Difco & BBL Manual

Manual of Microbiological Culture Media

Editors

Mary Jo Zimbro, B.S., MT (ASCP)

Manager, Technical Information
BD Diagnostic Systems

David A. Power, Ph.D.

Manager, Technical Information (Ret.)
BD Diagnostic Systems
Copyright 2003
Becton, Dickinson and Company
7 Loveton Circle
P.O. Box 999
Sparks, Maryland 21152

ISBN 0-9727207-0-7
All rights reserved
Printed in the United States of America

ATCC is a trademark of the American Type Culture Collection. CHROMagar is a trademark of Dr. A. Rambach.
Bacto, Bactrol, BiTek, CultureSwab and Difco are trademarks of Difco Laboratories, Inc., subsidiary of Becton,
Dickinson and Company.
BD, BD Logo and all other trademarks are the property of Becton, Dickinson and Company unless otherwise
noted. 2003 BD.
 Table of Contents

Contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................................ v
About This Manual .......................................................................................................................................... vii
History of BD Diagnostic Systems ..................................................................................................................... ix
Section I: Monographs ....................................................................................................................................... 1
History of Microbiology and Culture Media ................................................................................................. 3
Microorganism Growth Requirements ........................................................................................................... 4
Functional Types of Culture Media ................................................................................................................ 5
Culture Media Ingredients Agars ................................................................................................................. 6
Culture Media Ingredients Peptones and Hydrolysates ............................................................................... 7
Media Sterilization ....................................................................................................................................... 12
Quality Control Organisms .......................................................................................................................... 15
Typical Analyses ........................................................................................................................................... 17
Section II: General Technical Information ........................................................................................................ 19
Dehydrated Culture Media........................................................................................................................... 21
Prepared Plated Media ................................................................................................................................. 25
Prepared Tubed, Bottled and Mycoflask Media ......................................................................................... 27
Section III: Culture Media and Ingredients ....................................................................................................... 31
Section IV: Reference Guide ........................................................................................................................... 643
Culture Media for Specific Groups of Microorganisms .............................................................................. 645
Application Tables ...................................................................................................................................... 652
Agar Selection Guide ............................................................................................................................... 652
Antimicrobial/Preservative Effectiveness Testing ..................................................................................... 653
Cosmetic Testing ..................................................................................................................................... 654
Dairy Testing ........................................................................................................................................... 655
Environmental Sampling and Disinfectant Testing .................................................................................. 657
Fermentation ........................................................................................................................................... 658
Food and Beverage Testing ...................................................................................................................... 659
Media and Reagents Recommended for Campylobacter ......................................................................... 663
Media and Reagents Recommended for E. coli O157:H7 ...................................................................... 664
Media and Reagents Recommended for Listeria ..................................................................................... 665
Media and Reagents Recommended for Salmonella................................................................................ 666
Media and Reagents Recommended for Vibrio cholerae ......................................................................... 667
Membrane Filtration Testing ................................................................................................................... 668
Microbial Limit Testing .......................................................................................................................... 669
Molecular Genetics ................................................................................................................................. 670
Pharmaceutical Testing ........................................................................................................................... 671
Sterility Testing ....................................................................................................................................... 673
Veterinary Testing ................................................................................................................................... 674
Vitamin Assays ........................................................................................................................................ 676
Water/Wastewater Testing ....................................................................................................................... 676
Product Tables ............................................................................................................................................ 679
Bactrol Plus Quality Control Organisms .............................................................................................. 679
Culture Media Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing ............................................................................. 681
Culture Media General-Purpose ........................................................................................................... 681
Culture Media Supplements/Selective Agents ....................................................................................... 682
Peptones and Hydrolysates (product listing) ........................................................................................... 683
Peptones by Category .............................................................................................................................. 684
Peptones for Cell Culture ........................................................................................................................ 685
Typical Analyses Peptones and Hydrolysates ....................................................................................... 686
Product Index ................................................................................................................................................. 689
iii
iv
 Preface

Preface
The introduction of this, the first edition of the Difco & BBL Manual, marks the beginning of a new tradition. The Difco & BBL
Manual replaces the Difco Manual, 11th ed. (1998) and the Manual of BBL Products and Laboratory Procedures, 6th ed.
(1988), manuals which were first published in 1927 and 1948, respectively. This new manual, devoted exclusively to culture
media and associated reagents, presents in one volume descriptions of the media currently offered by BD as Difco and BBL
brands of dehydrated culture media and BBL brand prepared plated, tubed and bottled media. In this manual, over 170 years
of combined media experience is brought together in an educational and reference text.
The reader is advised that these products are for use by or under the supervision of microbiologists and other professionals
qualified by training and experience to handle pathogenic microorganisms and samples and specimens containing or suspected to
contain them. Also, it is expected that the user will be thoroughly familiar with the intended uses of the formulations presented
and will follow test procedures outlined in the applicable official compendia and standard texts or the procedure manual of the
using laboratory.
In addition to providing this manual as an educational resource, BD Diagnostic Systems offers an array of educational materials
and services:
Catapult a newsletter propelling applications development in the areas of biopharmaceutical production, QA/QC and
environmental monitoring.
LabO a newsletter providing the latest microbiology news and ideas to the clinical laboratory.
Technical and Product Support a dedicated group of specialists available to answer questions about any of our products
or procedures.
Our web site, www.bd.com
Grateful acknowledgement is made of the encouragement and support received from microbiologists throughout the world. Our
appreciation is extended, also, to those who have contributed their talents and time to the creation of this manual and its
predecessors. It is our desire to continue to extend our services to the advancement of microbiology and related sciences.

Becton, Dickinson and Company

v
vi
 About This Manual

About This Manual

The Difco & BBL Manual presents in one volume descriptions of the media currently offered by BD as Difco and BBL
brands of dehydrated culture media and BBL brand prepared plated, tubed and bottled media. Since products and labeling are
being reviewed continuously, the information provided in this manual is superceded by current product listings and labeling,
when differing from descriptions in this manual (e.g., product labels, package inserts, certificates of analysis, etc.). For product
availability, consult our current product catalog or contact your local distributor or BD representative.
This manual is organized into four major sections:
1. Monographs pertaining to the development, quality control and utilization of microbial culture media.
2. General technical information on dehydrated and prepared culture media.
3. Product descriptions for culture media and ingredients.
4. Reference section containing tables summarizing industrial and clinical applications and descriptions of related media and
media component analyses.
Product descriptions for dehydrated culture media contain the following sections:
Intended Use
Summary and Explanation
Principles of the Procedure
Formula(e)
Precautions (as applicable)
Directions for Preparation from Dehydrated Product
User Quality Control
Procedure
Expected Results
Limitations of the Procedure (as applicable)
References
Availability
For media offered only as prepared plated, tubed or bottled media, the descriptions are abbreviated; complete descriptions,
including the sections for Formula and User Quality Control, are provided in accompanying package inserts or the BBL
Quality Control and Product Information Manual for Plated and Tubed Media. This manual is available on-line at
http://www.bd.com/clinical/QCPI/index.asp or upon request from BD Technical Services (CD-ROM or hard copy).
American Type Culture Collection strains (ATCC), or commercially available derivatives of these strains, are specified for
performing quality control procedures on laboratory-prepared (and commercially-prepared) media. When listed in the User
Quality Control section, organism names generally conform to ATCC labeling. In text, abbreviated names may be used; e.g.,
serotypes of Salmonella choleraesuis.
This manual has several new features including international catalog numbers and standard methods icons. Under Availability,
catalog numbers are provided for prepared plated media manufactured in Europe, Japan and Mexico that are comparable to the
formulations manufactured in the United States. In addition, icons denoting media listed in official and standard methods
publications are provided. These icons represent:
AOAC Official Methods of Analysis of AOAC International1
BAM Bacteriological Analytical Manual (FDA)2
CCAM The Compendium of Analytical Methods (Canada)3
COMPF Compendium of Methods for the Microbiological Examination of Foods (APHA)4
EP European Pharmacopeia5
EPA Manual for the Certification of Laboratories Analyzing Drinking Water (EPA)6
ISO International Standards Organization7
SMD Standard Methods for the Examination of Dairy Products (APHA)8
SMWW Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater (APHA)9
USDA USDA/FSIS Microbiology Laboratory Guidebook10
USP The United States Pharmacopeia11

vii
 About This Manual, cont.

For many prepared media, icons are provided denoting the listing of these media in selected publications describing microbiologi-
cal procedures:
BS10 Bailey & Scotts Diagnostic Microbiology, 10th ed.12
CMPH Clinical Microbiology Procedures Handbook (ASM)13
MCM7 Manual of Clinical Microbiology, 7th ed. (ASM)14
NCCLS National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards15-17

Because procedures specified in these publications may differ from one another and from those included in this manual, these
publications should be consulted when adherence to specific procedures is preferred or required.
Technical inquiries about BD products should be directed to BD Diagnostic Systems Technical Services in the United States at
800-638-8663 or consult www.bd.com/support/contact for your local BD Diagnostic Systems office.

1. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
2. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
3. Health Canada. 2001. The compendium of analytical methods. Food Directorate, Health Products and Food Branch, Health Canada, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada.
4. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
5. Council of Europe. 2002. European Pharmacopeia, 4th ed. Council of Europe, Strasbourgh, France.
6. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1997. Manual for the certification of laboratories analyzing drinking water: criteria and procedures, quality assurance, 4th ed. Office of Ground Water and Drinking
Water, Technical Support Division, USEPA, Cincinnati, Ohio.
7. International Organization for Standardization. 2002. International Organization for Standardization, Geneva, Switzerland.
8. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
9. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
10. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1998. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food Safety and Inspection Service, USDA, Washington, D.C.
11. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
12. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
13. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
14. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
15. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved standard: M2-A7. Performance standards for antimicrobial disk susceptibility tests, 7th ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
16. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved standard: M7-A5. Methods for dilution antimicrobial susceptibility tests for bacteria that grow aerobically, 5th ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
17. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 1997. Approved standard: M11-A4. Methods for antimicrobial susceptibility testing of anaerobic bacteria, 4th ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.

viii
 History BD Diagnostic Systems

History
BD Diagnostic Systems A Tradition of Excellence
Difco Laboratories, originally known as Ray Chemical, was founded in 1895. The company
produced high quality enzymes, dehydrated tissues and glandular products. Ray Chemical
acquired the Digestive Ferments Company, a company that specialized in producing digestive
enzymes for use as bacterial culture media ingredients. This merger lead to the preparation of
a line of peptones, beginning with Bacto Peptone, and dehydrated culture media. In 1913,
the company moved to Detroit, Michigan, and dropped the Ray Chemical name.
In 1934, the Digestive Ferments Company chose the acronym Difco to rename the company.
The focus of Difco Laboratories was to develop new and improved bacteriological culture
media, many of which were adopted as standard formulations in water, dairy, food, pharma-
ceutical and other industrial microbiology laboratories. Difco Laboratories grew through the
acquisition, in 1974, of Lee Laboratories, one of the largest manufacturers of bacteriological
antisera. The Paul A. Smith Company, later known as Pasco, which manufactured a semi-
automated instrument used for bacterial identification and susceptibility testing, was acquired
Original Difco Laboratories
Manufacturing facility. in 1983.
BDs original microbiology products division, acquired in 1955, was founded in 1935 as a partnership between Theodore J.
Carski and Dr. Einar Leifson, employees of the Johns Hopkins Hospital in Baltimore, Maryland. Named the Baltimore Biologi-
cal Laboratory, the laboratory undertook a study of the preparation of peptones, and it began production of three new culture
media: Selenite-F Enrichment, Desoxycholate Agar and Desoxycholate-Citrate Agar. The acronym BBL was often used and
became the brand name for products offered by the company.
The Baltimore Biological Laboratory received increased impetus from the inventions and encouragement of Dr. John Brewer.
Brewers early pipetting machines were produced by the company, and the Brewer anaerobic jar, the forerunner of the GasPak
jar, made the performance of routine anaerobic bacteriology practical and safe.
New discoveries rapidly followed. Incorporation of the reducing chemical sodium thioglycollate resulted in the introduction of
thioglycollate media for the cultivation of anaerobes. Other new formulations were added resulting in the development of a full
line of culture media. Many of these media utilize peptones of known derivation, such as Trypticase Peptone, a pancreatic
digest of casein, and Phytone Peptone, a papaic digest of soybean meal, ingredients which are employed in Trypticase Soy Agar,
Trypticase Soy Broth and many other media.
In 1952, the formulation of the U.S. version of Lowenstein-Jensen Medium was introduced, launching the prepared tubed
media line. In 1960, the line of prepared culture media was completed by introducing commercially-prepared plated media.
Over the years, BDs microbiology division grew through a series of mergers and acquisitions. In 1972 and 1979, BD purchased
two more Baltimore-based microbiology companies Hynson Wescott and Dunning (HW&D) and Johnston Laboratories, Inc.,
respectively. HW&D brought with it the Macro-Vue RPR, RUBAscan and CMVscan card test kits and the Directigen line
of immunomicrobiology systems for the direct non-growth-dependent detection of antigens in patient specimens. Johnston
Laboratories was the developer and manufacturer of the BACTEC line of automated blood culturing and detection systems.
The BACTEC Blood Culture System, launched in 1971, was the first automated blood culture system to appear on the market.
The media lines were strengthened by the acquisition in 1987 of GIBCO Laboratories of Madison, Wisconsin. Many specialty
media formulations were added to the existing BBL brand prepared plated and tubed media product lines.
In 1989, when Marion Laboratories decided to divest its Marion Scientific divisions microbiology product lines, it selected BDs
microbiology division as the new provider of products such as the Culturette brand collection and transport systems,
Bio-Bag Environmental systems and CULTURETTE CDT kit for rapid Clostridium difficile testing.

ix
 History BD Diagnostic Systems, cont.

In 1992, the division acquired the worldwide microbiology business of Roche Diagnostic Systems, adding the
SEPTI-CHEK blood culture bottles, SEPTI-CHEK AFB mycobacteria culture system and Enterotube and
Oxi/Ferm identification products.
Finally, in June 1997, BD announced the acquisition of Difco Laboratories, Inc. The merger of this subsidiary with BDs
Microbiology Systems division brought together the leading providers of microbiology products to industrial and clinical
microbiology laboratories worldwide, with a combined total of over 170 years of culture media experience. Today, both
businesses comprise BD Diagnostic Systems, which is headquartered in Sparks, Maryland, near the city of Baltimore.
BD Diagnostic Systems offers a total spectrum of microbiology laboratory products from dehydrated culture media to fully
automated instrumentation for the rapid identification of clinically relevant bacteria. BD Diagnostic Systems continues to focus
on the missions and needs of both industrial and clinical microbiology laboratories.
The businesses that now constitute BD Diagnostic Systems were founded by entrepreneurs whose ideas, diligence and foresight
have contributed to the creation of BD as one of the worlds leaders in the health care field. Through its products and services,
BD is committed to helping all people live healthy lives.

x
Section I
History of Microbiology

2
 History of Microbiology

History of Microbiology and Culture Media

The science of microbiology evolved from a series of signifi-
cant discoveries. The Dutch microscopist, Anton van
Leeuwenhoek, was the first to observe bacteria while exam-
ining different water sources. This observation was published
in 1676 by the Royal Society in London. Anton van
Leeuwenhoek was also the first to describe the parasite known
today as Giardia lamblia. In 1667, the discovery of filamen-
tous fungi was described by Robert Hooke.
After microorganisms were visually observed, their growth
or reproduction created a major controversy. The conflict was
over the spontaneous generation theory, the idea that microor-
ganisms will grow spontaneously. This controversy continued
for years until Louis Pasteurs renowned research. Pasteur
realized that the theory of spontaneous generation must be Early years at Difco Laboratories.
refuted for the science of microbiology to advance. The con-
troversy remained even after Pasteurs successful experiment
using heat-sterilized infusions.
Two important developments were required for the science
During the period 1857-1878, both Louis Pasteur and
of microbiology to evolve. The first was a sophisticated
Joseph Lister published significant papers on their exten-
microscope; the second was a method for culturing micro-
sive studies on fermentation.
organisms. Compound microscopes were developed in
Germany at the end of the sixteenth century but it was not By 1887, a simple device called the Petri dish revolution-
until the early nineteenth century that achromatic lenses ized microbiology. With the invention of the Petri dish, the
were developed, allowing the light in the microscope to be focus turned to culture media formulations. With all the
focused. research being performed, scientists began to replace gelatin
with agar because it was resistant to microbial digestion
In 1719, Leeuwenhoek was the first to attempt differentia-
and liquefaction.
tion of bacteria by using naturally colored agents such as
beet juice. In 1877, Robert Koch used methylene blue to The study of immunity began after the discovery of the
stain bacteria. By 1882, Robert Koch succeeded in stain- tubercle bacillus by Robert Koch. With this acclaimed
ing the tubercle bacillus with methylene blue. This land- discovery, the involvement of bacteria as agents of disease
mark discovery was performed by using heat to penetrate became evident. The first rational attempts to produce ar-
the stain into the organism. Two years later Hans Chris- tificial active immunity were by Pasteur in 1880 during his
tian Gram, a Danish pathologist, developed the Gram stain. work with cholera.
The Gram stain is still widely used in the differentiation of Antibiotics had a dramatic beginning with the famous dis-
gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria. covery of penicillin by Alexander Fleming in 1928. Fleming
In 1860, Pasteur was the first to use a culture medium for observed that a mold had contaminated a culture of staphy-
growing bacteria in the laboratory. This medium consisted lococci and produced a substance inhibiting growth of the
of yeast ash, sugar and ammonium salts. In 1881, W. Hesse bacteria. It was not until the late 1930s that scientists could
used his wifes agar (considered an exotic food) as a solidi- purify penicillin and demonstrate its antibacterial effects.
fying agent for bacterial growth. Commercial production of penicillin began as a combined
wartime project between the United States and England. This
The study of fungi and parasites lagged behind other micro-
project was the beginning of the fermentation industry and
organisms. In 1839, ringworm was the first human disease
biotechnology.
found to be caused by fungi, followed closely by the recog-
nition of Candida albicans as the cause of thrush. It was Around 1930, certain growth factors, including factors X
not until 1910 that Sabouraud introduced a medium that and V, were shown to be important in bacterial nutrition.
would support the growth of pathogenic fungi. The interest In the early 1950s, most of the vitamins were also charac-
of scientists in studying fungi was often related to crop pro- terized as co-enzymes. This detailed information lead scien-
tection. There continues to be a close connection between tists to develop an understanding of biochemical pathways.
mycology and botany today.

3
Section I
History of Microbiology, cont.

A booming development of microbiology began after material. This study and other similar studies started a
World War II. Molecular biology, biotechnology and the biotechnology revolution that has gained momentum over
study of genetics were fields of extraordinary growth. By the years.
1941, the study of microbiology and genetics came together
In the 1980s, instrumentation entered the microbiology
when Neurospora crassa, a red bread mold, was used to
laboratory. Manual procedures could be replaced by fully
study microbial physiology. The study of bacterial genetics
automated instruments for bacterial identification, suscep-
moved dramatically forward during the 1940s following the
tibility testing and blood culture procedures. Immunoas-
discovery of antibiotic resistance. The birth of molecular
says and probe technologies broadened the capabilities of
biology began in 1953 after the publication by Watson
the microbiologist.
and Crick of the structure of DNA.
Significant advances continued in the 1990s. The use of chro-
In 1953, viruses were defined by Luria as submicroscopic
mogenic substrates in culture media was shown to enhance
entities, capable of being introduced into specific living
microbial identification capabilities directly from the culture
cells and of reproducing inside such cells only. The work
medium. In 1995, J. Craig Venter, Claire Fraser and Hamilton
of John Enders on culturing viruses lead to the develop-
Smith published the DNA sequence of the first free-living
ment of vaccines. Enders demonstrated that a virus could
organism, Haemophilus influenzae.
be grown in chick embryos and would lose its ability to
cause disease after successive generations. Using this tech- With rapid advances in technologies and instrumentation,
nique, Salk developed the polio vaccine. the basic culture media and ingredients listed in this
Manual remain some of the most reliable and cost effec-
One organism that has made a great contribution to mo-
tive tools in microbiology today.
lecular biology is Escherichia coli. In 1973, Herbert Boyer
and Stanley Cohen produced recombinant DNA through References
plasmid transformation. The researchers found that the 1. Marti-Ibanez (ed.). 1962. The epic of medicine. Clarkson N. Potter, Inc., New York, N.Y.
2. Wainwright and Lederberg. 1992. In Lederberg (ed.), Encyclopedia of microbiology, vol 2.
foreign gene not only survived, but copied the genetic Academic Press Inc., New York, N.Y.

Microorganism Growth Requirements

Cultivation of microorganisms depends on a number of im- The pH of the culture medium is important for microorgan-
portant factors: ism growth. Temperature is another important parameter:
mesophilic bacteria and fungi have optimal growth at tem-
Proper nutrients must be available.
peratures of 25-40C; thermophilic (heat loving) organisms
Oxygen or other gases must be available, as required.
grow only at temperatures greater than 45C; psychrophilic
Moisture is necessary. (cold loving) organisms require temperatures below 20C.
The medium must have an appropriate pH. Human pathogenic organisms are generally mesophiles.
Proper temperature relations must prevail.
The medium must be free of interfering bioburden. Common Media Constituents
Media formulations are developed on the ability of bacteria
Contamination must be prevented.
to use media components.
A satisfactory microbiological culture medium must contain
available sources of: CONSTITUENTS SOURCE
Amino-Nitrogen Peptone, protein hydrolysate,
Carbon infusions and extracts
Growth Factors Blood, serum, yeast extract
Nitrogen or vitamins, NAD
Inorganic phosphate and sulfur Energy Sources Sugar, alcohols and
carbohydrates
Trace metals Buffer Salts Phosphates, acetates
Water and citrates
Mineral Salts and Metals Phosphate, sulfate,
Vitamins magnesium, calcium, iron
Selective Agents Chemicals, antimicrobials
These were originally supplied in the form of meat infusion. and dyes
Beef or yeast extracts frequently replace meat infusion in Indicator Dyes Phenol red, neutral red
culture media. The addition of peptones, which are digests of Gelling agents Agar, gelatin, alginate,
silica gel
proteins, provides readily available sources of nitrogen and
carbon.

4
 Functional Types of Media

Media Ingredients microaerophiles, which develop best under partial anaerobic

Purified water is recommended for use in the preparation of conditions, and the facultative anaerobes, which are capable
culture media. As defined by The United States Pharmacopeia, of growing in the presence or absence of oxygen. Anaerobic
Purified Water is water obtained by a suitable process. It is conditions for growth of microorganisms are obtained in a
prepared from water complying with the U.S. Environmental number of ways:
Protection Agency National Primary Drinking Water Regula- Addition of small amounts of agar to liquid media
tions or comparable regulations of the European Union or
Addition of fresh tissue to the medium
Japan. It contains no added substance.1
Addition of a reducing substance to the medium; e.g.,
Peptone, protein hydrolysates, infusions and extracts are the sodium thioglycollate, thioglycollic acid and L-cystine
major sources of nitrogen and vitamins in culture media. Pep- Displacement of the air by hydrogen or nitrogen
tones are water-soluble ingredients derived from proteins by
Absorption of the oxygen by chemicals
hydrolysis or digestion of the source material; e.g., meat, milk.
Inoculation into the deep layers of solid media or under a
Carbohydrates are employed in culture media as energy sources layer of oil in liquid media
and may be used for differentiating genera and identifying
species. Many microorganisms require an environment of 5-10% CO2.
Levels greater than 10% are often inhibitory due to a decrease
Buffers maintain the pH of culture media. in pH as carbonic acid forms. Culture media vary in their
Selective Agents include bile salts, dyes and antimicrobial susceptibility to form toxic oxidation products if exposed to
agents. Bile salts and desoxycholate are selective for the isola- light and air.
tion of gram-negative microorganisms, inhibiting gram-posi-
Water Activity
tive cocci.
Proper moisture conditions are necessary for continued luxuri-
Dyes and indicators are essential in the preparation of differ- ant growth of microorganisms. Organisms require an aqueous
ential and selective culture media. In these formulations, dyes environment and must have free water. Free water is not
act as bacteriostatic agents or indicators of changes in acidity bound in complex structure and is necessary for transfer of
or alkalinity of the substrate. nutrients and toxic waste products. Evaporation during incu-
Antimicrobial agents are used in media to inhibit the growth bation or storage results in loss of free water and reduction
of bacteria, yeasts and fungi. of colony size or total inhibition of organism growth.

Solidifying agents, including agar, gelatin and albumin, can Protective Agents and Growth Factors
be added to a liquid medium in order to change the consis- Calcium carbonate, soluble starch and charcoal are examples
tency to a solid or semisolid state. of protective agents used in culture media to neutralize and
absorb toxic metabolites produced by bacterial growth.
Chromogens and fluorogens are substrates incorporated into
culture media to allow organism differentiation and identifica- Nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide, NAD (V factor) and hemin
tion. When these substrates are degraded by specific enzymes, (X factor) are growth factors required by certain bacteria; e.g.,
they release differently colored or fluorescent compounds. An Haemophilus species, and for enhanced growth of Neisseria
example of the latter is 4-methylumbelliferyl--D-glucuronide species.
or MUG. Surfactants, including polysorbate 80, lower the interfacial
tension around bacteria suspended in the medium. This activ-
Environmental Factors in Culture Media ity permits more rapid entry of desired compounds into the
Atmosphere bacterial cell and can increase bacterial growth.
Most bacteria are capable of growth under ordinary conditions
of oxygen tension. Obligate aerobes require the free admission Reference
of oxygen, while anaerobes grow only in the absence of atmo- 1. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
spheric oxygen. Between these two groups are the

Functional Types of Culture Media

The composition of a particular culture medium formulation wide variety of microorganism types and lacks inhibitory prop-
determines the classification of the medium as general-purpose, erties. Such a medium may be either nonenriched or enriched
enriched, selective or differential or a combination of these types. with an additive, usually animal blood, in order to cultivate
A general-purpose medium is one that supports the growth of a highly fastidious microbial species. Examples of such media

5
Section I
Functional Types of Media, cont.

include Trypticase Soy Agar (nonenriched) and Trypticase Soy Many culture media formulations combine the properties of
Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (enriched). selectivity and differentiation due to their inclusion of a variety
A selective medium favors the recovery of specific types or of chemicals. Chromogenic media fall into this category. In
genera of microorganisms and inhibits other members of a addition to selective agents, these unique formulations con-
mixed flora. Selectivity is usually achieved with a chemical tain chromogenic substrates which release differently colored
agent, dye or antibiotic. Group A Selective Strep Agar with compounds upon degradation by specific enzymes. This
5% Sheep Blood (ssA) is an example of a selective medium enzymatic reaction produces distinct colony colors that
as it preferentially isolates group A streptococci from throat allows for easy differentiation and identification. For example,
cultures due to the inclusion of a combination of selective on BBL CHROMagar Staph aureus medium, Staphylo-
agents. Culture media differ in their degree of selectivity, and coccus aureus produces mauve-colored colonies while most
the highly selective ones may inhibit some strains of the gram-positive organisms, if not inhibited, produce white,
organisms the recovery of which is desirable. For example, blue, green or blue-green (aqua) colonies. Gram-negative
when attempting isolation of enterics, several media possess- organisms and yeasts are partially to completely suppressed.
ing varying degrees of selectivity should be utilized. The isolation of microorganisms from clinical materials fre-
A differential medium is one which possesses certain ingredi- quently requires the use of enriched broth media in addition
ents that enable presumptive identification of a specific genus to the selective, differential and nonselective plated media
or species either from a pure or mixed culture. Identification normally used for primary isolation. The use of liquid back
is usually based on the organisms appearance; i.e., colony up media reduces the possibility of completely missing an
color or the presence of a precipitate. For example, TSI Agar etiological agent that is present in low numbers, slow grow-
(Triple Sugar Iron Agar) is a differential medium for gram- ing on plated media, susceptible to selective agents, or sensi-
negative enteric organisms on the basis of their ability to tive to unfavorable incubation conditions.
ferment dextrose, lactose and sucrose and to produce sulfides.

Culture Media Ingredients Agars

History
Agar was discovered in 1658 by Minora Tarazaemon in Ja-
pan.1 According to legend, this Japanese innkeeper threw sur-
plus seaweed soup into the winter night and noticed it later
transformed into a gel by the nights freezing and the days
warmth.2 In 1882, Koch was the first to use agar in microbiol-
ogy.3,4 Walter Hesse, a country doctor from Saxony, introduced
Koch to this powerful gelling agent.5 Hesse had learned about
agar from his wife, Fanny Hesse, whose family had contact
with the Dutch East Indies where agar was being used for
jellies and jams.3,5,6
By the early 1900s, agar became the gelling agent of choice
instead of gelatin. Agar was found more suitable because it
remained solid at the temperatures required for growth of hu-
Agar is derived from a group of red-purple marine algae as pictured
man pathogens and was resistant to breakdown by bacterial above.
enzymes.
algae are widely distributed throughout the world in temper-
Production of agar in the United States was started just before
ate zones. Gelidium is the preferred source of agar. The most
the beginning of World War II as a strategic material.5 In the
important properties of agar are:5
1940s, bacteriological-grade agar manufactured by the Ameri-
can Agar Company of San Diego, California, served as refer- Good transparency in solid and gel forms to allow identi-
ence agar for the evaluation of the characteristics of other cul- fication of colony type
ture media components, such as peptones.5 Consistent lot-to-lot gel strength that is sufficient to with-
stand the rigors of streaking but not so stiff that it affects
Characteristics diffusion characteristics
Agar is a phycocolloid, water-soluble polysaccharide, extracted Consistent gelling (32-40C) and melting (approximately
from a group of red-purple marine algae (Class Rhodophyceae) 85C) temperatures, a property known as hysteresis
including Gelidium and Gracilaria.7 These red-purple marine

6
 Peptones and Hydrolysates

Essential freedom from metabolically useful chemicals such taminants to be trapped, then washed from the agar, eliminat-
as peptides, proteins and fermentable hydrocarbons ing the contaminants. Detailed manufacturing methods are
Low and regular content of electronegative groups that described in references.2,5
could cause differences in diffusion of electropositive mol-
ecules (e.g., antibiotics, nutrients) Product Applications
For specific product applications, refer to the product
Freedom from toxic substances (bacterial inhibitors)
descripton for Agars.
Freedom from hemolytic substances that might interfere
with normal hemolytic reactions in culture media References
Freedom from contamination by thermophilic spores 1. Tsend. 1946. In Alexander (ed.). Colloid Chemistry. Reinhold Publishing Corp., New York, N. Y.
2. Selby and Selby. 1959. In Whister (ed.)., Industrial gums. Academic Press Inc., New York, N.Y.
Agars are normally used in final concentrations of 1-2% for 3.
4.
Hitchens and Leikind. 1939. J. Bacteriol. 37:485.
Koch. 1882. Berl. Klin. Wochenschr. 19:221.
solidifying culture media. Smaller quantities of agar (0.05- 5. Armisen. 1991. Hydrobiol. 221:157.
6. Hesse. 1894. Mitt. a. d. Kaiserl. Gesh. Berlin 2:182.
0.5%) are used in culture media for motility studies (0.5% w/v) 7. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States Pharmacopeia 25/The
national forumulary 20 2002. The United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
and growth of anaerobes (0.1%) and microaerophiles.2

The Manufacturing Process

The finest Gelidium marine algae from world sources is selected.
Through a variety of processes, the agar is extracted from the
Gelidium, resulting in a liquid agar that is purified. The liquid
agar is first gelled, causing the soluble and suspended con-

Culture Media Ingredients Peptones and Hydrolysates

History Today, the Difco Laboratories facility in Detroit continues to
Peptones were originally described in 1880 by Naegeli.1 With manufacture many of the peptones and hydrolysates offered
the rich amino acid and nitrogen compounds readily utilized separately as BD Bacto and BD Difco brands or used in a
by bacteria, peptones soon became one of the most important variety of BD Difco dehydrated culture media formulations.
constituents of culture media. BD remains committed to producing the highest quality
peptones that our customers rely on and expect.
Beginning in 1895, Difco Laboratories produced high quality
enzymes, dehydrated tissues and glandular products to aid in Biochemical Processes
the digestion process. The knowledge gained from processing
Proteins are molecules essential to the structure and function
animal tissues, purifying enzymes and performing dehydration
of all living organisms. They are made up of chains of any
procedures allowed a smooth transition to the preparation of
number of amino acids linked by peptide bonds and folded in
dehydrated culture media, in addition to its peptones.
a variety of complex structures. Proteins may be broken down
Meat and other protein digests were developed to stimulate into amino acids and peptides by hydrolysis using strong acids
growth of bacteria and fungi. Extensive research led to the or proteolytic enzymes such as pepsin, papain, or pancreatin,
development of Bacto Peptone, which was introduced in 1914. which contains trypsin and chymotrypsin. These protein
Since then, Bacto Peptone continues to be recognized as the hydrolysates are called peptones.
premium quality standard for all other peptones.
The starting materials for peptones vary from animal to
Building on this knowledge base, Difco Laboratories continued vegetable. Protein sources include meat, casein (milk protein),
to develop more peptones to add to the Bacto line of products. gelatin, soybean, yeast and grains.2 Enzyme sources include
Bacto Proteose Peptone, Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 2, and animal organs (pancreatin and pepsin), papaya (papain), fig
Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3 were created from the accumu- (ficin), pineapple (bromelain) and microbes.2
lated information that no single peptone was the most suitable
Acid hydrolysis is a harsh process, usually carried out at high
nitrogen source for growing fastidious bacteria and supplement-
temperature, which attacks all peptide bonds in the protein sub-
ing mammalian cell culture. More recently, due to increasing
strate, destroying some of the individual amino acids liberated.
concerns over infectious agents that may be present in animal-
Tryptophan is usually totally lost in an acid hydrolysis. Cystine,
based peptones, BD began development of non-animal pep-
serine and threonine are partially broken down and asparagine
tones as an alternative to fetal bovine serum for cell culture
and glutamine are converted to their acidic forms. Vitamins are
media. Select Soytone and Phytone Peptone are examples of
mostly destroyed by acid hydrolysis.
these products.

7
Section I
Peptones and Hydrolysates, cont.

Proteolytic enzymes hydrolyze proteins more gently than materials and to clarify and concentrate the material. The
acids, do not require the high temperature used for acid peptone solution may be vacuum-evaporated to rapidly con-
hydrolysis, and usually are specific to the peptide bonds they centrate the peptone. The peptone syrup, which contains
will break. The resulting material from a proteolytic digestion approximately 67% solids, may undergo further processing
is a mixture of amino acids and polypeptides of varying lengths. for pH adjustment or filtration. The final drying step of the
The enzyme pepsin will cut an amino acid chain where there process further concentrates the protein by spray drying or by
is a phenylalanine or leucine bond.3 Papain will cut the chain pan drying in vacuum ovens, which readies the material for
adjacent to arginine, lysine and phenylalanine,3 and pancre- packaging.
atin shows activity at arginine, lysine, tyrosine, tryptophan,
phenylalanine and leucine bonds.3 Casein Peptones
The casein peptones are so named because of their starting
Microbial proteases, proteolytic enzymes secreted by microor-
material, milk. Milk is a very complex material, consisting of
ganisms, are becoming more widely used in peptone produc-
water, lactose, lipids, salts and proteins. The protein portion
tion. Proteases from bacterial, algal, fungal and yeast sources
of milk provides the starting material for the casein peptones.
cover a wide variety of enzyme activities, can be produced in
After the milk has had the cream fraction removed and it is
large scale and usually require only simple purification.4
acidified (there are several methods available to accomplish
Meat Peptones this from the addition of acid to enzymatic and bacterial pro-
cesses), the protein composition of milk can be separated out.5,6
Meat peptones are proteins from animal sources that have been
The soluble portion, known as whey protein, can be found in
hydrolyzed, or broken down into amino acids and peptides, to
the supernatant. The insoluble portion, which precipitates out,
provide nitrogen for microorganisms. Meat peptones can be
consists of a group of heterogeneous phospho-proteins that
tailored to specific nutritive needs of microorganisms by
exist together in a colloidal particle called a micelle. This group
controlling the quality and origin of the protein, the quality and
of phosphoproteins is collectively known as casein. The casein
source of the enzyme used to digest the protein, and the meth-
micelle can be broken down into four component classes, based
ods used for hydrolysis, concentration and drying the peptone.
in order of their decreasing mobility when separated by elec-
Sources of animal protein include meat from muscular tissue trophoresis at pH 7, designated as s1, s2, and casein.
or offal (waste parts, entrails) and gelatin. Muscular tissue Casein, which can make up to 3% of the total components in
and offal are utilized fresh, frozen or dried. Gelatin is extracted bovine milk, is one of the most nutritive of the milk proteins,
by boiling collagen, the fibrous protein found in connective as it contains all of the common amino acids and is rich in the
tissue, bone and cartilage. essential ones.
A variety of proteolytic enzymes, or proteases, may be used to The casein recovered is known as acid casein and is insoluble
accomplish enzymatic hydrolysis of animal protein. Pepsin and in water. Generally, the acid casein is dissolved in a suitable
trypsin are widely used for animal peptone manufacture. hydroxide such as NaOH, to make it soluble in water. The
Pepsin is isolated from porcine or other animal stomach. resulting sodium caseinate is then used as the basis for hydro-
Trypsin, along with chymotrypsin, carboxypeptidase A, lyzed caseins. Sodium caseinate typically consists of between
carboxypeptidase B, and elastase, are enzymes isolated from 87% to 90% protein.7 Hydrolyzed caseins are manufactured
animal pancreas. by one of two processes, acid hydrolysis or enzymatic hydrolysis.
Peptone manufacture includes the following steps: hydroly- Many acids can be utilized in the acid hydrolysis of casein,
sis/digestion, centrifugation, filtration, concentration, and but hydrochloric acid is most commonly used in the process.
drying. Animal tissues are chopped in order to prepare for This process leads to complete hydrolysis of the casein to amino
digestion, and demineralized water is added to the starting acids and other compounds of relative chemical simplicity.
constituent(s) to form a thick suspension of protein material. However, not all of the amino acids survive intact. Tryptophan
The material is placed in large-capacity digestion vessels, which is typically destroyed in the process, as is cystine. Other amino
are stirred continuously. Base or acid is added to bring the pH acids, such as serine and threonine are reduced. Asparagine
of the protein suspension to the optimum for the specific and glutamine undergo hydrolysis to yield aspartic acid and
enzyme being used. For example, pepsin is most effective at glutamic acid.
pH 2.0 and trypsin shows maximum activity at pH 8.5.2 The
In the enzymatic hydrolysis of casein, enzymes from the pan-
enzyme is added when the pH and temperature are optimal.
creas are utilized to manufacture these peptones. While the
The amount of enzyme necessary, time for digestion, and
pancreas contains a battery of enzymes from the protease,
control of pH and temperature are dependent on the degree
lipase and amylase groups, it is the proteases that are used in
of hydrolysis intended.
the hydrolysis of casein. The proteases found in the pancreas
Once protein digestion is complete, the suspension may be consist of trypsin, chymotrypsin, carboxypeptidase A, carbox-
heated to inactivate the enzymes. The protein/enzyme slurry ypeptidase B and elastase. However, trypsin and chymotrypsin
is then centrifuged and/or filtered to remove the insoluble make up the greatest percentage of the total amount of

8
 Peptones and Hydrolysates, cont.

proteases and carry out the bulk of the work. Both of these facturers have found that the more highly aerated a culture,
proteases have the ability to digest proteins into peptides, but the higher the final product yield.12
they do not have the ability to break the protein down into its
The process of manufacturing bakers yeast extract is unique
component amino acids. The carboxypeptidases do have this
compared to the manufacture of other peptones. Yeast extract
ability. However, they are not present in large enough amounts
is an autolysate. Cell hydrolysis is performed by the
to accomplish this task to any great degree. Generally, in the
endogenous enzymes of the Saccharomyces organism. Autoly-
digestion process of animals, these peptides would be broken
sis is usually begun by either a controlled temperature shock
down into amino acids through the actions of peptidases found
or, for the food industry, an osmotic shock, which causes the
in the epithelial cells of the small intestine.8 Thus, one of the
yeast cells to expire. The temperature shock is not high enough
characteristics of pancreatic digest of casein, as opposed to
to inactivate the proteases of the yeast cell, which proceed to
the acid hydrolysis of casein, is a peptone that consists of
degrade the cell. Autolysis can proceed from 10 to 60 hours.
greater amounts of peptides.
After autolysis, soluble material is separated from insoluble
by means of centrifugation and several filtration steps.12 The
Soy Peptones
final filtration product is concentrated and then spray dried,
Soy peptones are all enzymatic digests of soy flour. Since soy
or can be left in the concentrated paste form, which contains
contains a tryptic inhibitor, before the digestion begins the
approximately 60-80% solids.
soy flour is thoroughly washed to eliminate the inhibitor. Soy
flour is rich in high-quality protein, carbohydrates, calcium Temperature, pH, addition of other enzymes, type of medium
and B vitamins.9 The enzymes used in the digestion of the soy substrate for the growth of the Saccharomyces and duration
flour should be from animal-free sources or sourced from of autolysis are all variations that create the large variety of
microorganisms that have been grown in animal-free media. yeast extracts available.
Sometimes the organism from which the enzymes have been
sourced has been stored with bovine serum albumin (BSA). Peptone Performance
All of these factors should be taken into consideration when The raw materials and manufacturing conditions for protein
selecting for animal-free peptones. hydrolysis are controlled to produce consistent peptone prod-
ucts. Ingredients used for peptone manufacture, including the
Yeast Products protein, agent of hydrolysis, and any buffering agents used,
Yeast extract is defined in the USP as a water-soluble, peptone- are selected based on specific purity and quality standards.
like derivative of yeast cells (Saccharomyces).10 Yeast extract is The conditions of the hydrolysis, such as the amount of
readily available in the U.S. as a spray-dried powder. In Europe, enzyme used, the time for digestion, and the pH and temperature
pharmaceutical companies use it as a liquid or paste, as well at which hydrolysis is conducted, determine the degree of
as in the powdered form. hydrolysis and the quality of the hydrolysate. Therefore, these
conditions must be carefully controlled throughout the manu-
Yeast extract is used by the health food industry as an inex-
facturing process. Purification, concentration and drying steps
pensive source for many of their vitamins. Yeast extract has
are carefully regulated due to their bearing on the character-
long been recognized as a major source of B-complex vitamins.
istics of a peptone. Finally, each batch of protein hydrolysate
Yeast extract, as a substrate in a media formulation, supplies
is tested for an array of physical, chemical, analytical and
not only vitamins, but also proteins, carbohydrates and some
growth support tests to ensure product quality and lot-to-lot
micronutrients.
consistency.
There are many kinds of yeast extract. The two principle
Peptones/hydrolysates are available as original premium
sources of yeast extract are brewers yeast and bakers
Bacto formulations, or as Difco, BBL or BiTek brands.
yeast. Brewers yeast is a by-product from the brewing industry.
The BiTek brand was developed for production-grade
It requires de-bittering (removal of hop resins) before it is
products where a premium product is not required.
suitable for fermentation use.2 A wide variety of strains and
growth processes have been used in the manufacture of the Applications
brewers yeast, thus precluding any consistency of the final Cell Culture
product.
In the biopharmaceutical industry, concerns over using
Bakers yeast (Saccharomyces cerevisiae) is defined as a primary animal-derived components have prompted investigation into
yeast because the yeast is grown for the specific purpose of new forms of supplementation. Traditionally, cell culture
being used as a substrate in a bioprocess or as a food product/ media have been supplemented by the addition of serum or
flavoring. Manufacture of bakers yeast is a reproducible and serum-derived components. While this helped to complete
controlled process. The yeast organism is grown on a molasses- the diverse nutritional and growth requirements of the cells,
based medium optimized for the specific yeast.11 Commercial the high product cost and variability between lots were diffi-
yeast fermentations are always fed-batch type fermentations cult obstacles to overcome. New concerns over infectious
lasting from 12-20 hours.12 Commercial bakers yeast manu- agents such as viruses, mycoplasma, and prion diseases like

9
Section I
Peptones and Hydrolysates, cont.

Bovine Spongiform Encephalopathy/Transmissible Spongiform are lower yields and greater expense, especially if the list of
Encephalopathy (BSE/TSE) demonstrated the need for an media components include growth factors and vitamins.18
alternative form of supplementation.13 The advantages of complex media are that they are inexpensive,
Throughout the years the successful use of meat-based pep- they support a wide variety of growth from a large group of
tones to replace serum in various cell culture applications has microorganisms, they promote growth of the more fastidious
been widely accepted.14,15 Peptones are more versatile and less organisms that will not grow on a chemically-defined
expensive than serum products and have been shown to medium, they stimulate toxin production and they routinely
perform just as well. In addition to their nutritional proper- produce higher yields than many defined media. The disadvan-
ties, meat-based peptones have exhibited many growth related tages of complex media are that the downstream processing may
properties such as the stimulation of both DNA synthesis and be more difficult and reproducibility can sometimes be com-
mitosis.16 Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3 is a porcine-based promised.
supplement that has shown great success as an alternative to When developing a new medium formulation, care should be
serum in many systems. Since porcine-based products are in a taken in choosing the peptones for the new formulation. Indi-
lower BSE/TSE risk category than bovine-based products, vidual experimentation with a variety of peptones is suggested
Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3 provides a way to reduce the to select the optimum peptone or combination of peptones.
risk of BSE/TSE while taking advantage of the complex prop-
erties of meat-based peptones.16 With increasing concerns over BSE/TSE, a prime directive for
the development of new fermentation products has been to
Yeast and soy-based peptones are used when it is necessary to either source the mediums raw materials from a country free
eliminate all animal derived components. Yeast Extract and from TSEs or reformulate the medium using animal-free com-
TC Yeastolate products are industry standards for use in insect ponents. BD began reformulating media formulations from
cell cultures. Select Soytone and Phytone Peptone products animal components to non-animal components in 1997. In
are excellent for growth promotion and protein production, 1998, Select APS (alternative protein source) products were
as well as good, non-animal alternatives to serum. CHO and introduced. These non-animal formulations provide growth
Hybridoma systems also benefit from the various soy products support characteristics comparable, and in some cases supe-
available. rior, to classical animal formulations.
Since every cell line is different, it is necessary to test an
assortment of peptones at a variety of concentrations to Culture Media Ingredients
optimize their performance. Peptones can also be used to Beef Extract
optimize cell proliferation. The right combination of peptones, Bacto Beef Extract, Desiccated
as well as a consideration of feed strategy, is essential in order Beef Extract Powder
to optimize every portion of the manufacturing process. Since The beef extract products are replacements for infusion of
lot-to-lot consistency is always a concern when using peptones, meat. They provide nitrogen, vitamins, amino acids and
evaluations of multiple lots and a clear understanding of the carbon in microbiological culture media. Beef extract is
product specifications is critical. usually employed in concentrations of 0.3 to 1.0% in culture
Purification requirements are greatly reduced when peptones media. Bacto Beef Extract, Desiccated, the dried form of
are used as a replacement for serum or any of its derived Beef Extract, was developed to provide a product for ease
proteins. The benefits achieved when peptones are used as a of use in handling. Beef Extract is in the paste form. The
serum substitute will be enhanced if they are used with an products are used in a one for one substitution. Beef Extract
optimized base medium, such as BD Cell, a specialized Powder is a meat extract dried to a powdered form.
hybridoma medium for high level antibody yield. Bacto Beef Heart for Infusion
In summary, peptones are used to provide additional amino acid Bacto Beef Heart for Infusion is prepared from fresh beef
supplementation to cell cultures or as a replacement for serum. heart tissue and is recommended for preparing heart
The concentration used should be optimized for each system. infusion media. It provides nitrogen, amino acids and vita-
mins in microbiological culture media. Bacto Beef Heart for
Fermentation
Infusion is processed from large volumes of raw material,
Fermentation media formulations are of two types: defined
retaining all the nutritive and growth stimulating properties
and complex. Defined media are made by the addition of of fresh tissue.
chemically defined ingredients to water for injection (WFI) or
distilled water. Complex media are made with peptone digests Biosate Peptone
or extracts of plant or animal origin.17 Biosate Peptone is a mixed hydrolysate of casein and yeast
The advantages of chemically defined media are greater extract. The product provides nitrogen, amino acids and
reproducibility, cleaner downstream processing steps and sim- vitamins in microbiological culture media. The combination
plicity in the analysis of the end product. The disadvantages of pancreatic digest of casein and yeast extract, at a ratio of
65:35, provides nutritional benefits that are not provided by
the components alone.
10
 Peptones and Hydrolysates, cont.

Bacto Casamino Acids Bacto Neopeptone

Bacto Casamino Acids, Technical Bacto Neopeptone is an enzymatic digest of protein. This prod-
Casamino Acids, Vitamin Assay uct contains a wide variety of peptide sizes in combination with
Acidicase Peptone vitamins, nucleotides and minerals. Bacto Neopeptone is
Bacto Casamino Acids, Bacto Casamino Acids, Technical, particularly well suited in supplying the growth requirements
Casamino Acids, Vitamin Assay and Acidicase Peptone are of fastidious bacteria. In addition, this peptone is extremely
acid hydrolysates of casein. Casein is a milk protein and a valuable in media for the cultivation of pathogenic fungi.
rich source of amino acid nitrogen. These products are Bacto Peptone
added to media primarily because of their organic nitrogen BiTek Peptone
and growth factor components. Their inorganic components Bacto Peptone and BiTek Peptone are enzymatic digests of
also play a vital role.19 Bacto Casamino Acids is recom- animal protein. These peptones contain nitrogen in a form
mended for use with microbiological cultures that require that is readily available for bacterial growth. Bacto Peptone
a completely hydrolyzed protein as a nitrogen source. Bacto has a high peptone and amino acids content and only a negli-
Casamino Acids, Technical is recommended for use in gible quantity of proteoses and more complex nitrogenous
culture media where amino acid mixtures are required for constituents. BiTek Peptone was developed to serve the
a nitrogen source but the sodium chloride and iron con- biotechnology/pharmaceutical industry. This product is a
tent have not been decreased to the same extent as with lower-cost alternative that offers the same lot-to-lot consis-
Casamino Acids. Casamino Acids, Vitamin Assay is tency and similar growth characteristics to Bacto Peptone.
specially treated to markedly reduce or eliminate certain
vitamins. It is recommended for use in microbiological Phytone Peptone
assay media and in growth promotion studies. Acidicase Phytone Peptone, UF
Peptone is a hydrochloric acid hydrolysate with a high salt Select Soytone
content. It is used in vitamin assay media and other Bacto Soytone
microbiological media where the high salt content will not Phytone Peptone, Phytone Peptone, UF, Select Soytone and
interfere. Bacto Soytone are enzymatic digests of soybean meal. The
nitrogen source in the soy peptones contains naturally occur-
Bacto Casitone
ring high concentrations of vitamins and carbohydrates of
Trypticase Peptone
soybean. Phytone Peptone is an animal-free soy peptone. This
Bacto Tryptone
product is an excellent plant peptone for the cultivation of
Bacto Casitone, Trypticase Peptone and Bacto Tryptone are
fungi and fastidious types of bacteria. It has also been used in
pancreatic digests of casein. These products are recommended
cell culture applications due to its high carbohydrate content.
for preparing media where an enzymatic hydrolyzed casein
Phytone Peptone, UF is an ultra-filtered peptone that was devel-
is desired. Casein is a rich source of amino nitrogen. These
oped for the tissue culture market. Its nitrogen content combined
products are used to support the growth of fastidious micro-
with the naturally occurring vitamins has demonstrated
organisms and are suitable for use in fermentation studies.
remarkable growth support with monoclonal antibodies and
Trypticase Peptone is biologically tested for freedom from
protein expression. Select Soytone is used in molecular genetics
detectable carbohydrates. Their high tryptophan content
media and cell culture. Bacto Soytone is recommended for
makes Bacto Casitone, Trypticase Peptone and Bacto Tryptone
use in media for the cultivation of a large variety of organ-
valuable for detecting indole production.
isms, including fungi, and microbiological assay media. Bacto
Gelysate Peptone Soytone utilizes an enzyme in digestion of the soy flour that
Gelysate Peptone is a pancreatic digest of gelatin. Gelatin is has been sourced from animal.
extracted from collagen, which is the fibrous protein in bone, Polypeptone Peptone
cartilage and connective tissue. Gelysate Peptone should be
Polypeptone Peptone is a mixture of peptones made up of
used for cultures requiring low carbohydrate, cystine and tryp-
equal parts of pancreatic digest of casein and peptic digest of
tophan levels in cell culture and bacterial fermentation.
animal tissue. Polypeptone Peptone includes the high content
Bacto Malt Extract of amino acids and small polypeptides characteristic of pancre-
Bacto Malt Extract is the water-soluble portion of malted atic digest of casein and the larger polypeptides characteristic
barley. It is used in culture media for the propagation of yeasts of peptic digest of animal tissue. Polypeptone Peptone provides
and molds because it contains a high concentration of reduced nitrogen, amino acids and vitamins in microbiological culture
sugars, particularly maltose. This product is generally media.
employed in concentrations of 1-10%. Bacto Malt Extract
provides carbon, protein and nutrients in culture media.

11
Section I
Peptones and Hydrolysates, cont.

Bacto Proteose Peptone Bacto Tryptose

BiTek Proteose Peptone Bacto Tryptose is a mixed enzymatic hydrolysate with distinc-
Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 2 tive nutritional properties. The digestive process of Bacto
Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3 Tryptose results in assorted peptides of higher molecular weight
Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 4 suitable for long chain amino acid requirements. Bacto Tryptose
Bacto Proteose Peptone, BiTek Proteose Peptone, Bacto provides nitrogen, amino acids and vitamins in microbiological
Proteose Peptone No. 2, Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3 and culture media.
Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 4 are enzymatic digests of pro- Bacto Yeast Extract
tein. Bacto Proteose Peptone, BiTek Proteose Peptone, Bacto Yeast Extract, UF
Proteose Peptone No. 2 and Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 4 are Yeast Extract, LD
used in preparing microbiological culture media and in Bacto Yeast Extract, Technical
producing bacterial toxins. Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3 is Yeast Extract
used to culture fastidious microorganisms. Bacto Proteose
Bacto Yeast Extract, Yeast Extract, UF, Yeast Extract, LD, Bacto
Peptone No. 4 is a spray-dried version of Bacto Proteose
Yeast Extract, Technical and Yeast Extract are concentrates of
Peptone. These proteose peptone products provide nitrogen in
the water-soluble portion of Saccharomyces cerevisiae cells that
a form that is readily available for bacterial growth.
have been autolyzed. These products provide vitamins, nitrogen,
Bacto TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate amino acids and carbon in microbiological culture media. Yeast
Bacto TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate is the enzymatically hydro- extract is considered a non-animal product and is used exten-
lyzed protein portion of milk whey. It is a mixture of peptides, sively for many non-animal formulations of bacterial, fungal,
amino acids and carbohydrates, simple and complex. It is used mammalian and insect cell culture.
for preparing bacterial, insect and mammalian cell culture media.
For additional information on peptones, call BD Technical
Bacto TC Yeastolate Services at 800-638-8663 and request a copy of the BD Pep-
TC Yeastolate, UF tone Technical Manual.
Bacto TC Yeastolate and TC Yeastolate, UF are animal-free,
water-soluble portions of autolyzed yeast of Saccharomyces References
1. Naegeli. 1880. Sitzber, math-physik. Klasse Akad. Wiss. Muenchen 10:277.
cerevisiae. These products are mixtures of peptides, amino 2. Bridson and Brecker. 1970. In Norris and Ribbons (ed.), Methods in microbiology, vol. 3A.
Academic Press, New York, N.Y.
acids, simple and complex carbohydrates, and vitamins. They 3. Dixon and Webb. 1979. Enzymes, 3rd ed. Longman Group Limited, London, England.
are used for preparing bacterial, insect and mammalian cell 4. Cowan. 1991. In Moses and Cape (ed.), Biotechnology, the science and the business. Harwood
Academic Publishers GmbH, Chur, Switzerland.
culture media. 5. Huffman and Harper. 1999. J. Dairy Sci. 82:2238.
6. Van Boekel. 1999. Int. Dairy. J. 9:237.
7. Dziuba, Babuchowski, Smoczynski and Smietana. 1999. Int. Dairy J. 9:287.
Thiotone E Peptone 8. Austgen, Bowen and Rouge. 2000. Hypertexts for biomedical science: pathophysiology digestive
systems. http://arbl.cvmbs.colostate.edu/hbooks/pathphys/digestion/pancreas/exocrine.html
Thiotone E Peptone is an enzymatic digest of animal tissue. 9. U.S. Department of Agriculture, Human Nutrition Service. 1986. Agriculture handbook, No.
This product contains a wide range of peptide sizes, including 8-16, revised. USDA, Washington, D.C.
10. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
the large molecular weight peptides, which support fastidious national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
11. Yeast Extracts: Production, properties and components. 13 Dec. 2002. <http://www.ohly.ed/
organisms. Thiotone E Peptone is high in sulfur amino acids publications/publications.html>.
12. Reed and Nagodawithana. Yeast technology, 2nd ed. Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York, N.Y.
and can be used in media to detect hydrogen sulfide produc- 13. Heidemann, Zhang, Qi, Rule, Rozales, Park, Chuppa, Ray, Michaels, Konstantinov and Naveh.
tion. 2000. Cytotechnology 32:157.
14. Schlaeger. 1996. J. Immunol. Methods 194:191.
15. Zhang, Zhou and Yu. 1994. Cytotechnology 16:147.
16. Jan, Jones, Emery and Al-Rubeai. 1994. Cytotechnology 16:17.
17. Demain and Solomon. 1986. Manual of industrial microbiology and biotechnology. American
Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
18. Cote. 1999. In Flickinger and Drew (ed.), Encyclopedia of bioprocess technology, fermentation,
biocatalysis and bioseparation. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, N.Y.
19. Nolan and Nolan. 1972. Appl. Microbiol. 24:290.

Media Sterilization
Sterilization is any process or procedure designed to Sterilization with Heat1
entirely eliminate viable microorganisms from a material The principal methods of thermal sterilization include 1) moist
or medium. Sterilization should not be confused with heat (saturated steam) and 2) dry heat (hot air) sterilization.
disinfection, sanitization, pasteurization or antisepsis Heat kills microorganisms by protein denaturation and
which are intended to inactivate microorganisms, but may coagulation. Moist heat has the advantage of being more rapid
not kill all microorganisms present. Sterilization can be and requiring lower temperatures than dry heat. Moist heat
accomplished by the use of heat, chemicals, radiation or is the most popular method of culture media sterilization.
filtration. 1 When used correctly, it is the most economical, safe and
reliable sterilization method.

12
 Media Sterilization, cont.

Moist Heat Sterilization In autoclave operation, all of the air in the chamber must be
Water boils at 100C, but a higher temperature is required to expelled and replaced by steam; otherwise, hot spots and
kill resistant bacterial spores in a reasonable length of time. A cold spots will occur. Pressure-temperature relations of a
temperature of 121C for 15 minutes is an accepted standard properly operated autoclave are shown in the table below.
condition for sterilizing up to one liter of culture medium. The
definition of autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes refers to Pressure-Temperature Relations in Autoclave4
the temperature of the contents of the container being held at (Figures based on complete replacement of air by steam)
121C for 15 minutes, not to the temperature and time at which PRESSURE IN POUNDS TEMPERATURE (C) TEMPERATURE (F)
the autoclave has been set.2 The steam pressure of 15 pounds
5 109 228
per square inch at this temperature aids in the penetration of
the heat into the material being sterilized. If a larger volume is 10 115 240
to be sterilized in one container, a longer period should be 15 121 250
employed. Many factors can affect sterility assurance, includ- 20 126 259
ing size and contents of the load and the drying and cooling
25 130 267
time. Certain products may decompose at higher temperature
and longer cycles. For this reason, it is important that all loads 30 135 275
be properly validated.
Over-sterilization or prolonged heating will change the compo-
The basic principles for validation and certification of a steril-
sition of the medium. For example, carbohydrates are known to
izing process are enumerated as follows:3
break down in composition upon overheating. Over-sterilizing
1. Establish that the processing equipment has the capability media can cause a number of problems, including:
of operating within the required parameters.
Incorrect pH
2. Demonstrate that the critical control equipment and
instrumentation are capable of operating within the pre- A decrease in the gelling properties of agar
scribed parameters for the process equipment. The development of a nontypical precipitate
3. Perform replicate cycles representing the required opera- Carmelization or darkening of the medium
tional range of the equipment and employing actual or Loss of nutritive value
simulated product. Demonstrate that the processes have Loss of selective or differential properties
been carried out within the prescribed protocol limits
and, finally, that the probability of microbial survival There are certain media (e.g., Hektoen Enteric Agar and
in the replicate processes completed is not greater than Violet Red Bile Agar) that should not be autoclaved. To
dissolve these media formulations, heat to boiling to dissolve
the prescribed limits.
completely. It is important to follow all label directions for
4. Monitor the validated process during routine operation.
each medium. Media supplements should be sterile and added
Periodically as needed, requalify and recertify the equipment.
aseptically to the sterilized medium, usually at 45-55C.
5. Complete the protocols and document steps 1-4, above.
For a complete discussion of process validation, refer to appro- Dry Heat Sterilization1
priate references. Dry heat is employed for materials such as metal instruments
Ensuring that the temperature is recorded correctly is vital. that could be corroded by moist heat, powders, ointments
and dense materials that are not readily penetrated by steam.
The temperature must reach all parts of the load and be main-
Because dry heat is effective only at considerably higher
tained for the desired length of time. Recording thermometers
temperatures and longer times than moist heat, dry heat steril-
are employed for the chamber and thermocouples may be
ization is restricted to those items, unlike culture media, that
buried inside the load.
will withstand higher temperatures. The dry heat time for
For best results when sterilizing culture media, plug tubes or sterilization is 120 minutes at 160C.
flasks of liquids with nonabsorbent cotton or cap loosely. Tubes
should be placed in racks or packed loosely in baskets. Flasks Chemical Sterilization1
should never be more than two-thirds full. It is important to Chemical sterilization employs gaseous and liquid sterilants for
not overload the autoclave chamber and to place contents so certain medical and industrial instruments. The gases include
that there is a free flow of steam around the contents. After ethylene oxide, formaldehyde and beta-propiolactone. The
sterilizing liquids, the chamber pressure must be reduced slowly liquid sterilants include glutaraldehyde, hydrogen peroxide,
to atmospheric pressure. This allows the liquid to cool below peracetic acid, chlorine dioxide and formaldehyde. Chemical
the boiling point at atmospheric pressure before opening the sterilization is not employed in the preparation of culture
door to prevent the solution from boiling over. media due to unfavorable affects upon performance. For a com-
plete discussion of this topic, consult appropriate references.

13
Section I
Media Sterilization, cont.

Radiation Sterilization1 the size of the pores to determine their screening effective-
Radiation sterilization is an optional treatment for heat-sensitive ness. Electrostatic forces are also important. A membrane
materials. This includes ultraviolet light and ionizing radiation. filter with an average pore size of 0.8 m will retain par-
ticulate matter as small as 0.05 m. For removing bacteria,
Ultraviolet light is chemically active and causes excitation of
a pore size of 0.2 m is commonly used. For retention of
atoms within the microbial cell, particularly the nucleic acids,
viruses and mycoplasmas, pore sizes of 0.01-0.1 m are
producing lethal mutations. This action stops the organism
recommended. Cocci and bacilli range in size from about
from reproducing. The range of the ultraviolet spectrum that
0.3 to 1 m in diameter. Most viruses are 0.02-0.1 m,
is microbiocidal is 240-280 nm. There is a great difference
with some as large as 0.25 m.
in the susceptibility of organisms to ultraviolet radiation;
Aspergillus niger spores are 10 times more resistant than Rating the pore size of filter membranes is by a nominal rat-
Bacillus subtilis spores, 50 times more resistant than Staphy- ing that reflects the capability of the filter membrane to retain
lococcus aureus and Escherichia coli, and 150 times more microorganisms of size represented by specified strains. Ster-
resistant than influenza virus. ilizing filter membranes are membranes capable of retaining
100% of a culture of 107 microorganisms of a strain of
Because most materials strongly absorb ultraviolet light,
Pseudomonas diminuta (ATCC 19146) per square centimeter
it lacks penetrating power and its applications are limited
of membrane surface under a pressure of not less than 30 psi.
to surface treatments. Much higher energy, 100 to millions
These filter membranes are nominally rated 0.22 m or 0.2 m.
of times greater, is generated by ionizing radiations. These
include gamma-rays, high energy X-rays and high energy Bacterial filter membranes (also known as analytical filter
electrons. membranes), which are capable of retaining only larger
microorganisms, are labeled with a nominal rating of 0.45 m.
Ionizing radiation, unlike ultraviolet rays, penetrates deeply
into atoms, causing ionization of the electrons. Ionizing Membrane filters are used for the commercial production of a
radiation may directly target the DNA in cells or produce number of pharmaceutical solutions and heat-sensitive
active ions and free radicals that react indirectly with DNA. injectables. Serum for use in bacterial and viral culture media
are often sterilized by filtration, as well as some sugars that
Gamma radiation is used more often than x-rays or high- are unstable when heated. Membrane filtration is useful in
energy electrons for purposes of sterilization. Gamma rays testing pharmaceutical and medical products for sterility.
are generated by radioactive isotopes, cobalt-60 being the usual
source. Gamma radiation requires many hours of exposure Sterility Assurance1
for sterilization. Validation of a gamma irradiation procedure Sterility Assurance is the calculated probability that a micro-
includes:4 organism will survive sterilization. It is measured as the SAL,
Establishment of article materials compatibility Sterility Assurance Level, or degree of sterility. For sterility
assurance, Bacillus stearothermophilus which contains steam
Establishment of product loading pattern and comple-
heat-resistant spores is employed with steam sterilization at
tion of dose mapping in the sterilization container
121C.
Establishment of timer setting
Demonstration of the delivery of the required steriliza- Testing Sterilizing Agents1,5
tion dose Sterilization by moist heat (steam), dry heat, ethylene oxide
The advantages of sterilization by irradiation include low chemi- and ionizing radiation is validated using biological indicators.
cal reactivity, low measurable residues, and few variables to con- The methods of sterilization and their corresponding indica-
trol.3 Gamma irradiation is used for treating many heat-sensi- tors are listed below:
tive products that can also be treated by gaseous sterilization,
including medical materials and equipment, pharmaceuticals, STERILIZATION METHOD BIOLOGICAL INDICATOR
biologicals and laboratory equipment. BD utilizes gamma irra-
Steam Bacillus stearothermophilus
diation in the manufacturing of BBL Sterile Pack media for
Dry heat Bacillus subtilis var. niger
environmental monitoring of critical environments.
Ethylene oxide Bacillus subtilis var. globigii
Filtration Pseudomonas diminuta
Sterilization by Filtration1,3
Filtration is a useful method for sterilizing liquids and gases.
Filtration excludes microorganisms rather than destroying For moist heat sterilization, paper strips treated with chemicals
them. Two major types of filters may be used, depth filters that change color at the required temperature may be used.
and membrane filters.
The membrane filter screens out particles, while the depth
filter entraps them. Membrane filters depend largely on

14
 Quality Control Organisms

The heat-resistant spores of B. stearothermophilus are dried Process validation is establishing documented evidence that a
on paper treated with nutrient medium and chemicals. After process does what it purports to do.
sterilization, the strips are incubated for germination and
Sterility Assurance Level is generally accepted when materials
growth, and a color change indicates whether they have or
are processed in the autoclave and attain a 10-6 microbial
have not been activated. Spore strips should be used in every
survivor probability; i.e., assurance of less than one chance
sterilization cycle.
in one million that viable microorganisms are present in the
sterilized article.3
Glossary1,6
Bioburden is the initial population of living microorganisms Sterilization process is a treatment process from which the
in the product or system being considered. probability of microorganism survival is less than 10-6, or one
in a million.
Biocide is a chemical or physical agent intended to produce
the death of microorganisms. Thermal Death Time and Thermal-Chemical Death Time are
terms referring to the time required to kill a specified microbial
Calibration is the demonstration that a measuring device
population upon exposure to a thermal or thermal-chemical
produces results within specified limits of those produced
sterilizing agent under specified conditions. A typical thermal
by a reference standard device over an appropriate range of
death time value with highly resistant spores is 15 minutes at
measurements.
121C for steam sterilization.
Death rate is the rate at which a biocidal agent reduces the
number of cells in a microbial population that are capable of References
1. Block. 1992. Sterilization. Encyclopedia of microbiology, vol. 4. Academic Press, Inc., San Diego,
reproduction. This is determined by sampling the population Calif.
initially, during and following the treatment, followed by plate 2. Cote and Gherna. 1994. In Gerhardt, Murray, Wood and Krieg (ed.), Methods for general and
molecular bacteriology. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
counts of the surviving microorganisms on growth media. 3. The United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
4. Perkins. 1969. Principles and methods of sterilization in health sciences, 2nd ed. Charles C.
D value stands for decimal reduction time and is the time Thomas, Springfield, Ill.
required in minutes at a specified temperature to produce a 5. Leahy. 1986. In Carleton and Agalloco (ed.), Validation of aseptic pharmaceutical processes. Marcel
Dekker, Inc. New York, N.Y.
90% reduction in the number of organisms. 6. Simko. 1986. In Carleton and Agalloco (ed.), Validation of aseptic pharmaceutical processes. Marcel
Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Microbial death is the inability of microbial cells to metabolize
and reproduce when given favorable conditions for reproduc-
tion.

Quality Control Organisms

Bacterial Control Strain Source Maintenance/Frozen Stock Cultures
An integral part of quality control testing includes quality If using commercial stock cultures, follow the manufacturers
control organisms. The following procedures for preparing recommendations for growth and maintenance.
quality control organisms were developed by the National
To prepare frozen stock cultures of Staphylococcus species,
Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards for evaluating the
Streptococcus species, Enterobacteriaceae and Pseudomonas
performance of certain commercially-prepared microbiological
aeruginosa:
culture media.1 These procedures may require modification for
the preparation and use of control cultures of mycobacteria, 1. Reconstitute the stock culture, if necessary.
yeasts and molds. 2. Inoculate multiple plates of a general-purpose medium; e.g.,
Microorganisms should be obtained from the American Type Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar (TSA) or blood agar.
Culture Collection (ATCC) or other commercial sources, such 3. Incubate plates for 18-24 hours in an appropriate atmosphere
as ATCC derived Difco Bactrol Plus Quality Control and at the recommended temperature.
Organisms and BBL QualiSwab Quality Control Organ- 4. Check for purity and correct colony morphology.
isms. For a listing of individual Bactrol Plus strains (vials of 5. If necessary, verify using biochemical tests.
lyophilized microorganisms), refer to the table in the Refer- 6. Remove sufficient growth from a confluent area and
ence Guide section of this manual. For a complete listing of suspend in 50-100 mL of cryoprotective medium; e.g.,
Bactrol Plus sets and QualiSwab strains, refer to our current Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Broth (TSB) with 10-15% glycerol,
product catalog. skim milk or sterile defibrinated sheep blood.

15
Section I
Quality Control Organisms, cont.

7. If the frozen cultures will be used to inoculate test media, 5. Perform a plate count of the organism suspension to con-
adjust suspension to a 0.5 McFarland standard (1-2 108 firm a colony count of 1-2 108 CFU/mL.
CFU/mL). For fastidious organisms, adjust to a 1 To Test Cultural Response
McFarland.
When qualifying a new lot of culture medium, always test the
8. Dispense 0.5-1.0 mL into sterile glass or plastic freezing
new lot of medium in parallel with an approved lot of me-
vials. Prepare enough vials for one year of storage. Assume
dium.
only one freeze/thaw cycle per vial. Assume at least one fresh
culture every four weeks. Non-Selective Media
9. Store vials at or below 50C (freezer) for one year. Or- Dilute the cell suspension 1:100 in normal saline or purified
ganisms will keep longer (indefinitely) if stored in an ultra- water. Inoculate each plate with 0.01 mL (10 L loopful) to
low-temperature freezer or in a liquid nitrogen tank. give 1-2 104 CFU/plate. Reduce the inoculum ten-fold, if
necessary, to obtain isolated colonies.1
To use a frozen culture:
1. Thaw the vial quickly. Selective Media and Tubed Media
2. Use the culture directly or subculture. Dilute the cell suspension 1:10 in normal saline or purified
3. Discard any unused cell suspension. Never refreeze water. Streak each plate with 0.01 mL (10 L loopful) of the
cultures for later use. suspension to provide 1-2 105 CFU/plate. Reduce the
inoculum ten-fold, if necessary, to avoid overwhelming some
Working Cultures selective media.1
1. Inoculate an agar slant or plate with the frozen stock Special Applications
culture and incubate overnight. Media used for special applications should be qualified
2. Store the working culture at 2-8C or at room tempera- accordingly. For example, prior to using Fluid Thioglycollate
ture for up to four weeks. Medium and/or Soybean-Casein Digest Medium (Tryptic Soy
3. Check for purity and appropriate colony morphology. Broth and Trypticase Soy Broth) for sterility testing, the
NOTE: Prepare no more than three serial subcultures from media should be tested for growth promotion according to
the original working culture. the specifications outlined in The United States Pharmacopeia2
Or or a comparable reference standard.
Use the frozen culture directly as a working culture. Results
Maintain anaerobic cultures in Cooked Meat Medium or an- For general-purpose (non-selective) media, sufficient, charac-
other suitable anaerobic medium. Alternatively, use frozen teristic growth and typical colony morphology should be ob-
anaerobic cultures. tained with all test strains. For selective media, growth of
designated organisms is inhibited and adequate growth of
Test Procedure desired organisms is obtained. Color and hemolytic reaction
1. Inoculate an agar plate from the working culture. criteria must be met.
2. Incubate overnight.
3. Suspend 3-5 isolated colonies with typical appearance in a References
1. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 1996. Approved standard M22-A2. Quality
small volume (0.5-1.0 mL) of TSB. Incubate 4-5 hours in assurance for commercially prepared microbiological culture media, 2nd ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
an appropriate atmosphere and temperature. 2. The United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. The United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
4. Adjust the turbidity to 0.5 McFarland (0.08-0.1 absorbance
units at 625 nm). Alternatively, a suspension may be made
from an overnight culture and adjusted to a 0.5 McFarland.

16
 Typical Analyses

Typical Analyses
Typical chemical compositions have been determined on may reduce stability. In the presence of high moisture and
the peptones and hydrolysates used in microbiological culture high ambient temperatures, chemical interactions will cause
media. The typical analysis is used to select products for darkening of the product and falling pH. These characteristics
research or production needs when specific nutritional charac- indicate product deterioration. Loss on Drying determinations
teristics are required. The specifications for the typical analysis were based on the method described in The United States
include: Pharmacopoeia1 (with some modifications to the procedure).
Nitrogen content NaCl: The sodium chloride (NaCl) content may reflect
Physical characteristics significant pH adjustments during processing; e.g., acid
Inorganics hydrolysates (see Ash). Sodium Chloride was determined by
silver nitrate/potassium thiocyanate titration method.
Amino acids
pH: pH was measured in a 2% solution after autoclaving and
For typical peptone and hydrolysate analyses, refer to the table equilibrating to room temperature. Hydrolysates vary in their
in the Reference Guide section of this manual. To obtain pH resistance according to their inherent buffering (phosphate)
Certificates of Analysis on specific lots of peptones and capacity.
hydrolysates, visit www.bdregdocs.com.
Inorganics
Glossary and Methods Elemental analysis (calcium, magnesium, potassium, sodium)
Nitrogen Content was determined by ICP (Inductively Coupled Plasma) using a
Total nitrogen (TN) was measured using a modified Kjeldhal Thermo Jarrell Ash instrument.
digestion method. Not all organic nitrogen is nutritive. Phosphate, chloride and sulfate percentages were determined
Percent (%) nitrogen 6.25 % proteins, peptides or amino by ion chromatography.
acids present. Amino Acids
The amino nitrogen (AN) value shows the extent of protein Free Amino Acids are defined as amino acids that are not part
hydrolysis by measuring the increase in free amino groups. of a protein or peptide chain. The amino acids were measured
This is a nutritionally meaningful value. using the Waters AccQTag* Method. The AccQTag
Method is based on the derivatizing reagent 6-aminoquinolyl-
The AN/TN ratio gives an estimate of the degree of protein N-hydroxysuccinimide-activated heterocyclic carbamate.
hydrolysis.
Total Amino Acids were measured by the same method as the
Physical Characteristics Free Amino Acids after an acid hydrolysis at 110C for 20
Ash: The higher the ash content, the lower the clarity of the hours. Cysteine and tryptophan are destroyed during the
prepared ingredient. Ash values refer to the non-combustible hydrolysis. The cysteine and tryptophan values are not reported
portion of the sample and roughly correspond to the mineral for Total Amino Acids.
content of the sample. The ash content includes sodium chlo-
ride, sulfate, phosphates, silicates and metal oxides. Acid- Reference
insoluble ash is typically from silicates found in animal fodder. 1. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 202002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
Ash values were measured after a minimum of 4 hours * AccQTag is a trademark of Waters Corporation.
heating at 600C.
Moisture (Loss on Drying): Lower moisture levels (<5%) are
preferred. Higher moisture levels in dehydrated ingredients

17
Section I
Monographs

18
Monographs

19
Section II
Dehydrated Culture Media

20
 Dehydrated Culture Media

Dehydrated Culture Media

I. Introduction immediately with plenty of water. Sodium azide may react with
BD supplies greater than 400 different Difco and BBL brand lead and copper plumbing to form highly explosive metal azides.
media formulations in dehydrated form for the convenience of On disposal, flush with a large volume of water to prevent azide
the laboratorian and bioprocessing specialist. Certain formula- build-up.
tions are designated by a II in the medium name; these Observe aseptic techniques and established precautions against
formulations are improved to provide more consistent, superior microbiological hazards throughout all procedures, since it
test results than earlier versions. must be assumed that all specimens/samples collected might
The individual ingredients and the final dehydrated product contain infectious microorganisms. After use, prepared plates,
are carefully quality-controlled to assure consistent, high quality specimen/sample containers and other contaminated materi-
performance and obviate the need for media to be prepared in als must be sterilized before discarding. Directions for use
the laboratory from raw materials. A number of factors should should be read and followed carefully.
be considered in the use of dehydrated media to ensure the
To minimize the risk in microbiology laboratories of working
quality of the finished product. These factors are discussed
with infectious microorganisms and specimens and samples
below.
suspected to contain them, the United States Department of
Dehydrated culture media may be offered as 100 g and 500 g Health and Human Services has published guidelines for han-
bottles, 2 kg, 5 lb, 25 lb and 10 kg containers. dling these agents and materials.1 The guidelines describe four
biosafety levels, some of which are mentioned in this manual
II. Formula(e) in association with specific microorganisms:
Generally, media ingredients are listed according to published
classical formulations. However, since biological raw materials Biosafety Level 1 is applicable when work is done with
may vary slightly, formulations are listed as approximate and defined and characterized strains of viable organisms
may be adjusted and/or supplemented to meet performance not known to consistently cause disease in healthy
criteria. adult humans.
Biosafety Level 2 practices are applicable to laboratories
Peptones in the formulations presented in this manual may
in which work is done with the broad spectrum of indig-
be expressed by their traditional names or by their generic
enous moderate-risk agents that are associated with hu-
equivalents. The United States Pharmacopeia lists culture
man disease; activities can be performed on the open bench
media peptones by generic names and includes specifications
provided the potential for producing splashes or aerosols
for peptone (meat peptone), pancreatic digest of casein, peptic
is low.
digest of animal tissue and papaic digest of soybean meal. The
peptones in BBL brand media have been converted to their Biosafety Level 3 practices are applicable to laboratories
generic equivalents. In general, the peptones in Difco brand working with agents with a potential for respiratory trans-
media have retained their traditional names, which also mission and which may cause serious and potentially lethal
appear in the published formulations in many textbooks and infection. All laboratory manipulations should be performed
in standard references containing methods for the micro- in a biological safety cabinet or other enclosed equipment
biological examination of foods, dairy products and waters to protect personnel and the environment from exposure to
and wastewaters. potentially infectious aerosols.
Biosafety Level 4 practices are applicable for work with
Traditionally, the amount of an infusion listed for an infusion-
containing medium has been expressed as the weight of the highly dangerous agents which may be transmitted via
source material (e.g., Beef Heart, Infusion from 250 g) used in the aerosol route, for which there is no available vaccine
the infusion extraction process. These values have been con- or therapy and for which specialized equipment and
verted to their dry weight equivalents in this manual, which is facilities are required.
consistent with their use in dehydrated culture media. Consult the reference for specific recommendations on the prac-
tices, equipment and facilities of the four biosafety levels.1
III. Warnings and Precautions
Dehydrated culture media are For Laboratory Use. IV. Storage Instructions
Sodium azide is a selective agent in certain culture media. The majority of formulations should be stored within the range
Media containing sodium azide are very toxic by inhalation, of 2-25C in a dry place at a distance from sources of heat and
in contact with skin and if swallowed. Contact with acids lib- sunlight; for a few, storage at 2-8C is required. Unless other-
erates very toxic gas. After contact with skin, wash wise noted, media described in this manual should be stored
at 2-25C.

21
Section II
Dehydrated Culture Media, cont.

Dehydrated culture media are hygroscopic. When bottles of VIII. Materials Provided
dehydrated media have been opened for initial use, they should Dehydrated Culture Medium
be tightly closed as soon as possible to protect them from Supplements and Enrichments (if applicable)
hydration.
Provision should be made for rotating the stock of dehydrated IX. Materials Required But Not Provided
media to ensure product freshness, obviating the use of aged Glassware
materials, and discarding of media which is outdated. Measuring scale
pH meter
V. Expiration Date Autoclave
The expiration date applies to the products in their intact con- Purified water, pH 5.5-7.5
tainers when stored as directed. Do not use a product if it fails Water bath
to meet specifications for identity and performance. Incubator
Sterile Petri dishes or tubes
VI. Product Deterioration Ancillary culture media, reagents and laboratory equipment
Verify that the physical characteristics of the powder are typical. as required.
Hydration can lead to caking and/or microbial contamination
which render the culture medium unusable. X. Procedures
Rehydration
VII. Specimen/Sample Collection and The procedure employed for dissolving dehydrated culture
Transport media very often determines the clarity and performance of
The success of a microbiological isolation procedure does not the finished product. Homogeneity of the solution and minimal
depend solely on the quality of the culture media utilized. heat exposure are important considerations.
Proper specimen/sample collection and transport are crucial
Prior to use, examine the dehydrated material. Caked or dis-
steps in the isolation process. A variety of transport systems
colored material should not be used for the preparation of
and holding media have been devised to prolong the survival
culture media batches.
of microorganisms when a significant delay is expected
between collection and definitive culturing. Add the precise amount of powdered material to approximately
Clinical Specimens one-half of the volume of purified water. After thorough mix-
For clinical specimens, BBL CultureSwab and Port-A-Cul ing, add the remainder of the water with care being taken to
collection and transport products are available. For trans- wash down the sides of the container (preferably an Erlenmeyer
port and growth of the pathogenic Neisseria, Transgrow, flask that is at least 2-3 the volume of medium). Dissolution is
Gono-Pak and JEMBEC* systems containing Modified enhanced by allowing agar preparations to stand for 5 min-
Thayer-Martin (MTM II), Martin-Lewis or GC-Lect Agars utes with occasional agitation prior to boiling. Formulae that
are recommended. Specimens should be obtained before do not contain agar, gelatin or cystine will dissolve without
antimicrobial therapy has been administered. Provision must heating, but heat is required to dissolve others so that they can
be made for prompt delivery to the laboratory. be dispensed and sterilized. When heating is required, heat
should be applied gently and the preparation agitated as
The clinical laboratory must be furnished with sufficient required to prevent scorching. However, care should be taken
patient information to enable the microbiologist to select the to avoid media eruptions that may occur when agitating a flask
most suitable media and appropriate techniques. For detailed of medium which is at or very near the boiling point. Boil as
information, appropriate references should be consulted.
briefly as possible to obtain solution; 1 minute is usually suffi-
* JEMBEC is a trademark of Miles Scientific.
cient. Exposure for longer periods can darken the medium and
Industrial Samples severely reduce its growth promotion properties. In no case
Sterile containers should be used to collect samples. For should powdered medium be added to water and immediately
environmental monitoring, samples can be collected using placed into an autoclave since layering and separation of
BD Sterile Pack Swabs. ingredients, precipitate formation and darkening are likely to
Samples must represent the mass of the material being exam- occur with diminution of performance.
ined. Samples may require special handling, including refrig- Sterilization
eration, to prevent the direct contamination of the sample by
Follow label directions for length and temperature of steriliza-
microorganisms and the subsequent growth of such contami-
tion. The recommended sterilization times assume a volume
nants during sampling, transportation and storage before
of one liter (1000 mL) or less. For larger volumes, the steril-
examination. For detailed information, appropriate references
ization time should be extended but the temperature should
should be consulted.

22
 Dehydrated Culture Media, cont.

not be raised. When larger volumes are used, validation studies When they have cooled, tighten the caps of media that are
should be performed to determine the optimum sterilization contained in screw-capped tubes or bottles; store all tubes and
cycle for each unique container size/volume combination. Au- bottles under appropriate conditions, usually at ambient room
toclave media containing carbohydrates at a temperature not temperature. The shelf life of some media, such as Lowenstein-
exceeding 116-118C to avoid caramelization of the carbohy- Jensen Medium, may be prolonged by refrigeration.
drate. It is important that physical parameters of the sterilizer Prepared media that have been refrigerated should be removed
and the efficacy of kill be monitored frequently through the from refrigeration and equilibrated to room temperature prior
use of calibration instrumentation and biological indicators. to inoculation to allow water of condensation to evaporate or
Do not autoclave media that should not be heat-sterilized. There dissipate and to avoid temperature shock to the inoculum.
are numerous formulations available that can merely be
dissolved and used directly. The performance of such media XI. User Quality Control
is seriously impaired by subjecting them to heat. For media prepared in-house, each lot of every medium must
be tested. When qualifying a new lot of culture medium,
Adding Enrichments and Supplements
always test the new lot of medium in parallel with an approved
Enrichments and supplements tend to be heat sensitive. Cool lot of medium. Quality control organisms must be maintained
the medium to 45-55C in a water bath prior to adding appropriately and inoculum preparation should be performed
enrichments or supplements. Ensure adequate mixing of the according to published guidelines (refer to the monograph
basal medium with enrichments or supplements by swirling to Quality Control Organisms). Maintain appropriate records
mix thoroughly. and report deficiencies to the manufacturer.
Sterile broths may be cooled to room temperature before add- Comments on BD User Quality Control
ing enrichment. In the product descriptions, the User Quality Control section
pH contains procedures for identity (Identity Specifications) and
Commercial dehydrated culture media are designed to fall performance (Cultural Response). Differences in the Identity
within the specified pH range after steam sterilization. Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered
as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences in the
For filter sterilization, adjust the pH, if necessary, prior to
development and testing of media for industrial and clinical
filtering.
applications, per the referenced publications.
Measure pH at room temperature (25C). Avoid excessive
For Identity Specifications, the expected appearance of the
pH adjustments.
powder, and of the solution following the addition of the
Dispensing and Storage of Prepared Media powder to purified water and boiling, when appropriate, are
After sterilization, media prepared in the laboratory should be indicated. The prepared (finished) medium appearance and fi-
removed from the autoclave as soon as the pressure has fallen nal pH, both determined at 25C, are specified.
to zero. Hastening the opening of the autoclave before zero For Cultural Response, test organisms, inocula and results are
pressure is reached can result in the ejection of media from the provided. Except for those media which are tested with fresh
sterilization vessels with considerable loss of contents. cultures (undiluted agar or broth cultures), the number of
For preparing plates, cool the medium to 50-55C prior to colony forming units (CFU) per plate is provided. Under
dispensing to reduce water evaporation. Ensure gentle mixing Recovery, growth on Difco and BBL plated media may be
during dispensing and dispense quickly. If using an automatic reported as None, Poor (growth in quadrant one), Fair (growth
plate dispenser, dispense general-purpose media before dis- in quadrants one and two) and Good (growth in quadrants
pensing selective media. Invert filled and cooled (solidified) three and four). Similar terms may be used for tubed media.
Petri dish bottoms over their off-set lids and allow to sit for The cultures listed are the minimum that should be used for
1-2 hours to obtain a dry surface. It is advisable to use freshly performance testing.
poured plated media on the day of preparation. Alternatively,
plates should be placed in the refrigerator as soon as they XII. Limitations of the Procedure
have solidified (agar side up) and several representative plates Detergent residues can compromise media. After washing
incubated at 35 2C as a sterility check. If storage of plates glassware, check for alkali or acid residue with a few drops
is for more than several days, it is recommended that they of bromthymol blue pH indicator (yellow is acidic; blue is
be wrapped in plastic or otherwise protected to prevent alkaline).
moisture loss. Most media, and especially those containing Quantities of media in excess of one liter may require an
dyes or indicators, should be protected from light during extended autoclave time to achieve sterilization. Longer ster-
storage. ilization cycles can cause nutrient concentration changes and
generation of inhibitory substances.

23
Section II
Dehydrated Culture Media, cont.

Since the nutritional requirements of organisms vary, a single specimens/samples cultured on nonselective media to obtain
medium is rarely adequate for detecting all organisms of additional information and help ensure recovery of potential
potential significance in a clinical specimen or industrial sample. pathogens and other significant organisms.
The agents in selective media may inhibit some strains of the
desired species or permit growth of a species they were XIII. Reference
1. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
designed to inhibit, especially if the species are present in large Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
numbers in the specimen/sample. Cultures of specimens/samples No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.

grown on selective media should, therefore, be compared with

PROBLEM A B C D E F G H OTHER CAUSES

Abnormal color of medium
Incorrect pH Storage at high temperature
Hydrolysis of ingredients
pH determined at wrong temperature
Atypical precipitate
Incomplete solubility Inadequate heating
Inadequate convection in a too small
flask
Darkening or carmelization
Toxicity Burning or scorching
Trace substances (Vitamins) Airborne or environmental sources
of vitamins
Loss of gelation property Hydrolysis of agar due to pH shift
Not boiling medium
Loss of nutritive value or Burning or scorching
selective or differential Presence of strong electrolytes, sugar
properties solutions, detergents, antiseptics,
metallic poisons, protein materials or
other substances that may inhibit the
inoculum
Contamination Improper sterilization
Poor technique in adding enrichments
and pouring plates
Not boiling agar containing medium

Key
A Deteriorated Dehydrated Medium D Incorrect Weighing G Repeated Remelting
B Improperly Washed Glassware E Incomplete Mixing H Dilution by a Too Large Inoculum

24
 Prepared Plated Media

Prepared Plated Media

I. Introduction Sterile Pack Settling Plates for air sampling; these plates
Since 1960, BD has been the leading manufacturer of prepared fit a variety of viable particle air sampler instruments.
plated media. BBL prepared plated media consist of BBL, Sterile Pack Finger Dab Plates for sampling gloved hands.
and in some cases Difco, dehydrated culture media prepared Sterile Isolator Pack Plates are similar to the above except
and poured into disposable Petri dishes ready for immediate that the multi-wrap design has been validated to protect
use. Each lot of BBL prepared plated media is manufactured the medium from the vaporized hydrogen peroxide used
from pretested components, and the final product is quaran- in the isolator decontamination cycle.
tined during quality control testing.
BBL plated media primarily are supplied in easy-open pack- II. Formulae
ages of twenty (20) and cartons of one hundred 100 15 Formulae for BBL brand prepared plated media are included
mm-style Stacker dishes, designed to interlock to minimize in product inserts or the BBL Quality Control and Product
the hazard of sliding stacks. Some media are supplied in pack- Information Manual for Plated and Tubed Media.
ages of 10 dishes.
III. Warnings and Precautions
Prepared Stacker I Plate dishes and bi-plate dishes (with Prepared plated media are For in vitro Diagnostic Use or For
marked halves) contain either the same medium in each side Laboratory Use as labeled.
of the dish divider or two different media for selective isola-
tion or differentiation of microorganisms. Directions for use should be read and followed carefully.

The 150 15 mm-style dish is offered in packages of 8 or If excessive moisture is observed, invert the bottom over an
boxes of 24 dishes containing Mueller Hinton Agar, with and off-set lid and allow to air dry in order to prevent formation of
without blood, and other media for use in the standardized a seal between the top and bottom of the plate during incubation.
Bauer-Kirby method of antimicrobial susceptibility testing. Observe aseptic techniques and established precautions against
NOTE: The catalog numbers for prepared plates listed under microbiological hazards throughout all procedures, since it
Availability for each of the media descriptions are 100 15 must be assumed that all specimens/samples collected might
mm-style unless another size is indicated. contain infectious microorganisms. After use, prepared plates,
specimen/sample containers and other contaminated materials
Prepared Plated Media for Environmental Monitoring
must be sterilized before discarding.
BD RODAC (Replicate Organism Detection and Counting) and
Contact plates are 60 mm-style plates used for surface sampling To minimize the risk in microbiology laboratories of working
for microbial contamination. The base of the RODAC plate with infectious microorganisms and specimens and samples
has inward-sloping walls and a convex bottom designed to keep suspected to contain them, the United States Department of
the agar bed in place during transit and use. Health and Human Services has published guidelines for han-
dling these agents and materials.1 The guidelines describe four
In addition, BD Hycheck hygiene contact slides are used to
biosafety levels, some of which are mentioned in this manual
assess the microbiological contamination of surfaces or fluids.
in association with specific microorganisms:
Contained in a tightly sealed tube with screw cap, the double-
sided design features a hinged paddle that bends for easy sam- Biosafety Level 1 is applicable when work is done with
pling; one paddle produces selective and nonselective results or defined and characterized strains of viable organisms not
surface samples can be obtained from two separate sites. known to consistently cause disease in healthy adult
humans.
BD also offers four lines of prepared sterile pack plated media
for critical environments. Because the entire double-bagged Biosafety Level 2 practices are applicable to laboratories
product is subjected to a sterilizing dose of gamma irradia- in which work is done with the broad spectrum of indig-
tion, the contents inside the outer bag are sterile (refer to the enous moderate-risk agents that are associated with
monograph Media Sterilization). This allows the inner bag human disease; activities can be performed on the open
to be aseptically removed and brought into an environmen- bench provided the potential for producing splashes or
tally-controlled area without introducing contaminants. A third aerosols is low.
sterile rolled-up inner bag is included and may be employed as Biosafety Level 3 practices are applicable to laboratories
a transport container from the critical environment. The four working with agents with a potential for respiratory trans-
options offered are: mission and which may cause serious and potential lethal
Sterile Pack RODAC plates for monitoring the micro- infection. All laboratory manipulations should be
bial load on impervious surfaces.

25
Section II
Prepared Plated Media, cont.

performed in a biological safety cabinet or other enclosed Industrial Samples

equipment to protect personnel and the environment from Sterile containers should be used to collect samples. For envi-
exposure to potentially infectious aerosols. ronmental monitoring, samples can be collected using
BD Sterile Pack Swabs.
Biosafety Level 4 practices are applicable for work with
highly dangerous agents which may be transmitted via Samples must represent the mass of the material being
the aerosol route, for which there is no available vaccine examined. Samples may require special handling, including
or therapy and for which specialized equipment and refrigeration, to prevent the direct contamination of the
facilities are required. sample by microorganisms and the subsequent growth of such
contaminants during sampling, transportation and storage
Consult the reference for specific recommendations on the prac- before examination. For detailed information, appropriate
tices, equipment and facilities of the four biosafety levels.1 references should be consulted.
IV. Storage Instructions VIII. Materials Provided
On receipt, store plates at 2-8C. Freezing and overheating Prepared plated medium
must be avoided. Allow the medium to warm to room tem-
perature before inoculation. Media containing dyes should be IX. Materials Required But Not Provided
protected from light. Ancillary culture media, reagents and laboratory equipment
as required.
V. Expiration Date
Prepared plates stored in their original sleeve wrapping at X. Procedures
2-8C until just prior to use may be inoculated up to the Prepared plated media are ready to use with no additional
expiration date and incubated for recommended incubation preparation required. Allow plates to warm to room tempera-
times, including up to 6 weeks for mycology media and up to ture prior to inoculation.
8 weeks for mycobacteriology media.
For anaerobic media, plates should be reduced immediately
VI. Product Deterioration prior to inoculation by placing under anaerobic conditions
Do not use plates if they show evidence of microbial contami- for 18-24 hours. An efficient and easy way to obtain suitable
nation, discoloration, drying, cracking or other signs of anaerobic conditions is through the use of BBL GasPak or
deterioration. GasPak EZ anaerobic systems.

VII. Specimen/Sample Collection and XI. User Quality Control

Transport Quality control procedures for BBL brand prepared plated
The success of a microbiological isolation procedure does not media are included in product inserts or the BBL Quality
depend solely on the quality of the culture media utilized. Control and Product Information Manual for Plated and
Proper specimen/sample collection and transport are crucial Tubed Media.
steps in the isolation process. A variety of transport systems If a culture medium being subjected to quality-control testing
and holding media have been devised to prolong the survival is a formulation to which the National Committee for Clinical
of microorganisms when a significant delay is expected Laboratory Standards (NCCLS) standard, Quality Assurance
between collection and definitive culturing. for Commercially Prepared Microbiological Culture Media,2
Clinical Specimens applies, American Type Culture Collection (ATCC) control
For clinical specimens, BBL CultureSwab and Port-A-Cul strains specified by the document are utilized; additional ATCC
collection and transport products are available. For transport and other organism strains may be also employed. If no
and growth of the pathogenic Neisseria, Transgrow, Gono-Pak standard exists for the particular medium, the organisms used
and JEMBEC* systems containing Modified Thayer-Martin represent strains from our stock culture collection. Except for
(MTM II), Martin-Lewis or GC-Lect Agars are recommended. NCCLS-specified strains, cultures employed in testing proce-
Specimens should be obtained before antimicrobial therapy has dures may be added or changed from time to time as strains
been administered. Provision must be made for prompt delivery are found that provide a greater challenge. Clinical isolates
to the laboratory. are included periodically for various formulations so as to
check performance with wild strains.
The clinical laboratory must be furnished with sufficient
patient information to enable the microbiologist to select the To determine pH, bring the medium to room temperature
most suitable media and appropriate techniques. For detailed (25C), transfer the medium from the plate to a beaker,
information, appropriate references should be consulted. macerate and immerse the electrode. Alternatively, a pH
* JEMBEC is a trademark of Miles Scientific. electrode designed for flat surfaces may be used.

26
 Prepared Tubed, Bottled Media

XII. Limitations of the Procedure to inhibit, especially if the species are present in large numbers
Some diagnostic tests may be performed with the primary plate in the specimen/sample. Cultures of specimens/samples grown
(e.g., BBL CHROMagar media). However, a pure culture on selective media should, therefore, be compared with
is recommended for the majority of biochemical tests and other specimens/samples cultured on nonselective media to obtain
identification procedures. Consult appropriate references for additional information and help ensure recovery of potential
further information. pathogens and other significant organisms.
Since the nutritional requirements of organisms vary, a single XIII. References
medium is rarely adequate for detecting all organisms of poten- 1. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
tial significance in a clinical specimen or industrial sample. The No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
agents in selective media may inhibit some strains of the 2. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 1996. Approved standard: M22-A2, Quality
assurance for commercially prepared microbiological culture media, 2nd ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
desired species or permit growth of a species they were designed

Prepared Tubed, Bottled and Mycoflask Media

I. Introduction such as Fluid Thioglycollate Medium, unless otherwise noted,
Since 1952, BD has been the leading manufacturer of pre- are filled to contain approximately 20 mL.
pared tubed and bottled media. BBL prepared tubed and The C tube is used primarily for cultivation of fungi and
bottled media consist of BBL and, in some cases Difco, mycobacteria.
dehydrated culture media prepared and poured into a variety
The D tube is utilized for certain general-purpose and
of sizes ready for immediate use. Some formulations are also
special-purpose media. These are filled usually with approxi-
supplied in Mycoflask bottles which provide a greater surface
mately 10 mL of medium. When filled with differential agars,
area for inoculation. Each lot of BBL and Difco prepared
such as TSI Agar, approximately 7 mL are used to produce
tubed, bottled and Mycoflask media is manufactured from
the characteristic long butt with short slant needed for these
pretested components and the final product is quarantined
special-purpose media.
during quality control testing.
The K tube provides the convenience of a wide mouth with
Prepared Tubed Media
vertical shelf space-saving. Unless otherwise noted, slants
BBL prepared tubed media are provided in several sizes of contain approximately 4 mL, slants with butts approximately
glassware depending on the application of the individual culture 6 mL and broths approximately 5-8 mL.
medium. Catalog listings indicate the type of tube in each
instance. Dimensions of each of the tubes are shown below. Media are available in packages of 10 and cartons of 100
tubes to meet the volume needs of various users.
A tube size 20 148 mm with cap
Prepared Bottled Media
C tube size 20 112 mm with cap
D tube size 16.5 128 mm with cap BBL and Difco prepared bottled media are available in a variety
K tube size 16 102 mm with cap of sizes and closures. Color-coded caps are used for easy prod-
uct identification and transparent labels allow clear view of
Tubes are borosilicate glass with black screw caps securely media and cultures. In addition, for sterility testing, we now
fitted to prevent loss of moisture. A special resilient rubber offer Sterile Pack bottles in two formulations: Tryptic Soy Broth
liner is affixed inside each cap with a unique adhesive that and Fluid Thioglycollate Medium. Sterile Pack Bottles, which
resists displacement even during autoclaving. Larger-sized tubes are validated sterile at a Sterility Assurance Level (SAL) of 10-6,
permit easy inoculation or streaking of media. Prepared slanted are terminally sterilized inside of autoclavable double-bags,
media are supplied in tubes with optimal dimensions that resulting in a bottle exterior that is free from environmental
provide a large surface for inoculation. This is especially contaminants and particulate matter. Bottled media products
desirable in examining specimens for the presence of Myco- conform to The United States Pharmacopeia and European
bacterium tuberculosis. Pharmacopeia requirements, as applicable.
The A tubes containing solid media (e.g., Trypticase Soy BBL and Difco prepared bottled media are supplied in pack-
Agar), except slants, contain a quantity sufficient to pour one ages of 10 in a variety of fill volumes.
plate; this is approximately 20 mL. A tube slants for culti- Mycoflask Bottles
vation on the agar surface contain approximately 9 mL of Mycoflask media are disposable, ready-to-use BBL culture
medium slanted at an angle to yield a slope of approximately media prepared in the special Mycoflask bottle. A limited
10 cm in length. A tubes containing liquid culture medium variety of media for isolation and cultivation of tubercle

27
Section II
Prepared Tubed, Bottled Media, cont.

bacilli and fungi is offered. The Mycoflask bottles special bench provided the potential for producing splashes or
features include: aerosols is low.
A deep offset well to contain a deep culture bed Biosafety Level 3 practices are applicable to laboratories
working with agents with a potential for respiratory trans-
Surface area of 5.4 cm2 for cultivation
mission and which may cause serious and potential
Horizontal incubation to flood agar surface with inoculum
lethal infection. All laboratory manipulations should be
Flat-sided bottle which keeps bottle stable, reduces performed in a biological safety cabinet or other enclosed
chances of breakage equipment to protect personnel and the environment from
Tightly fitted screw caps which prevent the loss of mois- exposure to potentially infectious aerosols.
ture even when incubation is extended to 8 weeks or more Biosafety Level 4 practices are applicable for work with
Mycoflask media are packaged in specially designed trays for highly dangerous agents which may be transmitted via
ease in handling and incubation; these Unit Boxes contain 10 the aerosol route, for which there is no available vaccine
bottles. The Shelf-Pack contains 10 Unit Boxes (10 10 or therapy and for which specialized equipment and
bottles). facilities are required.
Consult the reference for specific recommendations on the
II. Formulae practices, equipment and facilities of the four biosafety levels.1
Formulae for BBL and Difco brands of prepared tubed, bottled
and Mycoflask media are included in product inserts or the IV. Storage Instructions
BBL Quality Control and Product Information Manual for On receipt, media should be stored according to label instruc-
Plated and Tubed Media or on product carton labels (bottled tions. Freezing and overheating must be avoided. Allow the
media). medium to warm to room temperature before inoculation.

III. Warnings and Precautions V. Expiration Date

These media are For in vitro Diagnostic Use or For Labora- The expiration date applies to intact tubes and bottles stored
tory Use as labeled. as directed. Do not open until ready to use. Tubed and bottled
Directions for use should be read and followed carefully. media stored as labeled until just prior to use may be inocu-
lated up to the expiration date and incubated for recommended
Care should be exercised in opening tubes and bottles with
tight caps to avoid injury due to breakage of glass. incubation times, including up to 6 weeks for mycology
media and up to 8 weeks for mycobacteriology media.
Observe aseptic techniques and established precautions against
microbiological hazards throughout all procedures, since it VI. Product Deterioration
must be assumed that all specimens/samples collected might Do not use tubes or bottles if they show evidence of microbial
contain infectious microorganisms. The use of a biohazard contamination, discoloration, drying, cracking or other signs
cabinet is recommended when working with pure cultures and of deterioration.
specimens/samples suspected to contain fungi or mycobacteria.
After use, prepared tubes, bottles or Mycoflask bottles, speci- VII. Specimen/Sample Collection and
men/sample containers and other contaminated materials must Transport
be sterilized before discarding. The success of a microbiological isolation procedure does not
To minimize the risk in microbiology laboratories of working depend solely on the quality of the culture media utilized.
with infectious microorganisms and specimens and samples Proper specimen/sample collection and transport are crucial
suspected to contain them, the United States Department of steps in the isolation process. A variety of transport systems
Health and Human Services has published guidelines for han- and holding media have been devised to prolong the survival
dling these agents and materials.1 The guidelines describe four of microorganisms when a significant delay is expected
biosafety levels, some of which are mentioned in this manual between collection and definitive culturing.
in association with specific microorganisms: Clinical Specimens
Biosafety Level 1 is applicable when work is done with For clinical specimens, BBL CultureSwab and Port-A-Cul
defined and characterized strains of viable organisms not collection and transport products are available. For transport
known to consistently cause disease in healthy adult and growth of the pathogenic Neisseria, Transgrow, Gono-Pak
humans. and JEMBEC* systems containing Modified Thayer-Martin
Biosafety Level 2 practices are applicable to laboratories (MTM II), Martin-Lewis or GC-Lect Agars are recommended.
in which work is done with the broad spectrum of indig- Specimens should be obtained before antimicrobial therapy
enous moderate-risk agents that are associated with has been administered. Provision must be made for prompt
human disease; activities can be performed on the open delivery to the laboratory.

28
 Prepared Tubed, Bottled Media, cont.

The clinical laboratory must be furnished with sufficient XI. User Quality Control
patient information to enable the microbiologist to select the Quality control procedures for BBL brand prepared tubed
most suitable media and appropriate techniques. For detailed and Mycoflask media are included in product inserts or the
information, appropriate references should be consulted. BBL Quality Control and Product Information Manual for
* JEMBEC is a trademark of Miles Scientific.
Plated and Tubed Media.
Industrial Samples
If a culture medium being subjected to quality-control testing
Sterile containers should be used to collect samples. For envi- is a formulation to which the National Committee for Clinical
ronmental monitoring, samples can be collected using
Laboratory Standards (NCCLS) standard, Quality Assurance
BD Sterile Pack Swabs.
for Commercially Prepared Microbiological Culture Media,2
Samples must represent the mass of the material being exam- applies, American Type Culture Collection (ATCC) control
ined. Samples may require special handling, including refrig- strains specified by the document are utilized; additional ATCC
eration, to prevent the direct contamination of the sample by and other organism strains may be also employed. If no standard
microorganisms and the subsequent growth of such contami- exists for the particular medium, the organisms used represent
nants during sampling, transportation and storage before strains from our stock culture collection. Except for NCCLS-
examination. For detailed information, appropriate references specified strains, cultures employed in testing procedures may
should be consulted. be added or changed from time to time as strains are found
that provide a greater challenge. Clinical isolates are included
VIII. Materials Provided periodically for various formulations so as to check perfor-
Prepared tubed or bottled medium. mance with wild strains.

IX. Materials Required But Not Provided An uninoculated tube of medium always should be incubated
Ancillary culture media, reagents and laboratory equipment with the inoculated tubes for purposes of comparison (e.g.,
as required. color changes, turbidity) following the incubation period. This
procedure should be adopted both for quality control and test
X. Procedures specimen evaluations.
In some tubes, the agar may become distorted during ship- A single electrode of sufficiently small size to fit into the tubes
ment (e.g., semisolid formulations used for motility studies). should be used to determine the pH potentiometrically of tubed
Additionally, media (including all thioglycollate-containing and Mycoflask media. The tip of the electrode should be placed
media) may become oxidized within the tube or bottle during below the surface of broth media, and positioned in the cen-
shipment. These can be restored to their proper condition by tral portion of the agar mass in semisolid or solid media. Warm
bringing to 100C in a boiling water bath and resolidifying in all media to room temperature (25C) prior to measuring pH.
the appropriate position; screw caps should be slightly loos-
ened prior to boiling. The boiling also serves to reduce media XII. Limitations of the Procedure
intended for the cultivation of anaerobic organisms; caps Some diagnostic tests may be performed with the primary
should be tightened during cooling to room temperature. Con- culture. However, a pure culture is recommended for biochemi-
sult product label for specific instructions. cal tests and other identification procedures. Consult appro-
Tubed media in deeps (pour tubes) must be boiled, cooled to priate references for further information.
45-50C, poured into sterile Petri dishes and allowed to harden Since the nutritional requirements of organisms vary, a single
for a minimum of 30 minutes prior to use. medium is rarely adequate for detecting all organisms of
NOTE: Use of a microwave oven to melt tubed and bottled potential significance in a clinical specimen or industrial
media is not recommended. sample. The agents in selective media may inhibit some strains
of the desired species or permit growth of a species they were
Cultures requiring prolonged incubation, for example, myco-
designed to inhibit, especially if the species are present in large
bacteria and fungi, should be incubated with caps tightly closed
numbers in the specimen/sample. Cultures of specimens/
to prevent dehydration and consequent inhibition of growth.
samples grown on selective media should, therefore, be com-
The United States Pharmacopeia requires that Fluid pared with specimens/samples cultured on nonselective media
Thioglycollate Medium and Soybean-Casein Digest Medium to obtain additional information and help ensure recovery of
(Tryptic Soy Broth and Trypticase Soy Broth) be incubated potential pathogens and other significant organisms.
under aerobic conditions. Aerobic conditions can be main-
tained during incubation by insertion of a venting needle that Culture media sometime contain dead organisms derived from
is left in place during incubation or by incubating the tubes or medium constituents, which may be visible in smears of
bottles with the caps slightly loosened. culture media. Other sources of dead organisms visible upon

29
Section II
Prepared Tubed, Bottled Media, cont.

Gram staining include staining reagents, immersion oil, glass XIII. References
slides and the specimens used for inoculation. If there is 1. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
uncertainty about the validity of the Gram stain, the culture No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
2. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 1996. Approved standard: M22-A2, Quality
should be reincubated for another hour or two and the test assurance for commercially prepared microbiological culture media, 2nd ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
repeated before a report is given.

30
Section III
A Culture Media and Ingredients

32
 A-1 Medium
A
A-1 Medium
Intended Use NOTE: For 10 mL water samples, prepare double-strength
A-1 Medium is used for detecting fecal coliforms in water. medium to ensure ingredient concentrations are not reduced
below those of the standard medium.4
Summary and Explanation
Since the early 1900s enumeration of coliform organisms, User Quality Control
specifically Escherichia coli, has been used to determine water
purity. Elevated-temperature, most-probable-number (MPN) Identity Specifications
Difco A-1 Medium
methods are routinely used for the analysis of water and food
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, lumpy.
samples for the presence of fecal coliforms. One limiting factor
Solution: 3.15% solution, soluble in purified
in using E. coli is the length of time required for complete iden- water upon boiling. Solution is light
tification.1 A-1 Medium was formulated to hasten the recovery amber, opalescent immediately after
of E. coli and reduce the incidence of false positive cultures. autoclaving. Upon cooling clear, may
have a flocculent precipitate.
In 1972 Andrews and Presnell developed A-1 Medium. A-1 Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear, may have a floccu-
Medium recovers E. coli from estuarine water in 24 hours lent precipitate.
instead of 72 hours, and in greater numbers without the Reaction of 3.15%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.1
preenrichment step.2 Using a 3-hour preincubation step for
the enumeration of coliforms in chlorinated wastewater gave Cultural Response
results that were statistically comparable to those obtained in Difco A-1 Medium
the two-step MPN technique.3 Prepare the medium per label directions. Prepare tubes by placing
fermentation vials and 10 mL amounts of medium into tubes. Inocu-
A-1 Medium can be used in a single-step procedure for the late and incubate at 35 2C for 3 hours. Transfer tubes to a 44.5C
detection of fecal coliforms in source water, seawater, treated water bath for 21 2 hours.
wastewater and foods. Prior enrichment in a presumptive INOCULUM
medium is not required.4 A-1 Medium conforms to standard ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY GAS

methods for the isolation of fecal coliforms in water and foods.4,5 Bacillus subtilis 6633 102 None
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 102 Poor to good*
Principles of the Procedure Enterococcus faecalis 19433 102 None to poor
Escherichia coli 25922 102 Good +
Peptone provides the nitrogen, vitamins, minerals and amino Escherichia coli 13762 102 Good +
acids in A-1 Medium. Lactose is the carbon source and, in *May or may not produce gas.
combination with salicin, provides energy for organism growth.
Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance of the medium.
Triton* X-100 is a surfactant.
*Triton is a trademark of Rohm and Haas Company.

Formula
Difco A-1 Medium
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Tryptone ................................................................... 20.0 g
Lactose ....................................................................... 5.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Salicin ........................................................................ 0.5 g
Triton X-100 ............................................................... 1.0 mL
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Directions for Preparation from

Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 31.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- Uninoculated Escherichia coli
pletely dissolve the powder. Tube ATCC 25922
with fermentation vial
3. Dispense into tubes containing inverted fermentation vials.
4. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

33
Section III
A A-1 Medium, cont.

Procedure Limitations of the Procedure

1. Inoculate tubes of A-1 Medium as directed in standard 1. Fecal coliform counts are usually greater than E. coli
methods.4,5 counts.5
2. Incubate at 35 0.5C for 3 hours. 2. Interpretation of test procedure using A-1 Medium requires
3. Transfer tubes to a water bath at 44.5 0.2C and incubate understanding of the microflora of the specimen.5
for an additional 21 2 hours.
4. Maintain water level in bath above level of liquid in inocu- References
1. Andrews, Diggs and Wilson. 1975. Appl. Microbiol. 29:130.
lated tubes. 2. Andrews and Presnell. 1972. Appl. Microbiol. 23:521.
3. Standridge and Delfino. 1981. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 42:918.
4. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
Expected Results4,5 wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
5. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
Gas production in the inverted vial, or dissolved gas that forms 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
fine bubbles when slightly agitated, is a positive reaction indi-
cating the presence of fecal coliforms. Calculate fecal coliform Availability
densities using MPN tables from standard methods. Difco A-1 Medium
COMPF EPA SMWW
Cat. No. 218231 Dehydrated 500 g

A7 Agar, Modified
Intended Use The medium is particularly useful for detection and identifica-
A7 Agar, Modified is used for the cultivation, identification tion of U. urealyticum in primary cultures of urine and urethral
and differentiation of Ureaplasma urealyticum and other exudates. The medium, by incorporation of a direct test for
members of the genus Ureaplasma from other members of urease in colonies of Ureaplasma, provides for a simple and
the Mycoplasmatales. rapid differentiation of the genus from other Mycoplasmatales.

Summary and Explanation Principles of the Procedure

As knowledge and interest increased regarding the group of Mycoplasmas require a highly nutritious growth medium, which
organisms now known as Mycoplasma but originally referred is provided by the peptones, yeast extract, growth factors, horse
to as PPLOs (pleuropneumonia-like organisms), a number of serum, dextrose, salts and constituents of BBL IsoVitaleX
different culture media were developed to support the growth Enrichment in A7 Agar, Modified. The medium contains added
of these unique organisms. One of these, designated A7 Agar, urea and a sensitive indicator of ammonia (manganese sulfate)
was formulated by Shepard and Lunceford.1,2 The performance to provide differentiation by incorporation of the biochemical
of the medium has been improved by the addition of growth principle of the direct spot test for urease in colonies of
factors. Ureaplasma.1 The presence of urease enzyme hydrolyzes urea
with the production of ammonia and resultant alkalinity, which
Uninoculated
Plate precipitates the metallic oxide product (MnO2) within and on
the surface of Ureaplasma colonies.2 Penicillin G is included in
the formulation to provide for inhibition of gram-positive
endogenous bacteria.3,4

Procedure
Using an extract from swabs, or the specimen itself, streak the
surface of the medium. Incubate plates in a moist anaerobic
atmosphere supplemented with CO2 (BBL GasPak EZ
container or equivalent system) at 35-37 C. Incubate plates
for 48 hours or longer. Examine plates for colonies of
U. urealyticum with the culture plate inverted on the micro-
scope stage, under low power (100).2

Expected Results
Isolated colonies should give results consistent with those of
the quality control stains. Colonies of U. urealyticum are small
(usually 16-18 mm), dark, golden brown or deep brown with
a light background color of the medium. Species of Ureaplasma
are the only members of the Mycoplasmatales known to
34
 AC Broth
A
produce urease, upon which the specific color reaction Availability
depends.1,2 BBL A7 Agar, Modified
BS10 MCM7
References Cat. No. 215048 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
1. Shepard and Lunceford. 1976. J. Clin. Microbiol. 3:613. 292211 Prepared Plates (60 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 10*
2. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
*Store at 2-8C.
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
3. Shepard. 1983. In Razin and Tulley (ed.), Methods in mycoplasmology, vol. 1. Academic Press, Inc.,
New York, N.Y.
4. Waites and Taylor-Robinson. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

AC Broth
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
AC Broth is used for cultivating a wide variety of microorgan- Peptone, beef extract and malt extract provide the carbon and
isms and for the sterility testing of turbid or viscous solutions nitrogen sources required for good growth of a wide variety of
and other materials not containing mercurial preservatives. organisms. Vitamins and cofactors required for growth as well
as additional sources of nitrogen and carbon are provided by
Summary and Explanation yeast extract. Dextrose is a carbon energy source. Ascorbic
AC Broth possesses growth-promoting properties for a wide acid is added to clarify the solution.
variety of microorganisms. Christensen1 and Malin and Finn2
reported that AC Medium does not exhibit the toxicity shown Formula
by media containing sodium thioglycollate. Several early Difco AC Broth
studies reported on the wide variety of organisms able to grow Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 20.0 g
on AC Medium.3-5 AC Broth is suitable for use in the detection
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
of obligately aerobic contaminants in biologicals and other Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
products. AC Broth is also useful in the isolation and cultiva- Malt Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
tion of many common pathogenic and saprophytic aerobes.6 Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Ascorbic Acid ............................................................. 0.2 g
The medium can be used to test the sterility of biologicals and *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
solutions that do not contain mercurial preservatives. Fluid
Thioglycollate Medium should be employed for the sterility Directions for Preparation from
testing of solutions containing mercurial preservatives. Dehydrated Product
1. Dissolve 34 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
User Quality Control 2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
3. Store prepared medium at 15-30C.
Identity Specifications 4. After prolonged storage, reheat in flowing steam or a boil-
Difco AC Broth ing water bath for a few minutes to drive off dissolved gases.
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Cool without agitation.
Solution: 3.4% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is medium to dark
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
amber, clear to very slightly opalescent. stable, typical control cultures.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear to very
slightly opalescent. Procedure
Reaction of 3.4% See appropriate references for specific procedures.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Cultural Response Expected Results

Difco AC Broth
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-48 hours. Limitation of the Procedure
INOCULUM When reheating prepared media to drive off dissolved gases,
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY
do not overheat because this may result in decreased growth.
Corynebacterium
diphtheriae biotype mitis 8024 102-103 Good
Streptococcus mitis 9895 102-103 Good
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 102-103 Good
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good

35
Section III
A AC Broth, cont.

References Availability
1. Christensen. 1944. Paper read at New York Meeting. American Public Health Association.
2. Malin and Finn. 1951. J. Bacteriol. 62:349.
Difco AC Broth
3. Reed and Orr. 1943. J. Bacteriol. 45:309. Cat. No. 231710 Dehydrated 500 g
4. Schneiter, Dunn and Caminita. 1945. Public Health Rep. 60:789.
5. Kolb and Schneiter. 1950. J. Bacteriol. 59:401.
6. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.

AK Agar #2 (Sporulating Agar)

Intended Use #2. Incubate the bottles for 5 days at 35 2C and wash
AK Agar #2 (Sporulating Agar) is a culture medium for the off the resulting growth into 50 mL of sterile physiological
preparation of spore suspensions for use in procedures for the saline. Centrifuge the suspension and decant and discard
detection of antibiotic residues in milk and dairy products. the supernatant fluid. Resuspend the sediment in sterile
saline and heat shock the suspension at 70C for 30
Summary and Explanation minutes. The resultant spore suspension can be stored for
AK Agar #2 was devised by Arret and Kirshbaum for specific several months. Consult the reference for the test procedure
use in the production of spores of Bacillus subtilis ATCC 6633 utilizing this B. subtilis spore suspension.1
for use in the Penicillin Milk Test procedure. 1 This 2. For preparation of spore suspension for use in the APHA
medium was formerly specified in the spore preparation phase procedure for detection of sulfa drugs and antibiotics in
of the American Public Health Association disc assay procedure milk.2
for the detection of sulfa drugs and antibiotics in milk.2 Transfer cells of Bacillus megaterium ATCC 9855 by streak-
ing the entire surface of sterile AK Agar #2 contained in a
Principles of the Procedure prescription (180 mL capacity) or Roux bottle. Incubate
The peptones and beef extract are sources of nitrogen, sulfur, inoculated bottles at 35 2C for 48 hours. After incuba-
amino acids and essential trace ingredients. Yeast extract is a tion, wash the spores and vegetative cells from the agar
rich source of B vitamins. Dextrose is an energy source for surface with buffered MS (microbiologically suitable)
bacterial replication. Manganous sulfate plays an important water. Sediment the spores and cells by centrifugation at
role in the sporulation process. 5,000 g for 15 minutes at 3C. Store the spore suspen-
sion in buffered MS water under refrigeration. Consult the
Formula reference for the test procedure utilizing this B. megaterium
BBL AK Agar #2 spore suspension.2
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ....................................... 6.0 g
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 4.0 g User Quality Control
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Beef Extract ................................................................ 1.5 g Identity Specifications
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g BBL AK Agar #2
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
Manganous Sulfate .................................................... 0.3 g ous material.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Solution: 3.08% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
Directions for Preparation from to medium, yellow to tan, clear to
Dehydrated Product moderately hazy.
1. Suspend 30.8 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear
to moderately hazy.
thoroughly. Reaction of 3.08%
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- Solution at 25C: pH 6.6 0.2
pletely dissolve the powder.
3. Dispense and autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cultural Response
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using BBL AK Agar #2
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate plates and incubate
stable, typical control cultures. at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. Reincubate plates at 35 2C and prepare
slides after 2 days (and again after 5 days for B. subtilis only).
Procedure
INOCULUM SPORE
1. For preparation of spore suspensions for use in the FDA ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY PRODUCTION
procedure for the Penicillin Milk Test.1 Bacillus megaterium 9855 102-103 Good +
Transfer cultures of Bacillus subtilis ATCC 6633 monthly Bacillus subtilis 6633 102-103 Good +
to fresh Seed Agar slants. Wash the growth from a fresh
slant culture with sterile physiological saline onto the
surface of a Roux bottle containing 300 mL of AK Agar
36
 APT Agar
A
Expected Results Availability
Suspensions containing large numbers of bacterial spores are BBL AK Agar #2 (Sporulating Agar)
obtained with the use of AK Agar #2. Cat. No. 210912 Dehydrated 500 g

References
1. Arret and Kirshbaum. 1959. J. Milk Food Technol. 22:329.
2. Richardson (ed.). 1985. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 15th ed.
American Public Health Association. Washington, D.C.

APT Agar APT Broth

Intended Use meat products, while Deibel, Evans and Niven2 investigated
APT Agar is used for cultivating heterofermentative lactobacilli thiamine requiring bacteria, specifically Lactobacillus
and other organisms requiring high thiamine content. It is also viridescens. Their formulations led to the development of APT
used for maintaining stock cultures of Weissella (Lactobacillus) Agar and APT Broth.
viridescens ATCC 12706 used in the assay of thiamine. Historically, the lactic acid bacteria, a group of acid-producing
APT Broth is used for culturing Weissella viridescens ATCC bacteria, included the genera Streptococcus, Leuconostoc,
12706 used in the assay of thiamine. It is also used for culti- Pediococcus and Lactobacillus; currently, taxonomists include
vating heterofermentative lactobacilli and other organisms a number of additional genera (e.g., Weissella).3 These organ-
requiring high thiamine content. isms are widespread in nature and are associated with bacterial
spoilage of foods such as dairy, meat and vegetable products.3
Summary and Explanation One use of APT Agar and APT Broth is for cultivating these
Evans and Niven1 investigated cultivating the heterofermentative heterofermentative lactic acid bacteria from food products.3
lactobacilli that cause the faded or greenish discoloration of cured APT Agar and APT Broth are also used in the microbiological
assay of thiamine. In the assay, APT Agar is the maintenance
User Quality Control medium that preserves the viability and sensitivity of Weissella
Identity Specifications viridescens ATCC 12706. APT Broth is used for growing
Difco APT Agar Weissella viridescens ATCC 12706 and preparing the
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. inoculum.
Solution: 6.12%, soluble in purified water upon
boiling. Solution is medium amber, Principles of the Procedure
clear to slightly opalescent, may have APT Agar and APT Broth contain peptone as a source of
a slight precipitate.
carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Yeast extract supplies
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, clear to slightly opal-
escent, may have a slight precipitate. B-complex vitamins which stimulate bacterial growth. Dextrose
Reaction of 6.12% is the carbohydrate. The manganese chloride, magnesium
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2 sulfate and ferrous sulfate provide ions used in replication by
Difco APT Broth lactobacilli. Polysorbate 80 is a source of fatty acids required
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous. by lactobacilli. Agar is the solidifying agent in APT Agar.
Solution: 4.62%, soluble in purified water with
slight heating. Solution is opalescent
when hot. After cooling, is light to
Formulae
medium amber, clear to very slightly Difco APT Agar
opalescent, may have a slight pre- Approximate Formula* Per Liter
cipitate. Yeast Extract .............................................................. 7.5 g
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear to very Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 12.5 g
slightly opalescent without significant Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
precipitate. Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 5.0 g
Reaction of 4.62% Thiamine Hydrochloride ............................................. 1.0 mg
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2 Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 5.0 g
Cultural Response Manganese Chloride .................................................. 0.14 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.8 g
Difco APT Agar or APT Broth Ferrous Sulfate ........................................................... 0.04 g
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 0.2 g
35 2C for 24-48 hours. Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY Difco APT Broth
Lactobacillus fermentum 9338 2
10 -10 3
Good Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Weissella viridescens 12706 102-103 Good

37
Section III
A APT Agar, cont.

Directions for Preparation from triplicate at monthly intervals. One of the transfers is saved
Dehydrated Product for the preparation of stock cultures. The others are used to
Difco APT Agar prepare inoculum in APT Broth for assay as needed. Follow-
1. Suspend 61.2 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix ing incubation at 35-37C for 24-48 hours, store stock cul-
thoroughly. tures at 2-8C.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder. Expected Results
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Avoid overheating. Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
References
1. Evans and Niven. 1951. J. Bacteriol. 62:599.
2. Deibel, Evans and Niven. 1957. J. Bacteriol. 74:818.
Difco APT Broth 3. Hall, Ledenbach and Flowers. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the
microbiological examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington,
1. Suspend 46.2 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix D.C.
thoroughly.
2. Warm slightly to completely dissolve the powder. Availability
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Avoid overheating. Difco APT Agar
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using COMPF USDA
Cat. No. 265430 Dehydrated 500 g
stable, typical control cultures.
Difco APT Broth
Procedure Cat. No. 265510 Dehydrated 500 g
For maintaining stock cultures of Weissella viridescens ATCC
12706 prepare a stab inoculation. Prepare stock cultures in

Acetamide Agar
Intended Use Expected Results
Acetamide Agar is used in the differentiation of nonfermentative Deamination of the acetamide is indicated by a pronounced
gram-negative bacteria, particularly Pseudomonas aeruginosa. purplish-red color of the medium.
Complete identification requires determination of the Gram
Summary and Explanation
reaction, cellular morphology, biochemical reactions, etc.
Assimilation studies by Gilardi and others using basal mineral
Appropriate references may be consulted for further infor-
media showed that acetamide was utilized by a wide variety of
mation.10, 11
nonfermenting organisms.1,2 However, few organisms are
reported to deaminate acetamide.3,4 A variety of media Limitations of the Procedure
formulations have been developed to determine the ability of
Some strains deaminate acetamide slowly and may require as
various nonfermenting gram-negative organisms to deaminate
long as 7 days to yield a positive test result.
acetamide for purposes of identification.5-8 The formulation
of this medium is the one recommended in Standard Methods Only about 37% of apyocyanogenic strains of P. aeruginosa
for the Examination of Water and Wastewater.9 will produce a positive reaction. Therefore, this test should
not be relied upon as a sole criterion for identification.11
Principles of the Procedure
The ability to deaminate acetamide (acylamidase activity) has References
1. Gilardi. 1974. Antonie van Leewenhoek. J. Microbiol. Serol. 39:229.
been found to be most actively accomplished by P. aeruginosa, 2. Stainier, Palleroni and Doudoroff. 1966. J. Gen. Microbiol. 43:159.
3. Pickett and Pedersen. 1970. Can. J. Microbiol. 16:351.
Comamonas acidovorans, Achromobacter xylosoxidans subsp. 4. Pickett and Pedersen. 1970. Can. J. Microbiol. 16:401.
5. Hedberg. 1969. Appl. Microbiol. 17:481.
xylosoxidans (Alcaligenes xylosoxidans) and Alcaligenes 6. Smith and Dayton. 1972. Appl. Microbiol. 24:143.
faecalis (odorans).8 Deamination of acetamide produces am- 7. Buhlmann, Vischer and Bruhin. 1961. J. Bacteriol. 82:787.
8. Oberhofer and Rowen. 1974. Appl. Microbiol. 28:720.
monia which increases the pH of the medium causing a corre- 9. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.) 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
sponding color change from yellow-orange to purplish-red. 10. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriology,
9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
11. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
Procedure American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Inoculate the Acetamide Agar slant with a loopful of culture

emulsified in BBL Trypticase Soy Broth. Incubate inocu- Availability
BBL Acetamide Agar
lated slant at 35 2C and observe daily for 4 days and again
SMWW
at 7 days before discarding as negative. Cat. No. 221828 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

38
 Acetate Differential Agar
A
Acetate Differential Agar
Intended Use Procedure
Acetate Differential Agar is used for the differentiation of Inoculate the agar slant surfaces with pure cultures of unknown
Shigella species from Escherichia coli. organisms. Incubate all tubes for up to 7 days at 35 2C in
an aerobic atmosphere.
Summary and Explanation
Organic acids have been used widely as an aid to the differen- Expected Results
tiation of Enterobacteriaceae, usually in formulae that Bacteria capable of utilizing acetate as the sole carbon source
contained organic nitrogen sources. Most bacteria, however, will grow on the medium and produce an alkaline reaction
can use citrate and acetate in the presence of organic nitrogen. (blue color). For a listing of organisms capable of utilizing
acetate, consult appropriate texts.4-6
The citrate media of Koser1 and Simmons2 were free of organic
nitrogen and, therefore, were a true measure of citrate utiliza-
Limitations of the Procedure
tion. In a further extension of this approach, Trabulsi and Ewing
Some strains of E. coli utilize acetate slowly or not at all and
developed Acetate Differential Agar, a chemically defined medium
may give a false-negative reaction. Sodium acetate is utilized
utilizing sodium acetate that enables the differentiation of
as a sole source of carbon by some biotypes of S. flexneri 4a.4
Shigella spp. from E. coli, particularly anaerogenic, nonmotile
biotypes.3,4 Their basal medium was Simmons Citrate Agar in
which sodium acetate was substituted for sodium citrate. User Quality Control
Identity Specifications
Principles of the Procedure Difco Acetate Differential Agar
Acetate Differential Agar consists of a mixture of salts and Dehydrated Appearance: Medium yellowish-tan to light green,
sodium acetate, as a sole source of carbon, in a chemically free-flowing, homogeneous.
defined medium devoid of organic nitrogen. Solution: 2.92% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is emerald
Typical cultures of Shigella are unable to utilize acetate and green, slightly opalescent.
fail to grow; therefore, the medium remains unchanged. Most Prepared Appearance: Emerald green to green, slightly opal-
cultures of E. coli and closely related organisms grow well escent.
Reaction of 2.92%
within 24-48 hours, but some strains grow more slowly and a
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.1
few cannot use the acetate as a source of carbon. The blue
color of the bromthymol blue is due to the production of Cultural Response
alkaline products from the utilization of the sodium acetate. Difco Acetate Differential Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
Formula and incubate at 35 2C for 2-7 days. Acetate utilization is indicated
by a color change of the slant from green to blue.
Difco Acetate Differential Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY ACETATE UTILIZATION
Sodium Acetate ......................................................... 2.0 g Escherichia coli 25922 Good Positive (blue)
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.1 g Shigella sonnei 25931 Poor to good Negative (green)
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Monoammonium Phosphate ...................................... 1.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g
Bromthymol Blue ....................................................... 0.08 g
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Directions for Preparation from

Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 29.2 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
pletely dissolve the powder.
3. Dispense into tubes to allow a 10 mm butt and a 30 mm slant.
4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
Uninoculated Escherichia coli
Tube ATCC 25922

39
Section III
A Acetate Differential Agar, cont.

References Availability
1. Koser. 1923. J. Bacteriol. 8:493.
2. Simmons. 1926. J. Infect. Dis. 39:209.
Difco Acetate Differential Agar
3. Trabulsi and Ewing. 1962. Public Health Lab. 20:137. BAM COMPF SMD
4. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science
Publishing Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
Cat. No. 274210 Dehydrated 500 g
5. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriology,
9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md. BBL Acetate Differential Agar
6. Farmer. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology, BAM COMPF SMD
7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Cat. No. 221375 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10

Acidicase Peptone
(See Casamino Acids)

Actinomyces Broth
Intended Use Formula
Actinomyces Broth is used as a liquid medium or, with the BBL Actinomyces Broth
addition of 7 or 20 g/L of agar, as a semisolid or solid medium, Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Heart Muscle, Infusion from (solids) ........................... 2.0 g
respectively, for the maintenance or cultivation of Actinomyces Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 17.0 g
species. Yeast Extract ............................................................ 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Summary and Explanation Dipotassium Phosphate ............................................ 13.0 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 2.0 g
Actinomyces Broth is a basic medium modified from the Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Actinomyces Maintenance Medium of Pine and Watson.1 It is Ammonium Sulfate .................................................... 1.0 g
recommended for use in the growth and maintenance of L-Cysteine HCl ........................................................... 1.0 g
Soluble Starch ............................................................ 1.0 g
members of the genus Actinomyces.2 Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.2 g
Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.01 g
Principles of the Procedure *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Actinomyces Broth contains meat infusion, peptone, yeast

Directions for Preparation from
extract, soluble starch, L-cysteine and dextrose, which
provide carbon, nitrogen, sulfur, vitamins and other growth Dehydrated Product
factors required for the metabolism of Actinomyces spp. The 1. Dissolve 57 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Add
salts provide essential minerals and electrolytes. agar, 7 or 20 g/L, if a semisolid or solid medium is desired.
2. If agar is added, heat with frequent agitation just until
solution occurs.
User Quality Control
3. Dispense and autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes.
Identity Specifications 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
BBL Actinomyces Broth stable, typical control cultures.
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
ous material. Procedure
Solution: 5.7% solution, soluble in purified Inoculate Actinomyces cultures into tubes containing broth,
water. Solution is light to medium,
yellow to tan, trace hazy to moder- semisolid or solid media. The semisolid medium should be stab-
ately hazy. inoculated and the slanted medium should be inoculated over
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, trace its entire surface.
hazy to moderately hazy.
Reaction of 5.7% Incubate cultures at 35 2C in an anaerobic atmosphere
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2 (BBL GasPak EZ anaerobic system, or alternative system
for the cultivation of anaerobic microorganisms).
Cultural Response
BBL Actinomyces Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate
Expected Results
anaerobically at 35 2C for 7 days. After growth is obtained, tubes containing broth may be frozen
for long-term storage. Cultures grown in the semisolid medium
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RESULT can be refrigerated after growth has been obtained. Agar slant
Actinomyces bovis 13683 <103 Growth cultures are for use in a relatively short period of time.
Actinomyces israelii 10049 <103 Growth

40
 Actinomycete Isolation Agar
A
References Availability
1. Pine and Watson. 1959. J. Lab. Clin. Med. 54:107.
2. Ajello, Georg, Kaplan and Kaufman. 1963. CDC laboratory manual for medical mycology. PHS BBL Actinomyces Broth
Publication No. 994. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. Cat. No. 210920 Dehydrated 500 g

Actinomycete Isolation Agar

Glycerol
Intended Use source of organic nitrogen. Sodium propionate is a substrate
Actinomycete Isolation Agar is used with added glycerol for used in anaerobic fermentation. Dipotassium phosphate
isolating and cultivating actinomycetes from soil and water. provides buffering capability to maintain pH balance. Magne-
sium sulfate and ferrous sulfate provide sources of sulfates and
Glycerol is used in preparing microbiological culture media.
metallic ions. Agar is the solidifying agent. The added glycerol
is a source of carbon.
Summary and Explanation
Although some genera are important to human medicine, most
Formulae
of the actinomycetes are part of the indigenous flora of soil,
Difco Actinomycete Isolation Agar
water and vegetation. Actinomycetes may impart a musty odor Approximate Formula* Per Liter
to water or a muddy flavor to fish.1 Actinomycetes can cause Sodium Caseinate ...................................................... 2.0 g
massive growths which will form a thick foam in the activated Asparagine ................................................................. 0.1 g
Sodium Propionate ..................................................... 4.0 g
sludge process, causing a disruption in wastewater treatment.2,3 Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 0.5 g
Actinomycetes are gram-positive, acid-fast cells, growing as Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.1 g
filaments that may branch and may form irregularly shaped Ferrous Sulfate ........................................................... 1.0 mg
rods and cocci. Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Difco Glycerol
Olsen4 formulated Actinomycete Isolation Agar for isolating and Glycerin
cultivating actinomycetes from soil and water. The formula is *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

supplemented with glycerol, a highly purified fermentable

alcohol used occasionally for differentiating certain bacteria and Directions for Preparation from
in media for isolating and culturing fastidious bacteria. Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 22 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Principles of the Procedure thoroughly.
Actinomycete Isolation Agar contains sodium caseinate which 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
is a source of nitrogen. Asparagine is an amino acid and a completely dissolve the powder.
3. Add 5 g of Glycerol.
User Quality Control 4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Identity Specifications stable, typical control cultures.
Difco Actinomycete Isolation Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Procedure
Solution: 2.2% solution, soluble in purified
Inoculate medium and incubate at 30C for up to 72 hours.
water upon boiling with 0.5% Glycerol.
Solution is light to medium amber, opal- Expected Results
escent to opaque with precipitation. Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, opalescent.
Reaction of 2.2% Solution References
with 0.5% Glycerol at 25C: pH 8.1 0.2 1. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
2. Lechevalier. 1975. Actinomycetes of sewage-treatment plants. Environ. Protection Technol. Ser.,
Cultural Response EPA-600/2-75-031, U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, Ohio.
Difco Actinomycete Isolation Agar 3. Lechevalier and Lechevalier. 1974. Int. J. Syst. Bacteriol. 24:278.
4. Olsen. 1960. Personal communication.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
30 2C for up to 72 hours.
Availability
INOCULUM Difco Actinomycete Isolation Agar
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY
Cat. No. 212168 Dehydrated 500 g
Streptomyces achromogenes 12767 102-103 Good
Streptomyces albus 3004 102-103 Good Difco Glycerol

Streptomyces lavendulae 8664 102-103 Good Cat. No. 228210 Bottle 100 g
228220 Bottle 500 g

41
Section III
A Agars

Agars
Bacto Agar Agar, Grade A Agar, Granulated
Agar, Technical Agar, Noble Agarose Agar, Select
Intended Use used in media for motility studies (0.5% w/v) and for growth

Bacto Agar is a solidifying agent in which extraneous matter, of anaerobes (0.1%) and microaerophiles.3
pigmented portions and salts have been reduced to a minimum. The use of small amounts of agar in media for sterility testing
Bacto Agar is used in preparing microbiological culture media. was recommended by Falk et al.4 and has been incorporated
Agar, Grade A is a high-grade agar, specially processed for into Fluid Thioglycollate Medium for sterility testing by
microbiological purposes. It is routinely used as a solidifying standard procedures.5
agent in microbiological media. Specifications for bacteriological grade agar include good
Agar, Granulated is a solidifying agent used in preparing clarity, controlled gelation temperature, controlled melting
microbiological culture media. temperature, good diffusion characteristics, absence of toxic
bacterial inhibitors and relative absence of metabolically
Agar, Technical is a solidifying agent used in preparing micro-
useful minerals and compounds.
biological culture media. Although Agar, Technical has wider
quality control parameters than other bacteriological agars, Principles of the Procedure
solubility, gelation temperature and solidity are carefully
Bacto Agar is optimized for beneficial calcium and magne-
monitored to permit its use.
sium content. Detrimental ions such as iron and copper are
Agar, Noble is a solidifying agent that is essentially free of reduced. Bacto Agar is recommended for clinical applications,
impurities. It is used in electrophoretic and nutritional proce- auxotrophic studies, bacterial and yeast transformation
dures and in preparing microbiological culture media when studies and bacterial molecular genetics applications.6,7
increased purity is required.
Grade A Agar is a select grade of agar containing essential
Agarose is a complex galactose polysaccharide of near neutral minerals for bacterial growth. When utilized as an ingredient,
charge. It is specially prepared and is intended mainly for use most media formulations demonstrate improved growth and
in gel electrophoresis. test reactions.
Agar, Select is recommended for molecular genetics testing. Granulated Agar is qualified for culturing recombinant strains
of Escherichia coli (HB101) and Saccharomyces cerevisiae.
Summary and Explanation Agar, Granulated may be used for general bacteriological
Agar is a phycocolloid extracted from a group of red-purple purposes where clarity is not a strict requirement.
marine algae (Class Rhodophyceae) including Gelidium,
Technical Agar is suitable for many bacteriological applica-
Pterocladia and Gracilaria. Gelidium is the preferred source
tions. This agar is not highly processed, has broader technical
for agars. Impurities, debris, minerals and pigment are reduced
specifications than other agars and is not recommended for
to specified levels during manufacture.
growth of fastidious organisms.
Agar was first suggested for microbiological purposes in 1881
Noble Agar is extensively washed and bleached. This agar
by Fannie Hesse.1,2 By the early 1900s, agar became the
should be used for applications where extreme clarity and high
gelling agent of choice over gelatin because agar remains firm
purity are required. Noble Agar is suitable for immunodiffu-
at growth temperatures for many pathogens. Agar is also
sion, some electrophoretic applications, and as a substrate for
generally resistant to a breakdown by bacterial enzymes. The
mammalian or plant tissue culture.
use of agar in microbiological media significantly contributed
to the advance of microbiology, paving the way for pure Agarose is the low sulfate, neutral gelling fraction of agar.
culture isolation and study. During the fractionation of agar, the agarose-portion is
separated from the highly charged polysaccharides (high
Agar is a gel at room temperature, remaining firm at tempera-
sulfate, nongelling portion), purified and dried. Because of its
tures as high as 65C.3 Agar melts at approximately 85C, a
method of preparation, Agarose is considerably purer than the
different temperature from that at which it solidifies, 32-40C.
special kinds of agar, with respect to ionic groups, rendering
This property is known as hysteresis. Agar is generally
it more valuable for gel electrophoresis.8 In addition to
resistant to shear forces; however, different agars may have
high chemical purity, Agarose must exhibit certain physical
different gel strengths or degrees of stiffness.
properties; e.g., high gel strength and high gel clarity.8 The
Agar is typically used in a final concentration of 1-2% for suggested concentration for use is 0.5-1.2%.
solidifying culture media. Smaller quantities (0.05-0.5%) are

42
 Agars, cont.
A
User Quality Control
Identity Specifications
BACTO BBL AGAR, DIFCO AGAR, DIFCO AGAR, DIFCO AGAR, BBL BBL AGAR,
AGAR GRADE A GRANULATED TECHNICAL NOBLE AGAROSE SELECT
Dehydrated Very light beige, Light to medium, Very light beige Very light to medium White to White to light tan, Light cream to
Appearance free-flowing, yellow-cream to light tan, beige, free-flowing, off-white, homogeneous, free tan, homo-
homogeneous to cream-tan, free-flowing, homogeneous. free-flowing, of extraneous geneous, free
granules. homogenous, free of homogeneous homogeneous material. of extraneous
extraneous material. granules. fine granules. material.
Solution Concentration 1.5% 1.5% 1.5% 1.5% 1.5% 1.0% 1.5%
Solution Solution is very Solution is Solution is very Solution is very Solution is Solution is Solution is pale
Appearance* light amber, very colorless to tan, light to medium light to medium colorless, clear to colorless. to light yellow
slightly to slightly slightly hazy amber, slightly amber, slightly very slightly to tan, clear to
opalescent. (minute to small opalescent to opalescent to opalescent. moderately hazy
cream particles opalescent. opalescent. (minute to fine
may be present). cream particles
may be present).
pH at 25C N/A 5.5-7.5 N/A N/A N/A 6.1-7.1 5.5-7.5
Loss on Drying (LOD) 16-20% 5-11% 20% 20% 20% 10% 5-10%
Ash5 6.5% 3.0-6.5% 6.5% 6.5% 2% 1.0% 2.0-6.5%
Calcium g/g (ppm) 300-3,000 ppm N/A 300-2,500 ppm 3,000 ppm 1,000 ppm N/A N/A
Magnesium g/g (ppm) 50-1,000 ppm N/A 50-1,000 ppm 1,300 ppm 200 ppm N/A N/A
Melting Point 83-89C 80-90C 83-89C 85C 85C N/A 80-90C
Gelation Point 32-39C 33-38C 32-39C 32-39C 32-39C N/A 33-38C
Agar Gel Electrophoresis N/A N/A N/A N/A Satisfactory Satisfactory N/A
*Soluble in purified water upon boiling.

Cultural Response
Prepare the agar formulation of Nutrient Broth or LB Broth, Miller by adding 1.5% agar.
Inoculate with 102-103 CFU of the indicated test organisms and incubate at 35 2C for
18-24 hours (18-72 hours for LB Broth, Miller). Record recovery.
BACTO DIFCO AGAR, DIFCO AGAR, DIFCO AGAR,*
AGAR GRANULATED TECHNICAL NOBLE
Nutrient Broth with:
Escherichia coli ATCC 25922 Good Good Good
Staphylococcus aureus ATCC 25923 Good Good Good
LB Broth, Miller with:
Escherichia coli ATCC 33694 (HB101) Good
Saccharomyces cerevisiae ATCC 9763 Good
*To evaluate for growth in tissue culture, prepare TC Medium 199 with 10% fetal calf serum and 0.5% Noble Agar. Adjust pH to
7.4-8.0. Inoculate tissue culture flasks with Vero cells and observe for attachment and division.

BBL Agar, Grade A

This product is tested for satisfactory performance as plain Trypticase Soy Agar. Spread plates are
inoculated in duplicate with serial dilutions of Neisseria meningitidis (ATCC 13090), Streptococcus
pneumoniae (ATCC 6305) and Streptococcus pyogenes (ATCC 49117) such that one dilution
contains 30-300 CFU/mL. Plates are incubated at 35 2C for 1 day with 3-5% CO2. A satisfactory
result corresponds to colony counts that are within 1.2 logs of an acceptable control lot. Bacto Agar
BBL Agar, Select
This product is tested as NZC Bottom Agar and NZC Top Agar and tested for satisfactory propaga-
tion of bacteriophage lambda Charon 30 utilizing Escherichia coli ATCC 33526 (K802). To prepare
NZC agars, add, per liter of purified water: Casitone, 10 g; Casamino Acids, 1.0 g; Sodium Chloride,
5.0 g; Magnesium Chloride (anhydrous), 0.94 g; for NZC Bottom Agar, add 9.0 of Select Agar; for
NZC Top Agar, add 6.0 g of Select Agar.

Select Agar is a key ingredient used in molecular genetics work Expected Results
for determining bacteriophage lambda titers. Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.

Procedure
See appropriate references for specific procedures using Bacto
Agar, Grade A Agar, Granulated Agar, Technical Agar, Noble
Agar, Agarose or Select Agar.

43
Section III
A Agars, cont.

Typical Analyses
BACTO BBL AGAR, DIFCO AGAR, DIFCO AGAR, DIFCO AGAR, BBL BBL AGAR,
AGAR GRADE A GRANULATED TECHNICAL NOBLE AGAROSE SELECT
Physical Characteristics
Concentration (%) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.0 1.5
Ash (%) 3.6 3.0-6.5 3.4 4.1 1.3 < 1.0 2.0-6.5
Clarity (NTU)* 4.3 < 10 5.3 26.2 3.7 < 10 N/A
Color (430 nm, adsorbance) N/A < 0.2 N/A N/A N/A < 0.2 N/A
Loss on Drying (%) 17.3 < 10 12.2 18.2 16.0 < 10 N/A
pH 6.5 5.5-7.5 6.6 6.9 5.7 6.0-7.0 5.5-7.5
Gel Strength (g/cm2) 600 600-800 560 613 700 800-1200 N/A
Gelation Point (C) 35 35-39 35 36 35 35-39 33-38
Melting Point (C) 88 80-90 88 88 87 80-90 80-90
Resistivity (ohms) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A > 50,000 N/A
-mr (electrophoretic)** N/A N/A N/A N/A 0.55 < 0.25 N/A
Inorganics (%)
Calcium 0.179 0.23 0.133 0.110 0.015 0.03 N/A
Chloride 0.021 N/A < 0.005 0.172 < 0.050 N/A N/A
Cobalt < 0.001 N/A < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 N/A N/A
Copper < 0.001 N/A < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 N/A N/A
Iron 0.002 < 0.0060 0.003 0.002 < 0.001 < 0.0050 N/A
Lead < 0.001 N/A < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 N/A N/A
Magnesium 0.068 0.10 0.041 0.093 0.002 0.01 N/A
Manganese < 0.001 N/A < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 N/A N/A
Nitrate < 0.005 N/A < 0.005 < 0.005 < 0.050 N/A N/A
Phosphate < 0.005 0.02 0.010 0.015 < 0.050 0.08 N/A
Potassium 0.121 0.03 0.079 0.124 0.022 0.015 N/A
Sodium 0.837 1.8 0.776 0.932 0.335 < 0.1 N/A
Sulfate 1.778 N/A 1.710 0.367 0.663 N/A N/A
Sulfur 0.841 0.7 0.868 0.646 0.333 0.1 N/A
Tin < 0.001 N/A < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 N/A N/A
Zinc < 0.001 N/A < 0.001 < 0.001 < 0.001 N/A N/A
Biological Testing (CFU/g)
Spore Count < 1,000 20 < 1,000 4,300 < 1,000 N/A N/A
Standard Plate Count < 1,000 N/A < 1,000 2,725 < 1,000 N/A N/A
*Nephelometric turbidity units (NTU).
**Unit of relative electroendosmosis.

References Difco Agar, Granulated

1. Hesse. 1894. Mitt. a.d. Kaiserl. Gesh. Berlin 2:182. Cat. No. 214530 Dehydrated 500 g
2. Hitchens and Leikind. 1939. J. Bacteriol. 37:485. 214510 Dehydrated 2 kg
3. Selby and Selby. 1959. Agar. In Whister (ed.), Industrial gums. Academic Press Inc., New York, N.Y.
4. Falk, Bucca and Simmons. 1939. J. Bacteriol. 37:121. 214520 Dehydrated 10 kg
5. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md. Difco Agar, Technical
6. Sambrook, Fritsch and Maniatis. 1989. Molecular cloning, a laboratory manual, 2nd ed. Cold Cat. No. 281230 Dehydrated 500 g
Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, New York, N.Y.
7. Schiestl and Geitz. 1989. Current Genetics 16:339. 281210 Dehydrated 2 kg
8. Guiseley and Renn. 1975. Agarose: purification, properties, and biomedical applications. Marine
Colloids, Inc. Rockland, Maine. Difco Agar, Noble
Cat. No. 214220 Dehydrated 100 g
Availability 214230 Dehydrated 500 g
Bacto Agar BBL Agarose
Cat. No. 214050 Dehydrated 100 g Cat. No. 212272 Dehydrated 500 g
214010 Dehydrated 454 g
BBL Agar, Select
214030 Dehydrated 2 kg
214040 Dehydrated 10 kg Cat. No. 299340 Dehydrated 500 g
299341 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
BBL Agar, Grade A
Cat. No. 212304 Dehydrated 454 g

44
 Alkaline Peptone Water
A
Agar, 1.5%
Intended Use and allowed to solidify. This procedure provides a method of
Agar, 1.5% is used in the alternative agar-overlay method of evenly distributing an inoculum onto a plated medium.
inoculation for antimicrobial disc diffusion susceptibility
testing. It may also be used in other microbiological proce- Procedure
dures, such as colony counts, that require an agar preparation Because this product can be used for a variety of purposes, the
free from additives. instructions will vary according to use. For details on preparing
the agar overlay for the disc diffusion technique of determining
Summary and Explanation antimicrobial susceptibility, consult appropriate references.2,3
The Bauer-Kirby method of antimicrobial susceptibility testing
is well standardized and accurate.1 However, the method for Expected Results
standardizing the inoculum introduces some subjective Following incubation of the plates, zones of inhibition
variability. surrounding the discs may be measured and compared with
published standards.3,4
In 1970, Barry et al. introduced an agar-overlay procedure as
a modification of the method described by Bauer et al.2 They Limitations of the Procedure
found that placing the discs onto a double pour plate, consist- The agar overlay method is not applicable to tests with fastidi-
ing of a base layer of Mueller Hinton Agar overlaid with a ous or slow-growing organisms.4 The method is not described
thin layer of inoculated 1.5 percent agar produced more clearly in more recent editions of NCCLS standard M2.
defined zone edges for more precise zone measurements than
the Bauer-Kirby method of placing the discs directly onto References
inoculated Mueller Hinton Agar. The overlay procedure 1. Bauer, Kirby, Sherris and Turck. 1966. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 45:493.
2. Barry, Garcia and Thrupp. 1970. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 53:149.
also facilitated standardization of susceptibility testing by 3. Barry and Thornsberry. 1985. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of clinical
microbiology, 4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
providing a reproducible inoculum. 4. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 1990. Approved standard M2-A4, Perfor-
mance standards for antimicrobial disk susceptibility tests, 4th ed. NCCLS, Villanova, Pa.

Principles of the Procedure

These tubes contain bacteriological grade agar and purified
Availability
BBL Agar, 1.5%
water. When liquefied, by heating to 100C and cooling to 45
Cat. No. 297395 Prepared Tubes, 9 mL (D Tubes) Ctn. of 100
to 50C, the agar solution is used as a suspending matrix for
bacteria that may be added to an appropriate plated medium

Alkaline Peptone Water

Intended Use Procedure
Alkaline Peptone Water is an enrichment medium used for Swab specimens may be inserted directly into the medium.
the cultivation of Vibrio species from feces and other infected Material not being cultured from a swab may be transferred
materials. directly to the medium using a sterile inoculating loop. For
fecal specimens, aseptically transfer approximately 1 g of the
Summary and Explanation sample to the medium and mix well. If the feces are received in
Clinical materials containing small numbers of Vibrio should a preservative, transfer 2 to 3 mL of the fecal specimen to the
be inoculated into an enrichment medium prior to plating onto medium.
a selective medium, such as TCBS Agar. Alkaline Peptone Water
Incubate at 35C for 6-12 hours. Subculture onto a selective
is a suitable enrichment broth for this purpose.1-3 The
medium, such as TCBS Agar. Incubate subcultured plate at
relatively high pH of the medium (approximately 8.4)
35 C for 24-48 hours.
provides a favorable environment for the growth of vibrios.
Expected Results
Principles of the Procedure
Growth in tubes is indicated by turbidity compared to an
Enzymatic digest of casein provides amino acids and other
uninoculated control. Subculture growth onto selective and
complex nitrogenous substances necessary to support bacterial
nonselective media for isolation and identification.
growth. Sodium chloride maintains osmotic equilibrium.

45
Section III
A Alkaline Peptone Water, cont.

Limitations of the Procedure References

1. Gilligan, Janda, Karmali and Miller. 1992. Cumitech 12A, Laboratory diagnosis of bacterial diar-
This prepared tube medium is intended to be used as an rhea. Coord. ed., Nolte. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
enrichment medium. A pure culture is recommended for 2. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
St. Louis, Mo.
biochemical tests and other identification procedures. 3. Grasmick. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American
Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Availability
BBL Alkaline Peptone Water
Cat. No. 297814 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (D Tubes) Pkg. of 10

Amies Transport Media

(See Transport Media)

Amino Acid Assay Media

Lysine Assay Medium Methionine Assay Medium
Cystine Assay Medium
Intended Use Formulae1
Lysine Assay Medium is used for determining lysine concen- Difco Lysine Assay Medium, Methionine Assay
tration by the microbiological assay technique. Medium or Cystine Assay Medium
All amino acid assay media contain the following formula.
Methionine Assay Medium is used for determining methionine
concentration by the microbiological assay technique. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Dextrose ................................................................... 50.0 g
Cystine Assay Medium is used for determining L-cystine Sodium Acetate ....................................................... 40.0 g
Ammonium Chloride .................................................. 6.0 g
concentration by the microbiological assay technique. Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.2 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.2 g
Summary and Explanation Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.4 g
Amino acid assay media are prepared for use in the microbio- Ferrous Sulfate ......................................................... 20.0 mg
Manganese Sulfate .................................................. 40.0 mg
logical assay of amino acids. Three types of media are used for Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 20.0 mg
this purpose: Adenine Sulfate ....................................................... 20.0 mg
Guanine Hydrochloride ............................................ 20.0 mg
1. Maintenance Media: For carrying the stock culture to Uracil ........................................................................ 20.0 mg
preserve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism Xanthine .................................................................. 20.0 mg
Thiamine Hydrochloride ............................................. 1.0 mg
for its intended purpose; Pyrodoxine Hydrochloride .......................................... 2.0 mg
2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for immedi- Pyridoxamine Hydrochloride ................................... 600.0 mg
ate use; Pyridoxal Hydrochloride .......................................... 600.0 mg
Calcium Pantothenate ................................................ 1.0 mg
3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the amino acid Riboflavin ................................................................... 1.0 mg
under test. They contain all the factors necessary for Nicotinic Acid ............................................................. 2.0 mg
optimal growth of the test organism except the single p-Aminobenzoic Acid ............................................. 200.0 g
Biotin ......................................................................... 2.0 g
essential amino acid to be determined.
Folic Acid ................................................................. 20.0 g
Amino Acid Assay Media are prepared according to the formu- Glycine ....................................................................... 0.2 g
DL-Alanine ................................................................. 0.4 g
lations of Steel et al.1 They are used in the microbiological assay Asparagine ................................................................. 0.8 g
of amino acids using Pediococcus acidilactici ATCC 8042 as L-Aspartic Acid ........................................................... 0.2 g
the test organism. L-Proline ..................................................................... 0.2 g
DL-Serine ................................................................... 0.1 g
DL-Tryptophan ......................................................... 80.0 mg
Principles of the Procedure L-Glutamic Acid ......................................................... 0.6 g
Lysine Assay Medium, Methionine Assay Medium and Cystine L-Histidine Hydrochloride ....................................... 124.0 mg
Assay Medium contain all the factors essential for the growth DL-Phenylalanine ........................................................ 0.2 g
DL-Threonine ............................................................. 0.4 g
of Pediococcus acidilactici ATCC 8042, except the amino acid L-Tyrosine ................................................................... 0.2 g
under assay. The addition of the amino acid in specified DL-Valine .................................................................... 0.5 g
increasing concentrations gives a growth response by the test DL-Isoleucine .............................................................. 0.5 g
DL-Leucine ................................................................. 0.5 g
organism. L-Arginine Hydrochloride ....................................... 484.0 mg

46
 Amino Acid Assay Media, cont.
A
User Quality Control
Identity Specifications
Difco Lysine Assay Medium, Methionine Assay Medium or Cystine Assay Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: White to off-white, homogeneous, may have a tendency to clump.
Solution: 5.25% (single strength) solution, soluble in purified water upon boiling. Solution is light to medium amber, clear, may have
a slight precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Single strengthLight to medium amber, clear, may have a slight precipitate
Reaction of 5.25%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Lysine Assay Medium, Methionine Assay Medium or Cystine Assay Medium
Prepare the medium per label directions. These media support the growth of Pediococcus acidilactici ATCC 8042 when prepared in single strength and
supplemented with the appropriate amino acid. Lysine Assay Medium should produce a standard curve when tested with L-Lysine at 0.0 to 300 g per 10
mL. Methionine Assay Medium should produce a standard curve when tested with DL-Methionine at 0.0 to 60 g per 10 mL. Cystine Assay Medium
should produce a standard curve when tested with L-Cystine at 0 to 50 g per 10 mL. Incubate tubes with caps loosened at 35-37C for 16-20 hours.
Read the percent transmittance at 660 nm.
Preparation of inoculum dilution, amino acid stock and working solution.
PREPARATION OF STANDARD VOLUME OF STANDARD FINAL
INOCULUM DILUTION PREPARATION OF WORKING SOLUTION WORKING AMINO ACID
(CELL SUSPENSION + AMINO ACID STOCK SOLUTION (STOCK SOLUTION + SOLUTION CONCENTRATION
ASSAY MEDIUM TEST CULTURE STERILE 0.85% NACI) (AMINO ACID + PURIFIED H2O) PURIFIED H2O) (ML/10 ML TUBE) G/10 ML
Cystine Assay Pediococcus acidilactici 1 mL + 19 mL L-cystine 1 g + 100 mL + 1 mL 1 mL + 99 mL 0, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 0.0, 5, 10, 15, 20,
Medium ATCC 8042 HCl heated, then cooled, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5 25, 30, 40, 50
add up to 1,000 mL
Lysine Assay Pediococcus acidilactici 1 mL + 19 mL L-lysine 6 g + 1,000 mL 1 mL + 99 mL 0, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 0.0, 30, 60, 90, 120,
Medium ATCC 8042 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5 150, 180, 240, 300

Methionine Assay Pediococcus acidilactici 1 mL + 19 mL DL-methionine 1.2 g + 1,000 mL 1 mL + 99 mL 0, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 0.0, 6, 12, 18, 24,
Medium ATCC 8042 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5 30, 36, 48, 60

In addition to the ingredients listed on the previous page, the 4. Add standard or test samples.
media contain per liter*: 5. Adjust tube volume to 10 mL with purified water.
Lysine Assay Medium 6. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes.
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.1 g
DL-Methionine ........................................................... 0.2 g Procedure
Methionine Assay Medium Stock Culture and Inoculum
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.1 g
L-Lysine Hydrochloride ............................................... 0.5 g Stock cultures of Pediococcus acidilactici ATCC 8042 are
Cystine Assay Medium prepared by stab inoculation into tubes of Lactobacilli Agar
DL-Methionine ........................................................... 0.2 g AOAC or Micro Assay Culture Agar. Incubate cultures at
L-Lysine Hydrochloride ............................................... 0.5 g 35-37C for 24 hours. Store stock cultures at 2-8C. Make
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
transfers at monthly intervals in triplicate.
Precautions The inoculum for assay is prepared by subculturing the test
Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media or organism into 10 mL Lactobacilli Broth AOAC or Micro
glassware in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely small Inoculum Broth. Incubate at 35-37C for 16-24 hours. After
amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give erroneous incubation, centrifuge the cells under aseptic conditions and
results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from detergents and decant the liquid supernatant. Wash the cells 3 times with
other chemicals must be used. Glassware must be heated to 10 mL sterile 0.85% NaCl solution. After the third wash,
250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic residues that resuspend the cells in 10 mL sterile 0.85% NaCl solution.
might be present. Take precautions to keep sterilization and Dilute the 10 mL cell suspension with the appropriate amount
cooling conditions uniform throughout the assay. of sterile 0.85% NaCl solution. (See the table under User
Quality Control, Cultural Response.) One drop of the diluted
Directions for Preparation from inoculum suspension is used to inoculate each of the assay
Dehydrated Product tubes.
1. Suspend 10.5 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water. Amino Acid Solution
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 2-3 minutes to
Prepare stock solutions of each amino acid as described in Table
completely dissolve the powder.
1. If the DL form is used, twice the concentration of the amino
3. Dispense in 5 mL amounts into tubes, evenly dispersing
acid is required. Prepare the stock solutions fresh daily.
the precipitate.

47
Section III
A Amino Acid Assay Media, cont.

Increasing amounts of the standard or the unknown and Limitations of the Procedure
sufficient purified water to give a total volume of 10 mL per 1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium
tube are added to the tubes containing 5 mL of the rehydrated must be cultured and maintained on media recommended
medium. The appropriate volumes of the standards and their for this purpose.
final concentrations are listed in the table. 2. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the assay
Measure the growth response turbidimetrically or titrimetrically. procedure.
Turbidimetric readings are made after incubation at 35-37C 3. The use of altered or deficient media may cause mutants
for 16-20 hours. Titrimetric readings are made after incubation having different nutritional requirements that will not give
at 35-37C for 72 hours. a satisfactory response.
4. For successful results of these procedures, all conditions of
It is essential that a standard curve be constructed each time the assay must be followed precisely.
an assay is run. Conditions of autoclaving and temperature of
incubation that influence the standard curve readings cannot Reference
always be duplicated. 1. Steel, Sauberlich, Reynolds and Baumann. 1949. J. Biol. Chem. 177:533.

Expected Results Availability

1. Prepare a standard concentration response curve by plot- Difco Lysine Assay Medium
Cat. No. 242210 Dehydrated 100 g*
ting the response readings against the amount of standard

in each tube, disk or cup. Difco Methionine Assay Medium
2. Determine the amount of amino acid at each level of assay Cat. No. 242310 Dehydrated 100 g*

solution by interpolation from the standard curve. Difco Cystine Assay Medium
3. Calculate the concentration of amino acid in the sample Cat. No. 246710 Dehydrated 100 g*
*Store at 2-8C.
from the average of these volumes. Use only those values
that do not vary more than 10% from the average. Use
the results only if two-thirds of the values do not vary more
than 10%.

Anaerobe Broth MIC

(See Wilkins-Chalgren Agar)

Anaerobe CNA Agar with 5% Sheep Blood

Intended Use flora. The incorporation of colistin and nalidixic acid enables
Anaerobe CNA Agar with 5% Sheep Blood is used in a the selective recovery of anaerobic cocci by inhibiting gram-
qualitative procedure for the selective isolation of anaerobic negative enteric bacilli. The colistin disrupts the cell membranes
streptococci. of gram-negative organisms, whereas the nalidixic acid blocks
DNA replication in susceptible gram-negative bacteria.3
Summary and Explanation The addition of defibrinated sheep blood supplies additional
Anaerobe CNA Agar with 5% Sheep Blood is an enriched nutrients.
medium based on a modified formulation for Columbia CNA
Agar developed by Ellner et al.1 It consists of Columbia CNA Procedure
Agar modified to support the growth of anaerobic gram-positive The medium should be reduced immediately prior to inocula-
cocci. Colistin and nalidixic acid (CNA) are incorporated to tion by placing under anaerobic conditions for 6-24 hours.4
inhibit gram-negative enteric bacilli.
Incubate plates immediately after inoculation, with plates in
Principles of the Procedure an inverted position (agar side up), under anaerobic condi-
Anaerobe CNA Agar consists of Columbia Agar supplemented tions at 35C, or place the medium in a holding jar flushed
with L-cysteine and dithiothreitol as reducing agents and hemin with oxygen-free gas(es) until a sufficient number of plates is
and vitamin K1 to supply nutrients necessary for the cultivation accumulated (no longer than 3 hours).5 An efficient and easy
of anaerobes.2 way to obtain suitable anaerobic conditions is through the use
of BBL GasPak EZ anaerobic systems or an alternative
The addition of antimicrobial agents facilitates the recovery of anaerobic system.
anaerobic microorganisms from specimens containing mixed

48
 Anaerobe Laked Sheep Blood
A
Incubate for at least 48 hours and, if no growth occurs, continue Availability
incubation for up to 7 days. BBL Anaerobe CNA Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
Cat. No. 297165 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Expected Results BBL Anaerobe CNA Agar with 5% Sheep Blood//

In order to determine the relationship to oxygen of each colony Anaerobe Laked Sheep Blood KV Agar
type, follow established procedures.4,6 Those colony types that Cat. No. 297041 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
prove to be obligate anaerobes can be further studied using *Store at 2-8C.

appropriate identification methods.7

References
1. Ellner, Granato and May. 1973. Appl. Microbiol. 26:904.
2. Gibbons and MacDonald. 1960. J. Bacteriol. 80:164.
3. Estevez. 1984. Lab. Med. 15:258.
4. Allen, Siders and Marler. 1985. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of clinical
microbiology, 4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. Martin. 1971. Appl. Microbiol. 22:1168.
6. Mangels. 1994. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1., supp. 1.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
7. Rodloff, Hillier and Moncla. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Anaerobe Laked Sheep Blood KV Agar

Intended Use of BBL GasPak EZ anaerobic systems or an alternative
Anaerobe Laked Sheep Blood KV Agar is used in a qualitative anaerobic system.
procedure for isolation of gram-negative anaerobic bacilli. Incubate for at least 48 hours and, if no growth occurs,
continue incubation for up to 7 days.
Summary and Explanation
Anaerobe Laked Sheep Blood KV Agar consists of an enriched Expected Results
Columbia Agar Base with kanamycin and vancomycin as Examine colonies using a dissecting microscope and with a
selective agents for gram-negative obligate anaerobes. Laked long-wave UV lamp to detect fluorescence. Colonies of the
sheep blood stimulates pigmentation of the pigmenting pigmenting Porphyromonas-Prevotella species should fluoresce
Porphyromonas-Prevotella species. orange to brick-red under long-wave UV light. Fluorescence is
visible before pigmentation.
Principles of the Procedure
Anaerobe Laked Sheep Blood KV Agar consists of Columbia In order to determine the relationship to oxygen of each colony
Agar supplemented with L-cysteine and dithiothreitol as type, follow established procedures.4,6 Those colony types that
reducing agents and hemin and vitamin K1 to supply nutrients prove to be obligate anaerobes can be further studied using
necessary for the cultivation of anaerobes.1 appropriate identification methods.

The addition of antimicrobial agents facilitates the recovery of Limitation of the Procedure
anaerobic microorganisms from specimens containing mixed The concentration of vancomycin (7.5 mg/mL) may be inhibi-
flora. The kanamycin and vancomycin enable the selective tory to asaccharolytic Porphyromonas species.7
isolation of gram-negative anaerobic bacilli by inhibiting
facultatively and obligately anaerobic gram-positive bacteria.2 References
1. Gibbons and MacDonald. 1960. J. Bacteriol. 80:164.
Laking the blood improves pigmentation of the pigmenting 2. Finegold, Miller and Posnick. 1965. Ernahrungsforschung 10:517.
3. Finegold and Citron. 1980. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Truant (ed.), Manual of clinical microbi-
Porphyromonas-Prevotella species.3 Fluorescence is visible ology, 3rd ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
4. Allen, Siders and Marler. 1985. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of clinical
when the colonies are exposed to long-wave UV light. microbiology, 4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. Martin. 1971. Appl. Microbiol. 22:1168.
6. Mangels. 1994. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1, suppl. 1.
Procedure American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
7. Jousimies-Somer, Summanen and Finegold. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken
The medium should be reduced immediately prior to inocula- (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
tion by placing under anaerobic conditions for 6-24 hours.4
Incubate plates immediately after inoculation, with plates in
Availability
BBL Anaerobe Laked Sheep Blood KV Agar//
an inverted position (agar side up), under anaerobic condi- Anaerobe CNA Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
tions at 35C, or place the medium in a holding jar flushed Cat. No. 297041 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
with oxygen-free gas(es) until a sufficient number of plates is
BBL Anaerobe Laked Sheep Blood KV Agar//
accumulated (no longer than 3 hours).5 An efficient and easy CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar with PEA
way to obtain suitable anaerobic conditions is through the use Cat. No. 299611 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.
49
Section III
A Anaerobe Neomycin

Anaerobe Neomycin 5% Sheep Blood Agar

Intended Use with oxygen-free gas(es) until sufficient plates are accumulated
Anaerobe Neomycin 5% Sheep Blood Agar is a selective medium (no longer than 3 hours).4 An efficient and easy way to obtain
used in qualitative procedures for the isolation and cultivation suitable anaerobic conditions is through the use of BBL
of fastidious and slow-growing obligately anaerobic bacteria GasPak EZ anaerobic systems or an alternative system.
from a variety of clinical and nonclinical specimens. Incubate for at least 48 hours, and, if no growth occurs,
continue incubation for up to 7 days. An indicator should be
Summary and Explanation used to detect anaerobiosis.
Anaerobe Neomycin 5% Sheep Blood Agar consists of CDC
Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar and the selective agent, Expected Results
neomycin. The CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar is an After at least 48 hours of incubation, the plates should show
enriched, nonselective medium suitable for the isolation and isolated colonies in streaked areas and confluent growth in
cultivation of a wide variety of obligately anaerobic gram- areas of heavy inoculation.
negative microorganisms.1,2 The use of an antimicrobial agent
improves the recovery of obligately anaerobic bacteria from In order to determine the relationship to oxygen of each colony
specimens containing mixed flora. type present on anaerobic solid media, follow established
procedures.3,5 The colony types that prove to contain obligate
Principles of the Procedure anaerobes can be further studied using appropriate identifica-
CDC Anaerobe Blood Agar consists of BBL Trypticase Soy tion methods.
Agar with additional agar, yeast extract, cystine, hemin and
vitamin K1. Defibrinated sheep blood is added to supply References
1. Dowell, Lombard, Thompson and Armfield. 1977. Media for isolation, characterization and
nutrients and for the determination of hemolytic reactions and identification of obligately anaerobic bacteria. CDC laboratory manual. Center for Disease
Control, Atlanta, Ga.
pigmentation. 2. Dowell and Hawkins. 1987. Laboratory methods in anaerobic bacteriology, CDC laboratory manual.
HHS Publication No. (CDC) 87-8272. Centers for Disease Control, Atlanta, Ga.
Neomycin inhibits the growth of most staphylococci and 3. Allen, Siders and Marler. 1985. In Lenette, Balows, Hausler and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of clinical
microbiology, 4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Enterobacteriaceae. 4. Martin. 1971. Appl. Microbiol. 22:1168.
5. Mangels. 1994. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1, suppl. 1.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Procedure
The medium should be reduced immediately prior to inocula- Availability
tion by placing under anaerobic conditions for 6-24 hours.3 BBL Anaerobe Neomycin 5% Sheep Blood Agar
Cat. No. 297790 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Incubate plates immediately after inoculation, with plates in *Store at 2-8C.
an inverted position (agar side up), under anaerobic condi-
tions at 35C, or place the medium in a holding jar flushed

Anaerobic Agar
Intended Use bacteremia.5,6 Anaerobic bacteria are the predominant flora
Anaerobic Agar is used for cultivating anaerobic microorganisms. colonizing the skin and mucous membranes of the body.3
Anaerobes vary in their sensitivity to oxygen and nutritional
Summary and Explanation requirements.2 Anaerobic bacteria lack cytochromes and thus
Brewer1 described a special Petri dish cover that allowed are unable to use oxygen as a terminal electron acceptor.3
surface growth of anaerobes and microaerophiles without
anaerobic equipment. The microorganisms were grown on Principles of the Procedure
an agar-based medium having a low oxidation-reduction Peptone provides the nitrogen, vitamins and amino acids in
potential. Anaerobic Agar is a modification of Brewers Anaerobic Agar. Dextrose is a carbon source. Sodium chloride
original formula. This medium is suitable for standard plating maintains the osmotic equilibrium. Sodium thioglycollate
procedures used in cultivating anaerobic bacteria.2-4 and sodium formaldehyde sulfoxylate are reducing agents.
Methylene blue serves as an indicator of anaerobiosis with
Anaerobic bacteria cause a variety of infections in humans,
a blue color indicating the presence of oxygen. Agar is the
including otitis media, oral infections, endocarditis, meningitis,
solidifying agent.
wound infections following bowel surgery or trauma, and

50
 Anaerobic Agar, cont.
A
Formula Brewer Anaerobic Agar Plates
Difco Anaerobic Agar 1. Dispense 50-60 mL of Anaerobic Agar into a standard
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Petri dish. For best results use porous tops to obtain a dry
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 20.0 g surface.
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g 2. Inoculate the surface of the medium by streaking; avoid
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g the edges of the plates.
Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 2.0 g 3. Replace the standard Petri dish lid with a sterile Brewer
Sodium Formaldehyde Sulfoxylate .............................. 1.0 g
Methylene Blue .......................................................... 2.0 mg anaerobic Petri dish cover. The cover should not rest on the
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Petri dish bottom. The inner glass ridge should seal against
the uninoculated periphery of the agar. It is essential that
Directions for Preparation from the sealing ring inside the cover is in contact with the
Dehydrated Product medium. This seal must not be broken before the end of
1. Suspend 58 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix the incubation period. A small amount of air is caught over
thoroughly. the surface of the medium; however, the oxygen in this space
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to reacts with reducing agents in the medium to form an
completely dissolve the powder. anaerobic environment.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. 4. Incubate aerobically as desired.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using For a complete discussion on anaerobic and microaerophilic
stable, typical control cultures. bacteria from clinical specimens, refer to the appropriate
procedures outlined in the references.2-5 For the examination
Procedure of anaerobic bacteria in food, refer to standard methods.7-9
Standard Petri Dishes2
1. Inoculate a properly obtained specimen onto the medium Expected Results
using the pour plate technique. Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
2. Immediately incubate anaerobically at 35C.
3. Examine at 24 hours if incubating plates in an anaerobic Limitations of the Procedure
chamber. Examine at 48 hours if incubating plates in an 1. Clinical specimens must be obtained properly and trans-
anaerobic jar or anaerobic pouch. ported to the laboratory in a suitable anaerobic transport
4. Extended incubation may be necessary to recover some container.2
anaerobes. 2. The microbiologist must be able to verify quality control
of the medium and determine whether the environment is
User Quality Control anaerobic.2
3. The microbiologist must perform aerotolerance testing on
Identity Specifications
each isolate recovered to ensure that the organism is an
Difco Anaerobic Agar
anaerobe.2
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous. 4. Methylene blue is toxic to some anaerobic bacteria.
Solution: 5.8% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light References
amber, slightly opalescent when hot, 1. Brewer. 1942. Science 95:587.
2. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
changing to green when cooled. Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Prepared Appearance: Light green, slightly opalescent. 3. Baron, Peterson and Finegold. 1994. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 9th ed. Mosby-Year
Book, Inc. St. Louis, Mo.
Reaction of 5.8% 4. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2 American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. Allen, Siders and Marler. 1985. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Shadomy (ed.). Manual of clinical
microbiology, 4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Cultural Response 6. Smith. 1975. The pathogenic anaerobic bacteria, 2nd ed. Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, Ill.
7. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
Difco Anaerobic Agar International, Gaithersburg, Md.
8. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the pour plate 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
technique and incubate at 35 2C under anaerobic conditions for 9. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
18-48 hours. Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

ORGANISM ATCC
INOCULUM
CFU RECOVERY Availability
Bacteroides fragilis 25285 2
10 -10 3
Good Difco Anaerobic Agar
Clostridium perfringens 13124 102-103 Good Cat. No. 253610 Dehydrated 500 g
Fusobacterium mortiferum 9817 102-103 Good

51
Section III
A Antibiotic Assay Media

Antibiotic Assay Media

Antibiotic Medium 1 Antibiotic Medium 2
Antibiotic Medium 3 Antibiotic Medium 4
Antibiotic Medium 5 Antibiotic Medium 8
Antibiotic Medium 9 Antibiotic Medium 10
Antibiotic Medium 11 Antibiotic Medium 12
Antibiotic Medium 13 Antibiotic Medium 19
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
These media, where noted, conform with specifications of The Cylinder Plate Assay
United States Pharmacopeia (USP). This method is based on the diffusion of an antibiotic solution
Antibiotic Assay Media are used for determining antibiotic from a cylinder placed on the surface of an inoculated agar
potency by the microbiological assay technique.13 medium. The diameter of a zone of inhibition after incubation
depends, in part, on the concentration or activity of the
Summary and Explanation antibiotic. This method is used in the assay of commercial
The activity (potency) of an antibiotic can be demonstrated preparations of antibiotics, as well as in the quantitative deter-
under suitable conditions by its inhibitory effect on microor- mination of antibiotics in body fluids, animal feeds and other
ganisms.2 Reduction in antimicrobial activity may reveal materials.
changes not demonstrated by chemical methods.2 Antibiotic Turbidimetric Assay
assays are performed by the cylinder plate method and the The turbidimetric method is based on the inhibition of growth
turbidimetric tube assay. The cylinder plate method, first of a microbial culture in a fluid medium containing a uniform
described by Abraham et al.4 for the assay of penicillin, was solution of an antibiotic.2 Turbidimetric determinations
later modified by Foster and Woodruff5 and by Schmidt and have the advantage of requiring a short incubation period,
Moyer.6 providing test results after 3 or 4 hours. However, the presence
Antibiotic assay media are prepared according to the specifi- of solvents or other inhibitory materials may influence turbidi-
cations of the USP2, European Pharmacopeia7 and AOAC In- metric assays more markedly than cylinder plate assays. Use of
ternational.3 The antibiotic media are identified numerically this method is appropriate only when test samples are clear.
with names assigned by Grove and Randall in Assay Methods
of Antibiotics.1 Antibiotic Medium 19 corresponds to the use Formulae
described in Outline of Details for Official Microbiological Difco Antibiotic Medium 1 (Penassay Seed Agar)
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Assays of Antibiotics.8 Beef Extract ................................................................ 1.5 g
Antibiotic Medium 12 is prepared from the Grove and Randall Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 4.0 g
formula. 1 They recommended its use for preparing test Peptone ..................................................................... 6.0 g
plates for the cylinder plate assay of the antifungal agents, Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g
nystatin and anisomycin, using only a seed layer containing Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Saccharomyces cerevisiae as the test organism. It is used for Difco Antibiotic Medium 2 (Penassay Base Agar)
the assay of amphotericin B. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Extract ................................................................ 1.5 g
Antibiotic Medium 1 and Antibiotic Medium 4 are used in a Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Peptone ..................................................................... 6.0 g
cylinder plate method for detecting penicillin in nonfat dry Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
milk.9
Difco Antibiotic Medium 3 (Penassay Broth)
The use of standardized culture media and careful control of Approximate Formula* Per Liter
all test conditions are fundamental requisites in the microbio- Beef Extract ................................................................ 1.5 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 1.5 g
logical assay of antibiotics in order to achieve satisfactory test Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g
results. Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 3.5 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 3.68 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.32 g

52
 Antibiotic Assay Media, cont.
A
Also Known As
DIFCO BRAND PRODUCT NAME ALTERNATIVE DIFCO NAME BBL BRAND PRODUCT NAME USP2 AOAC3
Antibiotic Medium 1 Penassay Seed Agar Medium 1 Agar Medium A
Antibiotic Medium 2 Penassay Base Agar Medium 2 Agar Medium C
Antibiotic Medium 3 Penassay Broth Antibiotic Assay Broth Medium 3 Broth Medium A
Antibiotic Medium 4 Yeast Beef Agar Medium 4 Agar Medium B
Antibiotic Medium 5 Streptomycin Assay Agar Medium 5 Agar Medium E
Antibiotic Medium 8 Medium 8 Agar Medium D
Antibiotic Medium 9 Polymyxin Base Agar Medium 9
Antibiotic Medium 10 Polymyxin Seed Agar Medium 10
Antibiotic Medium 11 Neomycin Assay Agar Medium 11 Agar Medium J
Antibiotic Medium 12
Sabouraud Liquid Broth, Modified Medium 13 Broth Medium B
Antibiotic Medium 19 Medium 19

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications

DEHYDRATED PREPARED
SOLUTION PH AT 25 C
APPEARANCE APPEARANCE

Beige, 3.05% solution, soluble in purified water upon Light to medium

Difco Antibiotic
homogeneous, boiling. Solution is light to medium amber, slightly amber, slightly 6.55 0.05
Medium 1
free-flowing. opalescent. opalescent.

Light tan, 2.55% solution, soluble in purified water upon

Difco Antibiotic Light-medium amber,
homogeneous, boiling. Solution is light to medium amber, very 6.55 0.05
Medium 2 slightly opalescent.
free-flowing. slightly to slightly opalescent.

Difco Antibiotic Tan, free-flowing, 1.75% solution, soluble in purified water upon Light to medium
7.0 0.05
Medium 3 homogeneous. boiling. Solution is light to medium amber, clear. amber, clear.

BBL Antibiotic Assay Fine, homogeneous, 1.75% solution, soluble in purified water upon Pale to light,
Broth (Antibiotic free of extraneous boiling. Solution is very pale to light, yellow to tan, yellow to tan, clear 7.0 0.2
Medium 3) material. clear to slightly hazy. to slightly hazy.

Light tan, 2.65% solution, soluble in purified water upon Light amber, very
Difco Antibiotic
free-flowing, boiling. Solution is light amber, very slightly slightly to slightly 6.55 0.05
Medium 4
homogeneous. opalescent. opalescent.

Light tan, 2.55% solution, soluble in purified water upon Light to medium
Difco Antibiotic
free-flowing, boiling. Solution is light to medium amber, very amber, slightly 7.9 0.1
Medium 5
homogeneous. slightly to slightly opalescent. opalescent.

Light tan, 2.55% solution, soluble in purified water upon Light to medium
Difco Antibiotic
free-flowing, boiling. Solution is light to medium amber, very amber, slightly 5.85 0.05
Medium 8
homogeneous. slightly to slightly opalescent. opalescent.

Light to medium
Light beige, 5.0% solution, soluble in purified water upon
Difco Antibiotic amber, slightly
free-flowing, boiling. Solution is light to medium amber, slightly 7.25 0.05
Medium 9 opalescent with slight
homogeneous. opalescent, may have a slight flocculent precipitate.
flocculent precipitate.

Beige,
5.2% solution, soluble in purified water upon Light to medium
Difco Antibiotic homogeneous,
boiling. Solution is light to medium amber, very amber, slightly 7.25 0.05
Medium 10 moist with a
slightly to slightly opalescent. opalescent.
tendency to clump.

Beige, 3.05% solution, soluble in purified water upon Light to medium

Difco Antibiotic
homogeneous, boiling. Solution is light to medium amber, very amber, slightly 7.95 0.05
Medium 11
free-flowing. slightly to slightly opalescent. opalescent.

6.25% solution, soluble in purified water upon Light to medium

Difco Antibiotic Tan, homogeneous,
boiling. Solution is light to medium amber, very amber, slightly 6.1 0.1
Medium 12 free-flowing.
slightly to slightly opalescent. opalescent.

BBL Sabouraud
Fine, homogeneous, 3.0% solution, soluble in purified water upon Light to medium,
Liquid Broth,
free of extraneous boiling. Solution is light to medium, yellow to tan, yellow to tan, 5.7 0.1
Modified (Antibiotic
material. clear to slightly hazy. clear to slightly hazy.
Medium 13)

Light tan, 6.0% solution, soluble in purified water upon

Difco Antibiotic Medium amber,
homogeneous, boiling. Solution is medium amber, very slightly to 6.1 0.1
Medium 19 slightly opalescent.
free-flowing. slightly opalescent.

Continued

53
Section III
A Antibiotic Assay Media, cont.

Cultural Response
Difco Antibiotic Medium 1 Antibiotic Medium 9
Difco Antibiotic Medium 2 Antibiotic Medium 10
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate by the pour plate Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate by the pour plate
method and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. method and incubate at 35 2C for 40-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Staphylococcus aureus 6538P 30-300 Good Bordetella bronchiseptica 4617 30-300 Good

Difco Antibiotic Medium 3

Antibiotic Medium 11
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate by the pour plate
35 2C for up to 24 hours. method and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Enterococcus faecium 10541 ~107 Good Micrococcus luteus 9341 30-300 Good
Escherichia coli 10536 ~107 Good Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 30-300 Good
Klebsiella pneumoniae 10031 ~107 Good
Antibiotic Medium 12
Staphylococcus aureus 6538P ~107 Good
Antibiotic Medium 19
BBL Antibiotic Assay Broth (Antibiotic Medium 3) Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate by the pour plate
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at method and incubate at 30 2C for 40-48 hours.
25 2C for the Saccharomyces cerevisiae and 35 2C for the ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
remaining organisms for 7 days.
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 2601 30-300 Good
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
BBL Sabouraud Liquid Broth, Modified

Bacillus subtilis 6633 103 Good
(Antibiotic Medium 13)
Escherichia coli 10536 103 Good
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Micrococcus luteus 9341 103 Good 25 2C for 7 days (use one loopful of a fresh 3-7 day culture for
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 103 Good A. niger and T. mentagrophytes).
Staphylococcus aureus 6538P 103 Good
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Difco Antibiotic Medium 4 Asperillus niger 16404 Undiluted Good
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate by the pour plate Candida albicans 60193 103 Good
method and incubate at 35 2C for 40-48 hours.
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 103 Good
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY Trichophyton mentagrophytes 9533 Undiluted Good
Micrococcus luteus 9341 30-300 Good

Antibiotic Medium 5
Antibiotic Medium 8
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate by the pour plate
method and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Bacillus subtilis 6633 30-300 Good

BBL Antibiotic Assay Broth (Antibiotic Medium 3) Difco Antibiotic Medium 9 (Polymyxin Base Agar)
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Extract ................................................................ 1.5 g Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 17.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 1.5 g Soy Peptone ............................................................... 3.0 g
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ....................................... 5.0 g Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.5 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 3.5 g Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.5 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 3.68 g Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.32 g Difco Antibiotic Medium 10 (Polymyxin Seed Agar)
Difco Antibiotic Medium 4 (Yeast Beef Agar) Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 17.0 g
Beef Extract ................................................................ 1.5 g Soybean Peptone ....................................................... 3.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.5 g
Peptone ..................................................................... 6.0 g Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.5 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g
Difco Antibiotic Medium 5 (Streptomycin Assay Agar) Polysorbate 80 ......................................................... 10.0 g
Same as Medium 2, except for the final pH after autoclaving. Difco Antibiotic Medium 11 (Neomycin Assay Agar)
Difco Antibiotic Medium 8 Same as Medium 1, except for the final pH after autoclaving.
Same as Medium 2, except for the final pH after autoclaving.

54
 Antibiotic Assay Media, cont.
A
Selection of Media for the Microbiological Assay of Antibiotics2
CYLINDER PLATE CYLINDER PLATE
INOCULUM BASE LAYER SEED LAYER TURBIDIMETRIC
ANTIBIOTIC ASSAY METHOD ORGANISM ATCC MEDIUM MEDIUM MEDIUM ASSAY MEDIUM
Amikacin Turbidimetric Staphylococcus aureus 29737 1 3
Amphotericin B Cylinder Plate Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 19 19
Bacitracin Cylinder Plate Micrococcus luteus 10240 1 2 1
Candicidin Turbidimetric Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 19 2 13
Capreomycin Turbidimetric Klebsiella pneumoniae 10031 1 3
Carbenicillin Cylinder Plate Pseudomonas aeruginosa 25619 1 9 10
Cephalothin Cylinder Plate Staphylococcus aureus 29737 1 2 1
Cephapirin Cylinder Plate Staphylococcus aureus 29737 1 2 1
Chloramphenicol Turbidimetric Escherichia coli 10536 1 3
Chlortetracycline Turbidimetric Staphylococcus aureus 29737 1 3
Cloxacillin Cylinder Plate Staphylococcus aureus 29737 1 2 1
Colistimethate, sodium Cylinder Plate Bordetella bronchiseptica 4617 1 9 10
Colistin Cylinder Plate Bordetella bronchiseptica 4617 1 9 10
Cycloserine Turbidimetric Staphylococcus aureus 29737 1 3
Demeclyocycline Turbidimetric Staphylococcus aureus 29737 1 3
Dihydro- Cylinder Plate Bacillus subtilis 6633 32* 5 5
streptomycin Turbidimetric Klebsiella pneumoniae 10031 1 3
Doxycycline Turbidimetric Staphylococcus aureus 29737 1 3
Erythromycin Cylinder Plate Micrococcus luteus 9341 1 11 11
Gentamicin Cylinder Plate Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 1 11 11
Gramicidin Turbidimetric Enterococcus hirae 10541 3 3
Kanamycin Turbidimetric Staphylococcus aureus 29737 1 3
Methacycline Turbidimetric Staphylococcus aureus 29737 1 3
Nafcillin Cylinder Plate Staphylococcus aureus 29737 1 2 1
Neomycin Cylinder Plate Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 1 11 11
Neomycin Turbidimetric Klebsiella pneumoniae 10031 1 39**
Netilmicin Cylinder Plate Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 1 11 11
Novobiocin Cylinder Plate Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 1 2 1
Nystatin Cylinder Plate Saccharomyces cerevisiae 2601 19 19
Oxytetracycline Turbidimetric Staphylococcus aureus 29737 1 3
Paromomycin Cylinder Plate Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 1 11 11
Penicillin G Cylinder Plate Staphylococcus aureus 29737 1 2 1
Polymyxin B Cylinder Plate Bordetella bronchiseptica 4617 1 9 10
Rolitetracycline Turbidimetric Staphylococcus aureus 29737 1 3
Sisomicin Cylinder Plate Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 1 11 11
Streptomycin Turbidimetric Klebsiella pneumoniae 10031 1 3
Tetracycline Turbidimetric Staphylococcus aureus 29737 1 3
Tobramycin Turbidimetric Staphylococcus aureus 29737 1 3
Troleandomycin Turbidimetric Klebsiella pneumoniae 10031 1 3
Tylosin Turbidimetric Staphylococcus aureus 9144 3 39**
Vancomycin Cylinder Plate Bacillus subtilis 6633 32* 8 8
* Same as Medium 1, except for the additional ingredient of 300 mg of manganese sulfate.
** Same as Medium 3, except that the final pH after autoclaving is 7.9 0.1.

Difco Antibiotic Medium 12 Difco Antibiotic Medium 19

Approximate Formula* Per Liter Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Extract ................................................................ 2.5 g Beef Extract ................................................................ 2.4 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g Yeast Extract .............................................................. 4.7 g
Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g Peptone ..................................................................... 9.4 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 10.0 g Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 10.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 25.0 g Agar ......................................................................... 23.5 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
BBL Sabouraud Liquid Broth, Modified
(Antibiotic Medium 13)
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 5.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g

55
Section III
A Antibiotic Assay Media, cont.

Directions for Preparation from Cylinder Plate Assay

Dehydrated Product Use 20 100 mm glass or plastic Petri dishes with sufficient
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water: depth so that cylinders used in the assay will not be pushed
Difco Antibiotic Medium 1 30.5 g; into the medium by the cover.
Difco Antibiotic Medium 2 25.5 g; Use stainless steel or porcelain assay cylinders having the
Difco Antibiotic Medium 3 17.5 g; following dimensions ( 0.1 mm): 8 mm outside diameter,
BBL Antibiotic Assay Broth 6 mm inside diameter and 10 mm long.2 Carefully clean the
(Antibiotic Medium 3) 17.5 g; cylinders to remove all residues, using an occasional acid bath
Difco Antibiotic Medium 4 26.5 g; (i.e., with approximately 2N nitric acid or with chromic acid).2
Difco Antibiotic Medium 5 25.5 g; Four or six cylinders are generally used per plate, evenly spaced
Difco Antibiotic Medium 8 25.5 g; on a 2.8 cm radius.
Difco Antibiotic Medium 9 50 g;
To assure accurate assays, work on a level surface to obtain
Difco Antibiotic Medium 10 52 g;
uniformly thick base and seed layers in the Petri dish. Allow
Difco Antibiotic Medium 11 30.5 g;
the base layer to solidify and then overlay the seed layer con-
Difco Antibiotic Medium 12 62.5 g;
taining a proper concentration of the test organism. The amount
BBL Sabourand Liquid Broth, Modified
of medium in the layers varies for different antibiotics, with
(Antibiotic Medium 13) 30 g;
most assays specifying a 21 mL base layer and a 4 mL seed
Difco Antibiotic Medium 19 60 g.
layer. In any case, dishes with flat bottoms are required to
Mix thoroughly.
assure complete coverage of the bottom of the dish when small
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
amounts of base medium are used. Tilt the plate to obtain
pletely dissolve the powder.
even coverage of the base layer by the seed layer and allow it
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
to solidify in a level position. Plates should be used the same
4. To raise the pH of Antibiotic Medium 11 to 8.3 0.1, cool
day as prepared.
the base to 45-50C and add NaOH.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Turbidimetric Assay
stable, typical control cultures. Use glass or plastic test tubes (i.e., 16 125 mm or 18 150
mm) that are relatively uniform in length, diameter and thick-
Procedure ness and substantially free from surface blemishes.2 Tubes that
Test Organism Preparation will be placed in the spectrophotometer should be matched
Maintain stock cultures on agar slants and make transfers and free of scratches or blemishes.2 Clean the tubes thoroughly
at 1- or 2-week intervals. Prepare the inoculum for assay by to remove all antibiotic residues and traces of cleaning solu-
washing growth from a fresh 24-48 hour agar slant using tion and, prior to subsequent use, sterilize tubes that have been
sterile purified water, saline or Antibiotic Medium 3 and previously used.2
further dilute the culture to obtain the desired organism Prepare working dilutions of the antibiotic reference standards
concentration. In some turbidimetric assays, an 18- to 24-hour in specific concentrations. To a 1 mL quantity of each solution
culture of the test organism in Antibiotic Medium 3, diluted in a suitable tube, add 9 mL of inoculated broth, as required.
to obtain the optimal number of organisms, is used. Prepare similar solutions of the assay materials containing
When Bacillus subtilis is used as the test organism, inoculate it approximately the same amounts of antibiotic activity and place
on Antibiotic Medium 1 and incubate at 37C for 1 week, in tubes. Incubate the tubes for 3-4 hours at the required
wash spores from the agar surface, and heat the spores at 56C temperature, generally in a water bath. At the end of the
for 30 minutes. Wash the spores three times in purified water, incubation period, stop growth by adding 0.5 mL of 1:3
heat again at 65C for 30 minutes, and then dilute to the formalin. Determine the amount of growth by measuring light
optimal concentration. This inoculum preparation should transmittance with a suitable spectrophotometer. Determine
produce a sharp zone in the assay. the concentration of the antibiotic by comparing the growth
obtained with that given by reference standard solutions.
Antibiotic Medium 1 modified by the addition of 300 mg
manganese sulfate (MnSO4H2O) per liter often aids the For a complete discussion of antibiotic assay methods, refer to
sporulation of B. subtilis and may be used in preparing the appropriate procedures outlined in the references.2,3,7
spore suspension. A standardized spore suspension prepared
from B. subtilis ATCC 6633 is available as PKU Subtilis Spore Expected Results
Suspension. Refer to appropriate procedures for results.2,3,7
When B. cereus var. mycoides is required, inoculate the organism
on Antibiotic Medium 1 and incubate at 30C for 1 week. Wash
and prepare the spores as for B. subtilis, above.

56
 Arylsulfatase Broth
A
References Difco Antibiotic Medium 5
1. Grove and Randall. 1955. Assay methods of antibiotics. Medical Encyclopedia, Inc. New York, N.Y. AOAC USP
2. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The Cat. No. 227710 Dehydrated 500 g
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
3. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. 1. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
Difco Antibiotic Medium 8

4. Abraham, Chain, Fletcher, Florey, Gardner, Heatley and Jennings. 1941. Lancett ii:177. AOAC USP
5. Foster and Woodruff. 1943. J. Bacteriol. 46:187.
6. Schmidt and Moyer. 1944. J. Bacteriol. 47:199.
Cat. No. 266710 Dehydrated 500 g
7. Council of Europe. 2002. European pharmacopeia, 4th ed. Council of Europe, Strasbourgh, France.
8. Kirshbaum and Arret. 1967. J. Pharm. Sci. 56:512. Difco Antibiotic Medium 9

9. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American EP USP
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Cat. No. 246210 Dehydrated 500 g

Availability Difco Antibiotic Medium 10

Difco Antibiotic Medium 1 EP USP

Cat. No. 246310 Dehydrated 500 g*
AOAC EP USP
Cat. No. 226340 Dehydrated 500 g Difco Antibiotic Medium 11

Difco Antibiotic Medium 2 AOAC USP

Cat. No. 259310 Dehydrated 500 g
AOAC USP
Cat. No. 227020 Dehydrated 500 g Difco Antibiotic Medium 12

Difco Antibiotic Medium 3

Cat. No. 266910 Dehydrated 500 g
AOAC EP USP BBL Sabouraud Liquid Broth, Modified
Cat. No. 224320 Dehydrated 500 g (Antibiotic Medium 13)
224310 Dehydrated 2 kg AOAC USP
BBL Antibiotic Assay Broth (Antibiotic Medium 3) Cat. No. 210986 Dehydrated 500 g
221014 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10
AOAC EP USP
Cat. No. 210932 Dehydrated 500 g Difco Antibiotic Medium 19
Difco Antibiotic Medium 4
EP USP
Cat. No. 243100 Dehydrated 500 g
AOAC USP
Cat. No. 224410 Dehydrated 500 g PKU Subtilis Spore Suspension
Cat. No. 212901 Vial 100 1 mL*
*Store at 2-8C.

Arylsulfatase Broth (0.001 M and 0.003 M)

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Arylsulfatase Broths are chemically-defined media used in Arylsulfatase Broth consists of Middlebrook 7H9 Broth supple-
the differentiation of pathogenic mycobacteria based on their mented with tripotassium phenolphthalein disulfate.
ability to produce arylsulfatase. Middlebrook 7H9 Broth is composed of inorganic compounds
and albumin-dextrose enrichment to supply minerals and other
The 0.001 M Arylsulfatase Broth is used in a 3-day test to
nutrients necessary to support the growth of mycobacteria.
detect arylsulfatase activity in rapidly-growing mycobacteria.
The 0.003 M Arylsulfatase Broth is used in a 14-day test for Tripotassium phenolphthalein disulfate is the substrate for the
the detection of arylsulfatase in slow-growing mycobacteria. enzyme reaction. Arylsulfatase degrades the phenolphthalein
substrate, producing free phenolphthalein, a pH indicator that
Summary and Explanation becomes pink to red when the medium is made alkaline by the
Arylsulfatase is produced by many mycobacterial species in addition of sodium carbonate.
varying concentrations.1-3 The ability to produce a detectable
level of arylsulfatase is a biochemical characteristic used in the Precaution8
differentiation of some Mycobacterium spp.4-7 Biosafety Level 2 practices and procedures, containment equip-
ment and facilities are required for non-aerosol-producing
The test is performed by inoculating a broth containing
manipulations of clinical specimens such as preparation of
tripotassium phenolphthalein disulfate with a Mycobacterium
acid-fast smears. All aerosol-generating activities must be
isolate. If arylsulfatase is produced, it splits the phenolphthalein
conducted in a Class I or II biological safety cabinet. Biosafety
substrate, releasing free phenolphthalein, which turns pink to
Level 3 practices, containment equipment and facilities are
red when alkali is added to the medium.
required for laboratory activities in the propagation and
The 0.001 M broth is used for rapidly-growing arylsulfatase manipulation of cultures of M. tuberculosis and M. bovis.
producers, such as M. fortuitum and M. chelonae.7 Animal studies also require special procedures.
The 0.003 M broth is used for slow-growing mycobacteria
such as M. flavescens, M. marinum, M. smegmatis, M. szulgai,
M. trivale and M. xenopi.7
57
Section III
A Arylsulfatase Broth, cont.

Procedure Expected Results

The test procedures are those recommended by the Centers A change in the color of the medium to pink or red following
for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) for primary the addition of sodium carbonate is a positive reaction. The
isolation from specimens containing mycobacteria.4 N-Acetyl- medium remains colorless if the reaction is negative.
L-cysteine-sodium hydroxide (NALC-NaOH) solution is
recommended as a gentle, but effective, digesting and decon- References
1. Whitehead, Wildy and Engbaek. 1953. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 65: 451.
taminating agent. These reagents are provided in the BBL 2. Kubica and Vestal. 1961. Am. Rev. Respir. Dis. 83: 728.
MycoPrep Specimen Digestion/Decontamination Kit. For 3.
4.
Kubica and Rigdon. 1961. Am. Rev. Respir. Dis. 83: 737.
Cernoch, Enns, Saubolle and Wallace. 1994. Cumitech 16A, Laboratory diagnosis of mycobacterioses.
detailed decontamination and culturing instructions, Coord. ed., Weissfeld. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. Kent and Kubica. 1985. Public health mycobacteriology: a guide for the level III laboratory. USDHHS.
consult an appropriate reference.4-7 Centers for Disease Control, Atlanta, Ga.
6. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
Inoculate the broth with 0.1 mL of a 7-day liquid culture or 7.
St. Louis, Mo.
Nolte, Metchock and Wallace. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
heavily inoculate with organisms cultured on a solid medium. of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
8. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
Incubate the tubes at 35C in an aerobic atmosphere without No. (CD) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
added CO2. Remove the 0.001 M broth after 3 days and add
no more than six drops of 1 M sodium carbonate solution Availability
(10.6 g anhydrous Na2CO3 in 100 mL of water), and observe BBL Arylsulfatase Broth (0.001 M)
for a color change. Cat. No. 295654 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10*
BBL Arylsulfatase Broth (0.003 M)

Incubate the 0.003 M broth for 14 days, then remove and add
Cat. No. 297156 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10*
six drops of the 1 M sodium carbonate solution. Observe for *Store at 2-8C.
a color change.

Aspergillus Differential Agar

Intended Use for Aspergillus species. Using a sterile inoculating loop or
Aspergillus Differential Agar is used in the differentiation of needle, pick several isolated colonies and streak the surface of
Aspergillus species based on pigmentation. the slant. Incubate the tubes at 25C for up to 10 days to
allow sufficient time for pigmentation to develop.
Summary and Explanation
Bothast and Fennel developed Aspergillus Differential Agar Expected Results
as a screening medium to detect pigment produced under Examine the medium for typical growth and pigmentation.
colonies of Aspergillus flavus (flavus group).1 The yellow- A. flavus produces a yellow-orange pigment under colonies.
orange pigment differentiates A. flavus from most other
Aspergillus species and from organisms of other genera.1-3 Some Limitation of the Procedure
other Aspergillus species may also produce a yellow-orange A. parasiticus, another species associated with aspergillosis,4
pigment indistinguishable from the pigment produced by as well as some other aspergilli (i.e., A. sulphureus,
A. flavus.1-3 A. sclerotiorum and A. thomii) may also produce a yellow-
orange pigment that is indistinguishable from the pigment
Principles of the Procedure produced by A. flavus.1,3
Aspergillus Differential Agar contains an enzymatic digest of
casein to provide amino acids and other nitrogenous substances. References
1. Bothast and Fennel. 1974. Mycologia. 66:365.
Yeast extract primarily supplies the B-complex vitamins. Fer- 2. Haley and Callaway. 1978. Laboratory methods in medical mycology, 4th ed. Center for Disease
Control, Atlanta, Ga.
ric citrate is essential for the production of a bright, yellow- 3. McGinnis. 1980. Laboratory handbook of medical mycology. Academic Press, New York, N.Y.
4. Kennedy and Sigler. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
orange pigment that differentiates A. flavus from most other microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
clinically significant Aspergillus species.1
Availability
Procedure BBL Aspergillus Differential Agar
The isolate to be differentiated should be stained Cat. No. 297244 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10
with lactophenol cotton blue or an appropriate fungal stain
and examined to confirm that morphology is appropriate

58
 Azide Blood Agar Base
A
Azide Blood Agar Base
Intended Use Azide Blood Agar Base is used in the isolation of gram-
Azide Blood Agar Base is used for isolating streptococci and positive organisms from clinical and nonclinical specimens.
staphylococci and, supplemented with blood, for determining Azide Blood Agar Base can be supplemented with 5-10% sheep,
hemolytic reactions. rabbit or horse blood for isolating, cultivating and determining
hemolytic reactions of fastidious pathogens.
Summary and Explanation
In 1933, Edwards1 used a liquid medium containing crystal Principles of the Procedure
violet and sodium azide as a selective broth in the isolation of Peptones and beef extract provide nitrogen, vitamins, carbon
mastitis streptococci. Snyder and Lichstein2,3 reported that and amino acids. Sodium chloride maintains osmotic balance.
0.01% sodium azide in blood agar prevented the swarming Sodium azide is the selective agent, suppressing the growth
of Proteus species, and permitted the isolation of streptococci of gram-negative bacteria. Agar is the solidifying agent.
from mixed bacterial populations. Packer4 modified Edwards Supplementation with 5-10% blood provides additional growth
medium and prepared Infusion Blood Agar containing 1:15,000 factors for fastidious microorganisms, and is used to
sodium azide and 1:500,000 crystal violet for the study determine hemolytic patterns of bacteria.
of bovine mastitis. Mallmann, Botwright and Churchill5
reported that sodium azide exerted a bacteriostatic effect Formula
on gram-negative bacteria. The Azide Blood Agar Base formu- Difco Azide Blood Agar Base
lation was based on the work of these researchers. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 4.0 g
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.8 g
User Quality Control Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Identity Specifications Sodium Azide ............................................................. 0.2 g
Difco Azide Blood Agar Base Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, homogeneous. *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Solution: 3.3% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light Directions for Preparation from
to medium amber, very slight to
slightly opalescent.
Dehydrated Product
Prepared Appearance: PlainLight to medium amber, very
1. Suspend 33 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
slightly opalescent. Mix thoroughly.
With 5% bloodCherry red, opaque. 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Reaction of 3.3% completely dissolve the powder.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. To prepare blood agar, aseptically add 5% sterile defibrinated
Cultural Response
blood to the medium when cooled to 45-50C. Mix well.
Difco Azide Blood Agar Base
Prepare the medium per label directions, without and with 5% sterile
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
defibrinated sheep blood. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C under stable, typical control cultures.
appropriate atmospheric conditions for 18-48 hours.
INOCULUM Procedure
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY HEMOLYSIS 1. Process each specimen as appropriate, and inoculate directly
Enterococcus onto the surface of the medium. Streak for isolation with
faecalis 19433 102-103 Good Alpha/gamma
an inoculating loop, then stab the agar several times to
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Inhibition
Staphylococcus
deposit beta-hemolytic streptococci beneath the agar
aureus 25923 102-103 Good Beta surface. Subsurface growth will display the most reliable
Staphylococcus hemolytic reactions demonstrating both oxygen-stable and
epidermidis 12228 102-103 Good Gamma oxygen-labile streptolysins.6
Streptococcus 2. Incubate plates aerobically, anaerobically or under condi-
pneumoniae 6305 102-103 Good Alpha
tions of increased CO2 in accordance with established
Streptococcus
pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good Beta laboratory procedures.

59
Section III
A Azide Blood Agar Base, cont.

Expected Results References

1. Edwards. 1933. J. Comp. Pathol. Therap. 46:211.
Examine plates for growth and hemolytic reactions after 2. Snyder and Lichstein. 1940. J. Infect. Dis. 67:113.
18-24 and 40-48 hours of incubation. Four different types of 3.
4.
Lichstein and Snyder. 1941. J. Bacteriol. 42:653.
Packer. 1943. J. Infect. Dis. 67:113.
hemolysis on blood agar media can be described:7 5. Mallmann, Botwright and Churchill. 1943. J. Bacteriol. 46:343.
6. Ruoff, Whiley and Beighton. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
a. Alpha ()-hemolysis is the reduction of hemoglobin to 7. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
methemoglobin in the medium surrounding the colony, Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

causing a greenish discolorization of the medium.

b. Beta()-hemolysis is the lysis of red blood cells, resulting
Availability
Difco Azide Blood Agar Base
in a clear zone surrounding the colony.
Cat. No. 240920 Dehydrated 500 g
c. Gamma()-hemolysis indicates no hemolysis. No destruction
of red blood cells occurs, and there is no change in the
medium.
d. Alpha-prime ()-hemolysis is a small zone of complete
hemolysis that is surrounded by an area of partial lysis.

Limitations of the Procedure

1. Azide Blood Agar Base is intended for selective use and
should be inoculated in parallel with nonselective media.
2. Hemolytic patterns of streptococci grown on Azide Blood
Agar Base are somewhat different than those observed on
ordinary blood agar. Sodium azide enhances hemolysis.
Alpha and beta zones may be extended.4
3. Hemolytic patterns may vary with the source of animal
blood or base medium used.6

Azide Dextrose Broth

Intended Use Group D streptococci grow in the presence of azide, ferment
Azide Dextrose Broth is used for cultivating streptococci in glucose and cause turbidity.
water and wastewater.
Formula
Summary and Explanation Difco Azide Dextrose Broth
The formula for Azide Dextrose Broth originated with Rothe Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Extract ................................................................ 4.5 g
at the Illinois State Health Department.1 In a comparative Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 7.5 g
study, Mallmann and Seligmann2 investigated the detection of Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 7.5 g
streptococci in water and wastewater using Azide Dextrose Dextrose ..................................................................... 7.5 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 7.5 g
Broth. Their work supported use of the medium in determin- Sodium Azide ............................................................. 0.2 g
ing the presence of streptococci in water, wastewater, shellfish *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
and other materials. Azide Dextrose Broth has also been used
for primary isolation of streptococci from foodstuffs3,4 and Directions for Preparation from
other specimens of sanitary significance as an indication of Dehydrated Product
fecal contamination. 1. Dissolve 34.7 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water for
the preparation of single-strength broth for inoculation of
Azide Dextrose Broth is specified for use in the presumptive
samples of 10 mL or smaller. Use 69.4 g for 1 L of double-
test of water and wastewater for fecal streptococci by the
strength broth for samples larger than 10 mL.
Multiple-Tube Technique.5
2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Principles of the Procedure
stable, typical control cultures.
Azide Dextrose Broth contains beef extract and peptones as
sources of carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Dextrose
is a fermentable carbohydrate. Sodium chloride maintains the
osmotic balance of the medium. Sodium azide inhibits cyto-
chrome oxidase in gram-negative bacteria.

60
 Azide Dextrose Broth, cont.
A
User Quality Control
Identity Specifications
Difco Azide Dextrose Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.47% (single strength) solution,
soluble in purified water. Solution
is light amber, clear to very slightly opal-
escent.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to very slightly
opalescent.
Reaction of 3.47%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Azide Dextrose Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-24 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Enterococcus faecalis 19433 102-103 Good Uninoculated Enterococcus faecalis
Tube ATCC 29212
Escherichia coli 25922 3102-103 Inhibition

Procedure5 References
1. Rothe. 1948. Illinois State Health Department.
1. Inoculate a series of Azide Dextrose Broth tubes with 2. Mallmann and Seligmann. 1950. Am. J. Public Health 40:286.
appropriately graduated quantities of sample. Use sample 3.
4.
Larkin, Litsky and Fuller. 1955. Appl. Microbiol. 3:98.
Splittstoesser, Wright and Hucker. 1961. Appl. Microbiol. 9:303.
quantities of 10 mL or less. Use double-strength broth for 5. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
10 mL inocula. Consult an appropriate reference for 6. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
suggested sample sizes.5
2. Incubate inoculated tubes at 35 2C for 20-48 hours. Availability
3. Examine each tube for turbidity at the end of 24 2 hours. Difco Azide Dextrose Broth
If no turbidity is evident, reincubate and read again at the SMWW
end of 48 3 hours. Cat. No. 238710 Dehydrated 500 g

Expected Results
A positive test is indicated by turbidity (cloudiness) in the broth.
A negative test remains clear.
All Azide Dextrose Broth tubes showing turbidity after 24- or
48-hours of incubation must be subjected to the Confirmed
Test Procedure. Consult appropriate references for details
of the Confirmed Test Procedure5 and further identification
of Enterococcus.5,6

Limitations of the Procedure

1. Azide Dextrose Broth is used to detect presumptive
evidence of fecal contamination. Further biochemical
testing must be done for confirmation.
2. For inoculum sizes of 10 mL or larger, use double strength
medium to prevent dilution of ingredients.5,6

61
Section III
B B12 Assay Medium

B12 Assay Medium

Intended Use cultivation of L. delbrueckii subsp. lactis ATCC 7830. To obtain
This medium conforms with specifications of The United States a standard curve, USP Cyanocobalamin Reference is added in
Pharmacopeia (USP). specified increasing concentrations giving a growth response
that can be measured titrimetrically or turbidimetrically.
B12 Assay Medium is used for determining vitamin B12 concen-
tration by the microbiological assay technique. Formula
Difco B12 Assay Medium
Summary and Explanation Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Vitamin assay media are used in the microbiological assay of Vitamin Assay Casamino Acids ................................. 15.0 g
vitamins. Three types of media are used for this purpose: Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g
Asparagine ................................................................. 0.2 g
1. Maintenance Media: For carrying the stock culture to Sodium Acetate ....................................................... 20.0 g
preserve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism Ascorbic Acid ............................................................. 4.0 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.4 g
for its intended purpose; DL-Tryptophan ........................................................... 0.4 g
2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for immediate Adenine Sulfate ....................................................... 20.0 mg
use; Guanine Hydrochloride ............................................ 20.0 mg
Uracil ........................................................................ 20.0 mg
3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the vitamin under Xanthine .................................................................. 20.0 mg
test. They contain all the factors necessary for optimal Riboflavin ................................................................... 1.0 mg
growth of the test organism except the single essential Thiamine Hydrochloride ............................................. 1.0 mg
Biotin ....................................................................... 10.0 g
vitamin to be determined. Niacin ......................................................................... 2.0 mg
B12 Assay Medium is used in the microbiological assay of p-Aminobenzoic Acid ................................................. 2.0 mg
Calcium Pantothenate ................................................ 1.0 mg
vitamin B12 according to the procedures of the Vitamin B12 Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ............................................ 4.0 mg
Activity Assay in the USP 1 and the Cobalamin (Vitamin B12 Pyridoxal Hydrochloride .............................................. 4.0 mg
Activity) Assay in the Official Methods of Analysis of AOAC Pyridoxamine Hydrochloride ................................... 800.0 g
Folic Acid ............................................................... 200.0 g
International (AOAC).2 Lactobacillus delbrueckii subsp. lactis Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
ATCC 7830 (Lactobacillus leichmannii) is the test organism Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g
used in this procedure. Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.4 g
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 20.0 mg
Ferrous Sulfate ......................................................... 20.0 mg
Principles of the Procedure Manganese Sulfate .................................................. 20.0 mg
B12 Assay Medium is a vitamin B12-free dehydrated medium Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 2.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
containing all other nutrients and vitamins essential for the
Precautions
User Quality Control Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media
Identity Specifications or glassware in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely
Difco B12 Assay Medium small amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give
Dehydrated Appearance: Very light to light beige, homoge- erroneous results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from
neous, with a tendency to clump. detergents and other chemicals must be used. Glassware must
Solution: 4.25% (single strength) solution, be heated to 250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic
soluble in purified water upon residues that might be present. Take precautions to keep
boiling for 2-3 minutes. Solution is
light amber, clear, may have a slight sterilization and cooling conditions uniform throughout the
precipitate. assay.
Prepared Appearance: Very light to light amber, clear, may
have a slight precipitate. Directions for Preparation from
Reaction of 4.25%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.0 0.1 Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 8.5 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water.
Cultural Response 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 2-3 minutes to
Difco B12 Assay Medium completely dissolve the powder.
Prepare the medium per label directions. The medium supports the 3. Dispense in 5 mL amounts into tubes, evenly dispersing
growth of Lactobacillus delbrueckii subsp. lactis ATCC 7830 when
prepared in single strength and supplemented with cyanocobalamin the precipitate.
(vitamin B12). The medium should produce a standard curve when tested 4. Add standard or test samples.
with a cyanocabalamin reference standard at 0.0 to 0.25 ng per 5. Adjust the tube volume to 10 mL with purified water.
10 mL. Incubate tubes with caps loosened at 35-37C for 16-24 hours.
Read the percent transmittance using a spectrophotometer at 530 nm. 6. Autoclave at 121C for 5 minutes.

62
 B12 Culture Agar

Procedure the average of these volumes. Use only those values that do
Follow assay procedures as outlined in USP1 or AOAC.2 Use not vary more than 10% from the average and use the
levels of B12 in the preparation of the standard curve according results only if two-thirds of the values do not vary more
to these references. It is essential that a standard curve be con- than 10%.
structed each time an assay is run. Autoclave and incubation
conditions can influence the standard curve reading and cannot Limitations of the Procedure B
always be duplicated. Generally satisfactory results are obtained 1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium
with B12 at the following levels: 0.0, 0.025, 0.05, 0.075, 0.1, must be cultured and maintained on media recommended
0.125, 0.15, 0.2 and 0.25 ng per assay tube (10 mL). for this purpose.
2. For successful results to these procedures, all conditions of
Stock cultures of L. delbrueckii subsp. lactis ATCC 7830 are
the assay must be followed precisely.
prepared by stab inoculation into 10 mL of B12 Culture Agar
3. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the assay
or Lactobacilli Agar AOAC. After 16-24 hours incubation at
procedure.
35-37C, the cultures are kept refrigerated. The inoculum for
4. The use of altered or deficient media may cause mutants
assay is prepared by subculturing a stock culture of
having different nutritional requirements and will not give
L. delbrueckii subsp. lactis into 10 mL of B12 Inoculum Broth.
a satisfactory response.
For a complete discussion on B12 Culture Agar and B12
Inoculum Broth, refer to USP.1 References
1. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
Expected Results national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
2. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. II. AOAC
1. Prepare a standard concentration response curve by plotting International, Gaithersburg, Md.

the response readings against the amount of standard in each

tube, disk or cup.
Availability
Difco B12 Assay Medium
2. Determine the amount of vitamin at each level of assay
AOAC USP
solution by interpolation from the standard curve. Cat. No. 245710 Dehydrated 100 g*
3. Calculate the concentration of vitamin in the sample from *Store at 2-8C.

B12 Culture Agar B12 Inoculum Broth

Intended Use Lactobacillus species grow poorly on nonselective culture
These media conform with specifications of The United States media and require special nutrients. Mickle and Breed2 reported
Pharmacopeia (USP). the use of tomato juice in culture media for lactobacilli. Kulp,3
while investigating the use of tomato juice on bacterial devel-
B 12 Culture Agar is used for cultivating Lactobacillus
opment, found that growth of Lactobacillus acidophilus was
delbrueckii subsp. lactis ATCC 7830 used in the Vitamin B12
enhanced.
Activity Assay.
B12 Culture Agar is recommended for maintaining stock
B12 Inoculum Broth is used for preparing the inoculum of
cultures of L. delbrueckii subsp. lactis ATCC 7830 (Lactoba-
L. delbrueckii subsp. lactis ATCC 7830 used in theVitamin
cillus leichmannii) for use in the Vitamin B12 Activity Assay
B12 Activity Assay.
according to the USP.1
Summary and Explanation B12 Inoculum Broth is used for preparing the inoculum of
Vitamin assay media are prepared for use in the microbiological L. delbrueckii subsp. lactis ATCC 7830 in the microbiological
assay of vitamins. Three types of media are used for this purpose: assay of vitamin B12 according to the USP.1
1. Maintenance Media: For carrying the stock culture to
Principles of the Procedure
preserve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism for
Peptone provides the nitrogen and amino acids in B12 Culture
its intended purpose;
Agar and B12 Inoculum Broth. Yeast extract is the vitamin
2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for immediate
source in the formulas. Tomato juice is added to create the
use;
proper acidic environment. Dextrose is the carbon source, and
3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the vitamin under
polysorbate 80 acts as an emulsifier. Dipotassium phosphate
test. They contain all the factors necessary for optimal growth
acts as the buffering agent in B12 Inoculum Broth, and
of the test organism except the single essential vitamin to be
monopotassium phosphate is the buffering agent in B12
determined.
Culture Agar. Agar is the solidifying agent in B12 Culture Agar.

63
Section III
B B12 Culture Agar, cont.

Formulae Directions for Preparation from

Difco B12 Culture Agar Dehydrated Product
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
Tomato Juice (from 100 mL) ....................................... 5.0 g
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 7.5 g Difco B12 Culture Agar 47 g;
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 7.5 g Difco B12 Inoculum Broth 32 g.
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g Mix thoroughly.
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 2.0 g
Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 1.0 g 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Agar ......................................................................... 14.0 g completely dissolve the powder.
Difco B12 Inoculum Broth 3. Dispense 10 mL amounts into tubes.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Tomato Juice (from 100 mL) ....................................... 5.0 g 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 7.5 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 7.5 g stable, typical control cultures.
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.0 g Procedure
Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 0.1 g For a complete discussion of vitamin assay methodology, refer
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
to appropriate procedures outlined in the USP.1
Precautions
Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media Expected Results
or glassware in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely For test results of vitamin assay procedures refer to the USP.1
small amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give
erroneous results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from Limitations of the Procedure
detergents and other chemicals must be used. 1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium
must be cultured and maintained on media recommended
User Quality Control for this purpose.
2. For successful results of these procedures, all conditions of
Identity Specifications the assay must be followed precisely.
Difco B12 Culture Agar 3. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the assay
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. procedure.
Solution: 4.7% solution, soluble in purified 4. The use of altered or deficient media may cause mutants
water upon boiling. Solution is light to
medium amber, opalescent when hot, having different nutritional requirements that will not give
slightly opalescent with flocculent a satisfactory response.
precipitate when cooled.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal- References
escent, may have a slight flocculent 1. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
precipitate. national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
2. Mickle and Breed. 1925. Technical Bulletin 110, NY State Agriculture Ex. Station, Geneva, N.Y.
Reaction of 4.7% 3. Kulp and White. 1932. Science 76:17.
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.1
Difco B12 Inoculum Broth
Availability
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, homogeneous, tendency to Difco B12 Culture Agar
clump. USP
Solution: 3.2% solution, soluble in purified Cat. No. 254110 Dehydrated 100 g*
water upon boiling. Solution is medium
to dark amber, opalescent when
Difco B12 Inoculum Broth

hot, clear when cooled to room USP

temperature. Cat. No. 254210 Dehydrated 100 g*
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, clear. *Store at 2-8C.

Reaction of 3.2%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.1

Cultural Response
Difco B12 Culture Agar or B12 Inoculum Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 16-24 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Lactobacillus delbrueckii
subsp. lactis 7830 3102 -103 Good

64
 BAGG Broth

BAGG Broth
Intended Use SF Medium enhanced dextrose fermentation by Enterococcus
faecalis. Decreasing the concentration of bromcresol purple
BAGG Broth is used for presumptively identifying and
confirming fecal streptococci. allowed for easier detection of a color change within 24 hours. B
The BAGG Broth formulation made the original SF Medium
Summary and Explanation more useful in testing for fecal contamination of water and
In developing Buffered Azide Glucose Glycerol (BAGG) other materials.
Medium, Hajna1 modified the formula of SF Broth as speci-
fied by Hajna and Perry.2 Hajna found that adding glycerol to Principles of the Procedure
BAGG Broth contains peptones as sources for carbon,
User Quality Control nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Dextrose is a fermentable
carbohydrate. Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance
Identity Specifications of the medium. Sodium azide inhibits gram-negative bacteria.
Difco BAGG Broth Bromcresol purple is a pH indicator.
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige with a slight green tint,
free-flowing, homogeneous. Enterococci grow in the presence of azide and ferment glucose,
Solution: 3.6% solution, soluble in purified producing an acid pH that changes the color of the medium.
water containing 0.5% glycerol.
Solution is purple, clear. Formula
Prepared Appearance: Purple, clear. Difco BAGG Broth
Reaction of 3.6% Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2 Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 6.0 g
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 8.0 g
Cultural Response Soybean Peptone ....................................................... 4.0 g
Difco BAGG Broth Yeast Extract .............................................................. 2.0 g
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate tubes in duplicate Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g
and incubate one set at 35 2C and the other set at 45 1C for Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 4.0 g
18-48 hours. Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.5 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
INOCULUM Sodium Azide ............................................................. 0.5 g
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY ACID Bromcresol Purple .................................................... 15.0 mg
Enterococcus *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
faecalis 19433 102-103 Good + (yellow)
Enterococcus Directions for Preparation from
faecium 27270 102-103 Good + (yellow)
Dehydrated Product
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Marked to
complete inhibition 1. Dissolve 36 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water con-
Streptococcus taining 5 mL of glycerol. Rehydrate with proportionally
pyogenes 19615 103-2103 Marked to less water when liquid inocula will exceed 1 mL.
complete inhibition
2. Autoclave at 118C for 15 minutes.
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

Procedure1-3
1. Inoculate duplicate tubes with sample. Use single-strength
medium for inocula of 1 mL or less. Use double-strength
medium for inocula of 10 mL.
2. Incubate one set of tubes at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
Incubate the second set at 45 1C for 18-48 hours.
3. Read tubes for growth and acid production.

Expected Results1-3
1. A positive test is indicated by the production of a yellow color
(acid) throughout the medium. This result is presumptive
evidence of the presence of fecal streptococci. Further testing
must be performed to confirm this result. Consult appropri-
Uninoculated Enterococcus faecalis
Tube ATCC 29212 ate references for further identification of Enterococcus.3
2. A negative result is indicated by no change in the medium
(purple color).
65
Section III
B BAGG Broth, cont.

References Availability
1. Hajna. 1951. Public Health Lab. 9:80.
2. Hajna and Perry. 1943. Am. J. Public Health 33:550.
Difco BAGG Broth
3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria, Cat. No. 211841 Dehydrated 500 g
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Difco Glycerol

Cat. No. 228210 Bottle 100 g

228220 Bottle 500 g

BCYE Agars
BCYE Agar Base BCYE Agar BCYE Differential Agar
BCYE Selective Agars (CCVC, PAC, PAV)
Intended Use BCYE Differential Agar is used for the presumptive identifica-
These media are used in qualitative procedures for isolation of tion and differentiation of Legionella spp. based on colony
Legionella species from clinical specimens and nonclinical morphology and color.5 This medium is based on the formu-
(environmental) samples. lation of Vickers et al.,6 and consists of the dyes bromcresol
purple and bromthymol blue added to BCYE Agar.
Summary and Explanation BCYE Selective Agar w/CCVC is highly selective medium
BCYE Agar is based on Edelsteins modification of previously consisting of BYCE Agar supplemented with cephalothin,
described media. In 1979, Feely et al. described Charcoal Yeast colistin, vancomycin and cycloheximide. This medium is based
Extract (CYE) Agar as a modification of an existing medium, on the formulation of Bopp et al.7 They obtained improved
F-G Agar.1,2 They replaced the starch in the F-G Agar with recovery of L. pneumophila by using the selective medium
activated charcoal and substituted yeast extract for casein in conjunction with an acid wash treatment to reduce the
hydrolysate, resulting in better recovery of L. pneumophila. contaminating microbial flora present in environmental water
In 1980, Pasculle reported that CYE Agar could be improved samples.
by buffering the medium with ACES Buffer.3 A year later,
Edelstein further increased the sensitivity of the medium by BCYE Selective Agar with PAC was developed by Edelstein
adding alpha-ketoglutarate (BCYE Agar).4 for isolation of Legionella spp. from specimens containing

Legionella pneumophila
User Quality Control ATCC 33152

Identity Specifications
BBL BCYE Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine to coarse, homogeneous, free of
extraneous material.
Solution: 3.83% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is dark,
black-green to gray-black, moderately
hazy to opaque.
Prepared Appearance: Dark, black-green to gray-black, mod-
erately hazy to opaque.
Reaction of 3.83%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.85 0.1

Cultural Response
BBL BCYE Agar Base
Prepare the medium per label directions. For E. coli, inoculate and
incubate at 35 2C for 66-72 hours. For Legionella spp., inoculate test
and control lots of medium with serial 10-fold dilutions of the test
organisms and incubate at 35 2C for 66 - 72 hours. Growth on the
test lot should be within 1 log of the control lot.
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY FLUORESCENCE
Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good
Legionella bozemanii 33217 N/A Good (white-gray to Blue-white
blue-gray colonies)
Legionella pneumophila 33152 N/A Good Yellow green

66
 BCYE Agars, cont.

mixed flora.4 He found that BYCE Agar supplemented with 5. Cool to 45 - 50C and add 4 mL of a 10% filter-sterilized-
polymyxin B, cefamandole and anisomycin enhanced the solution of L-cysteine HCl.
recovery of L. pneumophila from contaminated clinical 6. Mix thoroughly. Check pH; if not 6.85 0.1, adjust using
specimens. In conjunction with an acid wash treatment to 1 N HCl or KOH.
reduce microbial flora, it also facilitated the recovery of the 7. Dispense into Petri dishes. Agitate while dispensing to keep
bacterium from potable water. charcoal in suspension. B
8. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
BCYE Selective Agar with PAV is similar to the Edelstein
stable, typical control cultures.
formula, above, except that the concentration of polymyxin B
is reduced by half, and vancomycin is substituted for
Procedure
cefamandole.
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
Principles of the Procedure specimens and samples.
These media consist of a base medium (BCYE) supplemented Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar side up) at
with antibiotics or dyes. Antibiotics improve the recovery 35 2C for a minimum of 3 days. Growth is usually visible
of Legionella spp. by inhibiting the growth of contaminating within 3-4 days, but may take up to 2 weeks to appear.
organisms. Dyes facilitate differentiation and identification
of Legionella spp. Expected Results
On BCYE Agar and the selective media, Legionella
The base medium contains yeast extract to supply the nutrients
pneumophila produces small to large, smooth, colorless to pale,
necessary to support bacterial growth. L-cysteine HCl, ferric
blue-gray, slightly mucoid colonies that fluoresce yellow-green
pyrophosphate and alpha-ketoglutarate are incorporated to
under long-wave UV light. Consult references for morphology
satisfy the specific nutritional requirements of Legionella
and color of fluorescence of other species.8,9
species. The activated charcoal decomposes hydrogen peroxide,
a toxic metabolic product, and may also collect carbon dioxide On BCYE Differential Agar, L. pneumophila produces light
and modify surface tension. The addition of the buffer helps main- blue colonies with a pale green tint. L. micdadei produces
tain the proper pH for optimal growth of Legionella species. blue-gray to dark blue colonies.
Antibiotics incorporated in the various formulations have A Gram stain, biochemical tests and serological procedures
different spectra of activity. Vancomycin inhibits gram-posi- should be performed to confirm findings.
tive bacteria; colistin and polymyxin B inhibit gram-negative
bacteria, except for Proteus spp.; and cephalothin and References
1. Feely, Gibson, Gorman, Langford, Rasheed, Mackel and Baine. 1979. J. Clin. Microbiol. 10:437.
cefamandole inhibit both gram-positive and gram-negative 2. Feely, Gorman, Weaver, Mackel and Smith. 1978. J. Clin. Microbiol. 8:320.
3. Pasculle, Feely, Gibson, Cordes, Myerowitz, Patton, Gorman, Carmack, Ezzell and Dowling. 1980.
bacteria. Anisomycin and cycloheximide are antifungal agents. J. Infect. Dis. 191:727.
4. Edelstein. 1981. J. Clin. Microbiol. 14:298.
BCYE Differential Agar contains the dyes bromcresol purple 5. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
and bromthymol blue to aid in the differentiation and identifi- 6. Vickers, Brown and Garrity. 1981. J. Clin. Microbiol. 13:380.
7. Bopp, Sumner, Morris and Wells. 1981. J. Clin. Microbiol. 13:714.
cation of Legionella species. 8. Winn. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
9. Weaver. 1978. In Jones and Herbert (ed.), Legionnaires: the disease, the bacterium and method-
Formula ology. DHEW, Center for Disease Control, Atlanta, Ga.

BBL BCYE Agar Base

Approximate Formula* Per Liter Availability
Yeast Extract ............................................................ 10.0 g BBL BCYE Agar Base
Ferric Pyrophosphate .................................................. 0.25 g Cat. No. 212327 Dehydrated 500 g
ACES Buffer ............................................................. 10.0 g
Charcoal, Activated .................................................... 2.0 g BBL BCYE Agar

Alpha-Ketoglutarate .................................................. 1.0 g BS10 CMPH MCM7

Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g Cat. No. 221808 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
BBL BCYE Differential Agar

Directions for Preparation from Cat. No. 297881 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*

Dehydrated Product BBL BCYE Selective Agar with PAC

BS10 CMPH MCM7
1. To 500 mL of purified water, add 2.4 g KOH pellets and
Cat. No. 297879 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
mix to dissolve.
2. Add 38.3 g of the powder and 500 mL of purified water. BBL BCYE Selective Agar with PAV
BS10 MCM7
Mix thoroughly.
Cat. No. 297880 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
3. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
BBL BCYE Selective Agar with CCVC

completely dissolve the powder.
Cat. No. 297878 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. *Store at 2-8C.

67
Section III
B BG Sulfa Agar

BG Sulfa Agar
SBG Sulfa Enrichment
Intended Use Many of these cases of Salmonella-related gastroenteritis
BG Sulfa Agar is used for isolating Salmonella. are due to improper handling of poultry products. Various
poultry products are routinely monitored for Salmonella
SBG Sulfa Enrichment is used for enriching Salmonella prior
before their distribution for human consumption, but in many
to isolation procedures.
instances, contaminated food samples elude detection.
Summary and Explanation BG (Brilliant Green) Sulfa Agar is a highly selective medium.
Salmonellosis continues to be an important public health Osborne and Stokes1 added 0.1% sodium sulfapyridine to
problem worldwide, despite efforts to control the prevalence Brilliant Green Agar to enhance the selective properties of this
of Salmonella in domesticated animals. Infection with medium for Salmonella. This formula is recommended as
non-typhi Salmonella often causes mild, self-limiting illness. a selective isolation medium for Salmonella following enrich-
The illness results from consumption of raw, undercooked or ment.2 It is also recommended for direct inoculation with
improperly processed foods contaminated with Salmonella. primary specimens for Salmonella isolation.

Uninoculated Salmonella typhimurium

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 14028

Identity Specifications
Difco BG Sulfa Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Pink, free flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 5.9% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is very dark
amber, very slightly to slightly opales-
cent.
Prepared Appearance: Orange-brown to dark reddish-amber,
slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 5.9%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2
Difco SBG Sulfa Enrichment
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Solution: 2.42% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is green, opalescent,
may have a precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Green, opalescent without significant
precipitate.
Reaction of 2.42%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco BG Sulfa Agar Difco SBG Sulfa Enrichment
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 Prepare the enrichment per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
2C for 18-48 hours. 35 2C for 18-24 hours. After incubation, subculture onto plates
COLOR OF of MacConkey Agar and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours.
INOCULUM COLONIES/
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY MEDIUM COLONY
Enterococcus INOCULUM COLOR ON
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY MACCONKEY
faecalis 29212 103-2103 None /no change
Escherichia coli 25922 102-3102 None Pink, if any
Escherichia coli 25922 102-3102 None to Yellow-green/
to poor
poor Yellow-green
Salmonella choleraesuis
Proteus vulgaris 13315 102-3102 None /no change
subsp. choleraesuis
Salmonella choleraesuis serotype Enteritidis 13076 102-3102 Good Colorless
subsp. choleraesuis
Salmonella choleraesuis
serotype Enteritidis 13076 102-3102 Good Pink-white/
subsp. choleraesuis
red
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-3102 Good Colorless
Salmonella choleraesuis
Shigella sonnei 9290 102-3102 None Colorless
subsp. choleraesuis
to fair
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-3102 Good Pink-white/
red

68
 BG Sulfa Agar, cont.

For food testing, BG Sulfa Agar has been used for detection of Directions for Preparation from
Salmonella in low and high moisture foods.3,4 It has also been Dehydrated Product
used for detecting Salmonella in feeds and feed ingredients.5 This Difco BG Sulfa Agar
medium is recommended when testing foods for Salmonella 1. Suspend 59 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
following USDA guidelines.6-8
SBG (Selenite Brilliant Green) Sulfa Enrichment is prepared
Mix thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
B
according to the formula described by Stokes and Osborne.9 completely dissolve the powder.
The researchers found that whole egg and egg yolk reduced 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Avoid overheating,
the selective properties of selenite brilliant green enrichment.1 which will decrease selectivity.
They also found that the addition of sulfapyridine (SBG Sulfa 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Enrichment) restored these selective properties.1 stable, typical control cultures.
SBG Sulfa Enrichment is a selective enrichment for the isola- Difco SBG Sulfa Enrichment
tion of Salmonella species, especially from egg products. The 1. Suspend 24.2 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
shell and the contents of the egg at the time of oviposition are Mix thoroughly.
generally sterile or harbor very few microorganisms. Contami- 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 5-10 minutes
nation of the shell occurs afterwards from nesting material, to completely dissolve the powder. Avoid overheating.
floor litter and avian fecal matter.10-12 DO NOT AUTOCLAVE.
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Principles of the Procedure stable, typical control cultures.
In BG Sulfa Agar, peptone and yeast extract provide nitrogen,
vitamins and minerals. Lactose and sucrose are the sources Procedure
of carbohydrates in the medium. Brilliant green and sodium Refer to appropriate references for specific procedures for the
pyridine are complementary in inhibiting gram-positive bacte- isolation and cultivation of Salmonella from meat, poultry and
ria and most gram-negative bacilli other than Salmonella spp. egg products and other foods.2,7,8
Phenol red is the pH indicator that turns the medium a yellow
color with the formation of acid when lactose and/or sucrose Expected Results
is fermented. Agar is the solidifying agent. BG Sulfa Agar
The typical Salmonella colonies appear as pink-white to red
Peptone provides the nitrogen, minerals and amino acids in
opaque colonies surrounded by a brilliant red medium. The
SBG Sulfa Enrichment. Yeast extract is the vitamin source.
few lactose and/or sucrose fermenting organisms that grow
D-Mannitol is the carbon source to stimulate organism growth.
are readily differentiated due to the formation of a yellow-
The phosphates act as buffers in the enrichment. Sodium
green colony surrounded by an intense yellow-green zone.
taurocholate, sodium selenite and brilliant green are the selective
BG Sulfa Agar is not suitable for the isolation of S. typhi or
agents. The selective agents are used to inhibit gram-positive
Shigella; however, some strains of S. typhi may grow forming
organisms and enteric bacteria other than Salmonella. Sodium
red colonies.
sulfapyridine is added to increase selectivity.
SBG Sulfa Enrichment
Formulae Examine prepared media for growth. Positive tubes should be
Difco BG Sulfa Agar subcultured onto prepared media for isolation and identifica-
Approximate Formula* Per Liter tion of bacteria.
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g Limitations of the Procedure
Saccharose ............................................................... 10.0 g 1. On BG Sulfa Agar colonies of Salmonella spp. vary from
Sodium Sulfapyridine ................................................. 1.0 g red to pink to white depending on length of incubation and
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g strain.13
Brilliant Green .......................................................... 12.5 mg 2. BG Sulfa Agar is normally orange-brown in color;
Phenol Red ................................................................. 0.08 g however, on incubation, it turns bright red and returns to
Difco SBG Sulfa Enrichment normal color at room temperature.13
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 3. S. typhi does not grow adequately on BG Sulfa Agar.
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g Shigella spp. do not grow on BG Sulfa Agar.13
D-Mannitol ................................................................. 5.0 g 4. Do not autoclave BG Sulfa Agar longer than 15 minutes;
Sodium Taurocholate .................................................. 1.0 g longer periods decrease the selectivity of the medium.
Sodium Sulfapyridine ................................................. 0.5 g
Sodium Selenite ......................................................... 4.0 g
5. Since BG Sulfa Agar is highly selective, it is recommended
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.65 g that less selective media, such as MacConkey Agar, be used
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.02 g simultaneously.
Brilliant Green ............................................................ 5.0 mg
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
69
Section III
B BG Sulfa Agar, cont.

10. Brooks and Taylor. 1955. Rep. Rd. Invest., Bd. 60, H. M. S. O. London, England.
6. SBG Sulfa Enrichment should be used in conjunction with 11. Forsythe, Ayres and Radlo. 1953. Food Technol. 7:49.
a selective prepared medium for bacterial identification. 12. Stadelman, Ikeme, Roop and Simmons. 1982. Poultry Sci. 61:388.
13. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
References
1. Osborn and Stokes. 1955. Appl. Microbiol. 3:295. Availability
2. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. Difco BG Sulfa Agar
3. DAoust, Maishment, Burgener, Conley, Loit, Milling and Purvis. 1980. J. Food Prot. 43:343.
4. DAoust. 1984. J. Food Prot. 47:588.
CCAM COMPF USDA
5. DAoust, Sewell and Boville. 1983. J. Food Prot. 46:851. Cat. No. 271710 Dehydrated 500 g
6. Moats. 1981. J. Food Prot. 44:375.
7. Federal Register. 1996. Fed. Regist. 61:38917. Difco SBG Sulfa Enrichment

8. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1998. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food Safety
and Inspection Service, USDA, Washington, D.C. USDA
9. Osborn and Stokes. 1955. Appl. Microbiol. 3:217. Cat. No. 271510 Dehydrated 500 g

BiGGY Agar
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
BiGGY (Bismuth Sulfite Glucose Glycine Yeast) is a selective Candida species, through a process of substrate reduction,
and differential medium used in the detection, isolation and produce sulfide and bismuth which combine to produce brown
presumptive identification of Candida species. to black pigmented colonies and zones of dark precipitate in
the medium surrounding colonies of some species. Dextrose
Summary and Explanation and yeast extract provide the nutrients in the formulation.
BiGGY Agar is based on the formulation of Nickerson.1
NOTE: A decrease in pH is normal and does not affect per-
Nickerson developed the medium in 1953 following a study
formance.
of sulfite reduction by Candida species.
Differentiation of Candida is based on growth patterns and Formula
pigmentation of isolated colonies. The bismuth sulfite acts BBL BiGGY Agar
as an inhibitory agent to suppress bacterial growth, which Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Bismuth Ammonium Citrate ....................................... 5.0 g
enables the recovery of isolated colonies of Candida. Candida Sodium Sulfite ............................................................ 3.0 g
species reduce the bismuth sulfite, resulting in pigmentation Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
of colonies and, with some species, pigmentation in the Glycine ..................................................................... 10.0 g
surrounding medium. Yeast Extract .............................................................. 1.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 16.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Candida krusei Candida albicans

User Quality Control ATCC 14243 ATCC 10231

Identity Specifications
BBL BiGGY Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Medium fine, homogeneous, free of
extraneous material.
Solution: 4.5% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light to
medium, cream yellow, hazy to cloudy.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, cream yellow, hazy to
cloudy.
Reaction of 4.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL BiGGY Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
and incubate at 25 2C for 18-24 hours (3-5 days if necessary).
COLOR OF
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY COLONIES/MEDIUM
Candida albicans 10231 Good Brown to black/
Candida kefyr 8553 Good Reddish brown/
Candida tropicalis 1369 Good Brown to black, metallic
sheen/Brown to black
Escherichia coli 25922 Partial to /
complete inhibition

70
 Bacteroides Bile Esculin

SPECIES OF CANDIDA COLONIAL MORPHOLOGY

Directions for Preparation from
C. albicans Smooth, circular or hemispherical brown-
Dehydrated Product black colonies; may have slight mycelial
1. Suspend 45 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix fringe; no color diffusion into surrounding
thoroughly. medium; no metallic sheen.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for not more than
1 minute to completely dissolve the powder. DO NOT
C. tropicalis Smooth, discrete, dark brown to black
colonies (may have black-colored centers); B
slight mycelial fringe; diffuse blackening
AUTOCLAVE. of medium after 72 hours; metallic sheen.
3. Cool to approximately 45-50C. Swirl to disperse the C. krusei Large, flat, wrinkled silvery brown-black
insoluble material and pour into plates. colonies with brown peripheries; yellow
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using to brown halo diffusion into medium;
metallic sheen.
stable, typical control cultures.
C. keyfr Medium size, flat, dark reddish-brown
glistening colonies; may have slight
Procedure mycelial fringe; no diffusion.
Consult appropriate references for information about the
processing and inoculation of specimens such as tissues, skin References
scrapings, hair, nail clippings, etc. 2-5 The streak plate 1. Nickerson. 1953. J. Infect. Dis. 93:43.
2. Haley, Trandel and Coyle. 1980. Cumitech 11, Practical methods for culture and identification of
technique is used primarily to obtain isolated colonies from fungi in the clinical mycology laboratory. Coord. ed., Sherris. American Society for Microbiology,
Washington, D.C.
specimens containing mixed flora. When using slants, streak 3. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
the surface of the slant with a sterile inoculating loop needle 4. Kwon-Chung and Bennett. 1992. Medical mycology. Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia, Pa.
using two to three isolated colonies. 5. Reisner, Woods, Thompson, Larone, Garcia and Shimizu. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover
and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology,
Washington, D.C.
Incubate plates in an inverted position (agar side up) for up 6. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
to 5 days at 25 2C. vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.

Expected Results Availability

BBL BiGGY Agar
Within 5 days of incubation, the plates should show isolated
Cat. No. 211027 Dehydrated 500 g
colonies in streaked areas and confluent growth in areas of
United States and Canada
heavy inoculation. Slants should show evidence of growth. Cat. No. 297254 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
297255 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
Examine plates and slants for colonies showing characteristic
Europe
growth patterns and morphology. The following table sum- Cat. No. 255002 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
marizes typical Candida colonial morphology.6
Mexico
Cat. No. 252563 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

Bacteroides Bile Esculin Agar (BBE)

Intended Use with Kanamycin and Vancomycin, have been recommended
Bacteroides Bile Esculin Agar (BBE) is recommended as a as appropriate for primary isolation.4 However, limited
primary isolation medium for the selection and presumptive evidence for the presumptive identification of the B. fragilis
identification of the B. fragilis group.1,2 group was provided. In 1978, Livingston et al. described a
primary plating medium (BBE) which was found to provide
Summary and Explanation selective recovery of the B. fragilis group and also evidence for
Among the most frequently encountered anaerobes in human presumptive identification.1
clinical infections are members of the Bacteroides fragilis
group. Rapid detection and identification of these organisms Principles of the Procedure
is important since they have been found to be more resistant to Bacteroides Bile Esculin Agar is a primary plating medium for
antimicrobial therapy than other anaerobes.3 B. fragilis and B. the selective isolation and presumptive identification of the
thetaiotaomicron are the species of greatest clinical significance.3 B. fragilis group. Selective inhibition of facultative anaerobes
Other species in the group include: B. caccae, B. distasonis, and most gram-negative anaerobic organisms is obtained by the
B. eggerthii, B. merdae, B. ovatus, B. stercoris, B. uniformis presence of gentamicin and oxgall. Differentiation of the
and B. vulgatus. B. fragilis group is based on esculin hydrolysis, which produces
esculetin and dextrose. The esculetin reacts with the iron salt
Frequently these pathogens occur in a mixture of microor-
(ferric ammonium citrate) contained in the medium to produce
ganisms which may overgrow the primary isolation medium.
a dark brown to black complex that appears in the medium
Selective media, such as CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar
surrounding colonies of members of the B. fragilis group.
71
Section III
B Bacteroides Bile Esculin, cont.

Procedure Expected Results

As some strains of the B. fragilis group may not grow well due After 48 hours of incubation, colonies of the B. fragilis group
to the selective properties of the medium, it is advisable should be greater than 1 mm in diameter and appear gray,
to include a nonselective blood agar medium, such as CDC circular, entire and raised. Most anaerobes other than the
Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar. All media should be pre- B. fragilis group are inhibited. Esculin hydrolysis is indicated
reduced. Incubate immediately under anaerobic conditions by a blackening of the medium around the colonies.
(BBL GasPak EZ anaerobic systems or alternative anaerobic
system) for at least 48 hours at 35 2C. Limitation of the Procedure
B. vulgatus may not hydrolyze esculin.2,3
Bacteroides fragilis
ATCC 25285
References
1. Livingston, Kominos and Yee. 1978. J. Clin. Microbiol. 7:448.
2. Reischelderfer and Mangels. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedure handbook,
vol. 1. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Chapin and Murray. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
microbiology. 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
4. Dowell, Lombard, Thompson and Armfield. 1977. Media for isolation, characterization and
identification of obligately anaerobic bacteria. CDC laboratory manual. Center for Disease
Control, Atlanta, Ga.

Availability
BBL Bacteroides Bile Esculin Agar (BBE)
BS10 CMPH MCM7
United States and Canada
Cat. No. 221836 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
Japan
Cat. No. 251972 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
BBL Bacteroides Bile Esculin Agar (BBE)//
CDC Anaerobe Laked Sheep Blood Agar with KV
CMPH MCM7
Cat. No. 297022 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
297260 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
*Store at 2-8C.

Baird-Parker Agar Base Baird-Parker Agar

EY Tellurite Enrichment
Intended Use procedure for the isolation and enumeration of Staphylococcus
This medium conforms with specifications of The United States aureus. In this study, it was shown that Baird-Parker Agar
Pharmacopeia (USP). was less inhibitory than Vogel and Johnson Agar for selected
strains of S. aureus and that it possesses a diagnostic aid (egg
Baird-Parker Agar Base is used with EY (Egg Yolk) Tellurite
yolk reaction) not present in Vogel and Johnson Agar. The use
Enrichment in the preparation of Egg-Tellurite-Glycerine-
of Baird-Parker Agar subsequently was officially adopted by
Pyruvate Agar (ETGPA) for selective isolation and enumeration
AOAC International7 and is recommended in the USP for use
of coagulase-positive staphylococci from food, skin, soil, air
in the performance of Microbial Limit Tests.8
and other materials. It may also be used for identification of
staphylococci on the basis of their ability to clear egg yolk. Principles of the Procedure
Baird-Parker Agar Base contains peptone, beef extract and yeast
Summary and Explanation
extract as sources of nitrogenous compounds, carbon, sulfur,
A number of culture media had been utilized for the recovery
vitamins and trace minerals. Sodium pyruvate is incorporated
of staphylococci from foods prior to the development of a
in order to stimulate the growth of S. aureus without destroying
new formulation by Baird-Parker in 1962.1,2 This scientist
the selectivity. The tellurite additive is toxic to egg yolk-
subsequently published additional results on the efficacy of
clearing strains other than S. aureus and imparts a black color
the medium for the recovery of coagulase-positive staphylo-
to the colonies. The egg yolk additive, in addition to being
cocci.3,4 In 1971, Tardio and Baer5 and Baer6 reported on the
an enrichment, aids in the identification process by demon-
results of a study comparing 18 staphylococcal isolation
strating lecithinase activity (egg yolk reaction). Glycine and
media in which they concluded that Baird-Parker Agar should
lithium chloride have inhibitory action for organisms other
be substituted for Vogel and Johnson Agar in the official AOAC
than S. aureus.
72
 Baird-Parker Agar, cont.

Formulae Procedure
Difco Baird-Parker Agar Base Food samples are macerated in suitable broth medium, diluted
Approximate Formula* Per 950 mL as desired and the dilutions spread-inoculated onto the agar
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
Beef Extract ................................................................ 5.0 g
surfaces, which should be dry when inoculated. Incubate plates
aerobically for 24 hours at 35 2C. Consult references for
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 1.0
Glycine ..................................................................... 12.0
g
g detailed instructions.7,8
B
Sodium Pyruvate ...................................................... 10.0 g
Lithium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g Expected Results
Difco EY Tellurite Enrichment
Typical colonies of S. aureus are black, shiny, convex and
Egg yolk emulsion containing potassium tellurite consists of surrounded by clear zones (egg yolk reaction) of approximately
30% egg yolk suspension with 0.15% potassium tellurite. 2-5 mm. Coagulase-negative staphylococci generally do not
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. grow well; if some growth occurs, the typical clear zones are
absent. The majority of other organisms are inhibited but some
Directions for Preparation from
may grow sparsely, producing white to brown colonies with
Dehydrated Product no clearing of the egg yolk.
1. Suspend 63 g of the powder in 950 mL of purified water.
Mix thoroughly. Limitation of the Procedure
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Baird-Parker Agar is selective for coagulase-positive staphylo-
completely dissolve the powder. cocci, but other bacteria may grow. Microscopic examination
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. and biochemical tests will differentiate coagulase-positive sta-
4. Cool to 45-50C and aseptically add 50 mL of EY Tellurite phylococci from other organisms.
Enrichment. Mix thoroughly but gently.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

Uninoculated Staphylococcus aureus

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 25923

Identity Specifications
Difco Baird-Parker Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 6.3 g/95 mL solution, soluble in puri-
fied water upon boiling. Solution is light
to medium amber, slightly opalescent.
Prepared
Appearance (Final): Yellow, opalescent.
Reaction of 6.3 g/95 mL
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.1
Difco EY Tellurite Enrichment

Appearance: Canary yellow, opaque suspension with

a resuspendable precipitate.

Cultural Response
Difco Baird-Parker Agar Base with EY Tellurite
Enrichment
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 24-50 hours.
LECITHINASE
INOCULUM COLONY PRODUCTION

ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR (HALOS)
Bacillus subtilis 6633 103 None to poor Brown
Proteus mirabilis 25933 103 Good Brown
Staphylococcus
aureus 25923 102 Good Black +
Staphylococcus
epidermidis 14990 102 Poor to good Black

73
Section III
B Baird-Parker Agar, cont.

References Difco EY Tellurite Enrichment

1. Baird-Parker. 1962. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 25:12. AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF EP ISO SMD SMWW USDA USP
2. Baird-Parker. 1962. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 25:441. Cat. No. 277910 Bottle 6 x 100 mL*
3. Baird-Parker. 1963. J. Gen. Microbiol. 30:409.
4. Baird-Parker. 1965. J. Gen. Microbiol. 38:383.
5. Tardio and Baer. 1971. J. Assoc. Off. Anal. Chem. 54:728.
BBL Baird-Parker Agar

6. Baer. 1971. J. Assoc. Off. Anal. Chem. 54:732. AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF EP ISO SMD SMWW USDA USP
7. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. 1. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
United States and Canada
8. United States Phamacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The na- Cat. No. 297214 Prepared Plates (complete) Pkg. of 20*
tional formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md. 297725 Prepared Plates (complete) Ctn. of 100*
Europe
Availability Cat. No. 255084 Prepared Plates (complete) Pkg. of 20*
Difco Baird-Parker Agar Base Mexico
AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF EP ISO SMD SMWW USDA USP Cat. No. 223950 Prepared Plates (complete) Pkg. of 10*
Cat. No. 276840 Dehydrated 500 g *Store at 2-8C.
276810 Dehydrated 2 kg

Beef Extract Powder Bacto Beef Extract,

Desiccated Beef Extract
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure

Beef Extract Powder, Bacto Beef Extract, Desiccated and Beef Beef Extract Powder, Bacto Beef Extract, Desiccated and Beef
Extract (paste) are used in preparing microbiological culture Extract (paste) are derived from infusion of beef and provide
media. an undefined source of nutrients. These Beef Extract products
are not exposed to the harsh treatment used for protein
Summary and Explanation hydrolysis, so they can provide some of the nutrients lost
Beef Extract is intended to replace aqueous infusion of meat in during peptone manufacture.9 Beef Extract Powder, Bacto Beef
microbiological culture media. Beef Extract is frequently used Extract, Desiccated and Beef Extract (paste) are mixtures of
at a concentration of 0.3 to 1.0% in culture media, although peptides and amino acids, nucleotide fractions, organic acids,
concentrations may vary depending on the nutritional require- minerals and some vitamins. The function of these Beef
ments for the medium formulation. Beef Extract may be relied Extract products can be described as complementing the
upon for biochemical studies, particularly fermentation reac- nutritive properties of peptone by contributing minerals,
tions, because of its independence from fermentable substances phosphates, energy sources and those essential factors missing
that would interfere with the accuracy of such determinations. from peptone.10
Beef Extract was used in media for early studies of nonsporu-
lating anaerobes of the intestinal tract and as a stock broth in Typical Analysis
the study of nutritional needs of streptococci. Prokofeva et al.1 Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of this
used Beef Extract for growing thermoacidophilic organisms manual.
newly isolated from hot springs in Kamchatka, Russia. Kataoka
and Tokiwa2 used Beef Extract as a nitrogen source in studies
Directions for Preparation from
of mannose production by Clostridium tertium strains isolated Dehydrated Product
from soil and methanogenic sludge. In addition, Beef Extract Refer to the final concentration of Beef Extract Powder,
is a nutritive ingredient in many classical culture media, Beef Extract, Desiccated or Beef Extract in the formula of the
including Antibiotic Assay media described in The United States medium being prepared. Add appropriate product as required.
Pharmacopeia,3 and several media recommended for standard
methods applications.4-8 Procedure
See appropriate references for specific procedures using
Beef Extract Powder is a meat extract dried to a powdered Beef Extract Powder, Bacto Beef Extract, Desiccated or Beef
form. Extract.
Bacto Beef Extract, Desiccated is the dried form of Beef
Extract (paste) and was developed to provide a product for Expected Results
ease of use in handling. Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Beef Extract is a meat extract in paste form.
These products are to be used in a one for one substitution;
however, variations tend to be formulation-specific and require
actual performance testing.

74
 Beef Heart

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Bacto Beef Extract, Desiccated BBL Beef Extract Powder B
Dehydrated Appearance: Medium to dark brown crystalline Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, light to light
powder. medium, cream to tan.
Solution: 0.3% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified
water upon warming. Solution is light water. Solution is light to light medium,
to medium amber, clear. yellow to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 0.3% Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.4 Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.5
Difco Beef Extract

Dehydrated Appearance: Medium to dark brown paste.

Cultural Response
BBL Beef Extract Powder
Solution: 0.3% solution, soluble in purified
water upon warming. Solution is light Prepare a sterile solution of peptone agar using 5.0 g of Beef Extract
to medium amber, clear. Powder, 1.25 g of sodium chloride and 3.25 g of agar in 250 mL of
purified water. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate plates
Reaction of 0.3% at 35 2C for 2 days under appropriate atmospheric conditions.
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Cultural Response Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good
Bacto Beef Extract, Desiccated Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good
Prepare a sterile solution of 0.3% Beef Extract, Desiccated and 0.5% Streptococcus pyogenes 49117 102-103 Good
Bacto Peptone. Adjust final pH to 6.9-7.1. Inoculate and incubate
tubes at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
References
1. Prokofeva, Miroshnichenko, Kostrikina, Chernyh, Kuznetsov, Tourova and Bonch-Osmolovskaya.
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 102-103 Good 2000. Int. J. Syst. Evol. Microbiol. 50: Pt 6:2001.
2. Kataoka and Tokiwa. 1998. J. Appl. Microbiol. 84:357.
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good 3. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
Klebsiella pneumoniae 10031 102-103 Good national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
4. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
Salmonella choleraesuis wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, DC.
subsp. choleraesuis 5. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good 6. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
Shigella flexneri 12022 102-103 Good foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
7. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International , 17th ed. AOAC Inter-
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good national, Gaithersburg, Md.
Staphylococcus aureus 6538P 102-103 Good 8. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1998. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food Safety
and Inspection Service, USDA, Washington, D.C.
Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 102-103 Good 9. Cote. 1999. In Flickinger and Drew (ed.), Encyclopedia of bioprocess technology: fermentation,
biocatalysis, and bioseparation. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Difco Beef Extract 10. Bridson and Brecker. 1970. In Norris and Ribbons (ed.), Methods in microbiology, vol. 3A.
Academic Press, New York. N.Y.
Prepare a sterile solution of 0.3% Beef Extract and 0.5% Bacto Pep-
tone. Adjust final pH to 6.9-7.1. Inoculate and incubate tubes at 35
2C for 18-48 hours. Availability
BBL Beef Extract Powder
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
AOAC BAM COMPF SMWW USDA USP
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis Cat. No. 212303 Dehydrated 500 g
2 3
serotype Typhimurium 14028 10 -10 Good Bacto Beef Extract, Desiccated
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good AOAC BAM COMPF SMWW USDA USP
Cat. No. 211520 Dehydrated 500 g
Difco Beef Extract

AOAC BAM COMPF SMWW USDA USP

Cat. No. 212610 Dehydrated 500 g

Beef Heart for Infusion

Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Beef Heart for Infusion is used in preparing microbiological Beef Heart for Infusion is prepared from fresh beef heart
culture media. tissue and dried to a powdered form. Beef Heart for Infusion
is processed from large quantities of raw material, retaining
all the nutritive and growth-stimulating properties of the fresh
tissues. One hundred grams of Beef Heart for Infusion are
75
Section III
B Beef Heart, cont.

the equivalent of 500 g of fresh heart tissue. Beef Heart for Principles of the Procedure
Infusion supplies the nutritional requirements for growth of Beef Heart for Infusion provides nitrogen, amino acids and
microorganisms in Heart Infusion media. vitamins in microbiological culture media.
One of the first media used for the cultivation of bacteria was
Typical Analysis
a liquid medium containing an infusion of meat. Huntoon1
Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of this
used fresh beef heart and Bacto Peptone to prepare a hormone
manual.
broth to retain growth-promoting substances. Highly patho-
genic organisms, such as meningococci and pneumococci, could
Directions for Preparation from
be grown on infusion medium without enrichments.1
Dehydrated Product
Beef Heart for Infusion is a component of Heart Infusion Infusions can be prepared using 50 g of Beef Heart for
media. Heart Infusion media are used in the mass production Infusion per liter of purified water. For best results, infuse
of microorganisms for vaccine production and are specified at 50 C for 1 hour. Heat the infusion to boiling for a few
in standard methods for other multiple applications.2-7 minutes to coagulate some of the proteins and filter. Add
peptone and remaining ingredients of the medium to the
User Quality Control filtrate. Adjust the pH to 7.5-7.8. Boil the medium and filter
before autoclaving. Consult appropriate references for further
Identity Specifications
Difco Beef Heart for Infusion
directions on preparation of specific products.
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan to medium brown, fine, homoge-
neous. Procedure
Solution: 5.0% solution, not completely soluble See appropriate references for specific procedures using Beef
in purified water. Solution, after Heart for Infusion.2-4
filtration, is light to medium amber,
clear to slightly opalescent, may have
a precipitate. Expected Results
Reaction of 5.0% Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.5-7.8
References
Cultural Response 1. Huntoon. 1918. J. Infect. Dis. 23:168.
2. Ruoff. 1995. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
Difco Beef Heart for Infusion 6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Prepare a 5% solution of Beef Heart for Infusion. Infuse for one hour 3. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
at 50 2C. Heat to boiling for 3-5 minutes and filter. Add 2% Pro- 4. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC Interna-
teose Peptone No. 3, 0.5% sodium chloride and 0.005% dextrose to tional, Gaithersburg, Md.
the filtrate. Adjust pH to 7.5-7.8. Boil and filter before autoclaving. 5. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 2000. Improved enumeration methods for the recreational
water quality indicators: Enterococci and Escherichia coli. EPA-821/R-97/004. Office of Water,
Inoculate and incubate tubes at 35 2C for 18-48 hours. USEPA, Washington, D.C.
6. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
7. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1998. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food Safety
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good and Inspection Service, USDA, Washington, D.C.
Klebsiella pneumoniae 13883 102-103 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good Availability
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good Difco Beef Heart for Infusion
AOAC BAM EPA SMWW USDA
Cat. No. 213210 Dehydrated 500 g

Bile Esculin Agar

Intended Use reaction on the bile esculin medium correlated with a serological
Bile Esculin Agar is used to differentiate enterococci and the group D precipitin reaction.5
Streptococcus bovis group from other streptococci.1,2
Principles of the Procedure
Summary and Explanation Enterococci and certain streptococci hydrolyze the glycoside
Rochaix noted the value of esculin hydrolysis in the identification esculin to esculetin and dextrose. Esculetin reacts with an iron
of enterococci.3 The enterococci were able to split esculin, salt to form a dark brown or black complex.6 Ferric citrate is
but other streptococci could not. Meyer and Schonfeld incor- incorporated into the medium as an indicator of esculin
porated bile into the esculin medium and showed that 61 of hydrolysis and resulting esculetin formation. Oxgall is used to
62 enterococci were able to grow and split esculin, whereas inhibit gram-positive bacteria other than enterococci.
the other streptococci could not.4 Swan used an esculin
medium containing 40% bile salts and reported that a positive
76
 Biosate Peptone

Formula 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to

BBL Bile Esculin Agar completely dissolve the powder.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ....................................... 5.0 g 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
stable, typical control cultures.
Oxgall ....................................................................... 20.0
Ferric Citrate ............................................................. 0.5
g
g
B
Esculin ........................................................................ 1.0 g Procedure
Agar ......................................................................... 14.0 g
Inoculate the medium with two or three colonies and incubate
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
overnight at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere.
Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product Expected Results
1. Suspend 43.5 g of the powder in 1 liter of purified water. Any blackening of the plated medium indicates a positive
Mix thoroughly. result; if no blackening occurs, the test is negative.
For slants, if more than half of the slant is blackened within
User Quality Control 24-48 hours, the test is positive; if less than half is blackened or
no blackening occurs within 24-48 hours, the test is negative.
Identity Specifications
BBL Bile Esculin Agar Limitations of the Procedure
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
ous material, may contain a moderate 1. Strains of Lactococcus, Leuconostoc and Pediococcus that
amount of very small dark particles. give a positive bile-esculin reaction have been isolated from
Solution: 4.35% solution, soluble in purified human infections.1,2
water upon boiling. Solution is dark, 2. Occasional strains of viridans streptococci blacken the
tan olive to olive green with a blue
tint, trace hazy to hazy.
medium or display weakly positive reactions.2
Prepared Appearance: Dark, tan olive to olive green with a
blue tint, trace hazy to hazy. References
Reaction of 4.35% 1. Ruoff, Whiley and Beighton. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2 2. Facklam, Sahm and Teixeira. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Rochaix. 1924. Comt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 90:771.
Cultural Response 4. Meyer and Schonfeld. 1926. Zentralbl. Bakeriol. Parasitenk. Infectionskr. Hyg. Abt. Orig. 99:402.
BBL Bile Esculin Agar 5. Swan. 1954. J. Clin. Pathol. 7:160.
6. MacFaddin. 2000. Biochemical tests for identification of medical bacteria, 3rd ed., Lippincott
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
35 2C for 42-48 hours.
INOCULUM
Availability
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY REACTION BBL Bile Esculin Agar
Enterococcus ISO
faecalis 29212 103-104 Good Blackening Cat. No. 299068 Dehydrated 500 g
Streptococcus 221838 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
pyogenes 19615 104-105 Partial to No blackening 221409 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
complete inhibition 221410 Prepared Slants Ctn. of 100*
*Store at 2-8C.

Biosate Peptone
Intended Use digest of casein and yeast extract has been used successfully
Biosate Peptone is used as a component in microbiological as components in media which supported the hatching and
culture media or in fermentation applications. culture of Giardia spp. from cysts and the first-time culturing
of a nematode without the need of its symbiotic bacteria.3,4
Summary and Explanation
Biosate Peptone is a mixed hydrolysate comprised of casein Principles of the Procedure
and yeast extract at a ratio of 65:35. The synergistic effect of Biosate Peptone provides nitrogen, amino acids and vitamins
two or more types of hydrolysates is well documented and has in microbiological culture media. In addition, the yeast
been utilized for decades in culture media formulation. The extract component of the product provides proteins, carbohy-
combination of pancreatic digest of casein and yeast extract drates and some micronutrients.
provides nutritional benefits that are not provided by the
components alone. It has been reported that the combined use Typical Analysis
of these two peptones has shown improved toxin production Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of
in clostridia.1,2 Additionally, the combination of pancreatic this manual.
77
Section III
B Biosate Peptone, cont.

Precautions5 Availability
1. Biosafety Level 2 practices, containment equipment and BBL Biosate Peptone
facilities are recommended for activities with clinical Cat. No. 211862 Dehydrated 454 g
294312 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
specimens of human or animal origin containing or poten-
tially containing pathogenic Brucella spp.
2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and User Quality Control
facilities are recommended for all manipulations of cultures Identity Specifications
of the pathogenic Brucella spp. and for experimental BBL Biosate Peptone
animal studies. Dehydrated Appearance: Yellow-tan powder, fine, homoge-
neous, free of extraneous material.
Directions for Preparation from Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified
Dehydrated Product water. Solution is light to medium,
yellow to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
Refer to the final concentration of Biosate Peptone in the formula
Reaction of 2.0%
of the medium being prepared. Add product as required. Solution at 25C: pH 6.3-7.5

Procedure Cultural Response

See appropriate references for specific procedures using Biosate BBL Biosate Peptone
Peptone. Prepare a sterile solution of peptone agar using 10 g of Biosate
Peptone, 2.5 g of sodium chloride and 6.5 g of agar in 500 mL of
purified water. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate
Expected Results plates at 35 2C for 2-3 days.
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results. ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
3 4
Brucella abortus 11192* 10 -10 Good
References Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good
1. Artemenko, Ivanova, Nenashev, Kuznetsova and Ochkina. 1985. Zhurnal Mikrobiologii,
Epidemiologii, i Immunobiologii. 11:37. Staphylococcus aureus 6538P 103-104 Good
2. Siegel and Metzger. 1980 Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 40:1023. Streptococcus pyogenes 49117 104-105 Good
3. Ponce, Martnez and Alvarez. 1989. Archivos de Investigacion Medica. 20:123.
4. Dorsman and Bijl. 1985. J. Parasitol. 71:200. *If this strain is not available, verify performance with a known isolate.
5. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.

Biotin Assay Medium

Intended Use User Quality Control
Biotin Assay Medium is used for determining biotin concen-
tration by the microbiological assay technique. Identity Specifications
Difco Biotin Assay Medium
Summary and Explanation Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, homogeneous with a
tendency to clump.
Vitamin assay media are used in the microbiological assay of
Solution: 3.75% (single strength) solution,
vitamins. Three types of media are used for this purpose: soluble in purified water upon
1. Maintenance Media: For carrying the stock culture to boiling 2-3 minutes. Solution is light
amber, clear, may have a slight
preserve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism precipitate.
for its intended purpose; Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear, may have a slight
2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for immediate precipitate.
use; Reaction of 3.75%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2
3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the vitamin under
test. They contain all the factors necessary for optimal Cultural Response
growth of the test organism except the single essential Difco Biotin Assay Medium
vitamin to be determined. Prepare the medium per label directions. The medium supports the
growth of Lactobacillus plantarum ATCC 8014 when prepared in single
Biotin Assay Medium is prepared for use in the microbiological strength and supplemented with biotin. The medium should produce a
assay of biotin using Lactobacillus plantarum ATCC 8014 as standard curve when tested with a biotin reference standard at 0.0 to
1.0 ng per 10 mL. Incubate tubes with caps loosened at 35-37C
the test organism. for 16-20 hours. Read the percent transmittance using a spectropho-
tometer at 660 nm.

78
 Biotin Assay Medium, cont.

Principles of the Procedure Inoculum

Biotin Assay Medium is a biotin-free dehydrated medium Inoculum for assay is prepared by subculturing from a stock
containing all other nutrients and vitamins essential for the culture of L. plantarum ATCC 8014 to 10 mL of single-strength
cultivation of L. plantarum ATCC 8014. The addition of a Biotin Assay Medium supplemented with 0.5 ng biotin. After
16-24 hours incubation at 35-37C, the cells are centrifuged
biotin standard in specified increasing concentrations gives
a growth response by this organism that can be measured under aseptic conditions and the supernatant liquid decanted. B
titrimetrically or turbidimetrically. The cells are washed three times with 10 mL sterile 0.85%
saline. After the third wash, the cells are resuspended in 10
Formula mL sterile 0.85% saline and finally diluted 1:100 with sterile
Difco Biotin Assay Medium 0.85% saline. One drop of this suspension is used to inoculate
Approximate Formula* Per Liter each 10 mL assay tube.
Vitamin Assay Casamino Acids ................................. 12.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g Standard Curve
Sodium Acetate ....................................................... 20.0 g It is essential that a standard curve be constructed each time
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.2 g
DL-Tryptophan ........................................................... 0.2 g
an assay is run. Autoclave and incubation conditions can
Adenine Sulfate ....................................................... 20.0 mg influence the standard curve reading and cannot always be
Guanine Hydrochloride ............................................ 20.0 mg duplicated. The standard curve is obtained by using biotin at
Uracil ........................................................................ 20.0 mg
levels of 0.0, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.8 and 1 ng per assay
Thiamine Hydrochloride ............................................. 2.0 mg
Riboflavin ................................................................... 2.0 mg tube (10 mL).
Niacin ......................................................................... 2.0 mg
Calcium Pantothenate ................................................ 2.0 mg The concentration of biotin required for the preparation of the
Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ............................................ 4.0 mg standard curve may be prepared by dissolving 0.1 gram of
p-Aminobenzoic Acid ............................................. 200.0 g d-Biotin or equivalent in 1,000 mL of 25% alcohol solution
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g (100 g per mL). Dilute the stock solution by adding 2 mL to
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.4 g 98 mL of purified water. This solution is diluted by adding
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 20.0 mg 1 mL to 999 mL purified water, giving a solution of 2 ng of
Ferrous Sulfate ......................................................... 20.0 mg
Manganese Sulfate .................................................. 20.0 mg
biotin per mL. This solution is further diluted by adding 10 mL
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. to 90 mL purified water, giving a final solution of 0.2 ng of
biotin per mL. Use 0.0, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4 and 5 mL of this
Precautions final solution. Prepare the stock solution fresh daily.
Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media or
Biotin Assay Medium may be used for both turbidimetric and
glassware in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely small
titrimetric analysis. Before reading, the tubes are refrigerated
amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give errone-
for 15-30 minutes to stop growth. Turbidimetric readings
ous results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from detergents
should be made after 16-20 hours at 35-37C. Titrimetric
and other chemicals must be used. Glassware must be heated
determinations are made after 72 hours incubation at 35-37C.
to 250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic residues
The most effective assay range, using Biotin Assay Medium,
that might be present. Take precautions to keep sterilization
has been found to be between 0.1 ng and 1 ng biotin.
and cooling conditions uniform throughout the assay.
For a complete discussion of vitamin assay methodology, refer
Directions for Preparation from to appropriate procedures outlined in the reference.1
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 7.5 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water. Expected Results
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 2-3 minutes to 1. Prepare a standard concentration response curve by plot-
completely dissolve the powder. ting the response readings against the amount of standard
3. Dispense 5 mL amounts into tubes, evenly dispersing the in each tube, disk or cup.
precipitate. 2. Determine the amount of vitamin at each level of assay
4. Add standard or test samples. solution by interpolation from the standard curve.
5. Adjust tube volume to 10 mL with purified water. 3. Calculate the concentration of vitamin in the sample from
6. Autoclave at 121C for 5 minutes. the average of these volumes. Use only those values that do
not vary more than 10% from the average. Use the results
Procedure only if two-thirds of the values do not vary by more than
Stock Cultures 10%.
Stock cultures of the test organism, L. plantarum ATCC 8014,
are prepared by stab inoculation of Lactobacilli Agar AOAC. Limitations of the Procedure
After 16-24 hours incubation at 35-37C, the tubes are stored 1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium
in the refrigerator. Transfers are made weekly. must be cultured and maintained on media recommended
for this purpose.

79
Section III
B Biotin Assay Medium, cont.

2. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the assay Reference

procedure. 1. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
3. The use of altered or deficient media may cause mutants
having different nutritional requirements that will not give Availability
a satisfactory response. Difco Biotin Assay Medium
4. For successful results to these procedures, all conditions of Cat. No. 241910 Dehydrated 100 g*
the assay must be followed precisely. *Store at 2-8C.

Bird Seed Agar

Intended Use The addition of the antimicrobial agent chloramphenicol
Bird Seed Agar is a selective and differential medium used in improves the recovery of Cryptococcus from specimens
the identification of Cryptococcus neoformans. containing mixed flora by suppressing bacterial growth.

Summary and Explanation Procedure

1
Bird Seed Agar was initially described by Staib. He found To prepare plates from agar deeps, liquefy medium in boiling
that Cryptococcus neoformans produced characteristic brown water bath and pour molten medium into a sterile Petri dish;
colonies when cultivated on a growth medium containing an allow medium to solidify and dry before use.
extract prepared from the seeds of the Indian thistle plant Using a sterile inoculating loop or needle, pick two or three
Guizotia abyssinica. C. neoformans is the only yeast known isolated colonies from the subculture medium and streak over slant
to produce this pigmentation.2 or plate surface. Incubate media at 25-30C for up to 7 days.
Shields and Ajello later modified the original formulation by
the addition of the antimicrobial agent chloramphenicol.3 The Expected Results
concentration of chloramphenicol has been doubled in this Yeast-like organisms that produce tan to brown colonies on
medium to improve the inhibition of bacteria. this medium within 4-7 days may be presumptively identified
as C. neoformans.
Principles of the Procedure
The seed extract contains caffeic acid, which serves as a References
1. Staib. 1962. Z. Hyg. Infekt. Med. Mikrobiol. Immunol. 148:466.
substrate for phenol oxidase, an enzyme present in the cell 2. Warren and Hazen. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
wall of C. neoformans. The subsequent enzymatic reaction 3. Shields and Ajello. 1966. Science 151:208.
produces the brown pigment melanin, resulting in tan to brown
pigmentation of the yeast colonies. C. neoformans is the only Availability
species known to produce this enzyme, although with BBL Bird Seed Agar
occasional isolates (particularly serotype C) the production of Cat. No. 297875 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
297096 Prepared Pour Tubes (20 mL) Pkg. of 10
phenol oxidase may have to be induced.2
*Store at 2-8C.

Bismuth Sulfite Agar

Intended Use tory, hepatic, splenic and/or neurological damage. These
This medium conforms with specifications of The United States illnesses result from consumption of raw, undercooked or
Pharmacopeia (USP). improperly processed foods contaminated with Salmonella.
Many cases of Salmonella-related gastroenteritis are due to
Bismuth Sulfite Agar is a highly selective medium used for
improper handling of poultry products. United States federal
isolating Salmonella spp., particularly Salmonella typhi, from
guidelines require various poultry products to be routinely
food and clinical specimens.
monitored before distribution for human consumption but
contaminated food samples often elude monitoring.
Summary and Explanation
Salmonellosis continues to be an important public health Bismuth Sulfite Agar is a modification of the Wilson and Blair2-4
problem worldwide, despite efforts to control the prevalence formula. Wilson5,6 and Wilson and Blair2-4 clearly showed the
of Salmonella in domesticated animals. Infection with nontyphi superiority of Bismuth Sulfite medium for isolation of
Salmonella often causes mild, self-limiting illness.1 Typhoid S. typhi. Cope and Kasper7 increased their positive findings of
fever, caused by S. typhi, is characterized by fever, headache, typhoid from 1.2 to 16.8% among food handlers and from
diarrhea and abdominal pain, and can produce fatal respira- 8.4 to 17.5% among contacts with Bismuth Sulfite Agar.
80
 Bismuth Sulfite Agar, cont.

Employing this medium in the routine laboratory examina- For food testing, the use of Bismuth Sulfite Agar is specified
tion of fecal and urine specimens, these same authors8 obtained for the isolation of pathogenic bacteria from raw and pasteur-
40% more positive isolations of S. typhi than were obtained ized milk, cheese products, dry dairy products, cultured milks
on Endo medium. Gunther and Tuft,9 employing various and butter.1,13-15 The use of Bismuth Sulfite Agar is also recom-
media in a comparative way for the isolation of typhoid from mended for use in testing clinical specimens.16,17 In addition,
stool and urine specimens, found Bismuth Sulfite Agar most Bismuth Sulfite Agar is valuable when investigating outbreaks B
productive. On Bismuth Sulfite Agar, they obtained 38.4% of Salmonella spp., especially S. typhi.18-20
more positives than on Endo Agar, 33% more positives than
Bismuth Sulfite Agar is used for the isolation of S. typhi and
on Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, and 80% more positives than
other Salmonella from food, feces, urine, sewage and other
on the Desoxycholate media. These workers found Bismuth
infectious materials. The typhoid organism grows luxuriantly
Sulfite Agar to be superior to Wilsons original medium.
on the medium, forming characteristic black colonies, while
Bismuth Sulfite Agar was stable, sensitive and easier to
gram-positive bacteria and members of the coliform group are
prepare. Green and Beard,10 using Bismuth Sulfite Agar, claimed
inhibited. This inhibitory action of Bismuth Sulfite Agar
that this medium successfully inhibited sewage organisms. The
toward gram-positive and coliform organisms permits the use
value of Bismuth Sulfite Agar as a plating medium after
of a much larger inoculum than possible with other media
enrichment has been demonstrated by Hajna and Perry.11
employed for similar purposes in the past. The use of larger
Since these earlier references to the use of Bismuth Sulfite Agar, inocula greatly increases the possibility of recovering the
this medium has been generally accepted as routine for pathogens, especially when they are present in relatively small
the detection of most Salmonella. The value of the medium is numbers. Small numbers of organisms may be encountered in
demonstrated by the many references to the use of Bismuth the early course of the disease or in the checking of carriers
Sulfite Agar in scientific publications, laboratory manuals and and releases.
texts. Bismuth Sulfite Agar is used in microbial limit testing as
recommended by the USP. In this testing, pharmaceutical Principles of the Procedure
articles of all kinds, from raw materials to the finished forms, In Bismuth Sulfite Agar, beef extract and peptone provide
are evaluated for freedom from Salmonella spp.12 nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Dextrose is an energy source.

Uninoculated Salmonella typhi

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 19430

Identity Specifications
Difco Bismuth Sulfite Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige to light green, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
Solution: 5.2% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
green, opaque with a flocculent precipi-
tate that can be dispersed by swirling
contents of flask.
Prepared Appearance: Light gray-green to medium green,
opaque with a flocculent precipitate.
Reaction of 5.2%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.7 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Bismuth Sulfite Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 40-48 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103 Marked to
Salmonella
complete inhibition typhimurium
Escherichia coli 25922 103 Partial inhibition Brown to green ATCC 14028
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhi 19430 102-103 Good Black with sheen
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good Black or greenish-gray,
may or may not
have sheen

81
Section III
B Bismuth Sulfite Agar, cont.

Disodium phosphate is a buffering agent. Bismuth sulfite these heavy growth areas, this organism frequently appears as
indicator and brilliant green are complementary in inhibiting small light green colonies. This fact emphasizes the importance
gram-positive bacteria and members of the coliform group, of inoculating plates so that some areas are sparsely populated
while allowing Salmonella to grow luxuriantly. Ferrous with discrete S. typhi colonies. Other strains of Salmonella
sulfate is included for detection of H2S production. When produce black to green colonies with little or no darkening of
H2S is present, the iron in the formula is precipitated, giving the surrounding medium.
positive cultures the characteristic brown to black color with
Generally, Shigella spp. other than S. flexneri and S. sonnei are
metallic sheen. Agar is the solidifying agent.
inhibited. S. flexneri and S. sonnei strains that do grow on this
medium produce brown to green, raised colonies with depressed
Formula centers and exhibit a crater-like appearance.
Difco Bismuth Sulfite Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Escherichia coli is partially inhibited. Occasionally a strain will
Beef Extract ................................................................ 5.0 g be encountered that will grow as small brown or greenish
Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g
glistening colonies. This color is confined entirely to the colony
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 4.0 g itself and shows no metallic sheen. A few strains of Enterobacter
Ferrous Sulfate ........................................................... 0.3 g aerogenes may develop on this medium, forming raised,
Bismuth Sulfite Indicator ............................................ 8.0 g
mucoid colonies. Enterobacter colonies may exhibit a silvery
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g
Brilliant Green .......................................................... 25.0 mg sheen, appreciably lighter in color than that produced by
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. S. typhi. Some members of the coliform group that produce
hydrogen sulfide may grow on the medium, giving colonies
Directions for Preparation from similar in appearance to S. typhi. These coliforms may be readily
Dehydrated Product differentiated because they produce gas from lactose in differ-
1. Suspend 52 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix ential media, for example, Kligler Iron Agar or Triple Sugar
thoroughly. Iron Agar. The hydrolysis of urea, demonstrated in Urea Broth
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to or on Urea Agar Base, may be used to identify Proteus sp.
completely dissolve the powder. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE.
3. Evenly disperse the precipitate when dispensing. Use the To isolate S. typhi for agglutination or fermentation studies,
medium the same day it is prepared. pick characteristic black colonies from Bismuth Sulfite Agar
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using and subculture them on MacConkey Agar. The purified colo-
stable, typical control cultures. nies from MacConkey Agar may then be picked to differential
tube media such as Kligler Iron Agar, Triple Sugar Iron Agar
Procedure or other satisfactory differential media for partial identifica-
For isolation of Salmonella spp. from food, samples are tion. All cultures that give reactions consistent with Salmo-
enriched and selectively enriched. Streak 10 L of selective nella spp. on these media should be confirmed biochemically
enrichment broth onto Bismuth Sulfite Agar. Incubate plates as Salmonella spp. before any serological testing is performed.
for 24-48 hours at 35C. Examine plates for the presence Agglutination tests may be performed from the fresh growth
of Salmonella spp. Refer to appropriate references for the on the differential tube media or from the growth on nutrient
complete procedure when testing food samples.1,13-15 agar slants inoculated from the differential media. The growth
on the differential tube media may also be used for inoculat-
For isolation of Salmonella spp. from clinical specimens, ing carbohydrate media for fermentation studies.
inoculate fecal specimens and rectal swabs onto a small area
of one quadrant of the Bismuth Sulfite Agar plate and streak Limitations of the Procedure
for isolation. This will permit the development of discrete 1. It is important to streak for well-isolated colonies. In heavy
colonies. Incubate plates at 35C. Examine at 24 hours and growth areas, S. typhi appears light green and may be
again at 48 hours for colonies resembling Salmonella spp. misinterpreted as negative growth for S. typhi.21
For additional information about specimen preparation 2. S. typhi and S. arizonae are the only enteric organisms to
and inoculation of clinical specimens, consult appropriate exhibit typical brown zones on the medium. Brown zones
references.16-20 are not produced by other members of the Enterobacteri-
aceae. However, S. arizonae is usually inhibited.21
Expected Results 3. Colonies on Bismuth Sulfite Agar may be contaminated with
The typical discrete S. typhi surface colony is black and other viable organisms; therefore, isolated colonies should
surrounded by a black or brownish-black zone which may be be subcultured to a less selective medium (e.g., MacConkey
several times the size of the colony. By reflected light, preferably Agar).21
daylight, this zone exhibits a distinctly characteristic metallic 4. Typical S. typhi colonies usually develop within 24 hours;
sheen. Plates heavily seeded with S. typhi may not show this however, all plates should be incubated for a total of
reaction except near the margin of the mass inoculation. In 48 hours to allow growth of all typhoid strains.21

82
 Blood Agar Base

the microbiological examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washing-
5. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE. Heating this medium for a pe- ton, D.C.
riod longer than necessary to just dissolve the ingredients 15. Andrews. 2000. In Horwitz (ed.), Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed.
AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
destroys its selectivity. 16. Washington. 1981. Laboratory procedures in clinical microbiology. Springer-Verlag, New York,
N.Y.
17. Baron, Peterson and Finegold. 1994. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 9th ed. Mosby-Year
References Book, Inc. St. Louis, Mo.

1. Flowers, Andrews, Donnelly and Koenig. 1993. In Marshall (ed.), Standard methods for the exami-
nation of dairy products, 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
18. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
19. Cintron. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American
B
2. Wilson and Blair. 1926. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 29:310. Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Wilson and Blair. 1927. J. Hyg. 26:374. 20. Grasmick. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American
4. Wilson and Blair. 1931. J. Hyg. 31:138. Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. Wilson. 1923. J. Hyg. 21:392. 21. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
6. Wilson. 1928. Br. Med. J. 1:1061. vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
7. Cope and Kasper. 1937. J. Bacteriol. 34:565.
8. Cope and Kasper. 1938. Am. J. Public Health 28:1065.
9. Gunther and Tuft. 1939. J. Lab. Clin. Med. 24:461.
10. Green and Beard. 1938. Am. J. Public Health 28:762.
Availability
11. Hajna and Perry. 1938. J. Lab. Clin. Med. 23:1185. Difco Bismuth Sulfite Agar
12. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md. AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF SMWW USP
13. Andrews, June, Sherrod, Hammack and Amaguana. 1995. In FDA bacteriological analytical manual, Cat. No. 273300 Dehydrated 500 g
8th ed. AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
14. Andrews, Flowers, Silliker and Bailey. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for

Blood Agar Base (Infusion Agar)

Blood Agar Base No. 2
Intended Use for determining hemolytic reactions. Hemolytic patterns may
Blood Agar Base (Infusion Agar) and Blood Agar Base No. 2, vary with the source of animal blood or type of base medium
with the addition of sterile blood, is used for the isolation, used. 5 Chocolate Agar for isolating Haemophilus and
cultivation and detection of hemolytic activity of streptococci Neisseria species can be prepared from Blood Agar Base No. 2
and other fastidious microorganisms. by supplementing the medium with 10% sterile defibrinated
blood (chocolatized).
Summary and Explanation
Infusion Agar is an all-purpose medium which has been used Formulae
for many years as a base for the preparation of blood agars. BBL Blood Agar Base (Infusion Agar)
In a study of viability of streptococci, Snavely and Brahier Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Heart Muscle, Infusion from (solids) ........................... 2.0 g
performed comparative studies of horse, rabbit and sheep blood Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 13.0 g
with Blood Agar Base, and found that sheep blood gave the Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
clearest and most reliable colony and hemolysis characteristics Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
at both 24 and 48 hours.1 In the course of the investigation,
Difco Blood Agar Base No. 2
about 1,300 isolations of streptococci were made with Blood
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Agar Base containing 5% sheep blood. Proteose Peptone ..................................................... 15.0 g
Liver Digest ................................................................ 2.5 g
Blood Agar Base No. 2 is a nutritionally rich medium for Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
maximum recovery of fastidious microorganisms. Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g
Blood Agar Base media are specified in standard methods for *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
food testing.2-4 Infusion Agar and Blood Agar Base No. 2 have
been largely replaced as blood agar bases by the Tryptic/ Directions for Preparation from
Trypticase Soy Agar formulations, which contain milk and Dehydrated Product
plant peptones in place of the variable infusion component. 1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
BBL Blood Agar Base (Infusion Agar) 40 g;
Principles of the Procedure Difco Blood Agar Base No. 2 39.5 g.
Infusion from heart muscle, casein peptone and yeast extract Mix thoroughly.
provide nitrogen, carbon, amino acids and vitamins in Blood 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Agar Base. Proteose peptone is the nitrogen source for Blood completely dissolve the powder.
Agar Base No. 2 while liver digest and yeast extract provide 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
essential carbon, vitamin, nitrogen and amino acid sources. 4. For preparation of blood agar, cool the base to 45-50C
Both media contain sodium chloride to maintain osmotic and aseptically add 5% sterile, defibrinated blood. Mix well.
equilibrium and agar is the solidifying agent. 5. To prepare chocolate agar, add 10% sterile defibrinated
Supplementation with blood (5-10%) provides additional blood to Blood Agar Base No. 2 at 80C. Mix well.
growth factors for fastidious microorganisms, and is the basis 6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
83
Section III
B Blood Agar Base, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Blood Agar Base No. 2 BBL Blood Agar Base (Infusion Agar)
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
Solution: 3.95% solution, soluble in purified material.
water upon boiling. Solution is Solution: 4.0% solution, soluble in purified water
medium to dark amber, very slightly upon boiling. Solution is medium,
to slightly opalescent. yellow to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Plain Medium to dark amber, slightly Prepared Appearance: Plain Medium, yellow to tan, clear
opalescent. to slightly hazy.
With 5% sheep blood Cherry red, With 5% sheep blood Cherry red,
opaque. opaque.
Reaction of 3.95% Reaction of 4.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2 Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2

Cultural Response Cultural Response

Difco Blood Agar Base No. 2 BBL Blood Agar Base (Infusion Agar)
Prepare the medium per label directions with 5% defibrinated Prepare the medium per label directions without (plain) and with 5%
sheep blood (SB) and 10% chocolatized sheep blood (chocolate agar). defibrinated sheep blood (SB). Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for
Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours with added CO2. 18-24 hours (incubate streptococci with 3-5% CO2).
INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU WITH SB CHOCOLATE AGAR ORGANISM ATCC CFU PLAIN WITH SB
Haemophilus Candida albicans 10231 30-300 N/A Good,
influenzae 19418 102-3102 N/A Good no hemolytysis
Neisseria Listeria
meningitidis 13090 102-3102 Good, gamma N/A monocytogenes 19115 30-300 N/A Good, beta hemolysis
hemolysis Pseudomonas
Streptococcus aeruginosa 10145 30-300 Good N/A
pneumoniae 6305 102-3102 Good, alpha N/A Shigella flexneri 12022 30-300 Good N/A
hemolysis Staphylococcus
Streptococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good Good, beta hemolysis
pyogenes 19615 102-3102 Good, beta N/A Streptococcus
hemolysis pneumoniae 6305 30-300 Good Good, alpha hemolysis
Streptococcus
pyogenes 19615 30-300 Good Good, beta hemolysis

Staphylococcus aureus Streptococcus pyogenes

ATCC 25923 ATCC 19615 Procedure
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
specimens. After streaking, stab the agar several times to
deposit beta-hemolytic streptococci beneath the agar surface.
Subsurface growth will display the most reliable hemolytic
reactions owing to the activity of both oxygen-stable and
oxygen-labile streptolysins.5
Since many pathogens require carbon dioxide on primary
isolation, plates may be incubated in an atmosphere containing
approximately 3-10% CO2. Incubate plates at 35 2C for
18-24 hours.

Expected Results
Colonial morphology on blood agar containing 5% sheep
blood is as follows:
1. Hemolytic streptococci may appear as translucent or opaque,
grayish, small (1 mm), or large matte or mucoid (2-4 mm)
colonies, encircled by a zone of hemolysis. Gram stains should
be made and examined to check the macroscopic findings.
Streptococcus
pneumoniae (Other organisms which may cause hemolysis include
ATCC 6305
Listeria, various corynebacteria, hemolytic staphylococci,
84
 Bordet Gengou Agar

Escherichia coli and Pseudomonas.) Approximate The use of sheep blood has been suggested to obviate this
quantitation of the number of colonies of hemolytic problem since sheep blood is deficient in pyridine nucleotides
streptococci may be helpful to the clinician. and does not support growth of H. haemolyticus.5
2. Pneumococci usually appear as very flat, smooth, translu-
cent, grayish and sometimes mucoid colonies surrounded References
by a narrow zone of green (alpha) hemolysis. 1. Snavely and Brahier. 1960. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 33:511.
2. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
B
3. Staphylococci appear as opaque, white to gold-yellow national, Gaithersburg, Md.
3. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
colonies with or without zones of beta hemolysis. foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
4. Atlas. 1993. Handbook of microbiological media. CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fla.
4. Listeria may be distinguished by their rod shape in stains, 5. Ruoff, Whiley and Beighton. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
and by motility at room temperature. Small zones of beta 6. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld (ed.). 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby,
Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
hemolysis are produced.
5. Other organisms representing minimal flora and clinically
Availability
significant isolates can also be expected to grow on this
BBL Blood Agar Base (Infusion Agar)
nonselective formulation.
BAM COMPF
Cat. No. 211037 Dehydrated 500 g
Limitation of the Procedure 211038 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
Colonies of Haemophilus haemolyticus are beta-hemolytic on Difco Blood Agar Base No. 2
horse and rabbit blood agar and must be distinguished from BAM ISO
colonies of beta-hemolytic streptococci using other criteria.6 Cat. No. 269620 Dehydrated 500 g

Bordet Gengou Agar Base Bordet Gengou Blood Agar

Intended Use aspirated bronchial or nasopharyngeal secretions, perinasal
Bordet Gengou Agar Base, with the addition of glycerol and swabs or, perhaps with greater difficulty due to the diversity
sterile blood, is used in qualitative procedures for the detection of flora, from throat swabs.1
and isolation of Bordetella pertussis from clinical specimens. Bordet and Gengou introduced the medium in 1906 as a
method of maintaining stock cultures.2 In 1934, Kendrick and
Summary and Explanation Eldering replaced the 50% human or rabbit blood recom-
Bordet Gengou Blood Agar is used in clinical laboratories as a mended in the original formulation with 15% sheep blood to
method of diagnosing whooping cough. Bordetella pertussis, make the medium more practical for laboratories to produce
the etiologic agent of this disease, may be isolated from for routine clinical procedures.3

Uninoculated Bordetella pertussis

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 8467

Identity Specifications
Difco Bordet Gengou Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.0% solution, soluble upon boiling in
purified water containing 1% glycerol.
Solution is light to medium amber, opal-
escent, may have a slight precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Plain Light to medium amber, opales-
cent, may have a precipitate.
With 15% blood Cherry red, opaque.
Reaction of 3.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Bordet Gengou Agar Base
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 48-72 hours.
INOCULUM RECOVERY WITH
ORGANISM ATCC CFU 15% RABBIT BLOOD
Bordetella bronchiseptica 4617 30-300 Good
Bordetella parapertussis 15311 30-300 Good
Bordetella
Bordetella pertussis 8467 30-300 Good parapertussis
ATCC 15311

85
Section III
B Bordet Gengou Agar, cont.

Principles of the Procedure tions of the agar that contain spreading colonies or molds.
Bordet Gengou Blood Agar contains potato infusion and Colonies of B. pertussis may not be visible without the aid of a
glycerol to supply the nutrients necessary to support the growth microscope for 2-4 days. Plates may be discarded as negative
of B. pertussis. Defibrinated animal blood supplies additional after incubation for 7 days.
nutrients and enables the detection of hemolytic reactions,
which aid in the identification of B. pertussis. Expected Results
Bordetella pertussis produces small, domed, glistening
Formula colonies that resemble bisected pearls. The colonies are
Difco Bordet Gengou Agar Base usually surrounded by a zone of hemolysis; however, some
Approximate Formula* Per Liter strains of B. pertussis are not hemolytic. Gram stains, bio-
Potato, Infusion from 125 g ....................................... 4.5 g chemical tests and serological procedures should be performed
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.5 g
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g to confirm findings.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Limitation of the Procedure
Directions for Preparation from Some Haemophilus spp. will grow on Bordetella isolation
Dehydrated Product media and cross-react with B. pertussis antisera. It may be
1. Suspend 30 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water prudent to rule out X and V factor dependence.
containing 10 g of glycerol. Mix thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to References
1. Hoppe. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology
completely dissolve the powder. 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. 2. Bordet and Gengou. 1906. Ann. Inst. Pasteur 20:731.
3. Kendrick and Eldering. 1934. Am. J. Public Health 24:309
4. Aseptically add 15% sterile, defibrinated blood to the
medium at 45-50C. Mix well. Availability
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Difco Bordet Gengou Agar Base
stable, typical control cultures. BS10 CMPH
Cat. No. 248200 Dehydrated 500 g
Procedure Difco Glycerol

Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci- Cat. No. 228210 Bottle 100 g
mens. Incubate plates in an inverted position (agar side up) in 228220 Bottle 500 g
a moist chamber at 35 2C for 7 days. Examine the plates BBL Bordet Gengou Blood Agar
daily with and without a dissecting microscope (oblique illu- BS10 CMPH
mination) to detect the presence of Bordetella pertussis and Cat. No. 297876 Prepared Plates with Glycerol
and 15% Sheep Blood Pkg. of 10*
spreading colonies or molds that could mask the presence of *Store at 2-8C.
this species. Use a sterile scalpel or needle to remove the por-

Bovine Albumin 5%
Intended Use Bovine Albumin can be added to normally sterile specimens,
Bovine Albumin 5% is used to enrich media for cultivating tissues and body fluids for direct inoculation onto culture
a large variety of microorganisms and tissue cells. Bovine media used for isolating mycobacteria. BSA is also used as an
albumin is also known as bovine serum albumin or BSA.1 enrichment when contaminated specimens are digested.
Bovine Albumin 5%, modified with added sodium chloride
Summary and Explanation and dextrose, is available as Dubos Medium Albumin.
Davis and Dubos2 recommended the use of bovine albumin at
a final concentration of 0.5% in liquid media for culturing Principles of the Procedure
Mycobacterium tuberculosis. In this study, bovine albumin Bovine Albumin 5% is a filter sterilized solution of bovine
neutralized the toxicity of fatty acids and permitted more albumin fraction V. BSA is suggested as a culture media
luxuriant growth of M. tuberculosis. enrichment because its buffering capacity and detoxifying
Ellinghausen and McCullough3 used bovine albumin fraction effect on specimen sediment.1 Bovine Albumin 5% also
V at a final concentration of 1% in liquid, semisolid and solid increases adhesion of the specimen to solid media.1
media for culturing leptospires. Morton et al.4 demonstrated
that 1% bovine albumin stimulated growth of Mycoplasma
(PPLO).

86
 Brain Heart CC Agar

Precautions5 plete discussion of the inoculation of sterile specimens, refer

1. Biosafety Level 2 practices and procedures, containment to appropriate references.
equipment and facilities are required for non-aerosol- Contaminated Specimens for the Isolation of Mycobacteria1
producing manipulations of clinical specimens such as A concentration of 0.2% BSA can be added to specimen
preparation of acid-fast smears. All aerosol-generating
activities must be conducted in a Class I or II biological
sediment that has been digested and centrifuged by the
N-Acetyl-L-cysteine-sodium hydroxide (NALC-NaOH) diges-
B
safety cabinet. tion method or by using the BBL MycoPrep Mycobacterial
2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and Specimen Digestion/Decontamination Kit. Using a separate
facilities are required for laboratory activities in the propa- sterile pipette for each tube, add 1-2 mL of 0.2% BSA, then
gation and manipulation of cultures of M. tuberculosis and resuspend the sediment with the pipette or by shaking the tube
M. bovis. Animal studies also require special procedures. gently by hand.
Procedure Several digestion procedures exist. Consult appropriate
Sterile Specimens for the Isolation of Mycobacteria 1 references for a complete discussion on all digestion and
Normally sterile tissues may be ground in 0.2% BSA and decontamination methods and other testing procedures.
inoculated directly in culture media. Concentrate body fluids
before inoculation because they normally contain only a small Expected Results
number of mycobacteria. Centrifuge fluids at 3,000 g and All media should be examined closely for evidence of growth.
inoculate the sediment onto liquid or solid media. For a com- Refer to the procedure established by laboratory policy or
to appropriate references on typical growth patterns and
confirmation tests.
User Quality Control
Identity Specifications Limitation of the Procedure
Difco Bovine Albumin 5% Bovine Albumin 5% is not recommended for use with the
Appearance: Light amber, clear to very slightly opal- BACTEC Blood Culture System because BSA may delay
escent.
detection times.1
Reaction of Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2

Cultural Response References

1. Metchock, Nolte and Wallace. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). Manual
Difco Bovine Albumin 5% of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Prepare Dubos Broth Base per label directions, substituting Bovine 2. Davis and Dubos. 1945. J. Bacteriol. 55:11.
3. Ellinghausen and McCullough. 1962. Bacteriol. Proc. 62:54.
Albumin 5% for Dubos Medium Albumin. Inoculate and incubate at 4. Morton, Smith, Williams and Eickenberg. 1951. J. Dent. Res. 30:415.
35 2C under CO2 for up to 3 weeks. 5. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.

Mycobacterium
intracellulare 13950 102-103 Good Availability
Mycobacterium Difco Bovine Albumin 5%
tuberculosis H37Ra 25177 102-103 Good Cat. No. 266810 Prepared Tubes, 20 mL Pkg. of 12

Brain Heart CC Agar

Selective Brain Heart Infusion Agars
Intended Use antimicrobial agents, cycloheximide and/or chloramphenicol
Brain Heart CC Agar is a selective medium used for the isola- and, in modified formulations, gentamicin, penicillin and strep-
tion of pathogenic fungi from specimens heavily contaminated tomycin, inhibits the growth of a wide variety of bacteria and
with bacteria and saprophytic fungi.1 It also serves as the base fungi and enhances the isolation of pathogenic fungal species.
for enriched and more selective media supplemented with sheep
blood and antibiotics. Principles of the Procedure
BHI Agar derives its nutrients from the brain heart infusion,
Summary and Explanation peptone and dextrose components. The peptones and infusion
Brain Heart Infusion (BHI) Agar is recommended as a are sources of organic nitrogen, carbon, sulfur, vitamins and
general-purpose medium for aerobic bacteriology and for the trace substances. Dextrose is the carbohydrate source that
primary recovery of fungi from clinical specimens.2,3 With 10% microorganisms utilize by fermentative action. The medium is
sheep blood, it is used to isolate systemic fungi that may grow buffered through the use of disodium phosphate. The addition
poorly on the nonenriched medium. The presence of the of defibrinated sheep blood provides essential growth factors
87
Section III
B Brain Heart CC Agar, cont.

for the more fastidious fungal organisms. Chloramphenicol is Procedure

a broad-spectrum antibiotic which inhibits a wide range of Consult appropriate references for information about the
gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria. Cycloheximide processing and inoculation of specimens.1,4
inhibits most saprophytic molds. Gentamicin is an
For isolation of fungi from potentially contaminated specimens,
aminoglycoside antibiotic that inhibits the growth of
a nonselective medium should be inoculated along with the
gram-negative and some gram-positive bacteria. Penicillin
selective medium. Incubate at 25-30C (plates in an inverted
primarily inhibits gram-positive bacteria. Streptomycin
position, agar side up, with increased humidity). For isolation
inhibits gram-negative organisms.
of fungi causing systemic mycoses, two sets of media should
Formula be inoculated, with one set incubated at 25-30C and a
BBL Brain Heart CC Agar
duplicate set at 35 2C.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter All cultures should be examined at least weekly for fungal
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 16.0 g
Brain Heart, Infusion from (solids) .............................. 8.0 g
growth and should be held for 4-6 weeks before being reported
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 5.0 g as negative.
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.0 g Expected Results
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 2.5 g
Cycloheximide ............................................................ 0.5 g After sufficient incubation, examine cultures for fungal colo-
Chloramphenicol ........................................................ 0.05 g nies exhibiting typical color and morphology. Biochemical tests
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g and serological procedures should be performed to confirm
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
findings.
Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product Limitation of the Procedure
Some fungi may be inhibited by antibiotics in this medium.5
1. Suspend 52 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
References
1. Reisner, Woods, Thomson, Larone, Garcia and Shimizu. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover
completely dissolve the powder. and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology,
Washington, D.C.
3. Autoclave at 118C for 15 minutes. 2. Kwon-Chung and Bennett. 1992. Medical mycology. Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia, Pa.
3. Chapin and Murray. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
4. Merz and Roberts. 1995. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
stable, typical control cultures. microbiology, 6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. Ajello, Georg, Kaplan and Kaufman. 1963. CDC laboratory manual for medical mycology. PHS
Publication No. 994, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.

Candida albicans
User Quality Control ATCC 10231

Identity Specifications
BBL Brain Heart CC Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material.
Solution: 5.2% solution, soluble in purified wa-
ter upon boiling. Solution is light to me-
dium, yellow to tan, clear to moderately
hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear to
moderately hazy.
Reaction of 5.2%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL Brain Heart CC Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
and incubate at 25 2C under appropriate atmospheric conditions for
7 days.
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY
Aspergillus niger 16404 Partial to complete inhibition
Candida albicans 10231 Good
Escherichia coli 25922 Partial to complete inhibition
Trichophyton
mentagrophytes 9533 Good

88
 Brain Heart Infusion Broths

Availability BBL Brain Heart Infusion Agar with 10% Sheep Blood,
Gentamicin and Chloramphenicol
BBL Brain Heart (Infusion) CC Agar

BS10 CMPH MCM7

Cat No. 211057 Dehydrated 500 g
Cat. No. 221841 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 20*
296261 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 20*
296343 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
297650 Prepared Slants (A Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
295756 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
296106
221834
Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
Mycoflask Bottles Pkg. of 10* BBL Brain Heart Infusion (Sheep) Blood Agar with
B
BBL Brain Heart Infusion CC Agar with Sheep Blood
Penicillin and Streptomycin
Cat. No. 296097 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 20*
Cat. No. 296178 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 20*
297335 Prepared Slants (A Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
BBL Brain Heart CC Agar with 10% Sheep Blood *Store at 2-8C.
and Gentamicin
Cat. No. 221842 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 10*
296358 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
295757 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Ctn. of 100*

Brain Heart Infusion (Broth Media)

Brain Heart Infusion Brain Heart Infusion
with Supplements Brain Heart Infusion without
Dextrose Brain Heart Infusion Broth, Modified
Intended Use Fildes enrichment may be incorporated for the growth of
Brain Heart Infusion (BHI) is a general-purpose liquid fastidious organisms. With the addition of 0.1% agar, the
medium used in the cultivation of fastidious and nonfastidious medium is used for the cultivation of anaerobes. The medium
microorganisms, including aerobic and anaerobic bacteria, pre-reduced in Hungate tubes is recommended for the cultivation
from a variety of clinical and nonclinical materials. It serves of anaerobic microorganisms, particularly obligate anaerobes.
as a base for supplemented media containing 0.1% agar, Fildes The broth medium that contains 6.5% sodium chloride is used
enrichment or 6.5% sodium chloride. A supplemented to differentiate the enterococci from nonenterococcal group D
pre-reduced formulation in tubes is especially recommended streptococci by the 6.5% salt tolerance test.4
for the cultivation of anaerobes.
Brain Heart Infusion without Dextrose is a basal medium used
Summary and Explanation with carbohydrates for fermentation studies.
Rosenow described brain-heart infusion broth prepared by Brain Heart Infusion, Modified differs from other formula-
adding pieces of brain tissue to meat infusion or beef extract- tions by the quantities of the ingredients and the substitution
dextrose broth.1 A variation of this medium appeared for many of pancreatic digest of casein for pancreatic digest of gelatin.
years in the National Formulary.2 The current formulation is
similar to the NF Brain Heart Infusion Broth, but the brain Principles of the Procedure
infusion component is composed of solids resulting from BHI Broth is a nutritious, buffered culture medium that
the drying of the liquid material and the heart infusion com- contains infusions of brain and heart tissue and peptones to
ponent has been replaced with a peptone of partially digested supply protein and other nutrients necessary to support the
animal tissue. growth of fastidious and nonfastidious microorganisms. In the
formulation containing 6.5% sodium chloride, the salt acts
BHI broth is used for the cultivation of a wide variety of
as a differential and/or selective agent by interfering with mem-
microorganisms, including bacteria, yeasts and molds.
brane permeability and osmotic and electrokinetic equilibria
BHI broth, 0.5 mL per tube, is used for the cultivation of in salt-intolerant organisms. Fildes enrichment (peptic digest
bacteria employed in the preparation of inocula for of sheep blood) is incorporated into one tubed formulation
microdilution minimal inhibitory concentration (MIC) and for the cultivation of fastidious microorganisms, such as
identification (ID) test panels. When a large number of cells Haemophilus influenzae.5,6 The addition of 0.1% agar aids in
are inoculated into the small volume of broth, a bacterial the cultivation of anaerobic microorganisms because its
culture rapidly reaches its stationary phase of growth.3 consistency yields conditions of reduced oxygen tension. The
The medium is also used in 5-mL amounts per tube for the pre-reduced medium in Hungate tubes is based on Hungate
preparation of inocula in antimicrobial susceptibility test methods of culturing anaerobic microorganisms outside of an
procedures. This volume and the 8-mL tubes also can be used anaerobic chamber.7 The tubes provide a reduced medium in
for general purposes.

89
Section III
B Brain Heart Infusion Broths, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Bacto Brain Heart Infusion BBL Brain Heart Infusion
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous. Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
Solution: 3.7% solution, soluble in purified material.
water upon boiling. Solution is light Solution: 3.7% solution, soluble in purified water
to medium amber, clear. upon boiling. Solution is light to medium,
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear. yellow to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 3.7% Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2 to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 3.7%
Difco Brain Heart Infusion without Dextrose Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.5% solution, soluble in purified
BBL Brain Heart Infusion Broth, Modified

water upon boiling. Solution is light Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
to medium amber, clear. material.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear. Solution: 3.8% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
Reaction of 3.5%
to medium, yellow to tan, clear to
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
slightly hazy.

Cultural Response Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear

to slightly hazy.
Bacto Brain Heart Infusion or Difco Brain Heart

Reaction of 3.7%
Infusion without Dextrose Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-48 hours. Cultural Response
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY BBL Brain Heart Infusion or BBL Brain Heart
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 102-103 Good Infusion Broth, Modified
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 102-103 Good Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C under appropriate atmospheric conditions for 7 days
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good
(incubate C. albicans at 20-27C).
INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
a self-contained, anaerobic tube sealed using a Hungate screw ORGANISM ATCC CFU BHI BHI, MODIFIED
cap. The cap contains a butyl rubber septum stopper that Bacteroides fragilis 25285 104 Good Good
permits inoculation and incubation without exposing the Candida albicans 10231 103 Good Good
medium to air. Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103 Good N/A
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 103 Good Good
Formulae Streptococcus
pneumoniae 6305 103 Good Good
Bacto Brain Heart Infusion Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 103 Good Good
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Calf Brains, Infusion from 200 g ................................ 7.7 g
Beef Heart, Infusion from 250 g ................................. 9.8 g
Proteose Peptone ..................................................... 10.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 2.5 g
BBL Brain Heart Infusion
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Brain Heart, Infusion from (solids) .............................. 6.0 g
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 6.0 g
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ..................................... 14.5 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 3.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 2.5 g
Difco Brain Heart Infusion without Dextrose
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Calf Brains, Infusion from 200 g ................................ 7.7 g
Beef Heart, Infusion from 250 g ................................. 9.8 g
Proteose Peptone ..................................................... 10.0 g Uninoculated Neisseria Streptococcus
Tube meningitidis pyogenes
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g ATCC 13090 ATCC 19615
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 2.5 g Brain Heart Infusion
Brain Heart
Infusion

90
 Brain Heart Infusion Broths, cont.

BBL Brain Heart Infusion Broth, Modified References

Approximate Formula* Per Liter 1. Rosenow. 1919. J. Dent. Res. 1:205.
Brain Heart, Infusion from (solids) .............................. 3.5 g 2. American Pharmaceutical Association. 1950. The national formulary, 9th ed., APA, Washington,
D.C.
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................. 15.0 g 3. Pratt-Rippin and Pezzlo. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1.
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.0 g 4. Barry. 1976. The antimicrobic susceptibility test: principles and practices. Lea & Febiger,
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 2.5
g
g
Philadelphia, Pa.
5. Fildes. 1920. Br. J. Exp. Pathol. 1:129.
6. Fildes. 1921. Br. J. Exp. Pathol. 2.16.
B
7. Hungate. 1969. Methods in microbiology. Academic Press, New York, N.Y.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
8. Hindler and Swenson. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Directions for Preparation from 9. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved Standard: M7-A5,
Methods for dilution antimicrobial susceptibility tests for bacteria that grow aerobically, 5th ed.
Dehydrated Product NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
10. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved Standard M2-A7, Perfor-
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water: mance standards for antimicrobial disk susceptibility tests, 7th ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.

Bacto Brain Heart Infusion 37 g;

BBL Brain Heart Infusion 37 g; Availability
Difco Brain Heart Infusion without Dextrose 35 g; Bacto Brain Heart Infusion
AOAC BAM CCAM CMPH COMPF ISO MCM7 NCCLS
BBL Brain Heart Infusion Broth, Modified 38 g.
SMD SMWW USDA
Mix thoroughly. Cat. No. 237400 Dehydrated 100 g
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 237500 Dehydrated 500 g
completely dissolve the powder. 237200 Dehydrated 2 kg
237300 Dehydrated 10 kg
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using BBL Brain Heart Infusion
AOAC BAM CCAM CMPH COMPF ISO MCM7 NCCLS
stable, typical control cultures.
SMD SMWW USDA
Cat. No. 211059 Dehydrated 500 g
Procedure 211060 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
With liquid specimens, tubed media should be inoculated with 211061 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
221778 Prepared Tubes, 0.5 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100
1-2 drops of the specimen using a sterile pipette. Swab specimens 221812 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10
may be inserted into broth after inoculation of plated media. 221813 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100
220837 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100
Liquid media for anaerobic incubation should be reduced prior 297312 Prepared Bottles, 100 mL 1 bottle
to inoculation by placing the tubes, with caps loosened, under 296299 Prepared Bottles, 400 mL 1 bottle
anaerobic conditions for 18-24 hours prior to use. An efficient 297304 Prepared Tubes, Pre-reduced
(with Hungate Cap) Pkg. of 10
and easy way to obtain suitable anaerobic conditions is through
the use of BBL GasPak EZ anaerobic systems or an alternative BBL Brain Heart Infusion with 6.5% Sodium Chloride
Cat. No. 221785 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10
anaerobic system. Alternatively, liquid media may be reduced
immediately prior to use by boiling with caps loosened and cool- BBL Brain Heart Infusion with 0.1% Agar

Cat. No. 297640 Prepared Tubes, 10 mL (D Tubes) Ctn. of 100

ing with tightened caps to room temperature before inoculation.
BBL Brain Heart Infusion with Fildes Enrichment
Before inoculating Hungate tubes, disinfect the septum of the cap. Cat. No. 297782 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
To inoculate, insert needle of syringe containing specimen through 297200 Prepared Tubes, 9 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
the septum and inject the specimen into the medium. Withdraw Difco Brain Heart Infusion without Dextrose
the needle slowly to avoid introducing air into the tube. Cat. No. 250220 Dehydrated 10 kg
For use in antimicrobial susceptibility testing, refer to appro- BBL Brain Heart Infusion Broth, Modified

priate references.8-10 Cat. No. 299070 Dehydrated 500 g

BBL Fildes Enrichment

Expected Results Cat. No. 211866 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
Growth in the tubes is indicated by the presence of turbidity 220810 Prepared Bottles, 100 mL 1 bottle*
220811 Prepared Bottles, 100 mL Pkg. of 6*
compared to an uninoculated control. If growth appears,
*Store at 2-8C.
cultures should be examined by Gram stain and subcultured
onto appropriate media; e.g., a Trypticase Soy Agar with
5% Sheep Blood and/or Chocolate II Agar plate, EMB Agar
or MacConkey II Agar plate. If anaerobes are suspected,
subcultures should be incubated anaerobically, as in a GasPak
EZ anaerobic system.
Enterococci will grow in the 6.5% NaCl broth within 24-48
hours. Nonenterococcal group D streptococci fail to grow in
the medium after 48 hours of incubation.3

91
Section III
B Brain Heart Infusion Agars

Brain Heart Infusion Agars

Brain Heart Infusion Agar Brain Heart Infusion Sheep
Blood Agar Brain Heart Infusion Agar, Modified
Intended Use microorganisms utilize by fermentative action. The medium
Brain Heart Infusion (BHI) Agar is a general-purpose medium is buffered through the use of disodium phosphate.
suitable for the cultivation of a wide variety of organism types, When defibrinated sheep blood is added to the basal medium,
including bacteria, yeasts and molds. With the addition of 5% it provides essential growth factors for the more fastidious
or 10% sheep blood, it is used for the isolation and cultivation fungal organisms.
of a wide variety of fungal species, including systemic fungi,1
from clinical and nonclinical sources. Formulae
Difco Brain Heart Infusion Agar
Summary and Explanation Approximate Formula* Per Liter
In the early years of bacteriology, meat infusions were utilized Calf Brains, Infusion from 200 g ................................ 7.7 g
as the growth-supporting components in a large number of Beef Heart, Infusion from 250 g ................................. 9.8 g
Proteose Peptone ..................................................... 10.0 g
culture media. Although they were cumbersome to prepare, Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.0 g
lacked consistency from batch to batch and were undefined Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
as to their nutritive content, they enabled the cultivation of Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 2.5 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
microorganisms in both solid and liquid media. As the state of
BBL Brain Heart Infusion Agar
the art in enzymology and chemistry advanced, methods were
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
developed for the preparation of peptones that were the result Brain Heart, Infusion from (solids) .............................. 8.0 g
of enzymatic or acid hydrolysis of animal tissues or products Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 5.0 g
and vegetable substances. These peptones currently are the Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 16.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.0 g
major nutritional additives to culture media formulations, but Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
infusions are still utilized in specific media. Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 2.5 g
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g
BHI Agar is one formulation in which meat infusion is used,
BBL Brain Heart Infusion Agar, Modified
although, unlike in the earlier days, the infusion components Approximate Formula* Per Liter
are solids resulting from the drying of the liquid infusion ma- Brain Heart, Infusion from (solids) .............................. 3.5 g
terial rather than the liquid components themselves. Peptones Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................. 15.0 g
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
are also included as sources of nutrients. Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.0 g
Brain Heart Infusion Agar, Modified, the agar form of Brain Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 2.5 g
Heart Infusion, Modified, differs from other formulations by Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
the quantities of the infusion and peptone components utilized. *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

BHI Agar has proven to be effective in the cultivation of Directions for Preparation from
a wide variety of microorganisms, including many types of Dehydrated Product
pathogens. BHI Agar can be used as a general medium for
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
aerobic bacteriology and for the primary recovery of fungi from
Difco Brain Heart Infusion Agar 52 g;
clinical specimens.2 Brain Heart Infusion Agar with 10% Sheep
BBL Brain Heart Infusion Agar 52 g;
Blood can be used to isolate systemic fungi that may grow
BBL Brain Heart Infusion Agar, Modified 53 g.
poorly on the nonenriched medium. Antimicrobial agents,
Mix thoroughly.
including chloramphenicol, gentamicin, and penicillin in
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
combination with streptomycin, can be incorporated to
completely dissolve the powder.
improve the recovery of pathogenic fungi from specimens
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
heavily contaminated with bacteria (see Selective Brain Heart
4. Before use, agitate gently to distribute the precipitate
Infusion Agars).3
uniformly throughout the medium.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Principles of the Procedure
stable, typical control cultures.
BHI Agar derives its nutrients from the brain heart infusion,
peptone and dextrose components. The peptones and infusion
are sources of organic nitrogen, carbon, sulfur, vitamins and
trace substances. Dextrose is a carbohydrate source that

92
 Brain Heart Infusion Agars, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Brain Heart Infusion Agar BBL Brain Heart Infusion Agar B
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
Solution: 5.2% solution, soluble in purified ous material.
water upon boiling. Solution is light Solution: 5.2% solution, soluble in purified
to medium amber, slightly opalescent water upon boiling. Solution is medium
to opalescent with a flocculent to dark, yellow to tan, trace to mod-
precipitate. erately hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, yellow to tan, trace
opalescent to opalescent with a to moderately hazy.
flocculent precipitate. Reaction of 5.2%
Reaction of 5.2% Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
BBL Brain Heart Infusion Agar, Modified
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
Cultural Response ous material.
Difco Brain Heart Infusion Agar
Solution: 5.3% solution, soluble in purified
Prepare the medium per label directions without (plain) and with water upon boiling. Solution is medium
5% defibrinated sheep blood (SB). Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C to dark, yellow to tan, trace to mod-
with 5-10% CO2 for 18-48 hours (incubate A. niger aerobically at erately hazy.
30 2C for 18-72 hours).
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, yellow to tan, trace
INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY to moderately hazy.

ORGANISM ATCC CFU PLAIN WITH SB Reaction of 5.3%
Aspergillus niger 16404 102-3102 Good Good Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
Escherichia coli 25922 102-3102 Good Good
Staphylococcus Cultural Response
aureus 25923 102-3102 Good Good BBL Brain Heart Infusion Agar
Streptococcus Prepare the medium per label directions without (plain) and with
pneumoniae 6305 102-3102 Good Good 5% defibrinated sheep blood (SB). Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C
Streptococcus under appropriate atmospheric conditions for 48 hours (incubate
pyogenes 19615 102-3102 Good Good S. rimosus at 23-27C for up to 7 days if necessary).
INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU PLAIN WITH SB
Procedure Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 N/A Good
Prepare plated medium from tubed agar deeps by liquefying Listeria
the medium in boiling water, cooling to 45-50C and pouring monocytogenes 19115 103-104 N/A Good
into sterile Petri dishes. Additives (e.g., blood) can be used Pseudomonas
aeruginosa 10145 103-104 Good N/A
as desired. Shigella flexneri 12022 103-104 Good N/A
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci- Staphylococcus
aureus 25923 103-104 Good Good
mens. Since many pathogens require carbon dioxide on pri-
Streptococcus
mary isolation, plates of plain BHI may be incubated in an pneumoniae 6305 103-104 Good Good
atmosphere containing approximately 5-10% CO2. Incubate Streptococcus
plates at 35 2C for 24-48 hours. pyogenes 19615 103-104 Good Good
Streptococcus
For isolation of fungi from potentially contaminated specimens, rimosus 10970 Undiluted Good N/A
a selective medium should be inoculated along with the nonse- BBL Brain Heart Infusion Agar, Modified

lective medium. Incubate the plates at 25-30C in an inverted Prepare the medium per label directions without (plain) and with
position (agar side up) with increased humidity. For isolation 5% defibrinated sheep blood (SB). Inoculate using pour plates and
of fungi causing systemic mycoses, two sets of media should incubate at 35 2C for 48 hours.
be inoculated, with one set incubated at 25-30C and a dupli- INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU PLAIN WITH SB
cate set at 35 2C. All cultures should be examined at least
Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 N/A Good
weekly for fungal growth and should be held for 4-6 weeks
Staphylococcus
before being reported as negative. aureus 25923 103-104 Good Good
BHI Agar slants primarily are used for the cultivation and Streptococcus
pyogenes 19615 103-104 Good Good
maintenance of pure cultures of microorganisms.

93
Section III
B Brain Heart Infusion Agars, cont.

Expected Results BBL Brain Heart Infusion Agar

AOAC BAM BS10 CMPH COMPF MCM7 SMD SMWW USDA
After sufficient incubation, the plates should show isolated
Cat. No. 211065 Dehydrated 500 g
colonies in streaked areas and confluent growth in areas of 212166 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
heavy inoculation. When culturing for fungi, examine plates 212247 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
for fungal colonies exhibiting typical color and morphology. United States and Canada
Biochemical tests and serological procedures should be Cat. No. 221569 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 20*
221570 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Ctn. of 100*
performed to confirm findings. 220838 Prepared Pour Tubes (20 mL) Pkg. of 10
221610 Prepared Slants (K Tubes) Pkg of 10
Slant cultures may be used as sources of inocula for additional
297283 Prepared Slants (A Tubes) Pkg. of 10
studies or for organism maintenance purposes.
Europe
Cat. No. 255003 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
References
1. Creitz and Puckett. 1954. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 24:1318. BBL Brain Heart Infusion Agar with 5% Sheep Blood

2. Chapin and Murray. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical BS10 CMPH MCM7
microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Reisner, Woods, Thompson, Larone, Garcia and Shimizu. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover Cat. No. 297199 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, 296067 Prepared Slants Ctn. of 100*
Washington, D.C.
BBL Brain Heart Infusion Agar with 10% Sheep Blood
Availability BS10 CMPH MCM7
United States and Canada
Difco Brain Heart Infusion Agar

Cat. No. 296125 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
AOAC BAM BS10 CMPH COMPF MCM7 SMD SMWW USDA 221843 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 10*
Cat. No. 241820 Dehydrated 100 g
241830 Dehydrated 500 g Europe
241810 Dehydrated 2 kg Cat. No. 255544 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
BBL Brain Heart Infusion Agar, Modified

Cat. No. 299069 Dehydrated 500 g

*Store at 2-8C.

Bacto Brain Heart Infusion, Porcine

Intended Use Hayden,2 revising Rosenows procedure by adding crushed
Bacto Brain Heart Infusion, Porcine is used for cultivating a marble to the medium, reported favorable growth of organisms
wide variety of microorganisms. from dental pathogens. Brain Heart Infusion is a modification
of the media described by Rosenow1 and Hayden.2 Infusion from
Summary and Explanation calf brains has replaced the brain tissue and disodium phos-
Rosenow1 devised an excellent medium for culturing strepto- phate has replaced the calcium carbonate buffer.
cocci by supplementing Dextrose Broth with brain tissue. Brain Heart Infusion, Porcine was developed as an alternative
to the Brain Heart Infusion (BHI) formula, and replaces calf
User Quality Control brains and beef heart with porcine brains and heart. Brain Heart
Infusion, Porcine was developed for pharmaceutical and
Identity Specifications
vaccine production and can replace the traditional BHI
Bacto Brain Heart Infusion, Porcine
depending on organism and production application. BHI,
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homoge-
neous. Porcine was formulated with no bovine components to mini-
Solution: 3.7% solution, soluble in purified mize Bovine Spongiform Encephalopathy (BSE) risk.
water. Solution is light to medium
amber, clear. The nutritionally rich formula of BHI is used to grow a variety
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear. of microorganisms. The original Brain Heart Infusion media
Reaction of 3.7% are specified in standard methods for multiple applications.3-6
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
Principles of the Procedure
Cultural Response Infusion from pork brains, infusion from pork heart and Pork
Bacto Brain Heart Infusion, Porcine Peptone No. 2 provide nitrogen, carbon, sulfur and vitamins
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-48 hours.
in Brain Heart Infusion, Porcine. Dextrose is the carbon
energy source to facilitate organism growth. Sodium chloride
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
maintains the osmotic balance of the medium. Disodium phos-
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 102-103 Fair
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 102-103 Good
phate is the buffering agent.
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 102-103 Fair

94
 Brain Heart Infusion with PABA

Formula Procedure
Bacto Brain Heart Infusion, Porcine See appropriate references for specific procedures using Brain
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Heart Infusion.
Pork Brains, Infusion from 200 g ................................ 7.7 g
Pork Heart, Infusion from 250 g ................................. 9.8 g
Expected Results
Pork Peptone No. 2 .................................................. 10.0
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.0
g
g Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results. B
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 2.5 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
References
1. Rosenow. 1919. J. Dent. Res. 1:205.
2. Hayden. 1923. Arch. Int. Med. 32:828.
Directions for Preparation from 3. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Dehydrated Product 4. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
national, Gaithersburg, Md.
1. Suspend 37 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix 5. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
thoroughly. 6. Horwitz (ed). 2000. Official methods of analysis, AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC Interna-
tional, Gaithersburg, Md.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
pletely dissolve the powder. Availability
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Bacto Brain Heart Infusion, Porcine
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Cat. No. 256120 Dehydrated 500 g
stable, typical control cultures. 256110 Dehydrated 10 kg

Brain Heart Infusion with PABA

Brain Heart Infusion with PAB and Agar
Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Brain Heart Infusion (BHI) with para-aminobenzoic acid (PAB PAB(A) has been incorporated into the formulation for BHI
or PABA) is a medium used for the examination of blood from to enable the detection of microorganisms in the blood of
patients who have received sulfonamide therapy. The addi- patients who are undergoing sulfonamide therapy. The addi-
tion of agar has been found to improve growth of anaerobes.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Brain Heart Infusion with PAB and Agar BBL Brain Heart Infusion with PABA
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homoge- Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
neous. ous material.
Solution: 3.8% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 3.7% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light water upon boiling. Solution is light
to medium amber, slightly opalescent. to medium, yellow to tan, clear to
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal- slightly hazy.
escent. Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear
Reaction of 3.8% to slightly hazy.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2 Reaction of 3.7%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
Cultural Response
Difco Brain Heart Infusion with PAB and Agar Cultural Response
Prepare the medium per label direction without and with 0.5 g/L of BBL Brain Heart Infusion with PABA
sulfadiazine. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C under appropriate Prepare the medium per label directions without and with 0.5 g/L of
atmospheric conditions for 18-48 hours. sulfadiazine (do not add agar). Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C
under appropriate atmospheric conditions for 7 days (incubate
RECOVERY RECOVERY C. albicans at 20-27C).
INOCULUM WITHOUT WITH
ORGANISM ATCC CFU SULFADIAZINE SULFDIAZINE
RECOVERY RECOVERY
Bacteroides fragilis 25285 30-300 Good Good INOCULUM WITHOUT WITH

ORGANISM ATCC CFU SULFADIAZINE SULFDIAZINE
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 30-300 Good Good
Streptococcus Bacteroides fragilis 25285 104 Good Good
pneumoniae 6305 30-300 Good Good Candida albicans 10231 104 Good Good
Streptococcus Streptococcus
pyogenes 19615 30-300 Good Good pyogenes 19615 104 Good Good

95
Section III
B Brain Heart Infusion w/PABA, cont.

tion of 0.1% agar results in a medium with improved ability 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
to support the growth of certain microorganisms (e.g., anaer- pletely dissolve the powder.
obes and microaerophiles). 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Principles of the Procedure stable, typical control cultures.
Unsupplemented BHI broth supports the growth of a broad
spectrum of microorganisms, including bacteria and fungi, due Procedure
to its content of nutritive ingredients, including brain heart With liquid specimens, tubed media should be inoculated
infusion, peptones and dextrose. Sodium chloride maintains with 1-2 drops of the specimen using a sterile pipette. Swab
osmotic equilibrium. PAB(A) neutralizes, by competitive specimens may be inserted into broth after inoculation of plated
inhibition, the effect of sulfonamides in the inoculum. The media.
inclusion of agar minimizes oxygen distribution by restricting
Liquid tubed media for anaerobic incubation should be
convection currents.
reduced prior to incubation by placing the tubes, with caps
loosened, under anaerobic conditions for 18-24 hours prior to
Formulae
use. An efficient and easy way to obtain suitable anaerobic
Difco Brain Heart Infusion with PAB and Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
conditions is through the use of BBL GasPak EZ anaerobic
Calf Brains, Infusion from 200 g ................................ 7.7 g system or an alternative anaerobic system. Alternatively,
Beef Heart, Infusion from 250 g ................................. 9.8 g liquid media may be reduced immediately prior to use by
Proteose Peptone ..................................................... 10.0 g boiling with caps loosened and cooling with tightened caps to
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g room temperature before inoculation.
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 2.5 g
p-Aminobenzoic Acid ................................................. 0.05 g Expected Results
Agar ........................................................................... 1.0 g
Examine tubes at intervals for up to 7 days for growth, which
BBL Brain Heart Infusion with PABA
is indicated by the presence of turbidity compared to an
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Brain Heart, Infusion from (solids) .............................. 6.0 g uninoculated control.
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 6.0 g
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ..................................... 14.5 g
If growth appears, cultures should be examined by Gram stain
Dextrose ..................................................................... 3.0 g and subcultured onto appropriate media; e.g., a Trypticase Soy
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g Agar with 5% Sheep Blood and/or Chocolate II Agar plate, Eosin
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 2.5 g Methylene Blue Agar, Levine, or MacConkey II Agar plates.
p-Aminobenzoic Acid ................................................. 0.05 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. If anaerobes are suspected, subcultures should be incubated
anaerobically, as in a BBL GasPak EZ anaerobic system.
Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product Availability
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water: Difco Brain Heart Infusion with PAB and Agar
Difco Brain Heart Infusion with PAB and Agar 38 g; Cat. No. 249910 Dehydrated 500 g
BBL Brain Heart Infusion with PABA 37 g (for blood BBL Brain Heart Infusion with PABA
culture work, add 0.5 to 1.0 g of agar). Cat. No. 211069 Dehydrated 500 g
220842 Prepared Tubes with 0.1% Agar, 20 mL
Mix thoroughly. (A Tubes) Pkg. of 10

Brewer Anaerobic Agar

Intended Use Anaerobic bacteria cause a variety of infections in humans,
Brewer Anaerobic Agar is used for cultivating anaerobic and including otitis media, oral infections, endocarditis, meningitis,
microaerophilic bacteria. wound infections following bowel surgery or trauma and bac-
teremia.2-5 Anaerobic bacteria are the predominant flora colo-
Summary and Explanation nizing the skin and mucous membranes of the body.3 Anaer-
Brewer1 described a special Petri dish cover that allowed obes vary in their sensitivity to oxygen and nutritional require-
surface growth of anaerobes and microaerophiles without ments.2 Anaerobic bacteria lack cytochromes and thus are
anaerobic equipment. The microorganisms were grown on agar unable to use oxygen as a terminal electron acceptor.3
with a low oxidation-reduction potential. Brewer Anaerobic
Agar was originally formulated and modified for the procedure Principles of the Procedure
described by Brewer.1 This medium is suitable for standard Peptones and yeast extract provide the nitrogen, vitamins and
plating procedures used in cultivating anaerobic bacteria. amino acids in Brewer Anaerobic Agar. Dextrose is the carbon

96
 Brewer Anaerobic Agar, cont.

3. Examine at 24 hours if incubating plates in an anaerobic

User Quality Control
chamber. Examine at 48 hours if incubating plates in an
Identity Specifications anaerobic jar or pouch, or if using Brewer anaerobic dish
Difco Brewer Anaerobic Agar cover.
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- 4. Extended incubation may be necessary to recover some
neous.
anaerobes. B
Solution: 5.8% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light Brewer Anaerobic Agar Plates
amber, slightly opalescent while hot, 1. Dispense 50-60 mL of Brewer Anaerobic Agar into a
turning red on aeration and cooling.
standard Petri dish. For best results use porous tops to
Prepared Appearance: Light pink ring at outer edge, light
amber in center, slightly opalescent. obtain a dry surface.
Reaction of 5.8% 2. Inoculate the surface of the medium by streaking; avoid
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2 the edges of the plates.
Cultural Response 3. Replace the standard Petri dish lid with a sterile Brewer
Difco Brewer Anaerobic Agar anaerobic dish cover. The cover should not rest on the Petri
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate Brewer plates with dish bottom. The inner glass ridge should seal against the
the test organisms. Replace the porous covers with Brewer covers and uninoculated periphery of the agar. It is essential that the
seal. Incubate plates at 35 2C aerobically for 18-48 hours. sealing ring inside the cover is in contact with the medium.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY This seal must not be broken before the end of the incuba-
Bacteroides fragilis 25285 102-103 Good tion period. A small amount of air is caught over the
Clostridium beijerinckii 17795 102-103 Good surface of the medium, and the oxygen in this space reacts
Clostridium perfringens 12924 102-103 Good
with the reducing agents to form an anaerobic environment.
4. Incubate aerobically as desired.
source, and sodium chloride maintains osmotic equilibrium. For a complete discussion on anaerobic and microaerophilic
Sodium thioglycollate and sodium formaldehyde sulfoxylate bacteria from clinical specimens, refer to the appropriate
are the reducing agents. Resazurin serves as an indicator of procedures outlined in the references.2-4 For the examination
anaerobiosis with a pink color indicating the presence of oxy- of anaerobic bacteria in food refer to standard methods.6-8
gen. Agar is the solidifying agent.
Expected Results
Formula Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Difco Brewer Anaerobic Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Limitations of the Procedure
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g 1. Clinical specimens must be obtained properly and transported
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g to the laboratory in a suitable anaerobic transport container.2
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g 2. The microbiologist must be able to verify quality control
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g of the medium and determine whether the environment is
Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 2.0 g anaerobic.2
Sodium Formaldehyde Sulfoxylate .............................. 1.0 g 3. The microbiologist must perform aerotolerance testing on each
Resazurin ................................................................... 2.0 mg
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
isolate recovered to ensure the organism is an anaerobe.2

Directions for Preparation from References

1. Brewer. 1942. Science 95:587.
Dehydrated Product 2. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, American Society for Microbiol-
ogy, Washington, D.C.
1. Suspend 58 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix 3. Baron, Peterson and Finegold. 1994. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 9th ed. Mosby-Year
thoroughly. Book, Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
4. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. Smith. 1975. The pathogenic anaerobic bacteria, 2nd ed. Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, Ill.
pletely dissolve the powder. 6. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the microbiological examination of dairy products,
16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. 7. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
national, Gaithersburg, Md.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 8. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
stable, typical control cultures. 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

Procedure Availability
Standard Petri Dishes 2 Difco Brewer Anaerobic Agar
Cat. No. 227920 Dehydrated 500 g
1. Inoculate a properly obtained specimen onto the medium,
and streak to obtain isolated colonies.
2. Immediately incubate anaerobically at 35 2C.

97
Section III
B Brilliant Green Agar

Brilliant Green Agar

Intended Use User Quality Control
This medium conforms with specifications of The United States
Pharmacopeia (USP). Identity Specifications
Difco Brilliant Green Agar
Brilliant Green Agar is a highly selective medium for the isolation Dehydrated Appearance: Pink, free-flowing, homogeneous.
of Salmonella other than S. typhi from feces and other materials. Solution: 5.8% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is
Summary and Explanation brownish-green, clear to very slightly
opalescent.
Brilliant Green Agar was first described by Kristensen et al.
Prepared Appearance: Orange-brown, very slightly to slightly
in 1925. 1 Their formulation was modified slightly by
opalescent.
Kauffmann in 1935.2 The medium is included in procedures Reaction of 5.8%
for the examination of water and wastewater.3 The medium Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2
is also included in the USP for use in the performance of
Cultural Response
Microbial Limit Tests.4 It is classified as a highly selective
Difco Brilliant Green Agar
medium for the recovery of salmonellae except for the typhoid
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
and paratyphoid bacilli.5 35 2C for 18-24 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY
Principles of the Procedure ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Brilliant green dye inhibits gram-positive bacteria and a majority Escherichia coli 25922 ~104 Poor Yellow-green
of gram-negative bacilli. Phenol red serves as a pH indicator Salmonella choleraesuis
and yields a yellow color as a result of acid production in the subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Enteritidis 13076 30-300 Good Red
fermentation of the lactose and/or sucrose in the medium. Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
Formula serotype Typhi 19430 30-300 None to poor Red
Difco Brilliant Green Agar Salmonella choleraesuis
Approximate Formula* Per Liter subsp. choleraesuis
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g serotype Typhimurium 14028 30-300 Good Red
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g Staphylococcus aureus 25923 ~104 Marked
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g inhibition
Saccharose ............................................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g
Brilliant Green .......................................................... 12.5 mg Expected Results
Phenol Red ................................................................. 0.08 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Typical colonial morphology on Brilliant Green Agar is as follows:
Salmonella (other than
Directions for Preparation from S. typhi and S. paratyphi) ..... White to red, opaque colonies
Dehydrated Product ............................................ surrounded by red zones in the
............................................ medium
1. Suspend 58 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
S. typhi and S. paratyphi ...... No growth to trace growth
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Shigella ................................ No growth to trace growth
completely dissolve the powder. Escherichia coli and
Enterobacter/Klebsiella ......... Yellow to greenish-yellow
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
............................................ colonies surrounded by intense
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using ............................................ yellow-green zones in medium
stable, typical control cultures. Proteus ................................. No growth to trace growth
Pseudomonas ....................... Pink to red colonies
Procedure
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from Gram-positive bacteria ......... No growth to trace growth
specimens. A less selective medium and a nonselective medium
should also be streaked to increase the chance of recovery when
the population of gram-negative organisms is low and
to provide an indication of other organisms present in the
specimen. Incubate plates, protected from light, at 35 2C
for 18-24 hours. If negative after 24 hours, reincubate an
additional 24 hours.

98
 Brilliant Green Agar Modified

References Availability
1. Kristensen, Lester and Jurgens. 1925. Br. J. Exp. Pathol. 6:291.
2. Kauffmann. 1935. Z. Hyg. Infektionskr. 117:26.
Difco Brilliant Green Agar
3. Downes and Ito (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and wastewater, 20th EP SMWW USP
ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
4. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
Cat. No. 228530 Dehydrated 500 g
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
BBL Brilliant Green Agar
EP SMWW USP B
Cat. No. 295963 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.

Brilliant Green Agar Modified

Intended Use User Quality Control
Brilliant Green Agar Modified is used for isolating Salmonella
from water, sewage and foodstuffs. Identity Specifications
Difco Brilliant Green Agar Modified
Summary and Explanation Dehydrated Appearance: Pink, free-flowing, homogeneous.
1
Kampelmacher proposed the formula for a selective medium Solution: 5.2% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is orange-
to isolate Salmonella from pig feces and minced meat. Brilliant brown, clear to slightly opalescent.
Green Agar Modified is more selective than Desoxycholate Prepared Appearance: Orange-brown, clear to slightly
Citrate Agar and other brilliant green media, and inhibits the opalescent.
growth of Pseudomonas aeruginosa and partially inhibits Reaction of 5.2%
the growth of Proteus spp. which may resemble Salmonella. Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.1
Salmonella cholerasuis grows well on Brilliant Green Agar
Cultural Response
Modified compared to Desoxycholate Citrate Agar.2
Difco Brilliant Green Agar Modified
Brilliant Green Agar Modified is recommended for the isolation Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
of Salmonella, other than Salmonella typhi, from water and 35 2C for 18-24 hours.

associated materials3 and meat and meat products.4 It is INOCULUM COLONY

ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
recommended by the British Poultry Meat Society5 for the
Escherichia coli 25922 103 Complete to Green
examination of poultry and poultry products. The recom- partial inhibition
mended procedures include using complementary selective
Proteus mirabilis 25933 103 Complete to Red
culture media and techniques to increase the likelihood of partial inhibition
isolating multiple serotypes of Salmonella from samples.6 Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
Principles of the Procedure serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good Red
Brilliant Green Agar Modified contains beef extract and peptone Uninoculated Salmonella typhimurium
as sources of carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Yeast Plate ATCC 14028
extract supplies B-complex vitamins which stimulate bacterial
growth. Lactose and sucrose are carbohydrate sources. In
the presence of phenol red, a pH indicator, lactose- and/or
sucrose-nonfermenting Salmonella will produce red colonies.
Brilliant green inhibits gram-positive organisms and many gram-
negative bacteria, except Salmonella. Agar is the solidifying agent.

Formula
Difco Brilliant Green Agar Modified
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Extract ................................................................ 5.0 g
Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 1.0 g
Monosodium Phosphate ............................................ 0.6 g
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
Sucrose .................................................................... 10.0 g
Phenol Red ................................................................. 0.09 g
Brilliant Green ............................................................ 4.7 mg
Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

99
Section III
B Brilliant Green Agar Modified, cont.

Directions for Preparation from Subculture

Dehydrated Product 1. Subculture from the broth at 18-24 hours and at 48 hours
1. Suspend 52 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix onto Brilliant Green Agar Modified.
thoroughly. 2. Examine for typical colonies of Salmonella after overnight
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to incubation at 37C.
completely dissolve the powder. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE.
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Expected Results
stable, typical control cultures. Salmonella will produce red colonies.

Procedure Limitations of the Procedure

Meat and Meat Products
1. Organisms other than Salmonella spp., such as Morganella
morgani and some Enterobacteriaceae, may grow on the
1. Weigh 25 g of the sample into a sterile blender jar and
medium.
add 225 mL of Buffered Peptone Water. Macerate for a
2. Confirmatory tests, such as fermentation reactions
sufficient time to give 15,000-20,000 revolutions.
and seroagglutination, should be carried out on all
2. Aseptically transfer the contents of the blender jar to a 500
presumptive Salmonella spp.
mL flask. Incubate at 37 0.1C for 16-20 hours.
3. Transfer 10 mL samples to 100 mL Muller Kauffmann
References
Tetrathionate Broth. 1. Guinee and Kampelmacher. 1962. Antonie van Leeuwenhoek 28:417.
4. Incubate the Muller Kauffmann Tetrathionate Broth at 2. Heard, Jennet and Linton. 1969. Br. Vet. J. 125:635.
3. H. M. S. O. 1982. Methods for the isolation and identification of salmonellae (other than Salmo-
42-43C. nella typhi) from water and associated materials.
4. International Organisation for Standardization. 1974. Draft International Standard ISO/DIS 3565.
Geneva, Switzerland.
Sewage Polluted Natural Water 5. British Poultry Meat Society. 1982. A manual of recommended methods for the microbiological
examination of poultry and poultry products.
This procedure is applicable to the isolation of Salmonella spp. 6. Harvey and Price. 1976. J. Hyg. Camb. 77:333.
other than S. typhi.
1. Inoculate 25 mL aliquots of the sample into 25 mL of double
Availability
Difco Brilliant Green Agar Modified
strength Buffered Peptone Water and incubate at 37C for
ISO
18 hours. Cat. No. 218801 Dehydrated 500 g
2. Transfer 1 mL samples into 10 mL of Muller Kauffmann Europe
Tetrathionate Broth. Cat. No. 254490 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
3. Incubate at 43C for 48 hours. *Store at 2-8C.

Brilliant Green Bile Agar

Intended Use presence of basic fuchsin, form deep red colonies with a pink
Brilliant Green Bile Agar is used for isolating, differentiating halo. Bacteria that do not ferment lactose form colorless to faint
and enumerating coliform bacteria. pink colonies. Coliform bacteria typically ferment lactose,
producing deep red colonies, while Salmonella spp., which do
Summary and Explanation not ferment lactose, produce colorless to faint pink colonies.
Noble and Tonney1 described Brilliant Green Bile Agar for
determining the relative density of coliform bacteria in water Formula
and sewage. The medium is particularly useful in selectively Difco Brilliant Green Bile Agar
isolating Salmonella spp. from other coliform bacteria. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Peptone ..................................................................... 8.25 g
Lactose ....................................................................... 1.9 g
Principles of the Procedure Oxgall ......................................................................... 2.95 mg
Brilliant Green Bile Agar contains peptone as a source of Sodium Sulfite ........................................................ 205.0 mg
Ferric Chloride .......................................................... 29.5 mg
carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Lactose is a ferment- Monopotassium Phosphate ...................................... 15.3 mg
able carbohydrate. Oxgall (bile) and brilliant green inhibit Agar ......................................................................... 10.15 g
gram-positive bacteria and most gram-negative bacteria Erioglaucine ............................................................. 64.9 mg
except coliforms. Basic fuchsin and erioglaucine are pH Basic Fuchsin ............................................................ 77.6 mg
Brilliant Green .......................................................... 29.5 g
indicators. Monopotassium phosphate is a buffering agent. *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Agar is the solidifying agent.
Differentiation of the coliforms is based on fermentation of
lactose. Bacteria that ferment lactose produce acid and, in the

100
 Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2%

Uninoculated Enterobacter aerogenes

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 13048

Identity Specifications
Difco Brilliant Green Bile Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light purple, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 2.06% solution, soluble in purified water B
upon boiling. Solution is bluish-purple,
slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Bluish-purple, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 2.06%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Brilliant Green Bile Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the pour plate
technique and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 102-103 Good Pink
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good Deep red with
bile precipitate
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis Salmonella
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good Colorless to Escherichia coli enteritidis
light pink ATCC 25922 ATCC 13076
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-2103 Marked to
complete inhibition

Directions for Preparation from Limitation of the Procedure

Dehydrated Product The medium is sensitive to light, particularly direct sunlight,
1. Suspend 20.6 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix which produces a decrease in the productivity of the medium
thoroughly. and a change in color from deep blue to purple or red. The
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- medium should be prepared just prior to use and, when neces-
pletely dissolve the powder. sary to store the medium, it should be kept in the dark.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using References
1. Nobel and Tonney. 1935. J. Am. Water Works Assoc. 27:108.
stable, typical control cultures. 2. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
Procedure 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

See appropriate references for specific procedures.2,3

Availability
Expected Results Difco Brilliant Green Bile Agar
Cat. No. 214100 Dehydrated 500 g
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.2,3

Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2%

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2% (Brilliant Green Lactose Bile Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2% contains two inhibitors of both
Broth) is used for the detection of coliform organisms in foods, gram-positive and selected gram-negative organisms; i.e., ox-
dairy products, water and wastewater, as well as in other ma- gall and brilliant green dye. Organisms, primarily coliforms,
terials of sanitary importance. which are resistant to the action of the inhibitors and which
ferment the lactose, are able to replicate in this medium. Fer-
Summary and Explanation mentation is detected by gas production.
Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2% is formulated according to the
American Public Health Association (APHA)1 specifications
for use in the confirmation of presumptive tests for coliforms.

101
Section III
B Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2%, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2%
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige to greenish-beige, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
Solution: 4.0% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is emerald green, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Emerald green, clear.
Reaction of 4.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2%
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 48 hours.
INOCULUM GAS
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY PRODUCTION
Enterobacter
aerogenes 13048 102-103 Good +
Enterococcus
faecalis 19433 103-2103 Partial to
complete inhibition Uninoculated Escherichia coli
Tube ATCC 25922
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good +
Staphylococcus
aureus 25923 103-2103 Marked to
complete inhibition

Formula Expected Results

Difco Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2% Gas production within 48 3 hours is considered positive
Approximate Formula* Per Liter evidence of fermentation by coliform bacilli. Detailed results
Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
Oxgall ....................................................................... 20.0 g
for the enumeration of coliforms using Brilliant Green Bile
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g Broth 2% are discussed in the various compendia of methods
Brilliant Green .......................................................... 13.3 mg for microbiological examination of foods, dairy products and
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
water and wastewater.1-5
Directions for Preparation from
References
Dehydrated Product 1. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
1. Suspend 40 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix 2. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
thoroughly. Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
2. Warm slightly to completely dissolve the powder. International, Gaithersburg, Md.
4. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. vol.1. AOAC
3. Dispense into tubes containing inverted fermentation vials. International, Gaithersburg, Md.
5. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool the broth as foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
quickly as possible.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Availability
stable, typical control cultures. Difco Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2%
AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF EPA ISO SMD SMWW
Procedure Cat. No. 273000 Dehydrated 100 g
274000 Dehydrated 500 g
For the detailed procedures for use of this medium in confir- 271000 Dehydrated 2 kg
matory testing for coliforms, refer to the various compendia
BBL Brilliant Green Bile Broth, 2%
for the examination of materials of sanitary importance.1-5 AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF EPA ISO SMD SMWW
Cat. No. 221612 Prepared Tubes with Durham Tube Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

102
 m Brilliant Green Broth

m Brilliant Green Broth

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
m Brilliant Green Broth is used for recovering and differentiating
Salmonella from primary water samples by membrane filtration.
Peptone provides the nitrogen, minerals and amino acids in
m Brilliant Green Broth. Yeast extract is the vitamin source.
B
Lactose and saccharose are the carbohydrates for bacterial
Summary and Explanation growth. Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance of the
m Brilliant Green Broth is primarily used as a selective-differen- medium and phenol red is the dye used as an indicator of
tial medium for Salmonella species. Salmonella species cause carbohydrate fermentation. Brilliant green is the selective agent.
many types of infections from mild, self-limiting gastroenteritis
to life-threatening typhoid fever.1 The most common form of Formula
Salmonella disease is self-limiting gastroenteritis with fever Difco m Brilliant Green Broth
lasting less than 2 days and diarrhea lasting less than 7 days.1 Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 20.0 g
2
m Brilliant Green Broth is a modification of Kauffmanns Yeast Extract .............................................................. 6.0 g
Brilliant Green Agar in which the agar has been omitted and Lactose ..................................................................... 20.0 g
Saccharose ............................................................... 20.0 g
all other ingredients are at double strength. Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 10.0 g
Phenol Red ................................................................. 0.16 g
Kabler and Clark3 used m Brilliant Green Broth in a membrane Brilliant Green .......................................................... 25.0 mg
filtration procedure originally developed by Geldreich and Jeter.4 *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
In this technique, an appropriate volume of water is filtered
through the membrane filter. The filter is placed on an absor- Directions for Preparation from
bent pad saturated with m Tetrathionate Broth Base. After Dehydrated Product
incubation, the membrane is transferred to another absorbent 1. Suspend 7.6 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water.
pad saturated with m Brilliant Green Broth and incubated. Mix thoroughly.
Following incubation, the membrane is transferred to a fresh 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
pad saturated with urease test reagent. completely dissolve the powder. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE.

Escherichia coli
User Quality Control ATCC 25922

Identity Specifications
Difco m Brilliant Green Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Pink, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 7.6% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is greenish-red, slightly
opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Greenish-red, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 7.6%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco m Brilliant Green Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the membrane
filter technique and incubate at 35 2C in a humid atmosphere for
18-24 hours.

INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Escherichia coli 25922 20-80 Good Yellow
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Enteritidis 13076 20-80 Good Pink to red
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 20-80 Good Pink to red

Salmonella
typhimurium
ATCC 14028

103
Section III
B m Brilliant Green Broth, cont.

3. Cool to room temperature. Dispense 2 mL amounts onto Expected Results

sterile absorbent pads. Salmonella species form pink to red colonies.
4. Use rehydrated medium within 24 hours.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using References
1. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1995. Manual of clinical microbiology, 6th ed.
stable, typical control cultures. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. Kauffmann. 1935. Z. Hyg. Infektionskr. 117:26.
3. Kabler and Clark. 1952. Am. J. Public Health 42:390.
Procedure 4. Geldreich and Jeter. 1952. Abstr. Bacteriol. Proc. 52nd Gen. Meet. Soc. Am. Bacteriologists 1952.
1. Inoculate a water sample using the membrane filtration
procedure. Availability
2. Place the filter on a pad saturated with m Brilliant Green Difco m Brilliant Green Broth
Broth. Cat. No. 249410 Dehydrated 500 g

3. Incubate at 35 2C in a humid atmosphere for 18-24

hours.
4. After incubation, examine for growth and the color of the
colonies.

Brucella Media
Brucella Agar Brucella Agar with 5% Horse Blood
Brucella Broth
Intended Use bisulfite is a reducing agent, and sodium chloride maintains
Brucella Agar is a culture medium for the cultivation of Brucella the osmotic equilibrium. Agar is the solidifying agent in
organisms. With the addition of 5% horse blood, the medium is Brucella Agar.
used in qualitative procedures for the isolation and cultivation In BBL Brucella Agar with 5% Horse Blood plates, the horse
of nonfastidious and fastidious microorganisms from a variety blood supplies both the X and V factors which are growth
of clinical and nonclinical specimens. requirements for certain organisms; e.g., Haemophilus
Brucella Broth is used for the cultivation of Brucella species influenzae.3 Sheep and human blood are not suitable for this
and for the isolation and cultivation of a wide variety of purpose because they contain enzymes that inactivate the nico-
fastidious and nonfastidious microorganisms. tinamide adenine dinucleotide (NAD) which is the V factor.4
Defibrinated horse blood may give hemolytic reactions differ-
Summary and Explanation ent than sheep blood.5 Some streptococci (e.g., group D) give
Brucella Agar was developed for the cultivation of Brucella hemolytic reactions on horse blood but not on sheep blood
species from diagnostic specimens, such as blood, and from and may be mistakenly reported as group A. If a hemolytic
foods and other potentially contaminated material. Brucella reaction is obtained, the organism should be tested with a
Agar with 5% Horse Blood plates are particularly useful for Taxo A bacitracin (0.04 unit) disc and it also should be
the cultivation of the more fastidious aerobic and anaerobic grouped serologically or tested by the fluorescent antibody
microorganisms,including streptococci, pneumococci, Listeria, method. 6 Beta-hemolytic streptococci and Haemophilus
Neisseria meningitidis and Haemophilus influenzae. haemolyticus may be differentiated by performing a Gram stain
Brucella Broth may be used for the isolation and cultivation on a smear prepared from the colony.
of a wide variety of microorganisms including nutritionally
fastidious specimens.1 This medium is recommended for Formulae
the cultivation of Brucella species and was recommended as BBL Brucella Agar
one of several media suitable for use as the liquid medium Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
component of biphasic blood culture bottles.1,2 It is also used Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................. 10.0 g
to cultivate Campylobacter spp.3 Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 2.0 g
Principles of the Procedure Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Sodium Bisulfite ......................................................... 0.1 g
Brucella Agar and Brucella Broth support the growth of Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
fastidious microorganisms due to their content of peptones, BBL Brucella Broth
dextrose and yeast extract. The peptones supply organic Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
nitrogen. The yeast extract is a potent source of the B-complex *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

vitamins. Dextrose is utilized as an energy source. Sodium

104
 Brucella Media, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications Cultural Response
BBL Brucella Agar BBL Brucella Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane- Prepare the medium per label directions without (plain) and with 5%
ous material. defibrinated horse blood (HB). Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for
3 days with 3-5% CO2 (incubate S. aureus without CO2).
B
Solution: 4.3% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
to medium, tan to yellow, clear to ORGANISM ATCC CFU PLAIN WITH HB
slightly hazy, may contain small Brucella abortus 11192* 103-104 Good Good
amount of sediment.
Brucella melitensis 4309* 103-104 Good N/A
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, tan to yellow, clear Brucella suis 4314* 103-104 Good N/A
to slightly hazy.
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-104 Good N/A
Reaction of 4.3%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 103-104 N/A Good
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 103-104 N/A Good
BBL Brucella Broth

*Minimally one strain of Brucella should be used for performance testing. If these strains are
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane- not available, verify performance with a known isolate.
ous material. BBL Brucella Broth
Solution: 2.8% solution, soluble in purified Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
water upon heating. Solution is pale 35 2C for 7 days with 3-5% CO2 (incubate S. pyogenes for 66-72
to medium, tan to yellow, clear to hours without CO2).
slightly hazy.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Prepared Appearance: Pale to medium, tan to yellow, clear
to slightly hazy. Brucella abortus 11192* < 103 Growth
Reaction of 2.8% Brucella melitensis 4309* < 103 Growth
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 Brucella suis 4314* < 103 Growth
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 < 103 Growth
*Minimally one strain of Brucella should be used for performance testing. If these strains are
not available, verify performance with a known isolate.

Precautions7 Procedure
1. Biosafety Level 2 practices, containment equipment and Agar (without or with added blood)
facilities are recommended for activities with clinical speci- Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
mens of human or animal origin containing or potentially specimens.
containing pathogenic Brucella spp.
Since many pathogens require carbon dioxide on primary
2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and
isolation, incubate plates at 35 2C for 24-72 hours in an
facilities are recommended for all manipulations of cultures
aerobic atmosphere supplemented with carbon dioxide.
of the pathogenic Brucella spp. and for experimental
animal studies. Broth
For liquid specimens, use a sterile inoculating loop to transfer
Directions for Preparation from a loopful to the broth medium. Swab specimens may be
Dehydrated Product inserted into the broth after the inoculation of plated media.
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water: Incubate tubes for up to 7 days at 35 2C in an aerobic atmo-
BBL Brucella Agar 43 g; sphere with or without supplementation with carbon dioxide.
BBL Brucella Broth 28 g.
Mix thoroughly. For the preparation of biphasic blood culture bottles, aseptically
2. For the agar, heat with frequent agitation and boil for add sterile Brucella Broth to a blood culture bottle containing
1 minute to completely dissolve the powder. For the broth, solidified sterile Brucella Agar, with increased agar at a final
heat slightly, if necessary, to obtain solution. concentration of 2.5%. The bottles should contain 5-10% CO2
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. and be vented. Blood cultures should be incubated at 35C for
4. For preparation of blood plates, add 5 to 10% sterile up to 30 days with subcultures prepared every 4 to 5 days.1,2
defibrinated blood to sterile agar which has been cooled to
Expected Results
45-50C.
Agar (without or with added blood)
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
After incubation, most plates will show an area of confluent
stable, typical control cultures.
growth. Because the streaking procedure is, in effect, a
dilution technique, diminishing numbers of microorganisms
are deposited on the streaked areas. Consequently, one or more

105
Section III
B Brucella Media, cont.

of these areas should exhibit isolated colonies of the organ- Availability

isms contained in the specimen. Further, growth of each BBL Brucella Agar
organism may be semi-quantitatively scored on the basis of ISO USDA
growth in each of the streaked areas. Cat. No. 211086 Dehydrated 500 g
221547 Prepared Plates with 5% Horse Blood Pkg. of 20*
Broth 221548 Prepared Plates with 5% Horse Blood
Ctn. of 100*
Growth in the tubes is indicated by the presence of turbidity
compared with an uninoculated control. BBL Brucella Agar with 5% Horse Blood//
MacConkey II agar with MUG
If growth appears, cultures should be examined by Gram Cat. No. 298303 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
stain and subcultured onto appropriate media; e.g., Trypticase BBL Brucella Broth
Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood and/or Brucella Agar and USDA
Chocolate II Agar, Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine or Cat. No. 211088 Dehydrated 500 g
MacConkey II Agar. 296185 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
*Store at 2-8C.

References
1. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
2. Moyer, Holcomb and Hausler. 1991. In Balows, Hausler, Herrmann, Isenberg, and Shadomy (ed.),
Manual of clinical microbiology, 5th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Chapin and Murray. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). Manual of
clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
4. Krumweide and Kuttner. 1938. J. Exp. Med. 67:429.
5. Vera and Power. 1980. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Truant (ed.), Manual of clinical microbi-
ology, 3rd ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
6. Vera. 1971. Health Lab. Sci. 8:176.
7. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.

Brucella Media for Anaerobes

Brucella Agar with 5% Sheep Blood, Hemin and
Vitamin K1 Brucella Laked Sheep Blood Agar with
Kanamycin and Vancomycin (KV)
Intended Use mycin and vancomycin for this purpose was first described by
Brucella Agar with 5% Sheep Blood, Hemin and Vitamin K1 is Finegold et al. 2 Vancomycin, however, may inhibit
used for the isolation and cultivation of fastidious, obligately Porphyromonas asaccharolytica.3
anaerobic microorganisms.
Principles of the Procedure
Brucella Laked Sheep Blood Agar with Kanamycin and Van-
Brucella Agar supports the growth of fastidious microorganisms
comycin (KV) is used for the selective isolation of fastidious
due to its content of peptones, dextrose and yeast extract. The
and slow growing, obligately anaerobic bacteria from the same
sheep blood, hemin and vitamin K1, provide essential nutrients
specimen.
for certain obligate anaerobes.4
Summary and Explanation The addition of the antimicrobial agents, kanamycin and
The isolation of obligately anaerobic bacteria from clinical and vancomycin, renders Brucella Laked Blood KV Agar selective
nonclinical materials requires the use of selective, nonselective for gram-negative microorganisms. The kanamycin inhibits
and enrichment media.1 Brucella Agar with 5% Sheep Blood, protein synthesis in susceptible organisms, whereas the
Hemin and Vitamin K1 is an enriched, nonselective medium vancomycin inhibits gram-positive bacteria by interfering with
for the isolation and cultivation of a wide variety of obligately cell wall synthesis.5 The laked blood improves pigmentation
anaerobic microorganisms. Nonselective media are used to of the Prevotella melaniogenica - P. asaccharolytica group.
isolate organisms present in low numbers and to provide an
indication of the numbers and types of organisms present in Procedure
the specimen or sample. These media should be reduced immediately prior to inocula-
tion by placing under anaerobic conditions for 18-24 hours.6
Kanamycin and vancomycin are included in Brucella Laked
An efficient and easy way to obtain suitable anaerobic
Blood KV Agar for use in selective isolation of gram-negative
conditions is through the use of BBL GasPak EZ anaerobic
anaerobes, especially Bacteroides. The combination of kana-
systems or an alternative system.7

106
 Brucella Broth with 20% Glycerol

Streak the specimen as soon as possible after it is received gate anaerobes can be further studied using appropriate iden-
in the laboratory. Minimize exposure to air. With liquid tification methods. Consult appropriate texts for additional
specimens, media should be inoculated with one drop of the information.10,11
specimen. Tissue specimens should be minced and then ground
in sterile broth such as BBL Enriched Thioglycollate Medium References
before inoculation. Inoculation is then performed as for liquid 1.
2.
Dowell. 1975. Am. J. Med. Technol. 41:402.
Finegold, Miller and Posnick. 1965. Ernahrungsforschung 10:517.
B
3. Van Winkelhoff and de Graaff. 1983. J. Clin. Microbiol. 18:1282.
specimens. Swab specimens may be rolled onto the first 4. Gibbons and MacDonald. 1960. J. Bacteriol. 80:164.
quadrant of plated media and then used to inoculate liquid 5. Estevez. 1984. Lab. Med. 15:258.
6. Dowell and Hawkins. 1987. Laboratory methods in anaerobic bacteriology. CDC laboratory manual.
media. Alternately, the swab may be scrubbed in a small HHS Publication No. (CDC) 87-8272. Centers for Disease Control, Atlanta, Ga.
7. Seip and Evans. 1980. J. Clin. Microbiol. 11:226.
volume of reduced broth and the broth used to inoculate 8. Martin. 1971. Appl. Microbiol. 22:1168.
9. Allen, Siders and Marler. 1985. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of clinical
media as performed with liquid specimens. microbiology, 4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
10. Koneman, Allen, Janda, Schreckenberger and Winn. 1997. Color atlas and textbook of diagnostic
An enrichment broth such as BBL Enriched Thioglycollate microbiology, 5th ed. Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, Pa.
11. Jousimies-Somer, Summanen and Finegold. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken
Medium should be inoculated at the same time as the primary (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington,
D.C.
isolation plates.
Incubate immediately under anaerobic conditions or place in a Availability
holding jar flushed with oxygen-free gas(es) until sufficient plates BBL Brucella Agar with 5% Sheep Blood,
are accumulated (but no longer than 3 hours).8 Incubation should Hemin and Vitamin K1
be at 35 2C for at least 48 hours and up to 7 days. Regardless BS10 CMPH MCM7
United States and Canada
of anaerobic system used, it is important to include an indicator Cat. No. 297848 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
of anaerobiosis such as a GasPak anaerobic indicator. 297716 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Europe
Expected Results Cat. No. 255509 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 20*
Examine colonies using a dissecting microscope and with a BBL Brucella Laked Sheep Blood Agar

long-wave UV lamp to detect fluorescence. Colonies of the with Kanamycin and Vancomycin
pigmenting Bacteroides group should fluoresce orange to brick- BS10 MCM7
Cat. No. 297840 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
red under long-wave UV light. Fluorescence is visible before
pigmentation. BBL Brucella 5% Sheep Blood Agar with Hemin

and Vitamin K1//Brucella Laked Sheep Blood Agar

In order to determine the relationship to oxygen of each colony with Kanamycin and Vancomycin
type present on anaerobic solid media, follow established Cat. No. 297849 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
procedures.9 Those colony types that prove to contain obli- *Store at 2-8C.

Brucella Broth with 20% Glycerol

Intended Use below. Consult texts for detailed information about preparing
This medium is used in the long-term frozen maintenance of stock cultures of specific organisms.2-4
bacterial stock cultures.
Expected Results
Summary and Explanation Bacterial stock cultures frozen and stored at 20C or below
Brucella Broth is a nutritious medium that, when supplemented will remain viable for several months, and some may remain
with glycerol, may be used as a maintenance medium for the viable for years.
preservation of bacterial cultures.1,2
Limitations of the Procedure
Principles of the Procedure The appropriate procedure, storage temperature, length of
Enzymatic digest of protein substrates act as protective colloids. storage, etc., may vary for specific organisms.
Glycerol is a cryoprotective agent that provides intracellular References
and extracellular protection against freezing.2 1. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-maintenance of medical bacteria, vol. 1.
Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
2. Gherna. 1994. In Gerhardt, Murray, Wood and Krieg (ed.), Methods for general and molecular
Procedure bacteriology. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Norris and Ribbons (ed.). 1970. Methods in microbiology, vol. 3A. Academic Press, Inc.,
Using a sterile swab or inoculating loop, remove fresh growth New York, N.Y.
4. Kirsop and Snell (ed.). 1984. Maintenance of microorganisms. Academic Press, Inc., New York, N.Y.
from the plated or slanted medium and suspend in the broth
maintenance medium to achieve the desired concentration Availability
of viable cells. Freeze suspension immediately at 20C or BBL Brucella Broth with 20% Glycerol
Cat. No. 297466 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10

107
Section III
B Buffered Listeria Enrichment

Buffered Listeria Enrichment Broth Base

(See Listeria Enrichment Broth)

Buffered Peptone Water Buffered Peptone Water II

Intended Use Formulae
Buffered Peptone Water and Buffered Peptone Water II are Difco or BBL Buffered Peptone Water
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
used for preenriching injured Salmonella species from food Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
specimens to increase recovery. Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 3.5 g
Summary and Explanation Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.5 g
Edel and Kampelmacher 1 noted that food preservation Difco Buffered Peptone Water II
techniques involving heat, desiccation, preservatives, high Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Peptone (Enzymatic Digest of Animal Tissue) ........... 10.0 g
osmotic pressure or pH changes cause sublethal injury to Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
salmonellae. Preenrichment in a nonselective medium allows Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 3.5 g
for repair of cell damage and facilitates the recovery of Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.5 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
salmonellae. Lactose Broth is frequently used for this purpose
but it may be detrimental to recovering salmonellae.2 Buffered Directions for Preparation from
Peptone Water maintains a high pH over the preenrichment Dehydrated Product
period and results in repair of injured cells that may be 1. Dissolve the powder in 1 L of purified water:
sensitive to low pH.3 This is particularly important for Difco or BBL Buffered Peptone Water 20 g;
vegetable specimens which have a low buffering capacity. These Difco Buffered Peptone Water II 20 g.
media can be used for testing dry poultry feed.4 Test methods Mix thoroughly.
have been published for a variety of food samples.5 2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Buffered Peptone Water II provides improved enrichment 3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
through tighter specifications applied to the peptone component. stable, typical control cultures.

Principles of the Procedure Procedure

These preenrichment media contain peptone as a source of Test specimens according to recommended guidelines.
carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Sodium chloride
maintains the osmotic balance. Phosphates buffer the medium.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications Cultural Response
Difco or BBL Buffered Peptone Water Difco Buffered Peptone Water, BBL Buffered
Dehydrated Appearance: Cream-white to light tan, free-flow- Peptone Water or Difco Buffered Peptone Water II
ing, homogeneous, free of extrane- Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
ous material. 35 2C for 18-24 hours.
Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified
INOCULUM
water. Solution is light yellow to tan ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY
or amber, clear to slightly hazy.
Salmonella choleraesuis
Prepared Appearance: Light yellow to tan or amber, clear to subsp. choleraesuis
slightly hazy. serotype Enteriditis 13076 30-100 Good
Reaction of 2.0%
Salmonella choleraesuis
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
subsp. choleraesuis
Difco Buffered Peptone Water II

serotype Typhi 19430 30-100 Good
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Salmonella choleraesuis
neous. subsp. choleraesuis
Solution: 2% solution, soluble in purified serotype Typhimurium 14028 30-100 Good
water. Solution is light amber, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear.
Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

108
 Bushnell-Haas Broth

Expected Results Availability

Growth is indicated by turbidity. Difco Buffered Peptone Water
ISO
Limitation of the Procedure Cat. No. 218105 Dehydrated 500 g
218103 Dehydrated 2 kg
The types and numbers of competing flora in the test sample
can affect recovery and may overgrow salmonellae.
218104 Dehydrated 10 kg
B
BBL Buffered Peptone Water
ISO
References Cat. No. 212367 Dehydrated 500 g
1. Edel and Kampelmacher. 1973. Bull. W.H.O. 48:167.
2. Angelotti. 1963. Microbiological quality of foods. Academic Press, New York, N.Y. 212345 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
3. Sadovski. 1977. J. Food Technol. 12:85.
4. Juven, Cox, Bailey, Thomson, Charles and Schutze. 1984. J. Food Prot. 47:299. Difco Buffered Peptone Water II
5. Andrews, Flowers, Silliker and Bailey. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods Cat. No. 218403 Dehydrated 500 g
for the microbiological examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Wash-
ington, D.C. 218401 Dehydrated 2 kg
218402 Dehydrated 10 kg

Bushnell-Haas Broth
Intended Use carbon source which allows for the addition of alternative
Bushnell-Haas Broth is used for studying microbial utilization hydrocarbons such as kerosene, light and heavy mineral oils,
of hydrocarbons. paraffin wax and gasoline.
Bushnell-Haas Broth was recommended for the microbiologi-
Summary and Explanation cal examination of fuels by the Society for Industrial Microbi-
Bushnell-Haas Broth (Bushnell-Haas marine salts broth), ology (SIM) Committee on Microbiological Deterioration of
prepared according to the formula described by Bushnell and Fuels.2 The medium was used to enumerate total heterotrophs
Haas1, is used to evaluate the ability of microorganisms and hydrocarbon degradation by microorganisms during
to decompose hydrocarbons. It is formulated without a bioremediation of Prince William Sound following the Exxon
Valdez oil spill.3,4
User Quality Control
Identity Specifications Principles of the Procedure
Difco Bushnell-Haas Broth
Magnesium sulfate, calcium chloride and ferric chloride
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige with pink tint, free-flowing, provide trace elements necessary for bacterial growth.
homogeneous. Potassium nitrate is a nitrogen source, while monopotassium
Solution: 0.327% solution, partially soluble phosphate and diammonium hydrogen phosphate provide
in purified water, white precipitate buffering capability.
remains. Solution, after autoclaving,
is colorless to very light amber,
clear supernatant over yellow-orange Formula
precipitate. Difco Bushnell-Haas Broth
Prepared Appearance: Colorless to very light amber, clear Approximate Formula* Per Liter
supernatant over yellow-orange Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.2 g
precipitate. Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.02 g
Reaction of 0.327% Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 Diammonium Hydrogen Phosphate ............................ 1.0 g
Potassium Nitrate ....................................................... 1.0 g
Cultural Response Ferric Chloride ............................................................ 0.05 g
Difco Bushnell-Haas Broth *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate in duplicate with

the test organisms. Add sterile mineral oil (the hydrocarbon source) to Directions for Preparation from
one set. Incubate at 25-30C for up to 1 week. Dehydrated Product
RECOVERY RECOVERY 1. Suspend 3.27 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
INOCULUM WITHOUT WITH
ORGANISM ATCC
CFU HYDROCARBON HYDROCARBON Mix thoroughly.
Pseudomonas 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
aeruginosa 9027 102-103 None to poor Good completely dissolve the powder.
Pseudomonas 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
aeruginosa 10145 102-103 None to poor Good
Pseudomonas
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
aeruginosa 14207 102-103 None to poor Good stable, typical control cultures.
Pseudomonas
aeruginosa 27853 102-103 None to poor Good
NOTE: A precipitate, white prior to autoclaving becoming
yellow to orange after autoclaving, is normal.
109
Section III
B Bushnell-Haas Broth, cont.

Procedure References
1. Bushnell and Haas. 1941. J. Bacteriol. 41:653.
1. Inoculate the collected sample directly into the broth. 2. Allred, DeGray, Edwards, Hedrick, Klemme, Rogers, Wulf and Hodge. 1963. Proposed procedures
2. Overlay the broth with a sterile hydrocarbon source. for microbiological examination of fuels. SIM Special Publications, No. 1. Merck, Sharp & Dohme
Research Laboratories, Rahway, N.J.
3. Incubate aerobically at 25-30C. 3. Bragg, Roffall and McMillen. 1990. Column flow studies of bioremediation in Prince William Sound.
Exxon Production Research Co., Houston, Tex.
4. Examine tubes daily for growth for up to one week. 4. Brown and Braddock. 1990. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 56:3895.

Expected Results Availability

Organisms capable of degrading hydrocarbons should show Difco Bushnell-Haas Broth
growth in the Bushnell-Haas Broth supplemented with a Cat. No. 257820 Dehydrated 500 g
hydrocarbon source.

Butterfield Buffer with 0.1% Peptone

and 2% Polysorbate 80
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Butterfield Buffer, otherwise known as phosphate-buffered Water containing monopotassium phosphate provides a
dilution water, is used in a number of standard methods for buffered diluent for protection of microorganisms from
the enumeration of microorganisms in water, foods, dairy changes in acidity. Casein peptone provides organic nitrogen.
products and pharmaceutical articles.1-4 Butterfield Buffer with Polysorbate 80 acts as a surfactant to break down the lecithin
0.1% Peptone and 2% Polysorbate 80 is a modification of or oils present.
Butterfield Buffer. For accurate plate counts, dilutions should be selected and
prepared so that the total number of colonies developing in
Summary and Explanation a plate will be between 30 and 300.
Butterfield Buffer with 0.1% Peptone and 2% Polysorbate 80
serves as a suitable diluent in procedures for the enumeration Formula
of microorganisms by the plate count and other methods. Di- BBL Butterfield Buffer with 0.1% Peptone
lutions are made by serial transfer of samples in the buffer. and 2% Polysorbate 80
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 1.0 g
User Quality Control Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 0.04 g
Polysorbate 80 ......................................................... 21.6 mL
Identity Specifications *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
BBL Butterfield Buffer with 0.1% Peptone
and 2% Polysorbate 80 Procedure
Appearance: Colorless and clear. Butterfield Buffer with 0.1% Peptone and 2% Polysorbate
Reaction of 80 is provided as a prepared, ready-to-use bottled medium.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2 Consult appropriate references for detailed information and
Cultural Response recommended procedures for the use of Butterfield Buffer.1-4
BBL Butterfield Buffer with 0.1% Peptone
and 2% Polysorbate 80 Expected Results
-4 -5 -6
Prepare serial dilutions (10 , 10 , 10 ) of test organisms in buffer so Refer to appropriate references for utilization and testing of
that one dilution, when plated, results in 30-300 colony-forming units. Butterfield Buffer.1-4
Using Standard Methods Agar, prepare pour plates of the dilutions at
0 Time and after 10 minutes of incubation at 20-25C. Incubate
pour plates at 35-37C for up to 3 days. References
1. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
2. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
Bacillus cereus 11778 30-300 The 10-minute incubation Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
colony count average is 3. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
85% recovery of 4. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
the 0 Time average International, Gaithersburg, Md.

Candida albicans 10231 30-300 The 10- minute incubation

colony count average is Availability
85% recovery of BBL Butterfield Buffer with 0.1% Peptone
the 0 Time average and 2% Polysorbate 80
Cat. No. 299101 Prepared Bottles, 99 mL (wide mouth) Pkg. of 10

110
 CDC Anaerobe 5% SB Agar

CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar

CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar with
Kanamycin and Vancomycin (KV) CDC Anaerobe 5%
Sheep Blood Agar with Phenylethyl Alcohol (PEA)
CDC Anaerobe Laked Sheep Blood Agar with
Kanamycin and Vancomycin (KV) C
Intended Use CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar with Kanamycin and
CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar is used for the isolation Vancomycin was formulated as an enriched, selective medium
and cultivation of fastidious and slow growing, obligately for the isolation of obligately anaerobic, gram-negative bacilli
anaerobic bacteria from a variety of clinical and nonclinical from clinical materials.2 The medium employs Trypticase Soy
materials. It also supports good growth of most aerobic, facul- Agar supplemented with additional agar, yeast extract,
tatively anaerobic and microaerophilic bacteria if incubated vitamin K1, hemin, cystine, 5% sheep blood, kanamycin and
appropriately. vancomycin. The combination of kanamycin and vancomycin
for use in selective isolation of gram-negative anaerobes was
CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar with Kanamycin and
first described by Finegold et. al.7 Vancomycin, however, may
Vancomycin (KV), CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar with
inhibit Porphyromonas asaccharolytica.8
Phenylethyl Alcohol (PEA) and CDC Anaerobe Laked Sheep
Blood Agar with Kanamycin and Vancomycin (KV) are used for CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar with Phenylethyl
the selective isolation of fastidious and slow-growing, obligately Alcohol was formulated as an enriched selective medium for
anaerobic bacteria from a variety of clinical and nonclinical the isolation and cultivation of obligately anaerobic bacteria
materials. from clinical materials containing rapidly growing, faculta-
tively anaerobic bacteria such as Proteus and other members
Summary and Explanation of the family Enterobacteriaceae.2 The medium employs
The isolation of obligately anaerobic bacteria from clinical and Trypticase Soy Agar supplemented with additional agar, yeast
nonclinical materials requires the use of selective, nonselective extract, vitamin K1, hemin, cystine, 5% sheep blood and
and enrichment media.1 The choice of media to be employed phenylethyl alcohol.
is based upon the type of material and the results of direct CDC Anaerobe Laked Blood Agar with Kanamycin and
microscopic observation. Nonselective media are used to Vancomycin was formulated as an enriched, selective medium
isolate organisms present in low numbers and to provide an for the isolation and cultivation of Prevotella melaninogenica,
indication of the numbers and types of organisms present in Fusobacterium necrophorum, Fusobacterium nucleatum and
the specimen or sample. Selective media are employed to other fastidious, obligately anaerobic, gram-negative bacilli,
facilitate recovery of the desired organisms present in mixed from clinical materials containing mixed populations.1,3 The
population. medium employs Trypticase Soy Agar supplemented with
CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar was formulated by additional agar, yeast extract, vitamin K1, hemin, cystine, 5%
Dowell et. al. of the Center for Disease Control (currently sheep blood, kanamycin and vancomycin. The combination
named the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention of kanamycin and vancomycin for use in selective isolation of
[CDC])as an enriched, nonselective medium for the isolation gram-negative anaerobes was first described by Finegold et.
and cultivation of a wide variety of obligately anaerobic micro- al. 7 Vancomycin, however, may inhibit Porphyromonas
organisms, particularly those found in clinical materials.2-5 The asaccharolytica.8 This medium is similar to CDC Anaerobe
medium employs BBL Trypticase Soy Agar supplemented 5% Sheep Blood Agar and Kanamycin and Vancomycin
with additional agar, yeast extract, vitamin K1, hemin, cystine except that the blood has been laked, by subjecting it to three
and 5% sheep blood. Improved growth of Prevotella freeze-thaw cycles, for improved pigmentation of the
melaninogenica, Fusobacterium necrophorum, Clostridium P. melaninogenica-P. asaccharolytica group.9
haemolyticum, as well as certain strains of Actinomyces israelii
and Bacteroides thetaiotaomicron, has been demonstrated Principles of the Procedure
on this medium.3 Furthermore, less smooth to rough colonial CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar is a highly nutritious
variation has been reported on this medium than on Schaedler medium due to its content of peptones, yeast extract, hemin,
Blood Agar.6 vitamin K1 and sheep blood. The peptones provide nitrogenous
growth factors, carbon, sulfur and trace ingredients. Yeast

111
 Section III
C CDC Anaerobe 5% SB Agar, cont.

CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar CDC Anaerobe Agar with Laked Sheep Blood and KV
Clostridium perfringens Bacteroides fragilis Porphyromonas levii Bacteroides fragilis

ATCC 13124 ATCC 25285
ATCC 29147 ATCC 25285

CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar

with Phenylethyl Alcohol (PEA) extract is an important source of B vitamins. Sodium chloride
Peptostreptococcus maintains osmotic equilibrium. Sheep blood constituents,
anaerobius
ATCC 27337 hemin, cystine and vitamin K1 provide growth factors required
by certain obligate anaerobes.3-6,10,11
The addition of the antimicrobial agents, kanamycin and
vancomycin, renders the medium selective for gram-negative
microorganisms. The kanamycin inhibits protein synthesis
in susceptible organisms, whereas the vancomycin inhibits
gram-positive bacteria by interfering with cell wall synthesis.12
Selectivity is achieved through the addition of phenylethyl
alcohol which reduces the growth of facultatively anaerobic,
gram-negative bacteria without inhibiting growth of obligately
anaerobic bacteria.13
The addition of laked sheep blood to CDC Anaerobe Agar
improves pigmentation of the Prevotella, Porphyromonas, and
pigmented Bacteroides species.12
Divided Petri dishes containing CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood
Agar in each half enable two specimens to be streaked on one
plate. Combinations of selective media are also provided in
divided dishes.

Procedure
Streak the specimen as soon as possible after it is received in the
laboratory. Minimize exposure to air. With liquid specimens,
media should be inoculated with one drop of the specimen.
Tissue specimens should be minced and then ground in sterile
broth, such as BBL Enriched Thioglycollate Medium, before
inoculation. Inoculation is then performed as for liquid speci-
mens. Swab specimens may be rolled onto the first quadrant

112
 CDC Anaerobe 5% SB Agar, cont.

of plated media and then used to inoculate liquid media. Organisms failing to grow on the aerobic subculture plates
Alternatively, the swab may be scrubbed in a small volume may be presumed to be obligately anaerobic in terms of their
of reduced broth and the broth used to inoculate media as oxygen requirements.
performed with liquid specimens.
References
These media should be reduced immediately prior to inoculation 1. Dowell. 1975. In Balows (ed.), Clinical microbiology. How to start and when to stop Charles
by placing under anaerobic conditions for 18-24 hours.3 An effi- C. Thomas, Springfield, Ill.
2. Dowell, Lombard, Thompson and Armfield. 1977. Media for isolation, characterization, and
cient and easy way to obtain suitable anaerobic conditions is identification of obligately anaerobic bacteria. CDC laboratory manual. Center for Disease
Control, Atlanta, Ga.
through the use of BBL GasPak EZ anaerobic systems or an 3. Dowell and Hawkins. 1987. Laboratory methods in anaerobic bacteriology. CDC laboratory
manual. HHS Publication (CDC) 87-8272. Center for Disease Control, Atlanta, Ga.
alternative anaerobic system.14 4. Forbes and Granato. 1995. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
microbiology, 6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Plated media should be inoculated using the streak plate method
in order to obtain pure cultures from specimens containing
5. Rodloff, Applebaum and Zabransky. 1991. Cumitech 5A, Practical anaerobic bacteriology. Coord.
ed., Rodloff. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
6. Star, Killgore and Dowell. 1971 Appl. Microbiol. 22:655.
C
7. Finegold, Miller, and Posnick. 1965. Ernahrungsforschung. 10:517.
mixed flora. 8. van Winkelhoff and de Graaf. 1983. J. Clin. Microbiol. 18:1282.
9. Finegold and Citron. 1980. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Truant (ed.), Manual of clinical
An enrichment broth, such as BBL Enriched Thioglycollate microbiology, 3rd ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
10. Gibbons and MacDonald. 1960. J. Bacteriol. 80:164.
Medium, should be inoculated at the same time as the primary 11. Wilkins, Chalgren, Jimenez-Ulate, Drake and Johnson. 1976. J. Clin. Microbiol. 3:359.
12. Estevez. 1984. Lab. Med. 15:258.
isolation plates. 13. Dowell, Hill and Altemeir. 1964. J. Bacteriol. 88:1811.
14. Martin. 1971. Appl. Microbiol. 22:1168.
Incubate immediately under anaerobic conditions or place in a 15. Allen, Siders and Marler. 1985. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler, and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
holding jar flushed with oxygen free gas(es) until sufficient plates
are accumulated (but no longer than 3 hours).14 Incubation Availability
should be at 35 2C for at least 48 hours and up to 7 days. BBL CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar
BS10 CMPH MCM7
Expected Results United States and Canada
Cat. No. 221733 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Examine colonies using a dissecting microscope and a longwave
221734 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
UV lamp (colonies of the pigmenting Porphyromonas-
Europe
Prevotella species should fluoresce orange to brick-red under Cat. No. 256506 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
UV light). Fluorescence is visible before pigmentation. Japan
Cat. No. 251733 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
In order to determine the relationship to oxygen of each colony 251584 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 24*
type present on anaerobic solid media, inoculate the following
BBL CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar with
media:15 Kanamycin and Vancomycin (KV)
1. One anaerobe blood agar plate to be incubated anaero- CMPH MCM7
bically. Cat. No. 221735 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
221736 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
2. One aerobic blood agar (or chocolate agar) plate to be
incubated in an aerobic atmosphere enriched with carbon BBL CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar with
Phenylethyl Alcohol (PEA)
dioxide. The chocolate agar is particularly needed to BS10 CMPH MCM7
distinguish nutritionally-fastidious Haemophilus species and Cat. No. 221739 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
other bacteria which will grow on anaerobe blood agar BBL CDC Anaerobe Agar with Laked Sheep Blood

incubated anaerobically and on chocolate agar under and KV

increased carbon dioxide tension but which fail to grow on CMPH MCM7
blood agar in the presence of carbon dioxide or in the air. Cat. No. 221846 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
3. One aerobic blood agar plate to be incubated aerobically BBL CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar//

without added carbon dioxide. CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar with PEA
4. Tubes of Enriched Thioglycollate Medium and/or Cooked Cat. No. 297646 Prepared Bi-Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
Meat Medium and a tube of Peptone Yeast Extract Glucose BBL CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar with KV//

Broth. CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar with PEA

Cat. No. 297004 Prepared Bi-Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
Incubate all cultures at 35 2C for a minimum of 24 hours
BBL CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar with PEA//

and up to 7 days. Anaerobe Laked Sheep Blood Agar with KV

Record the relationship to oxygen as either obligate anaerobe Cat. No. 299611 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.
or nonanaerobe (aerotolerant anaerobe, microaerophilic, or
facultative anaerobe).15
Colonies of the type(s) which proved to be obligate anaerobes
can be further studied using the corresponding broth cultures.

113
 Section III
C CIN Agar Base

CIN Agar Base (Yersinia Selective Agar Base)

Yersinia Antimicrobic Supplement CN
Intended Use Difco Yersinia Antimicrobic Supplement CN
Formula Per 10 mL Vial
CIN (cefsulodin-Irgasan *-novobiocin) Agar Base, when supple- Cefsulodin .................................................................. 4.0 mg
mented with cefsulodin and novobiocin, is a differential and Novobiocin ................................................................. 2.5 mg
selective medium used in qualitative procedures for the isola- *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

tion of Yersinia enterocolitica from a variety of clinical and

nonclinical specimens.
Directions for Preparation from
*Irgasan is a trademark of Ciba-Geigy.
Dehydrated Product
Yersinia Antimicrobic Supplement CN
Summary and Explanation 1. To rehydrate the supplement, aseptically add 10 mL of
CIN Agar, also known as Yersinia Selective Agar, was first purified water to the vial.
described by Schiemann as an alternative to MacConkey Agar 2. Invert the vial several times to dissolve the powder.
and other commonly used media for isolation of Yersinia Selective Agar
Y. enterocolitica, a causative agent of gastroenteritis.1 CIN Agar
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
has been found to be far superior to MacConkey, SS, CAL or
Difco Yersinia Selective Agar Base 59.5 g;
Y agars for the recovery of Y. enterocolitica.2
BBL CIN Agar Base 57.5 g.
Mix thoroughly.
Principles of the Procedure
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Fermentation of mannitol in the presence of neutral red results
completely dissolve the powder. For BBL CIN Agar Base,
in a characteristic bulls-eye colony, colorless with red center.
DO NOT AUTOCLAVE. For Difco Yersinia Selective Agar
Selective inhibition of gram-negative and gram-positive organ-
Base, autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Avoid overheating.
isms is obtained by means of crystal violet, sodium desoxycholate
3. For the preparation of CIN Agar, cool to 45-50C and
and Irgasan (triclosan). Supplementation with Yersinia Antimi-
aseptically add 10 mL of rehydrated Yersinia Antimicrobic
crobic Supplement CN (cefsulodin and novobiocin) improves
Supplement CN. Mix well.
inhibition of normal enteric organisms. Organisms that do not
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
metabolize mannitol to acid end products will form colorless,
stable, typical control cultures.
translucent colonies.
Procedure
Formulae
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
Difco Yersinia Selective Agar Base
specimens. Incubate plates at 25C for 24-48 hours.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Peptone ................................................................... 17.0 g If a cold enrichment procedure is desired, inoculate the specimen
Proteose Peptone ....................................................... 3.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 2.0 g into phosphate buffered saline and hold at 4C for up to 21 days.3,4
Mannitol .................................................................. 20.0 g Periodically subculture onto plates of CIN Agar, streaking for
Sodium Pyruvate ........................................................ 2.0 g isolation. Incubate plates as stated above.
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 1.0 g
Magnesium Sulfate Heptahydrate ............................ 10.0 mg
Sodium Desoxycholate ............................................... 0.5 g Expected Results
Sodium Cholate ......................................................... 0.5 g Typical Y. enterocolitica colonies will have deep-red centers
Irgasan ..................................................................... 4.0 mg surrounded by a transparent border giving the appearance of
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g
Crystal Violet .............................................................. 1.0 mg a bulls eye.
Neutral Red .............................................................. 30.0 mg
Growth of non-Yersinia organisms is markedly to completely
BBL CIN Agar Base (Yersinia Selective Agar Base) inhibited.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ..................................... 10.0 g
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 5.0 g Limitation of the Procedure
Beef Extract ................................................................ 5.0 g Although certain strains of Yersinia can be recovered by direct
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 2.0 g
plating, others may require cold enrichment (4C) in phosphate-
Mannitol .................................................................. 20.0 g
Sodium Pyruvate ........................................................ 2.0 g buffered saline.3 However, cold enrichment may not be practical
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 1.0 g because of the long incubation time and because it selects for
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 1.0 mg nonpathogenic Yersinia species.4
Sodium Desoxycholate ............................................... 0.5 g
Irgasan ................................................................... 4.0 mg
Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g
Crystal Violet .............................................................. 1.0 mg
Neutral Red ................................................................ 0.03 g
114
 CIN Agar Base, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Yersinia Selective Agar Base BBL CIN Agar Base (Yersinia Selective Agar Base)
Dehydrated Appearance: Light pinkish beige, free-flowing, Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
homogeneous. ous material.
Solution: 5.95% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 5.75% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is red- water upon boiling. Solution is
dish-purple, very slightly to slightly medium to dark, tan orange to tan

Prepared Appearance:
opalescent.
Reddish-orange, very slightly to
orange rose, clear to slightly hazy,
with up to a large amount of C
slightly opalescent. suspended insolubles.
Reaction of 5.95% Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, tan orange to tan
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2 orange rose, clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 5.75%
Difco Yersinia Antimicrobic Supplement CN
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
Dehydrated Appearance: Lyophilized, white, homogeneous
cake.
Cultural Response
Solution: Soluble on rehydration with 10 mL
BBL CIN Agar Base (Yersinia Selective Agar Base)
purified water. Solution is colorless,
clear. Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
25 2C for 18-24 and 42-48 hours.
Cultural Response INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Difco Yersinia Selective Agar Base
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Escherichia coli 25922 104-105 Partial to
30 2C for 18-48 hours. complete inhibition
Yersinia
INOCULUM COLONY enterocolitica 9610 107 Good Bulls eye reaction

ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
(translucent colonies
3
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 10 Inhibition with dark pink centers)
Escherichia coli 25922 103 Inhibition
Proteus mirabilis 12453 103 Inhibition
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 103 Inhibition
Yersinia enterocolitica 9610 102 Good Colorless
with dark pink
References
1. Schiemann. 1979. Can. J. Microbiol. 25:1298.
centers, may have 2. Head, Whitty and Ratnam. 1982. J. Clin. Microbiol. 16:615.
bile precipitate 3. Weissfeld and Sonnenwirth. 1982. J. Clin. Microbiol. 15:508.
4. Aleksic and Bockemuhl. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
Yersinia enterocolitica clinical microbiology. 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
ATCC 9610
Availability
Difco Yersinia Selective Agar Base
BAM COMPF ISO SMD
Cat. No. 218172 Dehydrated 500 g
BBL CIN Agar Base (Yersinia Selective Agar Base)
BAM COMPF ISO SMD
Cat. No. 212309 Dehydrated 500 g
Difco Yersinia Antimicrobic Supplement CN
BAM COMPF ISO SMD
Cat. No. 231961 Vial 6 10 mL*
BBL CIN Agar (Yersinia Selective Agar)
BAM BS10 CMPH COMPF ISO MCM7 SMD
United States and Canada
Cat. No. 221848 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
299579 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Europe
Cat. No. 254056 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
254088 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
Japan
Cat. No. 251139 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Mexico
Cat. No. 230550 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

115
Section III
C CLED Agar

CLED Agar
Intended Use CLED Agar is recommended for use in plates or in urine
CLED Agar is used for the isolation, enumeration and presump- dipsticks for detecting significant bacteriuria by quantitative
tive identification of microorganisms from urine. culture of urine. For reliable results, inoculation of the
medium must occur as soon after collection as possible.
Summary and Explanation Confluent or semiconfluent growth of bacteria will occur on
In 1960, Sandys reported on the development of a new method of the surface of the dipstick medium when bacterial counts are
preventing the swarming of Proteus on solid media by restricting greater than 105 per mL of urine, as confirmed by plates inocu-
the electrolytes in the culture medium.1 Previous chemical lated by the calibrated-loop or duplicate-dilution pour-plate
methods used to inhibit swarming by Proteus included the methods.4 Once the medium has been inoculated by immersion
addition of chloral hydrate, alcohol, sodium azide, surface-active of the dipstick or by pouring the urine over the surface of the
agents, boric acid and sulfonamides to the culture medium.1 medium if only a small volume is available, the dipstick may be
held 48 hours or longer, refrigerated or at room temperature
This electrolyte-deficient medium of Sandys was modified by
until received in the laboratory. On receipt, the dipstick should
Mackey and Sandys2 for use in urine culture by substituting
be incubated at 35 2C for 18-24 hours, to allow colonies to
lactose and sucrose for the mannitol and increasing the
develop on the medium.
concentrations of the bromthymol blue indicator and of the
agar. These two investigators further modified the medium by
Principles of the Procedure
the incorporation of cystine in order to enhance the growth of
The nutrients in CLED Agar are supplied by peptones, pancreatic
cystine-dependent dwarf colony coliforms and by deletion
digests of gelatin and casein, and beef extract. Lactose is included
of sucrose.3 They designated the new medium as Cystine-
to provide an energy source for organisms capable of utilizing it
Lactose-Electrolyte-Deficient (CLED) medium and reported it
by a fermentative mechanism. The cystine permits the growth
to be ideal for dip-inoculum techniques and for urinary
of dwarf colony coliforms. Bromthymol blue is used as a pH
bacteriology in general.
Staphylococcus aureus Proteus vulgaris
User Quality Control ATCC 25923 ATCC 8427

Identity Specifications
BBL CLED Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogenous, free of extraneous
material.
Solution: 3.6% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is medium,
yellow green to blue green, clear to
slightly hazy, with up to a large amount
of minute suspended insolubles.
Prepared Appearance: Medium, yellow green to blue green,
clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 3.6%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL CLED Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 42-48 hours.
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY REACTION
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-104 Good Yellow
Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good Yellow Enterococcus
faecalis Escherichia coli
Klebsiella pneumoniae 33495 103-104 Good With or ATCC 29212 ATCC 25922
without green to
yellow reaction
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 10145 103-104 Good With or without
blue reaction
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-104 Good Yellow
Proteus vulgaris 8427 103-104 Good Blue

116
 CLED Agar, cont.

indicator to differentiate lactose fermenters from lactose Typical colonial morphology on CLED Agar is as follows:
nonfermenters. Organisms that ferment lactose will lower the Escherichia coli ............................... Yellow colonies, opaque,
pH and change the color of the medium from green to yellow. center slightly deeper yellow
Electrolyte sources are reduced in order to restrict the swarming of Klebsiella ........................................ Yellow to whitish-blue
Proteus species. colonies, extremely mucoid
Proteus .......................................... Translucent blue colonies
Bacteriuria is determined by inoculating the surface of an agar
medium using 0.1 mL of a 10-2 dilution of the urine sample or Pseudomonas aeruginosa ................ Green colonies with typical
matted surface and rough
using a calibrated loop (0.001 mL) of the undiluted sample.5 periphery
Current guidelines are that for a single isolate a density of >105 Enterococci .................................... Small yellow colonies,
CFU/mL indicates infection, <104 CFU/mL indicates urethral about 0.5 mm in diameter
or vaginal contamination, and between 104 and 105 CFU/mL Staphylococcus aureus .................... Deep yellow colonies, C
needs to be evaluated based on clinical information.6 uniform in color
Staphylococci coagulase-negative .... Pale yellow colonies, more
Formula opaque than E. faecalis
BBL CLED Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Limitations of the Procedure
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ....................................... 4.0 g Factors that may cause urine counts from infected patients to
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 4.0 g be low include: rapid rate of urine flow, prior initiation of
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g antimicrobial therapy, a urine pH of less than 5 and a specific
L-Cystine ................................................................ 128.0 mg gravity of less than 1.003.7
Bromthymol Blue ....................................................... 0.02 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g References
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
1. Sandys. 1960. J. Med. Lab. Technol. 17:224.
2. Mackey and Sandys. 1965. Br. Med. J. 2:1286.
Directions for Preparation from 3.
4.
Mackey and Sandys. 1966. Br. Med. J. 1:1173.
Benner. 1970. Appl. Microbiol. 19:409.
Dehydrated Product 5. Barry, Smith and Turck. 1975. Cumitech 2, Laboratory diagnosis of urinary tract infections. Coord.
ed., Gavan. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
1. Suspend 36 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix 6. Clarridge, Pezzlo and Vosti. 1987. Cumitech 2A, Laboratory diagnosis of urinary tract infections.
Coordinating ed., Weissfeld. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
thoroughly. 7. Finegold and Martin. 1982. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 6th ed. The C.V. Mosby
Company, St. Louis, Mo.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder. Availability
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. BBL CLED Agar
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Cat. No. 212218 Dehydrated 500 g
stable, typical control cultures. United States and Canada
Cat. No. 221850 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
Procedure 221530 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Inoculate the medium as soon as possible after the specimen is Europe
received in the laboratory. It is recommended that quantitative Cat. No. 254003 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
methods be used for culturing urine specimens.5 Incubate at 254070 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
35 2C for 24-48 hours. Japan
Cat. No. 251953 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
251530 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Expected Results *Store at 2-8C.
Count the number of colonies on the plate or dipstick. Multiply
by an appropriate number to convert the count to CFU per
mL of sample.
Contaminant bacteria usually appear in low numbers which
vary in colonial morphology. Urinary pathogens will usually
yield high counts having uniform colonial morphology and should
be subcultured directly to routine media for identification and
susceptibility testing.5,7

117
Section III
C CTA Agar

CTA Agar
Intended Use Directions for Preparation from
CTA Agar is primarily used for carbohydrate fermentation tests Dehydrated Product
with corynebacteria and especially for differentiation of 1. Suspend 40 g of the powder in 1 L purified water. Mix
C. diphtheriae from related species. thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Summary and Explanation completely dissolve the powder.
CTA Medium, a semi-solid formulation, was developed 3. Autoclave at 118C for 15 minutes.
by Vera and is widely used for fermentation and motility 4. If desired, add 2 drops of sterile rabbit serum per tube prior
determinations by a wide variety of microorganisms.1 CTA to solidification in order to enhance the recovery of
Agar is the solid form of CTA Medium and, when employed C. diphtheriae.
as a plated medium and used in conjunction with BBL Taxo 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
carbohydrate discs, is useful in the speciation of Corynebac- stable, typical control cultures.
terium isolates of medical importance.2 Supplemented with
carbohydrates and prepared as slants, it is used for the differ- Procedure
entiation of Neisseria species.3 Inoculate a pure culture of the organism onto the surface of
the plated medium using a swab technique to inoculate the
Principles of the Procedure entire surface. Taxo carbohydrate discs are then applied to
CTA Agar utilizes peptone as a carbohydrate-free source of the agar surface using no more than four discs per plate.
nutrients. Inorganic salts are included in order to supply
Incubate plates for 18-48 hours at 35 2C in an aerobic
essential ions. Phenol red is an indicator of pH changes in the
atmosphere.
medium surrounding the Taxo carbohydrates discs, which are
applied to the surface of inoculated plates.
Expected Results
Formula Typical diphtheria bacilli ferment dextrose and maltose, but
BBL CTA Agar
not sucrose.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Typical carbohydrate reactions for selected corynebacteria on
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.5 g
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 20.0 g
CTA Agar plates containing Taxo carbohydrate discs are as
Agar ......................................................................... 14.0 g follows:
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Sodium Sulfite ............................................................ 0.5 g CORYNEBACTERIUM SPECIES DEXTROSE MALTOSE SUCROSE
Phenol Red ............................................................... 17.0 mg C. diphtheriae + +
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. C. pseudodiphtheriticum
C. xerosis + + +
C. jeikeium + v
User Quality Control
+ = acid (yellow zone reaction)
= no acid produced
Identity Specifications v = variable reaction
BBL CTA Agar
Current schemes recommended for the identification of medi-
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material. cally significant corynebacteria include carbohydrate utilization
Solution: 4.0% solution, soluble in purified as part of the testing regimen. Appropriate references should be
water upon boiling. Solution is medium, consulted for a discussion of the other tests, which enable a
orange-red to red-rose, clear to slightly definitive identification of the above-named organisms as well
hazy.
as other clinically important species of corynebacteria.4,5
Prepared Appearance: Orange-red to red-rose, slightly hazy.
Reaction of 4.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
References
1. Vera. 1948. J. Bacteriol. 55:531.
2. Alberti, Ortali and Turia. 1965. Ann. 1st. Superiore di Sanita. 1:349.
Cultural Response 3. Morello, Janda and Doern. 1991. In Balows, Hausler, Herrmann, Isenberg and Shadomy (ed.),
Manual of clinical microbiology, 5th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
BBL CTA Agar 4. Funke and Bernard. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures 5. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby,
and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours. Inc., St. Louis, Mo.

ORGANISM ATCC RESULT

Corynebacterium diphtheriae 11913 Growth
Availability
Corynebacterium pseudodiphtheriticum 10700 Growth BBL CTA Agar
Cat. No. 211094 Dehydrated 500 g

118
 CTA Medium

CTA Medium Cystine Tryptic Agar

CTA Medium with Carbohydrates
Intended Use Motility can be readily detected in the semisolid medium.2 Stab
Cystine Tryptic Agar and CTA Medium (Cystine Trypticase cultures show growth out from the line of inoculation. Nonmotile
Agar Medium) are for the maintenance of microorganisms, as organisms grow in the inoculated area, while the surrounding area
well as for the detection of bacterial motility and, with added remains clear.
carbohydrate, for fermentation reactions of fastidious micro- BBL Taxo carbohydrate discs can be selected and added, as
organisms; i.e., Neisseria, pneumococci, streptococci and
nonsporeforming anaerobes.
needed, to tubes of plain CTA Medium when fermentation C
reactions are to be determined.

Summary and Explanation For clostridia, bacilli, common micrococci, enteric bacilli and
This formulation was developed by Vera as a simple semi-solid other organisms not generally considered to be nutritionally
medium for the identification and maintenance of the fastidious, the use of Trypticase Agar Base is recommended
gonococcus and other bacteria.1 instead of this formulation.

Without carbohydrates, it can be used for maintenance of Principles of the Procedure

cultures, including fastidious organisms, for extended periods The medium contains cystine and peptone to supply the nutrients
when stored at appropriate temperatures. necessary to support the growth of fastidious microorganisms.
With the appropriate carbohydrate, it is recommended for the Carbohydrate fermentation is detected by a visible color change
differentiation of fastidious organisms by means of fermentation of the medium due to the incorporation of the pH indicator dye,
reactions. In the semisolid agar, acid reactions are easily detected phenol red. When the carbohydrate present is metabolized by
because the acid formed is not immediately diffused throughout the organism, organic acids are produced and the medium
the entire culture as in a broth. When no fermentable carbohy- becomes acidified. However, the peptone present in the medium
drate is present, most cultures show an alkaline shift. is also degraded by the bacteria present and yields substances
that are alkaline in pH.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Cystine Tryptic Agar BBL CTA Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Pink, free-flowing, homogeneous. Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
Solution: 2.85% solution, soluble in purified material.
water upon boiling. Solution is red, Solution: 2.85% solution, soluble in purified
very slightly opalescent. water upon boiling. Solution is light
Prepared Appearance: Red, very slightly opalescent. to medium, red-orange to orange-red
to red-rose, clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 2.85%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2 Prepared Appearance: Red-orange to red-rose, slightly hazy.
Reaction of 2.85%
Cultural Response Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
Difco Cystine Tryptic Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions without and with 0.5% dextrose.
Cultural Response
Inoculate tubes with fresh broth cultures (Neisseria from chocolate agar) BBL CTA Medium
by straight stab and incubate with caps tightened at 35 2C for 18-48 Prepare the medium per label directions (without added carbohydrate).
hours (up to 72 hours if necessary). Inoculate tubes with fresh broth cultures (Neisseria from chocolate agar) by
straight stab and incubate at 35 2C under appropriate atmospheric
ACID PRODUCTION
ORGANISM ATCC MOTILITY WITH DEXTROSE
conditions (Neisseria with tightened caps) for 72 hours.

Corynebacterium ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY MOTILITY

diphtheriae biotype mitis 8024 + Corynebacterium
Escherichia coli 25922 + + pseudodiphtheriticum 10700 Good
Neisseria gonorrhoeae 43070 + Enterococcus faecalis 29212 Good
Listeria monocytogenes 19115 Good +
Neisseria gonorrhoeae 19424 Good
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 6538P Good

119
Section III
C CTA Medium, cont.

The phenol red indicator changes from reddish-orange to 3. For fermentation tests with members of the genus Neisseria,
yellow when the amount of acid produced by carbohydrate only the surface of the tubed medium is inoculated. For
fermentation is greater than the alkaline end products of facultative organisms, such as streptococci and strictly anaero-
peptone degradation. The color change with phenol red bic organisms, inoculate by stabbing the center of the
occurs around pH 6.8, near the original pH of the medium. medium with an inoculating needle to about 1/2 the depth
of the medium.
Formulae 4. Repeat for each tube to be inoculated.
Difco Cystine Tryptic Agar 5. Incubate at 35 2C with loosened caps aerobically or
Approximate Formula* Per Liter anaerobically depending upon the organisms being tested;
Tryptose ................................................................... 20.0 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.5 g Neisseria should be incubated with tight caps4 especially if
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g tubes must be incubated in a CO2 incubator,5,6 or with loose
Sodium Sulfite ............................................................ 0.5 g caps in a non-CO 2 incubator.7,8 Examine periodically up
Agar ........................................................................... 2.5 g
Phenol Red ............................................................... 17.0 mg
to 24 hours for growth (turbidity), evidence of motility,
BBL CTA Medium and acid production in carbohydrate-containing medium
Approximate Formula* Per Liter (yellow color in upper layer of medium). A few strains
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 20.0 g may require incubation for up to 48-72 hours.9
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.5 g 6. Many fastidious organisms, including Neisseria, Pasteurella,
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Sodium Sulfite ............................................................ 0.5 g streptococci, Brucella, corynebacteria and vibrios, may
Agar ........................................................................... 2.5 g be readily cultivated in this medium, no added carbon
Phenol Red ............................................................... 17.0 mg dioxide, serum or other enrichments being required.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
7. For more rapid growth and also for more rapid fermentation
Directions for Preparation from reactions, anaerobic cultures preferably should be incubated
Dehydrated Product in the presence of carbon dioxide as well as hydrogen or
Difco Cystine Tryptic Agar nitrogen. Some strict anaerobes fail to grow or grow poorly
1. Suspend 28.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. in the absence of carbon dioxide.
Mix thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Expected Results
A yellow color either in the upper one-third or throughout the
completely dissolve the powder.
medium indicates acid production; i.e., fermentation of the
3. Autoclave at not over 118C for 15 minutes.
4. To prepare fermentation medium, add 5-10 g of carbohy- carbohydrate. A red (alkaline) to orange (neutral) color
drate before autoclaving or dissolve medium in 900 mL indicates that the carbohydrate has not been degraded and
water, autoclave, and aseptically add 100 mL sterile 5-10% that only the peptone has been utilized. Inoculated medium
carbohydrate solution. (without carbohydrate) also exhibits a red to orange color.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Motile organisms show growth out from the line of stab-
stable, typical control cultures. inoculation. Nonmotile organisms only grow along the stab
BBL CTA Medium
line with the surrounding agar remaining clear.
1. Suspend 28.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
Limitations of the Procedure
Add carbohydrate (0.5 to 1.0%) if desired, and adjust the
1. CTA requires a heavy inoculum.10
pH if necessary. Mix thoroughly.
2. Prolonged incubation may lead to changes in pH indicator
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute or until
or abnormal lactose/sucrose reactions with Neisseria
solution is complete.
pathogens.11,12
3. Tube and autoclave at not over 118C for 15 minutes. Cool
3. Neisseria species usually produce acid only in the area of
in the upright position.
stabs (upper third). If there is a strong acid (yellow color)
4. Store at room temperature. Do not refrigerate unless in
throughout the medium, a contaminating organism may
tightly closed, screw-capped tubes.
be present. If in doubt about a tube containing a Neisseria
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
species, a Gram stain and oxidase test should be performed
stable, typical control cultures.
on the growth.10
Procedure
References
1. Loosen caps, boil, tighten caps and cool before use. 1. Vera. 1948. J. Bacteriol. 55:531.
2. Remove fresh colony growth from the surface of a suitable 2. Vera and Petran. 1954. Bull. Nat. Assoc. Clin. Labs. 5:90.
3. Morello, Janda and Doern. 1991. In Balows, Hausler, Herrmann, Isenberg and Shadomy (ed.),
culture medium; e.g., Chocolate Agar, not from a selective, Manual of clinical microbiology, 5th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
4. Kellogg. 1974. In Lennette, Spaulding and Truant (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology, 2nd ed.
primary isolation plate.3 American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. Yu and Washington. 1985. In Washington (ed.), Laboratory procedures in clinical microbiology,
2nd ed. Springer-Verlag, New York, N.Y.
6. Morse and Knapp. 1987. In Wentworth (ed.), Diagnostic procedures for bacterial infections, 7th
ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

120
 Campylobacter Agars

7. Center for Disease Control. 1978. Laboratory methods in clinical bacteriology. CDC, Atlanta, Ga. BBL CTA Medium with Carbohydrates
8. Baron, Peterson and Finegold. 1994. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 9th ed. Mosby-
Year Book, Inc., St. Louis, Mo. Cat. No. 297731 Prepared Tubes with Arabinose Pkg. of 10*
9. Finegold and Martin. 1982. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 6th ed. The C.V. Mosby 297732 Prepared Tubes with Cellobiose Pkg. of 10*
Company, St. Louis, Mo.
10. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria, 221633 Prepared Tubes with Dextrose Pkg. of 10*
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md. 221634 Prepared Tubes with Dextrose Ctn. of 100*
11. Faur, Weisburd and Wilson. 1975. J. Clin. Microbiol. 1:294. 296001 Prepared Tubes with Fructose Pkg. of 10*
12. Applebaum and Lawrence. 1979. J. Clin. Microbiol. 9:598.
221635 Prepared Tubes with Lactose Pkg. of 10*
221637 Prepared Tubes with Maltose Pkg. of 10*
Availability 221639 Prepared Tubes with Mannitol Pkg. of 10*
Difco Cystine Tryptic Agar 297101 Prepared Tubes with Raffinose Pkg. of 10*
AOAC 297102 Prepared Tubes with Rhamnose Pkg. of 10*
Cat. No. 252310 Dehydrated 500 g 221641 Prepared Tubes with Salicin Pkg. of 10*
221643 Prepared Tubes with Sorbitol Pkg. of 10*
BBL CTA Medium
C

296002 Prepared Tubes with Starch Pkg. of 10*
AOAC 221645 Prepared Tubes with Sucrose Pkg. of 10*
Cat. No. 211096 Dehydrated 500 g 297033 Prepared Tubes with Trehalose Pkg. of 10*
221631 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10* 221647 Prepared Tubes with Xylose Pkg. of 10*
221632 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100* *Store at 2-8C.

Campylobacter Agars
Campylobacter Agar Base Campylobacter Agar
with 5 Antimicrobics and 10% Sheep Blood (Blaser)
Campy CSM Agar Campy CVA Agar Skirrows
Medium Campylobacter Antimicrobic Supplement
Skirrow Camplyobacter Antimicrobic Supplement
Blaser
Intended Use inhibition of normal fecal flora for easier detection of C. jejuni
Campylobacter Agar Base, when supplemented with blood or than the selective blood agar plate developed previously.
other additives and antimicrobial agents, is used for the primary Karmali et al., in 1986, evaluated a blood-free, charcoal-based
isolation and cultivation of Campylobacter jejuni subsp. selective medium (designated CSM) in parallel with a Skirrow-
jejuni from human fecal specimens. Several prepared selective type selective medium containing lysed horse blood. They
media formulations are provided for the same purpose. reported that the quality of Campylobacter growth on CSM
(luxuriant growth with smooth and effuse colonies) was similar
Summary and Explanation to that seen on blood-based media and was significantly more
In 1972, Dekeyser et al. reported that C. jejuni was isolated from selective than Skirrow medium.8
the feces of patients with diarrhea and acute gastroenteritis using
a filtration technique and a blood-containing selective medium Principles of the Procedure
with antimicrobics to suppress the normal enteric flora.1 These media support the growth of Campylobacter species due
Subsequently, Skirrow and other investigators reported similar to their content of peptones, yeast extract and other digests,
blood-based selective media that differed in the numbers and types extracts and components specific for the individual formula-
of antimicrobics.2-6 Bolton et al. reported that charcoal can tions provided. Campylobacter isolation relies, in addition,
effectively replace the blood in selective media for campylobacters.7 on a mediums selectivity, which depends on the antimicrobial
In 1978, Blaser et al. reported success in isolating C. jejuni agents in the medium, a microaerophilic environment and the
with a medium containing four antimicrobics incorporated into incubation temperature of 42C, which suppresses the growth
Brucella Agar supplemented with 10% defibrinated sheep of most normal bacteria.9
blood.3,4 Subsequently, cephalothin was incorporated to The antimicrobial agents required to make Skirrows and
increase its ability to inhibit the normal bacterial flora Blasers formulations are provided as Campylobacter Antimi-
associated with fecal specimens.5 crobic Supplement Skirrow and Campylobacter Antimicrobic
In 1983, Reller et al. introduced an improved selective Supplement Blaser, respectively.
medium containing cefoperazone, vancomycin and amphot- Campylobacter Agar with 5 Antimicrobics and 10% Sheep
ericin B (CVA) for isolation of C. jejuni.6 They reported that Blood supports the growth of Campylobacter species due to
this combination of antimicrobial agents provided better its content of peptones, dextrose, yeast extract and blood. The
121
Section III
C Campylobacter Agars, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications Campylobacter Agar Base
Uninoculated Campylobacter jejuni
Difco Campylobacter Agar Base Plate ATCC 33291
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.95% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium to dark
amber, clear to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Plain Medium to dark amber, very
slightly to slightly opalescent.
With 10% sheep blood Cherry red,
opaque.
Reaction of 3.95%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Campylobacter Agar Base
Prepare the medium per label directions; e.g., with 10% sterile defibrinated
sheep blood and antimicrobic supplements (Skirrow or Blaser). Inoculate and
incubate at 42C under microaerophilic conditions for 40-48 hours.
INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU SKIRROW BLASER
Campylobacter
jejuni subsp. jejuni 29428 102-103 Good Good
Campylobacter
jejuni subsp. jejuni 33291 102-103 Good Good
Candida albicans 10231 103 Good Inhibition
Enterococcus faecalis 33186 103 Inhibition Inhibition
Escherichia coli 25922 103 Inhibition Inhibition

Campy CSM Agar Campy CVA Agar

Campylobacter jejuni Campylobacter jejuni
ATCC 33291 ATCC 33291

122
 Campylobacter Agars, cont.

peptones supply nitrogenous compounds, carbon, sulfur and Directions for Preparation from
trace ingredients. Yeast extract is a source of the B-complex Dehydrated Product
vitamins. Dextrose is utilized as an energy source. Sheep blood 1. Suspend 39.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
supplies additional nutrients. The incorporation of the anti- Mix thoroughly.
microbial agents (amphotericin B, cephalothin, polymyxin B, 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
trimethoprim and vancomycin) suppresses the growth of the completely dissolve the powder.
normal microbial flora in fecal specimens, thereby facilitating 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool the medium to
isolation of C. jejuni. 45-50C.
Skirrows Medium contains, in addition to the usual nutritional 4. Aseptically add 5-7% sterile lysed horse blood or 10%
components, laked horse blood, which supplies the X factor sterile defibrinated sheep blood. Mix thoroughly.
(heme) and other growth requirements. Vancomycin inhibits 5. To prepare Skirrows medium: aseptically rehydrate one
vial of Campylobacter Antimicrobic Supplement Skirrow
C
gram-positive bacteria, polymyxin B inhibits most gram-
negative bacilli except Proteus and trimethoprim is inhibitory with 5 mL of sterile purified water. Rotate in an end-
for Proteus spp. over-end motion to dissolve the contents completely. Store
the rehydrated vials at 2-8C. Use within 24 hours after
Campy CSM Agar consists of Columbia Agar Base supple-
rehydration.
mented with activated charcoal, hematin, sodium pyruvate and
To prepare Blasers medium: aseptically rehydrate one vial
three antimicrobial agents (cefoperazone, cycloheximide and
of Campylobacter Antimicrobic Supplement Blaser with 5
vancomycin). The charcoal, hematin and sodium pyruvate
mL of sterile purified water. Rotate in an end-over-end mo-
improve the aerotolerance of Campylobacter species; it has
tion to dissolve the contents completely. Store the rehydrated
been suggested that these supplements act as quenching agents
vials at 2-8C. Use within 24 hours after rehydration.
of photochemically-produced toxic oxygen derivatives.8
Cefoperazone is a cephalosporin antibiotic that suppresses Aseptically add 1% of the desired antimicrobic supplement
the growth of gram-negative enteric bacilli and some gram- (10 mL of supplement to 1 L or 5 mL of supplement to
positive species. Vancomycin is a glycopeptide antibiotic that 500 mL of medium base). Mix thoroughly, avoiding the for-
inhibits many species of gram-positive bacteria. Cycloheximide mation of air bubbles and dispense into sterile Petri dishes.
is an antifungal agent. 6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
Campy CVA Agar consists of Brucella Agar, a general-purpose
medium that supports the growth of Campylobacter species. Procedure
Defibrinated sheep blood provides additional nutrients. Anti- Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
microbial agents are incorporated to suppress the growth of specimens. If immediate inoculation of a Campylobacter agar
normal fecal flora that could mask the presence of C. jejuni. cannot be performed, the use of a suitable holding medium
Cefoperazone is a cephalosporin antibiotic that suppresses the (e.g., Campylobacter Thioglycollate Medium with 5
growth of gram-negative enteric bacilli and some gram-positive Antimicrobics) is recommended. Incubate inoculated plates at
species. Vancomycin is a glycopeptide antibiotic that inhibits 42C in an atmosphere conducive to the primary isolation and
many species of gram-positive bacteria. Amphotericin B is an cultivation of microaerophilic organisms. This atmosphere can
antifungal agent. be achieved by using one BBL CampyPak or CampyPak
Plus disposable gas generator envelope in a GasPak 100 jar,
Formulae three envelopes in a GasPak 150 jar or using the BBL
Difco Campylobacter Agar Base
CampyPouch, Bio-Bag Type Cfj or GasPak EZ Campy
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 15.0 g systems. Alternatively, the atmosphere can be achieved using
Liver Digest ................................................................ 2.5 g evacuation of GasPak vented jars and replacement with
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g cylinder gases, or by using the Fortner principle.10
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g Examine plates at 24 and 48 hours.
Difco Campylobacter Antimicrobic Supplement
Skirrow NOTE: If plates are to be examined after 24 hours of incubation,
Formula Per 5 mL Vial treat plates as if they were anaerobic cultures; i.e., examine plates
Vancomycin ................................................................ 5.0 mg quickly and place them back into a reduced oxygen atmosphere
Polymyxin B .......................................................... 1250.0 units immediately after examination.
Trimethoprim ............................................................. 2.5 mg
Difco Campylobacter Antimicrobic Supplement Blaser Expected Results
Formula Per 5 mL Vial
Vancomycin ................................................................ 5.0 mg Campylobacter jejuni produces two types of colonies. One is
Polymyxin B .......................................................... 1250.0 units small, raised, grayish-brown, smooth and glistening with an
Trimethoprim ............................................................. 2.5 mg entire translucent edge. The other colony type is flat, mucoid,
Cephalothin ............................................................... 7.5 mg
Amphotericin B .......................................................... 1.0 mg translucent, grayish and has an irregular edge.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
123
Section III
C Campylobacter Agars, cont.

A small percentage of strains may appear tan or slightly pinkish.11 Difco Campylobacter Antimicrobic Supplement
Colonies tend to spread, especially when initially isolated from Skirrow
ISO SMWW
fresh clinical specimens. Cat. No. 214891 Vial 6 5 mL

Limitations of the Procedure Difco Campylobacter Antimicrobic Supplement

Blaser
1. Due to the presence of 15 mg/L of cephalothin, growth of SMWW
C. fetus subsp. fetus will be inhibited on Campylobacter Cat. No. 214890 Vial 6 5 mL
Agar with 5 Antimicrobics and 10% Sheep Blood; there- BBL Campylobacter Agar with 5 Antimicrobics

fore, this medium is not recommended for the isolation or and 10% Sheep Blood (Blaser)
culture of this subspecies. BS10 CMPH COMPF MCM7 SMWW
2. Since C. jejuni is thermophilic, it is important to incubate United States and Canada
Cat. No. 221727 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
the plates at 42C; otherwise, growth will be delayed. Also,
221728 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
the higher temperature improves selectivity by inhibiting
Europe
the normal flora. Cat. No. 254001 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
254069 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
References Japan
1. Dekeyser, Gossuin-Detrain, Butzler and Sternon. 1972. J. Infect. Dis. 125:390. Cat. No. 251727 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
2. Skirrow. 1977. Br. Med. J. 2:9.
3. Blaser, Cravens, Powers and Wang. 1978. Lancet ii:979. BBL Campy CSM Agar

4. Blaser, Berkowitz, LaForce, Cravens, Reller and Wang. 1979. Ann. Intern. Med. 91:179.
5. Wilson and Wang. October 13, 1979. Background and culture techniques for Campylobacter fetus BS10 CMPH MCM7 SMWW
subsp. jejuni. Information flier, Campylobacter Laboratory, Veterans Administration Hospital,
Denver, Co.
Cat. No. 299614 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
6. Reller, Mirrett and Reimer. 1983. Abstr. C274. Abstr. Annu. Meet. Am. Soc. Microbiol. 1983.
7. Bolton and Coates. 1983. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 54:115. BBL Campy CVA Agar

8. Karmali, Simor, Roscoe, Fleming, Smith and Lane. 1986. J. Clin. Microbiol. 23:456. BS10 MCM7
9. Grasmick. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American
Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C. Cat. No. 297246 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
10. Karmali and Fleming. 1979. J. Clin. Microbiol. 10:245. 297713 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
11. Kaplan. 1980. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Truant (ed.). 1980. Manual of clinical microbi-
ology, 3rd ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C. BBL Skirrows Medium
SMWW
Availability Cat. No. 297793 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Difco Campylobacter Agar Base *Store at 2-8C.

BS10 CMPH COMPF ISO MCM7 SMD SMWW

Cat. No. 214892 Dehydrated 500 g
218201 Dehydrated 2 kg

Campylobacter Thioglycollate Medium

with 5 Antimicrobics
Intended Use The combined yield using Campylobacter blood agar and
Campylobacter Thioglycollate Medium with 5 Antimicrobics is Campylobacter Thioglycollate Medium, both containing five
recommended as a holding medium for samples suspected to antimicrobics, was reported to be 33% higher than when the
contain Campylobacter jejuni subsp. jejuni when immediate plated medium only was used and 28% higher than when the
inoculation of Campylobacter Agar with 5 Antimicrobics and broth medium was used alone.4 Luechterfeld et al. reported
10% Sheep Blood cannot be performed. that the number of positives was not substantially increased
by holding turkey fecal specimens at 4C overnight in
Summary and Explanation Campylobacter Thioglycollate Medium.5
In 1972, Dekeyser et al. reported the isolation of C. jejuni Campylobacter Thioglycollate Medium has been recommended
from the feces of patients with diarrhea and acute gastroen- as a holding medium when facilities for streaking and incuba-
teritis using a filtration technique and a selective medium with tion are not immediately available.6
antimicrobics to suppress the normal enteric flora.1 Skirrow,
in 1977, reported a selective culture medium containing three Principles of the Procedure
antimicrobics.2 Blaser et al. reported success in isolating Campylobacter Thioglycollate Medium is a selective holding
C. jejuni by direct inoculation of stool specimens onto an agar medium recommended for the isolation of C. jejuni from clinical
medium containing four antimicrobics and by inoculating this specimens. The incorporation of antimicrobial agents (i.e.,
medium with stool swabs held refrigerated for 8 hours in amphotericin B, cephalothin, polymyxin B, trimethoprim and
thioglycollate broth (0.16% agar) containing the same four vancomycin) and refrigeration inhibits further multiplication
antimicrobics.3,4 A fifth antimicrobic, cephalothin, was later of normal microbial flora in fecal specimens, thus facilitating
incorporated to inhibit nonpathogenic C. fetus subsp. fetus.4 isolation of C. jejuni.
124
 Candida BCG Agar Base

Procedure Expected Results

1. Sample collection, storage and subculturing to plated Plates of Campylobacter Agar with 5 Antimicrobics and 10%
medium.7 Sheep Blood inoculated from Campylobacter Thioglycollate
Medium with 5 Antimicrobics should be examined for the
Place rectal swab about 1 cm into the medium and twirl
presence of colonies of Campylobacter jejuni. These colonies
the swab. Remove the swab or lower it to bottom of the
will appear as small, mucoid, usually grayish in coloration,
tube and break the shaft of the swab with the lip of the
flat with irregular edges and nonhemolytic at 24 and 48 hours.10
tube to allow easy access to the shaft.
With solid stools, prepare a saline suspension, blend in a Colonies may be only barely visible at 18 and 24 hours. An
mechanical mixer (i.e., vortex) and place five drops into alternate colonial morphology, which appears to be strain
the medium about 1 cm below the surface. Alternatively, related, consists of round colonies 1-2 mm in diameter, which
probe all areas of the stool with a swab and inoculate the are convex, entire and glistening.10 A small percentage of strains C
medium as described for a rectal swab. With diarrheal may appear tan or slightly pinkish in coloration.7
stools, place five drops in the medium about 1 cm below
Colonies tend to spread or swarm, especially when initially
the surface.
isolated from fresh clinical specimens.
Refrigerate inoculated Campylobacter Thioglycollate
Medium overnight and subculture the next day to NOTE: If plates are examined after 24 hours of incubation,
Campylobacter Agar with 5 Antimicrobics and 10% Sheep treat plates as if they were anaerobic cultures; i.e., examine
Blood plates using a Pasteur pipette inserted about 2 cm plates quickly and place them back into a reduced oxygen
below the surface of the broth to continuously withdraw a atmosphere immediately after examination.
sample as the tip is slowly drawn to the surface. Do not
subculture onto nonselective media since the normal flora References
1. Dekeyser, Gossuin-Detrain, Butzler and Sternon. 1972. J. Infect. Dis. 125:390
may still be viable. 2. Skirrow. 1977. Br. Med. J. 2:9.
3. Blaser, Cravens, Powers and Wang. 1978. Lancet 2:979
2. Incubation of plated medium. 4. Blaser, Berkowitz, LaForce, Cravens, Reller and Wang. 1979. Ann. Intern. Med. 91:179.
5. Luechtefeld, Wang, Blaser and Reller. 1981. J. Clin. Microbiol. 13:438
Incubate plated medium at 42C in a reduced oxygen, 6. Reller, Wang and Blaser. 1979. Campylobacter enteritis: Campylobacter fetus subspecies jejuni.
ASCP Check Sample, Microbiology No. MB-99, Commission on Continuing Education, American
increased carbon dioxide atmosphere. This atmosphere can Society of Clinical Pathologists, Chicago, Ill.
7. Kaplan. 1980. In. Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Truant (ed.), Manual of Clinical Microbiology,
be achieved by using one BBL CampyPak or CampyPak 3rd ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
8. Nachamkin, 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
Plus disposable gas generator envelope in a GasPak 100 microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
jar, three envelopes in a GasPak 150 jar or using the BBL 9. Karmali and Fleming. 1979. J. Clin. Microbiol. 10:245.
10. Smibert. 1984. In Kreig and Holt (ed.), Bergeys Manual of systematic bacteriology, vol. 1,
CampyPouch, Bio-Bag Type Cfj or GasPak EZ Campy Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.

systems. Alternatively, the atmosphere can be achieved

using evacuation of GasPak vented jars and replacement Availability
BBL Campylobacter Thioglycollate Medium
with cylinder gases,8 or by using the Fortner principle.9
with 5 Antimicrobics
Cat. No. 221747 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10
221748 Prepared Tubes Ctn. of 100

Candida BCG Agar Base

Candida Bromcresol Green Agar
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Candida Bromcresol Green (BCG) Agar is a differential and This medium consists of peptone agar base supplemented with
selective medium used for primary isolation and detection of yeast extract and dextrose to provide the nutrients necessary
Candida species from clinical specimens. to support growth. Neomycin is an aminoglycoside antibiotic
that is active against aerobic and facultatively anaerobic gram-
Summary and Explanation negative bacteria and certain gram-positive species. Bromcresol
Candida BCG medium employs the formula devised by Harold green aids in differentiation and identification of Candida
and Snyder.1 They demonstrated that the triphenyltetrazolium species based on dextrose fermentation. A change in the pH
chloride (TTC) being used as an indicator in Pagano Levin causes the medium to become a yellow color around the
medium retarded the growth of some species of Candida and colonies of organisms that ferment dextrose.
completely inhibited the growth of others. To overcome this,
they replaced TTC with bromcresol green, a non-toxic indicator,
to develop Candida BCG Agar. Neomycin is incorporated to
inhibit gram-negative and some gram-positive bacteria.

125
Section III
C Candida BCG Agar Base, cont.

Uninoculated Candida albicans

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 10231

Identity Specifications
Difco Candida BCG Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige to blue-green, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
Solution: 6.6% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is blue-
green to green-blue, slightly opalescent
to opalescent, may have a precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Blue-green to green-blue, slightly opal-
escent to opalescent.
Reaction of 6.6%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.1 0.1

Cultural Response
Difco Candida BCG Agar Base
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
30 2C for 24-72 hours.
INOCULUM COLOR OF
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY MEDIUM
Candida albicans 10231 102-103 Good Yellow
Candida
Candida tropicalis 9968 102-103 Good Yellow tropicalis
Escherichia coli 25922 103 Inhibition Green ATCC 3869

Formula Expected Results

Difco Candida BCG Agar Base Candida species produce convex to cone-shaped, smooth to
Approximate Formula* Per Liter rough colonies. The color of the medium around the colonies
Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 1.0 g
becomes yellow, usually within 72 hours.
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g Gram staining, biochemical tests and serological procedures
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Bromcresol Green ....................................................... 0.02 g should be performed to confirm findings.2-4
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
References
Directions for Preparation from 1. Harold and Snyder. 1968. Personal communication.
2. Kwon-Chung and Bennett. 1992. Medical mycology. Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia, Pa.
Dehydrated Product 3. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby,
Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
1. Suspend 66 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix 4. Warren and Hazen. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Availability
completely dissolve the powder. Difco Candida BCG Agar Base
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cat. No. 283510 Dehydrated 500 g
4. Add sterile neomycin (500 g/mL) to the medium at
BBL Candida Bromcresol Green Agar

50-55C. Mix well. Cat. No. 296241 Prepared Plates (complete) Pkg. of 20*
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using *Store at 2-8C.
stable, typical control cultures.

Procedure
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
specimens. Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar
side up) at 30 2C for up to 72 hours.

126
 Candida Isolation Agar

Candida Isolation Agar

Intended Use Directions for Preparation from
Candida Isolation Agar is used for isolating and differentiating Dehydrated Product
Candida albicans. 1. Suspend 41.1 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
Summary and Explanation 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Candida Isolation Agar is a nutritionally rich medium that completely dissolve the powder.
supports growth of many yeasts and molds and is differential 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
for Candida albicans. Candida Isolation Agar was developed 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
using a modification of YM Agar as described by Fung and stable, typical control cultures.
C
Liang.1 Goldschmidt demonstrated that YM Agar with aniline
blue WS could be used to identify C. albicans in clinical samples Procedure
with high accuracy and predictability.2 Aniline blue is metabo-
1. Process each specimen as appropriate for that specimen and
lized by C. albicans to produce a fluorescent moiety that can
inoculate directly onto the surface of the medium. Streak
be detected under long-wave UV light.2 for isolation.
2. Incubate plates aerobically at 30C for 18-72 hours.
Principles of the Procedure
3. Examine plates for growth after 18-72 hours of incubation.
Yeast extract provides nitrogen, carbon, vitamins and cofactors.
Malt extract provides carbon, protein and nutrients. Peptone
provides additional carbon and nitrogen. Dextrose is an Expected Results
energy source. Aniline blue is a fluorescent indicator. Agar is Colonies of C. albicans fluoresce yellow-green under long-wave
the solidifying agent. UV light following incubation at 30C for 18-24 hours. Non-
C. albicans isolates do not fluoresce.
Formula
Difco Candida Isolation Agar
Limitations of the Procedure
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 1. Strains of Candida albicans have been reported that are
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g false negative for fluorescence on this medium.2
Malt Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g 2. Strains of C. parapsilosis, C. krusei and C. pulcherrima
Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g that fluoresce on this medium may be encountered.2 These
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g strains may be distinguished from C. albicans based on germ
Aniline Blue ................................................................ 0.1 g tube formation in serum.2,3
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Candida albicans
User Quality Control ATCC 10231

Identity Specifications
Difco Candida Isolation Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 4.1% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium blue,
very slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Medium blue, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 4.1%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.2 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Candida Isolation Agar
Prepare the medium per label instructions. Inoculate and incubate
aerobically at 30 2C for 18-24 hours.
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY FLUORESCENCE
Bacillus subtilis 6633 102-103 Good
Candida albicans 10231 102-103 Good +
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good

127
Section III
C Candida Isolation Agar, cont.

References Availability
1. Fung and Liang. 1988. Bull. Inf. Lab. Serv. Vet. (France) 29/30:1.
2. Goldschmidt, Fung, Grant, White and Brown. 1991. J. Clin. Microbiol. 29:1095.
Difco Candida Isolation Agar
3. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. Cat. No. 250710 Dehydrated 500 g
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Cary and Blair Transport Medium

(See Transport Media)

Casamino Acids
Bacto Casamino Acids Bacto Casamino Acids,
Technical Casamino Acids, Vitamin Assay
Acidicase Peptone
Intended Use extent. Bacto Casamino Acids, Technical is recommended for
Bacto Casamino Acids and Bacto Casamino Acids, Technical use in culture media where amino acid mixtures are required
are used in preparing microbiological culture media. for a nitrogen source and the sodium chloride content is slightly
increased. It is particularly valuable in studying the growth
Casamino Acids, Vitamin Assay is used in vitamin assay
requirements of bacteria.
procedures.
Bacto Casamino Acids, Technical is prepared according to the
Acidicase Peptone is used as a nutritional supplement in
method suggested by Mueller1 for use in the preparation of
vitamin assay, susceptibility testing and other laboratory
diphtheria toxin. Bacto Casamino Acids, Technical has been
media and microbial fermentation where the high salt content
used in a medium for primary isolation of gonococcus and
will not interfere.
meningococcus, in agar-free media for the isolation of Neisseria,
in a tellurite medium for the isolation of Corynebacterium and
Summary and Explanation
in the preparation of a medium for the testing of disinfectants.6-8
Bacto Casamino Acids is an acid hydrolysate of casein, prepared
according to the method described by Mueller and Miller.1 The Casamino Acids, Vitamin Assay is an acid digest of casein spe-
method described reduces the sodium chloride and iron cially treated to markedly reduce or eliminate certain vitamins.
content of the hydrolyzed casein. This hydrolyzed casein, It is recommended for use in microbiological assay media and
supplemented with inorganic salts, growth factors, cystine, in studies of the growth requirements of microorganisms.
maltose and an optimum amount of iron was used by Mueller Casamino Acids, Vitamin Assay is commonly used as the amino
and Miller to prepare diphtheria toxin. Bacto Casamino Acids acid source in early phases of nutrition work.9 Casamino
duplicates this specially treated hydrolyzed casein. Acids, Vitamin Assay was used as the acid hydrolyzed casein
in studies on p-aminobenzoic acid and p-teroylglutamic acid
Bacto Casamino Acids, due to the nearly complete hydrolysis
as growth factors for Lactobacillus species.10
of casein and the low sodium chloride and iron content, makes
an excellent supplement for many media formulations where Several media containing Casamino Acids are specified in
nitrogen requirements are minimal. This product has been standard methods for multiple applications.11-16
recommended as a compromise for the replacement of pure Acidicase Peptone is a hydrochloric acid hydrolysate of casein.
amino acids in a defined medium for the growth of Lactoba- The manufacturing process produces a casein hydrolysate that
cillus, thus eliminating the complexity of preparation.2 Addi- has a high salt content of approximately 37% and nitrogen
tionally, it has been successfully used, along with Tryptone content of approximately 8%. The hydrolysis of the casein, a
Peptone, in nutritional studies to determine a bacteriums milk protein rich in amino acid nitrogen, is carried out until
growth requirement for peptides or amino acids.3,4 It also works all the nitrogen is converted to amino acids or other compounds
well as a component in laboratory media. It has been utilized of relative simplicity. It is deficient in cystine, because casein
in such diverse applications as TYI-S-33 media for the para- contains little cystine, and in tryptophan, which is destroyed
site Entamoeba histolytica and LCM medium for the growth by the acid treatment.
of a nematode-bacterium complex.5
Bacto Casamino Acids, Technical is an acid hydrolysate of Principles of the Procedure
casein. The hydrolysis is carried out as in the preparation Bacto Casamino Acids, Bacto Casamino Acids, Technical,
of Bacto Casamino Acids, but the sodium chloride and iron Casamino Acids, Vitamin Assay and Acidicase Peptone are acid
content of this product have not been decreased to the same hydrolyzed casein. Casein is milk protein and a rich source of
128
 Casamino Acids, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Bacto Casamino Acids BBL Acidicase Peptone
Dehydrated Appearance: Very light beige, free-flowing, homo- Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
geneous. material.
Solution: 1.0% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified
water upon slight heating. Solution is water. Solution is clear to slightly hazy.
very light amber, clear. 2.0% solution, Reaction of 2.0%
soluble in purified water upon slight
heating. Solution is light amber, clear.
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5-7.5
C
Reaction of 2.0% Cultural Response
Solution at 25C: pH 5.8-6.65
BBL Acidicase Peptone
Bacto Casamino Acids, Technical Prepare a sterile solution of 10.0 g of Acidicase Peptone, 2.5 g of
Dehydrated Appearance: Very light beige, free-flowing, homo- sodium chloride and 6.5 g of agar in 500 mL of purified water. Adjust
geneous. final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate plates at 35 2C for 2-3
Solution: 1.0% solution, soluble in purified days under appropriate atmospheric conditions.
water. Solution is colorless to very light ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
amber, clear.
Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good
Reaction of 1.0%
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 103-104 Good
Solution at 25C: pH 5.0-7.5
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-104 Good
Difco Casamino Acids, Vitamin Assay
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.0% solution, soluble in purified Typical Analysis
water upon boiling. Solution is very
Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of this
light to light amber, clear, may have a
slight precipitate. manual.
Reaction of 3.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5-8.5 Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product
Cultural Response
Refer to the final concentration of Bacto Casamino Acids, Bacto
Bacto Casamino Acids or Bacto Casamino Acids,
Technical Casamino Acids, Technical, Casamino Acids, Vitamin Assay
Prepare a sterile 1% solution and adjust the pH to 7.2 0.2. Inoculate and Acidicase Peptone in the formula of the medium being
and incubate tubes at 35 2C for 18-48 hours. prepared. Add appropriate product as required.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good Procedure
Salmonella choleraesuis See appropriate references for specific procedures using these
subsp. choleraesuis hydrolysates.
serotype Typhi 19430 102-103 Good

Difco Casamino Acids, Vitamin Assay

Expected Results
Prepare various vitamin assay media using Casamino Acids, Vitamin Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Assay to determine the vitamin content. It should not contain a vitamin
content higher than 20% above the following values:
References
Vitamin B12 ....................................................... 0.2 ng/g 1. Mueller and Miller. 1941. J. Immunol. 50:21.
Biotin ............................................................... 0.3 ng/g 2. Van Niel and Hahn-Hgerdal. 1999. Appl. Microbiol. Biotechnol. 52:617.
Folic Acid .......................................................... 3.3 ng/g 3. Takahashi, Sato and Yamada. 2000. J. Bacteriol. 182:4704.
4. Attwood, Klieve, Ouwerkerk and Patel. 1998. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 64:1796.
Niacin ............................................................... 0.17 g/g 5. Strauch and Ehlers. 2000. Appl. Microbiol. Biotechnol. 54:9.
Pantothenate ................................................... 0.04 g/g 6. Mueller and Hinton. 1941. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 48:330.
Riboflavin ......................................................... 0.1 g/g 7. Levin. 1943. J. Bacteriol. 46:233.
8. Wolf. 1945. J. Bacteriol. 49:463.
Thiamine .......................................................... 0.1 g/g 9. Nolan. 1971. Mycol. 63:1231.
10. Sarett. 1947. J. Biol. Chem. 171:265.
11. United States Pharmacopeial Convention. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia, 25/The national
formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
amino acid nitrogen. Bacto Casamino Acids, Bacto Casamino 12. Downs and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Acids, Technical, Casamino Acids, Vitamin Assay and Acidicase 13. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. II. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
Peptone provide nitrogen, vitamins, carbon and amino acids 14. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
national, Gaithersburg, Md.
in microbiological culture media. Although Bacto Casamino 15. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1998. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food Safety
Acids, Bacto Casamino Acids, Technical, Casamino Acids, and Inspection Service, USDA, Washington, D.C.
16. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
Vitamin Assay and Acidicase Peptone are added to media wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
17. Nolan and Nolan. 1972. Appl. Microbiol. 24:290.
primarily because of their organic nitrogen and growth factor
components, their inorganic components also play a vital role.17
129
Section III
C Casamino Acids, cont.

Availability Difco Casamino Acids, Vitamin Assay

Cat. No. 228820 Dehydrated 100 g
Bacto Casamino Acids

228830 Dehydrated 500 g
AOAC BAM COMPF SMWW USDA USP
Cat. No. 223050 Dehydrated 500 g BBL Acidicase Peptone
223020 Dehydrated 2 kg AOAC BAM COMPF SMWW USDA USP
223030 Dehydrated 10 kg Cat. No. 211843 Dehydrated 500 g
Bacto Casamino Acids, Technical
Cat. No. 223120 Dehydrated 500 g
223110 Dehydrated 10 kg

Casein Agar
(See Nocardia Differentiation Media)

Casein Digest
Intended Use Casein Digest is contained in the formulas of NZ media
Casein Digest is used in preparing microbiological culture media. (NZCYM Broth, NZYM Broth and NZM Broth), which are
used for cultivating recombinant strains of Escherichia coli.
Summary and Explanation E. coli grows rapidly in these rich media because they provide
Casein Digest, an enzymatic digest of casein similar to N-Z- amino acids, nucleotide precursors, vitamins and other
Amine A, was developed for use in molecular genetics media. metabolites that the cells would otherwise have to synthesize.1
This product is digested under conditions different from other Consult appropriate references for recommended test proce-
enzymatic digests of casein, including Tryptone and Casitone. dures using NZ media.1,2

User Quality Control Principles of the Procedure

Casein Digest is a nitrogen and amino acid source for micro-
Identity Specifications biological culture media. Casein is raw milk protein, a rich
Difco Casein Digest source of amino acid nitrogen.
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 1%, 2%, and 10% solutions, soluble in Procedure
purified water. Solutions are: 1%-Light
to medium amber, clear; 2%-Medium See appropriate references for specific procedures using Casein
amber, clear; 10%-Dark amber, clear. Digest.
Reaction of 1%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 Expected Results
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Cultural Response
Difco Casein Digest

Prepare NZM Broth per formula. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C

References
1. Ausubel, Brent, Kingston, Moore, Seidman, Smith and Struhl (ed.). 1994. Current protocols in
for 18-72 hours. molecular biology, vol.1. Current Protocols, New York, N.Y.
2. Sambrook, Fritsch and Maniatis. 1989. Molecular cloning: a laboratory manual, 2nd ed. Cold
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.

Bacillus subtilis 6633 102-103 Good

Escherichia coli (HB101) 33694 102-103 Good Availability
Escherichia coli (JM107) 47014 102-103 Good Difco Casein Digest
Escherichia coli (DH5) 53868 102-103 Good Cat. No. 211610 Dehydrated 500 g
Saccharomyces cerevisiae* 9763 102-103 Good
Streptomyces avermitilis 31267 102-103 Fair to good
*Tested with addition of 0.5% dextrose.

130
 Casitone

Bacto Casitone Trypticase Peptone

Bacto Tryptone BiTek Tryptone
Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Ingredients, where noted, conform with specifications of The The manufacturing process for an enzymatic digest of casein
United States Pharmacopeia (USP). is not as destructive as an acid hydrolysis. Thus, the casein is
not broken down as completely into its constituent components.
Bacto Casitone, Trypticase Peptone, Bacto Tryptone and BiTek
In many cases this makes for a more nutritious hydrolysate,
Tryptone are used in preparing microbiological culture media.
especially for those organisms that prefer peptides to amino acids. C
User Quality Control
NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications
Bacto Casitone
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, granules.
Solution: 1.0%, 2.0% and 10.0 % solutions, soluble in purified water. 1.0% solution is light amber, clear. 2.0% solution is light to
medium amber, clear, may have a slight precipitate. 10.0% solution is medium to dark amber, clear to very slightly opales-
cent, may have a precipitate.
Reaction of 1.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8-7.4
Bacto Tryptone
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 1.0%, 2.0% and 10.0% solutions, soluble in purified water. 1.0% solution is very light to light amber, clear. 2.0%
solution is light to medium amber, clear. 10.0% solution is medium to dark amber, clear to slightly opalescent,may have a
slight precipitate.
Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5-7.5
BiTek Tryptone

Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.

Solution: 1.0%, 2.0% and 10.0% solutions, soluble in purified water. 1.0% solution is very light to light amber, clear. 2.0%
solution is light to medium amber, clear. 10.0% solution is medium to dark amber, clear to slightly opalescent, may have
a slight precipitate.
Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Cultural Response
Biochemical Reactions
Bacto Casitone, Bacto Tryptone or BiTek Tryptone
Prepare a sterile solution as directed below. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
TEST TEST SOLUTION ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT
Fermentable Carbohydrates 2% Escherichia coli 25922 ~107 Negative
Indole Production 0.1% Escherichia coli 29552 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Acetylmethylcarbinol Production 0.1% with 0.5% dextrose Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Hydrogen Sulfide Production 1% Salmonella choleraesuis 14028 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
subsp. choleraesuis serotype Typhimurium

Growth Response
Bacto Casitone, Bacto Tryptone or BiTek Tryptone
Prepare a sterile solution with 2.0% Bacto Casitone, Bacto Tryptone or BiTek Tryptone, 0.5% sodium chloride and 1.5% agar. Adjust final pH to
7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate plates at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Brucella suis 4314* Undiluted Good
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good
*If this strain is not available, verify performance with a known strain.
Continued

131
Section III
C Casitone, cont.

Identity Specifications
BBL Trypticase Peptone
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous material.
Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified water. Solution is clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5-7.5

Cultural Response
Biochemical Reactions
BBL Trypticase Peptone
Prepare a sterile solution as directed below. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
TEST TEST SOLUTION ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT
Fermentable Carbohydrates 2% Escherichia coli 29552 ~107 Negative
Indole Production 0.1% Escherichia coli 29552 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Acetylmethylcarbinol Production 0.1% with 0.5% dextrose Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Hydrogen Sulfide Production 1% Citrobacter freundii 8454 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive

Growth Response
BBL Trypticase Peptone
1. Prepare a sterile solution of peptone agar without (plain) and with 5% sheep blood (SB) using 10 g Trypticase Peptone, 2.5 g sodium chloride and
6.5 g agar in 500 mL of purified water. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate plates at 35 2C for 3 days (incubate streptococci with CO2).
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY PLAIN RECOVERY WITH SB
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 103-104 Good N/A
Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good N/A
Staphylococcus aureus 6538P 103-104 Good N/A
Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 103-104 Good N/A
Streptococcus agalactiae 12386 103-104 N/A Good, beta hemolysis
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 103-104 N/A Good, alpha hemolysis
Streptococcus pyogenes 49117 104-105 Good Good, beta hemolysis
2. Prepare a sterile solution of chocolate peptone agar using Trypticase Peptone. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate plates at 35 2C
for 3 days with CO2.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Neisseria gonorrhoeae 19424 103-104 Good

Bacto Casitone can be used as a component in microbiological tions. It has been used successfully with commonly used
culture media or in fermentation applications. A recent publica- organisms, such as Escherichia coli,13 as well as uncommon organ-
tion has also reported that the stability of lyophilized influenza isms, such as the diatom Nitzschia laevis.14
virus vaccine was augmented by the addition of 2% Casitone.1
BiTek Tryptone is prepared similarly to Bacto Tryptone but
Trypticase Peptone is the primary nitrogen source in Trypticase the final product goes through fewer refinement steps during
Soy Broth and Agar. This product is recommended for use in processing. This product provides some of the same benefits
media formulations, where good growth of fungi and bacteria is as Bacto Tryptone in instances where a less refined hydroly-
required. Trypticase Peptone is referenced in Official Methods sate can be utilized.
of Analysis of AOAC International and meets specifications in
the USP for pancreatic digest of casein.2,3 Principles of the Procedure
Bacto Casitone, Trypticase Peptone, Bacto Tryptone and BiTek
Bacto Tryptone was developed by Difco Laboratories while
Tryptone are pancreatic digests of casein. Casein is the main
investigating a peptone particularly suitable for the elabora-
milk protein and a rich source of amino acid nitrogen.
tion of indole by bacteria. It is also notable for the absence of
detectable levels of carbohydrates. Bacto Tryptone has been
Typical Analysis
used in conjunction with casamino acids in nutritional studies
Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of this
to determine amino acids vs. peptide utilization.4,5 It is included
manual.
in standard methods applications and is listed in the reagent
section of the USP as meeting the specifications for pancre- Precautions15
atic digest of casein, a component in many of the media 1. Biosafety Level 2 practices, containment equipment and
listed.2,3,6-11 The European Pharmacopoeia also lists pancreatic facilities are recommended for activities with clinical
digest of casein as a component in many of the recommended specimens of human or animal origin containing or poten-
media.12 Bacto Tryptone also works well in fermentation applica- tially containing pathogenic Brucella spp.
132
 Casman Agar Base

8. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington D.C.
facilities are recommended for all manipulations of cultures 9. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
Public Health Association, Washington D.C.
of the pathogenic Brucella spp. and for experimental 10. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 2000. Improved enumeration methods for the recreational
water quality indicators: Enterococci and Escherichia coli. EPA-821/R-97/004. Office of Water,
animal studies. Washington, D.C.
11. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1998. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food Safety
and Inspection Service, USDA, Washington, D.C.
Directions for Preparation from 12. Council of Europe. 2002. European pharmacopoeia, 4th ed. Council of Europe, Strasbourg, France.
13. Sivakesavs, Chen, Hackett, Huang, Lam, Lam, Siu, Wong and Wong. 1999. Process Biochem.
Dehydrated Product 34:893.
14. Wen and Chen. 2001. Enzyme Microbia Technol. 29:341.
Refer to the final concentration of Bacto Casitone, Trypticase 15. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
Peptone, Bacto Tryptone and BiTek Tryptone in the formula of No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
the medium being prepared. Add appropriate product as required.
Availability
Procedure Bacto Casitone
C
See appropriate references for specific procedures using Bacto COMPF SMD SMWW USDA
Cat. No. 225930 Dehydrated 500 g
Casitone, Trypticase Peptone, Bacto Tryptone and BiTek 225910 Dehydrated 10 kg
Tryptone.
BBL Trypticase Peptone
AOAC BAM COMPF EP EPA SMD SMWW USDA USP
Expected Results Cat. No. 211921 Dehydrated 454 g
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results. 211922 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
211923 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
References Bacto Tryptone
1. Yannarell, Goldberg and Hjorth. 2001. J. Virol. Methods (in press).
2. Horowitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC AOAC BAM COMPF EP EPA SMD SMWW USDA USP
International, Gaithersburg, Md. Cat. No. 211705 Dehydrated 500 g
3. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
211699 Dehydrated 2 kg
4. Takahashi and Yamada. 2000. J. Bacteriol. 182:4704.
5. Nagel, Oostra, Tramper and Rinzema. 1999. Process Biochem. 35: 69.
BiTek Tryptone
6. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of Cat. No. 251420 Dehydrated 10 kg
foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
7. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.

Casman Agar Base

Intended Use User Quality Control
Casman Agar Base is used for the cultivation of fastidious
pathogenic organisms, such as Haemophilus influenzae and Identity Specifications
Neisseria gonorrhoeae, from clinical specimens. BBL Casman Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material.
Summary and Explanation
Solution: 4.3% solution, soluble in purified
Members of the genus Haemophilus are fastidious microorgan- water upon boiling. Solution is medium
isms that require the addition of X and/or V growth factors for to dark, yellow to tan, hazy to cloudy,
in vitro cultivation.1 Neisseria are also fastidious microorgan- with a moderate to large amount of
cream flocculation.
isms with complex growth requirements.2
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, yellow to tan, hazy
In 1947, Casman described a blood-enriched medium prepared to cloudy, with a moderate to large
amount of cream flocculation.
without an infusion of fresh meat for cultivation of Haemophilus
Reaction of 4.3%
and gonococci.1 The medium was developed to replace previ- Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
ous formulations that required time-consuming preparations
of fresh and heated blood and fresh meat infusion to supply Cultural Response
the nutrients necessary for the growth of these fastidious BBL Casman Agar Base
organisms.2,3 Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate for
42-48 hours at 35 2C, aerobically for L. monocytogenes and with
Casman found that nicotinamide interfered with the activity of 3-5% CO2 for all other organisms.
an enzyme in blood that inactivates V factor (NAD). Using INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY HEMOLYSIS
unheated human blood, he found that amount of nicotinamide
Haemophilus influenzae 10211 102-103 Good N/A
required for good growth of H. influenzae was inhibitory to
Haemophilus
gonococci.2 Therefore, he reduced the nicotinamide to a level parahaemolyticus 10014 102-103 Good Beta
that allowed good growth of gonococci. Listeria monocytogenes 19115 102-103 Good Weak beta
Neisseria gonorrhoeae 43070 102-103 Good N/A
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good Beta
133
Section III
C Casman Agar Base, cont.

To improve the recovery of H. influenzae on this medium, horse Directions for Preparation from
or rabbit blood should be used instead of human blood, since Dehydrated Product
they contain less NADase.4 1. Suspend 43 g of powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
Principles of the Procedure 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Casman Agar Base is a nonselective, peptone-based medium. completely dissolve the powder.
The peptones and beef extract provide amino acids and other 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
complex nitrogenous nutrients. Yeast extract is a source of 4. Cool to 45-50C and add 5% sterile blood and 0.15% blood
the B-complex vitamins. solution, made by lysing 1 part of blood with 3 parts of
Supplementing Casman Agar Base with blood supplies the water. Alternatively, add 5% partially lysed blood.
growth factors required by H. influenzae hemin, or X factor, 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
and nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide (NAD), or V factor. stable, typical control cultures.
Horse and rabbit bloods are preferred by some laboratories
because they are relatively free of NADase, an enzyme that Procedure
destroys the V factor. The addition of lysed blood stimulates For a complete discussion on the isolation and identification
the growth of some strains of N. gonorrhoeae. Nicotinamide of Neisseria and Haemophilus, consult appropriate references.5,6
is incorporated into the medium to inhibit the nucleotidase of
erythrocytes that destroys the V factor. Expected Results
H. influenzae produces colorless to gray, transparent, moist
Cornstarch is incorporated to prevent fatty acids from inhibiting colonies with a characteristic mousy odor. N. gonorrhoeae
the growth of N. gonorrhoeae and to facilitate -hemolytic produces small, translucent, raised, moist, colorless to grayish-
reactions by neutralizing the inhibitory action of dextrose. A white colonies.
small amount of dextrose is added to enhance the growth of
pathogenic cocci. Gram staining, biochemical tests and serological procedures
should be performed to confirm findings.
Formula
BBL Casman Agar Base References
1. Casman. 1947. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 17:281.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 2. Casman. 1942. J. Bacteriol. 43:33.
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 11.5 g 3. Casman. 1947. J. Bacteriol. 53:561.
4. Krumweide and Kuttner. 1938. J. Exp. Med. 67:429.
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 5.0 g 5. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.5 g Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g 6. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Nicotinamide .............................................................. 0.05 g
p-Aminobenzoic Acid ................................................. 0.05 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 0.5 g Availability
Cornstarch ................................................................. 1.0 g BBL Casman Agar Base
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g Cat. No. 211106 Dehydrated 500 g
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Cetrimide Agar Base Pseudosel Agar

Intended Use reduced, as reported by Lowbury and Collins in 1955.3 Brown
This medium conforms with specifications of The United States and Lowbury employed incubation at 37C with examination
Pharmacopeia (USP). after 18 and 42 hours of incubation.4
Cetrimide (Pseudosel) Agar is used for the selective isolation Strains of P. aeruginosa are identified from specimens by their
and identification of Pseudomonas aeruginosa. production of pyocyanin, a blue, water-soluble, nonfluorescent,
phenazine pigment in addition to their colonial morphology5
Summary and Explanation and the characteristic grapelike odor of aminoacetophenone.6
King et al. developed Medium A (Tech Agar) for the enhance- P. aeruginosa is the only species of Pseudomonas or gram-
ment of pyocyanin production by Pseudomonas.1 Cetrimide negative rod known to excrete pyocyanin. Cetrimide (Pseudosel)
(Pseudosel) Agar has the formula for Tech Agar but is modified Agar, therefore, is a valuable culture medium in the identification
by the addition of cetrimide for the selective inhibition of of this organism.
organisms other than that P. aeruginosa.2 Cetrimide (Pseudosel) Agar is widely recommended for use in
In 1951, Lowbury described the use of 0.1% cetrimide in a the examination of cosmetics,7 pharmaceuticals8 and clinical
selective medium for P. aeruginosa.2 Because of the increased specimens5,9 for the presence of P. aeruginosa, as well as for
purity of the inhibitory agent, the concentration was later evaluating the efficacy of disinfectants against this organism.10
134
 Cetrimide Agar Base, cont.

Uninoculated Pseudomonas aeruginosa

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 27853

Identity Specifications
Difco Cetrimide Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 4.53% solution with 1% glycerol,
soluble in purified water upon boiling.
Solution is light amber, opalescent, with
a precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, opalescent, with precipitate.
Reaction of 4.53%
Solution with 1%
glycerol at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2 C
Cultural Response
Difco Cetrimide Agar Base
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 18-48 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Inhibition
Pseudomonas
aeruginosa 27853 103 Good Yellow-green
to blue
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-2103 Inhibition

Principles of the Procedure Expected Results

The production of pyocyanin is stimulated by the magnesium Colonies that are surrounded by a blue-green pigment and fluo-
chloride and potassium sulfate in the medium.11 Cetrimide is resce under short wavelength (254 nm) ultraviolet light may be
a quaternary ammonium compound which is inhibitory to a presumptively identified as Pseudomonas aeruginosa. Note,
wide variety of bacterial species including Pseudomonas however, that certain strains of P. aeruginosa may not produce
species other than P. aeruginosa. pyocyanin. Other species of Pseudomonas do not produce
pyocyanin, but fluoresce under UV light. Most non-Pseudomonas
Formula species are inhibited, and some species of Pseudomonas may
Difco Cetrimide Agar Base also be inhibited. Gram staining, biochemical tests and sero-
Approximate Formula* Per Liter logical procedures should be performed to confirm findings.
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ..................................... 20.0 g
Magnesium Chloride .................................................. 1.4 g
Potassium Sulfate ..................................................... 10.0 g Limitations of the Procedure
Cetrimide (Tetradecyltrimethylammonium Bromide) ... 0.3 g 1. The type of peptone used in base may affect pigment pro-
Agar ......................................................................... 13.6 g duction.4,12
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
2. No single medium can be depended upon to exhibit all
Directions for Preparation from pigment-producing P. aeruginosa strains.
Dehydrated Product 3. Occasionally some enterics will exhibit a slight yellowing
1. Suspend 45.3 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water of the medium; however, this coloration is easily distin-
containing 10 mL of glycerol. Mix thoroughly. guished from fluorescein production since this yellowing
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to does not fluoresce.4
completely dissolve the powder. 4. Some nonfermenters and some aerobic sporeformers may
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. exhibit a water-soluble tan to brown pigmentation on this
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using medium. Serratia strains may exhibit a pink pigmentation.4
stable, typical control cultures. 5. Studies of Lowbury and Collins13 showed P. aeruginosa
may lose its fluorescence under UV if the cultures are left at
Procedure room temperature for a short time. Fluorescence reappears
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci- when plates are reincubated.
mens. Incubate plates in an inverted position (agar side up) at
35 2C for 18-48 hours. References
1. King, Ward and Raney. 1954. J. Lab Clin. Med. 44:301.
2. Lowbury. 1951. J. Clin. Pathol. 4:66.
Inoculate tubes with either pure cultures or with specimen 3. Lowbury and Collins. 1955. J. Clin. Pathol. 8:47.
material. Incubate tubes at 35 2C for 18-24 hours in an 4.
5.
Brown and Lowbury. 1965. J. Clin. Pathol. 18:752.
Kiska and Gilligan. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
aerobic atmosphere. microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

135
Section III
C Cetrimide Agar Base, cont.

6. Gilardi. 1991. In Balows, Hausler, Herrmann, Isenberg and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of clinical BBL Pseudosel Agar
microbiology, 5th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
7. Hitchins, Tran and McCarron. 1995. FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC AOAC BAM BS10 EP MCM7 USP
International, Gaithersburg, Md. United States and Canada
8. United States Pharmaceutical Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmaceutical Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md. Cat. No. 297882 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
9. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc., 221344 Tubed Slants Pkg. of 10
St. Louis, Mo.
10. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. 1. AOAC
221345 Tubed Slants Ctn. of 100
International, Gaithersburg, Md. Europe
11. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md. Cat. No. 254419 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20
12. Goto and Enomoto. 1970. Jpn. J. Microbiol. 14:65.
13. Lowbury and Collins. 1955. J. Clin. Pathol. 8:47.
Mexico (Cetrimide Agar)
Cat. No. 252626 Prepared Plates (60 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 10*
257506 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
Availability
Difco Cetrimide Agar Base Difco Glycerol
Cat. No. 228210 Bottle 100 g
AOAC BAM BS10 EP MCM7 USP
228220 Bottle 500 g
Cat. No. 285420 Dehydrated 500 g
*Store at 2-8C.

Chapman Stone Medium

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Chapman Stone Medium is used for isolating and differentiat- Yeast extract and peptone provide nitrogen, carbon, sulfur,
ing staphylococci based on mannitol fermentation and vitamins and trace nutrients essential for growth. Gelatin serves
gelatinase activity. as a substrate for gelatinase activity. Ammonium sulfate
allows detection of gelatin hydrolysis. D-Mannitol is the
Summary and Explanation fermentable carbohydrate. Sodium chloride acts as a selective
Chapman Stone Medium is prepared according to the for- agent because most bacterial species are inhibited by the high
mula described by Chapman.1 It is similar to Staphylococcus salt content. Dipotassium phosphate provides buffering
Medium 110, previously described by Chapman,2 except that capability. Agar is the solidifying agent.
the sodium chloride concentration is reduced to 5.5% and
ammonium sulfate is included in the formulation. The inclu- Formula
sion of ammonium sulfate in the medium negates the need to Difco Chapman Stone Medium
add a reagent after growth has been obtained in order to Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 2.5 g
detect gelatinase activity by Stones method. Chapman Stone Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
Medium is especially recommended for suspected food Gelatin ..................................................................... 30.0 g
poisoning studies involving Staphylococcus.3 It is selective, D-Mannitol ............................................................... 10.0 g
due to the relatively high salt content, and is differential due Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 55.0 g
to pigmentation, mannitol fermentation and the presence or Ammonium Sulfate .................................................. 75.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 5.0 g
absence of gelatin liquefaction. Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
User Quality Control
Directions for Preparation from
Identity Specifications
Difco Chapman Stone Medium Dehydrated Product
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- 1. Suspend 20.2 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water.
neous with a tendency to cake. Mix thoroughly.
Solution: 20.2% solution, soluble in purified 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
water upon boiling. Solution is light completely dissolve the powder.
amber, opalescent with a precipitate. 3. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes. Omit autoclaving if used
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, opalescent within 12 hours.
with a precipitate. 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Reaction of 20.2% stable, typical control cultures.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Chapman Stone Medium
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 30 2C for 18-48 hours. Add bromcresol purple indicator to determine mannitol
fermentation (yellow = positive).
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY HALO (GELATINASE) MANNITOL FERMENTATION
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Inhibition
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good + +
Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 102-103 Good +

136
 Charcoal Agar

Procedure aureus. White or nonpigmented colonies, with or without a

1. Streak a sample of the specimen onto the surface of the clear zone, are probably S. epidermidis.
agar. Make several stabs into the medium along the streak.
2. Incubate, aerobically, at 30 2C for up to 48 hours. Limitations of the Procedure
3. Examine for growth and the presence or absence of clear 1. Confirm the presumptive identification of pathogenic sta-
zones around colonies. phylococci with additional tests, such as coagulase activity.
2. Enterococci and/or Group D streptococci may exhibit
4. To determine mannitol fermentation, add a few drops of
growth on the medium and show slight mannitol fermen-
bromcresol purple to areas on the medium from which
tation. The colonies, however, are tiny and can easily be
colonies have been removed. Any change in color of the
differentiated from staphylococci by Gram stain and the
indicator, compared with that of the uninoculated medium,
catalase test.3
indicates fermentation of mannitol. C
Expected Results References
1. Chapman. 1948. Food Res. 13:100.
Mannitol fermentation: Positive = change in color of the indi- 2. Chapman. 1946. J. Bacteriol. 51:409.
3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria.
cator to yellow. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.

Gelatinase activity: Positive Stone reaction = formation of clear

zones around the colonies. Availability
Any mannitol-positive, yellow or orange colonies surrounded Difco Chapman Stone Medium
Cat. No. 211805 Dehydrated 500 g
by a clear zone are presumptively identified as Staphylococcus

Charcoal Agar
Intended Use The genus Bordetella consists primarily of four species:
Charcoal Agar is used for cultivating fastidious organisms, Bordetella pertussis, B. parapertussis, B. bronchiseptica and
especially Bordetella pertussis, for vaccine production and stock B. avium; additional species have recently been described.2 All
culture maintenance. Bordetella are respiratory pathogens, residing on the mucous
membranes of the respiratory tract. B. pertussis is the major
Summary and Explanation cause of whooping cough or pertussis. B. parapertussis is
Charcoal Agar is prepared according to the method of associated with a milder form of the disease.3 B. bronchiseptica
Mishulow, Sharpe and Cohen.1 The authors found this medium is an opportunistic human pathogen associated with both
to be an efficient substitute for Bordet-Gengou Agar in the respiratory and non-respiratory infections, often occurring in
patients having close contact with animals.2 B. bronchiseptica
production of B. pertussis vaccines.

Uninoculated Bordetella bronchiseptica

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 4617

Identity Specifications
Difco Charcoal Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Gray, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 6.25% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is black, opaque
with a precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Black, opaque.
Reaction of 6.25%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Charcoal Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C under 5-10% CO2 for 18-72 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Bordetella bronchiseptica 4617 102-103 Good
Bordetella parapertussis 15237 102-103 Good
Bordetella pertussis 8467 102-103 Good

137
Section III
C Charcoal Agar, cont.

has not been reported to cause pertussis. There have been no 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
reports of recovery of B. avium from humans.2 4. Mix thoroughly during dispensing to uniformly distribute
the charcoal.
Charcoal Agar supplemented with Horse Blood is used for the
cultivation and isolation of Haemophilus influenzae.4 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
Principles of the Procedure
Infusion from beef heart and peptone provide the nitrogen, Procedure
carbon and amino acids in Charcoal Agar. Yeast extract is a For a complete discussion on the isolation and maintenance of
vitamin source. Sodium chloride maintains osmotic balance. fastidious microorganisms refer to the procedures described
Agar is the solidifying agent. Soluble starch and Norit SG, char- in appropriate references.2,4,5
coal, neutralize substances toxic to Bordetella species, such as
fatty acids. Expected Results
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Formula
Difco Charcoal Agar Limitation of the Procedure
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Charcoal has a tendency to settle out of the medium. Swirl the
Beef Heart, Infusion from 500 g ............................... 12.0 g
Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
flask gently when dispensing to obtain a uniform charcoal
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g suspension.4
Soluble Starch .......................................................... 10.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.5 g References
Norit SG ..................................................................... 4.0 g 1. Mishulow, Sharpe and Cohen. 1953. Am. J. Public Health, 43:1466.
Agar ......................................................................... 18.0 g 2. Hoppe. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Linneman and Pery. 1977. Am. J. Dis. Child. 131:560.
4. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
Directions for Preparation from vol 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
5. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
Dehydrated Product Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

1. Suspend 62.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix

thoroughly. Availability
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Difco Charcoal Agar
completely dissolve the powder. Cat. No. 289410 Dehydrated 500 g

Chocolate II Agar Chocolate II Agar with Bacitracin

Chocolate II Agar with Pyridoxal
Intended Use developed specially to aid the growth of gonococci, although
Chocolate II Agar is an improved medium for use in qualitative it has broad application for other microorganisms; e.g.,
procedures for the isolation and cultivation of fastidious Haemophilus.3,4 Through careful selection and pretesting of
microorganisms, especially Neisseria and Haemophilus species, raw materials, Chocolate II prepared plated medium promotes
from a variety of clinical specimens. Media provided in improved growth of gonococci and Haemophilus species. With
divided (two-sectored) plates offer the ability to utilize the prop- most strains of N. gonorrhoeae, visible growth on primary
erties of two media in one plate. isolation is seen after incubation of 18-24 hours.
Chocolate II Agar with Bacitracin is a selective medium used The isolation of fastidious organisms from specimens contain-
for the isolation of Haemophilus species. ing mixed flora is facilitated by selective agents. Bacitracin has
been recommended for isolation of Haemophilus from the
Chocolate II Agar with Pyridoxal is used for the isolation of
respiratory tract.5,6
nutritionally-variant streptococci (vitamin B6-requiring strep-
tococci) from blood cultures. Chocolate II Agar is often used as the medium for subculture
from blood culture bottles to detect the presence of bacteria in
Summary and Explanation cases of septicemia. Some cases of septicemia are caused by
Carpenter and Morton described an improved medium for the organisms referred to as nutritionally variant streptococci.
isolation of the gonococcus in 24 hours.1 The efficiency of this These organisms require certain forms of vitamin B6, such as
medium, GC Agar supplemented with hemoglobin and yeast pyridoxal or pyridoxamine, and will not be isolated by the use
concentrate, was demonstrated in a study of twelve media then of unsupplemented media.7 Chocolate II Agar supplemented
in use for the isolation of this organism.2 The medium was with pyridoxal may be used for this purpose.
improved by replacing the yeast concentrate with BBL
IsoVitaleX Enrichment, a chemically defined supplement
138
 Chocolate II Agar, cont.

Chocolate II Agar
Chocolate II Agar slants primarily are used for the cultivation
Neisseria gonorrhoeae Neisseria meningitidis
ATCC 43069 ATCC 13090 and maintenance of pure cultures. The slants should be inocu-
lated with a pure culture.
Chocolate II Agar with Bacitracin and Chocolate II Agar
with Pyridoxal
Streak the specimen as soon as possible after it is received in
the laboratory. The streak plate is used primarily to isolate
pure cultures from specimens containing mixed flora.
Alternatively, if material is being cultured directly from a swab,
roll the swab over a small area of the surface at the edge; then
streak from this inoculated area. Incubate plates at 35 2C C
for 18-24 hours in an aerobic atmosphere enriched with
5-10% carbon dioxide.

Expected Results
Chocolate II Agar
Typical colonial morphology on Chocolate II Agar is as follows:
Haemophilus influenzae ... Small (1 mm), moist, pearly with
a characteristic mousy odor
Streptococcus Haemophilus Neisseria gonorrhoeae ..... Small, grayish-white to colorless,
pneumoniae influenzae mucoid
ATCC 6305 ATCC 10211
Neisseria meningitidis ....... Medium to large, blue-gray,
mucoid
Principles of the Procedure
Chocolate II Agar with Bacitracin and Chocolate II Agar
Chocolate II Agar contains an improved GC Agar base (GC II with Pyridoxal
Agar Base), bovine hemoglobin and IsoVitaleX Enrichment. After a minimum of 18 hours of incubation, the plates should
GC II Agar Base contains nitrogenous nutrients in the form of show isolated colonies in streaked areas and confluent growth
casein and meat peptones, phosphate buffer to maintain pH in areas of heavy inoculation.
and corn starch, which neutralizes toxic fatty acids that may
be present in the agar. Hemoglobin provides X factor (hemin) Haemophilus may appear as small (1 mm), moist, pearly colo-
for Haemophilus species. IsoVitaleX Enrichment is a defined nies with a characteristic mousy odor.
supplement which provides V factor (nicotinamide adenine
dinucleotide, NAD) for Haemophilus species and vitamins, References
1. Carpenter and Morton. 1947. Proc. N.Y. State Assoc. Public Health Labs. 27:58.
amino acids, co-enzymes, dextrose, ferric ion and other factors 2. Carpenter, Bucca, Buck, Casman, Christensen, Crowe, Drew, Hill, Lankford, Morton, Peizer, Shaw
and Thayer. 1949. Am. J. Syphil. Gonorrh. Venereal Diseases 33:164.
which improve the growth of pathogenic Neisseria. 3. Martin, Billings, Hackney and Thayer. 1967. Public Health Rep. 82:361
4. Vastine, Dawson, Hoshiwara, Yonega, Daghfous and Messadi. 1974. Appl. Microbiol. 28:688.
Chocolate II Agar with Bacitracin is a selective medium for the 5. Chapin and Doern. 1983. J. Clin. Microbiol. 17:1163.
6. Chapin and Murray. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
isolation of Haemophilus species from specimens containing microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
7. Reimer and Reller. 1981. J. Clin. Microbiol. 14:329.
mixed flora. Bacitracin is a polypeptide antibiotic that inhibits 8. Garrod and OGrady. 1971. Antibiotics and chemotherapy, 3rd ed. Williams & Wilkins, Balti-
more, Md.
gram-positive bacteria and Neisseria.8
Chocolate II Agar with Pyridoxal is an enriched medium that Availability
supports the growth of nutritionally variant streptococci, as BBL Chocolate II Agar (GC II Agar with Hemoglobin
well as Haemophilus and other fastidious microorganisms. and IsoVitaleX)
BS10 CMPH MCM7
Pyridoxal is a vitamin B6 compound that is required for the
United States and Canada
growth of certain strains of streptococcus.7 Cat. No. 221169 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
221267 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Procedure 295872 Prepared Slants (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
Chocolate II Agar Japan
Cat. No. 251169 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Streak the specimen as soon as possible after it is received in 251267 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
the laboratory. Place the culture in an aerobic environment 251578 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 200*
enriched with carbon dioxide. Incubate at 35 2C and BBL Chocolate II Agar with Bacitracin
examine after overnight incubation and again after approxi- United States and Canada
mately 48 hours. Subcultures for identification of Cat. No. 296271 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
N. gonorrhoeae should be made within 18-24 hours. Japan
Cat. No. 256271 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*

139
Section III
C Chocolate II Agar, cont.

BBL Chocolate II Agar with Bacitracin//Trypticase BBL Chocolate II Agar//Modified Thayer-Martin

Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II) (MTM II) Agar
Japan BS10 CMPH MCM7
Cat. No. 251789 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20* Cat. No. 221623 Prepared Bi-Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
BBL Chocolate II Agar with Pyridoxal

BBL Chocolate II Agar//Trypticase Soy Agar

Cat. No. 297259 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100* with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II)
BBL Chocolate II Agar//Martin-Lewis Agar United States and Canada
Cat. No. 221302 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
Cat. No. 297060 Prepared Bi-Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20* 221303 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
297245 Prepared Bi-Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
Europe
BBL Chocolate II Agar//Modified Martin-Lewis Agar Cat. No. 251302 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
Cat. No. 298513 Prepared Bi-Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20* 251303 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
298206 Prepared Bi-Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
BBL Chocolate II Agar//Trypticase Soy Agar
with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II)//MacConkey II Agar
Cat. No. 297140 Prepared Y Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
299580 Prepared Y Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
*Store at 2-8C.

Choline Assay Medium

Intended Use Choline Assay Medium is a slight modification of the medium
Choline Assay Medium is used for determining choline con- described by Horowitz and Beadle.1 Neurospora crassa ATCC
centration by the microbiological assay technique. 9277 is the test organism used in this microbiological assay.

Summary and Explanation Principles of the Procedure

Vitamin assay media are used in the microbiological assay of Choline Assay Medium is a choline-free dehydrated medium
vitamins. Three types of media are used for this purpose: containing all other nutrients and vitamins essential for the
cultivation of N. crassa ATCC 9277. The addition of choline
1. Maintenance Media: For carrying the stock culture to
preserve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism for standard in specified increasing concentrations gives a growth
its intended purpose; response by this organism that can be measured gravimetri-
2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for imme- cally.
diate use;
3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the vitamin under Formula
test. They contain all the factors necessary for optimum Difco Choline Assay Medium
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
growth of the test organism except the single essential Sucrose .................................................................... 40.0 g
vitamin to be determined. Ammonium Nitrate .................................................... 2.0 g
Potassium Sodium Tartrate ....................................... 11.4 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 2.0 g
User Quality Control Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 1.0
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 0.2
g
g
Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.2 g
Identity Specifications Ferrous Sulfate ........................................................... 1.1 mg
Difco Choline Assay Medium Zinc Sulfate .............................................................. 17.6 mg
Dehydrated Appearance: White, free-flowing, homogeneous. Biotin ....................................................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Borate ....................................................... 700.0 g
Solution: 2.85% (single strength) solution, Ammonium Molybdate .......................................... 500.0 g
soluble in purified water upon boiling. Cuprous Chloride ................................................... 300.0 g
Solution is colorless, clear, may have a Manganese Sulfate ................................................ 110.0 g
slight precipitate. *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Prepared Appearance: Colorless, clear, may have a slight

precipitate. Precautions
Reaction of 2.85% Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media
Solution at 25C: pH 5.5 0.2
or glassware in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely
Cultural Response small amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give
Difco Choline Assay Medium erroneous results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from deter-
Prepare the medium per label directions. The medium supports the gents and other chemicals must be used. Glassware must be
growth of Neurospora crassa ATCC 9277 when prepared in single heated to 250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic
strength and supplemented with choline chloride. The medium should
produce a standard curve when tested using a choline chloride reference
residues that might be present. Take precautions to keep steril-
standard at 0.0 to 25.0 g per 10 mL. Incubate flasks with caps loosened ization and cooling conditions uniform throughout the assay.
at 25-30C for 3 days. Measure the growth response gravimetrically
weight of mycelia versus micrograms of choline chloride standard.

140
 Chopped Meat Broth, PR II

Directions for Preparation from The concentration of choline required for the preparation
Dehydrated Product of the standard curve may be prepared by dissolving 0.5 g
1. Suspend 5.7 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water. choline chloride in 1,000 mL purified water. This is the stock
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 2-3 minutes to solution (500 g per mL). Dilute the stock solution by adding
completely dissolve the powder. 1 mL to 99 mL purified water. Use 0.0, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 mL
3. Dispense 10 mL amounts into flasks, evenly dispersing the of this diluted solution per flask. Prepare the stock solution
precipitate. fresh daily.
4. Add standard or test samples.
5. Adjust flask volume to 20 mL with purified water. Expected Results
6. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes. 1. Prepare a standard concentration response curve by plot-

Procedure
ting the response readings against the amount of standard
in each tube, disk or cup.
C
Remove 1 loop of spores from a 48-72 hour culture of 2. Determine the amount of vitamin at each level of assay
N. crassa ATCC 9277 grown on Neurospora Culture Agar solution by interpolation from the standard curve.
(per liter: Proteose Peptone No. 3, 5.0 g; Yeast Extract, 5.0 g; 3. Calculate the concentration of vitamin in the sample from
Maltose, 40.0 g; Agar, 15.0 g; pH 6.7 0.2) and suspend it in the average of these volumes. Use only those values that do
100 mL sterile saline. Add 1 drop of this spore suspension to not vary more than 10% from the average. Use the results
each flask of medium. Incubate at 25-30C for 3 days. At the only if two thirds of the values do not vary more than 10%.
end of the incubation period, steam the flask at 100C for
5 minutes. Remove all the mycelium from the flask using a Limitations of the Procedure
stiff wire needle or glass rod, press dry between paper towels, 1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium
and roll into a small pellet. Dry the pellet at 100C in a vacuum must be cultured and maintained on media recommended
oven for 2 hours. (A glazed porcelain spot plate is convenient for this purpose.
for handling the mycelium during drying and weighing.) Weigh 2. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the assay pro-
to the nearest 0.5 mg. A standard curve is then constructed cedure.
from the weights obtained, and the unknown determined by 3. The use of altered or deficient media may cause mutants
interpolation. In the assay for choline, 50 mL Erlenmeyer flasks having different nutritional requirements that will not give
containing a total volume of 10 mL each are used. a satisfactory response.
4. For successful results to these procedures, all conditions of
It is essential that a standard curve be constructed each time the assay must be followed precisely.
an assay is run. Autoclave and incubation conditions can
influence the standard curve reading and cannot always be Reference
duplicated. The standard curve is obtained by using choline at 1. Horowitz and Beadle. 1943. J. Biol. Chem. 150:325.

levels of 0.0, 2.5, 5, 10, 15, 20 and 25 g per assay flask

(10 mL). The most effective assay range using Choline Assay Availability
Medium is between 2.5 and 30 g choline. Difco Choline Assay Medium
Cat. No. 246010 Dehydrated 100 g*
*Store at 2-8C.

Chopped Meat Carbohydrate Broth, PR II

Chopped Meat Glucose Broth, PR II
Intended Use chamber sealed using a Hungate screw cap. The cap contains
Chopped Meat Carbohydrate Broth, PR II and Chopped Meat a butyl rubber septum stopper that permits inoculation and
Glucose Broth, PR II are pre-reduced media used in the incubation outside an anaerobic chamber without exposing the
enrichment, cultivation and maintenance of anaerobic micro- medium to air.
organisms, particularly obligate anaerobes. They are recommended for subculture and enrichment of
anaerobic isolates for chromatographic analysis and tests to
Summary and Explanation determine proteolysis (meat digestion), spore formation, motility
These media utilize Hungates method for culturing anaerobic and toxin production, particularly by Clostridium species, and as
microorganisms outside of an anaerobic chamber.1 The tubes a holding or stock culture maintenance medium.2-4
provide a reduced medium in a self-contained, anaerobic culture

141
Section III
C Chopped Meat Broth, PR II, cont.

Principles of the Procedure appropriate primary plating media. Prepare tissues and other
Pre-reduced medium provides an anaerobic nitrogen and solid specimens by mincing and grinding the specimen in 0.5
hydrogen atmosphere. The tubes are packaged under oxygen- to 1.0 mL sterile, reduced broth. For swab specimens, scrape
free conditions and sealed to prevent aerobiosis. the swab in sterile, reduced broth.
Meat pellets and enzymatic digest of casein provide amino acids Incubate the tubes at 35 2C for up to a week before discard-
and other nitrogenous substances to support bacterial growth. ing as negative. For suspected actinomycoses, osteomyelitis,
Yeast extract primarily provides the B-complex vitamins, and endocarditis and other serious infections, incubate the tubes
the phosphate is incorporated to maintain the pH of the for up to two weeks before discarding as negative.
medium. Carbohydrates provide energy sources. Hemin and
vitamin K1 are required by certain anaerobic species for growth Expected Results
and may improve the growth of other species.5 Examine the medium for blackening of meat particles, indi-
cating digestion. Consult references for information needed
The reducing action of the meat particles and L-cysteine binds
for chromatographic analyses and tests for indole production,
molecular oxygen. The reducing agents are required to maintain
toxin production and spore formation.2-4, 6, 7
a low Eh. Resazurin is an oxidation-reduction indicator used
to detect changes in the Eh of the medium. The medium References
remains colorless if the Eh remains low; increased oxidation 1. Hungate. 1969. Methods of microbiology. Academic Press, New York, N.Y.
2. Moore, Cato and Moore (ed.). 1987. Anaerobe laboratory manual, 4th ed. Virginia Polytechnic
causes the medium to become pink. Institute and State University, Blacksburg, Va.
3. Reischelderfer and Mangels. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook,
vol. 1. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Procedure 4. Allen, Emery and Siders. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Before inoculating, disinfect the septum of the cap. To inoculate, 5. Gibons and MacDonald. 1960. J. Bacteriol. 80:164.
6. Summanen, Baron, Citron, Strong, Wexler and Finegold. 1993. Wadsworth anaerobic bacteriol-
insert needle through the septum and inject the specimen into the ogy manual, 5th ed. Star Publishing Co., Belmont, Calif.
7. Rodloff, Applebaum and Zabransky. 1991. Cumitech 5A, Practical anaerobic bacteriology.
medium. Withdraw the needle slowly to avoid introducing air Coordinating ed., Rodloff. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
into the tube.
Organisms for subculture should first be isolated in pure culture Availability
BBL Chopped Meat Carbohydrate Broth, PR II
on an appropriate solid medium. Prepare a suspension of the
CMPH
pure culture in 0.5 to 1.0 mL of sterile, reduced broth and Cat. No. 297307 Prepared Tubes (Hungate cap) Pkg. of 10
inoculate with one or two drops.
BBL Chopped Meat Glucose Broth, PR II

For enrichment purposes, inoculate the pre-reduced medium Cat. No. 297305 Prepared Tubes (Hungate cap) Pkg. of 10
with one or two drops of the specimen after inoculating

CHROMagar Candida
Intended Use species on the isolation plate.1-3 Colonies of C. albicans
BBL CHROMagar Candida* medium is for the isolation appear light to medium green, C. tropicalis colonies appear
and differentiation of Candida albicans, C. tropicalis and dark blue to metallic-blue, and C. krusei colonies appear light
C. krusei.1 Due to the differences in morphology and colors of rose with a whitish border. Other yeasts may develop either
the yeast colonies, this medium facilitates the detection of mixed their natural color (cream) or appear light to dark mauve (e.g.,
yeast cultures in specimens.2,3 It may also be used as a selective C. glabrata and other species).
isolation medium for other yeasts and for filamentous fungi BBL CHROMagar Candida medium is a selective and
instead of Sabouraud Dextrose Agar or similar media. differential medium deveolped by A. Rambach and is sold by
*U.S. Patent Nos. 5,716,799 and 5,962,251 BD under a licensing agreement with CHROMagar, Paris,
France.
Summary and Explanation
The usefulness of a selective and differential medium for the Principles of the Procedure
primary isolation of Candida species has long been noted. In
Specially selected peptones supply the nutrients in BBL
1953, Nickerson developed a medium following a study of
CHROMagar Candida medium. The chromogen mix consists
sulfite reduction by Candida species.4 In 1958, Pagano et al.
of artificial substrates (chromogens), which release differently
added triphenyl tetrazolium chloride to Sabouraud Dextrose
colored compounds upon degradation by specific enzymes. This
medium to differentiate C. albicans from other yeasts. 5
permits the differentiation of certain species, or the detection
With the inclusion of chromogenic substrates in the medium, of certain groups of organisms, with only a minimum of
the colonies of C. albicans, C. tropicalis and C. krusei produce confirmatory tests. Chloramphenicol inhibits most bacterial
different colors, thus allowing the direct detection of these yeast contaminants.

142
 CHROMagar Candida, cont.

Mixed Yeast
Colonies

Candida tropicalis Candida krusei

ATCC 1369 ATCC 34135

Candida
albicans
ATCC 1231

Procedure 3. Since molds and other filamentous fungi metabolize the

Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci- chromogenic substrates, the colors exhibited by these
mens. Incubate plates aerobically at 35 2C for 36-48 hours organisms on BBL CHROMagar Candida medium may
in an inverted position (agar-side up). Do not incubate in an differ from those exhibited on Sabouraud Dextrose Agar.
atmosphere supplemented with carbon dioxide. Minimize expo- Do not use the appearance of growth on this medium
sure to light both before and during incubation. Occasional for traditional descriptive identification from Sabouraud
isolates, such as Cryptococcus neoformans and filamentous Dextrose Agar.
fungi, will require a longer incubation time and possibly a lower 4. Minimize exposure to light before and during incubation,
incubation temperature. as light may destroy the chromogens. Keep plates within
the original sleeve wrapping and cardboard box for the
Expected Results entire storage period.
After incubation, plates from specimens containing yeasts will
show growth. Depending on the yeast species, colonies will References
1. Odds and Bernaerts. 1994. J. Clin. Microbiol. 32:1923.
appear light to medium green (C. albicans), light rose to pink 2. Pfaller, Huston and Coffman. 1996. J. Clin. Microbiol. 34:58.
3. Beighton, Ludford, Clark, Brailsford, Pankhurst, Tinsley, Fiske, Lewis, Daly, Khalifa, Marren and
(C. krusei), dark blue to metallic blue (C. tropicalis), light Lynch. 1995. J. Clin. Microbiol. 33:3025.
to dark mauve or natural color (cream). Data from various 4. Nickerson. 1953. J. Infect. Dis. 93:45.
5. Pagano, Levine and Trejo. 1958. Antibiot. Ann. 1957-1958:137.
studies indicate that further identification using biochemical 6. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
St. Louis, Mo.
and morphological tests for the above three yeast species is 7. Schoofs, Odds, Coleblunders, Ieven and Goosens. 1997. Eur. J. Clin. Microbiol. Infect. Dis. 16:296.
8. Kirkpatrick, Revankar, McAtee, Lopez-Ribot, Fothergill, McCarthy, Sanche, Cantu, Rinaldi and
not necessary.1-3 Colonies that appear light to dark mauve or Patterson. 1998. J. Clin. Microbiol. 36:3007.
9. Odds, Van Nuffel and Dams. 1998. J. Clin. Microbiol. 36:2869.
appear in their natural cream color should be identified using
standard methods.6
Availability
BBL CHROMagar Candida
Limitations of the Procedure
United States and Canada
1. Consult appropriate references for detailed information and Cat. No. 254093 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
recommended procedures for the identification of isolates.1,3,6 Europe
2. It has been reported that C. dubliniensis produces a Cat. No. 254093 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
distinctive dark green color on primary isolation with BBL 254106 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
CHROMagar Candida medium.7-9 However, this property Japan
Cat. No. 251594 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
may not be retained in subculture. Additional phenotypic 251367 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
and genotypic assays may be necessary. The clinical impor-
Mexico
tance of C. dubliniensis requires further study. Cat. No. 252630 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

143
Section III
C CHROMagar O157

CHROMagar O157
Intended Use undercooked beef; other foods have also been implicated.1-3 In

BBL CHROMagar O157* medium is designed for the selec- addition, transmission can occur person to person, as well as,
tive isolation and presumptive identification of Escherichia coli from recreational water sources. 1-3
O157 from clinical, food, veterinary and environmental sources. With the inclusion of chromogenic substrates in BBL
NOTE: Product under development at the time of printing. CHROMagar O157 medium, colonies of E. coli O157
Consult package insert for a complete description of this product. should produce a mauve color, thus allowing presumptive
*U.S. Patent No. 6,165,743 identification from the primary isolation plate.
BBL CHROMagar O157 medium is a selective and differ-
Summary and Explanation
ential medium developed by A. Rambach and is sold by BD
E. coli O157:H7 is the most frequently isolated pathogen from
under a licensing agreement with CHROMagar, Paris, France.
bloody stools. 1-3 In addition to bloody diarrhea, this serotype
can also cause hemolytic uremic syndrome and death.1-3 Trans- Principles of the Procedure
mission most often occurs through ingestion of raw or
Specially selected peptones supply the nutrients. The chromogen
Escherichia coli O157 Enterobacter mix consists of artificial substrates (chromogens), which
ATCC 43895 cloacae (blue) release an insoluble colored compound when hydrolyzed by a
ATCC 13047
specific enzyme. This permits the differentiation of E. coli O157
from other organisms. Several antimicrobial agents are incor-
porated to enhance the selectivity of this medium.

Procedure
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci-
mens. Incubate plates aerobically at 35 2C for 18-24 hours
in an inverted position (agar-side up). Minimize exposure to
light both before and during incubation.

References
1 Moe. 2002. In Hurst, Crawford, Knudsen, McInerney and Stetzenbach (ed.), Manual of environ-
mental microbiology, 2nd ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, DC.
2. Doyle, Zhao, Meng and Zhao. 1997. In Doyle, Beuchat and Montville (ed.), Food microbiology
fundamentals and frontiers. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, DC.
3. Bopp, Brenner, Wells and Strockbine. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.),
Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, DC.

Availability
BBL CHROMagar O157
Escherichia coli Cat. No. 214984 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
O157 (mauve) *Store at 2-8C.
ATCC 43895

CHROMagar Orientation
Intended Use Due to the different antimicrobial susceptibility patterns of

BBL CHROMagar Orientation* medium is a nonselective the microorganisms involved, identification to the species level
medium for the isolation, differentiation and enumeration of is necessary for effective antimicrobial therapy. The most
urinary tract pathogens. frequently isolated species or organism groups produce
*U.S. Patent Nos. 5,716,799 and 5,962,251 characteristic enzymes. Thus, it is possible to identify these
organisms to the species level with a limited number of
Summary and Explanation substrate fermentation or utilization tests.1
Escherichia coli, enterococci, the Klebsiella-Enterobacter-
Some of the organisms encountered in UTIs produce enzymes
Serratia (KES) and the Proteus-Morganella-Providencia (PMP)
either for the metabolism of lactose or glucosides or both. Other
groups are frequently encountered organisms in urinary tract
organisms produce none of these enzymes. For example, E. coli
infections (UTI). Most UTIs are caused by E. coli alone, or in
contains enzymes for lactose metabolism but is -glucosidase
combination with enterococci. Staphylococcus saprophyticus
negative. Some members of the family Enterobacteriaceae are
and Streptococcus agalactiae may be isolated from females,
-glucosidase positive but do not contain enzymes necessary
although less frequently.
144
 CHROMagar Orientation, cont.

for lactose fermentation; others may contain both types of colony appearance on BBL CHROMagar Orientation
enzymes or none of them. -glucosidases are also found in medium is as follows:
gram-positive cocci, such as S. agalactiae and enterococci. E. coli ........................................ Dark rose to pink, transparent
Tryptophan deaminase (TDA) is an enzyme characteristically colonies, with or without
found in the Proteus-Morganella-Providencia group. halos in the surrounding
medium
BBL CHROMagar Orientation medium was developed by KES group ................................. Medium-blue to dark blue
colonies
A. Rambach and is sold by BD under a licensing agreement PMP group ................................ Pale to beige colonies
with CHROMagar, Paris, France. surrounded by brown halos*
Enterococcus ............................. Blue-green small colonies
Principles of the Procedure S. agalactiae .............................. Blue-green to light blue,
Specially selected peptones supply the nutrients in BBL
pinpoint to small colonies,
with or without halos C
CHROMagar Orientation medium. The chromogen mix S. saprophyticus (most strains) .. Light pink to rose, small
consists of artificial substrates (chromogens) which release opaque colonies with or
without halos
differently colored compounds upon degradation by specific Other including yeasts ............... Natural (cream) pigmentation
microbial enzymes, thus assuring the differentiation of certain *About 50% of P. vulgaris strains produce blue colonies on a brownish medium.
species or the detection of certain groups of organisms, with Key: KES = Klebsiella-Enterobacter-Serratia group;
PMP = Proteus-Morganella-Providencia group.
only a minimum of confirmatory tests.
Clinical studies have demonstrated that BBL CHROMagar
Procedure Orientation medium has advantages over other differential me-
A dilution of the specimen on the plate (by using calibrated dia used in the isolation, differentiation and enumeration of
loops or other techniques commonly used for plating urine UTI pathogens, such as CLED Agar or a combination of Blood
specimens) is required to obtain isolated colonies with typical and MacConkey Agars.2-4 BBL CHROMagar Orientation
colors and morphology. Incubate plates aerobically at medium allows the differentiation of E. coli and enterococci
35 2C for not less than 20-24 hours in an inverted position without confirmatory testing. Presumptive identification of
(agar-side up). Do not incubate in an atmosphere supplemented S. saprophyticus, Klebsiella-Enterobacter-Serratia (KES) and
with carbon dioxide. Avoid exposure to light during incuba- the Proteus-Morganella-Providencia (PMP) groups is possible
tion as light may destroy the chromogens. Once the colony by means of colony morphology, pigmentation and medium
color develops, exposure to light is permissible. discoloration.

Expected Results Limitations of the Procedure

After incubation, the plates should show isolated colonies in 1. As this medium is nonselective, other UTI pathogens will
the areas where the inoculum was diluted appropriately. Typical grow. Colonies that show their natural color and do not
react with the chromogenic substrates must be further
Mixed Bacterial Colonies
Escherichia coli (rose) Enterococcus faecalis differentiated with appropriate biochemical or serological
ATCC 25922 (blue-green)
ATCC 29212
tests to confirm identification.
2. E. coli colonies that are dark rose to pink but are pinpoint
to small in size, require additional confirmatory tests such
as spot indole.
3. Gram-negative organisms other than those belonging to
the KES group may produce large blue colonies and thus
require other biochemical tests for identification.
4. In very rare cases, Listeria monocytogenes or other Listeria
species may be present in urine (e.g., after abortion due to
these agents). Listeria will produce blue to blue-green colo-
nies that are PYR-negative, mimicking Streptococcus
agalactiae. Therefore, it may be useful to perform a Gram
stain of organisms producing small, blue to blue-green
colonies on this medium that are PYR negative. The
presence of gram-positive bacilli may be indicative of
Listeria species, but additional biochemical tests are
necessary to confirm their identification.
5. Very rarely, isolates of Aeromonas hydrophila may
Proteus produce rose colonies. They may be differentiated from
mirabilis (beige)

ATCC 43071 E. coli with the oxidase test (Aeromonas is positive; E. coli
is negative).

145
Section III
C CHROMagar Orientation, cont.

6. This medium will not support the growth of fastidious Availability

organisms, such as Neisseria spp., Haemophilus spp. or BBL CHROMagar Orientation
Mycoplasma spp. United States and Canada
7. Use of this medium for nonclinical or clinical specimens Cat. No. 254102 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
215081 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
other than urine has not been documented.
Europe
8. Minimize exposure to light before and during incubation, Cat. No. 254102 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
as light may destroy the chromogens. Keep plates within 254107 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
the original sleeve wrapping and cardboard box for the Japan
entire storage period. Cat. No. 251781 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Mexico
References Cat. No. 252631 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
1. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for *Store at 2-8C.
Microbiology, Washington, DC.
2. Merlino, Siarakas, Robertson, Funnell, Gottlieb and Bradbury. 1996. J. Clin. Microbiol. 34: 1788.
3. Hengstler, Hammann and Fahr. 1997. J. Clin. Microbiol. 35:2773.
4. Samra, Heifetz, Talmor, Bain and Bahar. 1998. J. Clin. Microbiol. 36: 990.

CHROMagar Salmonella
Intended Use chromogenic substrates in the medium facilitates detection of
BBL CHROMagar Salmonella* is a selective medium for Salmonella species from other normal flora.
the isolation and differentiation of Salmonella species from BBL CHROMagar Salmonella medium was developed by
other coliform and non-coliform bacteria directly from clini- A. Rambach and is sold by BD under a licensing agreement
cal and industrial samples. with CHROMagar, Paris, France.
*U.S. Patent Nos. 5,098,832 and 5,194,374

Principles of the Procedure

Summary and Explanation Specially selected peptones supply the nutrients. Gram-positive
Salmonella is ubiquitous in animal populations and is generally
organisms are generally inhibited as a result of the selective
isolated from the intestines of animals and humans. It is one of
medium base used. The addition of an antifungal agent
the most prevalent organisms associated with foodborne
(amphotericin B) prevents the growth of Candida species and
illnesses, which is often linked to animal origin.1 Illnesses caused
cefsulodin inhibits the growth of nonfermenters.Sodium
by Salmonella have been associated with poultry, beef, chocolate,
novobiocin is added to suppress the growth of Proteus
dairy and vegetable products.2
species which could potentially overgrow Salmonella colonies.
BBL CHROMagar Salmonella medium is intended for the A chromogenic mixture is included in the medium. Due to
isolation and differentiation of Salmonella species based on metabolic differences in the presence of selected chromogens,
the formation of an insoluble pigment. The addition of colonies of Salmonella species appear light mauve to mauve in
Salmonella typhimurium color, whereas undesired bacteria are either inhibited, blue-green
ATCC 14028
or colorless.

Procedure
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
specimens. Incubate plates aerobically at 35 2C in an
inverted position (agar-side up) and examine plates after
18-24 hours and 48 hours of incubation.

Expected Results
After proper incubation, read plates against a white background.
Salmonella enteritidis and other Salmonella species will ap-
pear as light mauve to mauve-colored colonies. Citrobacter
freundii and other coliforms will appear as light blue-green to
blue-green colored colonies. Some organisms that do not hy-
drolyze any of the chromogenic compounds may appear as
colorless colonies.

Limitations of the Procedure

Occasionally strains of Aeromonas hydrophilia, Pseudomonas
aeruginosa, P. putida, Acinobacter species, or Candida albicans
146
 CHROMagar Staph aureus

may not be completely inhibited and colonies may exhibit light chromogens. Keep plates within the original sleeve wrapping
mauve to mauve pigmentation. Salmonella choleraesuis and cardboard box for the entire storage period.
subspecies arizonae isolates positive for lactose and beta-
glucosidase may appear as blue-violet colonies. Slow-growing References
1. Bopp, Brenner, Wells and Strockbine. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.),
Salmonella strains may require a full 48 hours of Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, DC.
incubation. BBL CHROMagar Salmonella is not designed 2. DAoust, Mauer and Bailey. 2001. In Doyle, Beuchat and Montville (ed.), Food microbiology:
fundamentals and frontiers, 2nd ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, DC.
for the isolation of intestinal pathogens other than Salmonella.
Minimize exposure of BBL CHROMagar Salmonella to light Availability
before and during incubation, as light may destroy the BBL CHROMagar Salmonella
Cat. No. 214983 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.
C
CHROMagar Staph aureus
Intended Use With the inclusion of chromogenic substrates in the medium,

BBL CHROMagar Staph aureus* medium is designed colonies of S. aureus produce a mauve color, thus allowing
for the isolation and identification of Staphylococcus aureus identification on the primary isolation plate.
without the use of confirmatory testing from clinical sources. BBL CHROMagar Staph aureus medium is a selective and
BBL CHROMagar Staph aureus medium can be utilized differential medium developed by A. Rambach and is sold by
for the isolation and identification of S. aureus from food and BD under a licensing agreement with CHROMagar, Paris,
environmental sources. France.
*Patent Pending

Principles of the Procedure

Summary and Explanation Specially selected peptones supply the nutrients. The chromogen
S. aureus is a well documented pathogen. It is responsible
mix consists of artificial substrates (chromogens), which
for infections ranging from superficial to systemic.1,2 Due to
release an insoluble colored compound when hydrolyzed by
the prevalence of this organism and its clinical implications,
specific enzymes. Selective agents have also been added for the
detection is of utmost importance.
suppression of gram-negative organisms and partial suppres-
S. aureus is also considered a significant foodborne pathogen sion of yeast.
and its presence may indicate poor sanitation.3 It is also
recommended that this organism be used as an indicator of Procedure
recreational water quality.4 Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci-
Staphylococcus aureus mens. Incubate plates aerobically at 35 2C for a minimum
ATCC 25923 of 20-24 hours in an inverted position (agar-side up).
For food and water testing, consult appropriate references.

Expected Results
After incubation, read plates against a white background.
S. aureus produces mauve to orange-mauve colored colonies
on the medium. Most gram-positive organisms, if not inhibited,
will produce white, blue, green or blue-green (aqua) colonies.
Gram-negative organisms and yeasts are partially to completely
suppressed.

Limitations of the Procedure

Occasional strains of coagulase negative staphylococci such
as S. cohnii, S. intermedius and S. schleiferi, as well as coryne-
bacteria and yeasts, may produce mauve-colored colonies at 24
hours. Differentiation of S. aureus from non-S. aureus can be
accomplished by coagulase, other biochemicals or Gram stain.
Resistant gram-negative bacilli, which typically appear as small
blue colonies, may also breakthrough.
Incubation beyond 24 hours is not recommended due to an
increase in potential false positives. Incubation for less than
147
Section III
C CHROMagar Staph aureus, cont.

the recommended 20-24 hours will result in a lower percentage References

of correct results being obtained. 1. Jablonski and Bohach. 1997. Staphylococcus aureus. In Doyle, Beuchat and Montville (ed.), Food
microbiology fundamentals and frontiers. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, DC.
2. Kloos and Bannerman. 1999. Staphylococcus and Micrococcus. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover
Minimize exposure of BBL CHROMagar Staph aureus to and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology,
Washington, DC.
light before and during incubation, a light may destroy the 3. Bennett and Lancette. 1998. Staphylococcus aureus. FDA bacteriological analytical manual,
chromogens. Keep plates within the original sleeve wrapping 8th ed. AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
4. Toranzos, McFeters and Borrego. 2002. Detection of microorganisms in environmental freshwaters
and cardboard box for the entire storage period. and drinking waters. In Hurst, Crawford, Knudsen, McInerney and Stetzenbach (ed.), Manual of
environmental microbiology, 2nd ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, DC.

Availability
BBL CHROMagar Staph aureus
Cat. No. 214982 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.

Clostridium Difficile Selective Agar

Intended Use Incubate immediately under anaerobic conditions or place in
Clostridium difficile Selective Agar (CDSA) is recommended a holding jar flushed with oxygen-free gas(es) until sufficient
as a selective and differential medium for the primary isola- plates are accumulated (but no longer than 3 hours).2 Incuba-
tion of Clostridium difficile from fecal specimens. tion should be at 35 2C for at least 48 hours.

Summary and Explanation Expected Results

CDSA is a selective and differential medium developed by BD After 48-72 hours of incubation, Clostridium difficile will appear
Diagnostic Systems. It permits superior recovery of C. difficile, as flat to low umbonate, yellow colonies with a ground glass-
with equivalent to better inhibition of normal flora when like appearance and a slightly filamentous edge. C. difficile
compared to CCFA (cycloserine-cetoxitin-fructose agar). As colonies may be surrounded by a yellow zone of about 2-3
growth of C. difficile occurs, the pH of the medium is raised mm, depending on colony size and incubation time. Growth
causing the neutral red indicator to turn yellow. may be examined with a long-wave UV light for yellow
fluorescence within 1 hour of removal from the anaerobic
Principles of the Procedure atmosphere. After exposure to air, colonies may become
CDSA employs a peptone base with 0.6% mannitol. Ingredi- nonviable, which is usually accompanied by reversal of the
ents have been optimized to improve recovery and colony size color change to pink and a loss of fluorescence. Since some
of C. difficile. Amino acids present in the agar base are facultative anaerobic organisms potentially could produce
utilized by C. difficile causing an increase in pH. The colony reactions similar to C. difficile, it is recommended that an
and surrounding medium change color from rose to yellow as aerobically incubated plate be utilized in order to confirm that
the pH rises. Mannitol is utilized by fewer Clostridium species the isolate is an obligate anaerobe.
than fructose and improves the recovery of C. difficile. Cefoxitin
and cycloserine are incorporated to inhibit normal fecal flora. Limitations of the Procedure
These antibiotics have a broad range of antimicrobic activity This prepared plated medium is intended for primary isolation.
against aerobic, anaerobic and facultatively anaerobic gram- Some diagnostic tests may be performed with growth from the
positive and gram-negative bacteria while permitting recovery primary plating medium. For identification, the organism must
of C. difficile. C. difficile colonies produce yellow fluores- be in pure culture. Complete identification may be performed
cence when viewed with long-wave UV light. using Gram reaction, cellular morphology, sensitivity to oxygen,
biochemical reactions, susceptibility to antimicrobial agents
Procedure and gas liquid chromatographic analysis of metabolic
As soon as possible after receipt in the laboratory, inoculate the products. Some species of clostridia (e.g., butyricum,
specimen onto a reduced CDSA plate and streak for isolation. histolyticum, innocuum, sordellii and subterminale) may grow
As some strains of C. difficile may not grow well due to the on this medium and produce yellow colonies and fluorescence.
selective properties of the medium, it is advisable to include a Also, the isolation of Clostridium difficile should not be relied
nonselective medium, such as CDC Anaerobe Blood Agar. upon for etiologic diagnosis of pseudomembranous colitis.3
Other tests, such as ColorPAC C. difficile Rapid Toxin A
Media should be reduced prior to inoculation by placing under
Test, the rapid latex agglutination test for C.difficile antigens
anaerobic conditions for 6-24 hours prior to use.1 An efficient
(Culturette brand CDT Kit), or other toxin assays, along
and easy way to obtain suitable anaerobic conditions is through
with clinical observations should be used.4
the use of GasPak EZ anaerobic systems or other alternative
anaerobic systems.

148
 Clostrisel Agar

References Availability
1. Allen, Siders and Marler. 1985. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
BBL Clostridium difficile Selective Agar
2. Martin. 1971. Appl. Microbiol. 22:1168. Cat. No. 222228 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
3. George, Rolfe and Finegold. 1982. J. Clin. Microbiol. 15:1049.
4. Baron. 1989. Clin. Microbiol. Newsl. 11:118. *Store at 2-8C.

Clostrisel Agar
Intended Use Formula
Clostrisel Agar is a highly selective medium for the isolation BBL Clostrisel Agar
of pathogenic clostridia from specimens containing mixed flora; Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 17.0 g
C
e.g., from wounds, soil, feces and other materials.
Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal .................................. 3.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 6.0 g
Summary and Explanation Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.5 g
Clostrisel Agar was developed by Vera to provide improved Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 1.8 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.25 g
selectively for the recovery of clostridia from clinical and Sodium Formaldehyde Sulfoxylate .............................. 1.0 g
nonclinical materials.1 Neomycin Sulfate ....................................................... 0.15 g
Sodium Azide ............................................................. 0.20 g
Principles of the Procedure Agar ......................................................................... 14.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
The nutrient base for Clostrisel Agar is BBL Trypticase Soy
Broth. The reducing agents, sodium thioglycollate and sodium Directions for Preparation from
formaldehyde sulfoxylate, provide a low oxidation-reduction Dehydrated Product
potential enabling the growth of obligate anaerobes. 1. Suspend 45 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Selective inhibition of organisms, other than clostridia, is thoroughly.
achieved by the neomycin and sodium azide. These ingredients 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
are inhibitory to members of the genus Bacillus, to coliforms completely dissolve the powder.
and other enteric bacilli and to Proteus and Pseudomonas 3. Autoclave at 118C for 15 minutes.
species as well. Most cocci are inhibited, with the exception 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
of E. faecalis and E. faecium, which can be distinguished from stable, typical control cultures.
clostridia by Gram staining and by their colonial morphology.2
Procedure
User Quality Control For best recovery in Clostrisel Agar, place molten medium in
tubes, cool to 45-50C, inoculate with the specimen, tighten
Identity Specifications caps, rotate the tubes to obtain a homogeneous suspension
BBL Clostrisel Agar and allow to solidify prior to incubation. Plates of Clostrisel
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material.
Agar can also be used. The agar surface should be inoculated
Solution: 4.5% solution, soluble in purified water
by the streak technique.
upon boiling. Solution is pale to light, It is recommended that Clostrisel Agar be used in parallel with
yellow to tan, trace hazy to moderately
hazy. a nonselective medium such as CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood
Prepared Appearance: Pale to light, yellow to tan with a faint Agar or BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood. A
pink top, trace hazy to moderately kanamycin 30 mg disc should be placed on the area of heaviest
hazy. inoculation. The antibiotic inhibits growth of some other
Reaction of 4.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 organisms, and anaerobes are sometimes found in pure
culture within a zone surrounding the disc.
Cultural Response
Incubate tubes or plates for 24-48 hours at 35 2 C in an
BBL Clostrisel Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate tubes with fresh
anaerobic atmosphere.
broth cultures and incubate anaerobically at 35 2C for 42-48 hours.
Expected Results
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY
Due to the highly selective nature of Clostrisel Agar, most
Clostridium histolyticum 19401 Good
Clostridium perfringens 13124 Good
bacterial species are inhibited and primarily clostridia are
Clostridium sporogenes 11437 Good recovered; however, most strains of the butyl-butyric groups
Clostridium tetani 19406 Good fail to grow, but they are not of great medical importance.2
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 10145 Partial to Further testing of typical colonies should be conducted to
complete inhibition confirm the presence of clostridia and to speciate members of
the genus Clostridium.
149
Section III
C Clostrisel Agar, cont.

References Availability
1. Vera. 1962. Presented Pa. Soc. Med. Tech. York, Pa.
2. Vera. 1969. J. Am. Med. Technol. 31:62.
BBL Clostrisel Agar
Cat. No. 211114 Dehydrated 500 g

Coagulase Mannitol Agar

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Coagulase Mannitol Agar is used for the differentiation of Coagulase Mannitol Agar aids in the differentiation of staphy-
Staphylococcus aureus from other species based on coagulase lococci by indicating the presence of coagulase and the utiliza-
production and mannitol utilization. tion of mannitol. Coagulase production is dependant on the
presence of mannitol, a protein factor in the brain heart
Summary and Explanation infusion and blood serum (plasma).5 During utilization of the
Staphylococci, both coagulase-positive and coagulase-negative mannitol, the pH of the medium drops, causing the bromcresol
Staphylococcus species (CoNS), have major medical significance.1 purple indicator to change from purple to yellow and producing
Coagulase-producing staphylococci (S. aureus) may be differ- yellow zones around these colonies. An opaque area of coagu-
entiated and presumptively identified with this medium based lated plasma forms around the colonies of organisms that also
on production of coagulase and mannitol utilization. produce coagulase.
Chapman introduced the first selective medium for isolating In contrast, a coagulase-negative species that does not utilize
and differentiating staphylococcal species.2 Several years later, mannitol, such as Staphylococcus epidermidis, does not change
Zebovitz et al. and Marwin introduced tellurite-glycine media the color of the medium and it remains clear. Other coagulase-
designed to selectively isolate coagulase-positive staphylococcal negative species may utilize mannitol and produce a yellow
species.3,4 zone around the colonies, but an opaque zone will not be
Esber and Faulconer developed the formula used in this medium.5 produced.
In contrast to the earlier media, this formulation was developed
as a general-purpose medium for fastidious organisms that also
Formula
BBL Coagulase Mannitol Agar
permitted differentiation of pathogenic staphylococci from other
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
bacteria. Brain Heart Infusion ................................................... 5.0 g
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.5 g
Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal .................................. 3.5 g
User Quality Control Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 3.5 g
D-Mannitol ............................................................... 10.0 g
Identity Specifications Agar ......................................................................... 14.5 g
BBL Coagulase Mannitol Agar Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 0.02 g
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
material, may contain some minute to
very small tan flecks. Directions for Preparation from
Solution: 4.7% solution, soluble in purified Dehydrated Product
water upon boiling. Solution is medium
to dark, purple, clear to slightly hazy. 1. Suspend 47 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, purple, clear to slightly thoroughly.
hazy. 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Reaction of 4.7% completely dissolve the powder.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Cultural Response 4. Cool to 50C and add 7-15% pretested, undiluted rabbit
BBL Coagulase Mannitol Agar coagulase plasma with EDTA. Mix gently and pour into
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at plates, approximately 18 mL per plate.
35 2C for 18-24 hours. 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
INOCULUM MANNITOL COAGULASE stable, typical control cultures.
ORGANISM* ATCC CFU UTILIZATION REACTION
Enterobacter NOTE: The use of BBL Coagulase Plasma, Rabbit with
aerogenes 13048 103-104 Yellow colonies No zone EDTA, in place of citrated plasma, prevents false-positive
with or without
coagulase reactions by citrate-utilizing microorganisms.
weak yellow zone
Proteus vulgaris 8427 103-104 Negative No zone
Staphylococcus Procedure
aureus 13150 103-104 Yellow zone Opaque zone Inoculate and incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar
Staphylococcus side up) at 35 2C, and examine for growth after 18-24 hours.
epidermidis 12228 103-104 Negative No zone
*Recovery of all cultures should be good.
Avoid prolonged incubation because it may cause the opaque
150 zones surrounding coagulase-positive organisms to become clear.
 Columbia Agars

Expected Results uses mannitol and may be weakly coagulase-positive. Colonial

After 18-24 hours of incubation, coagulase-positive organisms morphology and a Gram stain should readily allow for differ-
will produce opaque zones; coagulase-negative organisms will entiation from S. aureus.
produce no opacity. Organisms that utilize mannitol produce
yellow zones. S. aureus may be presumptively identified as References
1. Kloos and Bannerman. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
those colonies with opaque, yellow zones around them. clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. Chapman. 1946. J. Bacteriol. 51:409.
3. Zebovitz, Evans and Nivens. 1955. J. Bacteriol. 70:686.
Limitations of the Procedure 4. Marwin. 1958. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 30:470.
5. Esber and Faulconer. 1959. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 32:192.
Some old or mutant strains of S. aureus may be weak coagulase
producers or exhibit negative coagulase reactions and should Availability
be subcultured and retested if in doubt. Escherichia coli also BBL Coagulase Mannitol Agar
Cat. No. 211116 Dehydrated 500 g
C

Columbia Agars
Columbia Agar Base Columbia Blood Agar Base
Columbia Blood Agar Base EH Columbia Agar with
5% Sheep Blood Columbia Agar with Fildes
Enrichment and Bacitracin
Intended Use supplementing nutrient agar with a digest of sheep blood sup-
Columbia Agar Base, without or with the addition of 5% (or 10%) plied both of these factors and the medium would support the
sheep blood, is a highly nutritious, general-purpose medium for growth of H. influenzae.2,3 The inclusion of bacitracin makes the
the isolation and cultivation of nonfastidious and fastidious enriched Columbia Agar medium selective for the isolation of
microorganisms from a variety of clinical and nonclinical Haemophilus species from clinical specimens, especially from
materials. the upper respiratory tract.4
Columbia Blood Agar Base EH (Enhanced Hemolysis) is used Principles of the Procedure
with blood in isolating and cultivating fastidious microorganisms.
Columbia Agar Base supplemented with sheep, rabbit or horse
Columbia Agar with Fildes Enrichment and Bacitracin is used blood derives its superior growth-supporting properties from
in qualitative procedures for isolation and cultivation of the combination of peptones prepared from pancreatic digest
Haemophilus species from clinical specimens. of casein, peptic digest of animal tissue and beef extract. Yeast
extract and corn starch are also included in the formulation
Summary and Explanation and serve as energy sources with yeast extract being a supplier
Ellner et al.,1 in 1966, reported the development of a blood of the B-complex vitamins.
agar formulation, which has been designated as Columbia Agar.
It should be noted that Columbia Sheep Blood Agar has a rela-
The base achieves the more rapid and luxuriant growth obtained
tively high carbohydrate content and, therefore, beta-hemolytic
from casein hydrolysate media with the sharply defined hemolytic
streptococci may produce a greenish hemolytic reaction that
reactions, more typical colonial morphology and improved
may be mistaken for alpha hemolysis.
pigment production achieved with media containing infusion
peptone. Fildes enrichment is prepared by the action of the enzyme pepsin
on defibrinated sheep blood. Bacitracin is a polypeptide anti-
The Columbia Agar Base is utilized as the base for media
biotic that is active mainly against gram-positive bacteria.
containing blood and for selective media formulations in which
various combinations of antimicrobial agents are used as Formulae
additives. Difco Columbia Blood Agar Base
Sheep blood allows detection of hemolytic reactions and supplies Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
the X factor (heme) necessary for the growth of many bacterial Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 5.0 g
species but lacks V factor (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide), Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
since it contains NADase which destroys the NAD. For this Beef Heart Digest ....................................................... 3.0 g
reason, Haemophilus influenzae, which requires both the X and Corn Starch ................................................................ 1.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
V factors, will not grow on this medium. Fildes found that Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g

151
Section III
C Columbia Agars, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications
Difco Columbia Blood Agar Base Difco Columbia Blood Agar Base EH
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 4.4% solution, soluble in purified water Solution: 3.9% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light to medium upon boiling. Solution is light to medium
amber, opalescent with fine precipitate. amber, clear to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Plain Light to medium amber, slightly Prepared Appearance: Plain Light to medium amber, clear
opalescent to opalescent with fine to slightly opalescent.
precipitate. With sheep blood Medium to bright
With sheep blood Cherry red, cherry red, opaque, no hemolysis.
opaque, no hemolysis. Reaction of 3.9%
Reaction of 4.4% Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Columbia Blood Agar Base or Columbia Blood Agar Base EH
Prepare the medium per label directions without (plain) and with 5% sheep blood (SB) for Columbia Blood Agar Base and with 5% sheep blood for
Columbia Blood Agar Base EH. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C with 5-10% CO2 for 18-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY PLAIN RECOVERY WITH SB HEMOLYSIS
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good Good Beta
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 30-300 Good Good Gamma (none)
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good Good Beta
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 30-300 Good Good Alpha
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 30-300 Good Good Beta

Columbia Blood Agar Base Columbia Blood Agar Base EH

Escherichia coli Staphylococcus aureus Staphylococcus aureus

ATCC 25922 ATCC 25923 ATCC 25923

Streptococcus Streptococcus
pneumoniae pyogenes
ATCC 6305 ATCC 19615

Continued

152
 Columbia Agars, cont.

Staphylococcus aureus Escherichia coli

Identity Specifications ATCC 25923 ATCC 25922
BBL Columbia Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material.
Solution: 4.25% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium, yellow
to tan, hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Plain Medium, yellow to tan, hazy.
With sheep blood Cherry red, opaque,
no hemolysis.
Reaction of 4.25%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
C
Cultural Response
BBL Columbia Agar Base
Prepare the medium per label directions without (plain) and with 5%
sheep blood (SB). Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C under appropriate
atmospheric conditions for 48 hours (incubate C. jejuni at 42 2C for
48-72 hours).
INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU PLAIN WITH SB
Campylobacter jejuni 33291 103 N/A Good
Campylobacter jejuni 33292 103 N/A Good
Candida albicans 10231 103-104 N/A Good Enterococcus
faecalis
Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 N/A Good ATCC 33186
Listeria monocytogenes 19115 103-104 N/A Good
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 10145 103-104 Good N/A
Shigella flexneri 12022 103-104 Good N/A
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-104 Good Good, beta hemolysis
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 103-104 Good Good, alpha hemolysis
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 103-104 N/A Good, beta hemolysis

BBL Columbia Agar Base 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.

Approximate Formula* Per Liter 4. For preparation of blood agar, cool the base to 45-50C
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 12.0 g
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 5.0 g and add 5% sterile, defibrinated blood. Mix well.
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g stable, typical control cultures.
Corn Starch ................................................................ 1.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g Procedure
Difco Columbia Blood Agar Base EH
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci-
Approximate Formula* Per Liter mens. Incubate plates at 35 2C for 18-72 hours.
Pantone ................................................................... 12.0 g
Bitone H Plus .............................................................. 6.0 g Since many pathogens require carbon dioxide on primary iso-
Enzymatic Digest of Animal Tissue ............................. 3.0 g lation, plates may be incubated in an atmosphere containing
Starch ......................................................................... 1.0 g approximately 3-10% CO2.
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. Expected Results
After incubation most plates will show an area of confluent
Directions for Preparation from growth. Because the streaking procedure is, in effect, a dilution
Dehydrated Product technique, diminishing numbers of microorganisms are
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water: deposited on the streaked areas. Consequently, one or more of
Difco Columbia Blood Agar Base 44 g; these areas should exhibit isolated colonies of the organisms
BBL Columbia Agar Base 42.5 g; contained in the specimen. Further, growth of each organism
Difco Columbia Blood Agar Base EH 39 g. may be semiquantitatively scored on the basis of growth in
Mix thoroughly. each of the streaked areas.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder.

153
Section III
C Columbia Agars, cont.

References BBL Columbia Agar with 5% Sheep Blood

1. Ellner, Stoessel, Drakeford and Vasi. 1966. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 45:502. BS10 CMPH
2. Fildes. 1920. Br. J. Exp. Pathol. 1:129. United States and Canada
3. Fildes. 1921. Br. J. Exp. Pathol. 2:16.
4. Chapin and Doern. 1983. J. Clin. Microbiol. 17:163. Cat. No. 221165 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
221263 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Availability Europe
Cat. No. 254005 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Difco Columbia Blood Agar Base
254071 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
EP ISO
Cat. No. 279240 Dehydrated 500 g Japan
279220 Dehydrated 2 kg Cat. No. 251165 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
279230 Dehydrated 10 kg Difco Columbia Blood Agar Base EH

BBL Columbia Agar Base Cat. No. 279030 Dehydrated 500 g

EP ISO
279010 Dehydrated 2 kg
279020 Dehydrated 10 kg
Cat. No. 211124 Dehydrated 500 g
211125 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg) BBL Fildes Enrichment
211126 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg) Cat. No. 211866 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
295661 Prepared Plates with Fildes Enrichment
*Store at 2-8C.
and Bacitracin Pkg. of 20*

Columbia Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar

Intended Use Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci-
Columbia Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar is recommended mens. Inoculate an enrichment broth, such as BBL Enriched
for the general cultivation of anaerobes. Thioglycollate Medium, at the same time as the primary plates
to detect small numbers of anaerobes.
Summary and Explanation Incubate the plates and tubes immediately after inoculation,
Ellner1, using Columbia Agar Base, formulated reducible with plates in an inverted position (agar side up), under anaerobic
anaerobic media designed to improve recovery of anaerobes conditions at 35C, or place the media in a holding jar flushed
with minimal difficulty. The reducing agents used were with oxygen-free gas(es) until a sufficient number of plates and
cysteine, palladium chloride and dithiothreitol. The presence tubes is accumulated (no longer than 3 hours).6 An efficient
of organic peroxides (or peroxide-like compounds) and and easy way to obtain suitable anaerobic conditions is through
the redox potential (Eh) of media are important factors in the the use of a BBL GasPak EZ anaerobic system or an alter-
determination of whether anaerobic organisms will grow in, native anaerobic system. Incubate for at least 48 hours and, if
or on, a particular medium. The addition of reducing agents no growth occurs, continue incubation for up to 7 days.
to the medium reduces the inhibitory effects of the peroxides.
Expected Results
Principles of the Procedure After sufficient incubation, the plates should show isolated
Columbia Anaerobe Sheep Blood Agar is a highly nutritious colonies in streaked areas and confluent growth in areas of
medium due to its content of peptones, yeast extract, beef heavy inoculation.
extract, hemin, vitamin K1 and sheep blood. The peptones
provide nitrogenous growth factors, carbon, sulfur and trace Growth in liquid media is indicated by the presence of turbidity
ingredients. Yeast extract is an important source of B vitamins. compared with uninoculated control.
Sodium chloride maintains osmotic equilibrium. Sheep blood Examine colonies using a dissecting microscope and with a
constituents, hemin and vitamin K1 provide growth factors re- long-wave UV lamp to detect fluorescence. Colonies of the
quired by certain obligate anaerobes.2-5 The addition of pigmenting Porphyromonas-Prevotella species should fluoresce
L-cysteine HCl and dithiothreitol facilitates the lowering of orange to brick red under long-wave UV light. Fluorescence is
the redox potential of medium. visible before pigmentation.

Procedure In order to determine the relationship to oxygen of each colony

This medium should be reduced at room temperature immediately type present on the medium, follow established procedures.7 Those
prior to inoculation by placing under anaerobic conditions for colony types that prove to contain obligate anaerobes can be
18-24 hours.4 further studied using appropriate identification methods.

154
 Columbia Broth

References Availability
1. Ellner, Granato and May. 1973. Appl. Microbiol. 26:904.
2. Jousimies-Somer, Summanen and Finegold. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken
BBL Columbia Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar
(ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C. Cat. No. 221928 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
3. Gibbons and MacDonald. 1960. J. Bacteriol. 80:164.
4. Dowell. 1975. In Balows (ed.), Clinical microbiology. How to start and when to stop. Charles C.
221929 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Thomas, Springfield, Ill. *Store at 2-8C.
5. Isenberg, Schoenknecht and von Graeventiz. 1979. Cumitech 9, Collection and processing of bacte-
riological specimens. Coord. ed., Rubin. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
6. Martin. 1971. Appl. Microbiol. 22:1168.
7. Allen, Siders and Marler. 1985. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Columbia Broth
C
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Columbia Broth is used for cultivating fastidious microor- Peptones and yeast extract provide nitrogen, carbon, vitamins
ganisms. and trace nutrients essential for growth. Dextrose is added
to the formula as a carbon energy source. The medium is
Summary and Explanation buffered with Tris. Corn starch is omitted to reduce opales-
Columbia Broth is prepared according to the formulation cence.1 Cysteine is the reducing agent. Magnesium and iron
described by Morello and Ellner.1 In their study Columbia are added to facilitate organism growth.
Broth, a medium developed for blood cultures, was superior
to a commonly used general purpose broth for faster growth
Formula
of Staphylococcus aureus, Escherichia coli and streptococci Difco Columbia Broth
(viridans and enterococcus groups). Columbia Broth, in the Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
presence of CO2 and supplemented with SPS, is an excellent Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
blood culture medium.2 In the study by Morello and Ellner,1 Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 5.0 g
the addition of sodium polyanetholsulfonate (SPS) in Columbia Tryptic Digest of Beef Heart ........................................ 3.0 g
Broth was emphasized. SPS is an anticoagulant that inhibits L-Cysteine HCl .......................................................... 0.1 g
serum bactericidal activity against many bacteria, inhibits Dextrose .................................................................... 2.5 g
Sodium Chloride ....................................................... 5.0 g
phagocytosis, inactivates complement, and neutralizes Magnesium Sulfate (anhydrous) ................................ 0.1 g
lysozymes and the aminoglycoside class of antibiotics.2 Ferrous Sulfate .......................................................... 0.02 g
Sodium Carbonate ..................................................... 0.6 g
Tris (Hydroxymethyl) Aminomethane ......................... 0.83 g
User Quality Control Tris (Hydroxymethyl) Aminomethane HCl ................... 2.86 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Identity Specifications
Difco Columbia Broth

Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Dehydrated Product
Solution: 3.5% solution, soluble in purified
1. Suspend 35 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
water upon warming. Solution is light thoroughly.
amber, clear to very slightly opales- 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
cent, may have a slight amount of fine
precipitate.
completely dissolve the powder.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to very slightly opal-
3. OPTIONAL: Sodium polyanetholesulfonate (SPS) may
escent, may have a slight amount of be added at this time with agitation to ensure a uniform
fine precipitate. solution. The culture medium should contain 0.025 to
Reaction of 3.5%
0.05% SPS.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.5 0.2
4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Cultural Response 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Difco Columbia Broth stable, typical control cultures.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C under appropriate conditions for 18-48 hours. Incubate Procedure
Bacteroides fragilis anaerobically. Process clinical specimens from different body sites as described
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY in Clinical Microbiology Procedures Handbook,2 Manual of
Bacteroides fragilis 25285 102-103 Good Clinical Microbiology3 or according to laboratory procedures.
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 102-103 Good
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 102-103 Good Expected Results
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good

155
Section III
C Columbia Broth, cont.

Limitations of the Procedure References

1. Morello and Ellner. 1969. Appl. Microbiol. 17:68.
1. Neisseria spp. may be inhibited by SPS in Columbia Broth. 2. Isenberg (ed). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol.1. American Society for Mi-
The addition of 1.2% gelatin may counteract the inhibi- crobiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
tory effect, but SPS may also inhibit other organisms.2 American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

2. Opalescence in Columbia Broth cannot always be relied

upon as evidence of bacterial growth in the bottle. Availability
3. It is possible for significant numbers of viable bacteria to Difco Columbia Broth
Cat. No. 294420 Dehydrated 500 g
be present in an inoculated and incubated blood culture
bottle without the usual signs of bacterial growth.

Columbia CNA Agar Columbia CNA Agar, Modified

Columbia PNA Agar
Intended Use Sheep blood supports the growth of fastidious organisms and
Columbia CNA Agar, Columbia CNA Agar, Modified, and allows detection of hemolytic reactions. It should be noted that
Columbia PNA Agar, all supplemented with 5% sheep blood, this medium has a relatively high carbohydrate content and,
are selective and differential media used for the isolation and therefore, beta-hemolytic streptococci may produce a greenish
differentiation of gram-positive microorganisms from clinical hemolytic reaction that may be mistaken for alpha hemolysis.
and nonclinical materials. The addition of the antimicrobial agents, colistin (or polymyxin
B) and nalidixic acid, renders the medium selective for gram-
Summary and Explanation positive microorganisms.3 Colistin and polymyxin B disrupt
Ellner et. al., in 1966, reported the development of a blood the cell membrane of gram-negative organisms, whereas the
agar formulation, which has been designated as Columbia nalidixic acid blocks DNA replication in susceptible gram-nega-
Agar.1 The Columbia Agar base, which achieves rapid and tive bacteria.4
luxuriant growth and sharply defined hemolytic reactions,
is utilized as the base for media containing blood and for Formula
selective formulations in which various combinations of BBL Columbia CNA Agar
antimicrobial agents are used as additives. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 12.0 g
Ellner and his colleagues found that a medium consisting of Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 5.0 g
10 mg of colistin and 15 mg of nalidixic acid per liter in a Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Columbia Agar Base enriched with 5% sheep blood would Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Corn Starch ................................................................ 1.0 g
support the growth of staphylococci, hemolytic streptococci Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
and enterococci while inhibiting the growth of Proteus, Kleb- Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g
siella and Pseudomonas species. In BBL Columbia CNA Agar Colistin ..................................................................... 10.0 mg
Nalidixic Acid ........................................................... 10.0 mg
with 5% Sheep Blood, the concentration of nalidixic acid has *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
been reduced to 10 mg/L to increase the recovery of gram-
positive cocci from clinical specimens. The concentration of Directions for Preparation from
nalidixic acid has been further reduced in Columbia CNA Agar, Dehydrated Product
Modified to 5 mg/L. 1. Suspend 42.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
In the Columbia PNA version of Ellners medium, polymyxin Mix thoroughly.
B has been substituted for colistin (10 mg). Although the anti- 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
microbial properties of the two agents are nearly the same, completely dissolve the powder.
some species of gram-negative bacteria are more sensitive to 3. Autoclave at 121C for 12 minutes. Cool to 45-50C.
polymyxin B than colistin.2 4. Add 5% sterile, defibrinated sheep blood.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Principles of the Procedure stable, typical control cultures.
These media derive their superior growth-supporting properties
from the combination of peptones prepared from pancreatic Procedure
digest of casein, peptic digest of animal tissue and beef extract. Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci-
Yeast extract and corn starch are also included in the formula- mens. Incubate plates at 35 2C for 24-48 hours in an aerobic
tion and serve as energy sources, with yeast extract being a atmosphere supplemented with carbon dioxide.
supplier of the B-complex vitamins.

156
 Columbia CNA Agar, cont.

Enterococcus faecalis
User Quality Control ATCC 29212

Identity Specifications
BBL Columbia CNA Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material.
Solution: 4.25% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium, tan to
yellow, hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Tan to yellow, hazy.
Reaction of 4.25%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
C
Cultural Response
BBL Columbia CNA Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C with 3-5% CO2 for 18-24 hours.
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY HEMOLYSIS
Proteus mirabilis 12453 104-105 Partial to
complete inhibition
Staphylococcus
aureus 25923 103-104 Good Beta
Streptococcus
pneumoniae 6305 103-104 Good Alpha
Streptococcus
pyogenes 19615 103-104 Good Beta, slight greening
may be present

Expected Results BBL Columbia CNA Agar with 5% Sheep Blood

BS10 CMPH MCM7
Typical colonial morphology on Colombia CNA Agar with
United States and Canada
5% Sheep Blood is as follows: Cat. No. 221352 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Streptococci (non-group) D .. Small, white to grayish. 221353 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Beta or alpha hemolysis. Europe
Enterococci (group D) ........... Small, but larger than group A Cat. No. 254007 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
streptococci, blue-gray. Beta 254072 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
or alpha hemolysis. Japan
Staphylococci ....................... Large, white to gray or cream Cat. No. 251352 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
to yellow, with or without
hemolysis. BBL Columbia CNA Agar with 5% Sheep Blood//

Micrococci ............................ Large, white to gray or yellow MacConkey II Agar

to orange, with or without BS10 CMPH MCM7
hemolysis. United States and Canada
Corynebacteria ..................... Small to large, white to gray Cat. No. 221600 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
or yellow, with or without 221601 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
hemolysis.
Candida ............................... Small, white. Japan
Listeria monocytogenes ........ Small to large, blue-gray, with Cat. No. 251600 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
beta hemolysis. BBL Columbia CNA Agar, Modified, with Sheep Blood//
Gram-negative bacteria ........ No growth to trace growth. Enterococcosel Agar
Cat. No. 297413 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
References
1. Ellner, Stoessel, Drakeford and Vasi. 1966. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 45:502.
BBL Columbia CNA Agar with 5% Sheep Blood//
2. Garrod and OGrady. 1971. In Antibiotics and chemotherapy, 3rd ed. Williams & Wilkins, Balti- Levine EMB Agar
more, Md.
3. Chapin and Murray. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical Cat. No. 295618 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
4. Estevez. 1984. Lab. Med. 15:258. BBL Columbia CNA Agar with 5% Sheep Blood//
EMB Agar, Modified (Holt-Harris and Teague)
Availability Cat. No. 221941 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
BBL Columbia CNA Agar BBL Columbia PNA Agar with 5% Sheep Blood//
Cat. No. 212104 Dehydrated 500 g MacConkey II Agar
294221 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg) Cat. No. 297272 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
212249 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg) *Store at 2-8C.

157
Section III
C Cooke Rose Bengal Agar

Cooke Rose Bengal Agar

Antimicrobic Vial A
Intended Use by Taplin, Azias, Rebell and Blank5 for the isolation of
Cooke Rose Bengal Agar is used with or without Antimicrobic dermatophytes. Antimicrobic Vial A is applicable for use in
Vial A in isolating fungi from environmental and food specimens. various media requiring this antibiotic. Cooke1 preferred
chlortetracycline in Cooke Rose Bengal Agar due to the
Antimicrobic Vial A is used in preparing microbiological culture increased stability of the antibiotic.
media.
Principles of the Procedure
Summary and Explanation Peptone provides nitrogen, carbon and vitamins in Cooke Rose
Cooke Rose Bengal Agar is a selective medium for the isolation Bengal Agar. Dextrose is an energy source. Rose bengal and
of fungi prepared according to the formula of Cooke.1,2 chlortetracycline selectively inhibit bacterial growth and
Selectivity of the medium is increased by the addition of anti- restrict the size and height of colonies of more rapidly growing
biotics. molds. Monopotassium phosphate provides buffering capability.
Magnesium sulfate is a source of divalent cations. Agar is the
A variety of materials and methods have been used to inhibit solidifying agent.
bacteria in an attempt to isolate fungi from mixed flora. Fungi
are extremely successful organisms, as evidenced by their ubiq- Formulae
uity in nature.3 Waksman4 described an acid medium consisting Difco Cooke Rose Bengal Agar
of peptone, dextrose, inorganic salts and agar for the isolation of Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Soy Peptone ............................................................... 5.0 g
fungi from soil. Cooke1 used the Waksman4 medium without
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
adjustment to investigate the isolation of fungi from sewage. It Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
was discovered that soy peptone was particularly suitable for Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.5 g
use in this medium and that the combination of chlortetracycline, Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g
or oxytetracycline, with rose bengal increased the selectivity of Rose Bengal ............................................................. 35.0 mg
the medium. Difco Antimicrobic Vial A
Contains 25 mg sterile desiccated chlortetracycline per 10 mL
Antimicrobic Vial A contains sterile, desiccated chlortetracy- vial.
cline. It was originally used in preparing DTM Agar described *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Uninoculated Aspergillus niger

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 16404

Identity Specifications
Difco Cooke Rose Bengal Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Pinkish-tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.6% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is pinkish red,
slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Deep pink, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 3.6%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.0 0.2
Difco Antimicrobic Vial A

Desiccated Appearance: Yellow cake or powder.

Rehydrated Appearance: Yellow, clear solution.
Solution: Soluble in 10 mL purified water.

Cultural Response
Difco Cooke Rose Bengal Agar and Antimicrobic
Vial A
Prepare the medium with 35 g per mL chlortetracycline (Antimicrobic
Vial A added aseptically) per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
25-30C for up to 72 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Candida albicans
Aspergillus niger 16404 Undiluted Good ATCC 26790
Candida albicans 26790 30-300 Good
Escherichia coli 25922 103 Inhibition
Saccharomyces cerevisae 9763 30-300 Good

158
 Cooked Meat Medium

Directions for Preparation from Limitations of the Procedure

Dehydrated Product 1. Although this medium is selective primarily for fungi,
Difco Cooke Rose Bengal Agar
microscopic examination is recommended for presumptive
1. Suspend 36 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix identification. Biochemical testing using pure cultures is
thoroughly. required for complete identification.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 2. Due to the selective properties of this medium and the type
completely dissolve the powder. of specimen being cultured, some strains of fungi may
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 45C. be encountered that fail to grow or grow poorly on the
4. Aseptically add 14 mL of rehydrated Antimicrobic Vial A complete medium; similarly, some strains of bacteria may
(final concentration of 35 g chlortetracycline per mL) or be encountered that are not inhibited or only partially
appropriate amount of another antibiotic. inhibited.
3. Care should be taken not to expose this medium to light,
C
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures. since photo-degradation of rose bengal yields compounds
that are toxic to fungi.6,7
Difco Antimicrobic Vial A
1. Aseptically add 10 mL sterile purified water per vial of References
supplement. 1. Cooke. 1954. Antibiot. Chemother. 4:657.
2. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
2. Agitate gently to dissolve completely. wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. Dixon, Rhodes and Fromtling. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
3. The resulting concentration of the rehydrated solution is of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2.5 mg chlortetracycline per mL. 4. Waksman. 1922. J. Bacteriol. 7:339.
5. Taplin, Azias, Rebell and Blank. 1969. Arch. Dermatol. 99:203.
6. Banks, Board and Paton. 1985. Lett. Appl. Microbiol. 1:7.
7. Beuchat and Cousin. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiologi-
Procedure cal examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Refer to appropriate references for specific procedures on the
isolation and cultivation of fungi. Availability
Difco Cooke Rose Bengal Agar
Expected Results SMWW
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results. Cat. No. 270310 Dehydrated 500 g
Difco Antimicrobic Vial A

SMWW
Cat. No. 233331 Vial 6 x 10 mL*
*Store at 2-8C.

Cooked Meat Medium Cooked Meat Medium

with Glucose, Hemin and Vitamin K1
Intended Use in small numbers in a population and as a subculture medium
Cooked Meat Medium and the enriched medium are used for for determination of proteolysis (meat digestion) and spore
the cultivation of anaerobes, especially pathogenic clostridia. formation by Clostridium species.
Cooked Meat Medium with Glucose, Hemin and Vitamin K1,
Summary and Explanation is also recommended as a subculture medium for anaerobic
In 1916, Robertson developed a cooked meat medium for use isolates to be examined by gas liquid chromatography.3
in the cultivation of certain anaerobes isolated from wounds.1
The present formulation for Cooked Meat Medium is a modi- Principles of the Procedure
fication of Robertsons original formula. Cooked Meat Medium provides a favorable environment for
Cooked Meat Medium is still widely used for the cultivation the growth of anaerobes, since the muscle protein in the heart
and maintenance of clostridia and for determining proteolytic tissue granules is a source of amino acids and other nutrients.
activity of anaerobes. For example, the medium is recom- The muscle tissue also provides reducing substances, particu-
mended for use in the enumeration and identification of larly glutathione, which permits the growth of strict anaerobes.4
Clostridium perfringens from food.2 It supports the growth of The sulfhydryl groups, which exert the reducing effect, are more
most sporeforming and nonsporeforming obligate anaerobes available in denatured protein; therefore, the meat particles
and may be used for a variety of purposes including the main- are cooked for use in the medium.
tenance of stock cultures. The medium is also useful as an
enrichment broth for cultivating anaerobes that may be present

159
Section III
C Cooked Meat Medium, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Cooked Meat Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Brown, homogeneous pellets.
Solution: 12.5% solution, partially insoluble in
purified water. Solution is medium
amber, clear to very slightly opalescent
supernatant fluid over insoluble pellets.
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, clear to very slightly
opalescent supernatant fluid over
insoluble pellets.
Reaction of 12.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Cooked Meat Medium
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 40-48 hours.
Uninoculated Clostridium sporogenes
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY Tube ATCC11437
Bacteroides vulgatus 8482 102-103 Good
Clostridium novyi 7659 102-103 Good
Clostridium perfringens 12924 102-103 Good
Clostridium sporogenes 11437 102-103 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good

Cooked Meat Medium with Glucose, Hemin and Vitamin K1 is Procedure

supplemented with added glucose, yeast extract, hemin and Liquid media for anaerobic incubation should be reduced prior
vitamin K1 to enhance the growth of anaerobic microorganisms. to inoculation by placing the tubes, with caps loosened, under
Growth is indicated by turbidity and, with some organisms, anaerobic conditions for 18-24 hours. An efficient and easy
by the presence of gas bubbles in the medium. Disintegration way to obtain suitable anaerobic conditions is through the use of
and blackening of the meat particles indicates proteolysis. the GasPak EZ anaerobic system or an alternative anaerobic
Gram stains or spore stains should be made to determine the system. Alternatively, liquid media may be reduced immediately
shape and location of spores. prior to use by boiling with caps loosened and cooling with
tightened caps to room temperature before inoculation.
Formula Organisms to be cultivated must first be isolated in pure
Difco Cooked Meat Medium culture in an appropriate medium.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Using a sterile inoculating loop or needle, transfer growth from
Beef Heart (from 454 g) ........................................... 98.0 g
Proteose Peptone ..................................................... 20.0 g a fresh subculture medium, inoculating heavily in the area of
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.0 g meat particles. Incubate the tubes at 35 2C under anaerobic
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g conditions for up to 7 days. It is recommended that an indicator
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
of anaerobiosis be used.
Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product Expected Results
1. Suspend 12.5 g of the particles in 100 mL purified water In the cultivation of clostridia, saccharolytic organisms usually
(1.25 g/10 mL). produce acid and gas. Growth of proteolytic organisms is
2. Let stand until all particles are thoroughly wetted and form generally characterized by blackening and dissolution of the
an even suspension. meat particles.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Reduce pressure slowly
References
and cool without agitation. 1. Robertson. 1916. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 20:327.
4. If not used within 24 hours, reheat (100C) prior to use to 2. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC,
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
drive off absorbed oxygen. 3. Holdeman, Cato and Moore. 1977. Anaerobe laboratory manual, 4th ed. Virginia Polytechnical
Institute and State University, Blacksburg, Va.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 4. Willis. 1977. Anaerobic bacteriology: clinical and laboratory practice, 3rd ed. Butterworths,
London, England.
stable, typical control cultures.

160
 Corn Meal Agar

Availability BBL Cooked Meat Medium with Glucose, Hemin

and Vitamin K1
Difco Cooked Meat Medium

BS10 CMPH MCM7

AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF
Cat. No. 297809 Prepared Tubes, 10 mL (C Tubes) Ctn. of 100
Cat. No. 226730 Dehydrated 500 g
295982 Prepared Tubes, 9 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10
BBL Cooked Meat Medium 299455 Prepared Tubes, 9 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100
AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF
Cat. No. 221507 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10
221508 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100

Corn Meal Agar Corn Meal Agar with C

Polysorbate 80 Corn Meal Agar with 1% Dextrose
Intended Use
Corn Meal Agar is a general-purpose medium for the cultiva-
tion of fungi. With the addition of polysorbate 80, it is utilized
primarily for the testing of Candida species for their ability to
produce chlamydospores. BBL prepared plates of Corn Meal
Agar with Polysorbate 80 are deep-filled to reduce the effects
of drying during prolonged incubation. Corn Meal Agar with
1% Dextrose enhances pigment production.

Summary and Explanation

Corn Meal Agar has been used for many years to cultivate fungi.
Pollack and Benham reported on its usefulness for studying the
morphology of Candida.1 In 1960, Walker and Huppert
modified the basic formulation of Corn Meal Agar by adding
polysorbate 80, which stimulated rapid and abundant chlamy-
dospore formation.2 This modified formulation is recommended
Microscopic Photo of Chlamydospores
for the production and viualization of chlamydospores.3

User Quality Control Corn Meal Agar with Polysorbate 80

Candida albicans
Identity Specifications ATCC 10231
BBL Corn Meal Agar

Dehydrated Appearance: Coarse, homogeneous, free of extraneous

material.
Solution: 1.7% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is pale to light,
yellow to tan, slightly hazy to hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Pale to light, yellow to tan, slightly hazy
to hazy.
Reaction of 1.7%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.0 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL Corn Meal Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Test for chlamydospore production.
Using fresh cultures, streak two parallel lines approximately 1.5 cm long each
and 1.0 cm apart. Make an S-shape by lightly streaking back and forth
across the two parallel streak lines. Place a coverslip over the streak marks.
Incubate at 25 2C for 4 days and examine microscopically.
CHLAMYDOSPORE
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY PRODUCTION
Aspergillus niger 16404 Good N/A
Candida albicans 10231 Good Present
Candida albicans 60193 Good Present
Candida kefyr 8553 Good None

161
Section III
C Corn Meal Agar, cont.

The addition of dextrose enhances fungal growth and pigment Test for the production of chlamydospores on medium
production.4 Corn Meal Agar with Dextrose is commonly used containing polysorbate 80 using the Dalmau plate method.6
in the differentiation of Trichophyton species based on chromo- With a sterile inoculating needle, lightly touch the yeast colony,
genesis.5 and then make two separate streaks approximately 1.5 cm long
each and 1.0 cm apart. Do not dig into the agar. Flame the
Principles of the Procedure needle, allow to cool. Then lightly make an S-shaped streak
Corn Meal Agar is a relatively simple medium, consisting back and forth across the two original streak lines. Flame a
of an infusion of corn meal and agar. The infusion product coverslip and, after it cools, place it over the central area of
contains sufficient nutrients to support the growth of fungal the stab marks to provide slightly reduced oxygen tension.3
species. The polysorbate 80 is a mixture of oleic esters which, Incubate the plates at room temperature (25 2C) for 24-48
when added to the basal medium, stimulates the production hours. If the test is negative, reincubate plates an additional
of chlamydospores.3 Dextrose is added to Corn Meal Agar to 48-72 hours and examine again.7
provide an energy source to enhance fungal growth and chromo-
genesis. Expected Results
Observe cultures for growth and morphology. After 24-48
Formula hours on medium containing polysorbate 80, most strains of
BBL Corn Meal Agar C. albicans and C. stellatoidea will have formed typical chlamy-
Approximate Formula* Per Liter dospores.3 Invert the plate and examine microscopically (low
Corn Meal Infusion from (Solids) ................................ 2.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g and high power objectives) for chlamydospore formation along
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. the edge of the coverslip.

Directions for Preparation from On Corn Meal Agar with 1% Dextrose, macroscopically
observe chromogenesis.
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 17 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Limitation of the Procedure
Add 1% polysorbate 80, or 1% dextrose, if desired. Mix
Corn Meal Agar with Dextrose is not recommended for detect-
thoroughly.
ing the production of chlamydospores by Candida species.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder. References
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. 1. Pollack and Benham. 1960. J. Lab. Clin. Med. 50:313.
2. Walker and Huppert. 1960. Tech. Bull. Reg. Med. Technol. 30:10.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 3. McGinnis. 1980. Laboratory handbook of medical mycology. Academic Press, New York, N.Y.
4. Conant, Smith, Baker and Callaway. 1971. Manual of clinical mycology, 3rd ed. W.B. Saunders
stable, typical control cultures. Co., Philadelphia, Pa.
5. Haley and Callaway. 1978. Laboratory methods in medical mycology. HEW Publication No.
(CDC) 78-8361. Center for Disease Control, Atlanta, Ga.
Procedure 6. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
To prepare plated media from agar deeps, place the agar deeps 7. Campbell and Stewart. 1980. The medical mycology handbook. John Wiley & Sons, New York,
N.Y.
in a boiling water bath until the medium becomes liquefied
(clear). Pour the molten medium into a sterile Petri dish and
Availability
allow to solidify before use. Organisms to be cultivated for
BBL Corn Meal Agar
identification must first be isolated in pure culture on an Cat. No. 211132 Dehydrated 500 g
appropriate medium. 297379 Prepared Pour Tubes, 20 mL Pkg. of 10
Using an inoculating needle, streak the medium with growth BBL Corn Meal Agar with Polysorbate 80
from a pure culture and incubate at 25 2C. Examine at BS10
Cat. No. 221854 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 10*
intervals for up to 28 days for growth and pigmentation.
297235 Prepared Pour Tubes, 20 mL Pkg. of 10
Corn Meal Agar with 1% Dextrose should be incubated for up BBL Corn Meal Agar with 1% Dextrose
to 4 weeks to allow sufficient time for pigmentation to develop. Cat. No. 297229 Prepared Pour Tubes, 20 mL Pkg. of 10
*Store at 2-8C.

Cystine Assay Medium

(See Amino Acid Assay Media)

162
 Cystine Heart Agar

Cystine Heart Agar

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Cystine Heart Agar is used with hemoglobin for cultivating Infusions from beef heart, peptone and L-cystine provide
Francisella tularensis and without enrichment for cultivating nitrogen, vitamins and amino acids in Cystine Heart Agar.
gram-negative cocci and other microorganisms. Dextrose is a carbon source. Sodium chloride maintains the
osmotic balance and agar is the solidifying agent.
Summary and Explanation
Francisella tularensis was first described in humans in 1907.1 Enrichment with 2% hemoglobin provides additional growth
factors. Without enrichment, Cystine Heart Agar supports
Several media formulations were employed to isolate this
microorganism. Initial formulations contained egg or serum excellent growth of gram-negative cocci and other pathogenic C
and were difficult to prepare. Edward Francis,2 who dedicated microorganisms. Rabbit blood and antimicrobial agents can
his career to the study of this organism, reported that blood be added to this medium.5
dextrose cystine agar was a satisfactory medium for cultivat-
Formula
ing this fastidious pathogen. Shaw3 added 0.05% cystine and
Difco Cystine Heart Agar
1% dextrose to Heart Infusion Agar for the cultivation of
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
F. tularensis. Beef Heart, Infusion from 500 g ............................... 10.0 g
Proteose Peptone ..................................................... 10.0 g
While experimenting with Francis blood dextrose cystine agar, Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Rhamy4 added hemoglobin to Cystine Heart Agar to develop Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
a satisfactory medium for growth of F. tularensis. L-Cystine .................................................................... 1.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Cystine Heart Agar, also known as Cystine Glucose Blood agar, *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

is the historical medium of choice for isolating F. tularensis.2

User Quality Control

Francisella tularensis Neisseria meningitidis
Identity Specifications with enrichment with enrichment
Difco Cystine Heart Agar
ATCC 29684 ATCC 13090
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 5.1% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light to medium
amber, very slightly to slightly opalescent,
may have fine precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Plain Light to medium amber, slightly
opalescent, may have a fine precipitate.
With Hemoglobin Chocolate, opaque.
Reaction of 5.1%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Cystine Heart Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions without and with hemoglobin.
Incubate inoculated medium at 35 2oC aerobically for 66-72 hours.
Incubate Neisseria meningitidis under increased CO2.
INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU W/O HEMOGLOBIN W/HEMOGLOBIN
Francisella tularensis
(BD 16223)* 102-103 N/A Good
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 102-103 Good Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good Good
Streptococcus
pneumoniae 6303 102-103 Good Good
*Minimally, one strain of F. tularensis should be used for performance testing. F. tularensis ATCC 29684 can be
substituted for BD Diagnostic Systems strain 16223.

163
Section III
C Cystine Heart Agar, cont.

Precautions Procedure
Francisella tularensis is a Biosafety Level 2 pathogen that can 1. Inoculate and streak specimens as soon as possible. For a
be transmitted by aerosols or by penetration of unbroken skin.5 complete discussion on the inoculation and identification
Wearing of gowns, gloves and masks is advocated for labora- of Francisella, consult appropriate references.
tory staff handling suspected infectious material.6 2. Overgrowth by contaminating organisms can be reduced
by incorporating 100-500 units penicillin per mL into the
Directions for Preparation from medium.1
Dehydrated Product
Enriched Medium Expected Results
1. Suspend 10.2 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water. Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Mix thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to References
1. Wong and Shapiro. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
completely dissolve the powder. microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. Francis. 1928. JAMA 91:1155.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 50-60C. 3. Shaw. 1930. Zentr. Bakt. I. Abt. Orig. 118:216.
4. Rhamy. 1933. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 3:121.
4. Add 100 mL sterile 2% hemoglobin solution and mix well. 5. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol.1. American Society for
Use: Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
6. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Hemoglobin Solution 2%; or, Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
Prepare a 2% hemoglobin solution as follows: Place 2 g
of hemoglobin powder in a dry flask. Add 100 mL of Availability
cold purified water while agitating vigorously. Continue Difco Cystine Heart Agar
intermittent agitation for 10-15 minutes until solution Cat. No. 247100 Dehydrated 500 g
is complete. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool BBL Hemoglobin, Bovine, Freeze-Dried
to 50-60C. Cat. No. 212392 Dehydrated 500 g
5. Dispense into sterile Petri dishes or tubes. BBL Hemoglobin Solution 2%

6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Cat. No. 211874 Bottle 10 100 mL
stable, typical control cultures.
Unenriched Medium
1. Suspend 51 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

Cystine Tryptic Agar

(See CTA Medium)

Czapek-Dox Broth Czapek Solution Agar

Intended Use inorganic sources of nitrogen and chemically defined sources
Czapek-Dox Broth and Czapek Solution Agar are used for of carbon. Czapek-Dox media are useful in a variety of
cultivating fungi and bacteria capable of using inorganic microbiological procedures, including soil microbiology and
nitrogen. fungi and mildew resistance tests. Thom and Raper3 reported
Czapek-Dox Broth and Czapek Solution Agar produce mod-
Summary and Explanation erately vigorous growth of most saprophytic aspergilli and yield
Czapek-Dox Broth is a modification of the Czapek1 and Dox2 characteristic mycelia and conidia.
formula prepared according to Thom and Raper.3 Czapek Czapek Solution Agar is recommended in Standard Methods
Solution Agar is prepared according to the formula given for the Examination of Water and Wastewater5 for the isola-
by Thom and Church.4 The media are prepared with only tion of Aspergillus, Penicillium, Paecilomyces and related fungi.

164
 Czapek-Dox Broth, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications Cultural Response
Difco Czapek-Dox Broth Difco Czapek-Dox Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: White, free-flowing, homogeneous. Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Solution: 3.5% solution, soluble in purified 30 2C for 48-72 hours.
water. Solution is colorless, clear to ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
very slightly opalescent and may have
a slight precipitate. Aspergillus niger 9642 102-103 Good
Candida albicans 10231 102-103 Good
Prepared Appearance: Colorless, clear to very slightly opal-
escent, may have a slight precipitate. Candida tropicalis 750 102-103 Good
Reaction of 3.5% Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 102-103 Good
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
Difco Czapek Solution Agar
C
Difco Czapek Solution Agar

Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Dehydrated Appearance: Very light beige, free-flowing, homo- 30 2C for 18-48 hours (up to 72 hours if necessary).
geneous.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Solution: 4.9% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light Aspergillus niger 9642 102-103 Good
amber, opalescent with a uniform Candida albicans 10231 102-103 Good
flocculent precipitate. Penicillium rubrum 10520 102-103 Good
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent, may Streptococcus albus 3004 102-103 Good
have a slight precipitate.
Reaction of 4.9%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2

Principles of the Procedure Difco Czapek Solution Agar

Saccharose is the sole carbon source, and sodium nitrate is 1. Suspend 49 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
the sole nitrogen source in Czapek-Dox Broth and Czapek thoroughly.
Solution Agar. Dipotassium phosphate is the buffering agent, 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
and potassium chloride contains essential ions. Magnesium completely dissolve the powder.
sulfate and ferrous sulfate are sources of cations. Agar is the 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
solidifying agent in Czapek Solution Agar. 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
Formulae
Difco Czapek-Dox Broth Procedure
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Refer to appropriate references for specific procedures for the
Saccharose ............................................................... 30.0 g cultivation of fungi and bacteria capable of utilizing inorganic
Sodium Nitrate ........................................................... 3.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g
nitrogen.
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.5 g
Potassium Chloride .................................................... 0.5 g Expected Results
Ferrous Sulfate ........................................................... 0.01 g Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Difco Czapek Solution Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter References
Saccharose ............................................................... 30.0 g 1. Czapek. 1902-1903. Beitr. Chem. Physiol. Pathol. 1:540.
Sodium Nitrate ........................................................... 2.0 g 2. Dox. 1910. U.S. Dept. Agr. Bur. Anim. Ind. Bull. 120:70.
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g 3. Thom and Raper. 1945. Manual of the aspergilli. Williams & Wilkins Co., Baltimore, Md.
4. Thom and Church. 1926. The aspergilli. Williams & Wilkins Co., Baltimore, Md.
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.5 g 5. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
Potassium Chloride .................................................... 0.5 g wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Ferrous Sulfate ........................................................... 0.01 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g Availability
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Difco Czapek-Dox Broth
Cat. No. 233810 Dehydrated 500 g
Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product Difco Czapek Solution Agar

SMWW
Difco Czapek-Dox Broth

Cat. No. 233910 Dehydrated 500 g
1. Dissolve 35 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

165
Section III
D DCLS Agar

DCLS Agar
Intended Use both; e.g., Proteus vulgaris, as well as typical coliforms.
DCLS Agar (Desoxycholate Citrate Lactose Sucrose Agar) is This permits the more accurate selection of members of the
a moderately selective culture medium for the isolation of genera Shigella and Salmonella, which form colorless or nearly
Salmonella and Shigella from fecal specimens. colorless colonies on DCLS Agar.

Summary and Explanation Formula

DCLS Agar is a modification of Leifsons Desoxycholate Agar, BBL DCLS Agar
a slightly selective and differential plating medium for enterics Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Sodium Desoxycholate ............................................... 2.5 g
in which the degree of inhibition is accurately controlled by Sodium Citrate ......................................................... 10.5 g
the substitution of pure chemicals for the largely undefined Lactose ....................................................................... 5.0 g
composition of bile.1 DCLS Agar is only one of a number of Sucrose ...................................................................... 5.0 g
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 3.5 g
modified desoxycholate-containing media and differs from the Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 3.5 g
rest by its inclusion of sucrose.2 Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................... 5.0 g
DCLS Agar supports good growth of cultures of Shigella and Neutral Red ................................................................ 0.03 g
Salmonella, and inhibits the growth of coliforms and Proteus. Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
In addition to the human pathogens, S. pullorum and
S. gallinarum grow well. Directions for Preparation from
Principles of the Procedure Dehydrated Product
This medium contains peptones and beef extract, which 1. Suspend 50 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
supply essential nutrients for the support of bacterial growth. thoroughly.
The citrate and desoxycholate compounds serve as inhibitors 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
of gram-positive bacteria and coliforms. The incorporation completely dissolve the powder. Avoid excessive heating.
of two sugars permits the formation of red colonies by DO NOT AUTOCLAVE.
organisms that rapidly ferment either sucrose or lactose, or

Uninoculated Salmonella typhimurium

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 14028

Identity Specifications
BBL DCLS Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous powder.
Solution: 5.0% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium to
dark, red-orange to orange-rose, clear
to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, red-orange to orange-
rose, clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 5.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL DCLS Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 24 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Escherichia coli 25922 104-105 Good Pink to
rose-red
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 103-104 Good Colorless to
pale pink
Shigella flexneri 12022 103-104 Good Colorless to
pale pink
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 104-105 None

166
 D/E Neutralizing Agar

3. Cool the medium to approximately 45C and pour into Expected Results
plates using about 20 mL per plate. The plates may be used Typical colonial appearance on DCLS Agar is as follows:
at once or refrigerated for a few days. Escherichia coli ................. Large, flat, pink to rose red with
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using a zone of precipitated bile salts
stable, typical control cultures. Enterobacter/Klebsiella ..... Large, mucoid, pink
Proteus ............................. Colorless to red
Salmonella ....................... Colorless to pale pink
Procedure Shigella ............................ Colorless to pale pink
Inoculate and incubate plates, protected from light, at 35 Pseudomonas ................... Colorless to brown or green
2C for 18-24 hours. If negative after 24 hours, reincubate an Gram-positive bacteria ..... No growth
additional 24 hours.
References
A nonselective medium should also be streaked to increase 1. Leifson. 1935. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 40:581.
2. Hajna and Damon. 1956. Appl. Microbiol. 4:341.
the chance of recovery when the population of gram-negative
organisms is low and to provide an indication of other Availability
organisms present in the specimen. BBL DCLS Agar
Cat. No. 211144 Dehydrated 500 g
Europe
Cat. No. 254012 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20* D
*Store at 2-8C.

D/E Neutralizing Agar D/E Neutralizing Broth

Intended Use areas and are also recommended for use in air sampling
D/E (Dey/Engley) Neutralizing Agar has the ability to neutralize equipment such as the Surface Air System. Finger Dab Sterile
antimicrobial chemicals and is used for environmental sampling Pack and Isolator Pack plates are intended for sampling gloved
for the detection and enumeration of microorganisms present hands. Hycheck hygiene contact slides are used for assessing the
on surfaces of sanitary importance. Prepared plates are provided microbiological contamination of surfaces and fluids.
for environmental monitoring. Sterile Pack and Isolator Pack D/E Neutralizing Broth is for the neutralization and testing of
RODAC prepared plates are particularly useful for monitoring antiseptics and disinfectants according to the procedure of
surfaces in clean rooms and other environmentally-controlled Engley and Dey.1

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications Cultural Response
Difco D/E Neutralizing Agar Difco D/E Neutralizing Agar or
Dehydrated Appearance: Bluish-gray, homogeneous, appears D/E Neutralizing Broth
moist and lumpy. Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate plates and incubate
Solution: 5.4% solution, soluble in purified at 35 2C for up to 40-48 hours. Prepare tubes with and without the
water upon boiling. Solution is laven- addition of disinfectants; e.g., mercurials and quaternary ammonium
der, opaque with a fine precipitate. compounds. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 40-48 hours.
Prepared Appearance: Lavender, opaque with a fine precipitate. ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Reaction of 5.4% Bacillus subtilis 6633 102-103 Good
Solution at 25C: pH 7.6 0.2 Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good
Difco D/E Neutralizing Broth Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 102-103 Good
Dehydrated Appearance: Bluish-gray, homogeneous, appears Salmonella choleraesuis
moist and lumpy. subsp. choleraesuis
Solution: 3.9% solution, soluble in purified serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good
water upon warming. Solution is Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good
purple, opaque with an even suspen-
Neutralization Test
sion of particles.
Prepare D/E Neutralizing Agar per label directions. Inoculate 50 mL of
Prepared Appearance: Purple, opaque with an even suspen- D/E Neutralizing Agar with 0.1 mL of a heavy suspension of test organ-
sion of particles. ism and dispense into 150 15 mm Petri dishes of D/E Neutralizing
Reaction of 3.9% Agar and Plate Count Agar. Place 1/2 inch sterile blank disks on each
Solution at 25C: pH 7.6 0.2 plate. Dispense 0.1 mL of each disinfectant solution onto two disks
per medium. Incubate at 35 2C for 40-48 hours. D/E Neutralizing
Agar should exhibit no zones of inhibition or zones significantly smaller
than those found on Plate Count Agar.

167
Section III
D D/E Neutralizing Agar, cont.

Staphylococcus aureus
ATCC 25923 Summary and Explanation
Environmental contact sampling plates (RODAC plates) are
specially constructed so that the D/E Neutralizing Agar
medium can be over-filled, producing a meniscus or dome-
shaped surface that can be pressed onto a surface for sampling
its microbial burden. These plates are used in a variety of
programs to establish and monitor cleaning techniques and
schedules.2-5 After touching the surface to be sampled with the
medium, the dish is covered and incubated at an appropriate
temperature. The presence and number of microorganisms is
determined by the appearance of colonies on the surface of the
agar medium. Collection of samples from the same area
before and after cleaning and treatment with a disinfectant
permits the evaluation of the efficacy of sanitary procedures
because of the neutralizing ability of the medium.
The Hycheck hygiene contact slide is a double-sided paddle
containing two agar surfaces for immersing into fluids or
sampling surfaces. There are two slides containing D/E
Neutralizing Agar: one slide contains D/E Neutralizing Agar
on both sides; and another slide contains D/E Neutralizing
Agar along with Tryptic Soy Agar.
D/E Neutralizing Broth is used for environmental sampling
where neutralization of the chemical is important to determine
its bactericidal or bacteriostatic activity. This medium will
neutralize a broad spectrum of antiseptic and disinfectant
chemicals, including quaternary ammonium compounds,
phenolics, iodine and chlorine preparations, mercurials, form-
aldehyde and glutaraldehyde.1

Principles of the Procedure

Peptone, yeast extract and dextrose are sources of nutrients
required for the replication of microorganisms. The peptone
provides nitrogenous compounds, including essential amino
acids. Yeast extract is a rich source of B-complex vitamins.
Dextrose is an energy source. Five neutralizers in this medium
will inactivate a variety of disinfectant and antiseptic chemicals:
Uninoculated Bacillus subtilis Escherichia coli
Tube ATCC 6633 ATCC 25922 sodium bisulfite neutralizes aldehydes; sodium thioglycollate
neutralizes mercurials; sodium thiosulfate neutralizes iodine
and chlorine;1 lecithin neutralizes quaternary ammonium
compounds; and polysorbate 80, a non-ionic surface active agent,
neutralizes substituted phenolics.6-9 Bromcresol purple is
incorporated as an indicator for dextrose utilization.
In the medium supplemented with penicillinase, the addition
of penicillinase inactivates penicillinase-sensitive beta-lactam
antibiotics.
In the prepared plated medium, the entire double-bagged (Sterile
Pack) or triple-bagged (Isolator Pack) product is subjected to a
sterilizing dose of gamma radiation so that the contents inside
the outer bag are sterile.10 This allows the inner bag(s) to be
aseptically removed and brought into an environmentally-
controlled area without introducing contaminants. Since the agar
Pseudomonas Salmonella Staphylococcus medium has been sterilized after packaging, the presence of
aeruginosa typhimurium aureus
ATCC 27853 ATCC 14028 ATCC 25923 microbial growth after sampling and incubation can be relied
upon to represent the presence of environmental contaminants
168
 D/E Neutralizing Agar, cont.

and not pre-existing microorganisms in the medium that may Grid method:
have been introduced during manufacture. The plate has a marked
1. Subdivide surface (floor or wall) into 36 equal squares
grid to facilitate counting organisms.
per 100 square feet of area by striking five equidistant
Due to the high concentration of lecithin in the broth medium dividing lines from each of two adjacent sides.
(which renders the medium opaque), turbidity cannot be used 2. These dividing lines intersect at twenty-five points.
to detect growth. Therefore, bromcresol purple and dextrose 3. Number these intersections consecutively in a serpentine
are added to the medium. Those organisms that ferment configuration.
dextrose will turn the medium from purple to yellow. Growth 4. Use red numerals for odd numbers, black numerals for
of Pseudomonas species, which do not ferment dextrose, can even numbers.
be detected by the formation of a pellicle on the surface of the 5. Omit number 13 which falls in the center of the total area.
broth.1 6. Sample odd points at one sampling period, even points at
the next sampling period.
Formulae 7. For areas greater than 100 square feet, extend grid to
Difco D/E Neutralizing Agar include entire area.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 8. For areas smaller than 25 square feet, divide the areas
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
into twenty-five equal squares (sixteen intersections).
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 2.5
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0
g
g Sample eight even-numbered or odd-numbered intersec- D
Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 1.0 g tions at each sampling period.
Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................... 6.0 g
Sodium Bisulfite ......................................................... 2.5 g
9. For areas smaller than 25 and 100 square feet, divide into
Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 5.0 g 36 equal squares as in #1.
Lecithin ...................................................................... 7.0 g 10. Mark plates with intersection numbers.
Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 0.02 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g Incubate exposed plates at 35-37C for 48 hours, and 25C
Difco D/E Neutralizing Broth for 7 days as required.
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
Broth
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Add 1 mL of disinfectant solution to one tube of D/E Neutral-
Directions for Preparation from izing Broth. Add culture as desired. Incubate tubes at 35C.
Dehydrated Product Examine for growth, indicated by a color change from purple
Difco D/E Neutralizing Agar to yellow or by pellicle formation.
1. Suspend 54 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix To determine whether viable organisms are present in a
thoroughly. bacteriostatic or bactericidal solution, inoculate samples
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to from the broth onto D/E Neutralizing Agar or Standard
completely dissolve the powder. Methods Agar plates. Incubate plates at 35-37C for 48 hours.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Expected Results
stable, typical control cultures. Agar
Difco D/E Neutralizing Broth
After incubation, count visible colonies on plated medium.
1. Dissolve 39 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix Counting of plates containing a profusion of growth can lead
thoroughly. to considerable error. A basic decision to be made is whether
2. Warm slightly to completely dissolve the powder. distinct colony margins can be observed. Spreading colonies
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. should be counted as one but care taken to observe other
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using distinct colonies intermingled in the growth around the plate
stable, typical control cultures. periphery or along a hair line. These should also be counted
as one colony, as should bi-colored colonies and halo-type
Procedure spreaders.
Agar It is generally agreed that 200 colonies is the approximate
Selected surfaces are sampled by firmly pressing the agar maximum that can be counted on these plates. Colony counts
medium against the test area. Hold the plates with thumb and may be recorded by:
second finger and use index finger to press plate bottom firmly
against surface. Pressure should be the same for every sample. 1. Simply keeping individual counts.
Do not move plate laterally; this spreads contaminants over 2. Number of viable particles per square foot (agar area of
the agar surface making resolution of colonies difficult. Slightly RODAC plates is 3.97 square inches).
curved surfaces may be sampled with a rolling motion. Areas 3. Means and standard deviations.
(walls, floors, etc.) to be assayed may be divided into sections
or grids and samples taken from specific points within the grid.
169
Section III
D D/E Neutralizing Agar, cont.

Subculture colonies of interest so that positive identification Availability

can be made by means of biochemical testing and/or micro- Difco D/E Neutralizing Agar
scopic examinations of organism smears. COMPF SMD
Cat. No. 268620 Dehydrated 500 g*
Broth 268610 Dehydrated 10 kg*
If the disinfectant solution is bacteriostatic, it should be BBL D/E Neutralizing Agar
neutralized in the broth medium and the test organisms COMPF SMD
introduced into the broth will grow. Growth is indicated by a United States and Canada
color change of the medium from purple to yellow, or pellicle Cat. No. 299969 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
221232 Sterile Pack RODAC Plates Pkg. of 10*
formation. 222209 Sterile Pack RODAC Plates Ctn. of 100*
Growth on the plates from negative broth tubes indicates 292227 Sterile Pack RODAC Plates
with Penicillinase Pkg. of 10*
a bacteriostatic substance. No growth on the plates from 292645 Isolator Pack RODAC Plates Pkg. of 10*
negative broth tubes indicates a bactericidal substance. All 292646 Isolator Pack RODAC Plates Ctn. of 100*
positive broth tubes should be positive on the plates. 292647 Isolator Pack Finger Dab Plates Pkg. of 10*
Europe
Cat. No. 257013 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
References
1. Engley and Dey. 1970. Chem. Spec. Manuf. Assoc. Proc., Mid-Year Meet., p. 100. Difco D/E Neutralizing Broth

2. Vesley and Michaelson. 1964. Health Lab. Sci. 1:107.
3. Pryor and McDuff. 1969. Exec. Housekeeper, March. AOAC
4. Dell. 1979. Pharm. Technol. 3:47. Cat. No. 281910 Dehydrated 500 g*
5. Hickey, Beckelheimer and Parrow. 1993. In Marshall (ed.), Standard methods for the examina-
tions of dairy products, 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. BBL D/E Neutralizing Broth

6. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. AOAC
7. Quisno, Gibby and Foter. 1946. Am. J. Phar. 118:320.
8. Erlandson and Lawrence. 1953. Science 118:274.
Cat. No. 298318 Prepared Tubes, 9 mL (A Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
9. Brummer. 1976. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 32:80.
10. Association for the Advancement of Medical Instrumentation. 1984. Process control guidelines for Difco Hycheck Hygiene Contact Slides

gamma radiation sterilization of medical devices. AAMI, Arlington, Va. Cat. No. 290411 D/E Neutralizing Agar//D/E Neutralizing Agar (20 slides)*
290391 D/E Neutralizing Agar//Tryptic Soy Agar (20 slides)*
*Store at 2-8C.

DNase Test Agars

DNase Test Agar DNase Test Agar with Methyl Green
DNase Test Agar with Toluidine Blue
Intended Use Trypticase Soy Agar and subsequently reported a correlation
DNase Test Agar, DNase Test Agar with Methyl Green and between coagulase production and DNase activity.
DNase Test Agar with Toluidine Blue are differential media DNase Test Agar with Methyl Green contains a dye to
used for the detection of deoxyribonuclease activity to aid in eliminate the necessity of adding reagent to the agar plate
the identification of bacteria isolated from clinical specimens. following incubation.5

Summary and Explanation DNase Test Agar with Toluidine Blue contains a metachro-
The DNase test is used to detect the degradation of deoxyri- matic dye to eliminate the necessity of reagent addition to the
bonucleic acid (DNA).1,2 The test is useful for differentiating agar following incubation.6 Toluidine blue may be toxic to
Serratia from Enterobacter, Staphylococcus aureus from some gram-positive cocci and, therefore, should be used
coagulase-negative staphylococci, and Moraxella catarrhalis primarily with Enterobacteriaceae.
from Neisseria species.1
Principles of the Procedure
In 1957, Jeffries et al. described a rapid agar plate method Peptones provide amino acids and other complex nitrogenous
for demonstrating DNase activity of microorganisms.3 This substances to support bacterial growth. Sodium chloride
procedure utilized a semi-synthetic medium with nucleic acid maintains osmotic equilibrium. DNA is the substrate for DNase
solution incorporated in the medium. Enzymatic activity is activity. DNase is an extracellular enzyme that breaks the DNA
detected by flooding the plate with 1 N hydrochloric acid (HCl). down into subunits composed of nucleotides.
A clear zone surrounding growth indicates a positive reaction.
The depolymerization of the DNA may be detected by flood-
DNase Test Agar is based on a medium developed by DiSalvo ing the surface of the medium with 1 N HCl and observing for
to adapt the rapid plate method for staphylococci.4 Rather than clear zones in the medium surrounding growth. In the absence
using semi-synthetic medium, DiSalvo incorporated DNA into of DNase activity, the reagent reacts with the intact nucleic
acid, resulting in the formation of a cloudy precipitate.
170
 DNase Test Agars, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco DNase Test Agar BBL DNase Test Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
neous. ous material.
Solution: 4.2% solution, soluble in purified wa- Solution: 4.2% solution, soluble in purified wa-
ter upon boiling. Solution is light to ter upon boiling. Solution is light to
medium amber, very slightly to slightly medium, yellow to tan, clear to slightly
opalescent, may have a slight precipi- hazy.
tate. Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal- to slightly hazy.
escent, may have a slight precipitate. Reaction of 4.2%
Reaction of 4.2% Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
BBL DNase Test Agar with Toluidine Blue
Difco DNase Test Agar with Methyl Green Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige with slight green tint, free-
flowing, homogeneous. Solution:
ous material.
4.2% solution, soluble in purified
D
Solution: 4.2% solution, soluble in purified wa- water upon boiling.Solution is me-
ter upon boiling. Solution is green, dium to dark, blue, trace hazy to hazy.
very slightly to slightly opalescent with Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, blue, trace hazy
slight precipitate. to hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Green, very slightly to slightly opales- Reaction of 4.2%
cent with slight precipitate. Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
Reaction of 4.2%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2 Cultural Response
BBL DNase Test Agar or DNase Test Agar
Cultural Response with Toluidine Blue
Difco DNase Test Agar or DNase Test Agar with Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
Methyl Green and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. For DNase Test Agar, flood
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at the plates with 1N HCl and examine for deoxyribonuclease activity. For
35 2C for up to 48 hours. (Note: Prepare extra plates by streaking DNase Test Agar with Toluidine Blue, examine for deoxyribonuclease
with a line of undiluted culture across the medium.) For DNase Test activity.
Agar, flood the streak plates with 1N HCl and examine for clear zones
RECOVERY/ RECOVERY/REACTION
around the streaks (positive reactions). For DNase Test Agar with Me- REACTION DNASE TEST AGAR
thyl Green, examine the streak plates for decolorized zones around the ORGANISM ATCC
DNASE TEST AGAR W/TOLUIDINE BLUE
streaks (positive reactions).
Enterobacter
INOCULUM aerogenes 13048 N/A Good/
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY REACTION Klebsiella pneumoniae 33495 Good/ Good/
Serratia marcescens 8100 30-300 Good + Serratia marcescens 13880 Good/+ Good/+
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good + Staphylococcus aureus 25923 Good/+ N/A
Staphylococcus Staphylococcus
epidermidis 12228 30-300 Good epidermidis 12228 Good/ N/A
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 30-300 Good +

The HCl reagent is not needed to detect DNase activity on DNase complex. In the presence of nucleotides produced from the
Agar with Methyl Green. Methyl green forms a complex with DNase depolymerization, the dye takes on its metachromatic
intact (polymerized) DNA to form the green color of the color, forming pink to red zones around bacterial growth.
medium. DNase activity depolymerizes the DNA, breaking down A negative test is indicated when the medium remains blue.
the methyl green-DNA complex, which results in the formation
of colorless zones around colonies of the test organism. A Formulae
negative test is indicated by the absence of a colorless zone around Difco DNase Test Agar
the colonies. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Tryptose ................................................................... 20.0 g
The HCl reagent is not needed to detect DNase activity Deoxyribonucleic Acid ................................................ 2.0 g
on DNase Agar with Toluidine Blue. Toluidine blue forms a Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
complex with intact (polymerized) DNA. In the intact DNA
complex, the toluidine blue has the normal blue color. DNase
activity depolymerizes the DNA, breaking down the dye-DNA

171
Section III
D DNase Test Agars, cont.

DNase Test Agar DNase Test Agar with Methyl Green

Staphylococcus aureus Uninoculated Staphylococcus
ATCC 25923 Plate aureus
ATCC 25923

Staphylococcus
epidermidis
ATCC 12228

DNase Test Agar with Toluidine Blue BBL DNase Test Agar
Serratia marcescens

ATCC 13880 Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 15.0 g
Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal .................................. 5.0 g
Deoxyribonucleic Acid ................................................ 2.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Difco DNase Test Agar with Methyl Green
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g
Deoxyribonucleic Acid ................................................ 2.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Methyl Green ............................................................. 0.05 g
BBL DNase Test Agar with Toluidine Blue
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal ................................ 10.0 g
Deoxyribonucleic Acid ................................................ 2.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Toluidine Blue ............................................................. 0.1 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Directions for Preparation from

Dehydrated Product
DNase Test Agar or DNase Test Agar with Methyl Green
or DNase Test Agar with Toluidine Blue
1. Suspend 42 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

172
 DRBC Agar

Procedure References
1. Washington. 1985. Laboratory procedures in clinical microbiology, 2nd ed. Springer-Verlag, New
Inoculate by making a single streak line using inoculum from York, N.Y.
an agar slant or plate. One plate may be inoculated with up to 2. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
eight isolates by spot inoculation (1/8 to 1/4 inch) or streak 3. Jeffries, Holtman and Guse. 1957. J. Bacteriol. 73:590.
4. DiSalvo. 1958. Med. Tech. Bull. U.S. Armed Forces Med. J. 9:191.
inoculation (a single 1- to 2-inch line). 5. Schreier. 1969. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 51:711.
6. Smith, Hancock and Rhoden. 1969. Appl. Microbiol. 18:991.
Incubate at 35 2C for 24-48 hours. Plates should be
incubated in an inverted position. Incubate tubes with loosened Availability
caps. Difco DNase Test Agar
COMPF
Following incubation, flood DNase Test Agar plates with 1N Cat. No. 263220 Dehydrated 500 g
HCl reagent and observe for reaction. Reagent addition is not
BBL DNase Test Agar
required with DNase Test Agar with Methyl Green or with
COMPF
DNase Test Agar with Toluidine Blue. Cat. No. 211179 Dehydrated 500 g
Europe
Expected Results Cat. No. 255506 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
A clear area surrounding growth (band/spot inocula) on DNase Mexico
Test Agar after the addition of 1N HCl indicates a positive
reaction, DNase activity. A negative reaction is indicated by
Cat. No. 227450 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
Difco DNase Test Agar with Methyl Green

D
no clearing and a cloudy precipitate around colonies and Cat. No. 222020 Dehydrated 500 g
throughout medium due to precipitated salts in the medium. BBL DNase Test Agar with Methyl Green
United States and Canada
A positive reaction on DNase Test Agar with Methyl Green
Cat. No. 297202 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
is a distinct clear zone surrounding growth in an otherwise
Mexico
green-colored medium. The color of the medium remains Cat. No. 252573 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
unchanged if the test is negative.
BBL DNase Test Agar with Toluidine Blue

On DNase Test Agar with Toluidine Blue, DNase activity is COMPF

indicated by pink to red zones surrounding growth. The color Cat. No. 299081 Dehydrated 500 g
of the medium remains unchanged if the test is negative. United States and Canada
Cat. No. 221856 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
Mexico
Cat. No. 211789 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

DRBC Agar
Intended Use The concentration of rose bengal is reduced from 50 g/mL to
DRBC Agar is used for the enumeration of yeasts and molds. 25 g/mL as found in Rose Bengal Chloramphenicol Agar for
optimal performance with dichloran. Chloramphenicol is
Summary and Explanation included in this medium to inhibit the growth of bacteria present
DRBC (Dichloran Rose Bengal Chloramphenicol) Agar is based in environmental and food samples. Inhibition of growth of
on the Dichloran Rose Bengal Chlortetracycline Agar formula bacteria and restriction of spreading of more-rapidly growing
described by King, Hocking and Pitt.1 DRBC Agar conforms molds aids in the isolation of slow-growing fungi by preventing
with APHA guidelines for the mycological examination of foods, their overgrowth by more-rapidly growing species. In addition,
containing chloramphenicol rather than chlortetracycline as rose bengal is taken up by yeast and mold colonies, which
originally proposed.2 DRBC Agar is a selective medium that allows these colonies to be easily recognized and enumerated.
supports good growth of yeasts and molds. Reduced recovery of yeasts may be encountered due to increased
activity of rose bengal at pH 5.6.1 Agar is the solidifying agent.
Principles of the Procedure Formula
Peptone provides nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Dextrose
Difco DRBC Agar
is a carbohydrate source. Phosphate is a buffering agent.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Magnesium sulfate is a source of divalent cations and sulfate. Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 5.0 g
The antifungal agent, dichloran, is added to the medium to Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
reduce colony diameters of spreading fungi. The pH of the Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
medium is reduced from 7.2 to 5.6 for improved inhibition Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.5 g
of the spreading fungi.1 The presence of rose bengal in the Dichloran ................................................................... 2.0 mg
Rose Bengal ............................................................. 25.0 mg
medium suppresses the growth of bacteria and restricts the Chloramphenicol ........................................................ 0.1 g
size and height of colonies of the more rapidly growing molds. Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
173
Section III
D DRBC Agar, cont.

Aspergillus niger
User Quality Control ATCC 1015

Identity Specifications
Difco DRBC Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Pink, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.16% solution, soluble in purified wa-
ter upon boiling.Solution is reddish pink,
very slightly to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Bright pink, very slightly to slightly opal-
escent.
Reaction of 3.16%
Solution at 25C: pH 5.6 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco DRBC Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
25 2C for up to 5 days. For A. niger, spot inoculate.
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY
Aspergillus niger 1015 Undiluted Good
Candida albicans 10231 102-103 Good
Escherichia coli 25922 103 None to poor
Micrococcus luteus 10240 103 None to poor

Directions for Preparation from Limitations of the Procedure

Dehydrated Product 1. Although this medium is selective primarily for fungi,
1. Suspend 31.6 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix microscopic examination is recommended for presumptive
thoroughly. identification. Biochemical testing using pure cultures is
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to required for complete identification.
completely dissolve the powder. 2. Due to the selective properties of this medium and the type
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. of specimen being cultured, some strains of fungi may
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using be encountered that fail to grow or grow poorly on the
stable, typical control cultures. medium; similarly, some strains of bacteria may be encoun-
tered that are not inhibited or only partially inhibited.
Procedure2,3 3. Care should be taken not to expose this medium to light,
1. Inoculate 0.1 mL of appropriate decimal dilutions of the since photo-degradation of rose bengal yields compounds
sample in duplicate onto the surface of DRBC Agar plates. that are toxic to fungi.2-4
The plates should be dried overnight at room temperature.
Spread the inoculum over the entire surface of the plate References
1. King, Hocking and Pitt. 1979. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 37:959.
using a sterile, bent-glass rod. 2. Beuchat and Cousin. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.). Compendium of methods for the microbio-
logical examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association. Washington, D.C.
2. Incubate plates upright at 22-25C. Examine for growth of 3. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
yeasts and molds after 3, 4 and 5 days incubation. International, Gaithersburg, Md.
4. Banks, Board and Paton. 1985. Lett. Appl. Microbiol. 1:7.

Expected Results Availability

Colonies of molds and yeasts should be apparent within 5 days Difco DRBC Agar
of incubation. Colonies of yeast appear pink due to the uptake BAM CCAM COMPF SMD
of rose bengal. Report the results as colony-forming units per Cat. No. 258710 Dehydrated 500 g
gram or milliliter of sample.

174
 Decarboxylase Differential Media

Decarboxylase Differential Media

Decarboxylase Base Moeller Decarboxylase Medium
Base Lysine Decarboxylase Broth Moeller
Decarboxylase Broth Base Moeller Decarboxylase
Broth with Arginine Moeller Decarboxylase Broth
with Lysine Moeller Decarboxylase Broth with
Ornithine
Intended Use Decarboxylase tests are important in the differentiation and
Decarboxylase media are used in the biochemical differentia- identification of a wide variety of microorganisms and are
outlined in numerous standard methods.12-15
tion of gram-negative enteric bacilli based on the production of
arginine dihydrolase and lysine and ornithine decarboxylase. Decarboxylase Base Moeller conforms with the Moeller
D
Decarboxylase Medium Base, with added arginine, lysine or formulation while Decarboxylase Medium Base is prepared
ornithine is used for the same purpose. according to the formula described by Falkow. Lysine
Decarboxylase Broth is the Falkow medium with L-lysine added
Lysine Decarboxylase Broth is used for differentiating micro-
in 0.5% concentration.
organisms based on lysine decarboxylation.
Principles of the Procedure
Summary and Explanation
Decarboxylase basal media consist of peptones and beef or yeast
Moeller introduced the decarboxylase media for detecting
extract to supply the nitrogenous and other nutrients necessary
the production of lysine and ornithine decarboxylase and
to support bacterial growth. Pyridoxal is an enzyme co-factor
arginine dihydrolase.1-3 These media are a useful adjunct to
for the amino acid decarboxylase. Dextrose is a fermentable
other biochemical tests for the speciation and identification of
carbohydrate. Bromcresol purple and cresol red are pH
the Enterobacteriaceae and other gram-negative bacilli.4-8 The
indicators. The amino acids lysine, ornithine or arginine are
production of ornithine decarboxylase is particularly useful
added to the basal medium at a concentration of 10.0 g/L to
for differentiating Klebsiella and Enterobacter species.
detect the production of the enzyme specific for these substrates.
Klebsiella species are non-motile and, except for
K. ornithinolytica, do not produce ornithine decarboxylase, When the medium is inoculated with a bacterium that is able
while most Enterobacter species are motile and, except for to ferment dextrose, acids are produced that lower the pH of
E. agglomerans, usually produce this enzyme.6 the medium and change the color of the indicator from purple
to yellow. The acidic condition also stimulates decarboxylase
Falkow obtained valid and reliable results with a lysine decar-
activity. If the organism produces the appropriate enzyme, the
boxylase medium he developed to differentiate and identify
amino acid in the medium is degraded, yielding a correspond-
Salmonella and Shigella.9 Although his modification of the
ing amine. Decarboxylation of lysine yields cadaverine, while
Moeller formula was originally described as a lysine medium
decarboxylation of ornithine yields putrescine. Arginine is first
only, further study by Falkow and then by Ewing, Davis and
hydrolyzed to form ornithine, which is then decarboxylated to
Edwards,10 substantiated the use of the medium for ornithine
form putrescine. The production of these amines elevates the
and arginine decarboxylase reactions as well.
pH of the medium, changing the color of the indicator from
Ewing, Davis and Edwards10 compared the Falkow decarboxy- yellow to purple or violet. If the organism does not produce
lase medium base to the Moeller medium and reported that, the appropriate enzyme, the medium remains acidic (yellow).
although the two methods compared favorably in most cases, Consult the reference for more information.16
the Moeller medium was found to be more reliable for
Each isolate to be tested must also be inoculated into a tube of
cultures of Klebsiella and Enterobacter. They concluded that
the basal medium that does not contain the amino acid. If this
the Moeller method should be regarded as the standard or
tube becomes alkaline, the test is invalid.
reference method, although the Falkow fomula is suitable for
determining decarboxylase reactions for most members of the To obtain the appropriate reactions, the inoculated tubes
Enterobacteriaceae except for Klebsiella and Enterobacter. must be protected from air with a layer of sterile mineral oil.
The Moeller medium is also particularly useful in the identifi- Exposure to air may cause alkalinization at the surface of
cation of Aeromonas, Plesiomonas, Vibrio spp. and the medium, which could cause a decarboxylase-negative
nonfermentative gram-negative bacilli.11 organism to appear positive.

175
Section III
D Decarboxylase Differential, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications
Difco Decarboxylase Base Moeller
Dehydrated Appearance: Light to medium tan, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
Solution: 1.05% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is yellow-
ish-red, slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Yellowish-red, very slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 1.05%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.0 0.2
Difco Decarboxylase Medium Base

Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-

neous.
Solution: 0.9% solution, soluble in purified water
upon warming. Solution is purple, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Purple, clear.
Escherichia coli E. coli Shigella S.flexneri
Reaction of 0.9% ATCC 25922 w/Lysine flexneri w/Lysine
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2 ATCC 25922 ATCC 12022 ATCC 12022
Decarboxylase Base Moeller
Difco Lysine Decarboxylase Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Solution: 1.4% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is purple, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Purple, clear.
Reaction of 1.4%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Decarboxylase Base Moeller
Prepare the medium per label directions with and without 1% L-lysine
HCl. Inoculate tubes, overlaying with sterile mineral oil, and incubate at
35 2C for 18-48 hours. Purple color indicates a positive decarboxylase
reaction; a yellow color is negative.
REACTION REACTION
INOCULUM WITHOUT WITH
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY LYSINE LYSINE Uninoculated Salmonella Proteus vulgaris
Tube typhimurium ATCC 13315
Escherichia coli 25922 103 Good Yellow Purple ATCC 14028
Shigella flexneri 12022 103 Good Yellow Yellow Decarboxylase Medium Base

Difco Decarboxylase Medium Base

Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate tubes, overlaying
with sterile mineral oil, and incubate at 35 2C for 40-48 hours.
Purple color indicates a positive decarboxylase reaction; a yellow color
is negative.
REACTION REACTION REACTION
INOCULUM WITH WITH WITH
ORGANISM ATCC CFU LYSINE ORNITHINE ARGININE
Proteus vulgaris 13315 103
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype
Typhimurium 14028 103 + + +

Difco Lysine Decarboxylase Broth

Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate tubes, overlaying with
sterile mineral oil, and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours. Purple color
indicates a positive decarboxylase reaction; a yellow color is negative. Escherichia coli Proteus vulgaris
ATCC 25922 ATCC 13315
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY REACTION
Lysine Decarboxylase Broth
Escherichia coli 25922 103 Good +
Proteus vulgaris 13315 103 Good Continued

176
 Decarboxylase Differential, cont.

Formulae 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to

Difco Decarboxylase Base Moeller completely dissolve the powder.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 3. Add 10 g of L-amino acid or 20 g of DL-amino acid
Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g and dissolve. (When adding ornithine, adjust pH using
Beef Extract ................................................................ 5.0 g
approximately 4.6 mL 1N NaOH per liter.)
Dextrose ..................................................................... 0.5 g
Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 0.01 g 4. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes.
Cresol Red .................................................................. 5.0 mg 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Pyridoxal .................................................................... 5.0 mg stable, typical control cultures.
BBL Moeller Decarboxylase Broth Base BBL Moeller Decarboxylase Broth Base
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 5.0 g 1. Suspend 10.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
Beef Extract ................................................................ 5.0 g Add 1% of L-(or 2% of DL-)lysine, arginine or ornithine,
Dextrose ..................................................................... 0.5 g as desired. Do not add the amino acid to the control broth.
Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 0.01 g 2. Mix until a uniform suspension is obtained. Heat if
Cresol Red .................................................................. 5.0 mg necessary.
Pyridoxal .................................................................... 5.0 mg
3. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes. A small amount of
Difco Decarboxylase Medium Base
floccular precipitate may be present in the ornithine broth,
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g but it does not interfere with the reactions. D
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g stable, typical control cultures.
Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 0.02 g
Difco Decarboxylase Medium Base
Difco Lysine Decarboxylase Broth
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 1. Suspend 9 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water and
Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g warm to dissolve completely.
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g 2. Add 5 g of L-amino acid or 10 g of DL-amino acid and
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g warm to dissolve completely. Adjust pH if necessary.
L-Lysine ...................................................................... 5.0 g
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 0.02 g
* Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
Directions for Preparation from
Difco Lysine Decarboxylase Broth
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 14 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Difco Decarboxylase Base Moeller
thoroughly.
1. Suspend 10.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Mix thoroughly.
completely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Identity Specifications 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
BBL Moeller Decarboxylase Broth Base stable, typical control cultures.
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
ous material.
Solution: 1.05% solution, soluble in purified
Procedure
water. Solution is light to medium, Inoculate the broth media by transferring one or two colonies
purple trace green to green tan from the surface of a fresh culture with an inoculating loop or
purple, trace gray and rose accept- needle and mix to distribute the culture throughout the me-
able, clear to slightly hazy.
dium. Overlay the medium in each tube with 1 mL sterile min-
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, purple trace green
to green tan purple, trace gray and eral oil.
rose acceptable, clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 1.05%
Incubate the tubes with caps tightened at 35 2C. Examine
Solution at 25C: pH 6.0 0.2 for growth and decarboxylase reactions after 18-24, 48, 72
and 96 hours before reporting as negative. The medium will
Cultural Response become yellow initially, if the dextrose is fermented, and then
BBL Moeller Decarboxylase Broth Base will gradually turn purple if the decarboxylase or dihydrolase
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
and incubate at 35 2C under appropriate atmospheric conditions
reaction occurs and elevates the pH.
for 4 days.
Expected Results
REACTION REACTION
ORGANISM ATCC WITHOUT LYSINE WITH LYSINE Compare the color of tubes of media containing the specific
Enterobacter cloacae 13047 amino acids with the color of control tubes of basal media
Klebsiella pneumoniae 33495 + (without amino acid) that have been inoculated with the same
isolate. If inoculated control tubes show an alkaline reaction,
177
Section III
D Decarboxylase Differential, cont.

the test is invalid; i.e., either improperly performed or the test reaction (yellow color of medium) in 24 hours when
organisms can degrade the peptone sufficiently to produce an Decarboxylase Medium Base is used.4
alkaline reaction in the absence of a specific amino acid.
References
The medium becomes purple to violet if the reaction is posi- 1. Moeller. 1954. Acta. Pathol. Microbiol. Scand. 34:102.
tive (alkaline). A yellow color indicates a negative test; i.e., the 2.
3.
Moeller. 1954. Acta. Pathol. Microbiol. Scand. 34:259.
Moeller. 1955. Acta. Pathol. Microbiol. Scand. 36:158.
organism does not produce the appropriate enzyme. 4. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. I. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
5. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
Limitations of the Procedure St. Louis, Mo.
6. Farmer. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
1. If isolated or received on a selective medium, the organism 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
7. Mutters. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
should be subcultured to Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
8. Kiska and Gilligan. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
Sheep Blood or other suitable culture medium before attempt- microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
9. Falkow. 1958. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 29:598.
ing to determine decarboxylase or dihydrolase activity. 10. Ewing, Davis and Edwards. 1960. Publ. Health Lab. 18:77.
11. Baron, Peterson and Finegold. 1994. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 9th ed. Mosby-
2. Biochemical characteristics of the Enterobacteriaceae serve Year Book, Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
to confirm presumptive identification based on cultural, 12. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
morphological, and/or serological findings. Therefore, 13. Harmon, Kautter, Golden and Rhodehamel. 1995. In FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th
ed. AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
biochemical testing should be attempted on pure culture 14. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
isolates only and subsequent to differential determinations. 15. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. The decarboxylase reactions are part of a total biochemical 16. MacFaddin. 2000. Biochemical tests for identification of medical bacteria, 3rd ed. Lippincott
profile for members of the Enterobacteriaceae and related Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.

organisms. Results obtained from these reactions, therefore,

can be considered presumptively indicative of a given genus Availability
Difco Decarboxylase Base Moeller
or species. However, conclusive and final identification of
SMWW USDA
these organisms cannot be made solely on the basis of the Cat. No. 289020 Dehydrated 500 g
decarboxylase reactions.
BBL Moeller Decarboxylase Broth Base and Moeller
4. If layers of yellow and purple appear after incubation, shake Decarboxylase Broth with Amino Acids
the test tube gently before attempting to interpret results. SMWW USDA
5. If a reaction is difficult to interpret, compare the tube in Cat. No. 211430 Dehydrated 500 g*
question to an uninoculated control tube. Any trace of 221731 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL Pkg. of 10*
221659 Prepared Tubes with Arginine, 5 mL Pkg. of 10*
purple after 24 hours of incubation is a positive test. 221660 Prepared Tubes with Arginine, 5 mL Ctn. of 100*
6. A gray color may indicate reduction of the indicator. 221661 Prepared Tubes with Lysine, 5 mL Pkg. of 10*
Additional indicator may be added before the results are 221662 Prepared Tubes with Lysine, 5 mL Ctn. of 100*
221663 Prepared Tubes with Ornithine, 5 mL Pkg. of 10*
interpreted.12 221664 Prepared Tubes with Ornithine, 5 mL
7. Salmonella gallinarum gives a delayed positive ornithine Ctn. of 100*
decarboxylase reaction, requiring 5-6 days incubation.3 Difco Decarboxylase Medium Base
Many strains of E. coli, including those that ferment BAM COMPF SMD SMWW
adonitol, may exhibit a delayed reaction.3 Cat. No. 287220 Dehydrated 500 g
8. Decarboxylase Medium Base is not satisfactory for the Difco Lysine Decarboxylase Broth

determination of lysine decarboxylase activity with the two BAM COMPF SMD SMWW
genera Klebsiella and Enterobacter. Cat. No. 211759 Dehydrated 500 g
9. The lysine decarboxylase activity in Salmonella is used Pasco Mineral Oil
to differentiate this group from Citrobacter freundii. Cat. No. 266631 Bottle 60 mL
Salmonella partyphi A, however, gives an atypical negative *Store at 2-8C.

Demi-Fraser Broth Base

Fraser Broth Supplement
Intended Use the Fraser Broth formulation of Fraser and Sperber.1 The
Demi-Fraser Broth Base is used with Fraser Broth Supple- medium is used in the rapid detection of Listeria from food
ment in selectively and differentially enriching Listeria from and environmental samples. Demi-Fraser Broth Base is a
foods. modification of Fraser Broth Base in which the nalidixic acid
and acriflavine concentrations have been reduced to 10 mg/L
Summary and Explanation and 12.5 mg/L respectively.2
Fraser Broth Base and Fraser Broth Supplement are based on

178
 Demi-Fraser Broth Base, cont.

Principles of the Procedure Directions for Preparation from

Peptone, beef extract and yeast extract provide carbon and Dehydrated Product
nitrogen sources and the cofactors required for good growth 1. Dissolve 55 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
of Listeria. Sodium phosphate and potassium phosphate thoroughly.
buffer the medium. Selectivity is provided by lithium chloride, 2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 45-50C.
nalidixic acid and acriflavine. The high sodium chloride
3. Aseptically add 10 mL of Fraser Broth Supplement.
concentration of the medium inhibits growth of enterococci.
Mix well.
All Listeria species hydrolyze esculin, as evidenced by a black- 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
ening of the medium. This blackening results from the forma- stable, typical control cultures.
tion of 6,7-dihydroxycoumarin, which reacts with ferric ions.1
Ferric ions are added to the final medium as ferric ammonium Procedure2
citrate in Fraser Broth Supplement.
1. Pre-enrich the sample in Demi-Fraser Broth. Incubate for
18-24 hours at 35 2C. Subculture onto Oxford Medium
Formulae
or PALCAM Medium.
Difco Demi-Fraser Broth Base
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
2. Transfer 0.1 mL of the pre-enrichment culture into 10 mL of
Tryptose ................................................................... 10.0 g Fraser Broth and incubate for 48 hours at 37C. Subculture
Beef Extract ................................................................ 5.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
onto Oxford Medium or PALCAM Medium after 18-24 D
hours and again after 42-48 hours of incubation.
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 20.0 g
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 9.6 g 3. Examine Oxford Medium or PALCAM Medium plates for
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.35 g the appearance of presumptive Listeria colonies.
Esculin ........................................................................ 1.0 g 4. Confirm the identity of all presumptive Listeria by
Nalidixic Acid ............................................................. 0.01 g
Acriflavine HCl ......................................................... 12.5 m g biochemical and/or serological testing.
Lithium Chloride ........................................................ 3.0 g
Difco Fraser Broth Supplement Expected Results
Formula Per 10 mL Vial The presence of Listeria is presumptively indicated by the
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.5 g blackening of Demi-Fraser Broth after incubation for 24-48
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
hours at 35C. Confirmation of the presence of Listeria is made

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Demi-Fraser Broth Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 5.5% solution, soluble in purified water.
Solution is medium amber, clear to slightly
opalescent, may have a fine precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, very slightly to slightly
opalescent, may have a fine precipitate.
Reaction of 5.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
Difco Fraser Broth Supplement

Solution Appearance: Dark brown solution.

Cultural Response
Difco Demi-Fraser Broth Base
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 24-48 hours.
RECOVERY/
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU APPEARANCE
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-2103 Partial to complete
inhibition
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Inhibition Uninoculated Listeria monocytogenes
Listeria monocytogenes 19114 102-103 Good/blackening Tube ATCC 19114
of the medium
Listeria monocytogenes 19115 102-103 Good/blackening
of the medium
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-2103 Inhibition

179
Section III
D Demi-Fraser Broth Base, cont.

following subculture onto appropriate media and biochemi- Availability

cal/serological identification. Difco Demi-Fraser Broth Base
Cat. No. 265320 Dehydrated 500 g
References 265310 Dehydrated 10 kg
1. Fraser and Sperber. 1988. J. Food Prot. 51:762.
2. Lassociation franaise de normalisation (AFNOR). 1993. Food microbiology- Detection of List-
Difco Fraser Broth Supplement
eria monocytogenes-Routine method, V 08-055. AFNOR, Paris, France. Cat. No. 211742 Tube 6 x 10 mL*
*Store at 2-8C.

Dermatophyte Test Medium Base Dermatophyte

Test Medium, Modified with Chloramphenicol
Intended Use Taplin et al. developed DTM as a screening medium for the
Dermatophyte Test Medium (DTM) is a selective and selective isolation and detection of dermatophytes from clinical
differential medium used for the detection and presumptive specimens.5 A combination of three antimicrobial agents
identification of dermatophytes from clinical and veterinary (cycloheximide, chlortetracycline and gentamicin) inhibited
specimens.1 Because of the unavailability of one of the inhibi- bacteria and saprophytic yeasts and molds. Lack of availability
tory agents, chlortetracycline, Dermatophyte Test Medium of chlortetracycline in late 1992 resulted in the substitution of
(DTM), Modified with Chloramphenicol is recommended as chloramphenicol for chlortetracycline.
a substitute for the original DTM formation. Dermatophytes are presumptively identified based on gross
morphology and the production of alkaline metabolites, which
Summary and Explanation raise the pH and cause the phenol red indicator to change the
Dermatophytes cause cutaneous fungal infections of the hair, color of the medium from yellow to pink to red.3-5 Taplin et al.
skin and nails generally referred to as tinea or ringworm.2-4 reported the medium (with chlortetracycline) to be 97 to 100%
Members of the genera Trichophyton, Microsporum and accurate for identifying dermatophytes.5
Epidermophyton are the most common etiologic agents of
these infections. Principles of the Procedure
The soy peptone provides nitrogenous and carbonaceous
User Quality Control substances essential for microbial growth. Dextrose is a source
Identity Specifications of energy for metabolism. The pH indicator, phenol red, is
BBL Dermatophyte Test Medium Base used to detect acid production.
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane- Cycloheximide inhibits most saprophytic molds. The additives,
ous material.
gentamicin and chloramphenicol, aid in the selectivity of
Solution: 4.05% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
the medium. Gentamicin inhibits gram-negative bacteria
to medium, yellow orange, clear to including Pseudomonas species. Chloramphenicol is a broad-
slightly hazy. spectrum antibiotic that inhibits a wide range of gram-
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow orange, clear positive and gram-negative bacteria.
to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 4.05% Formula
Solution at 25C: pH 5.5 0.2
BBL Dermatophyte Test Medium Base
Cultural Response Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal ................................ 10.0 g
BBL Dermatophyte Test Medium Base

Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Prepare the medium per label directions with added gentamicin sulfate- Phenol Red ................................................................. 0.2 g
chloramphenicol solution. Inoculate with fresh cultures and incubate at Cycloheximide ............................................................ 0.5 g
25 2C for 7 days. Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY REACTION
Aspergillus niger 16404 Partial to Directions for Preparation from
complete inhibition Dehydrated Product
Microsporum audouinii 9079 Fair to good Alkaline (red)
1. Suspend 40.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
Pseudomonas
aeruginosa 10145 Partial to _ Mix thoroughly.
complete inhibition 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Trichophyton completely dissolve the powder.
mentagrophytes 9533 Fair to good Alkaline (red)
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.

180
 Desoxycholate Agar

4. Cool to 50C and add gentamicin sulfate and chloramphenicol Inoculation onto conventional media is recommended for
(0.1 g of each per L). definitive identification of isolates presumptively identified as
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using dermatophytes.
stable, typical control cultures.
Limitation of the Procedure
Procedure The complete classification of dermatophytes depends on
Inoculate the specimen as soon as possible after it is received in microscopic observations of direct and slide culture prepara-
the laboratory. Implant cutaneous specimens by gently pressing tions along with biochemical and serological tests.6
the samples into the agar surface.
References
For isolation of fungi from potentially contaminated specimens, 1. Isenberg. 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for Microbi-
a nonselective medium should be inoculated along with the ology, Washington, D.C.
2. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1994. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
selective medium. Incubate plates at 22-25C in an inverted St. Louis, Mo.
3. Kane and Summerbell. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
position (agar side up) with increased humidity and tubes with clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
4. Kwon-Chung and Bennett. 1992. Medical mycology. Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia, Pa.
caps loosened to allow air to circulate. 5. Taplin, Zaias, Rebell and Blank. 1969. Arch. Dermatol. 99:203-209.
6. Larone. 1995. Medically important fungi: a guide to identification, 3rd ed. American Society for
Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Expected Results
Dermatophytes produce typical morphology and a pink to red Availability D
color in the medium around the colony within 10-14 days of BBL Dermatophyte Test Medium Base
incubation. Disregard color changes after the fourteenth day Cat. No. 212330 Dehydrated 500 g
of incubation because they may be caused by contaminating BBL Dermatophyte Test Medium, Modified

fungi.5 with Chloramphenicol

BS10 MCM7
Certain strains of Candida albicans are capable of converting United States and Canada
the indicator to red, but the yeast can be recognized by Cat. No. 299636 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
their white bacteria-like colonial appearance. Certain 299701 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
nondermatophyte fungi rarely can produce alkaline products Europe
Cat. No. 254429 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
(false positives).
*Store at 2-8C.

Desoxycholate Agar
Intended Use of normal intestinal bacteria ferment lactose (red colonies),
Desoxycholate Agar is a slightly selective and differential while Salmonella and Shigella species do not ferment lactose
plating medium used for isolating and differentiating gram- (colorless colonies).
negative enteric bacilli.
Formula
Summary and Explanation Difco Desoxycholate Agar
1
Desoxycholate Agar as formulated by Leifson demonstrated Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
improved recovery of intestinal pathogens from specimens Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
containing normal intestinal flora. The medium was an Sodium Desoxycholate ............................................... 1.0 g
improvement over other media of the time because the Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
chemicals, citrates and sodium desoxycholate, in specified Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.0 g
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 1.0 g
amounts, worked well as inhibitors. This medium has been
Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 1.0 g
used to screen for Salmonella spp. and Shigella spp. from clinical Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
specimens.2 Neutral Red ................................................................ 0.03 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Principles of the Procedure
Peptone provides nitrogen and carbon for general growth Directions for Preparation from
requirements. Lactose is the fermentable carbohydrate. Sodium Dehydrated Product
chloride and dipotassium phosphate maintain the osmotic 1. Suspend 45 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
balance of the medium. Sodium desoxycholate, ferric citrate thoroughly.
and sodium citrate inhibit growth of gram-positive bacteria. 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Neutral red is a pH indicator. Agar is the solidifying agent. completely dissolve the powder. Avoid overheating. DO
Differentiation of enteric bacilli is based on fermentation NOT AUTOCLAVE.
of lactose. Bacteria that ferment lactose produce acid and, in 3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
the presence of neutral red, form red colonies. Bacteria that stable, typical control cultures.
do not ferment lactose form colorless colonies. The majority
181
Section III
D Desoxycholate Agar, cont.

Enterobacter aerogenes
User Quality Control ATCC 13048

Identity Specifications
Difco Desoxycholate Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Pinkish beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Solution: 4.5% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is reddish-orange,
slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Orange, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 4.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Desoxycholate Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 18-24 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-2103 Marked
inhibition
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good Pink w/bile
precipitate
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 30-300 Good Colorless

Procedure Availability
For a complete discussion on the isolation of enteric bacilli, Difco Desoxycholate Agar
refer to appropriate procedures outlined in the references.2-4 COMPF SMWW
Cat. No. 227310 Dehydrated 500 g
Expected Results Europe
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.2-4 Cat. No. 254010 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Japan
Cat. No. 251550 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
References 251507 Prepared RODAC Plates Pkg. of 30*
1. Leifson. 1935. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 40:581.
2. Grasmick. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American *Store at 2-8C.
Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
4. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

Desoxycholate Citrate Agar

Intended Use Desoxycholate Citrate Agar effectively isolates intestinal
Desoxycholate Citrate Agar is a moderately selective and pathogens (Salmonella and Shigella species) by inhibiting
differential plating medium used for isolating enteric bacilli, coliforms and many Proteus species.
particularly Salmonella and many Shigella species.
Principles of the Procedure
Summary and Explanation Infusion from meat is a source of carbon and nitrogen. This
ingredient is used because the inhibition of coliforms produced
Desoxycholate Citrate Agar is a modification of Desoxycholate
is greater than when an extract or simple peptone is used.1
Agar formulated by Leifson.1 His original medium demon-
Peptone provides carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals.
strated improved recovery of intestinal pathogens from
Lactose is the fermentable carbohydrate. Sodium citrate and
specimens containing normal intestinal flora by using citrates
sodium desoxycholate inhibit gram-positive bacteria, coliforms
and sodium desoxycholate in specified amounts as inhibitors
and Proteus species. Ferric ammonium citrate aids in the
to gram-positive bacteria.
detection of H2S-producing bacteria. Neutral red is a pH
Leifson modified his original medium by increasing the indicator. Agar is the solidifying agent.
concentration of sodium citrate and sodium desoxycholate
In the presence of neutral red, bacteria that ferment lactose
and found Desoxycholate Citrate Agar reliable for isolating
produce acid and form red colonies. Bacteria that do not
many Salmonella and Shigella species.1
182
 Desoxycholate Citrate Agar, cont.

Uninoculated Salmonella typhimurium

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 14028

Identity Specifications
Difco Desoxycholate Citrate Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Pinkish-beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 7.0% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is orange-red, very
slightly to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Orange-red, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 7.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.5 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Desoxycholate Citrate Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 18-24 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR H 2S
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-2103 Marked to
complete
inhibition
D
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Partial to Pink
complete with bile
inhibition precipitate
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Fair to good Colorless +
Shigella flexneri 12022 102-103 Fair Colorless

ferment lactose form colorless colonies. If the bacteria Procedure

produce H 2S, the colonies will have black centers. The 1. Inoculate specimen directly onto surface of medium.
majority of normal intestinal bacteria ferment lactose and 2. Incubate plates at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. Plates can
do not produce H2S (red colonies without black centers). be incubated for an additional 24 hours if no lactose
Salmonella and Shigella spp. do not ferment lactose but
fermenters are observed.
Salmonella may produce H2S (colorless colonies with or
without black centers). Lactose-fermenting colonies may
have a zone of precipitation around them caused by the
Expected Results
precipitation of desoxycholate in the presence of acid. Lactose nonfermenters produce transparent, colorless to light
pink or tan colored colonies with or without black centers.
Formula Lactose fermenters produce a red colony with or without a
Difco Desoxycholate Citrate Agar bile precipitate.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Meat, Infusion from 330 g ......................................... 9.5 g Limitations of the Procedure
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g 1. Coliform strains may be encountered that will grow on this
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Citrate ......................................................... 20.0 g medium, making it difficult to detect pathogens.
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 2.0 g 2. Heavy inocula should be distributed over the entire surface
Sodium Desoxycholate ............................................... 5.0 g of the medium to prevent complete masking of pathogens
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g
Neutral Red ................................................................ 0.02 g by coliform organisms.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Reference
Directions for Preparation from 1. Leifson. 1935. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 40:581.

Dehydrated Product
Availability
1. Suspend 70 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Difco Desoxycholate Citrate Agar
thoroughly.
EP
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Cat. No. 227410 Dehydrated 500 g
completely dissolve the powder. Avoid overheating. DO
NOT AUTOCLAVE.
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

183
Section III
D Desoxycholate Lactose Agar

Desoxycholate Lactose Agar

Intended Use Sodium desoxycholate and sodium citrate inhibit growth of
Desoxycholate Lactose Agar is a slightly selective and differ- gram-positive bacteria. Neutral red is a pH indicator. Agar
ential plating medium used for isolating and differentiating is the solidifying agent.
gram-negative enteric bacilli and for enumerating coliforms Differentiation of enteric bacilli is based on fermentation of
from water, wastewater, milk and dairy products. lactose. Bacteria that ferment lactose produce acid and, in the
presence of neutral red, form red colonies. Bacteria that do
Summary and Explanation
not ferment lactose form colorless colonies. The majority of
Desoxycholate Lactose Agar is a modification of Desoxycholate
normal intestinal bacteria ferment lactose (red colonies) while
Agar formulated by Leifson.1 His original medium demon-
Salmonella and Shigella species do not ferment lactose
strated improved recovery of intestinal pathogens from speci-
(colorless colonies).
mens containing normal intestinal flora by using citrates and
sodium desoxycholate in specified amounts as inhibitors to Formula
gram-positive bacteria.
Difco Desoxycholate Lactose Agar
2 3
Standard methods manuals for dairy and water specified a Approximate Formula* Per Liter
modification of Desoxycholate Agar to contain less sodium Proteose Peptone ..................................................... 10.0 g
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
desoxycholate and, accordingly, be less inhibitory to gram- Sodium Desoxycholate ............................................... 0.5 g
positive bacteria. This formulation, known as Desoxycholate Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Lactose Agar, was used in pour plate procedures for isolation Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 2.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
and enumeration of coliforms in milk, water and other Neutral Red ................................................................ 0.03 g
specimens. The medium is no longer included in recent *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

editions of these manuals.

Directions for Preparation from
Principles of the Procedure Dehydrated Product
Peptone provides nitrogen and carbon for general growth 1. Suspend 42.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
requirements. Lactose is a fermentable carbohydrate. Sodium thoroughly.
chloride maintains the osmotic balance of the medium.

Uninoculated Escherichia coli

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 25922

Identity Specifications
Difco Desoxycholate Lactose Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Pinkish beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 4.25% solution, soluble in purifed water
upon boiling. Solution is pinkish-red, very
slightly to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Pinkish-red, very slightly to slightly
opalescent.
Reaction of 4.25%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Desoxycholate Lactose Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 18-24 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Bacillus subtilis 6633 ~103 Inhibition
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 30-300 Good Pink, may
have slight bile
precipitate
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 ~103 Inhibition
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good Pink w/bile
precipitate
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 30-300 Good Colorless

184
 Dextrose Agar

2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to References

completely dissolve the powder. Avoid overheating. DO 1. Leifson. 1935. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 40:581.
2. American Public Health Association. 1960. Standard methods for the examination of dairy
NOT AUTOCLAVE. products, 11th ed. American Public Health Association, New York, N.Y.
3. American Public Health Association. 1960. Standard methods for the examination of water and
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using wastewater, 11th ed. American Public Health Association, New York, N.Y.
stable, typical control cultures.
Availability
Procedure Difco Desoxycholate Lactose Agar
See appropriate references for specific procedures.2,3 Cat. No. 242010 Dehydrated 500 g

Expected Results
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.2,3

Dextrose Agar Dextrose Broth

Intended Use of early, abundant organism growth and shortening the lag
Dextrose Agar is used for cultivating a wide variety of micro- periods of older cultures. Because of the increased dextrose D
organisms with or without added blood. content, Dextrose Agar is not suitable for observation of
Dextrose Broth is used for cultivating fastidious microorgan- hemolysis when supplemented with 5% sheep, rabbit or horse
isms and for detecting gas from enteric bacilli. blood.
Dextrose Broth is a highly nutritious broth suitable for the
Summary and Explanation
isolation of fastidious organisms and specimens containing a
In 1932, Norton1 recommended a basal medium containing
low inoculum. The addition of 0.1-0.2% agar to Dextrose
0.5-1% dextrose with approximately 5% defibrinated blood
Broth facilitates anaerobic growth and aids in dispersion of
for the isolation of many fastidious bacteria, including
reducing substances and CO2 formed in the environment.2 The
Haemophilus and Neisseria. Dextrose is an energy source used
low agar concentration provides suitable conditions for both
by many organisms. The high concentration of this ingredient
aerobic growth in the clear upper zone and for microaero-
makes Dextrose Agar a suitable medium for the production
philic and anaerobic growth in the lower, flocculent agar zones.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications Cultural Response
Difco Dextrose Agar Difco Dextrose Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Medium beige, homogeneous, free- Prepare the medium per label directions without (plain) and with sterile
flowing. 5% defibrinated sheep blood (SB). Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C
Solution: 4.3% solution, soluble in purified under appropriate atmospheric conditions for 18-48 hours.
water upon boiling. Solution is medium
INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
amber, very slightly to slightly opales- ORGANISM ATCC CFU PLAIN WITH SB
cent.
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good Good
Prepared Appearance: Plain Light to medium amber, Neisseria meningitidis 13090 102-103 Poor Good
slightly opalescent without significant
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good Good
precipitate.
With blood Cherry-red, opaque. Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 102-103 Fair Good
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good Good
Reaction of 4.3%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2 Difco Dextrose Broth
Difco Dextrose Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions with one set of tubes contain-
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, homogeneous, free-flowing. ing fermentation vials and a second set of tubes (without fermentation
vials) containing medium supplemented with 0.1% agar. Inoculate and
Solution: 2.3% solution, soluble in purified incubate at 35 2C. Read growth and gas production at 18-48 hours.
water. Solution is light amber, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear. RECOVERY
INOCULUM W/0.1%
Reaction of 2.3% ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY GAS AGAR
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2 Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good + Good
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 102-103 Good Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good Good
Streptococcus
pneumoniae 6305 102-103 Good Good
Streptococcus
pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good Good

185
Section III
D Dextrose Agar, cont.

Dextrose Agar and Dextrose Broth are specified in the 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Compendium of Methods for the Microbiological Examina- 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
tion of Foods.3 stable, typical control cultures.
Principles of the Procedure OPTIONAL: To prepare blood agar, aseptically add 5%
Beef extract and peptones provide nitrogen, amino acids sterile defibrinated blood to the medium at 45-50C. Mix well
and vitamins. Dextrose is a carbon source, and the increased and dispense as desired.
concentration is a distinguishing characteristic of this medium
Difco Dextrose Broth
from other formulations used as blood agar bases. Agar is the
solidifying agent. 1. Dissolve 23 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Supplementation with 5% blood provides additional growth 3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
factors for fastidious microorganisms. stable, typical control cultures.
Formulae OPTIONAL: To prepare medium with agar, add 1-2 g of agar
Difco Dextrose Agar
per liter of medium.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g Procedure
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 2.0 g For a complete discussion on microorganism isolation and
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ....................................... 3.0 g
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g identification, refer to appropriate references.
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g Expected Results
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Difco Dextrose Broth
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g References
1. Norton. 1932. J. Lab. Clin. Med. 17:558.
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 2.0 g 2. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ....................................... 3.0 g vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g 3. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. Availability
Difco Dextrose Agar
Directions for Preparation from COMPF
Dehydrated Product Cat. No. 267100 Dehydrated 500 g
Difco Dextrose Agar

Difco Dextrose Broth

1. Suspend 43 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix COMPF

Cat. No. 263100 Dehydrated 500 g
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder.

Dextrose Starch Agar

Intended Use cannot be used to maintain stock cultures of organisms
Dextrose Starch Agar is used for cultivating pure cultures of capable of splitting starch; acid production from starch will
Neisseria gonorrhoeae and other fastidious microorganisms. create an unsatisfactory environment.
Dextrose Starch Agar was used by Wilkins, Lewis and Barbiers1
Summary and Explanation in an agar dilution procedure to test the activity of antibiotics
Dextrose Starch Agar is recommended as a complete solid against Neisseria species.
medium for the propagation of pure cultures of Neisseria
gonorrhoeae. This highly nutritious medium without additives Principles of the Procedure
will also support excellent growth of N. meningitidis, Strepto- Peptone and gelatin provide the nitrogen, vitamins and amino
coccus pneumoniae and S. pyogenes. Dextrose Starch Agar, in acids in Dextrose Starch Agar. Soluble starch improves growth
half concentration, is recommended as a stock culture agar for response. Dextrose is a carbon source. Sodium chloride
maintains the osmotic balance of the medium, and disodium
the maintenance of N. gonorrhoeae, N. meningitidis and other
organisms not capable of hydrolyzing starch. This medium phosphate is a buffering agent. Agar is the solidifying agent.

186
 Dextrose Tryptone Agar

Formula Directions for Preparation from

Difco Dextrose Starch Agar Dehydrated Product
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 1. Suspend 65 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 15.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.0 g thoroughly.
Soluble Starch .......................................................... 10.0 g 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g completely dissolve the powder.
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 3.0 g
Gelatin ..................................................................... 20.0 g
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Agar ......................................................................... 10.0 g 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. stable, typical control cultures.

User Quality Control Procedure

For a complete discussion of the isolation and identification of
Identity Specifications
N. gonorrhoeae and other fastidious pathogens, refer to the
Difco Dextrose Starch Agar
procedures described in Clinical Microbiology Procedures
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Handbook2 and Manual of Clinical Microbiology.3
Solution: 6.5% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
amber, opalescent with a precipitate. Expected Results D
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, opalescent with a Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
precipitate.
Reaction of 6.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
Limitation of the Procedure
This medium is not recommended for isolation of gonococci
Cultural Response from mixed cultures.
Difco Dextrose Starch Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at References
35 2C for 18-48 hours under appropriate atmospheric conditions. 1. Wilkins, Lewis and Barbiers. 1956. Antibiot. Chemother. 6:149.
2. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol.1. American Society for
ORGANISM ATCC
INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
Neisseria gonorrhoeae 43070 102-103 Good American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 102-103 Good
Pasteurella multocida 19427 102-103 Good Availability
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6303 102-103 Good Difco Dextrose Starch Agar
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good Cat. No. 266200 Dehydrated 500 g

Dextrose Tryptone Agar

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Dextrose Tryptone Agar is used for cultivating thermophilic Dextrose Tryptone Agar contains peptones to provide carbon
flat-sour microorganisms associated with food spoilage. and nitrogen sources for general growth requirements.
Dextrose is the carbohydrate source. Bromcresol purple is the
Summary and Explanation pH indicator. Agar is the solidifying agent.
In the 1930s, the National Canners Association specified the
use of Dextrose Tryptone Agar for isolating flat sour organ- Formula
isms from food products.1 Flat sour spoilage of canned foods Difco Dextrose Tryptone Agar
is caused by Bacillus coagulans (Bacillus thermoacidurans). Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Tryptone ..................................................................... 8.0 g
Bacterial growth results in a 0.3-0.5 drop in pH, while the Peptone ..................................................................... 2.0 g
ends of the can remain flat. B. coagulans is a soil microorgan- Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g
ism that can be found in canned tomato products and dairy Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
products. Conditions favorable for multiplication of the Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 0.04 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
bacterium can result in spoilage of the food product.2
Dextrose Tryptone Agar can also be used to isolate other food
spoilage bacteria: mesophilic aerobic spore formers in the
genera Bacillus and Sporolactobacillus and thermophilic flat
sour spore formers such as B. stearothermophilus.2

187
Section III
D Dextrose Tryptone Agar, cont.

Uninoculated Bacillus coagulans

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 7050

Identity Specifications
Difco Dextrose Tryptone Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light, greenish-beige, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
Solution: 3.0% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is purple, slightly
opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Purple, slightly opalescent without
significant precipitate.
Reaction of 3.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Dextrose Tryptone Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate plates by the pour
plate method and incubate at 55 2C for 40-48 hours.
INOCULUM DEXTROSE
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY FERMENTATION
Bacillus coagulans 7050 102-103 Good + (yellow)
Bacillus
stearothermophilus 7953 102-103 Good + (yellow)

Directions for Preparation from Expected Results

Dehydrated Product A change in the color of the medium from purple to yellow
1. Suspend 30 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix indicates dextrose fermentation.
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to References
1. National Canners Association. 1933. Bacterial standards for sugar.
completely dissolve the powder. 2. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Availability
stable, typical control cultures. Difco Dextrose Tryptone Agar
COMPF
Procedure Cat. No. 280100 Dehydrated 500 g
See appropriate references for specific procedures.

Differential Reinforced Clostridial Agar

Intended Use for clostridia. Non-heat-shocked tubes showing blackening must
Differential Reinforced Clostridial Agar is used for enumerating be heat shocked to kill off vegetative cells and subcultured
and cultivating sulfite-reducing clostridia. into DRCA to confirm the presence of sulfite-reducing
clostridia.
Summary and Explanation
Differential Reinforced Clostridial Medium (broth) was Principles of the Procedure
developed by Gibbs and Freame in 1965.1 The medium could Peptones, beef extract, yeast extract, starch and L-cysteine
be used to enumerate clostridia in foods using the Most provide nutrients and co-factors required for good growth of
Probable Number (MPN) method. Differential Reinforced clostridia. Dextrose is included in the medium as an energy
Clostridial Agar (DRCA) is based on Differential Reinforced source. Partial selectivity of the medium is achieved through
Clostridial Medium, but with the addition of agar. the addition of sodium acetate. Agar is the solidifying agent.
The assay is performed using unheated and heat-shocked tubes Anaerobiosis in the medium is detected by the redox indicator
of DRCA containing replicate dilutions of the test sample. resazurin. The addition of ferric ammonium citrate to the
Blackening of the medium is presumptive evidence for the medium is used to detect sulfite reduction. Blackening of the
presence of sulfite-reducing clostridia. In this method, medium is due to the formation of iron sulfide.
heat-shocked tubes showing blackening are confirmatory

188
 Differential Reinforced, cont.

Formula 4. Heat one of the duplicate DRCA tubes prepared in step 2

Difco Differential Reinforced Clostridial Agar to 80 1C for 10 minutes to kill vegetative cells.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 5. Incubate both tubes, heat-shocked and non-heat-shocked,
Tryptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g at 35 1C for 5 days; examine for sulfite reduction.
Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Beef Extract, Desiccated ............................................. 8.0 g Non-heat-shocked cultures showing blackening must be heat
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 1.0 g
L-Cysteine HCl ........................................................... 0.5 g
shocked and subcultured to DRCA for confirmation.
Starch ......................................................................... 1.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g Alternative Procedures
Sodium Acetate ......................................................... 5.0 g Inoculate samples onto the surface of agar plates using
Sodium Bisulfite ......................................................... 0.5 g
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.5 g
the streak plate or spread plate technique. Samples may be
Resazurin ................................................................... 2.0 mg inoculated into DRCA using the pour plate technique.
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g Medium in agar deeps may be inoculated using the stab
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. technique. DRCA may be used to overlay the membrane filter
in the membrane filter technique. Incubate plates and tubes at
Directions for Preparation from 35 1C for 24-48 hours under anaerobic conditions. Agar
Dehydrated Product deeps may be incubated under aerobic conditions when
1. Suspend 42.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
following the Prickett tube method.2
D
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Expected Results
completely dissolve the powder. The presence of clostridia is presumptively indicated by
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. blackening in the medium. Heat-shocked tubes showing black-
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using ening should be considered confirmatory for the presence
stable, typical control cultures. of sulfite-reducing clostridia.

Procedure References
1. Gibbs and Freame. 1965. J. Appl. Microbiol. 28:95.
1. Prepare serial 10-fold dilutions of the sample in 1/4 strength 2. Miller, Gerrett and Prickett. 1939. Food Res. 4:447.
Ringers solution or 0.1% peptone water.
2. Depending on the amount of the initial sample, transfer Availability
1 mL or 0.1 mL of the appropriate dilution, prepared in Difco Differential Reinforced Clostridial Agar
step 1, to the bottom of a molten (45-50C) DRCA tube. Cat. No. 264120 Dehydrated 500 g
Prepare a duplicate tube using the same procedure.
3. Tighten the caps on the tubes.

Clostridium septicum
User Quality Control ATCC 12464

Identity Specifications
Difco Differential Reinforced Clostridial Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 4.25% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light to
medium amber, clear to slightly opales-
cent while hot; upon cooling, solution
becomes light red.
Prepared Appearance: Light pink, clear to slightly opalescent
without significant precipitate.
Reaction of 4.25%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Differential Reinforced Clostridial Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C in an anaerobic atmosphere for 72 hours.
INOCULUM BLACK
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLONIES
Clostridium bifermentans 638 102-103 Good +
Clostridium perfringens 12924 102-103 Good +
Clostridium septicum 12464 102-103 Good +

189
Section III
D Dubos Media

Dubos Media
Dubos Broth Base Dubos Medium Albumin
Dubos Oleic Agar Base Dubos Oleic Albumin
Complex Dubos Broth, Enriched
Intended Use Mycobacteria grow more rapidly in broth media. Primary
Dubos Broth Base is used with Dubos Medium Albumin for culture of all specimens in broth media is recommended.10
rapidly cultivating pure cultures of Mycobacterium tuberculosis. Polysorbate 80 in the medium acts as a surfactant, dispersing
the bacilli, which increases growth.
Dubos Oleic Agar Base is used with Dubos Oleic Albumin
Complex and penicillin for isolating and determining the Dubos Broth, Enriched is a modified medium based on the
susceptibility of M. tuberculosis. formulation of Dubos et al.4 This formulation differs from the
original in that it has a strong buffering system and an acid
Dubos Broth, Enriched is a prepared medium used for the
pH.11 The particular value of Dubos Broth, Enriched is that
cultivation of pure cultures of M. tuberculosis.
it provides dispersed growth, free of excessive clumps, which
can be used to prepare a relatively uniform suspension of
Summary and Explanation
mycobacteria for use in bacterial studies. It is also used as a
Mycobacterial infections, particularly tuberculosis, are a
subculture and enrichment medium for the rapid cultivation
worldwide health problem. Almost three million people
of M. tuberculosis and other mycobacterial species from treated
worldwide die of tuberculosis each year.1 During the mid
clinical specimens and from direct inoculation of specimens
1980s, the number of tuberculosis (TB) cases in the U.S.
that may yield pure cultures; e.g., cerebrospinal fluid.12
began increasing. Prior to this time, the number of cases
in the U.S. had been decreasing, reaching a low in 1984.2
Principles of the Procedure
Non-tuberculous mycobacterial infections have also increased
Peptone and asparagine are sources of nitrogen. Disodium
since the mid 1980s.3
phosphate and monopotassium phosphate are sources of
Dubos Broth is prepared according to the Dubos, Fenner and phosphates and, along with calcium chloride, help maintain
Pierce4 modification of the medium originally described the pH of the medium. Magnesium sulfate, ferric ammonium
by Dubos and Davis5 and Dubos and Middlebrook.6 sulfate, zinc sulfate and copper sulfate are sources of trace
Dubos and Middlebrook6 described Dubos Oleic Medium metals and sulfates. Polysorbate 80, an oleic acid ester,
Albumin as suitable for primary isolation and cultivation of supplies essential fatty acids for the replication of mycobac-
the tubercle bacillus and for studying colony morphology. teria. Bovine albumin acts as a protective agent by binding
In comparative studies, Dubos Oleic Albumin Agar Medium free fatty acids that may be toxic to mycobacteria. The
was superior to other media studied for primary isolation.7,8 albumin is heat-treated to inactivate lipase, which may
release fatty acids from the polysorbate 80. Phosphate
There are two types of solid culture media for the primary buffers maintain the pH of the medium. Agar is the solidify-
isolation of mycobacteria, those that have coagulated egg as a ing agent.
base and those that have agar. Lowenstein formulations are
examples of media that contain egg; Middlebrook and Dubos Formulae
formulations contain agar. Difco Dubos Broth Base
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Agar based media are not liquefied by contaminating
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 0.5 g
proteolytic organisms but overgrowth may occur. These Asparagine ................................................................. 2.0 g
media are recommended for specimens from nonsterile sites.9 Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 0.2 g
The medium is clear so colonies of mycobacteria can be viewed Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
Disodium Phosphate (anhydrous) ............................... 2.5 g
through a stereo microscope even if contaminating organisms Ferric Ammonium Citrate ......................................... 50.0 mg
are present. Colonies can be observed in 10-12 days. Magnesium Sulfate .................................................. 10.0 mg
Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.5 mg
Drugs may be added to Dubos media in exact concentrations Zinc Sulfate ................................................................ 0.1 mg
because the medium is solidified with agar rather than by Copper Sulfate ........................................................... 0.1 mg
inspissation. Also, there is less drug inactivation when egg Difco Dubos Medium Albumin
ingredients are not present. A 5% solution of albumin fraction V from bovine plasma and
7.5% dextrose in normal saline (0.85%).

190
 Dubos Media, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications Cultural Response
Difco Dubos Broth Base Difco Dubos Broth Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Prepare the medium per label directions with added Dubos Medium
neous. Albumin (10 mL of albumin to 90 mL base). Inoculate and incubate at
Solution: 0.65 g/90 mL solution, soluble in 35 2C with 5-10% CO2 for up to 3 weeks.
purified water upon boiling. Solution INOCULUM
is very light to light amber, clear, may ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY
have a slight precipitate. Mycobacterium fortuitum 6841 ~103 Good
Prepared Appearance: Very light to light amber, clear, may Mycobacterium intracellulare 13950 ~103 Good
have a slight precipitate. Mycobacterium kansasii 12478 ~103 Good
Reaction of 0.65 g/90 mL Mycobacterium scrofulaceum 19981 ~103 Good
Solution at 25C: pH 6.6 0.2 Mycobacterium tuberculosis
Difco Dubos Oleic Agar Base
H37Ra 25177 ~103 Good
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Difco Dubos Oleic Agar Base
Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
water upon boiling. Solution is light 35 2C with 5-10% CO2 for up to 3 weeks.
amber, slightly opalescent to opales-
cent with fine precipitate. INOCULUM
D
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent to
opalescent with fine precipitate. Escherichia coli 25922 ~103 Partial inhibition
Mycobacterium fortuitum 6841 ~300 Good
Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.6 0.2 Mycobacterium intracellulare 13950 ~300 Good
Mycobacterium kansasii 12478 ~300 Good
Mycobacterium scrofulaceum 19981 ~300 Good
Mycobacterium tuberculosis
H37Ra 25177 ~300 Good

Difco Dubos Oleic Agar Base Directions for Preparation from

Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 0.5 g Dehydrated Product
Asparagine ................................................................. 1.0 g Difco Dubos Broth Base
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g 1. Suspend 1.3 g of the powder in 180 mL of purified water
Disodium Phosphate (anhydrous) ............................... 2.5 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g (or 170 mL of purified water and 10 mL glycerol). Mix
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ......................................... 50.0 mg thoroughly.
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................. 10.0 mg 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.5 mg
Zinc Sulfate ................................................................ 0.1 mg completely dissolve the powder.
Copper Sulfate ........................................................... 0.1 mg 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to below 50C.
Difco Dubos Oleic Albumin Complex 4. Aseptically add 20 mL Dubos Medium Albumin and mix
A 0.05% solution of alkalinized oleic acid in a 5% solution of thoroughly. Incubate medium for 24 hours to test for
albumin fraction V in normal saline (0.85%). microbial load.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Precautions13,14 stable, typical control cultures.
1. Biosafety Level 2 practices, containment equipment and Difco Dubos Oleic Agar Base
facilities are required for non-aerosol-producing manipula- 1. Suspend 4 g of the powder in 180 mL of purified water.
tions of clinical specimens such as preparation of acid-fast Mix thoroughly.
smears. All aerosol-generating activities must be conducted 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
in a Class I or II biological safety cabinet. completely dissolve the powder.
2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to below
facilities are required for laboratory activites in the propa- 50-55C.
gation and manipulation of cultures of M. tuberculosis and 4. Aseptically add 20 mL Dubos Oleic Albumin Complex and
M. bovis. Animal studies also require special procedures. 5,000-10,000 units of penicillin (25-50 units per mL of
medium). Mix thoroughly.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

191
Section III
D Dubos Media, cont.

Procedure References
1. Musser. 1995. Clin. Microbiol. Rev. 8:496.
The test procedures are recommended by the Centers for 2. Klietmann. 1995. Clin. Microbiol. Newsl. 17:65.
Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) for primary isolation 3. Metchock, Nolte and Wallace. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
from specimens containing mycobacteria.13 N-acetyl-L-cysteine- 4. Dubos, Fenner and Pierce. 1950. Am. Rev. Tuberc. 61:66.
5. Dubos and Davis. 1946. J. Exp. Med. 83:409.
sodium hydroxide (NALC-NaOH) solution is recommended 6. Dubos and Middlebrook. 1947. Am. Rev. Tuberc. 56:334.
7. Roberts, Wallace and Erlich. 1950. Am. Rev. Tuberc. 61:563.
as a gentle, but effective digesting and decontaminating agent. 8. Byham. 1950. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 20:678.
These reagents are provided in the BBL MycoPrep Specimen 9. Isenberg (ed.). 1994. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, suppl. 1. American Society for
Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Digestion/Decontamination Kit. For detailed decontamination 10. Tenover, Crawford, Huebner, Geiter, Horsburgh and Good. 1993. J. Clin. Microbiol. 31:767.
11. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
and culturing instructions, consult an appropriate text.3,9,12,13,15 vol. 1 Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
12. Cernoch, Enns, Saubolle and Wallace. 1994. Cumitech 16A, Laboratory diagnosis of the mycobac-
terioses. Coord. Ed. Weissfeld, American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Specimens that are less likely to be contaminated with other 13. Kent and Kubica. 1985. Public health mycobacteriology: a guide for the level III laboratory. USDHHS,
microorganisms (cerebrospinal fluid, pleural fluid, tissue Centers for Disease Control, Atlanta, Ga.
14. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
biopsy, etc.) may be inoculated directly into the medium. Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
Consult appropriate texts for recommended procedures.3,9,12,13,15 15. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
St. Louis, Mo.
Incubate the tubes at 35 2C in a CO2-enriched atmosphere.
Keep the tube caps loosened for at least one week to permit Availability
circulation of CO2, but tighten the caps thereafter to prevent Difco Dubos Broth Base
dehydration. Loosen briefly once a week to replenish CO2. Cat. No. 238510 Dehydrated 500 g
Six to eight weeks of incubation may be necessary for evidence Difco Dubos Medium Albumin

of growth of many mycobacteria. AOAC

Cat. No. 230910 Tube, 20 mL Pkg. of 12*
Expected Results Difco Dubos Oleic Agar Base

Growth of mycobacterial colonies on the agar medium or in Cat. No. 237310 Dehydrated 500 g
broth media, as indicated by turbidity compared to an Difco Dubos Oleic Albumin Complex

uninoculated control. Cat. No. 237510 Tube, 20 mL Pkg. of 12*

BBL Dubos Broth, Enriched

Limitations of the Procedure Cat. No. 295697 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10*
1. Negative culture results do not rule-out active infection *Store at 2-8C.
by mycobacteria. Some factors that are responsible for
unsuccessful cultures are:
The specimen was not representative of the infectious
material; i.e., saliva instead of sputum.
The mycobacteria were destroyed during digestion and
decontamination of the specimen.
Gross contamination interfered with the growth of the
mycobacteria.
Proper aerobic conditions and increased CO2 tension
were not provided during incubation.
2. Mycobacteria are strict aerobes and growth is stimulated
by increased levels of CO2. Screw caps on tubes or bottles
should be handled as directed for exchange of CO2.

192
 m E Agar

m E Agar Esculin Iron Agar

Intended Use Program. The use of m EI Agar eliminates the necessity of
m E Agar is used with nalidixic acid and triphenyltetrazolium transferring the incubated membrane to Esculin Iron Agar.
chloride in isolating and differentiating enterococci from
water by membrane filtration and in an in situ esculin test on Principles of the Procedure
Esculin Iron Agar. m E Agar is a highly selective and differential primary
isolation medium that supports good growth of enterococci.
Esculin Iron Agar (EIA substrate) is used for enumerating
Peptone and yeast extract provide carbon, nitrogen, minerals,
enterococci from water by membrane filtration based on escu-
vitamins and other growth factors for organism growth.
lin hydrolysis.
Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance of the medium.
Nalidixic acid and sodium azide act as selective agents to
Summary and Explanation
inhibit gram-negative bacteria. Cycloheximide inhibits fungi.
Enterococcus species are a subgroup of fecal streptococci that
At the concentration in the formula, 2,3,5-triphenyltetrazolium
includes E. faecalis, E. faecium, E. gallinarum and E. avium.1
chloride (TTC) dyes enterococci colonies. TTC slightly inhib-
Enterococci are differentiated from other streptococci by their
its growth of other microorganisms. In addition, the
ability to grow in 6.5% sodium chloride, at pH 9.6, and at 10C
elevated incubation temperature of 41C inhibits some indig-
and 45C.1 The enterococci portion of the fecal streptococcus
enous microbial flora. Esculin is hydrolyzed by enterococci to
group is a valuable bacterial indicator for determining the extent
form esculetin and dextrose. The esculetin reacts with the iron
of fecal contamination of recreational surface waters.1
salt (ferric ammonium citrate) contained in the medium to
Slanetz and Bartley2 first reported quantitating enterococci by produce a black to reddish brown complex that appears in the
the membrane filter method in 1957. A wide range of levels of medium surrounding the colonies. The production of black to E
enterococci in water can be enumerated and detected because reddish brown complex verifies the colonies as enteroccci and
small or large volumes of water can be analyzed by the facilitates their enumeration. Agar is the solidifying agent.
membrane filter technique.3 In 1961, Kenner et al.4 described
the KF method for detecting and quantitating fecal strepto- Formulae
cocci. In 1966, Isenberg et al.5 reported a plating procedure Difco m E Agar
with differentiation based on esculin hydrolysis. Levin, Fischer Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Yeast Extract ............................................................ 30.0 g
and Cabelli6 compared the KF method with Isenbergs plating Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
method, and found the latter method resulted in better Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 15.0 g
recovery of fecal streptococci. They developed m E Agar as a Esculin ........................................................................ 1.0 g
primary isolation medium for enterococci, and Esculin Iron Cycloheximide ............................................................ 0.05 g
Sodium Azide ............................................................. 0.15 g
Agar as an in situ substrate test medium for identifying Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
organisms capable of hydrolyzing esculin.6 Difco or BBL Esculin Iron Agar
Two research projects by the U.S. Environmental Protection Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Esculin ........................................................................ 1.0 g
Agency (USEPA) evaluated the relationships between swimming- Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.5 g
associated illness and the ambient densities of indicator bacte- Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
ria.7,8 The studies demonstrated that enterococci have a better *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

correlation with swimming-associated illness for both marine

Directions for Preparation from
and fresh waters than fecal coliforms. Escherichia coli has a
correlation in fresh water equal to enterococci but does not
Dehydrated Product
Difco m E Agar
correlate as well in marine waters.7,8 This suggests that entero-
cocci may be better indicator organisms for some recreational 1. Suspend 7.12 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water.
waters.7,8 Mix thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
m E Agar and Esculin Iron Agar are prepared according to the pletely dissolve the powder.
formulas specified in standard methods.1 These media are used 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 45C.
in the membrane filter technique for the isolation of fecal strep- 4. Add 0.024 g of nalidixic acid and 1.5 mL TTC Solution
tococcus and enterococcus groups.1 This procedure can be used 1% (0.015 g Triphenyl Tetrazolium Chloride). Adjust to
to test marine and fresh water sources. pH 7.1 if necessary.
m E Agar with the addition of 0.075% indoxyl--D-glucoside 5. Dispense 4-6 mL into 9 x 50 mm Petri dishes.
(m EI Agar) is recommended by the USEPA as a one-step pro- 6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
cedure for the isolation and identification of enterococci in stable, typical control cultures.
recreational water.9 This method is used in the USEPA Beaches NOTE: Nalidixic acid is soluble in water with an alkaline pH.
Environmental Assessment Closure and Health (BEACH)
193
Section III
E m E Agar, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco m E Agar BBL Esculin Iron Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
Solution: 7.12% solution, soluble in purified ous material.
water upon boiling. Solution is light to Solution: 1.65% solution, soluble in purified
medium amber with bluish cast, very water upon boiling. Solution is medium
slightly opalescent. to dark tan with blue tint, clear to
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber with blue cast, slightly hazy.
slightly opalescent. Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark tan with a blue tint,
Reaction of 7.12% clear to slightly hazy.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2 Reaction of 1.65%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2
Difco Esculin Iron Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan to dark tan, free-flowing, homoge- Cultural Response
neous.
BBL Esculin Iron Agar
Solution: 1.65% solution, soluble in purified Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate plates of m E Agar
water upon boiling. Solution is medium with the test organisms using the membrane filtration technique and
amber with bluish cast, very slightly incubate at 41 0.5C for 48 hours. Remove the filters and place over
opalescent. prepared Esculin Iron Agar plates. After 20 minutes of incubation at
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber with blue cast, slightly 41 0.5C, count colonies giving positive esculin reaction.
opalescent.
REACTION ON
Reaction of 1.65% ORGANISM ATCC ESCULIN IRON AGAR
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2 Enterococcus faecalis 29212 Pink to red colonies, dark
brown to black precipitate
Cultural Response Escherichia coli 25922 None
Difco m E Agar and Difco Esculin Iron Agar
m E Agar Esculin Iron Agar
Prepare m E Agar per label directions and pour into 9 x 50 mm plates. Enterococcus faecalis Enterococcus faecalis
Dilute the test organisms and filter through membrane filters. Place the ATCC 29212 ATCC 29212
filters on m E Agar plates and incubate the plates in an upright position
for 48 hours at 41 0.5C. Remove the filters and place over prepared
Esculin Iron Agar plates. After 20 minutes of incubation at 41 0.5C,
count colonies giving positive esculin reaction (formation of black or red-
dish brown precipitate).
REACTION
INOCULUM RECOVERY ON ESCULIN
ORGANISM ATCC CFU/10 mL ON M E AGAR IRON AGAR
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 20-60 Good/pink Black or
to red colonies reddish
brown ppt
Enterococcus faecalis 33186 20-60 Good/pink Black or
to red colonies reddish
brown ppt
Escherichia coli 25922 20-60 Marked to None
complete inhibition

Difco or BBL Esculin Iron Agar Procedure

1. Suspend 1.65 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water 1. Follow the membrane filter procedure described in Standard
(16.5 g in 1 L of purified water). Mix thoroughly. Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater.1
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- 2. Choose a sample size so that 20-60 colonies will result.
pletely dissolve the powder. 3. Place the filter on an m E Agar plate and incubate for
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 45C. 48 hours at 41 0.5C.
4. Dispense 4-6 mL into 9 x 50 mm Petri dishes. 4. After incubation, remove the filter from m E Agar and place
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using on an Esculin Iron Agar plate.
stable, typical control cultures. 5. Incubate Esculin Iron Agar at 41 0.5C for 20 minutes.

194
 EC Medium

7. Cabelli. 1981. Health effects criteria for marine recreational waters. U.S. Environmental Protection
Expected Results1 Agency. EPA-600/1-80-031. Cincinnati, Ohio.
8. Dufour. 1983. Health effects criteria for fresh recreational waters. U.S. Environmental Protection
Pink to red enterococci develop a black or reddish-brown pre- Agency. Cincinnati, Ohio.
cipitate on the underside of the filter. Count colonies using a 9. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1997. EPA method 1600: Membrane filter test method for
enterococci in water. USEPA. EPA-821-R-97-004. Washington, D.C.
fluorescent lamp and a magnifying lens. Report results as esti-
mated number or organisms per 100 mL of water. Availability
Difco m E Agar
Limitations of the Procedure SMWW
1. m E Agar and Esculin Iron Agar should be used in sequence. Cat. No. 233310 Dehydrated 100 g
2. Incubation at 41 0.5C is recommended. 233320 Dehydrated 500 g

3. Approximately 10% false-positive esculin reactions may be Difco Esculin Iron Agar
expected. When used as m EI Agar, USEPA reports a 6.0% SMWW
Cat. No. 248810 Dehydrated 100 g
false positive and 6.5% false negative rate with m E Agar.
BBL Esculin Iron Agar

References SMWW
1. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and Cat. No. 298118 Dehydrated 500 g
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
2. Slanetz and Bartley. 1957. J. Bacteriol. 74:591. Difco TTC Solution 1%

3. American Society for Testing and Materials. 1996. Annual book of ASTM standards. Section 11,
Water and environmental technology. PCN: 01-110296-16. ASTM, West Conshohocken, Pa. SMWW
4. Kenner, Clark and Kabler. 1960. Appl. Microbiol. 9:15. Cat. No. 231121 Tube 30 mL*
5. Isenberg, Goldberg and Sampson. 1970. Appl. Microbiol. 20:433.
6. Levin, Fischer and Cabelli. 1975. Appl. Microbiol. 30:66. *Store at 2-8C.

EC Medium
E
Intended Use and nut meats and reported that the test worked optimally
EC Medium is a culture medium for the detection of coliform when conducted at 45.5C with incubation being limited to
bacteria at 35C and of Escherichia coli at an elevated tem- 24 hours.3
perature (44.5 or 45.5C). EC Medium is recommended for use in the fecal coliform Most
Probable Number (MPN) procedure for the examination of
Summary and Explanation water, wastewater and foods.4,5 The procedure employing EC
EC Medium was devised by Hajna and Perry1 and is used for Medium provides information regarding the source of the
the examination of water, milk, shellfish and other material coliform group (fecal or nonfecal) when used as a confirma-
for evidence of fecal pollution. Tennant et al. reported on the tory test.6 It should not be used for the direct isolation of
use of this medium for the estimation of E. coli densities in coliforms since prior enrichment in a presumptive medium for
seawater and shellfish.2 Fishbein and Surkiewicz used the EC optimal recovery of fecal coliforms is required.
confirmation test for recovery of E. coli from frozen foods

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco EC Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, freeflowing,homogeneous.
Solution: 3.7% solution, soluble in purified
water upon warming. Solution is light
amber, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear.
Reaction of 3.7%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco EC Medium
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate tubes
with fermentation vials at 44.5 0.2C for 24 2 hours.
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY GAS
Enterococcus faecalis 19433 103 Inhibition
Uninoculated Escherichia coli
Escherichia coli 25922 103 Good + Tube ATCC 25922
Escherichia coli 8739 103 Good +

195
Section III
E EC Medium, cont.

Principles of the Procedure Procedure

EC Medium contains peptone as a source of nutrients. Refer to the various compendia for the specific procedures
Lactose provides fermentable carbohydrate for the growth of employing EC Medium.4-8
coliforms. Bile salts are inhibitory for gram-positive bacteria,
particularly bacilli and fecal streptococci. The medium has Expected Results
a strong potassium phosphate buffering system to control the Refer to the compendia for the results expected when using this
pH in the presence of considerable fermentative action. Sodium medium for the detection of coliforms and E. coli.4-8
chloride maintains the osmotic balance of the medium.
Limitation of the Procedure
Formula False-negative reactions in recovering coliforms from water
Difco EC Medium supplies can occur due to low pH, refrigeration and use of
Approximate Formula* Per Liter bactericidal or bacteriostatic agents.9
Tryptose ................................................................... 20.0 g
Lactose ....................................................................... 5.0 g
Bile Salts No. 3 ........................................................... 1.5 g References
1. Hajna and Perry. 1943. Am. J. Public Health 33:550.
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 4.0 g 2. Tennant, Reid, Rockwell and Bynoe. 1961. Can. J. Microbiol. 1:733.
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.5 g 3. Fishbein and Surkiewicz. 1964. Appl. Microbiol. 12:127.
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g 4. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 5. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
6. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
Directions for Preparation from Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
7. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
Dehydrated Product International, Gaithersburg, Md.
8. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. 1. AOAC
1. Dissolve 37 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix International, Gaithersburg, Md.
thoroughly. 9. Ray. 1986. J. Food. Prot. 49:651.

2. Warm slightly to completely dissolve the powder.

3. Dispense into tubes containing inverted fermentation vials.
Availability
Difco EC Medium
4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF EPA ISO SMD SMWW USDA
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Cat No. 231420 Dehydrated 100 g
stable, typical control cultures. 231430 Dehydrated 500 g
231410 Dehydrated 10 kg

EC Medium with MUG

Intended Use EC Medium with MUG is prepared according to the formula
EC Medium with MUG is used for detecting Escherichia coli specified by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency6 and
in water, food and milk. standard methods for water and food testing.7,8

Summary and Explanation Principles of the Procedure

EC Medium was developed by Hajna and Perry to improve 1 Peptone provides the nitrogen, vitamins and amino acids in
the methods for the detection of coliforms and E. coli. This EC Medium with MUG. Lactose is the carbon source in this
medium consists of a buffered lactose broth with the addition medium. Bile Salts No. 3 is the selective agent against gram-
of 0.15% Bile Salts No. 3. Growth of sporeformers and fecal positive bacteria, particularly bacilli and fecal streptococci.
streptococci is inhibited by the bile salts, while growth of Dipotassium phosphate and monopotassium phosphate are
E. coli is enhanced. EC Medium with MUG is the same buffering agents. Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance
formula as EC Medium with the addition of 4 methyl- of the medium.
umbelliferyl--D-glucuronide.
E. coli produces the enzyme glucuronidase that hydrolyzes
Feng and Hartman2 developed a rapid assay for E. coli by incor- MUG to yield a fluorogenic product that is detectable under
porating 4-methylumbelliferyl--D-glucuronide (MUG) into long-wave (366 nm) UV light. The addition of MUG to EC
Lauryl Tryptose Broth at a final concentration of 100 g/mL.
Medium provides another criterion, in addition to growth
Robison3 compared the fluorogenic assay with present method-
response and gas production, to determine the presence of
ology and found that total agreement between the two methods
was 94.8%. Moburg4 determined the amountof MUG could be E. coli in food and environmental samples.
reduced to a final concentration of 50 g/mL without adversely
affecting results. Koburger and Miller5 recommended the incor-
poration of MUG into EC Broth for use in testing shellfish.

196
 EC Medium with MUG, cont.

Formula of E. coli are positive for both gas production and fluorescence.
Difco EC Medium with MUG Non-E. coli coliforms that grow may exhibit fluorescence but
Approximate Formula* Per Liter will not produce gas.
Tryptose ................................................................... 20.0 g
Lactose ....................................................................... 5.0 g Strains of Salmonella, Shigella and Yersinia that produce
Bile Salts No. 3 ........................................................... 1.5 g glucuronidase may be encountered. These strains must be
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 4.0 g distinguished from E. coli on the basis of other parameters;
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.5 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g i.e., gas production, growth at 44.5C.
MUG (4-methylumbelliferyl--D-glucuronide) ............ 0.05 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. Limitations of the Procedure
1. Strains of E. coli that fail to grow in EC Medium with
Directions for Preparation from
MUG, fail to produce gas, or fail to produce glucuronidase
Dehydrated Product may infrequently be encountered.
1. Dissolve 37.1 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. 2. The presence of endogenous glucuronidase in shellfish
Mix thoroughly. samples may cause false positive fluorescent reactions at
2. Warm slightly to completely dissolve the powder. the presumptive stage. To prevent this problem, the use of
3. Dispense into test tubes containing inverted fermentation EC Medium with MUG in the confirmatory stage has been
vials. recommended.5
4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using References
stable, typical control cultures. 1. Hajna and Perry. 1943. Am. J. Public Health 33:550.
2. Feng and Hartman. 1982. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 43:1320.
3. Robison. 1984. App. Environ. Microbiol. 48:285.
Procedure 4. Moberg. 1985. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 50:1383.

E
5. Koburger and Miller. 1985. J. Food Prot. 48:244.
Follow the methods and procedures as stated in appropriate 6. Federal Register. 1991. National primary drinking water regulation; analytical techniques; coliform
bacteria. Fed. Regist. 56:636.
references.6-8 7. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
8. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
Expected Results national, Gaithersburg, Md.

Following incubation, observe tubes for growth, production

Availability
of gas and fluorescence. Positive gas production is demonstrated
Difco EC Medium with MUG
by displacement of the medium from the fermentation vial.
BAM CCAM EPA SMWW
Positive MUG reactions exhibit a bluish fluorescence under Cat. No. 222100 Dehydrated 100 g
long-wave (approximately 366 nm) UV light. Typical strains 222200 Dehydrated 500 g

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco EC Medium with MUG
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.71% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light amber, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear.
Reaction of 3.71%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco EC Medium with MUG
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate tubes in duplicate
with fresh 18-24 hour cultures. Incubate the first set at 35 2C for
24 2 hours and the second set at 44.5 0.2C for 24 2 hours.
Read fluorescence under a long-wave UV light.
RECOVERY AT RECOVERY AT
ORGANISM ATCC 35C/GAS 44.5C/GAS FLUORESCENCE
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 Good/ Inhibition to good/
Enterococcus faecalis 19433 Inhibition/ Inhibition to good/
Escherichia coli 25922 Good/+ Good/+ + Escherichia coli
ATCC 25922

197
Section III
E EC Medium, Modified

EC Medium, Modified
Novobiocin Antimicrobic Supplement
Intended Use Formulae
EC Medium, Modified is used with Novobiocin Antimicrobic Difco EC Medium, Modified
Supplement in the detection of Escherichia coli O157:H7 in Approximate Formula* Per Liter
meat and poultry products. Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 20.0 g
Bile Salts No. 3 ........................................................... 1.12 g
Lactose ....................................................................... 5.0 g
Summary and Explanation Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 4.0 g
EC Medium, Modified and Novobiocin Antimicrobic Supple- Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.5 g
ment are based on the formula for modified EC broth with Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
novobiocin (mEC+n) as described by Okrend and Rose.1 In Difco Novobiocin Antimicrobic Supplement
modifying the EC Medium formula, Okrend and Rose reduced Formula Per 10 mL Vial
the Bile Salts No. 3 from 1.5 grams per liter to 1.12 grams per Sodium Novobiocin .................................................. 20.0 mg
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
liter and added 20 milligrams per liter of sodium novobiocin.
Okrend et al. reported that mEC+n was useful in the
Directions for Preparation from
enrichment and detection of E. coli O157:H7 from meats and
poultry products.2-4 Dehydrated Product
Difco EC Medium, Modified
Principles of the Procedure 1. Dissolve 36.6 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
Peptone supports good growth of E. coli O157:H7 and is rich 2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to room
in peptides and nitrogen. Lactose is an additional source of temperature.
carbon for organisms, such as E. coli, that can ferment this 4. Aseptically add 10 mL rehydrated Novobiocin Antimicrobic
sugar. Dipotassium phosphate and monopotassium phosphate Supplement. Mix well.
are buffers that facilitate recovery of injured cells. Sodium 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
chloride provides a suitable ionic environment for growth of stable, typical control cultures.
microorganisms.
Difco Novobiocin Antimicrobic Supplement
Selectivity of the medium is achieved by the incorporation of Bile
1. Aseptically add 10 mL sterile purified water to the vial.
Salts No. 3 into the base medium and by the addition of sodium
2. Shake to dissolve the contents.
novobiocin to the complete medium. These agents suppress the
growth of nuisance organisms commonly found in foods.
The sodium novobiocin is provided in the freeze-dried state as Procedure
Novobiocin Antimicrobic Supplement. This supplement is Many procedures and systems have been described for the
rehydrated before use with sterile purified water. use of Modified EC Medium with novobiocin in the selective
and differential enrichment of E. coli O157:H7 in meat and
User Quality Control poultry samples. Consult appropriate references.4-6 Listed
below is the U.S. Department of Agricultures recommended
Identity Specifications procedure for the enrichment and detection of E. coli
Difco EC Medium, Modified O157:H7 in meat and poultry samples using EC Medium,
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Modified, with novobiocin.2-4
Solution: 3.66% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light to medium 1. Inoculate 25 g of meat sample into 225 mL of EC Medium,
amber, clear. Modified, with novobiocin in a stomacher bag. Blend or
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear. stomach as required (i.e., 2 minutes) for thorough mixing.
Reaction of 3.66% 2. Incubate at 35C for 24 hours.
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2
3. Dilute cultures 10-fold in Butterfields Phosphate Diluent
Difco Novobiocin Antimicrobic Supplement

and inoculate 0.1 mL of appropriate dilutions using a spread
Lyophilized Appearance: White cake.
plate technique onto MacConkey Sorbitol Agar (MSA) and
Rehydrated Appearance: Colorless solution.
MacConkey Sorbitol Agar with BCIG (5-bromo-4-chloro-
Cultural Response 3-indoxyl--D-glucuronide) agar plates.
Difco EC Medium, Modified 4. Incubate plates at 42C for 24 hours.
Prepare the medium (without added novobiocin) per label directions. 5. Examine MSA plates for sorbitol-negative colonies (white)
Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for a maximum of 24 hours. and MSA-BCIG plates for sorbitol-negative, BCIG-negative
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY colonies (white).
Enterococcus faecalis 33186 103 None to poor 6. Subculture sorbitol-negative colonies to respective plates of
Escherichia coli O157:H7 35150 10-102 Good EMB Agar and Phenol Red Sorbitol (PRS) Agar containing
MUG (4-methylumbelliferyl--D-glucuronide).
198
 EE Broth Mossel

7. Incubate EMB and PRS-MUG Agar plates at 35C for 18- on EMB Agar are indicative of E. coli O157:H7. These cultures
24 hours. Examine plates for sorbitol fermentation, MUG should be tested serologically and with additional biochemical
reaction (fluorescence), and typical E. coli growth on EMB testing to confirm their identity as E. coli O157:H7.
Agar.
References
Expected Results 1. Okrend and Rose. 1989. Isolation and identification of E. coli O157:H7 from meat. USDA Food
Safety Inspection Service. Rev. 3 of Laboratory Communication no. 38. E. coli O157:H7. 20
Growth in EC Medium, Modified, with novobiocin is demon- December 1989. U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, D.C.
2. Okrend, Rose and Bennett. 1990. J. Food Prot. 53:249.
strated as an increase in turbidity. Colonies of E. coli O157:H7 3. Okrend, Rose and Lattuada. 1990. J. Food Prot. 53:941.
4. Okrend, Rose and Matner. 1990. J. Food Prot. 53:936.
appear white on MacConkey Sorbitol and MacConkey 5. Hawkins and Orme. 1995. Proc. West. Sec., Amer. Soc. Animal Sci. vol. 46.
6. Johnson, Durham, Johnson and MacDonald. 1995. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 61:386.
Sorbitol-BCIG Agars. Fermentation of sorbitol in Phenol Red
Sorbitol Broth is demonstrated by the production of a yellow Availability
color in the medium. With sorbitol nonfermenters, the color Difco EC Medium, Modified
of the medium remains red to reddish purple. Positive MUG COMPF USDA
reactions are demonstrated as a blue fluorescence in the Cat. No. 234020 Dehydrated 500 g
medium under long-wave UV light. Colonies of E. coli on EMB 234010 Dehydrated 2 kg
Agar appear blue-black to dark purple. A green metallic sheen Difco Novobiocin Antimicrobic Supplement
may also be present. COMPF USDA
Cat. No. 231971 Vial 6 10 mL*
Cultures that are sorbitol-negative, MUG-negative and produce
*Store at 2-8C.
blue-black to dark purple colonies with a green metallic sheen

EE Broth Mossel E
Intended Use The enumeration of Enterobacteriaceae is of great concern in
EE Broth Mossel is used for selectively enriching and detecting monitoring the sanitary condition of food. Enterobacteriaceae
Enterobacteriaceae, particularly from foods. can be injured in food-processing procedures, which include
exposure to low temperatures, sub-marginal heat, drying,
Summary and Explanation radiation, preservatives or sanitizers.2 Recovery relies on proper
EE Broth Mossel is prepared according to the formula of Mossel, resuscitation of damaged cells.
Visser and Cornelissen.1 The formula contains dextrose to
facilitate growth of most Enterobacteriaceae, thus ensuring the Principles of the Procedure
detection of Salmonella and other lactose-negative organisms. Peptones provide nitrogen, vitamins and amino acids. Dextrose
EE Broth Mossel should be used as an enrichment broth, is a carbon source. Disodium phosphate and monopotassium
followed by a selective medium; e.g., Violet Red Bile Agar. phosphate are buffering agents. Brilliant green and oxgall
are selective agents.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco EE Broth Mossel
Dehydrated Appearance: Light green, homogeneous, free-flowing.
Solution: 4.5% solution, soluble in purified water.
Solution is emerald green, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Emerald green, clear.
Reaction of 4.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco EE Broth Mossel
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 18-24 hours and up to 48 hours if necessary.
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY ACID
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 102-103 Good + (yellow)
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good + (yellow)
Shigella boydii 12030 102-103 Good Uninoculated Escherichia coli
Tube ATCC 25922
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Marked to
complete inhibition

199
Section III
E EE Broth Mossel, cont.

Formula 4. Prepare plates such as Violet Red Bile Agar for streaking. To
Difco EE Broth Mossel
ensure recovery of dextrose fermenters, add 1% dextrose
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
before boiling.
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 12.0 g 5. Streak a loopful of the enrichment culture onto the
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 8.0 g prepared plates.
Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g 6. Incubate the plates for 18-24 hours at 35-37C. Examine
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 8.0 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 2.0 g
for the presence of coliforms which appear pink to
Brilliant Green .......................................................... 13.5 mg purplish-red on Violet Red Bile Agar. The color of coliform
Oxgall ....................................................................... 10.0 g colonies may vary if a different medium is used.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
For a complete discussion on Enterobacteriaceae in food
Directions for Preparation from testing, refer to procedures in appropriate references.3,4
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 45 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Expected Results
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1-2 minutes to Acid production causes the color of EE Broth Mossel to
completely dissolve the powder. become yellow. A negative reaction results in no color change
3. Heat at 100C (water bath or flowing steam) for 30 minutes. and the medium remains green.
DO NOT AUTOCLAVE.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
References
1. Mossel, Vissar and Cornellisen. 1963. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 26:444.
stable, typical control cultures. 2. Hartman and Minnich. 1981. J. Food Prot. 44:385.
3. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
national, Gaithersburg, Md.
Procedure 4. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
1. Inoculate flasks of EE Broth Mossel with approximately
10 g of homogenized food or other material to be tested.
2. Shake the inoculated medium thoroughly for a few seconds to
Availability
Difco EE Broth Mossel
mix well.
COMPF EP
3. Incubate for a total of 20-24 hours at 35-37C. Shake the
Cat. No. 256620 Dehydrated 500 g
flasks after the first 3 hours of incubation.

mEI Agar
Intended Use In 1997, the USEPA improved on the mE agar formulation
mEI Agar is a selective culture medium used for the chromogenic by reducing the triphenyltetrazolium chloride component and
detection and enumeration of enterococci in water by the adding the chromogen, indoxyl--D-glucoside. The new
single-step membrane filtration technique. It conforms with U.S. medium, mEI Agar,1,5 was developed as a single-step proce-
Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) Approved Method dure that does not require the transfer of the membrane filter
1600: Enterococci in Water by Membrane Filtration Using to another substrate. Observation of a blue halo around
membrane-Enterococcus Indoxyl--D-Glucoside Agar (mEI). colonies in 24 hours is confirmatory for the presence of
enterococci. A wide range of sample volumes or dilutions can
Summary and Explanation be tested by this single-step MF procedure for the detection
Enterococci are found in the feces of humans and other warm- and enumeration of enterococci in potable, fresh, estuarine,
blooded animals. Although some strains are ubiquitous and marine and shellfish-growing waters.
are not related to fecal pollution, the presence of enterococci BD mEI Agar conforms to the 1986 revisions to the bacterio-
in water is an indication of fecal pollution and the possible logical ambient water quality criteria, that included the
presence of enteric pathogens.1 In epidemiological studies indicator bacteria E. coli and enterococci, which provide
conducted by the USEPA, it was found that the presence better correlation with swimming-associated gastrointestinal
of enterococci had a higher correlation with swimming- illness. In response to this health risk, the USEPA established
associated gastroenteritis in fresh and marine water environ- the Beaches Environmental Assessment Closure and Health
ments than fecal coliforms.2 In 1986, the USEPA recommended (Beach) Program. This method is published for use in the Beach
that both Escherichia coli and enterococci be used as bacterial Program.5
water quality indicators to monitor recreational waters.3
The USEPA published false-positive rate is 6.0% and false-
A two-step membrane filter (MF) method4 was developed by negative rate is 6.5%.5 Colonies having a blue halo can be
Levin et al. to measure enterococci in fresh and marine recre- verified as enterococci by appropriate biochemical procedures
ational waters. Using mE agar, the method required a 48-hour in instances where required in evidence gathering or for
incubation and a transfer of the membrane to another substrate performing quality control for the initial use of the test.5
medium, Esculin Iron Agar, to differentiate enterococci.
200
 mEI Agar, cont.

Principles of the Procedure 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes and cool in a 50C water
mEI Agar contains peptone that supplies nitrogen and carbon bath.
compounds. Sodium chloride maintains osmotic equilibrium. 4. Prepare a solution of 0.24 g of nalidixic acid in 5 mL
Esculin is hydrolyzed by enterococci to form esculetin and of purified water. Add a few drops of 0.1 N NaOH to
dextrose. Cycloheximide inhibits fungi. Sodium azide acts as a dissolve. Add this solution to 1 L of mEI medium.
selective agent to inhibit gram-negative bacteria. Yeast extract 5. Add 0.02 g of triphenyltetrazolium chloride separately to
provides trace elements, vitamins and amino acids. The the mEI medium and mix well.
addition of the chromogen indoxyl--D-glucoside results in 6. Dispense 5 mL amounts into 9 50 mm or 15 60 mm
the production of an insoluble indigo blue complex by plates and allow to solidify.
-D-glucosidase-positive enterococci, which diffuses into the 7. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
surrounding medium, forming a blue halo around the colony.6 stable, typical control cultures.
Agar is incorporated into the medium as the solidifying agent.
Procedure
Formula 1. Collect and prepare water samples in accordance to
Difco mEI Agar
recommended guidelines.7,8
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 2. Test sample volumes following the membrane filtration
Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g procedure described in Standard Methods for the Exami-
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 15.0 g
Esculin ........................................................................ 1.0 g nation of Water and Wastewater.7 Select sample volumes
Cycloheximide ............................................................ 0.05 g to produce 20-60 colonies on the membrane filter.
Sodium Azide ............................................................. 0.15 g 3. After sample has been filtered, aseptically remove membrane
Yeast Extract ............................................................ 30.0 g
Indoxyl--D-glucoside ................................................ 0.75 g filter from filter base and roll it onto mEI Agar to avoid the
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g formation of bubbles between the membrane and the agar
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. surface. E
4. Invert inoculated plates and incubate for 24 2 hours at
Directions for Preparation from
41 0.5C.
Dehydrated Product 5. After incubation, count and record the number of colonies
1. Suspend 72 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. with a blue halo using an illuminated lens with a 2-5
Mix thoroughly. magnification.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 6. Calculate and report the number of enterococci colonies
completely dissolve the powder. per 100 mL of sample.

Enterococcus faecalis
User Quality Control ATCC 19433

Identity Specifications
Difco mEI Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light to medium beige, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
Solution: 7.2% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium to dark
amber, very slightly to slightly opales-
cent,.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear to very
slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 7.2%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco mEI Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 41
0.5C for 24 2 hours. Count all colonies with blue halos.
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY APPEARANCE
Enterococcus faecalis 19433 20-80 Good Blue halo
Enterococcus faecium 19434 20-80 Good Blue halo
Escherichia coli 25922 20-80 Marked to
complete inhibition

201
Section III
E mEI Agar, cont.

3. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1986. Bacteriological ambient water quality criteria:
Expected Results availability. Fed. Reg. 51(45):8012.
4. Levin, Fischer and Cabelli. 1975. Appl. Microbiol. 30:66.
Colonies with a blue halo regardless of color may be presump- 5. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 2002. Method 1600: Enterococci in water by membrane
tively identified as enterococci. Refer to the USEPA Microbiology filtration using membrane-enterococcus indoxyl--D-glucoside agar (mEI). Publication EPA-821-
R-02-022. USEPA Office of Water, Office of Science and Technology, USEPA, Washington, DC.
Methods Manual, Part II, Section C, 3.5 for general counting 6. Messer and Dufour. 1998. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 64:678.
7. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
rules.9 wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
8. ASTM International. 2002. Annual book of ASTM standards. Water and environmental
technology. ASTM International, West Conshohocken, Pa.
Limitations of the Procedure 9. Bordner, Winter and Scarpino (ed.). 1978. Microbiological methods for monitoring the
environment: water and wastes. Publication EPA-600/8-78-017. Environmental Monitoring and
1. Choose a water sample size that will result in 20-60 colonies Support Laboratory, Office of Research and Development, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
Cincinnati, Ohio.
per filter.
2. Minimize the exposure of mEI Agar to light before and Availability
during incubation, as light may destroy the chromogen. Difco mEI Agar
3. Overheating may cause darkening of the medium.2 EPA
Cat. No. 214885 Dehydrated 100 g
References 214881 Dehydrated 500 g
1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1997. Method 1600: Membrane filter test method for en-
terococci in water. Publication EPA-821-R-97-004a. Office of Water, USEPA, Washington, D.C.
BBL mEI Agar
2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 2000. Improved enumeration methods for the recreational Cat. No. 215045 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
water quality indicators: enterococci and Escherichia coli. Publication EPA/821/R-97/004. Office
of Science and Technology, USEPA, Washington, D.C.
215047 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
*Store at 2-8C.

EVA Broth
Intended Use selective agents and formulated a medium using ethyl violet
EVA (Ethyl Violet Azide) Broth is used for detecting and and sodium azide as selective agents. The medium known as
confirming enterococci in water and other specimens as an Ethyl Violet Azide (EVA) Broth is specific for enterococci. In
indication of fecal contamination. conjunction with Azide Dextrose Broth, EVA Broth is used
to confirm the presence of enterococci.
Summary and Explanation
The presence of enterococci in water and other specimens
Principles of the Procedure
indicates fecal contamination. Mallmann and Seligmann1 EVA Broth contains peptones as sources of carbon, nitrogen,
compared various enrichment media for detecting fecal strep- vitamins and minerals. Dextrose is the carbohydrate. Sodium
tococci and found that Azide Dextrose Broth presumptively azide and ethyl violet inhibit gram-positive bacilli and
identified the streptococci. However, because gram-positive gram-positive cocci other than enterococci. Monopotassium
bacteria other than enterococci grow in that medium, confir- and dipotassium phosphates buffer the medium. Sodium
mation is necessary. Litsky et al.2 studied various dyes and chloride provides osmotic balance.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco EVA Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.58% solution, soluble in purified water.
Solution is light amber, clear to very slightly
opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to very slightly opal-
escent.
Reaction of 3.58%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco EVA Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 18-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Enterococcus faecalis 19433 102-103 Good
Uninoculated Enterococcus faecalis
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 102-103 Good Tube ATCC 29212
Escherichia coli 25922 103 Inhibition

202
 Egg Meat Medium

Formula Procedure
Difco EVA Broth See appropriate references for specific procedures.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 8.0 g Expected Results
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 12.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g Growth of enterococci.
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.7 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 2.7 g References
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g 1. Mallmann and Seligmann. 1950. Am. J. Pub. Health 40:286.
Sodium Azide ............................................................. 0.4 g 2. Litsky, Mallmann and Fifield. 1953. Am. J. Pub. Health 43:873.
Ethyl Violet ................................................................. 0.83 mg
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. Availability
Difco EVA Broth
Directions for Preparation from Cat. No. 212107 Dehydrated 500 g
Dehydrated Product
1. Dissolve 35.8 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

Egg Meat Medium

Intended Use Directions for Preparation from E
Egg Meat Medium is recommended for cultivating Clostridium Dehydrated Product
cultures used in detecting the sporicidal activity of disinfectants. 1. Suspend 1.5 g of the powder in 15 mL of garden soil
extract.5 Let stand at least 15 minutes to form a thoroughly
Summary and Explanation wetted, even suspension.
Egg Meat Medium is a dehydrated medium containing 2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Allow to cool.
particles of meat, egg white and calcium carbonate. 3. Avoid a rapid release of pressure after autoclaving to
The use of a combination meat and egg white culture medium prevent expelling the medium from the container.
was reported by Rettger1 in his studies on Escherichia coli and 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Enterobacter aerogenes. Later, he described the use of this stable, typical control cultures.
medium in studies of intestinal putrefaction.2 In 1923, Reddish
and Rettger3 used the medium in their detailed study of User Quality Control
Clostridium putrificum and, the following year, in a study of
Identity Specifications
other spore-forming anaerobes.4 Difco Egg Meat Medium
5
AOAC recommends Egg Meat Medium to propagate and Dehydrated Appearance: Brown, free-flowing, homogeneous
maintain cultures of Clostridium for use in testing sporicidal pellets.
activity of liquid and gaseous chemicals. Solution: 15% solution, partially insoluble in
purified water. Solution is a light to
medium amber, clear to very slightly
Principles of the Procedure opalescent supernatant over insoluble
Beef muscle provides carbon, nitrogen, inorganic salts, pellets.
vitamins and a variety of other nutrients to support bacterial Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear to very
growth. Egg whites are a source of protein. Calcium carbonate slightly opalescent supernatant over
helps neutralize acids and displaces oxygen in the medium. insoluble pellets.
Reaction of 15%
Formula Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Difco Egg Meat Medium

Cultural Response
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Muscle, from .................................................. 454.0 g
Difco Egg Meat Medium
Egg White, from ........................................................ 6 eggs Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Calcium Carbonate .................................................... 5.0 g 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Bacillus subtilis 19659 102-103 Good
Clostridium sporogenes 3584 102-103 Good

203
Section III
E Egg Meat Medium, cont.

Procedure References
1. Rettger. 1903. Am. J. Physiol. 8:284.
Refer to AOAC5 for detailed procedures to determine presence 2. Rettger. 1906. J. Biol. Chem. 2:71.
or absence of sporicidal activity of disinfectants against specified 3.
4.
Reddish and Rettger. 1923. J. Bacteriol. 8:375.
Reddish and Rettger. 1924. J. Bacteriol. 9:13.
spore-forming bacteria. 5. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. I,
6.3.05A(a)(4). AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.

Expected Results Availability

Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results. Difco Egg Meat Medium
AOAC
Cat. No. 242100 Dehydrated 500 g

Egg Yolk Agar, Modified

Intended Use Proteolysis is indicated by clear zones in the medium surrounding
Egg Yolk Agar, Modified is a differential medium used in the growth.
isolation and presumptive differentiation of Clostridium spp.
And other obligately anaerobic bacilli. Procedure
This medium should be reduced immediately prior to inocula-
Summary and Explanation tion by placing it under anaerobic conditions for 18-24 hours.3
Egg Yolk Agar, Modified is based on an egg yolk medium An efficient and convenient method for obtaining suitable
developed by McClung and Toabe for the isolation and anaerobic conditions is through the use of the BBL GasPak
presumptive differentiation of clostridia based on lecithinase EZ anaerobic system or an alternative anaerobic system.
and lipase production and proteolytic activity.1 Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
In this modification, CDC Anaerobe Agar (without vitamin specimens.
K1, which is subsequently supplied by egg yolks) is used as the Inoculate an enrichment broth, such as Enriched Thioglycollate
basal medium instead of the McClung and Toabe formulation. Medium, at the same time as the primary plates to detect small
CDC Anaerobe Agar is an enriched, nonselective medium that numbers of anaerobes.
was developed at the Center for Disease Control (currently
named the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention [CDC]) Incubate plates and tubes immediately after inoculation, with
for use in the cultivation of obligately anaerobic microorgan- plates in an inverted position (agar side up), under anaerobic
isms, particularly those found in clinical materials.2 conditions at 35C, or place the media in a holding jar flushed
with oxygen-free gas(es) until a sufficient number of plates
CDC Anaerobe Agar is supplemented with egg yolk suspension and tubes is accumulated (no longer than 3 hours).8 Incubate
for demonstration of lecithinase and lipase production and for at least 48 hours, and, if no growth occurs, continue
proteolytic activity.1-7 incubation for up to 7 days.

Principles of the Procedure Examine for growth after 48 hours of incubation. Cultures
Enzymatic digests of casein and soybean meal supply amino should not be regarded as negative until after 7 days of
acids and other complex nitrogenous substances. Yeast extract incubation.
primarily provides the B-complex vitamins. Hemin improves
the growth of anaerobic microorganisms. L-cystine is a reducing Expected Results
agent and an essential amino acid. After a minimum of 48 hours of incubation, the plates should
show isolated colonies in streaked areas and confluent growth
An egg yolk suspension is incorporated to detect the production in areas of heavy inoculation.
of lecithinase and lipase and proteolytic activity. Lecithinase
degrades the lecithin present in the egg yolks, producing an Examine for lecithinase and lipase production and proteolytic
insoluble, opaque precipitate in the medium surrounding activity. Plates with isolates negative for lipase should be held
growth. up to 7 days. Examine colonial morphology and a Gram stain
of the organism to confirm presumptive identification.
Lipase breaks down free fats present in the egg yolks, causing
an iridescent, oil on water sheen to form on the surface of
the colonies. Since the lipase reaction may be delayed, plates
should be kept up to 7 days before regarding them as negative
for lipase production.

204
 Elliker Broth

References Availability
1. McClung and Toabe. 1947. J. Bacteriol. 53:139.
2. Dowell, Lombard, Thompson and Armfield. 1977. Media for isolation, characterization and iden-
BBL Egg Yolk Agar, Modified
tification of obligately anaerobic bacteria. CDC laboratory manual. Center for Disease Control, BS10 CMPH MCM7
Atlanta, Ga.
3. Dowell and Hawkins. 1987. Laboratory methods in anaerobic bacteriology. CDC laboratory manual.
Cat. No. 297873 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
HHS Publication No. (CDC) 87-8272. Centers for Disease Control, Atlanta, Ga. *Store at 2-8C.
4. Allen, Emery and Siders. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. Jousimies-Somer, Summanen and Finegold. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken
(ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington,
D.C.
6. Holdeman, Cato and Moore (ed.). 1977. Anaerobe laboratory manual, 4th ed. Virginia Polytechnic
Institute and State University Anaerobe Laboratory, Blacksburg, Va.
7. Baron, Peterson and Finegold. 1994. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 9th ed. Mosby-Year
Book, Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
8. Martin. 1971. Appl. Microbiol. 22:1168.

Elliker Broth
Intended Use Directions for Preparation from
Elliker Broth, also known as Lactobacilli Broth, is used for Dehydrated Product
cultivating streptococci and lactobacilli, particularly in dairy 1. Suspend 48.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
procedures. thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Summary and Explanation completely dissolve the powder.
Testing for lactic acid bacteria in dairy products may be useful 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
for various reasons.1 These include determining the cause of
acid defects in dairy products, evaluating lactic starter cultures
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
E
and controlling the quality of cured cheese, cultured milks and
uncultured products.1 Lactic acid bacteria found in dairy Procedure
products are primarily Streptococcus, Lactococcus, Leuconostoc For a complete discussion on the isolation and identification
and Lactobacillus.1 of streptococci and lactobacilli, refer to standard methods in
Elliker Broth is prepared according to the formulation of Elliker, food testing.1,4-6
Anderson and Hannesson,2 and modified by McLaughlin.3 This
slightly acidic medium contains nutrients to support the growth Expected Results
of streptococci and lactobacilli. Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.

A modification of Elliker Broth, Lactic (Elliker) Agar is recom-

User Quality Control
mended for general purpose enumeration of lactic acid bacteria.1
Identity Specifications
Principles of the Procedure Difco Elliker Broth
Peptone and gelatin provide the nitrogen and amino acids Dehydrated Appearance: Light to medium beige, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
in Elliker Broth. Yeast extract is the vitamin source in this
Solution: 4.85% solution, soluble in purified
formula. Dextrose, lactose and saccharose are the fermentable water upon boiling. Solution is light
carbohydrates. Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance to medium amber, clear.
of the medium, and ascorbic acid is added to create a proper Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear.
environment for organism growth. Sodium acetate is a Reaction of 4.85%
selective agent against gram-negative bacteria. Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2

Formula Cultural Response

Difco Elliker Broth
Difco Elliker Broth
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 20.0 g 35 2C for 18-48 hours except Streptococcus cremoris which is
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g incubated at 30 2C for 18-48 hours.
Gelatin ....................................................................... 2.5 g
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Lactose ....................................................................... 5.0 g Lactobacillus casei 7469 102-103 Good
Saccharose ................................................................. 5.0 g Lactobacillus delbrueckii
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 4.0 g subsp. lactis 8000 102-103 Good
Sodium Acetate ......................................................... 1.5 g Lactobacillus sp. 11506 102-103 Fair
Ascorbic Acid ............................................................. 0.5 g Streptococcus cremoris 9596 102-103 Good
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

205
Section III
E Elliker Broth, cont.

References Availability
1. Frank, Christen and Bullerman. 1993. In Marshall (ed.), Standard methods for the examination of
dairy products. 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Difco Elliker Broth
2. Elliker, Anderson and Hannesson. 1956. J. Dairy Sci. 39:1611. SMD
3. McLaughlin. 1946. J. Bacteriol. 51:560.
4. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
Cat. No. 212183 Dehydrated 500 g
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
5. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
national, Gaithersburg, Md.
6. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th. ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

Emerson YpSs Agar

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Emerson YpSs Agar is used for cultivating Allomyces and other Yeast extract provides a source of trace elements, vitamins and
fungi. amino acids. Soluble starch provides starch for hydrolysis,
detoxification of metabolic byproducts and as a carbon source.
Summary and Explanation Dipotassium phosphate is a buffer. Magnesium sulfate is a
Emerson YpSs (Yeast protein Soluble starch) Agar is prepared source of divalent cations and sulfate. Agar is the solidifying
according to the formula given by Emerson.1 Emerson and agent.
Wilson2 used the medium at half strength for streaking
zygotes or zoospores to obtain single germlings. Formula
Fungi are extremely successful organisms, as evidenced by their Difco Emerson YpSs Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
ubiquity in nature.3 Of the estimated 250,000 species, fewer Yeast Extract .............................................................. 4.0 g
than 150 are known primary human pathogens.3 Opportunistic Soluble Starch .......................................................... 15.0 g
fungal pathogens are increasing at an impressive rate relating Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.5 g
directly to the expanding size of the immunocompromised to Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g
patient population.3 *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

User Quality Control Directions for Preparation from

Dehydrated Product
Identity Specifications 1. Suspend 40.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Difco Emerson YpSs Agar thoroughly.
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
neous.
completely dissolve the powder.
Solution: 4.05% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light to 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
medium amber, slightly opalescent, 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
may have a slight flocculent precipitate. stable, typical control cultures.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal-
escent, may have a slight flocculent
precipitate.
Procedure
Reaction of 4.05% Refer to appropriate references for specific procedures on the
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 isolation and cultivation of fungi.

Cultural Response Expected Results

Difco Emerson YpSs Agar Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate plates from fresh
3-7 day cultures in Mycophil Broth and incubate at 30 2C for
18-72 hours. References
1. Emerson. 1941. Lloydia 4:77.
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY 2. Emerson and Wilson. 1954. Mycologia 46:393.
3. Dixon, Rhodes and Fromtling. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
Allomyces macrogynus 38327 Good of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Allomyces reticulatus 42465 Good
Aspergillus niger 16404 Good Availability
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 Good Difco Emerson YpSs Agar
Cat. No. 273910 Dehydrated 500 g

206
 Endo Agar

Endo Agar
Intended Use The original formula has been modified extensively since
Endo Agar is a differential and slightly selective culture its introduction. The meat infusions have been replaced by a
medium for the detection of coliform and other enteric micro- peptic digest of animal tissue. The dye composition and
organisms. concentration also have been adjusted.
Over the years, Endo Agar has been an important medium
Summary and Explanation in the microbiological examination of potable water and
The majority of the enteric plating media developed in the early wastewater, dairy products and foods; however, the current
years of the 20th century utilized either mixtures of bile salts compendia of standard methods for the examination of these
or individual salts as selective agents to achieve inhibition of materials recommend alternative media formulations.3-5
gram-positive species. In 1904, Endo reported the develop-
ment of a culture medium for the differentiation of lactose Principles of the Procedure
fermenters from the nonfermenters in which no bile salts were The selectivity of Endo Agar is due to the sodium sulfite/basic
used.1 Inhibition of gram-positive microorganisms was achieved fuchsin combination, which results in the suppression of
by the sodium sulfite and basic fuchsin contained in the gram-positive microorganisms. It is classified as only slightly
formulation. Endos Fuchsin Sulphite Infusion Agar was the selective since other media contain more potent inhibitors
original name for this medium,2 which is known today as Endo of the gram-positive microorganisms. Coliforms ferment the
Agar. It was developed initially in order to facilitate the lactose, produce pink to rose-red colonies and similar coloration
isolation and identification of the typhoid bacillus. of the medium. The colonies of organisms that do not ferment

User Quality Control

lactose are colorless to faint against the pink background of
the medium.
E
Identity Specifications
BBL Endo Agar Formula
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous powder that may BBL Endo Agar
contain a large amount of minute to Approximate Formula* Per Liter
small dark particles. Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 3.5 g
Solution: 4.15% solution, soluble in purified Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................. 10.0 g
water upon boiling. Solution is light Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
to medium, pink rose to tan rose trace Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
orange, moderately hazy to hazy. May Sodium Sulfite ............................................................ 2.5 g
contain a moderate amount of small Basic Fuchsin .............................................................. 0.5 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
dark red particles and a large amount
of minute dark red particles.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, pink rose to tan rose
Directions for Preparation from
trace orange, moderately hazy to Dehydrated Product
hazy. May contain a moderate amount 1. Suspend 41.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
of small dark red particles and a large
amount of minute dark red particles. thoroughly.
Reaction of 4.15% 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Solution at 25C: pH 7.5 0.2 completely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Cultural Response 4. Cool to 45-50C. Resuspend precipitate by gentle mixing
BBL Endo Agar
before use. Endo Agar should be prepared as needed.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 48 hours. 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 104-105 Poor to fair Pink to Procedure
rose-red Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good Rose-red, specimens. A nonselective medium should also be streaked to
green metallic
sheen increase the chance of recovery when the population of gram-
Klebsiella pneumoniae 33495 103-104 Good Pink to rose- negative organisms is low and to provide an indication of other
red mucoid organisms present in the specimen. Incubate plates, protected
Salmonella choleraesuis from light, at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. If negative after
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 103-104 Good Colorless
24 hours, reincubate an additional 24 hours.
to pale pink

207
Section III
E Endo Agar, cont.

Expected Results Availability

Typical colonial morphology on Endo Agar is as follows: BBL Endo Agar
Cat. No. 211199 Dehydrated 500 g
Escherichia coli ................ Pink to rose-red, green metallic sheen
Enterobacter/Klebsiella .... Large, mucoid, pink United States and Canada
Proteus ............................ Colorless to pale pink Cat. No. 221167 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Salmonella ...................... Colorless to pale pink 221265 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Shigella ........................... Colorless to pale pink Europe
Pseudomonas .................. Irregular, colorless Cat. No. 254016 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Gram-positive bacteria .... No growth to slight growth 254074 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
*Store at 2-8C.
References
1. Endo. 1904. Zentralbl. Bakteriol., Abt. 1, Orig. 35:109.
2. Levin and Schoenlein. 1930. A compilation of culture media for the cultivation of microorganisms.
Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
3. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
4. Marshall (ed.). 1992. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products. 16th ed. American
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
5. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

m Endo Agar LES

Intended Use Lactose-fermenting bacteria produce acetaldehyde that reacts
m Endo Agar LES is used for enumerating coliforms in water with the sodium sulfite and fuchsin to form red colonies. The
by membrane filtration. development of a metallic sheen occurs when the organism
produces aldehydes with the rapid fermentation of lactose.
Summary and Explanation If the inoculum is too heavy, the sheen will be suppressed.
McCarthy, Delaney and Grasso1 formulated Endo Agar LES Lactose-nonfermenting bacteria form clear, colorless colonies.
(Lawrence Experimental Station) for testing water for coliform
bacteria by a two-step membrane filter procedure using User Quality Control
Lauryl Tryptose Broth as a preliminary enrichment. They
Identity Specifications
recovered higher numbers of coliforms by this method
Difco m Endo Agar LES
compared with the one step technique using m Endo Broth.
Dehydrated Appearance: Purple, free-flowing, homogeneous.
The American Public Health Association specifies using m Endo Solution: 5.1% solution, soluble in purified
Agar LES in the standard total coliform membrane filtration water containing 2% ethanol upon
boiling. Solution is pinkish-red,
procedure for testing drinking water2 and bottled water.3 It is slightly opalescent to opalescent with
also specified for use in the completed phase of the standard precipitate.
total coliform fermentation technique.2 The coliform bacteria Prepared Appearance: Rose colored, slightly opalescent, with
are bacteria that produce a red colony with a metallic (golden) precipitate.
sheen within 24 hours incubation at 35C on an Endo-type Reaction of 5.1%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
medium.
The U. S. Environmental Protection Agency specifies using m Cultural Response
Endo Agar LES in the total coliform methods for testing water Difco m Endo Agar LES
using single-step, two-step and delayed incubation membrane Prepare the medium per label directions. Use the membrane filter
filtration methods.4,5 technique to inoculate filters and preincubate on pads saturated with
Lauryl Tryptose Broth or Lauryl Sulfate Broth at 35 0.5C for
1.5-2 hours. Transfer filters to plates of m Endo Agar LES and incubate
Principles of the Procedure at 35 0.5C for 22 2 hours.
m Endo Agar LES contains peptones as sources of carbon, INOCULUM COLONY
nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Yeast extract supplies ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR

B-complex vitamins, which stimulate bacterial growth. Lactose Escherichia coli 25922 30-80 Good Red with
is the carbohydrate. Phosphates are buffering agents. Sodium sheen
Salmonella choleraesuis
chloride maintains the osmotic balance of the medium. Sodium subsp. choleraesuis
desoxycholate and sodium lauryl sulfate are added as inhibi- serotype Typhimurium 14028 30-80 Good Pink
tors. Basic fuchsin is a pH indicator. Sodium sulfite is added to Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103 Marked to
decolorize the basic fuchsin solution. Agar is the solidifying complete inhibition
agent.

208
 m Endo Broth MF

Formula 5. Incubate at 35 0.5C for 1.5-2.5 hours. Transfer the

Difco m Endo Agar LES membrane from the pad to the surface of the m Endo Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter LES medium in the Petri dish bottom, keeping the side on
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 1.2 g which the bacteria have been collected facing upward.
Casitone ..................................................................... 3.7 g
Thiopeptone ............................................................... 3.7 g 6. Leave the filter pad in the lid and incubate the plates in the
Tryptose ..................................................................... 7.5 g inverted position at 35 0.5C for 22 2 hours.
Lactose ....................................................................... 9.4 g 7. Observe and count all colonies that are red and have a
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 3.3 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
metallic sheen.
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 3.7 g
Sodium Desoxycholate ............................................... 0.1 g Expected Results
Sodium Lauryl Sulfate ................................................ 0.05 g All colonies that are red and have the characteristic metallic
Sodium Sulfite ............................................................ 1.6 g
Basic Fuchsin .............................................................. 0.8 g sheen are considered coliforms. The sheen may cover the
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g entire colony, may only be in the center or may appear only
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. around the edges.

Directions for Preparation from Limitations of the Procedure

Dehydrated Product Occasionally, noncoliform organisms may produce typical
1. Suspend 51 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water sheen colonies. Coliform organisms may also occasionally
containing 20 mL of 95% ethanol. Mix thoroughly. produce atypical colonies (dark red or nucleated colonies
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to without sheen). It is advisable to verify both colony types.2
completely dissolve the powder. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE.
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using References
stable, typical control cultures.
1. McCarthy, Delaney and Grasso. 1961. Water Sewage Works 108:238.
2. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
E
3. Kim and Feng. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiological
Procedure examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
4. Bordner and Winter (ed.). 1978. Microbiological methods for monitoring the environment, water
1. Place a membrane filter absorbent pad inside the cover of a and wastes. EPA-600/8-78-017. Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Office of
Research and Development, U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, Ohio.
Petri dish. 5. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1992. Manual for the certification of laboratories analyzing
drinking water. EPA-814B-92-002. Office of Ground Water and Technical Support Division, USEPA,
2. Add 1.8-2.0 mL Lauryl Tryptose Broth or Lauryl Sulfate Cincinnati, Ohio.
Broth to each pad.
3. Run the water sample through a membrane filter. Availability
4. Place the filter, top side up, onto the pad containing Lauryl Difco m Endo Agar LES
Tryptose Broth or Lauryl Sulfate Broth. Use a rolling COMPF EPA SMD SMWW
motion to avoid entrapping air bubbles. Cat. No. 273610 Dehydrated 100 g
273620 Dehydrated 500 g

m Endo Broth MF
Intended Use bacteria are defined as bacteria that produce a red colony with
m Endo Broth MF* is used for enumerating coliform organ- a metallic sheen within 24 hours incubation at 35C on an
isms in water by membrane filtration. Endo-type medium.
*MF is a trademark of Millipore Corporation. The U. S. Environmental Protection Agency specifies using
m Endo Broth MF in the total coliform methods for testing
Summary and Explanation
water using single-step, two-step and delayed incubation
m Endo Broth MF is prepared according to the formulation of
membrane filtration methods.4,5
the Millipore Corporation1 for selectively isolating coliform
bacteria from water and other specimens using the membrane Principles of the Procedure
filtration technique. The medium is a combination of the former
m Endo Broth MF contains peptones as sources of carbon,
m HD Endo Medium and Lauryl Tryptose Broth.
nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Yeast extract supplies
The American Public Health Association (APHA) specifies B-complex vitamins, which stimulate bacterial growth.
using m Endo Broth MF in the standard total coliform Lactose is the carbohydrate. Phosphates are buffering agents.
membrane filtration procedure for testing water2 and bottled Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance of the medium.
water.3 APHA also specifies using m Endo Broth MF in the Sodium desoxycholate and sodium lauryl sulfate are added as
delayed-incubation total coliform procedure by adding sodium inhibitors of gram-positive bacteria. Basic fuchsin is a pH
benzoate to make m Endo preservative medium.2 The coliform indicator. Sodium sulfite is added to decolorize the basic fuchsin

209
Section III
E m Endo Broth MF, cont.

Escherichia coli Salmonella typhimurium

User Quality Control ATCC 25922 ATCC 14028

Identity Specifications
Difco m Endo Broth MF
Dehydrated Appearance: Pinkish purple, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Solution: 4.8% solution, partially soluble in puri-
fied water containing 2% ethanol upon
boiling. Solution is pinkish-red, opalescent
with precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Pinkish-red, opalescent with precipitate.
Reaction of 4.8%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.1

Cultural Response
Difco m Endo Broth MF
Prepare the medium per label directions. Use the membrane filter tech-
nique to inoculate filters. Incubate on pads saturated with m Endo Broth
MF at 35 2C for 24 2 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY COLONY COLOR
Escherichia coli 25922 20-80 Good Red with green
metallic sheen
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 20-80 Good Colorless to pink
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-2103 Marked
inhibition

solution. The ethanol additive increases the antibacterial 3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
nature of the formulation. stable, typical control cultures.
Lactose-fermenting bacteria produce acetaldehyde that reacts CAUTION: Protect from light. Use immediately.
with the sodium sulfite and fuchsin to form red colonies. The
development of a metallic sheen occurs when the organism Procedure
produces aldehydes with the rapid fermentation of lactose. 1. Place a membrane filter absorbent pad inside a sterile
If the inoculum is too heavy, the sheen will be suppressed. 60 mm Petri dish.
Lactose-nonfermenting bacteria form clear, colorless colonies. 2. Add 1.8-2.0 mL m Endo Broth MF to each pad.
3. Filter the water sample through a membrane filter.
Formula 4. Place filter top side up on the pad using a rolling motion to
Difco m Endo Broth MF avoid entrapping air bubbles.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 5. Invert the dish and incubate for 22-24 hours at 35 0.5C.
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 1.5 g 6. Observe and count all colonies that are red and have a
Casitone ..................................................................... 5.0 g metallic sheen.
Thiopeptone ............................................................... 5.0 g
Tryptose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Lactose ..................................................................... 12.5 g Expected Results
Sodium Desoxycholate ............................................... 0.1 g All colonies that are red and have the characteristic metallic
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 4.375 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.375 g sheen are considered coliforms. The sheen may cover the
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g entire colony, may only be in the center or may appear only
Sodium Lauryl Sulfate ................................................ 0.05 g around the edges.
Sodium Sulfite ............................................................ 2.1 g
Basic Fuchsin .............................................................. 1.05 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. Limitations of the Procedure
Occasionally, noncoliform organisms may produce typical
Directions for Preparation from sheen colonies. Coliform organisms may also occasionally
Dehydrated Product produce atypical colonies (dark red or nucleated colonies
1. Dissolve 48 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water without sheen). It is advisable to verify both colony types.2
containing 20 mL nondenatured ethanol.
2. Heat to boiling but avoid over-heating. DO NOT
AUTOCLAVE.

210
 Enteric Fermentation Base

References Availability
1. Fifield and Schaufus. 1958. J. Am. Water Works Assoc. 50:193. Difco m Endo Broth MF
2. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. COMPF EPA SMD SMWW
3. Kim and Feng. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiological
examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Cat. No. 274920 Dehydrated 100 g
4. Bordner and Winter (ed). 1978. Microbiological methods for monitoring the environment, water 274930 Dehydrated 500 g
and wastes. EPA-600/8-78-017. Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Office of Re-
search and Development, U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, Ohio.
5. U. S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1992. Manual for the certification of laboratories analyz-
ing drinking water. EPA-814B-92-002. Office of Ground Water and Technical Support Division,
USEPA, Cincinnati, Ohio.

Enriched Thioglycollate Media

(See Thioglycollate Media)

Enteric Fermentation Base

Intended Use sources required for good growth of a wide variety of organ-
Enteric Fermentation Base is used with added carbohydrate isms. Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance of
and indicator for differentiating microorganisms based on fer- the medium. The microorganisms tested are differentiated by
mentation reactions. their ability to ferment a particular carbohydrate that has been
added to the Enteric Fermentation Base. The fermentation and
Summary and Explanation resultant acid production are indicated by a change in color of
The fermentative properties of bacteria are valuable criteria the pH indicator (Andrades indicator) which is also added to E
in their identification.1-4 A basal medium for determining the the Enteric Fermentation Base.
fermentation reactions of microorganisms must be capable
of supporting growth of test organisms and be free from Formula
fermentable carbohydrates. Enteric Fermentation Base is Difco Enteric Fermentation Base
prepared according to the formula described by Edwards Approximate Formula* Per Liter
and Ewing.5 Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Principles of the Procedure *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Beef extract and peptone provide the carbon and nitrogen

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Enteric Fermentation Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 1.8% solution, soluble in purified water.
Solution is light amber, clear.
Prepared Medium (plain)
+ Andrades Indicator: Light pinkish-amber, clear.
Reaction of 1.8%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.1

Cultural Response
Difco Enteric Fermentation Base
Prepare the medium per label directions, without and with 1% dextrose.
Inoculate with fresh cultures and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours.
Acid production is indicated by a change in color from light amber to
dark pink or red. Check for gas production in at least 3% of the volume Uninoculated Escherichia Escherichia
of the fermentation vial. Tube coli coli
PLAIN w/ DEXTROSE ATCC 25922 ATCC 25922
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY ACID/GAS ACID/GAS with Dextrose Plain
Escherichia coli 25922 Good / +/+
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 Good / +/+
Shigella flexneri 12022 Good / +/

211
Section III
E Enteric Fermentation Base, cont.

Directions for Preparation from Procedure

Dehydrated Product For a complete discussion on identification of Enterobacteriaceae,
1. Suspend 18 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix refer to the appropriate procedures outlined in the references.1-4,6
thoroughly.
2. Add 10 mL of Andrades indicator. Expected Results
3. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to A positive result for gas includes production in at least 3% of
completely dissolve the powder. the volume of the fermentation tube. A positive reaction for
4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. acid is a change in color from light amber to dark pink or red.
5. Cool to 45-50C in a water bath.
6. Aseptically add 0.5% or 1% of sterile carbohydrate (see Limitation of the Procedure
table). Negative tubes remain colorless and should be observed regu-
larly for a total of 30 days.
FINAL ADD BEFORE ADD AFTER
CARBOHYDRATE CONCENTRATION AUTOCLAVING AUTOCLAVING
Adonitol 0.5% X
References
1. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th edition. Mosby,
Arabinose 0.5% X Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
2. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken. (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
Cellobiose 0.5% X American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Dextrose (Glucose) 1% X 3. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriology,
9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Dulcitol 0.5% X 4. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th edition. Elsevier
Glycerol* 0.5% X Science Publishing Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
5. Edwards and Ewing. 1972. Identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 3rd ed. Burgess Publishing Co.,
Inositol 0.5% X Minneapolis, Minn.
Lactose 1% X 6. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol.1. American Society for
Microbiology. Washington, D.C.
Mannitol 1% X
Salicin 0.5% X
Availability
Sucrose 1% X
Difco Enteric Fermentation Base
Xylose 0.5% X
Cat. No. 218281 Dehydrated 500 g
*Medium containing glycerol should be autoclaved for 10 minutes at 15 lbs pressure (121C).

7. Dispense 9 mL amounts into test tubes containing inverted

vials (Durham tubes).
8. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

Enterococcosel Agar Enterococcosel Broth

Intended Use non-specific since it is produced by the genera Enterococcus,
Enterococcosel Agar, a Bile Esculin Agar with Azide, is used for Pediococcus and by certain streptococci.6
the rapid, selective detection and enumeration of enterococci.1 Isenberg et al. modified the Bile Esculin Agar formulation
Enterococcosel Broth, a Bile Esculin Broth with Azide, is by reducing the bile concentration from 40 to 10 g/L and by
recommended for use in the differentiation of enterococci and adding sodium azide. 7 This modification is supplied as
group D streptococci. Enterococcosel Agar. Consult the text for a list of specimens
for which this medium is recommended for primary isolation.8
Summary and Explanation Enterococcosel Broth has the same formula as Enterococcosel
Rochaix noted the value of esculin hydrolysis in the identification Agar with the agar omitted. Colonies suspected of being
of enterococci.2 The enterococci were able to split esculin, but Enterococcus faecalis can be emulsified in 1 or 2 mL of broth
other streptococci could not. Meyer and Schonfeld incorporated and incubated at 35C. The combination of esculin and a rather
bile into the esculin medium and showed that 61 of 62 low concentration of bile in the presence of azide permits the
enterococci were able to grow and split esculin, whereas the other selection and differentiation of enterococci by esculin hydrolysis
streptococci could not.3 Swan used an esculin medium contain- (blackening of the medium) within 2 hours.7
ing 40% bile salts and reported that a positive reaction on
the bile esculin medium correlated with a serological group Principles of the Procedure
D precipitin reaction.4 Facklam and Moody preformed a Enterococci and Group D streptococci hydrolyze the glycoside
comparative study of tests used to presumptively identify group esculin to esculetin and dextrose. Esculetin reacts with an iron
D streptococci and found that the bile-esculin test provides a salt, ferric ammonium citrate, to form a dark brown or black
reliable means of identifying group D streptococci and differ- complex.9 Oxgall is used to inhibit gram-positive bacteria other
entiating them from non-group D streptococci.5 According than enterococci. Sodium azide is inhibitory for gram-negative
to current nomenclature, the group D antigen is considered microorganisms.
212
 Enterococcosel Agar, cont.

Formulae 2. For agar, heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute
BBL Enterococcosel Agar to completely dissolve the powder. For broth, heat if neces-
Approximate Formula* Per Liter sary to completely dissolve the powder.
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 17.0 g 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 3.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Oxgall ....................................................................... 10.0 g stable, typical control cultures.
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Esculin ........................................................................ 1.0 g Procedure
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.5 g
Sodium Azide ............................................................. 0.25 g Agar
Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 1.0 g Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g
specimens. Incubate plates 24-48 hours at 35 2C in and
BBL Enterococcosel Broth aerobic atmosphere.
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. Broth
Colonies, from a primary isolation plate, suspected of being
Directions for Preparation from enterococci or group D streptococci can be emulsified in 2 mL
Dehydrated Product of Enterococcosel Broth and incubated at 35 2C in an
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water: aerobic atmosphere.
BBL Enterococcosel Agar 56 g;
BBL Enterococcosel Broth 43 g.
Mix thoroughly.

Enterococcus faecalis
User Quality Control ATCC 33186
E
Identity Specifications
BBL Enterococcosel Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Medium fine, homogeneous, may contain
some tan specks.
Solution: 5.6% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium, tan with
a trace blue cast, clear to moderately hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Medium, tan with a trace blue cast, clear
to moderately hazy.
Reaction of 5.6%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2
BBL Enterococcosel Broth

Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous

material.
Solution: 4.3% solution, soluble in purified water
upon heating. Solution is medium, yellow
to tan to yellow green with a bluish cast,
clear to hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Medium, yellow to tan to yellow-green
with a bluish cast, clear to hazy.
Reaction of 4.3%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL Enterococcosel Agar or Enterococcosel Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. For agar, inoculate as described
below. For broth, inoculate with fresh cultures. Incubate at 35 2C for
48 hours (agar) or 24 hours (broth).

ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY AGAR RECOVERY BROTH

Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-104 Good, blackening Good, blackening
Escherichia coli 25922 104-105 Complete inhibition Partial to complete
inhibition, no blackening
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 104-105 Complete inhibition Partial to complete
inhibition, no blackening

213
Section III
E Enterococcosel Agar, cont.

Expected Results (e.g., micrococci, Candida, corynebacteria and gram-negative

After incubation, observe for typical growth and reaction: bacteria) may appear as small colonies or produce trace growth.
Agar
References
Typical colonial morphology on Enterococcosel Agar is as 1. Facklam, Sahm and Teixera. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
follows: 2. Rochaix. 1924. C.R. Soc. Biol. 90:771.
3. Meyer and Schonfeld. 1926. Zentralbl. Bakteriol. Parasitenk. Infectionskr. Hyg. Abt. Orig. 99:402.
Streptococci (non-group D) .......... No growth to trace growth. 4. Swan. 1954. J. Clin. Pathol. 7:160.
5. Facklam and Moody. 1970. Appl. Microbiol. 20:245.
Enterococci/group D streptococci .... Small, but larger than group 6. Ruoff, Whiley and Beighton. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
A streptococci. Translucent clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
7. Isenberg, Goldberg and Sampson. 1970. Appl. Microbiol. 20:433.
with brownish-black to black 8. Cintron. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American
zones. Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
9. MacFaddin. 2000. Biochemical tests for identification of medical bacteria, 3rd ed. Lippincott
Staphylococci ................................ Large, white, opaque. William & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.

Micrococci ..................................... Large, white, grayish.

Availability
Corynebacteria .............................. Small to large, white to
BBL Enterococcosel Agar
grayish-yellow, smooth and
irregular. CMPH MCM7
Cat. No. 212205 Dehydrated 500 g
Candida ........................................ Small to large, white. 293943 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
Listeria monocytogenes .................. Small to large, translucent United States and Canada
with brownish-black to black Cat. No. 221492 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
zones. 221493 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
221381 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
Gram-negative bacteria .................. No growth to trace growth.
221382 Prepared Slants Ctn. of 100*
Broth Europe
Enterococci and group D streptococci turn the medium black Cat. No. 254019 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
within 2 hours when a heavy inoculum is used. Other organ- BBL Enterococcosel Agar//Columbia CNA Agar,

isms are inhibited or do not turn the medium black. Modified with Sheep Blood
Cat. No. 297413 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
Limitations of the Procedure BBL Enterococcosel Broth
Listeria monocytogenes, Streptococcus bovis group, Pediococcus Cat. No. 212207 Dehydrated 500 g
221383 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10*
and staphylococci may also grow on Enterococcosel Agar. However,
*Store at 2-8C.
staphylococci do not produce black zones. Other organisms

Enterococcosel Agar with Vancomycin, 8 g/mL

Intended Use Enterococcus faecalis
Enterococcosel Agar with Vancomycin, 8 g/mL, is used for ATCC 51299

primary screening of asymptomatic gastrointestinal carriage

of vancomycin-resistant enterococci (VRE).1

Summary and Explanation

Enterococci are known to cause a wide variety of infections. Most
commonly they infect the urinary tract, abdomen, bloodstream,
endocardium, biliary tract, burn wounds and in-dwelling
catheters.2 Enterococcus faecalis causes 80 to 90% of infections,
while E. faecium causes the remainder.3 Today the enterococci
are the fourth leading cause of nosocomial infection and the
third leading cause of bacteremia in the United States.4 The
case/fatality rates for enterococcal bacteria range from 12 to 68%
with death due to sepsis in 4 to 50% of the cases.5
Because the potential exists for vancomycin-resistant genes to
be transferred to other gram-positive organisms and because
the treatment options for VRE infections are limited, the CDC
issued infection control guidelines for hospitals and long-term
care facilities.6 Guidelines include stool and rectal swab
culture surveys of asymptomatic patients who may be carrying
VRE.
214
 m Enterococcus Agar

Principles of the Procedure Expected Results

Enterococcosel Agar, a Bile Esculin Agar with Azide, is used for Examine plates after 24 and 48 hours for the presence of trans-
the rapid, selective detection and enumeration of enterococci. lucent to light gray, pinpoint colonies exhibiting black halos
(discoloration of the agar) in areas of heavy growth. Perform
Enterococci hydrolyze the glucoside esculin to esculetin and
a Gram stain, catalase test and PYR test. Gram-positive cocci
dextrose. Esculetin reacts with an iron salt to form a dark brown
which are either catalase negative or weakly positive and PYR
or black complex.7 Ferric citrate is incorporated into the medium
positive may be presumptively identified as VRE pending con-
as an indicator of esculin hydrolysis and resulting esculetin
firmatory tests.1
formation. Oxgall is used to inhibit gram-positive bacteria other
than enterococci. Sodium azide is inhibitory for gram-negative
References
organisms. 1. Barton and Doern. 1995. Diagn. Microbiol. Infect. Dis. 23:119.
2. Jett, Huycke and Gilmore. 1994. Clin. Microbiol. Rev. 7:462.
Vancomycin at 8 g/mL is used to detect resistance to vanco- 3. Moellering. 1992. Clin. Infect. Dis. 14:1173.
4. Emori and Gaynes. 1993. Clin. Microbiol. Rev. 6:428.
mycin.1,8 5. Landry, Kaiser and Wenzel. 1989. Am. J. Infect. Control. 17:323.
6. Subcommittee on Prevention and Control of Antimicrobial-Resistant Microorganisms in Hospitals.
1994. Preventing the spread of vancomycin resistance: a report from the hospital infection control
Procedure practices advisory committee. Fed. Regist. 59:25758.
7. MacFaddin. 2000. Biochemical tests for identification of medical bacteria, 3rd ed. Lippincott,
Allow the contents of a rectal swab (or a cotton-tipped swab Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
8. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved standard: M2-A7. Perfor-
sample obtained from a stool specimen) to elute in 1 mL of mance standards for antimicrobial disk susceptibility tests, 7th ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
Trypticase Soy Broth.1 Using a new swab, absorb eluent,
rotate swab firmly several times against the upper inside wall Availability
of the tube to express excess fluid, roll the swab over a small BBL Enterococcosel Agar with Vancomycin, 8 g/mL
area of the surface at the edge of the plate and streak from this BS10 NCCLS
Cat. No. 292234 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
inoculated area.
Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar-side up) for
*Store at 2-8C.
E
24-48 hours at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere.

m Enterococcus Agar
Intended Use perform, not requiring confirmation and permitting a direct
m Enterococcus Agar, also referred to as m Azide Agar, is used count of enterococci in 48 hours. Burkwell and Hartman4 added
for isolating and enumerating enterococci in water and other 0.2% sodium carbonate and 0.05% polysorbate 80 to
materials by membrane filtration or pour plate technique. m Enterococcus Agar to increase the sensitivity for the direct
plating method.
Summary and Explanation
The enterococcus group is a subgroup of the fecal streptococci Principles of the Procedure
that includes E. faecalis, E. faecium, E. gallinarum, and Peptone provides nitrogen, minerals and amino acids. Yeast
E. avium.1 Enterococci are differentiated from other strepto- extract is the vitamin source and dextrose supplies carbon.
cocci by their ability to grow in 6.5% sodium chloride, at pH Dipotassium phosphate acts as a buffer for the medium.
9.6 and at 10C and 45C.1 The enterococcal portion of the Sodium azide is the selective agent to suppress the growth of
fecal streptococcus group is a valuable bacterial indicator for gram-negative organisms. Agar is the solidifying agent.
determining the extent of fecal contamination of recreational Triphenyl tetrazolium chloride (TTC) is the dye used as an
surface waters.1 m Enterococcus Agar is used in standard meth- indicator of bacterial growth. TTC is reduced to the insoluble
ods for the detection of fecal streptococcus and enterococcus formazan inside the bacterial cell, resulting in the production
groups using the membrane filtration technique.1 of red colonies.
m Enterococcus Agar was developed by Slanetz et al.2 for Formula
the enumeration of enterococci by the membrane filtration
Difco m Enterococcus Agar
technique. A modification of m Enterococcus Agar, adding Approximate Formula* Per Liter
triphenyltetrazolium chloride (TTC), was described by Slanetz Tryptose ................................................................... 20.0 g
and Bartley3. This modified medium proved to be a superior Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.0 g
membrane filtration medium for the enumeration of entero- Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 4.0 g
cocci. Increased recovery and larger colonies were obtained Sodium Azide ............................................................. 0.4 g
by incubating the inoculated membranes on the agar surface Agar ......................................................................... 10.0 g
2,3,5-Triphenyl Tetrazolium Chloride .......................... 0.1 g
instead of on pads saturated with liquid medium. The mem-
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
brane filtration method has the advantages of being simpler to

215
Section III
E m Enterococcus Agar, cont.

Directions for Preparation from 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Dehydrated Product stable, typical control cultures.
1. Suspend 42 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly. Procedure
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Collect water samples as described in Standard Methods for
completely dissolve the powder. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE. the Examination of Water and Wastewater, Section 90601 or
3. Cool to 45-50C and dispense into 50 x 9 mm Petri dishes by laboratory policy.
to a depth of 4-5 mm (approximately 4-6 mL). Membrane filtration procedure
1. Follow the membrane filtration procedure as described in
User Quality Control Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and
Wastewater, Section 9230C.1
Identity Specifications 2. Choose a sample size so that 20-60 colonies will result.
Difco m Enterococcus Agar 3. Transfer the filter to agar medium in a Petri dish, avoiding
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
air bubbles beneath the membrane.
Solution: 4.2% solution, soluble in purified
4. Let plates stand for 30 minutes.
water upon boiling. Solution is light 5. Invert plates and incubate at 35 0.5C for 48 hours.
amber, slightly opalescent.
Direct plating procedure
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 4.2%
1. Inoculate medium with a specimen using the streak plate
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2 method.
2. Incubate plates at 35 2C for 24-48 hours.
Cultural Response
Difco m Enterococcus Agar Expected Results1
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the membrane Count all light and dark red colonies as enterococci. Count
filter technique. Incubate in humid atmosphere at 35 0.5C for
40-48 hours. colonies using a fluorescent lamp and a magnifying lens.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR References
1. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
Enterococcus faecalis 19433 20-60 Good Light pink wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
to red 2. Slanetz, Bent and Bartley. 1955. Public Health Rep. 70:67.
3. Slanetz and Bartley. 1957. J. Bacteriol. 74:591.
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 20-60 Good Light pink 4. Burkwell and Hartman. 1964. Appl. Microbiol. 12:18.
to red
Escherichia coli 25922 103 Marked to Availability
complete inhibition
Difco m Enterococcus Agar
Enterococcus faecalis
ATCC 19433 SMWW
Cat. No. 274610 Dehydrated 100 g
274620 Dehydrated 500 g

216
 Enterococcus Screen Agar

Enterococcus Screen Agar QUAD Plate

with Streptomycin/Gentamicin/Vancomycin
Intended Use tance to streptomycin ( 2000 g/mL), gentamicin ( 500 g/mL)
Enterococcus Screen Agar is used to test enterococci for high- and vancomycin ( 6 g/mL) results in the failure of the
level resistance to aminoglycosides and vancomycin to predict penicillin- or vancomycin-aminoglycoside combinations to
the synergistic activity of these antimicrobials. eradicate the infecting organisms. Therefore, testing for high
level resistance to streptomycin, gentamicin and vancomycin
Summary and Explanation is important. The use of a Brain Heart Infusion Agar (BHIA)
Enterococci are known to cause a wide variety of infections. Most containing streptomycin (2000 g/mL), gentamicin (500 g/mL)
commonly they infect the urinary tract, abdomen, bloodstream, or vancomycin (6 g/mL) is recommended by the National
endocardium, biliary tract, burn wounds and in-dwelling cath- Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards (NCCLS) for
eters.1 Enterococcus faecalis causes 80 to 90% of infections, while testing high level resistance.9
E. faecium causes the majority of the remainder.2 Today the
enterococci are the fourth leading cause of bacteremia in the United Principles of the Procedure
States.3 The case/fatality rates for enterococcal bacteremia range Brain Heart Infusion Agar is a general-purpose medium suit-
from 12 to 68% with death due to sepsis in 4 to 50% of the able for the cultivation of a wide variety of microorganisms
cases.4 and is recommended for agar screen susceptibility testing of
enterococci.9
Treatment of enterococcal infections with either penicillin or
The meat infusion solids and peptones are sources of organic
vancomycin alone fails to kill enterococci resulting in relapse
of infection.5 Enterococci for years were known to have low nitrogen, carbon, sulfur, vitamins, and trace substances. E
intrinsic resistance to a variety of -lactam as well as Dextrose is the carbohydrate source. The medium is buffered
aminoglycoside antibiotics.6 The addition of an aminoglycoside through the use of disodium phosphate. Streptomycin at
to which the isolate has demonstrated susceptibility results in 2000 g/mL and gentamicin at 500 g/mL are used to detect
both in vitro and in vivo synergism producing a bactericidal high level aminoglycoside resistance.9 Vancomycin at 6 g/mL
effect.7 This synergistic effect is thought to be due to the is used to detect resistance to vancomycin.9 The Food, Drug &
penicillin or vancomycin damaging the integrity of the cell wall, Cosmetic (FD&C) dyes are inert and added for easy visual
thus allowing the aminoglycoside to penetrate and inhibit identification of the antimicrobials.
bacterial protein synthesis.8 The emergence of high level resis-
Procedure
Enterococcus faecalis
ATCC 51299 1. Prepare the inoculum by suspending several well-isolated
colonies of the enterococcal isolate from an 18-24 hour
plate culture into a tube of Trypticase Soy Broth and
adjust the turbidity to be equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland
turbidity standard.
2. Spot inoculate each quadrant of the plate with 10 L of the
adjusted suspension.
3. Allow the inoculum spots to absorb into the agar surfaces.
4. Incubate plates at 35 2C aerobically for a full 24 hours.
If negative at 24 hours, reincubate streptomycin tests an
additional 24 hours.

Expected Results
Following a full 24 hours of incubation, observe plates for
growth. Growth on Quadrant I (BHIA Control) indicates
viable test organisms in the inoculum broth suspension and
the test is valid. If there is no growth, the test is invalid and
must be repeated.

217
Section III
E Enterococcus Screen Agar, cont.

Growth on: Availability

Quadrant II Red (BHIA with gentamicin) and/or BBL Enterococcus Screen Agar QUAD Plate
with Streptomycin/Gentamicin/Vancomycin
Quadrant III Yellow (BHIA with vancomycin) and/or
BS10 CMPH NCCLS
Quadrant IV Blue (BHIA with streptomycin) indicates Cat. No. 222201 Prepared Plates (QUAD) Pkg. of 10*
that the antimicrobial would not be synergistic in combi- *Store at 2-8C.
nation therapy.
No growth indicates synergy may be predicted. See the NCCLS
standard and supplemental tables for details of interpretation
and additional procedures.

References
1. Jett, Huycke and Gilmore. 1994. Clin. Microbiol. Rev. 7:462.
2. Moellering. 1992. Clin. Infect. Dis. 14:1173.
3. Emori and Gaynes. 1993. Clin. Microbiol. Rev. 6:428.
4. Landry, Kaiser and Wenzel. 1989. Am. J. Infect. Control 17:323.
5. Moellering, Korzeniowski, Sande and Wennersten. 1979. J. Infect. Dis. 140:203.
6. Murray. 1990. Clin. Microbiol. Rev. 3:46.
7. Mandell. 1984. Ann. Intern. Med. 100:904.
8. Moellering and Weinberg. 1971. J. Clin. Invest. 50:2580.
9. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved standard: M7-A5. Meth-
ods for dilution antimicrobial susceptibility tests for bacteria that grow aerobically, 5th ed. NCCLS,
Wayne, Pa.

Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine

EMB Agar, Levine, without Lactose
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine, conforms with specifica- The eosin Y and methylene blue dyes in Levine EMB Agar
tions of The United States Pharmacopeia (USP). render the medium slightly selective in that they inhibit gram-
positive bacteria to a limited degree. These dyes also play a
Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine is a slightly selective and
role in differentiating between lactose fermenters and lactose
differential plating medium for the isolation of gram-negative
nonfermenters due to the presence or absence of dye uptake in
enteric bacteria. EMB Agar, Levine, without Lactose is
the bacterial colonies. Coliforms, as lactose-fermenting organ-
provided for convenience in genetic studies of enteric bacilli.
isms, are visualized as blue-black colonies, whereas colonies
Summary and Explanation of Salmonella and Shigella, as lactose nonfermenters, appear
Shortly following the publication by Holt-Harris and Teague colorless, transparent or amber.
of a paper describing a new culture medium for the differen- Some gram-positive bacteria, such as fecal streptococci,
tiation of enteric microorganisms through the use of eosin and staphylococci and yeasts, will grow on this medium and
methylene blue dyes,1 Levine described a modification of their usually form pinpoint colonies. A number of nonpathogenic,
formulation which he claimed gave better differentiation lactose-nonfermenting gram-negative bacteria will grow on this
between what are now referred to as Escherichia and medium and must be distinguished from the pathogenic strains
Enterobacter species.2 The two formulations differ in that by additional biochemical tests.
Levine EMB Agar does not contain sucrose. Both of these for-
mulations were developed to improve upon the differentiating Formulae
properties of Endo Agar,3 which was developed previously. BBL Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Levine EMB Agar has become the predominant enteric plating Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ..................................... 10.0 g
medium that utilizes dyes as selective agents. It is recommended Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
for use in the microbiological examination of dairy products Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.0 g
Eosin Y ....................................................................... 0.4 g
and foods by the American Public Health Association.4,5 It Methylene Blue ........................................................ 65.0 mg
is recommended in the USP for use in the performance of Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Microbial Limit Tests.6 EMB Agar, Levine, without Lactose BBL EMB Agar, Levine, without Lactose
can be supplemented with a carbohydrate as the sole carbon Consists of the same ingredients without the lactose.
source for the study of hybrid enteric bacilli.7 *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

218
 Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, cont.

Escherichia coli
User Quality Control ATCC 25922

Identity Specifications
BBL Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, may contain up to
a large amount of minute to small dark
red purple particles.
Solution: 3.74% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is medium
to dark, green orange brown, hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, green orange brown,
hazy.
Reaction of 3.74%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2
BBL EMB Agar, Levine, without Lactose

Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, may contain up to

a large amount of minute to small dark
red purple particles.
Solution: 2.74% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is medium
to dark, green orange brown, hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, green orange brown,
hazy.
Reaction of 2.74%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2

Cultural Response
E
BBL Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine or EMB Agar, Levine, without Lactose
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 24 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 104-105 Partial inhibition
Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good
Klebsiella pneumoniae 33495 103-104 Good
Salmonella choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis serotype Typhi 19430 103-104 Good
Salmonella choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis serotype Typhimurium 14028 103-104 Good
Shigella dysenteriae 9361 103-104 Good
Shigella flexneri 12022 103-104 Good

Directions for Preparation from Follow established procedures when using the medium without
Dehydrated Product lactose.
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
BBL Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine 37.4 g; Expected Results
BBL EMB Agar, Levine, without Lactose 27.4 g. Typical colonial morphology on Eosin Methylene Blue Agar,
Mix thoroughly. Levine is as follows:
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Escherichia coli ..................... Large, blue-black, green
completely dissolve the powder. metallic sheen
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Enterobacter/Klebsiella ......... Large, mucoid, blue-black
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Proteus ................................. Large, colorless
stable, typical control cultures. Salmonella ........................... Large, colorless
Shigella ................................ Large, colorless
Procedure
Pseudomonas ....................... Irregular, colorless
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
specimens. A nonselective medium should also be streaked Gram-positive bacteria ......... No growth to slight growth
to increase the chance of recovery when the population of
gram-negative organisms is low and to provide an indication Results obtained with Levine EMB Agar without Lactose are
of other organisms present in the specimen. Incubate plates, dependent upon the substituted carbohydrate.
protected from light, at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. If negative
after 24 hours, reincubate an additional 24 hours.

219
Section III
E Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, cont.

References BBL EMB, Levine, without Lactose

1. Holt-Harris and Teague. 1916. J. Infect. Dis. 18:596. Cat. No. 211191 Dehydrated 500 g
2. Levine. 1918. J. Infect. Dis. 23:43.
3. Endo. 1904. Zentralbl. Bakteriol., Abt. 1, Orig. 35:109. BBL Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine//

4. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Columbia CNA Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
5. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods, Cat. No. 295618 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
6. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The Na- BBL Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine//

tional formulary 20 2002. The United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Rockville, Md.
7. Baron, Spilman and Carey. 1959. Abstr. G7, p. 29. Bacteriol. Proc. 59th Gen. Meet. Soc. Am.
MacConkey II Agar
Bacteriologists 1959. Cat. No. 295969 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
BBL Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine//

Availability Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II)
BBL Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine Cat. No. 221286 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
AOAC BAM BS10 CMPH COMPF MCM7 SMD USP *Store at 2-8C.
Cat. No. 211221 Dehydrated 500 g
211222 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
221170 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
221268 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*

Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Modified,

Holt-Harris and Teague
Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Modified (formula of Holt-Harris In 1904, Endo developed a culture medium for the isolation of
and Teague) is a slightly selective and differential medium for typhoid bacilli from feces,1 and this medium was widely used
the isolation, cultivation and differentiation of gram-negative in the years immediately following its development. According
enteric bacilli from both clinical and nonclinical specimens. to Holt-Harris and Teague,2 the chief disadvantage of the Endo
medium was that the red color of the coliform colonies diffused
User Quality Control through the surrounding medium. When larger numbers of these
colonies were present on the agar surface, the colorless colonies
Identity Specifications of the typhoid organisms and other lactose nonfermenters were
BBL Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Modified, masked and often overlooked. In 1916, these two scientists
Holt-Harris and Teague
reported on the development of a new medium in which the
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, may contain up
to a large amount of minute to small dyes, eosin Y and methylene blue, were incorporated. Differ-
dark red purple particles. entiation between lactose fermenters and lactose nonfermenters
Solution: 3.6% solution, soluble in purified on this formulation was greatly improved since color diffu-
water upon boiling. Solution is medium sion into the agar was eliminated.
to dark, green orange brown, hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, green orange brown, The original EMB Agar formulation of Holt-Harris and Teague
hazy. was modified by Levine who described his medium in a 1918
Reaction of 3.6%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
publication.3 Levine simplified the original formula by using
a single peptone as a base and supplementing it with dipotas-
Cultural Response sium phosphate as a buffer and by deleting the sucrose and
BBL Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Modified, increasing the concentration of lactose. The concentration
Holt-Harris and Teague of methylene blue was later reduced because of increased
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at purity of the dye. This provided the current ratio of eosin to
35 2C for 24 hours.
methylene blue of approximately 6:1. Over the years, it is the
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Levine Eosin Methylene Blue formulation that has achieved
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 104-105 Partial inhibition dominant status.
Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good
Proteus vulgaris 9484 103-104 Good
Salmonella choleraesuis
Principles of the Procedure
subsp. choleraesuis Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Modified, contains eosin Y and
serotype Typhi 19430 103-104 Good methylene blue dyes that inhibit gram-positive bacteria to a
Salmonella choleraesuis limited degree. The dyes also serve as differential indicators in
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 103-104 Good response to the fermentation of lactose and/or sucrose by
Shigella flexneri 12022 103-104 Good microorganisms. Coliforms produce blue-black colonies due
to the taking up of an eosin-methylene blue dye complex by

220
 Esculin Agar

the bacterial cells when the pH drops. Salmonella and Shigella Procedure
colonies are colorless or have a transparent amber color. Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
Escherichia coli colonies may show a characteristic green specimens. A nonselective medium should also be streaked to
metallic sheen due to the rapid fermentation of lactose. increase the chance of recovery when the population of gram-
Some gram-positive bacteria, such as fecal streptococci, negative organisms is low and to provide an indication of other
staphylococci and yeasts, will grow on this medium and organisms present in the specimen. Incubate plates, protected
usually form pinpoint colonies. A number of non-pathogenic, from light, at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. If negative after 24
lactose-nonfermenting gram-negative bacteria will grow on this hours, reincubate an additional 24 hours.
medium and must be distinguished from the pathogenic
bacterial strains by additional biochemical tests. Expected Results
Typical colonial morphology on EMB Agar, Modified is as
Formula follows:
BBL Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Modified, Holt-Harris Escherichia coli ................. Large, blue-black, green
and Teague metallic sheen
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Enterobacter/Klebsiella ..... Large, mucoid, blue-black
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ..................................... 10.0 g Proteus ............................. Large, colorless
Lactose ....................................................................... 5.0 g Salmonella ....................... Large, colorless to amber
Sucrose ...................................................................... 5.0 g Shigella ............................ Large, colorless to amber
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.0 g Pseudomonas ................... Irregular, colorless
Eosin Y ....................................................................... 0.4 g Gram-positive bacteria ..... No growth to slight growth
Methylene Blue ........................................................ 65.0 mg
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g References
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 1. Endo. 1904. Zentralbl. Bakteriol., Abt. I Orig. 35:109.
2. Holt-Harris and Teague. 1916. J. Infect. Dis. 18:596.

Directions for Preparation from 3. Levine. 1918. J. Inf. Dis. 23:43.

E
Dehydrated Product Availability
1. Suspend 36 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix BBL Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Modified, Holt-Harris
thoroughly. and Teague
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to AOAC
Cat. No. 211215 Dehydrated 500 g
completely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. United States and Canada
Cat. No. 221354 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
4. Cool to approximately 45C. Agitate gently and pour into 221355 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
plates. Europe
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Cat. No. 254014 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
stable, typical control cultures. 254073 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
BBL Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Modified, Holt-Harris
and Teague//Columbia CNA Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
Cat. No. 221941 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.

Esculin Agar
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Esculin Agar is a differential medium for demonstrating escu- Animal tissue peptones and infusions from heart muscle provide
lin hydrolysis by various microorganisms. amino acids or other nitrogenous substances that support bacte-
rial growth. Sodium chloride maintains osmotic equilibrium.
Summary and Explanation
Esculin is a glycoside incorporated as a differential agent
Esculin hydrolysis is recommended in the differentiation and
to facilitate the identification of various organisms, including
identification of a variety of organisms.1-3 If the test organism
Enterobacteriaceae, enterococci and anaerobes. Hydrolysis of
does not hydrolyze esculin, the medium remains unchanged
esculin yields esculetin and dextrose. In the presence of an iron
and the esculin will fluoresce when subjected to long-wave UV
salt, esculetin forms a brown-black complex that diffuses into
light at 360 nm. When hydrolyzed, the medium turns black
the surrounding medium.3
and fluorescence is lost.1

221
Section III
E Esculin Agar, cont.

Procedure References
1. Shigei. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Soci-
Organisms to be tested must first be isolated in pure culture ety for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
on an appropriate solid medium. Using a sterile inoculating 2. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
loop or needle, inoculate esculin agar with several isolated 3. Koneman, Allen, Janda, Schreckenberger and Winn. 1997. Color atlas and textbook of diagnostic
microbiology, 5th ed. Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, Pa.
colonies. Incubate tubes at 35C with caps loosened for up to
48 hours. Availability
BBL Esculin Agar
Expected Results Cat. No. 295951 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
Blackening of the agar medium in the area of growth indicates *Store at 2-8C.
esculin hydrolysis.

Esculin Iron Agar

(See m E Agar)

Eugon Agar
Intended Use enrichment. Enriched with blood, Eugon Agar supports the
Eugon Agar is a general-purpose medium used for cultivating growth of pathogenic fungi including Nocardia, Histoplasma
a wide variety of microorganisms. and Blastomyces. With the addition of Supplement B, excellent
growth of Neisseria, Francisella and Brucella is achieved. The
Summary and Explanation unenriched medium supports rapid growth of lactobacilli
Eugon Agar is prepared according to the formula described associated with cured meat products, dairy products and other
by Pelczar and Vera.1 Eugon Agar and Eugon Broth were foods.
developed to obtain eugonic (luxuriant) growth of fastidious Niven3 reported the use of Eugon Agar for the detection of
microorganisms.2 Eugon Agar can be used with or without lactic acid in cured meats, and recommended it for investigat-
ing spoilage in meats. Harrison and Hansen4 employed the
User Quality Control medium for plate counts of the intestinal flora of turkeys. Frank5
showed its usefulness in germinating anaerobic spores pasteur-
Identity Specifications
ized at 104C.
Difco Eugon Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. Eugon Agar is included in the Compendium of Methods for
Solution: 4.54% solution, soluble in purified the Microbiological Examination of Foods.6
water upon boiling. Solution is light
amber, very slightly to slightly opales-
cent, cystine precipitate may be visible.
Principles of the Procedure
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent, Peptones provide the nitrogen, vitamins and amino acids in
precipitate may be visible. Eugon Agar. The high concentration of dextrose is the energy
Reaction of 4.54% source for rapid growth of bacteria. L-Cystine and sodium
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
sulfite are added to stimulate growth. Sodium chloride main-
Cultural Response tains the osmotic balance of the media. The high carbohydrate
Difco Eugon Agar content along with high sulfur (cystine) content improves
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate the growth with chromogenicity.2 Agar is the solidifying agent in
medium unsupplemented for 18-48 hours. Candida albicans and Eugon Agar.
Aspergillus niger should be incubated at 30 2C; all other cultures
should be incubated at 35 2C.
Formula
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Difco Eugon Agar
Aspergillus niger 16404 102-103 Fair to good Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Brucella abortus 11192* 102-103 Good Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 7.5 g
Candida albicans 26790 102-103 Good Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 7.5 g
Lactobacillus fermentum 9338 102-103 Good Soy Peptone ............................................................... 5.0 g
Shigella flexneri 12022 102-103 Good Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.5 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.7 g
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 4.0 g
*If this strain is not available, verify performance with a known isolate.
Sodium Sulfite ............................................................ 0.2 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

222
 Eugon Broth

Precautions7 Expected Results

1. Biosafety Level 2 practices, containment equipment and Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
facilities are recommended for activities with clinical speci-
mens of human or animal origin containing or potentially Limitations of the Procedure
containing pathogenic Brucella spp. 1. Eugon Agar is not recommended as a blood agar base for
2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and hemolytic reactions because of its high sugar content.
facilities are recommended for all manipulations of cultures 2. It is suggested that Eugon Agar be prepared as required.
of the pathogenic Brucella spp. and for experimental ani- Do not melt and resolidify media containing enrichments.
mal studies.
References
Directions for Preparation from 1. Pelczar and Vera. 1949. Milk Plant Monthly 38:30.
2. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
Dehydrated Product vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
3. Niven. 1949. J. Bacteriol. 58:633.
4. Harrison and Hansen. 1950. J. Bacteriol. 59:197.
1. Suspend 45.4 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix 5. Frank. 1955. J. Bacteriol. 70:269.
thoroughly. 6. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- 7. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
pletely dissolve the powder. No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
8. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
4. When an enrichment is being prepared, cool to 50-55C 9. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
prior to adding the desired enrichment. 10. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
national, Gaithersburg, Md.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures. Availability
Procedure
Difco Eugon Agar
COMPF
E
For a complete discussion on bacteria and fungi from clinical Cat. No. 258910 Dehydrated 500 g
specimens, refer to the appropriate procedures outlined in the Difco Supplement B
references.8,9 For the examination of bacteria and fungi in food Cat. No. 227610 Lyophilized 6 10 mL with Reconstituting Fluid*
refer to standard methods.6,10 227620 Lyophilized 100 mL with Reconstituting Fluid*
*Store at 2-8C.

Bacto Eugon Broth Eugonbroth Medium

Intended Use Formula
Eugon Broth (Eugonbroth) is a general-purpose medium used Bacto Eugon Broth
for the cultivation of fastidious and nonfastidious bacteria from Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 7.5 g
a variety of clinical and nonclinical specimens. Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 7.5 g
Soy Peptone ............................................................... 5.0 g
Summary and Explanation Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.5 g
Eugon Broth (Eugonbroth) is the fluid form of Eugon Agar, a L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.7 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 4.0 g
clear medium developed for use in the enumeration of bacteria Sodium Sulfite ............................................................ 0.2 g
in milk and other products.1 The formulation was developed *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
from a study conducted by Vera of various peptones, carbohy-
drates, salts and other constituents in various concentrations Precautions3
and combinations to yield eugonic (luxuriant) growth of 1. Biosafety Level 2 practices, containment equipment and
bacteria.2 facilities are recommended for activities with clinical speci-
mens of human or animal origin containing or potentially
Principles of the Procedure containing pathogenic Brucella spp.
Peptones supply amino acids and other nitrogenous substances 2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and
to support bacterial growth. L-cystine is an essential amino facilities are recommended for all manipulations of cultures
acid that improves growth. Dextrose is incorporated as a source of the pathogenic Brucella spp. and for experimental ani-
of energy and sodium chloride provides osmotic equilibrium. mal studies.
Sodium sulfite along with the cystine content improves growth
with chromogenicity.

223
Section III
E Eugon Broth, cont.

Directions for Preparation from Procedure

Dehydrated Product Organisms to be cultivated must first be isolated in pure
1. Suspend 30.4 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. culture on an appropriate solid medium.
Mix thoroughly. Using a sterile inoculating loop or needle, transfer fresh growth
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- from the subculture medium to the tubed medium.
pletely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Incubate under conditions appropriate for the organism being
4. When an enriched medium is being prepared, cool to cultivated. Broth cultures should be held at least 1 week
50-55C prior to adding the desired enrichment. before discarding as negative.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
Expected Results
Growth in tubes is indicated by the presence of turbidity
compared to an uninoculated control.
User Quality Control
If growth appears, cultures should be examined by Gram
Identity Specifications staining, subculturing onto appropriate media and incubating
Bacto Eugon Broth inoculated media aerobically with increased CO2 and/or
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
anaerobically.
Solution: 3.04% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
amber, clear, may have a slight pre- References
cipitate. 1. Pelczar and Vera. 1949. Milk Plant Monthly. 38:30.
2. Vera. 1947. J. Bacteriol. 54:14.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear, may have a slight 3. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
precipitate. No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
Reaction of 3.04%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
Availability
Cultural Response Bacto Eugon Broth
Bacto Eugon Broth
Cat. No. 259010 Dehydrated 500 g
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate the BBL Eugonbroth Medium

medium unsupplemented at 35 2C (Aspergillus niger and Candida Cat. No. 297424 Prepared Tubes Ctn. of 100*
albicans at 30 2C) for up to 72 hours.
*Store at 2-8C.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Aspergillus niger 16404 102-103 Fair to good
Brucella abortus 11192* 102-103 Good
Candida albicans 26790 102-103 Good
Lactobacillus fermentum 9338 102-103 Good
Shigella flexneri 12022 102-103 Good
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good
*If this strain is not available, verify performance with a known isolate.

224
 m FC Agar

m FC Agar m FC Broth Base

Rosolic Acid
Intended Use procedure, the delayed-incubation fecal coliform procedure and
m FC Agar and m FC Broth Base are used with Rosolic Acid in the two-layer agar method for recovering injured fecal
cultivating and enumerating fecal coliforms by the membrane coliforms.2 AOAC International specifies m FC Agar for
filter technique at elevated temperatures. detecting total coliforms and fecal coliforms in foods.3
The U. S. Environmental Protection Agency specifies using
Summary and Explanation m FC medium in fecal coliform methods for testing water by
Geldreich et al.1 formulated a medium to enumerate fecal the direct MF method or the delayed-incubation MF method.4,5
coliforms (MFC) using the membrane filter (MF) technique
without prior enrichment. Fecal coliforms (i.e., those found in Principles of the Procedure
the feces of warm-blooded animals) are differentiated from m FC Agar and m FC Broth Base contain peptones as sources
coliforms from environmental sources by their ability to grow of carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals.Yeast extract
at 44.5 0.5C.2 supplies B-complex vitamins that stimulate bacterial growth.
Many standard methods membrane filtration procedures Lactose is a carbohydrate. Bile Salts No. 3 inhibits growth of
specify m FC medium for testing water.2-4 The American Public gram-positive bacteria. m FC Agar contains agar as the solidi-
Health Association (APHA) specifies m FC medium and incu- fying agent. The differential indicator system combines aniline
bation at 44.5 0.5C in the fecal coliform membrane filter blue and rosolic acid.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications Cultural Response
Difco m FC Agar Difco m FC Agar or m FC Broth Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige with slight blue tint, free-flowing, Prepare the medium per label directions with 1% Rosolic Acid. Using

Solution:
homogeneous.
5.2% solution, soluble in purified water
the membrane filter technique, inoculate and incubate plates at 44.5
0.5C for 24 2 hours. F
upon boiling. Without 1% Rosolic Acid:
blue, very slightly to slightly opalescent, ORGANISM ATCC
INOCULUM
CFU RECOVERY
COLONY
COLOR
G
may have a slight precipitate. With 1%
Enterococcus
Rosolic Acid: cranberry red, slightly opal-
faecalis 19433 103-2103 Marked to
escent, may have a slight precipitate.
complete
Prepared Appearance: Without 1% Rosolic AcidBlue, slightly inhibition
opalescent. Escherichia coli 25922 20-80 Good Blue
With 1% Rosolic AcidCranberry red,
slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 5.2% Escherichia coli
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2 (without 1% Rosolic Acid) ATCC 25922

Difco m FC Broth Base

Dehydrated Appearance: Beige with slight blue tint, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
Solution: 3.7% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is blue, slightly
opalescent, may have a precipitate.

Prepared Appearance: Without 1% Rosolic AcidBlue, slightly

opalescent, may have a very fine pre-
cipitate.
With 1% Rosolic AcidCranberry red,
slightly opalescent, may have a very fine
precipitate.
Reaction of 3.7%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2 (without 1% Rosolic Acid)
Difco Rosolic Acid
Dehydrated Appearance: Dark reddish-brown with metallic green
particles, free-flowing, fine crystalline
powder.
Solution: 1.0% solution, soluble in 0.2N NaOH.
Solution is deep red, clear to very slightly
opalescent.

225
 Section III
FG m FC Agar, cont.

Colonies of fecal coliforms are blue; non-fecal coliforms and Difco m FC Broth
other organisms are gray to cream-colored. 1. Prepare the broth medium from the dehydrated base
according to the label directions and with the addition of
Formulae the Rosolic Acid solution.
Difco m FC Agar 2. Add 2 mL of the cooled broth to sterile absorbent pads in
Approximate Formula* Per Liter special tight-fitting plastic dishes.
Tryptose ................................................................... 10.0 g
3. Roll the membrane filter used to collect the water sample
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 5.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g onto the moistened absorbent pad, so as to avoid the
Lactose ..................................................................... 12.5 g formation of air bubbles between the filter and the pad.
Bile Salts No. 3 ........................................................... 1.5 g 4. Place the dishes in plastic bags and incubate, by immersion,
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g in a water bath at 44.5 0.2C for 24 2 hours.
Aniline Blue ................................................................ 0.1 g
Difco m FC Broth Base Expected Results
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar. Colonies of fecal coliforms will be various shades of blue.
Difco Rosolic Acid Non-fecal coliforms are gray to cream-colored.
Rosolic Acid ................................................................ 1 g/vial
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. Limitation of the Procedure
A few non-fecal coliform colonies may be observed on m FC
Directions for Preparation from
media due to the selective action of the elevated temperature
Dehydrated Product and the addition of the Rosolic Acid. It may be useful to
Difco m FC Agar
elevate the temperature to 45 0.2C to eliminate Klebsiella
1. Suspend 52 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix strains from the fecal coliform group.6
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to References
completely dissolve the powder. 1. Geldreich, Huff and Best. 1965. J. Am. Water Works Assoc. 57:208.
2. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
3. Add 10 mL of a 1% solution of Rosolic Acid in 0.2N NaOH. wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC Interna-
Continue heating for 1 minute. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE. tional. Gaithersburg, Md.
4. If necessary, adjust to pH 7.4 with 1N HCl. 4. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1992. Manual for the certification of laboratories analyzing
drinking water. EPA-814B-92-002. Office of Ground Water and Technical Support Division, USEPA,
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Cincinnati, Ohio.
5. Bordner, Winter and Scarpino (ed.). 1978. Microbiological methods for monitoring the environment:
stable, typical control cultures. water and wastes. Publication EPA-600/8-78-017. Environmental Monitoring and Support Labora-
tory, Office of Research and Development, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, Ohio.
6. Eaton, Clesceri and Greenberg (ed.). 1995. Standard methods for the examination of water and
Difco m FC Broth Base wastewater, 19th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
1. Suspend 3.7 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water.
2. Add 1 mL of a 1% solution of Rosolic Acid in 0.2N NaOH. Availability
3. If necessary, adjust to pH 7.4 with 1N HCl. Difco m FC Agar
4. Heat to boiling. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE. AOAC CCAM EPA SMWW
5. Cool before dispensing. Cat. No. 267710 Dehydrated 100 g
267720 Dehydrated 500 g
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures. Difco m FC Broth Base
EPA SMWW
Difco Rosolic Acid Cat. No. 288320 Dehydrated 100 g
Prepare a 1% solution, dissolving 1 g in 100 mL of 0.2N NaOH. 288330 Dehydrated 500 g
Difco Rosolic Acid
Procedure Cat. No. 232281 Vial 6 1 g
Difco m FC Agar

1. Prepare the agar medium from the dehydrated base according

to the label directions and with the addition of the Rosolic
Acid solution.
2. Pour molten agar, previously cooled to 45-50C into special
tight-fitting plastic dishes and allow to harden.
3. Roll the membrane filter used to collect the water sample
onto the surface of the agar, so as to avoid the formation of
air bubbles between the filter and the agar surface.
4. Place the dishes in plastic bags and incubate, by immersion,
in a water bath at 44.5 0.2C for 24 2 hours.

226
 m FC Basal Medium

m FC Basal Medium
Intended Use Medium superior to LES Endo Medium in recovering coliforms
m FC Basal Medium is used with MUG or BCIG for cultivating and equivalent to FC-BCIG Medium in recovering E. coli.
and enumerating fecal coliforms by the membrane filter tech-
nique at elevated temperatures. Principles of the Procedure
m FC Basal Medium contains peptones as sources of carbon,
Summary and Explanation nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Yeast extract supplies B-complex
Ciebin et al.1 described a modification of m FC Medium, called vitamins that stimulate bacterial growth. Bile Salts No. 3 inhibits
FC Basal Medium, in which the chromogenic substrate the growth of gram-positive microorganisms. Agar is the solidi-
5-bromo-6-chloro-3-indolyl--D-glucuronide (BCIG) is added fying agent.
for quantitative recovery of Escherichia coli from untreated
water samples to show fecal contamination using membrane Formula
filter methods. Difco m FC Basal Medium
Standard method procedures use media with the fluorogenic Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Tryptose ................................................................... 10.0 g
substrate, 4-methylumbelliferyl--D-glucuronide (MUG) to
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 5.0 g
enumerate E. coli by membrane filter methods.2 Disadvantages Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
of using MUG include the requirement of ultraviolet light, Bile Salts No. 3 ........................................................... 1.5 g
possible diffusion of fluorescence from the colony to the Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
surrounding medium and background fluorescence of membrane Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
filters.3 Using BCIG in place of MUG to detect -glucuronidase *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

activity gives visible blue colonies and an indigo-blue complex Directions for Preparation from
that remains within the colony. Ciebin et al.1 found FC-BCIG
Medium comparable to standard MUG-based media for
Dehydrated Product
detection of -glucuronidase activity of E. coli. 1. Suspend 39.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
In another study, Ciebin et al.4 formulated DC Medium using 2. Add 100 mg of MUG or BCIG, as desired, and boil to com-
FC Basal Medium supplemented with lactose, BCIG and
cefsulodin. It is a differential coliform medium for the
pletely dissolve the powder. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE. F
3. If necessary, adjust to pH 7.4 with 1N HCl.
enumeration of coliforms and E. coli in potable water using
membrane filtration. Ciebin et al. compared DC Medium to 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using G
LES Endo Medium and FC-BCIG Medium. They found DC stable, typical control cultures.

Escherichia coli
User Quality Control ATCC 25922

Identity Specifications
Difco m FC Basal Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.95% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light amber, very
slightly to slightly opalescent, may have
slight precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 3.95%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco m FC Basal Medium
Prepare the medium per label directions (with the addition of 0.01% MUG).
Using the membrane filter technique, inoculate and incubate at 44.5
0.5C for 24 2 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY FLUORESCENCE
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 30-200 Inhibition
Enterococcus faecalis 19433 3102-103 Marked to
complete inhibition
Escherichia coli 25922 30-200 Good + (blue-white)

227
 Section III
FG m FC Basal Medium, cont.

Procedure m FC-BCIG
1. Filter duplicate water samples through membrane filtration -glucuronidase-positive organisms produce a visible blue
apparatus. colony.
2. Transfer each membrane to the surface of the m FC Basal -glucuronidase-negative organisms produce a non-blue colony.
Medium plate. Place cultures in waterproof plastic bags.
Submerge Petri dishes in waterbath. Incubate one set of plates References
at 35 2C and one set at 44.5 0.2C for 24 2 hours. 1. Ciebin, Brodsky, Eddington, Horsnell, Choney, Palmateer, Ley, Joshi and Shears. 1995. Appl. Environ.
Microbiol. 61:3940.
3. Count number of colonies and record observations. m FC-MUG 2. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
plates are read under long-wavelength (366 nm) ultraviolet light. 3. Farber. 1986. Can. Inst. Food Sci. Tech. J. 19:34.
4. Ciebin, Schop and Brodsky. 1997. Q-152. Abstr. 97th Annu. Meet. Am. Soc. Microbiol. 1997.

Expected Results
m FC-MUG
Availability
Difco m FC Basal Medium
-glucuronidase-positive organisms produce a blue-white Cat. No. 269810 Dehydrated 500 g
fluorescence; e.g., E. coli.
-glucuronidase-negative organisms do not fluoresce; e.g.,
E. aerogenes, E. faecalis, S. typhimurium, S. flexneri.

FLN Agar
Intended Use Procedure
FLN (Fluorescence Lactose Nitrate) Agar was developed to Specimens must first be isolated in pure culture on an appro-
provide a screening procedure for partial identification of priate medium. The isolate should be Gram-stained and
nonfermentative gram-negative bacilli. examined to confirm that morphology is appropriate for the
gram-negative bacilli.
Summary and Explanation
Using a sterile inoculating needle, streak the slant surface and
Pickett and Pedersen observed that over 50% of 183 strains of
stab the butt with several colonies from the subculture medium.
nonfermentative bacilli from clinical specimens consisted of
Incubate the tubes, with caps loosened, at 35C for 18-24 hours.
only 3 (of 17) species.1 These species were Pseudomonas
aeruginosa, Pseudomonas maltophilia (now Stenotrophomonas If the isolate fails to grow, reincubate at 25-30C for up to 1
maltophilia), and Achromobacter anitratus (now Acinetobacter week; examine daily for growth and pigment production. If
baumannii). This observation led to the development of media pigmentation fails to develop after the initial 24 hours of incu-
and tests to differentiate and partially identify the species. bation, reincubate the cultures at 22C for 1 or more days.
FLN Agar provides a means to test for fluorescence, lactose Expected Results
oxidation and denitrification. Further differentiation can be
Examine FLN Agar under UV light for fluorescin, a greenish-
obtained by testing for oxidase, lysine decarboxylation and
yellow fluorescent pigment in the colonies and surrounding
fructose oxidation.1
medium. Observe butt of slant for presence of gas bubbles as
evidence of denitrification. Yellow color on slant indicates
Principles of the Procedure
oxidation of lactose.
To demonstrate the ability of isolates to produce fluorescin
pigment, to reduce nitrate to nitrite to nitrogen gas and to oxidize References
lactose, medium B of King (Pseudomonas Agar P/Tech Agar)2 1. Pickett, and Pedersen. 1968. Appl. Microbiol. 16:1631.
2. King, Ward, and Raney. 1954. J. Lab. Clin. Med. 44:301.
was modified.1 The ability of isolates to produce fluorescin and 3. Koneman, Allen, Janda, Schreckenberger and Winn. 1997. Color atlas and textbook of diagnostic
to reduce nitrate or nitrite to nitrogen gas are two important microbiology, 5th ed. Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, Pa.

characteristics in differentiating certain Pseudomonas spp.

(principally P. aeruginosa) from other nonfermentative bacilli.
Availability
BBL FLN Agar
The inclusion of lactose and phenol red indicator in the medium
Cat. No. 296363 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10
permits the detection of acid formed from the oxidation of
lactose and aids in identifying the strongly lactose-positive group
of nonfermenters.3

228
 Fildes Enrichment

FTA Hemagglutination Buffer

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
FTA Hemagglutination Buffer (Phosphate Buffered Saline, pH This phosphate buffered saline provides an isotonic environ-
7.2) is used in the FTA-ABS test and other serological procedures ment for microorganisms during manipulation pursuant to the
as a diluent and for washing slide preparations. performance of serological test procedures.

Summary and Explanation Formula

This phosphate buffered saline product is widely used in immu- BBL FTA Hemagglutination Buffer
nology as a diluent in serological procedures. It is referred Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 7.65 g
to as FTA Hemagglutination Buffer because of its use in the Disodium Phosphate ........................................... 1,268.8 mg
Fluorescent Treponemal Antibody-Absorption (FTA-ABS) test, Monosodium Phosphate ............................................ 0.1 g
which is a serological test for syphilis. Monopotassium Phosphate .................................... 211.3 mg
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

User Quality Control Directions for Preparation from

Identity Specifications Dehydrated Product
BBL FTA Hemagglutination Buffer 1. Dissolve 9.23 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. DO
Dehydrated Appearance: White, fine, homogeneous, free of NOT AUTOCLAVE.
extraneous material. 2. Test samples of the finished product for performance.
Solution: 0.923% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is colorless, clear. Procedure
Prepared Appearance: Colorless, clear. Refer to specific serological procedures for the use of this
Reaction of 0.923% buffer.1
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.1

Reference
1. Larsen, Pope, Johnson and Kennedy (ed.). 1998. A manual of tests for syphilis, 9th ed. American
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. F
Availability G
BBL FTA Hemagglutination Buffer
Cat. No. 211248 Dehydrated 500 g

Fildes Enrichment
Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Fildes Enrichment may be used to enrich a variety of media Fildes Enrichment is a peptic digest of sheep blood used to
for the cultivation of various microorganisms. enhance the growth of fastidious organisms. It may be added
to Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Broth or Agar in a final concentra-
User Quality Control tion of 5% for cultivation of Haemophilus influenzae.1,2

Identity Specifications Stokes and Willis both recommended that 5% Fildes Enrich-
BBL Fildes Enrichment
ment and 20% human serum be added to Nutrient Agar for
Appearance: Dark brown and hazy with fine dark Nagler plates for C. perfringens and C. bifermentans.3,4
brown sediment.
Principles of the Procedure
Cultural Response Fildes Enrichment is a rich source of growth factors stimula-
BBL Fildes Enrichment
tory to various microorganisms, including the X (hemin) and
Prepare medium with added Fildes Enrichment. Inoculate with fresh
cultures and incubate at 35 2C for 2 days with CO2. V (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide, NAD) factors necessary
for the growth of H. influenzae.
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY
Haemophilus influenzae 10211 Good
Neisseria meningitidis 700344 Good
Formula
Fildes Enrichment is prepared by the action of the enzyme
pepsin on defibrinated sheep blood.

229
 Section III
FG Fildes Enrichment, cont.

Procedure Expected Results

Fildes Enrichment is a ready-to-use solution. Many factors in Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Fildes Enrichment are heat labile. This enrichment cannot be
heated and must be added aseptically in the proper amounts References
1. Fildes. 1920. Br. J. Exp. Pathol. 1:129.
to media that have been autoclaved and cooled to 50-55C. 2. Parker and Hoeprich. 1962. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 37:319.
3. Stokes. 1960. Clinical bacteriology, 2nd ed. Edward Arnold, Ltd., London.
Fildes Enrichment is usually employed in prepared media at a 4. Willis. 1960. Anaerobic bacteriology in clinical medicine. Butterworth & Co., Ltd., London.

final concentration of 5% for optimal results. Some formulas

may require higher or lower concentrations. Add Fildes Availability
Enrichment as required. BBL Fildes Enrichment
Cat. No. 211866 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 5 mL Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

Fletchers Media
Fletcher Medium Base Fletchers Medium
Fletchers Medium with 5-FU
Intended Use thereafter, leptospires may be isolated by direct culture of
Fletchers Medium is an enriched, semisolid medium used for undiluted urine specimens. At autopsy, leptospires may be
the cultivation of Leptospira. isolated from kidney and liver tissues as well as from blood
and urine.
Fletchers Medium with 5-FU contains 5-fluorouracil for
selective recovery and cultivation of Leptospira from clinical Fletcher developed an enriched medium for the cultivation of
specimens. Leptospira from clinical specimens (urine, blood, kidney and
liver tissues).3 Peptone and a rabbit serum enrichment
Summary and Explanation support the growth of leptospires.
Leptospirosis is an acute, febrile disease caused by members of When supplemented with 5-fluorouracil, the medium is
the genus Leptospira.1,2 Direct culture of blood is the most recommended for urine and other specimens containing mixed
reliable way to detect Leptospira during the first week of microbial flora to provide selective inhibition of bacterial
illness. After the first week of illness and for several months contaminants without inhibiting the growth of leptospires.4

User Quality Control Principles of the Procedure

Identity Specifications Peptone and beef extract provide amino acids and other
Difco Fletcher Medium Base nitrogenous substances to support bacterial growth. Sodium
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. chloride provides essential ions. A small amount of agar provides
Solution: 0.25 g/92 mL solution, soluble in a semi-solid consistency, which helps in the detection of motile
purified water upon boiling. Solution organisms.
is very light amber, clear to very slightly
opalescent. The 5-fluorouracil is a fluorinated pyrimidine analog that
Prepared Appearance: Very light amber, very slightly opales- inhibits bacterial contaminants without affecting the growth
cent. of Leptospira.
Reaction of 0.25 g/92 mL
Solution at 25C: pH 7.9 0.1
Formula
Cultural Response Difco Fletcher Medium Base
Difco Fletcher Medium Base
Approximate Formula* Per 920 mL
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with undiluted Peptone ..................................................................... 0.3 g
cultures and incubate at 30 2C for up to 5 days. Beef Extract ................................................................ 0.2 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 0.5 g
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM RECOVERY Agar ........................................................................... 1.5 g
Leptospira interrogans *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

serotype australis 23605 0.1 mL Good

Leptospira interrogans
serotype canicola 23606 0.1 mL Good
Leptospira kirschneri 23604 0.1 mL Good

230
 Fluid A

Directions for Preparation from 1:10 and 1:100 dilutions. Consult appropriate texts for
Dehydrated Product detailed information about the processing and inoculation of
1. Suspend 2.5 g of the powder in 920 mL of purified water. tissues and other specimens.1,2
Mix thoroughly. Incubate tubes in the dark at 25-30C for up to 6 weeks.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder. Expected Results
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Examine tubes for growth every 5-7 days. Growth occurs as a
4. Aseptically add 80 mL sterile normal rabbit serum at 56C. ringed-area (disk) 1-3 cm below the surface of the medium.
Mix well. The absence of a ringed area of growth does not necessarily
5. Determine pH; if necessary, aseptically adjust to pH 7.9 mean leptospires are not present. Remove a small amount of
0.1 with 1N HCl or 1N NaOH. growth from the disk area and examine microscopically (the
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Gram stain is not satisfactory). Microcolonies can be fixed
stable, typical control cultures. with methanol and stained with Giemsa stain to show rod
forms.5
Procedure
Cultures should be held for up to 6 weeks before discarding as
Prepare the medium from Fletcher Medium Base per label
negative.
directions and aseptically dispense into sterile screw-cap tubes
in 5-7 mL amounts. Store at room temperature overnight.
References
Inactivate the whole medium the day following its prepara- 1. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
tion by placing the tubes in a water bath at 56C for 1 hour. St. Louis, Mo.

Allow the medium to cool before inoculation. 2. Weyant, Bragg and Kaufmann. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Fletcher. 1927-28. Trans. Roy. Soc. Trop. Med. & Hyg. 21:265.
Inoculate the medium with one or two drops of blood or urine 4. Johnson and Rogers. 1964. J. Bacteriol. 87:422.
5. Weinman. 1981. In Balows and Hausler (ed.), Diagnostic procedures for bacterial, mycotic and
per tube and distribute throughout the medium. Leptospires parasitic infections, 6th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
are most likely to be isolated from blood during the first week
of illness. Thereafter, they are more likely to be isolated from Availability
urine. Both undiluted and 10-fold diluted urine specimens Difco Fletcher Medium Base
should be cultured because the undiluted urine may contain
growth-inhibiting substances. Repeat the inoculation proce-
Cat. No. 298710
BBL Fletchers Medium

Dehydrated 500 g
F
dures to obtain optimal recovery of Leptospira, since they may Cat. No. 297242 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 5 mL Pkg. of 10* G
be shed sporadically. BBL Fletchers Medium with 5-FU

SMWW
Leptospira may also be cultured from liver and kidney tissues.
Cat. No. 297243 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 5 mL Pkg. of 10*
Aseptically macerate tissue specimens and inoculate using 1:1, *Store at 2-8C.

Flo Agar
(See Pseudomonas Agars)

Fluid A Fluid D
Intended Use is performed using the membrane filtration or direct testing
Fluid A and Fluid D conform with specifications of The United methods, depending upon sample type and size.
States Pharmacopeia (USP). Fluid A and Fluid D are used for diluting or rinsing when perform-
Fluid A (peptone water) is used for diluting or rinsing when ing sterility testing. These fluids aid in the complete rinsing of the
performing sterility testing. Fluid D (peptone water with membrane filter apparatus and are not toxic to microorganisms.
polysorbate 80) is used for diluting or rinsing samples con- Fluid D contains polysorbate 80, which acts as a surfactant to
taining lecithin or oil when performing sterility testing. break down the lecithin or oils present.

Summary and Explanation Principles of the Procedure

Pharmaceuticals, biologicals, medical devices or any material Fluid A and Fluid D contain peptic digest of animal tissue,
claiming to be sterile must be tested for sterility according to which provides a source of nitrogen for bacteria. Polysorbate
the procedures described in the compendia.1,2 Sterility testing 80 in Fluid D is a surfactant.

231
 Section III
FG Fluid A, cont.

Formulae Procedure
Difco Fluid A Fluid A and Fluid D are provided as prepared, ready-to-use
Approximate Formula* Per Liter diluents in a variety of bottle sizes and closures. Consult
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 1.0 g
appropriate references for detailed information and recom-
Difco Fluid D

mended procedures.1,2
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 1.0 g
Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 1.0 mL Expected Results
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. Consult appropriate references for further information.1,2

User Quality Control References

1. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
Identity Specifications 2. Council of Europe. 2002. European pharmacopeia, 4th ed. Council of Europe, Strasbourgh, France.
Difco Fluid A
Appearance: Nearly colorless, clear solution. Availability
Reaction of Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2 Difco Fluid A
Difco Fluid D EP USP
Cat. No. 290651 Prepared Bottles, 100 mL
Appearance: Nearly colorless, clear solution.
(septum screw cap) Pkg. of 10
Reaction of Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2 290821 Prepared Bottles, 100 mL (serum) Pkg. of 10
290652 Prepared Bottles, 300 mL
Toxicity Test (septum screw cap) Pkg. of 10
Difco Fluid A or Fluid D Difco Fluid D
Perform a toxicity test by inoculating duplicate tubes of Tryptic Soy
EP USP
Broth with the test organisms and adding 1 mL of Fluid A or Fluid D to
Cat. No. 290661 Prepared Bottles, 100 mL
one tube of each set. Incubate tubes at 20-25C for up to 5 days.
(septum screw cap) Pkg. of 10
Good recovery in the tubes containing Fluid A or Fluid D indicates that
290831 Prepared Bottles, 100 mL (serum) Pkg. of 10
the solution does not have antibacterial or antifungal properties and is
290662 Prepared Bottles, 300 mL
suitable for use in appropriate procedures.
(septum screw cap) Pkg. of 10
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
2
Bacillus subtilis 6633 10-10 Good
Candida albicans 10231 10-102 Good
Micrococcus luteus 9341 10-102 Good

Fluid Sabouraud Medium

(See Sabouraud Media)

Fluid Thioglycollate Media

(See Thioglycollate Media)

Folic AOAC Medium

Intended Use 3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the vitamin under
Folic AOAC Medium is used for determining folic acid con- test. They contain all the factors necessary for optimal
centration by the microbiological assay technique. growth of the test organism except the single essential vitamin
to be determined.
Summary and Explanation Folic AOAC Medium is prepared for use in the microbiological
Vitamin assay media are prepared for use in the microbiological assay of folic acid according to the procedures of the Folic
assay of vitamins. Three types of media are used for this purpose: Acid Assay in the Official Methods of Analysis of AOAC
1. Maintenance Media: For carrying the stock culture to International.1 Enterococcus hirae ATCC 8043 is the test
preserve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism organism in this assay.
for its intended purpose;
2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for immediate
use;
232
 Folic AOAC Medium, cont.

User Quality Control Precautions

Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media or
Identity Specifications glassware in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely small
Difco Folic AOAC Medium amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give erroneous
Dehydrated Appearance: Off-white, free-flowing, homogeneous.
results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from detergents and
Solution: 5.5% (single strength) or 11.0%
other chemicals must be used. Glassware must be heated to
(double strength) solution, soluble in
purified water upon boiling. Single 250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic residues
strength solution is light amber, clear, that might be present. Take precautions to keep sterilizing and
may have a slight precipitate. cooling conditions uniform throughout the assay.
Prepared Appearance: Very light amber, clear.
Reaction of 5.5% Directions for Preparation from
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.1
Dehydrated Product
Cultural Response 1. Suspend 11 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water.
Difco Folic AOAC Medium 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 2-3 minutes.
Prepare the medium per label directions. The medium supports the 3. Distribute 5 mL amounts into tubes, evenly dispersing the
growth of Enterococcus hirae ATCC 8043 when prepared in single precipitate.
strength and supplemented with folic acid. The medium should
produce a standard curve when tested using a folic acid reference 4. Add standard or test samples.
standard at 0.0 to 10.0 ng per 10 mL. Incubate tubes with caps 5. Adjust the tube volume to 10 mL with purified water.
loosened at 35-37C for 16-18 hours. Read the percent transmittance 6. Autoclave at 121C for 5 minutes.
using a spectrophotometer at 660 nm.

Procedure
Principles of the Procedure Follow assay procedures as outlined in the reference.1 It is
Folic Acid AOAC Medium is a folic acid-free dehydrated essential that a standard curve be set up for each separate
medium containing all other nutrients and vitamins essential assay. Autoclaving and incubation conditions that can influ-
for the cultivation of E. hirae ATCC 8043. The addition of folic ence the standard curve readings cannot always be duplicated.
acid in specified increasing concentrations gives a growth re- The standard curve is obtained by using folic acid at levels of
sponse that can be measured turbidimetrically or titrimetrically. 0.0, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 ng per assay tube (10 mL). Folic AOAC
Medium may be used for both turbidimetric and titrimetric F
Formula
Difco Folic AOAC Medium
analysis. Turbidimetric readings should be taken after incuba-
tion at 35-37C for 16-18 hours. Titrimetric determinations
G
Approximate Formula* Per Liter are best made following incubation at 35-37C for 72 hours.
Vitamin Assay Casamino Acids ................................. 10.0 g
L-Asparagine .............................................................. 0.6 g The folic acid required for the preparation of the standard
L-Tryptophan .............................................................. 0.2 g
L-Cysteine Hydrochloride ........................................... 0.76 g
curve may be prepared as follows:
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g A. Dissolve 50 mg dried folic acid in about 30 mL 0.01N
Adenine Sulfate ....................................................... 10.0 mg
Guanine Hydrochloride ............................................ 10.0 mg NaOH and 300 mL purified water.
Uracil ........................................................................ 10.0 mg B. Adjust the pH reaction to 7.5 0.5 with diluted HCl
Xanthine .................................................................. 20.0 mg solution.Dilute to 500 mL with purified water.
p-Aminobenzoic Acid ................................................. 1.0 mg
Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ............................................ 4.0 mg C. Add 2 mL of the solution to 50 mL purified water. Adjust
Thiamine Hydrochloride ......................................... 400.0 g the pH reaction to 7.5 0.5. Dilute to 100 mL with puri-
Calcium Pantothenate ............................................ 800.0 g fied water. This yields a stock solution containing 2 g folic
Nicotinic Acid ......................................................... 800.0 g
Biotin ....................................................................... 20.0 g
acid per mL.
Riboflavin ................................................................... 1.0 mg D. Prepare the stock solution fresh daily.
Glutathione ................................................................ 5.2 mg
Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 0.1 g The standard solution for the assay is made by diluting 1 mL
Sodium Citrate ......................................................... 52.0 g of this stock solution to 1 liter with purified water. This solution
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 6.4 g contains 2 ng folic acid per mL. Use 0.0, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4, and
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.4 g
Manganese Sulfate .................................................. 20.0 mg 5 mL per assay tube.
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 20.0 mg
Ferrous Sulfate ......................................................... 20.0 mg
Some laboratories may wish to alter the concentration of folic
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. acid recommended above for the standard curve. This is
permissible if the concentration used is within the limits
specified by AOAC.1

233
 Section III
FG Folic AOAC Medium, cont.

Expected Results 3. The use of altered or deficient media may cause mutants
1. Prepare a standard concentration response curve by plotting having different nutritional requirements that will not give
the response readings against the amount of standard in a satisfactory response.
each tube, disk or cup. 4. For successful results of these procedures, all conditions of
2. Determine the amount of vitamin at each level of assay the assay must be followed precisely.
solution by interpolation from the standard curve.
3. Calculate the concentration of vitamin in the sample from Reference
1. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC international, 17th ed., vol. II. AOAC
the average of these volumes. Use only those values that do International, Gaithersburg, Md.
not vary more than 10% from the average. Use the results
only if two-thirds of the values do not vary more than 10%. Availability
Difco Folic AOAC Medium
Limitations of the Procedure AOAC
Cat. No. 212169 Dehydrated 100 g*
1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium
*Store at 2-8C.
must be cultured and maintained on media recommended
for this purpose.
2. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the assay
procedure.

Folic Acid Assay Medium

Intended Use Formula
Folic Acid Assay Medium is used for determining folic acid Difco Folic Acid Assay Medium
concentration by the microbiological assay technique. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Vitamin Assay Casamino Acids ................................. 12.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g
Summary and Explanation Sodium Citrate ......................................................... 20.0 g
Vitamin assay media are prepared for use in the microbiological L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.2 g
assay of vitamins. Three types of medium are used for this purpose: DL-Tryptophan ........................................................... 0.2 g
Adenine Sulfate ....................................................... 20.0 mg
1. Maintenance Media: For carrying the stock culture to pre- Guanine Hydrochloride ............................................ 20.0 mg
Uracil ........................................................................ 20.0 mg
serve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism for Thiamine Hydrochloride ............................................. 2.0 mg
its intended purpose; Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ............................................ 4.0 mg
2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for immediate Riboflavin ................................................................... 2.0 mg
use; Niacin ......................................................................... 2.0 mg
Calcium Pantothenate ............................................ 400.0 g
3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the vitamin under p-Aminobenzoic Acid ............................................. 200.0 g
test. They contain all the factors necessary for optimal Biotin ......................................................................... 0.8 g
growth of the test organism except the single essential Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
vitamin to be determined. Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.4 g
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 20.0 mg
Folic Acid Assay Medium is used in the microbiological assay Ferrous Sulfate ......................................................... 20.0 mg
of folic acid with Enterococcus hirae ATCC 8043 as the test Manganese Sulfate .................................................. 20.0 mg
organism. Folic Acid Assay Medium is prepared according to *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

the formula described by Capps, Hobbs and Fox,1 modified

Precautions
with sodium citrate instead of sodium acetate.
Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media or
Principles of the Procedure glassware in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely small
Folic Acid Assay Medium is a folic acid-free dehydrated amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give erroneous
medium containing all other nutrients and vitamins essential results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from detergents and
for the cultivation of E. hirae ATCC 8043. The addition of other chemicals must be used. Glassware must be heated to
folic acid in specified increasing concentrations gives a growth 250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic residues that
response that can be measured turbidimetrically. might be present. Take precautions to keep sterilization and
cooling conditions uniform throughout the assay.

234
 Folic Acid Assay Medium, cont.

Prepare the folic acid stock solution required for the standard
User Quality Control
curve as follows:
Identity Specifications 1. Dissolve 50 mg dried Folic Acid USP Reference Standard
Difco Folic Acid Assay Medium
or equivalent in about 30 mL of 0.01N NaOH and 300 mL
Dehydrated Appearance: Off white to very light beige, free-
flowing, homogeneous. purified water.
Solution: 3.75% (single strength) or 7.5% 2. Adjust to pH 7.5 0.5 with diluted HCl solution. Add
(double strength) solution, soluble in purified water to give a volume of 500 mL.
purified water upon boiling for 2-3 3. Add 2 mL of the solution from step 2 to 50 mL purified
minutes. Single strength solution is
light amber, may have a slight precipi- water. Adjust the pH to 7.5 0.5 with HCl solution. Dilute
tate. to 100 mL with purified water to give a stock solution con-
Prepared Appearance: Very light amber, clear, may have a taining 2 g folic acid per mL. Prepare the stock solution
very slight precipitate. fresh daily.
Reaction of 3.75%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2 Prepare the standard solution for the assay by diluting 1 mL of
this stock solution in 1 liter with purified water. This solution
Cultural Response contains 2 ng folic acid per mL. Use 0.0, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4 and
Difco Folic Acid Assay Medium 5 mL per assay tube.
Prepare the medium per label directions. The medium supports the
growth of Enterococcus hirae ATCC 8043 when prepared in single Following incubation, place the tubes in the refrigerator for
strength and supplemented with folic acid. The medium should 15-30 minutes to stop growth. The growth can be measured
produce a standard curve when tested using a folic acid reference
standard at 0.0 to 10.0 ng per 10 mL. Incubate tubes with caps by a turbidimetric method and the curve constructed from the
loosened at 35-37C for 18-24 hours. Read the percent transmittance values obtained. The most effective assay range is between the
using a spectrophotometer at 660 nm. levels of 2 and 10 ng folic acid per 10 mL tube.

Expected Results
Directions for Preparation from 1. Prepare a standard concentration response curve by plotting
Dehydrated Product the response readings against the amount of standard in
1. Suspend 7.5 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water. each tube, disk or cup.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 2-3 minutes. 2. Determine the amount of vitamin at each level of assay F
3. Dispense in 5 mL amounts into tubes, evenly dispersing
the precipitate.
solution by interpolation from the standard curve.
3. Calculate the concentration of vitamin in the sample from
G
4. Add standard or test samples. the average of these volumes. Use only those values that do
5. Adjust the tube volume to 10 mL with purified water. not vary more than 10% from the average. Use the results
6. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes. only if two-thirds of the values do not vary more than 10%.
Procedure Limitations of the Procedure
Prepare stock cultures of E. hirae ATCC 8043 by stab inocula- 1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium
tion of Lactobacilli Agar AOAC. Incubate at 35-37C for 24-48 must be cultured and maintained on media recommended
hours. Store tubes in the refrigerator. Make transfers at monthly for this purpose.
intervals. Prepare the inoculum for assay by subculturing a stock 2. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the assay pro-
culture of E. hirae ATCC 8043 into a tube containing 10 mL cedure.
of Lactobacilli Broth AOAC. After incubation at 35-37C for 3. The use of altered or deficient media may cause mutants
18-24 hours, centrifuge the cells under aseptic conditions and having different nutritional requirements that will not give
decant the supernatant. Wash the cells three times with 10 mL a satisfactory response.
of sterile 0.85% saline. After the third wash, dilute the cell 4. For successful results of these procedures, all conditions of
suspension 1:100 with sterile 0.85% saline. Use one drop of the assay must be followed precisely.
this latter suspension to inoculate each of the assay tubes.
Reference
It is essential that a standard curve be set up for each separate 1. Capps, Hobbs and Fox. 1948. J. Bacteriol. 55:869.
assay. Autoclaving and incubation conditions that influence
the standard curve readings cannot always be duplicated. Availability
The standard curve is obtained by using folic acid at levels of Difco Folic Acid Assay Medium
0.0, 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 ng per 10 mL assay tube. Turbidimetric Cat. No. 231810 Dehydrated 100 g*
readings should be made after incubation at 35-37C for *Store at 2-8C.

18-24 hours. Refrigerate tubes for 15-30 minutes to stop

growth before reading.

235
 Section III
FG Folic Acid Casei Medium

Folic Acid Casei Medium

Intended Use uncomplicated pernicious anemia have a mean serum folic acid
Folic Acid Casei Medium is used for determining folic acid level of 16.6 ng per mL, while patients with megaloblastic
concentration by the microbiological assay technique. anemia have levels less than 4.0 ng per mL.

Summary and Explanation Principles of the Procedure

Vitamin assay media are prepared for use in the microbiological Folic Acid Casei Medium is a folic acid-free dehydrated
assay of vitamins. Three types of media are used for this purpose: medium containing all other nutrients and vitamins essential
1. Maintenance Media: For carrying the stock culture to for the cultivation of L. rhamnosus ATCC 7469. The addition
preserve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism of folic acid in specified increasing concentrations gives a
for its intended purpose; growth response that can be measured turbidimetrically.
2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for immediate
use; Formula
3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the vitamin under Difco Folic Acid Casei Medium
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
test. They contain all the factors necessary for optimal Charcoal Treated Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........... 10.0 g
growth of the test organism except the single essential Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g
vitamin to be determined. Sodium Acetate ....................................................... 40.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g
Folic Acid Casei Medium is prepared for the microbiological Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
assay of folic acid, particularly folic acid in serum. Lactobacillus DL-Tryptophan ........................................................... 0.2 g
L-Asparagine .............................................................. 0.6 g
rhamnosus ATCC 7469 is used as the test organism in this L-Cysteine Hydrochloride ........................................... 0.5 g
assay. Folic Acid Casei Medium is prepared according to the Adenine Sulfate ....................................................... 10.0 mg
formulation described by Flynn et al.1 and modified by Baker Guanine Hydrochloride ............................................ 10.0 mg
Uracil ........................................................................ 10.0 mg
et al.2 and Waters and Mollin.3 Xanthine .................................................................. 20.0 mg
Total serum folic acid activity can vary depending on the Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 0.1 g
Glutathione (reduced) ................................................ 5.0 mg
disease state. It has been reported that normal subjects have a Magnesium Sulfate (anhydrous) ................................. 0.2 g
mean serum folic acid level of 9.9 ng per mL. Patients with Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 20.0 mg
Ferrous Sulfate ......................................................... 20.0 mg
Manganese Sulfate .................................................. 15.0 mg
User Quality Control Riboflavin ................................................................... 1.0 mg
p-Aminobenzoic Acid ................................................. 2.0 mg
Identity Specifications Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ............................................ 4.0 mg
Difco Folic Acid Casei Medium Thiamine Hydrochloride ......................................... 400.0 g
Dehydrated Appearance: Off-white, homogeneous, with soft Calcium Pantothenate ............................................ 800.0 g
clumps. Nicotinic Acid ......................................................... 800.0 g
Biotin ....................................................................... 20.0 g
Solution: 4.7% (single strength) soluble in puri-
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
fied water upon boiling 1-2 minutes.
Single-strength solution is light amber,
clear, may have a slight precipitate. Precautions
Prepared Appearance: Single-strength solution is very light Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media or
amber, clear, may have a very slight glassware in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely small
precipitate. amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give erroneous
Reaction of 4.7%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.1 results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from detergents and
other chemicals must be used. Glassware must be heated to
Cultural Response 250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic residues that
Difco Folic Acid Casei Medium might be present. Take precautions to keep sterilization and
Prepare the medium per label directions with the addition of 0.05% cooling conditions uniform throughout the assay.
ascorbic acid. Dilute folic acid to produce a standard solution in folic
acid buffer solution (consisting of per liter: monopotassium phosphate
10.65 g, dipotassium phosphate 3.744 g and ascorbic acid 1.0 g and Directions for Preparation from
having a final pH at 25C of 6.1 0.05). The medium supports the Dehydrated Product
growth of Lactobacillus rhamnosus ATCC 7469 when prepared in
single strength and supplemented with folic acid. The medium should 1. Suspend 9.4 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water.
produce a standard curve when tested using a folic acid reference 2. Add 50 mg ascorbic acid. Mix thoroughly.
standard at 0.0 to 1.0 ng per 10 mL. Incubate tubes with caps 3. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1-2 minutes to
loosened at 35-37C for 18-24 hours. Read the percent transmittance
using a spectrophotometer at 660 nm. completely dissolve the powder.
4. Dispense 5 mL amounts into tubes, evenly dispersing the
precipitate.

236
 Folic Acid Casei Medium, cont.

5. Add standard or test samples. 3. If the test is not begun immediately, place tubes in a freezer
6. Adjust tube volume to 10 mL with purified water. and hold below -20C.
7. Autoclave at 121C for 5 minutes. Preparation of Serum Specimen
1. Thaw the serum containing ascorbic acid.
Procedure
2. Add 5 mL of the uniform sample to 45 mL rehydrated folic
Preparation of Stock Cultures and Inoculum
buffer solution (see Preparation of the Standard).
Prepare stock cultures of the test organism, L. rhamnosus ATCC
3. Incubate the serum-buffer solution at 37C for 90 minutes.
7469, by stab inoculation into prepared tubes of Lactobacilli Agar
Autoclave the incubated mixture at 121C for 2.5 minutes.
AOAC. Incubate the cultures at 35-37C for 18-24 hours. Store
4. Remove the coagulated protein by centrifuging and transfer
cultures in the refrigerator at 2-8C. Stock transfers are made at
the clear supernatant to a clean dry tube. The clear solution
monthly intervals.
is the sample to use in the folic acid assay.
Prepare the inoculum for assay by subculturing from a stock
Procedure for Total Folic Acid
culture of L. rhamnosus into a tube containing 10 mL prepared
1. Use 0.5, 1.0, 1.5 mL or other volumes of the prepared serum
Micro Inoculum Broth. Incubate at 35-37C for 16-18 hours.
extracts as described above.
Under aseptic conditions, centrifuge the tubes to sediment the
2. Fill each assay tube with 5 mL of rehydrated Folic Acid
cells and decant the supernatant. Wash the cells in 10 mL sterile
Casei Medium and sufficient purified water to give a total
single-strength Folic Acid Casei Medium. Resediment the cells
volume of 10 mL per tube.
by centrifuging aseptically and decant the supernatant. Repeat
3. Autoclave tubes at 121C for 5 minutes.
washing two more times. After the third washing, resuspend
4. Add 1 drop of inoculum described under Preparation of
the cells in 10 mL sterile single-strength medium and dilute
Stock Cultures and Inoculum to each assay.
1 mL with 99 mL of the same medium. One drop of this
5. Incubate at 35-37C for 18-24 hours. Tubes are refrigerated
suspension is used to inoculate each of the assay tubes. Read
for 15-30 minutes to stop growth before reading turbidi-
the growth response of the assay tubes turbidimetrically after
metrically.
18-24 hours incubation at 35-37C. (Some laboratories use
0.85% saline instead of the single-strength basal medium to Expected Results
wash and dilute the inoculum.)
The amount of folic acid in the test samples can be determined
Preparation of the Standard by interpolating the results with the values obtained on the F
It is essential that a standard curve be constructed for each sepa- standard curve, taking into consideration the dilutions of the
rate assay. Autoclave and incubation conditions can influence samples. G
the standard curve readings and cannot always be duplicated.
The standard curve may be obtained by using folic acid at levels Limitations of the Procedure
of 0.0, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.6, 0.8 and 1 ng per assay tube (10 mL). 1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium
must be cultured and maintained on media recommended
The folic acid required for preparation of the standard curve
for this purpose.
may be prepared as follows:
2. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the assay
Dissolve 50 mg dried folic acid in about 30 mL 0.01N NaOH procedure.
and 300 mL purified water. Adjust to pH 7-8 with 0.05N HCl 3. The use of altered or deficient media may cause mutants
and dilute to 500 mL with purified water. Dilute 10 mL of this having different nutritional requirements that will not give
solution with 500 mL purified water. Further dilute 1 mL in 1 a satisfactory response.
liter purified water to make a stock solution containing 2 ng 4. For successful results of these procedures, all conditions of
per mL folic acid. Prepare the standard solution containing the assay must be followed precisely.
0.2 ng per mL folic acid by diluting 10 mL of stock solution
with 90 mL of folic buffer solution (consisting of per liter: References
1. Flynn, Williams, ODell and Hogan. 1951. Anal. Chem. 23:180.
monopotassium phosphate 10.656 g, dipotassium phosphate 2. Baker, Herbert, Frank, Pasher, Hunter, Wasserman and Sobotka. 1959. Clin. Chem. 5:275.
3.744 g and ascorbic acid 1.0 g and having a final pH at 25C 3. Waters and Molin. 1961. J. Clin. Pathol. 14:335.

of 6.1 0.05). Use 0.0, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 mL per assay tube.

Availability
Prepare the stock solution fresh daily. Difco Folic Acid Casei Medium
Preservation of Serum Specimens Cat. No. 282210 Dehydrated 100 g*
*Store at 2-8C.
1. Allow the blood specimen to clot and the serum to separate
from the clot.
2. Aspirate the serum into a clean dry tube and centrifuge to
remove any cells that may be present. Avoid hemolysis.
Dispense 5 mL of each serum sample into clean dry test
tubes and add 25 mg ascorbic acid to each tube.

237
 Section III
FG Fraser Broth Base

Fraser Broth Base

Fraser Broth Supplement
Intended Use Many common food contaminants such as streptococci, entero-
Fraser Broth Base is used with Fraser Broth Supplement in cocci, Bacillus species, Escherichia coli, Pseudomonas aeruginosa
selectively enriching and detecting Listeria. and Proteus vulgaris interfere with the isolation of Listeria
monocytogenes.9
Summary and Explanation Listeria species grow on laboratory media over a pH range of
First described in 1926 by Murray, Webb and Swann,1 Listeria 4.4-9.6, and can survive in foods of similar acidity for days or
monocytogenes is a widespread problem in public health and weeks.10 Listeria spp. are microaerophilic, gram-positive,
the food industries. This organism has the ability to cause asporogenous, non-encapsulated, non-branching, regular,
human illness and death, particularly in immunocompromised short, motile rods. Motility is most pronounced at 20C.
individuals and pregnant women.2 The first reported foodborne
outbreak of listeriosis was in 1985,3 and since then, microbio- Identification of Listeria is based on successful isolation of
logical and epidemiological evidence from both sporadic and the organism, biochemical characterization and serological
epidemic cases of listeriosis has indicated that the principle confirmation.
route of transmission is via the consumption of foodstuffs
contaminated with Listeria monocytogenes.4 Principles of the Procedure
Peptones, beef extract and yeast extract provide nitrogen, vita-
Implicated vehicles of transmission include turkey frankfurters,5 mins and minerals. Sodium phosphate and potassium phosphate
coleslaw, pasteurized milk, Mexican-style cheese, pat and are buffering agents. Differentiation is aided by including
pickled pork tongue. The organism has been isolated from ferric ammonium citrate in the final medium. Since all Listeria
commercial dairy and other food processing plants and is ubiq- species hydrolyze esculin, the addition of ferric ions to the
uitous in nature, being present in a wide range of unprocessed medium will detect the reaction. A blackening of the medium
foods as well as in soil, sewage, silage and river water.6 by cultures containing esculin-hydrolyzing bacteria is the result
Fraser Broth Base and Fraser Broth Supplement are based on of the formation of 6,7-dihydroxycoumarin that reacts with
the formulation of Fraser and Sperber.7 The medium is use in the the ferric ions.7
rapid detection of Listeria from food8 and environmental samples.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Fraser Broth Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 5.5% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium amber,
clear to slightly opalescent with a fine
precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, clear to slightly opales-
cent with a fine precipitate.
Reaction of 5.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
Difco Fraser Broth Supplement

Solution Appearance: Dark brown solution.

Cultural Response
Difco Fraser Broth Base and Fraser Broth Supplement Uninoculated Listeria monocytogenes
Prepare the medium per label directions. Add Fraser Broth Supplement. Tube ATCC 19114
Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C and read for growth and blackening
at 18-24 and 42-48 hours.
INOCULUM ESCULIN
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY REACTION
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-2103 Marked to complete inhibition
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Marked to complete inhibition
Listeria monocytogenes 19114 102-103 Good +
Listeria monocytogenes 19115 102-103 Good +
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-2103 Marked to complete inhibition

238
 GBNA Medium

Selectivity is provided by the presence of lithium chloride, 3. Transfer 0.1 mL of the incubated broth to Fraser Broth.
nalidixic acid and acriflavine in the formula. The high salt Incubate at 35C for 26 2 hours.
tolerance of Listeria is used as a means to inhibit growth of 4. At 24 and 48 hours, streak the Fraser Broth culture to
enterococci. Modified Oxford Agar.
5. Incubate the Modified Oxford plates at 35C for 24-48
Formulae hours.
Difco Fraser Broth Base
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Expected Results
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 5.0 g
1. Examine agar plates for suspect colonies. For further identifi-
Beef Extract ................................................................ 5.0 g cation and confirmation of Listeria spp., consult appropriate
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g references.8,10-12
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 20.0 g
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 9.6 g 2. Rapid slide and macroscopic tube tests can be used for
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.35 g definitive serological identification.
Esculin ........................................................................ 1.0 g
Nalidixic Acid ............................................................. 0.02 g Limitations of the Procedure
Acriflavine HCl ......................................................... 24.0 mg
Lithium Chloride ........................................................ 3.0 g 1. Since Listeria species other than L. monocytogenes can grow
Difco Fraser Broth Supplement
on these media, an identification of Listeria monocytogenes
Per 10 mL Vial must be confirmed by biochemical and serological
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.5 g testing.11,12
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
2. Poor growth and a weak esculin reaction may be seen after
Directions for Preparation from 40 hours incubation for some enterococci.
Dehydrated Product
References
1. Suspend 55 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix 1. Murray, Webb and Swann. 1926. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 29:407.
2. Monk, Clavero, Beuchat, Doyle and Brackett. 1994. J. Food Prot. 57:969.
thoroughly. 3. Wehr. 1987. J. Assoc. Off. Anal. Chem. 70:769.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 4. Bremer and Osborne. 1995. J. Food Prot. 58:604.
5. Grau and Vanderlinde. 1992. J. Food Prot. 55:4.
completely dissolve the powder. 6. Patel, Hwang, Beuchat, Doyle and Brackett. 1995. J. Food Prot. 58:244.
7. Fraser and Sperber. 1988. J. Food Prot. 51:762.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to room
temperature.
8. Lee and McClain. 1994. Laboratory Communication No. 57 (revised February 8, 1994). Food
Safety and Inspection Service, Microbiology Division, USDA, Bethesda, Md.
9. Kramer and Jones. 1969. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 32:381.
F
4. Aseptically add 10 mL Fraser Broth Supplement. Mix well.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
10. Ryser and Donnelly. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiological
examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
11. Bille, Rocourt and Swaminathan. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
G
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
stable, typical control cultures. 12. Flowers, Andrews, Donnelly and Koenig. 1993. In Marshall (ed.), Standard methods for the exami-
nation of dairy products, 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

Procedure Availability
To isolate Listeria monocytogenes from processed meats and
Difco Fraser Broth Base
poultry, the following procedure is recommended by the U.S. COMPF ISO SMD USDA
Department of Agriculture.8 Cat. No. 211767 Dehydrated 500 g
211766 Dehydrated 2 kg
1. Add 25 g of test material to 225 mL of UVM Modified
Listeria Enrichment Broth and mix or blend thoroughly. Difco Fraser Broth Supplement
COMPF ISO SMD USDA
2. Incubate for 20-24 hours at 30C.
Cat. No. 211742 Vial 6 10 mL*
*Store at 2-8C.

GBNA Medium
Intended Use replacing the agar with a self-gelling, highly-purified
GBNA (Gum Base Nalidixic Acid) Medium is used for the heterosaccharide biopolymer, gellan gum,2 resulted in a trans-
isolation of Listeria monocytogenes from clinical and parent medium (GBNA). The substitution greatly aided in
nonclinical specimens. colonial visualization and identification of Listeria using
Henrys Oblique Light System.3 The addition of nalidixic acid
Both selective and nonselective media have been used to isolate
combined with a reduction in the nutrient level resulted in the
and cultivate L. monocytogenes. Colonies of this organism, when
inhibition of undesirable organisms without reducing the
viewed by special optical illumination, have a definite color and
efficiency of isolating L. monocytogenes.1
distinctive colonial characteristics, but the opaqueness of agar
media greatly interferes with the optical system. Martin et al.1
experimented with various media formulations and found that
239
 Section III
FG GBNA Medium, cont.

User Quality Control Directions for Preparation from

Dehydrated Product
Identity Specifications 1. Suspend 18.4 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
BBL GBNA Medium Mix thoroughly.
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, dry, homogeneous.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
Solution: 1.84% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is pale to
pletely dissolve the powder.
light, yellow to tan, trace hazy to hazy. 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Prepared Appearance: Pale to light, yellow to tan, trace hazy 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
to hazy. stable, typical control cultures.
Reaction of 1.84%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
Procedure
Cultural Response Homogenize specimens in Brain Heart Infusion Broth using a
BBL GBNA Medium 1 to 10 w/v ratio and inoculate the homogenate onto plates of
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at GBNA Medium. Inoculate the plates for 18-22 hours at 35
35 2C for 18-22 hours. 2C.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Escherichia coli 25922 104-105 None to poor Expected Results1
Listeria monocytogenes 19112 103-104 Good, iridescence When viewed microscopically under oblique transmitted light,
colonies of L. monocytogenes are blue in color with a ground-
glass appearance. This characteristic color aids in the selection
Principles of the Procedure of such colonies occurring in areas of mixed growth. Colonies
The casein and soy peptones are sources of nutrients, including of L. monocytogenes can be selected and used to inoculate
carbon, nitrogen, sulfur and trace ingredients required for the additional media for use in further laboratory studies.
propagation of L. monocytogenes. Dextrose is an energy
source. The sodium and magnesium chloride provide essential References
ions. Buffering is achieved by inclusion of potassium phosphate. 1. Martin, Sumarah and MacDonald. 1984. Clin. Invest. Med. 7:233.
2. Shungu, Valiant, Tutlane, Weinberg, Weissberger, Koupal, Gadesbusch and Stapley. 1983. Appl.
Nalidixic acid blocks DNA replication in susceptible gram- Environ. Microbiol. 46:840.
3. Henry. 1933. J. Infect. Dis. 52:374.
negative bacteria. The gellan gum, a solidifying agent, provides
a transparent, solid plating medium.
Availability
The optical system of Henry3 provides transmitted oblique light BBL GBNA Medium
obtained by directing a beam of light from a 6-volt lamp onto SMD
a concave mirror and subsequently to the underside of the stage Cat. No. 298158 Dehydrated 500 g
of a stereomicroscope at approximately a 45 angle.

Formula
BBL GBNA Medium
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.7 g
Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal .................................. 1.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 0.83 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 1.7 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 0.83 g
Magnesium Chloride .................................................. 0.33 g
Nalidixic Acid ............................................................. 0.05 g
Gellan Gum ................................................................ 8.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

240
 GC Medium Base

GC Medium Base GC Agar Base GC II Agar Base

Supplement B Supplement VX IsoVitaleX
Enrichment Hemoglobin Antimicrobic CNV
VCN Inhibitor VCNT Inhibitor VCA Inhibitor
VCAT Inhibitor
Intended Use Difco Supplement B is a yeast concentrate for use in supple-
The chocolate agar bases, Difco GC Medium Base, BBL menting media for growth of microorganisms with exacting
GC Agar Base and BBL GC II Agar Base, are used with various nutritional requirements. It is recommended for use in the
additives in isolating and cultivating Neisseria gonorrhoeae preparation of chocolate agar described by Christensen and
and other fastidious microorganisms. Schoenlein.5
Difco Supplement B with Reconstituting Fluid B, Difco Supple- Difco Supplement VX and BBL IsoVitaleX Enrichment are
ment VX with Reconstituting Fluid VX and BBL IsoVitaleX lyophilized concentrates. These supplements are recommended
Enrichment with Rehydrating Fluid are used for supplementing for enriching GC Agar media, Proteose No. 3 Agar and the
media to culture fastidious microorganisms, particularly selective agars for the isolation of pathogenic Neisseria.
Neisseria gonorrhoeae and Haemophilus influenzae. Hemoglobin, an autoclavable preparation of beef blood, provides
BBL Hemoglobin products are used in preparing microbio- hemin, which is required by Haemophilus species and enhances
logical culture media. growth of Neisseria species.
Difco Antimicrobic CNV and BBL VCN Inhibitor, VCNT In 1964, Thayer and Martin6 formulated a selective medium
Inhibitor, VCA Inhibitor and VCAT Inhibitor are lyophilized incorporating the antibiotics polymyxin B and ristocetin into
preparations containing inhibitory agents to be used in selective GC Agar with added hemoglobin and Supplement B. Thayer
media for culturing N. gonorrhoeae and N. meningitidis. and Martin7 improved their medium by replacing the two
original antibiotics with a new microbial solution of colistin,
F
Summary and Explanation vancomycin and nystatin (CNV/VCN). In 1971, Martin and G
In 1945, Johnston1 described a medium that could success- Lester8 improved the new Thayer-Martin medium by incorpo-
fully produce colonies of N. gonorrhoeae in 24 rather than 48 rating an additional antibiotic, trimethoprim lactate (T), into
hours. The accelerated growth rates were primarily due to the the formulation (VCNT). This improved medium is called
decreased agar content (solidity) of the medium. GC Medium Modified Thayer-Martin (MTM) Medium.9 CNV/VCN and
Base was introduced in 1947 with reduced agar content. While VCNT are used in the preparation of Thayer-Martin and
investigating the growth rate of some gonococcal strains, a Modified Thayer-Martin agars, respectively.
medium containing the growth factors glutamine and cocarboxy- Martin and Lewis10 further improved the selectivity of MTM
lase was found to improve recovery.2,3 From this discovery, by increasing the concentration of vancomycin from 3.0 g/mL
Supplement B, a yeast concentrate, was developed. In a com- to 4.0 g/mL for greater inhibition of gram-positive bacteria and
parative study4 of 12 different media, an enriched chocolate agar replacing nystatin with anisomycin (VCA/VCAT) for greater
prepared with GC Medium Base, Hemoglobin and Supplement inhibition of yeasts; this is known as Martin-Lewis (ML) Agar
B proved superior for isolating N. gonorrhoeae. Difco VX Medium. Transgrow Medium bottles and Gono-Pak and
Supplement and BBL IsoVitaleX Enrichment are chemically JEMBEC* plates are chocolate agar-based transport medium
defined supplements developed to replace the yeast concentrate systems that can incorporate these formulations.11
additive.
*JEMBEC is a trademark of Miles Scientific.
Through careful selection and pretesting of raw materials, BBL
GC II Agar Base was developed to provide performance as a Principles of the Procedure
chocolate agar base superior to that achieved with the GC agar Peptones provide nitrogen, vitamins and amino acids. Corn
medium bases. With most strains of N. gonorrhoeae, visible starch absorbs any toxic metabolites that are produced; dibasic
growth on primary isolation is seen after incubation of 18-24 and monobasic potassium phosphates buffer the medium.
hours. GC II Agar Base is used in BBL brand prepared plates Sodium chloride maintains osmotic balance. Agar is the solidify-
of Chocolate II Agar and BBL chocolate agar-based media ing agent.
for the selective isolation of pathogenic Neisseria (Thayer- Chocolate Agar is prepared from GC agar medium base with the
Martin, Modified Thayer-Martin, Martin-Lewis and GC-Lect addition of 2% Hemoglobin. Hemoglobin provides hemin (X
agars). factor) required for growth of Haemophilus and enhanced
growth of Neisseria.
241
 Section III
FG GC Medium Base, cont.

Uninoculated Neisseria gonorrhoeae

Plate ATCC 43069 User Quality Control
NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural
Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands
may reflect differences in the development and testing of media for
industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications
Difco GC Medium Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.6% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
to medium amber, opalescent, may
have a slight precipitate, ground
glass appearance.
Prepared Appearance: With Hemoglobin and Supplement,
chocolate brown, opaque.
Reaction of 3.6%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
Difco Supplement B with Reconstituting Fluid
Lyophilized Appearance: Tan to reddish brown, lyophilized
powder or cake.
Rehydrated Appearance: Medium to dark amber, very to slightly
opalescent.
Haemophilus
parainfluenzae Reconstituting Fluid
ATCC 7901 Appearance: Colorless, clear liquid.
Difco Supplement VX with Reconstituting Fluid

The growth rate of Neisseria and Haemophilus is improved
Lyophilized Appearance: Pink powder or cake.
with the addition of 1% nutritive enrichment, providing the
Rehydrated Appearance: Pink, clear.
growth factors glutamine and cocarboxylase. Supplement B
Reconstituting Fluid
contains yeast concentrate, glutamine, coenzyme (V factor), Appearance: Colorless, clear solution.
cocarboxylase, hematin (X factor) and growth factors. Supple- Difco Antimicrobic CNV

ment VX is a defined lyophilized concentrate of essential growth Lyophilized Appearance: Pale yellow, dry cake or powder.
factors; i.e., vitamins, amino acids, coenzymes, dextrose and Rehydrated Appearance: Off-white to pale yellow, opalescent
other factors to improve the growth of Haemophilus and to opaque, even suspension.
Neisseria species. IsoVitaleX Enrichment provides V factor
(nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide, NAD) for Haemophilus Cultural Response
Difco GC Medium Base, Hemoglobin and
species and vitamins, amino acids, coenzymes, dextrose, ferric Supplement B or Supplement VX
ion and other factors which improve the growth of pathogenic Prepare Chocolate Agar with GC Medium Base per label directions.
Neisseria. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C under 3-5% CO2 for 18-48 hours.

Antimicrobial agents are used as inhibitors in the selective media, INOCULUM

ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY
Thayer-Martin, Modified Thayer-Martin and Martin Lewis agars
Haemophilus influenzae 10211 30-300 Good
and Transgrow Medium. Colistin inhibits gram-negative bacteria, Neisseria gonorrhoeae 43069 30-300 Good
vancomycin inhibits gram-positive contaminants, nystatin
Difco GC Medium Base, Hemoglobin, Supplement
suppresses the growth of yeasts, anisomycin provides improved
B or Supplement VX and Antimicrobic CNV
inhibition of Candida albicans, an organism that has been shown Prepare Thayer-Martin Medium with GC Medium Base per label
to inhibit N. gonorrhoeae, 12,13 and trimethoprim lactate directions, supplemented with Antimicrobic CNV. Inoculate and
suppresses the swarming of Proteus species. incubate at 35 2C under 3-5% CO2 for 18-48 hours.
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY
Formulae
Candida albicans 60193 103 Partial inhibition
Difco GC Medium Base
Escherichia coli 25922 103 Marked to
Approximate Formula* Per Liter complete inhibition
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 15.0 g
Neisseria gonorrhoeae 43069 102-103 Good
Corn Starch ................................................................ 1.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 4.0 g Neisseria meningitidis 13090 102-103 Good
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g Neisseria sicca 9913 102-103 Partial Inhibition
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g Staphylococcus
Agar ......................................................................... 10.0 g epidermidis 12228 103 Marked to
complete inhibition
Continued

242
 GC Medium Base, cont.

Identity Specifications Cultural Response

BBL GC Agar Base or BBL GC II Agar Base BBL GC Agar Base, Hemoglobin and IsoVitaleX
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, dry, homogeneous, free of Enrichment
extraneous material. Prepare Chocolate Agar with GC Agar Base per label directions. Inocu-
Solution: 7.2% (double strength) solution, late and incubate at 35 2C with 3-5% CO2 for 48 hours.
soluble in purified water upon boiling. ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Solution is medium to dark, tan to
yellow, hazy. Haemophilus influenzae 10211 103-104 Good
Neisseria gonorrhoeae 43069 30-300 Good
Prepared Appearance: With Hemoglobin and IsoVitaleX
Enrichment, brown, opaque. Neisseria meningitidis 13090 103-104 Good
Reaction of Complete Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 103-104 Good
Medium at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
BBL GC II Agar Base, Hemoglobin and IsoVitaleX
BBL Hemoglobin Solution 2%

Enrichment
Solution Appearance: Dark chocolate brown with fine, very Prepare Chocolate Agar with GC II Agar Base per label directions. Inocu-
dark brown sediment, opaque. late and incubate at 35 2C with 3-5% CO2 for 24 hours.
BBL Hemoglobin, Bovine, Freeze-Dried ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Dehydrated Appearance: Coarse powder to crystals, free of
Haemophilus influenzae 10211 103-104 Good
extraneous material, medium to
Neisseria gonorrhoeae 43069 30-300 Good
medium dark brown to red brown to
black brown. Neisseria meningitidis 13090 103-104 Good
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 103-104 Good
Solution: 2% solution, soluble in purified water.
Solution Appearance: 2% solution, medium to dark medium, BBL GC Agar Base or GC II Agar Base, Hemoglobin,
brown to red brown to black brown, IsoVitaleX Enrichment and VCN Inhibitor or VCNT
opaque. Inhibitor
BBL IsoVitaleX Enrichment with Diluent Prepare Thayer-Martin Agar or Modified Thayer-Martin Agar with GC
Lyophilized Appearance: Pink cake. Agar Base or GC II Agar Base according to label directions, supplemented
with VCN or VCNT Inhibitor, respectively. Inoculate and incubate at 35
Rehydrated Appearance: Light pink to pink tan, clear to trace 2C under 3-5% CO2 for 48 hours.
hazy.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Diluent Appearance: Colorless, clear solution.
Candida albicans* 60193 30-300 Inhibition (partial)
BBL VCN Inhibitor
Lyophilized Appearance: Pale yellow, dry cake.
Neisseria gonorrhoeae
Neisseria meningitidis*
43069
13090
30-300
30-300
Good
Good
F
Reconstituted Appearance: Trace yellow-green and hazy contain-
ing a moderate amount of minute
Proteus mirabilis*
Staphylococcus epidermidis
43071
12228
30-300
30-300
Inhibition (partial)
Inhibition (partial)
G
yellow particles.
*Only used on VCNT-containing medium.
BBL VCNT Inhibitor
BBL GC Agar Base or GC II Agar Base, Hemoglobin,
Lyophilized Appearance: Pale green, trace yellow.
IsoVitaleX Enrichment and VCA Inhibitor or VCAT
Reconstituted Appearance: Trace yellow, hazy, contains moderate Inhibitor
amount of minute yellow particles. Prepare Martin-Lewis Agar with GC Agar Base or GC II Agar Base
BBL VCA Inhibitor according to label directions, supplemented with VCA Inhibitor or VCAT
Lyophilized Appearance: White to off-white. Inhibitor. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C under 3-5% CO2 for
48 hours.
Reconstituted Appearance: Clear and colorless.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
BBL VCAT Inhibitor

Lyophilized Appearance: White to off-white, complete and dry, Candida albicans 60193 30-300 Inhibition (partial)
with scum-like disk evident. Neisseria gonorrhoeae 43069 30-300 Good
Reconstituted Appearance: Colorless, clear to moderately hazy. Neisseria meningitidis* 13090 30-300 Good
Proteus mirabilis* 43071 30-300 Inhibition (partial)
Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 30-300 Inhibition (partial)
*Only used on VCAT-containing medium.

BBL GC Agar Base BBL GC II Agar Base

Approximate Formula* Per Liter Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 7.5 g Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 7.5 g
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 7.5 g Selected Meat Peptone .............................................. 7.5 g
Corn Starch ................................................................ 1.0 g Corn Starch ................................................................ 1.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 4.0 g Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 4.0 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 10.0 g Agar ......................................................................... 10.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

243
 Section III
FG GC Medium Base, cont.

BBL Hemoglobin Directions for Preparation from

An autoclavable preparation of beef blood. The 2% solution Dehydrated Product
is ready for use in the preparation of media for the cultivation Difco Supplement B
of fastidious organisms. Difco Supplement VX
Difco Supplement B 1. Aseptically rehydrate Supplement B and Supplement VX
Processed to preserve both the thermolabile and thermostable with 10 mL or 100 mL of the corresponding Reconstituting
growth accessory factors of fresh yeast, it contains glutamine, Fluid, as appropriate.
coenzyme (V factor), cocarboxylase and other growth factors, 2. Rotate the vial to dissolve completely.
as well as hematin (X factor). BBL IsoVitaleX Enrichment
Difco Supplement VX 1. Reconstitute each lyophilized vial by aseptically transferring
Approximate Formula* Per 10 mL Vial with a sterile syringe and needle the accompanying diluent.
Adenine Sulfate ....................................................... 10.0 mg 2. Shake to assure complete solution.
p-Aminobenzoic Acid ................................................. 0.25 mg
Cocarboxylase ............................................................ 2.0 mg BBL Hemoglobin
L-Cysteine HCl ....................................................... 259.0 mg 1. Dissolve 10 g of Hemoglobin powder for each L of
L-Cystine .................................................................. 11.0 mg
Diphosphopyridine Nucleotide ................................... 3.5 mg medium desired in 1/2 volume of cold purified water.
Ferric Citrate .............................................................. 0.3 mg 2. Autoclave solution at 121C for 15 minutes.
L-Glutamine ........................................................... 200.0 mg 3. Cool to 45-50C and combine with 1/2 volume of autoclaved
Guanine HCl .............................................................. 0.3 mg
Thiamine HCl ............................................................. 0.06mg agar base solution (such as GC agar medium base).
Vitamin B12 (Cyanocobalamin) .................................... 0.2 mg 4. Mix thoroughly before dispensing into appropriate con-
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 mg tainers.
BBL IsoVitaleX Enrichment
BBL Hemoglobin 2%
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Adenine ..................................................................... 1.0 g Shake the bottle to resuspend any sedimented hemoglobin
p-Aminobenzoic Acid ............................................... 13.0 mg before use.
L-Cysteine Hydrochloride ......................................... 25.9 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 1.1 g Difco Antimicrobic CNV
Nicotinamide Adenine Dinucleotide ........................... 0.25 g BBL VCN Inhibitor, VCNT Inhibitor, VCA Inhibitor,
Ferric Nitrate .............................................................. 0.02 g VCAT Inhibitor
L-Glutamine ............................................................. 10.0 g
Guanine Hydrochloride .............................................. 0.03 g
1. Restore each lyophilized vial by aseptically adding the
Thiamine Hydrochloride ............................................. 3.0 mg appropriate amount of sterile purified water, as indicated
Vitamin B12 ................................................................. 0.01 g on the label.
Dextrose ................................................................. 100.0 g
2. Rotate the vial to dissolve completely.
Thiamine Pyrophosphate ............................................ 0.1 g
Difco Antimicrobic CNV Chocolate Agar
Formula Per 10 mL Vial 1. Suspend 7.2 g of GC base medium in 100 mL of purified
Colistin Sulfate .................................................... 7,500 g
Nystatin ............................................................ 12,500 units water. Mix thoroughly.
Vancomycin ......................................................... 3,000 g 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
BBL VCN Inhibitor completely dissolve the powder.
Formula Per 1 mL Vial 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 45-50C.
Vancomycin ............................................................ 300 g 4. Aseptically add 100 mL Hemoglobin Solution 2%.
Colistin ................................................................... 750 g
Nystatin ............................................................... 1,250 units 5. Aseptically add 2 mL Supplement B or Supplement VX or
BBL VCNT Inhibitor
IsoVitaleX Enrichment.
Formula Per 1 mL Vial 6. Dispense into sterile Petri dishes or tubes as desired.
Vancomycin ............................................................ 300 g 7. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Colistin ................................................................... 750 g stable, typical control cultures.
Nystatin ............................................................... 1,250 units
Trimethoprim Lactate ............................................. 500 g Thayer-Martin Agar
BBL VCA Inhibitor 1. Suspend 7.2 g of GC base medium in 100 mL of purified
Formula Per 1 mL Vial water. Mix thoroughly.
Vancomycin ............................................................ 400 g
Colistin ................................................................... 750 g
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Anisomycin ................................................................ 2.0 mg completely dissolve the powder.
BBL VCAT Inhibitor 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 45-50C.
Formula Per 1 mL Vial 4. Aseptically add 100 mL Hemoglobin Solution 2%.
Vancomycin ............................................................ 400 g 5. Aseptically add 2 mL Supplement B or Supplement VX or
Colistin ................................................................... 750 g
Anisomycin ................................................................ 2.0 mg
IsoVitaleX Enrichment.
Trimethoprim Lactate ............................................. 500 g 6. Aseptically add 2 mL rehydrated Antimicrobic CNV or
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. VCN Inhibitor to the medium.

244
 GC Medium Base, cont.

7. Dispense into sterile Petri dishes. References

8. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 1.
2.
Johnston. 1945. J. Vener. Dis. Inform. 26:239.
Lankford, Scott, Cox and Cooke. 1943. J. Bacteriol. 45:321.
stable, typical control cultures. 3. Lankford and Snell. 1943. J. Bacteriol. 45:421.
4. Carpenter, Bucca, Buck, Casman, Christensen, Crowe, Drew, Hill, Lankford, Morton, Peizer,
Shaw and Thayer. 1949. Am. J. Syphil. Gonorrh. Vener. Dis. 33:164.
Modified Thayer-Martin Medium 5. Christensen and Schoenlein. 1947. Annu. Meet. Calif. Public Health Assoc.
6. Thayer and Martin. 1964. Public Health Rep. 79:49.
1. Suspend 7.2 g of GC base medium in 100 mL of purified 7. Thayer and Martin. 1966. Public Health Rep. 81:559.
water. Mix thoroughly. 8. Martin and Lester. 1971. HSMHA Health Rep. 86:30.
9. Martin, Armstrong and Smith. 1974. Appl. Microbiol. 27:802.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 10. Martin and Lewis. 1977. Public Health Rep. 35:53.
11. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
completely dissolve the powder. vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
12. Hipp, Lawton, Chen and Gaafar. 1974. Appl. Microbiol. 27:192.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 45-50C. 13. Hipp, Lawton, Savage and Gaafar. 1975. J. Clin. Microbiol. 1:476.
4. Aseptically add 100 mL Hemoglobin Solution 2% to the 14. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
medium. 15. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. Aseptically add 2 mL IsoVitaleX Enrichment. 16. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc., St.
Louis, Mo.
6. Aseptically add 2 mL rehydrated VCNT Inhibitor to the
medium. Availability
7. Dispense into sterile Petri dishes. Difco GC Medium Base
8. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Cat. No. 228950 Dehydrated 500 g
stable, typical control cultures. 228920 Dehydrated 2 kg
228930 Dehydrated 10 kg
Martin-Lewis Agar
BBL GC Agar Base
1. Suspend 7.2 g of GC base medium in 100 mL of purified
Cat. No. 211275 Dehydrated 500 g
water. Mix thoroughly. 212171 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 212252 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
completely dissolve the powder. BBL GC II Agar Base
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 45-50C. Cat. No. 212307 Dehydrated 500 g
4. Aseptically add 100 mL Hemoglobin Solution 2%. BBL Hemoglobin Solution 2%

5. Aseptically add 2 mL IsoVitaleX Enrichment. Cat. No. 211874 10 100 mL*

6. Aseptically add 2 mL rehydrated VCAT Inhibitor to the BBL Hemoglobin, Bovine, Freeze-Dried

medium. Cat. No. 212392 Dehydrated 500 g F

7. Dispense into sterile Petri dishes.
8. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Difco Supplement B
Cat. No.

227610 Lyophilized 6 10 mL with Reconstituting Fluid*

G
stable, typical control cultures. 227620 Lyophilized 100 mL with Reconstituting Fluid*
Difco Supplement VX
Procedure Cat. No. 233541 Lyophilized 6 10 mL with Reconstituting Fluid*
For a complete discussion on the isolation and identification 233542 Lyophilized 100 mL with Reconstituting Fluid*
of Neisseria and Haemophilus species, consult the procedures BBL IsoVitaleX Enrichment
outlined in the references.14-16 Cat. No. 211875 Lyophilized 5 2 mL with Diluent*
211876 Lyophilized 5 10 mL with Diluent*
Expected Results Difco Antimicrobic CNV
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results. Cat. No. 232601 Lyophilized 6 10 mL*
BBL VCN Inhibitor

Limitations of the Procedure Cat. No. 212227 Lyophilized 10 2 mL**

1. GC agar medium bases are intended for use with supple- 212228 Lyophilized 10 10 mL**
mentation. Although certain diagnostic tests may be BBL VCNT Inhibitor
performed directly on the medium, biochemical and, if Cat. No. 212408 Lyophilized 10 10 mL**
indicated, immunological testing using pure cultures are BBL VCA Inhibitor

recommended for complete identification. Consult appro- Cat. No. 212269 Lyophilized 10 10 mL**
priate references for further information. BBL VCAT Inhibitor

2. Improper specimen collection, environment, temperature, Cat. No. 212404 Lyophilized 10 10 mL**
CO2 level, moisture and pH can adversely affect the growth *Store at 2-8C.
**Store at -20 to + 8C.
and viability of the organisms.
3. Inactivation or deterioration of antibiotics in selective
media may allow growth of contaminants.
4. GC agar medium bases have sufficient buffering capacity
to offset the very low pH of the small amount of nutritive
enrichments added. However, the pH of some media may
have to be adjusted with 1% NaOH after the addition of
these enrichments.
245
 Section III
FG GC II Agar with IsoVitaleX

GC II Agar with IsoVitaleX Enrichment

Intended Use to neutralize toxic fatty acids that may be present in the agar.

GC II Agar with IsoVitaleX Enrichment is used for antimi- IsoVitaleX Enrichment is a defined supplement that provides
crobial disc diffusion susceptibility testing of Neisseria V factor (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide, NAD), vitamins,
gonorrhoeae. amino acids, coenzymes, dextrose, ferric ions and other
factors that improve the growth of pathogenic Neisseria.
Summary and Explanation
Because of the growing problem of resistance of gonococci Procedure
to penicillin and other antimicrobial agents, the Centers for The direct colony suspension procedure should be used when test-
Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) issued, in 1987, policy ing N. gonorrhoeae. Observe aseptic techniques. Agar surfaces
guidelines for the detection, management and control of anti- should be smooth and moist but without excessive moisture.
biotic-resistant N. gonorrhoeae.1 The medium recommended 1. Prepare a Gram stain and perform an oxidase test before
for the disc diffusion method of antimicrobial susceptibility starting susceptibility testing to confirm culture purity and
testing was GC agar base with a defined supplement, such as to confirm tentative identification of N. gonorrhoeae.
BBL IsoVitaleX Enrichment. 2. Use several well-isolated colonies taken directly from an over-
The National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards night chocolate agar plate as the source of the inoculum.
(NCCLS) also recommends the use of GC Agar with a 1% 3. A rapid -lactamase test (Cefinase disc) should be utilized
defined supplement (equivalent to IsoVitaleX Enrichment) for to assess the clinical utility of penicillin. This rapid test pro-
antimicrobial disc diffusion susceptibility testing of vides the clinician with valuable antimicrobial susceptibility
N. gonorrhoeae.2,3 information sooner than the disc diffusion test.
4. Using colonies taken directly from an overnight chocolate
Principles of the Procedure agar plate, prepare a suspension of the test organism in
GC II Agar Base contains casein and meat peptones as sources Mueller Hinton Broth, Mueller Hinton II Broth or 0.9%
of nutrients, phosphate buffer to control pH and corn starch saline and dilute with more broth or saline to a turbidity
equivalent to that of the 0.5 McFarland standard. This
Neisseria gonorrhoeae
ATCC 49226 suspension will contain approximately 1 to 2 106 CFU/mL.
Care must be exercised in preparing this suspension
since higher inoculum concentration may lead to false-
resistant results and too light an inoculum can result
in false-susceptible results. Periodically perform
dilutions and plate counts of inoculum
suspensions to confirm that the adjust-
ment method employed produces an
inoculum containing approxi-
mately 1 to 2 10 6 CFU/mL.
5. Within 15 minutes of adjusting the
turbidity of the inoculum, dip a
sterile swab into the properly di-
luted inoculum and rotate it
firmly several times against the
upper inside wall of the tube to
express excess fluid.
6. Inoculate the entire agar surface
of the plate three times, rotating
the plate 60 between streakings
to obtain even inoculation.
7. Replace the lid of the plate and
hold the plate at room tempera-
ture for 3-5 minutes, but no longer
than 15 minutes, to allow any sur-
face moisture to be absorbed be-
fore applying the drug-impreg-
nated discs.

246
 GC-Lect Agar

8. Apply the discs by means of an antimicrobial disc dispenser, visible growth that can be detected with the unaided eye.
using aseptic precautions. Most antimicrobial agents Disregard faint growth of tiny colonies that can be detected
produce larger zones of inhibition when tested against with difficulty near the edge of the obvious zone of inhibition.
N. gonorrhoeae compared with other organisms; therefore, 3. Refer to the Zone Diameter Interpretive Standards in the
no more than 9 discs per 150 mm plate are recommended. NCCLS publication for interpretation of results obtained
After discs have been placed on the agar, tamp them with a with clinical isolates of N. gonorrhoeae.3 Results may be
sterile needle or forceps to make complete contact with the reported as resistant, intermediate or susceptible depending
medium surface. This step is not necessary if the discs on the zone diameters obtained. Organisms testing positive
are deposited using the Sensi-Disc Self Tamping 12-Place for -lactamase production should be considered resistant
Dispenser (tampers will not descend from holes lacking to penicillin regardless of the zone diameters obtained.
cartridges).
Consult references for additional information.4-6
9. Within 15 minutes after the discs are applied, invert the
plates and incubate for 20-25 hours at 35C in an aerobic References
atmosphere enriched with 5-7% carbon dioxide. 1. Centers for Disease Control. 1987. Antibiotic-resistant strains of Neisseria gonorrhoeae: policy
guidelines for detection, management, and control. Morbid. Mortal. Weekly Rep. 36(Suppl.):1S.
2. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved standard: M2M7. Per-
Expected Results formance standards for antimicrobial disk susceptibility tests, 7th ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
3. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. M100S10 (M2), Disk diffusion
1. Examine the plates after 20-24 hours of incubation. A supplemental tables. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
4. Neumann, Sahm, Thornsberry and McGowan. 1991. Cumitech 6A, New developments in antimi-
confluent lawn of growth should be obtained. If only crobial agent susceptibility testing: a practical guide. Coordinating ed., McGowan. American Soci-
ety for Microbiology, Washington D.C.
isolated colonies grow, the inoculum was too light and the 5. Koneman, Allen, Janda, Schreckenberger and Winn. 1997. Color atlas and textbook of diagnostic
microbiology, 5th ed. Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, Pa.
test should be repeated. 6. Jorgensen, Jurnidge and Washington. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.)
2. Measure the diameter of the zone of complete inhibition (as Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington. D.C.

judged by the unaided eye), including the diameter of the disc,

to the nearest whole millimeter, using calipers, a ruler, or a
Availability
BBL GC II Agar with IsoVitaleX Enrichment
template prepared for this purpose. The measuring device is
BS10 CMPH MCM7 NCCLS
held on the back of the Petri plate, which is held over a black, Cat. No. 221240 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 8*
non-reflecting background and illuminated from above. *Store at 2-8C.
The endpoint should be taken as the area showing no obvious
F
GC-Lect Agar G
Intended Use to the inhibitors in MTM Agar; i.e., vancomycin-resistant con-
BBL GC-Lect Agar is a selective plated medium providing taminants, including certain strains of Staphylococcus
enhanced growth and recovery of Neisseria gonorrhoeae and epidermidis. As with MTM, N. lactamica, which is resistant
better inhibition of contaminating bacteria and fungi, including to colistin, is not inhibited by GC-Lect Agar.
Capnocytophaga species in oropharyngeal specimens. GC-Lect Agar contains a decreased concentration of vanco-
mycin for improved recovery of N. gonorrhoeae strains that
Summary and Explanation are sensitive to this antibiotic.
A succession of media have been developed for the isolation of
the pathogenic Neisseria from specimens containing mixed flora The JEMBEC* system consists of GC-Lect Agar in a JEMBEC
(Thayer-Martin Selective Agar, Modified Thayer-Martin (John E. Martin Biological Environmental Chamber)-style
[MTM] Agar, Martin-Lewis Agar).1-3 Each provides greater plate, a carbon dioxide tablet and resealable plastic bag.7
inhibition of contaminating organisms than the preceding A 100 mm dish (with pill pocket) is also available with GC-Lect
formulation but each is, to varying degrees, inhibitory to Agar as the medium.
certain strains that it is designed to recover.4,5 *JEMBEC is a trademark of Miles Scientific.

BD Diagnostic Systems developed BBL GC II Agar Base as

Principles of the Procedure
an improved base for Chocolate II Agar, which is utilized in
BBL GC-Lect Agar is based on BBL Chocolate II Agar that
these selective media. The superior growth-promotion achieved
contains the improved GC II Agar Base, achieved through careful
for pathogenic Neisseria also enabled growth of stains of
selection and pretesting of raw materials, bovine hemoglobin and
Capnocytophaga on the selective medium when inoculated with
BBL IsoVitaleX Enrichment. The GC II Agar Base contains
oropharyngeal specimens.6
nitrogenous nutrients in the form of casein and meat peptones,
GC-Lect Agar was developed and patented by BD Diagnostic phosphate buffer to maintain pH and corn starch, which
Systems to provide the additional inhibition required to neutralizes toxic fatty acids that may be present in the agar.
prevent overgrowth of the pathogenic Neisseria in specimens X (hemin) and V (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide) factors
containing Capnocytophaga species and other strains resistant are provided by hemoglobin and IsoVitaleX Enrichment.
247
 Section III
FG GC-Lect Agar, cont.

IsoVitaleX Enrichment also provides vitamins, amino acids, 3. Place the culture as soon as possible in an aerobic environ-
coenzymes, dextrose, ferric ion and other factors that improve ment enriched with carbon dioxide.
the growth of pathogenic Neisseria. 8 In addition, GC-Lect Agar With the JEMBEC System: With sterile forceps remove a
permits the growth of some vancomycin-sensitive gonococcal CO2-generating tablet from its foil wrapper and place it in
strains which are inhibited on standard MTM Agar.9 the specially designed well in the plate. Place inoculated
plates in the polyethylene bag provided (one plate per bag).
To improve the selectivity of GC-Lect Agar, a combination of
DO NOT ADD WATER TO THE TABLET. Seal the bag
five antimicrobial agents was developed to inhibit gram posi-
by pressing down on the zipper at the end of the bag
tive bacteria, including vancomycin-resistant S. epidermidis,
with fingers and slide along to the opposite end. Be sure
gram-negative species, including Proteus and Capnocytophaga,
that the bag is sealed completely. After the bag is sealed,
as well as fungi, including Candida albicans.9
incubate in an inverted position (agar side up) at 35C for
In the JEMBEC system, a tablet consisting of a mixture of 18-48 hours.11
citric acid and sodium bicarbonate is placed in a well within To transport the culture after incubation, place the sealed
the plate and is activated by the moisture (humidity) produced JEMBEC system in a suitable mailing or shipping container.
by the culture medium within the sealed plastic bag. The CO2 Care should be taken to protect the culture from extreme
levels generated are sufficient for the growth of Neisseria heat or cold and to ensure delivery to the testing labora-
gonorrhoeae.7 tory as soon as possible.
4. Incubate at 35 2C and examine after overnight incuba-
Procedure tion and again after approximately 48 hours.
Streak the specimen as soon as possible after it is received in 5. Subculture for identification of N. gonorrhoeae should
the laboratory. If material is being cultured directly from a be made within 18-24 hours. If shipped after incuba-
swab, proceed as follows.10 tion, colonies should be subcultured before performing
1. Roll swab directly on the medium in a large Z to provide biochemical identification tests in order to ensure that
adequate exposure of swab to the medium for transfer of adequate viability is achieved.
organisms.
2. Cross-streak the Z pattern with sterile wire loop, prefer- Expected Results
ably in the clinic. If not done previously, cross-streaking After a minimum of 18 hours of incubation, the plates should
should be done in the laboratory. show isolated colonies in streaked areas and confluent growth
in areas of heavy inoculation. Some strains may require up to
72 hours of incubation before visible colonies appear.
Neisseria gonorrhoeae appears as small, grayish-white to
colorless mucoid colonies. N. meningitidis forms a colony
similar to N. gonorrhoeae, but larger and bluish-gray.
A presumptive identification may be made by performing a Gram
stain and an oxidase test.12 Biochemical tests and other identifi-
cation procedures should be performed to confirm findings.

Limitation of the Procedure

While the JEMBEC system is an improvement over previous
transport systems, optimum recovery of N. gonorrhoeae will
be obtained by direct inoculation of media with the specimen
and immediate incubation in a CO2-enriched atmosphere at
35C.

Specific Performance Characteristics10

In a clinical study with 500 specimens, visible growth of
N. gonorrhoeae occurred within 24 hours in 72% of the
positive cultures on GC-Lect Agar, compared with only 52%
on the reference medium, MTM Agar. A total of 50 positive
cultures were obtained with GC-Lect Agar, compared with
49 obtained with MTM. The selectivity of GC-Lect Agar was
superior, with only 19 cultures producing growth of normal
flora, compared with 78 cultures on MTM after 24 hours
JEMBEC System of incubation. The selectivity was especially improved on
Neisseria gonorrhoeae
ATCC 43069

248
 GN Broth

GC-Lect Agar with regard to yeasts (2 versus 30 cultures) and Availability

gram-positive cocci (5 versus 31 cultures). BBL GC-Lect Agar
United States and Canada
References Cat. No. 297715 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
1. Thayer and Martin, 1966. Pub. Health Rep. 81:559. 297928 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
2. Martin, Armstrong and Smith. 1974. Appl. Microbiol. 27:802. 298243 Prepared 100 mm Dish (Pill-pocket) Ctn. of 100*
3. Martin and Lewis. 1977. Public Health Lab. 35:53.
4. Cross, Hoger, Neibaur, Pasternack and Brady. 1971. HSMHA Health Rep. 86:990.
221995 JEMBEC Plate Pkg. of 10*
5. Phillips, Humphrey, Middleton and Nichol. 1972. Br. J. Vener. Dis. 48:287. Europe
6. Reichart, Rupkey, Brady and Hook. 1989. J. Clin. Microbiol. 27:808.
7. Martin and Jackson. 1975. J. Am. Dis. Assoc. 2:28. Cat. No. 254554 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
8. Martin, Billings, Hackney and Thayer. 1967. Public Health Rep. 82:361. 254555 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
9. Evans, Kopyta and Crouse. 1989. J. Clin. Microbiol. 27:2471.
10. Center for Disease Control. 1975. Criteria and techniques for the diagnosis of gonorrhea. U.S. *Store at 2-8C.
Public Health Service, Atlanta, Ga.
11. Evangelista and Beilstein. 1993. Cumitech 4A, Laboratory diagnosis of gonorrhea. Coordinating
ed., Abramson. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
12. Knapp and Koumans. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

GN Broth GN Broth, Hajna

Intended Use In another study, Taylor and Schelhart showed that GN Broth
GN Broth is used for the selective enrichment of Salmonella was superior to selenite enrichment media for the isolation of
and Shigella. Shigella.5
GN Broth currently is recommended for use in the microbio-
Summary and Explanation logical examination of foods.6
GN (Gram Negative) Broth was developed by Hajna as
an enrichment medium for the recovery of Salmonella and Principles of the Procedure
Shigella from clinical and nonclinical specimens.1,2 Croft and Peptones provide amino acids and other nitrogenous substances
Miller succeeded in isolating more Shigella strains by use of to support bacterial growth. Mannitol and dextrose are sources
this medium, rather than by direct streaking.3 Taylor and of energy. Mannitol is provided in a higher concentration
Schelhart reported that GN Broth enhanced the isolation of than dextrose to enhance the growth of mannitol-fermenting F
enteric pathogens, producing a 53% increase in Shigella and a
36% increase in Salmonella as compared to direct streaking.4
species, such as Salmonella and Shigella, and limit the growth
of Proteus and other dextrose-fermenting bacteria. Phosphate
G
User Quality Control
NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco GN Broth, Hajna BBL GN Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Off-white to light tan, free-flowing, Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, dry, homogeneous, free of
homogeneous. extraneous material.
Solution: 3.9% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 3.9% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light amber, clear water. Solution is pale to medium,
to slightly opalescent. tan to yellow, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to slightly opales- Prepared Appearance: Pale to medium, tan to yellow, clear
cent. to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 3.9% Reaction of 3.9%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2

Cultural Response Cultural Response

Difco GN Broth, Hajna BBL GN Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-24 hours. 35 2C; subculture to MacConkey II Agar after 6 hours and again
after 18-24 hours of incubation. Incubate subculture plates at 35
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY 2C for 18-24 hours.
Enterococcus faecalis 19433 103-2103 None to poor
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good
Salmonella choleraesuis Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good
subsp. choleraesuis Salmonella choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good subsp. choleraesuis
Shigella flexneri 12022 102-103 Good serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good
Shigella sonnei 9290 102-103 Good

249
 Section III
FG GN Broth, cont.

buffers are incorporated to maintain the pH of the medium. directly into the broth. For stool specimens, use 1 g of feces or
Sodium citrate and sodium desoxycholate are added to inhibit 1 mL of liquid stool per tube. Consult appropriate references
gram-positive and some gram-negative bacteria. for information about the processing and inoculation of other
clinical specimens or food samples.6-9
Proteus, Pseudomonas and coliforms do not overgrow
Salmonella and Shigella in GN Broth during the first 6 hours Incubate the tubes with loosened caps at 35 2C and subcul-
of incubation. ture onto selective and differential media after 6-8 hours of
incubation and again after 18-24 hours of incubation.10
Formulae
Difco GN Broth, Hajna Expected Results
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Growth in broth media is indicated by turbidity compared to
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 12.0 g
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 8.0 g
an uninoculated control. Subculture onto appropriate selective
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g and differential media to isolate pathogens for identification.
D-Mannitol ................................................................. 2.0 g
Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 5.0 g Limitation of the Procedure
Sodium Desoxycholate ............................................... 0.5 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 4.0 g Enrichment broths should not be used as the sole isolation
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.5 g medium. They are to be used in conjunction with selective
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g and nonselective plating media to increase the probability of
BBL GN Broth isolating pathogens, especially when they may be present in
Approximate Formula* Per Liter small numbers. Consult references for detailed information
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................. 10.0 g and recommended procedures.6-9
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g
D-Mannitol ................................................................. 2.0 g References
Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 5.0 g 1. Hajna. 1955. Public Health Lab. 13:59.
Sodium Desoxycholate ............................................... 0.5 g 2. Hajna. 1955. Public Health Lab. 13:83.
3. Croft and Miller. 1956. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 26:411.
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 4.0 g 4. Taylor and Schelhart. 1967. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 48:356.
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.5 g 5. Taylor and Schelhart. 1968. Appl. Microbiol. 16:1383.
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g 6. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 7. Farmer. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Directions for Preparation from 8. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
St. Louis, Mo.
Dehydrated Product 9. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science
Publishing Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
10. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
1. Suspend 39 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
thoroughly.
2. Dispense and autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Availability
3. Alternatively, the broth may be steamed for 30 minutes at Difco GN Broth, Hajna
100C. BS10 CMPH COMPF MCM7 USDA
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Cat. No. 248610 Dehydrated 500 g
stable, typical control cultures. BBL GN Broth
BS10 CMPH COMPF MCM7 USDA
Procedure Cat. No. 211279 Dehydrated 500 g
221729 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
Inoculate the broth as soon as possible after the specimen 221730 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
arrives at the laboratory. Swab specimens may be inserted *Store at 2-8C.

Gelatin
Intended Use This innovation, a solid culture method, became the foundation
Gelatin is used in preparing microbiological culture media. for investigation of the propagation of bacteria.1 However, gelatin-
based media were soon replaced by media containing agar as the
Summary and Explanation solidifying agent.
Gelatin is a protein of uniform molecular constitution derived Gelatin is used in culture media for determining gelatinolysis
chiefly by the hydrolysis of collagen.1 Collagens are a class of (elaboration of gelatinases) by bacteria. Levine and Carpenter2
albuminoids found abundantly in bones, skin, tendon, cartilage and Levine and Shaw3 employed gelatin media in their studies
and similar animal tissues.1 of gelatin liquefaction. Garner and Tillett4 used culture media
Koch1 introduced gelatin into bacteriology when he invented prepared with gelatin to study the fibrinolytic activity of
the gelatin tube method in 1875 and the plate method in 1881. hemolytic streptococci.

250
 Gelatin, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Gelatin
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 12% solution, soluble in purified water
upon slight heating in a 50-55C water
bath. Solution is light amber, clear to
slightly opalescent, may have a slight
precipitate.
Prepared Gel: Very light amber, clear to slightly opal-
escent, may have a slight precipitate.

Cultural Response
Difco Gelatin
Prepare a 12% Gelatin solution in 0.8% Nutrient Broth. Dispense into tubes
and autoclave. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C under appropriate
atmospheric conditions for 18-48 hours or for up to 2 weeks for the
gelatinase test. To read gelatinase, refrigerate until well-chilled and com-
pare to uninoculated tubes. Tubes positive for gelatinase will remain liquid. Uninoculated Bacillus subtilis
Tube ATCC 6633
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY GELATINASE
2 3
Bacillus subtilis 6633 10 -10 Good +
Clostridium sporogenes 11437 102-103 Good +
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good

Gelatin is a high grade gelatin in granular form which may be Procedure

used as a solidifying agent or may be incorporated into culture See appropriate references for specific procedures using gelatin.
media for various uses. Gelatin is used in Nutrient Gelatin, F
Expected Results
Motility GI Medium, Stock Culture Agar and Dextrose Starch
Agar. A 0.4% gelatin medium is used in the presumptive Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
G
differentiation of Nocardia brasiliensis from N. asteroides (see
Nocardia Differentiation Media). Media containing gelatin are References
1. Gershenfeld and Tice. 1941. J. Bacteriol. 41:645.
specified in standard methods5,6 for multiple applications. 2. Levine and Carpenter. 1923. J. Bacteriol. 8:297.
3. Levine and Shaw. 1924. J. Bacteriol. 9:225.
4. Garner and Tillett. 1934. J. Exp. Med. 60:255.
Principles of the Procedure 5. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
national, Gaithersburg, Md.
The melting point of a 12% concentration of gelatin is between 6. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
28 and 30C, which allows it to be used as a solidifying agent.
Certain microorganisms elaborate gelatinolytic enzymes
Availability
(gelatinases) which hydrolyze gelatin, causing liquefaction of
Difco Gelatin
a solidified medium or preventing the gelation of a medium Cat. No. 214340 Dehydrated 500 g
containing gelatin. Gelatin is also used as a source of nitrogen 214320 Dehydrated 10 kg
and amino acids.

251
 Section III
FG Gelysate Peptone

Gelysate Peptone
Intended Use Typical Analysis
Gelysate Peptone is used for cultures requiring low carbohydrates, Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of this
cystine and tryptophan levels in cell culture and bacterial fermen- manual.
tation.
Directions for Preparation from
Summary and Explanation Dehydrated Product
Gelatin hydrolysate is high in proline residues.1 Gelysate Pep- Refer to the final concentration of Gelysate Peptone in
tone is deficient in carbohydrates and is characterized by low the formula of the medium being prepared. Add product as
cystine, methionine and tryptophan content. When used alone required.
as a basic nutrient, it is suitable for preparing media for organ-
isms not particularly fastidious in their nutritional requirements. Procedure
Consult standard methods manuals for media formulations See appropriate references for specific procedures using
containing Gelysate Peptone.2,3 Gelysate Peptone.

Principles of the Procedure Expected Results

Gelysate Peptone is a pancreatic digest of gelatin. Gelatin is Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
extracted from collagen, which is the fibrous protein in bone,
cartilage and connective tissue. Gelysate Peptone provides
References
1. Bridson and Brecker. 1970. In Norris and Ribbons (ed.), Methods in microbiology, vol. 3A.
nitrogen, amino acids and vitamins in microbiological culture Academic Press, New York, N.Y.
2. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
media. International, Gaithersburg, Md.
3. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1998. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food Safety
and Inspection Service, USDA, Washington, D.C.

User Quality Control

Availability
Identity Specifications BBL Gelysate Peptone
BBL Gelysate Peptone BAM USDA
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, homogeneous, free of extraneous Cat. No. 211870 Dehydrated 454 g
material.
Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is clear to slightly
hazy.
Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5-7.5

Cultural Response
Biochemical Reactions
BBL Gelysate Peptone
Prepare a sterile solution of Gelysate Peptone as directed below. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoclate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
TEST TEST SOLUTION ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT
Fermentable Carbohydrates 2% Escherichia coli 29552 ~107 Negative
Indole Production 0.1% Escherichia coli 29552 0.1 mL, undiluted Negative
Acetylmethylcarbinol Production 0.1% with 0.5% dextrose Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Hydrogen Sulfide Production 1% Citrobacter freundii 8454 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive

Growth Response
BBL Gelysate Peptone
Prepare a sterile solution of 10 g of Gelysate Peptone, 2.5 g of sodium chloride and 6.5 g of agar in 500 mL of purified water. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4.
Inoculate and incubate plates at 35 2C for 2-3 days (incubate S. pyogenes with 3-5% CO2).
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-104 Good
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 103-104 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 6538P 103-104 Good
Streptococcus pyogenes 49117 104-105 Good

252
 Giolitti-Cantoni Broth Base

Giolitti-Cantoni Broth Base

Intended Use supplies potassium tellurite, which in combination with glycine,
Giolitti-Cantoni Broth Base is used for enriching Staphylo- inhibits gram-positive bacteria other than staphylococci.
coccus aureus from foods during isolation procedures.
Formula
Summary and Explanation Difco Giolitti-Cantoni Broth Base
Giolitti and Cantoni1 described a broth medium with added Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Tryptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
potassium tellurite and a test procedure for enriching small Beef Extract ................................................................ 5.0 g
numbers of staphylococci in foods. Mossel et al.2 recommended Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Giolitti-Cantoni Broth for detecting Staphylococcus aureus in D-Mannitol ............................................................... 20.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
dried milk and other infant foods where the organism should Lithium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
be absent from 1 g of test material. Glycine ....................................................................... 1.2 g
Sodium Pyruvate ........................................................ 3.0 g
The International Dairy Federation (IDF) and American Public *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Health Association recommend a procedure for detecting S. aureus
in dried milk using Giolitti-Cantoni Broth as an enrichment Directions for Preparation from
medium from which selective media are inoculated.3,4 Dehydrated Product
1. Dissolve 54.2 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
Principles of the Procedure 2. Warm slightly to completely dissolve the powder.
Giolitti-Cantoni Broth Base contains peptone and beef extract 3. Dispense 19 mL amounts into 20 200 mm tubes.
as sources of carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Yeast 4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 15-30C.
extract supplies B-complex vitamins which stimulate bacterial 5. Aseptically add 1.05 mL Tellurite Solution 1% per tube;
growth. D-Mannitol is the carbohydrate source. Sodium 0.105 mL when testing meat products (or quality control
pyruvate stimulates growth of staphylococci. Lithium chloride organisms). Mix thoroughly.
inhibits gram-negative bacilli. Added Tellurite Solution 1% 6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures. F
User Quality Control G
Identity Specifications
Difco Giolitti-Cantoni Broth Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 5.42% solution, soluble in purified water
upon warming. Solution is medium
amber, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, clear.
Reaction of 5.42%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Giolitti-Cantoni Broth Base
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate (overlaying with sterile
paraffin wax or mineral oil) and incubate at 35 2C for 40-48 hours.
INOCULUM Uninoculated Escherichia coli Staphylococcus
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY APPEARANCE Tube ATCC 25922 aureus
Escherichia coli 25922 3
10 -210 3
Inhibition No blackening ATCC 6538
Micrococcus luteus 10240 103-2103 Inhibition No blackening
Staphylococcus aureus 6538 102-103 Good Black
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good Black

253
 Section III
FG Giolitti-Cantoni Broth Base, cont.

Procedure References
1. Giolitti and Cantoni. 1966. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 29:395.
1. Inoculate 1 g or 1 mL of test sample (0.1 g or 0.1 mL when 2. Mossel, Harrewijn and Elzebroek. 1973. UNICEF.
testing meat or meat products) and 1 mL aliquots of each 3. International Dairy Federation. 1978. IDF Standard 60A:1978. International Dairy Federation,
Brussels, Belgium.
of a suitable decimal dilution series of the test sample into 4. Flowers, Andrews, Donnelly and Koenig. 1993. In Marshall (ed.). Standard methods for the micro-
biological examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington,
duplicate tubes. D.C.
2. Overlay each tube with 5 mL sterile molten paraffin wax
to an approximate height of 2 cm. Availability
3. Incubate at 35 2C 40-48 hours. Difco Giolitti-Cantoni Broth Base
4. Examine daily. COMPF SMD
Cat. No. 218091 Dehydrated 500 g

Expected Results BBL Tellurite Solution 1%

Read tubes for blackening of the medium (a positive reaction) Cat. No. 211917 Tube 20 mL

or no blackening (a negative reaction). If blackening occurs,

subculture to Baird-Parker Agar to confirm the isolation of
S. aureus.

M-Green Yeast and Mold Broth

Intended Use bromcresol green. It is a relatively more complex formula than
M-Green Yeast and Mold Broth is used for the detection of many of the other media exclusively used for the recovery of
fungi in the routine analysis of beverages. yeasts and molds.

Summary and Explanation Principles of the Procedure

M-Green Yeast and Mold Broth is an improved modification The formulation is rich in nutrients provided by peptones, yeast
of the liquid medium, M-Yeast and Mold Broth, which was extract and dextrose, but bacterial growth is inhibited by the
developed to improve the efficiency of detection and enumera- acid pH. Diastase is a mixture of amylolytic (starch-hydrolyz-
tion of fungi in sugar and other materials by the membrane ing) enzymes. The bromcresol green indicator facilitates the
filter method. The revised formula contains the indicator dye, visualization and counting of fungal colonies. The colonies
are green due to the diffusion of bromcresol green into the
User Quality Control colonies (alkaline reaction). End products from the colonies
diffuse into the medium, further reducing the pH and causing
Identity Specifications the dye to turn yellow (acid reaction).
BBL M-Green Yeast and Mold Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
ous material, may contain a large
Formula
number of minute to small, dark green BBL M-Green Yeast and Mold Broth
and/or white specks. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Solution: 7.3% solution, soluble in purified Yeast Extract .............................................................. 9.0 g
water. Solution is medium, green Dextrose (anhydrous) ............................................... 50.0 g
(with or without a tint of yellow) to Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
blue-green, clear to moderately hazy. Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 5.0 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 2.1 g
Prepared Appearance: Medium, green to blue-green, clear Potassium Phosphate ................................................. 2.0 g
to moderately hazy. Diastase ..................................................................... 0.05 g
Reaction of 7.3% Thiamine .................................................................... 0.05 g
Solution at 25C: pH 4.6 0.2 Bromcresol Green ..................................................... 26.0 mg
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Cultural Response
BBL M-Green Yeast and Mold Broth Directions for Preparation from
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the membrane Dehydrated Product
filter technique and incubate at 30-35C for 2 days (up to 5 days, if
necessary). 1. Suspend 7.3 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water.

Mix thoroughly.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
2. Warm slightly if necessary to completely dissolve the powder.
Aspergillus niger 16404 102-3102 Good
Candida tropicalis 1369 30-300 Good 3. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes.
Penicillium roquefortii 10110 102-3102 Good 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 30-300 Good stable, typical control cultures.

254
 Group A Selective Strep Agar

Procedure Expected Results

1. Saturate a sterile membrane filter pad in a sterile Petri dish After incubation, colonies appearing on the filter surface can be
with 2.0-2.5 mL of M-Green Yeast and Mold Broth. counted. Mold colonies generally appear green and filamen-
2. Roll a membrane filter, which has been used to filter the tous, whereas yeast colonies are green and opaque.
test sample, onto the surface of the moistened pad so as to
avoid the trapping of air bubbles between the filter and the Availability
pad. BBL M-Green Yeast and Mold Broth
3. Incubate the plates at 30-35C for 48 hours and up to 5 COMPF
days in an aerobic atmosphere with increased humidity. Cat. No. 211286 Dehydrated 100 g*
211287 Dehydrated 500 g*
*Store at 2-8C.

Group A Selective Strep Agar

with 5% Sheep Blood (ssA)
Intended Use selective ingredients provides improved suppression of normal
Group A Selective Strep Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (ssA ) is throat flora for improved recovery of S. pyogenes.1,2
recommended as a primary selective plating medium for the Beta-hemolytic streptococci which show a zone of inhibition
isolation of group A streptococci (S. pyogenes) from throat around a bacitracin (0.04 unit) disc may be presumptively
cultures and other specimens in which the presence of identified as group A streptococci.3
S. pyogenes is suspected. Group B streptococci will also grow
on this medium; most other streptococci, neisseriae, staphylo- Procedure
cocci and gram-negative bacteria are inhibited. The medium As soon as possible, inoculate the specimen onto a Group A
is designed for use is conjunction with Taxo A (bacitracin, Selective Strep Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (ssA) plate by firmly
0.04 unit) discs for presumptive identification of S. pyogenes. rolling the swab over a third of the agar surface. Streak the

Summary and Explanation

remainder of the plate with a sterilized or sterile disposable F
inoculating loop to obtain isolated colonies. After streaking, stab
Infection with Lancefield group A streptococci (S. pyogenes) the agar two or three times in the area of heaviest inoculation. G
may produce serious sequelae such as rheumatic fever and acute
glomerulonephritis. Therefore, early detection and identifica- Place Taxo A disc directly on the swabbed portion of the plate;
tion are important. i.e., where the swabbed area is intersected by the area of initial
loop streaking. It is recommended that a routine blood agar
Because of the overgrowth of normal flora present in throat
Streptococcus pyogenes
culture specimens inoculated onto routine blood agar plates, ATCC 19615
selective ingredients have been added to sheep blood agar to
enhance the detection of group A streptococci.
Evaluation of various antimicrobial agents resulted in a com-
bination with improved selectivity over other selective media
tested. This medium (ssA) allows presumptive identification
of group A streptococci, based on bacitracin susceptibility
and beta hemolysis, within 24 hours after inoculation with the
specimen when the medium is incubated in a CO2-enriched
atmosphere.1

Principles of the Procedure

The base medium, modified Trypticase Soy Agar (TSA II),
provides a combination of casein and soy peptones that supply
organic nitrogen. The sodium chloride maintains osmotic equi-
librium. Defibrinated sheep blood provides proper hemolytic
reactions of streptococci. In addition, growth of Haemophilus
hemolyticus, a nonpathogen whose hemolytic colonies are
indistinguishable from those of beta-hemolytic streptococci, is
inhibited. The incorporation of a unique combination of

255
 Section III
FG Group A Selective Strep Agar, cont.

plate, such as Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA References
II) also be inoculated to assure the recovery of microorganisms 1. Evans and ONeill, 1984. Abstr. C-136. Abstr. 84th Annu. Meet. Am. Soc. for Microbiol. 1984.
2. Carlson, Merz, Hansen, Ruth and Moore. 1985. J. Clin. Microbiol. 21:307.
that may be inhibited on the selective medium. 3. Ruoff, Whiley and Beighton. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Incubate inoculated plates at 35 2C in an atmosphere enriched 4. Facklam and Washington. 1991. In Balows, Hausler, Herrmann, Isenberg and Shadomy (ed.), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 5th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
with carbon dioxide. If plates are incubated without carbon
dioxide, the beta-hemolytic zones and colony size will be smaller Availability
and fewer colonies may be apparent. BBL Group A Selective Strep Agar with
5% Sheep Blood (ssA)
Expected Results BS10 MCM7
United States and Canada
After 18-24 hours of incubation in an atmosphere enriched Cat. No. 221779 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
with carbon dioxide, group A streptococci (S. pyogenes) 221780 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
will appear as translucent or opaque, white to gray, small Europe
(1- 2 mm) colonies surrounded by a zone of beta hemolysis. Cat. No. 254050 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
A decrease in size as compared to a nonselective control Japan
is typical. Pinpoint or very small colonies of alpha-, non- Cat. No. 212498 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*

hemolytic or other beta-hemolytic streptococci may grow in BBL Group A Selective Strep Agar with
small numbers, but they should not interfere with the recovery 5% Sheep Blood (ssA)//Trypticase Soy Agar
with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II)
of group A streptococci or interpretation of the results. Cat. No. 221783 Prepared Bi-Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
Neisseria species, viridans streptococci, staphylococci, gram- *Store at 2-8C.
negative rods and most beta-hemolytic streptococci other than
groups A and B are inhibited. Bacitracin susceptibility may be
used to differentiate group A streptococci from group B. Fair
to heavy growth of beta-hemolytic colonies demonstrating a
zone of inhibition around the Taxo A disc on this medium
may be presumptively reported as S. pyogenes. A PYR
(pyroglutamic acid) test may also be performed. It is more
specific than the bacitracin test for this purpose.4 Gram stains
should be made and examined.
A serological grouping test procedure may be performed if
sufficient well-isolated beta-hemolytic colonies are present.

256
 HC Agar Base

HBT Bilayer Medium

Intended Use Colistin, nalidixic acid (CNA) and amphotericin B are added

HBT (Human Blood Tween *) Bilayer Medium is a selective to facilitate the selective recovery of G. vaginalis from clinical
and differential medium used in the primary isolation and specimens. Colistin and nalidixic acid inhibit most gram-negative
presumptive identification of Gardnerella vaginalis from organisms. Amphotericin B is active against yeasts and fila-
clinical specimens. mentous fungi.
*Tween is a trademark of ICI Americas, Inc. A thin layer of the medium with human blood enhances the
detection of the characteristic diffuse beta hemolysis of
Summary and Explanation
G. vaginalis.
HBT Bilayer Medium was described in 1982 by Totten et al.
for the selective isolation and detection of G. vaginalis from Procedure
clinical specimens.1 The basal medium consists of Columbia
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci-
Agar supplemented with selective agents and Tween (polysor-
mens. Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar side up)
bate) 80. The top layer is made by adding human blood to
at 35 2C in a CO2-enriched atmosphere for 24-48 hours.
the basal medium. Colonies of G. vaginalis may be differen-
tiated by a diffuse, beta-hemolytic reaction they produce in Expected Results
the presence of human blood.2-5 Totten et al. reported that the G. vaginalis produces small, white colonies surrounded by a
rate of isolation of G. vaginalis was better on HBT Bilayer beta-hemolytic zone with a diffuse edge.
Medium than on a single layer human blood medium because
the characteristic beta-hemolytic reaction used in differentiat- References
ing the bacterium was more apparent.1 1. Totten, Amsel, Hale, Piot and Holmes. 1982. J. Clin. Microbiol. 15:141.
2. Greenwood and Pickett. 1979. J. Clin. Microbiol. 9:200.
3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
Principles of the Procedure vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
4. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
Columbia Agar supplies the nutrients necessary to support St. Louis, Mo.
5. Funke and Bernard. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
bacterial growth. Enzymatic digests of casein, meat and beef microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

extract provide amino acids and other complex nitrogenous

substances. Yeast extract primarily supplies the B-complex Availability
vitamins. Corn starch is incorporated to neutralize fatty BBL HBT Bilayer Medium
acids that may be toxic to G. vaginalis. Sodium chloride main- BS10 CMPH
tains the osmotic equilibrium. Cat. No. 297884 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.
H
-
HC Agar Base K
Intended Use Sodium carbonate inactivates low levels of preservatives that
HC Agar Base, when supplemented with Polysorbate 80, is are active at a more acidic pH (e.g., benzoic acid). Chloram-
used for enumerating molds in cosmetic products. phenicol inhibits bacteria, including Pseudomonas aeruginosa
and Serratia marcescens, that are potential contaminants of
Summary and Explanation cosmetic products. Polysorbate 80 neutralizes preservatives and
Methods for isolating molds from cosmetic products require sequesters surfactants that may be present in residual amounts
incubation for 5 to 7 days using traditional agar media.1 In from the product sample.2 Agar is the solidifying agent.
1986, Mead and ONeill2 described a new medium, HC Agar,
for enumerating molds in cosmetic products that decreased Formula
incubation time to 3 days at 27.5 0.5C. HC Agar Base, Difco HC Agar Base
based on the HC Agar formula of Mead and ONeill, is supple- Approximate Formula* Per Liter
mented with Polysorbate 80 to prepare HC Agar. Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 2.5 g
Proteose Peptone ....................................................... 2.5 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Principles of the Procedure Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g
HC Agar Base contains peptones as sources of carbon, nitro- Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 3.5 g
gen, vitamins and minerals. Yeast extract supplies B-complex Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 3.4 g
Ammonium Chloride .................................................. 1.4 g
vitamins which stimulate bacterial growth. Dextrose provides Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.06 g
a source of fermentable carbohydrate. Ammonium chloride Chloramphenicol ........................................................ 0.1 g
and magnesium sulfate provide essential ions. Disodium and Sodium Carbonate ..................................................... 1.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
monopotassium phosphates buffer the pH to near neutrality. *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
257
Section III
H-K HC Agar Base, cont.

Directions for Preparation from 4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.

Dehydrated Product 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
1. Suspend 54.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix stable, typical control cultures.
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Procedure
completely dissolve the powder. 1. Process each specimen as appropriate for that specimen and
inoculate directly onto the surface of the medium.1 Inoculate
3. Add 20 mL of Polysorbate 80.
duplicate plates.
2. Incubate plates aerobically at 27.5 0.5C.
User Quality Control
3. Examine plates for growth and recovery after 72 hours of
Identity Specifications incubation.
Difco HC Agar Base 4. Count mold colonies from duplicate plates and record
Dehydrated Appearance: Very light to light beige, free-flowing, average count as mold count per gram or milliliter of sample.
homogeneous.
Solution: 5.45% solution, soluble in purified Expected Results
water upon boiling. Solution is medium
to dark amber, slightly opalescent Mold cultures should yield good growth and recovery. Bacteria
to opalescent, may have a slight pre- should be inhibited.
cipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber with yellow tint, very Limitation of the Procedure
slightly to slightly opalescent, no signifi-
cant precipitate.
The 27.5 0.5C incubation temperature is critical for obtain-
Reaction of 5.45%
ing statistically significant mold counts after three days using
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 this medium.

Cultural Response References

Difco HC Agar Base 1. Hitchins, Tran and McCarron. 1995. In FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 2. Mead and ONeill. 1986. J. Soc. Cosmet. Chem. 37:49.
27.5 0.5C for 65-72 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY Availability
Aspergillus niger 16404 2
10 -10 3
Good Difco HC Agar Base
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 10145 103-2103 None to poor Cat. No. 268510 Dehydrated 500 g
Serratia marcescens 13880 103-2103 None to poor

m HPC Agar
Intended Use investigators.6-8 The volume of inoculum is limited with both
m HPC Agar is used for enumerating heterotrophic organisms pour and spread plate techniques while the membrane filter
in treated potable water and other water samples with low method enables the use of large samples, which is desirable for
counts by membrane filtration. water with low counts.

Summary and Explanation Principles of the Procedure

m HPC Agar was developed by Taylor and Geldreich in 1979 Peptone provides nitrogen and carbon as well as other nutri-
in their pursuit of a suitable standard methods medium to use ents. Gelatin at 2.5% concentration eliminates problems of
with the membrane filter procedure.1 m HPC Agar is also liquefaction and spreading colonies. Agar is the solidifying
known as m-Heterotrophic Plate Count Agar and previously agent.
as membrane filter Standard Plate Count Agar, m-SPC Agar.
The formulation was evaluated by many investigators who Formula
reported it as a suitable alternative medium for standard plate Difco m HPC Agar
counts.2-4 It is recommended for the membrane filter method Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Peptone ................................................................... 20.0 g
in the recent editions of Standard Methods for the Examination Gelatin ..................................................................... 25.0 g
of Water and Wastewater.5 Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
The advantages of the membrane filter procedure over the
standard plate count method have been described by many

258
 m HPC Agar, cont.

User Quality Control Water Sample

Identity Specifications
Difco m HPC Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 6% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. (Add 1% glycerol after
boiling.) With glycerol, solution is light
amber, slightly opalescent to opalescent,
may have a slight precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, opalescent, may have a pre-
cipitate.
Reaction of 6% Solution
with Glycerol at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco m HPC Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the membrane
filtration technique. Incubate at 35 2C for 40-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 20-200 Growth
Escherichia coli 25922 20-200 Growth
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 10145 20-200 Growth

Directions for Preparation from divide by the sample volume to give colonies per milliliter. If
Dehydrated Product there are more than 20 colonies per square, record count as
1. Suspend 6 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water. > 2,000 divided by the sample volume. Report averaged counts
Mix thoroughly. as estimated colony-forming units. Make estimated counts only
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to when there are discrete, separated colonies.5
completely dissolve the powder.
3. Add 1 mL of glycerol. Limitations of the Procedure
4. Autoclave at 121C for 5 minutes. Cool to 45-50C. 1. m HPC Agar is intended for use only with the membrane
5. Dispense 5 mL portions into 50 9 mm Petri dishes. filter method.
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 2. m HPC Agar is recommended for testing treated water.
stable, typical control cultures. 3. Longer incubation times may be necessary to recover slow- H
growing bacteria.
4. This medium may not be sterile; use with care to avoid
-
Procedure
Water samples should be collected and handled as described contamination. K
in Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste-
water, Section 9060.5 References
1. Taylor and Geldreich. 1979. J. Am. Water Works Assoc. 71:402.
2. Means, Hanami, Ridgway and Olson. 1981. J. Am. Water Works Assoc. 73:585.
1. The volume to be filtered will vary with the sample. Select 3. Nagy and Olson. 1982. Can. J. Microbiol. 28:667.
4. Haas, Meyer and Paller. 1982. J. Am. Water Works Assoc. 74:322.
a maximum sample size to give 20-200 CFU per filter. 5. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
2. Filter the appropriate volume through a sterile 47 mm, 0.45 wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
6. Lechevallier, Seidler and Evans. 1980. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 40:922.
m, gridded membrane filter, under partial vacuum. Rinse 7. Stapert, Sokolski and Northam. 1962. Can. J. Microbiol. 8:809.
8. Saleem and Schlitzer. 1983. Abstr. Q 126, p. 281. Abstr. 83rd Annu. Meet. Am. Soc. Microbiol.
funnel with three 20-30 mL portions of sterile dilution water. 1983.

Place filter on agar in Petri dish.

3. Place dishes in a close-fitting box or plastic bag containing Availability
moistened paper towels. Difco m HPC Agar
4. Incubate at 35 0.5C for 48 hours. Duplicate plates may COMPF SMWW
be incubated at other conditions as desired. Cat. No. 275210 Dehydrated 100 g
275220 Dehydrated 500 g
Expected Results Difco Glycerol
Count all colonies on the membrane when there are 2 or less Cat. No. 228210 Bottle 100 g
228220 Bottle 500 g
colonies per square. For 3-10 colonies per square, count
10 squares and obtain average count per square. For 10-20
colonies per square, count 5 squares and obtain average count
per square. Multiply average count per square by 100 and
259
Section III
H-K Haemophilus Isolation Agar

Haemophilus Isolation Agar with Bacitracin

Intended Use The polypeptide antibiotic bacitracin is incorporated into these
Haemophilus Isolation Agar with Bacitracin is a primary plat- media to inhibit normal flora, including gram-positive bacteria,
ing medium used for the selective isolation of Haemophilus such as streptococci, and most species of Neisseria.6
species.
Procedure
Summary and Explanation Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci-
Members of the genus Haemophilus are fastidious microor- mens. Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar side
ganisms that require the addition of the growth factors hemin up) at 35C in a moist, CO2-enriched atmosphere for 24-48
(X factor) and/or nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide (NAD or hours to obtain satisfactory growth of H. influenzae and most
V factor).1 To enable the cultivation of Haemophilus species, other Haemophilus spp. H. aegyptius requires a longer incu-
Haemophilus Isolation Agar is formulated with Fildes Enrich- bation period, 2-4 days. H. ducreyi may require up to 9 days
ment and BBL IsoVitaleX Enrichment to supply the essential of incubation, preferably at a temperature of 33C.7
X and/or V growth factors. Horse blood provides appropriate
hemolytic reactions to facilitate the differentiation of Expected Results
Haemophilus species. Haemophilus influenzae produces pale gray, smooth, glisten-
ing and slightly convex colonies. Gram staining, biochemical
The antimicrobial agent bacitracin is incorporated to inhibit the
tests and serological procedures should be performed to con-
growth of bacteria that could mask the presence of Haemophilus
firm findings.
species. Bacitracin is frequently utilized in enriched media as
a selective agent to increase the recovery of Haemophilus References
species from the upper respiratory tract.2 1. Campos. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiol-
ogy, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. Chapin and Doern. 1983. J. Clin. Microbiol. 17:1163.
Principles of the Procedure 3. Fildes. 1920. Br. J. Exper. Pathol. 1:129.
4. Fildes. 1921. Br. J. Exper. Pathol. 2:16.
Haemophilus Isolation Agar with Bacitracin consists of Brain 5. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriol-
ogy, 9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Heart Infusion Agar supplemented with Fildes Enrichment, 6. Garrod and OGrady. 1971. Antibiotics and chemotherapy, 3rd ed. Williams & Wilkins, Balti-
more, Md.
IsoVitaleX Enrichment and horse blood. Fildes Enrichment is a 7. Kilian. 1991. In Balow, Hausler, Herrmann, Isenberg and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of clinical micro-
biology, 5th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
peptic digest of sheep blood that supplies both X and V factors.3,4
IsoVitaleX Enrichment is a chemically-defined supplement that
Availability
provides V factor and other nutrients, such as thiamine and
BBL Haemophilus Isolation Agar with Bacitracin
cysteine, to stimulate the growth of Haemophilus species.5 Cat. No. 295914 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
The horse blood supplies additional nutrients and enables the *Store at 2-8C.
detection of hemolytic reactions, which aid in the differentia-
tion and identification of Haemophilus species.

Haemophilus Test Medium Agar (HTM Agar)

Intended Use late Agar) was the medium previously recommended for
Haemophilus Test Medium Agar (HTM Agar) is intended for Haemophilus influenzae.5 Extensive studies performed by
use in the antimicrobial disc diffusion susceptibility procedure Jorgensen and colleagues led to the development of
for Haemophilus spp. As described in the Approved Standard Haemophilus Test Medium (HTM).6,7 This medium is Mueller
M2, published by the National Committee for Clinical Labo- Hinton agar or broth supplemented with X factor (hemin or
ratory Standards (NCCLS).1 hematin), V factor (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide, NAD)
and yeast extract.
Summary and Explanation A major advantage of HTM Agar compared with Mueller
In 1966, Bauer, Kirby and others developed a standardized Hinton Chocolate Agar is optical clarity, permitting zone
procedure for the antimicrobial susceptibility testing of diameter measurements from the bottom of the dish as is
common, rapidly growing bacteria in which Mueller Hinton the standard test procedure for nonfastidious organisms on
Agar was selected as the test medium.2-4 This medium in not Mueller Hinton Agar. Furthermore, HTM Agar contains low
satisfactory for fastidious organisms such as some streptococci, levels of thymidine and is, therefore, suitable for testing
gonococci and Haemophilus species. trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole.
Mueller Hinton Agar supplemented with 1% hemoglobin and
1% BBL IsoVitaleX Enrichment (Mueller Hinton Choco-
260
 Haemophilus Test Medium, cont.

Interpretive criteria for the antimicrobial susceptibility testing 3. A rapid -lactamase test should be utilized for rapid detection
of Haemophilus are provided with the NCCLS document M2.1 of strains that are resistant to penicillin, ampicillin or
This document should be consulted for further details. amoxicillin.
4. Prepare a suspension of the test organism in Mueller Hinton
Principles of the Procedure Broth, Mueller Hinton II Broth or 0.9% saline. This suspen-
The Bauer-Kirby procedure is based on the diffusion through sion should be adjusted to the turbidity of the 0.5 McFarland
an agar gel of antimicrobial substances which are impregnated standard using a photometric device. This suspension will
on paper discs. In contrast to earlier methods, which used contain approximately 1-4 108 CFU/mL. Care must be
discs of high and low antimicrobial concentrations and the exercised in preparing this suspension because higher
presence or absence of inhibition zones for their interpretation, inoculum concentrations may lead to false-resistant results
this method employs discs with single concentration of with some -lactam antibiotics, particularly when
antimicrobial agent and zone diameters are correlated with -lactamase-producing strains of H. influenzae are tested.1
minimal inhibitory concentrations (MICs).1-3,8 5. Alternative methods of inoculum preparation involving
In the test procedure, a standardized suspension of the organism devices that permit direct standardization of inocula without
is swabbed over the entire surface of the medium. Paper discs adjustment of turbidity, such as the BBL Prompt Inocu-
impregnated with specified amounts of antibiotic or other lation System, have been found to be acceptable for
antimicrobial agents are then placed on the surface of the medium, routine testing purposes.10 This system has also been found
the plate is incubated and zones of the inhibition around each to be satisfactory for testing H. influenzae.11
disc are measured. The determination as to whether the or- Consult the product literature or the NCCLS Approved Standard
ganism is susceptible, resistant or intermediate in its response M21 for details on plate inoculation and use of antimicrobial discs.
to the agent is made by comparing zone diameters obtained to
those provided with NCCLS document M2.1 Expected Results
1. Examine the plates after 16-18 hours of incubation. A
Various factors have been identified as influencing disc diffu-
confluent lawn of growth should be obtained. If only
sion susceptibility tests. These include the medium, agar depth,
isolated colonies grow, the inoculum was too light and the
disc potency, inoculum concentration, pH and beta-lactamase
rest should be repeated.
production by test organisms.1,5,8,9
2. Measure the diameter of the zones of complete inhibition
Procedure (as judged by the unaided eye), including the diameter of
1. Prepare a Gram stain before starting susceptibility testing the disc, to the nearest whole millimeter, using calipers, a
to confirm culture purity and to confirm tentative identifi- ruler, or a template prepared for this purpose. The measuring
cation of Haemophilus. device is held on the back of the plate, which is held over a
black, non-reflecting background and illuminated from
2. Use several well-isolated colonies taken directly from an
overnight (preferably 20-24 hours) Chocolate Agar plate above. The endpoint should be taken as the area showing H
as the source of the inoculum. no obvious visible growth that can be detected with the -
Haemophilus
unaided eye. Disregard faint growth of tiny colonies which
can be detected with difficulty near the edge of the obvious
K
influenzae
ATCC 49247 zone of the inhibition.
3. Consult the product literature or the NCCLS Approved
Standard M21 for details on interpretation of results.

References
1. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved standard: M2-A7. Perfor-
mance standards for antimicrobial disk susceptibility tests, 7th ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
2. Bauer, Kirby, Sherris and Turck. 1966. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 45:493.
3. Ryan, Schoenknecht, and Kirby. 1970. Hospital Practice 5:91.
4. Barry, Garcia, and Thrupp. 1970. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 53:149.
5. Neumann, Sahm, Thornsberry and McGowan. 1991. Cumitech 6A, New developments in antimi-
crobial agent susceptibility testing, A practical guide. Coord. ed., McGowan. American Society for
Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
6. Jorgensen, Redding, Maher and Howell. 1987. J. Clin. Microbiol. 25:2105-2113.
7. Jorgensen, Howell and Maher. J. Clin. Microbiol. 28:985-988.
8. Ericsson and Sherris. 1971. Acta. Pathol. Microbiol. Scand. Sect. B, Suppl. 217:1.
9. Jorgensen, Turnidge and Washington. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.),
Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
10. Baker, Thornsberry and Hawkinson. 1983. J. Clin. Microbiol. 17:450.
11. Marsik, Evans, Fowler and Thompson. 1989. Abstr. C-67, p. 404. Abstr. 89th Annu. Meet. Am.
Soc. Microbiol. 1989.

261
Section III
H-K Haemophilus Test Medium, cont.

Availability Europe
Cat. No. 254058 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
BBL Haemophilus Test Medium Agar (HTM Agar)

Japan
BS10 CMPH NCCLS Cat. No. 251992 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
United States and Canada 251954 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 8*
Cat. No. 221992 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10* *Store at 2-8C.
221954 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 8*

Haemophilus Test Medium Broth (HTM Broth)

Intended Use ting easier interpretation of MIC endpoints. Further, HTM Broth
Haemophilus Test Medium Broth (HTM Broth) is intended ingredients are selected for low thymine and thymidine content
for use in dilution antimicrobial susceptibility testing of and the medium is treated with thymidine phosphorylase to make
Haemophilus influenzae as described in the Approved Standard it suitable for testing trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole (SXT).
M7, published by the National Committee for Clinical Labora- Interpretive criteria for the antimicrobial susceptibility testing
tory Standards (NCCLS).1 of H. influenzae are provided in the NCCLS standard, M7.1
This document and supplemental tables should be consulted
Summary and Explanation for further details.
The development of laboratory tests to determine the activity
of antimicrobial agents has paralleled the development of these Principles of the Procedure
agents. Fleming used a serial dilution technique to measure The broth dilution AST procedure is based on the serial 2-fold
the lowest concentration of penicillin that prevented growth dilution in HTM Broth of antimicrobial agents which are then
of a test organism in broth.2 Ericsson and Sherris have published inoculated with the test culture to give a final concentration of
an excellent review of the various methods for susceptibility 5 x 105 CFU/mL. Following incubation at 35 2C for 20-24
testing and the relationship of dilution and diffusion methods.3 hours in an ambient air (non-CO2) environment, the presence
Broth dilution antimicrobial susceptibility tests (AST) are per- of growth (turbidity) of the organism is determined. The lowest
formed by inoculating serial dilutions (usually 2-fold) of the drug concentration of antimicrobial agent showing no growth is
in a suitable liquid medium. The test may be performed in tubes the MIC of that organism for that agent.
(macrodilution), usually in 1.0 mL volumes, or in microtiter The interpretation as to whether the organism is susceptible,
trays (microdilution) in volumes of 0.05 to 0.1 mL. Following resistant or intermediate in its response to the agent is made
incubation, the tubes or wells are examined for the presence by comparing the MIC to those MIC interpretative standards
of growth (turbidity or a pellet). The lowest concentration of provided with the NCCLS standard.1
an antimicrobial agent at which no visible growth occurs is
defined as the minimal inhibitory concentration, or MIC. Various factors have been identified as influencing broth dilution
susceptibility tests. These include the medium, antimicrobial
The rationale for an MIC susceptibility test rather than the potency, inoculum concentration, pH, antimicrobial stability
disc diffusion test is that it gives quantitative information. It and -lactamase production by test organisms.1,3,7,8
allows the clinician to correlate the amount of antimicrobial
agent required to inhibit the growth of an organism in vitro Procedure
and achievable concentrations in blood, urine, cerebrospinal 1. Prepare a Gram stain before starting susceptibility testing
fluid or bile. Effective antimicrobial therapy, however, also to confirm culture purity and tentative identification of H.
depends on other factors that must be considered.4 influenzae.
Broth dilution ASTs are usually performed in cation-adjusted 2. A rapid -lactamase test may be utilized to predict the ac-
Mueller Hinton Broth (CAMHB). However, this medium is tivity of penicillin, ampicillin or amoxicillin. This rapid
not satisfactory for fastidious organisms such as H. influenzae.1 test provides valuable information earlier than tests requir-
ing overnight incubation.
CAMHB supplemented with 2-5% laked horse blood and 10
3. Prepare a suspension of the test organism in CAMHB. Use
mg/mL of nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide (NAD) was the
several well-isolated colonies taken directly from an overnight
medium previously recommended for susceptibility testing of
Chocolate Agar plate as the source of the inoculum. This
H. influenzae.5 Extensive studies performed by Jorgensen and
suspension should be adjusted to the turbidity of the
colleagues have led to the development of Haemophilus Test
0.5 McFarland standard. This suspension will contain
Medium (HTM).6 This medium is Mueller Hinton agar or broth
approximately 1 108 CFU/mL. Care must be exercised in
supplemented with X factor (hemin or hematin),
preparing this suspension since higher inoculum concentra-
V factor (NAD) and yeast extract.
tion may lead to false-resistant results with certain cepha-
A major advantage of HTM Broth compared with Mueller losporins, particularly with -lactamase-producing strains of
Hinton Broth containing laked blood is optical clarity permit- H. influenzae.1 Periodically perform dilutions and plate
262
 Heart Infusion Agar

counts of inoculum suspensions to confirm that the inoculum 3. H. influenzae may be susceptible, intermediate or resistant
contains approximately 1 108 CFU/mL. for a given antimicrobial agent depending on the MIC value.
4. The inoculum prepared above must be used within 15 minutes Interpretive standards for MIC values with various drugs
after preparation. It is diluted in HTM Broth to achieve a final may be found in NCCLS standard M71 or may be obtained
inoculum level in each tube or well of 5 105 CFU/mL from the drug manufacturer.
(not CFU per well).
5. Following inoculation, the tubes or trays are incubated for References
1. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved standard: M7-A5. Meth-
20-24 hours at 35C in an aerobic atmosphere. To maintain ods for dilution antimicrobial susceptibility tests for bacteria that grow aerobically. 5th ed., NCCLS,
Wayne, Pa.
the same incubation temperature for all cultures, 2. Fleming. 1929. Br. J. Exp. Pathol. 10:225.
microdilution trays are not to be stacked more than four 3. Ericsson and Sherris. 1971. Acta. Pathol. Microbiol. Scand. Sect B, Suppl. 217:1.
4. Yao and Moellering. 1995. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
high. To prevent drying out, the trays should be covered with microbiology, 6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 1985. Approved standard: M7-A. Meth-
plastic tape, a tight-fitting lid or placed in a plastic bag.1 ods for dilution antimicrobial susceptibility tests for bacteria that grow aerobically. NCCLS,
Villanova, Pa.
6. Jorgensen, Redding, Maher and Howell. 1987. J. Clin. Microbiol. 25:2105.
Expected Results 7. Neumann, Sahm, Thornsberry and McGowan, 1991. Cumitech 6A, New developments in antimi-
crobial agent susceptibility testing: a practical guide. Coord. ed., McGowan, American Society for
1. Examine the tubes or trays after 20-24 hours of incuba- Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
8. Jorgensen, Turnidge and Washington. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.),
tion. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. The MIC is the lowest concentration of antimicrobial that
completely inhibits growth of the organism as detected by Availability
the unaided eye. Viewing devices that make it easier to read BBL Haemophilus Test Medium Broth (HTM Broth)
microdilution tests are available. The amount of growth in CMPH MCM7 NCCLS
the wells or tubes containing the agent is compared with the Cat. No. 221966 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 10 mL Pkg. of 10*
amount of growth in the growth-control wells or tubes (no *Store at 2-8C.

antimicrobial agent) used in each set of tests.

Heart Infusion Agar

Intended Use Formula
Heart Infusion Agar is a general-purpose medium used in the Difco Heart Infusion Agar
cultivation of a wide range of microorganisms from a variety Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Heart, Infusion from 500 g ............................... 10.0 g
of clinical and nonclinical specimens. Tryptose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Summary and Explanation Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g H
Meat infusions provided one of the earliest means of culturing *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
-
microorganisms, and infusion-based media are still widely used.
Huntoon demonstrated that pathogenic organisms could be
Directions for Preparation from K
grown on infusion agar without supplements.1 In plates, Heart
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 40 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Infusion Agar can be used for primary isolation of organisms
thoroughly.
from mixed cultures; in agar slant form, it is used primarily
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
for organism cultivation and maintenance rather than for
completely dissolve the powder.
isolation from mixed cultures.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Heart infusion media are specified for the isolation of Vibrio 4. To prepare blood agar, aseptically add 5% sterile defibri-
cholerae and Vibrio species.2,3 Several modifications of heart nated blood to the medium at 45-50C. Mix well.
infusion media have been described.4 The BBL prepared 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
medium provided in tubed slants contains yeast extract and a stable, typical control cultures.
reduced peptone content.
Procedure
Principles of the Procedure Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
Heart Infusion Agar derives its nutrients from heart muscle specimens.
infusion and peptone, which supply nitrogenous and carbon-
Since many pathogens require carbon dioxide on primary
aceous compounds, sulfur, vitamins and trace ingredients.
isolation, plates may be incubated in an atmosphere contain-
Sodium chloride maintains osmotic equilibrium. Agar is the
ing approximately 3-10% CO2. Incubate plates at 35 2C
solidifying agent. The addition of 5% sheep blood provides
for 18-48 hours.
additional growth factors and is used to determine hemolytic
reactions.
263
Section III
H-K Heart Infusion Agar, cont.

Escherichia coli Staphylococcus aureus

User Quality Control ATCC 25922 ATCC 25923

Identity Specifications
Difco Heart Infusion Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 4% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light to medium
amber, very slightly to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Plain Light to medium amber, slightly
opalescent.
With 5% sheep blood Cherry red,
opaque.
Reaction of 4%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Heart Infusion Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions without (plain) and with 5% sheep
blood (SB). Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU PLAIN WITH 5% SB HEMOLYSIS
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good Good Beta
Staphylococcus
aureus 25923 102-103 Good Good Beta Streptococcus
pyogenes
Streptococcus ATCC 19615
pneumoniae 6305 102-103 Fair Good Alpha
Streptococcus
pyogenes 19615 102-103 Fair Good Beta

Using a sterile inoculating loop or needle, pick several isolated Availability

colonies from the primary isolation plate and streak the Difco Heart Infusion Agar
surface of a slant of Heart Infusion Agar. Incubate the tubes BAM COMPF
under appropriate conditions at 35C. Cat. No. 244400 Dehydrated 500 g
244100 Dehydrated 2 kg
Expected Results 211839 Dehydrated 10 kg
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results. BBL Heart Infusion Agar
Cat. No. 297336 Tubed Slants Pkg. of 10
References BBL Heart Infusion Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
1. Huntoon. 1918. J. Inf. Dis. 23:169.
2. Elliott, Kaysner, Jackson and Tamplin. 1995. In FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed.
Europe
AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md. Cat. No. 257026 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
3. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
*Store at 2-8C.
foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
4. Atlas. 1997. Handbook of microbiological media, 2nd ed. CRC Press, Inc., Boca Raton, Fla.

Bacto Heart Infusion Broth

Intended Use enrichments.1 The formula for HIB contains tryptose, which is
Bacto Heart Infusion Broth is used for cultivating fastidious better suited to the nutritional requirements of pathogenic
microorganisms. bacteria than Bacto Peptone.
Heart infusion media are specified for the isolation of Vibrio
Summary and Explanation cholerae and Vibrio species.2,3 HIB may be used as the base in
Heart Infusion Broth (HIB) is a nonselective general-purpose carbohydrate fermentation tests.4
medium used for the isolation of nutritionally fastidious micro-
organisms. One of the first media used for the cultivation of Several modifications of heart infusion media have been
bacteria was a liquid medium containing an infusion of meat. described.5 The addition of carbohydrates or other ingredients
Huntoon1 using fresh beef heart and Bacto Peptone, prepared results in media used for a variety of purposes. The method-
a hormone broth to retain growth promoting substances. ologies for the multiple applications using HIB are outlined in
Highly pathogenic organisms, such as meningococci and the references.
pneumococci, could be grown on infusion medium without

264
 Hektoen Enteric Agar

User Quality Control Principles of the Procedure

Infusion from beef heart and tryptose supply the nutritional
Identity Specifications requirements for growth of microorganisms in heart infusion
Bacto Heart Infusion Broth media. Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance of the
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, homogeneous, free-flowing. medium.
Solution: 2.5% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light to medium
amber, clear.
Formula
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear.
Bacto Heart Infusion Broth
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Reaction of 2.5% Beef Heart, Infusion from 500 g ............................... 10.0 g
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2 Tryptose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Cultural Response *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Bacto Heart Infusion Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Directions for Preparation from
35 2C for 18-48 hours.
Dehydrated Product
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY 1. Dissolve 25 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good 2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good 3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 102-103 Good
stable, typical control cultures.
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good

Procedure
See appropriate references for specific procedures.

Expected Results
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.

References
1. Huntoon. 1918. J. Infect. Dis. 23:169.
2. Elliott, Kaysner, Jackson and Tamplin. 1995. In FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed.
AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
3. Vanderzant and Splittstoesser (ed.). 1992. Compendium of methods for the microbiological exami-
nation of foods, 3rd ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
4. Ruoff. 1995. In Murray, Baron Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.)., Manual of clinical microbiology,
6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. Atlas. 1997. Handbook of microbiological media, 2nd ed. CRC Press, Inc., Boca Raton, Fla.

Availability H
Bacto Heart Infusion Broth
-
BAM COMPF EP
Cat. No. 238400 Dehydrated 500 g
K
Uninoculated Escherichia coli 238100 Dehydrated 2 kg
Tube ATCC 25922
292844 Dehydrated 10 kg

Hektoen Enteric Agar

Intended Use spectrum of enteric pathogens were less inhibitory to members
Hektoen Enteric (HE) Agar is a modrately selective medium of the nonpathogenic intestinal flora.
used in qualitative procedures for the isolation and cultivation Hektoen Enteric Agar was developed in 1967 by King and
of gram-negative enteric microorganisms, especially Shigella, Metzger of the Hektoen Institute in order to increase the
from a variety of clinical and nonclinical specimens. frequencies of isolation of Shigella and Salmonella organisms
when compared with their recovery on other media frequently
Summary and Explanation utilized in clinical laboratories at that time.1-3 This medium is
Through the years many media have been devised for the considered to be moderately selective, and is particularly
isolation of enteric pathogens. These various formulations have useful in the isolation of Shigella species. The present formula-
differed in their degree of selectivity for the pathogenic tion differs from that of the original in that sodium
species. Some were designed to isolate and differentiate Shigella desoxycholate has been eliminated and the concentration of
species whereas others were formulated for the selective bile salts is reduced. Additionally, the peptone concentrations
isolation of the salmonellae. Media that isolated a broader
265
Section III
H-K Hektoen Enteric Agar, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Hektoen Enteric Agar BBL Hektoen Enteric Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, may have a slight green Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
cast, free-flowing, homogeneous. material, may contain some specks.
Solution: 7.6% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 7.5% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is brown water upon boiling. Solution is dark,
with greenish cast, slightly opalescent. green trace blue to green to brown
Prepared Appearance: Green with yellowish cast, slightly green, clear to slightly hazy.
opalescent. Prepared Appearance: Dark, green trace blue to green to
Reaction of 7.6% brown green, clear to slightly hazy.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.5 0.2 Reaction of 7.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.6 0.2
Cultural Response
Difco Hektoen Enteric Agar Cultural Response
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at BBL Hektoen Enteric Agar
35 2C for 18-24 hours. Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-24 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR INOCULUM COLONY
Enterococcus ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
faecalis 29212 103
Marked to Enterococcus faecalis 29212 104-105 Partial to Yellow
complete inhibition complete
Escherichia coli 25922 102-3102 Partial Salmon- inhibition
inhibition orange, may Escherichia coli 25922 104-105 Partial to Yellow to
have bile complete salmon, may
precipitate inhibition have bile
Salmonella choleraesuis precipitate
subsp. choleraesuis Salmonella choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-3102 Good Greenish blue, subsp. choleraesuis
w/black centers serotype Typhimurium 14028 103-104 Good Blue-green to
Shigella flexneri 2
12022 10 -310 2
Good Greenish blue blue w/black
centers
Shigella flexneri 12022 103-104 Good Green to
blue-green

Salmonella typhimurium Shigella flexneri

ATCC 14028 ATCC 12022 have been increased in order to offset the inhibitory effects of
the bile salts.4
HE Agar is currently recommended as one of several plating
media for the culture of Enterobacteriaceae from stool specimens.5
Foods containing poultry, eggs or dairy products are the most
frequent vehicles for foodborne salmonellosis, and a variety of
procedures have been developed using Hektoen Enteric Agar as
part of the multi-step procedure to isolate Salmonella.6-9

Principles of the Procedure

The selective nature of Hektoen Enteric Agar is due to the
incorporation of bile salts in the formulation. These substances
inhibit gram-positive organisms but also can be toxic for some
gram-negative strains.
This medium contains three carbohydrates, lactose, sucrose
(saccharose) and salicin, for optimal differentiation of enteric
pathogens by the color of the colonies and of the medium
adjacent to the colonies. The lactose concentration is higher
than in many other media used for enterics in order to aid
in the visualization of enteric pathogens and minimize the
problem of delayed lactose fermentation. Ferric ammonium

266
 Hektoen Enteric Agar, cont.

citrate and sodium thiosulfate in the medium enable the Expected Results
detection of hydrogen sulfide production, thereby aiding in After incubation most plates will show an area of confluent
the differentiation process due to the production of black- growth. Because the streaking procedure is, in effect, a dilu-
centered colonies. The indicator system, consisting of acid tion technique, diminishing numbers of microorganisms are
fuchsin and bromthymol blue, has a lower toxicity than that deposited on the streaked areas. Consequently, one or more of
of many other enteric media, resulting in improved recovery these areas should exhibit isolated colonies of the organisms
of enteric pathogens. contained in the specimen. Better isolation is obtained due to
the inhibitory action of the medium.
Formulae
Difco Hektoen Enteric Agar Limitation of the Procedure
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Proteus species may resemble salmonellae or shigellae. Further
Proteose Peptone ..................................................... 12.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g testing should be conducted to confirm the presumptive identi-
Bile Salts No. 3 ........................................................... 9.0 g fication of organisms isolated on this medium.
Lactose ..................................................................... 12.0 g
Saccharose ............................................................... 12.0 g References
Salicin ........................................................................ 2.0 g 1. King and Metzger. 1967. Abstr. M99, p. 77. Bacteriol. Proc. Am. Soc. Microbiol. 1967.
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g 2. King and Metzger. 1968. Appl. Microbiol. 16:577.
Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................... 5.0 g 3. King and Metzger. 1968. Appl. Microbiol. 16:579.
4. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 1.5 g vol. l. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Agar ......................................................................... 14.0 g 5. Chapin and Murray. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
Bromthymol Blue ..................................................... 65.0 mg microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
6. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard Methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. Ameri-
Acid Fuchsin ............................................................... 0.1 g can Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
7. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
BBL Hektoen Enteric Agar International, Gaithersburg, Md.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 8. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. I. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................. 12.0 g 9. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Bile Salts ..................................................................... 9.0 g
Lactose ..................................................................... 12.0 g
Sucrose .................................................................... 12.0 g
Availability
Salicin ........................................................................ 2.0 g Difco Hektoen Enteric Agar
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g AOAC BAM BS10 CMPH COMPF MCM7 SMD
Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................... 5.0 g
Cat. No. 285340 Dehydrated 500 g
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 1.5 g
285310 Dehydrated 2 kg
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g
285320 Dehydrated 10 kg
Bromthymol Blue ..................................................... 64.0 mg
Acid Fuchsin ............................................................... 0.1 g BBL Hektoen Enteric Agar
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
AOAC BAM BS10 CMPH COMPF MCM7 SMD

Directions for Preparation from Cat. No. 212211 Dehydrated 500 g H

Dehydrated Product
212253
293327
Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
-
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water: United States and Canada K
Difco Hektoen Enteric Agar 76 g; Cat. No. 221365 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
221366 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
BBL Hektoen Enteric Agar 75 g.
Europe
Mix thoroughly.
Cat. No. 254009 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
2. Heat to boiling with frequent agitation to dissolve 254075 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
completely. Do not overheat. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE. Mexico
3. Cool to 45-50C and use immediately. Cat. No. 224450 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using BBL Hektoen Enteric Agar//Salmonella Shigella Agar
stable, typical control cultures. Cat. No. 297426 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
BBL Hektoen Enteric Agar//XLD Agar

Procedure Cat. No. 295646 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*

Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci- *Store at 2-8C.
mens. A nonselective medium should also be streaked to increase
the chance of recovery when the population of gram-negative
organisms is low and to provide an indication of other organisms
present in the specimen.
Incubate plates, protected from light, at 35 2C for 18-24
hours.

267
Section III
H-K Hemo ID QUAD Plate

Hemo (Haemophilus) Identification (ID) QUAD Plate

Intended Use each quadrant with one loopful of diluted specimen and streak
The Hemo (Haemophilus) Identification (ID) QUAD Plate to obtain isolated colonies. To prevent carry-over of growth
(with growth factors) is used for the differentiation and identi- factors, sterilize the loop between inoculations of each quadrant.
fication of Haemophilus species based on requirements for Alternatively, suspend one or two colonies in 5 mL of distilled
growth factors X and/or V and hemolytic reactions. water or Trypticase Soy Broth or other suitable medium and
vortex to mix. Inoculate each quadrant of the plate with one
Summary and Explanation loopful of the diluted specimen and streak to obtain isolated
In 1917, Davis reported that bacteria causing influenza required colonies, sterilizing the loop between inoculation of each quad-
two factors for in vitro growth, one from hemoglobin and rant.
another that the organism derived through a satellite relation-
ship with Staphylococcus aureus.1 In 1921, Thjotta and Avery Do not inoculate plates directly from the chocolate plate.
described the growth factor from blood as X factor and the Inoculum must be diluted as described above.
other as V factor.2 The X factor was found in hemin and later Invert the plates (agar side up) and incubate them in a CO2-
identified as protoporphyrin IX, or protoheme, and V factor enriched atmosphere at 35C for 24 hours and examine for
was identified as nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide (NAD).3,4 growth.
Pathogenic Haemophilus species may be differentiated and
presumptively identified by determining in vitro growth Expected Results
requirements for X and/or V factors and by determining After 24 hours of incubation, the plates should show growth
hemolytic reactions.5 or no growth, depending on X and V factor requirements. The
isolate should grow in quadrants III and IV. In quadrant IV,
Principles of the Procedure the isolated colonies may have zones of hemolysis, depending
The Hemo ID QUAD Plate (with growth factors) is a four-sectored on the species isolated.
plate that contains Brain Heart Infusion Agar in quadrants I, The following table shows the expected growth results for vari-
II and III and Blood Agar Base in quadrant IV. Quadrant I is ous Haemophilus spp.
enriched with hemin to supply X factor. Quadrant II is enriched
Growth on Quadrants*/ Factor(s) Present
with BBL IsoVitaleX Enrichment to supply V factor and other
I (X) II (V) III (XV) IV HEMOLYSIS
nutrients, such as thiamine and cysteine, which stimulate the growth
of Haemophilus species. Quadrant III contains both hemin and H. influenzae +
H. haemolyticus + +
IsoVitaleX Enrichment. Quadrant IV is supplemented with NAD
H. parainfluenzae + +
to supply V factor and horse blood to provide X factor and H. parahaemolyticus + + +
demonstrate hemolytic reactions. H. aphrophilus** + + +
H. paraphophilus + +
A Haemophilus isolate that grows on quadrants III and IV,
H. segnis + +
but fails to grow on quadrants I and II exhibits a requirement
H. ducreyi + +
for both X and V factors. An isolate that fails to grow on
* + = growth or hemolysis
quadrant I, grows on quadrants II, III and IV indicates a re- = no growth or no hemolysis

quirement only for V factor. Alternatively, an isolate that fails ** X factor requirement occasionally may be observed on primary isolation but will be lost on
subculture. Gram staining, biochemical tests and/or additional identification procedures should be
to grow on quadrant II, but grows on quadrants I, III and IV performed to confirm findings.4-6

indicates a requirement only for X factor.

References
1. Davis. 1917. J. Infect. Dis. 21:392.
Procedure 2. Thjotta and Avery. 1921. J. Exp. Med. 34:97.
3. Lwoff and Lwoff. 1937. Proc. Roy. Soc. (London) 122:352.
The initial specimens should be inoculated onto BBL Choco- 4. Campos. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiol-
late II Agar or another suitable medium and incubated for 18- ogy, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
24 hours in a CO2-enriched atmosphere. Choose one or two St. Louis, Mo.
6. Koneman, Allen, Janda, Schreckenberger and Winn. 1997. Color atlas and textbook of diagnostic
well-isolated colonies that resemble Haemophilus species and microbiology, 5th ed. Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, Pa.

perform a Gram stain to confirm that the isolate is a gram-

negative rod or coccobacillus. To prepare inoculum, suspend
several well-isolated colonies of the test organism from an 18-
24 hour plate culture into 5 mL of distilled water or Trypticase
Soy Broth or other suitable medium and adjust the turbidity
to a 0.5 McFarland turbidity standard. Dilute 10-1. Inoculate

268
 Herrolds Egg Yolk Agar

Haemophilus
influenzae Availability
ATCC 10211 BBL Hemo (Haemophilus) Identification (ID)
QUAD Plate
MCM7
United States and Canada
Cat. No. 297890 Prepared Plates (QUAD) Pkg. of 10*
Japan
Cat. No. 251142 Prepared Plates (QUAD) Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

Herrolds Egg Yolk Agar with Mycobactin J and ANV

Herrolds Egg Yolk Agar without Mycobactin J
with ANV
Intended Use nitrogenous nutrients, vitamins and minerals required for
Herrolds Egg Yolk Agars are used for the selective isolation microbial growth. Sodium chloride maintains osmotic equi-
and differentiation of Mycobacterium paratuberculosis. librium. Sodium pyruvate is a source of energy for bacterial
Mycobacteria other than M. paratuberculosis will grow on metabolism. Egg yolk and glycerol provide fatty acids and other
Herrolds Egg Yolk Agar (w/o Mycobactin), while M. paratu- nutrients required for the metabolism of mycobacteria. H
berculosis will not grow unless the growth factor, Mycobactin, Most mycobacteria produce endogenous siderophores (iron
-
is provided. binding compounds) called mycobactins and will grow on K
Herrolds Egg Yolk Agar whether or not mycobactins have
Summary and Explanation been added. M. paratuberculosis is unable to grow on media
Paratuberculosis (Johnes disease) is a chronic granulomatous lacking mycobactins. Mycobactin J permits earlier and more
enteritis of ruminants first described in 1826.1 Johne and abundant growth of M. paratuberculosis than other
Frothingham further described the disease in 1895 and dem- mycobactins.8, 9
onstrated the presence of acid-fast bacilli in affected intestine.1
The first successful isolation of this organism occurred in 1910.2 Amphotericin B (A) enhances the selectivity of the medium
Early nutritional studies demonstrated the stimulatory effect by inhibiting contaminating fungi. Nalidixic acid (N) inhibits
of an ethanol soluble substance obtained from other myco- contaminating gram-negative organisms and vancomycin (V)
bacteria (e.g., M. phlei) called mycobactin.3 The organism inhibits contaminating gram-positive organisms. Malachite
fails to grow on the medium lacking the growth factor. green is included to help control contaminants and enhance
the visibility of colonies.
Cultivation of M. paratuberculosis from fecal specimens is the
most frequently used method to diagnose paratuberculosis. Procedure
Specific procedures are described elsewhere for the cultivation 1. Weigh out 1-2 g of fecal sample.
of M. paratuberculosis from bovine fecal specimens.4-7 2. Process specimen using the MycoPrep Specimen Digestion/
Decontamination Kit or a recommended procedure4-7 to
Principles of the Procedure remove or kill contaminating organisms other than myco-
Enzymatic digest of casein provides amino acids and other bacteria.
nitrogenous substances. Beef extract provides additional

269
Section III
H-K Herrolds Egg Yolk Agar, cont.

3. Inoculate tubes of Herrolds Egg Yolk ANV Agar with and caps and re-incubate. Examine tubes weekly for the presence
without Mycobactin J with no more than 0.25 mL (5-7 of growth. Acid-fast cultures that grow only in the presence of
drops from a sterile transfer pipette) of the final processed Mycobactin J are identified as M. paratuberculosis.
and decontaminated material.
4. Incubate tubes at 35-37C in a slanted position with the Limitations of the Procedure
caps loose. Subcultures of M. paratuberculosis may occasionally lose their
5. Tighten caps when medium surface is dry (1-2 weeks) and dependency on Mycobactin. Reduced growth of the organism
place in an upright position in the incubator. may be observed after multiple transfers.
6. Read and evaluate tubes for growth and contamination
every week for up to 16 weeks. References
1. Chiodini, van Kruinigen and Merkal. 1984. Cornell Vet. 74: 218.
2. Twort. 1910. Proc. R. Soc. Lond. Ser. B. 83: 156.
Expected Results 3.
4.
Twort and Ingram. 1912. Proc. R. Soc. Lond. Ser. B. 84: 517.
Whipple, Callihan and Jarnagin. 1991. J. Vet. Diagn. Invest. 3: 368.
Colonies appearing should be evaluated for typical acid-fast- 5. Whitlock, Rosenberger and Spencer. 1989. Proc. Annu. Meet. U.S. Animal Health Assn. 93: 382.
6. Whitlock and Sweeney. 1990. Proc. Annu. Meet. Livestock Conservation Inst., p. 24.
ness and morphological appearance of M. paratuberculosis. 7. Stabel. 1997. J. Vet. Diagn. Invest. 9: 375.
8. Merkal and McCullough. 1982. Curr. Microbiol. 7: 333.
M. paratuberculosis-like colonies should not appear on the 9. Thoen and Baum. 1988. J. Am. Vet. Med. Assoc. 192: 1609.
medium lacking Mycobactin J.
Availability
To confirm Mycobactin J dependency, suspend suspected colonies
BBL Herrolds Egg Yolk Agar with Mycobactin J
in 0.5 mL autoclaved purified water so that the turbidity and ANV
is equivalent to a No. 1 McFarland nephelometer standard. Cat. No. 222232 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
Dilute the specimen 100-fold in autoclaved purified water. 222233 Prepared Slants Ctn. of 100*
Inoculate 0.1 mL of the suspension onto a single tube of BBL Herrolds Egg Yolk Agar without Mycobactin J
Herrolds Egg Yolk ANV Agar with Mycobactin J and 0.1 mL with ANV
onto a single tube of the medium without Mycobactin J. Incu- Cat. No. 222240 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
222241 Prepared Slants Ctn. of 100*
bate tubes for 1 week with loosened caps at 35-37C. Tighten
*Store at 2-8C.

ISP Medium 1 ISP Medium 2 ISP Medium 4

Intended Use Formulae
ISP Medium 1, ISP Medium 2 and ISP Medium 4 are used Difco ISP Medium 1
for characterizing Streptomyces species according to the Inter- Approximate Formula* Per Liter
national Streptomyces Project (ISP).1 Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Summary and Explanation Difco ISP Medium 2
ISP media were developed by Difco Laboratories for the Inter- Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 4.0 g
national Streptomyces Project (ISP) in order to select stable Malt Extract .............................................................. 10.0 g
properties and reproducible procedures for characterization Dextrose ..................................................................... 4.0 g
of Streptomyces species.1 Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g

ISP Medium 1 is also referred to as Tryptone-Yeast Extract Broth. Difco ISP Medium 4
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
ISP Medium 2 is also referred to as Yeast Extract-Malt Extract Soluble Starch .......................................................... 10.0 g
Agar. Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g
Magnesium Sulfate USP ............................................. 1.0 g
ISP Medium 4 is also referred to as Inorganic Salts-Starch Agar. Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 1.0 g
Ammonium Sulfate .................................................... 2.0 g
Calcium Carbonate .................................................... 2.0 g
Principles of the Procedure Ferrous Sulfate ........................................................... 1.0 mg
Peptone and yeast extract provide nitrogen, vitamins, carbon Manganous Chloride .................................................. 1.0 mg
and amino acids in ISP Medium 1. Zinc Sulfate ................................................................ 1.0 mg
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g
Yeast extract and malt extract provide nitrogen, amino acids *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
and vitamins in ISP Medium 2. Dextrose is the carbon source.
Agar is the solidifying agent.
ISP Medium 4 is composed of many inorganic salts and soluble
starch to provide essential nutrients for organism growth. Agar
is the solidifying agent.

270
 Indole Nitrite Medium

User Quality Control Directions for Preparation from

Dehydrated Product
Identity Specifications 1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
Difco ISP Medium 1 Difco ISP Medium 1 8 g;
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Difco ISP Medium 2 38 g;
Solution: 0.8% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
Difco ISP Medium 4 37 g.
amber, clear to very slightly opalescent. Mix thoroughly.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to very slightly opal- 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
escent. pletely dissolve the powder.
Reaction of 0.8% 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
4. Mix thoroughly while dispensing ISP Medium 4.
Difco ISP Medium 2 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
stable, typical control cultures.
Solution: 3.8% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
to medium amber, very slightly to Procedure
slightly opalescent. For details on the use of these media for characterization of
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal- Streptomyces species, consult the reference.1 For a complete
escent. discussion on the isolation and maintenance of Strepto-
Reaction of 3.8% myces species refer to appropriate references.2,3
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
Difco ISP Medium 4

Expected Results
Dehydrated Appearance: White to light beige, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Solution: 3.7% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is white References
1. Shirling and Gottlieb. 1966. Int. J. Syst. Bacteriol. 16:313.
to off-white, opaque with precipitate. 2. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
Prepared Appearance: White to off-white, opaque, may have Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
a precipitate. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Reaction of 3.7%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2 Availability
Difco ISP Medium 1
Cultural Response
Cat. No. 276910 Dehydrated 500 g
Difco ISP Medium 1, ISP Medium 2 or ISP Medium 4
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate tubes of prepared Difco ISP Medium 2

ISP Medium 1 with the test organisms and incubate at 30 2C for up

to 96 hours. Inoculate prepared ISP Medium 2 and ISP Medium 4 with
Cat. No. 277010 Dehydrated 500 g
H
the test organisms by placing approximately 0.1 mL of inoculum near
Difco ISP Medium 4
Cat. No.

277210 Dehydrated 500 g

-
the edge of the plate. Five parallel streaks across the plate are made
from this 0.1 mL of inoculum, followed by four perpendicular streaks. K
Incubate inoculated plates at 30 2C for 48-96 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Streptomyces albus 3004 102-103 Good
Streptomyces lavendulae 8664 102-103 Good

Indole Nitrite Medium (Trypticase Nitrate Broth)

Intended Use Indole Nitrite Medium can be used for nitrite tests with
Indole Nitrite Medium is used for the identification of micro- members of the Enterobacteriaceae but is not recommended
organisms by means of the nitrate reduction and indole tests. for the indole test with these organisms since they reduce
nitrate to nitrite, which prevents the detection of indole.1
Summary and Explanation Tryptophan (Trypticase) 1% Solution is the medium of choice
Indole Nitrite Medium was developed to serve the dual role of for indole test with enteric bacilli.
detecting indole production and nitrate reduction of a wide
range of microorganisms. Due to its nutritive content, the Principles of the Procedure
medium will support the growth of aerobes, microaerophiles The casein peptone contains tryptophan, which is attacked
and facultative and obligate anaerobes. by certain microorganisms, resulting in the production of
indole, detectable by the addition of chemical reagents to 18-

271
Section III
H-K Indole Nitrite Medium, cont.

to 48-hour cultures. Potassium nitrate serves as the substrate for various lengths of time. Incubate tubes with loosened caps
for determining the ability of microorganisms to reduce at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere. The caps of tubes
nitrates to nitrites. inoculated with obligate anaerobes should be tightened dur-
ing incubation.
Formula
1. Indole Test
BBL Indole Nitrite Medium (Trypticase Nitrate Broth)
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
The test for indole may be performed as soon as heavy growth
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 20.0 g has taken place, usually after 18 to 48 hours of incubation.
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 2.0 g The test may be performed by any suitable method, such as
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g with Kovacs reagent (add 0.5 mL, Cat. No. 261185) or
Agar ........................................................................... 1.0 g
Potassium Nitrate ....................................................... 1.0 g Ehrlichs reagent employing p-dimethylaminobenzaldehyde.2
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. Testing for indole may be made after 24 hours of incuba-
tion; if negative, the test should be repeated on another
Directions for Preparation from culture incubated for 48 hours.
Dehydrated Product 2. Nitrite Test
1. Suspend 25 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Add The test for nitrites may be performed at several intervals
2 g of agar for use as a motility medium. Mix thoroughly. during the incubation process if replicate tubes were
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to inoculated. The presence of nitrites may be detected by any
completely dissolve the powder. of several methods.2 Addition of approximately 5 drops
3. Dispense in regular test tubes, filing them half full. Autoclave each of sulfanilic acid (Cat. No. 261197) and N, N-dim-
at 121C for 15 minutes. ethyl-1-naphthylamine (Cat. No. 261198) reagents permits
4. If the medium is more than 2 days old at the time of use, the detection of nitrites. If prior tests are negative, a final
boil and cool prior to use. test should be conducted at 48 hours of incubation.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures. Expected Results
1. Indole Test
Procedure The production of a pink to red color following addition
Inoculate the tubes with pure cultures of the organisms being of the reagent is a positive test for indole formation.
evaluated. Replicate tubes should be inoculated if it is desired 2. Nitrite Test
to test for the presence of indole or nitrites after incubation A pink to red color develops, after addition of the reagents,
if nitrite is present, and indicates that nitrate reduction has
User Quality Control occurred. Since some organisms further reduce nitrite to
Identity Specifications ammonia, add a small amount of zinc dust (Cat. No.
BBL Indole Nitrite Medium (Trypticase Nitrate 261207) to tubes exhibiting no color. A pink color in this
Broth) part of the test indicates no nitrate reduction. A colorless
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane- reaction indicates that nitrates have been completely
ous material. reduced.
Solution: 2.5% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light Consult appropriate references for an explanation of the
to medium, yellow to tan, trace hazy reactions involved and expected results with specific microor-
to hazy.
ganisms.3,4
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, trace
hazy to hazy.
Limitations of the Procedure
Reaction of 2.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2 Indole Nitrite Medium should not be used for detecting indole
production by members of the Enterobacteriaceae. The tubed
Cultural Response medium should be boiled for 2 minutes and cooled, without
BBL Indole Nitrite Medium (Trypticase Nitrate agitation, before use.
Broth)
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh broth
cultures diluted 1:10 and incubate at 35 2C for 2 days under appro-
References
1. Smith, Rogers and Bettge. 1972. Appl. Microbiol. 43:423.
priate atmospheric conditions. 2. MacFaddin. 2000. Biochemical tests for identification of medical bacteria, 3rd ed. Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY NITRATE INDOLE 3. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
St. Louis, Mo.
Clostridium perfringens 13124 Good + 4. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
Clostridium bifermentans 17836 Good + American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Escherichia coli 25922 Good + +

272
 Infusion Broth

Availability Difco/BBL Nitrate A Reagent

Cat. No. 261197 Droppers, 0.5 mL Ctn. of 50
BBL Indole Nitrite Medium (Trypticase Nitrate Broth)

BAM Difco /BBL Nitrate B Reagent

Cat. No. 211299 Dehydrated 500 g Cat. No. 261198 Droppers, 0.5 mL Ctn. of 50
221655 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10*
Difco/BBL Nitrate C Reagent
Difco/BBL Indole Reagent Cat. No. 261207 Droppers, 0.5 mL Ctn. of 50
Cat. No. 261185 Droppers, 0.5 mL Ctn. of 50 *Store at 2-8C.

Infusion Broth
Intended Use Formula
Infusion Broth is a general purpose medium that supports the BBL Infusion Broth
growth of a wide variety of microorganisms. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Heart Muscle, Infusion from (solids) ........................... 2.0 g
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 13.0 g
Summary and Explanation Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Infusion Broth is one of many liquid media that support Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
the growth of fastidious as well as nonfastidious microbial *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

species. It may be used in the conventional manner for a

Directions for Preparation from
variety of purposes. Blood or serum may be added aseptically
after the medium is sterilized.
Dehydrated Product
1. Dissolve 25 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
With the addition of 65 g/L of sodium chloride, the medium 2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
can be used to differentiate enterococci from other strepto- 3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
cocci. The enterococci grow in the presence of the high salt stable, typical control cultures.
content, while pyogenic, viridans and lactic streptococci are
unable to grow. Procedure
Inoculate and incubate the medium as appropriate for the
Principles of the Procedure specimen or the known or unknown organism being cultured.1,2
Infusion Broth consists of heart muscle infusion, casein pep-
tone and yeast extract that are sources of organic nitrogen, Expected Results
carbon, sulfur, vitamins and trace substances. Sodium chlo- Growth in the tubes is indicated by the presence of turbidity
ride provides osmotic equilibrium. compared to an uninoculated control.
H
User Quality Control
If growth appears, cultures should be examined by a Gram
stain and subcultured onto appropriate media; e.g., a BBL
-
Identify Specifications Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood and/or Chocolate K
BBL Infusion Broth II Agar, LEMB Agar or MacConkey II Agar plates. If anaerobes
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogenous, free of extraneous are suspected, subcultures should be incubated anaerobically,
material. as in BBL GasPak or BBL GasPak EZ anaerobic systems,
Solution: 2.5% solution, soluble in purified or an alternative anaerobic system.
water. Solution is light to medium,
yellow to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear
References
1. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
to slightly hazy. Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Reaction of 2.5% 2. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2

Cultural Response Availability

BBL Infusion Broth
BBL Infusion Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Cat. No. 211305 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
35 2C under appropriate atmospheric conditions for 7 days.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Bacteroides fragilis 25285 103 Growth
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103 Growth
Micrococcus luteus 9341 103 Growth
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 103 Growth
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 103 Growth
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 103 Growth

273
Section III
H-K Inhibitory Mold Agar

Inhibitory Mold Agar

Inhibitory Mold Agar with Gentamicin
Intended Use Formula
Inhibitory Mold Agar, which contains chloramphenicol, is a BBL Inhibitory Mold Agar
moderately selective medium used for the isolation of pathogenic Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 3.0 g
fungi. BBL prepared plates of Inhibitory Mold Agar and Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 2.0 g
Inhibitory Mold Agar with Gentamicin are deep filled to Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
reduce the effects of drying during prolonged incubation. Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Starch ......................................................................... 2.0 g
Dextrin ....................................................................... 1.0 g
Summary and Explanation Chloramphenicol .................................................... 125.0 mg
Inhibitory Mold Agar was formulated by Ulrich as a general Sodium Phosphate ..................................................... 2.0 g
medium for the selective isolation and cultivation of the Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.8 g
Ferrous Sulfate ........................................................... 0.04 g
majority of pathogenic fungi.1 Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 0.04 g
Manganese Sulfate .................................................... 0.16 g
Principles of the Procedure Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
The nutritive properties of Inhibitory Mold Agar are provided
by the two peptones, derived from casein and animal tissue, Directions for Preparation from
and yeast extract, which is a rich source of vitamins. Dextrose,
Dehydrated Product
starch and dextrin are energy sources for the metabolism of
1. Suspend 36 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
fungi. Sodium chloride and the metallic salts provide essential
thoroughly.
ions and minerals. Chloramphenicol is a broad-spectrum
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
antibiotic that inhibits a wide range of gram-positive and
completely dissolve the powder.
gram-negative bacteria. Gentamicin, if present, inhibits gram-
3. Dispense in screw-capped test tubes or other suitable
negative microorganisms.
container. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

Candida albicans
User Quality Control ATCC 10231

Identity Specifications
BBL Inhibitory Mold Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material.
Solution: 3.6% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light to medium,
yellow to tan, slightly hazy to hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, slightly
hazy to hazy.
Reaction of 3.6%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL Inhibitory Mold Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
(undiluted or diluted as described below) and incubate at 25 2C for 7
days under appropriate atmospheric conditions.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Candida albicans 10231 Undiluted Good
Escherichia coli 25922 104-105 Partial to complete
inhibition
Trichophyton
mentagrophytes 9533 Undiluted Good

274
 Inositol Assay Medium

Procedure Limitation of the Procedure

Consult appropriate references for information about the pro- Some fungi may be inhibited by the antibiotics in Inhibitory
cessing and inoculation of specimens.2 Mold Agar and Inhibitory Mold Agar with Gentamicin.3
For isolation of fungi from potentially contaminated specimens,
References
a nonselective medium should be inoculated along with the 1. Ulrich. 1956. Abstr. M75, p. 87. Bacteriol. Proc. Soc. Am. Bacteriologists. 1956.
selective medium. Incubate the plates at 25-30C in an in- 2. Miller and Holmes. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
verted position (agar side up) with increased humidity. The 3. Ajello, Georg, Kaplan and Kaufmann. 1963. CDC laboratory manual for medical mycology. PHS
Publication No. 994, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
tubed slants also should be incubated at 25-30C. For isolation
of fungi causing systemic mycoses, two sets of media should be Availability
inoculated, with one set incubated at 25-30C and a duplicate BBL Inhibitory Mold Agar
set at 35 2C. BS10 CMPH MCM7
All cultures should be examined at least weekly for fungal Cat. No. 292846 Dehydrated 500 g
212254 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
growth and should be held for 4-6 weeks before being reported
297799 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 10*
as negative. 298191 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Ctn. of 100*
297276 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
Expected Results 297826 Transgrow-style Bottle Pkg. of 10*
297757 Transgrow-style Bottle Ctn. of 100*
Examine plates for fungal colonies exhibiting typical color and
morphology. Biochemical tests and serological procedures BBL Inhibitory Mold Agar with Gentamicin
should be performed to confirm findings. BS10 CMPH MCM7
Cat. No. 297800 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

Inositol Assay Medium

Intended Use User Quality Control
Inositol Assay Medium is used for determining inositol
concentration by the microbiological assay technique. Identity Specifications
Difco Inositol Assay Medium
Summary and Explanation Dehydrated Appearance: White to off-white, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
Vitamin assay media are prepared for use in the microbiological
Solution: 6.1% (single strength) solution,
assay of vitamins. Three types of media are used for this purpose: soluble in purified water upon boil-
1. Maintenance Media: For carrying the stock culture to ing. Solution is light amber, clear, may H
preserve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism
Prepared Appearance:
have a slight precipitate.
Light amber, clear, may have a slight
-
for its intended purpose;
2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for immediate
precipitate. K
Reaction of 6.1%
use; Solution at 25C: pH 5.2 0.2
3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the vitamin under
Cultural Response
test. They contain all the factors necessary for optimal
Difco Inositol Assay Medium
growth of the test organism except the single essential
Prepare the medium per label directions. The medium supports the
vitamin to be determined. growth of Saccharomyces cerevisiae ATCC 9080 when prepared in
single strength and supplemented with inositol. The medium should
Inositol Assay Medium, a modification of the formula described produce a standard curve using an inositol reference standard at 0.0 to
by Atkin et al.,1 is used in the microbiological assay of inositol 10.0 g per 10 mL. Incubate tubes with caps loosened at 25-30C
using Saccharomyces cerevisiae ATCC 9080 (Saccharomyces for 20-24 hours. Read the percent transmittance using a spectropho-
tometer at 660 nm.
uvarum) as the test organism.

Principles of the Procedure

Inositol Assay Medium is an inositol-free dehydrated medium
containing all other nutrients and vitamins essential for
the cultivation of S. cerevisiae ATCC 9080. The addition of
inositol in specified increasing concentrations gives a growth
response that can be measured turbidimetrically.

275
Section III
H-K Inositol Assay Medium, cont.

Formula sterile saline. Wash the cells three times with 10 mL sterile
Difco Inositol Assay Medium 0.85% saline. After the third wash, resuspend the cells in 10
Approximate Formula* Per Liter mL 0.85% saline. Dilute 1 mL of the cell suspension in 1000
Dextrose ................................................................. 100.0 g mL of sterile 0.85% saline. This diluted suspension is the
Potassium Citrate ..................................................... 10.0 g
Citric Acid .................................................................. 2.0 g inoculum. Use 1 drop of inoculum suspension to inoculate each
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.1 g assay flask.
Potassium Chloride .................................................... 0.85 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.25 g The concentrations of inositol required for the preparation
Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.25 g of the standard curve may be prepared by dissolving 200 mg
Manganese Sulfate .................................................. 50.0 mg inositol in 100 mL purified water. Mix thoroughly. Dilute
Ferric Chloride .......................................................... 50.0 mg
DL-Tryptophan ......................................................... 80.0 mg 1 mL of this solution with 999 mL purified water to make a
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.1 g final solution containing 2 g inositol per mL. Use 0.0, 0.5, 1,
L-Isoleucine ................................................................ 0.5 g 2, 3, 4 and 5 mL per flask. Prepare this stock solution fresh
L-Leucine .................................................................... 0.5 g
L-Lysine ...................................................................... 0.5 g daily.
L-Methionine .............................................................. 0.2 g
DL-Phenylalanine ........................................................ 0.2 g
It is essential that a standard curve be constructed each time
L-Tyrosine ................................................................... 0.2 g an assay is run. Autoclave and incubation conditions can
L-Asparagine .............................................................. 0.8 g impact the standard curve readings and cannot always be
DL-Aspartic Acid ........................................................ 0.2 g
DL-Serine ................................................................... 0.1 g
duplicated. The standard curve is obtained by using inositol at
Glycine ....................................................................... 0.2 g levels of 0.0, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 g per assay flask (10 mL).
DL-Threonine ............................................................. 0.4 g
L-Valine ...................................................................... 0.5 g Following inoculation, flasks are incubated at 25-30C for
L-Histidine .............................................................. 124.0 mg 20-24 hours. Place flasks in the refrigerator for 15-30 minutes
L-Proline ..................................................................... 0.2 g to stop growth. Growth is measured turbidimetrically using
DL-Alanine ................................................................. 0.4 g
L-Glutamic Acid ......................................................... 0.6 g any suitable spectrophotometer.
L-Arginine .................................................................. 0.48 g
Thiamine Hydrochloride ......................................... 500.0 g Expected Results
Biotin ....................................................................... 16.0 g
1. Prepare a standard concentration response curve by plotting
Calcium Pantothenate ................................................ 5.0 mg
Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ............................................ 1.0 mg the response readings against the amount of standard in
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. each tube, disk or cup.
2. Determine the amount of vitamin at each level of assay
Precautions solution by interpolation from the standard curve.
Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media 3. Calculate the concentration of vitamin in the sample from
or glassware in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely the average of these volumes. Use only those values that do
small amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give not vary more than 10% from the average. Use the results
erroneous results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from only if two-thirds of the values do not vary more than 10%.
detergents and other chemicals must be used. Glassware must
be heated to 250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic Limitations of the Procedure
residues that might be present. Take precautions to keep 1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium
sterilization and cooling conditions uniform throughout the must be grown and maintained on media recommended
assay. for this purpose.
2. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the assay
Directions for Preparation from procedure.
Dehydrated Product 3. The use of altered or deficient media may cause mutants
1. Suspend 12.2 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water. having different nutritional requirements that will not give
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to a satisfactory response.
completely dissolve the powder. 4. For successful results of these procedures, all conditions of
3. Dispense 5 mL amounts into tubes. the assay must be followed precisely.
4. Add standard or test samples.
5. Adjust tube volume to 10 mL. Reference
6. Autoclave at 121C for 5 minutes. 1. Atkin, Schultz, Williams and Frey. 1943. End. & Eng. Chem., Ann. Ed. 15:141.

Procedure Availability
Remove a loopful of culture from a stock culture slant of Difco Inositol Assay Medium
Cat. No. 212222 Dehydrated 100 g*
S. cerevisiae ATCC 9080 and suspend it in 10 mL sterile 0.85%
*Store at 2-8C.
saline. Centrifuge cells at moderate speed for 10 minutes.
Decant the supernatant and resuspend cells in 10 mL 0.85%

276
 KF Streptococcus Agar

Jordans Tartrate Agar

Intended Use Using a sterile inoculating needle, pick the center of a well-
Jordans Tartrate Agar is used as an aid in the identification of isolated colony from a young culture and inoculate the
members of the Enterobacteriaceae on the basis of tartrate medium by stabbing deeply into the column of medium.
utilization. Replace the cap loosely. Incubate the tubes at 35 2C for
24-48 hours in an aerobic atmosphere.
Summary and Explanation
Jordans Tartrate Agar was formulated by Jordan and Harmon Expected Results
for the detection of sodium tartrate fermentation, a test used The test is positive if the lower portion of the medium has
to differentiate Salmonella typhi (now S. choleraesuis subsp. turned yellow. If there is no change in the color of the
choleraesuis serotype Typhi) and S. schottmuelleri (now medium, the test is negative.
S. choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis serotype Paratyphi B).1
Edwards and Ewing later reported tartrate utilization useful Limitation of the Procedure
for the differentiation of monophasic and diphasic Arizona Tartrate utilization is an aid to identification and is not a
(now S. choleraesuis subsp. arizonae) cultures.2 confirmatory test. Complete identification should include
determination of Gram reaction, morphology, biochemical and
Jordans Tartrate Agar is particularly helpful in the differentia-
serological tests. Appropriate texts should be consulted for
tion of S. choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis serotype Paratyphi A,
additional information.3-5
which does not utilize tartrate, from other strains of salmonellae
most of which are capable of utilizing tartrate.3,4 References
1. Jordan and Harmon. 1928. J. Infect. Dis. 42:238.
Principles of the Procedure 2. Edwards and Ewing. 1955. Identification of Enterobacteriaceae. Burgess Publishing Company,
Minneapolis, Minn.
Utilization of the organic salt, sodium tartrate, may be used to 3. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science
Publishing Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
differentiate enteric bacilli. Tartrate fermentation acidifies the 4. Farmer. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiol-
ogy, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
medium and is indicated by the development of a yellow color 5. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriol-
ogy, 9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
in the lower portion of the tube. Phenol red is incorporated as
an indicator of acid production. Availability
BBL Jordans Tartrate Agar
Procedure USDA
Prior to inoculation of Jordans Tartrate Agar, the organism to Cat. No. 221889 Prepared Agar Deeps (K size tubes) Pkg. of 10*
be tested must have been previously isolated on some other *Store at 2-8C.
suitable solid medium. The use of a pure culture is essential to H
correct performance of the test. -
K
KF Streptococcus Agar
TTC Solution 1%
Intended Use color to cells and to colonies on agar or on membranes, thereby
KF Streptococcus Agar is used with TTC Solution 1% in facilitating the detection of growth.
isolating and enumerating fecal streptococci.
Principles of the Procedure
Summary and Explanation Peptone provides a source of nitrogen, amino acids and
Kenner et al. developed KF (Kenner Fecal) Streptococcal Agar carbon. Yeast extract is a source of trace elements, vitamins
with TTC for use in detecting streptococci in surface waters and amino acids. Maltose and lactose are fermentable carbo-
by direct plating or by the membrane filtration method.1 These hydrates and carbon sources. Sodium azide is a selective agent.
investigators compared the performance of their formulation Bromcresol purple is an indicator dye.
to other media used for enumerating fecal streptococci and TTC is used as a redox indicator in culture media. It is colorless
achieved greater recoveries with KF Streptococcal Agar. The in the oxidized form and is reduced to formazan, an insoluble
medium is recommended for use in determining counts of fe- red pigment, by actively growing microbial cells. The reduction
cal streptococci in water.2 of TCC is irreversible; it is not reoxidized by air once it is
reduced to the red formazan.3
TTC (2, 3, 5-Triphenyl Tetrazolium Chloride) in aqueous 1%
solution may be added to various agar and fluid media to lend
277
Section III
H-K KF Streptococcus Agar, cont.

Uninoculated Enterococcus faecalis

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 19433

Identity Specifications
Difco KF Streptococcus Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light greenish-beige, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
Solution: 7.64% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
purple, very slightly to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light purple, very slightly to slightly
opalescent.
Reaction of 7.64%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
Difco TTC (powder)

Appearance: White to slightly yellow, free-flowing,

homogeneous.
Solution: 1% solution, soluble in purified water.
Solution is colorless to very slight amber,
clear.

Cultural Response
Difco KF Streptococcus Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the pour plate
technique and incubate at 35 2C for 46-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY COLONY COLOR
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 3102-103 Marked to complete inhibition
Enterococcus faecalis 19433 30-300 Good Red to pink centers
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 30-300 Good Red to pink centers
Escherichia coli 25922 3102-103 Marked to complete inhibition

In this medium, the addition of 1% triphenyltetrazolium chlo- 3. Aseptically add 10 mL TTC Solution 1% to the medium
ride (TTC) causes enterococci to develop a deep red color. cooled to 50C. Mix well.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Formula stable, typical control cultures.
Difco KF Streptococcus Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Procedure
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g
Pour Plate Technique
Yeast Extract ............................................................ 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g 1. Prepare appropriate dilutions of the test material.
Sodium Glycerophosphate ....................................... 10.0 g 2. Place the selected volume of sample in a Petri dish.
Maltose .................................................................... 20.0 g
3. Pour 15 mL of the prepared medium at 45-50C into each
Lactose ....................................................................... 1.0 g
Sodium Azide ............................................................. 0.4 g plate.
Bromcresol Purple .................................................... 15.0 mg 4. Thoroughly mix the medium and sample to uniformly
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g disperse the organisms.
TTC Solution 1% 5. Allow the agar to solidify.
Formula Per 100 mL
6. Incubate plates in the inverted position at 35 2C for
2, 3, 5-Triphenyltetratolium Chloride ......................... 1.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
46-48 hours.
Membrane Filter Procedure
Directions for Preparation from 1. Filter a suitable volume of sample through a sterile membrane.
Dehydrated Product 2. Place the inoculated membrane filter on the solidified agar
1. Suspend 76.4 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix in the Petri dish, inoculum side up.
thoroughly. 3. Incubate the plates, inverted, at 35 2C for 46-48 hours.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder. Expected Results
2. Heat an additional 5 minutes. Avoid overheating which Enterococci will appear as red or pink colonies. The use of a
could decrease the productivity of the medium. DO NOT stereoscopic microscope with 15 magnification can aid in
AUTOCLAVE. counting colonies.

278
 KF Streptococcus Broth

Limitations of the Procedure Availability

1. Many strains of S. bovis and S. equinus are inhibited by Difco KF Streptococcus Agar
azide. COMPF EPA
2. Overheating may lower the pH, causing a decrease in the Cat. No. 249610 Dehydrated 500 g
productivity of the medium. Mexico
Cat. No. 222050 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
References Difco TTC Solution 1%

1. Kenner, Clark and Kabler. 1961. Appl. Microbiol. 9:15.

2. Bordner and Winter. 1978. Microbiological methods for monitoring the environment, water and
Cat. No. 231121 Tube 30 mL
wastes. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, Ohio. 264310 Bottle 25 g
3. Kelly and Fulton. 1953. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 23:512.
*Store at 2-8C.

KF Streptococcus Broth
Intended Use The addition of 1% TTC (2,3,5-Triphenyl Tetrazolium Chlo-
KF Streptococcus Broth is used for isolating fecal streptococci. ride), in the membrane filter procedure, causes the enterococci
to have a deep red color as a result of tetrazolium reduction to
Summary and Explanation an acid azo dye.
Kenner et al. developed KF (Kenner Fecal) Streptococcal Broth
for the detection and enumeration of enterococci in waters.1,2 Formula
They found that this formulation was superior to other liquid Difco KF Streptococcus Broth
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
media in the recovery of enterococci in Most Probable Num- Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g
ber (MPN) test systems. The medium is not specific for pre- Yeast Extract ............................................................ 10.0 g
sumptive identification of group D streptococci. Other tests Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Sodium Glycerophosphate ....................................... 10.0 g
are required.2-4
Maltose .................................................................... 20.0 g
Lactose ....................................................................... 1.0 g
Principles of the Procedure Sodium Azide ............................................................. 0.4 g
Peptone provides a source of nitrogen, amino acids and carbon. Bromcresol Purple .................................................... 15.0 mg
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Yeast extract is a source of trace elements, vitamins and amino
acids. Maltose and lactose are the fermentable carbohydrates
and carbon sources. Sodium azide is the selective agent.
Bromcresol purple is the indicator dye.

User Quality Control

Enterococcus faecalis
ATCC 29212 H
Identity Specifications
-
Difco KF Streptococcus Broth K
Dehydrated Appearance: Light greenish-beige, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
Solution: 5.64% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is reddish
to light purple, clear to very slightly
opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Purple, clear to very slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 5.64%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco KF Streptococcus Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Supplement with TTC Solution
1%. Using the membrane filter technique, inoculate and incubate at
35 1C in an atmosphere saturated with water vapor for 46-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY COLONY COLOR
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 3102-103 Inhibition
Enterococcus faecalis 19433 30-200 Good Red
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 30-200 Good Red
Escherichia coli 25922 3102-103 Inhibition

279
Section III
H-K KF Streptococcus Broth, cont.

Directions for Preparation from Membrane Filter Procedure

Dehydrated Product 1. Place a sterile absorbent pad in each sterile Petri dish.
MPN Procedure 2. Saturate the pads with the sterile medium containing TTC.
1. For an inoculum of 1 mL or less, suspend 56.4 g of the 3. Place an inoculated membrane filter, inoculated side up, on
powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix thoroughly. the saturated pad.
For an inoculum of 10 mL, suspend 84.6 g of the powder 4. Incubate at 35 1C in an atmosphere saturated with water
in 1 L of purified water. Mix thoroughly. vapor for 46-48 hours.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
pletely dissolve the powder.
Expected Results
MPN Procedure
3. For an inoculum of 1 mL or less, dispense 10 mL amounts
into culture tubes. MPN tubes positive for enterococci are turbid with growth
For an inoculum of 10 mL, dispense 20 mL amounts into that appears yellow in color and does not produce foaming.
culture tubes. When foaming occurs, confirmation for enterococci should be
4. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes. made by Gram staining.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Membrane Filter Procedure
stable, typical control cultures. All red or pink colonies visible with 15 magnification are
Membrane Filter Procedure counted as enterococci colonies.
1. Suspend 56.4 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Limitations of the Procedure
thoroughly.
1. Many strains of S. bovis and S. equinus are inhibited by
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
azide.
pletely dissolve the powder.
2. Overheating may lower the pH, resulting in a decrease in
3. Dispense in 100 mL amounts into flasks and autoclave at
productivity of the medium.
121C for 10 minutes.
4. Cool to 60C and add 1 mL TTC Solution 1% per 100 mL
References
of medium. 1. Kenner, Clark and Kabler. 1960. Am. J. Public Health 50:1553.
2. Kenner, Clark and Kabler. 1961. Appl. Microbiol. 9:15.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
stable, typical control cultures. vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
4. Facklam and Moody. 1970. Appl. Microbiol. 20:245.

Procedure Availability
MPN Procedure Difco KF Streptococcus Broth
1. Inoculate tubes of the KF Streptococcus Broth with the appropri- Cat. No. 212226 Dehydrated 500 g
ate amount of inoculum. Difco TTC Solution 1%

2. Incubate tubes at 35 1C, with loosened caps, for 46-48 Cat. No. 231121 Tube 30 mL
hours. 264310 Bottle 25 g

KL Virulence Agar
KL Virulence Enrichment KL Antitoxin Strips
Intended Use duction. Incorporating Proteose Peptone into the test medium
KL (Klebs-Loeffler) Virulence Agar is used with KL Virulence assured consistent results. The authors used rabbit, sheep and
Enrichment, Tellurite Solution 1% and KL Antitoxin Strips in horse serum as enrichments, finding human serum to be
differentiating virulent (toxigenic) from nonvirulent strains of unsatisfactory. To overcome irregularities encountered in
Corynebacterium diphtheriae. previous formulations, Hermann, Moore and Parsons3 refined
the medium used for the in vitro KL Virulence Test, simplify-
Summary and Explanation ing the basal medium and developing a nonserous enrichment.
Elek1 was the first to describe the agar plate diffusion tech- The medium and enrichment described by these authors have
nique for demonstrating the in vitro toxigenicity (virulence) of been standardized for use in the KL Virulence Test.
Corynebacterium diphtheriae. King, Frobisher and Parsons2 KL Virulence Agar and KL Virulence Enrichment are prepared
expanded on Eleks technique and, by using a carefully according to the formulation of Hermann, Moore and
standardized medium, obtained results in agreement with ani- Parsons.3
mal inoculation tests. These authors demonstrated that
Proteose Peptone possessed properties essential for toxin pro-

280
 KL Virulence Agar, cont.

Principles of the Procedure Formulae

Peptone provides the carbon and nitrogen sources required Difco KL Virulence Agar
for good growth of a wide variety of organisms and for toxin Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Proteose Peptone ..................................................... 20.0 g
production. Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.5 g
of the medium. Agar is incorporated as the solidifying agent. Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
KL Virulence Enrichment provides a source of nonserous en- Difco KL Virulence Enrichment
richment. Casamino acids are derived from acid-hydrolyzed Approximate Formula* Per 100 mL
Casamino Acids ......................................................... 1.0 g
casein that has low sodium chloride and iron concentrations. Glycerol ...................................................................... 1.0 mL
The low iron concentration is beneficial because iron is known Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 1.0 mL
to prevent the production of diphtheria toxin when present in BBL Taxo KL Antitoxin Strips
more than minute amounts. Glycerol (glycerin) contains no KL Antitoxin Strips are 1 7 cm filter paper strips containing
heavy metals and is used by bacteria as a source of carbon. antitoxin to diphtheria toxin.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Polysorbate 80 improves growth of certain strains of Coryne-
bacterium diphtheriae. Directions for Preparation from
Toxin produced by bacteria and diffused into the medium is Dehydrated Product
detected by precipitation with the antitoxin present on the KL 1. Suspend 37.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Antitoxin Strip. Tellurite Solution 1% (1% potassium tellurite thoroughly.
solution) inhibits gram-negative and most gram-positive bac- 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
teria except Corynebacterium spp., Streptococcus mitis, S. pletely dissolve the powder.
salivarius, enterococci and possibly Staphylococcus 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
epidermidis. This permits direct testing of mixed primary cul- 4. Cool in a water bath to 55-60C.
tures. 5. Aseptically dispense 10 mL of KL Virulence Agar into a
Petri dish containing 2 mL KL Virulence Enrichment and
0.5 mL Tellurite Solution 1%. Mix thoroughly.

Corynebacterium diphtheriae
User Quality Control ATCC 8028

Identity Specifications
Difco KL Virulence Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige with some small dark specks,
free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.75% solution, soluble in purified wa- H
ter upon boiling. Solution is light to me- -
dium amber, very slightly to slightly opal-
escent with precipitate. K
Prepared Appearance: Light medium amber, slightly opalescent,
may have a slight precipitate.
Reaction of 3.75%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.8 0.2
Difco KL Virulence Enrichment

Appearance: Colorless to very light amber, clear liquid.

BBL Taxo KL Antitoxin Strips
Appearance: White, filter paper strips, 1 x 7 cm.

Cultural Response
Difco KL Virulence Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions, including KL Virulence Enrichment,
Tellurite Solution 1% and one KL Antitoxin Strip per plate. Inoculate with a
single line streak across the plate perpendicular to the strip and incubate at
35 2C under CO2 for up to 72 hours. Precipitate lines are graphically enhanced for
ORGANISM ATCC REACTION demonstration purposes (see Expected Results).

Bacillus subtilis 6633

Corynebacterium diphtheriae biotype gravis 8028 +
Corynebacterium diphtheriae biotype intermedius 8032 +
Corynebacterium diphtheriae biotype mitis 8024 +
Staphylococcus aureus 25923
+ = positive, line of precipitation at 45 angle to the strip
= negative, no line of precipitation

281
Section III
H-K KL Virulence Agar, cont.

6. Submerge a KL antitoxin strip or equivalent beneath the Limitations of the Procedure

agar prior to solidification. 1. False-positive reactions may be seen after 24 hours as weak
7. Test samples of the finished product for performance using bands near the antitoxin strip. These can be recognized when
stable, typical control cultures. compared with the positive control.7
2. Corynebacterium ulcerans and C. pseudotuberculosis may
Procedure also produce lines of toxin-antitoxin.8
Process the specimen according to accepted practices.4 Inocu-
late the complete medium by streaking a loopful of a 24-hour References
culture in a single line across the plate perpendicular to (right 1.
2.
Elek. 1948. Br. Med. J. 1:493.
King, Frobisher and Parsons. 1949. Am. J. Public Health 39:1314.
angle to) the antitoxin strip. (Do not touch the actual strip 3. Hermann, Moore and Parsons. 1958. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 29:181.
4. Funke and Bernard. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
itself.) As many as eight cultures may be tested on a single microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
plate.5 Place test isolates about 1 cm apart. Also inoculate a vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
6. Washington. 1981. Laboratory procedures in clinical microbiology. Springer-Verlag, New York,
toxigenic (positive control) and a nontoxigenic (negative con- N.Y.
trol) C. diphtheriae strain approximately 1 cm on either side 7. Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Truant (ed.). 1980. Manual of clinical microbiology, 3rd ed. Ameri-
can Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
of the test isolates.5 Incubate the inverted plates under CO2 at 8. Branson. 1972. Methods in clinical bacteriology. Charles C. Thomas, Springfield, Ill.

37C for 72 hours. Examine at 24-, 48- and 72-hour intervals.

Availability
Expected Results Difco KL Virulence Agar
Toxigenic (virulent) cultures of C. diphtheriae will show fine Cat. No. 212192 Dehydrated 500 g

lines of precipitation at approximately 45 angles from the Difco KL Virulence Enrichment

culture streak. This line forms where toxin (from the bacteria) Cat. No. 298610 Tube 12 20 mL*
combines with antitoxin from the strip. Primary precipitin lines BBL Taxo KL Antitoxin Strips

form an arc of identity with the precipitin line produced by an Cat. No. 231740 Vial 12 strips*
adjacent positive control strain.6 Nontoxigenic strains of C. BBL Tellurite Solution 1%
diphtheriae will show no lines of precipitation. Cat. No. 211917 Tube 20 mL
*Store at 2-8C.

Kligler Iron Agar

Intended Use red pH indicator in response to the acid produced during the
Kligler Iron Agar is used for the differentiation of members of fermentation of these sugars. The dextrose concentration is
the Enterobacteriaceae on the basis of their ability to ferment only 10% of the lactose concentration. The combination of
dextrose and lactose and to liberate sulfides. ferric ammonium citrate and sodium thiosulfate enables the
detection of hydrogen sulfide production.
Summary and Explanation Lactose nonfermenters (e.g., Salmonella and Shigella) initially
In 1911, Russell described a new double sugar tube medium produce a yellow slant due to acid produced by the fermenta-
for the isolation of typhoid bacilli from urine and feces.1 Six tion of the small amount of dextrose. When the dextrose sup-
years later, Kligler developed a simple lead acetate medium for ply is exhausted in the aerobic environment of the slant, the
the differentiation of the typhoid-paratyphoid group.2 Subse- reaction reverts to alkaline (red slant) due to oxidation of the
quently, Kligler evaluated culture media used in the isolation acids. The reversion does not occur in the anaerobic environ-
and differentiation of typhoid, dysentery and allied bacilli and ment in the butt, which remains acid (yellow butt). Lactose
endorsed Russells medium.3 Bailey and Lacey substituted phe- fermenters produce yellow slants and butts because enough
nol red for the Andrade indicator previously used as a pH acid is produced in the slant to maintain an acid pH under
indicator.4 aerobic conditions. Organisms incapable of fermenting either
The current formulation of Kligler Iron Agar combines fea- carbohydrate produce red slants and butts.
tures of Kliglers lead acetate medium with those of Russells Hydrogen sulfide production is evidenced by a black color either
double sugar agar. throughout the butt, or in a ring formation near the top of
the butt. Gas production (aerogenic reaction) is detected as
Principles of the Procedure individual bubbles or by splitting or displacement of the agar.
Kligler Iron Agar, in addition to casein and meat peptones,
contains lactose and dextrose which enable the differentiation
of species of enteric bacilli due to color changes of the phenol

282
 Kligler Iron Agar, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
BBL Kligler Iron Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material.
Solution: 5.2% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium to
dark, orange to red, with or without a
tint of brown, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, orange to red, with or
without a tint of brown, clear to slightly
hazy.
Reaction of 5.2%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2

Cultural Response
Uninoculated Echerichia coli Morganella Salmonella
BBL Kligler Iron Agar Tube ATCC morganii typhimurium
Prepare the medium per label directions. Stab inoculate with fresh cultures 25922 ATCC 8019 ATCC 14028
and incubate at 35 2C for 24 hours.

ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY SLANT BUTT H 2S

Escherichia coli 25922 Good Acid Acid with gas
Morganella morganii 8019 Good Alkaline Acid with
or without gas
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 Good Alkaline Alkaline
without gas
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhi 19430 Good Alkaline Acid without gas +
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 Good Alkaline Acid with gas +
Shigella flexneri 12022 Good Alkaline Acid without gas

Formula Procedure
BBL Kligler Iron Agar To inoculate, carefully touch the center of an isolated colony
Approximate Formula* Per Liter on an enteric plated medium with a cool, sterile needle, stab H
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................. 10.0 g
into the medium in the butt of the tube, and then streak back -
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g
and forth along the surface of the slant. Several colonies from
each primary plate should be studied separately, since mixed
K
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g infections may occur. Incubate tubes with loosened caps for
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.5 g
Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................... 0.5 g 18-24 hours at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere.
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Phenol Red ............................................................... 25.0 mg To enhance the alkaline condition in the slant, free exchange
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. of air must be permitted through the use of a loose closure. If
the tube is tightly closed, an acid reaction (caused solely by
Directions for Preparation from dextrose fermentation) will also involve the slant.
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 52 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix Expected Results
thoroughly. After incubation, record the reaction in the slant and butt,
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- noting gas formation and hydrogen sulfide production.
pletely dissolve the powder.
Typical reactions produced by members of the Enterobacteri-
3. Dispense and autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
aceae (majority of the species in the particular genus) are
4. Cool in a slanted position such that deep butts are formed.
presented in the following table.5
For best results, the medium should be used on the date of
preparation or melted and resolidified before use.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

283
Section III
H-K Kligler Iron Agar, cont.

SLANT BUTT GAS H 2S

References
Citrobacter Alkaline Acid + + or 1. Russell. 1911. J. Med. Res. 25:217.
Edwardsiella Alkaline Acid + + 2. Kligler. 1917. Am. J. Public Health. 7:1041.
3. Kligler. 1918. J. Exp. Med. 28:319.
Escherichia coli Acid Acid + 4. Bailey and Lacy. 1927. J. Bacteriol. 13:183.
5. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of the Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Sci-
Enterobacter Acid* Acid + ence Publishing Co., Inc. New York, N.Y.
Morganella Alkaline Acid
Proteus Alkaline or Acid Acid + + Availability
Providencia Alkaline Acid
BBL Kligler Iron Agar
Salmonella Alkaline Acid + +
Shigella Alkaline Acid BAM CMPH COMPF ISO MCM7

*May revert to alkaline even though lactose fermented (E. aerogenes).

Cat. No. 211317 Dehydrated 500 g
220896 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
220897 Prepared Slants Ctn. of 100*
*Store at 2-8C.

Koser Citrate Medium

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Koser Citrate Medium is used for differentiating Escherichia Koser Citrate Medium is prepared with chemically pure salts
coli from Enterobacter aerogenes based on citrate utilization. and tested to determine that no sources of carbon (other than
sodium citrate) or nitrogen (other than ammonium salts) are
Summary and Explanation present. Bacteria that are able to use citrate as their carbon
In 1923, the work of Koser demonstrated that coli-aerogenes source will grow in the medium and cause turbidity.
bacteria could be differentiated by their use of certain salts of
organic acids.1 Koser found that the sodium salt of citric acid Formula
(sodium citrate) is used as a source of carbon by E. aerogenes Difco Koser Citrate Medium
and not by E. coli. Biochemical identification schemes for iden- Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Sodium Ammonium Phosphate .................................. 1.5 g
tifying E. coli frequently include Koser citrate. Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
E. coli is an important member of the coliform group of bacte- Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.2 g
Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 3.0 g
ria. The coliforms are described as aerobic and facultatively *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
anaerobic gram-negative non-sporeforming bacilli that ferment
lactose and form acid and gas at 35C within 48 hours. Proce- Directions for Preparation from
dures to detect, enumerate and presumptively identify coliforms Dehydrated Product
are used in testing foods and dairy products.2-5 Presumptive 1. Dissolve 5.7 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
identification is confirmed by performing biochemical tests that 2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
specifically identify E. coli. 3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
User Quality Control
Procedure
Identity Specifications 1. Transfer growth from a single colony or a loopful of liquid
Difco Koser Citrate Medium
suspension and inoculate the broth medium.
Dehydrated Appearance: White, free-flowing, homogeneous.
2. Incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours.
Solution: 0.57% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is colorless, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Colorless, clear.
Expected Results
Positive: ................ Turbidity
Reaction of 0.57% Negative: .............. Clear, no turbidity
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2

Cultural Response References

1. Koser. 1923. J. Bacteriol. 8:493.
Difco Koser Citrate Medium

2. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the microbiological examination of dairy products,
16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 3. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
35 2C for 18-24 hours. national, Gaithersburg, Md.
4. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC Interna-
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY tional, Gaithersburg, Md.
5. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 103 Good 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Escherichia coli 25922 103 Marked to complete
inhibition Availability
Difco Koser Citrate Medium
AOAC BAM COMPF SMD
Cat. No. 215100 Dehydrated 500 g
284
 LB Agar, Lennox

LB Agar, Lennox LB Broth, Lennox

Intended Use medium may be aseptically supplemented with glucose to
LB Agar, Lennox and LB Broth, Lennox are used for main- prepare the complete medium described by Lennox.
taining and cultivating recombinant strains of Escherichia coli.
Principles of the Procedure
Summary and Explanation Peptone provides nitrogen and carbon. Vitamins (including
LB Agar, Lennox and LB Broth, Lennox are nutritionally rich B vitamins) and certain trace elements are provided by yeast
extract. Sodium ions for transport and osmotic balance are
media developed by Lennox for the growth and maintenance of
provided by sodium chloride. Agar is the solidifying agent in
pure cultures of recombinant strains of E. coli.1 These strains
LB Agar, Lennox.
are generally derived from E. coli K12, which are deficient in B
vitamin production. This strain of E. coli has been further modi- Formulae
fied through specific mutation to create an auxotrophic strain Difco LB Agar, Lennox
that is not capable of growth on nutritionally deficient media. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Tryptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
LB Agar, Lennox provides all the nutritional requirements of these Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
organisms. LB Agar, Lennox contains half the sodium chloride level Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
of the Miller formulation of LB Agar.2 This allows the Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
researcher to select the optimal salt concentration for a specific strain. Difco LB Broth, Lennox
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
LB Broth, Lennox contains ten times the sodium chloride level *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
of Luria Broth Base, Miller and one half of that found in
LB Broth, Miller.3 This allows the researcher to select the Directions for Preparation from
optimal salt concentration for a specific strain. If desired, the Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend/dissolve the powder in 1 L of purified water:
User Quality Control Difco LB Agar, Lennox 35 g;
Difco LB Broth, Lennox 20 g.
Identity Specifications Mix thoroughly.
Difco LB Agar, Lennox
2. Heat the agar medium with frequent agitation and boil for
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
1 minute to completely dissolve the powder.
Solution: 3.5% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
amber, clear to slightly opalescent. 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, very slightly to slightly stable, typical control cultures.
opalescent.
Reaction of 3.5% Procedure
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
Consult appropriate references for recommended test proce-
Difco LB Broth, Lennox dures.1-4
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified water. Expected Results
Solution is light amber, clear to very
After sufficient incubation, the agar medium should show
Prepared Appearance:
slightly opalescent.
Very light amber, clear to very slightly growth as evidenced by formation of colonies and/or a L
opalescent. confluent lawn of growth. In the broth medium, growth is
Reaction of 2.0% evident by the appearance of turbidity.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2

Cultural Response
References
1. Lennox. 1955.Virology 1:190.
Difco LB Agar, Lennox or LB Broth, Lennox
2. Ausubel, Brent, Kingston, Moore, Seidman, Smith and Struhl (ed.). 1994. Current protocols in
molecular biology, vol. 1. Green Publishing Associates, Inc., Brooklyn, N.Y.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 3. Miller. 1972. Experiments in molecular genetics. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor,
35 2C for 18-24 hours. N.Y.
4. Sambrook, Fritsch and Maniatis. 1989. Molecular cloning: a laboratory manual, 2nd ed. Cold
RECOVERY RECOVERY Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU AGAR BROTH
Escherichia coli 23724 (C600) 102-3102 Good N/A Availability
Escherichia coli 33694 (HB101) 102-3102 Good Good Difco LB Agar, Lennox
Escherichia coli 33849 (DH1) 102-3102 Good N/A Cat. No. 240110 Dehydrated 500 g
Escherichia coli 39403 (JM103) 102-3102 Good Good
Difco LB Broth, Lennox

Escherichia coli 47014 (JM107) 102-3102 Good N/A
Cat. No. 240230 Dehydrated 500 g
Escherichia coli 53868 (DH5) 102-3102 Good Good
240210 Dehydrated 2 kg
240220 Dehydrated 10 kg
285
 Section III
L LB Agar, Miller

LB Agar, Miller LB Broth, Miller

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
LB Agar, Miller and LB Broth, Miller (Luria-Bertani) are Peptone provides nitrogen and carbon. Vitamins (including
used for maintaining and propagating Escherichia coli in B vitamins) and certain trace elements are provided by yeast
molecular microbiology procedures. extract. Sodium ions for transport and osmotic balance are
provided by sodium chloride. Agar is the solidifying agent in
Summary and Explanation LB Agar, Miller.
LB Agar, Miller and LB Broth, Miller are based on LB Medium
as described by Miller for the growth and maintenance of E. coli Formulae
strains used in molecular microbiology procedures.1-3 These are Difco LB Agar, Miller
nutritionally rich media designed for growth of pure cultures Approximate Formula* Per Liter
of recombinant strains. E. coli grows more rapidly because Tryptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
they provide the cells with amino acids, nucleotide precursors, Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 10.0 g
vitamins and other metabolites that the microorganism would Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
otherwise have to synthesize.4 Difco LB Broth, Miller
LB Broth, Miller contains twenty times the sodium chloride level Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
of Luria Broth Base, Miller and twice the level found in LB Broth, *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Lennox.3,5,6 This allows the researcher to select the optimal salt

concentration for a specific strain in LB Agar, Miller. Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product
User Quality Control 1. Suspend/dissolve the powder in 1 L of purified water:
Difco LB Agar, Miller 40 g;
Identity Specifications Difco LB Broth, Miller 25 g.
Difco LB Agar, Miller Mix thoroughly.
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
2. Heat the agar medium with frequent agitation and boil for
Solution: 4.0% solution, soluble in purified water
1 minute to completely dissolve the powder.
upon boiling. Solution is light amber,
very slightly to slightly opalescent. 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Prepared Appearance: Very light amber, slightly opalescent. 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Reaction of 4.0% stable, typical control cultures.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
Difco LB Broth, Miller Procedure
Dehydrated Appearance: Off-white to beige, free-flowing, homo- Consult appropriate references for recommended test pro-
geneous. cedures.3-5
Solution: 2.5% solution; soluble in purified water.
Solution is light amber, clear to very
slightly opalescent.
Expected Results
Growth should be evident on the agar medium by the
Prepared Appearance: Very light amber, clear to very slightly
opalescent. appearance of colonies and/or a confluent lawn on the
Reaction of 2.5%
surface of the medium. In the broth medium, growth is
Medium at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 evident by the appearance of turbidity.

Cultural Response References

1. Luria and Burrous. 1955. J. Bacteriol. 74:461.
Difco LB Agar, Miller or LB Broth, Miller

2. Luria, Adams and Ting. 1960. Virology 12:348.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 3. Miller. 1972. Experiments in molecular genetics. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor,
N.Y.
35 2C for 18-24 hours. 4. Ausubel, Brent, Kingston, Moore, Seidman, Smith and Struhl (ed.). 1994. Current protocols in
molecular biology, vol. 1. Greene Publishing Associates, Inc., Brooklyn, N.Y.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY 5. Sambrook, Fritsch and Maniatis. 1989. Molecular cloning: a laboratory manual, 2nd. ed. Cold
Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.
Escherichia coli 33526 (K802) 102-103 Good 6. Lennox. 1955. Virology 1:190.

Availability
Difco LB Agar, Miller
Cat. No. 244520 Dehydrated 500 g
244510 Dehydrated 2 kg
Difco LB Broth, Miller
Cat. No. 244620 Dehydrated 500 g
244610 Dehydrated 2 kg

286
 LBS Agar

LBS Agar LBS Broth

Intended Use Directions for Preparation from
LBS (Lactobacillus Selection) Agar is used for the selective Dehydrated Product
isolation and enumeration of lactobacilli. 1. Suspend/dissolve the powder in 1 L of purified water:
LBS Broth is a selective medium for the isolation and cultiva- BBL LBS Agar 84 g (for growth of L. acidophilus, add
tion of lactobacilli. 84 g to 200 mL of filtered tomato juice plus 800 mL of
purified water);
Summary and Explanation BBL LBS Broth 70 g.
Rogosa et al. developed LBS Agar as a selective medium for Mix thoroughly.
the isolation and enumeration of oral and fecal lactobacilli.1,2 2. Add 1.32 mL of glacial acetic acid (ACS).
They reported that the medium was more selective for lactoba- 3. Heat the agar medium with frequent agitation and boil for
cilli than the tomato juice media previously employed and that 1 minute to completely dissolve the powder.
the growth of molds, streptococci and spreading organisms was 4. Cool and use without autoclaving. If storage is necessary,
markedly reduced. autoclave at 118C for 15 minutes.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
LBS Agar is used for selective recovery of lactobacilli from the stable, typical control cultures.
oral cavity, especially tooth surfaces, intestinal flora,3,4 the
vagina,5 meats and other foods 6 and dairy products.7 Sabine
User Quality Control
and Vaselekos reported that incorporation of tomato juice
resulted in a twofold increase in the number of L. acidophilus Identity Specifications
organisms recovered from feces.8 BBL LBS Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, slightly clumped and moist, homo-
LBS Broth is the fluid form of LBS Agar.1 This broth medium geneous, free of extraneous material.
may be used as a preliminary enrichment broth for detection Solution: 8.4% solution, soluble in purified water
of lactic acid organisms. Subcultures should be made to LBS upon boiling. Solution (with acetic acid)
Agar or to suitable general-purpose plating media. is light to medium, yellow to tan, mod-
erately hazy to hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, mod-
Principles of the Procedure erately hazy
Peptone, yeast extract and dextrose supply nitrogenous and Reaction of 8.4%
carbonaceous compounds for the support of bacterial growth. Solution at 25C: pH 5.5 0.2
Polysorbate 80 is a source of growth factors, since it supplies BBL LBS Broth
fatty acids required for the metabolism of lactobacilli. The Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
ammonium citrate and sodium acetate inhibit the growth of material.
many organisms, including streptococci, molds and members Solution: 7.0% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution (with acetic acid)
of the oral microbial flora other than lactobacilli, and restrict
is light to medium, yellow to tan,
swarming on the agar medium.9 The low pH, due to the slightly hazy to clear.
addition of acetic acid, also is inhibitory for other bacterial Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan,
flora and favors the isolation of lactobacilli. slightly hazy to clear.
Reaction of 7.0%
pH 5.4 0.2
L
Formulae Solution at 25C:
BBL LBS Agar
Cultural Response
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g BBL LBS Agar or LBS Broth
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 6.0 g and incubate at 35 2C with 3-5% CO2 for 42-48 hours (up to 4
Ammonium Citrate .................................................... 2.0 g days, if necessary).
Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 1.0 g
Sodium Acetate Hydrate .......................................... 25.0 g Lactobacillus acidophilus 4356 Undiluted Good
Magnesium Sulfate ................................................ 575.0 mg Lactobacillus plantarum 8014 Undiluted Good
Manganese Sulfate .................................................... 0.12 g Proteus vulgaris 8427 104-105 Partial to complete
Ferrous Sulfate ......................................................... 34.0 mg inhibition
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
BBL LBS Broth
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

287
 Section III
L LBS Agar, cont.

Procedure medium, is not favorable for keeping cultures in their nor-

LBS Agar can be used as a plating medium for counting lactoba- mal state. Colonies required for further study should be
cilli in various types of specimens. Alternatively, it can be used subcultured as soon as possible.
for direct recovery of organisms using the streak-inoculation 2. This medium is not suitable for the isolation of dairy lacto-
technique. Incubate plates at 35 2C in an aerobic or anaerobic bacilli such as L. lactis and L. bulgaricus due to its content
atmosphere supplemented with carbon dioxide. of salts.9
Inoculate the broth with the test specimen and incubate tubes References
with loosened caps at 35 2C in an aerobic or anaerobic 1. Rogosa, Mitchell and Wiseman. 1951. J. Bacteriol. 62:132.
2. Rogosa, Mitchell and Wiseman. 1951. J. Dental Res. 30:682.
atmosphere supplemented with carbon dioxide. 3. Wiseman, Sarles, Benton, Harper and Elvehjem. 1956. J. Bacteriol. 79:723.
4. Ellis and Sarles. 1958. J. Bacteriol. 75:272.
5. Rogosa and Sharpe. 1960. J. Gen. Microbiol. 23:197.
Expected Results 6. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
On the agar medium, lactobacilli appear as large, white colonies. 7. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Growth should be subcultured to appropriate agar or broth 8. Sabine and Vaselekos. 1965. Nature 206:960.
media for use in biochemical identification procedures. 9. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.

After growth has been obtained in LBS Broth, as evidenced by

the appearance of turbidity in the tube, subculture aliquots Availability
to appropriate plating media (e.g., LBS Agar) in order to BBL LBS Agar
COMPF SMD
obtain isolates in pure culture for subsequent use in identifica-
Cat. No. 211327 Dehydrated 500 g*
tion procedures.
BBL LBS Broth

Cat. No. 211331 Dehydrated 500 g*

Limitations of the Procedure
*Store at 2-8C
1. LBS Agar should not be used for the maintenance of lacto-
bacilli, since it is not sterile and, being a highly selective

LPM Agar Base

Listeria Selective Supplement
Intended Use The most common contaminating bacteria found in food sources
LPM Agar Base is used with Listeria Selective Supplement for potentially containing Listeria are: streptococci, especially the
isolating and cultivating Listeria monocytogenes. enterococci, micrococci and Bacillus species, Escherichia coli,
Pseudomonas aeruginosa and Proteus vulgaris.8
Summary and Explanation Identification of Listeria is based on successful isolation of the
First described in 1926 by Murray, Webb and Swann,1
organism, biochemical characterization and serological con-
Listeria monocytogenes is a widespread problem in public
firmation.
health and the food industries. This organism can cause
human illness and death, particularly in immunocompromised LPM Agar, a modification of McBride Listeria Agar, was
individuals and pregnant women.2 The first reported food-borne developed by Lee and McClain9 to recover low numbers of
outbreak of listeriosis was in 1985,3 and since then, microbio- L. monocytogenes from samples with profusely mixed micro-
logical and epidemiological evidence from both sporadic and flora. Its use is recommended when testing food and dairy
epidemic cases of listeriosis has shown that the principal route of samples and clinical specimens for Listeria.
transmission is via the consumption of foodstuffs contaminated
with L. monocytogenes.4 Principles of the Procedure
In LPM Agar, peptones and beef extract provide nitrogen,
Implicated vehicles of transmission include turkey frankfurters,5
vitamins and minerals. Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic
coleslaw, pasteurized milk, Mexican-style cheese, pat, and
balance of the medium. Glycine anhydride is used for improved
pickled pork tongue. The organism has been isolated from
recovery of Listeria. Lithium chloride, in an increased concentra-
commercial dairy and other food processing plants, and is
tion, and phenylethanol are incorporated to aid in suppression
ubiquitous in nature, being present in a wide range of unproc-
of both gram-positive and gram-negative contaminants. Agar
essed foods and in soil, sewage, silage and river water.6
is the solidifying agent. Listeria Selective Supplement is added
Listeria species grow over a pH range of 4.4-9.6, and survive to LPM Agar Base after autoclaving to inhibit staphylococci,
in food products with pH levels outside these parameters.7 bacilli and Proteus species.
Listeria spp. are microaerophilic, gram-positive, asporogenous,
non-encapsulated, non-branching, regular, short, motile rods.
Motility is most pronounced at 20C.
288
 LPM Agar Base, cont.

Uninoculated Listeria monocytogenes

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 19114

Identity Specifications
Difco LPM Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, homogeneous, may have a
tendency to clump.
Solution: 5.05% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light to
medium amber, very slightly to slightly
opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal-
escent.
Reaction of 5.05%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
BBL Listeria Selective Supplement

Lyophilized Appearance: White to pale yellow and dry.

Reconstituted Appearance: Clear to pale yellow to light tan yellow;
clear.

Cultural Response
Difco LPM Agar Base
Prepare the medium per label directions with Listeria Selective Supple-
ment. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU GROWTH W/MOXALACTAM
Bacillus subtilis 6633 103 Partial inhibition
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-2103 Marked to complete inhibition
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Marked to complete inhibition
Listeria monocytogenes 19114 102-103 Good (at 40-48 hours)
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103 Marked to complete inhibition

Formulae BBL Listeria Selective Supplement

Difco LPM Agar Base

1. Reconstitute each lyophilized vial by aseptically adding 2.0
Approximate Formula* Per Liter mL of sterile purified water with a sterile syringe and needle.
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g 2. Invert the vial several times to assure complete solution.
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 5.0 g
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g Procedure
Lithium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g Clinical specimens obtained from nonsterile sites should be
Glycine Anhydride .................................................... 10.0 g
Phenylethanol ............................................................ 2.5 g selectively enriched for Listeria spp. before being plated. Refer
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g to appropriate references for the procedure to use with clinical
BBL Listeria Selective Supplement specimens.10 For a procedure for isolating Listeria from milk,
Formula Per 1 mL Vial milk products and food samples, refer to an appropriate
Moxalactam ............................................................... 0.01 g reference.7,11,12
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
L
Directions for Preparation from Expected Results
Dehydrated Product Observe colonies under oblique transmitted light. Listeria colonies
Difco LPM Agar Base
display a gray to blue color with a ground glass appearance.
1. Suspend 50.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Cool medium to 45-50C.
5. Aseptically add 2.0 mL of the reconstituted Listeria Selective
Supplement to 1 L of medium. Mix well.
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

289
 Section III
L LPM Agar Base, cont.

References Availability
1. Murray, Webb and Swann. 1926. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 29:407.
2. Monk, Clavero, Beuchat, Doyle and Brackett. 1994. J. Food Prot. 57:969.
Difco LPM Agar Base
3. Wehr. 1987. J. Assoc. Off. Anal. Chem. 70:769. AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF SMD
4. Bremer and Osborne. 1995. J. Food Prot. 58:604.
5. Grau and Vanderlinde. 1992. J. Food Prot. 55:4. Cat. No. 222120 Dehydrated 500 g*
6. Patel, Hwang, Beuchat, Doyle and Brackett. 1995. J. Food Prot. 58:244. 222110 Dehydrated 2 kg*
7. Ryser and Donnelly. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiological
examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. BBL Listeria Selective Supplement
8. Kramer and Jones. 1969. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 32:381.
9. Lee and McClain. 1986. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 52:1215. AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF SMD
10. Bille, Rocourt and Swaminathan. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual Cat. No. 212402 Vial 10 2 mL*
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
11. Flowers, Andrews, Donnelly and Koenig. 1993. In Marshall (ed.), Standard methods for the exami- *Store at 2-8C.
nation of dairy products, 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
12. Hitchins. 1995. In FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC International, Gaithersburg,
Md.

Lactobacilli Agar AOAC Lactobacilli Broth AOAC

Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Lactobacilli Agar AOAC is used for maintaining stock cultures Vitamin assay media are prepared for use in the microbiological
for microbiological assays of vitamins and amino acids. assay of vitamins. Three types of media are used for this purpose:
Lactobacilli Broth AOAC is used for preparing inocula for 1. Maintenance Media: For maintaining the stock culture to
microbiological assays of vitamins and amino acids. preserve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism
for its intended purpose;
User Quality Control 2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for immediate
use;
Identity Specifications 3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the vitamin under
Difco Lactobacilli Agar AOAC
test. They contain all the factors necessary for optimal
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
growth of the test organism except the single essential
Solution: 4.8% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling 2-3 minutes. Solution is vitamin to be determined.
medium amber, opalescent when hot,
clearer when cooled to 45-50C.
Lactobacilli Agar AOAC1 and Lactobacilli Broth AOAC1
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, clear.
are prepared according to the formula recommended by Loy.2
Reaction of 4.8%
Lactobacilli Agar AOAC is used for maintaining stock
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2 cultures. Lactobacilli Broth AOAC is used to prepare inocula
Difco Lactobacilli Broth AOAC
of Lactobacillus delbruecki subsp. lactis (Lactobacillus
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, homogeneous. leichmannii) ATCC 7830, Enterococcus hirae ATCC 8043,
Solution: 3.8% solution, soluble in purified water Lactobacillus plantarum ATCC 8014, Lactobacillus (casei)
upon boiling 2-3 minutes. Solution is rhamnosus ATCC 7469 and other organisms used in the
medium amber, opalescent when hot,
microbiological assay of B vitamins.
clear after cooling, may have a slight
precipitate. Lactobacillus species grow poorly on nonselective culture media
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, clear, may have a and require special nutrients. Mickle and Breed3 reported
slight precipitate.
the use of tomato juice in culture media for lactobacilli. Kulp
Reaction of 3.8%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2 and White,4 while investigating the use of tomato juice on
bacterial development, found that growth of Lactobacillus
Cultural Response acidophilus was enhanced.
Difco Lactobacilli Agar AOAC or Lactobacilli
Broth AOAC Principles of the Procedure
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate Lactobacilli Agar
Peptonized milk and yeast extract provide the nitrogen, amino
AOAC by stabbing the medium with test organisms; incubate at 35 2C
for 18-48 hours. Inoculate Lactobacilli Broth AOAC with test organisms acids and vitamins sources in Lactobacilli Agar AOAC and
and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. Lactobacilli Broth AOAC. Dextrose is a carbon source to
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY facilitate organism growth. Tomato juice creates the proper
Enterococcus hirae 8043 2
10 -10 3
Good acidic environment. Monopotassium phosphate is a buffering
Lactobacillus rhamnosus 7469 102-103 Good agent. Polysorbate 80 acts as an emulsifier. Agar is the solidify-
Lactobacillus delbrueckii ing agent in Lactobacilli Agar AOAC.
subsp. lactis 7830 102-103 Good
Lactobacillus plantarum 8014 102-103 Good

290
 Lactobacilli MRS Agar

Formulae Inoculum
Difco Lactobacilli Agar AOAC
1. Subculture from a 16-24 hour stock culture into 10 mL
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Lactobacilli Broth AOAC.
Peptonized Milk ....................................................... 15.0 g 2. Incubate at 35-37C for 16-24 hours or as specified in
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
specific assay procedures.
Tomato Juice (from 100 mL) ....................................... 5.0 g 3. Centrifuge the culture and decant the supernatant.
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 2.0 g 4. Resuspend cells in 10 mL of sterile 0.9% NaCl solution or
Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 1.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 10.0 g
sterile single-strength basal assay medium.
5. Wash the cells by centrifuging and decanting the supernatant
Difco Lactobacilli Broth AOAC
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
two additional times unless otherwise indicated.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 6. Dilute the washed suspension 1:100 with sterile 0.9% NaCl
or sterile single-strength basal assay medium or as indicated.
Precautions Where applicable, inoculum concentration should be ad-
Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media or justed according to limits specified in the references.1,5
glassware used for microbiological assay procedures. Extremely
For a complete discussion on vitamin assay methodology refer
small amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give
to appropriate procedures outlined in the references.1,5
erroneous results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from
detergents and other chemical must be used. Glassware must
Expected Results
be heated to 250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic
Refer to appropriate references for vitamin assay results.1,5
residues that might be present. Take precautions to keep
sterilization and cooling conditions uniform. Limitations of the Procedure
1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium
Directions for Preparation from
must be cultured and maintained on media recommended
Dehydrated Product for that purpose.
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water: 2. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the vitamin
Difco Lactobacilli Agar AOAC 48 g; assay procedure.
Difco Lactobacilli Broth AOAC 38 g. 3. The use of altered or deficient media may result in mutants
Mix thoroughly. with different nutritional requirements that will not give a
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 2-3 minutes to satisfactory response.
completely dissolve the powder. 4. For a successful completion of these procedures, all condi-
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. tions of the assay must be adhered to meticulously.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures. References
1. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. 2. AOAC
Procedure International, Gaithersburg, Md.
2. Loy. 1958. J. Assoc. Off. Agri. Chem. 4:61.
Stock Cultures 3. Mickle and Breed. 1925. Technical Bulletin 110, N.Y. State Agriculture Ex. Station, Geneva, N.Y.
4. Kulp and White. 1932. Science 76:17.
1. Prepare stock cultures in one or more tubes of sterile 5. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The na-
tional formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
Lactobacilli Agar AOAC.
2. Inoculate the medium using an inoculating needle. Availability
3. Incubate at 30-37C for 18-24 hours.
4. Store at 2-8C.
Difco Lactobacilli Agar AOAC
AOAC
L
5. Transfer at weekly or twice monthly intervals. Cat. No. 290010 Dehydrated 100 g*
Difco Lactobacilli Broth AOAC

AOAC
Cat. No. 290110 Dehydrated 100 g*
*Store at 2-8C.

Lactobacilli MRS Agar Lactobacilli MRS Broth

Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Lactobacilli MRS Agar and Lactobacilli MRS Broth are Lactobacilli MRS Agar and Lactobacilli MRS Broth are based
recommended for use in the isolation, enumeration and culti- on the formulations of deMan, Rogosa and Sharpe.1 These
vation of Lactobacillus species. media were shown by the authors to support luxuriant growth
of all lactobacilli from oral, fecal, dairy and other sources.

291
 Section III
L Lactobacilli MRS Agar, cont.

Principles of the Procedure Directions for Preparation from

Lactobacilli MRS Agar and Lactobacilli MRS Broth contain Dehydrated Product
peptone and dextrose. These ingredients supply nitrogen, carbon 1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water.
and other elements necessary for growth. Polysorbate 80, acetate, Difco Lactobacilli MRS Agar 70 g;
magnesium and manganese provide growth factors for culturing Difco Lactobacilli MRS Broth 55 g.
a variety of lactobacilli. The above ingredients may inhibit the Mix thoroughly.
growth of some organisms other than lactobacilli. 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder.
Formulae 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Difco Lactobacilli MRS Agar 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Approximate Formula* Per Liter stable, typical control cultures.
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g
Beef Extract .............................................................. 10.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g Procedure
Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g Direct Counts
Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 1.0 g
Ammonium Citrate .................................................... 2.0 g 1. To obtain direct counts of lactobacilli, pour 15-20 mL
Sodium Acetate ......................................................... 5.0 g sterile, molten (45-50C) Lactobacilli MRS Agar into sterile
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.1 g Petri dishes containing 1 mL volumes of diluted test sample.
Manganese Sulfate .................................................... 0.05 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.0 g 2. Distribute the inoculum throughout the medium by rotating
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g the plate in one direction and then in the reverse direction.
Difco Lactobacilli MRS Broth 3. Allow the medium to solidify on a flat surface for 5-10
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar. minutes.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Lactobacillus delbrueckii subsp. lactis

User Quality Control ATCC 7830

Identity Specifications
Difco Lactobacilli MRS Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 7.0% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium amber,
clear to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, very slightly to slightly
opalescent.
Reaction of 7.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5 0.2
Difco Lactobacilli MRS Broth

Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, homogeneous, appears moist.

Solution: 5.5% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium amber,
clear to very slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, clear to very slightly
opalescent.
Reaction of 5.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Lactobacilli MRS Agar or Lactobacilli MRS Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate Lactobacilli MRS Agar
and incubate in a 5% CO2 atmosphere at 35 2C for 24- 72 hours.
Inoculate Lactobacilli MRS Broth and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24
hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Lactobacillus delbrueckii
subsp. lactis 7830 102-103 Good
Lactobacillus fermentum 9338 102-103 Good
Lactobacillus johnsonii 11506 102-103 Good

292
 Lactose Broth

4. Alternatively, plates of Lactobacilli MRS Agar can be used Limitation of the Procedure
for direct recovery of organisms using the streak inocula- Organisms other than lactobacilli may grow in these media.
tion technique. Isolates must be confirmed as lactobacilli by appropriate
5. Incubate agar plates at 35C for 3 days, or at 30C for 5 biochemical testing.
days, in an aerobic atmosphere supplemented with carbon
dioxide. References
1. deMan, Rogosa and Sharpe. 1960. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 23:130.
Broth Enrichment 2. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
1. Samples can be inoculated directly into Lactobacilli MRS 3. Downes and Ito(ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Broth.
2. Incubate broth tubes at 35C for 3 days, or at 30C for 5 Availability
days, in an aerobic atmosphere. Difco Lactobacilli MRS Agar
3. Subculture growth in broth tubes to appropriate solid media. COMPF SMD
Cat. No. 288210 Dehydrated 500 g*
Expected Results Difco Lactobacilli MRS Broth

Lactobacilli appear as large, white colonies embedded in or on COMPF SMD

Lactobacilli MRS Agar or as turbidity in Lactobacilli MRS Broth. Cat. No. 288130 Dehydrated 500 g*
Growth may be subcultured onto the appropriate media for use 288110 Dehydrated 2 kg*
288120 Dehydrated 10 kg*
in additional procedures. Refer to appropriate references for
*Store at 2-8C.
recommendations on the culture of Lactobacillus spp.2,3

Lactose Broth
Intended Use
This medium conforms with specifications of The United States
Pharmacopeia (USP).
Lactose Broth is used for detection of the presence of coliform
organisms, as a pre-enrichment broth for salmonellae and in
the study of lactose fermentation of bacteria in general.

Summary and Explanation

Lactose Broth was formulated in accordance with recommen-
dations of the American Public Health Association (APHA)
and the American Water Works Association for testing dairy
products and water for the presence of coliform organisms.1,2
This medium was, but no longer is, listed as an alternative
to Lauryl Sulfate Broth in the presumptive portion of the
Standard Total Coliform Multiple-Tube (MPN) Test for water
analysis provided that it had been demonstrated not to increase
the frequency of false-positives nor mask coliforms.3 It is one
L
Uninoculated Escherichia coli
of the recommended media in the Compendium of Methods for Tube ATCC 25922

the Microbiological Examination of Foods for pre-enrichment

when Salmonella organisms are suspected in foods.4 It is Formulae
included in the USP for use in the performance of Microbial Difco Lactose Broth
Limit Tests for Salmonella species and Escherichia coli.5 Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Principles of the Procedure Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Lactose ....................................................................... 5.0 g
The peptone and beef extract provide essential nutrients for
bacterial metabolism. Lactose provides a source of fermentable BBL Lactose Broth
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
carbohydrate for coliform organisms. Growth with the forma- Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
tion of gas is a presumptive test for coliforms. Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ....................................... 5.0 g
Lactose ....................................................................... 5.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

293
 Section III
L Lactose Broth, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Lactose Broth BBL Lactose Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige to light tan, free flowing, Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
homogeneous. material.
Solution: 1.3% solution, soluble in purified water Solution: 1.3% solution, soluble in purified
upon slight warming. Solution is light water. Solution is pale to light, tan to
amber, clear. yellow, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear. Prepared Appearance: Pale to light, tan to yellow, clear to
Reaction of 1.3% slightly hazy.
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2 Reaction of 1.3%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2
Cultural Response
Difco Lactose Broth Cultural Response
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at BBL Lactose Broth
35 2C for 18-48 hours. After incubation, add 1-2 drops of 1% Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
phenol red solution to observe acid production. 35 2C for 48 hours.
INOCULUM INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY ACID GAS ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY ACID GAS
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 30-300 Good + + Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 103-104 Good + +
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good + + Enterococcus faecalis 29212 104-105 Good +
Enterococcus faecalis 19433 30-300 Good + Escherichia coli 11775 103-104 Good + +
Salmonella choleraesuis Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good + +
subsp. choleraesuis Salmonella choleraesuis
serotype Typhi 6539 30-300 Good subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 13311 103-104 Good

Directions for Preparation from Turbidity of the medium accompanied by formation of gas in
Dehydrated Product any amount in the Durham tubes within 48 3 hours is a
1. Dissolve 13 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. positive presumptive test for the presence of coliforms in the
2. Dispense in test tubes containing inverted Durham tubes, sample. The result should be confirmed by additional standard
in 10 mL amounts for testing samples of 1 mL or less. For testing.
testing 10 mL quantities of samples, dissolve 26 g of the
powder in 1 L of purified water and distribute in 10 mL References
1. American Public Health Association. 1946. Standard methods for the examination of water and
amounts. The concentration of the medium should be sewage, 9th ed. APHA, New York, N.Y.
2. American Public Health Association. 1948. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products,
varied according to the size of the test samples. The 9th ed. APHA, New York, N.Y.
3. Rand, Greenberg and Taras (ed.). 1976. Standard methods for the examination of water and waste-
concentration of broth plus sample should approximate 1 water, 14th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
4. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
for proper performance. (In broth concentrations higher 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
that 2, a reduction in clarity may be noticed.) 5. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The na-
tional formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
3. Autoclave at 121C not exceeding 15 minutes.
4. After autoclaving, cool the broth as quickly as possible. Availability
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Difco Lactose Broth
stable, typical control cultures. AOAC BAM COMPF EP EPA SMD USP
Cat. No. 243000 Dehydrated 100 g
Procedure 211835 Dehydrated 500 g
241000 Dehydrated 2 kg
Refer to the official test procedures for the detection of 242000 Dehydrated 10 kg
coliforms in the compendia of methods for the microbiological 290701 Bottle, 90 mL (Wide Mouth) Pkg. of 10*
examination of foods and pharmaceutical articles.4,5 BBL Lactose Broth
AOAC BAM COMPF EP EPA SMD USP
Expected Results Cat. No. 211333 Dehydrated 500 g
After incubation at 35 2C for 24 2 hours, examine tubes 211334 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
212255 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
for turbidity and for gas production in the Durham tubes. If
*Store at 2-8C.
no gas has formed and been trapped in the inverted tube,
reincubate and reexamine after 48 3 hours.

294
 Lactose Peptone Broth

Lactose Peptone Broth

Intended Use Directions for Preparation from
Lactose Peptone Broth is used for the detection of coliform Dehydrated Product
organisms in water. 1. Suspend 35 g (single strength) or 105 g (triple strength) of
the powder, depending upon the test procedure, in 1 L of
Summary and Explanation purified water. Mix thoroughly.
Lactose Peptone Broth is based on the Lactose Peptone Broth 2. Warm slightly to completely dissolve the powder.
formula described in German Standard Methods and German 3. Dispense 50 mL into tubes or bottles containing a Durham tube.
Drinking Water Regulations.1 Lactose Peptone Broth is recom- 4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
mended as a nonselective broth enrichment and detection medium 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
for E. coli and other coliform bacteria present in water. Lactose stable, typical control cultures.
fermentation and gas production at 36 1C are used as the basis
for this presumptive coliform test. Procedure1
Direct Broth Method
Principles of the Procedure 1. Add 100 mL of sample to 50 mL of triple strength Lactose
Lactose Peptone Broth contains peptones, which provide the Peptone Broth.
carbon and nitrogen sources required for good growth of a 2. Incubate at 36 1C for 24-48 hours.
wide variety of organisms. Lactose is provided as a source of 3. Examine tubes or bottles for evidence of acid formation
fermentable carbohydrate. Sodium chloride is present in the and gas production.
medium to provide a suitable osmotic environment. Bromcresol Membrane Filtration Broth Method
purple is used as a colorimetric indicator to show the produc- 1. Filter 100 mL of sample through a sterile 0.45 micron mem-
tion of acid from the fermentation of lactose. brane filter.
2. Remove filter and place in 50 mL of single strength Lactose
Formula Peptone Broth.
Difco Lactose Peptone Broth 3. Incubate at 36 1C for 24-48 hours.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 4. Examine tubes or bottles for evidence of acid formation
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 17.0 g
Soy Peptone ............................................................... 3.0 g
and gas production.
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g Expected Results
Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 0.02 g Acid formation is demonstrated by a change in the color
*Adjusted and/or supplemented ad required to meet performance criteria.
of the medium from reddish-purple to yellow. Gas production
is demonstrated by the displacement of the medium from
User Quality Control the Durham tube. Production of both acid and gas is a pre-
Identity Specifications sumptive indication of the presence of coliform organisms.
Difco Lactose Peptone Broth Subculture presumptive positives onto Endo Agar and
Dehydrated Medium: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
MacConkey Agar. Incubate at 35 2C for 24 hours. Examine
plates for the presence of typical coliform colonies. Further
Solution: 3.5% (single strength) and 10.5%
(triple-strength) solution, soluble in biochemical testing is necessary to confirm the presence and L
purified water. Solution is dark reddish- identify coliforms. Consult appropriate references for further
purple, clear to slightly opalescent.
information on identification of coliforms.2,3
Prepared Appearance: Dark reddish-purple, clear to slightly
opalescent.
Limitation of the Procedure
Reaction of 10.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2 Detection of coliform bacteria in Lactose Peptone Broth using
this method is only a presumptive test.
Cultural Response
Difco Lactose Peptone Broth References
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 1. DIN Deutsches Institut fr Normung. 1991. e.V.: Deutsche Einheitsverfahren zur Wasser-, Abwasser-
und Schlammunter suchung: Mikrobiologische Verfahren (Gruppe k), Nachwels von Escherichia
35 2C for 40-48 hours. coli und coliformen Keimen (K6). Reference Method DIN 38411.
2. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU ACID GAS St. Louis, Mo.
3. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
Escherichia coli 25922 10-102 + + American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103
Availability
Difco Lactose Peptone Broth
Cat. No. 266520 Dehydrated 500 g
266510 Dehydrated 10 kg 295
 Section III
L Lauryl Tryptose Broth

Lauryl Tryptose Broth Lauryl Sulfate Broth

Intended Use potassium phosphates provide buffering capacity. Sodium
Lauryl Tryptose Broth and Lauryl Sulfate Broth, which are chloride maintains osmotic equilibrium.
also known as Lauryl Sulfate Tryptose (LST) Broth, are used Lactose provides a source of fermentable carbohydrate
for the detection of coliform organisms in materials of sanitary for coliform organisms. The fermentation of lactose with gas
importance. formation is a presumptive test for coliforms. Sodium lauryl
sulfate inhibits organisms other than coliforms.
Summary and Explanation
Mallmann and Darby developed this medium for the detection Formulae
of coliform organisms by American Public Health Association Difco Lauryl Tryptose Broth
(APHA) procedures.1 They incorporated sodium lauryl sulfate Approximate Formula* Per Liter
into the formulation since it proved to be selective but not Tryptose ................................................................... 20.0 g
inhibitory for coliforms. Lactose ....................................................................... 5.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.75 g
This medium is used for the detection of coliforms in foods 2 Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 2.75 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
and dairy products.3 It is now the medium of choice for use Sodium Lauryl Sulfate ................................................ 0.1 g
in the presumptive phase of the Standard Total Coliform BBL Lauryl Sulfate Broth
Multiple-Tube (MPN) Test for the microbiological examination Approximate Formula* Per Liter
of water.4 It is also listed in the Official Methods of Analysis of Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 20.0 g
AOAC International.5 Lactose ....................................................................... 5.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.75 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 2.75 g
Principles of the Procedure Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Peptone provides essential growth substances, such as nitrogen Sodium Lauryl Sulfate ................................................ 0.1 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
and carbon compounds, sulfur and trace ingredients. The

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Lauryl Tryptose Broth BBL Lauryl Sulfate Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
neous. ous material.
Solution: 3.56% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 3.56% solution, soluble in purified
water upon warming. Solution is light water. Solution is pale to light, tan to
to medium amber, clear to very slightly yellow, clear to slightly hazy.
opalescent. Prepared Appearance: Pale to light, tan to yellow, clear to
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear to very slightly hazy.
slightly opalescent. Reaction of 3.56%
Reaction of 3.56% Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2
Cultural Response
Cultural Response BBL Lauryl Sulfate Broth
Difco Lauryl Tryptose Broth Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 48 hours.
35 2C for 24 2 hours or longer, if necessary.
INOCULUM
INOCULUM ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY GAS
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY GAS Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 103-104 Good +
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 30-300 Good +* Enterococcus faecalis 29212 104-105 Partial to
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good + complete inhibition
Salmonella choleraesuis Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good +
subsp. choleraesuis Proteus mirabilis 12453 103-104 Good
serotype Typhimurium 14028 30-300 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 3102-103 Marked to
complete inhibition
*Gas production positive within 48 3 hours.

296
 Lauryl Tryptose Broth with MUG

Directions for Preparation from However, clarity is not important because only gas production
Dehydrated Product is significant.
Difco Lauryl Tryptose Broth
1. Suspend 35.6 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Procedure
Mix thoroughly. Refer to the official test procedures for the detection of
2. Warm slightly to completely dissolve the powder. coliforms in the compendia of methods for microbiological
3. Dispense required amounts into tubes containing inverted examination of foods, dairy products and waters.2-5
fermentation vials (see table).
4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool the broth as
Expected Results
After incubation of the tubes with loosened caps at 35 0.5C
quickly as possible.
for 24 hours, examine for turbidity and for gas production in
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
the Durham fermentation tubes. If no gas has formed and
stable, typical control cultures.
been trapped in the inverted tube, reincubate and reexamine
BBL Lauryl Sulfate Broth after 48 hours.2-5
1. Suspend 35.6 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
Turbidity of the medium accompanied by formation of gas in
2. Dispense in test tubes, containing inverted Durham tubes,
any amount in the Durham tubes within 48 hours is a positive
in 10 mL amounts for testing samples of 1 mL or less. For
presumptive test for the presence of coliforms in the sample.2-5
testing 10 mL quantities of samples, dissolve 71.2 g of the
The result should be confirmed by additional standard testing.
powder in 1 L of purified water and distribute in 10 mL
amounts. The concentration of the medium should be
References
varied according to the size of the test samples (see table). 1. Mallmann and Darby. 1941. Am. J. Public Health 31:127.
2. Downes and Ito. 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods. 4th
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. After autoclaving, cool ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
the broth as quickly as possible. 3. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
Public Health Association. Washington, D.C.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 4. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
stable, typical control cultures. 5. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International. 17th ed. AOAC Interna-
tional. Gaithersburg, Md.
Preparation of Lauryl Tryptose (Sulfate) Broth4
AMOUNT OF DEHYDRATED Availability
MEDIUM IN VOLUME OF MEDIUM
INOCULUM mL THE TUBE mL MEDIUM+INOCULUM mL REQUIRED g/L Difco Lauryl Tryptose Broth
AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF EPA ISO SMD SMWW USDA
1 10 or more 11 or more 35.6
Cat. No. 224140 Dehydrated 100 g
10 10 20 71.2
224150 Dehydrated 500 g
10 20 30 53.4 224120 Dehydrated 2 kg
20 10 30 106.8 224130 Dehydrated 10 kg
100 50 150 106.8
BBL Lauryl Sulfate Broth
100 35 135 137.1
AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF EPA ISO SMD SMWW USDA
100 20 120 213.6
Cat. No. 211338 Dehydrated 500 g
NOTE: Refrigerated broth generally becomes cloudy or forms 211339 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
294369 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
precipitates but clears upon warming to room temperature.

Lauryl Tryptose Broth with MUG L

Lauryl Sulfate Broth with MUG
Intended Use material of sanitary importance. These procedures require the
Lauryl Tryptose Broth with MUG and Lauryl Sulfate Broth incubation of test media for up to 7 days.
with MUG, which are also known as Lauryl Sulfate Tryptose The presence of the fluorogenic compound, MUG (4-
Broth with MUG (LST-MUG), are used for the detection of methylumbelliferyl--D-glucuronide), in this medium permits
Escherichia coli in water, food and dairy samples by a the rapid detection of E. coli when the medium is observed for
fluorogenic procedure. fluorescence using a long-wave UV light source, and further con-
firmation is not required.1,2 MUG detects anaerogenic strains
Summary and Explanation which may not be detected in the conventional procedure.1
E. coli is used as an indicator organism of unsanitary condi-
tions. A number of selective media are recommended for use Feng and Hartman, using a MUG-containing medium in
in enrichment, presumptive identification and confirmatory microtitration plates, reported -glucuronidase activity in 96%
procedures for demonstrating the presence of coliforms in of E. coli, 100% of enterotoxigenic E. coli, 17% of Salmonella

297
 Section III
L Lauryl Tryptose with MUG, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Lauryl Tryptose Broth with MUG BBL Lauryl Sulfate Broth with MUG
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free flowing, homoge- Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
neous. ous material.
Solution: 3.57% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 3.57% solution, soluble in purified
water upon warming. Solution is light water. Solution is pale to light, tan to
to medium amber, clear to very slightly yellow, clear to slightly hazy.
opalescent. Prepared Appearance: Pale to light, tan to yellow, clear to
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear to very slightly hazy.
slightly opalescent. Reaction of 3.57%
Reaction of 3.57% Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2
Cultural Response
Cultural Response BBL Lauryl Sulfate Broth with MUG
Difco Lauryl Tryptose Broth with MUG Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 48 hours.
35 2C for 24 2 hours or longer, if necessary.
INOCULUM FLUO-
INOCULUM FLUO- ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY GAS RESCENCE
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY GAS RESCENCE Enterobacter
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 103-104 Good +
aerogenes 13048 30-100 Good +* Enterococcus faecalis 29212 104-105 Partial to
Escherichia coli 25922 30-100 Good + + complete inhibition
Salmonella choleraesuis Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good + +
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 30-100 Good
Staphylococcus
aureus 25923 3102-103 Marked
to complete
inhibition
*Gas production positive within 48 3 hours.

spp., and 40% of Shigella spp., while all other genera tested to yield a fluorescent end product, 4-methylumbelliferone.1,2
were negative; most reactions occurred within 4 hours, but some Development of fluorescence permits the detection of E. coli
weakly -glucuronidase-positive strains required overnight in pure or mixed cultures within 4-24 hours following
incubation.1 In the presence of large numbers of Proteus inoculation and incubation of the medium.
vulgaris, which may suppress gas production by E. coli, fluo-
rescence due to E. coli was detected within 15 hours.1 Formulae
Difco Lauryl Tryptose Broth with MUG
In a comparison, with conventional methods, Robison reported Approximate Formula* Per Liter
94.8% agreement, a false-positive rate of 4.8%, attributable Tryptose ................................................................... 20.0 g
to the presence of streptococci in the samples, and no false- Lactose ....................................................................... 5.0 g
negatives.2 Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.75 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 2.75 g
These media are included in the compendia of methods for the Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Sodium Lauryl Sulfate ................................................ 0.1 g
detection and enumeration of coliform organisms in food 3 MUG (4-methylumbelliferyl--D-glucuronide) ............ 0.05 g
and dairy 4 products and in the Official Methods of Analysis BBL Lauryl Sulfate Broth with MUG
of AOAC International.5 Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 20.0 g
Principles of the Procedure Lactose ....................................................................... 5.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.75 g
Lactose is a source of energy for organisms. Peptone provides Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 2.75 g
additional nutrients. The phosphate compounds provide Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
buffering capacity. Sodium lauryl sulfate is inhibitory to many Sodium Lauryl Sulfate ................................................ 0.1 g
organisms but not for coliforms. 4-Methylumbelliferyl--D-glucuronide ....................... 0.05 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
The substrate 4-methylumbelliferyl--D-glucuronide is hydro-
lyzed by an enzyme, -glucuronidase, possessed by most
E. coli and a few strains of Salmonella, Shigella and Yersinia,

298
 Lecithin Lactose Agar

Directions for Preparation from Procedure

Dehydrated Product Follow standard methods for the test being performed.3-5
Difco Lauryl Tryptose Broth with MUG Observe the medium periodically during the incubation
1. Suspend 35.7 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water and period for the development of fluorescence, using a long-wave
warm slightly to dissolve completely. UV light source (approximately 366 nm) as well as for charac-
2. Dispense into test tubes containing inverted fermentation teristic growth and/or gas production.
vials.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Expected Results
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using The presence of E. coli is detected by the appearance of fluo-
stable, typical control cultures. rescence throughout the tube.

BBL Lauryl Sulfate Broth with MUG References

1. Dissolve 35.7 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. 1. Feng and Hartman. 1982. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 43:1320.
2. Robison. 1984. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 48:285.
2. Dispense in test tubes, containing inverted Durham tubes, 3. Downes and Ito. 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods, 4th
ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
in 10 mL amounts for testing samples of 1 mL or less. For 4. Marshall (ed.) 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
testing 10 mL quantities of samples, dissolve 71.4 g of the Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
5. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC Interna-
powder in 1 L of purified water and distribute in 10 mL tional, Gaithersburg, Md.

amounts. The concentration of the medium should be

varied according to the size of the test samples. Availability
3. Autoclave at 121C, preferably for 12 minutes, but not Difco Lauryl Tryptose Broth with MUG
AOAC BAM COMPF SMD SMWW
exceeding 15 minutes. After autoclaving, cool the broth as Cat. No. 211740 Dehydrated 100 g
quickly as possible. 211744 Dehydrated 500 g
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using BBL Lauryl Sulfate Broth with MUG
stable, typical control cultures. AOAC BAM COMPF SMD SMWW
Cat. No. 298076 Dehydrated 500 g
NOTE: Refrigerated broth generally becomes cloudy or forms
precipitates but clears upon warming to room temperature.
However, clarity is not important because only gas production
is significant.

Lecithin Lactose Agar

Intended Use added.4 This medium continues to be an important one for
Lecithin Lactose Agar is recommended for the isolation and visualizing and characterizing the histotoxic clostridia.
differentiation of histotoxic clostridia from clinical specimens.1
It is particularly useful in differentiating Clostridium perfringens, Principles of the Procedure
C. sordellii, C. novyi, C. septicum and C. histolyticum. Lecithin Lactose Agar provides differentiation of clostridia
by the demonstration of lecithinase production and lactose
Summary and Explanation fermentation. The medium is rendered selective by the addition
Culture media containing egg yolks were useful in isolating, of neomycin and sodium azide. Gram-negative and aerobic L
cultivating and identifying species of histotoxic clostridia. gram-positive rods are inhibited. Growth of gram-positive cocci
In 1948, McClung and Toabe reported on the use of egg yolk is suppressed.
medium for this purpose.1 Willis and Hobbs added milk and On this medium, the production of a zone of opalescence
lactose to the egg yolk in a formulation designed to group surrounding colonies indicates lecithinase production. A yellow
clostridia on the basis of production of lecithinase, hydrolysis color surrounding colonies indicates lactose fermentation
of casein and lactose fermentation.2 Neomycin sulfate was due to the effect of the lowered pH on the bromcresol purple
included in their formulation in order to make it a selective indicator.
medium.
Willis, in response to problems in the obtaining and processing Procedure
of antibiotic-free eggs, developed an egg-free medium in which As soon as possible after receipt in the laboratory, inoculate
purified lecithin was substituted for the egg yolk.3 In order to the specimen onto a reduced Lecithin Lactose Agar plate and
further refine the growth-promoting and selective properties, streak for isolation. Since some anaerobes may be inhibited
Ellner and ODonnell developed the formulation, designated as due to the selective nature of the medium, it is advisable to
Lecithin Lactose Agar, in which a decreased concentration of include a nonselective medium such as CDC Anaerobe 5%
neomycin was employed and to which sodium azide was Sheep Blood Agar.
299
 Section III
L Lecithin Lactose Agar, cont.

LECITHINASE LACTOSE
Media should be reduced prior to inoculation by placing ORGANISM PRODUCTION FERMENTATION
under anaerobic conditions for 6 to 24 hours prior to use.5 An C. perfringens + +
efficient and easy way to obtain suitable anaerobic conditions C. sordellii +
is through the use of BBL GasPak or BBL GasPak EZ C. novyi +
anaerobic systems or an alternative anaerobic system. C. septicum +
C. histolyticum
Incubate immediately under anaerobic conditions or place in
a holding jar flushed with oxygen-free gas(es) until sufficient Additional testing may be performed to differentiate the above
plates are accumulated (but no longer than 3 hours).6 Incuba- species.7,8
tion should be at 35 2C for at least 48 hours. Regardless of
anaerobic system used, it is important to include an indicator
References
1. McClung and Toabe. 1948. J. Bacteriol. 53:139.
of anaerobiosis such as a GasPak anaerobic indicator. 2. Willis and Hobbs. 1959. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 77:511.
3. Willis. 1960. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 80:379.
4. Ellner and ODonnell. 1971. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 56:197.
Expected Results 5. Allen, Siders and Marler. 1985. Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of clinical
microbiology, 4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
6. Martin. 1971. Appl. Microbiol. 22:1168.
Plates may be examined after a minimum of 48 hours incuba- 7. Summanen, Baron, Citron, Strong, Wexler and Finegold. 1993. Wadsworth anaerobic bacteriology
tion under anaerobic conditions. manual, 5th ed. Star Publishing Co., Belmont, Calif.
8. Allen, Emery and Siders. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
On Lecithin Lactose Agar the production of a zone of opalescence
around colonies indicates lecithinase production; a yellow color Availability
around colonies indicates lactose fermentation. Typical reactions BBL Lecithin Lactose Agar
are listed in the following table. Cat. No. 221858 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

Legionella Selective Agar

Legionella Selective Agar DGVP
Intended Use bromthymol blue.6 Glycine, vancomycin and polymixin B are
These media are used in qualitative procedures for isolation of included as selective agents.7
Legionella species from clinical and nonclinical specimens.
Principles of the Procedure
Legionella Selective Agar DGVP (dye, glycine, vancomycin,
These media consist of a base medium (BCYE) supplemented
polymixin B) is used for the isolation and differentiation of
with antibiotics or dyes. Antibiotics improve the recovery of
Legionella species from clinical specimens and environmental
Legionella species by inhibiting the growth of contaminating
samples.
organisms. Dyes facilitate differentiation and identification of
Legionella species.
Summary and Explanation
Charcoal Yeast Extract (CYE) Agar was developed by Feely et The base medium contains yeast extract to supply the nutrients
al. in 1979 as a modification of an existing medium for necessary to support bacterial growth. L-cysteine HCL, ferric
Legionella isolation, F-G Agar.1,2 They replaced the starch in pyrophosphate and alpha-ketoglutarate are incorporated to
the F-G agar with activated charcoal and substituted yeast satisfy the specific nutritional requirements of Legionella
extract for casein hydrolysate, resulting in better recovery of species. The activated charcoal decomposes hydrogen peroxide,
L. pneumophila. In 1980, Pasculle reported that CYE Agar a toxic metabolic product, and may also collect carbon dioxide
could be improved by buffering the medium with ACES Buffer.3 and modify surface tension. The addition of the buffer helps
A year later, Edelstein further increased the sensitivity of the maintain the proper pH for optimal growth of Legionella species.
medium by adding alpha-ketoglutarate.4 BCYE Agar is based Bromcresol purple and bromthymol blue are included for differ-
on Edelsteins modified formulation. entiation of Legionella species based on colony morphology and
Legionella Selective Agar was developed by BD Diagnostic color.6 Glycine, vancomycin, and polymixin B are included to
Systems for isolation of Legionella species from materials con- provide moderate inhibition of competing flora and, therefore,
taining mixed flora. Consisting of BCYE Agar supplemented enhance to recovery of Legionella species.7
with the antimicrobics vancomycin, colistin and anisomycin,
it provides improved inhibition of contaminating bacteria Procedure
without significantly inhibiting Legionella species.5 Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
specimens. Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar-
Legionella Selective Agar DGVP is a further modification of
side up) at 35C for a minimum of 3 days. Growth is usually
BCYE Agar incorporating the dyes, bromcresol purple and
visible within 3-days, but may take up to 2 weeks to appear.

300
 Leptospira Medium EMJH

4. Edelstein. 1981. J. Clin. Microbiol. 14:298.

Expected Results 5. Data on file, BD Diagnostic Systems.
6. Vickers, Brown and Garrity. 1981. J. Clin. Microbiol. 13:380.
On Legionella Selective Agar, Legionella pneumophila produces 7. Wadowski and Yee. 1981. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 42:768.
small to large, smooth, colorless to pale blue-gray, slightly
mucoid colonies that fluoresce yellow-green when exposed Availability
to long-wave UV light. On Legionella Selective Agar DGVP, BBL Legionella Selective Agar
L. pneumophila produces small to large, smooth, pale green Cat. No. 297920 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
colonies which are slightly mucoid. BBL Legionella Selective Agar DGVP
Cat. No. 299648 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
References *Store at 2-8C.
1. Feely, Gibson, Gorman, Langsford, Rasheed, Mackel, and Baine. 1979. J. Clin. Microbiol. 10:437.
2. Feely, Gorman, Weave, Mackel and Smith. 1978. J. Clin. Microbiol. 8:320.
3. Pasculle, Feely, Gibson, Cordes, Myerowitz, Patton, Gorman, Carmack, Ezzell and Dowling. 1980.
J. Infect. Dis. 191:727.

Leptospira Medium Base EMJH

Leptospira Enrichment EMJH
Intended Use sure occurs in pet owners, veterinarians and persons working
Leptospira Medium Base EMJH is used with Leptospira with livestock.3
Enrichment EMJH in cultivating Leptospira. The basal medium and enrichment are prepared according to
the formulations described by Ellinghausen and McCullough4
Summary and Explanation as modified by Johnson and Harris.5 They modified the
In 1816, Adolf Weil described the first recognized leptospiral formula by replacing rabbit serum medium with polysorbate
infections in humans.1 These cases were caused by Leptospira 80-albumin. Leptospira Medium EMJH was used in cultiva-
icterohaemorrhagiae and the disease was subsequently named tion studies of Leptospira.6
Weils Disease.1 Leptospirosis is a zoonotic disease, having its
reservoir in wild, domestic and peridomestic animals. Infection Leptospira Medium EMJH is recommended for the clinical
usually results from direct or indirect exposure to the urine of isolation of Leptospira from clinical specimens7 and environ-
mental samples.8
leptospiruric animals.2 Indirect exposure through contaminated
water and soil accounts for most sporadic cases. Direct expo-

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Leptospira Medium Base EMJH
Dehydrated Appearance: White, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 2.3 g of base in 900 mL purified water;
soluble upon agitation. Solution is
colorless, clear.
Prepared Appearance
(with Enrichment): Very light to light amber, clear. L
Reaction (Basal Medium)
at 25C: pH 7.5 0.2
Difco Leptospira Enrichment EMJH

Appearance: Medium to dark amber, clear to very

slightly opalescent.

Cultural Response
Difco Leptospira Medium EMJH with Enrichment
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate tubes with undiluted
Uninoculated Leptospira interrogans
fresh cultures of Leptospira and incubate at 30 2C for up to 7 days. Tube serotype australis
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM RECOVERY
ATCC 23605

Leptospira interrogans
serotype australis 23605 2-3 Loopfuls Good
Leptospira interrogans
serotype canicola 23470 2-3 Loopfuls Good
Leptospira kirschneri
serotype grippotyphosa 23604 2-3 Loopfuls Good

301
 Section III
L Leptospira Medium EMJH, cont.

Principles of the Procedure Urine

Leptospira Medium Base EMJH contains ammonium chloride, A total of 12 tubes will be inoculated for each urine specimen.
a nitrogen source, and thiamine, a growth factor. Disodium 1. Prepare 1:10 and 1:100 dilutions of urine using Leptospira
phosphate and monopotassium phosphate are buffering agents. Medium EMJH to dilute potential inhibitory substances.
Sodium chloride provides essential ions. 2. Inoculate two 5 mL tubes each of Leptospira Medium
EMJH with:
Leptospira Enrichment EMJH contains albumin, polysorbate Urine undiluted, 1 drop per tube;
80 and additional growth factors for Leptospira. Urine diluted 1:10, 1 drop per tube;
Urine diluted 1:100, 1 drop per tube.
Formulae
3. Duplicate the above inoculations using medium containing
Difco Leptospira Medium Base EMJH
200 g/mL 5-fluorouracil to inhibit contaminants.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 1.0 g 4. Incubate the tubes in the dark at 28-30C or at room tem-
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 0.3 g perature.
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 1.0 g
Ammonium Chloride .................................................. 0.25 g
Thiamine .................................................................... 5.0 mg Expected Results7
Difco Leptospira Enrichment EMJH 1. Examine tubes weekly for signs of growth (turbidity, haze
A solution of albumin, polysorbate 80 and additional growth or a ring of growth).
factors for Leptospira. 2. Examine tubes microscopically each week. Take a small drop
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. from a few millimeters below the surface, and examine it
with dark-field illumination. Use 400 magnification.
Directions for Preparation from
3. Leptospires will be seen as tightly coiled spirochetes about
Dehydrated Product 1 m wide and 6-20 m long. Leptospires rotate rapidly on
1. Dissolve 2.3 g of the powder in 900 mL of purified water.
their long axes and usually have hooked ends.
2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. If the specimen is positive, subculture about 0.5 mL taken
3. Aseptically add 100 mL Leptospira Enrichment EMJH to
from the area of growth to two tubes of fresh medium.
the medium at room temperature. Mix thoroughly.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using References
stable, typical control cultures. 1. Elliott. 1980. J. Am. Med. Tech. 42:37.
2. Faine (ed.). 1982. Guidelines for the control of leptospirosis. W. H. O. Offset publication no. 67.
World Health Organization, Geneva, Switzerland.
Procedure7 3. Weyant, Bragg and Kaufmann. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Blood and Cerebrospinal Fluid 4. Ellinghausen and McCullough. 1965. Am. J. Vet. Research 26:45.
5. Johnson and Harris. 1967. J. Bacteriol. 94:27.
Freshly drawn blood is preferable; otherwise, use blood taken 6. Rule and Alexander. 1986. J. Clin. Microbiol. 23:500.
7. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
with SPS, sodium oxalate or heparin. Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
8. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
1. Inoculate four 5 mL tubes of Leptospira Medium EMJH wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
with 1-2 drops of fluid per tube.
2. Incubate in the dark at 28-30C or at room temperature. Availability
Difco Leptospira Medium Base EMJH
SMWW
Cat. No. 279410 Dehydrated 500 g
Difco Leptospira Enrichment EMJH

SMWW
Cat. No. 279510 Bottle 6 x 100 mL*
*Store at 2-8C.

Letheen Agar Letheen Broth

Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Letheen Agar is used to inactivate quarternary ammonium The value of a highly nutritional solid medium containing
compounds and other preservatives when determining the neutralizing agents for quaternary ammonium compounds in
number of bacteria present in cosmetics and other materials. sanitizers was described by Weber and Black1 in 1948. The addi-
Letheen Broth is used for determining the phenol coefficient tion of lecithin and polysorbate 80 (Tween* 80) to Tryptone
of cationic surface-active materials. Glucose Extract (TGE) agar resulted in a medium that effectively
neutralizes quaternary ammonium compounds in the testing of
germicidal activity. Letheen Agar is a modification of TGE agar
with the addition of lecithin and polysorbate 80.
*Tween is a trademark of ICI Americas, Inc.

302
 Letheen Agar, cont.

Letheen Agar and Letheen Broth are specified for use by the
User Quality Control
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) in the
Identity Specifications Standard Test Method for Preservatives in Water-Containing
Difco Letheen Agar Cosmetics.4
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, moist appearance, with a few
clumps. Principles of the Procedure
Solution: 3.2% solution, soluble in purified Letheen Agar contains beef extract and peptone which
water upon boiling. Solution is light
to medium amber, clear to slightly provide the carbon and nitrogen sources required for growth
opalescent, may have a slight, fine of a wide variety of organisms. Dextrose is provided as a source
precipitate (opalescent immediately of fermentable carbohydrate. Agar is the solidifying agent.
after autoclaving).
Lecithin and polysorbate 80 are added to neutralize surface
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal-
escent, may have a slight precipitate.
disinfectants.2,5,6 Lecithin is added to neutralize quaternary
Reaction of 3.2%
ammonium compounds and polysorbate 80 is incorporated
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 to neutralize phenols, hexachlorophene, formalin and, with
Difco Letheen Broth lecithin, ethanol.7
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, appears moist, with a tendency Letheen Broth contains peptone and beef extract which provide
to clump.
the carbon and nitrogen sources necessary for growth. Lecithin
Solution: 2.57% solution, soluble in purified
and polysorbate 80 are added as surface active disinfectant
water upon boiling. Solution is light
amber, clear to slightly opalescent neutralizing agents.2,5,6 Sodium chloride is included to maintain
(opalescent when hot). May have a osmotic balance.
very slight precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear to Formulae
slightly opalescent, may have a slight Difco Letheen Agar
precipitate.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Reaction of 2.57% Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g
Cultural Response Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Difco Letheen Agar Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 7.0 g
Lecithin ...................................................................... 1.0 g
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 40-48 hours. Difco Letheen Broth
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Beef Extract ................................................................ 5.0 g
2 3
Escherichia coli 11229 10 -10 Good Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g
Staphylococcus aureus 6538 102-103 Good Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 5.0 g
Lecithin ...................................................................... 0.7 g
Difco Letheen Broth Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
35 2C for 40- 48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Directions for Preparation from
Escherichia coli 11229 2
10 -10 3
Good Dehydrated Product
Salmonella choleraesuis 1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhi 6539 102-103 Good
Difco Letheen Agar 32 g; L
Staphylococcus aureus 6538 102-103 Good
Difco Letheen Broth 25.7 g.
Mix thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Letheen Broth was developed as a subculture medium for completely dissolve the powder.
the neutralization of quaternary ammonium compounds in 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
disinfectant testing. Quisno, Gibby and Foter2 found that the 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
addition of lecithin and polysorbate 80 to F.D.A. Broth stable, typical control cultures.
resulted in a medium that neutralized high concentrations of
NOTE: The dehydrated Letheen Agar has a characteristic
quaternary ammonium salts. The resulting medium, termed
brown sugar appearance and may seem moist. This does
Letheen (a combination of Lecithin and Tween), was easy
not indicate deterioration.
to prepare and clear in appearance, which aided in visual
inspection for growth. Letheen Broth is recommended in the
Procedure
Official Methods of Analysis of AOAC International3 for
Letheen Agar and Letheen Broth are used in a variety of proce-
use with disinfectants containing cationic surface active
dures. Consult appropriate references for further information.3,4
materials.

303
 Section III
L Letheen Agar, cont.

Expected Results Availability

Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.3,4 Difco Letheen Agar
Cat. No. 268010 Dehydrated 500 g*
References Difco Letheen Broth

1. Weber and Black. 1948. Soap and Sanit. Chem. 24:134.

2. Quisno, Gibby and Foter. 1946. Am. J. Pharm. 118:320. AOAC
3. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. 1. AOAC Cat. No. 268110 Dehydrated 500 g*
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
4. American Society for Testing and Materials. 1991. Standard test method for preservatives in water- *Store at 2-8C.
containing cosmetics, E 640-78. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. ASTM, Philadelphia, Pa.
5. Erlandson and Lawrence. 1953. Science 118:274.
6. Brummer. 1976. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 32:80.
7. Favero (chm.). 1967. Microbiological sampling of surfaces-a state of the art report. Biological
Contamination Control Committee, American Association for Contamination Control.

Letheen Agar, Modified Letheen Broth, Modified

Intended Use Directions for Preparation from
Letheen Agar, Modified and Letheen Broth, Modified are used Dehydrated Product
for the microbiological testing of cosmetics. 1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
Difco Letheen Agar, Modified - 59.1 g;
Summary and Explanation Difco Letheen Broth, Modified - 42.8 g.
Letheen Agar, Modified and Letheen Broth, Modified are based Mix thoroughly.
on Letheen Agar, Modified and Letheen Broth, Modified as
described in the 8th edition of the U.S. Food and Drug Admin- User Quality Control
istration (FDA) Bacteriological Analytical Manual.1 Letheen
Agar, Modified and Letheen Broth, Modified are recommended Identity Specifications
by the FDA for use in the microbiological testing of cosmetics.1 Difco Letheen Agar, Modified
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, moist with a tendency to clump.
Principles of the Procedure Solution: 5.91% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is medium
Beef extract, included in the Letheen Agar and Letheen Broth amber, opalescent, may have a slight
bases, and peptone provide carbon and nitrogen sources precipitate. After cooling, slightly opal-
required for good growth of a wide variety of bacteria and escent.
fungi. The peptone level was increased in the modified Letheen Prepared Appearance: Light-medium amber, slightly opales-
cent, may have a slight, fine precipitate.
Agar and Broth formulas to provide for better growth. Vitamins
Reaction of 5.91%
and cofactors, required for growth as well as additional sources Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
of nitrogen and carbon, are provided by yeast extract. Sodium
Difco Letheen Broth, Modified

chloride provides a suitable osmotic environment. In Letheen Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, homogeneous, appears moist
Broth, Modified sodium chloride is provided by the Letheen with a tendency to clump.
Broth component. Both media also contain polysorbate 80, Solution: 4.28% solution, soluble in purified
lecithin and sodium bisulfite to partially neutralize the preser- water upon boiling. Solution is medium
amber, clear to slightly opalescent, may
vative systems commonly found in cosmetics. Agar is included have slight fine precipitate.
in Letheen Agar, Modified as the solidifying agent. Prepared Appearance: Medium-dark amber, slightly opales-
cent, may have a slight fine precipitate.
Formulae Reaction of 4.28%
Difco Letheen Agar, Modified Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Letheen Agar ........................................................... 32.0 g Cultural Response
Tryptone ................................................................... 10.0 g Difco Letheen Agar, Modified or Letheen Broth,
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g Modified
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 2.0 g Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g 35 2C for 24-48 hours.
Sodium Bisulfite ......................................................... 0.1 g
Difco Letheen Broth, Modified INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU AGAR BROTH
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Staphylococcus aureus 6538 25-100 Good Good
Letheen Broth .......................................................... 25.7 g
Tryptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g Salmonella choleraesuis
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g subsp. choleraesuis
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 2.0 g serotype Typhi 6539 25-100 N/A Good
Sodium Bisulfite ......................................................... 0.1 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

304
 Lim Broth

2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- Modified only if there is no growth on the primary Letheen
pletely dissolve the powder. Agar, Modified plates.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Expected Results
stable, typical control cultures. Examine plates for evidence of growth and characteristic colonial
morphology. Determine colony counts and subculture each colony
Procedure 1 type onto Letheen Agar, Modified and MacConkey Agar (also Baird-
1. Prepare and dilute samples in Letheen Broth, Modified in Parker or Vogel-Johnson Agar, if used in step 2).
accordance with established guidelines. Determine Gram reaction, cell morphology and catalase reac-
2. Using the spread plate technique, inoculate in duplicate 0.1 tions. Identify bacterial isolates in accordance with established
mL of the diluted samples onto Letheen Agar, Modified, procedures.1
Potato Dextrose Agar (or Malt Extract Agar) containing
chlortetracycline, Baird-Parker Agar (or Vogel-Johnson Reference
1. Hitchins, Tran and McCarron. 1995. In FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
Agar, optional), Anaerobic Agar, and a second set of Letheen International, Gaithersburg, Md.
Agar, Modified plates.
3. Incubate one set of Letheen Agar, Modified plates at 30 2C Availability
for 48 hours and the other set at 35 2C under anaerobic Difco Letheen Agar, Modified
conditions for 2-4 days. Incubate the Potato Dextrose Agar BAM
Cat. No. 263110 Dehydrated 500 g*
(or Malt Extract Agar) plates at 30 2C for 7 days and the
Baird-Parker Agar (or Vogel-Johnson Agar) plates, if inocu- Difco Letheen Broth, Modified
lated, at 35 2C for 48 hours. BAM
Cat. No. 263010 Dehydrated 500 g*
4. Incubate the diluted samples from step 1 at 35 2C for 7
*Store at 2-8C.
days. Subculture enriched samples onto Letheen Agar,

Levine EMB Agar

(See Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine)

Lim Broth
Intended Use sheep blood agar.1 Lim Broth is prepared from Todd Hewitt
Lim Broth us used for the selective enrichment of group B strepto- Broth by the addition of colistin and nalidixic acid, at the
cocci (Streptococcus agalactiae), especially from genital specimens. recommended concentrations, plus yeast extract for enhanced
growth of group B streptococci.2
Summary and Explanation Group B streptococci have also been found in cases of sepsis
Since its emergence in the 1970s, neonatal group B streptococcal in nonparturient women and men, and in joint infections,
disease has become the major infectious cause of illness and death osteomyelitis, urinary tract infections and wound infections.
among newborns. Prior to 1994, an estimated 7600 episodes They are associated with endocarditis, pneumonia and pyelo- L
of invasive group B streptococcal disease, primarily sepsis and nephritis in immunosuppressed patients.7
meningitis, occurred in newborns each year in the United States,
with approximately 80% of those episodes representing Principles of the Procedure
early-onset disease occurring within the first week of life.1 The Todd Hewitt Broth base is a general-purpose medium primarily
disease is spread to newborns through vertical transmission used for the cultivation of -hemolytic streptococci, especially
from a mother who carries B streptococci in her anorectum or for serologic studies.8
genital tract. Lim and colleagues combined the use of an enriched,
selective broth medium and slide coagglutination test to rapidly The peptones, dextrose and salts provide an excellent nutritional
screen such maternity patients.2-5 base for the growth of streptococci. The added yeast extract is
a rich source of B-complex vitamins. Dextrose stimulates
The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) has hemolysin production. Disodium phosphate and sodium
published guidelines for screening and use of intrapartum carbonate provide buffering action to counteract the acidity
chemoprophylaxis for prevention of neonatal group B strep- produced during the fermentation of the carbohydrate, thereby
tococcal disease.6 The use of Todd Hewitt Broth with colistin protecting the hemolysin from inactivation by the acid.
and nalidixic acid is a medium recommended to maximize the
likelihood of recovering group B streptococci upon plating on Nalidixic acid and colistin suppress growth of gram-negative
bacteria.
305
 Section III
L Lim Broth, cont.

Procedure Jones et al. reported detection of group B streptococci by slide

Inoculate tubes and incubate with loosened caps at 35 2C coagglutination after 5 hours of incubation when the concen-
in an aerobic atmosphere with or without added carbon diox- tration of organisms in the culture was 107 per mL or greater.4
ide. If desired, perform a slide coagglutination test for group
B streptococci after 5 hours of incubation.4 References
1. Federal Register. 1994. Prevention of group B streptococcal disease: a public health perspective.
Fed. Regist. 59:64764.
If turbidity is observed after 18-24 hours, subculture from the 2. Jones, Friedl, Kanarek, Williams and Lim. 1983. J. Clin. Microbiol. 18:558.
broth culture to a sheep blood agar plate; otherwise, incubate 3. Lim, Kanarek and Peterson. 1982. Curr. Microbiol. 7:99.
4. Jones, Kanarek and Lim. 1984. J. Clin. Microbiol. 20:438.
an additional 24 hours before discarding.1 5. Jones, Kanarek, Angel and Lim. 1983. J. Clin. Microbiol. 18:526.
6. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. 2002. Morbid. Mortal. Weekly Rep. 51 (No. RR-11):1.
7. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby Inc.,
Expected Results St. Louis, Mo.
8. Todd and Hewitt. 1932. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 35:973.
Growth in broth medium is indicated by the presence of
turbidity compared to an uninoculated control. Availability
BBL Lim Broth
Subculture to a Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA
BS10 CMPH MCM7
II) plate and incubate for 18-24 hours, or up to 48 hours if Cat. No. 292209 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 5 mL Pkg of 10*
necessary. Identify organisms suggestive of group B streptococci 296266 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 5 mL Ctn. of 100*
(- or non-hemolytic, gram-positive and catalase-negative). *Store at 2-8C.

Specific identification may be performed; e.g., using strepto-

coccal grouping sera, the CAMP test or other procedures.

Lima Bean Agar

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Lima Bean Agar is used for cultivating fungi. Infusion from lima beans is a source of nitrogen, carbon, amino
acids and vitamins. Agar is the solidifying agent.
Summary and Explanation
Fungi are ubiquitous in nature. Of the estimated 250,000 species, Formula
fewer than 150 are known to be primary human pathogens.1 Difco Lima Bean Agar
Lima Bean Agar is prepared from an infusion of dry lima beans Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Lima Beans, Infusion from 62.5 g ............................... 8.0 g
and is solidified with 1.5% agar. The nutritive properties Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
of lima beans and the low pH of Lima Bean Agar create a *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

suitable environment for the growth of many fungi.

Directions for Preparation From
User Quality Control Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 23 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Identity Specifications thoroughly.
Difco Lima Bean Agar 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
Dehydrated Appearance: Light yellowish-tan, free-flowing,
pletely dissolve the powder.
homogeneous.
Solution: 2.3% solution; soluble in purified
3. Autoclave at 121 C for 15 minutes.
water upon boiling. Solution is light 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
to medium amber, opalescent, may stable, typical control cultures.
have a slight precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, opalescent, Procedure
may have a slight precipitate.
Refer to appropriate references for specific procedures on the
Reaction of 2.3%
Solution at 25C: pH 5.6 0.2 isolation and cultivation of fungi.

Cultural Response Expected Results

Difco Lima Bean Agar Refer to appropriate references and procedures.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
30 2 C for 40-48 hours. Reference
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY 1. Dixon, Rhodes and Fromtling. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2 3
Aspergillus niger 16404 10 -10 Good
Candida albicans 10231 102-103 Good Availability
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 102-103 Good
Difco Lima Bean Agar
Cat. No. 211710 Dehydrated 500 g

306
 Listeria Enrichment Broth

Listeria Enrichment Broth Listeria Enrichment Broth,

Modified Buffered Listeria Enrichment Broth Base
Intended Use cases of listeriosis has shown that the principal route of trans-
Listeria Enrichment Broth is used to selectively enrich Listeria mission is via the consumption of foodstuffs contaminated with
from foods. Listeria monocytogenes.6
Listeria Enrichment Broth, Modified is used for selectively Implicated vehicles of transmission include turkey frankfurters,7
enriching Listeria from raw and pasteurized milk according to coleslaw, pasteurized milk, Mexican-style cheese, pat, and
the International Dairy Federation (IDF).1 pickled pork tongue. The organism has been isolated from
commercial dairy and other food processing plants, and is
Buffered Listeria Enrichment Broth Base is used as an enrichment
ubiquitous in nature, being present in a wide range of unproc-
broth for the cultivation of Listeria spp. from food according to
essed foods and in soil, sewage, silage and river water.8
the U.S Food and Drug Administration (FDA).2
Listeria species grow over a pH range of 4.4-9.6, and survive
Summary and Explanation in food products with pH levels outside these parameters.9
First described in 1926 by Murray, Webb and Swann,3 Listeria Listeria spp. are microaerophilic, gram-positive, asporogenous,
monocytogenes is a widespread problem in public health and non-encapsulated, non-branching, regular, short, motile rods.
the food industries. This organism can cause human illness and Motility is most pronounced at 20C.
death, particularly in immunocompromised individuals and
pregnant women.4 The first reported food-borne outbreak The most common contaminating bacteria found in food sources
of listeriosis was in 1985.5 Since then, microbiological and potentially containing Listeria are: streptococci, especially the
epidemiological evidence from both sporadic and epidemic enterococci, micrococci, Bacillus species, Escherichia coli,

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications Cultural Response
Difco Listeria Enrichment Broth or Listeria Enrich-

Difco Listeria Enrichment Broth
ment Broth, Modified Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- 30 2C for 18-48 hours.
neous.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Solution: 3.61% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light to Enterococcus faecalis 29212 2103-104 Inhibition at 18-24
medium yellowish-amber with a faint hours; none to poor
green ring at the surface, clear to very at 40-48 hours
slightly opalescent. Escherichia coli 25922 2103-104 Inhibition
Prepared Appearance: Light yellowish-amber, clear to slightly Listeria monocytogenes 19114 102-103 Good
opalescent. Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9080 2103-104 Inhibition
Reaction of 3.61% Difco Listeria Enrichment Broth, Modified
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2 Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Difco Buffered Listeria Enrichment Broth Base 30 2C for 18-48 hours.
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
ORGANISM
Enterococcus faecalis
ATCC
29212
INOCULUM CFU
2103-104
RECOVERY
Partial inhibition
L
Solution: 4.8% solution, soluble in purified
Escherichia coli 25922 2103-104 Marked to
water upon boiling. Solution is light
complete inhibition
to medium amber, clear to very slightly
opalescent. Listeria monocytogenes 19114 102-103 Good
Listeria monocytogenes 19115 102-103 Good
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to very slightly opal-
escent. Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9080 2103-104 Marked to
complete inhibition
Reaction of 4.8%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.1 Difco Buffered Listeria Enrichment Broth Base
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
30 2C for 4 hours. After 4 hours of incubation, aseptically add
filter-sterilized selective agents according to the label directions.
Reincubate at 30 2C and observe for growth after 48 hours of total
incubation.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU GROWTH
Escherichia coli 25922 103 Inhibition
Listeria monocytogenes 19114 30-300 Good
Listeria monocytogenes 19115 30-300 Good
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9080 103 Inhibition
307
 Section III
L Listeria Enrichment Broth, cont.

Pseudomonas aeruginosa and Proteus vulgaris.10 Identification Directions for Preparation from
of Listeria is based on successful isolation of the organism, Dehydrated Product
biochemical characterization and serological confirmation. 1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
Listeria Enrichment Broth is based on the formula developed Difco Listeria Enrichment Broth 36.1 g;
Difco Listeria Enrichment Broth, Modified 36.1 g;
by Lovett et al.11 in which Tryptic Soy Broth is supplemented
Difco Buffered Listeria Enrichment Broth Base 48 g.
with yeast extract for optimum growth of Listeria. Listeria Mix thoroughly.
Enrichment Broth, Modified is a modification of Listeria 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Enrichment Broth in which the concentration of one of the completely dissolve the powder.
selective agents, acriflavine, has been reduced from 15 mg to 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
10 mg per liter. This modification reflects the lower concen- 4. For Buffered Listeria Enrichment Broth Base, prepare
tration specified by the IDF for isolation of L. monocytogenes filter-sterilized solutions of the following agents and add to
from milk and milk products. the base as directed under Procedure:
Buffered Listeria Enrichment Broth Base is a modification of 1% (w/v) cycloheximide in 40% (v/v) solution of ethanol
Listeria Enrichment Broth with added buffering strength. The in water;
addition of selective agents is delayed until after four hours of 0.5% (w/v) acriflavine HCl in purified water;
enrichment with this formula.2 0.5% (w/v) nalidixic acid in purified water.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Principles of the Procedure stable, typical control cultures.
Peptones and yeast extract provide nitrogen, vitamins and
minerals. Dextrose is a carbohydrate source. Sodium chloride Procedure
maintains the osmotic balance of the medium. Phosphates Listeria Enrichment Broth
provide buffering capacity. Sodium pyruvate aids in resuscita- For food samples, use Listeria Enrichment Broth in recom-
tion of stressed organisms. Nalidixic acid inhibits growth of mended laboratory procedures for isolating Listeria.
gram-negative organisms. Acriflavine HCl suppresses the Listeria Enrichment Broth, Modified
growth of gram-positive bacteria. Cycloheximide is incorpo- For dairy samples, the IDF1 selective enrichment method is as
rated to inhibit saprophytic fungi. follows:

Formulae 1. Add 25 mL of liquid or 25 g of solid test material to 225

Difco Listeria Enrichment Broth
mL Listeria Enrichment Broth, Modified and mix or blend
Approximate Formula* Per Liter thoroughly.
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 17.0 g 2. Incubate for 48 hours at 30C.
Soytone ...................................................................... 3.0 g 3. At 48 hours, streak the Listeria Enrichment Broth, Modified
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.5 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g culture onto plates of Oxford Medium or PALCAM
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.5 g Medium.
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 6.0 g 4. Incubate the agar plates at 37C for 48 2 hours.
Cycloheximide ............................................................ 0.05 g
Acriflavine HCl ......................................................... 15.0 mg Buffered Listeria Enrichment Broth Base
Nalidixic Acid ............................................................. 0.04 g For food samples, the FDA2 selective enrichment method is as
Difco Listeria Enrichment Broth, Modified follows:
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 17.0 g 1. Add 25 mL liquid or 25 g solid test material to 225 mL
Soytone ...................................................................... 3.0 g Buffered Listeria Enrichment Broth Base without selective
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.5 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g agents and mix or blend thoroughly.
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.5 g 2. Incubate for 4 hours at 30C.
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 6.0 g 3. Add 0.455 mL acriflavine HCl solution, 1.8 mL nalidixic
Cycloheximide ............................................................ 0.05 g
Acriflavine HCl ......................................................... 10.0 mg acid solution and 1.15 mL cycloheximide solution to 225
Nalidixic Acid ............................................................. 0.04 g mL Buffered Listeria Enrichment Broth Base and continue
Difco Buffered Listeria Enrichment Broth Base incubating another 44 hours, for a total of 48 hours, at
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 30C.
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 17.0 g 4. At 24 and 48 hours incubation, streak incubated broth onto
Soytone ...................................................................... 3.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.5 g both Oxford Medium and LPM Agar (or PALCAM Agar)
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g plates. Incubate Oxford Medium and PALCAM plates at
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.5 g 35C for 24-48 hours, and LPM plates at 30C for 24-48
Disodium Phosphate ................................................. 9.6 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.35 g
hours.
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 6.0 g
Sodium Pyruvate ........................................................ 1.1 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

308
 Litmus Milk

8. Patel, Hwang, Beuchat, Doyle and Brackett. 1995. J. Food Prot. 58:244.
Expected Results 9. Ryser and Donnelly. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiological
examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
1. Examine agar plates for typical Listeria colonies. 10. Kramer and Jones. 1969. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 32:381.
2. Consult appropriate references for selection of biochemical 11. Lovett, Frances and Hunt. 1987. J. Food Prot. 50:188.
12. Bille, Rocourt and Swaminathan. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). Manual
and/or serological tests for confirmation of Listeria of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
13. Flowers, Andrews, Donnelly and Koenig. 1993. In Marshall (ed.), Standard methods for the exami-
spp.1,2,9,12,13 nation of dairy products, 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

Limitation of the Procedure Availability

Listeria Enrichment Broth, Modified is a partially selective medium. Difco Listeria Enrichment Broth
Growth of some contaminating strains will be markedly but not CCAM COMPF SMD
Cat. No. 222220 Dehydrated 500 g
totally inhibited. 222210 Dehydrated 10 kg

References Difco Listeria Enrichment Broth, Modified

1. International Dairy Federation. 1995. Milk and milk products - detection of Listeria monocytogenes. Cat. No. 220530 Dehydrated 500 g
International IDF Standard No. 143A. International Dairy Federation, Brussels, Belgium. 245152 Dehydrated 2 kg
2. Hitchens. 1995. FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md. 220520 Dehydrated 10 kg
3. Murray, Webb and Swann. 1926. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 29:407.
4. Monk, Clavero, Beuchat, Doyle and Brackett. 1994. J. Food Prot. 57:969.
5. Wehr. 1987. J. Assoc. Off. Anal. Chem. 70:769.
Difco Buffered Listeria Enrichment Broth Base
6. Bremer and Osborne. 1995. J. Food Prot. 58:604. BAM COMPF
7. Grau and Vanderlinde. 1992. J. Food Prot. 55:4.
Cat. No. 290720 Dehydrated 500 g

Litmus Milk
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Litmus Milk is used for the maintenance of lactic acid bacteria Skim milk is the substrate that particular species of bacteria
and as a differential medium for determining the action of attack in different ways to produce various metabolic products.
bacteria on milk. Azolitmin serves as a pH indicator with a color range of pink
(below pH 4.5) to purple (in middle of pH range) to blue (above
Summary and Explanation pH 8.3) and also functions as an Eh (oxidation-reduction)
Litmus Milk has been used for many years for determining the indicator.1
metabolic activities of microorganisms in milk as an aid to
The action of bacteria on milk can be categorized as follows:
the identification of bacterial species. It is especially useful in
species differentiation within the genus Clostridium. 1. No change (no carbohydrate fermentation and no change
of litmus indicator).
This medium is also of value in the maintenance and propaga-
tion of lactic bacteria.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
BBL Litmus Milk
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous

Solution:
material.
10.0% solution, soluble in purified water.
L
Solution is medium, purple gray, opaque.
Prepared Appearance: Medium, purple gray, opaque.
Reaction of 10.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL Litmus Milk
Uninoculated Bacillus subtilis Clostridium Lactobacillus
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures Tube ATCC 6633 perfringens rhamnosus
diluted 1:10 and incubate at 35 2C for 7 days. ATCC 12924 ATCC 7469
ORGANISM ATCC RESULT
Clostridium perfringens 13124 Stormy
fermentation (gas),
clot or curd,
reduction (white)
Lactobacillus acidophilus 4356 Acid (pink),
clot or curd

309
 Section III
L Litmus Milk, cont.

2. Fermentation of lactose and/or dextrose in the milk 2. Autoclave at 115C for 20 minutes or by fractional steam
with production of acid (pink color), including stormy sterilization for 30 minutes on three successive days. Avoid
fermentation (strong evolution of gas) by certain strains overheating and the consequent caramelization which
of Clostridium. occurs.
3. Action of proteolytic enzymes on lactalbumin with 3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
production of ammonia or basic amines resulting in an stable, typical control cultures.
alkaline reaction (blue color).
4. Coagulation of casein as evidenced by the formation of Procedure
a curd or clot. If the casein is converted to paracasein by Inoculate tubes of Litmus Milk with 18- to 24-hour pure
the enzyme rennin, a clear, watery liquid called whey is cultures. For the study of anaerobic organisms, sterile mineral
produced at the top of a thoroughly coagulated tube.1 oil can be layered over the medium following inoculation. In-
5. Peptonization due to digestion of the milk protein as cubate tubes at 35 2C for up to 14 days and record
evidenced by a clearing of the medium and dissolution reactions at various intervals during the incubation process.
of the clot.
6. Reduction of the litmus in the depths of the tube due to the Expected Results
action of reductase enzymes with the resultant removal of Consult an appropriate reference for the expected reactions
oxygen to form the decolorized leucolitmus compound. for specific microbial species.2

Formula References
1. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
BBL Litmus Milk

vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 2. Sneath and Holt (ed.). 1986. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriology, vol. 2. Williams &
Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Skim Milk ............................................................... 100.0 g
Azolitmin ................................................................... 0.5 g
Sodium Sulfite ............................................................ 0.5 g Availability
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. BBL Litmus Milk
Cat. No. 211343 Dehydrated 500 g
Directions for Preparation from 221657 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10*
Dehydrated Product *Store at 2-8C.

1. Dissolve 100 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water,

preferably preheated to 50C. Mix thoroughly.

Littman Oxgall Agar

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Littman Oxgall Agar is used for isolating and cultivating fungi, Peptone provides nitrogen, amino acids and carbon. Dextrose
especially dermatophytes. is an additional carbon source. Oxgall restricts the spreading
of fungus colonies. Crystal violet and streptomycin are selective
Summary and Explanation bacteriostatic agents. Agar is the solidifying agent.
In 1947, Littman1 described Littman Oxgall Agar, a selective
medium for the primary isolation of fungi, including patho- Formula
genic fungi. Difco Littman Oxgall Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Littman demonstrated that Littman Oxgall Agar is valuable Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
for culturing the dermatophytes. Molds and yeasts form Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
nonspreading, discrete colonies, that are easy to isolate in Oxgall ....................................................................... 15.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g
pure culture. He also suggested that the medium be used for Crystal Violet .............................................................. 0.01 g
estimating the normal fungal flora of feces, sputum and other *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
human discharges. The medium can also be used for single cell
isolation of fungi and plate counts of viable saprophytic fungi Directions for Preparation from
in foodstuffs and air. Dehydrated Product
In a comparative study, Littman2 compared this medium with 1. Suspend 55 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar using a large variety of pathogenic thoroughly.
and saprophytic fungi. He reported the isolation of three times 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
as many fungi from feces, sputum, skin scrapings and hair completely dissolve the powder.
on Littman Oxgall Agar and four times as many pathogenic 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 46C.
dermatophytes on the selective medium compared with
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar.
310
 Liver Infusion Agar

Uninoculated Saccharomyces cerevisiae

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 9763

Identity Specifications
Difco Littman Oxgall Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Grayish-blue, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Solution: 5.5% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is blue, very
slightly to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Blue, very slightly to slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 5.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Littman Oxgall Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions without (plain) and with the
addition of streptomycin. Inoculate and incubate at 25-30C for up to 72
hours.
INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU PLAIN w/STREPTOMYCIN
Candida albicans 10231 102-103 Good Good
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Fair to good Inhibition
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 102-103 Good Good
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9080 102-103 Good Good Trichophyton
mentagrophytes
Trichophyton mentagrophytes 9533 102-103 Fair to good Fair to good ATCC 28185

4. Add 30 g streptomycin per mL of medium. using one or more of the following techniques to corrobo-
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using rate cultural findings: direct microscopic examination of
stable, typical control cultures. the specimen; animal inoculation; biochemical determina-
tion; or serological procedures.
Procedure 2. Do not use to culture Nocardia asteroides, Streptomyces
See appropriate references for specific procedures. or any other microorganism sensitive to streptomycin.3

Expected Results References

1. Littman. 1947. Science 106:109.
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results. 2. Littman. 1948. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 18:409.
3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Limitations of the Procedure
1. Although culture techniques are primary in the identification Availability
of etiological agents of mycotic infections, they are not Difco Littman Oxgall Agar
absolute. Often identification must be accomplished by Cat. No. 229410 Dehydrated 500 g

Liver Infusion Agar Liver Infusion Broth L

Intended Use For isolating Brucella strains from contaminated milk, crystal
Liver Infusion Agar is used for cultivating Brucella and other violet (gentian violet) can be added to Liver Infusion Agar to
pathogenic organisms. suppress gram-positive organisms.3 Five percent (5%) heated
Liver Infusion Broth is used for cultivating a variety of organ- horse or rabbit serum enhances growth of Brucella.4
isms, particularly Brucella and anaerobes.
Liver Infusion Agar at approximately half strength may be used
Summary and Explanation to prepare Endamoeba medium for cultivating Endamoeba
Brucellosis is a zoonotic disease with a domestic animal reservoir. histolytica.5
Transmission by milk, milk products, meat and direct contact Liver Infusion Broth maintains a degree of anaerobiosis
with infected animals is the usual route of exposure.1 well suited to support growth of anaerobic microorganisms,
Most strains of Brucella will grow on chocolate or blood agar. especially Clostridium species.
However, special media such as liver infusion, tryptose, tryptone
or brucella agar are preferred.2 The nutritive factors of Liver
Infusion media permit luxuriant growth of Brucella and other
fastidious pathogens.
311
 Section III
L Liver Infusion Agar, cont.

Principles of the Procedure Precautions6

Peptones and infusions provide the nitrogen, amino acids, 1. Biosafety Level 2 practices, containment equipment and
vitamins and carbon sources in Liver Infusion media. Sodium facilities are recommended for activities with clinical speci-
chloride maintains the osmotic balance. Agar is the solidifying mens of human or animal origin containing or potentially
agent. containing pathogenic Brucella spp.
2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and
Formulae
facilities are recommended for all manipulations of cultures
Difco Liver Infusion Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
of the pathogenic Brucella spp. and for experimental animal
Beef Liver, Infusion from 500 g ................................ 20.0 g studies.
Proteose Peptone ..................................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g Directions for Preparation from
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g
Dehydrated Product
Difco Liver Infusion Broth
1. Suspend/dissolve the powder in 1 L of purified water:
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Difco Liver Infusion Agar 55 g;
Difco Liver Infusion Broth 35 g.
Mix thoroughly.
User Quality Control 2. Heat the Liver Infusion Agar with frequent agitation and
Identity Specifications boil for 1 minute to completely dissolve the powder.
Difco Liver Infusion Agar 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Dehydrated Appearance: Dark beige to light tan, free-flowing, 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
homogeneous. stable, typical control cultures.
Solution: 5.5% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium to dark Procedure
amber, slightly opalescent to opalescent. For a complete discussion of the isolation and identification
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark amber, slightly opal- of Brucella, anaerobic microorganisms and other fastidious
escent.
pathogens, refer to the procedures described in Bailey & Scotts
Reaction of 5.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2
Diagnostic Microbiology,4 Clinical Microbiology Procedures
Handbook7 and Manual of Clinical Microbiology.8
Difco Liver Infusion Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.5% solution, soluble in purified water.
Expected Results
Solution is medium to dark amber, clear Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
to very slightly opalescent with a few
particles. References
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark amber, clear to slightly 1. Shapiro and Wong. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
opalescent with a few particles. microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. Carter. 1979. Diagnostic procedures in veterinary bacteriology and mycology, 3rd ed. Charles
Reaction of 3.5% C. Thomas, Springfield, Ill.
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2 3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
4. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
Cultural Response St. Louis, Mo.
5. Cleveland and Sanders. 1930. Arch. Protietenkd. 70:223.
Difco Liver Infusion Agar or Liver Infusion Broth 6. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
35 2C for 18-48 hours, or up to 72 hours if necessary. Incubate 7. Isenberg. (ed.). 1995. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
Clostridium under anaerobic conditions. Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
8. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Brucella abortus 11192* 102-103 Good
Brucella melitensis 4309* 102-103 Good
Availability
Brucella suis 4314* 102-103 Good Difco Liver Infusion Agar
Clostridium sporogenes 11437 102-103 Good Cat. No. 252100 Dehydrated 500 g
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 102-103 Good Difco Liver Infusion Broth

*Minimally, one strain of Brucella should be used for performance testing. These ATCC strains Cat. No. 226920 Dehydrated 500 g
should be used if available.

312
 Liver Veal Agar

Liver Veal Agar

Intended Use mens of human or animal origin containing or potentially
Liver Veal Agar is used for cultivating anaerobic bacteria. containing C. botulinum or C. tetani or their toxins.
2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and
Summary and Explanation facilities are recommended for all manipulations of cultures
Spray1 described a procedure using the anaerobic culture dish for of C. botulinum and for activities with a high potential for
the cultivation of these organisms. Liver Veal Agar is identical aerosol or droplet production, and those involving produc-
to the medium described by Spray.2 Liver Veal Agar provides tion quantities of toxin.
a rich supply of nutrients for anaerobic and fastidious aerobic
pathogens. The medium supports excellent growth of sporulat- Formula
ing anaerobes and can be used for deep tube cultures. Difco Liver Veal Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Liver Veal Agar is specified in the FDA Bacteriological Liver, Infusion from 50 g ............................................ 9.0 g
Analytical Manual (BAM)3 and Compendium of Methods for Veal, Infusion from 500 g ........................................... 6.4 g
Proteose Peptone ..................................................... 20.0 g
the Microbiological Examination of Foods.4 Liver Veal Agar Gelatin ..................................................................... 20.0 g
can be supplemented with 50% egg yolk for the cultivation of Soluble Starch .......................................................... 10.0 g
anaerobic organisms.3-5 Isoelectric Casein ........................................................ 2.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Neopeptone ............................................................... 1.3 g
Principles of the Procedure Tryptone ..................................................................... 1.3 g
Infusions, peptones, gelatin and isoelectric casein provide the Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
rich nitrogen, amino acids and vitamin content of the medium. Sodium Nitrate ........................................................... 2.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Soluble starch is added to enhance the growth of anaerobes *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
and dextrose is a carbon source. Sodium chloride maintains
osmotic balance and agar is the solidifying agent. Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product
Precautions6 1. Suspend 97 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
1. Biosafety Level 2 practices, containment equipment and thoroughly.
facilities are recommended for activities with clinical speci- 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
pletely dissolve the powder.
User Quality Control 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Identity Specifications stable, typical control cultures.
Difco Liver Veal Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Procedure
neous.
For a complete discussion of the isolation and identification
Solution: 9.7% solution, soluble in purified water of anaerobic bacteria and other fastidious aerobic pathogens,
upon boiling. Solution is medium to
dark amber, opalescent, may have a
refer to the procedures described in Clinical Microbiology
slight precipitate. Procedures Handbook7 and Manual of Clinical Microbiology.8
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark amber, opalescent,
may have a slight precipitate. Expected Results
L
Reaction of 9.7% Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
References
Cultural Response 1. Spray. 1930. J. Lab. Clin. Med. 16:203.
2. Spray. 1936. J. Bacteriol. 32:135.
Difco Liver Veal Agar 3. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at national, Gaithersburg, Md.
4. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
35 2C for 18-48 hours under appropriate atmospheric conditions. 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Incubate clostridia anaerobically, Neisseria under increased CO2 and 5. Atlas. 1993. Handbook of microbiological media. CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fla.
6. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
streptococci aerobically. Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY 7. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol.1. American Society for
2 3 Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Clostridium botulinum 3502* 10 -10 Good 8. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
Clostridium tetani 10779* 102-103 Good American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 102-103 Good
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 102-103 Good Availability
*Minimally, one strain of these clostridia should be used for performance testing. These ATCC
strains should be used if available.
Difco Liver Veal Agar
BAM CCAM COMPF
Cat. No. 259100 Dehydrated 500 g
313
 Section III
L Loeffler Blood Serum

Loeffler Blood Serum Loeffler Medium

Intended Use In addition to the beef serum, eggs are included in the prepared
Loeffler media are used primarily for the cultivation of coryne- tube formulation. These components cause the medium to
bacteria. coagulate during the sterilization process and are sources of
protein utilized for the metabolism of corynebacteria and other
Summary and Explanation organisms.
In 1887, Loeffler devised a culture medium containing horse
serum, meat infusion and dextrose for use in the cultivation of Formula
corynebacteria and for differentiating them from other organ- Difco Loeffler Blood Serum
isms.1 A number of modifications of the original formulation Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Bovine Serum Powder .............................................. 67.0 g
have been made; those of Perry and Petran2 and Buck3 are Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
incorporated in Loeffler Medium. Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 2.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.5 g
The primary value of these media is for the promotion of Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 4.25 g
growth and morphological characterization of members of the Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 1.25 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
genus, Corynebacterium; formation of metachromatic granules
is enhanced within the cells of these organisms. These media are Directions for Preparation from
also useful for demonstrating colonial pigmentation, ascospore
Dehydrated Product
production and the proteolytic activity of microorganisms.4
1. Suspend 80 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water warmed
Principles of the Procedure to 42-45C.
2. Check pH. Adjust to pH 7.1, if necessary.
Bovine serum powder and peptones provide the amino acids
3. Dispense into tubes having screw caps or other tightly sealing
and other complex nitrogenous substances necessary to support
closures.
growth of corynebacteria. Sodium chloride supplies essential ions.
4. Slant the tubes in the autoclave, close the door loosely and
Dextrose is a source of fermentable carbohydrate.
coagulate the medium in constantly flowing steam for 10
minutes.
User Quality Control 5. Close the door tightly and autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Identity Specifications 6. Allow the autoclave pressure to fall to zero before removing
Difco Loeffler Blood Serum tubes.
Dehydrated Appearance: Medium beige, free-flowing, homo- 7. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
geneous. stable, typical control cultures.
Solution: 8.0% solution, soluble in purified
water upon warming to 42-45C.
Solution is opaque.
Procedure
Prepared Appearance: Opaque, white-cream colored (coagu- Inoculate the tubed medium as soon as possible after specimen
lated). collection, using either direct inoculation of the specimen by
Reaction of 8.0% Solution swabs or by means of an inoculating loop. Incubate the tubes
(after coagulation) at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2
with loosened caps for 18-24 hours and up to 4 days at 35
Cultural Response 2C in an aerobic atmosphere. Alternatively, follow recom-
Difco Loeffler Blood Serum mended procedures for the isolation of C. diphtheriae.5
Prepare the medium per label directions. Dispense into tubes and
coagulate for 10 minutes at approximately 100C. Autoclave tubes, Expected Results
cool, inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. Prepare
Examine cultures and examine smears stained with Loefflers
heat-fixed slides of growth from the medium and stain with Loefflers
alkaline methylene blue. Stained cells should show bipolar granules, methylene blue after incubation. Observe for typical cellular
club cells and some cells with general granulation. morphology of corynebacteria species and for the presence of
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY metachromatic granules which take up the methylene blue
Corynebacterium diphtheriae dye. Subculture colonies that are catalase positive and exhibit
biotype mitis 8024 30-300 Good typical morphology onto blood agar to provide growth for
Corynebacterium diphtheriae identification procedures.
biotype intermedius 8032 30-300 Good
Corynebacterium diphtheriae Observe for pigmentation of specific organisms; e.g.,
biotype gravis 8028 30-300 Good Pseudomonas aeruginosa (green) and Staphylococcus aureus
(yellow to gold). Proteolytic activity is evidenced by destruc-
tion of the integrity of the coagulated medium.

314
 Lowenstein Media

Limitations of the Procedure References

1. Loeffler. 1887. Zentralbl. Baketeriol. Parasitenkd. 2:105.
1. Although the production of metachromatic granules on this 2. Perry and Petran. 1939. J. Lab. Clin. Med. 25:71.
medium is characteristic of members of the Corynebacte- 3.
4.
Buck. 1949. J. Lab. Clin. Med. 34:582.
MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
rium genus, other organisms, such as Propionibacterium, vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
5. Sneed. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American
some Actinomyces and pleomorphic streptococcal strains Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
display stained granules resembling those of the coryne-
bacteria.4 Availability
2. Loeffler Medium must be used in parallel with a tellurite-con- Difco Loeffler Blood Serum
taining medium (e.g., Tinsdale Agar or Serum Tellurite Agar) Cat. No. 270100 Dehydrated 500 g*
for selective isolation of pathogens, particularly C. diphtheriae.4 BBL Loeffler Medium

3. Additional culture, biochemical identification and toxi- Cat. No. 220906 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.
genicity tests must be performed for differentiation and
identification.4

Lowenstein Media
Lowenstein Medium Base Lowenstein-Jensen
Medium Lowenstein-Jensen Medium, Gruft
Lowenstein-Jensen Medium with Iron
Lowenstein-Jensen Medium with Pyruvic Acid
Lowenstein-Jensen Medium with 5% Sodium Chloride
Intended Use rusty-brown colonies and a tan discoloration in the medium.6
Lowenstein Medium and Lowenstein-Jensen (LJ) Medium are M. chelonae and slow-growing species do not take up the iron.7
used for the isolation and cultivation of mycobacteria and as Hughes 8 and Dixon and Cuthbert 9 reported that the addition
bases for selective, differential and enriched media for myco- of pyruvic acid to egg-based media resulted in improved
bacteria. recovery of tubercle bacilli compared to recovery on egg-based
LJ Medium, tubed as deeps, is used for the semi-quantitative media supplemented only with glycerol. Dixon and Cuthbert
catalase test. recommended using pyruvic acid-egg medium in addition to
media supplemented with glycerol for optimum recovery of
LJ Medium, Gruft, is a selective medium used for the isolation
tubercle bacilli from clinical specimens.9
and cultivation of mycobacteria.
Additionally, the medium is available with the addition of 5%
LJ Medium with Iron is used to determine iron uptake for
sodium chloride. Most rapid growers, the slowly growing
differentiation and identification of mycobacteria.
M. triviale and some strains of M. flavescens grow on NaCl-
LJ Medium with Pyruvic Acid is an enrichment medium used
for enhanced growth of mycobacteria.
containing media. The inability of M. chelonae subsp. chelonae
to grow helps differentiate it from other members of the
L
LJ Medium with 5% sodium chloride is used to characterize M. fortuitum complex (e.g., M. chelonae subsp. abscessus).6,10
certain strains of mycobacteria. In the semi-quantitative catalase test, mycobacteria can be
differentiated into groups, based upon catalase activity. 6,11,12
Summary and Explanation
LJ Medium is an inspissated, egg-based medium developed from Principles of the Procedure
Jensens modification of Lowensteins formula.1,2 Lowenstein Medium Base is a relatively simple formulation
Gruft modified LJ Medium by adding penicillin and nalidixic that requires supplementation in order to support the growth
acid for selective isolation of mycobacteria.3 Gruft also found of mycobacteria. Glycerol and egg mixture are added prior to
that the addition of ribonucleic acid (RNA) increased the the inspissation process. These substances provide fatty acids
percentage of tubercle bacilli recovered from clinical specimens and protein required for the metabolism of mycobacteria. The
compared to recovery on the standard LJ Medium.4 coagulation of the egg albumin during sterilization provides a
solid medium for inoculation purposes. Malachite green
Wayne and Doubek differentiated rapidly-growing from selectively inhibits contaminants.
slow-growing mycobacteria based on iron intake.5 The rapid-
growing mycobacteria take up iron in the medium, producing
315
 Section III
L Lowenstein Media, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Lowenstein Medium Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Medium to dark green-blue, free flowing,
homogeneous.
Solution: 37.4 g/600 mL solution containing
12 mL of glycerol, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is opales-
cent, viscous, dark blue-green.
Prepared Appearance: Opalescent, viscous, dark blue green.

Cultural Response
Difco Lowenstein Medium Base
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C under appropriate atmospheric conditions for up to 21 days.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Partial inhibition
Mycobacterium tuberculosis H37Ra 25177 102-3102 Good Uninoculated Mycobacterium
Tube fortuitum
Mycobacterium tuberculosis 27294 102-3102 Good ATCC 6841
Mycobacterium kansasii Group I 12478 102-3102 Good
Mycobacterium scrofulaceum Group II 19981 102-3102 Good
Mycobacterium intracellulare Group III 13950 102-3102 Good
Mycobacterium fortuitum Group IV 6841 102-3102 Good

Low-level concentrations of penicillin (50.0 units/mL) and Formula

nalidixic acid (35.0 mg/mL) are included in the LJ Medium, Difco Lowenstein Medium Base
Gruft, to inhibit gram-positive as well as some gram-negative Approximate Formula* Per 600 mL
bacterial contaminants. The addition of RNA (0.05 mg/mL) Asparagine ................................................................. 3.6 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 2.4 g
enhances the recovery of tubercle bacilli. Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.24 g
Magnesium Citrate .................................................... 0.6 g
In the iron uptake test, most rapid growers take up the iron Potato Flour ............................................................. 30.0 g
salt in the medium (ferric ammonium citrate, 25 mg/mL), Malachite Green ........................................................ 0.4 g
producing rusty brown colonies and a tan discoloration in *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria
the surrounding medium. Slow-growing species and most
strains of M. chelonae do not take up the iron in the medium.6,7 Precaution13
Biosafety Level 2 practices and procedures, containment equip-
Pyruvic acid (2.5 mg/mL) enhances the growth of tubercle bacilli.
ment and facilities are required for non-aerosol-producing
The ability to tolerate 5% sodium chloride is a characteristic manipulations of clinical specimens such as preparation of
of certain strains of mycobacteria (e.g., M. fortuitum and acid-fast smears. All aerosol-generating activities must be
M. chelonae subsp. abscessus).10 conducted in a Class I or II biological safety cabinet. Biosafety
Catalase is an intracellular, soluble enzyme capable of split- Level 3 practices, containment equipment and facilities
ting hydrogen peroxide into water and oxygen. The oxygen are required for laboratory activities in the propagation and
bubbles into the reaction mixture creating a column of bubbles. manipulation of cultures of M. tuberculosis and M. bovis.
With a column height breakpoint of 45 mm, the mycobacteria Animal studies also require special procedures.
can be divided into groups: those producing less than 45 mm
(M. tuberculosis, M. marinum, M. avium complex and
Directions for Preparation from
M. gastri); and those producing more than 45 mm (M. kansasii, Dehydrated Product
M. simiae, most scotochromogens, the nonphotochromogenic 1. Suspend 37.4 g of the powder in 600 mL of purified water
saprophytes and the rapid growers).6 containing 12 mL of glycerol. Do not add glycerol if bo-
vine tubercle bacilli or other glycerophobic organisms are
to be cultivated.
Mix thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation just until the medium boils.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to approximately
50C.
4. Meanwhile, prepare 1,000 mL of whole eggs collected asepti-
cally and mixed thoroughly, without introducing air bubbles.

316
 Lowenstein Media, cont.

5. Admix base and egg gently until mixture is uniform and Stained smears may show acid-fast bacilli, which are reported
without bubbles. only as acid-fast bacilli unless definitive tests are performed.
6. Distribute in suitable sterile containers such as screw-capped
Bottles may be examined by inverting the bottles on the stage
tubes.
of a dissecting microscope. Read at 10-60 with transmitted
7. Arrange tubes in slanted position, then coagulate and
light. Scan rapidly at 10-20 for the presence of colonies.
inspissate at 85C for 45 minutes.
Higher magnification (30-60) is helpful in observing colony
8. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
morphology; i.e., serpentine cord-like colonies.
stable, typical control cultures.
Examine LJ Medium with Iron for rusty-brown colonies with
Procedure a tan discoloration in the surrounding medium, indicating
The test procedures are those recommended by the Centers for uptake of the iron.
Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) for primary The presence or absence of growth in the tube of medium con-
isolation from specimens containing mycobacteria.6 N-Acetyl-L- taining 5% NaCl aids in the differentiation of mycobacterial
cysteine-sodium hydroxide (NALC-NaOH) solution is isolates. The salt tolerance test is positive when numerous
recommended as a gentle but effective digesting and decontami- colonies appear on the control medium and more than 50 colo-
nating agent. These reagents are provided in the BBL MycoPrep nies grow on the medium containing 5% NaCl.6,15 Colonies on
Mycobacterial Specimen Digestion/Decontamination Kit. For the control medium, but no visible growth on the test medium
detailed decontamination and culturing instructions, consult an after a total of 4 weeks of incubation constitutes a negative
appropriate reference.6,7,12,14,15 test.6,12,15
Following inoculation, keep test containers shielded from light In the semi-quantitate catalase test, mycobacteria fall into two
and place them in a suitable system providing an aerobic groups with M. tuberculosis falling into the group producing
atmosphere enriched with carbon dioxide. Incubate at 35 2C. a column of bubbles less than 45 mm in height.6
Slanted and bottled media should be incubated in a horizontal
plane until the inoculum is absorbed. Tubes and bottles should Limitations of the Procedure
have screw caps loose for the first 3 weeks to permit the circula- 1. Negative culture results do not rule-out active infection
tion of carbon dioxide for the initiation of growth. Thereafter, by mycobacteria. Some factors that are responsible for
to prevent dehydration, tighten caps; loosened briefly once a unsuccessful cultures are:
week. Stand tubes upright if space is a problem. The specimen was not representative of the infectious
material; i.e., saliva instead of sputum.
NOTE: Cultures from skin lesions suspected to be M. marinum
The mycobacteria were destroyed during digestion and
or M. ulcerans should be incubated at 25-33C for primary
decontamination of the specimen.
isolation; cultures suspected to contain M. avium or M. xenopi
Gross contamination interfered with the growth of the
exhibit optimum growth at 40-42C.6 Incubate a duplicate
mycobacteria.
culture at 35-37C.
Proper aerobic conditions and increased CO2 tension
For LJ Medium with Iron, specimens must first be isolated in were not provided during incubation.
pure culture on an appropriate solid medium. Inoculate LJ 2. Mycobacteria are strict aerobes and growth is stimulated
Medium with Iron with one drop of a barely turbid suspen- by increased levels of CO2. Screw caps on tubes or bottles
sion of the culture to be tested. should be handled as directed for exchange of CO2.
For the semi-quantitative catalase test, 1 mL of a 1:1 mixture
of 10% polysorbate 80 and 30% hydrogen peroxide is added
References L
1. Lowenstein. 1931. Zentralbl. Bakteriol. Parasitenkd. Infektionskr. Hyg. Abt. 1 Orig.120:127.
to each inoculated tube after 2 weeks of incubation. The height 2.
3.
Jensen. 1932. Zentralb. Bakteriol. Parasitenkd. Infektionskr. Hyg. Abt. I Orig. 125:222.
Gruft. 1971. Health Lab. Sci. 8:79.
of the column of bubbles is recorded after 5 minutes as <45 4. Gruft. 1963. Am. Rev. Respir. Dis. 88:412.
5. Wayne and Doubek. 1968. Appl. Microbiol. 16:925.
mm or >45 mm.6,7 6. Kent and Kubica. 1985. Public health mycobacteriology: a guide to the level III laboratory. USDHHS.
Centers for Disease Control, Atlanta, Ga.
7. Metchock, Nolte and Wallace. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
Expected Results of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
8. Hughes. 1966. J. Clin. Pathol. 19:73.
Cultures should be read within 5-7 days after inoculation and 9. Dixon and Cuthbert. 1967. Am. Rev. Respir. Dis. 96:119.
10. Silcox, Good and Floyd. 1981. J. Clin. Micobiol. 14:686.
once a week thereafter for up to 8 weeks. 11. Wayne. 1962. Am. Rev. Respir. Dis. 86:651.
12. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. In Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby,
Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
Record Observations: 13. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
1. Number of days required for colonies to become macro- No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
14. Cernoch, Enns, Saubolle and Wallace. 1994. Cumitech 16A, Laboratory diagnosis of the mycobac-
scopically visible. Rapid growers have mature colonies terioses. Coord. ed., Weissfeld. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
15. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
within 7 days; slow growers require more than 7 days for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
mature colony forms.
2. Pigment production
White, cream to buff = Nonchromogenic (NC)
Lemon, yellow, orange, red = Chromogenic (Ch) 317
 Section III
L Lowenstein Media, cont.

Availability BBL Lowenstein-Jensen Medium, Gruft

BS10 CMPH MCM7
Difco Lowenstein Medium Base

Cat. No. 297608 Prepared Slants (A Tubes) Pkg. of 10*

Cat. No. 244420 Dehydrated 500 g
297653 Prepared Slants (A Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
244410 Dehydrated 2 kg
297211 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
BBL Lowenstein-Jensen Medium 297703 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
BS10 CMPH EP MCM7 SMWW BBL Lowenstein-Jensen Medium with Iron
Cat. No. 220908 Prepared Slants (A Tubes) Pkg. of 10* Cat. No. 297206 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
220909 Prepared Slants (A Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
221387 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10* BBL Lowenstein-Jensen Medium with Pyruvic Acid

221388 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Ctn. of 100* Cat. No. 297270 Prepared (Transgrow-style bottle) Ctn. of 100*
221257 Prepared Deeps (A Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
221115 Mycoflask Bottle Pkg. of 10* BBL Lowenstein-Jensen Medium with 5% Sodium

221116 Mycoflask Bottles Ctn. of 100* Chloride

295701 Bottles, 1 oz Ctn. of 100* Cat. No. 221896 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

Luria Agar Base, Miller Luria Broth Base, Miller

Intended Use amplified. Chloramphenicol may be added to inhibit host
Luria Agar Base, Miller and Luria Broth Base, Miller are used synthesis and, as a result, prevent replication of the bacterial
for maintaining and propagating Escherichia coli in molecular chromosome.2
microbiology procedures with or without added glucose. Luria Agar Base, Miller and Luria Broth Base, Miller contain
one-tenth and one-twentieth, respectively, the sodium chloride
Summary and Explanation level of the LB Agar, Lennox and LB Agar, Miller formula-
Luria Agar Base, Miller and Luria Broth Base, Miller are tions.1-3 This allows the researcher to select the optimal salt
nutritionally rich media designed for growth of pure cultures concentration for a specific strain. The medium may be
of recombinant strains, based on the Luria agar and broth aseptically supplemented with glucose, if desired.
formulae described by Miller.1 E. coli is grown to late log phase
in LB Medium. Some plasmid vectors replicate to high copy Principles of the Procedure
numbers and do not require selective amplification. Some Peptone and yeast extract provide nitrogen, carbon, vitamins
vectors do not replicate so freely and need to be selectively (including B vitamins) and certain trace elements. Sodium
chloride provides essential ions. Agar is the solidifying agent.
User Quality Control Formulae
Difco Luria Agar Base, Miller
Identity Specifications
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Difco Luria Agar Base, Miller Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous. Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Solution: 3.05% solution, soluble in purified water Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 0.5 g
upon boiling. Solution is light amber, very Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
slightly to slightly opalescent. Difco Luria Broth Base, Miller
Prepared Appearance: Very light amber, slightly opalescent. Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
Reaction of 3.05% *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
Difco Luria Broth Base, Miller
Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous. Dehydrated Product
Solution: 1.55% solution, soluble in purified 1. Suspend/dissolve the powder in 1 L of purified water:
water. Solution is very light to light Difco Luria Agar Base, Miller 30.5 g;
amber, clear to very slightly opalescent. Difco Luria Broth Base, Miller 15.5 g.
Prepared Appearance: Light to light amber, clear to very Mix thoroughly.
slightly opalescent. 2. Heat the agar medium with frequent agitation and boil for
Reaction of 1.55%
1 minute to completely dissolve the powder.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 45-50C.
4. If desired, aseptically add 10 mL of sterile 20% glucose
Cultural Response
solution and mix thoroughly.
Difco Luria Agar Base, Miller or Luria Broth Base,
Miller
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Prepare the medium with 10 mL sterile 20% glucose solution per label stable, typical control cultures.
directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Procedure
Escherichia coli (K802) 33526 102-3102 (Agar) Good
Consult appropriate references for recommended test proce-
102-103 (Broth) Good dures.1,2
318
 Lysine Iron Agar

Expected Results Availability

Growth is evident in the form of isolated colonies and/or Difco Luria Agar Base, Miller
a confluent lawn on the surface of the agar medium or the Cat. No. 241320 Dehydrated 500 g
211829 Dehydrated 2 kg
appearance of turbidity in the broth medium.
Difco Luria Broth Base, Miller
References COMPF
1. Miller. 1972. Experiments in molecular genetics. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Cat. No. 241420 Dehydrated 500 g
Harbor, N.Y. 241410 Dehydrated 2 kg
2. Sambrook, Fritsch and Maniatis. 1989. Molecular cloning: a laboratory manual, 2nd ed. Cold
Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.
3. Lennox. 1955. Virology 1:190.

Lysine Assay Medium

(See Amino Acid Assay Media)

Lysine Iron Agar

Intended Use Cultures of enteric bacilli that produce hydrogen sulfide cause
Lysine Iron Agar is used for the differentiation of enteric organ- blackening of the medium due to the production of ferrous
isms based on their ability to decarboxylate or deaminate lysine sulfides. Those that produce lysine decarboxylase produce an
and to form hydrogen sulfide. alkaline reaction (purple color) or neutral reaction in the butt
of the medium. Organisms that deaminate the lysine cause the
Summary and Explanation development of a red slant over an acid butt. Gas may be
Edwards and Fife devised Lysine Iron Agar for the detection formed but its formation is often irregular or suppressed.
of Salmonella choleraesuis subsp. arizonae (previously Arizona
arizonae) cultures, especially those that ferment lactose Formulae
rapidly.1 This development followed closely the promulgation Difco Lysine Iron Agar
by Ewing and Edwards of a taxonomic scheme for the Entero- Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g
bacteriaceae in which the principle division and groups within Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
this family were defined and differentiation procedures Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g
described.2 The various criteria for identification of cultures L-Lysine HCl ............................................................. 10.0 g
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.5 g
were summarized by Edwards and Ewing in their treatise Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................... 0.04 g
on the Enterobacteriaceae.3 However, the taxonomy of the Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 0.02 g
Enterobacteriaceae has changed dramatically in recent years.4-6 Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
BBL Lysine Iron Agar
Johnson et al. utilized Lysine Iron Agar and Kligler Iron Agar Approximate Formula* Per Liter
for primary differentiation of various groups of bacteria within Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ....................................... 5.0 g
the family Enterobacteriaceae and a combination of Lysine Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Iron Agar with Triple Sugar Iron Agar for identification of Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g
Salmonella, Shigella and Arizona group organisms from feces.7
L-Lysine .................................................................... 10.0
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.5
g
g L
Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................... 0.04 g
Lysine Iron Agar aids in the differentiation of enteric bacilli on Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 0.02 g
the basis of their ability to decarboxylate lysine, to deaminate Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g
lysine and to produce hydrogen sulfide. It is designed for use *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

with other media (e.g., Triple Sugar Iron Agar) in appropriate

Directions for Preparation from
identification schemes.
Dehydrated Product
Principles of the Procedure 1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
Dextrose serves as a source of fermentable carbohydrate. The Difco Lysine Iron Agar 34.5 g;
pH indicator, bromcresol purple, is changed to a yellow color BBL Lysine Iron Agar 33 g.
at or below pH 5.2 and is purple at or above pH 6.8.8 Ferric Mix thoroughly.
ammonium citrate and sodium thiosulfate are indicators of 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
hydrogen sulfide formation. Lysine is the substrate for use pletely dissolve the powder.
in detecting the enzymes, lysine decarboxylase and lysine
deaminase.

319
 Section III
L Lysine Iron Agar, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Lysine Iron Agar BBL Lysine Iron Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige to greenish beige, free flowing, Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
homogeneous. material.
Solution: 3.45% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 3.3% solution, soluble in purified water
water upon boiling. Solution is reddish upon boiling. Solution is medium to dark,
purple, slightly opalescent. rose purple, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Purple, slightly opalescent. Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, rose purple, clear to
Reaction of 3.45% slightly hazy.
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2 Reaction of 3.3%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2
Cultural Response
Difco Lysine Iron Agar Cultural Response
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures BBL Lysine Iron Agar
and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours. Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
and incubate at 35 2C for 24 hours.
REACTION
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY SLANT/BUTT H2S REACTION
Proteus mirabilis 25933 Good Red/acid ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY SLANT/BUTT H2S

Salmonella choleraesuis Citrobacter freundii 8454 Good K/A, w/ or +

subsp. arizonae 13314 Good Alkaline/alkaline + w/o gas
Salmonella choleraesuis Escherichia coli 25922 Good K/Weak K to K,
subsp.choleraesuis w/ or w/o gas
serotype Typhimurium 14028 Good Alkaline/alkaline + Proteus vulgaris 9484 Good R/A, w/ or
Shigella flexneri 12022 Good Alkaline/acid w/o gas
Alkaline = red purple, no change in color Providencia rustigianii 13159 Good R/A, w/ or
Acid = yellow w/o gas
Red = lysine deaminase
+ H2S = black precipitate Salmonella choleraesuis
H2S = no black precipitate subsp. arizonae 13314 Good K /K, w/ or
w/o gas +
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Paratyphi 9150 Good K/A, w/ or
w/o gas
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhi 19430 Good K/K, w/ or +
w/o gas
A = Acid (yellow)
K = Alkaline (red purple, no change in color)
R = Red (lysine deaminase)
+ H2S = black precipitate
H2S = no black precipitate

Uninoculated Proteus Salmonella

Tube mirabilis typhimurium
ATCC 25933 ATCC 14028

3. Autoclave at 121C for 12 minutes. Procedure

4. Cool tubes in a slanted position to form slants with deep Using an inoculating needle, stab the butt twice then streak
butts. the slant with growth from a pure culture. Incubate tubes
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using with loosened caps for 18-48 hours at 35 2C in an aerobic
stable, typical control cultures. atmosphere.
Triple Sugar Iron Agar slants should be inoculated in parallel
unless results from this medium have already been obtained
to distinguish coliforms from Shigella, for example.
320
 Lysozyme Broth

4. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science
Expected Results Publishing Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
5. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriology,
Lysine decarboxylation is detected in the butt by an alkaline 9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
(purple) reaction. Lysine deamination is detected by a red slant. 6. Farmer. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiol-
ogy, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Hydrogen sulfide production is detected by the formation of 7. Johnson, Kunz, Barron and Ewing. 1966. Appl. Microbiol. 14:212.
8. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
a black precipitate. A negative reaction (purple slant and vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
yellow butt) indicates fermentation of dextrose only.8
Availability
Hydrogen sulfide may not be detected in this medium by
Difco Lysine Iron Agar
organisms that are negative for lysine decarboxylase activity AOAC BAM BS10 CCAM CMPH MCM7 SMD SMWW USDA
since acid production in the butt may suppress its formation.8 Cat. No. 284920 Dehydrated 500 g
For this reason H2S-producing Proteus species do not blacken BBL Lysine Iron Agar

this medium.8 AOAC BAM BS10 CCAM CMPH MCM7 SMD SMWW USDA
Cat. No. 211363 Dehydrated 500 g
References 220952 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
1. Edwards and Fife. 1961. Appl. Microbiol. 9:478. 220953 Prepared Slants Ctn. of 100*
2. Ewing and Edwards. 1960. Int. Bull. Bacteriol. Nomencl. Taxon. 10:1.
*Store at 2-8C.
3. Edwards and Ewing. 1962. Identification of Enterobacteriaceae. Burgess Publishing Co., Minneapolis,
Minn.

Lysozyme Broth Lysozyme Control

Intended Use Procedure
Lysozyme Broth and Lysozyme Control are used in the identi- The organism to be tested should be isolated in pure culture,
fication of Nocardia species based on resistance to lysozyme. Gram stained and examined to determine that morphology is
appropriate for Nocardia species.
Summary and Explanation
Using a sterile inoculating loop or needle, inoculate the
Nocardiosis is a disease of man and animals caused by Nocardia
Lysozyme Broth and Lysozyme Control with fragments of the
species. The disease may resemble tuberculosis if the organism is
culture being tested. Inoculate a control set of broths using a
inhaled or produce granulomatous abscesses if introduced into
known Streptomyces species. The control set indicates whether
tissues at the time of the injury.
the lysozyme is active. Incubate the tubes at 25C for up to
Lysozyme Broth is used with Lysozyme Control to identify 7 days.
Nocardia by determining resistance to the enzyme lysozyme,
indicated by the presence of growth.2 Streptomyces species, Expected Results
which resemble Nocardia morphologically, are inhibited by Nocardia species exhibit growth in both media, indicating
lysozyme.3 resistance to lysozyme. If growth occurs in the control tube
and not in the Lysozyme Broth, the organism is probably not a
Principles of the Procedure Nocardia species. The test is inconclusive if neither tube shows
Enzymatic digest of casein and beef extract provide amino growth.
acids and other nitrogenous substances. Glycerol is a source
of energy. References
Lysozyme is a muramidase that lyses some gram-positive
1. Ajello, Georg, Kaplan and Kaufman. 1963. CDC laboratory manual for medical mycology. PHS
Publication No. 994. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
L
2. Haley and Callaway. 1978. Laboratory methods for medical mycology, 4th ed. Center for Disease
bacteria. Nocardia species are resistant to lysozyme, exhibit- Control, Atlanta, Ga.
3. Koneman, Allen, Janda, Schreckenberger and Winn. 1997. Color atlas and textbook of diagnostic
ing growth in Lysozyme Broth and in the control medium, microbiology, 5th ed., Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, Pa.
while Streptomyces species are susceptible and growth is
inhibited.2 The control medium contains the same nutrients Availability
as lysozyme broth, but without the enzyme to demonstrate BBL Lysozyme Broth
that the test organism is capable of growth in the medium. Cat. No. 297231 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 5 mL Pkg. of 10*
BBL Lysozyme Control

Cat. No. 297232 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 5 mL Pkg. of 10*

*Store at 2-8C.

321
Section III
M M9 Minimal Salts

M9 Minimal Salts, 5
Intended Use for cellular systems. Sodium chloride provides essential ions.
M9 Minimal Salts, 5 is used in preparing M9 Minimal Glucose may be added as a source of carbohydrate. Supple-
Medium which is used for cultivating recombinant strains of menting the medium with magnesium and calcium increases
Escherichia coli. the growth of recombinants.

Summary and Explanation Formula

M9 Minimal Salts, 5 is a 5 concentrate that is diluted to Difco M9 Minimal Salts, 5
a 1 concentration and supplemented with an appropriate Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Disodium Phosphate (anhydrous) ............................. 33.9 g
carbon and energy source, such as dextrose, to provide a Monopotassium Phosphate ...................................... 15.0 g
minimal, chemically defined medium. The medium will support Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.5 g
the growth of wild-type strains of E. coli. M9 Minimal Salts Ammonium Chloride .................................................. 5.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
is useful for maintaining positive selection pressure on plas-
mids coding for the ability to produce essential substances such Directions for Preparation from
as amino acids or vitamins. M9 Minimal Medium is also used Dehydrated Product
to maintain stocks of F-containing bacteria for use with M13. 1. Dissolve 56.4 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
The medium can be supplemented with specific amino acids 2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
or other metabolites, allowing for selection of specific 3. To prepare M9 Minimal Salts Medium, add 200 mL sterile
auxotrophs. M9 Minimal Salts, 5 to 750 mL sterile purified water
cooled to 45-50C, adjusting the final volume to 1 liter.
Principles of the Procedure
4. Aseptically add 20 mL filter-sterilized 20% glucose
Sodium phosphate and potassium phosphate are present as
solution, 2 mL sterile 1.0 M MgSO4 solution and, if
buffering agents. Ammonium chloride is a source of nitrogen
desired, 0.1 mL sterile 1.0 M CaCl2 solution. Mix well.
5. If desired, supplement with amino acids, as appropriate.
User Quality Control 6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Identity Specifications stable, typical control cultures.
Difco M9 Minimal Salts, 5
Dehydrated Appearance: White, free-flowing, homogeneous. Procedure
Solution: 5.64% solution, soluble in purified Consult appropriate references for recommended test proce-
water. Solution is colorless, clear, no dures.1,2
significant precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Colorless, clear, no siginficant precipitate. Expected Results
Reaction of 5.64% Solution
Growth should be evident by the appearance of turbidity.
(5 concentrate) at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2

Cultural Response References

1. Davis, Dibner and Battey. 1986. Basic methods in molecular biology. Elsevier, New York, N.Y.
Difco M9 Minimal Salts, 5

2. Sambrook, Fritsch and Maniatis. 1989. Molecular cloning: a laboratory manual, 2nd ed. Cold
Prepare the medium and dilute to 1x. Supplement with glucose per Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.
label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Availability
Difco M9 Minimal Salts, 5
Escherichia coli (Strain B) 23226 30-300 Good to excellent
Cat. No. 248510 Dehydrated 500 g
Escherichia coli (JM103) 39403 30-300 Good to excellent

M17 Agar M17 Broth

Intended Use Summary and Explanation
M17 Agar is used for isolating and enumerating lactic strepto- Lactic streptococci are acid-producing bacteria. They are
cocci in yogurt, cheese starters and other dairy products. nutritionally fastidious and require complex culture media
for optimum growth. One study showed that in a synthetic
M17 Broth is used for isolating lactic streptococci from
medium, all strains had an obligate requirement for at least
yogurt, cheese starters and other dairy products.
six amino acids and three vitamins.1 These homofermentative
lactic streptococci produce large amounts of acid and, in a
322
 M17 Agar, cont.
M
culture medium without an adequate buffering system, the pH Principles of the Procedure
decreases and adversely affects growth. Lowrie and Pearce2 M17 Agar and M17 Broth contain peptones and meat derivatives
developed M16 Medium but it lacked a strong buffering as sources of carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Yeast
system. Terzaghi and Sandine3 worked with M16 Medium and extract supplies B-complex vitamins which stimulate bacterial
demonstrated that the rapid drop in pH that accompanies growth. Disodium--glycerophosphate buffers the medium as
lactic streptococcal growth can adversely affect colony size and acid is produced from fermentation of lactose. Ascorbic acid
phage plaque formation. They modified M16 Medium using stimulates growth of lactic streptococci. Magnesium sulfate
disodium--glycerophosphate as a buffer and called it M17. provides essential ions for growth. Agar is the solidifying agent
Shankar and Davies4 found that disodium--glycerophosphate in M17 Agar.
in M17 Broth suppressed Lactobacillus bulgaricus and
selectively isolated Streptococcus thermophilus from yogurt. Formulae
Difco M17 Agar
Similar results were achieved using M17 Broth solidified with
Approximate Formula* Per 950 mL
agar. The International Dairy Federation recommends M17 Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
Agar for isolating S. thermophilus from yogurt.5 M17 Agar is Soy Peptone ............................................................... 5.0 g
a standard methods medium for isolating lactic streptococci.6 Beef Extract ................................................................ 5.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 2.5 g
Ascorbic Acid ............................................................. 0.5 g
User Quality Control Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.25 g
Disodium--glycerophosphate ................................. 19.0 g
Identity Specifications Agar ......................................................................... 11.0 g
Difco M17 Agar Difco M17 Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige to medium tan, free-flowing, Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
homogeneous. *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Solution: 48.25 g soluble in 950 mL purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light- Directions for Preparation from
medium to medium amber, very Dehydrated Product
slightly to slightly opalescent.
1. Suspend the powder in 950 mL of purified water.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, very slightly
to slightly opalescent, no significant Difco M17 Agar 48.25 g;
precipitate. Difco M17 Broth 37.25 g.
Reaction of 48.25 g/950 mL Mix thoroughly.
at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
Difco M17 Broth

pletely dissolve the powder.
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige to medium tan, free-flowing, 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 50C.
homogeneous.
4. Add 50 mL sterile 10% lactose solution and mix well.
Solution: 37.25 g soluble in 950 mL purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light- 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
medium to medium amber, clear to stable, typical control cultures.
very slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light medium to medium amber, Procedure
clear to very slightly opalescent, no
significant precipitate.
See appropriate references for specific procedures.
Reaction of 37.25 g/950 mL
at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2 Expected Results
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Cultural Response
Difco M17 Agar or M17 Broth References
Prepare the medium per label directions with the addition of lactose. 1. Reiter and Oram. 1962. J. Dairy Res. 29:63.
Inoculate and incubate for 40-48 hours; Lactococcus lactis subsp. 2. Lowrie and Pearce. 1971. J. Dairy Sci. Technol. 6:166.
3. Terzaghi and Sandine. 1975. Appl. Microbiol. 29:807.
cremoris at 30 2C and the remaining organisms at 35 2C. 4. Shankar and Davies. 1977. J. Soc. Dairy Tech. 30:28.
5. International Dairy Federation. 1981. Identification and enumeration of microorganisms in
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY fermented milks. Joint IDF/ISO/AOAC Group E44.
6. Vedamuthu, Raccach, Glatz, Seitz and Reddy. 1992. In Vanderzant and Splittstoesser (ed.),
Lactobacillus delbrueckii Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods, 3rd ed. American Public
subsp. bulgaricus 11842 102-103 None to poor Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Lactococcus lactis
subsp. cremoris 19257 102-103 Good Availability
Lactococcus lactis Difco M17 Agar
subsp. cremoris 9625 102-103 Good
COMPF
Streptococcus thermophilus 19258 102-103 Good Cat. No. 218571 Dehydrated 500 g
Difco M17 Broth

Cat. No. 218561 Dehydrated 500 g

323
Section III
M Bacto M Broth

Bacto M Broth
Intended Use screening procedures for the presence of Salmonella and
Bacto M Broth is used for cultivating Salmonella in foods and positive results must be confirmed by culture.
feeds by the accelerated enrichment serology (ES) procedure.
Principles of the Procedure
Summary and Explanation Yeast extract is a source of B-complex vitamins. Peptone
M Broth, prepared according to the formula of Sperber and provides organic nitrogen. D-Mannose and sodium citrate are
Diebel,1 contains all the nutrients necessary for good growth fermentation energy sources. Mannose prevents fimbrial
and flagella development of Salmonella. agglutination.1 Sodium chloride helps maintain osmotic
equilibrium, while dipotassium phosphate acts as a buffer. The
Fantasia, Sperber and Deibel2 compared the enrichment serology
inorganic salts stimulate bacterial growth. Polysorbate 80 is a
(ES) procedure with the traditional procedure that was outlined
surfactant and dispersing agent.
in the Bacteriological Analytical Manual3 (BAM) and reported
excellent agreement between the two. They found the ES Formula
procedure not only to be faster and less complicated but also Bacto M Broth
as accurate and sensitive as the BAM procedure. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
M Broth also conforms to the testing standards recommended Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 12.5 g
by the Compendium of Methods for the Microbiological D-Mannose ................................................................ 2.0 g
Examination of Foods4 (APHA) for the isolation and identifi- Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 5.0 g
cation of foodborne Salmonella. Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 5.0 g
Both monoclonal and polyclonal enzyme immunoassay (EIA) Manganese Chloride .................................................. 0.14 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.8 g
methods have been described in Official Methods of Analysis Ferrous Sulfate ........................................................... 0.04 g
of AOAC International5 using M Broth. These methods are Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 0.75 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Bacto M Broth
Dehydrated appearance: Beige, homogeneous with a tendency to
clump.
Solution: 3.62% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
amber, clear to very slightly opalescent,
may have a slight precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to very slightly opal-
escent, may have a slight precipitate.
Reaction of 3.62%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2

Cultural Response
Bacto M Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 18-24 hours.
Uninoculated Salmonella choleraesuis
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY Tube ATCC 12011
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis serotype
Choleraesuis var. kunzendorf 12011 102-103 Good
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good

324
 MI Agar
M
Directions for Preparation from 7. Add 0.1 mL pooled Salmonella H Antiserum to one of the
Dehydrated Product Kahn tubes (above). Add 0.1 mL 0.85% NaCl solution to
1. Suspend 36.2 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix the other tube. Shake the tubes gently. Incubate in a 50C
thoroughly. water bath for 1.5 hours.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder. Expected Results
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Agglutination in the Kahn tube containing antiserum indicates
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using the presence of Salmonella. Agglutination in the Kahn tube
stable, typical control cultures. containing 0.85% NaCl solution (control tube) indicates a
rough culture which should be streaked for isolation, passed
Procedure through Motility GI Medium to enhance flagella and then
1. Prepare a 10% suspension of the test sample in Lactose retested with pooled antiserum.
Broth. Incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours.
2. Transfer 1 mL of the above preenrichment culture to 9 mL Alternative Testing Procedures
of Selenite Cystine Broth and 1 mL to 9 mL of Tetrathionate Refer to Official Methods of Analysis of AOAC International5
Broth. Incubate both enrichment media at 35 2C for 24 for screening procedures using enzyme immunoassay or DNA
hours. hybridization to detect Salmonella antigen in test samples.
3. Inoculate one 10 mL tube of M Broth, tempered to 35C,
with one drop from each of the above cultures. Incubate at
References
1. Sperber and Deibel. 1969. Appl. Microbiol. 17:533.
35 2C for 6-8 hours. 2. Fantasia, Sperber and Deibel. 1969. Appl. Microbiol. 17:540.
3. Bacteriological Analytical Manual, 2nd ed. 1969. USDHEW, Washington, D.C.
4. Prepare a formalin-salt solution by adding 4.2 g of NaCl 4. Andrews, Flowers, Silliker and Bailey. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.). Compendium of methods for
the microbiological examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washing-
and 3 mL of formalin to 100 mL of purified water. Place ton, D.C.
5. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC Interna-
one drop in each of two Kahn tubes. tional, Gaithersburg, Md.
5. Carefully insert a pipette about 1 inch below the surface of
the M Broth culture and transfer 0.85 mL of culture to Availability
each of the above Kahn tubes containing formalin-salt Bacto M Broth
solution. AOAC COMPF
6. Prepare a pooled antiserum by combining together 0.5 mL Cat. No. 294020 Dehydrated 500 g*
294010 Dehydrated 2 kg*
each of rehydrated Salmonella H Antiserum Poly D *Store at 2-8C.
and Salmonella H Antiserum z6 (Salmonella H Antisera
Spicer-Edwards Set) in 11.5 mL of 0.85% NaCl.

MI Agar
Intended Use indicator of fecal contamination and the possible presence of
MI Agar* is a chromogenic/fluorogenic medium used to enteric pathogens.
detect and enumerate Escherichia coli and total coliforms in Chromogens or fluorogens have been used for many years
drinking water by the membrane filtration technique. It to detect and identify total coliforms (TC) and E. coli. Some
conforms with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA) methods use liquid media in a multiple-tube-fermentation
Approved Method 1604: Total Coliforms and Escherichia coli (MTF) test, a presence-absence (PA) format or other tube tests.
in Water by Membrane Filtration Using a Simultaneous Agar media are also used for direct plating or membrane
Detection Technique (MI Medium). filtration (MF) technology. However, standard MF technology
* U.S. Patent No. 6, 063, 590. Manufactured under license. Commercialization of dehydrated culture
medium as prepared medium is prohibited.
for the detection of TC and fecal coliforms requires the use of
several different types of media and two different incubation
Summary and Explanation temperatures.1
Coliform bacteria are species that inhabit the intestines of The newest technology developed by the USEPA when using
warm-blooded animals or occur naturally in soil, vegetation MI Agar for testing water is a single membrane technique where
and water. They are usually found in fecally-polluted water no membrane filter transfers are required.1-4 The medium
and are often associated with disease outbreaks. Although these is named after the two enzyme substrates included in the
bacteria are not usually pathogenic themselves, their presence formulation: the fluorogen, 4-Methylumbelliferyl--
in drinking water indicates the possible presence of other D-galactopyranoside (MUGal) and a chromogen, Indoxyl--
pathogens. E. coli is one species in this group of coliform D-glucuronide (IBDG). MI Agar can simultaneously detect and
bacteria. Since it is always found in feces, it is a more direct enumerate both TC and E. coli in water samples in 24 hours

325
Section III
M MI Agar, cont.

Ambient Ultraviolet
User Quality Control Light Light

Identity Specifications
Difco MI Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.65% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light to
medium tan, very slightly to slightly opal-
escent, without significant precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Light tan, clear to very slightly opales-
cent, without significant precipitate.
Upon removal from 2-8C storage, plates
may exhibit a crystal precipitate that
disappears upon warming to room tem-
perature. This is a typical characteristic
of the medium and is acceptable.
Reaction of 3.65%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.95 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco MI Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
0.5C for approximately 20-24 hours. Count all blue or indigo colonies
under ambient light. Expose MI Agar plates to long-wave ultraviolet light
(366 nm) and count all fluorescent colonies. Escherichia coli
ATCC 25922
INOCULUM COLONY COLOR/ and Coliform
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY FLUORESCENCE
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 20-80 Good Tan/blue-white
Escherichia coli 25922 20-80 Good Blue/blue-green
Proteus mirabilis 43071 20-80 Marked to Tan/none
complete inhibition
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 20-80 Good Tan/none

or less based on their specific enzyme activities. MI Agar capabilities. Sodium lauryl sulfate and sodium desoxycholate are
detects the presence of the bacterial enzymes -galactosidase selective against gram-positive bacteria. E. coli that produce the
and -glucuronidase produced by TC and E. coli, respectively. enzyme -D-glucuronidase cleave the chromogen indoxyl--D-
glucuronide (IBDG) to form a blue- or indigo-colored compound.
MI Agar is approved for use by certified drinking water labo-
The -galactosidase produced by total coliforms cleaves the
ratories for microbial analysis of potable water. Other uses
fluorogen 4-methylumbelliferyl--D-galactopyranoside (MUGal),
include recreational, surface or marine water, bottled water,
producing 4-methylumbelliferone, a fluorescent compound when
groundwater, well water, treatment plant effluents, water from
exposed to long-wave UV light (366 nm). Agar is the solidifying
drinking water distribution line, drinking water source water
agent.
and possibly foods.5
As referenced in USEPA method 1604, this method has a Formula
detection limit of one E. coli and/or one total coliform per Difco MI Agar
sample volume or dilution tested.5 The false-positive and false- Approximate Formula* Per Liter
negative rates for E. coli are both 4.3%.5 Specificity for E. coli Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 5.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
is 95.7% and for total coliforms is 93.1%.5 The single lab D-Lactose ................................................................... 1.0 g
recovery of E. coli is 97.9% of the heterotrophic plate count 4-Methylumbelliferyl--D-galactopyranoside
(pour plate) and 115% of the R2A spread plate count.5 For (MUGal) ..................................................................... 0.1 g
Indoxyl--D-glucuronide (IBDG) .................................. 0.32 g
Klebsiella pneumoniae and Enterobacter aerogenes recoveries are Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 7.5 g
87.5% and 85.7% of the heterotrophic plate count and 89.3% Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 3.3 g
and 85.8% of the R2A spread plate method, respectively.5 Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
Sodium Lauryl Sulfate ................................................ 0.2 g
Sodium Desoxycholate ............................................... 0.1 g
Principles of the Procedure Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
MI Agar contains peptone as a source of nitrogen, carbon and *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

amino acids. Yeast extract provides trace elements, vitamins

and amino acids. Lactose is a fermentable carbohydrate and
carbon source. Sodium chloride maintains osmotic equilibrium.
Monopotassium and dipotassium phosphates offer buffering

326
 MI Agar, cont.
M
Directions for Preparation from 2. Water samples containing colloidal or suspended particulate
Dehydrated Product material can clog the membrane filter, preventing adequate
1. Suspend 36.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. filtration or causing the spread of bacterial colonies. This
Mix thoroughly. could interfere with identification of the target colonies.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to However, the blue E. coli colonies can often be counted on
completely dissolve the powder. plates with heavy particulate matter or high concentrations
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes and cool in a 50C water of total bacteria.1
bath. 3. The presence of some lateral diffusion of blue color away
4. Add 5 mL of a freshly prepared 1 mg/mL filter-sterilized from the target E. coli colonies can affect enumeration and
solution of cefsulodin per liter of tempered agar medium colony picking on plates with high concentrations of
(final concentration of 5 g/mL). E. coli. This problem should not affect filters with low
5. Dispense 5 mL amounts into 9 50 mm or 15 60 mm counts, such as those obtained with drinking water or
plates and allow to solidify. properly diluted samples.1
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 4. Colonies that are tiny, flat or peaked pinpoint blue, with a
stable, typical control cultures. size of less than 0.5 mm in diameter on filters containing
less than 200 colonies may be due to species other than
NOTE: Upon removal from 2-8C storage, plates may E. coli. These colonies occur occasionally in low numbers
exhibit a crystal precipitate that disappears upon warming and should be excluded from the count of E. coli colonies,
to room temperature. This is a typical characteristic of the which are usually much larger in size (1 - 3 mm in diameter).
medium and is acceptable. The small colonies have never been observed in the absence
of typical E. coli, but, if they should occur, the sample should
Procedure not be considered E. coli-positive unless at least one colony
1. Collect and prepare water samples in accordance to
has been verified by another method.1
recommended guidelines.6,7
5. Bright green, fluorescent, non-blue colonies, observed along
2. Test recommended sample volumes following the membrane
with the typical blue/white or blue/green fluorescent
filtration procedure described in Standard Methods for
TC colonies, may be species other than coliforms. These
the Examination of Water and Wastewater.6 Select sample
colonies generally occur in low numbers ( 5%) and can
volumes to produce 20-80 colonies on the membrane filter.
usually be distinguished from the total coliforms. An
3. After sample has been filtered, aseptically remove membrane
increase in the number of bright green colonies may
filter from filter base and roll it onto MI Agar to avoid the
indicate an unusual sample population or a breakdown of
formation of bubbles between the membrane and the agar
the cefsulodin in the medium.1
surface.
6. Minimize the exposure of MI Agar to light before and
4. Invert inoculated plates and incubate for 20-24 hours at
during incubation, as light may destroy the chromogen.
35 0.5C.
5. After incubation, count and record the number of blue or References
indigo colonies under normal/ambient light. 1. Brenner, Rankin, Roybal, Stelma, Scarpino and Dufour. 1993. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 59:3534.
2. Brenner, Rankin and Sivaganesan. 1996. J. Microbiol. Methods 27:111.
6. Expose each MI Agar plate to long-wave ultraviolet light 3. Brenner, Rankin, Sivaganesan and Scarpino. 1996. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 62:203.
4. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 2000. Membrane filter method for the simultaneous detec-
(366 nm), and count all fluorescent colonies. Record the tion of total coliforms and Escherichia coli in drinking water. Publication EPA 600-R-00-013.
data. Office of Research and Development, USEPA, Cincinnati, Ohio.
5. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 2002. Method 1604: Total coliforms and Escherichia coli
7. Calculate and report the number of E. coli and total coliform in water by membrane filtration using a simultaneous detection technique (MI medium). Publica-
tion EPA-821-R-02-024. USEPA Office of Water (4303T), Washington, DC.
colonies per 100 mL of sample. 6. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
7. ASTM International. 2002. Annual book of ASTM standards. Water and environmental technology.
Expected Results 8.
ASTM International, West Conshohocken, Pa.
Bordner, Winter and Scarpino (ed.). 1978. Microbiological methods for monitoring the environment:
E. coli produces blue or indigo colonies under normal/ambient water and wastes. Publication EPA-600/8-78-017. Environmental Monitoring and Support Labora-
tory, Office of Research and Development, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, Ohio.
light. Total coliforms produce blue/green fluorescence (E. coli),
blue/white fluorescence (total coliforms other than E. coli) and Availability
blue/green with fluorescent edges (also E. coli). Add any blue, Difco MI Agar
non-fluorescent colonies (if any) found on the same plate to EPA
the TC count.1 Cat. No. 214882 Dehydrated 100 g
214883 Dehydrated 500 g
Refer to the USEPA Microbiology Methods Manual, Part II,
BBL MI Agar
Section C, 3.5 for general counting rules.8
EPA
Cat. No. 214986 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Limitations of the Procedure 214985 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
1. Choose a water sample size that will result in 20-80 colonies *Store at 2-8C.

per filter.

327
Section III
M MIL Medium

MIL Medium
Intended Use Formula
MIL Medium is used for differentiating Enterobacteriaceae Difco MIL Medium
based on motility, lysine decarboxylation, lysine deamination Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
and indole production. Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Summary and Explanation L-Lysine HCl ............................................................. 10.0 g
MIL (Motility-Indole-Lysine) Medium, prepared according to Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g
the formula of Reller and Mirrett,1 is a single culture medium Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.5 g
Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 0.02 g
that provides four differentiating biochemical reactions. When Agar ........................................................................... 2.0 g
used in conjunction with Triple Sugar Iron Agar (TSI) and Urea *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Agar, as many as nine reactions are provided. This combination

enables reliable initial identification of Enterobacteriaceae.2,3 Directions for Preparation from
Extensive testing of 890 enteric cultures by Reller and Mirrett1 Dehydrated Product
gave essentially the same results with MIL Medium as with 1. Suspend 36.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
the standard motility, indole and lysine decarboxylase (Moeller) thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
test media.
completely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Principles of the Procedure 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Peptones provide the carbon and nitrogen sources required stable, typical control cultures.
for good growth of a wide variety of organisms. Yeast extract
provides vitamins and cofactors required for growth. Lysine Procedure
hydrochloride is present as a substrate to detect lysine decar- 1. Using an inoculating needle, stab tubes (13 100 mm
boxylase or lysine deaminase activity. Dextrose is an energy screw-capped tubes containing 5 mL) with growth from an
source. Ferric ammonium citrate is an H2S indicator. Bromcresol 18-24 hour pure culture.
purple is a pH indicator. Agar is the solidifying agent. 2. Incubate the tubes at 35 2C for 18-24 hours.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco MIL Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.65% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is reddish-
purple, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Reddish purple, clear, semisolid.
Reaction of 3.65%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.6 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco MIL Medium
Prepare the medium per label directions. Stab inoculate using fresh
cultures and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. After reading the
lysine decarboxylase, motility and lysine deaminase reactions, add Indole
Reagent Kovacs to determine the indole reaction.
LYSINE LYSINE INDOLE
ORGANISM ATCC DECARBOXYLASE MOTILITY DEAMINASE PRODUCTION Uninoculated Escherichia Shigella
Escherichia coli 25922 + + + Tube coli flexneri
ATCC 25922 ATCC 12022
Providencia alcalifaciens 9886 + + All with Indole Reagent
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Enteritidis 13076 + +
Shigella flexneri 12022

328
 MIO Medium
M
3. After incubation, examine tubes for evidence of lysine Positive and negative reactions are based on 90% or more
deaminase, motility, lysine decarboxylase reactions and, occurrences. When an aberrant reaction occurs, subcultures
after addition of Indole Reagent Kovacs, indole production. should be plated on differential media to ensure the purity
of the culture.
Expected Results
Lysine deaminase is indicated by a red or red-brown color in Limitations of the Procedure
the top centimeter of the medium. 1. Do not add Indole Reagent Kovacs until the final lysine
deaminase, lysine decarboxylase and motility results have
Motility is indicated by a clouding of the medium or by growth
been interpreted.
extending from the inoculation line.
2. Occasionally, the indole test produces false-negative or
Lysine decarboxylase is indicated by a purple color throughout falsely weak reactions.4
the medium. This color may vary in intensity and may be
bleached out to a pale light color due to reduction of the References
indicator. Lysine-negative cultures produce a yellow medium 1. Reller and Mirrett. 1975. J. Clin. Microbiol. 2:247.
2. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken. (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
that may be purple or red on the top. Tubes that show a purple American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey and Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby Inc.,
reaction with a red color on top should be incubated for a St. Louis, Mo.
4. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
longer period of time. vol.1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.

After examining the medium for lysine deaminase, motility

and lysine decarboxylase reactions, add 3 or 4 drops of Indole
Availability
Difco MIL Medium
Reagent Kovacs (Cat. No. 261185) to the top of each tube.
Cat. No. 218041 Dehydrated 500 g
The appearance of a pink to red color in the reagent is inter-
Difco /BBL Indole Reagent

preted as a positive indole test.
Cat. No. 261185 Droppers, 0.5 mL Ctn. of 50

MIO Medium Motility Indole Ornithine Medium

Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Motility Indole Ornithine (MIO) Medium is used to demon- MIO Medium was formulated by Ederer and Clark1 and
strate motility, indole production and ornithine decarboxylase Oberhofer and Hajkowski2 for detection of motility, indole and
activity for the differentiation of Enterobacteriaceae. ornithine decarboxylase production in one tube as an aid in
the identification of members of the Enterobacteriaceae family.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco MIO Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.1% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is purple, clear
to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Purple, slightly opalescent, semi-solid.
Reaction of 3.1%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco MIO Medium
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
using an inoculating needle and incubate with caps loosened at 35
2C for 24-48 hours. Detect the presence of indole by the addition of
3-4 drops of Kovacs Reagent.
ORGANISM ATCC MOTILITY INDOLE ORNITHINE
Uninoculated Enterobacter Escherichia coli
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 + + Tube aerogenes ATCC 25922
ATCC 13048
Escherichia coli 25922 + + +
Klebsiella pneumoniae
subsp. pneumoniae 13883
Proteus mirabilis 25933 + +

329
Section III
M MIO Medium, cont.

Principles of the Procedure from a primary isolation plate or other pure culture. Incubate
Peptones, yeast extract and dextrose provide amino acids and all tubes for 18-24 hours at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere.
other nitrogenous and carbonaceous substances, vitamins
and minerals essential for bacterial metabolism. Motility can Expected Results
be read because of the semi-solid consistency of the medium. Read motility and decarboxylase activity prior to the addition
Organisms that possess the enzyme tryptophanase degrade of the reagent for the detection of indole production.
the amino acid tryptophan to indolepyruvic acid, from which 1. Motility is indicated by growth extending from the line of
indole can be formed through deamination.3 When ornithine inoculation. Nonmotile organisms grow only along the line
decarboxylase is present, the ornithine is decarboxylated to of inoculation.
putrescine which causes a rise in the pH and corresponding 2. Decarboxylation of ornithine is indicated by the develop-
color change of the bromcresol purple from yellow to purple. ment of a turbid purple to a faded yellow-purple color. A
negative reaction is indicated by a yellow color.
Formula 3. Indole production is indicated by the formation of a pink
Difco MIO Medium to red color after the addition of three or four drops of
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Kovacs reagent to the surface of the medium and gentle
Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g shaking. A negative reaction is indicated by the develop-
Tryptone ................................................................... 10.0 g ment of a yellow color.
L-Ornithine HCl .......................................................... 5.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g Refer to appropriate texts for typical reactions produced by
Agar ........................................................................... 2.0 g various members of the Enterobacteriaceae.4-6
Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 0.02 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
References
Directions for Preparation from 1. Ederer and Clark. 1970. Appl. Microbiol. 2:849.
2. Oberhofer and Hajkowski. 1970. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 54:720.
Dehydrated Product 3. MacFaddin. 2000. Biochemical tests for identification of medical bacteria, 3rd ed. Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
1. Suspend 31 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix 4. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science
Publishing Co., New York, N.Y.
thoroughly. 5. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriology,
9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 6. Farmer. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
completely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Availability
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Difco MIO Medium
stable, typical control cultures. BAM
Cat. No. 273520 Dehydrated 500 g
Procedure BBL Motility Indole Ornithine Medium

To prepare the stored medium for use in motility studies, loosen BAM
caps, heat the medium to boiling and cool to room tempera- Cat. No. 221517 Prepared Deeps (K Tubes), 5 mL Pkg. of 10*
ture prior to inoculation. Inoculate tubes of medium by a single 221518 Prepared Deeps (K Tubes), 5 mL Ctn. of 100*
*Store at 2-8C.
stab to 1/4 inch from the bottom of the tube using growth

MR-VP Medium MR-VP Broth

Intended Use The smaller amount of acid produced by Klebsiella pneumoniae
MR-VP Medium and MR-VP Broth (Methyl Red-Voges and Enterobacter aerogenes is converted to acetoin resulting
Proskauer Medium/Broth, also known as Buffered Peptone- in an alkaline reaction (negative methyl red test).
Glucose Broth) are used for the differentiation of bacteria by In the Voges-Proskauer test, Reagent A (5% [w/v] alpha-naph-
means of the methyl red and Voges-Proskauer reactions. thol in absolute alcohol) contains a catalyst enhancing
the formation of specific metabolic products that form a red
Summary and Explanation complex upon the addition of Reagent B (40% [w/v] potassium
Voges and Proskauer, in the latter part of the 19th century, hydroxide in purified water).
reported the initial observations regarding the production of a
red color after the addition of potassium hydroxide to specific MR-VP Medium/Broth was developed to enable both the MR
culture media in which various organisms had grown.1 and the VP tests to be performed in the same medium, although
in different tubes or on aliquots from the same tube.
Clark and Lubs,2 in 1915, found that the addition of methyl
red to cultures of Escherichia coli resulted in a red color due to
the high acidity produced during the fermentation of dextrose.

330
 MR-VP Medium, cont.
M
User Quality Control
NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco MR-VP Medium BBL MR-VP Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Very light to light beige, free-flowing, Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
homogeneous. material.
Solution: 1.7% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 1.7% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light amber, clear. water. Solution is pale to light, yellow
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear. to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 1.7% Prepared Appearance: Pale to light, yellow to tan, clear to
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2 slightly hazy.
Reaction of 1.7%
Cultural Response Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2
Difco MR-VP Medium
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
Cultural Response
and incubate at 35 2C for 40-48 hours. BBL MR-VP Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate two sets of tubes
METHYL VOGES-
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY RED PROSKAUER
(3 mL, Voges-Proskauer and 5 mL, Methyl Red) with fresh cultures and
incubate at 35 2C for 48 hours (3 mL) and 5 days (5 mL).
Enterbacter aerogenes 13048 Good +
(yellow) (red) METHYL VOGES-
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY RED PROSKAUER
Escherichia coli 25922 Good +
(red) (no change) Citrobacter freundii 8454 Good +
Klebsiella pneumoniae (red) (no change)
subsp. pneumoniae 23357 Good + Enterbacter aerogenes 13048 Good +
(yellow) (red) (yellow) (red)
Escherichia coli 25922 Good +
(red) (no change)
Klebsiella pneumoniae
subsp. pneumoniae 33495 Good +
(yellow) (red)

Principles of the Procedure Directions for Preparation from

Methyl red-positive organisms produce high levels of acid Dehydrated Product
during fermentation of dextrose, overcome the phosphate 1. Dissolve 17 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
buffer system and produce a red color upon the addition of thoroughly.
the methyl red pH indicator. 2. If necessary, heat slightly to dissolve.
In the Voges-Proskauer test, the red color produced by 3. Dispense and autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
the addition of potassium hydroxide to cultures of certain 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
microbial species is due to the ability of the organisms to stable, typical control cultures.
produce a neutral end product, acetoin (acetylmethylcarbinol),
from the fermentation of dextrose.3 The acetoin is oxidized in Procedure
the presence of oxygen and alkali to produce a red color.3 This Using a light inoculum, inoculate tubes of MR-VP media with
is a positive Voges-Proskauer reaction. 18- to 24-hour pure cultures. Incubate tubes aerobically at
35 2C for a minimum of 48 hours but preferably for 5 days.
Formulae Prepare the methyl red indicator by dissolving 0.1 g of methyl
Difco MR-VP Medium red in 300 mL of 95% ethyl alcohol. Add sufficient purified
Approximate Formula* Per Liter water to make 500 mL.
Buffered Peptone ....................................................... 7.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 5.0 g After the appropriate incubation period, aseptically remove
Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g
aliquots (1 mL for the VP test) of the medium and conduct the
BBL MR-VP Broth following tests:
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 3.5 g 1. Methyl Red Test Add 5 drops of methyl red indicator to an
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 3.5 g aliquot of the broth. Interpret the color result immediately.
Potassium Phosphate ................................................. 5.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g 2. Voges-Proskauer Test Empty the contents (15 drops) from
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. the reagent A dropper and 5 drops from the reagent B
dropper into 1 mL of broth culture. Shake well after the
addition of each reagent to aerate the sample.
331
Section III
M MR-VP Medium, cont.

3. Most members of the family Enterobacteriaceae give

either a positive MR test or a positive VP test. However,
certain organisms such as Hafnia alvei and Proteus mirabilis
may give a positive result for both tests.
4. Incubation time for the Methyl Red test cannot be shortened
by increasing the dextrose concentration in the medium or by
heavily inoculating the broth.7
5. Incubate MR-negative tests for more than 48 hours and
test again.
6. Read the VP test at 48 hours. Increased incubation may
produce acid conditions in the broth that will interfere with
reading the results.7
7. VP reagents must be added in the order and the amounts
specified or a weak-positive or false-negative reaction
may occur. A weak-positive reaction may be masked by a
Uninoculated Enterobacter Escherichia coli copper-like color which may form due to the reaction of
Tube aerogenes ATCC 25922

ATCC 13048 KOH and -naphthol.7
MR-VP Medium 8. Read the VP test within 1 hour of adding the reagents. The
KOH and -naphthol may react to form a copper-like color,
causing a potential false-positive interpretation.7
9. Due to the possible presence of acetoin, diacetyl or related
substances in certain raw materials,8 the use of media low
in these substances (such as MR-VP media) is recommended
for this test.

References
1. Voges and Proskauer. 1898. Z. Hyg. 28:20.
2. Clark and Lubs. 1915. J. Infect. Dis. 17:160.
3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. I. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
4. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science
Publishing Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
5. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriology,
9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
6. Farmer. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
Enterobacter Enterobacter Escherichia coli Escherichia coli 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
aerogenes aerogenes ATCC 25922 ATCC 25922 7. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1 American Society for
ATCC 13048 ATCC 13048 MR Test VP Test Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
MR Test VP Test 8. Barritt. 1936. J. Pathol. 42:441.

Availability
Expected Results Difco MR-VP Medium
1. Methyl Red Test AOAC BAM COMPF ISO SMD SMWW USDA

a. Positive red color at surface of the medium. Cat. No. 216300 Dehydrated 500 g

b. Negative yellow color at surface of the medium. BBL MR-VP Broth

2. Voges-Proskauer Test AOAC BAM COMPF ISO SMD SMWW USDA

Cat. No. 211383 Dehydrated 500 g
A positive reaction is indicated by the development of a 221667 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10
distinct red color which occurs within 5 minutes. 221668 Prepared Tubes Ctn. of 100

Certain species within Enterobacteriaceae genera may react Difco/BBL Voges-Proskauer Reagent A
differently or give variable results. Consult appropriate texts Cat. No. 261192 Droppers Ctn. of 50
for reactions of specific species.3-6 Difco /BBL Voges-Proskauer Reagent B

Cat. No. 261193 Droppers Ctn. of 50

Limitations of the Procedure
1. Results of the MR and VP tests need to be used in conjunc-
tion with other biochemical tests to differentiate genus and
species within the Enterobacteriaceae.
2. A precipitate may form in the potassium hydroxide reagent
solution. This precipitate has not been shown to reduce the
effectiveness of the reagent.

332
 MYP Agar
M
MYP Agar
Antimicrobic Vial P
Intended Use colonies that are yellow. Bacteria that produce lecithinase
MYP Agar is used with Egg Yolk Enrichment 50% and Antimi- hydrolyze the lecithin and a zone of white precipitate forms
crobic Vial P for enumerating Bacillus cereus from foods. around the colonies. B. cereus is typically mannitol-negative
(pink-red colonies) and lecithinase-positive (zone of precipitate
Summary and Explanation around the colonies).
Mossel et al.1 formulated Mannitol-Egg Yolk-Polymyxin
Formulae
(MYP) Agar to isolate and enumerate Bacillus cereus from
Difco MYP Agar
foods. This medium differentiates B. cereus from other bacteria
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
based on its resistance to polymyxin, lack of mannitol fermen- Beef Extract ................................................................ 1.0 g
tation and presence of lecithinase.2,3 B. cereus is commonly Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
found in nature, on vegetables and in some processed foods.4 D-Mannitol ............................................................... 10.0 g
Under favorable circumstances the microorganism grows to Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 10.0 g
Phenol Red ............................................................... 25.0 mg
sufficient numbers and causes gastrointestinal illness.4 Out- Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
breaks of foodborne illness have been associated with boiled
Difco Antimicrobic Vial P
and cooked rice, cooked meats and cooked vegetables. 5
Approximately 30,000 units polymyxin B per vial.
MYP Agar is a recommended medium for testing foods.4-6 *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Principles of the Procedure Directions for Preparation from

MYP Agar contains beef extract and peptone as sources of Dehydrated Product
carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. D-Mannitol is the Difco MYP Agar
carbohydrate source. Phenol red is the pH indicator. Agar is 1. Suspend 46 g of the powder in 900 mL of purified water.
the solidifying agent. Egg Yolk Enrichment 50% provides Mix thoroughly.
lecithin. Antimicrobic Vial P is polymyxin B which inhibits the 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
growth of most other bacteria. pletely dissolve the powder.
Bacteria that ferment mannitol produce acid products and form 3. Dispense 225 mL into 500 mL flasks.

Uninoculated Bacillus subtilis

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 6633

Identity Specifications
Difco MYP Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Pink, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 46 g soluble in 900 mL purified water
upon boiling. Solution is red, slightly
opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Red, very slightly to slightly opalescent
without significant precipitate.
Reaction of 46 g/900 mL
at 25C: pH 7.2 0.1
Difco Antimicrobic Vial P

Dehydrated Appearance: White cake or powder.

Cultural Response
Difco MYP Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Supplement with Egg Yolk
Enrichment 50% and Antimicrobic Vial P. Inoculate and incubate at 30
2C for 18-48 hours. Lecithinase reaction is read as a zone of precipitate.
Colonies that ferment mannitol are yellow.
INOCULUM MANNITOL LECITHINASE
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY FERMENTATION REACTION Bacillus cereus
Bacillus cereus 13061 30-300 Good + ATCC 13061
Bacillus subtilis 6633 30-300 Good +
Pseudomonas
aeruginosa 27853 103-2103 Inhibition

333
Section III
M MYP Agar, cont.

5. Bennett and Belay. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiological
4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 45-50C. examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
5. Aseptically add 12.5 mL Egg Yolk Enrichment 50% and 6. Andrews. 2000. In Horwitz (ed.), Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed.,
vol. I. AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
4.1 mL Antimicrobic Vial P rehydrated with 5 mL sterile
water (25,000 units of polymyxin B). Mix thoroughly. Availability
Difco Antimicrobic Vial P (Polymyxin B)
Difco MYP Agar
AOAC BAM COMPF ISO USDA
1. To rehydrate, aseptically add 5 mL sterile purified water
Cat. No. 281010 Dehydrated 500 g
(to achieve the desired concentration for MYP Agar).
Europe
2. Rotate in an end-over-end motion to dissolve the contents Cat. No. 257004 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
completely. Japan
Cat. No. 251264 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Procedure 251265 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Consult appropriate references.4-6 Difco Antimicrobic Vial P
AOAC BAM COMPF ISO USDA
Expected Results Cat. No. 232681 Vial 6 10 mL*
Consult appropriate references.4-6 Difco Egg Yolk Enrichment 50%

AOAC BAM COMPF ISO USDA

References Cat. No. 233471 Tube 12 10 mL*
1. Mossel, Koopman and Jongerius. 1967. Appl. Microbiol. 15:650. 233472 Bottle 6 100 mL*
2. Donovan. 1958. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 21:100.
*Store at 2-8C.
3. Coliner. 1948. J. Bacteriol. 55:777.
4. Rhodehamel and Harmon. 1995. FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Interna-
tional, Gaithersburg, Md.

MacConkey Agars
MacConkey Agar MacConkey Agar Base
MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet
MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet or Salt
MacConkey Agar without Salt
Intended Use Summary and Explanation
MacConkey Agar conforms with the specifications of The MacConkey Agar is based on the bile salt-neutral red-lactose
United States Pharmacopeia (USP). agar of MacConkey.8
MacConkey agars are slightly selective and differential plating The original MacConkey medium was used to differentiate
media mainly used for the detection and isolation of gram-negative strains of Salmonella typhosa from members of the coliform
organisms from clinical,1 dairy,2 food,3,4 water,5 pharmaceutical6 group. Formula modifications improved the growth of Shigella
and industrial7 sources. and Salmonella strains. These modifications included the addi-
tion of 0.5% sodium chloride, decreased agar content, and
MacConkey Agar is used for isolating and differentiating lactose-
altered bile salts and neutral red concentrations. The formula
fermenting from lactose-nonfermenting gram-negative enteric
improvements gave improved differential reactions between
bacilli.
these enteric pathogens and the coliform group.
MacConkey Agar Base is used with added carbohydrate in
MacConkey Agar contains crystal violet and bile salts that
differentiating coliforms based on fermentation reactions.
inhibit gram-positive organisms and allow gram-negative
MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet is used for isolating organisms to grow. Isolated colonies of coliform bacteria are
and differentiating enteric microorganisms while permitting brick red in color and may be surrounded by a zone of precipi-
growth of staphylococci and enterococci. The medium can tated bile. This bile precipitate is due to a local pH drop around
be used also to separate Mycobacterium fortuitum and the colony due to lactose fermentation. Colonies that do not
M. chelonae from other rapidly growing mycobacteria. ferment lactose (such as typhoid, paratyphoid and dysentery
MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet or Salt and MacConkey bacilli) remain colorless. When lactose nonfermenters grow
Agar without Salt are used for isolating and differentiating in proximity to coliform colonies, the surrounding medium
gram-negative bacilli while suppressing the swarming of most appears as cleared areas. It is recommended in the USP for use
Proteus species. in the performance of Microbial Limit Tests.6

334
 MacConkey Agars, cont.
M
User Quality Control
NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco MacConkey Agar BBL MacConkey Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Pink to pinkish beige, free-flowing, Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogenous, may contain dark
homogeneous. particles.
Solution: 5.0% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 5.0% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is red- water upon boiling. Solution is medium
dish purple, slightly opalescent. to dark, rose to brown-rose with or
Prepared Appearance: Reddish purple, slightly opalescent. without a trace orange tint, clear to
slightly hazy.
Reaction of 5.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2 Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, rose to brown-rose
with or without a trace orange tint,
Difco MacConkey Agar Base clear to slightly hazy.
Dehydrated Appearance: Pink to pinkish beige, free-flowing, Reaction of 5.0%
homogeneous. Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2
Solution: 4.0% solution, soluble in purified
BBL MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet
water upon boiling. Solution is red,
very slightly to slightly opalescent. Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material.
Prepared Appearance: Red, slightly opalescent.
Solution: 5.2% solution, soluble in purified
Reaction of 4.0% water upon boiling. Solution is medium,
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2 red-orange to red-rose, slightly hazy
Difco MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet
to hazy.
Dehydrated Appearance: Pinkish beige, free-flowing, homoge- Prepared Appearance: Medium, red-orange to red-rose,
neous. slightly hazy to hazy.
Solution: 5.2% solution, soluble in purified Reaction of 5.2%
water upon boiling. Solution is red- Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
dish orange, clear to very slightly
BBL MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet or Salt
opalescent.
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
Prepared Appearance: Reddish orange, slightly opalescent. ous material.
Reaction of 5.2% Solution: 4.37% solution, soluble in purified
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2 water upon boiling. Solution is medium,
Difco MacConkey Agar without Salt red-orange to red-rose, slightly hazy
to hazy.
Dehydrated Appearance: Pinkish beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous. Prepared Appearance: Medium, red-orange to red-rose,
slightly hazy to hazy.
Solution: 4.7% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is red- Reaction of 4.37%
dish orange, slightly opalescent. Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2

Prepared Appearance: Reddish orange, slightly opalescent.

Reaction of 4.7%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
Continued Continued

MacConkey Agar Base is prepared without added carbohydrates, MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet or Salt and MacConkey
which permits their addition either individually or in combina- Agar without Salt (which also lacks crystal violet) are differen-
tion. It is recommended that carbohydrates such as sucrose or tial media used for isolating and cultivating gram-negative
lactose be added in a concentration of 1% to the basal enteric organisms and gram-positive cocci from waters, feces
medium. and other sources suspected of containing these organisms, as
well as limiting the swarming of Proteus species.
MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet is a differential
medium that is less selective than MacConkey Agar. The lack
Principles of the Procedure
of crystal violet permits the growth of Staphylococcus and
Peptones are sources of nitrogen and other nutrients. Lactose
Enterococcus. Staphylococci produce pale pink to red colonies
is a fermentable carbohydrate. When lactose is fermented, a
and enterococci produce compact tiny red colonies either on
local pH drop around the colony causes a color change in the
or beneath the surface of the medium. The medium is used
pH indicator (neutral red) and bile precipitation. Bile salts,
also to separate Mycobacterium fortuitum and M. chelonae
bile salts no. 3, oxgall and crystal violet are selective agents
from other rapidly growing mycobacteria.9,10
that inhibit growth of gram-positive organisms. Agar is the
solidifying agent.

335
Section III
M MacConkey Agars, cont.

Cultural Response Cultural Response

Difco MacConkey Agar or Difco MacConkey BBL MacConkey Agar
Agar Base Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Prepare the medium per label directions. For MacConkey Agar Base, 35 2C for 18-24 hours (and 40-48 hours for E. coli).
prepare without and with 1% added lactose. Inoculate and incubate at
INOCULUM COLONY BILE
35 2C for 18-24 hours (and 40-48 hours for E. coli). ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR PPT.
INOCULUM COLONY BILE Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-2103 Partial to
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR PPT. complete
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-2103 Partial to inhibition
complete
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good Pink to +
inhibition
rose-red
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good Pink to red; +
w/o lactose: Proteus mirabilis 12453 102-103 Good Colorless
Colorless Salmonella choleraesuis
Proteus mirabilis 12453 102-103 Good Colorless subsp. choleraesuis
Salmonella choleraesuis serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good Colorless
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good Colorless BBL MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet

Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at

Difco MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet 35 2C for 18-24 hours and up to 48 hours if necessary (up to 11
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 days for M. fortuitum).
2C for 18-48 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY BILE
INOCULUM COLONY BILE ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR PPT.

ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR PPT.
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-104 Good Rose-red
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 102-103 Good Red Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good Pink to
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good Pink to red rose-red
Proteus mirabilis 12453 102-103 Good Colorless Mycobacterium
Salmonella choleraesuis fortuitum 6841 103-104 Good Rose-red
subsp. choleraesuis Salmonella choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good Colorless subsp. choleraesuis
Difco MacConkey Agar without Salt
serotype Typhimurium 14028 103-104 Good Colorless
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-104 Good Pink to
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
rose-red
2C for 18-48 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY BILE
BBL MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet or Salt
ORGANISM ATCC
CFU RECOVERY COLOR PPT. Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Enterococcus faecalis 33186 102-103 Good Red 35 2C for 18-24 hours and up to 48 hours if necessary.
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good Pink to red INOCULUM COLONY BILE
Proteus mirabilis 12453 102-103 Good Colorless, ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR PPT.
no swarming Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-104 Good Rose-red
Salmonella choleraesuis Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good Pink to
subsp. choleraesuis rose-red
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good Colorless Proteus mirabilis 12453 103-104 Good Colorless,
Shigella flexneri 12022 102-103 Good Colorless no swarming
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 103-104 Good Colorless

Formulae BBL MacConkey Agar

Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Difco MacConkey Agar
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ..................................... 17.0 g
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 1.5 g
Peptone ................................................................... 17.0 g Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 1.5 g
Proteose Peptone ....................................................... 3.0 g Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g Bile Salts ..................................................................... 1.5 g
Bile Salts No. 3 ........................................................... 1.5 g Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g Neutral Red ................................................................ 0.03 g
Neutral Red ................................................................ 0.03 g Crystal Violet .............................................................. 1.0 mg
Crystal Violet .............................................................. 1.0 mg
Difco MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet
Difco MacConkey Agar Base
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Consists of the same ingredients without the lactose. Peptone ................................................................... 20.0 g
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
Bile Salts ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g
Neutral Red ................................................................ 0.05 g
336
 MacConkey Agars, cont.
M
MacConkey Agar w/o CV 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
Uninoculated Escherichia coli
Plate ATCC 25922 pletely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
NOTE: If MacConkey Agar Base is to be used within 12 hours,
omit autoclaving and gently boil medium for 5 minutes.
Add 1% carbohydrate before or after autoclaving, depending
upon heat lability. The surface of MacConkey agars without
salt should be thoroughly air-dried prior to inoculation.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

Procedure
For procedures on the isolation and identification of enteric
organisms consult the appropriate references.

Expected Results
Lactose-fermenting organisms grow as pink to brick-red colonies
with or without a zone of precipitated bile. Lactose-nonfermenting
organisms grow as colorless or clear colonies.
Proteus Salmonella Swarming by Proteus spp. is reduced on MacConkey agars
mirabilis typhimurium
ATCC 12453 ATCC 14028 without salt.

BBL MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet On MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet and MacConkey
Approximate Formula* Per Liter agars without salt, staphylococci produce pale pink to red
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g colonies and enterococci produce tiny red colonies; these
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................. 10.0 g
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
organisms are inhibited on MacConkey Agar.
Bile Salts ..................................................................... 5.0 g On MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet, potentially
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g pathogenic rapid growers of the M. fortuitum complex
Neutral Red ................................................................ 0.05 g usually grow in 5-11 days, while the commonly saprophytic
Difco MacConkey Agar without Salt species are inhibited.9,10
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Peptone ................................................................... 20.0 g On MacConkey agars without salt, the swarming of Proteus
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g is reduced.
Bile Salts ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g
Neutral Red .............................................................. 75.0 mg
Limitations of the Procedure
1. Although MacConkey media are selective primarily for
BBL MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet or Salt
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
gram-negative enteric bacilli, biochemical and, if indicated,
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ..................................... 10.0 g serological testing using pure cultures are recommended
Yeast Extract ............................................................ 10.0 g for complete identification. Consult appropriate references
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
Oxgall ......................................................................... 5.0 g
for further information.1,3
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.2 g 2. Incubation of MacConkey Agar plates under increased CO2
Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g has been reported to reduce the growth and recovery of a
Neutral Red .............................................................. 75.0 mg
number of strains of gram-negative bacilli.11
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
3. Some strains of M. smegmatis from humans may grow on
Directions for Preparation from MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet, but these strains
Dehydrated Product can be differentiated from M. fortuitum complex by the
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water: 3-day arylsulfatase test.9
Difco MacConkey Agar 50 g;
BBL MacConkey Agar 50 g;
Difco MacConkey Agar Base 40 g;
Difco MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet 52 g;
BBL MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet 52 g;
BBL MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet or Salt
47.3 g;
Difco MacConkey Agar without Salt 47 g.
Mix thoroughly.
337
Section III
M MacConkey Agars, cont.

References BBL MacConkey Agar

1. Bopp, Brenner, Wells and Strockbine. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF EP SMD SMWW USP
Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C. Cat. No. 211387 Dehydrated 500 g
2. Flowers, Andrews, Donnelly and Koenig. 1993. In Marshall (ed.), Standard methods for the
examination of dairy products. 16th ed., American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. 211390 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
3. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods, 211391 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington. D.C.
4. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter- Difco MacConkey Agar Base
national, Gaithersburg, Md.
5. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and Cat. No. 281810 Dehydrated 500 g
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
6. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The Difco MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet

national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
7. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC Interna-
Cat. No. 247010 Dehydrated 500 g
tional, Gaithersburg, Md.
8. MacConkey. 1905. J. Hyg. 5:333. BBL MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet
9. Kent and Kubica. 1985. Public health mycobacteriology: a guide for the level III laboratory. USDHHS, Cat. No. 211393 Dehydrated 500 g
Centers for Disease Control, Atlanta, Ga.
10. Master. 1994. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1, suppl. 1. American Europe
Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
11. Mazura-Reetz, Neblett and Galperin. 1979. Abstr. C179, p. 339. Abstr. Annu. Meet. American
Cat. No. 256008 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Society for Microbiology 1979.
BBL MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet or Salt
Cat. No. 294584 Dehydrated 500 g
Availability 297901 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Difco MacConkey Agar
Difco MacConkey Agar without Salt
AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF EP SMD SMWW USP
Cat. No. 233120 Dehydrated 500 g
Cat. No. 212123 Dehydrated 500 g
233110 Dehydrated 10 kg
212122 Dehydrated 2 kg
Europe
275300 Dehydrated 10 kg
Cat. No. 256009 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.

MacConkey II Agar MacConkey II Agar with MUG

Intended Use Colorless or pink to red colonies are produced depending upon
MacConkey II Agar conforms with specifications of The United the ability of the isolate to ferment the carbohydrate.
States Pharmacopeia (USP). Most strains (96-97%) of E. coli produce -D-glucuronidase.2
MacConkey II Agar is a slightly selective and differential medium The enzyme hydrolyzes MUG to yield 4-methylumbelliferone,
for the detection of coliform organisms and enteric pathogens. a compound that fluoresces under long-wave (366 nm)
UV light. The addition of MUG to the formulation allows
MacConkey II Agar with MUG is used for the presumptive
-D-glucuronidase-positive strains of E. coli to fluoresce
identification of Escherichia coli.
blue-green when examined under UV light.
Summary and Explanation BBL MacConkey II Agar with MUG contains 0.1 g of MUG
The BBL MacConkey II Agar formulation was made available per liter of MacConkey II Agar.
in 1983. It was specially designed to improve the inhibition
of swarming Proteus species, to achieve more definitive differen- Formula
tiation of lactose fermenters and nonfermenters, and for the BBL MacConkey II Agar
promotion of superior growth of enteric pathogens. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ..................................... 17.0 g
Trepeta and Edberg1 modified MacConkey Agar by the incorpo- Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 1.5 g
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 1.5 g
ration of MUG (4-methylumbelliferyl--D-glucuronide). The Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
resulting medium allowed the authors to presumptively Bile Salts ..................................................................... 1.5 g
identify E. coli from the primary plating medium within 5 Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
minutes. Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g
Neutral Red ................................................................ 0.03 g
Crystal Violet .............................................................. 1.0 mg
Principles of the Procedure *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
MacConkey II Agar is a selective and differential medium. It
is only slightly selective since the concentration of bile salts, Directions for Preparation from
which inhibit gram-positive microorganisms, is low in com- Dehydrated Product
parison with other enteric plating media. Crystal violet also is 1. Suspend 50 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
included in the medium to inhibit the growth of gram-positive thoroughly.
bacteria, especially enterococci and staphylococci. 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder.
Differentiation of enteric microorganisms is achieved by
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
the combination of lactose and the neutral red indicator.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
338
 MacConkey II Agar, cont.
M
User Quality Control MacConkey II Agar

Escherichia coli Proteus mirabilis

Identity Specifications ATCC 25922 ATCC 12453
BBL MacConkey II Agar

Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, may contain dark

particles.
Solution: 5.0% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium to dark,
rose to brown-rose, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, rose to brown-rose,
clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 5.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL MacConkey II Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 48 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY BILE
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR PPT.
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 104-105 Partial to
complete
inhibition
Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good Pink to red +
Proteus mirabilis 12453 103-104 Good, Colorless
inhibition of
swarming
Pseudomonas
aeruginosa 10145 103-104 Good Colorless
to blue to green
to pink
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 103-104 Good Colorless

Procedure Limitations of the Procedure

Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from Not all strains of E. coli ferment lactose or produce -D-glu-
specimens. A nonselective medium should also be streaked curonidase. Some strains of Salmonella and Shigella produce
to increase the chance of recovery when the population of -D-glucuronidase and will fluoresce.3 A small percentage of
gram-negative organisms is low and to provide an indication Yersinia and streptococci have been reported to fluoresce.4
of other organisms present in the specimen. Additional biochemical or serological tests are necessary for
definitive identification.
Incubate plates, protected from light, at 35 2C (do not use
CO2-enriched atmosphere with MacConkey II Agar) or other
References
appropriate temperature for 18-24 hours; if negative after 24 1. Trepeta and Edberg. 1984. J. Clin. Microbiol. 19:172.
hours on MUG-containing medium, reincubate an additional 2.
3.
Killian and Bulow. 1976. Acta Pathol. Microbiol. Scand. Sec. B. 84:245.
Feng and Hartman. 1982. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 43:1320.
24 hours. 4. Robison. 1984. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 48:285.

Expected Results Availability

After incubation, examine the medium macroscopically for BBL MacConkey II Agar
AOAC BAM BS10 CCAM CMPH COMPF EP MCM7 SMD
typical colonies. Colonies of lactose-fermenting bacteria
SMWW USP
appear pink to rose-red in color and may be surrounded by Cat. No. 212306 Dehydrated 500 g
a zone of bile precipitation, while lactose-nonfermenting 292861 Dehydrated 10 kg
colonies are colorless. United States and Canada
Cat. No. 221172 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Examine MacConkey II Agar with MUG under long-wavelength 221270 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
UV light (366 nm). -D-glucuronidase-positive colonies have a Europe
blue-green fluorescence; -D-glucuronidase-negative colonies do Cat. No. 254025 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
not fluoresce. 254078 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
Japan
Cat. No. 251172 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
251270 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
251577 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Ctn. of 100*
339
Section III
M MacConkey II Agar, cont.

BBL MacConkey II Agar//Columbia CNA Agar with 5% BBL MacConkey II Agar//Columbia PNA Agar with 5%
Sheep Blood Sheep Blood
BS10 CMPH MCM7 Cat. No. 297272 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
Cat. No. 221600 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
BBL MacConkey II Agar//Chocolate II Agar//Trypticase
221601 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II)
BBL MacConkey II Agar//Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Cat. No. 297140 Prepared Y Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
Sheep Blood (TSA II) 299580 Prepared Y Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
BS10 CMPH MCM7
BBL MacConkey II Agar with MUG
United States and Canada
Cat. No. 221938 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Cat. No. 221290 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
221291 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100* BBL MacConkey II Agar with MUG//Trypticase Soy
Europe Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II)
Cat. No. 251290 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20* Cat. No. 221949 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
BBL MacConkey II Agar//Levine EMB Agar BBL MacConkey II Agar with MUG//Brucella Agar with
Cat. No. 295969 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100* 5% Horse Blood
Cat. No. 298303 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
*Store at 2-8C.

MacConkey Agars with Sorbitol

MacConkey Sorbitol Agar MacConkey II Agar
with Sorbitol Sorbitol MacConkey II Agar with
Cefixime and Tellurite
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
MacConkey Sorbitol Agar and MacConkey II Agar with MacConkey Sorbitol Agar and MacConkey II Agar with
Sorbitol are selective and differential media for the detection Sorbitol, modified MacConkey agars using sorbitol instead of
of sorbitol-nonfermenting Escherichia coli serotype O157:H7 lactose, are only slightly selective, since the concentration of
associated with hemorrhagic colitis. These media are also bile salts, which inhibits gram-positive microorganisms, is
referred to as Sorbitol MacConkey Agar. low in comparison with other enteric plating media. Crystal
violet also is included in the medium to inhibit the growth
Sorbitol MacConkey II Agar with Cefixime and Tellurite
of gram-positive bacteria, especially enterococci and staphy-
(SMAC-CT) is a more selective and differential medium
lococci. MacConkey II Agar with Sorbitol is also formulated
designed to inhibit Proteus mirabilis, non-O157 E. coli strains
to reduce swarming of Proteus species.
and other sorbitol-nonfermenting strains.
MacConkey II Agar with Sorbitol
Escherichia coli O157:H7 Escherichia coli
Summary and Explanation ATCC 35150 ATCC 25922
Escherichia coli serotype O157:H7 is a human pathogen associ-
ated with hemorrhagic colitis that results from the action
of a shiga-like toxin (SLT).1 On standard MacConkey Agar
containing lactose, this strain is indistinguishable from other
lactose-fermenting E. coli. Unlike most E. coli strains, E. coli
O157:H7 ferments sorbitol slowly or not at all. Therefore, the
efficacy of MacConkey Agar containing sorbitol instead of
lactose as a differential medium for the detection of E. coli
O157:H7 in stool cultures was determined. Field trial results
showed that the growth of E. coli O157:H7 on MacConkey Agar
with Sorbitol was heavy and occurred in almost pure culture as
colorless sorbitol-nonfermenting colonies. Most organisms
of the fecal flora ferment sorbitol and appear pink on this
medium. MacConkey Agar with Sorbitol, therefore, permits ready
recognition of E. coli O157:H7 in stool cultures.1-3
The addition of cefixime and tellurite significantly reduces the
number of sorbitol nonfermenters that need to be screened
during the attempted isolation of E. coli O157:H7.4,5

340
 MacConkey Sorbitol Agar, cont.
M
User Quality Control
NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco MacConkey Sorbitol Agar BBL MacConkey II Agar with Sorbitol
Dehydrated Appearance: Pinkish beige, free-flowing, homoge- Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, may contain dark
neous. particles.
Solution: 5.0% solution, soluble in purified water Solution: 5.0% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is reddish-purple, upon boiling. Solution is medium to dark,
very slightly to slightly opalescent. rose to brown-rose, with or without a
Prepared Appearance: Reddish-purple, slightly opalescent. trace orange tint, clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 5.0% Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, rose to brown-rose,
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2 with or without a trace orange tint,
clear to slightly hazy.
Cultural Response Reaction of 5.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2
Difco MacConkey Sorbitol Agar

Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at

35 2C for 18-24 hours.
Cultural Response
BBL MacConkey II Agar with Sorbitol
INOCULUM COLONY BILE
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR PPT.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-24 hours (42-48 hours for E. coli ATCC 25922).
Enterococcus
faecalis 29212 103-2103 Marked to INOCULUM COLONY BILE
complete ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR PPT.
inhibition Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good Pink to red +
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good Pink-red + to rose-red
Escherichia coli Escherichia coli
O157:H7 35150 102-103 Good Colorless O157:H7 35150 103-104 Good Colorless
Proteus mirabilis 12453 103-104 Good Colorless

Differentiation of enteric microorganisms is achieved by the Directions for Preparation from

combination of sorbitol and the neutral red indicator. Colorless Dehydrated Product
or pink to red colonies are produced depending upon the abil- 1. Suspend 50 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
ity of the isolate to ferment the carbohydrate sorbitol. thoroughly.
SMAC-CT is modified MacConkey II Agar using sorbitol instead 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
of lactose and with cefixime (0.05 mg/L) and potassium tellurite pletely dissolve the powder.
(2.5 mg/L) added. Cefixime inhibits Proteus spp. and tellurite 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
inhibits non-O157 E. coli and other organisms, thus improving 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
the selectivity of SMAC-CT for E. coli O157:H7. stable, typical control cultures.

Formulae Procedure
Difco MacConkey Sorbitol Agar Prepare plated medium from tubed agar deeps by liquefying
Approximate Formula* Per Liter the medium in boiling water, cooling to 45-50C and pouring
Peptone ................................................................... 15.5 g into sterile Petri dishes.
Proteose Peptone ....................................................... 3.0 g
D-Sorbitol ................................................................. 10.0 g Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
Bile Salts ..................................................................... 1.5 g specimens. Incubate plates, protected from light, in an inverted
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g position (agar side up) at 35 2C for 18-24 hours in an aerobic
Neutral Red ................................................................ 0.03 g atmosphere without additional CO2.
Crystal Violet .............................................................. 1.0 mg
BBL MacConkey II Agar with Sorbitol Expected Results
Approximate Formula* Per Liter After 18-24 hours of incubation, the plates should show isolated
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ..................................... 17.0 g
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 1.5 g colonies in streaked areas and confluent growth in areas of
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 1.5 g heavy inoculation.
D-Sorbitol ................................................................. 10.0 g
Bile Salts ..................................................................... 1.5 g Sorbitol fermenters produce pink to red colonies, some surrounded
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g by zones of precipitated bile, while sorbitol nonfermenters
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g produce colorless colonies.
Neutral Red ................................................................ 0.03 g
Crystal Violet .............................................................. 1.0 mg Most fecal flora will be partially to completely inhibited on
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
SMAC-CT.
341
Section III
M MacConkey Sorbitol Agar, cont.

Gram staining, biochemical tests and serological procedures Availability

should be performed to confirm findings. Difco MacConkey Sorbitol Agar
BAM BS10 CCAM CMPH COMPF ISO MCM7 SMWW USDA
Limitations of the Procedure Cat. No. 279100 Dehydrated 500 g
1. It has been reported that some Enterobacteriaceae and BBL MacConkey II Agar with Sorbitol
Pseudomonas aeruginosa are inhibited on MacConkey Agar BAM BS10 CCAM CMPH COMPF ISO MCM7 SMWW USDA
when incubated in a CO2-enriched atmosphere.6 Cat. No. 299769 Dehydrated 500 g
2. Prolonged incubation of the culture may result in colonies United States and Canada
Cat. No. 297684 Prepared Deeps (Pour Tubes) Pkg. of 10
of E. coli serotype O157:H7 losing their characteristic 297953 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
colorless appearance. There are additional species of 298519 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
facultatively anaerobic gram-negative rods that do not Europe
ferment sorbitol. Cat. No. 254455 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
3. The color of sorbitol-positive colonies can fade, making Japan
them hard to distinguish from sorbitol-negative colonies.7 Cat. No. 251147 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
251767 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*

References BBL MacConkey II Agar with Sorbitol//SS Agar

1. March and Ratnam. 1986. J. Clin. Microbiol. 23:869. Japan
2. Centers for Disease Control. 1991. Morbid. Mortal. Weekly Rep. 40:265. Cat. No. 251163 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
3. Bopp, Brenner, Wells and Stockbine. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.),
Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C. BBL Sorbitol MacConkey II Agar with Cefixime and
4. Zadik, Chapman and Siddons. 1993. J. Med. Microbiol. 39:155.
5. Sanderson, Gay, Hancock, Gay, Fox and Besser. 1995. J. Clin. Microbiol. 33:2616. Tellurite
6. Mazura-Reetz, Neblett and Galperin. 1979. Abstr. C 179, p. 339. Abstr. Annu. Meet. Am. Soc.
Microbiol. 1979.
United States and Canada
7. Adams. 1991. Clin. Lab. Sci. 4:19. Cat. No. 222226 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
222227 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Europe
Cat. No. 257019 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.

MacConkey Broth
Intended Use Summary and Explanation
MacConkey Broth is used for cultivating gram-negative, lactose- MacConkey Broth is a modification of the original bile salt broth
fermenting bacilli in water and foods as a presumptive test for recommended by MacConkey1 that contained 0.5% sodium
coliform organisms. taurocholate and litmus as an indicator. In later publications,2,3

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco MacConkey Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.5% solution, soluble in purified water.
Solution is purple, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Purple, clear.
Reaction of 3.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.1

Cultural Response
Difco MacConkey Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 18-24 hours.
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY ACID GAS
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-2103 Marked to
complete inhibition
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good + + Uninoculated Escherichia coli
Salmonella choleraesuis Tube ATCC 25922
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Choleraesuis
var. kunzendorf 12011 102-103 Good
Key: + = positive, yellow for acid, gas
= negative, no change for acid, no gas

342
 Malonate Broth
M
MacConkey suggested variations of this formulation using 2. Dispense in test tubes containing Durham tubes.
neutral red indicator instead of litmus. Childs and Allen4 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
demonstrated the inhibitory effect of neutral red and substi- 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
tuted the less inhibitory bromcresol purple. Oxgall in the stable, typical control cultures.
medium replaces the original sodium taurocholate to inhibit
growth of gram-positive organisms. Procedure
Inoculate tubes with the test specimen. Incubate tubes for
Principles of the Procedure 18-24 hours at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere.
Peptone provides amino acids and other growth factors.
Lactose is a carbon energy source for gram-negative lactose- Expected Results
fermenting bacilli. Oxgall inhibits the growth of gram-
Lactose-fermenting organisms grow very well in MacConkey
positive organisms. Bromcresol purple is the indicator.
Broth and produce acid, causing the medium to turn yellow.
Formula Gas is also produced, which collects in the Durham tubes.
Difco MacConkey Broth Nonfermenting organisms produce good growth but will not
Approximate Formula* Per Liter produce acid or gas.
Oxgall ......................................................................... 5.0 g
Peptone ................................................................... 20.0 g References
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g 1. MacConkey. 1901. Zentralbl. Bakteriol. 29:740.
Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 0.01 g 2. MacConkey. 1905. J. Hyg. 5:333.
3. MacConkey. 1908. J. Hyg. 8:322.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
4. Childs and Allen. 1953. J. Hyg. Camb. 51:468.

Directions for Preparation from Availability

Dehydrated Product Difco MacConkey Broth
1. Dissolve 35 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. For EP
testing 10 mL samples, prepare double strength. Cat. No. 220100 Dehydrated 500 g

Malonate Broth
Intended Use Formula
Malonate Broth is used for differentiating Enterobacter from Difco Malonate Broth
Escherichia based on malonate utilization. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Ammonium Sulfate .................................................... 2.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 0.6 g
Summary and Explanation Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 0.4 g
Malonate Broth, prepared according to the formula described Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.0 g
by Leifson,1 is a liquid medium containing ammonium sulfate Sodium Malonate ....................................................... 3.0 g
Bromthymol Blue ..................................................... 25.0 mg
as the only source of nitrogen and malonate as the only source *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
of carbon. Leifson was able to demonstrate that the
Enterobacter group utilizes malonate whereas the Escherichia Directions for Preparation from
group is unable to grow on the medium. Dehydrated Product
Malonate Broth is further described for differentiating Enterobac- 1. Suspend 8 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
teriaceae in food and dairy products.2,3 More often, the medium thoroughly.
referenced is the modified Edwards and Ewing4 formulation that 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
contains yeast extract and dextrose. The modification permits completely dissolve the powder.
growth of organisms that would otherwise fail on the 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
unsupplemented Leifson medium. 4. Avoid introducing extraneous carbon and nitrogen.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Principles of the Procedure stable, typical control cultures.
Malonate Broth contains ammonium sulfate, which is the sole
source of nitrogen in the medium; sodium malonate is the sole Procedure
source of carbon. Dipotassium phosphate and monopotassium 1. Inoculate tubes with a loopful of test organism.
phosphate provide buffering capability. Sodium chloride 2. Incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
maintains the osmotic balance of the medium. Increased 3. Examine tubes for a change in the color of the medium
alkalinity resulting from malonate utilization causes the indi- from green to blue.
cator, bromthymol blue, to change color from green to blue.

343
Section III
M Malonate Broth, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Malonate Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Light green, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 0.8% solution, soluble in purified water.
Solution is green, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Green, clear.
Reaction of 0.8%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Malonate Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.

ORGANISM ATCC MEDIUM COLOR

Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 Blue
Enterobacter cloacae 13047 Blue
Escherichia coli 25922 Green Uninoculated Enterobacter Escherichia coli
Tube aerogenes ATCC 25922
Klebsiella pneumoniae 13883 Blue ATCC 13048
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. arizonae 13314 Blue
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 Green

Expected Results References

1. Leifson. 1933. J. Bacteriol. 26:329.
Malonate utilization is indicated by a change in the color of 2. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
the medium from green to blue: 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Positive: Blue 4. Edwards and Ewing. 1962. Enterobacteriaceae. U.S. Public Health Service Bulletin No. 734:19.
5. Oberhofer. 1985. Manual of nonfermenting gram-negative bacteria. Churchill Livingstone, New
Negative: Green York, N.Y.

Limitation of the Procedure Availability

A slight bluing (blue-green) of the medium may occur after Difco Malonate Broth
prolonged incubation.5 In such cases, care should be taken in COMPF SMD
interpreting results. Cat. No. 239520 Dehydrated 500 g

Malonate Broth, (Ewing) Modified

Intended Use counteracted by the acid produced in the fermentation of the
Malonate Broth, as modified by Ewing, is used for the differ- small amount of dextrose.3 An alkaline result (blue color)
entiation of coliforms and other enteric organisms. is only produced in this medium by organisms capable of
utilizing malonate and ammonium sulfate.
Summary and Explanation
Leifson, in 1933, developed a synthetic liquid medium which Principles of the Procedure
differentiated Aerobacter (now Enterobacter) from Escherichia An organism that simultaneously can utilize sodium malonate
species based on their ability to utilize malonate.1 The modifi- as its carbon source and ammonium sulfate as its nitrogen
cation, in which dextrose and yeast extract are incorporated, source produces an alkalinity due to the formation of sodium
was devised by Ewing et al.2 hydroxide.3 The alkali changes the color of the bromthymol
blue indicator in the medium to light blue to Prussian blue. The
The addition of yeast extract, a source of vitamins, and a
color of the medium remains unchanged in the presence of an
relatively small amount of dextrose, a minimal carbon source,
organism that cannot utilize these substances. Some malonate-
is included in Ewings modification to stimulate the growth
negative strains produce a yellow color due to the fermentation
of some organisms. The medium, therefore, will support
of dextrose only, which results in increased acidity causing the
the growth of organisms that cannot utilize malonate or
pH indicator to change to yellow at a pH of 6.0.
ammonium salt, but any spontaneous alkalinization produced
by such organisms is buffered by the phosphate system and
344
 Malonate Broth, Modified, cont.
M
User Quality Control
NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Malonate Broth, Modified BBL Malonate Broth, Ewing Modified
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige to light green, free-flowing, Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
homogeneous. ous material.
Solution: 0.93% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 0.93% solution, soluble in purified
water with agitation. Solution is green, water. Solution is light to medium,
clear. green, with or without a tint of
Prepared Appearance: Green, clear. yellow or blue, clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 0.93% Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, green, with or
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2 without a tint of yellow or blue, clear
to slightly hazy.
Cultural Response Reaction of 0.93%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2
Difco Malonate Broth, Modified
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
Cultural Response
BBL Malonate Broth, Ewing Modified
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY MEDIUM COLOR
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 Good Blue and incubate at 35 2C for 42-48 hours.
Enterobacter cloacae 13047 Good Blue
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY MEDIUM COLOR
Escherichia coli 25922 Good Green
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 Good Blue
Klebsiella pneumoniae 13883 Good Blue
Escherichia coli 25922 Good Yellow-green to
Salmonella choleraesuis
gray-green
subsp. arizonae 13314 Good Blue
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 Good Green

Formulae Procedure
Difco Malonate Broth, Modified Inoculate tubes, using a light inoculum, with growth from an
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 18- to 24-hour pure culture. Incubate tubes with loosened
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 1.0 g
Ammonium Sulfate .................................................... 2.0 g
caps for 18-48 hours at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere.
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 0.6 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 0.4 g Expected Results
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.0 g Bacterial genera in which the majority of species yield a
Sodium Malonate ....................................................... 3.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 0.25 g positive alkaline reaction (light blue to Prussian blue color
Bromthymol Blue ..................................................... 25.0 mg throughout the medium) include:
BBL Malonate Broth, Ewing Modified Enterobacter
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 1.0 g
Klebsiella
Ammonium Sulfate .................................................... 2.0 g Citrobacter
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 0.6 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 0.4 g Genera in which the majority of species yield a negative reac-
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.0 g tion (color of medium is unchanged or yellow) include:
Sodium Malonate ....................................................... 3.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 0.25 g Escherichia Serratia
Bromthymol Blue ..................................................... 25.0 mg Salmonella Morganella
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Shigella Proteus
Directions for Preparation from Edwardsiella Providencia
Dehydrated Product Yersinia
1. Dissolve 9.3 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
Limitation of the Procedure
2. Dispense and autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Some malonate-positive organisms produce only slight alkalinity.
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Compare any tube in question with an uninoculated malonate tube.
stable, typical control cultures.
Any trace of blue color after a 48-hour incubation period denotes
a positive test. Before making a final negative interpretation, be
sure that test tubes have been incubated for 48 hours.3

345
Section III
M Malonate Broth, Modified, cont.

References Availability
1. Leifson. 1933. J. Bacteriol. 26:329.
2. Ewing, Davis and Reavis. 1957. Public Health Lab. 15:153.
Difco Malonate Broth, Modified
3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria, AOAC BAM COMPF SMD USDA
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Cat. No. 256910 Dehydrated 500 g
BBL Malonate Broth, Ewing Modified
AOAC BAM COMPF SMD USDA
Cat. No. 211399 Dehydrated 500 g
221322 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10

Malt Agar
Intended Use organisms. Agar is the solidifying agent. The acidic pH of Malt
Malt Agar is used for isolating and cultivating yeasts and molds Agar allows for optimal growth of molds and yeasts while
from food and for cultivating yeast and mold stock cultures. restricting bacterial growth.

Summary and Explanation Formula

Malt media for yeasts and molds have been widely used for Difco and BBL Malt Agar
many years. In 1919, Reddish1 prepared a satisfactory substi- Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Malt Extract .............................................................. 30.0 g
tute for beer wort from malt extract. Thom and Church2 used Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Reddishs medium for their studies of the aspergilli. Malt Agar *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
was also employed by Fullmer and Grimes3 for their studies of
the growth of yeasts on synthetic media. Malt Agar is included Directions for Preparation from
in Official Methods of Analysis of AOAC International.4 Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 45 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Principles of the Procedure thoroughly.
Malt Agar contains malt extract which provides the carbon, 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
protein and nutrient sources required for the growth of micro- completely dissolve the powder.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Malt Agar BBL Malt Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous. Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
Solution: 4.5% solution, soluble in purified material.
water upon boiling. Solution is light Solution: 4.5% solution, soluble in purified water
to medium amber, very slightly to upon boiling. Solution is medium to dark,
slightly opalescent. yellow to tan, trace hazy to hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, very slightly Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, yellow to tan, trace
to slightly opalescent. hazy to hazy.
Reaction of a 4.5% Reaction of 4.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 5.5 0.2 Solution at 25C: pH 5.5 0.2

Cultural Response Cultural Response

Difco Malt Agar BBL Malt Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. For specific quantities of Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate pour plates with
sterile 1:10 dilution of lactic acid, USP (85%) to add to 100 mL of Saccharomyces cerevisiae and incubate at 25 2C for 42-48 hours.
medium to obtain a pH of 3.5 or 4.5, see the Certificate of Analysis for Inoculate tubes with other test organisms and incubate at 25 2C for
each lot.* Inoculate and incubate at 30 2C for 42-48 hours (up to 7 days.
72 hours if necessary).
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
*For Certificates of Analysis from Technical Services, phone 800-638-8663, fax 410-527-0244 or
via the internet at www.bd.com/regdocs. Aspergillus niger 16404 30-300 Good
ORGANISM ATCC
INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Candida albicans 60193 30-300 Good
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 30-300 Good
Aspergillus niger 16404 102-103 Good
Candida albicans 10231 102-103 Good
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 102-103 Good

346
 Malt Extract
M
Uninoculated Aspergillus niger
Plate ATCC 16404 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Avoid overheating
(and consequent hydrolysis and darkening of the agar with
failure to solidify). Note: To lower the pH, add sterile 1:10
lactic acid, USP. DO NOT REHEAT THE MEDIUM.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

Procedure
See appropriate references for specific procedures.

Expected Results
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.

Limitation of the Procedure

Do not heat the medium after addition of acid, as this will
hydrolyze the agar and reduce its solidifying properties.

References
1. Reddish. 1919. Abstr. Bacteriol. 3:6.
2. Thom and Church. 1926. The aspergilli. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Candida Saccharomyces 3. Fulmer and Grimes. 1923. J. Bacteriol. 8:585.
albicans cerevisiae 4. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. I. AOAC
ATCC 10231 ATCC 9763 International, Gaithersburg, Md.

Availability
Difco Malt Agar
AOAC BAM
Cat. No. 224200 Dehydrated 500 g
224100 Dehydrated 10 kg
BBL Malt Agar
AOAC BAM
Cat. No. 211401 Dehydrated 500 g

Bacto Malt Extract

Intended Use User Quality Control
Bacto Malt Extract is used for preparing microbiological
culture media for the propagation of yeasts and molds. Identity Specifications
Bacto Malt Extract
Summary and Explanation Dehydrated Appearance: Medium tan, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Bacto Malt Extract is used in the culture of yeasts and molds.
Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified
This product is very high in carbohydrate content1 and is water. Solution is medium amber,
suitable for the growth of yeasts and molds because of the slightly opalescent to opalescent, with
high concentration of reduced sugars, especially the maltoses. a precipitate.
Malt extract in the agar form is recommended for the detec- Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 4.5-5.5
tion and isolation of yeasts and molds from dairy products
and food. It is also a medium for stock culture maintenance. Cultural Response
Media formulations containing Bacto Malt Extract are Bacto Malt Extract
specified in various standard methods manuals.2-5 Prepare a sterile 2% solution of Bacto Malt Extract. Inoculate and
incubate tubes at 30 2C for up to 3 days.

Principles of the Procedure ORGANISM ATCC

INOCULUM
CFU RECOVERY
Bacto Malt Extract is the water-soluble portion of malted barley. Aspergillus niger 16404 30-300 Good
The extraction process breaks down the polysaccharides into Candida albicans 10231 30-300 Good
simple sugars. After the malting process is complete, the extract Saccharomyces carlsbergensis 9080 30-300 Good
is prepared from the malted barley by cracking the grain in a mill
and then extracting the grain with a warm liquor. The resulting
wort is filtered and evaporated or dried under vacuum.6,7

347
Section III
M Malt Extract, cont.

Typical Analysis References

1. Cote. 1999. In Flickinger and Drew (ed.), Encyclopedia of bioprocess technology: fermentation,
Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of this biocatalysis, and bioseparation. John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, N.Y.
manual. 2. Horowitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
3. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
national, Washington, D.C.
Directions for Preparation from 4. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Dehydrated Product 5. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Refer to the final concentration of Bacto Malt Extract in 6. Bridson and Brecker. 1970. In Norris and Ribbons (ed.), Methods in microbiology, vol. 3A. Academic
the formula of the medium being prepared. Add product as Press, New York, N.Y.
7. How malt is made. Briess Malting Company. 2 Dec. 2002. <http://www.briessmalting.com/hb/
required. hbhow.htm>.

Procedure Availability
See appropriate references for specific procedures using Bacto Bacto Malt Extract
AOAC BAM COMPF SMWW
Malt Extract.
Cat. No. 218630 Dehydrated 500 g
218610 Dehydrated 10 kg
Expected Results
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.

Malt Extract Agar Malt Extract Broth

Intended Use medium prepared from malt extract that was a satisfactory
Malt Extract Agar is used for isolating, cultivating and enumer- substitute for wort. Thom and Church,2 following the formula of
ating yeasts and molds. Reddish, used malt extract as a base from which they prepared
the complete media. Malt Extract Broth is recommended for
Malt Extract Broth is used for cultivating yeasts and molds.
the examination of yeasts and molds in the U.S. Food and
Summary and Explanation Drug Administrations Bacteriological Analytical Manual.3
The use of malt and malt extracts for the propagation of yeasts
and molds is quite common. Reddish1 described a culture
Principles of the Procedure
Malt Extract Agar contains maltose as an energy source. Dextrin,
a polysaccharide derived from high quality starch, and
User Quality Control glycerol are included as carbon sources. Peptone is provided
Identity Specifications as a nitrogen source. Agar is the solidifying agent.
Difco Malt Extract Agar Malt Extract Broth contains malt extract which provides the
Dehydrated Appearance: Off-white, free-flowing, homogeneous. carbon, protein, and nutrient sources required for growth
Solution: 3.36% solution, soluble in purified of microorganisms. Maltose is added as an energy source.
water upon boiling. Solution is very
light amber, slightly opalescent. Dextrose is included as a source of fermentable carbohydrate.
Prepared Appearance: Very light amber, slightly opalescent. Yeast extract provides the vitamins and cofactors required for
Reaction of 3.36% growth and additional sources of nitrogen and carbon.
Solution at 25C: pH 4.7 0.2
The acidic pH of Malt Extract Agar and Broth allows for the
Difco Malt Extract Broth

optimal growth of molds and yeasts while restricting bacterial
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige to beige, free-flowing, growth.
homogeneous.
Solution: 1.5% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light amber, clear.
Formulae
Difco Malt Extract Agar
Prepared Appearance: Very light to light amber, clear.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Reaction of 1.5% Maltose, Technical .................................................... 12.75 g
Solution at 25C: pH 4.7 0.2 Dextrin ....................................................................... 2.75 g
Glycerol ...................................................................... 2.35 g
Cultural Response Peptone ..................................................................... 0.78 g
Difco Malt Extract Agar or Malt Extract Broth Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Difco Malt Extract Broth
30 2C for 18-48 hours (agar) or 18-72 hours (broth). Approximate Formula* Per Liter
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Malt Extract ................................................................ 6.0 g
Maltose, Technical ...................................................... 1.8 g
Aspergillus niger 16404 102-103 Good Dextrose ..................................................................... 6.0 g
Candida albicans 10231 102-103 Good Yeast Extract .............................................................. 1.2 g
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 102-103 Good *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

348
 Mannitol Salt Agar
M
Directions for Preparation from Procedure
Dehydrated Product See appropriate references for specific procedures.
Difco Malt Extract Agar

1. Suspend 33.6 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix Expected Results

thoroughly. Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder.
References
1. Reddish. 1919. Abstr. Bacteriol. 3:6.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Avoid overheating 2. Thom and Church. 1926. The aspergilli. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
3. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
which could cause a softer medium. International, Gaithersburg, Md.

4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using

stable, typical control cultures. Availability
Difco Malt Extract Agar
Difco Malt Extract Broth Cat. No. 211220 Dehydrated 500 g
1. Dissolve 15 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Europe
2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cat. No. 254487 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Difco Malt Extract Broth

stable, typical control cultures. BAM

Cat. No. 211320 Dehydrated 500 g
*Store at 2-8C.

Mannitol Salt Agar

Intended Use agar results in an improved medium for the isolation of plasma-
This medium conforms with specifications of The United States coagulating staphylococci.2 This medium is listed as one of
Pharmacopeia (USP). several recommended for the enumeration of gram-positive
bacteria in cosmetics3 and is recommended in the USP for use
Mannitol Salt Agar is used for the selective isolation and enu-
in the performance of Microbial Limit Tests.4
meration of staphylococci from clinical and nonclinical materials.
Principles of the Procedure
Summary and Explanation
Mannitol Salt Agar is a nutritive medium due to its content
Koch, in 1942, reported that only staphylococci grow on agar
of peptones and beef extract, which supply essential growth
media containing 7.5% sodium chloride.1 Chapman further
factors, such as nitrogen, carbon, sulfur and trace nutrients.
studied this phenomenon in greater detail and concluded that
The 7.5% concentration of sodium chloride results in the
the addition of 7.5% sodium chloride to phenol red mannitol
partial or complete inhibition of bacterial organisms other
Uninoculated
Plate
Staphylococcus
epidermidis
than staphylococci. Mannitol fermentation, as indicated by a
ATCC 12228 change in the phenol red indicator, aids in the differentiation
of staphylococcal species.

Formulae
Difco Mannitol Salt Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g
Beef Extract ................................................................ 1.0 g
D-Mannitol ............................................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 75.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Phenol Red ............................................................... 25.0 mg
BBL Mannitol Salt Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 5.0 g
Beef Extract ................................................................ 1.0 g
D-Mannitol ............................................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 75.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Phenol Red ............................................................... 25.0 mg
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Staphylococcus
aureus
ATCC 25923

349
Section III
M Mannitol Salt Agar, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Mannitol Salt Agar BBL Mannitol Salt Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light pink, free-flowing, homogeneous. Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
Solution: 11.1% solution, soluble in purified ous material, may contain many light
water upon boiling. Solution is red, to dark red flecks.
slightly opalescent. Solution: 11.1% solution, soluble in purified
Prepared Appearance: Pinkish red, slightly opalescent. water upon boiling. Solution is medium
to dark, red to rose, clear to slightly
Reaction of 11.1% hazy.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, red to rose, clear to
slightly hazy.
Cultural Response
Reaction of 11.1%
Difco Mannitol Salt Agar
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-24 hours or up to 48 hours. A yellow zone around the
colony indicates mannitol has been fermented.
Cultural Response
BBL Mannitol Salt Agar
COLOR OF
MEDIUM
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
INOCULUM AROUND 35 2C for 42-48 hours.

ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLONY
COLOR OF
Enterobacter MEDIUM
aerogenes 13048 103 Marked to INOCULUM AROUND
complete inhibition ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLONY

Escherichia coli 25922 10 3

Marked to Proteus mirabilis 12453 104-105 Partial to
complete inhibition complete
Proteus mirabilis 12453 103 Partial inhibition inhibition
Staphylococcus Staphylococcus
aureus 25923 102-3102 Good Yellow aureus 25923 103-104 Good Yellow
Staphylococcus Staphylococcus
epidermidis 12228 102-3102 Good Red epidermidis 12228 103-104 Good Red

Directions for Preparation from References

1. Koch. 1942. Zentralbl. Bakteriol. Parasitenkd. Abt. I Orig. 149:122.
Dehydrated Product 2. Chapman. 1945. J. Bacteriol. 50:201.
3. Hitchens, Tran and McCarron. 1995. FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
1. Suspend 111 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix International, Gaithersburg, Md.
thoroughly. 4. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder. Availability
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Difco Mannitol Salt Agar
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using BAM BS10 CMPH MCM7 USP
stable, typical control cultures. Cat. No. 230650 Dehydrated 500 g
230620 Dehydrated 2 kg
230630 Dehydrated 10 kg
Procedure
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from BBL Mannitol Salt Agar
BAM BS10 CMPH MCM7 USP
specimens. Incubate plates for 24-48 hours at 35 2C in an Cat. No. 211407 Dehydrated 500 g
aerobic atmosphere. 211410 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
293689 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
Expected Results United States and Canada
Typical colonial morphology on Mannitol Salt Agar is as follows: Cat. No. 221173 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
221271 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Staphylococcus aureus ........................ Small to large with
Europe
yellow zones
Cat. No. 254027 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Staphylococci other than S. aureus ........ Small to large with red 254079 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
zones Japan
Streptococci ......................................... No growth to trace Cat. No. 251173 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
growth *Store at 2-8C.

Micrococci ........................................... Large, white to orange

Gram-negative bacteria ........................ No growth to trace
growth
350
 Marine Agar 2216
M
Marine Agar 2216 Marine Broth 2216
Intended Use bacteria. The media contain minerals that nearly duplicate the
Marine Agar 2216 and Marine Broth 2216 are used for culti- major mineral composition of sea water,2 in addition to peptone
vating heterotrophic marine bacteria. and yeast extract that provide a good source of nutrients.
In the use of Marine Agar 2216, the conventional pour plate
Summary and Explanation and spread plate techniques of enumeration are used. For
Marine bacteria are present in nutrient sea water by the the pour plate technique, the agar must be cooled to 42C
millions per mL and are essential to the life cycle of all marine before inoculation because of the thermo-sensitive nature
flora and fauna. The enumeration and activity of marine of most marine bacteria. In the spread plate technique, the
bacteria are important to the food industry for the conserva- agar is poured while hot and allowed to cool and solidify
tion of marine life. Marine Agar 2216 and Marine Broth 2216 before inoculation. This latter method was reported by Buck
are prepared according to the formula of ZoBell1 The media and Cleverdon3 to give higher counts than the pour plate
contain all of the nutrients necessary for the growth of marine method because of the increased growth of the thermo-
sensitive bacteria.
User Quality Control
Sizemore and Stevenson4 used Marine Agar 2216 routinely as
Identity Specifications the upper nutrient layer of a marine agar-milk agar double-
Difco Marine Agar 2216 layer plate. This two layer plate was developed for isolating
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige with a few dark particles, proteolytic marine bacteria. Marine Agar 2216 was also used
free flowing, homogeneous.
in studies characterizing a marine bacterium associated with
Solution: 5.51% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
Crassostrea virginica (the Eastern Oyster).5
amber, slightly opalescent to opales-
cent with slight precipitate. Principles of the Procedure
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent to Peptone and yeast extract provide nitrogen, vitamins and
opalescent, may have a slight precipi-
minerals.
tate, may contain dark particles.
Reaction of 5.51% The high salt content helps to simulate sea water. Numerous
Solution at 25C: pH 7.6 0.2 minerals are also included to duplicate the major mineral
Difco Marine Broth 2216 composition of sea water. Agar is the solidifying agent.
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige with a few dark particles,
free flowing, homogeneous. Uninoculated Vibrio harveyi
Plate ATCC 14126
Solution: 3.74% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
amber, slightly opalescent with precipi-
tate.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent with
a precipitate.
Reaction of 3.74%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.6 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Marine Agar 2216
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
20-25C for 40-72 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Vibrio fischeri 7744 102-103 Good
Vibrio harveyi 14126 102-103 Good

Difco Marine Broth 2216

Prepare the medium per label directions. Dispense 50 mL amounts in
250 mL Erlenmeyer flasks. Inoculate and incubate at 20-25C on a
shaker for 40-72 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Vibrio fischeri 7744 102-103 Good
Vibrio harveyi 14126 102-103 Good

351
Section III
M Marine Agar 2216, cont.

Formulae Directions for Preparation from

Difco Marine Agar 2216 Dehydrated Product
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 1.0 g
Difco Marine Agar 2216 - 55.1 g;
Ferric Citrate .............................................................. 0.1 g Difco Marine Broth 2216 - 37.4 g.
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 19.45 g 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Magnesium Chloride .................................................. 8.8 g completely dissolve the powder.
Sodium Sulfate ........................................................... 3.24 g 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 1.8 g
Potassium Chloride .................................................... 0.55 g 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Sodium Bicarbonate ................................................... 0.16 g stable, typical control cultures.
Potassium Bromide ..................................................... 0.08 g
Strontium Chloride ................................................... 34.0 mg Procedure
Boric Acid ................................................................. 22.0 mg
Sodium Silicate ........................................................... 4.0 mg Consult appropriate references for recommended test proce-
Sodium Fluoride ......................................................... 2.4 mg dures.3,4
Ammonium Nitrate .................................................... 1.6 mg
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 8.0 mg
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Expected Results
Difco Marine Broth 2216
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g References
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 1.0 g 1. ZoBell. 1941. J. Mar. Res. 4:42.
2. Lyman and Fleming. 1940. J. Mar. Res. 3:134.
Ferric Citrate .............................................................. 0.1 g 3. Buck and Cleverdon. 1960. Limnol. Oceanogr. 5:78.
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 19.45 g 4. Sizemore and Stevenson. 1970. Appl. Microbiol. 20:991.
Magnesium Chloride .................................................. 5.9 g 5. Weiner, Segall and Colwell. 1985. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 49:83.
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 3.24 g
Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 1.8 g Availability
Potassium Chloride .................................................... 0.55 g Difco Marine Agar 2216
Sodium Bicarbonate ................................................... 0.16 g
Cat. No. 212185 Dehydrated 500 g
Potassium Bromide ..................................................... 0.08 g
Strontium Chloride ................................................... 34.0 mg Difco Marine Broth 2216

Boric Acid ................................................................. 22.0 mg Cat. No. 279110 Dehydrated 500 g

Sodium Silicate ........................................................... 4.0 mg
Sodium Fluoride ......................................................... 2.4 mg
Ammonium Nitrate .................................................... 1.6 mg
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 8.0 mg
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Martin-Lewis Agar Martin-Lewis Agar, Modified

Martin-Lewis Agar (Gono-Pak) Martin-Lewis Agar
(JEMBEC)
Intended Use Selective Agar.4 A significantly greater number of positive
Martin-Lewis Agar and Martin-Lewis Agar, Modified are used gonococcal isolates from clinical specimens was reported as
for the isolation of pathogenic Neisseria from specimens compared with Thayer-Martin Selective Agar due to the inhibi-
containing mixed flora of bacteria and fungi. tion of swarming Proteus species.4-6 Because of its improved
performance, it is recommended over earlier formulations for
Summary and Explanation the isolation of N. gonorrhoeae.7 The original formula contained
Thayer-Martin Selective Agar was developed for the primary 20 g/L of agar and 1.5 g/L dextrose (in addition to the dextrose
isolation of N. gonorrhoeae and N. meningitidis from speci- in the IsoVitaleX Enrichment). The agar concentration has been
mens containing mixed flora taken from the throat, vagina, changed to approximately 12 g/L; the extra 1.5 g/L of dextrose
rectum, and urethra.1-3 Consisting of BBL Chocolate II Agar has been eliminated since the lower dextrose content was found
with vancomycin, colistin and nystatin, it is formulated to to improve the growth of N. gonorrhoeae. BBL MTM II was
minimize the overgrowth of gonococci and meningococci by developed by careful selection and pretesting of raw materials
contaminants, to suppress the growth of saprophytic Neisseria to provide enhanced growth of gonococci as well as improved
species and to enhance the growth of pathogenic Neisseria. inhibition of Candida species.
Martin et al. modified Thayer-Martin Selective Agar by adding Also recommended over earlier formulations is Martin-Lewis
trimethoprim to produce Modified Thayer-Martin (MTM) Agar, a further modification of the earlier formulations

352
 Martin-Lewis Agar, cont.
M
developed for the selective isolation of pathogenic Neisseria, (humidity) produced by the culture medium within the sealed
which is more inhibitory to gram-positive bacteria and yeasts plastic bag and generates CO 2 levels sufficient for
than Thayer-Martin agars.8,9 The concentration of vancomycin the growth of Neisseria gonorrhoeae on the selective media
is increased from 3.0 mg/mL to 4.0 mg/mL for greater inhibi- provided with the system.15
tion of gram-positive bacteria, and anisomycin is substituted
In the JEMBEC system, a tablet consisting of a mixture of
for nystatin for improved inhibition of Candida albicans. This
citric acid and sodium bicarbonate is placed in a well within
organism has been shown to inhibit N. gonorrhoeae.10,11
the plate and is activated by the moisture (humidity) produced
Martin-Lewis Agar, Modified has the same formulation as by the culture medium within the sealed plastic bag. The CO2
Martin-Lewis Agar except that the concentration of vancomycin levels generated are sufficient for the growth of N. gonorrhoeae
has been reduced to 3.0 mg/mL. on the selective media provided with the system.15
Gono-Pak is the name given to a selective medium resealable
Procedure
polyethylene bag CO2 generating tablet system described by
Streak the specimen as soon as possible after it is received in
Holston et al. for the isolation of N. gonorrhoeae. It was found
the laboratory. If material is cultured directly from a swab,
to be comparable to the candle jar method for the isolation of
proceed as follows:16
N. gonorrhoeae from clinical specimens.12,13 The Gono-Pak
system obviates the need both for a separate carbon dioxide 1. Roll swab directly on the medium in a large Z to provide
system and for transferring the specimen from the transport adequate exposure of swab to the medium for transfer of
system to a culture plate. It has been reported to be superior to organisms.
Transgrow (Modified Thayer-Martin Agar with a CO2-enriched 2. Cross-streak the Z pattern with a sterile wire loop, prefer-
atmosphere in a bottle) as a transport system.14 ably in the clinic. If not done previously, cross-streaking
should be done in the laboratory.
The JEMBEC* style plate was developed by John E. Martin,
3. Place the culture as soon as possible in an aerobic environ-
Jr., of the Centers for Disease Control in association with Ames
ment enriched with carbon dioxide.
Laboratories and was designed to provide a self-contained CO2
a. With the Gono-Pak System:
environment through the use of a CO2-generating tablet placed
Place inoculated plates in the polyethylene bag provided
in a specially designed well provided in the plate.15 The
(one or two plates per bag). Cut off the corner of one foil-
JEMBEC system is recommended for the growth and trans-
wrapped CO2 tablet to expose the tablet and place in the
portation of N. gonorrhoeae and has the advantage over other
bag. DO NOT ADD WATER TO THE TABLET.
transport systems of obviating the necessity of transferring the
To seal the bag, simply press down on the zipper at the
specimen from the transport system to a culture plate.
end of the bag with fingers and slide along to the opposite
*JEMBEC is a trademark of Miles Scientific.
end. Be sure that the bag is sealed completely. After the bag
Principles of the Procedure is sealed, incubate in an inverted position (agar bed up) at
Martin-Lewis Agar is based on Chocolate II Agar which 35C for 18 to 48 hours.7,17
contains an improved GC Agar base, bovine hemoglobin To transport the culture after incubation, place the sealed
and BBLIsoVitaleX Enrichment. The GC base contains Gono-Pak system in a suitable mailing or shipping con-
nitrogenous nutrients in the form of casein and meat peptones, tainer. Care should be taken to protect the culture from
phosphate buffer to maintain pH and corn starch, which extreme heat or cold and to ensure delivery to the testing
neutralizes toxic fatty acids that may be present in the agar. laboratory as rapidly as possible.
Hemoglobin provides X factor (hemin) for Haemophilus
b. With the JEMBEC System:
species. IsoVitaleX Enrichment is a defined supplement which
With sterile forceps, remove a CO2-generating tablet from
provides V factor (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide, NAD)
its foil wrapper and place it in the specially designed well
for Haemophilus species and vitamins, amino acids, coenzymes,
in the plate. Place inoculated plates in the polyethylene bag
dextrose, ferric ion and other factors which improve the growth
provided (one plate per bag). DO NOT ADD WATER
of pathogenic Neisseria.
TO THE TABLET. Seal the bag by pressing down on the
This selective medium contains the antimicrobial agents vanco- zipper at the end of the bag with fingers and slide along
mycin, colistin, anisomycin (V-C-A Inhibitor) and to the opposite end. Be sure that the bag is sealed
trimethoprim, to suppress the normal flora. Vancomycin is completely. After the bag is sealed, incubate in an inverted
active primarily against gram-positive bacteria. Colistin inhibits position (agar bed up) at 35C for 18-48 hours.7,17
gram-negative bacteria, including Pseudomonas species, but
To transport the culture after incubation, place the sealed
is not active against Proteus species. Anisomycin inhibits yeasts.
JEMBEC system in a suitable mailing or shipping container.
Trimethoprim inhibits Proteus.
Care should be taken to protect the culture from extreme
In the Gono-Pak system, a tablet consisting of a mixture of heat or cold and to ensure delivery to the testing laboratory
citric acid and sodium bicarbonate is activated by the moisture as soon as possible.

353
Section III
M Martin-Lewis Agar, cont.

Transit time may be extended and viability and recovery References

enhanced by incubating before mailing. An incubation time 1.
2.
Martin, Billings, Hackney and Thayer. 1967. Public Health Rep. 82:361.
Thayer and Martin. 1966. Pub. Health Rep. 81:559.
of 18-24 hours at 35 2C will enhance transport 3. Mitchell, Rhoden and Marcus. 1966. Am. J. Epidem. 83:74.
4. Martin, Armstrong and Smith. 1974. Appl. Microbiol. 27:802.
and recovery of organisms for definitive examinations 5. Center for Disease Control, January 2, 1975. Memorandum: recommendation to use the same
medium, Modified Thayer-Martin (MTM), in both plates and bottles for the GC culture screening
immediately upon arrival in the laboratory.9 Specimens program. U.S. Public Health Service, Atlanta, Ga.
should arrive at the laboratory within 48 hours.9 6. Seth. 1970. Br. J. Vener. Dis. 46:201.
7. Evangelista and Beilstein. 1993. Cumitech 4A, Laboratory diagnosis of gonorrhea. Coord. ed.,
If confluent growth is obtained on the surface of the Abramson. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
8. Martin and Lewis. 1977. Public Health Lab. 35:53.
medium, subculture growth to Martin-Lewis Agar and 9. Knapp and Koumans. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
nonselective Chocolate II Agar and pick isolated colonies 10. Hipp, Lawton, Chen and Gaafar. 1974. Appl. Microbiol. 27:192.
11. Hipp, Lawton, Savage and Gaafar. 1975. J. Clin. Microbiol. 1:476.
from the subculture plates for further investigation. 12. Holston, Hosty and Martin. 1974. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 62:558.
If isolated colonies are present on the agar surface of the 13. DeVaux, Evans, Arndt and Janda. 1987. J. Clin. Microbiol. 25:571.
14. Lewis and Weisner. 1980. Lab Management. 18:33.
medium, pick colonies for Gram staining, oxidase testing 15. Martin and Jackson. 1975. J. Am. Ven. Dis. Assoc. 2:28.
16. Center for Disease Control. 1975. Criteria and techniques for the diagnosis of gonorrhea. U.S.
and for carbohydrate fermentation studies. Public Health Service, Atlanta, Ga.
17. Lewis. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American
4. Incubate at 35 2C and examine after overnight incuba- Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
tion and again after approximately 48 hours.
5. Subculture for identification of N. gonorrhoeae should Availability
be made within 18-24 hours. If shipped after incubation, BBL Martin-Lewis Agar
colonies should be subcultured before performing biochemical Cat. No. 221557 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
221558 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
identification tests in order to ensure that adequate viability is
achieved. BBL Martin-Lewis Agar//Chocolate II Agar
Cat. No. 297060 Prepared Bi-Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
297245 Prepared Bi-Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
Expected Results
Typical colonial morphology on Martin-Lewis Agar is as follows: BBL Martin-Lewis, Modified//Chocolate II Agar
Cat. No. 298513 Prepared Bi-Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
Neisseria gonorrhoeae ..... Small grayish-white to colorless, 298206 Prepared Bi-Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
mucoid
BBL Martin-Lewis Agar (Gono-Pak)
Neisseria meningitidis ....... Medium to large, blue-gray, Cat. No. 221793 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
mucoid
BBL Martin-Lewis Agar (JEMBEC)

Colonies may be selected for Gram staining, subculturing or Cat. No. 221804 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
other diagnostic procedures. 299602 Prepared Plates (with white patient label on bottom)
Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

Maximum Recovery Diluent

Intended Use User Quality Control
Maximum Recovery Diluent is an isotonic diluent containing
a low level of peptone used for maintaining the viability of Identity Specifications
organisms during dilution procedures. Difco Maximum Recovery Diluent
Dehydrated Appearance: Cream to beige, free-flowing, homo-
Summary and Explanation geneous.
Standard methods for the microbiological examination of food- Solution: 0.95% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is colorless, clear.
stuffs require sample dilution to be carried out accurately to
estimate the number of microorganisms. Diluents consisting Prepared Appearance: Colorless, clear.
of sterile saline, phosphate buffer solutions and distilled water Reaction of 0.95%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
have all been shown to have a lethal action on a wide range of
organisms.1,2 Cultural Response
The presence of low levels of peptone in the diluent at a pH Difco Maximum Recovery Diluent
of 7.0 0.2 affords protection for bacteria for at least one Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate tubes with the test
hour during the dilution stage.3,4 The presence of peptone also organism. At time zero and after 30 minutes at room temperature,
allows accurate quantitative procedures to be performed with subculture a loopful (0.01 mL) onto Trypticase Soy Agar with 5%
Sheep Blood (TSA II) plates using the streak technique. Incubate plates
minimal reductions in viable count in the diluent. at 35 2C for 18-24 hours.
Principles of Procedure INOCULUM RECOVERY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU AFTER 30 MINUTES
Low levels of peptone help protect organisms in the diluent.
Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 No significant reduction
Sodium chloride maintains proper osmotic pressure.
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-104 No significant reduction

354
 McBride Listeria Agar
M
Formula Procedure
Difco Maximum Recovery Diluent Consult appropriate references for dilution procedures when
Approximate Formula* Per Liter testing foods.1-4
Peptone ..................................................................... 1.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 8.5 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Expected Results
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product References
1. DeMello, Danielson and Kiser. 1951. J. Lab. Clin. Med. 37:579.
1. Dissolve 9.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. 2. Gunter. 1954. J. Bacteriol. 67:628.
3. Straka and Stokes. 1957. Appl. Microbiol. 5:21.
2. Dispense into final containers and cap loosely. 4. Patterson and Cassells. 1963. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 26:493.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Availability
stable, typical control cultures. Difco Maximum Recovery Diluent
Cat. No. 218971 Dehydrated 500 g

McBride Listeria Agar

Intended Use cases of listeriosis has shown that the principal route of trans-
McBride Listeria Agar is used for isolating Listeria mission is via the consumption of foodstuffs contaminated with
monocytogenes with or without the addition of blood. L. monocytogenes.4
Implicated vehicles of transmission include turkey frankfurters,5
Summary and Explanation coleslaw, pasteurized milk, Mexican-style cheese, pat and
First described in 1926 by Murray, Webb and Swann,1 Listeria pickled pork tongue. The organism has been isolated from
monocytogenes is a widespread problem in public health and commercial dairy and other food processing plants. Listeria
the food industries. This organism can cause human illness species are ubiquitous in nature, being present in a wide range
and death, particularly in immunocompromised individuals of unprocessed foods, soil, sewage, silage and river water.6
and pregnant women.2 The first reported food-borne outbreak
of listeriosis was in 19853 and, since then, microbiological and Listeria species grow over a pH range of 4.4-9.6 and survive in
epidemiological evidence from both sporadic and epidemic food products with pH levels outside of these parameters.7
Listeria species are microaerophilic, gram-positive, asporogenous,
User Quality Control non-encapsulated, non-branching, regular, short, motile rods.
Motility is most pronounced at 20C.
Identity Specifications
Difco McBride Listeria Agar The most common contaminating bacteria found in food sources
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, homogeneous, may form potentially containing Listeria are streptococci, especially the
soft lumps. enterococci, micrococci and Bacillus species, Escherichia coli,
Solution: 4.6% solution, soluble in purified Pseudomonas aeruginosa and Proteus vulgaris.8
water upon boiling. Solution is light
to medium amber, very slightly to Identification of Listeria is based on successful isolation of
slightly opalescent. the organism, biochemical characterization and serological
Prepared Appearance: Without Blood Light to medium confirmation.
amber, slightly opalescent.
With Blood Cherry red, opaque. McBride Listeria Agar is prepared according to the formulation
Reaction of 4.6% of McBride and Girard,9 who originally described the medium
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
and its use in the selective isolation of Listeria from experimen-
Cultural Response tally mixed cultures. The medium has been recommended for
Difco McBride Listeria Agar isolating Listeria from clinical specimens,10 raw milk11,12 and
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at food samples.7
35 2C for 18-48 hours. Observe the colonies under oblique trans-
mitted light. When the medium is used as a blood agar, a narrow zone of beta-
hemolysis may be evident around and under Listeria colonies.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Inhibition
Lactobacillus rhamnosus 9595 103-2103 Inhibition
Principles of the Procedure
Listeria monocytogenes 19114 102-103 Good* Peptone and beef extract provide nitrogen, vitamins and
Listeria monocytogenes 19115 102-103 Good* minerals. Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance of
*Listeria colonies gray to blue color with a ground glass appearance. the medium. Partial selectivity is provided by lithium chloride,
glycine and phenylethanol, which aid in suppressing both
355
Section III
M McBride Listeria Agar, cont.

gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria other than Listeria. Procedure

If increased inhibition of fungi is also needed, cycloheximide When testing clinical specimens for Listeria, inoculate directly
can be added after autoclaving. Agar is the solidifying agent. onto primary plating media and McBride Listeria Agar.10

Formula When isolating Listeria from raw milk and food samples,
Difco McBride Listeria Agar
refer to appropriate references.7,12
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Tryptose ................................................................... 10.0 g Expected Results
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g Observe colonies under oblique transmitted light. Listeria
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Glycine ..................................................................... 10.0 g
colonies should display a gray to blue color with a ground
Lithium Chloride ........................................................ 0.5 g glass appearance.
Phenylethanol ............................................................ 2.5 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g References
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 1. Murray, Webb and Swann. 1926. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 29:407.
2. Monk, Clavero, Beuchat, Doyle and Brackett. 1994. J. Food Prot. 57:969.
Directions for Preparation from 3.
4.
Wehr. 1987. J. Assoc. Off. Anal. Chem. 70:769.
Bremer and Osborne. 1995. J. Food Prot. 58:604.
Dehydrated Product 5.
6.
Grau and Vanderlinde. 1992. J. Food Prot. 55:4.
Patel, Hwang, Beuchat, Doyle and Brackett. 1995. J. Food Prot. 58:244.
1. Suspend 46 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix 7. Ryser and Donnelly. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiological
examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
thoroughly. 8. Kramer and Jones. 1969. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 32:381.
9. McBride and Girard. 1960. J. Lab. Clin. Med. 55:153.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 10. Pezzlo. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Soci-
completely dissolve the powder. ety for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
11. Hayes, Feeley, Graves, Ajello and Fleming. 1986. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 51:438.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. 12. Flowers, Andrews, Donnelly and Koenig. 1993. In Marshall (ed.), Standard methods for the exami-
nation of dairy products, 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
4. To enhance selectivity and/or differentiation, aseptically add
0.2 g/L cycloheximide and/or sterile defibrinated blood to Availability
the medium at 45-50C. Mix well. Difco McBride Listeria Agar
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using COMPF SMD
stable, typical control cultures. Cat. No. 212156 Dehydrated 500 g*
*Store at 2-8C.

McClung Toabe Agar Base

Egg Yolk Enrichment 50%
Intended Use Disodium phosphate and monopotassium phosphate maintain
McClung Toabe Agar Base is used with Egg Yolk Enrichment pH balance and provide a source of phosphates. Agar is the
50% for isolating and detecting Clostridium perfringens in solidifying agent. Egg Yolk Enrichment 50% provides egg yolk
foods based on the lecithinase reaction. lecithin. Lecithinase-producing clostridia, such as C. perfringens,
hydrolyze the lecithin and produce opaque halos.
Summary and Explanation
McClung and Toabe1 formulated a medium for isolating Formulae
C. perfringens from foods. With the addition of 50% egg yolk Difco McClung Toabe Agar Base
emulsion, C. perfringens and a few other Clostridium species Approximate Formula* Per Liter
show the lecithinase reaction. Proteose Peptone ..................................................... 40.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.0 g
C. perfringens is found in raw meats, poultry, dehydrated soups Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 5.0 g
and sauces, raw vegetables and other foods and food ingredients, Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
but occurrences of food borne illness are usually associated with Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.0 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.1 g
cooked meat or poultry products.2 Spores of some strains that Agar ......................................................................... 25.0 g
may resist heat during cooking germinate and grow in foods Difco Egg Yolk Enrichment 50%
that are not adequately refrigerated.3 Enumerating the micro- Sterile concentrated egg yolk emulsion.
organism in food samples plays a role in epidemiological *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

investigation of outbreaks of food borne illness.2

Directions for Preparation from
Principles of the Procedure Dehydrated Product
McClung Toabe Agar Base contains peptone as a source Difco McClung Toabe Agar Base
of carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Dextrose is the 1. Suspend 75 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
carbohydrate source. Sodium chloride provides essential ions. thoroughly.
Magnesium sulfate provides divalent cations and sulfate.
356
 McFarland Turbidity Standard
M
User Quality Control
Identity Specifications Cultural Response
Difco McClung Toabe Agar Base Difco McClung Toabe Agar Base with Egg Yolk
Dehydrated Appearance: Very light beige, free-flowing, homo- Enrichment 50%
geneous. Prepare the medium with Egg Yolk Enrichment 50% per label direc-
Solution: 7.5% solution, soluble in purified tions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours. Incubate
water upon boiling. Solution is light the clostridia anaerobically.
amber, slightly opalescent, with a INOCULUM LECITHINASE
precipitate. ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY REACTION
Prepared Appearance: Plain Light amber, opalescent with Clostridium
precipitate. perfringens 12919 102-103 Good Opaque halo
With Egg Yolk Enrichment Light Clostridium
yellow, opaque. perfringens 12924 102-103 Good Opaque halo
Reaction of 7.5% Staphylococcus
Solution at 25C: pH 7.6 0.2 aureus 25923 102-103 Good None
Difco Egg Yolk Enrichment 50% Staphylococcus
Appearance: Canary yellow, opaque liquid with a epidermidis 14990 102-103 Good None
resuspendable precipitate.

2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Expected Results
completely dissolve the powder. Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
3. Dispense 90 mL amounts into flasks and autoclave at 121C
for 15 minutes. References
4. Cool to 50C and aseptically add 10 mL of Egg Yolk 1. McClung and Toabe. 1947. J. Bacteriol. 53:139.
2. Labbe. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiological examina-
Enrichment 50% to each 90 mL of base. Mix thoroughly. tion of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
5. Dispense into sterile Petri dishes in approximately 15 mL 3. Rhodehamel and Harmon. 1995. FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Interna-
tional, Gaithersburg, Md.
amounts.
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Availability
stable, typical control cultures. Difco McClung Toabe Agar Base
Difco Egg Yolk Enrichment 50% Cat. No. 294110 Dehydrated 500 g
Shake gently to resuspend the precipitate. Difco Egg Yolk Enrichment 50%

Cat. No. 233471 Tube 12 10 mL*

Procedure 233472 Bottle 6 100 mL*
*Store at 2-8C.
See appropriate references for specific procedures.

McFarland Turbidity Standard No. 0.5

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
McFarland standards are used as turbidity standards in the Turbidity standards are prepared by mixing chemicals that
preparation of suspensions of microorganisms. The McFarland precipitate to form a solution of reproducible turbidity.3
0.5 standard has particular application in the preparation of McFarland standards are prepared by adding sulfuric acid to
bacterial inocula for performing antimicrobial susceptibility an aqueous solution of barium chloride, which results in the
testing. formation of a suspended barium sulfate precipitate.
The McFarland 0.5 standard corresponds approximately to a
Summary and Explanation
homogeneous Escherichia coli suspension of 1.5 108 cells
One of the earliest uses of turbidity for the estimation of
per mL.3
bacterial populations was in the preparation of vaccines.1 In 1907,
McFarland developed a series of barium sulfate solutions to Procedure
approximate the numbers of bacteria in solutions of equal
Vigorously agitate the turbidity standard on a mechanical
turbidity, as determined by plate counts.2,3
vortex mixer just before use.
The performance of susceptibility testing requires the use of
Using adequate light, compare the turbidity of a bacterial suspen-
standard inocula. The McFarland 0.5 standard is used for the
sion to the turbidity standard by holding the tubes against a
preparation of inocula in standardized agar dilution, broth
white background with contrasting horizontal black lines.
macro- and microdilution, disc diffusion and anaerobic organ-
ism susceptibility test procedures.4-6
357
Section III
M McFarland Turbidity Standard, cont.

3. Baron, Peterson and Finegold. 1994. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 9th ed. Mosby-Year
Alternatively, use the turbidity standard to standardize Book, Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
electrometric turbidimeters. 4. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved Standard: M7-A5. Methods for
dilution antimicrobial susceptibility tests for bacteria that grow aerobically, 5th ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
5. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved Standard: M2-A7.
Performance standards for antimicrobial disk susceptibility tests, 7th ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
Expected Results 6. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 1997. Approved Standard: M11-A4.
Methods for antimicrobial susceptibility testing of anaerobic bacteria, 4th ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
Use of the McFarland 0.5 standard will enable the preparation of
standardized inocula for use in the performance of standardized
Availability
antimicrobial susceptibility testing procedures.4-6
BBL McFarland Turbidity Standard No. 0.5
BAM COMPF NCCLS
References Cat. No. 297298 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10
nd
1. Lorian (ed.). 1986. Antibiotics in laboratory medicine, 2 ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
2. McFarland. 1907. J. Am. Med. Assoc. 49:1176.

Methionine Assay Medium

(See Amino Acid Assay Media)

Micro Assay Culture Agar Micro Inoculum Broth

Intended Use
Micro Assay Culture Agar is used for cultivating lactobacilli Micro Inoculum Broth is used for preparing the inoculum of
and other organisms used in microbiological assays. lactobacilli and other microorganisms used in microbiological
assays of vitamins and amino acids.
User Quality Control Summary and Explanation
Identity Specifications Vitamin assay media are prepared for use in the microbiological
Difco Micro Assay Culture Agar
assay of vitamins.
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan to tan, free-flowing, homo- Three types of media are used for this purpose:
geneous.
1. Maintenance Media: For carrying the stock culture to preserve
Solution: 4.7% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light to medium
the viability and sensitivity of the test organism for its
amber, very slightly to slightly opalescent intended purpose;
without significant precipitate. 2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for immediate
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal- use;
escent.
3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the vitamin under
Reaction of 4.7%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2 test. They contain all the factors necessary for optimal
Difco Micro Inoculum Broth growth of the test organism except the single essential
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. vitamin to be determined.
Solution: 3.7% solution, soluble in purified Micro Assay Culture Agar is used for maintaining stock
water. Solution is light to medium
amber, clear to very slightly opalescent. cultures of lactobacilli and other test microorganisms. This
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear to very medium is also used for general cultivation of lactobacilli.
slightly opalescent, without precipitate.
Micro Inoculum Broth is used for cultivating lactobacilli and
Reaction of 3.7%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2
preparing the inoculum for microbiological assays.

Cultural Response Principles of the Procedure

Difco Micro Assay Culture Agar or Micro
Peptone provides nitrogen and amino acids in both Micro Assay
Inoculum Broth Culture Agar and Micro Inoculum Broth. Yeast extract is a
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with test organ- vitamin source. Dextrose is a carbon source. Monopotassium
isms. Incubate Micro Assay Culture Agar at 35 2C for 18-48 hours;
incubate Micro Inoculum Broth at 35-37C for 18-24 hours. phosphate is a buffering agent. Polysorbate 80 acts as an emul-
sifier. Agar is the solidifying agent (Micro Assay Culture Agar).
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Enterococcus hirae 8043 102-103 Good
Lactobacillus rhamnosus 7469 102-103 Good
Lactobacillus delbrueckii
subsp. lactis 7830 102-103 Good
Lactobacillus plantarum 8014 102-103 Good

358
 Microbial Content Test Agar
M
Formulae 3. Store at 2-8C.
Difco Micro Assay Culture Agar 4. Transfer cultures at weekly or twice-monthly intervals.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 5.0 g Assay Inoculum
Yeast Extract ............................................................ 20.0 g 1. Subculture from a 16-24 hour stock culture of lactobacilli
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g in Micro Assay Culture Agar into a 10 mL tube of Micro
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 2.0 g
Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 0.1 g Inoculum Broth.
Agar ......................................................................... 10.0 g 2. Incubate at 35-37C for 16-24 hours or as specified in the
Difco Micro Inoculum Broth assay procedure.
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar. 3. Centrifuge the culture and decant the supernatant.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
4. Resuspend cells in 10 mL of sterile 0.9% NaCl solution or
Precautions sterile single strength basal assay medium.
Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media or 5. Wash the cells by centrifuging and decanting the supernatant
glassware used in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely two additional times unless otherwise indicated.
small amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give 6. Dilute the washed suspension 1:100 with sterile 0.9% single
erroneous results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from deter- strength basal assay medium or as indicated. Where appli-
gents and other chemicals must be used. Glassware must be cable, adjust inoculum concentration according to limits
heated to 250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic specified in the references.1,2
residues that might be present. Take precautions to keep steril- For a complete discussion of vitamin assay methodology, refer
ization and cooling conditions uniform throughout the assay. to appropriate procedures.1,2

Directions for Preparation from Expected Results

Dehydrated Product For test results on vitamin assay procedures, refer to appropriate
Difco Micro Assay Culture Agar procedures.1,2
1. Suspend 47 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly. Limitations of the Procedure
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- 1. Test organisms used in assay procedures must be cultured
pletely dissolve the powder. and maintained on media recommended for this purpose.
3. Dispense 10 mL amounts into 16-20 mm diameter tubes. 2. Follow assay directions exactly. The age, preparation and size
4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. of inoculum are extremely important factors in obtaining a
5. Agitate tubes prior to solidification to disperse the floccu- satisfactory assay result.
lent precipitate. 3. Although other media and methods may be used successfully
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using for maintaining cultures and preparing inocula, uniformly
stable, typical control culures. good results will be obtained if the methods described are
followed exactly.
Difco Micro Inoculum Broth
4. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the micro-
1. Dissolve 37 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. biological assay procedure.
2. Dispense 10 mL quantities into tubes of 16-20 mm diam- 5. The use of altered or deficient media may create mutants
eter. having different nutritional requirements. Such organisms
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. will not produce a satisfactory test response.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures. References
1. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed, vol. II. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
Procedure 2. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
Stock Cultures
1. Prepare stock cultures in triplicate on Micro Assay Culture Availability
Agar, inoculating tubes using a straight-wire inoculating Difco Micro Assay Culture Agar
needle. Cat. No. 231920 Dehydrated 500 g
2. Incubate tubes at 30-37C for 18-24 hours. Difco Micro Inoculum Broth
Cat. No. 211813 Dehydrated 500 g

Microbial Content Test Agar

(See Tryptic Soy Agar with Lecithin and Polysorbate 80)

359
Section III
M Middlebrook 7H9 Broth

Middlebrook 7H9 Broth Middlebrook 7H9 Broth

with Glycerol Middlebrook 7H9 Broth with
Polysorbate 80 Middlebrook ADC Enrichment
Intended Use Summary and Explanation
These media are used in qualitative procedures for the cultivation Middlebrook and co-workers developed the 7H9 broth base
of mycobacteria. formulation during the same time period in which they
devised the 7H10 agar base.1-3 Both media types support the
Middlebrook 7H9 Broth dehydrated base (which may
growth of mycobacterial species when supplemented with
be supplemented with either glycerol or polysorbate 80) in
nutrients such as glycerol, oleic acid, albumin and dextrose,
combination with Middlebrook ADC Enrichment, and
except for M. bovis which is inhibited by glycerol. The albumin
Middlebrook 7H9 Broth prepared tubes (containing ADC
and dextrose, along with sodium chloride and catalase are
Enrichment) when supplemented with glycerol (2 mL/L) support
provided by the Middlebrook ADC Enrichment.
the growth of mycobacteria, including M. tuberculosis. They
are used primarily for growth of pure cultures of mycobacteria Middlebrook 7H9 Broth may be additionally supplemented
for use in laboratory studies. with polysorbate 80 for improved growth.4,5 Middlebrook
broths are commonly used in the preparation of inocula for
These media and 7H9 Broth with Polysorbate 80 (0.5 mL/L)
antimicrobial assays, biochemical tests (arylsufatase and
are used as subculture media for Mycobacterium species and
tellurite reduction) and for maintenance of stock strains.4-6
in the preparation of inocula for drug susceptibility testing.
Principles of the Procedure
User Quality Control The large number of inorganic salts in this medium provide
Identity Specifications substances essential for the growth of mycobacteria. Sodium
Difco Middlebrook 7H9 Broth citrate, when converted to citric acid, serves to hold certain
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- inorganic cations in solution. The albumin acts as a protective
neous. agent by binding free fatty acids, which may be toxic to
Solution: 0.47% solution, soluble in purified Mycobacterium species. In the enriched medium, the albumin
water. Solution is very light amber,
clear.
is heat-treated to remove lipase, which may release fatty acids
Prepared Appearance: Colorless to very light amber, clear.
from polysorbate 80;7 catalase destroys toxic peroxides that
Reaction of 0.47%
may be present in the medium; dextrose is an energy source;
Solution at 25C: pH 6.6 0.2 and sodium chloride provides essential electrolytes. Supple-
BBL Middlebrook ADC Enrichment mentation with glycerol or polysorbate 80 enhances the growth
Appearance: Very pale yellow, clear to trace hazy. of mycobacteria.
Reaction of Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2
Formulae
Cultural Response Difco Middlebrook 7H9 Broth
Difco Middlebrook 7H9 Broth with Approximate Formula* Per 900 mL
BBL Middlebrook ADC Enrichment Ammonium Sulfate .................................................... 0.5 g
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at L-Glutamic Acid ......................................................... 0.5 g
35 2C under approximately 10% CO2 for up to 21 days. Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 0.1 g
Pyridoxine .................................................................. 1.0 mg
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY Biotin ......................................................................... 0.5 mg
Mycobacterium Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 2.5 g
tuberculosis H37Ra 25177 102-3102 Good Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
Mycobacterium Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.04 g
kansasii, Group I 12478 102-3102 Good Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.05 g
Mycobacterium Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.5 m g
scrofulaceum, Group II 19981 102-3102 Good Zinc Sulfate ................................................................ 1.0 mg
Copper Sulfate ........................................................... 1.0 mg
Mycobacterium
intracellulare, Group III 13950 102-3102 Good BBL Middlebrook ADC Enrichment
Mycobacterium Approximate Formula* Per Liter
fortuitum, Group IV 6841 102-3102 Good Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 8.5 g
Bovine Albumin (Fraction V) ..................................... 50.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g
Catalase ..................................................................... 0.03 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

360
 Middlebrook 7H10 Agar
M
Precaution8 Limitations of the Procedure
Biosafety Level 2 practices and procedures, containment equip- 1. Negative culture results do not rule-out active infection
ment and facilities are required for non-aerosol-producing by mycobacteria. Some factors that are responsible for
manipulations of clinical specimens such as preparation of unsuccessful cultures are:
acid-fast smears. All aerosol-generating activities must be The specimen was not representative of the infectious
conducted in a Class I or II biological safety cabinet. Biosafety material; i.e., saliva instead of sputum.
Level 3 practices, containment equipment and facilities are The mycobacteria were destroyed during digestion and
required for laboratory activities in the propagation and decontamination of the specimen.
manipulation of cultures of M. tuberculosis and M. bovis. Gross contamination interfered with the growth of the
Animal studies also require special procedures. mycobacteria.
Proper aerobic conditions and increased CO2 tension
Directions for Preparation from were not provided during incubation.
Dehydrated Product 2. Mycobacteria are strict aerobes and growth is stimulated
1. Suspend 4.7 g of the powder in 900 mL of purified water by increased levels of CO2. Screw caps on tubes or bottles
(containing 2 mL glycerol or 0.5 g polysorbate 80, if should be handled as directed for exchange of CO2.
desired).
2. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes. References
1. Middlebrook. 1955. Fitzsimmons Army Hospital Report No. 1, Denver, Colo.
3. Aseptically add 100 mL of Middlebrook ADC Enrichment 2. Middlebrook and Cohn. 1958. Am. J. Public Health. 48:844.
3. Middlebrook, Cohn and Schaefer. 1954. Am. Rev. Tuberc. 70:852.
to the medium when cooled to 45C. 4. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 5.
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Washington (ed.). 1985. Laboratory procedures in clinical microbiology, 2nd ed. Springer-Verlag,
stable, typical control cultures. New York, N.Y.
6. Metchock, Nolte and Wallace. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Procedure 7.
8.
Middlebrook, Cohn, Dye, Russel and Levy. 1960. Acta. Tuberc. Scand. 38:66.
U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Middlebrook 7H9 Broth with appropriate supplements is Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
primarily used for growth of pure cultures of mycobacteria 9. Kent and Kubica. 1985. Public health mycobacteriology: a guide for the level III laboratory.
USDHHS. Centers for Disease Control, Atlanta, Ga.
for use in laboratory studies. Place inoculated tubes in a BBL
GasPak EZ container operated with a GasPak EZ carbon Availability
dioxide generator sachet, or other suitable system providing Difco Middlebrook 7H9 Broth
an aerobic atmosphere enriched with carbon dioxide. Incu- AOAC SMWW
bate at 35 2C for up to 8 weeks. Keep the caps of the tubes Cat. No. 271310 Dehydrated 500 g
loosened for at least 1 week to permit circulation of CO2, but BBL Middlebrook 7H9 Broth
tighten the caps thereafter to prevent dehydration, loosening BS10 CMPH MCM7
briefly once a week to replenish CO2. Cat. No. 295939 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*

NOTE: Cultures from skin lesions suspected to be M. marinum BBL Middlebrook 7H9 Broth with Glycerol

AOAC SMWW
or M. ulcerans should be incubated at 25-33C for primary
Cat. No. 221832 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
incubation. Cultures suspected to contain M. avium or
BBL Middlebrook 7H9 Broth with Polysorbate 80

M. xenopi exhbit optimum growth at 40-42C.9 Incubate a
Cat. No. 297151 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
duplicate culture at 35-37C.9
BBL Middlebrook ADC Enrichment

Expected Results AOAC SMWW

Cat. No. 212352 Bottle, 100 mL Pkg. of 6*
Cultures should be read within 5-7 days after inoculation and
once a week thereafter for up to 8 weeks. Difco Glycerol
Cat. No. 228210 Bottle 100 g
Mycobacterial growth from the broth tubes can be utilized for 228220 Bottle 500 g
additional laboratory test procedures as required. *Store at 2-8C.

Middlebrook 7H10 Agar Middlebrook and Cohn

7H10 Agar Middlebrook OADC Enrichment
Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Middlebrook and Cohn 7H10 Agar, when supplemented with Over the years, many culture media have been devised for the
Middlebrook OADC Enrichment, is used in qualitative proce- cultivation of mycobacteria. The early ones were egg-based
dures for the isolation and cultivation of mycobacteria. formulations and included Lowenstein-Jensen Medium and
Petragnani Medium. Dubos and Middlebrook were instru-
361
Section III
M Middlebrook 7H10 Agar, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Middlebrook 7H10 Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige with green tint, free-
flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 1.9% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light to
medium amber with slight green tint,
slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 1.9%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.6 0.2
BBL Middlebrook OADC Enrichment

Appearance: Very pale yellow, clear to trace hazy.

Reaction of Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Middlebrook 7H10 Agar with Uninoculated Mycobacterium
BBL Middlebrook OADC Enrichment Tube fortuitum
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 ATCC 6841
2C under approximately 10% CO2 for up to 21 days.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Marked inhibition
Mycobacterium tuberculosis H37Ra 25177 102-3102 Good
Mycobacterium kansasii, Group I 12478 102-3102 Good
Mycobacterium scrofulaceum, Group II 19981 102-3102 Good
Mycobacterium intracellulare, Group III 13950 102-3102 Good
Mycobacterium fortuitum, Group IV 6841 102-3102 Good

mental in the development of a number of formulations which bacilli against toxic agents and, therefore, it enhances their
contained oleic acid and albumin as key ingredients to aid in recovery on primary isolation; dextrose is an energy source;
the growth of the tubercle bacilli and to protect the organisms and catalase destroys toxic peroxides that may be present in
against a variety of toxic agents.1 Subsequently, Middlebrook the medium. Partial inhibition of bacteria is achieved by the
and Cohn improved the formulation of oleic acid-albumin agar presence of the malachite green dye.
and obtained faster, more luxuriant growth of Mycobacterium
species on their medium designated as 7H10.2,3 The oleic acid Formulae
and bovine albumin, along with sodium chloride, dextrose and Difco Middlebrook 7H10 Agar
catalase, are provided by the Middlebrook OADC Enrichment. Approximate Formula* Per 900 mL
Ammonium Sulfate .................................................... 0.5 g
It has been reported that the 7H10 medium tends to grow Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.5 g
fewer contaminants than the egg-based media commonly used Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 1.5 g
Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 0.4 g
for the cultivation of mycobacteria.4 Magnesium Sulfate .................................................. 25.0 mg
Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.5 mg
Prepared plates of the complete medium are deep-filled to Zinc Sulfate ................................................................ 1.0 mg
reduce the effects of drying during prolonged incubation. Copper Sulfate ........................................................... 1.0 mg
L-Glutamic Acid (sodium salt) ..................................... 0.5 g
Principles of the Procedure Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.04 g
Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ............................................ 1.0 mg
Middlebrook and Cohn 7H10 Agar Base contains a variety of Biotin ......................................................................... 0.5 mg
inorganic salts that provide substances essential for the growth Malachite Green .................................................... 250.0 g
of mycobacteria. The sodium citrate, when converted to citric Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
acid, serves to hold certain inorganic cations in solution. BBL Middlebrook OADC Enrichment
Glycerol is an abundant source of carbon and energy. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 8.5 g
Supplementation of the agar base is required in order to obtain Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g
Bovine Albumin (Fraction V) ..................................... 50.0 g
mycobacterial growth. In the enriched medium, sodium chloride Catalase ..................................................................... 0.03 g
maintains osmotic equilibrium; oleic acid, as well as other long Oleic Acid ................................................................... 0.6 mL
chain fatty acids, can be utilized by tubercle bacilli and plays *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

an important role in the metabolism of mycobacteria; the

primary effect of albumin is that of protection of the tubercle
362
 Middlebrook 7H10 Agar, cont.
M
Precaution9 Expected Results
Biosafety Level 2 practices and procedures, containment equip- Cultures should be read within 5-7 days after inoculation and
ment and facilities are required for non-aerosol-producing once a week thereafter for up to 8 weeks.
manipulations of clinical specimens such as preparation of
For reading plates or Mycoflask bottles, invert the containers
acid-fast smears. All aerosol-generating activities must be
on the stage of a dissecting microscope. Read at 10-60 with
conducted in a Class I or II biological safety cabinet. Biosafety
transmitted light. Scan rapidly at 10-20 for the presence of
Level 3 practices, containment equipment and facilities are
colonies. Higher magnification (30-60) is helpful in observing
required for laboratory activities in the propagation and
colony morphology; i.e., serpentine cord-like colonies.
manipulation of cultures of M. tuberculosis and M. bovis.
Animal studies also require special procedures. Record observations:5
1. Number of days required for colonies to become macro-
Directions for Preparation from scopically visible.
Dehydrated Product 2. Number of colonies (plates and Mycoflask bottles):
1. Suspend 19 g of the powder in 900 mL of purified water No colonies = Negative
containing 5 mL of glycerol. Mix thoroughly. Less than 50 colonies = Actual count
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 50-100 colonies = 1+
completely dissolve the powder. 100-200 colonies = 2+
3. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes. Almost confluent (200-500) = 3+
4. Aseptically add 100 mL of Middlebrook OADC Enrich- Confluent (more than 500) = 4+
ment to the medium when cooled to 50-55C. 3. Pigment production
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using White, cream or buff = Nonchromogenic (NC)
stable, typical control cultures. Lemon, yellow, orange, red = Chromogenic (Ch)
Acid-fast-stained smears may show acid-fast bacilli, which are
Procedure reported only as acid-fast bacilli unless definitive tests are
The test procedures are those recommended by the Centers performed.5
for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) for primary isolation
from specimens containing mycobacteria.5 N-acetyl-L-cysteine- Limitations of the Procedure
sodium hydroxide (NALC-NaOH) solution is recommended 1. Negative culture results do not rule-out active infection
as a gentle but effective digesting and decontaminating by mycobacteria. Some factors that are responsible for
agent. These reagents are provided in the BBL MycoPrep unsuccessful cultures are:
Mycobacterial Specimen Digestion/Decontamination Kit. For The specimen was not representative of the infectious
detailed decontamination and culturing instructions, consult material; i.e., saliva instead of sputum.
an appropriate reference.5-8 The mycobacteria were destroyed during digestion and
Following inoculation, keep plates shielded from light and place decontamination of the specimen.
plates, medium side down, in a BBL GasPak EZ container Gross contamination interfered with the growth of the
operated with a GasPak EZ disposable carbon dioxide mycobacteria.
generator sachet, or other suitable system providing an Proper aerobic conditions and increased CO2 tension
aerobic atmosphere enriched with carbon dioxide. Incubate at were not provided during incubation.
35 2C. 2. Mycobacteria are strict aerobes and growth is stimulated
by increased levels of CO2. Screw caps on tubes or bottles
Tubes should be incubated in a slanted position at a 5 angle, should be handled as directed for exchange of CO2.
permitting incubation of slant surfaces in a horizontal plane.
Tubes and Mycoflask bottles should have screw caps loose References
for at least 1 week to permit circulation of carbon dioxide for 1. Dubos and Middlebrook. 1947. Am. Rev. Tuberc. 56:334.
2. Middlebrook and Cohn. 1958. Am. J. Pub. Health. 48:844.
the initiation of growth. Thereafter, to prevent dehydration, 3. Middlebrook, Cohn, Dye, Russell and Levy. 1960. Acta Tuberc. Scand. 38:66.
4. Kubica and Dye. 1967. Laboratory methods for clinical and public health mycobacteriology. PHS
tighten caps; loosen briefly once a week. Stand tubes upright if Publication No. 1547. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
space is a problem. 5. Kent and Kubica. 1985. Public health mycobacteriology: a guide for the level III laboratory.
USDHHS. Centers for Disease Control, Atlanta, Ga.
6. Cernoch, Enns, Saubolle and Richards. 1994. Cumitech 16A, Laboratory diagnosis of the myco-
NOTE: Cultures from skin lesions suspected to be M. marinum bacterioses. Coord. ed., Weissfeld. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
7. Metchock, Nolte and Wallace. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
or M. ulcerans should be incubated at 25-33C for primary of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
8. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey and Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby,
incubation; cultures suspected to contain M. avium or Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
M. xenopi exhibit optimum growth at 40-42C.5 Incubate a 9. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
duplicate culture at 35-37C.5 NO. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.

363
Section III
M Middlebrook 7H10 Agar, cont.

Availability Europe
Cat. No. 254520 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Difco Middlebrook 7H10 Agar

EP BBL Middlebrook OADC Enrichment

Cat. No. 262710 Dehydrated 500 g Cat. No. 212240 Bottle, 100 mL Pkg. of 6*
212351 Bottle 500 mL*
BBL Middlebrook and Cohn 7H10 Agar
BS10 CMPH EP MCM7
Difco Glycerol
United States and Canada Cat. No. 228210 Bottle 100 g
Cat. No. 221174 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 20* 228220 Bottle 500 g
295964 Prepared I Plate Dishes (Middlebrook 7H10 Agar *Store at 2-8C.
and Middlebrook 7H10 Agar) Pkg. of 20*
220958 Prepared Slants, (A Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
220959 Prepared Slants, (A Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
297448 Prepared Slants, (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
297396 Prepared Slants, (C Tubes) Ctn. of 100*

Milk Agar
Intended Use Poor cleaning of the milking equipment may cause contamina-
Milk Agar is recommended by the British Standards Institute1 tion with micrococci, streptococci, coliforms or heat resistant
and the International Dairy Federation2 for the enumeration Bacillus strains, giving an increase of the bulk milk count of
of microorganisms in liquid milk, ice cream, dried milk and >5 104 organisms/mL. Spoilage of pasteurized or raw milk by
whey. proteolytic psychrotrophic bacteria can occur on prolonged
storage below 7C.
Summary and Explanation Milk Agar conforms to the EEC Commission for the examina-
Liquid milk is a highly perishable foodstuff with a shelf life tion of ice cream.3 Milk Agar is recommended for performing
of only 5-10 days after pasteurization. Contamination of raw plate count tests on milks, rinse waters and dairy products.4
milk may arise from either the soiled or diseased udder or
inadequately cleaned milking or storage equipment. Bovine Principles of Procedure
mastitis or udder inflammation may cause contamination with Peptone and yeast extract provide essential nutrients while skim
Staphylococcus aureus, Streptococcus agalactiae, Escherichia milk powder is a source of casein. Dextrose is the carbon
coli or, more rarely, Yersinia enterocolitica and Leptospira energy source. Agar is the solidifying agent.
species. Excretion of these organisms can increase the bulk
milk count by 105 organisms/mL. Proteolytic bacteria will be surrounded by a clear zone from
the conversion of casein into soluble nitrogenous compounds.1
User Quality Control
Formula
Identity Specifications Difco Milk Agar
Difco Milk Agar

Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. Tryptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 2.5 g
Solution: 2.2% solution, soluble in purified
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g
water upon boiling. Solution is light
Skim Milk Powder (antibiotic free) ............................. 1.0 g
amber, clear to slightly opalescent, no Agar ......................................................................... 12.5 g
significant precipitate. *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, opalescent, no signifi-
cant precipitate. Directions for Preparation from
Reaction of 2.2% Dehydrated Product
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.1
1. Suspend 22 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Cultural Response thoroughly.
Difco Milk Agar 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the pour plate completely dissolve the powder.
technique and incubate at 30 2C for up to 72 hours. 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Lactobacillus rhamnosus 9595 30-300 Good stable, typical control cultures.
Lactococcus lactis 19435 30-300 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good Procedure
Streptococcus thermophilus 19258 30-300 Good Total counts may be carried out using either pour plates or
surface counting techniques.

364
 Minerals Modified Glutamate
M
1. Prepare milk dilutions of 1/10, 1/100, 1/1,000 in 1/4- Proteolytic psychrotrophic colonies may be enhanced by flood-
strength Ringers solution. Use this inoculum within 15 ing the plates with a solution of 1% hydrochloric acid or 10%
minutes. acetic acid. Pour off the excess acid solution and count the
2. Pour Plates: Pipette 1 mL of each dilution into Petri dishes. colonies surrounded by clear zones.
Add 10-12 mL of molten Milk Agar, cooled to 45C, and
mix thoroughly. References
1. Methods of microbiological examination for dairy purposes. Diluents, media and apparatus and
Spread Plates: Spread 1 mL of milk dilution over the sur- their preparation and sterilisation. BS4285, Sec. 1.2.
2. International Dairy Federation. 1993. Milk and milk products preparation of samples and
face of the solidified medium in a Petri dish. dilutions for microbiological examination. Standard 122A: 1988.
3. Incubate at 30 2C for 72 hours. 3. Klose. 1968. Susswaren. 14:778.
4. Ministry of Health. 1937. Bacteriological tests for graded milk. Memo 139/Foods. H.M.S.O.,
London, England.
Expected Results
Select plates containing 10-300 colonies. Results are expressed Availability
as colonies per mL of product tested. Difco Milk Agar
Cat. No. 218591 Dehydrated 500 g

Minerals Modified Glutamate Broth

Intended Use The medium was improved2 by the addition of ammonium
Minerals Modified Glutamate Broth is used for enumerating chloride that, by replacing ammonium lactate, resulted in
coliform organisms in water. a doubling of the gas volume. The addition of B-complex
vitamins, certain amino acids and magnesium ions resulted in
Summary and Explanation an increased rate of fermentation. Comparative trials of
Gray1 described a simple formate-lactose-glutamate medium the modified glutamate medium and MacConkey Broth3 with
that could be used as an alternative to MacConkey Broth for chlorinated and unchlorinated waters showed that Grays
the presumptive identification of coliform bacteria in water. Minerals Modified Glutamate Broth gave significantly higher
Grays original medium gave fewer false positive results than numbers of positive results (acid and gas production) for
MacConkey Broth, was suitable for use at 44C and gave low coliform organisms and Escherichia coli. This was especially
volumes of gas. apparent after 48 hours of incubation but was also clearly seen
with unchlorinated water samples after only 24 hours incuba-
User Quality Control tion. For chlorinated water samples, results with the two
media were comparable. After 18-24 hours incubation,
Identity Specifications
Minerals Modified Glutamate Medium gave significantly fewer
Difco Minerals Modified Glutamate Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Off-white to beige, free flowing,
false positive reactions. Clostridium perfringens, a common
homogeneous. cause of false positive reactions in MacConkey media, is
Solution: 1.77% solution with 0.25% ammonium unable to grow in a minimal-glutamate based medium.
chloride, soluble in purified water on
gentle warming. Solution is purple, clear. A major feature of Minerals Modified Glutamate Medium is
Prepared Appearance: Purple, clear. its superiority in initiating growth of Escherichia coli after
Reaction of 1.77% exposure to chlorine when incubated for 48 hours. In view of
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.1 (containing 0.25 g of the known resistance to chlorination of some viruses, the ability
ammonium chloride per 100 mL) to isolate coliform bacteria that survive marginal chlorination
Cultural Response provides an additional safety factor in water treatment.
Difco Minerals Modified Glutamate Broth In a comparison to Lauryl Tryptose Lactose Broth4, Minerals
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Modified Glutamate Medium gave superior isolation of
35 2C for 18-48 hours.
Escherichia coli after 48 hours incubation by the multiple tube
ORGANISM ATCC
INOCULUM
CFU RECOVERY ACID GAS
method, especially in waters containing small numbers of
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 30-300 Good + +
organisms. Minerals Modified Glutamate Medium is the
(yellow) medium of choice for the detection of fecal contamination in
Enterococcus faecalis 19433 103 None chlorinated drinking water supplies in Great Britain.4
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good + +
(yellow) Abbiss et al.5 compared Minerals Modified Glutamate Medium
Salmonella choleraesuis and three other enrichment broths for the enumeration of
subsp. choleraesuis coliform organisms present in soft cheese, cooked meat and
serotype Typhimurium 14028 30-300 Good
pat. Minerals Modified Glutamate Medium was superior in
sensitivity to Lauryl Sulfate Tryptose Broth, MacConkey Broth
and Brilliant Green Bile Broth.
365
Section III
M Minerals Modified Glutamate, cont.

Minerals Modified Glutamate Broth has been used in the modified For more polluted waters, inoculate the water sample into the
direct plate method for enumeration of Escherichia coli biotype medium in the following volumes:
1 in foods.6 According to this method, 15 grams of agar are
1. 5 1 mL of sample into 5 5 mL of single-strength medium;
added per liter of single strength broth before autoclaving. The
2. 5 1 mL of a 1:10 dilution of the sample into 5 5 mL of
medium is poured in 12-15 mL amounts into sterile Petri dishes.
single-strength medium.
This resuscitation agar is used for the recovery of damaged
cells from frozen or dried foodstuffs. Incubate the tubes at 35 2C. Examine after 18-24 hours
incubation and again at 48 hours.
Principles of the Procedure
Sodium glutamate and sodium formate are the basis of a defined Expected Results
minimal medium for the enumeration of coliform organisms in All tubes demonstrating acid production, indicated by the
water. Lactose is the carbohydrate source in Minerals Modified medium turning yellow, and gas, either in the inverted
Glutamate Broth. The addition of B-complex vitamins, certain fermentation vial or by effervescence on shaking, may be re-
amino acids and magnesium ions allows an increased rate of garded as presumptive positive reactions. Each presumptive
fermentation. Phosphate acts as a buffering agent. The addition positive tube should be confirmed in Brilliant Green Bile 2%,
of ammonium chloride allows increased gas production by the as well as with additional biochemical tests.
test organism. Bromocresol purple is present as a pH indicator. The most probable number of organisms in 100 mL of the
original water sample can be calculated using the following
Formula table.7
Difco Minerals Modified Glutamate Broth
Approximate Formula* Per Liter QUANTITY OF WATER IN EACH TUBE 50 mL 10 mL MOST PROBABLE NUMBER (MPN)
Sodium Glutamate ..................................................... 6.4 g NUMBER OF TUBES USED 1 2 OF COLIFORMS IN 100 mL IN SAMPLE
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g 0 0 0
Sodium Formate ......................................................... 0.25 g
Number of Tubes 0 1 1
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.02 g
L(-) Aspartic Acid ...................................................... 24.0 mg Giving Positive 0 2 2
L(+) Arginine .............................................................. 0.02 g Reaction 0 3 4
Thiamine .................................................................... 1.0 mg 0 4 5
Nicotinic Acid ............................................................. 1.0 mg 0 5 7
Pantothenic Acid ........................................................ 1.0 mg 1 0 2
Magnesium Sulfate Heptahydrate .............................. 0.1 g 1 1 3
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.01 g
Calcium Chloride Dihydrate ....................................... 0.01 g 1 2 6
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 0.9 g 1 3 9
Bromocresol Purple .................................................... 0.01 g 1 4 16
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 1 5 +18

Directions for Preparation from Limitations of the Procedure

Dehydrated Product 1. The performance of the medium is significantly affected by
1. Suspend 17.7 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water (or pH. Avoid overheating the broth. Check the pH of each lot
in 500 mL to prepare a double strength medium). before proceeding with testing.
2. Add 2.5 g of ammonium chloride. 2. Due to the nutritional requirements of the organisms, some
3. Mix well with gentle heating to dissolve. organisms other than coliform bacteria may grow in the
4. Distribute into tubes and place an inverted fermentation medium with production of acid and gas. Test all presump-
tube in each tube. tive-positive tubes to confirm the presence of Escherichia
5. Autoclave at 115-116C for 10 minutes. coli.
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures. References
1. Gray. 1959. J. Hyg., Camb. 57:249.
2. Gray. 1964. J. Hyg., Camb. 62:495.
Procedure 3. P. H. L. S. Standing Committee on the Bacteriological Examination of Water Supplies. 1968.
J. Hyg., Camb. 65:67.
The multiple tube method is used for the enumeration of 4. Joint Committee of the P. H. L. S. and the Standing Committee of Analysts. 1980. J. Hyg., Camb.
85:35.
Escherichia coli and coliform organisms using Minerals 5. Abbiss, Wilson, Blood and Jarvis. 1981. J. Appl. Bact. 51:121.
6. Holbrook, Anderson and Baird-Parker. 1980. Food Technol. Aust. 32:78.
Modified Glutamate Broth. 7. Departments of the Environment, Health & Social Security, and P.H.L.S. 1982. The bacteriological
examination of drinking water supplies. Report on Public Health and Medical Subjects No. 71.,
For good quality water, inoculate the water sample into the H.M.S.O., London, England.

medium in the following volumes:

Availability
1. 50 mL of sample into 50 mL of double-strength medium; Difco Minerals Modified Glutamate Broth
2. 5 10 mL of sample into 5 10 mL of double-strength Cat. No. 218501 Dehydrated 500 g
medium.

366
 Minimal Agar Davis
M
Minimal Agar Davis
Minimal Broth Davis without Dextrose
Intended Use delayed enrichment. Both Lederberg1 and Davis2 described
Minimal Agar Davis is used for isolating and characterizing a third technique using penicillin. Nutritional mutants of
nutritional mutants of Escherichia coli. B. subtilis can be isolated by these three techniques and by a
modification of the penicillin technique described by Nester,
Minimal Broth Davis without Dextrose is used with added
Schafer and Lederberg.3
dextrose in isolating and characterizing nutritional mutants of
Escherichia coli and Bacillus subtilis. After the mutants are isolated, they are characterized biochemi-
cally by growth in minimal broth supplemented with specific
Summary and Explanation growth factors or groups of growth factors. It is generally best
Lederberg1 described the Davis formulation for Minimal Agar to classify mutants according to their requirements for amino
Davis. Minimal Broth Davis without Dextrose is the same acids, vitamins, nucleic acids or other substances. This is done
formulation without dextrose and agar. Both media support by supplementing the minimal medium with Vitamin Assay
the growth of nutritional mutants of E. coli while Minimal Casamino Acids plus tryptophan, or a mixture of water soluble
Broth Davis without Dextrose with added dextrose also vitamins, alkaline-hydrolyzed yeast, nucleic acid or yeast
supports the growth of nutritional mutants of B. subtilis. extract, depending on the particular mutants desired. The
supplemented minimal broth is inoculated with a slightly
Lederberg1 described two techniques for isolating nutritional
turbid suspension of the mutant colonies and incubated for 24
mutants of E. coli, one by random isolation and the other by
hours at 35C. Growth with Vitamin Assay Casamino Acids
indicates a vitamin requirement. When a major growth factor
User Quality Control
group response is obtained, the characterization is carried
Identity Specifications further by the same general procedure to subgroups and
Difco Minimal Agar Davis finally to individual growth substances.
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 2.66% solution, soluble in purified Principles of the Procedure
water upon boiling. Solution is medium Minimal Agar Davis and Minimal Broth Davis without Dex-
amber, very slightly to slightly opales-
cent. trose contain citrate and phosphates as buffers. Ammonium
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, very slightly to slightly sulfate is the nitrogen source. Magnesium is a cofactor for many
opalescent. metabolic reactions. Minimal Agar Davis contains dextrose as
Reaction of 2.66% the carbohydrate energy source. Agar is the solidifying agent.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
Difco Minimal Broth Davis without Dextrose Formulae
Dehydrated Appearance: White, free-flowing, homogeneous. Difco Minimal Agar Davis
Solution: 1.06% solution, soluble in purified Approximate Formula* Per Liter
water. Solution is colorless, clear. Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g
Prepared Appearance: Colorless, clear. Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 7.0 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 2.0 g
Reaction of 1.06%
Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 0.5 g
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.1 g
Ammonium Sulfate .................................................... 1.0 g
Cultural Response Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Difco Minimal Agar Davis Difco Minimal Broth Davis without Dextrose
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate by the pour plate
Consists of the same ingredients without the dextrose and agar.
method and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Escherichia coli 6883 102-103 Good Directions for Preparation from
Escherichia coli 9637 102-103 Good Dehydrated Product
Difco Minimal Broth Davis without Dextrose Difco Minimal Agar Davis
Prepare the medium per label directions with the addition of 1% 1. Suspend 26.6 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
dextrose. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. thoroughly.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Bacillus subtilis 6633 102-103 Good completely dissolve the powder.
Escherichia coli 6883 102-103 Good 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Escherichia coli 9637 102-103 Good 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
367
Section III
M Minimal Agar Davis, cont.

Difco Minimal Broth Davis without Dextrose 6. Irradiate the suspension with a low pressure mercury
1. Dissolve 10.6 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. ultraviolet lamp for a sufficient time to give a cell survival
2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. of 1 104 cells per mL.
3. If desired, aseptically add 10 mL of 10% dextrose solution 7. Incubate the suspension at room temperature for 4-18
at room temperature. Mix thoroughly. hours in the minimal medium with appropriate substances
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using added to allow for the growth of desired mutants.
stable, typical control cultures. 8. Wash the culture in sterile minimal medium.
9. Centrifuge and resuspend in the same medium.
Procedure 10. Dilute 1 to 10 with sterile minimal medium.
Random Technique 11. Let stand for 60 minutes to starve the mutants.
1. Irradiate a cell suspension of wild type E. coli. 12. Add penicillin to give a concentration of 2,000 units per
2. Dilute the suspension 100-500. mL.
3. Culture on a complete agar medium containing all the 13. Incubate 15 minutes.
necessary growth requirements. 14. Plate the culture on nutrient agar for colony isolation.
4. Incubate the cultures at 35 2C for 24 hours. 15. Identify the nutrition mutants by transferring colonies
5. Select isolated colonies and inoculate into Minimal Broth by replicate plating onto plates of minimal agar which
Davis and a nutritionally complete broth. has been supplemented with the appropriate nutritional
6. Incubate at 35 2C for 24 hours. substances.
7. Observe growth in both media.
Delayed Enrichment Method
Expected Results
Random Technique
1. Prepare plates of Minimal Agar Davis by pouring a 15-20
mL base layer in a 95 mm sterile Petri dish followed by a 5 Growth in the nutritionally complete medium and no growth
mL seed layer. in the Minimal Broth indicates a mutant.
2. Inoculate with a diluted irradiated E. coli suspension. Delayed Enrichment Method
3. Pour a 5-10 mL layer of uninoculated Minimal Agar Davis Mutant colonies will grow as small colonies after the addition
over the seed layer. of the complete medium which diffuses through the Minimal
4. Incubate for 24 hours or longer to allow for the growth of Agar.
prototroph cells (wild type cells). Penicillin Method
5. Pour a layer of a complete agar medium over the minimal Mutant colonies grow after the addition of penicillin.
agar medium to develop the mutant cells.
6. Incubate at 35 2C for 6-12 hours. Bacillus subtilis Method
Mutant colonies grow on Nutrient Agar after the addition of
Penicillin Method penicillin.
1. Wash an irradiated E. coli suspension with sterile saline
and dilute to 20 the original volume in sterile minimal Limitation of the Procedure
broth. Strains vary in their sensitivity to penicillin. Adjustments to
2. Dispense into tubes in desired amounts. the time of treatment and concentration of penicillin may be
3. Add freshly prepared penicillin to each tube to give a final necessary.1
concentration of 200 units per mL.
4. Incubate at 35 2C for 4-24 hours on a shaker. References
5. Spread 0.1 mL, 0.01 mL and 0.001 mL samples onto 1. Lederberg. 1950. Methods in Med. Res. 3:5.
2. Davis. 1949. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci. 35:1.
complete agar plates. 3. Nester, Schafer and Lederberg. 1963. Genetics 48:529.

6. Incubate at 35 2C for 24 hours.

7. Select isolated colonies and test for growth in minimal broth. Availability
Difco Minimal Agar Davis
Bacillus subtilis Method Cat. No. 254410 Dehydrated 500 g
1. Grow cultures of Bacillus subtilis in Antibiotic Medium 3 Difco Minimal Broth Davis without Dextrose
at 35 2C for 18 hours. Cat. No. 275610 Dehydrated 500 g
2. Centrifuge to sediment the cells.
3. Aseptically decant the supernatant fluid.
4. Resuspend the cells in minimal medium and centrifuge.
5. Decant the supernatant and resuspend the pellet in mini-
mal medium to give a cell concentration of about 2 108
cells per mL.

368
 Mitis Salivarius Agar
M
Mitis Salivarius Agar
Tellurite Solution 1%
Intended Use and most gram-positive bacteria except streptococci. Trypan
Mitis Salivarius Agar is used with Tellurite Solution 1% in blue gives the colonies a blue color. Agar is the solidifying agent.
isolating Streptococcus mitis, S. salivarius and enterococci,
particularly from grossly contaminated specimens. Formulae
Difco Mitis Salivarius Agar
Summary and Explanation Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 6.0 g
S. mitis, S. salivarius and Enterococcus species are part of the Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 9.0 g
normal human flora. S. mitis and S. salivarius are known as Proteose Peptone ....................................................... 5.0 g
viridans streptococci. These organisms play a role in cariogenesis Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g
Saccharose ............................................................... 50.0 g
and infective endocarditis and cause an increasing number of Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 4.0 g
bacteremias.1 Enterococci cause urinary tract infections, wound Trypan Blue .............................................................. 75.0 mg
infections and bacteremia.2 These organisms can colonize the Crystal Violet .............................................................. 0.8 mg
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
skin and mucous membranes.
BBL Tellurite Solution 1%
Chapman3-5 investigated methods for isolating streptococci and Sterile 1% solution of Potassium Tellurite.
formulated Mitis Salivarius Agar. The medium facilitates isola- *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

tion of S. mitis (Streptococcus viridans), S. salivarius (nonhemolytic

streptococci) and enterococci from mixed cultures.6
Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product
Principles of the Procedure 1. Suspend 90 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Mitis Salivarius Agar contains peptones as sources of carbon, thoroughly.
nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Dextrose and saccharose are 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
carbohydrate sources. Crystal violet and potassium tellurite completely dissolve the powder.
(from Tellurite Solution 1%) inhibit most gram-negative bacilli 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 50-55C.

Uninoculated Enterococcus faecalis

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 19433

Identity Specifications
Difco Mitis Salivarius Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Bluish-beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Solution: 9.0% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is deep royal blue,
very slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Deep royal blue, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 9.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
BBL Tellurite Solution 1%

Appearance: Colorless and clear to trace hazy.

Cultural Response
Difco Mitis Salivarius Agar with BBL Tellurite
Solution 1%
Prepare the complete medium per label directions. Inoculate and
incubate under 5-10% CO2 at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Enterococcus faecalis 19433 102-103 Good Blue/black
Streptococcus
Escherichia coli 25922 103 Partial to Brown, if any salivarius
complete inhibition ATCC 9758
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103 Partial to
complete inhibition
Streptococcus mitis 9895 102-103 Good Blue
Streptococcus salivarius 9758 102-103 Good Blue gum
drop shape

369
Section III
M Mitis Salivarius Agar, cont.

4. Add 1 mL of Tellurite Solution 1%. DO NOT HEAT THE 2. Molds will grow on the medium after two days incubation.
COMPLETE MEDIUM. 3. Erysipelothrix rhusiopathiae produces colorless, circular,
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using convex colonies.
stable, typical control cultures. 4. Beta-hemolytic streptococci produce colonies that resemble
S. mitis.
Procedure
See appropriate references for specific procedures. References
1. Ruoff, Whiley and Beighton. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology. Washington, D.C.
Expected Results 2. Facklam, Sahm and Teixeira. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
S. mitis produces small or minute blue colonies. These colonies 3. Chapman. 1944. J. Bacteriol. 48:113.
4. Chapman. 1946. Am. J. Dig. Dis. 13:105.
may become easier to distinguish with longer incubation. 5. Chapman. 1947. Trans. N.Y. Acad. Sci. (Series 2) 10:45.
6. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
S. salivarius produces blue, smooth or rough gum drop vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
colonies, 1-5 mm in diameter depending on the number of
colonies on the plate. Enterococcus species form dark blue or Availability
black, shiny, slightly raised, 1-2 mm colonies. Difco Mitis Salivarius Agar
Cat. No. 229810 Dehydrated 500 g
Limitations of the Procedure BBL Tellurite Solution 1%

1. If coliforms grow on the medium, they produce brown Cat. No. 211917 Tube 20 mL
colonies.

Modified mTEC Agar

(See mTEC Agar, Modified)

Moeller Decarboxylase Broths

(See Decarboxylase Differential Media)

Moeller KCN Broth Base

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Moeller KCN Broth Base, when supplemented with a solution The addition of 0.15 mL of a 0.5% solution of potassium
of potassium cyanide, is used in the differentiation of enteric cyanide to each of the prepared tubes of the nutritive base
bacilli on the basis of their ability to grow promptly in the enables differentiation of members of various genera within
presence of cyanide. the Enterobacteriaceae family.

Summary and Explanation Procedure

In 1954, Moeller reported on the use of a medium containing Prior to use, add 0.15 mL of a 0.5% solution (0.5 g in 100 mL
cyanide as an aid in the differentiation of members of the Entero- of COLD sterile distilled water) of potassium cyanide to each
bacteriaceae.1 Edwards and Ewing2 modified Moeller Cyanide tube containing 10 mL of base and close tightly.
Broth and it is this modified formulation that is supplied as BBL
Precaution: Do not mouth pipette. Extreme care should
brand Moeller KCN Broth Base prepared in a tube.
be taken at all times in handling and disposing of potassium
This medium, when supplemented with potassium cyanide, is cyanide. Work should be performed within a chemical hood.
used in the differentiation of members of the genus Salmonella
Inoculate Moeller KCN Broth with a loopful of an 18- to 24-
from Citrobacter freundii.3 It is particularly useful in differen-
hour culture of the test organism. Incubate at 35 2C in an
tiating cultures of C. freundii that either fail to ferment lactose
aerobic atmosphere and examine daily for 2 days.
or ferment it slowly (i.e., strains formerly classified as Bethesda-
Ballerup bacteria).3 Except for strains of groups IV and V, Expected Results
members of the genus Salmonella do not grow in KCN Except for a few infrequently-isolated species, members of the
medium, whereas species of Citrobacter with the exception of genera Citrobacter, Enterobacter, Hafnia, Klebsiella, Morganella,
C. (diversus) koseri do grow in this medium.3,4 Proteus and Providencia are KCN positive; i.e., they grow in
the presence of KCN. With certain exceptions, other Entero-
bacteriaceae are negative (inhibited) in the KCN test.4
370
 Motility GI Medium
M
References Availability
1. Moeller. 1954. Acta Pathol. Microbiol. Scand. 34:115.
2. Edwards and Ewing. 1955. Identification of Enterobacteriaceae. Burgess Publishing Co., Minne-
BBL Moeller KCN Broth Base
apolis, Minn. BAM USDA
3. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science
Publishing Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
Cat. No. 221665 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10*
4. Farmer. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology, *Store at 2-8C.
7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Motility GI Medium
Intended Use Formula
Motility GI Medium is used for detecting motility of microor- Difco Motility GI Medium
ganisms and for separating organisms in their motile phase. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Heart, Infusion from 500 g ............................... 10.0 g
Tryptose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Summary and Explanation Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Motility GI Medium is prepared according to the formulation Gelatin ..................................................................... 53.4 g
of Jordan, Caldwell and Reiter.1 It is a semisolid gelatin-heart Agar ........................................................................... 3.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
infusion medium that is adaptable to use in both tubes and plates
for motility studies. Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product
Principles of the Procedure 1. Suspend 81.4 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Beef heart infusion, peptone and gelatin provide nitrogen, vita- thoroughly.
mins and amino acids. Agar is the solidifying agent. Motility is 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
evidenced by the presence of diffuse growth away from the completely dissolve the powder.
line or spot of inoculation. Nonmotile organisms grow only 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
along the line of inoculation. 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Motility GI Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, slightly gritty,
homogeneous.
Solution: 8.14% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium amber,
clear to slightly opalescent, may have a
slight precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, slightly opalescent, may
have a slight precipitate.
Reaction of 8.14%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Motility GI Medium
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate tubes of the medium
with fresh cultures by stabbing with an inoculating wire and incubate at
35 2C for 18-48 hours.
Uninoculated Escherichia coli Klebsiella
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY MOTILITY Tube ATCC 25922 pneumoniae
ATCC 13883
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 Good +
Escherichia coli 25922 Good +
Klebsiella pneumoniae 13883 Good
Proteus mirabilis 25933 Good +/*
*Motility of Proteus is temperature dependent, being more pronounced at 20C and possibly
absent at 35C.

371
Section III
M Motility GI Medium, cont.

Procedure Limitations of the Procedure

1. If tubes are desired, dispense the molten medium to a depth 1. All weak or questionable motility test results should be
of 60-75 mm and cool in cold water up to the depth of confirmed by flagella stain or by direct wet microscopy.2
the medium. Cool flasks of medium to 50-55C; pour into 2. Some flagellar proteins are not synthesized at higher
sterile Petri dishes to a depth of 1/8 inch or more and allow temperatures.3
to solidify. 3. Some isolates of Yersinia enterocolitica demonstrate motility
2. Inoculate with growth from an 18-24 hour pure culture. If at 35C while others may be nonmotile at 25C.2 The motility
tubes are used, inoculate by stab inoculation. If plates are of Proteus is also temperature dependent. This effect of
used, spot the inoculum on the surface or stab just below temperature on motility needs to be taken into account when
the medium surface. deciding on a testing regimen.
3. Incubate at a temperature and duration appropriate for the 4. Due to the temperature dependency of motility in some
suspected organism being tested. organisms, a negative test tube or plate should be incubated
4. Examine tubes or plates for growth and signs of motility. an additional 5 days at a lower temperature of 22-25C.3

Expected Results References

1. Jordan, Caldwell and Reiter. 1934. J. Bacteriol. 27:165.
Motility is evidenced by the presence of diffuse growth away 2. DAmato and Tomfohrde. 1981. J. Clin. Microbiol. 14:347.
from the line or spot of inoculation. Nonmotile organisms grow 3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
only along the line of inoculation.
Availability
Difco Motility GI Medium
Cat. No. 286910 Dehydrated 500 g

Motility Indole Lysine Sulfide (MILS) Medium

The acidic pH also stimulates enzyme activity. Organisms
Intended Use that possess a specific decarboxylase degrade the amino acid
Motility Indole Lysine Sulfide (MILS) Medium is used to
provided in the medium, yielding a corresponding amine.
demonstrate motility, indole production, lysine decarboxylase
Lysine decarboxylation yields cadaverine.
and deaminase activity and hydrogen sulfide production for
the differentiation of Enterobacteriaceae. The production of these amines elevates the pH and causes the
medium in the bottom portion of the tube to return to a purple
Summary and Explanation color. The medium in the upper portion of the tube remains
MILS Medium is a modified formulation of Ederer et al. that acidic because of the higher oxygen tension. If the organism
combines a test for hydrogen sulfide production with tests for being tested does not produce the required decarboxylase, the
lysine decarboxylase and deaminase, indole production and medium remains yellow (acidic) throughout or yellow with a
motility.1 When used in conjunction with Kligler Iron Agar or purple or red reaction near the top.
Triple Sugar Iron Agar and the urease test, it facilitates early Lysine deamination produces a color change in the upper
detection and presumptive identification of enteric pathogens portion of MILS Medium. Oxidative deamination of lysine
from feces and other clinical spcecimens.2-4 yields a compound that reacts with ferric ammonium citrate,
producing a burgundy red color in the top centrimeter of the
Principles of the Procedure medium.3 (The bottom portion of the medium remains acidic.)
Enzymatic digests of gelatin, casein, animal tissue and heart This reaction can only be detected if lysine decaraboxylase is
infusion supply amino acids and other complex nitrogenous not produced, which is the case with Proteus, Morganella and
substances. Yeast extract is added to MILS Medium primarily Providencia species.
to supply the B-complex vitamins. Dextrose is a source of
energy. Indole is produced in MILS Medium by organisms that
possess the enzyme tryptophanase. Tryptophanase degrades
A small amount of agar is added for demonstration of motility the typtophan present in the casein peptone, yielding indole.
along a stab line of inoculation. Growth of motile organisms Indole can be detected in the medium by adding Kovacs
extends out from the line of inoculation, while nonmotile reagent to the agar surface. The indole combines with the
organisms grow only along the stab line. p-dimethylaminobenzaldehyde of Kovacs reagent and
The pH indicator bromcresol purple is used in MILS Medium to produces a red complex.
facilitate detection of decarboxylase activity. When inoculated MILS Medium is also used in the demonstration of hydrogen
with an organism that ferments dextrose, acids are produced that sulfide production. Hydrogen sulfide, which is produced by
lower the pH, causing the indicator in the medium to change some enteric organisms from sulfur compounds contained in
from purple to yellow.
372
 Motility Nitrate Medium
M
the medium, reacts with ferric ion, producing a characteristic The test for lysine deaminase is read in the upper portion of
black precipitate. the medium. In a positive test, the medium at or near the sur-
face is purple. In a negative test, the medium near the
Procedure surface is yellow or remains unchanged.
Using a sterile inoculating loop or needle, remove growth from
Hydrogen sulfide production is indicated by blackening in the
the subculture medium and stab the center of the motility me-
medium.
dium to the bottom of the tube. Incubate the tubes at 35C
for 48 hours. After reading the other reactions, indole production may be
detected by adding three drops of Kovacs reagent (Cat. No.
Some flagellar proteins are not synthesized at higher temperatures.
261185) to the surface of MILS Medium and shaking gently.
If motility tests are negative after two days incubation, place
The medium turns red if indole is present and remains un-
the cultures at 21-25C for up to 5 days to induce flagellar devel-
changed if indole has not been produced.
opment.
References
Expected Results 1. Ederer, Lund, Blazevic, Reller and Mirrett. 1972. J. Clin. Microbiol. 2:266.
2. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science
Motility is indicated by turbidity extending out from the line Publishing Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
of stab inoculation. Nonmotile organisms grow only in the 3. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
St. Louis, Mo.
inoculated area. 4. Farmer. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Lysine decarboxylation (read at the bottom of the tube) is indi-
cated by a dark purple color compared with an uninoculated Availability
control tube. In a negative test, the medium is yellow through- BBL Motility Indole Lysine Sulfide (MILS) Medium
out the tube or has a narrow band of purple at the top of the Cat. No. 298266 Prepared Deeps (K Tubes), 5 mL Ctn. of 100*
medium. A negative test with organisms that do not ferment Difco/BBL Indole Reagent
dextrose may show no color change. Cat. No. 261185 Droppers, 0.5 mL Ctn. of 50
*Store at 2-8C.

Motility Nitrate (MN) Medium

Intended Use Potassium nitrate is added to detect those nonfermenting gram-
Motility Nitrate (MN) Medium (Picketts, for nonfermenters) negative rods that can reduce nitrate to nitrite. Some organisms
is used for the detection of motility, nitrate reduction and can further reduce the nitrite to nitrogen gas. Detection of
denitrification of nonfermenting gram-negative bacilli. denitrification activity can be useful for the identification of
isolates, since only a small number of species of nonfermenting
Summary and Explanation gram-negative rods can denitrify.5-8
Motility Nitrate (MN) Medium is based on the formulation
of Blackman and Pickett1 and Pickett.2 Microorganisms may Procedure
be differentiated according to their metabolism of certain substrates. Loosen caps, place tubes in boiling water and cool to room
The ability to reduce nitrate to nitrite is characteristic of the family temperature before use.
Enterobacteriaceae.3 Nonfermenters and other miscellaneous Organisms to be cultivated must first be isolated in pure cul-
gram-negative bacilli vary in their ability to reduce nitrates. ture on an appropriate solid medium.
Some members of this group are capable of denitrification,
which is a reduction of nitrate to nitrogen gas. The produc- Using a sterile straight, smooth inoculating needle, remove
tion of gas from nitrate is an important differential test for growth from the subculture medium and stab the center of the
glucose-nonfermenting gram-negative bacilli. The end product motility medium to 5-10 mm in depth. Incubate tubes at 18-
of reduction depends upon the bacterial species.4 20C.7

The medium is also used for indirect eveidence of motility by Tubes may be examined for motility after 3-8 hours. If tubes
nonfermenting gram-negative bacilli. are negative, reincubate and examine again after 24-48 hours.
The opacity of the medium should be compared to an
Principles of the Procedure uninoculated tube.
Enzymatic digests of casein and heart infusion supply amino To test for nitrate reduction (on cultures incubated 42-48
acids and other complex nitrogenous substances. Yeast extract hours):
suppplies the B-complex vitamins. Agar is added to demon-
a. Add 0.5 mL of sulfanillic acid solution (Cat. No. 261197)
strate motility of the organism along a stab line of inoculation.
b. Add 0.5 mL of N, N-dimethly-1-naphthylamine solution
Growth of motile organisms extends out from the line of
(Cat. No. 261198).
inoculation.
373
Section III
M Motility Nitrate Medium, cont.

c. Observe for the production of a pink to red color (positive References

nitrate reduction test). Since some organisms further 1. Blachman and Pickett. 1978. Unusual aerobic bacilli in clinical bacteriology. Scientific Develop-
ments Press, Los Angeles, Calif.
reduce nitrite to ammonia, add a small amount of zinc dust 2. Pickett. 1980. Nonfermentative gram-negative bacilli. Scientific Developments Press, Los Angeles,
Calif.
(Cat. No. 261207) to tubes exhibiting no color. 3. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science
Publishing Co., New York, N.Y.
4. MacFaddin. 2000. Biochemical tests for the identification of medical bacteria, 3rd ed. Lippincott
Expected Results Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
5. Gilardi (ed.). 1985. Nonfermentative gram-negative rods. Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Motility is indicated by turbidity extending out from the line 6. Gilardi. 1988. Identification of glucose non-fermenting gram-negative rods. Dept. of Laboratories,
North General Hospital, New York, N.Y.
of stab inoculation. Nonmotile organisms grow only in the 7. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
St. Louis, Mo.
inoculated area. After 3-8 hours of incubation, a small puff- 8. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
ball of motility may be seen around the line of inoculation.5 If
this is not observed, tubes should be reincubated for 24-48
Availability
hours and compared for turbidity to an uninoculated tube.
BBL Motility Nitrate (MN) Medium
Negative motility reactions should be confirmed by a hanging Cat. No. 296309 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
drop preparation.
Difco /BBL Nitrate A Reagent

In the nitrate reduction test, a pink to red color develops after Cat. No. 261197 Droppers, 0.5 mL Ctn. of 50
addition of the reagents if nitrite is present, and indicates that Difco /BBL Nitrate B Reagent

nitrate reduction has occurred. Since some organisms further Cat. No. 261198 Droppers, 0.5 mL Ctn. of 50
reduce nitrite to ammonia, add a small amount of zinc dust Difco /BBL Nitrate C Reagent

(Cat. No. 261207) to tubes exhibiting no color. A pink color in Cat. No. 261207 Droppers, 1 g Ctn. of 50
this part of the test indicates no nitrate reduction. A colorless *Store at 2-8C.
reaction indicates that nitrates have been completely reduced.
Consult appropriate references for an explanation of the reactions
involved and expected results with specific microorganisms.6-8

Motility Test Medium

Intended Use Directions for Preparation from
Motility Test Medium is used for the detection of motility of Dehydrated Product
gram-negative enteric bacilli. 1. Suspend 22 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
Summary and Explanation 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
In 1936, Tittsler and Sandholzer reported on the use of completely dissolve the powder.
semisolid agar for the detection of bacterial motility.1 Their 3. Dispense and autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
original formulation has been modified in the medium 4. If desired, 5 mL of sterile 1% TTC solution may be added
supplied as BBL brand Motility Test Medium. aseptically after autoclaving.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Principles of the Procedure stable, typical control cultures.
Bacterial motility can be observed directly from examination
of the tubes following incubation. Growth spreads out from Procedure
the line of inoculation if the organism is motile. Highly motile Inoculate tubes with a pure culture by stabbing the center of
organisms provide growth throughout the tube. Growth of the column of medium to greater than half the depth. Incubate
nonmotile organisms only occurs along the stab line. tubes for 24-48 hours at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere.

Formula Expected Results

BBL Motility Test Medium After incubation, observe the tubes for growth in relation to the
Approximate Formula* Per Liter stab line. Nonmotile organisms grow only along the line of
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g inoculation, while motile organisms spread out from the line of
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g inoculation and may even grow throughout the medium.
Agar ........................................................................... 4.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. Negative tubes can be reincubated at 25 2C for an additional
5 days, if desired.
Consult appropriate texts for results with specific organisms.2,3

374
 Mucate Agar
M
User Quality Control
Identity Specifications
BBL Motility Test Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material.
Solution: 2.2% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is pale to light,
yellow to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Pale to light, yellow to tan, clear to
slightly hazy.
Reaction of 2.2%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL Motility Test Medium
Prepare the medium per label directions. Stab inoculate with fresh
cultures and incubate at 35 2C for 2 days.
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY MOTILITY
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 Good + Uninoculated Escherichia coli Klebsiella
Escherichia coli 25922 Good + Tube ATCC 25922 pneumoniae
ATCC 13883
Klebsiella pneumoniae 33495 Good
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 Good +
Shigella flexneri 9199 Good
Proteus vulgaris 8427 Good +

Limitation of the Procedure Availability

Many organisms fail to grow deep in semisolid media; inocu- BBL Motility Test Medium
lating pour plates may be advantageous.4 BAM COMPF
Cat. No. 211436 Dehydrated 500 g
221509 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10
References 221510 Prepared Tubes Ctn. of 100
1. Tittsler and Sandholzer. 1936. J. Bacteriol. 31:575.
2. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriology,
9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Difco TTC Solution 1%
3. Farmer. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology, Cat. No. 231121 Tube 30 mL
7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
4. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
264310 Bottle 25 g
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.

Mucate Agar Mucate Broth

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
These media are used in the differentiation of certain Entero- Gelatin peptone provides amino acids and other nitrogenous
bacteriaceae based on utilization of mucate. substances to support bacterial growth.
Mucate, which is produced from mucic acid when the pH is
Summary and Explanation
adjusted with sodium hydroxide during manufacture of the
Kauffman and Peterson devised mucate medium (broth) for
medium, is the sole source of carbon. Utilization of the mucate
differentiation of some members of the Enterobacteriaceae
results in an acid reaction, which lowers the pH of the
based on their ability to utlize mucate as a source of carbon.1
medium and causes the bromthymol blue indicator to change
Mucate Agar is a solid form of mucate medium. Utilization of
the color of the medium from blue-green to yellow. The
the mucate produces an acid reaction, which causes the medium
medium remains blue-green if the organism being tested does
to become yellow. Ellis et al. recommended using mucate
not utlize the mucate.
medium and two other organic acid media (D-tartrate and
sodium citrate) in conjunction with other tests for differentiation Mucate utilization is intended to be used in conjunction with
among Salmonella and Arizona strains.2 Mucate utilization is other tests for differentiation and identification of certain
also recommended for differentiation of other genera of the members of the Enterobacteriaceae.
Enterobacteriaceae, such as Escherichia coli and Shigella
species.3-6
375
Section III
M Mucate Agar, cont.

Procedure References
1. Kauffman and Petersen. 1956. Acta Pathol. Microbiol. Scand. 38:481.
Organisms to be tested must first be isolated in pure culture 2. Ellis, Edwards and Fife. 1957. Pub. Health Lab. 15:89.
on an appropriate solid medium. Inoculate mucate media with 3. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science
Publishing Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
a 3 mm loopful of a broth culture incubated overnight. Incu- 4. Krieg and Holt (ed.). 1984. Bergeys manual of systematic bacteiology, vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins,
Baltimore, Md.
bate mucate media at 35C for up to 48 hours. 5. Farmer. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiol-
ogy, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
6. Flowers, Andrews, Donnelly and Koenig. 1993. In Marshall (ed.), Standard methods for the
Expected Results examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

After sufficient incubation, examine tubes for a yellow (acid)

reaction indicating utilization of the mucate. The medium remains
Availability
BBL Mucate Agar
blue-green if the mucate is not utilized. Consult appropriate texts
Cat. No. 297709 Prepared Slants (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
for information needed to interpret the results.3-6
BBL Mucate Broth
SMD
Cat. No. 296135 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

Mueller Hinton Agars

Mueller Hinton Agar Mueller Hinton II Agar
Mueller Hinton Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
Intended Use Because clinical microbiology laboratories in the early 1960s
Each lot of Mueller Hinton Agar and Mueller Hinton II Agar were using a wide variety of procedures for determining the
has been tested according to, and meets the acceptance limits susceptibility of bacteria to antibiotic and chemotherapeutic
of, the current M6 protocol published by the NCCLS. agents, Bauer, Kirby and others developed a standardized
procedure in which Mueller Hinton Agar was selected as the
Mueller Hinton Agar is recommended for antimicrobial disc
test medium.1,2 A subsequent international collaborative study
diffusion susceptibility testing of common, rapidly growing
confirmed the value of Mueller Hinton Agar for this purpose
bacteria by the Bauer-Kirby method,1-3 as standardized by the
because of the relatively good reproducibility of the medium,
National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards
the simplicity of its formula, and the wealth of experimental
(NCCLS).4
data that had been accumulated using this medium.7
Mueller Hinton Agar with 5% Sheep Blood is recommended
The NCCLS has written a performance standard for the Bauer-
for antimicrobial disc diffusion susceptibility testing of Strep-
Kirby procedure and this document should be consulted for
tococcus pneumoniae with selected agents; i.e., chloramphenicol,
additional details.4 The procedure is recommended for testing
erythromycin, ofloxacin, tetracycline and vancomycin, in
rapidly growing aerobic or facultatively anaerobic bacterial
addition to oxacillin screening for susceptibility to penicillin, as
pathogens, such as staphylococci, members of the Enterobac-
standardized by the National Committee for Clinical Laboratory
teriaceae, aerobic gram-negative rods; e.g., Pseudomonas spp.
Standards (NCCLS).4
and Acinetobacter spp., enterococci and Vibrio cholerae. The
NOTE: The recommended medium for disc diffusion suscep- procedure is modified for testing fastidious species;i.e.,
tibility testing of Streptococcus pneumoniae is Mueller Hinton H. influenzae, N. gonorrhoeae and S. pneumoniae and other
agar with 5% sheep blood. The recommended medium for streptococci.
Haemophilus influenzae is Haemophilus Test Medium (HTM)
Mueller Hinton Agar and Mueller Hinton II Agar are manu-
Agar. The recommended medium for Neisseria gonorrhoeae
factured to contain low levels of thymine and thymidine8,9 and
is GC Agar with 1% defined growth supplement (GC II
controlled levels of calcium and magnesium.10-12 Thymine and
Agar with BBL IsoVitaleX Enrichment or equivalent).
thymidine levels of raw materials are determined using the disc
Interpretive criteria are provided in the NCCLS Document
diffusion procedure with trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole
M100-S12 (M2),5 which is included with NCCLS Document
(SXT) discs and Enterococcus faecalis ATCC 33186 and/or
M2, Performance Standards for Antimicrobial Disk Suscepti-
29212. Calcium and magnesium levels are controlled by
bility Tests; Approved Standard.4
testing raw materials and supplementing with sources of
calcium and/or magnesium as required to produce correct zone
Summary and Explanation
diameters with aminoglycoside antibiotics and Pseudomonas
Mueller Hinton Agar was originally developed for the cultiva-
aeruginosa ATCC 27853.13
tion of pathogenic Neisseria.6 However, these organisms are
now commonly isolated on selective media.

376
 Mueller Hinton Agars, cont.
M
of the starch during autoclaving provides a small amount of
User Quality Control
dextrose, which is a source of energy. Agar is the solidifying
Identity Specifications agent.
Difco Mueller Hinton Agar
The Bauer-Kirby procedure is based on the diffusion through
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
an agar gel of antimicrobial substances which are impregnated
Solution: 3.8% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light on paper discs.16 In contrast to earlier methods which used discs
to medium amber, slightly opalescent, of high and low antimicrobial concentrations and which used
may have a slight precipitate. the presence or absence of inhibition zones for their interpre-
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal- tation, this method employs discs with a single concentration
escent.
of antimicrobial agent and zone diameters are correlated with
Reaction of 3.8%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.1 minimal inhibitory concentrations (MIC).1,2,4,7,16
BBL Mueller Hinton II Agar

In the test procedure, a standardized suspension of the organism
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, dry, homogeneous, free of is swabbed over the entire surface of the medium. Paper discs
extraneous material.
impregnated with specified amounts of antibiotic or other
Solution: 3.8% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
antimicrobial agents are then placed on the surface of the
to medium, yellow to tan, trace hazy medium, the plate is incubated and zones of inhibition around
to slightly hazy. each disc are measured. The determination as to whether the
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, trace organism is susceptible, intermediate or resistant to an agent
hazy to slightly hazy.
is made by comparing zone sizes obtained to those in the
Reaction of 3.8%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.1
NCCLS Document M100(M2).4
Various factors have been identified as influencing disc diffusion
Cultural Response susceptibility tests. These include the medium, excess surface
Difco Mueller Hinton Agar or
BBL Mueller Hinton II Agar
moisture on the medium, agar depth, disc potency, inoculum con-
Prepare the medium per label directions. Using the organisms listed centration, pH and -lactamase production by test organisms.7,13,16
below, inoculate plates, add antibiotic disks and incubate as recom-
mended by NCCLS.4 Measure zone diameters and compare to the Formulae
NCCLS recommended zone ranges.4
Difco Mueller Hinton Agar
ORGANISM ATCC Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Enterococcus faecalis 33186 Beef Extract Powder ................................................... 2.0 g
Acid Digest of Casein ............................................... 17.5 g
Escherichia coli 25922
Starch ......................................................................... 1.5 g
Escherichia coli 35218 Agar ......................................................................... 17.0 g
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853
BBL Mueller Hinton II Agar
Staphylococcus aureus 25923
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Staphylococcus aureus 43300
Beef Extract ................................................................ 2.0 g
Acid Hydrolysate of Casein ....................................... 17.5 g
Starch ......................................................................... 1.5 g
Mueller Hinton agar complies with requirements of the World Agar ......................................................................... 17.0 g
Health Organization14 and is specified in the FDA Bacterio- *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
logical Analytical Manual for food testing.15
Directions for Preparation from
Unsupplemented Mueller Hinton agar, although adequate for
Dehydrated Product
susceptibility testing of rapidly growing aerobic pathogens, is
1. Suspend 38 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
not adequate for more fastidious organisms such as
thoroughly.
S. pneumoniae. The NCCLS Document M2, Performance Stan-
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
dards for Antimicrobial Disk Susceptibility Tests, recommends
completely dissolve the powder.
Mueller Hinton agar supplemented with 5% defibrinated sheep
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. DO NOT OVERHEAT.
blood. Details of quality control procedures and interpretive
OPTIONAL: Cool medium to 45-50C and aseptically add
criteria for use with S. pneumoniae and other Streptococcus
5% sterile defibrinated sheep blood.
spp. are contained in supplemental tables.5 These documents
4. Pour cooled Mueller Hinton agar into sterile Petri dishes
should be consulted for additional details.4,5
on a level, horizontal surface to give a uniform depth of
Principles of the Procedure about 4 mm (60-70 mL of medium for 150 mm plates and
25-30 mL for 100 mm plates) and cool to room temperature.4
Acid hydrolysate (digest) of casein and beef extract supply
5. Check prepared medium to ensure the final pH is 7.3 0.1
amino acids and other nitrogenous substances, minerals,
at 25C.
vitamins, carbon and other nutrients to support the growth of
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
microorganisms. Starch acts as a protective colloid against
stable, typical control cultures.
toxic substances that may be present in the medium. Hydrolysis
377
Section III
M Mueller Hinton Agars, cont.

Mueller Hinton II Agar Mueller Hinton Agar with 5% Sheep Blood

Pseudomonas Streptococcus
aeruginosa pneumoniae
ATCC 27853 ATCC 49619

Procedure mm from the edge of the Petri dish, and their centers are at
A. Standard Method 4 least 30 mm apart. Avoid placing such discs adjacent to one
1. Perform a Gram stain before starting a susceptibility test another. After discs have been placed on the agar, tamp
to confirm culture purity and to determine appropriate them with a sterile needle or forceps to make complete
test battery. contact with the medium surface. This step
2. Select at least three to five well-isolated similar colonies is not necessary if the discs are deposited using the
and transfer with an inoculation needle or loop into 4-5 Sensi-Disc 12-place self-tamping dispenser.
mL of suitable broth. 9. Within 15 minutes after the discs are applied, invert the
3. Incubate the broth at 35C until it achieves or just exceeds plates and place them in a 35C incubator. With
the turbidity of the 0.5 McFarland barium sulfate stan- nonfastidious organisms, plates should not be incubated
dard (usually 2-6 hours). This results in a suspension con- under an increased concentration of carbon dioxide.
taining approximately 1 to 2 108 CFU/mL (for E. coli 10. Examine plates after 16-18 hours incubation. A full 24
ATCC 25922). hours incubation is recommended for Staphylococcus
4. Adjust the turbidity to be equivalent to the barium sulfate aureus with oxacillin to detect methicillin-resistant
standard. For the diluent, use sterile broth or sterile S. aureus (MRSA) and for Enterococcus spp. when tested
saline. The turbidity of the standard and the test inoculum with vancomycin to detect vancomycin-resistant strains.
should be compared by holding both tubes in front of Growth within the apparent zone of inhibition is indica-
a white background with finely drawn black lines or a tive of resistance.
photometric device can be used. A confluent lawn of growth should be obtained. If only
5. Within 15 minutes after adjusting the turbidity of the inocu- isolated colonies grow, the inoculum was too light and the
lum, immerse a sterile cotton swab into the properly diluted test should be repeated. Measure the diameter of the zones of
inoculum and rotate it firmly several times against the complete inhibition (as judged by the unaided eye), including
upper inside wall of the tube to express excess fluid. the diameter of the disc, to the nearest whole millimeter, using
6. Inoculate the entire agar surface of the plate three times, sliding calipers, a ruler, or a template prepared for this
rotating the plate 60 between streakings to obtain even purpose. The measuring device is held on the back of the
inoculation. As a final step, swab the rim of the agar bed. inverted plate over a black, non-reflecting background, and
7. The lid may be left ajar for 3-5 minutes and the plate held illuminated from above.
at room temperature for no longer than 15 minutes to
allow any surface moisture to be absorbed before apply- The endpoint should be taken as the area showing no obvious
ing the antimicrobial agent-impregnated discs. visible growth that can be detected with the unaided eye. Dis-
8. Apply the discs by means of an antimicrobial disc dispenser, regard faint growth of tiny colonies which can be detected
using aseptic precautions. Deposit discs so that the centers with difficulty near the edge of the obvious zone of inhibition.
are at least 24 mm apart. It is preferable to deposit penicillin Staphylococcus aureus when tested with oxacillin discs is an
and cephalosporin discs so that they are not less than 10 exception, as are enterococci when tested with vancomycin. In
378
 Mueller Hinton Agars, cont.
M
these cases, transmitted light should be used to detect a haze Isolates of S. pneumoniae with oxacillin zone diameters of 20
of growth around the disc which is shown by occult resistant mm are susceptible (MIC 0.06 mg/mL) to penicillin. NCCLS
MRSA strains17 or vancomycin-resistant enterococci.4 With Document M100 (M2) should be consulted for other antimi-
Proteus species, if the zone of inhibition is distinct enough to crobial agents to which penicillin-susceptible isolates may also
measure, disregard any swarming inside the zone. With be considered susceptible.4
trimethoprim and the sulfonamides, antagonists in the medium
NOTE: Informational supplements to NCCLS Document
may allow some slight growth; therefore, disregard slight
M2, containing revised tables of antimicrobial discs and inter-
growth (20% or less of the lawn of growth) and measure the
pretive standards are published periodically. The latest tables
more obvious margin to determine the zone diameter.
should be consulted for current recommendations. The com-
B. Direct Method4 plete standard and informational supplements can be ordered
The direct colony suspension method should be used when from the National Committee for Clinical Laboratory
testing S. pneumoniae. Observe aseptic techniques. Standards, 940 West Valley Road, Suite 1400, Wayne, PA
19087-1898. Telephone: (610) 688-1100.
1. Suspend growth from an overnight (16-18 hour) sheep
blood agar plate in saline or broth, such as Mueller Hinton Refer to other texts for additional information on antimicrobial
broth. Adjust the turbidity to be equivalent to the 0.5 susceptibility testing.19,20 Protocols developed by the NCCLS
McFarland barium sulfate standard. For the diluent, use and used by manufacturers to evaluate the performance of
sterile broth or sterile saline. The turbidity of the standard Mueller Hinton Agar in comparison to a reference medium
and the test inoculum should be compared by holding both are published in NCCLS document M6-A.21
tubes in front of a white background with finely drawn
black lines or a photometric device can be used. Limitations of the Procedure
NOTE: Alternative methods of inoculum preparation in- 1. Numerous factors can affect results: inoculum size; rate of
volving devices that permit direct standardization of inocula growth; medium formulation and pH, length of incuba-
without adjustment of turbidity, such as the BBL Prompt tion and incubation environment; disc content and drug
Inoculation System, have been found to be acceptable for diffusion rate; and measurement of endpoints. Therefore,
routine testing purposes.18 strict adherence to protocol is required to ensure reliable
2. Within 15 minutes of adjusting the turbidity of the inocu- results.22
lum, dip a sterile swab into the properly diluted inoculum 2. When Mueller Hinton agar is supplemented with blood,
and rotate it firmly several times against the upper inside the zone of inhibition for oxacillin and methicillin may be
wall of the tube to express excess fluid. 2-3 mm smaller than those obtained with unsupplemented
3. Inoculate onto Mueller Hinton Agar with 5% Sheep Blood agar.23 Conversely, sheep blood may markedly increase the
by streaking the entire agar surface of the plate three times, zone diameters of some cephalosporins when they are tested
rotating the plate 60 between streakings to obtain even against enterococci.24 Sheep blood may cause indistinct
inoculation. As a final step, swab the rim of the agar bed. zones or a film of growth within the zones of inhibition
4. Replace the lid of the plate and hold the plate at room tempera- around sulfonamide and trimethoprim discs.23
ture for at least 3 minutes, but no longer than 15 minutes, to 3. Mueller Hinton agar deeper than 4 mm may cause false-
allow surface moisture to be absorbed before applying the resistant results, and agar less than 4 mm deep may be
drug-impregnated discs. Use no more than nine discs per associated with a false-susceptibility report.23
150 mm plate, or four discs per 100 mm plate. 4. A pH outside the range of 7.3 0.1 may adversely affect
5. Incubate for 20-24 hours at 35C in an atmosphere of 5% susceptibility test results. If the pH is too low,
CO2. aminoglycosides and macrolides will appear to lose potency;
others may appear to have excessive activity.23 The oppo-
Expected Results site effects are possible if the pH is too high.23
Zone diameters measured around discs should be compared
with those in the NCCLS Document M100 (M2). Results ob-
tained with specific organisms may then be reported as resis-
tant, intermediate or susceptible.
With Mueller Hinton Agar with 5% Sheep Blood, the zone
of growth inhibition should be measured, not the zone of inhi-
bition of hemolysis. The zones are measured from the upper
surface of the agar illuminated with reflected light, with the
cover removed. Zone diameters for the agents specified under
Intended Use should be compared with those in the NCCLS
Document M100 (M2), which provides interpretive criteria.5
Results obtained may then be reported as resistant, intermediate
or susceptible.
379
Section III
M Mueller Hinton Agars, cont.

References United States and Canada

1. Bauer, Kirby, Sherris and Turck. 1966. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 45:493. Cat. No. 221177 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
2. Ryan, Schoenknecht and Kirby. 1970. Hospital Practice 5:91. 221275 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
3. Barry, Garcia and Thrupp. 1970. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 53:149. 221994 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm) Pkg. of 8*
4. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved standard: M2-A7. Perfor-
mance standards for antimicrobial disk susceptibility tests, 7th ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa. 221800 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm) Box of 24*
5. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2002. Performance standards for antimi-
crobial susceptibility testing; twelfth informational supplement, M100-S12(M2). NCCLS, Wayne,
Europe
Pa. Cat. No. 254032 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
6. Mueller and Hinton. 1941. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 48:330. 254081 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
7. Ericsson and Sherris. 1971. Acta Pathol. Microbiol. Scand. Sec. B, Suppl. 217.
8. Koch and Burchall. 1971. Appl. Microbiol. 22:812. 255062 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 20*
9. Ferone, Bushby, Burchall, Moore and Smith. 1975. Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. 7:91. 254518 Prepared Plates (square 120 120 mm-style)
10. Reller, Schoenknecht, Kenny and Sherris. 1974. J. Infect. Dis. 130:454. Pkg. of 20*
11. Pollock, Minshew, Kenny and Schoenknecht. 1978. Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. 14:360.
12. DAmato and Thornsberry. 1979. Current Microbiol. 2:135. Japan
13. Thornsberry, Gavan and Gerlach. 1977. Cumitech 6, New developments in antimicrobial agent
susceptibility testing. Coord. ed., Sherris. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, DC.
Cat. No. 251177 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
14. World Health Organization. 1961. Standardization of methods for conducting microbic sensitivity 251275 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
tests. Technical Report Series No. 210, Geneva, Switzerland. 251579 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 200*
15. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md. 251800 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 24*
16. Jorgensen, Turnidge and Washington. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.),
Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, DC. BBL Mueller Hinton Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
17. Hindler and Anderbied. 1985. J. Clin. Microbiol. 21:205. BS10 CMPH MCM7 NCCLS
18. Baker, Thornsberry and Hawkinson. 1983. J. Clin. Microbiol. 17:450.
19. Koneman, Allen, Janda, Schreckenberger and Winn. 1997. Color atlas and textbook of diagnostic United States and Canada
microbiology, 5th ed. Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, Pa. Cat. No. 221176 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
20. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
St. Louis, Mo.
221993 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm) Pkg. of 8*
21. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 1996. Approved standard: M6-A. Protocols 221801 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm) Box of 24*
for evaluating dehydrated Mueller-Hinton agar. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
22. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for Europe
Microbiology, Washington, D.C. Cat. No. 254030 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
23. Wood and Washington. 1995. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
254080 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
24. Buschelman, Jones and Bale. 1994. J. Clin. Microbiol. 32:565. 255080 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 20*
254517 Prepared Plates (square 120 120 mm-style)
Availability Pkg. of 20*

Difco Mueller Hinton Agar Japan

Cat. No. 251176 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
BAM BS10 CMPH ISO MCM7 NCCLS
251262 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Cat. No. 225250 Dehydrated 500 g 251801 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 24*
225220 Dehydrated 2 kg
*Store at 2-8C.
225230 Dehydrated 10 kg
BBL Mueller Hinton II Agar
BAM BS10 CMPH ISO MCM7 NCCLS
Cat. No. 211438 Dehydrated 500 g
211441 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
212257 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
298034 Dehydrated (LitrePak) 20 1.0 L

Mueller Hinton Chocolate Agar

Intended Use Known as Mueller Hinton Chocolate Agar, this formulation
Mueller Hinton Chocolate Agar is for use in qualitative proce- was replaced for this purpose by HTM Agar.4
dures for the isolation and cultivation of fastidious organisms, The medium is now recommended for routine cultivation of
particularly Haemophilus species. It was formerly recom- fastidious organisms.
mended by the National Committee for Clinical Laboratory
Standards (NCCLS) for antimicrobial susceptibility testing of Principles of the Procedure
H. influenzae. However, it has been replaced in this procedure The primary nutrients in Mueller Hinton Chocolate Agar are
by Haemophilus Test Medium (HTM) Agar. beef extract, which provides nitrogenous nutrients, vitamins
and minerals required for microbial growth, and acid hydroly-
Summary and Explanation sate of casein, which provides amino acids with the exception
Mueller Hinton Agar was originally developed for the cultiva- of cystine (because casein contains little cystine) and tryptophan
tion of pathogenic Neisseria.1 In the 1960s, Bauer, Kirby and (which is destroyed by the acid treatment, as are vitamins).
others developed a standardized disc diffusion procedure for The starch neutralizes toxic fatty acids that may be present in
determining the susceptibility of bacteria to antibiotic and the agar. Hemoglobin provides X factor (hemin) for Haemophilus
chemotherapeutic agents in which Mueller Hinton Agar was species. BBL IsoVitaleX Enrichment is a defined supplement
selected as the test medium.2 that provides V factor (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide,
Because growth of fastidious organisms was poor, the use of NAD) for Haemophilus species and vitamins, amino acids,
Mueller Hinton Agar supplemented with 1% hemoglobin and co-enzymes, dextrose, ferric ion and other factors for improved
a defined supplement was adopted for testing of H. influenzae.3 growth of fastidious organisms; i.e., pathogenic Neisseria.
380
 Mueller Hinton II with Tryptophan
M
Procedure References
1. Mueller and Hinton. 1941. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 48:330.
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from 2. Bauer, Kirby, Sherris and Turck. 1966. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 45:493.
specimens. Incubate plates at 35 2C for 18-24 hours and 3. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 1984. Approved standard: M2-A3.
Performance standards for antimicrobial disk susceptibility tests, 3rd ed. NCCLS, Villanova, Pa.
up to 72 hours, if necessary, in an aerobic atmosphere 4. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 1990. Approved standard: M2-A4.
Performance standards for antimicrobial disk susceptibility tests, 4th ed. NCCLS, Villanova, Pa.
enriched with 5-10% CO2.5 5. Campos. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Expected Results
Availability
After a minimum of 18 hours of incubation, the plates should
BBL Mueller Hinton Chocolate Agar
show isolated colonies in streaked areas and confluent growth United States and Canada
in areas of heavy inoculation. Cat. No. 221860 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
221869 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style plates)
The growth of Haemophilus appears as small (1 mm), moist, Pkg. of 8*
pearly colonies with a characteristic mousy odor. 221802 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style plates)
Box of 24*
Japan
Cat. No. 251860 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
251802 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 24*
*Store at 2-8C.

Mueller Hinton II Agar with Tryptophan

Intended Use plate. Incubate plates at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere
Mueller Hinton II Agar with tryptophan is for the determina- for 18-24 hours.
tion of indole production. After incubation, add a few drops of Kovacs Reagent to the
sterile blank disc. Read the disc for the indole reaction within
Summary and Explanation 1 minute after the addition of the reagent.
The ability of an organism to produce indole has long been
used as a part of the IMVIC reactions to separate Escherichia Expected Results
coli from Klebsiella-Enterobacter organisms, although it is now The production of indole is indicated by a brown red or purple
considered important in the identification of a wide variety of red color which develops on the disc within 1 minute. If no
organisms isolated in the clinical laboratory.1 indole is produced, no color will develop with the reagent; the
original color of the reagent is a negative test.
Principles of the Procedure
Indole is produced by bacteria through degradation of the amino References
acid, tryptophan. Various enzymes involved are collectively 1. Blazevic and Ederer. 1975. Principles of biochemical tests in diagnostic microbiology. John Wiley
& Sons, New York, N.Y.
called tryptophanase, a general term used to denote the com- 2. MacFaddin. 2000. Biochemical tests for identification of medical bacteria, 3rd ed. Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
plete system of enzymes that mediate the production of indole
by hydrolytic activity against the substrate tryptophan.2
Availability
The indole production by the organisms can be detected with BBL Mueller Hinton II Agar with Tryptophan
Kovacs Reagent (Cat. No. 261185). Indole, if present, combines Cat. No. 297623 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style plates)
with the aldehyde present in the reagent to give a red color. Box of 24*
Difco/BBL Indole Reagent
Procedure Cat. Not. 261185 Droppers, 0.5 mL Ctn. of 50
*Store at 2-8C.
Inoculate the medium with a pure culture, streaking to obtain
isolated colonies. Place a sterile blank disc on the inoculated

381
Section III
M Mueller Hinton Broth

Mueller Hinton Broth (Not Cation-Adjusted)

Intended Use BBL Mueller Hinton II Broth is cation-adjusted to the
Mueller Hinton Broth is a general purpose medium that may calcium and magnesium ion concentrations recommended in
be used in the cultivation of a wide variety of fastidious and the NCCLS standard M7.2
nonfastidious microorganisms. This medium is not supple- Difco Mueller Hinton Broth, not cation-adjusted, is formu-
mented with calcium or magnesium ions. lated to have a low thymine and thymidine content. It may be
used for broth dilution antimicrobial susceptibility testing as
Summary and Explanation long as the calcium and magnesium ion concentrations are
The Mueller Hinton formulation was originally developed as a adjusted according to NCCLS standard M7.2
simple, transparent agar medium for the cultivation of patho-
genic Neisseria.1 Other media were developed that replaced the BBL Mueller Hinton Broth, not cation-adjusted, has not been
use of Mueller Hinton Agar for the cultivation of pathogenic formulated to have a low thymine and thymidine content. It
Neisseria, but it became widely used in the determination of may be used for the general cultivation of bacteria.
sulfonamide resistance of gonococci and other organisms. It is
now used as a test medium for antimicrobial susceptibility Principles of the Procedure
testing.2 Acid hydrolysate (digest) of casein and beef extract supply
amino acids and other nitrogenous substances, minerals, vita-
Mueller Hinton Broth, not cation-adjusted, has a formula simi- mins, carbon and other nutrients to support the growth of
lar to that of the solid medium, but without agar, for use when microorganisms. Starch acts as a protective colloid against
the fluid medium is preferred. While it may be used for the toxic substances that may be present in the medium. Hydrolysis
general cultivation of bacteria, for consistency, cation-adjusted of the starch during autoclaving provides a small amount of
Mueller Hinton Broth is now recommended for dilution dextrose, which is a source of energy.
antimicrobial susceptibility testing of all species of most com-
monly encountered aerobic and facultatively anaerobic bacteria.2,3

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Mueller Hinton Broth BBL Mueller Hinton Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
neous with a few dark specks. ous material.
Solution: 2.1% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 2.2% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is very water upon boiling. Solution is pale
light amber, clear, may have a slight to light, tan to yellow, clear to slightly
precipitate. hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Very light amber, clear, may have a Prepared Appearance: Pale to light, tan to yellow, clear to
slight precipitate. slightly hazy.
Reaction of 2.1% Reaction of 2.2%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.1 Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.1
Calcium: 2.9-5.9 mg/L
Cultural Response
Magnesium: 3.2-5.2 mg/L
BBL Mueller Hinton Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Cultural Response
35 2C for 18-24 hours (up to 72 hours, if necessary).
Difco Mueller Hinton Broth

Prepare the medium per label directions, supplementing with calcium ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
and magnesium ions according to NCCLS standard M7.2 Prepare broth Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103 Good
microdilution trays, inoculate (with the organisms listed below) and Enterococcus faecalis 33186 103 Good
incubate as recommended by NCCLS.2 Compare the MIC (lowest con- Escherichia coli 25922 103 Good
centration of antimicrobial that inhibits growth of the test bacterium)
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 103 Good
of the antimicrobials tested to the NCCLS standard.2
Staphylococcus aureus 29213 103 Good
ORGANISM ATCC
Enterococcus faecalis 29212
Escherichia coli 25922
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853
Staphylococcus aureus 29213

382
 Mueller Hinton II Broth
M
Formulae the isolation medium to Mueller Hinton Broth using standard
Difco Mueller Hinton Broth bacteriologic techniques.3,4
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Extract Powder ................................................... 2.0 g
For enrichment purposes, inoculate the specimen onto primary
Acid Digest of Casein ............................................... 17.5 g media and then into the broth, according to recommended
Starch ......................................................................... 1.5 g procedures.
BBL Mueller Hinton Broth
Incubate the tubes at 35C under conditions appropriate for
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g the organism being cultured.
Acid Hydrolysate of Casein ....................................... 17.5 g
Starch ......................................................................... 1.5 g Expected Results
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
For broth dilution antimicrobial susceptibility testing, refer to
Directions for Preparation from appropriate references for results.2,5
Dehydrated Product Growth in broth media is indicated by the presence of turbidity
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water: compared with an uninoculated control.
Difco Mueller Hinton Broth 21 g;
BBL Mueller Hinton Broth 22 g. References
1. Mueller and Hinton. 1941. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 48:330.
Mix thoroughly. 2. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved Standard: M7-A5.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- Methods for dilution antimicrobial susceptibility tests for bacteria that grow aerobically, 5th ed.
NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
pletely dissolve the powder. 3. Jorgensen, Turnidge and Washington. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.),
Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Autoclave at 116-121C for 10-15 minutes (consult product 4. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
St. Louis, Mo.
label). DO NOT OVERHEAT. 5. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
4. Check prepared medium to ensure the final pH is 7.3 0.1 Microbiology, Washington , D.C.

at 25C.
Availability
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Difco Mueller Hinton Broth (Not cation-adjusted)
stable, typical control cultures. NCCLS
Cat. No. 275730 Dehydrated 500 g
Procedure 275710 Dehydrated 2 kg
For a complete discussion on broth dilution antimicrobial BBL Mueller Hinton Broth (Not cation-adjusted)
susceptibility testing, refer to the appropriate procedures Cat. No. 211443 Dehydrated 500 g
outlined in the references.2-5 296195 Prepared Tubes, 2 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10
296164 Prepared Tubes, 2 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100
Organisms to be subcultured must first be isolated in pure 297220 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10
culture on an appropriate solid medium. Transfer growth from 295834 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (C Tubes) Ctn. of 100
297868 Prepared Bottle 100 mL

Mueller Hinton II Broth (Cation-Adjusted)

Mueller Hinton II Broth (Cation-Adjusted) with
Lysed Horse Blood Mueller Hinton II Broth
(Cation-Adjusted) with 2% Sodium Chloride
Intended Use sulfamethoxazole and vancomycin according to the protocol
Mueller Hinton II Broth is intended for use in quantitative described in NCCLS standard M7.1
procedures for susceptibility testing of rapidly-growing aerobic Mueller Hinton II Broth with 2% Sodium Chloride (NaCl) is
and facultatively anaerobic bacteria isolated from clinical for testing methicillin-resistant strains of Staphylococcus aureus
specimens. It is formulated to have a low thymine and thymi- (MRSA).1
dine content and is adjusted to the calcium and magnesium
ion concentrations recommended in NCCLS standard M7.1 Summary and Explanation
Mueller Hinton II Broth with Lysed Horse Blood is for use The development of laboratory tests to determine the activity
in broth dilution antimicrobial susceptibility testing of Strep- of antimicrobial agents has paralleled the development of these
tococcus pneumoniae with 11 antimicrobial agents; i.e., agents. In 1929, Fleming used a serial dilution technique to
cefaclor, cefotaxime, ceftriaxone, cefuroxime, chloramphenicol, measure the lowest concentration of penicillin that prevented
erythromycin, imipenem, penicillin, tetracycline, trimethoprim/ growth of a test organism in broth.2 Ericsson and Sherris
published an excellent review of the various methods for
383
Section III
M Mueller Hinton II Broth, cont.

susceptibility testing and the relationship of dilution and concentration at the site of infection that is two to four times
diffusion methods.3 greater than the MIC value, while for urinary tract infections, a
peak urine concentration of 10-20 times the MIC value should
Rammelkamp and Maxon were among the earliest to use
be achieved.9 However, effective antimicrobial therapy also
the tube dilution test to determine the in vitro antimicrobial
depends on many other factors.10
susceptibility of bacteria isolated from clinical specimens.4 The
development of this test resulted from the need to know why Cation-adjusted Mueller Hinton Broth is the medium usually
some patients infected with S. aureus did not respond to peni- used for dilution antimicrobial susceptibility tests. This me-
cillin therapy. dium is supplemented with calcium and magnesium salts to
produce correct MICs with aminoglycosides and Pseudomo-
The tube dilution test (broth dilution) involves exposing bacteria
nas aeruginosa.1 However, this medium is not satisfactory for
to decreasing concentrations of antimicrobial agents in liquid
fastidious organisms such as S. pneumoniae. Cation-adjusted
media, usually by serial two-fold dilution. The mixture, consisting
Mueller Hinton Broth supplemented with 2-5% lysed horse
of microorganisms, nutrient medium and antimicrobial agent,
blood is the medium recommended for susceptibility testing of
is incubated at 35C for 16-20 hours. The lowest concentra-
S. pneumoniae.1
tion of antimicrobial agent at which no visible growth occurs
is defined as the minimal inhibitory concentration (MIC). Thornsberry and McDougal reported that adding 2% sodium
chloride to cation-adjusted Mueller Hinton Broth improved the
The term microdilution appeared in the literature in 1970
reliability of MIC tests using oxacillin for detecting methicillin-
to describe the minimal inhibitory concentration tests
resistant S. aureus (MRSA).11 In addition, they recommend
performed with volumes of 0.1 mL or less of antimicrobial
the alternative direct inoculum standardization procedure (see
solution.5 Correlations between MIC values using microdilution
Procedure, step 2) and incubation of the inoculated MIC trays
and tube dilution methodologies have been reported to be
or tubes for a full 24 hours.11
between 85 and 96%.6,7
The qualitative disc diffusion antimicrobial susceptibility Principles of the Procedure
procedure has been standardized since 1966.8 The rationale for Acid hydrolysate of casein and beef extract provide nutrients
an MIC susceptibility test rather than the disc diffusion test is for growth of test organisms. These ingredients are selected
that it gives quantitative information. It provides a relationship for low thymine and thymidine content as determined by MIC
between the amount of antimicrobial agent required to inhibit values with Enterococcus faecalis and sulfamethoxazole-
the growth of an organism in vitro and the achievable concentra- trimethoprim (SXT). Calcium and magnesium ion concentra-
tions in the blood, urine, cerebrospinal fluid or bile, under tions are adjusted to provide the amounts recommended by
various dosage conditions. It has been suggested that in the treat- NCCLS to give the correct MIC values with aminoglycosides
ment of systemic infections, the drug dosage should yield a peak and P. aeruginosa.1 The pH has been adjusted to the specifica-
tion in NCCLS standard M7.
User Quality Control Mueller Hinton II Broth with Lysed Horse Blood contains the
Identity Specifications nutrients necessary to support the growth of S. pneumoniae.
BBL Mueller Hinton II Broth (Cation-Adjusted) MRSA cultures often consist of two populations, one that is
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane- susceptible and one that is resistant (so-called occult resis-
ous material.
tant strains). The methicillin-resistant population grows more
Solution: 2.2% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is pale slowly and prefers a high salt concentration as contained in
to light yellow, clear to trace hazy. Mueller Hinton II Broth with 2% NaCl. In addition, the lower
Prepared Appearance: Pale to light yellow, clear to trace hazy. pH of this medium (6.9) improves the stability of -lactam
Reaction of 2.2% antibiotics during storage of prepared MIC test tubes or trays.12
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.1
Calcium: 20-25 mg/L Antimicrobial agents are prepared in serial two-fold dilutions
Magnesium: 10-12.5 mg/L in Mueller Hinton II Broth (with or without lysed horse blood)
and are inoculated with the test culture to give a final concen-
Cultural Response tration of 5 105 CFU/mL. Following incubation at 35C,
BBL Mueller Hinton II Broth (Cation-Adjusted) the presence of turbidity indicates growth of the organism.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with approximately The lowest concentration of antimicrobial agent showing no
105 of the test organisms, dispense into an antimicrobial susceptibility
test system and incubate at 35 2C for 16-20 hours. growth is the MIC of that organism for that agent. The inter-
pretation as to whether the organism is susceptible, intermedi-
ORGANISM ATCC RESULT
ate, or resistant in its response to the agent is made by
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 Satisfactory MIC values
comparing the MIC to those in the MIC interpretive standards
Escherichia coli 25922 Satisfactory MIC values
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 Satisfactory MIC values in NCCLS standard M7.1,13
Staphylococcus aureus 29213 Satisfactory MIC values

384
 Mueller Hinton II Broth, cont.
M
Various factors have been identified as influencing broth dilution II Broth with 2% NaCl. Suspensions of test organisms must
susceptibility tests. These include the medium, antimicrobial be used within 15 minutes of standardization.
potency, inoculum concentration, pH, antimicrobial stability and 3. Inoculation of Antimicrobial Dilutions
mechanisms of resistance by the test organisms.3,14,15 The amount of inoculum depends on the procedure used.1
The standardized inoculum prepared above will contain
Formula approximately 1-2 108 CFU/mL. The final concentration
BBL Mueller Hinton II Broth (Cation-Adjusted) in a well (or tube) should be 5 105 CFU/mL (not CFU/tube
Approximate Formula* Per Liter or well).
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Acid Hydrolysate of Casein ....................................... 17.5 g a. Macrodilution (tube) method
Starch ......................................................................... 1.5 g If the volume of antimicrobial solution in the tube is
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required with appropriate salts to provide 20-25 mg/L of calcium 1 mL, dilute the standardized inoculum 1:100 in Mueller
and 10-12.5 mg/L of magnesium and as additionally required to meet performance criteria.
Hinton II Broth (0.1 mL to a 10-mL tube of broth).
Directions for Preparation from Add 1.0 mL of the adjusted inoculum to each tube con-
Dehydrated Product taining an antimicrobial agent and 2.0 mL to a sterile
1. Suspend 22 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix empty tube for a growth control.
thoroughly. b. Microdilution method
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- In this method, the antimicrobial dilutions are made in
pletely dissolve the powder. sterile plastic trays with round or conical-shaped wells.
3. Autoclave at 116-121C for 10 minutes. DO NOT OVER- The volume is either 0.05 or 0.1 mL in each well. If the
HEAT. volume in the well is 0.1 mL, dilute the inoculum 1:10
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using and add 0.005 mL of the inoculum per well, using a
stable, typical control cultures. replicator. One well in each tray should contain 0.1 mL
of broth without any antimicrobial agent (growth
Procedure control well).
Mueller Hinton II Broth (Cation-Adjusted) may be used for If a dropper (0.05 mL) is used for the inoculum and the
inoculum preparation for MIC tests and for preparation of volume of antimicrobial solution is 0.05 mL, this
antimicrobial dilutions for the microdilution or macrodilution results in a 1:2 dilution. Therefore, dilute the inoculum
procedure. Details for the preparation of antimicrobial agents 1:100 and add 0.05 mL to each well to obtain the final
are provided in reference 1. concentration of 5 105 CFU/mL (5 104 CFU/well).
Add 0.05 mL of broth without any antimicrobial agent
1. Inoculum Standardization (for rapidly growing bacteria)
(growth control well). After the trays are inoculated,
a. Using aseptic technique, pick 3-5 isolated colonies of
cover with tape or a tight-fitting lid to prevent evapo-
the same organism from an 18- to 24-hour Trypticase
ration.
Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II) plate and
4. Incubation
inoculate into 5 mL of Mueller Hinton II Broth.
Incubate the tubes or trays (stacked no more than four high)
b. Incubate 2-6 hours at 35C. Periodically check turbidity
at 35C for 16-20 hours for Mueller Hinton II Broth,
against the 0.5 McFarland turbidity standard.
20-24 hours for Mueller Hinton II Broth with Lysed Horse
If comparable, go to step 3, Inoculation of Antimi-
Blood (S. pneumoniae) and a full 24 hours for Mueller
crobial Dilutions.
Hinton II Broth with 2% Sodium Chloride (MRSA). Do
If too turbid, dilute aseptically with additional
not use a CO2 incubator. To prevent drying out, the trays
Mueller Hinton II Broth and repeat turbidity check.
should be covered with plastic tape, a tight fitting lid, or
If turbidity is comparable to the standard, go to step
placed in a plastic bag.1
3, Inoculation of Antimicrobial Dilutions.
Control cultures should be included each time a suscepti-
If not turbid enough, continue incubation. When
bility test is performed or weekly if satisfactory performance
turbidity is comparable to the standard, go to step
can be documented according to the NCCLS standard.1 The
3, Inoculation of Antimicrobial Dilutions.
correct quality control MIC ranges will be found in M100
Suspensions of test organisms must be used within 15 minutes
(M7).
of standardization.
2. Alternative Direct Inoculum Standardization (for rapidly Expected Results
growing bacteria, S. pneumoniae and MRSA) The minimal inhibitory concentration (MIC) of an antimicrobial
A stationary phase culture may also be used. In this method, agent for a specific organism is the lowest concentration which
skip step number 1b and simply suspend enough colonies will inhibit the growth of the organism. Growth is indicated by
in the broth to equal the turbidity of the 0.5 McFarland turbidity or sediment. Some microorganisms when tested against
standard. For S. pneumoniae, use Mueller Hinton II Broth trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole or sulfonamides alone do not
with Lysed Horse Blood. For MRSA, use Mueller Hinton always give clear-cut end points. In the case of doubling dilutions

385
Section III
M Mueller Hinton II Broth, cont.

of trimethoprim/sulfamethoxazole, there may be a trailing of References

growth. Such a pattern typically shows an obvious reduction in 1. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved standard: M7-A5.
Methods for dilution antimicrobial susceptibility tests for bacteria that grow aerobically, 5th ed.
the amount of growth and, then, either small pellets (usually less NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
2. Fleming. 1929. Br. J. Exp. Pathol. 10:225.
than 1 mm in diameter) in the rest of the wells, or an obvious 3. Ericsson and Sherris. 1971. Acta Pathol. Microbiol. Scand. Sect B Suppl. 217:1.
4. Rammelkamp and Maxon. 1942. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. and Med. 51:386.
reduction in the amount of growth and then a slight but detect- 5. Gavan and Town. 1970. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 53:880.
6. Harwick, Weiss and Fekety. 1968. J. Lab Clin. Med. 72:511.
able graduation in the size of the pellets. In these cases, the MIC 7. Marymount and Wentz. 1966. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 45:548.
end point should be identified as the lowest concentration of 8. Bauer, Kirby, Sherris and Turck. 1966. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 45:493.
9. Petersdorf and Plorde. 1963. Ann. Rev. of Med. 14:41.
antimicrobial agent beyond which there is no further reduction 10. Thornsberry. 1991. In Balows, Hausler, Herrmann, Isenberg and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of clinical
microbiology, 5th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
in the size of the pellet or amount of turbidity. 11. Thornsberry and McDougal. 1983. J. Clin. Microbiol. 18:1084.
12. Nickolai, Lammel, Byford, Morris, Kaplan, Hadley and Brooks. 1985. J. Clin. Microbiol. 21:366.
An organism may be susceptible, intermediate or resistant 13. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2002. Performance standards for antimicro-
bial susceptibility testing; 12th informational supplement, M100-S12(M7). NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
for a given antimicrobial agent depending on the MIC value. 14. Thornsberry, Gavan and Gerlach. 1977. Cumitech 6, New developments in antimicrobial agent
susceptibility testing. Coord. ed., Sherris. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Interpretive standards for MIC values with various drugs may 15. Jorgensen, Turnidge and Washington. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.),
Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
be found in NCCLS document M100 (M7)1 or may be 16. Koneman, Allen, Janda, Schreckenberger and Winn. 1997. Color atlas and textbook of diagnostic
microbiology, 5th ed. Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, Pa.
obtained from the drug manufacturer. 17. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
St. Louis, Mo.
NOTE: Informational supplements to NCCLS Document M7,
containing revised tables of antimicrobial agents and interpretive Availability
standards are published periodically. The latest tables should be BBL Mueller Hinton II Broth (Cation-Adjusted)
consulted for current recommendations. The complete standard BS10 CMPH MCM7 NCCLS
and informational supplements can be ordered from the National Cat. No. 212322 Dehydrated 500 g
Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards, 940 West 297701 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10
298268 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100
Valley Road, Suite 1400, Wayne, PA 19087-1898. Telephone: 297310 Prepared Bottle (pH 7.3) 250 mL
(610) 688-1100. 297963 Prepared Bottle 400 mL

Refer to other texts for additional information on antimicrobial BBL Mueller Hinton II Broth (Cation-Adjusted) with
Lysed Horse Blood
susceptibility testing.16,17
NCCLS
Cat. No. 220500 Prepared Tubes, 10 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10
BBL Mueller Hinton II Broth (Cation-Adjusted) with 2%
Sodium Chloride
NCCLS
Cat. No. 297311 Prepared Bottle (pH 6.9) 250 mL

Muller Kauffmann Tetrathionate Broth Base

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Muller Kauffmann Tetrathionate Broth Base is used for enriching Muller Kauffmann Tetrathionate Broth Base contains peptone
Salmonella from water, foodstuffs and fecal samples prior to and beef extract as sources of carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and
selective isolation. minerals. Oxgall and added brilliant green are selective agents
which inhibit gram-positive and other gram-negative organ-
Summary and Explanation isms. Calcium carbonate is the buffer. Sodium thiosulfate is a
Muller1 recommended Tetrathionate Broth as a selective source of sulfur.
medium for the isolation of Salmonella. Kauffmann2 modified
the formula to include oxbile and brilliant green as selective Formula
agents to suppress bacteria such as Proteus spp. Difco Muller Kauffmann Tetrathionate Broth Base
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
The British Standard Specification specifies Brilliant Green Beef Extract ................................................................ 5.0 g
Tetrathionate Broth for isolating Salmonella from meat and meat Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
products and from poultry and poultry products.3 It is also a Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 3.0 g
recommended selective broth for isolating Salmonella from Calcium Carbonate .................................................. 45.0 g
animal feces and sewage-polluted water.4 Using more than one Sodium Thiosulfate (anhydrous) ............................... 38.1 g
Oxgall ......................................................................... 4.7 g
selective broth increases the isolation of Salmonella from *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
samples with multiple serotypes.5
Muller Kauffmann Tetrathionate Broth Base conforms with
ISO/DIS 3565.3

386
 Mycobacteria 7H11 Agar
M
3. Transfer 10 mL samples to 100 mL Muller Kauffmann
User Quality Control
Tetrathionate Broth and to 100 mL SBG Sulfa Enrichment.
Identity Specifications 4. Incubate Muller Kauffmann Tetrathionate Broth at 42-43C
Difco Muller Kauffmann Tetrathionate Broth Base and the SBG Sulfa Enrichment at 37C.
Dehydrated Appearance: Off-white to light beige, free-flowing, 5. Subculture broths after 18-24 hours and 48 hours onto
homogeneous.
Brilliant Green Agar.
Solution: 10.58% solution, slightly soluble in
purified water. Solution is very pale
6. Incubate overnight.
green with white precipitate. 7. Examine for the growth of typical colonies of Salmonella spp.
Prepared Appearance: Very pale green with white precipitate. Sewage-Polluted Natural Waters
Reaction of 10.58% Solution, This procedure is applicable to the isolation of Salmonella spp.
with additives, at 25C: pH 8.0 0.2
other than S. typhi.
Cultural Response 1. Inoculate 25 mL aliquots of the sample into 25 mL of double
Difco Muller Kauffmann Tetrathionate Broth Base strength Buffered Peptone Water. Incubate at 37C for 18
Prepare the medium per label directions, with the addition of 1.9 mL
iodine solution and 0.95 mL brilliant green solution per 100 mL of hours.
medium. Inoculate and incubate at 42-43C for 18-24 hours. Subcul- 2. Transfer 1 mL samples into 10 mL of Muller Kauffmann
ture to Brilliant Green Agar. Incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. Tetrathionate Broth.
INOCULUM COLONY 3. Incubate at 43C for 48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
4. Subculture broths after 18-24 and 48 hours onto Brilliant
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 None to poor
Green MacConkey Agar, prepared by adding 10 mL of a
Proteus vulgaris 13315 103-2103 None to poor
Salmonella choleraesuis
0.33% (w/v) aqueous solution of brilliant green to
subsp. choleraesuis MacConkey Agar without Salt to give a final concentration
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good Red of 0.033 g/L.
Salmonella senftenburg 5. Incubate at 37C overnight.
(NCTC 10384) 102-103 Good Red
6. Examine for colonies typical of Salmonella spp.

Expected Results
Directions for Preparation from Salmonella spp. will produce red colonies with good growth.
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 105.8 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water and Limitations of the Procedure
boil gently. 1. The complete medium is unstable and should be used
2. Cool to below 45C. immediately. It may be stored at 2-8C in the dark for no
3. Add 19 mL of iodine solution (20 g iodine and 25 g potas- more than 7 days.
sium iodide in 100 mL water) and 9.5 mL brilliant green 2. Due to the nutritional requirements and inhibitory charac-
solution (0.1 g brilliant green in 100 mL water). teristics of the organisms themselves, organisms other than
4. Adjust the pH of the complete medium to 7.0 0.2 using salmonellae, such as Morganella morganii and some
1N HCl. Enterobacteriaceae may grow in the medium.
5. Dispense into sterile tubes, mixing well to evenly disperse 3. Confirmatory tests, such as fermentation and
the calcium carbonate. seroagglutination reactions, should be carried out on all
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using presumptive Salmonella colonies that are recovered.
stable, typical control cultures.
References
Procedure 1. Muller. 1923. C. R. Soc. Biol. (Paris) 89:434.
2. Kauffmann. 1935. Ztschr. F. Hyg. 117:26.
Meat and Meat Products 3. International Organization for Standardization. 1974. (Draft International Standard ISO/DIS 3565).
Geneva, Switzerland.
1. Weigh 25 g of the sample into a sterile blender jar and 4. Public Health Laboratory Service. 1974. Monograph Series No. 8. Public Health Laboratory
Service, London, England.
add 225 mL of Buffered Peptone Water and macerate for 5. Harvey and Price. 1976. J. Hyg. Camb. 77:333.
sufficient time to give 10,000-15,000 revolutions.
2. Transfer contents of the blender jar aseptically to a 500 mL Availability
flask. Incubate at 37C 0.1C for 16-20 hours. Difco Muller Kauffmann Tetrathionate Broth Base
ISO
Cat. No. 218531 Dehydrated 500 g

Mycobacteria 7H11 Agar

(See Seven H11 Agars)

387
Section III
M Mycobactosel L-J Medium

Mycobactosel L-J Medium

Intended Use Media may be inoculated up to the expiration date and incu-
Mycobactosel L-J Medium is used in qualitative procedures bated for up to 8 weeks.
for the isolation of mycobacteria from clinical specimens. Following inoculation, keep test containers shielded from light
and place them in a suitable system providing an aerobic atmo-
Summary and Explanation
sphere enriched with carbon dioxide. Incubate at 35 2C.
Mycobactosel L-J Medium is Lowenstein-Jensen Medium
plus cycloheximide, lincomycin and nalidixic acid for use with Slanted media should be incubated in a horizontal plane until
specimens likely to contain many contaminating organisms.1-4 the inoculum is absorbed. Tubes should have screw caps loose
The authors, Petran and Vera, reported that the medium for the first 3 weeks to permit circulation of carbon dioxide
permits isolation of mycobacteria from a few more specimens for the initiation of growth. Thereafter, to prevent dehydra-
and reduced by 68% the number of cultures which otherwise tion, tighten caps; loosen briefly once a week. Stand tubes
would have been reported as unsatisfactory as the result of upright if space is a problem.
overgrowth by contaminants.5 NOTE: Cultures from skin lesions suspected to be M. marinum
or M. ulcerans should be incubated at 25-33C for primary
Principles of the Procedure isolation; cultures suspected to contain M. avium or M. xenopi
This medium contains a variety of inorganic salts or other exhibit optimum growth at 40-42C.7 Incubate a duplicate
nitrogen sources, which provide substances essential for the culture at 35-37C.7
growth of mycobacteria. The glycerol is a source of carbon
and energy. Asparagine is added to promote the initiation of Expected Results
growth and increase the growth rate. Egg yolk is a source of Cultures should be read within 5 to 7 days after incubation
lipids for the metabolism of mycobacteria. Partial inhibition and once a week thereafter for up to 8 weeks.
of bacteria is achieved by the presence of the malachite green
Record Observations7
dye.
1. Number of days required for colonies to become macro-
Cycloheximide suppresses the growth of saprophytic fungi. scopically visible. Rapid growers have mature colonies
Lincomycin inhibits gram-positive bacteria. Nalidixic acid within 7 days. Slow growers require more than 7 days for
inhibits some of the gram-negative bacteria encountered in mature colony forms.
clinical specimens. 2. Pigment production
White, cream or buff = Nonchromogenic (NC)
Precaution6 Lemon, yellow, orange, red = Chromogenic (Ch)
Biosafety Level 2 practices and procedures, containment
equipment and facilities are required for non-aerosol-produc- Stained smears may show acid-fast bacilli, which are reported
ing manipulations of clinical specimens such as preparation only as acid-fast bacilli unless definitive tests are performed.
of acid-fast smears. All aerosol-generating activities must be
conducted in a Class I or II biological safety cabinet. Biosafety Limitations of the Procedure
Level 3 practices, containment equipment and facilities are 1. Negative culture results do not rule-out active infection
required for laboratory activities in the propagation and by mycobacteria. Some factors that are responsible for
manipulation of cultures of M. tuberculosis and M. bovis. unsuccessful cultures are:
Animal studies also require special procedures. The specimen was not representative of the infectious
material; i.e., saliva instead of sputum.
Procedure The mycobacteria were destroyed during digestion and
The test procedures are those recommended by the Centers for decontamination of the specimen.
Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) for primary isolation from Gross contamination interfered with the growth of the
specimens containing mycobacteria.7 N-Acetyl-L-cysteine-sodium mycobacteria.
hydroxide (NALC-NaOH) solution is recommended as a Proper aerobic conditions and increased CO2 tension
gentle, but effective, digesting and decontaminating agent. were not provided during incubation.
These reagents are provided in the BBL MycoPrep Myco- 2. Mycobacteria are strict aerobes and growth is stimulated
bacterial Specimen Digestion/Decontamination Kit. For by increased levels of CO2. Screw caps on tubes or bottles
detailed decontamination and culturing instructions, consult should be handled as directed for exchange of CO2.
an appropriate reference.7-10

388
 Mycological Media
M
References Availability
1. Lowenstein. 1931. Zentralbl. Bakteriol. Parasitenkd. Infectionskr. Hyg. Abt. I Orig. 120:127.
2. Lowenstein. 1933. Ann. Inst. Pasteur. 50:161.
BBL Mycobactosel L-J Medium
3. Metchock, Nolte and Wallace. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (eds.), Manual CMPH MCM7
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
4. Jensen. 1932. Zentralbl. Bakteriol. Parasitenkd. Infektionskr. Hyg. Abt. I. Orig. 125:222.
Cat. No. 221413 Prepared Slants (A Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
5. Petran and Vera. 1971. Health Lab. Sci. 8:225. 221414 Prepared Slants (A Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
6. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
*Store at 2-8C.
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
7. Kent and Kubica. 1985. Public health mycobacteriology: a guide for the level III laboratory.
USDHHS. Centers for Disease Control, Atlanta, Ga.
8. Cernoch, Enns, Saubolle and Wallace. 1994. Cumitech 16A, Laboratory diagnosis of the mycobac-
terioses. Coord. ed., Weissfeld. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
9. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
St. Louis, Mo.
10. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Mycological Media
Mycological Agar Mycophil Agar
Mycophil Agar with Low pH
Intended Use Formulae
Mycological media are used for the cultivation and mainte- Difco Mycological Agar
nance of fungi, for the demonstration of chromogenesis and Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Soy Peptone ............................................................. 10.0 g
for obtaining yeast and mold counts. Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Summary and Explanation BBL Mycophil Agar
Many different culture media have been developed for the Approximate Formula* Per Liter
growth of fungi. In comparison with media for the majority Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal ................................ 10.0 g
of bacterial strains, fungal media are of simple composition, Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 16.0 g
usually consisting of a peptone, dextrose and agar. Selectivity
BBL Mycophil Agar with Low pH
is achieved by lowering the pH, incorporating dyes or adding
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
antimicrobial agents. Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal ................................ 10.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Mycological Agar and Mycophil Agar are nonselective media Agar ......................................................................... 18.0 g
of value in general work with yeasts and molds rather than *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
for isolation from materials possessing mixed flora. It is often
desirable to use these media in parallel with selective media as Directions for Preparation from
some of the selective agents are inhibitory for certain fungi. Dehydrated Product
Difco Mycological Agar
Mycophil Agar with Low pH has had its base adjusted to
1. Suspend 35 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
approximately pH 4.7, which obviates the need for pH adjust-
thoroughly.
ment with lactic or tartaric acids in the laboratory. It also
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
differs from Mycophil Agar in that an additional 2 g/L of agar
completely dissolve the powder.
has been incorporated so that the medium may be sterilized
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
and remelted without losing its ability to solidify.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Wetzler et al. employed Mycophil Agar with Low pH for stable, typical control cultures.
enumeration of yeasts and molds in poultry processing plants.1
BBL Mycophil Agar
The formulation also has been recommended for isolation of
1. Suspend 36 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
yeasts and most filamentous fungi from clinical material.2
thoroughly.
Principles of the Procedure 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
The peptone and dextrose ingredients supply sufficient completely dissolve the powder.
nutrients for the metabolism of fungal species. 3. Autoclave at 118C for 15 minutes.
4. For yeast and mold counts, adjust the pH to 4.0 by adding
15 mL of sterile 10% lactic acid to each L of sterile melted
medium prior to plating.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

389
Section III
M Mycological Media, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Mycological Agar BBL Mycophil Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
Solution: 3.5% solution, soluble in purified ous material, may contain a large num-
water upon boiling. Solution is light ber of minute to small yellow specks.
to medium amber, very slightly to Solution: 3.6% solution, soluble in purified water
slightly opalescent. upon boiling. Solution is light to medium,
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal- yellow to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
escent. Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear
Reaction of 3.5% to slightly hazy.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 Reaction of 3.6%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
Cultural Response BBL Mycophil Agar with Low pH

Difco Mycological Agar Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-

Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at ous material, may contain tan specks.
30 2C (incubate Penicillium at 20-25C) for 18-72 hours. Solution: 3.8% solution, soluble in purified water
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY upon boiling. Solution is light to medium,
yellow to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
Aspergillus niger 16404 30-300 Good
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear
Candida albicans 10231 30-300 Good
to slightly hazy.
Penicillium abeanum 22346 30-300 Good
Reaction of 3.8%
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9080 30-300 Good
Solution at 25C: pH 4.7 0.2
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-104 Good
Cultural Response
BBL Mycophil Agar with Low pH BBL Mycophil Agar or Mycophil Agar with
1. Suspend 38 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix Low pH
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
thoroughly. and incubate at 25 2C for 7 days.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for about 30 seconds
RECOVERY
to completely dissolve the powder. RECOVERY MYCOPHIL
MYCOPHIL AGAR WITH
3. Autoclave at 118C for 15 minutes or at 121C for 10 ORGANISM ATCC AGAR LOW PH
minutes. Aspergillus niger 16404 Good Good
4. The medium should be cooled and used at once. If the Candida albicans 60193 Good Good
medium is allowed to solidify after autoclaving, it may be Nocardia asteroides 19247 Good N/A
remelted once. DO NOT OVERHEAT. Penicillium roquefortii 9295 Good N/A
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Penicillium roquefortii 10110 N/A Good
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 N/A Good
stable, typical control cultures.
Trichophyton mentagrophytes 9533 Good N/A

Procedure
Inoculate plated media with test specimens or materials so as can be counted to determine the level of contamination in the
to obtain isolated colonies. Consult appropriate references for test sample. Biochemical tests and serological procedures
information about the processing and inoculation of specimens.3,4 should be performed to confirm findings.5
For isolation of fungi from potentially contaminated specimens,
also inoculate a selective medium. Incubate plates at 25-30C in References
1. Wetzler, Musick, Johnson and MacKenzie. 1962. Am. J. Public Health 52:460.
an inverted position (agar side up) with increased humidity. For 2. Von Riesen and Jensen. 1958. Am. J. Med. Technol. 24:123.
3. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
isolation of fungi causing systemic mycoses, two sets of media Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
should be inoculated, with one set incubated at 25-30C and a 4. Merz and Roberts. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (eds.), Manual of clinical
microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
duplicate set at 35 2C. All cultures should be examined at 5. Larone. 1995. Medically important fungi: a guide to identification, 3rd ed. American Society for
Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
least weekly for fungal growth and should be held for 4-6 weeks
before being reported as negative. Availability
Difco Mycological Agar
Expected Results Cat. No. 240520 Dehydrated 500 g
After sufficient incubation, the plates should show isolated BBL Mycophil Agar
colonies in streaked areas and confluent growth in areas of Cat. No. 211445 Dehydrated 500 g
heavy inoculation. Examine plates for fungal colonies exhib-
BBL Mycophil Agar with Low pH

iting typical color and morphology. Yeast and mold colonies Cat. No. 211450 Dehydrated 500 g
390
 Mycosel Agar
M
Mycoplasma Media
(See PPLO Media)

Mycosel Agar
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Mycosel Agar is a highly selective medium containing cyclo- The nutritive properties of Mycosel Agar are supplied by the
heximide and chloramphenicol. It is recommended for the iso- peptone prepared from soybean meal. Dextrose is an energy
lation of pathogenic fungi from materials having a large amount source for the metabolism of fungi. Cycloheximide inhibits
of flora of other fungi and bacteria.1,2 BBL prepared plates most saprophytic molds. Chloramphenicol is a broad-spectrum
of Mycosel Agar are deep-filled to reduce the effects of drying antibiotic which inhibits a wide range of gram-positive and
during prolonged incubation. gram-negative bacteria.

Summary and Explanation Formula

Mycosel Agar was developed by using the ingredients of BBL Mycosel Agar
Mycophil Agar as a nutritive base to which cycloheximide Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal ................................ 10.0 g
and chloramphenicol were added as selective agents. It is widely Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
used for the isolation of fungi from a variety of sources, and is Agar ......................................................................... 15.5 g
recommended for the recovery of dermatophytes.3 Cycloheximide ............................................................ 0.4 g
Chloramphenicol ........................................................ 0.05 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Candida albicans
User Quality Control ATCC 10231

Identity Specifications
BBL Mycosel Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material.
Solution: 3.6% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light to medium,
yellow to tan, clear to moderately hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear to
moderately hazy.
Reaction of 3.6%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL Mycosel Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
and incubate at 25 2C for 7 days.
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY
Aspergillus niger 16404 Partial to
complete inhibition
Aureobasidium pullulans 9348 Partial to
complete inhibition
Blastomyces dermatitidis 56218 Good
Candida albicans 10231 Good
Escherichia coli 25922 Partial to
complete inhibition
Microsporum audouinii 9079 Good
Penicillium roquefortii 9295 Partial to
complete inhibition
Phialophora verrucosa 10223 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 Complete inhibition
Streptomyces rimosus 10970 Partial to
complete inhibition
Trichophyton mentagrophytes 9533 Good

391
Section III
M Mycosel Agar, cont.

Directions for Preparation from Limitation of the Procedure

Dehydrated Product Some fungi may be inhibited by the antibiotics in this medium.5
1. Suspend 36 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly. References
1. Weitzman, Kane and Summerbell. 1995. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (eds.),
2. Heat with frequent agitation just until the medium boils, Manual of clinical microbiology, 6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. Kwon-Chung and Bennett. 1992. Medical mycology. Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia, Pa.
to completely dissolve the powder. 3. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
St. Louis, Mo.
3. Autoclave at 118C for 15 minutes. Avoid overheating. 4. Ajello, Georg, Kaplan and Kaufman. 1963. CDC laboratory manual for medical mycology. PHS
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Publication No. 994, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
5. Larone. 1995. Medically important fungi: a guide to identification, 3rd ed. American Society for
stable, typical control cultures. Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Procedure Availability
Consult appropriate references for information about the pro- BBL Mycosel Agar
cessing and inoculation of specimens.1-3 BS10 CMPH MCM7
Cat. No. 211462 Dehydrated 500 g
For isolation of fungi from potentially contaminated specimens, United States and Canada
a nonselective medium should be inoculated along with the Cat. No. 221847 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 20*
selective medium. Incubate the containers at 25-30C with 220966 Prepared Tubed Slants (A Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
220967 Prepared Tubed Slants (A Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
increased humidity. 297456 Prepared Tubed Slants (C Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
221130 Mycoflask Bottles Pkg. of 10*
For isolation of fungi causing systemic mycoses, two sets of 221131 Mycoflask Bottles Ctn. of 100*
media should be inoculated, with one set incubated at 25-30C 296233 Prepared 1 oz Bottles Pkg. of 10*
and a duplicate set at 35 2C. All cultures should be exam- 295698 Prepared 1 oz Bottles Ctn. of 100*
ined at least weekly for fungal growth and should be held for Europe
4-6 weeks before being reported as negative. Cat. No. 254417 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.

Expected Results
After sufficient incubation, the plates and Mycoflask bottles
should show isolated colonies in streaked areas and confluent
growth in areas of heavy inoculation.
Examine containers for fungal colonies exhibiting typical color
and morphology.4 Biochemical tests and serological proce-
dures should be performed to confirm findings.

392
 NIH Thioglycollate Broth

NBB Agar Base, Modified

Intended Use Formula
NBB Agar, Modified is a selective medium used for the detec-
tion of contaminating/spoilage microorganisms in beer.
BBL NBB Agar Base, Modified
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
N
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Summary and Explanation Beef Extract ................................................................ 2.0 g
Developed in Germany, the NBB medium (Nachweismedium Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 0.5 g
fr bierschdliche Bacterien) by Back and Dachs was modified Potassium Acetate ...................................................... 6.0 g
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 2.0 g
by Nishikawa and Kohgo to provide a less inhibitory medium L-Cysteine HCl ........................................................... 0.2 g
for beer spoilage bacteria.1-3 Chlorphenol Red ........................................................ 0.07 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 15.0 g
Maltose .................................................................... 15.0 g
Principles of the Procedure L-Malic Acid ............................................................... 0.5 g
This medium contains a wide variety of nutrients including Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
peptone, yeast extract, beef extract, dextrose and maltose. The *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

composition of nutrients provides for the growth of common

spoilage organisms. The modified formula contains potassium
Directions for Preparation from
acetate (replacing sodium acetate in the original NBB formula), Dehydrated Product
which was reported to be less inhibitory to the growth of 1. Suspend 66.3 g of the powder in 500 mL of purified water
spoilage bacteria.3 and 500 mL of degassed beer. Mix thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
pletely dissolve the powder.
User Quality Control
3. Dispense and autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Identity Specifications 4. Test samples of finished product for performance using
BBL NBB Agar Base, Modified stable, typical control cultures.
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material. Procedure4
Solution: 6.63% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium, rose
Using the spread plate technique, inoculate plates of NBB
to red, clear to moderately hazy. Agar, Modified with samples from beer production processes.
Prepared Appearance: Medium, rose to red, clear to moder- Incubate plates anaerobically at 30 1C for 7-14 days.4
ately hazy.
Reaction of 6.63% Expected Results
Solution at 25C: pH 5.8 0.2
After incubation, observe plates for the presence of isolated
Cultural Response acid-producing colonies. Prepare Gram-stained smears and test
BBL NBB Agar Base, Modified for catalase production. Gram-positive, catalase-negative cocci
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures or rods may tentatively be considered lactic acid bacteria.4
and incubate anaerobically at 30-35C for 4 days.
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY ACID PRODUCTION References
1. Back. 1980. Brauwelt 1562.
Lactobacillus brevis 8291 Good Weak acid (trace yellow) 2. Dachs. 1981. Brauwelt 1778.
to acid (yellow) 3. Nishikawa and Kohgo. 1985. Master Brew. Am. Assoc. Technol. Q. 22:61.
4. Hall, Ledenbach and Flowers. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the
Pediococcus acidilactici 8042 Good Weak acid (trace yellow) microbiological examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington,
to acid (yellow) D.C.
Pediococcus damnosus 29358 Good Weak acid (trace yellow)
to acid (yellow) Availability
BBL NBB Agar Base, Modified
COMPF
Cat. No. 298140 Dehydrated 500 g

NIH Thioglycollate Broth

(See Thioglycollate Media)

393
Section III
N NZCYM Broth

NZCYM Broth NZYM Broth

Intended Use acids. Sodium chloride is included in the medium to provide
NZCYM Broth and NZYM Broth are used for cultivating a suitable osmotic environment. Magnesium sulfate is a
recombinant strains of Escherichia coli. source of magnesium ions required in a variety of enzymatic
reactions, including DNA replication.
Summary and Explanation
NZCYM Broth was developed by Blattner et al. as an enriched Formulae
medium for cultivating recombinant strains of E. coli and Difco NZCYM Broth
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
propagating bacteriophage.1 E. coli grows rapidly in rich Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
media, such as the NZ media, which provide amino acids, Casamino Acids ......................................................... 1.0 g
vitamins and other metabolites the cell would otherwise have Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
to synthesize.2 Magnesium Sulfate (anhydrous) ................................. 0.98 g
The two variations of NZ media allow the user to select a Difco NZYM Broth
formulation appropriate to the need. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Principles of the Procedure Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Casein digest, yeast extract and casamino acids provide the Magnesium Sulfate (anhydrous) ................................. 0.98 g
necessary nutrients and cofactors required for excellent growth *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

of recombinant strains of E. coli. Due to its higher degree of

digestion, casamino acids is an excellent source of free amino
Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product
1. Dissolve the powder in 1 L of purified water:
User Quality Control Difco NZCYM Broth 22 g;
Identity Specifications Difco NZYM Broth 21 g.
Difco NZCYM Broth 2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- 3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
neous. stable, typical control cultures.
Solution: 2.2% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light to medium
amber, clear. Procedure
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear. Consult an appropriate reference for recommended test
Reaction of 2.2% procedures.3
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
Difco NZYM Broth Expected Results
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Growth should be evident in the form of turbidity.
neous.
Solution: 2.1% solution, soluble in purified References
water. Solution is light to medium 1. Blattner, Williams, Blechl, Denniston-Thompson, Faber, Furlong, Grunwald, Kiefer, Moore, Schumm,
Sheldon and Smithies. 1977. Science 196:161.
amber, clear. 2. Ausubel, Brent, Kingston, Moore, Seidman, Smith and Struhl(ed.). 1994. Current protocols in
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear. molecular biology, vol. 1. Current Protocols, New York, N.Y.
3. Sambrook, Fritsch and Maniatis. 1989. Molecular cloning: a laboratory manual, 2nd ed. Cold
Reaction of 2.1% Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
Availability
Cultural Response
Difco NZCYM Broth
Difco NZCYM Broth or NZYM Broth
Cat. No. 240410 Dehydrated 500 g
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-24 hours. Difco NZYM Broth

Cat. No. 241510 Dehydrated 500 g

ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Escherichia coli (C600) 23724 102-3102 Good

394
 Neopeptone

Neomycin Blood Agar

Intended Use the loop, stab the agar two or three times in the area of heaviest
inoculation.
Neomycin Blood Agar is used for the isolation of group
A streptococci (S. pyogenes) and group B streptococci Also, inoculate a Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
N
(S. agalactiae) from clinical specimens in which the presence (TSA II) plate to assure the recovery of other clinically signifi-
of these organisms is suspected.1,2 cant microorganisms that may be inhibited on the selective
medium.
Summary and Explanation
Lancefield group A streptococci (S. pyogenes) and group Incubate inoculated plates at 35 2C in an aerobic
B streptococci (S. agalactiae) are medically important gram- atmosphere supplemented with carbon dioxide. Examine plates
positive beta-hemolytic bacteria. Blanchette and Lawrence after 18-24 hours and 48-72 hours, if necessary.
added neomycin to sheep blood agar to enhance the detection
of group A and group B streptococci by suppressing the growth Expected Results
of other hemolytic organisms.1 Most staphylococci, Entero- After 18-48 hours of incubation, group A streptococci
bacteriaceae, Neisseria, Listeria and some Pseudomonas (S. pyogenes) will appear as translucent or opaque, white to
species are inhibited. gray, small (1-2 mm) colonies surrounded by a zone of beta
hemolysis. A decrease in size as compared to the nonselective
Principles of the Procedure control is typical.
The nutrients in Neomycin Blood Agar are provided by Neisseria spp., gram-negative rods and most beta-hemolytic
peptones which are sources of nitrogenous compounds, staphylococci are inhibited. While both group A and group
carbon, sulfur and trace ingredients. The defibrinated sheep B streptococci will grow on this medium, susceptibility to
blood supplies enrichment for growth of fastidious organisms. bacitracin, utilizing Taxo A (0.04 unit) discs, may be used to
Sodium chloride maintains osmotic equilibrium. The incorpo- differentiate them.
ration of 30 g/mL of neomycin in this medium provides
suppression of normal flora for improved recovery of the group References
A and group B streptococci. 1. Blanchette and Lawrence. 1967. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 48:411.
2. Facklam and Washington. 1991. In Balows, Hausler, Herrmann, Isenberg and Shadomy (ed.), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 5th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Procedure
As soon as possible after the specimen is received in the Availability
BBL Neomycin Blood Agar
laboratory, inoculate the specimen onto a Neomycin Blood Unites States and Canada
Agar plate by firmly rolling swab over a third of the agar Cat. No. 221792 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
surface. Streak the remainder of the plate with a sterilized Europe
inoculating loop to obtain isolated colonies. Without re-sterilizing Cat. No. 254444 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.

Bacto Neopeptone
Intended Use Ifediba and Vanderberg4 reported that neopeptone, in addition
Bacto Neopeptone is used in preparing microbiological to calf serum, was used as an inexpensive replacement for
culture media. human serum in cultivation of Plasmodium falciparum,
the causative agent of human malaria. Cushion and Ebbets5
Summary and Explanation utilized neopeptone in their investigations of various media
Neopeptone is recommended for use in media for detection for cultivating Pneumocystis carinii without feeder cells.
of fungi.1 Apodaca and McKerrow2 used neopeptone for the Optimal replication of P. carinii separated from host fungi cells
cultivation of Trichophyton rubrum for study of its proteolytic was observed in media with neopeptone and N-acetylglucosamine
activity. Neopeptone has been cited as a component of culture at low pH.
media used for cultivation of human pathogens, notably, Media formulations containing Bacto Neopeptone are specified
Bordetella pertussis and group A streptococci. in standard methods for multiple applications.1,6-9
Neopeptone has also been reported to provide nutrients for
support of spirochetes and protozoa. Wyss et al.3 used
neopeptone as a component of a medium for cultivation of
Treponema maltophilum sp. nov., a fastidious oral anaerobe.

395
Section III
N Neopeptone, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Bacto Neopeptone
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, granules.
Solution: 1.0%, 2.0% and 10.0% solutions, soluble in purified water. 1.0% solution is very light to light amber, clear to very slightly
opalescent, may have a precipitate. 2.0% solution is light to medium amber, clear to very slightly opalescent, may have a
precipitate.10.0% solution is medium to dark amber, slightly opalescent to opalescent, may have a precipitate.
Reaction of 1.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9-7.5

Cultural Response
Biochemical Reactions
Bacto Neopeptone
Prepare a sterile solution of Bacto Neopeptone as directed below. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
TEST TEST SOLUTION ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT
Fermentable Carbohydrates 2% Escherichia coli 25922 ~107 Negative
Indole Production 0.1% Escherichia coli 29552 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Acetylmethylcarbinol 0.1% with Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Production 0.5% dextrose
Hydrogen Sulfide 1% Salmonella choleraesuis 14028 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Production subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium

Growth Response
Bacto Neopeptone
Prepare a sterile solution with 2% Bacto Neopeptone, 0.5% sodium chloride and 1.5% agar. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate plates
at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Brucella suis 4314* Undiluted Good
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good
*If this strain is not available, verify performance with a known isolate.

Principles of the Procedure Procedure

Bacto Neopeptone is an enzymatic digest of protein. See appropriate references for specific procedures using Bacto
Neopeptone contains a wide variety of peptide sizes in combi- Neopeptone.
nation with vitamins, nucleotides and minerals.
Expected Results
Typical Analysis Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of this
manual. References
1. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
10
Precautions 2. Apodaca and McKerrow. 1990. J. Med. Vet. Mycol. 28:159.
3. Wyss, Choi, Schupbach, Guggenheim and Gobel. 1996. Int. J. Syst. Bacteriol. 46:745.
1. Biosafety Level 2 practices, containment equipment and 4. Ifediba and Vanderberg. 1980. J. Parasitol. 66:236.
5. Cushion and Ebbets. 1990. J. Clin. Microbiol. 28:1385.
facilities are recommended for activities with clinical speci- 6. Horowitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
mens of human or animal origin containing or potentially 7. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
containing pathogenic Brucella spp. 8. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
9. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1998. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food Safety
facilities are recommended for all manipulations of cultures and Inspection Service, USDA, Washington, D.C.
10. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
of the pathogenic Brucella spp. and for experimental Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
animal studies.
Availability
Directions for Preparation from
Bacto Neopeptone
Dehydrated Product AOAC BAM COMPF SMWW USDA
Refer to the final concentration of Bacto Neopeptone in Cat. No. 211681 Dehydrated 500 g
the formula of the medium being prepared. Add product as 211680 Dehydrated 10 kg
required.

396
 New York City (NYC) Medium

Neutralizing Buffer
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Neutralizing Buffer is recommended for detection of microor-
ganisms found on dairy and food equipment disinfected with
Monopotassium phosphate provides the buffering capability.
Sodium thiosulfate inactivates the effect of chlorine compounds.
N
chlorine or quaternary ammonium compounds. The aryl sulfonate complex neutralizes the effects of quater-
nary ammonium compounds.
Summary and Explanation
Neutralizing Buffer has the ability to inactivate the bacteri- Formula
cidal and bacteriostatic effect of chlorine as well as quaternary Difco Neutralizing Buffer
ammonium compounds. Neutralizing Buffer is recommended Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Monopotassium Phosphate ...................................... 42.5 mg
for use in the microbiological examination of surfaces in Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................... 0.16 g
standard methods for the examination of dairy products Aryl Sulfonate Complex ............................................. 5.0 g
and foods.1,2 Neutralizing Buffer is also recommended for the *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

digestion and decontamination of mycobacterial specimens.3

Directions for Preparation from
User Quality Control Dehydrated Product
1. Dissolve 5.2 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
Identity Specifications 2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Difco Neutralizing Buffer 3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, homogeneous. stable, typical control cultures.
Solution: 0.52% solution; soluble in purified
water. Solution is very light to light Procedure
amber, clear to very slightly opalescent.
See appropriate standard methods for specific test methodolo-
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to very slightly
opalescent. gies.1-3
Reaction of 0.52%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2 Expected Results
Refer to appropriate references for results.
Cultural Response
Difco Neutralizing Buffer References
Prepare the buffer per label directions. Verify the neutralizing effect by 1. Marshall. (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
diluting a quaternary ammonium compound with Neutralizing Buffer Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
2. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
from 1:2,500 to 1:100,000. Inoculate tubes with Staphylococcus aureus 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
ATCC 6538P. Prepare pour plates by transferring 1 mL from each 3. Cernoch, Enns, Saubolle and Wallace. 1994. Cumitech 16A, Laboratory diagnosis of the mycobac-
dilution to Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar (Cat. No. 223000) and terioses. Coord. ed., Weissfeld. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
incubate at 32 1C for 42-48 hours. Observe for inactivation of the
bactericidal activity as indicated by the growth pattern. Availability
Difco Neutralizing Buffer
COMPF SMD
Cat. No. 236210 Dehydrated 100 g

New York City (NYC) Medium, Modified

Intended Use ment developed specifically to aid the growth of gonococci
New York City (NYC) Medium, Modified is a semi-transparent and other microorganisms,3 and the agar content is reduced
selective medium used in qualitative procedures primarily for from approximately 20 to 13 g/L for improved growth of
the isolation of pathogenic Neisseria. N. gonorrhoeae as reported by Anstey et al.4
The antimicrobial mixture in NYC Medium is similar to that of
Summary and Explanation Martin-Lewis Agar, except that the vancomycin concentration
Fauer et al., described a new medium, designated NYC is reduced from 4 to 2 g/mL and trimethoprim is reduced from
medium, for the isolation of pathogenic Neisseria consisting 5.0 to 3.0 g/mL.1,2 Both formulations contain anisomycin at
of a peptone-corn starch-agar-phosphate buffered base supple- 20 mg/L.
mented with horse plasma, horse hemoglobin, dextrose, yeast
dialysate and antimicrobics.1,2 The BBL formulation is Clinical field trials with NYC Medium indicate that the medium
modified by replacing the yeast dialysate and dextrose with is superior to both Thayer-Martin1 and Martin-Lewis5,6 agars
BBL IsoVitaleX Enrichment, a chemically defined supple- in recovery of N. gonorrhoeae.
397
Section III
N New York City (NYC) Medium, cont.

Principles of the Procedure 5. Subculture for identification of N. gonorrhoeae should be made

The peptones, horse plasma, hemoglobin and IsoVitaleX within 18-24 hours. If shipped after incubation, colonies
Enrichment in NYC Medium, Modified provide nutrients for should be subcultured before performing biochemical
the growth of N. gonorrhoeae and N. meningitidis. The phos- identification tests in order to ensure that adequate viability
phate salts buffer the medium at a neutral pH. is achieved.
This selective medium contains the antimicrobial agents, Expected Results
vancomycin, colistin, anisomycin and trimethoprim, to
Typical colonial morphology is as follows:
suppress the normal flora. Vancomycin is active primarily
against gram-positive bacteria. Colistin inhibits gram-negative N. gonorrhoeae may appear as small (0.5-1.0 mm) grayish
bacteria, including Pseudomonas species, but is not active white to colorless mucoid colonies.
against Proteus species. Anisomycin inhibits yeasts. N. meningitidis appears as large colorless to bluish-gray
Trimethoprim inhibits Proteus. mucoid colonies.
Colonies may be selected for Gram-staining, subculturing or
Procedure other diagnostic procedures.8
Streak the specimen as soon as possible after it is received in
the laboratory. If material is being cultured directly from a References
swab, proceed as follows:7 1. Fauer, Weisburd, Wilson and May. 1973. Health Lab. Sci. 10:44.
2. Fauer, Weisburd and Wilson. 1973. Health Lab. Sci. 10:55.
3. Martin, Billings Hackney and Thayer. 1967. Public Health Rep. 82:361.
1. Roll swab directly on the medium in a large Z to provide 4. Anstey, Gun-Munro, Rennie, Thornley, Schaus, Flannigan, Hussain and Maharajah. 1984. J. Clin.
Microbiol. 16:754.
adequate exposure of swab to the medium for transfer of 5. Lawton and Koch. 1982. J. Clin. Microbiol. 20:905.
organisms. 6. Granato, Schneible-Smith and Weiner, 1981. J. Clin. Microbiol. 13:963.
7. Center for Disease Control. 1975. Criteria and techniques for the diagnosis of gonorrhea, USPHS,
2. Cross-streak the Z pattern with a sterile wire loop, prefer- Atlanta, Ga.
8. Knapp and Koumans. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
ably in the clinic. If not done previously, cross-streaking microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
should be done in the laboratory.
3. Place the culture as soon as possible in an aerobic environ- Availability
ment enriched with carbon dioxide. BBL New York City (NYC) Medium, Modified
4. Incubate at 35 2C and examine after overnight incuba- Cat. No. 297173 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
297174 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
tion and again after approximately 48 hours.
*Store at 2-8C.

Niacin Assay Medium

Intended Use User Quality Control
This medium conforms with specifications of The United States
Pharmacopeia (USP). Identity Specifications
Niacin Assay Medium is used for determining niacin concen- Difco Niacin Assay Medium
tration by the microbiological assay technique. Dehydrated Appearance: Off-white, homogeneous, tendency
to clump.
Summary and Explanation Solution: 3.75% (single strength) or 7.5%
(double strength) solution, soluble in
Vitamin assay media are prepared for use in the microbiological purified water upon boiling 2-3 minutes.
assay of vitamins. Three types of media are used for this purpose: Single strength solution is very light
1. Maintenance Media: For carrying the stock culture to amber, clear, may have a slight
precipitate.
preserve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism
Prepared Appearance: (Single strength) very light amber,
for its intended purpose; clear, may have a slight precipitate.
2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for immediate Reaction of 3.75%
use; Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2
3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the vitamin under
test. They contain all the factors necessary for optimal growth Cultural Response
Difco Niacin Assay Medium
of the test organism except the single essential vitamin to be
Prepare the medium per label directions. The medium supports the
determined. growth of Lactobacillus plantarum ATCC 8014 when prepared in single
Niacin Assay Medium is prepared according to the formula strength and supplemented with nicotinic acid. The medium should
produce a standard curve when tested using a nicotinic acid reference
described by Snell and Wright,1 modified by Krehl, Strong and standard at 0.0 to 0.25 g per 10 mL. Incubate tubes with caps loosened
Elvehjem2 and Barton-Wright.3 Niacin Assay Medium is used at 35-37C for 18-24 hours. Read the percent transmittance using a
in the microbiological assay of nicotinic acid or nicotinamide spectrophotometer at 660 nm.
(niacin) using Lactobacillus plantarum ATCC 8014 as the
398
 Niacin Assay Medium, cont.

test organism. The medium is specified in assay procedures Procedure

published in the USP4 and Official Methods of Analysis of Follow assay procedures as outlined in the USP4 and AOAC5
AOAC International (AOAC).5 publications.
Principles of the Procedure Stock cultures of the test organism L. plantarum ATCC 8014
Niacin Assay Medium is a dehydrated medium free from nicotinic are prepared by stab inoculation of Lactobacilli Agar AOAC N
acid and its analogs but containing all other nutrients and or Micro Assay Culture Agar. After 24-48 hours incubation at
vitamins essential for the cultivation of L. plantarum ATCC 35-37C, the cultures are kept refrigerated. Transfers are made
8014. The addition of nicotinic acid or its analogs in specified in triplicate at monthly intervals.
increasing concentrations gives a growth response that can be
The inoculum for assay is prepared by subculturing a stock
measured turbidimetrically or titrimetrically.
culture of L. plantarum ATCC 8014 into 10 mL of Lactoba-
Formula cilli Broth AOAC or Micro Inoculum Broth. After 18-24 hours
Difco Niacin Assay Medium incubation at 35-37C, the cells are centrifuged under aseptic
Approximate Formula* Per Liter conditions and the supernatant decanted. The cells are washed
Vitamin Assay Casamino Acids ................................. 12.0 g three times with 10 mL sterile 0.85% saline. After the third
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g wash, the cells are resuspended in 10 mL sterile 0.85% saline
Sodium Acetate ....................................................... 20.0 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.4 g and finally diluted 1:100 with 0.85% sterile saline. One drop
DL-Tryptophan ........................................................... 0.2 g of this latter suspension is used to inoculate each 10 mL assay
Adenine Sulfate ....................................................... 20.0 mg tube.
Guanine Hydrochloride ............................................ 20.0 mg
Uracil ........................................................................ 20.0 mg It is essential that a standard curve be constructed each time
Thiamine Hydrochloride ......................................... 200.0 g
an assay is run. Autoclave and incubation conditions can
Calcium Pantothenate ............................................ 200.0 g
Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ........................................ 400.0 g influence the standard curve reading and cannot always be
Riboflavin ............................................................... 400.0 g duplicated. The standard curve is obtained by using niacin at
p-Aminobenzoic Acid ............................................. 200.0 g levels of 0.0, 0.025, 0.05, 0.1, 0.15, 0.2 and 0.25 g niacin
Biotin ......................................................................... 0.8 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g per assay tube (10 mL). Niacin Assay Medium may be used
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g for both turbidimetric and titrimetric analyses. Turbidimetric
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.4 g readings should be made after 18-24 hours incubation at
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 20.0 mg
Ferrous Sulfate ......................................................... 20.0 mg 35-37C. Titrimetric determinations are best made following
Manganese Sulfate .................................................. 20.0 mg 72 hours incubation at 35-37C.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
The concentration of niacin required for the preparation of the
Precautions standard curve may be prepared by dissolving 0.05 g of niacin
Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media or in 1,000 mL purified water, giving a stock solution of 50 g
glassware in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely small per mL. Dilute the stock solution by adding 1 mL to 999 mL
amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give errone- purified water (50 ng/mL). Use 0.0, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4 and
ous results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from detergents 5 mL of the 50 ng/mL solution per tube. Other standard
and other chemicals must be used. Glassware must be heated concentrations may be used provided the standard falls within
to 250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic residues the limits specified by AOAC.5
that might be present. Take precautions to keep sterilization
and cooling conditions uniform throughout the assay. Expected Results
1. Prepare a standard concentration response curve by plotting
Directions for Preparation from the response readings against the amount of standard in
Dehydrated Product each tube, disk or cup.
1. Suspend 7.5 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water. 2. Determine the amount of vitamin at each level of assay
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 2-3 minutes. solution by interpolation from the standard curve.
3. Dispense 5 mL amounts into tubes, evenly dispersing the 3. Calculate the concentration of vitamin in the sample from
precipitate. the average of these volumes. Use only those values that do
4. Add standard or test samples. not vary more than 10% from the average and use the
5. Adjust tube volumes to 10 mL with purified water. results only if two-thirds of the values do not vary more
6. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes. than 10%.

399
Section III
N Niacin Assay Medium, cont.

Limitations of the Procedure References

1. Snell and Wright. 1941. J. Biol. Chem. 13:675.
1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium 2. Krehl, Strong and Elvehjem. 1943. Ind. & Eng. Chem., Ann. Ed. 15:471.
must be cultured and maintained on media recommended 3.
4.
Barton-Wright. 1944. J. Biochem. 38:314.
United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia, 25/The
for this purpose. national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
5. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC Interna-
2. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the assay tional, Gaithersburg, Md.
procedure.
3. The use of altered or deficient media may cause mutants Availability
having different nutritional requirements that will not give Difco Niacin Assay Medium
a satisfactory response. AOAC USP
Cat. No. 232210 Dehydrated 100 g*
4. For successful results to these procedures, all conditions of
*Store at 2-8C.
the assay must be followed precisely.

Nitrate Broth
Intended Use gram-negative bacilli. The end product of reduction depends
Nitrate Broth is recommended as an aid in the identification upon the bacterial species.2
of aerobic and facultative anaerobic gram-negative microor- Nitrate Broth is a basal medium containing potassium nitrate.
ganisms by means of the nitrate reduction test. The microorganism under evaluation is inoculated into the
medium and after incubation, nitrate reduction may be deter-
Summary and Explanation mined. An inverted Durham fermentation tube in the prepared
Microorganisms may be differentiated according to their me- tubed medium serves to trap nitrogen gas produced through
tabolism of certain substrates. The ability to reduce nitrate to denitrification. The medium is evaluated for nitrate reduction
nitrite is characteristic of the family Enterobacteriaceae.1 by the addition of two reagents, Nitrate A Reagent (0.8% sul-
Nonfermenters and other miscellaneous gram-negative bacilli fanilic acid in 5N acetic acid) and Nitrate B Reagent (0.6% N,
vary in their ability to reduce nitrates. Some members of this N-dimethyl-alpha-naphthylamine in 5N acetic acid), which
group are capable of denitrification, which is a reduction detect the presence of a catabolic end product, and by the
of nitrate to nitrogen gas. The production of gas from nitrate addition of Nitrate C Reagent, zinc dust, which detects the
is an important differential test for glucose-nonfermenting absence of remaining nitrate in the medium.2

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Nitrate Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Light to medium tan, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
Solution: 0.9% solution, soluble in purified water.
Solution is light to medium amber, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear.
Reaction of 0.9%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Nitrate Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 18-24 hours. Test for nitrate reduction using Nitrate A Reagent,
Nitrate B Reagent and Nitrate C Reagent following label directions.
INOCULUM NITRATE
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY REDUCTION
Acinetobacter calcoaceticus 19606 102-103 Good
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 102-103 Good + Uninoculated Acinetobacter Escherichia coli
Tube calcoaceticus ATCC 25922
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good + ATCC 19606
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 102-103 Good +

400
 Nitrate Broth, cont.

Principles of the Procedure an applicator stick) of Nitrate C Reagent. If no color develops

Reduction of nitrate is generally an anaerobic respiration in within 5-10 minutes, nitrate was reduced beyond nitrite and the
which an organism derives its oxygen from nitrate. Depending test is positive. The development of a red color indicates the pres-
upon environmental conditions, the end products of this ence of unreduced nitrate and the test is negative.
metabolic process are usually not further oxidized or assimilated
into cellular metabolism, but are excreted into the surrounding Limitations of the Procedure N
medium. Enterobacteriaceae characteristically reduce nitrate 1. Nitrate reduction is an aid to identification and is not a
to nitrite which reacts with sulfanilic acid and N, N-dimethyl- confirmatory test. Complete identification should include
alpha-naphthylamine to produce a red color (Griess reaction). determination of Gram reaction, morphology, biochemical
The formation of other end products (ammonia, nitrous and serological tests. Appropriate texts should be consulted
oxide, hydroxylamine, etc.) is also possible; therefore, the for additional information.3-5
addition of zinc dust is used to detect unreduced nitrate. The 2. Allow at least 2 minutes for the color to develop before
formation of nitrogen gas, an end product typical of certain considering the nitrate test negative.
organisms, is evidenced by displacement of the medium from 3. The nitrate test is very sensitive. An uninoculated nitrate
the Durham tube by the gas produced.2 control should be tested with reagents to determine whether
the medium is nitrate-free and that the glassware and
Formula reagents have not been contaminated with nitrous oxide.2
Difco Nitrate Broth 4. The addition of too much zinc dust may result in a false-
Approximate Formula* Per Liter negative reaction or just a fleeting color reaction.6
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Peptone ..................................................................... 4.0 g
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 1.0 g
References
1. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science
Potassium Nitrate ....................................................... 1.0 g Publishing Co., New York, N.Y.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 2. MacFaddin. 2000. Biochemical tests for the identification of medical bacteria, 3rd ed. Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
3. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
Directions for Preparation from St. Louis, Mo.
4. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteri-
Dehydrated Product ology, 9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
5. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
1. Dissolve 9 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
6. Porres and Porter. 1974. Am. J. Med. Technol. 40:257.
2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Availability
stable, typical control cultures. Difco Nitrate Broth
AOAC BAM COMPF ISO SMD USDA
Procedure Cat. No. 226810 Dehydrated 500 g
Prior to inoculation of Nitrate Broth, the organism to be tested BBL Nitrate Broth with Durham Tube
must have been previously isolated on some other suitable solid Cat. No. 221830 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10
medium. The use of a pure culture is essential to correct
Difco /BBL Nitrate A Reagent

performance of the test. Cat. No. 261197 Droppers, 0.5 mL Ctn. of 50

Using a sterile inoculating loop remove several similar isolated Difco/BBL Nitrate B Reagent
colonies from the agar medium and inoculate into a tube of Cat. No. 261198 Droppers, 0.5 mL Ctn. of 50
Nitrate Broth. Replace cap loosely and incubate at 35-37C. Difco /BBL Nitrate C Reagent

Examine the tubes after 18-24 and 42-48 hours for growth Cat. No. 261207 Droppers, 1 g Ctn. of 50

and presence of gas in the Durham tube. After 24-48 hours

add reagents as described in Expected Results.

Expected Results
If growth is apparent after 24-48 hours of incubation, examine
for presence of gas in the Durham tube. If gas is present
and the test organism is a nonfermenter, the test is positive for
denitrification (nitrate was reduced to nitrogen gas). If the
organism is a fermenter, gas may or may not be present. Add
10 drops of Nitrate A Reagent and 10 drops of Nitrate B Reagent
to the tube. Development of a red color within 2 minutes
denotes a positive test for nitrate. If there is no color develop-
ment, add a small amount (approximately 20 mg on the tip of

401
Section III
N Nocardia Differentiation Media

Nocardia Differentiation Media

Casein Agar Tyrosine Agar Xanthine Agar
Starch Agar
Intended Use Procedure
These media are used in qualitative procedures for the differ- Prepare a Gram-stained smear of the isolate and examine
entiation of Nocardia species. to confirm that the morphology is appropriate for Nocardia
species. Subculture the isolate to be identified onto a Sabouraud
Summary and Explanation Dextrose Agar slant or Mycophil Agar slant. Incubate at
Nocardiosis is a disease of man, most frequently in patients 25-30C until good growth is observed.
who are severely immunocompromised, and animals caused
To prepare plated media, place agar deeps with loosened caps
by Nocardia species.1 The disease may resemble tuberculosis
in a boiling water bath until the medium becomes liquified
when the organism is inhaled, or may produce granulomatous
(clear). Pour the molten medium into a sterile Petri dish.
abscesses when the organism is introduced into tissue at the
Allow the medium to solidify and dry before use. The agar
time of an injury.
surface should be smooth and moist, but without excessive
Biochemical tests demonstrating the hydrolysis of casein, moisture.
tyrosine, xanthine and/or starch, or growth in 0.4% gelatin
Inoculate the Casein, Tyrosine, Xanthine or Starch medium
may be used to differentiate Nocardia species and to differen-
by streaking the isolate to be tested onto the agar surface with
tiate Nocardia from Streptomyces species, which appear
a sterile inoculating loop. To prepare the 0.4% gelatin
morphologically similar to Nocardia in clinical materials and
medium, add 0.4 g of gelatin to 100 mL of purified water
in culture.1,2
warmed to 50-55C in a water bath, dispense into tubes
Agar deeps are provided in a 20 mL fill so that the media (4 mL/tube) and autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Inoculate
may be liquified and poured into Petri dishes. This provides the gelatin medium just below the surface of the medium.
a convenient source of medium with a longer shelf life than
Incubate the media at 35C.
pre-poured plated media.
Casein, Tyrosine and Xanthine Agars may need to be incu-
Principles of the Procedure bated for up to 3 weeks to allow positive hydrolytic reactions
Casein Agar consists of agar with skim milk as a source of to develop. Examine plates at regular intervals for colony
casein. Tyrosine Agar and Xanthine Agar consist of nutrient growth and hydrolytic reactions.
agar supplemented with tyrosine or xanthine. Nocardia may Incubate Starch Agar for 48-72 hours. Test for hydrolysis of
be differentiated from Streptomyces species based on patterns the starch by flooding the agar surface with Grams or Lugols
of enzymatic hydrolysis of casein, tyrosine and xanthine. Clear iodine. Observe for a purple color in the medium surrounding
zones under colony growth and in the surrounding medium colony growth (a negative reaction). The medium does not
indicate hydrolysis of the substrate present.1,2 change color if a positive reaction occurs.
Starch Agar consists of nutrient agar supplemented with Growth in 0.4% gelatin medium should be visible within
potato starch. Nocardia may be presumptively differentiated 10 days of incubation.
from Streptomyces based on the inability of Nocardia to
hydrolyze starch. The hydrolysis of starch may be detected Expected Results
following incubation by flooding the agar surface with Grams The following table shows typical hydrolytic reactions that
or Lugols iodine. The medium surrounding the growth of may be used to differentiate Nocardia and distinguish them
Nocardia becomes temporarily colored dark blue, while from Streptomyces.
the area surrounding the growth of Streptomyces remains
unstained, indicating complete or partial hydrolysis of the ORGANISM CASEIN TYROSINE XANTHINE STARCH GELATIN

starch. Nocardia asteroides

Nocardia brasiliensis + + +
A gelatin test can also be included to assist in the presumptive Nocardia caviae +
differentiation of Nocardia brasiliensis from N. asteroides. Streptomyces spp. + + + + +
N. brasiliensis grows well in the 0.4% gelatin medium, produc-
ing compact, round colonies, while N. asteroides fails to grow
or grows poorly and produces thin, flaky growth.

402
 Nocardia ID QUAD

References BBL Xanthine Agar

1. Brown, McNeil and Desmond. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual Cat. No. 297224 Prepared Pour Tubes, 20 mL Pkg. of 10*
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. Larone. 1995. Medically important fungi: a guide to identification, 3rd ed. American Society for BBL Starch Agar

Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Cat. No. 297223 Prepared Pour Tubes, 20 mL Pkg. of 10*
Difco Gelatin
Availability
BBL Casein Agar Cat. No. 214340 Dehydrated 500 g N
214320 Dehydrated 10 kg
Cat. No. 296188 Prepared Pour Tubes, 20 mL Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.
BBL Tyrosine Agar

Cat. No. 297222 Prepared Pour Tubes, 20 mL Pkg. of 10*

Nocardia ID QUAD
Intended Use Quadrant III contains Tyrosine Agar (tyrosine and nutrient
The Nocardia ID QUAD plate is a four-sectored plate agar) for testing the ability of isolates to decompose tyrosine.
containing four different media used for differentiation and Quadrant IV contains Xanthine Agar (xanthine and nutrient
identification of Nocardia species and other aerobic actino- agar) for testing the ability of isolates to decompose xanthine.
mycetes isolated from clinical specimens.
Principles of the Procedure
Summary and Explanation The four biochemical media contained in the Nocardia ID
The most frequently encountered aerobic actinomycetes, QUAD plates offer a convenient means of conducting four
members of the order Actinomycetales, include the genera tests used in the differentiation and identification of Nocardia
Nocardia, Streptomyces, Actinomadura, Nocardiopsis, species following observation of staining reactions and micro-
Rhodococcus and Dermatophilus. The testing algorithm that scopic characteristics.1,2
permits identification of most aerobic actinomycetes consists
of direct microscopic techniques and a minimum number of Decomposition of casein in Quadrant I may be detected by
biochemical reactions.1 observing clear zones in the white, opaque skim milk around
the inoculum. Growth without clearing around the inoculum
Quadrant I contains Casein Agar (skim milk and agar) for is considered to be a negative test result.
determining the ability of isolates to hydrolyze casein.
The ability of isolates to break down and utilize starch may be
Quadrant II contains Starch Agar (potato starch and nutrient detected in Quadrant II. Starch hydrolysis may be detected by
agar) for testing the ability of isolates to utilize starch.

Quadrant I: Quadrant II: Quadrant I: Quadrant II:

Casein Agar Starch Agar Casein Agar Starch Agar

Quadrant IV: Quadrant III: Quadrant IV: Quadrant III:

Xanthine Agar Tyrosine Agar Xanthine Agar Tyrosine Agar

Streptomyces griseus Nocardia asteroides

ATCC 10971 ATCC 19247
403
Section III
N Nocardia ID QUAD, cont.

colorless zones surrounding colonies after the plate is flooded Examine Quadrant I for the presence of a clear halo in the
with Grams iodine. Blue or purple zones surrounding colo- white opaque medium around the inoculum, which indicates
nies indicate a negative test. a positive reaction. N. brasiliensis decomposes casein and gives
a positive reaction. N. asteroides shows a negative reaction or
The decomposition of tyrosine can be detected in Quadrant
no clearing around the inoculum.
III. A clear halo around a colony is a positive test. Growth
without the presence of clear halos or growth with the pro- To determine starch utilization, flood Quadrant II with Grams
duction of melanin-like pigment is a negative test. or Lugols iodine and observe the plate for colorless zones
around the inoculum, which indicates a positive reaction, such
The ability of isolates to decompose xanthine may be detected
as that obtained with S. rimosus. N. asteroides and
in Quadrant IV. A clear halo around a colony is a positive
N. brasiliensis give a negative reaction with no clear zones;
test. Growth without the presence of clear halos or growth
blue or purple zones surround colonies.
with the production of a melanin-like pigment is a negative
test. The decomposition of tyrosine in Quadrant III is indicated by
clear halos around colonies. There are no clear halos around
Procedure colonies in a negative test. N. brasiliensis decomposes tyrosine,
Inoculate each sector with a pure culture of the isolate. Use a whereas N. asteroides does not.
small sterile spatula to obtain approximately 1 mm of the
The ability of isolates to decompose xanthine in Quadrant IV
colony from a pure culture. Using the spatula, cut a small groove
is shown by a clear halo around colonies, such as that
through the agar to the bottom of the plate, depositing the
obtained with S. rimosus. The absence of clear halos or the
inoculum near the bottom of the groove. Alternatively, the tip
production of a melanin-like pigment indicates a negative test.
of a sterile wooden applicator stick can be used to make a well
Both N. asteroides and N. brasiliensis give a negative reaction.
through the agar to the bottom of the plate, depositing the
inoculum at the bottom of the well. References
1. Land. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol.1. American Society
Incubate the plates at 30C in an inverted position (agar side for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
up) under aerobic conditions and observe every 3-4 days for 2. Koneman, Allen, Janda, Schrechenberger and Winn. 1997. Color atlas and textbook of diagnostic
microbiology, 5th ed. Lippencott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, Pa.
14-21 days.1
Availability
Expected Results BBL Nocardia ID QUAD
Examine plates for growth periodically for 14-21 days of BS10 CMPH MCM7
incubation. Cat. No. 298309 Prepared Plates (QUAD) Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

Nutrient Agar
Intended Use User Quality Control
Nutrient Agar is used for the cultivation of bacteria and for
the enumeration of organisms in water, sewage, feces and other Identity Specifications
materials. Difco Nutrient Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Summary and Explanation Solution: 2.3% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light to medium
Early in the 20th century, the American Public Health Asso- amber, clear to slightly opalescent.
ciation published the formula for a general purpose medium Prepared Appearance: Light amber, very slightly to slightly
for the growth of a wide variety of nonfastidious microorganisms.1 opalescent.
This was in recognition of the need for a standardized medium Reaction of 2.3%
for the use in the examination of water and wastewater, dairy Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2
products and various foods. This relatively simple formula-
Cultural Response
tion has stood the test of time, and with the name of Nutrient
Difco Nutrient Agar
Agar, is still specified in current compendia of methods for Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
the microbiological examination of a broad spectrum of 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
materials.2-5 Additionally, it is used in the laboratory for the ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
cultivation and maintenance of nonfastidious species. Enterococcus faecalis 19433 102-103 Good
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 102-103 Good

404
 Nutrient Agar 1.5%

Principles of the Procedure Tubed slants are used primarily for the cultivation and main-
Nutrient Agar consists of peptone, beef extract and agar. This tenance of pure cultures. They should be inoculated with an
relatively simple formulation provides the nutrients necessary inoculating loop and incubated under the same conditions as
for the replication of a large number of microorganisms that the plated medium.
are not excessively fastidious. The beef extract contains water-
soluble substances including carbohydrates, vitamins, organic Expected Results N
nitrogen compounds and salts. Peptones are the principle Examine plates for growth.
sources of organic nitrogen, particularly amino acids and long- Growth from tubes inoculated with pure cultures may be used
chained peptides. Agar is the solidifying agent. for biochemical and/or serological testing.

Formula References
Difco Nutrient Agar 1. American Public Health Association. 1917. Standard methods of water analysis, 3rd ed. American
Public Health Association, New York, N.Y.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 2. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g International, Gaithersburg, Md.
Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g 3. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g 4. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. 1. AOAC
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. International, Gaithersburg, Md.
5. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product Availability
1. Suspend 23 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix Difco Nutrient Agar
thoroughly. AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF ISO SMWW USDA
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Cat. No. 212000 Dehydrated 100 g
213000 Dehydrated 500 g
completely dissolve the powder. 211665 Dehydrated 2 kg
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
BBL Nutrient Agar
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF ISO SMWW USDA
stable, typical control cultures. United States and Canada
Cat. No. 297801 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
Procedure 220968 Prepared Pour Tubes Pkg. of 10
220971 Prepared Slants Ctn. of 100
Liquefy the agar if prepared tubes are used, cool to 45-50C
Europe
and pour into Petri dishes. Allow to solidify for at least 30 Cat. No. 256035 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
minutes. Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies Mexico
from specimens. Incubate plates at 35 2C for 18-24 hours Cat. No. 257500 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
and 42-48 hours, if necessary. *Store at 2-8C.

Nutrient Agar 1.5%

Intended Use will not rupture when blood is added as supplement.1 Agar is
Nutrient Agar 1.5% is used for cultivating a variety of micro- the solidifying agent.
organisms and with the addition of blood or other enrichment
can be used for cultivating fastidious microorganisms. Formula
Difco Nutrient Agar 1.5%
Summary and Explanation Approximate Formula* Per Liter
1 Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Nutrient Agar 1.5% is a modification of Nutrient Agar. This Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g
medium is a slightly alkaline general-purpose medium. Since Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 8.0 g
the medium contains 0.8% sodium chloride, it can be used as a Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
base for enrichment with blood, ascitic fluid or other supple-
ments for cultivating fastidious microorganisms. Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product
Principles of the Procedure
1. Suspend 31 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Beef extract and peptone provide the nitrogen, vitamins, amino
thoroughly.
acids and carbon sources in Nutrient Agar 1.5%. Sodium
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
chloride maintains the osmotic balance so that red blood cells
completely dissolve the powder.

405
Section III
N Nutrient Agar 1.5%, cont.

Escherichia coli Staphylococcus aureus

User Quality Control ATCC 25922 ATCC 25923

Identity Specifications
Difco Nutrient Agar 1.5%
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige to light tan, free-flowing, homo-
geneous.
Solution: 3.1% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light to medium
amber, very slightly to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, very slightly to
slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 3.1%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Nutrient Agar 1.5%
Prepare the medium per label directions without (plain) and with 5% sheep
blood (SB). Inoculate and incubate the plates at 35 2C for 40-48 hours
under appropriate atmospheric conditions.
INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU PLAIN WITH SB HEMOLYSIS
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good Good Beta
Neisseria
meningitidis 13090 102-103 Good Good Gamma Streptococcus Streptococcus
pneumoniae pyogenes
Staphylococcus ATCC 6305 ATCC 19615
aureus 25923 102-103 Good Good Beta
Streptococcus
pneumoniae 6305 102-103 Good Good Alpha
Streptococcus
pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good Good Beta

3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Expected Results

4. To prepare an enriched medium, cool the autoclaved Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
base to 45-50C and add the desired enrichment. Mix
thoroughly. Reference
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 1. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
stable, typical control cultures.
Availability
Procedure Difco Nutrient Agar 1.5%
For a complete discussion of the isolation and identification of COMPF
aerobic and anaerobic microorganisms, refer to appropriate Cat. No. 269100 Dehydrated 500 g
references.

Nutrient Agar with MUG

Intended Use transferring the membrane from a total-coliform or fecal-
Nutrient Agar with MUG is used for detecting and enumerat- coliform positive sample to a Nutrient Agar substrate contain-
ing Escherichia coli in water. ing 4-methylumbelliferyl--D-glucuronide (MUG).1
Mates and Shaffer3 used the membrane filter-Endo Agar
Summary and Explanation method, followed by incubation on Nutrient Agar with MUG,
Escherichia coli is a member of the fecal coliform group to detect and enumerate E. coli within 4 hours of membrane
of bacteria. The presence of E. coli is indicative of fecal transfer. E. coli was recovered at a rate of 98% with no
contamination.1 Feng and Hartman2 developed a rapid assay false-positive results.
for E. coli by incorporating 4-methylumbelliferyl--D-
glucuronide (MUG) at a final concentration of 100 g/mL into Nutrient Agar with MUG is prepared according to the
Lauryl Tryptose Broth. Nutrient Agar is similarly modified with formula specified by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency4
the addition of MUG. Rapid quantitation and verification and published in Standard Methods for the Examination of
may be achieved with the membrane filtration procedure by Water and Wastewater.1

406
 Nutrient Agar with MUG, cont.

Uninoculated Escherichia coli

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 25922

Identity Specifications
Difco Nutrient Agar with MUG
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 2.31% solution, soluble in purified N
water upon boiling. Solution is light
amber, clear to very slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 2.31%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Nutrient Agar with MUG
Prepare the medium per label directions. After incubation on m Endo
Agar LES using the membrane filter technique, aseptically transfer the
membrane to Nutrient Agar with MUG. Incubate 4-24 hours at 35 2C.
Examine for fluorescence under long-wave (approximately 366 nm) UV
light.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU FLUORESCENCE
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 30-300
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 +

Principles of the Procedure Expected Results

Beef extract and peptone are sources of nitrogen, vitamins, Observe for fluorescence following incubation. Positive MUG
carbon and amino acids. Agar is the solidifying agent. reactions exhibit a bluish fluorescence around the periphery of
The substrate, MUG (4-methylumbelliferyl--D-glucuronide), the colony under long-wave (approximately 366 nm) UV light.
produces a blue fluorescence when hydrolyzed by the enzyme
Typical strains of E. coli (red with a green metallic sheen on
-glucuronidase, which is produced by most E. coli.
m Endo Agar LES) exhibit blue fluorescence on Nutrient Agar
with MUG. Non-E. coli coliforms may produce a metallic sheen
Formula
but do not fluoresce.
Difco Nutrient Agar with MUG
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g Limitations of the Procedure
Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g 1. Glucuronidase-negative strains of E. coli have been encoun-
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g tered.5-7 Similarly, MUG-negative strains of E. coli have been
MUG (4-Methylumbelliferyl--D-glucuronide) ............ 0.1 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
reported in this assay procedure but at a very low frequency.3
2. Strains of Salmonella and Shigella species that produce
Directions for Preparation from glucuronidase may infrequently be encountered.8 These
Dehydrated Product strains must be distinguished from E. coli on the basis of
1. Suspend 23.1 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix other parameters; i.e., gas production, lactose fermenta-
thoroughly. tion or growth at 44.5C.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder. References
1. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
2. Feng and Hartman. 1982. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 43:1320.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 3. Mates and Shaffer. 1989. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 67:343.
stable, typical control cultures. 4. Federal Register. 1991. Fed. Regist. 56:636.
5. Chang, Brill and Lum. 1989. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 55:335.
6. Hansen and Yourassowsky. 1984. J. Clin. Microbiol. 20:1177.
7. Kilian and Bulow. 1976. Acta Pathol. Microbiol. Scand. Sect. B 84:245.
Procedure 8. Damare, Campbell and Johnston. 1985. J. Food Sc. 50:1736.
Follow the methods and procedures for water testing using
m Endo Agar LES in standard methods.1 After incubation on Availability
m Endo Agar LES, aseptically transfer the membrane to Nutrient Difco Nutrient Agar with MUG
Agar with MUG. Incubate 18-24 hours at 35 2C. Expose the EPA SMWW
Cat. No. 223100 Dehydrated 100 g
filter surface to long-wave UV light. 223200 Dehydrated 500 g

407
Section III
N Nutrient Broth

Nutrient Broth
Intended Use Formula
Nutrient Broth is used for the cultivation of many species of Difco Nutrient Broth
nonfastidious microorganisms. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Summary and Explanation *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Nutrient Broth has the formula originally designed for use
in the Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Waste- Directions for Preparation from
water. It is not a recommended bacteriological medium in Dehydrated Product
later editions of this publication. It is one of several nonselec- 1. Dissolve 8 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
tive media useful in routine cultivation of microorganisms.1-3 2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Principles of the Procedure stable, typical control cultures.
This relatively simple formulation supports the growth of
nonfastidious microorganisms due to its content of peptone Procedure
and beef extract. Inoculate tubes of the broth medium with the test samples.
Incubate tubes for 18-24 hours at 35 2C in an aerobic
User Quality Control atmosphere.

Identity Specifications Expected Results

Difco Nutrient Broth After incubation, growth is evidenced by the appearance of
Dehydrated Appearance: Medium tan, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
turbidity in the broth. Aliquots of the broth can be used for
Solution: 0.8% solution, soluble in purified
subculturing to solid media for purification and identification
water. Solution is light to medium purposes.
amber, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear. References
1. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
Reaction of 0.8% Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2 2. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
3. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
Cultural Response foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Difco Nutrient Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Availability
35 2C for 18-24 hours. Difco Nutrient Broth
ORGANISM ATCC
INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF SMD
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good Cat. No. 233000 Dehydrated 100 g
234000 Dehydrated 500 g
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good
231000 Dehydrated 2 kg
232000 Dehydrated 10 kg
BBL Nutrient Broth
BAM CCAM COMPF SMD
Cat. No. 221669 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10

Nutrient Gelatin
Intended Use bacteria. The use of Nutrient Gelatin for determining gelatin
Nutrient Gelatin is used for the detection of gelatin liquefac- liquefaction patterns is considered to be the standard method
tion by microbial species. for taxonomic studies, since the rate of liquefaction is impor-
tant in the characterization of groups within the Enterobacte-
Summary and Explanation riaceae family as well as other groups of microorganisms.2,3
Nutrient Gelatin is made in accordance with the formula Edwards and Ewing consider gelatin liquefaction to be an
formerly used in the examination of water, sewage, and other essential test for differentiation of enteric bacilli.4
materials of sanitary importance.1 Gelatin liquefaction is one Nutrient Gelatin is used chiefly for identification of pure
of the characteristics used in the classification of members cultures of bacteria that are not particularly fastidious in
of the Enterobacteriaceae and nonfermenting gram-negative regard to nutritional requirements.
408
 Nutrient Gelatin, cont.

Principles of the Procedure ing needle directly down the center of the medium to a depth
The peptone and beef extract supply sufficient nutrients for of approximately one-half an inch from the bottom of the tube.
the growth of nonfastidious bacterial species. The gelatin is Incubate tubes, including an uninoculated control, at 35 2C
the substrate for the determination of the ability of an organ- for 24-48 hours and up to 14 days.
ism to produce gelatinases, which are proteolytic-like enzymes
active in the liquefaction of gelatin. Expected Results N
At various intervals during the incubation process, examine
Formula the tubes for growth (turbidity) and liquefaction. Use
Difco Nutrient Gelatin uninoculated control tubes for comparison. At each interval,
Approximate Formula* Per Liter tighten caps and transfer the tubes to a refrigerator or ice bath
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g for a sufficient time period to determine whether liquefaction
Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Gelatin ................................................................... 120.0 g has or has not occurred. It is important that the tubes not be
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. shaken during the transfer from incubator to refrigerator. When
reading results, invert the chilled tubes to test for solidifica-
Directions for Preparation from tion or liquefaction.3
Dehydrated Product
Consult appropriate texts for results with specific organisms.3-6
1. Suspend 128 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
2. Warm to 50C to completely dissolve the powder.
Limitations of the Procedure
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
1. This medium is not recommended for determination
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
of gelatin liquefaction by fastidious species and obligate
stable, typical control cultures.
anaerobes.
2. Gelatin is liquid at temperatures above 20C. If tubes are
Procedure
incubated at 35C, they must be refrigerated in order to
Using a heavy inoculum (growth from an 18-24 hour pure
read for liquefaction. Include an uninoculated tube in the
culture), stab the tubes of Nutrient Gelatin with an inoculat-
test procedure for comparison.
3. Growth and liquefaction frequently occur only at the
User Quality Control surface of the tube. To prevent a false-negative interpreta-
Identity Specifications tion, handle tubes carefully when warm so that liquified
Difco Nutrient Gelatin gelatin remains at the surface of the tube.3
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, fine granular, free-flowing.
Solution: 12.8% solution, soluble in purified References
water upon warming in a 50-55C 1. American Public Health Association. 1960. Standard methods for the examination of water and
sewage, 9th ed. American Public Health Association, New York, N.Y.
water bath. Solution is light to 2. MacFaddin. 2000. Biochemical tests for identification of medical bacteria, 3rd ed. Lippincott
medium amber, clear to slightly opal- Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
escent, may have a slight precipitate. 3. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, clear to slightly opal- 4. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science
Publishing Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
escent, may have a slight precipitate. 5. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteri-
Reaction of 12.8% ology, 9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
6. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2 American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Cultural Response Availability

Difco Nutrient Gelatin
Difco Nutrient Gelatin
Prepare the medium per label directions. Stab inoculate using a heavy
USDA
inoculum of fresh cultures and incubate at 35 2C for 1-7 days.
Cat. No. 211100 Dehydrated 500 g
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY GELATINASE
BBL Nutrient Gelatin
Escherichia coli 25922 Good
USDA
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 Good + Cat. No. 220974 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (Deeps) Pkg. of 10

409
Section III
OP OF Basal Medium

OF Basal Medium OF Medium with Carbohydrates

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
OF (Oxidation Fermentation) media are used for the determina- The medium contains a high concentration of added carbo-
tion of oxidative and fermentative metabolism of carbohydrates hydrates relative to the peptone concentration to avoid
by gram-negative rods on the basis of acid reaction in either the utilization of peptone by an aerobic organism and the
the open or closed system. resultant production of an alkaline reaction which would
neutralize slight acidity produced by an oxidative organism.2
Summary and Explanation The dipotassium phosphate adds buffering capacity to the
OF Medium was developed by Hugh and Leifson who described medium. The agar permits the determination of motility and
the taxonomic significance of fermentative versus oxidative aids in the even distribution of any acid produced at the
metabolism of carbohydrates by gram-negative bacteria.1 They surface of the medium.3
showed that when an organism is inoculated into two tubes of
Dextrose is the most important carbohydrate for use in OF
OF Basal Medium containing a carbohydrate and the medium
Basal Medium; however, certain organisms may metabolize
in one of the tubes is covered with melted petrolatum prior
other carbohydrates even if they are unable to utilize dextrose.
to incubation, the patterns of metabolism are of differential
Prepared tubed media containing arabinose, dextrose, dulcitol,
significance. Oxidative organisms only produce an acid reac-
fructose, galactose, lactose, maltose, mannose, raffinose, rham-
tion in the open tube with little or no growth and no acid
nose, salicin, sorbitol, sucrose and xylose are provided.
formation in the covered tube. Fermentative organisms will
produce an acid reaction in both types of tubes. Formula
Changes in the covered agar are considered to be due to true Difco OF Basal Medium
fermentation, while changes in the open tubes are due to Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 2.0 g
oxidative utilization of the carbohydrate present. If the Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
carbohydrate is not utilized by either method, there is no acid Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 0.3 g
production in either tube. Bromthymol Blue ....................................................... 0.08 g
Agar ........................................................................... 2.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco OF Basal Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige with green tinge, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
Solution: 0.94% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is green, clear to
very slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Green, clear to very slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 0.94%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco OF Basal Medium
Prepare the medium per label directions without (plain) and with 1% dextrose.
Inoculate tubes in duplicate with fresh cultures using an inoculating needle
and add an overlay of mineral oil to one set of tubes. Incubate at 35
2C for 18-48 hours.
PLAIN PLAIN WITH DEXTROSE WITH DEXTROSE
ORGANISM ATCC OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED
Uninoculated Acinetobacter Escherichia Pseudomonas
Acinetobacter Tube calcoaceticus coli aeruginosa
ATCC 19606 ATCC 25922 ATCC 27853
calcoaceticus 19606 K K A K
Enterobacter Tubes above are closed, with Dextrose
aerogenes 13048 K K A, G A, G
Escherichia coli 25922 K K A, G A, G
Pseudomonas
aeruginosa 27853 K K A K
Shigella flexneri 12022 K K A A
K = alkaline reaction, green medium
A = acid reaction, yellow medium
G = gas production

410
 OGYE Agar Base

Directions for Preparation from Limitations of the Procedure

Dehydrated Product 1. The acid reaction produced by oxidative organisms is
1. Suspend 9.4 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix apparent at the surface and gradually spreads throughout
thoroughly. the medium. If the oxidation is weak or slow, however, an
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to initial alkaline reaction at the surface of the open tube may
completely dissolve the powder. perist for several days and eventually convert to an acid
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Add 1% carbohydrate reaction.
before or after autoclaving depending on heat lability. 2. If an organism is unable to grow on OF Basal Medium,
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Cowan5 recommends adding either 2% serum or 0.1%
stable, typical control cultures. yeast extract to each carbohydrate tube.
O
Procedure References
1. Hugh and Leifson. 1953. J. Bacteriol. 66:24.
P
Inoculate a pair of OF tubes of each carbohydrate used with 2. MacFaddin. 2000. Biochemical tests for identification of medical bacteria, 3rd ed. Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
each organism being tested. The tubes should be stabbed to 3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
approximately 1/4 inch from the bottom using an inoculating vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
4. Shigei. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American
needle and a light inoculum. Overlay one tube of each Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. Cowan. 1974. Cowan and Steeles manual for the identification of medical bacteria, 2nd ed.
pair with sterile mineral oil. Incubate tubes at 35 2C in an Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, Mass.
aerobic atmosphere for 48 hours. Do not discard as negative
until after 4 days of incubation. Availability
Difco OF Basal Medium
Expected Results BAM USDA
Cat. No. 268820 Dehydrated 500 g
Record results as acid (A) or alkaline/no change (). Also record
whether or not the organism is motile as evidenced by the BBL OF Basal Medium
appearance of growth away from the line of inoculation. Cat. No. 221326 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*

Typical reaction patterns are as follows.2-4 BBL OF Basal Medium with Carbohydrates

Cat. No. 297783 Prepared Tubes with Arabinose Pkg. of 10*

Enteric OF Carbohydrate Utilization Patterns 221328 Prepared Tubes with Dextrose Pkg. of 10*
TUBE WITH 221329 Prepared Tubes with Dextrose Ctn. of 100*
REACTION REACTION OPEN TUBE COVERED TUBE 297784 Prepared Tubes with Dulcitol Pkg. of 10*
Oxidation (O) Open Yellow (A) Green () 297366 Prepared Tubes with Fructose (Levulose) Pkg. of 10*
297785 Prepared Tubes with Galactose Pkg. of 10*
Fermentation (F) 221330 Prepared Tubes with Lactose Pkg. of 10*
Anaerogenic Covered Yellow (A) Yellow (A) 221332 Prepared Tubes with Maltose Pkg. of 10*
Aerogenic Covered Yellow (AG) Yellow (AG) 221334 Prepared Tubes with Mannitol Pkg. of 10*
Neither Oxidation 297786 Prepared Tubes with Mannose Pkg. of 10*
nor Fermentation () Neither* Blue or Green () Green () 296374 Prepared Tubes with Raffinose Pkg. of 10*
297368 Prepared Tubes with Rhamnose Pkg. of 10*
Both Oxidation and 297365 Prepared Tubes with Salicin Pkg. of 10*
Fermentation (O/F) Both Yellow (A or AG) Yellow (A or AG) 297367 Prepared Tubes with Sorbitol Pkg. of 10*
A = acid production 221336 Prepared Tubes with Sucrose Pkg. of 10*
G = gas production 221338 Prepared Tubes with Xylose Pkg. of 10*
= no change or alkaline
* = Uninoculated carbohydrate control reading; no change in color. Pasco Mineral Oil
Cat. No. 266631 Bottle 60 mL
*Store at 2-8C.

OFPBL Agar
(See PC Agar)

OGYE Agar Base

Antimicrobic Vial Oxytetracycline
Intended Use Summary and Explanation
OGYE Agar Base is for use with Antimicrobic Vial Oxytetra- Acidified agar may be used for enumerating yeasts and molds
cycline in isolating and enumerating yeasts and molds in foods. in foods and dairy products. However, in some cases,
antimicrobics better suppress bacterial growth and improve
recovery of yeasts and molds.1,2
411
Section III
OP OGYE Agar Base, cont.

Mossel et al.3,4 described Oxytetracycline-Glucose Yeast

Extract (OGYE or OGY) Agar for selectively isolating and User Quality Control
enumerating yeasts and molds in foods. Mossel et al. demon- Identity Specifications
strated improved recovery compared to acidified agar media. Difco OGYE Agar Base
OGYE Agar is specified as a standard methods medium for Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
use with dairy products.1 Solution: 3.7% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is medium
Principles of the Procedure amber, very slightly opalescent.
OGYE Agar Base contains yeast extract to supply B-complex Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, slightly opalescent.
vitamins which stimulate bacterial growth. Dextrose is the Reaction of 3.7%
carbon energy source. Agar is the solidifying agent. Antimi- Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
crobic Vial Oxytetracycline inhibits the growth of bacteria. Difco Antimicrobic Vial Oxytetracycline

Lyophilized Appearance: Yellow cake or powder

Formulae
Difco OGYE Agar Base Cultural Response
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Difco OGYE Agar Base
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g Prepare the medium per label directions (with the addition of Antimi-
Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g crobic Vial Oxytetracycline). Inoculate using the pour plate technique
Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g and incubate at 22 3C for 48-72 hours (up to 5 days if necessary).
Difco Antimicrobic Vial Oxytetracycline ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Formula Per 10 mL Vial
Oxytetracycline ....................................................... 100 mg Aspergillus niger 16404 102-103 Good
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Inhibition
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 102-103 Good
Directions for Preparation from Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9080 102-103 Good
Dehydrated Product
Difco OGYE Agar Base Expected Results
1. Suspend 37 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
References
completely dissolve the powder. 1. Frank, Christen and Bullerman. 1993. In Marshall (ed.), Standard methods for the microbiological
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
2. Beuchat and Cousin. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiologi-
4. Aseptically add 10 mL of rehydrated Antimicrobic Vial cal examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. Mossel, Visser and Mengerink. 1962. Lab. Pract. 11:109.
Oxytetracycline to the medium at 50C. Mix well. 4. Mossel, Kleynen-Semmeling, Vincentie, Beerens and Catsaras. 1970. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 33:454.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures. Availability
Difco OGYE Agar Base
Difco Antimicrobic Vial Oxytetracycline COMPF ISO SMD
1. Aseptically add 10 mL sterile purified water to the vial. Cat. No. 218111 Dehydrated 500 g
2. Shake to dissolve the contents. Difco Antimicrobic Vial Oxytetracycline

COMPF ISO SMD

Procedure Cat. No. 232671 Vial 10 mL*
See appropriate references for specific procedures. *Store at 2-8C.

Oatmeal Agar
Intended Use spores are called macroconidia, macroaleuriospores or
Oatmeal Agar is used for cultivating fungi, particularly for macrospores and are produced by aerial sporulation.2
macrospore formation.
The detection of fungi is a great concern in the pharmaceutical,
food and cosmetic industry.
Summary and Explanation
Fungi are extremely successful organisms, as evidenced by their
Principles of the Procedure
ubiquity in nature. Of the estimated 250,000 species, fewer
Oatmeal is a source of nitrogen, carbon, protein and nutrients.
than 150 are known primary pathogens of humans.1
Agar is the solidifying agent.
Identification and classification of fungi is primarily based on
the morphologic differences in their reproductive structures.2
Fungi reproduce by producing spores.2 Large, multi-celled
412
 Orange Serum Agar

Formula Directions for Preparation from

Difco Oatmeal Agar Dehydrated Product
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
1. Suspend 72.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Oatmeal ................................................................... 60.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 12.5 g thoroughly.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder.
User Quality Control 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Identity Specifications stable, typical control cultures.
Difco Oatmeal Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, nonhomogeneous, may be Procedure O
Solution:
slightly lumpy.
7.25% solution, soluble in purified
Consult appropriate references for specific procedures on the P
water upon boiling with frequent isolation and cultivation of fungi.
agitation. Solution is off-white, opaque
with nonhomogeneous particles. Expected Results
Prepared Appearance: Off-white, opaque appearance with Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
nonhomogeneous particles.
Reaction of 7.25%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.0 0.2
References
1. Dixon, Rhodes and Fromtling. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). Manual
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Cultural Response 2. Koneman, Allen, Janda, Schreckenberger and Winn. 1997. Color atlas and textbook of diagnostic
microbiology, 5th ed. Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, Pa.
Difco Oatmeal Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Availability
30 2C for 18-72 hours.
Difco Oatmeal Agar
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY Cat. No. 255210 Dehydrated 500 g
Aspergillus niger 16404 102-103 Good
Candida albicans 10231 102-103 Good
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 102-103 Good

Orange Serum Agar

Orange Serum Broth Concentrate 10
Intended Use Orange Serum Agar is included in recommended methods for
Orange Serum Agar is used for cultivating aciduric microor- examining fruit beverages.1 Orange Serum Broth Concentrate
ganisms, particularly those associated with spoilage of citrus 10 is used for small samples to initiate growth of saprophytic
products. and pathogenic fungi,5 as well as detecting and enumerating
butyric acid anaerobes.1
Orange Serum Broth Concentrate 10 when diluted 1:10 is
used for cultivating and enumerating microorganisms associated Principles of the Procedure
with spoilage of citrus products. Orange Serum Agar and Orange Serum Broth Concentrate
10 contain peptone as a source of carbon and nitrogen
Summary and Explanation
for general growth requirements. Orange serum provides the
The low pH of fruit juices makes citrus fruit products susceptible acid environment favorable to recovering acid-tolerant micro-
to spoilage by yeasts, molds and the bacteria Lactobacillus and organisms. Yeast extract supplies B-complex vitamins which
Leuconostoc.1 In the 1950s, Hays investigated spoilage in frozen stimulate growth. Dextrose is the carbohydrate. Agar is the
concentrated orange juice. He found that an agar medium solidifying agent in Orange Serum Agar.
containing orange serum (juice) was superior to Lindegren
Agar in isolating the microorganisms responsible for spoilage Formulae
causing a buttermilk off-odor.2 In a later comparative study,
BBL Orange Serum Agar
Murdock, Folinazzo and Troy found Orange Serum Agar,
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
pH 5.4 to be a suitable medium for growing Leuconostoc, Orange Serum .......................................................... 10.0 g
Lactobacillus and yeasts.3 Stevens described preparation of Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
dehydrated agar media containing orange serum.4 The BBL Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
formula for Orange Serum Agar differs only in a slightly Dextrose ..................................................................... 4.0 g
increased orange serum content and in the incorporation of Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.5 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.5 g
less agar.

413
Section III
OP Orange Serum Agar, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Orange Serum Broth Concentrate 10 BBL Orange Serum Agar
Concentrate Appearance: Dark amber, clear solution. Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
ous material, may contain dark tan
Reaction of Solution at 25C: pH 5.6 0.2
particles.

Cultural Response Solution: 4.5% solution, soluble in purified wa-

ter upon boiling. Solution is light to
Difco Orange Serum Broth Concentrate 10

medium, yellow to tan; clear to slightly
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate tubes and incubate hazy.
for 18-48 hours 35 2C for Lactobacillus fermentum and 30 2C
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan; clear
for the remaining organisms.
to slightly hazy.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT Reaction of 4.5%
Aspergillus niger 16404 30-300 Growth Solution at 25C: pH 5.5 0.2
Lactobacillus fermentum 9338 30-300 Growth
Leuconostoc mesenteroides 23386 30-300 Growth Cultural Response
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 30-300 Growth BBL Orange Serum Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate streak plates with
fresh cultures and incubate for 66-72 hours at 30-32C; for Penicillium
roquefortii, incubate at 23-27C. Inoculate pour plates with Lactobacillus
plantarum and incubate for 66-72 hours at 30-32C.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Lactobacillus gasseri 4962 Undiluted Good
Leuconostoc mesenteroides 12291 Undiluted Good
Penicillium roquefortii 10110 Undiluted Good
Lactobacillus plantarum 8014 30-300 Good

Difco Orange Serum Broth Concentrate 10 Procedure

Approximate Formula*
BBL Orange Serum Agar
Orange Serum ........................................................ 100.0 mL
Yeast Extract ............................................................ 30.0 g 1. For the plate count method, prepare serial 10-fold dilu-
Pancreatic Digest of Casein .................................... 100.0 g tions of the test material.
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g
2. Add 1 mL of test sample to a sterile Petri dish.
Dipotassium Phosphate ............................................ 25.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 3. Add 18-20 mL of molten agar (cooled to 45-50C) and
swirl plate gently to mix well.
Directions for Preparation from 4. Allow to solidify before incubating at 30C for 48 hours.
Dehydrated Product Plates can be held up to 5 days.
BBL Orange Serum Agar
Difco Orange Serum Broth Concentrate 10
1. Suspend 45 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix Orange Serum Broth Concentrate 10 diluted to single-strength
thoroughly. is used for small samples to initiate growth.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder. Expected Results
3. Dispense in quantities under 50 mL and autoclave at 121C BBL Orange Serum Agar
for 10 minutes. For larger quantities, increase the auto- Record colony morphology for each type of growth.
clave time. Avoid overheating with consequent darkening
and poor solidification. Difco Orange Serum Broth Concentrate 10
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Turbidity indicates growth.
stable, typical control cultures.
Limitations of the Procedure
Difco Orange Serum Broth Concentrate 10 1. Orange Serum Agar is not a differential medium. Perform
1. To prepare the single-strength medium, aseptically add microscopic examination and biochemical tests to identify
100 mL of Orange Serum Broth Concentrate 10 to isolates to genus and species if necessary.
900 mL sterile purified water and mix thoroughly. 2. If Orange Serum Agar is divided into aliquots and allowed
2. Aseptically dispense 10 mL amounts into sterile test tubes. to solidify, remelt only once. Repeated heating may
produce a softer medium.

414
 Oxacillin Screen Agar

References Availability
1. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods, BBL Orange Serum Agar
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
2. Hays. 1951. Proc. Fla. State Hortic. Soc. 54:135. COMPF
3. Murdock, Folinazzo and Troy. 1952. Food Technol. 6:181.
4. Stevens. 1954. Food Technol. 8:88.
Cat. No. 211486 Dehydrated 500 g
5. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria, Mexico
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Cat. No. 252613 Prepared Plates (60 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 20*
Difco Orange Serum Broth Concentrate 10

COMPF
Cat. No. 251810 Ampule 6 x 100 mL*
*Store at 2-8C.

O
Oxacillin Screen Agar P
Intended Use modified PBPs, which lowers the organisms affinity for
Oxacillin Screen Agar (originally named MRSA Screen Agar) -lactam antibiotics.3
was developed for the detection of methicillin-resistant Characteristics that might help differentiate the three types of
Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA). These strains are resistant to oxacillin (methicillin) resistance can be found outlined in the
penicillinase-resistant penicillins (PRPs), such as methicillin, Manual of Clinical Microbiology, 7th ed., p. 1566.3
oxacillin and nafcillin. Since the method to detect MRSA uses
the same inoculum as the Bauer-Kirby antimicrobial disc Strains that possess the mec gene (classic resistance) are either
susceptibility test procedure, the oxacillin screen test may be homogeneous or heterogeneous in their expression of
conveniently performed on isolates at the same time as routine resistance. With homogeneous expression, virtually all cells
susceptibility testing. express resistance when tested by standard in vitro tests. With
heteroresistant expression, some cells appear susceptible and
Summary and Explanation others appear resistant. Often, only 1 in 104 to 1 in 108 cells
Resistance to penicillin in S. aureus was observed soon after in the test population express resistance. Heterogeneous
the introduction of penicillin in the late 1940s.1 By the late expression occasionally results in MICs that appear to be
1960s, methicillin/oxacillin-resistant strains of S. aureus borderline; i.e., oxacillin MICs of 4 to 8 g/mL. Isolates that
began to be isolated in the United States.2 have classic resistance are usually resistant to other agents such
as erythromycin, clindamycin, chloramphenicol, tetracycline,
Three different resistance mechanisms contribute to oxacillin trimethoprim-sulfamethoxazole, a quinolone, or an
resistance in S. aureus. These are (1) the classic type, which aminoglycoside.3
involves production of a supplemental penicillin-binding
protein (PBP) that is encoded by a chromosomal mecA gene, Resistance mediated by hyper -lactamase production or the
(2) hyper -lactamase production, and (3) production of presence of modified PBPs also results in borderline resistance.
Isolates that are resistant by either hyper -lactamase production
Staphylococcus aureus
ATCC 33592 or the modified PBP mechanism usually do not have multiple-
drug resistance.3 Additionally, these isolates are unlikely to grow
on the agar screen plate.3-5
The methicillin-resistant population grows more slowly,
prefers a lower temperature of incubation and a high salt
concentration.

Principles of the Procedure

Mueller Hinton Agar is a medium that has been standardized
for the disc diffusion procedure for antimicrobial susceptibility
testing of aerobic bacteria.6 Sodium chloride is added to
improve the growth of the PRP-resistant sub-populations.
Oxacillin is preferred for the detection of PRP resistance since
it is more stable and results are more reliable.7,8

Procedure
1. Prepare the inoculum by suspending several well-isolated
colonies of the S. aureus test isolate from an 18- to 24-hour
plate culture into a tube of suitable broth medium, such as

415
Section III
OP Oxacillin Screen Agar, cont.

Trypticase Soy Broth and adjust the turbidity to a 0.5 2. In-house studies have shown that there is a difference in
McFarland turbidity standard, or use the BBL Prompt inoculum size between inoculating with 10 L of the test
inoculation system. suspension using a micropipette and inoculating the plate
2. Spot inoculate with 10 L of test suspension using with a swab. The likelihood of the emergence of the
micropipette. resistant sub-population is greater in a large population of
3. Alternatively, saturate a cotton swab with the test suspension bacterial cells. Detection of resistance, especially with the
and gently press out excess fluid against the inner wall heterogeneous resistant population, is improved with the
of the tube. Streak plate by drawing swab over an approxi- larger inoculum obtained by using a micropipette and
mately 1 inch (2.54 cm) area. inoculating the plate with 10 L.9
4. Include a Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA 3. Any isolate that grows on this medium should be tested
II) plate as a nonselective growth control. quantitatively by broth or agar dilution to confirm oxacillin
5. The test and control plates may be divided into several resistance and also resistance to other antimicrobial agents
wedge-shaped sectors by marking the bottom of the plate. that are characteristic of MRSA, such as chloramphenicol,
Several isolates may be tested on each plate. However, use clindamycin, erythromycin, gentamicin and tetracycline.
and incubate each plate only once. DO NOT REUSE AND 4. The use of Oxacillin Screen Agar for the detection of
REINCUBATE a BBL Oxacillin Screen Agar plate. methicillin/oxacillin resistant coagulase-negative staphylo-
6. Incubate plates at 30-35C for a full 24 hours. Do not cocci is not recommended.7
exceed 35C.
References
Expected Results 1. Chain, Florey and Jennings. 1949. In Florey, Chain, Heatley, Jennings, Sanders, Abraham and
Florey (ed.), Antibiotics, vol. II. Oxford University Press, London.
Following incubation, observe plates for growth. Any growth, 2. Barrett, McGehee and Finland. 1968. N. Engl. J. Med. 279:444.
3. Swenson, Hindler and Peterson. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
even one colony, indicates that the isolate is methicillin (oxacillin) of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
4. Leitch and Boonlayangoor. 1994. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures manual, vol.
resistant. No growth indicates that the organism is susceptible to 1 (suppl. 1). American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. Harberberger, Kallen, Driscoll and Wallace. 1998. Lab. Med. 29:302.
PRPs (methicillin, nafcillin and oxacillin). Isolates that grow on 6. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved standard: M2-A7.
Performance standards for antimicrobial disk susceptibility tests, 7th ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
Oxacillin Screen Agar should be reported as resistant to all 7. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Disk diffusion supplemental tables,
-lactam antimicrobial agents, including -lactam/ -lactamase M100-S10 (M2). NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
8. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. MIC testing supplemental tables:
inhibitor combinations and cephalosporins. M100-S10 (M7). NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
9. Data on file, BD Diagnostic Systems.

Limitations of the Procedure Availability

1. Occasionally, S. aureus isolates with borderline resistant BBL Oxacillin Screen Agar
MICs may not grow within 24 hours. It is recommended BS10 CMPH MCM7 NCCLS
that any equivocal results demonstrated on the screening Cat. No. 221952 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
plate be confirmed with a standard MIC test. *Store at 2-8C.

Oxford Medium Base

Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement
Modified Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement
Intended Use transmission is via the consumption of foodstuffs contaminated
Oxford Medium Base is used with either Oxford Antimicrobic with Listeria monocytogenes.6
Supplement1 or Modified Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement2 Implicated vehicles of transmission include turkey frankfurters,7
for isolating and differentiating Listeria monocytogenes. coleslaw, pasteurized milk, Mexican-style cheese, pat and
pickled pork tongue. The organism has been isolated from
Summary and Explanation commercial dairy and other food processing plants and is ubiqui-
First described in 1926 by Murray, Webb and Swann,3 Listeria tous in nature, being present in a wide range of unprocessed
monocytogenes is a widespread problem in public health and foods and in soil, sewage, silage and river water.8
the food industries. This organism can cause human illness
and death, particularly in immunocompromised individuals Listeria spp. grow over a pH range of 4.4-9.6 and survive
and pregnant women.4 The first reported foodborne outbreak in food products with pH levels outside these parameters.9
of listeriosis was in 1985.5 Since then, microbiological and Listeria spp. are microaerophilic, gram-positive, asporogenous,
epidemiological evidence from both sporadic and epidemic non-encapsulated, non-branching, regular, short, motile rods.
cases of listeriosis has shown that the principal route of Motility is most pronounced at 20C.

416
 Oxford Medium Base, cont.

Uninoculated Listeria monocytogenes

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 19114

Identity Specifications
Difco Oxford Medium Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 5.75% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium amber,
slightly opalescent with a blue ring at the
surface of the liquid.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, very slightly to
slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 5.75% O
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
Difco Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement
P
Appearance: Yellow cake may be broken; yellow
solution upon rehydration.
Difco Modified Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement
Appearance: White cake may be broken; colorless
solution with a pale yellow tint upon
rehydration.

Cultural Response
Difco Oxford Medium or Modified Oxford Medium
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 18-48 hours.
INOCULUM RECOVERY ON RECOVERY ON MODIFIED
ORGANISM ATCC CFU OXFORD MEDIUM OXFORD MEDIUM
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-2103 Marked to complete inhibition Marked to complete inhibition
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Marked to complete inhibition Marked to complete inhibition
Listeria monocytogenes 19114 102-103 Good at 40-48 hours, black colonies Good at 40-48 hours, black colonies

The most common contaminating bacteria found in food Selectivity is increased by adding various antimicrobial agents
sources potentially containing Listeria are streptococci, espe- to the base. Incorporating these agents into Oxford Medium
cially the enterococci, micrococci and Bacillus species, Escheri- Base will completely inhibit gram-negative organisms and most
chia coli, Pseudomonas aeruginosa and Proteus vulgaris.10 gram-positive organisms after 24 hours of incubation. The most
widely recognized antimicrobial agent combinations are
Identification of Listeria is based on successful isolation of
the Oxford Medium formulation11 and the Modified Oxford
the organism, biochemical characterization and serological
Medium formulation.2 The Oxford Medium formulation
confirmation.
contains cycloheximide, colistin sulfate, acriflavine, cefotetan
Oxford Medium Base is prepared according to the formulation and fosfomycin (available as Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement).
of Curtis et al.11 who originally described the medium and its The Modified Oxford Medium formulation contains
use in the selective isolation of Listeria from mixed cultures. moxalactam and colistin methane sulfonate or colistin sulfate
(available as Modified Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement).
Principles of the Procedure
Peptones and beef heart digest provide nitrogen, carbon, amino Modified Oxford Medium is recommended for isolating and
acids and vitamins. Agar is the solidifying agent. Sodium identifying Listeria monocytogenes from processed meat and
chloride maintains the osmotic balance. poultry products.2 Oxford Medium is recommended for isolat-
ing Listeria from enrichment broth cultures.13
Ferric ammonium citrate aids in the differentiation of Listeria
spp. Since all Listeria spp. hydrolyze esculin, the addition Formulae
of ferric ions to the medium will detect the reaction. A black- Difco Oxford Medium Base
ening of the colony and surrounding medium in cultures Approximate Formula* Per Liter
containing esculin-hydrolyzing bacteria results from the Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 8.9 g
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 4.4 g
formation of 6,7-dihydroxycoumarin which reacts with the Yeast Extract .............................................................. 4.4 g
ferric ions.12 Tryptic Digest of Beef Heart ........................................ 2.7 g
Starch ......................................................................... 0.9 g
Selectivity is provided by the presence of lithium chloride in Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 4.4 g
the formula. The high salt tolerance of Listeria is used as a Esculin ........................................................................ 1.0 g
means to markedly inhibit growth of enterococci. Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.5 g
Lithium Chloride ...................................................... 15.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.3 g
417
Section III
OP Oxford Medium Base, cont.

Difco Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement For further information when testing food samples or clinical
Formula Per 10 mL Vial specimens for Listeria, consult appropriate references.1,2,9,13,14
Acriflavine .................................................................. 5.0 mg
Cefotetan ................................................................... 2.0 mg
Colistin Sulfate ......................................................... 20.0 mg Expected Results
Cycloheximide ........................................................ 400.0 mg Select esculin-positive colonies and confirm their identity by
Fosfomycin ............................................................... 10.0 mg further biochemical testing. Use macroscopic tube and rapid
Difco Modified Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement slide tests for definitive serological identification. For addi-
Formula Per 10 mL Vial tional information, refer to appropriate references.1,2,9,13,14
Colistin Sulfate ......................................................... 10.0 mg
Moxalactam ............................................................. 20.0 mg
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Limitations of the Procedure
1. Since Listeria spp. other than L. monocytogenes can grow
Directions for Preparation from on these media, an identification of L. monocytogenes must
Dehydrated Product be confirmed by biochemical and serological testing.14
2. Use freshly prepared antimicrobial agent solutions or
1. Suspend 57.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
aliquot portions and store at -20C or below.
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 3. Poor growth and a weak esculin reaction may be seen after
completely dissolve the powder. 40 hours incubation for some enterococci.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes. Cool to 45-50C.
4. To prepare Oxford Medium: Aseptically rehydrate one vial References
1. Hitchins. 1995. FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC International, Gaithersburg,
of Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement with 5 mL of reagent Md.
2. McClain and Lee. May 24, 1989. Laboratory communication No. 57. Microbiology Division, Food
grade ethanol and 5 mL of sterile purified water. Rotate in Safety and Inspection Service, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Beltsville, Md.
an end-over-end motion to dissolve the contents completely. 3. Murray, Webb and Swann. 1926. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 29:407.
4. Monk, Clavero, Beuchat, Doyle and Brackett. 1994. J. Food Prot. 57:969.
Add 10 mL of rehydrated Oxford Antimicrobic Supple- 5. Wehr. 1987. J. Assoc. Off. Anal. Chem. 70:769.
6. Bremer and Osborne. 1995. J. Food Prot. 58:604.
ment to 1 L of molten Oxford Medium Base (45-50C). 7. Grau and Vanderlinde. 1992. J. Food Prot. 55:4.
Mix thoroughly. 8. Patel, Hwang, Beuchat, Doyle and Brackett. 1995. J. Food Prot. 58:244.
9. Ryser and Donnelly. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiologi-
To prepare Modified Oxford Medium: Aseptically cal examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
10. Kramer and Jones. 1969. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 32:381.
rehydrate one vial of Modified Oxford Antimicrobic 11. Curtis, Mitchell, King and Emma. 1989. Appl. Microbiol. 8:95.
Supplement with 10 mL of sterile purified water. Rotate in 12. Fraser and Sperber. 1988. J. Food Prot. 51:762.
13. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, vol. 1. AOAC Interna-
an end-over-end motion to dissolve the contents completely. tional, Gaithersburg, Md.
14. Bille, Rocourt and Swaminathan. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
Add 10 mL of rehydrated Modified Oxford Antimicrobic of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Supplement to 1 L of Oxford Medium Base (45-50C). Mix
thoroughly. Availability
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Difco Oxford Medium Base
stable, typical control cultures. AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF ISO SMD USDA
Cat. No. 222530 Dehydrated 500 g
Procedure 222510 Dehydrated 2 kg
The USDA method2 involves enrichment of the food sample in Difco Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement
UVM Modified Listeria Enrichment Broth (one part sample to BAM COMPF ISO SMD
nine parts broth) at 30C. After incubation, a portion of the Cat. No. 211755 Vial 6 x 10 mL*
enrichment mixture is plated onto Oxford or Modified Difco Modified Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement

Oxford Medium. AOAC CCAM COMPF USDA

1 Cat. No. 211763 Vial 6 x 10 mL*
The FDA method involves adding 25 mL of liquid or 25 g of
*Store at 2-8C.
solid material to 225 mL Listeria Enrichment Broth and incu-
bating at 30C for 2 days. After enrichment, the broth is plated
onto Oxford Medium.

M-PA-C Agar
Intended Use number (MPN) procedures result in satisfactory recovery
M-PA-C Agar is used for the selective recovery and enumera- levels of P. aeruginosa, but are not usable for the testing of
tion of Pseudomonas aeruginosa from water. large-volume water samples and lack precision. These two
deficiencies are eliminated in membrane filter (MF) techniques.
Summary and Explanation Many of the membrane filter media used for the recovery of
A variety of methods have been used for the enumeration of P. aeruginosa lacked specificity and were of limited value when
P. aeruginosa from water samples, some of which have been large heterogeneous microbial flora were present in the water
more widely accepted than others. The most-probable- samples. Levin and Cabelli devised M-PA Agar as a selective
418
 M-PA-C Agar, cont.

membrane filter medium for P. aeruginosa.1 This formulation Formula

incorporated four antimicrobics, kanamycin, nalidixic acid, BBL M-PA-C Agar
sulfapyridine and cycloheximide, which render the medium Approximate Formula* Per Liter
moderately selective. This original formulation was modified Yeast Extract .............................................................. 2.0 g
L-Lysine HCl ............................................................... 5.0 g
by raising the pH2 and altering the content or concentration of Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
ingredients.3 The resulting medium was designated M-PA-B Xylose ........................................................................ 1.25 g
Agar. Sucrose ...................................................................... 1.25 g
Lactose ....................................................................... 1.25 g
Brodsky and Ciebin further modified these media by eliminating Phenol Red ................................................................. 0.08 g
sulfapyridine and cycloheximide and produced M-PA-C Agar.4 Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.8 g
Sodum Thiosulfate ..................................................... 5.0 g
This formulation resulted in the ability to enumerate
P. aeruginosa after only 24 hours of incubation at 41.5C
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 1.5 g
Kanamycin ................................................................. 8.0 mg
O
compared to 72 hours required with M-PA-B Agar and 96 hours Nalidixic Acid ........................................................... 37.0 mg P
Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g
for a presumptive MPN test.4 M-PA-C Agar is identified as *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Modified M-PA Agar in Standard Methods for the Examination
of Water and Wastewater.5 Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product
Principles of the Procedure 1. Suspend 35 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Yeast extract, lysine and the carbohydrates provide carbon- thoroughly.
aceous and nitrogenous compounds, energy sources and 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
vitamins required for bacterial metabolism. Sodium chloride completely dissolve the powder. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE.
maintains osmotic equilibrium. The salts provide essential ions. 3. Cool to 45-50C and pour into sterile 50-mm Petri dishes.
Phenol red is a pH indicator, which becomes yellow in response Use the medium within 1 week after preparation.
to acids produced as a result of the fermentation of the 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
carbohydrates. Kanamycin inhibits protein synthesis in gram- stable, typical control cultures.
positive organisms.6 Nalidixic acid blocks replication of
susceptible gram-negative bacteria.6 Procedure
Following filtration of the water sample through a sterile
User Quality Control 47 mm, 0.45 m gridded filter, place the membrane filter on
the surface of a plate of M-PA-C Agar taking care to avoid the
Identity Specifications entrapment of bubbles between the agar and filter surface.
BBL M-PA-C Agar Incubate for 72 hours at 41.5 0.5C in an aerobic atmosphere.
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material. Consult the standard method for additional information regard-
Solution: 3.5% solution, soluble in purified water ing the M-PA-C membrane filter technique.5
upon boiling. Solution is medium to
dark, orange-red to rose red, clear to Expected Results
slightly hazy.
Colonies on membrane filters are counted using a stereoscopic
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, orange-red to rose
red, clear to slightly hazy.
microscope at 10-15 magnification. Optimal colony density
Reaction of 3.5%
is 20-80 colonies. All colonies on the filter are counted when
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.1 the density is 2 or fewer per square. The average of 10 squares
is determined when the count is 3-10 colonies per square and
Cultural Response the average of 5 squares is determined when the count is
BBL M-PA-C Agar 10-20 colonies per square. Multiply the average count per
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the mem-
brane filter technique and incubate at 41.5 0.5C for 18-24 hours.
square by 100 and divide by the sample volume to give
colonies per milliliter.5
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Partial to References
1. Levin and Cabelli. 1972. Appl. Microbiol. 24:864.
complete inhibition 2. Carson, Peterson, Favero, Doto, Collins and Levin. 1975. Appl. Microbiol. 30:935.
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 10145 30-300 Good 3. Dutka and Kwan. 1977. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 33:240.
4. Brodsky and Ciebin. 1978. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 36:26.
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 30-300 Good 5. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
6. Estevez. 1984. Lab. Med. 15:258.

Availability
BBL M-PA-C Agar
SMWW
Cat. No. 298153 Dehydrated 500 g

419
Section III
OP PALCAM Medium Base

PALCAM Medium Base

PALCAM Antimicrobic Supplement
Intended Use Antimicrobic Supplement. These agents effectively suppress
PALCAM Medium Base is used with PALCAM Antimicrobic growth of most commonly occurring non-Listeria spp. of
Supplement in isolating and cultivating Listeria, particularly bacteria present in foods. The ceftazidime concentration is
from foods and milk products. reduced from 20 mg/L to 8 mg/L for improved growth and
recovery of Listeria.
Summary and Explanation Differentiation on PALCAM Medium is based on esculin
PALCAM Medium Base and PALCAM Antimicrobic Supplement hydrolysis and mannitol fermentation. All Listeria spp.
are based on the PALCAM agar formulation of van Netten et hydrolyze esculin as evidenced by a blackening of the medium.
al.,1 who developed this selective and differential medium for use This blackening by esculin-hydrolyzing bacteria results from
in the isolation and enumeration of Listeria spp. from food the formation of 6,7 dihydroxycoumarin, which reacts with
samples. PALCAM medium is widely recommended for use in ferric ions that are present in the medium as ferric ammonium
the detection of L. monocytogenes in foods,2-5 milk and milk citrate. On occasion, organisms other than Listeria, such
products6 and environmental samples.7 as staphylococci or enterococci, may grow on this medium.
Mannitol and the pH indicator, phenol red, have been added
Principles of the Procedure to differentiate mannitol-fermenting strains of these species
Good growth of Listeria spp. is obtained by including
from Listeria based on mannitol fermentation. Mannitol
Columbia Agar Base in PALCAM Medium Base. Columbia Agar
fermentation is demonstrated by a color change in the colony
Base provides the nutrients and cofactors required for good
and/or the surrounding medium from red or gray to yellow
to excellent growth of Listeria. Selectivity of the complete medium
due to the production of acidic end products.
is achieved through the presence of lithium chloride,
polymyxin B sulfate and acriflavine HCl, present in PALCAM
Medium Base, and ceftazidime, provided by PALCAM

Uninoculated Listeria monocytogenes

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 19114

Identity Specifications
Difco PALCAM Medium Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Pink, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 6.8% solution, soluble in purified water upon
boiling. Solution is dark red, slightly opales-
cent.
Prepared Appearance: Dark red, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 6.8 %
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
Difco PALCAM Antimicrobic Supplement
Lyophilized Appearance: White, free-flowing, homogeneous
powder.
Rehydrated Appearance: Colorless solution.

Cultural Response
Difco PALCAM Medium Base
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 48 hours in a microaerophilic environment.
INOCULUM ESCULIN
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY REACTION
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-2103 Inhibition
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Inhibition
Listeria monocytogenes 19114 102-103 Good +
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-2103 Inhibition

420
 PALCAM Medium Base, cont.

Formulae 3. After the required incubation, examine for presumptive

Difco PALCAM Medium Base Listeria colonies.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 4. Confirm the identity of each presumptive Listeria isolate
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 8.9 g by biochemical and/or serological testing.
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 4.4 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 4.4 g IDF Method for Milk and Milk Products6
Tryptic Digest of Beef Heart ........................................ 2.7 g
Corn Starch ................................................................ 0.9 g 1. Enrich the sample in Modified Listeria Enrichment Broth.
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 4.4 g Incubate at 30 1C for 48 2 hours.
Mannitol .................................................................. 10.0 g 2. Subculture onto Oxford Medium (and onto PALCAM
Dextrose ..................................................................... 0.5 g
Esculin ........................................................................ 1.0 g Medium, if desired). Incubate at 37 1C for 48 2 hours.
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.5 g 3. After the required incubation, examine for presumptive O
Lithium Chloride ...................................................... 15.0 g
Phenol Red ................................................................. 0.08 g
Listeria colonies.
4. Subculture five presumptive colonies (or all of the colonies
P
Acriflavin HCl ............................................................. 5.0 mg
Polymyxin B Sulfate .................................................... 0.01 g if there are less than five) from each isolation medium onto
Agar ......................................................................... 15.3 g Tryptic Soy Agar with 0.6 % Yeast Extract.
Difco PALCAM Antimicrobic Supplement 5. Confirm the identity of each presumptive Listeria isolate
Formula Per 10 mL Vial by biochemical and/or serological testing.
Ceftazidime .............................................................. 40.0 mg
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. Health Canada Method for Foods and Environmental
Samples7
Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product 1. Enrich the sample in Listeria Enrichment Broth (LEB).
Incubate at 30C for 48 hours.
Difco PALCAM Medium Base
2. Transfer 0.1 mL of the primary enrichment broth culture
1. Suspend 68 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
into 9.9 mL of modified Fraser Broth. Incubate at 35C
thoroughly.
for 24-48 hours. (If desired, the LEB culture may also
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
be streaked onto Oxford Medium [OXA] and lithium
completely dissolve the powder.
chloride-phenylethanol-moxalactam agar [LPM], modified
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 45-50C.
Oxford medium [MOX] or PALCAM medium [PAL].
4. Aseptically add 2 mL PALCAM Antimicrobic Supplement.
Incubate LPM at 30C for 24-48 hours and OXA, MOX
Mix well.
and PAL at 35C for 24-48 hours.)
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
3. Examine modified Fraser broth for reactions. Subculture
stable, typical control cultures.
all positive cultures (black, dark brown or dark green)
Difco PALCAM Antimicrobic Supplement after 24 and 48 hours of incubation onto OXA and LPM,
1. Aseptically add 10 mL sterile purified water to the vial. MOX or PAL, streaking for isolation. Incubate LPM at
2. Shake to dissolve the contents. 30C for 24-48 hours and OXA, MOX and PAL at 35C
for 24-48 hours. If desired, all negative modified Fraser
Procedure broth cultures (straw color) may be subcultured onto OXA
A number of methods and incubation conditions may be used and LPM, MOX or PAL to facilitate recovery of esculin-
for detecting and isolating Listeria on PALCAM Medium. negative strains of L. monocytogenes.
In their original work, van Netten et al. recommended incuba- 4. Examine for presumptive Listeria colonies. Examine LPM
tion at 37C for 48 hours under microaerophilic conditions.1 under oblique lighting positioned at a 45 angle relative to
AFNOR, Canadian Health Protection Branch and IDF the surface of the plate.
methods for detecting Listeria in foods and dairy products are 5. Confirm the identity of each presumptive Listeria isolate
listed below. Consult guidelines appropriate to your location by biochemical and/or serological testing.
and sample type.
AFNOR Method for Foods2 Expected Results
1. Pre-enrich the sample in Demi-Fraser Broth. Incubate at On PALCAM Medium, colonies of Listeria appear gray-green
30C for 18-24 hours. Subculture onto Oxford Medium or with a black precipitate following inoculation and incubation
PALCAM Medium. at 35C for 24-48 hours under aerobic or microaerophilic
2. Transfer 0.1 mL of the pre-enrichment culture into 10 mL conditions. Confirmation of the presence of Listeria is made
of Fraser Broth and incubate at 37C for 48 hours. Subculture following subculture onto appropriate media and biochemical/
onto Oxford Medium or PALCAM Medium after 18-24 and serological identification.2,6 Colonies of mannitol-fermenting
42-48 hours of incubation. organisms such as staphylococci, which may grow on this
medium, appear yellow with a yellow halo.

421
Section III
OP PALCAM Medium Base, cont.

References Availability
1. Van Netten, Perales, Van de Moosalijk, Curtis and Mossel. 1989. Int. J. Food Microbiol. 8:299.
2. Lassociation franaise de normalisation (AFNOR). 1993. Food microbiology detection of Listeria
Difco PALCAM Medium Base
monocytogenes routine method, V 08-055. AFNOR, Paris, France. BAM CCAM COMPF ISO
3. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Interna-
tional, Gaithersburg, Md.
Cat. No. 263620 Dehydrated 500 g
4. Canadian Food Directorate. 2001. The compendium of analytical methods. Polyscience Publications, 263610 Dehydrated 2 kg
Laval, Quebec, Canada.
5. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods, Difco PALCAM Antimicrobic Supplement
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
6. International Dairy Federation. 1990. Milk and milk productsDetection of Listeria monocytogenes. BAM CCAM COMPF ISO
IDF Provisional International Standard no. 143. International Dairy Federation, Brussels, Belgium. Cat. No. 263710 Vial 3 10 mL*
7. Farber, Warburton and Babiuk. 1994. Isolation of Listeria monocytogenes from all food and envi-
ronmental samples. Health Protection Branch Ottawa, MFHPB-30. Polyscience Publications, Laval, Europe
Quebec, Canada. Cat. No. 254539 Prepared Plates (complete) Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.

PC Agar OFPBL Agar

Intended Use Gillian et al. developed PC Agar for improved recovery of
PC Agar and OFPBL Agar are used in the selective isolation B. cepacia.2 Crystal violet, bile salts and two antimicrobial
and detection of Burkholderia (formerly Pseudomonas) cepacia agents are used as selective agents. Phenol red facilitates
from clinical and nonclinical specimens. detection of B. cepacia by a color change in the medium. They
reported isolating B. cepacia on PC Agar from respiratory
Summary and Explanation secretions of 35 CF patients, but isolated the organism from
Burkholderia cepacia is an opportunistic pathogen generally only 21 patients on MacConkey Agar.2
associated with nosocomial infections.1 Studies indicate that Welch et al. developed a differential but less selective medium
B. cepacia may be an important pulmonary pathogen for the recovery of B. cepacia.4,5 This medium, OFPBL Agar,
for patients with cystic fibrosis (CF).1,2 The incidence of this is OF (oxidation-fermentation) basal medium supplemented
organism in the respiratory tract of CF patients is often with polymyxin B, bacitracin, lactose and agar. The indicator,
accompanied by rapid deterioration in pulmonary status and bromthymol blue, aids in the detection of B. cepacia isolates
death.3 through a color change in the medium. These investigators
Recovery of this organism on commonly used media, such as reported isolating B. cepacia on OFPBL Agar from 58 CF
blood agar or MacConkey Agar, is difficult because common patients, while only isolating this organism from 19 patients
isolates, such as Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Escherichia coli and on MacConkey Agar.4
Staphylococcus aureus, overgrow the slower-growing colonies
of B. cepacia and mask its presence.

PC Agar OFPBL Agar

Burkholderia cepacia Burkholderia cepacia
ATCC 25416 ATCC 25416

422
 PKU Test Agar

Principles of the Procedure Expected Results

These media provide a variety of enzymatic digests of Typical colonies of B. cepacia on PC Agar are grayish-white
proteinaceous substrates, inorganic salts and other nutrients with a pink-red zone in the surrounding medium.2 Typical colonies
to satisfy the nutritional requirements of these organisms. of B. cepacia on OFPBL Agar are yellow with yellow zones in
the surrounding medium.
Selective agents are incorporated to improve the recovery
of B. cepacia by inhibiting common contaminants. PC agar
Limitation of the Procedure
incorporates crystal violet to inhibit gram-positive cocci,
Organisms other than B. cepacia may also grow on PC Agar
especially enterococci and staphylococci, bile salts to inhibit
and produce alkaline end products that cause the medium to
most gram-positive cocci other than enterococci, and ticarcillin
become pink. Other organisms, e.g., B. gladioli, may also grow
and polymyxin B to inhibit gram-negative bacilli. OFPBL Agar
on OFPBL Agar and resemble B. cepacia (yellow colonies). O
incorporates polymyxin B to inhibit gram-negative flora, while
bacitracin inhibits the gram-positive organisms and Neisseria.4
Therefore, these media should not be used as the sole method P
of identification of B. cepacia.8
PC Agar contains the pH indicator phenol red to facilitate
detection of B. cepacia. Alkaline end products from the References
1. Gilligan and Whittier. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
metabolism of pyruvate raise the pH of the medium, causing clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
the color of the indicator to change from light orange to pink 2. Gilligan, Gage, Bradshaw, Schidlow and DeCicco. 1985. J. Clin. Microbiol. 22:5.
3. Gilligan and Schidlow. 1984. Clin. Microbiol. Newsl. 6:42.
or pink-red in the area of growth. In areas of heavy growth of 4. Welch, Muszynski, Pai, Marcon, Hribar, Gilligan, Matsen, Ahlin, Hilman and Chartrand. 1987.
J. Clin. Microbiol. 25:1730.
B. cepacia, the pink color intensifies. 5. Carson, Tablan, Cusick, Jarvis, Favero and Bland. 1988. J. Clin. Microbiol. 26:2096.
6. MacDonald, Gilligan, Welch, Reller and Menegus. 1994. In Consensus conference: microbiology
OFPBL Agar contains the pH indicator bromthymol blue to and infectious disease in cystic fibrosis, vol. 5:1. Cystic Fibrosis Foundation, Washington, D.C.
7. Gilligan. 1996. Clin. Microbiol. Newsl. 18:83.
facilitate detection of B. cepacia. Acid end products from the 8. Christenson, Welch, Mukwaya, Muszynski, Weaver and Brenner. 1989. J. Clin. Microbiol. 27:270.

metabolism of lactose lower the pH of the medium resulting

in a yellow color change. B. cepacia colonies will also have a Availability
yellow color. BBL PC Agar
BS10 CMPH MCM7
Cat. No. 297755 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Procedure
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from BBL OFPBL Agar

BS10 MCM7
specimens. Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar-
United States and Canada
side up) at 30-35C for a minimum of 4 days to allow Cat. No. 299970 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
sufficient time for colony development and for the color of the Europe
indicator change.6,7 Cat. No. 254481 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.

PKU Test Agar PKU Test Agar without

Thienylalanine PKU Subtilis Spore Suspension
Intended Use which estimates the level of phenylalanine in the blood, is used
PKU Test Agar is used with PKU Subtilis Spore Suspension in for this purpose.3-6 Bacillus subtilis ATCC 6633 growth
estimating phenylalanine levels in blood. is inhibited in minimal culture medium containing
PKU Test Agar without Thienylalanine is used with PKU -2-thienylalanine. Phenylalanine blocks the inhibition, allowing
Subtilis Spore Suspension and -2-thienylalanine in estimat- the organism to grow.
ing phenylalanine levels in blood. In the PKU Test procedure, PKU Test Agar containing
thienylalanine or PKU Test Agar without Thienylalanine with
Summary and Explanation added thienylalanine are inoculated with a suspension of B. subtilis
Phenylketonuria (PKU) results from an inborn error of phenyl- ATCC 6633. Filter paper disks saturated with infant blood
alanine metabolism. In this disease, phenylalanine hydroxylase and control disks impregnated with known concentrations of
deficiency causes accumulation of the amino acid phenylalanine L-phenylalanine (2,4,6,8,12 and 20 mg%) are applied to the
with subsequent neurological damage. surface of the medium. After incubation at 35C for 12-16 hours,
In 1934, Folling1 reported the presence of a urine phenylalanine the zones of growth around the test disks are compared to the
metabolite in mentally retarded persons. Jervis2 established that zones around the control disks. A growth zone around the test
defective phenylalanine metabolism was the cause of the disk comparable to the zone around the 4 mg% or higher disk is
mental retardation. Detection and management of PKU are a presumptive positive indication of phenylketonuria. A positive
possible by testing infants for abnormal levels of phenylalanine result must be repeated using a duplicate test disk and a chemical
or its metabolites. The Guthrie bacterial inhibition assay (BIA), or spectrofluorometric procedure.7
423
Section III
OP PKU Test Agar, cont.

Principles of the Procedure Difco PKU Test Agar without Thienylalanine

Consists of the same ingredients without thienylalanine.
PKU Test Agar and PKU Test Agar without Thienylalanine
are defined minimal media containing the factors necessary PKU Subtilis Spore Suspension
Standardized, stable suspension of Bacillus subtilis (origin ATCC
for B. subtilis growth under appropriate conditions. 6633) in water.
-2-thienylalanine is an inhibitor of B. subtilis growth. PKU *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Test Agar contains the inhibitor, -2-thienylalanine; PKU Test
Agar without Thienylalanine does not, requiring the user to Precaution
add -2-thienylalanine to the medium. Phenylalanine supplied PKU Subtilis Spore Suspension: While spore suspensions are
from a PKU-positive patient specimen will overcome the not considered to be pathogens, they are, nevertheless, live
inhibitory action of -2-thienylalanine. organisms. Never use mouth pipetting. Always use some type
of pipetting aid. Follow proper established laboratory proce-
Formulae dures in handling and disposing of infectious materials.
Difco PKU Test Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Directions for Preparation from
L-Glutamic Acid ......................................................... 0.5 g
DL-Alanine ................................................................. 0.5 g
Dehydrated Product
Asparagine ................................................................. 0.5 g Difco PKU Test Agar
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g 1. Suspend 50 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water (7.5 g
Dipotassium Phosphate ............................................ 15.0 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 5.0 g
per 150 mL) and boil to dissolve completely. Simmer for
Ammonium Chloride .................................................. 2.5 g 5 minutes. Cool to 50-55C.
Ammonium Nitrate .................................................... 0.5 g 2. Add 6.7 mL PKU Subtilis Spore Suspension (1 mL per
Sodium Sulfate ........................................................... 0.5 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.05 g
150 mL). Swirl flask to obtain a uniform distribution of spores.
Manganese Chloride .................................................. 5.0 mg 3. Dispense the final medium into 150 mm Petri dishes and
Ferric Chloride ............................................................ 5.0 mg allow to solidify.
Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 2.5 mg
-2-Thienylalanine ...................................................... 3.3 mg Difco PKU Test Agar without Thienylalanine
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g 1. Suspend 50 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water (7.5 g
per 150 mL) and boil to dissolve completely. Simmer for
User Quality Control 5 minutes.
Identity Specifications 2. Add 2 mL of 171 mg% -2-thienylalanine solution
Difco PKU Test Agar or PKU Test Agar without (0.3 mL per 150 mL) and mix thoroughly. Cool to 50-55C.
Thienylalanine 3. Add 6.7 mL PKU Subtilis Spore Suspension (1 mL per
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige to beige, free-flowing, 150 mL). Swirl flask to obtain a uniform distribution of
homogeneous. spores.
Solution: 5.0% solution, soluble in purified water 4. Dispense the final medium into 150 mm Petri dishes and
upon boiling. Solution is light amber, very
slightly to slightly opalescent with a
allow to solidify.
slight precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, very slightly to slightly Procedure
opalescent with a slight precipitate. For specific procedures, see appropriate references8,9 and the
Reaction of 5.0% product insert packaged with the PKU Subtilis Spore Suspen-
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 sion, -2-thienylalanine and other PKU test components.
PKU Subtilis Spore Suspension
Appearance: White, opalescent, homogeneous Expected Results
suspension.
Growth zone diameters around the control disks are related to
Cultural Response the concentration of phenylalanine in the disks. A zone of
Difco PKU Test Agar growth may or may not be present around the test disks
Prepare the medium per label directions and test using PKU Subtilis depending on the presence or absence of phenylalanine in the
Spore Suspension and PKU control disks. After incubation, measure test specimen. The culture medium outside the zones of growth
zones of growth around each PKU control disk and correlate with the
expected concentration of phenylalanine.
will be comparable to an inoculated and incubated plate to
which no disks have been applied.
Difco PKU Test Agar without Thienylalanine
Prepare the medium per label directions and test the medium without Compare the zone of growth around a test disk to the zone
and with added thienylalanine. Inoculate with PKU Subtilis Spore Suspen- around the standard disk containing 4 mg% phenylalanine. If
sion and apply PKU control disks. After incubation, observe for zones
of growth around the disks on the complete medium, which increase
the test zone is equal to or larger than the 4 mg% control
in size with increasing phenylalanine concentration in the disks. Growth zone, the test result is a presumptive positive and should be
should occur throughout the medium on plates without thienylalanine. confirmed using a second sample. If the second sample gives a
similar result, confirm by quantitative blood assay.

424
 PPLO Media

8. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 1997. Approved standard LA4-A3. Blood
Limitations of the Procedure collection on filter paper for neonatal screening programs, 3rd ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
9. Aldis, Hoffman and Therrell. 1993. In Therrell (ed.), Laboratory methods for neonatal screening.
(See the product insert packaged with PKU Test components American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
for a complete list.)
1. Positive results obtained by this methodology require Availability
confirmation by quantitative blood assay. Difco PKU Test Agar
2. PKU Test Agar must not be overheated. Bring to a boil and Cat. No. 298010 Dehydrated 500 g
mix gently during heating. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE. Difco PKU Test Agar without Thienylalanine
3. Do not add spores if the temperature of the medium is above Cat. No. 247410 Dehydrated 500 g
55C. Distribute the spores uniformly in the medium BBL -2-thienylalanine, 171 mg% aqueous solution

without creating bubbles.

4. Place the Petri dish on a horizontal surface while pouring
Cat. No. 212105
PKU Subtilis Spore Suspension
Tube 10 10 mL*
O
the medium to ensure an even depth of agar and a uniform Cat. No. 212901 Vial 100 1 mL* P
distribution of spores throughout the plate.
BBL PKU Control Disc Strips: Concentrations 2, 4, 4, 4,

5. Caution and proper controls should be used when utilizing 4, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 20 mg%
components purchased individually or from other suppliers. Cat. No. 231110 Strips Pkg. of 10*
BBL PKU Test Specimen Cards

References Cat. No. 231111 Cards Pkg. of 1000
1. Folling. 1934. Hoppe Seyler Z. Physiol. Chem. 227:169.
2. Jervis. 1939. J. Ment. Sci.. 85:719.
3. Guthrie and Tieckelmann. 1960. London Conference on the Scientific Study of Mental Deficiency,
BBL PKU Tray, complete with template for placing disks
London, England. Cat. No. 260435 One
4. Guthrie. 1961. JAMA 178:863.
5. Demain. 1958. J. Bacteriol. 75:517. *Store at 2-8C.
6. Guthrie and Susi. 1963. Pediatrics 32:338.
7. Ambrose. 1969. Clin. Chem. 15:15.

PPLO Media (Mycoplasma Media)

PPLO Agar (Mycoplasma Agar Base)
PPLO Broth (Mycoplasma Broth Base)
Mycoplasma Broth Base (Frey) Mycoplasma
Supplement Mycoplasma Enrichment w/o Penicillin
Intended Use tory action on some Mycoplasma. It has been used for the
PPLO (Mycoplasma) agars and broths, when supplemented cultivation of Mycoplasma for research studies.7,8
with nutritive enrichments, are used for isolating and cultivating Mycoplasma Broth Base (Frey), a modification of other broth
Mycoplasma. Mycoplasma Broth Base (Frey) is used for the media, was developed specifically for the cultivation of avian
cultivation of avian mycoplasmas. strains of Mycoplasma.9
Mycoplasma Supplement and Mycoplasma Enrichment w/o
Summary and Explanation
Penicillin are sterile desiccated enrichments for use in PPLO
Members of the class Mollicutes, Mycoplasma was first recog-
nized from a case of pleuropneumonia in a cow.1 The organism media as described by Hayflick. 10 The supplements are
was designated pleuropneumonia-like organism, or PPLO.1 prepared according to the formulations of Chanock, Hayflick
Although some species are normal human respiratory tract and Barile11 and Hayflick.12
flora, M. pneumoniae is a major cause of respiratory disease
(primary atypical pneumonia, sometimes called walking Principles of the Procedure
pneumonia).1 M. hominis, M. genitalium and Ureaplasma Meat digests, peptones, beef extract and yeast extract provide
urealyticum are important colonizers (and possible pathogens) the nitrogen, vitamins, amino acids and carbon in these media.
of the human genital tract.1 Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance of these
PPLO (Mycoplasma) Agar was described by Morton, Smith formulations. Agar, the solidifying agent, is used in PPLO
and Leberman.2 It was used in a study of the growth require- (Mycoplasma) Agar at a concentration slightly reduced from
ments of Mycoplasma,3 along with the identification and usual to ensure formation of the largest possible colonies
cultivation of this organism.4-6 because the organisms grow into the agar with only slight
PPLO (Mycoplasma) Broth (without crystal violet) is prepared surface growth.13
according to the formula described by Morton and Lecci.3
Crystal violet is omitted from this formula due to its inhibi-

425
Section III
OP PPLO Media, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco PPLO Agar (Mycoplasma Agar) BBL Mycoplasma Agar Base (PPLO Agar Base)
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, homogeneous, free-flowing. Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
Solution: 3.5% solution, soluble in purified water material.
upon boiling. Solution is medium Solution: 3.4% solution, soluble in purified water
amber, slightly opalescent. upon boiling. Solution is light to medium,
Prepared Appearance: Enriched with 30% Mycoplasma yellow to tan, trace hazy to hazy.
Supplement Light to medium am- Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, trace
ber, slightly opalescent. hazy to hazy.
Reaction of 3.5% Reaction of 3.4%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.8 0.2 Solution at 25C: pH 7.8 0.2
Difco PPLO Broth (Mycoplasma Broth)
BBL Mycoplasma Broth Base (PPLO Broth Base)

Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
neous. material.
Solution: 2.1% solution, soluble in purified water. Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified water
Solution is light amber, clear to very upon warming. Solution is light to me-
slightly opalescent. dium, yellow to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to very slightly opal- Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear
escent. to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 2.1% Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.8 0.2 Solution at 25C: pH 7.8 0.2
Difco Mycoplasma Supplement
BBL Mycoplasma Broth Base (Frey)
Desiccated Appearance: Straw-colored, dried button, may be Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
dispersed. material.
Rehydrated Appearance: Light to dark straw-colored, clear to Solution: 2.25% solution, soluble in purified water.
slightly opalescent. Solution is light to medium, yellow to tan,
clear to slightly hazy.
Cultural Response Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear
Difco PPLO Agar or PPLO Broth
to slightly hazy.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate agar plates with Reaction of 2.25%
0.1 mL of serial dilutions of the test organisms. Incubate plates under Solution at 25C: pH 7.7 0.2
5-10% CO2 at 35 2C for up to 7 days. Inoculate tubes of broth with BBL Mycoplasma Enrichment without Penicillin

1.0 mL of serial dilutions of the test organisms and incubate under 5-

Reconstituted Appearance: Dark brown, clear to trace hazy.
10% CO2 at 35 2C for up to 7 days, then subculture (0.1 mL) to
plates of the agar medium and incubate under 5-10% CO2 at 35 2C
for up to 7 days. Daily examine plates microscopically for growth. Cultural Response
BBL Mycoplasma Agar Base or Mycoplasma Broth
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY
Base
Mycoplasma arginini 23243 Good Prepare the medium per label directions (enriched with BBL Mycoplasma
Mycoplasma bovis 25523 Good Enrichment without Penicillin). Inoculate agar plates with 0.1 mL of serial
Mycoplasma gallinarum 19708 Good dilutions of the test organisms. Incubate for 7 days at 35 2C with CO2
for Mycoplasma pneumoniae and anaerobically for Mycoplasma orale.
Inoculate tubes of broth with 1.0 mL of serial dilutions of the test
The base media are supplemented with Mycoplasma Supple- organisms and incubate for 7 days at 35 2C with 3-5% CO2 for
M. pneumoniae and anaerobically for M. orale. After 5 days of incubation,
ment or Mycoplasma Enrichment w/o Penicillin because subculture tubes (0.1 mL) to Mycoplasma Agar and incubate at 35 2C
Mycoplasma spp. are fastidious in their growth requirements.14 for up to 7 days under appropriate atmospheric conditions.
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY
Mycoplasma Supplement contains fresh yeast extract and horse
serum. Yeast extract provides the preformed nucleic acid Mycoplasma orale 23714 Good
Mycoplasma pneumoniae 1553 Good
precursors that are required by Mycoplasma spp.14 Horse
serum supplies cholesterol, a growth stimulant.14 BBL Mycoplasma Broth Base (Frey)
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Mycoplasma Enrichment without Penicillin is a selective 35 2C under 3-5% CO2 for 7 days. Subculture to Mycoplasma Agar
enrichment containing the inhibitor thallium acetate, to which plates and incubate aerobically at 35 2C for 7 days. Examine plates
microscopically for growth.
a penicillin of choice (penicillin G or a broad-spectrum semi-
synthetic penicillin) can be added at the time of use to make it ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY

selective against gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria. Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Growth in a dilution
containing 103 CFU/mL
Mycoplasma gallisepticum 19610 Undiluted Good
Mycoplasma synoviae 25204 Undiluted Good

426
 PPLO Media, cont.

Formulae Mycoplasma Broth Base: Suspend 20 g of the powder in

Difco PPLO Agar 1 L of purified water. Mix thoroughly. Warm slightly to
Approximate Formula* Per Liter completely dissolve the powder.
Beef Heart, Infusion from 50 g ................................... 6.0 g
2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g 3. Cool to 50C and add enrichment. Recommended
Agar ......................................................................... 14.0 g enrichments include addition of 20 mL of horse serum and
Difco PPLO Broth 5 mL of specially prepared yeast extract11 to each 75 mL of
Consists of the the same ingredients without the agar. cooled medium.
BBL Mycoplasma Agar Base (PPLO Agar Base) 4. For a selective medium inhibitory to bacteria, add 30 mL
Approximate Formula* Per Liter of BBL Mycoplasma Enrichment without Penicillin to 70 mL
Beef Heart, Infusion from (solids) ............................... 2.0 g
of molten agar medium (50C) or 70 mL of broth medium O
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 7.0
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0
g
g and add sterile penicillin G to a final concentration of 500 P
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g units/mL.
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Agar ......................................................................... 14.0 g
stable, typical control cultures.
BBL Mycoplasma Broth Base (PPLO Broth Base)
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar. BBL Mycoplasma Broth Base (Frey)
BBL Mycoplasma Broth Base (Frey)

1. Dissolve 22.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Approximate Formula* Per Liter thoroughly.
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 7.5 g 2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal .................................. 2.5 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g 3. Cool to 50C and add 100 mL of sterile inactivated horse
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g serum. Mix thoroughly.
Potassium Chloride .................................................... 0.4 g 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.2 g
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 1.6 g stable, typical control cultures.
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 0.1 g
Difco Mycoplasma Supplement
Difco Mycoplasma Supplement BBL Mycoplasma Enrichment without Penicillin
Approximate Formula* Per 30 mL Vial 1. Rehydrate with 30 mL of sterile purified water.
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 0.01 g
Horse Serum, Desiccated ............................................ 1.6 g 2. Rotate gently to dissolve.
BBL Mycoplasma Enrichment without Penicillin 3. Add 30 mL (the contents of one vial) to 70 mL of sterile
Approximate Formula* Per 30 mL Vial medium base.
Horse Serum ............................................................ 20.0 mL 4. Dispense in plates or tubes as desired.
Yeast Extract (fresh autolysate) ................................. 10.0 mL
Thallium Acetate ...................................................... 50.0 mg
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Procedure
Agar
Directions for Preparation from Inoculate the surface of plates containing the complete
Dehydrated Product medium by adding drops of liquid inoculum or by a swab-
Difco PPLO Agar inoculation technique. Incubate plates at 35 2C for up to
Difco PPLO Broth 21 days in a moist atmosphere containing 5-10% carbon
1. PPLO Agar: Suspend 35 g of the powder in 700 mL dioxide or anaerobically if the presence of M. buccale,
of purified water. Mix thoroughly. Heat with frequent M. faucium, M. orale or M. salivarium is suspected.13
agitation and boil for 1 minute to completely dissolve the
Broth
powder.
Test material, either solid or liquid, should be directly inocu-
PPLO Broth: Dissolve 21 g of the powder in 700 mL of
lated into the broth medium. For preparation of stock organism
purified water. Mix thoroughly.
suspensions, a block of agar culture can be added to the broth.
2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool medium to 50-
60C. Following incubation at 35 2C in a moist aerobic atmo-
3. Aseptically add 300 mL Difco Mycoplasma Supplement to sphere containing 5-10% carbon dioxide or anaerobically, if
the medium. Mix well. appropriate,13 for various lengths of time, subculture aliquots
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using of the broth to PPLO (Mycoplasma) Agar plates for visualiza-
stable, typical control cultures. tion of typical colonies. The broth usually does not become
turbid enough to confirm the presence of growth.
BBL Mycoplasma Agar Base
BBL Mycoplasma Broth Base For a complete discussion of the isolation and identification of
1. Mycoplasma Agar Base: Suspend 34 g of the powder in 1 L of Mycoplasma spp. from clinical specimens, refer to appropriate
purified water. Mix thoroughly. Heat with frequent agitation procedures outlined in the references.13-15
and boil for 1 minute to completely dissolve the powder.

427
Section III
OP PPLO Media, cont.

12. Hayflick. 1968. Personal communication.

Expected Results 13. Kenny. 1985. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Shadomy (ed.). Manual of clinical microbiology,
4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Agar 14. Waites and Taylor-Robinson. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). Manual of
PPLO colonies are round with a dense center and a less dense clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
15. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
periphery, giving a fried egg appearance on PPLO (Mycoplasma) Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Agar. Vacuoles, large bodies characteristic of Mycoplasma spp.,

are seen in the periphery. Colonies vary in diameter from 10 to Availability
500 microns (0.01-0.5 mm) and penetrate into the medium. Difco PPLO Agar (Mycoplasma Agar)
Cat. No. 241210 Dehydrated 500 g
Broth
BBL Mycoplasma Agar Base (PPLO Agar Base)

After subculture to plates of PPLO (Mycoplasma) Agar, posi- Cat. No. 211456 Dehydrated 500 g
tive broth cultures produce colonies exhibiting the typical mor- Difco PPLO Broth (Mycoplasma Broth)

phology; i.e., fried egg appearance. Cat. No. 255420 Dehydrated 500 g
255410 Dehydrated 10 kg
Limitation of the Procedure BBL Mycoplasma Broth Base (PPLO Broth Base)
Thallium acetate can partially inhibit some mycoplasmas.13 Cat. No. 211458 Dehydrated 500 g
BBL Mycoplasma Broth Base (Frey)
References Cat. No. 212346 Dehydrated 500 g
1. Baron, Peterson and Finegold. 1994. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 9th ed. Mosby-Year
Book, Inc. St. Louis, Mo. 212347 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
2. Morton, Smith and Leberman. 1951. Am. J. Syphilis Gonorrh. 35:361.
3. Morton and Lecce. 1953. J. Bacteriol. 66:646. Difco Mycoplasma Supplement
4. Chanock, James, Fox, Turner, Mufso and Hayflick. 1962. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 110:884.
5. Craven, Wenzel, Calhoun, Hendley, Hamory and Gwaltney. 1976. J. Clin. Microbiol. 4:225.
Cat. No. 283610 Vial 6 x 30 mL*
6. Gregory and Cundy. 1970. Appl. Microbiol. 19:268.
7. Adler and Da Massa. 1967. Appl. Microbiol. 15:245. BBL Mycoplasma Enrichment w/o Penicillin

8. Leland, Lapworth, Jones and French. 1982. J. Clin. Microbiol. 16:709. Cat. No. 212292 Vial 10 x 30 mL*
9. Frey, Hanson and Anderson. 1968. Am. J. Vet. Res. 29:2163.
10. Hayflick. 1965. Tex. Rep. Biol. Med. 23:285. *Store at 2-8C.
11. Chanock, Hayflick and Barile. 1962. Proc. Nat. Acad. Science 48:41.

Pagano Levin Base

Intended Use User Quality Control
Pagano Levin Base is used with TTC Solution 1% and neomy-
cin in isolating and differentiating Candida spp. Identity Specifications
Difco Pagano Levin Base
Summary and Explanation Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Pagano Levin Base as described by Pagano, Levin and Trejo is 1 Solution: 6.6% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light amber,
selective for Candida. Candida spp. reduce TTC (2,3,5- very slightly to slightly opalescent.
triphenyltetrazolium chloride) in the medium to produce Prepared Appearance: Plain Light amber, slightly opalescent.
colonies with various degrees of color. Neomycin inhibits With TTC and antibiotic Light amber,
growth of most bacteria without appreciably influencing milky.
Candida. Gentamicin (50 g/mL) may also be added to reduce Reaction of 6.6%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.0 0.2
bacterial populations according to Yamane and Saitoh.2
Samaranayake, MacFarlane and Williamson 3 found that Cultural Response
modified Pagano Levin Agar was far superior to the commonly Difco Pagano Levin Base
used Sabouraud Dextrose Agar in detecting multiple yeast Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 25-
species in a single sample. 30C for up to 72 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY
Principles of the Procedure ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR

Peptone provides the carbon and nitrogen required for good Candida albicans 26790 ~107 Good Cream to light pink
Candida albicans 36232 ~107 Good Pink to light red
growth of a wide variety of organisms. Yeast extract provides
Candida krusei 34135 ~107 Good White to light
vitamins and cofactors. Dextrose is an energy source. Agar is pink, spreading
the solidifying agent. TTC Solution 1%, added to the basal Escherichia coli 25922 ~108 Inhibition
medium, facilitates the differentiation of yeast colonies based
on the color change that occurs when a microorganism
reduces TTC. Neomycin added to the base inhibits the growth
of most bacteria.

428
 Pantothenate Assay Medium

Formula Procedure
Difco Pagano Levin Base Inoculate the surface of the medium with the specimen and
Approximate Formula* Per Liter incubate at 25-30C for 48-72 hours.
Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 1.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g Expected Results
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g C. albicans colonies appear cream-colored to light pink,
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. smooth, round, raised, opaque and glistening. Typical
C. albicans colonies can be confirmed on Chlamydospore Agar
Directions for Preparation from
or Rice Extract Agar based on chlamydospore production.
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 66 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix References O
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
1. Pagano, Levin and Trejo. 1958. Antibiot. Annu. 1957-1958:137.
2. Yamane and Saitoh. 1985. J. Clin. Microbiol. 21:276.
3. Samaranayake, MacFarlane and Williamson. 1987. J. Clin. Microbiol. 25:162.
P
completely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 50-55C. Availability
4. Aseptically add 10 mL TTC Solution 1% (100 g 2,3,5- Difco Pagano Levin Base
triphenyltetrazolium chloride per mL of medium) and Cat. No. 214110 Dehydrated 500 g
500 g of neomycin per mL of medium. Mix thoroughly. Difco TTC Solution 1%

5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Cat. No. 231121 Tube 30 mL
264310 Bottle 25 g
stable, typical control cultures.

Pantothenate Assay Medium

Intended Use Formula
Pantothenate Assay Medium is used for determining the con- Difco Pantothenate Assay Medium
centration of pantothenic acid and its salts by the microbio- Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Vitamin Assay Casamino Acids ................................. 10.0 g
logical assay technique. Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g
Sodium Acetate ....................................................... 20.0 g
Summary and Explanation L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.4 g
Vitamin assay media are prepared for use in the microbiological DL-Tryptophan ........................................................... 0.2 g
Adenine Sulfate ....................................................... 20.0 mg
assay of vitamins. Three types of media are used for this purpose: Guanine Hydrochloride ............................................ 20.0 mg
Uracil ........................................................................ 20.0 mg
1. Maintenance Media: For carrying the stock culture to Thiamine Hydrochloride ......................................... 200.0 g
preserve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism Riboflavin ............................................................... 400.0 g
for its intended purpose; Niacin ......................................................................... 1.0 mg
2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for immediate Pyridoxine .............................................................. 800.0 g
p-Aminobenzoic Acid ............................................. 200.0 g
use; Biotin ......................................................................... 1.0 g
3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the vitamin under Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
test. They contain all the factors necessary for optimal Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.4 g
growth of the test organism except the single essential Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 20.0 mg
vitamin to be determined. Ferrous Sulfate ......................................................... 20.0 mg
Manganese Sulfate .................................................. 20.0 mg
Pantothenate Assay Medium is a modification of the formula *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
described in The United States Pharmacopeia1 for the micro-
biological assay of calcium pantothenate using Lactobacillus
Precautions
plantarum ATCC 8014 as the test organism. Pantothenate Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media
Assay Medium does not contain polysorbate 80, which is or glassware in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely
included in Difco Pantothenate Medium AOAC. small amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give
erroneous results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from
Principles of the Procedure detergents and other chemicals must be used. Glassware must
Pantothenate Assay Medium is a dehydrated medium free from be heated to 250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic
pantothenic acid or pantothenate but containing all other residues that might be present. Take precautions to keep
nutrients and vitamins essential for the cultivation of sterilization and cooling conditions uniform throughout the
L. plantarum ATCC 8014. The addition of calcium panto- assay.
thenate in specified increasing concentrations gives a growth
response that can be measured turbidimetrically or titrimetrically.

429
Section III
OP Pantothenate Assay, cont.

Directions for Preparation from duplicated. The standard curve is obtained by using calcium
Dehydrated Product pantothenate solution at levels of 0.0, 0.01, 0.02, 0.03, 0.04,
1. Suspend 7.3 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water. 0.05, 0.06, 0.08 and 0.1 g per assay tube (10 mL). Turbidi-
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 2-3 minutes to metric determinations are made after 18-24 hours incubation
completely dissolve the powder. at 35-37C. Construct a standard curve and determine the
3. Dispense in 5 mL amounts into tubes, evenly dispersing concentration of the unknown by interpolation from the
the precipitate. standard curve.
4. Add standard or test samples. The concentration of pantothenic acid required for the prepa-
5. Adjust tube volume to 10 mL with purified water. ration of the standard curve may be prepared by dissolving 50
6. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes. mg dried calcium pantothenate in a solution containing
approximately 500 mL purified water, 10 mL 0.2N acetic acid
Procedure and 100 mL 0.2N sodium acetate. Dilute to 1,150 mL
Prepare stock cultures of L. plantarum ATCC 8014 in tripli- with additional water to make the calcium pantothenate
cate by stab inoculation of Lactobacilli Agar AOAC. Incubate concentration 43.47 g per mL; one mL equals 40 g
cultures for 18-24 hours at 35-37C. Store the tubes at 2-8C. pantothenic acid.
Prepare a fresh stock culture every week. Do not use a culture
older than 1 week for this assay. This solution is diluted by adding 25 mL to a solution
containing 500 mL purified water, 10 mL 0.2N acetic acid
Inoculum and 100 mL 0.2N sodium acetate. Dilute to 1 liter with
Subculture from a stock culture of Lactobacillus plantarum purified water to make a stock solution containing 1.0 g
ATCC 8014 to 10 mL of sterile single-strength Pantothenate pantothenic acid per mL. The standard solution is made by
Assay Medium supplemented with 0.02 g pantothenate. diluting 2 mL of the stock solution to 100 mL with purified
Incubate for 18-24 hours at 35-37C. Centrifuge the cells water. This solution contains 0.02 g pantothenic acid per mL.
under aseptic conditions and decant the supernatant. Wash Use 0.0, 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 4.0 and 5.0 mL per assay
the cells three times with 10 mL sterile 0.85% saline. After the tube. Prepare the stock solution fresh daily.
third wash, resuspend the cells with sterile 0.85% saline and
adjust to a turbidity of 40-45% transmittance when read on a Expected Results
spectrophotometer at 660 nm. Aseptically inoculate each 1. Prepare a standard concentration response curve by plotting
assay tube with one drop of the cell suspension. the response readings against the amount of standard in each
Standard Curve tube, disk or cup.
It is essential that a standard curve be constructed each time 2. Determine the amount of vitamin at each level of assay
an assay is run. Autoclave and incubation conditions can solution by interpolation from the standard curve.
influence the standard curve readings and cannot always be 3. Calculate the concentration of vitamin in the sample from
the average of these volumes. Use only those values that do
not vary more than 10% from the average. Use the results
User Quality Control
only if two-thirds of the values do not vary more than 10%.
Identity Specifications
Difco Pantothenate Assay Medium Limitations of the Procedure
Dehydrated Appearance: Very light beige, homogeneous with 1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium
a tendency to clump.
must be cultured and maintained on media recommended
Solution: 3.65% (single-strength) solution,
soluble in purified water upon boiling
for this purpose.
for 2-3 minutes. Single-strength 2. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the assay
solution is light amber, clear, may have procedure.
a slight precipitate.
3. The use of altered or deficient media may cause mutants
Prepared Appearance: (Single strength) light amber, clear,
having different nutritional requirements that will not give
may have a slight precipitate.
a satisfactory response.
Reaction of 3.65%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.1 4. For successful results to these procedures, all conditions of
the assay must be followed precisely.
Cultural Response
Difco Pantothenate Assay Medium Reference
Prepare the medium per label directions. The medium supports the 1. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The na-
growth of Lactobacillus plantarum ATCC 8014 when prepared in single tional formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.

strength and supplemented with pantothenic acid. The medium should

produce a standard curve when tested with a pantothenic acid refer- Availability
ence standard at 0.0 to 0.10 g per 10 mL. Incubate tubes with caps Difco Pantothenate Assay Medium
loosened at 35-37C for 18-24 hours. Read the percent transmittance
Cat. No. 260410 Dehydrated 100 g*
using a spectrophotometer at 660 nm.
*Store at 2-8C.

430
 Pantothenate AOAC

Pantothenate Medium AOAC

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
This medium conforms with specifications of The United States Pantothenate Medium AOAC is a pantothenic acid/pantothenate-
Pharmacopeia (USP). free dehydrated medium containing all other nutrients and
vitamins essential for the cultivation of Lactobacillus plantarum
Pantothenate Medium AOAC is used for determining the
ATCC 8014. The addition of calcium pantothenate in
concentration of pantothenic acid and pantothenate by the
specified increasing concentrations gives a growth response that
microbiological assay technique.
can be measured turbidimetrically or titrimetrically. O
Summary and Explanation
Vitamin assay media are prepared for use in the microbiological
Formula P
Difco Pantothenate Medium AOAC
assay of vitamins. Three types of media are used for this
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
purpose: Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g
Sodium Acetate ....................................................... 20.0 g
1. Maintenance Media: For carrying the stock culture to Vitamin Assay Casamino Acids ................................. 10.0 g
preserve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g
for its intended purpose; Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.4 g
2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for immediate L-Tryptophan .............................................................. 0.1 g
use; Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.4 g
3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the vitamin under Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 20.0 mg
test. They contain all the factors necessary for optimal Ferrous Sulfate ......................................................... 20.0 mg
Manganese Sulfate .................................................. 20.0 mg
growth of the test organism except the single essential Adenine Sulfate ....................................................... 20.0 mg
vitamin to be determined. Guanine Hydrochloride ............................................ 20.0 mg
Uracil ........................................................................ 20.0 mg
Pantothenate Medium AOAC is prepared for use in the Riboflavin ............................................................... 400.0 g
microbiological assay of pantothenic acid and pantothenate Thiamine Hydrochloride ......................................... 200.0 g
Biotin ......................................................................... 0.8 g
according to the procedures of Calcium Pantothenate Assay p-Aminobenzoic Acid ............................................. 200.0 g
in the USP1 and Pantothenate Acid Assay in the Official Nicotinic Acid ............................................................. 1.0 mg
Methods of Analysis of AOAC International (AOAC). 2 Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ........................................ 800.0 g
Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 0.1 g
Lactobacillus plantarum ATCC 8014 is the test organism used *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
in this assay.
Precautions
User Quality Control Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media or
glassware in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely small
Identity Specifications amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give erroneous
Difco Pantothenate Medium AOAC results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from detergents and
Dehydrated Appearance: White to very light beige, homoge-
neous, tendency to clump.
other chemicals must be used. Glassware must be heated to
Solution: 3.65% (single strength) or 7.3%
250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic residues that
(double strength) solution,soluble in might be present. Take precautions to keep sterilization and
purified water upon boiling for 2-3 cooling conditions uniform throughout the assay.
minutes. Single-strength solution is
very light amber, clear, may have a
slight precipitate. Directions for Preparation from
Prepared Appearance: (Single strength) light amber, clear, Dehydrated Product
may have a very slight precipitate. 1. Suspend 7.3 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water.
Reaction of 3.65% 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 2-3 minutes to
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.1
completely dissolve the powder.
Cultural Response 3. Dispense 5 mL amounts into tubes, evenly dispersing the
Difco Pantothenate Medium AOAC precipitate.
Prepare the medium per label directions. The medium supports the 4. Add standard or test samples.
growth of Lactobacillus plantarum ATCC 8014 when prepared in single 5. Adjust the tube volume to 10 mL.
strength and supplemented with pantothenic acid. The medium should
6. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes.
produce a standard curve when tested with a pantothenic acid refer-
ence standard at 0.0 to 0.05 g per 10 mL. Incubate tubes with caps
loosened at 35-37C for 18-24 hours. Read the percent transmittance
using a spectrophotometer at 660 nm.

431
Section III
OP Pantothenate AOAC, cont.

Procedure Dilute further by adding 25 mL of this solution to 500 mL

Follow the assay procedures as outlined in USP1 or AOAC.2 purified water, 10 mL 0.2N acetic acid and 100 mL 0.2N so-
dium acetate. Dilute this solution to 1 liter with purified water
Prepare stock cultures of L. plantarum ATCC 8014 by stab
to make a stock solution containing 1 g pantothenic acid per
inoculation of Lactobacilli Agar AOAC. Incubate stock cul-
mL. The standard solution is made by diluting 5 mL of the
tures at 35-37C ( 0.5C) for 18-24 hours. Store the stock
stock solution to 1000 mL with purified water to obtain
cultures at 2-8C. Prepare fresh stab cultures every week. Do
a solution containing 0.005 g pantothenic acid per mL.
not use a culture more than one week old for preparing the
Use 0.0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 mL per assay tube. For the USP
inoculum.
procedure, dilute the 50 g per mL solution with purified wa-
Subculture from a stock culture of Lactobacillus plantarum ter to make a standard concentration of 0.01 g per mL. Other
ATCC 8014 to a tube of sterile single-strength Pantothenate standard concentrations may be used provided the standard
Medium AOAC (10 mL) supplemented with 0.2 g panto- falls within the limits specified by USP1 and AOAC.2
thenate. Incubate for 18-24 hours at 35-37C. Centrifuge the
cells under aseptic conditions and decant the supernatant. Wash Expected Results
the cells three times with 10 mL sterile 0.85% NaCl. After the 1. Prepare a standard concentration response curve by
third wash, resuspend the cells with sterile 0.85% NaCl and plotting the response readings against the amount of stan-
adjust to a turbidity of 40-45% transmittance when read on a dard in each tube, disk or cup.
spectrophotometer at 660 nm. Aseptically inoculate each 2. Determine the amount of vitamin at each level of assay
assay tube with one drop of the cell suspension. solution by interpolation from the standard curve.
3. Calculate the concentration of vitamin in the sample from
Prepare solutions of Calcium Pantothenate USP Reference
the average of these volumes. Use only those values that do
Standard or pantothenic acid (or equivalent) according to USP1
not vary more than 10% from the average and use the
or AOAC.2 Satisfactory results are obtained with the standard
results only if two-thirds of the values do not vary more
curve by using pantothenic acid at levels of 0.0, 0.005, 0.01,
than 10%.
0.015, 0.02 and 0.025 g per assay tube (10 mL) for the AOAC
procedure. Calcium pantothenate may be used at standard
Limitations of the Procedure
levels of 0.0, 0.01, 0.02, 0.03, 0.04 and 0.05 g per assay tube
1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium
for the USP procedure. Pantothenate Medium AOAC may be
must be cultured and maintained on media recommended
used for both turbidimetric and titrimetric analysis in the
for this purpose.
AOAC procedure, and for turbidimetric analysis only for the
2. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the assay
USP procedure. Turbidimetric readings should be made after
procedure.
18-24 hours incubation at 35-37C ( 0.5C). Titrimetric
3. The use of altered or deficient media may cause mutants
determinations are made following 72 hours incubation at
having different nutritional requirements that will not give
35-37C ( 0.5C).
a satisfactory response.
The concentration of pantothenic acid or calcium pantothenate 4. For successful results of these procedures, all conditions of
required for the preparation of the standard curve may be the assay must be followed precisely.
prepared as follows:
1. Dissolve 50 mg dried calcium pantothenate in 500 mL References
1. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
purified water, 10 mL 0.2N acetic acid and 100 mL 0.2N national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
2. Horwitz (ed). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. II. AOAC
sodium acetate. International, Gaithersburg, Md.

2. Dilute with additional water to make calcium pantothenate

concentration 43.47 g per mL for the AOAC procedure or Availability
dilute to 50 g per mL for the USP procedure. At 43.47 g Difco Pantothenate Medium AOAC
per mL, one mL should equal 40 g pantothenic acid. AOAC USP
Cat. No. 281610 Dehydrated 100 g*
*Store at 2-8C.

Peptic Digest Agar

Intended Use mented with Fildes Enrichment and BBL IsoVitaleX Enrich-
Peptic Digest Agar is used for the cultivation of Haemophilus ment. Brain Heart Infusion Agar has proven to be effective in
species from a variety of clinical specimens. the cultivation of a wide variety of microorganisms including
many types of pathogens. When supplemented with Fildes
Summary and Explanation and IsoVitaleX Enrichments, it is used for the cultivation of
Peptic Digest Agar consists of Brain Heart Infusion Agar supple- fastidious organisms; e.g., Haemophilus influenzae.
432
 Peptone

Principles of the Procedure Procedure

Peptic Digest Agar derives its nutrients from the brain heart Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci-
infusion, peptone and dextrose components. The peptones and mens. Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar side up)
infusions are sources of organic nitrogen, carbon, sulfur, at 35C in a CO2-enriched aerobic atmosphere for 18-72 hours.
vitamins and trace substances. Dextrose is an energy source.
The medium is buffered through the use of disodium phosphate. Expected Results
H. influenzae colonies are small, moist and grayish with a char-
Fildes Enrichment is a peptic digest of sheep blood that supplies
acteristic mousy odor. Gram staining, biochemical tests and
the X (hemin) and V (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide, NAD)
other procedures should be performed to confirm findings.
factors necessary for the growth of H. influenzae.1 IsoVitaleX
Enrichment is a defined supplement which provides V factor (NAD)
References O
for Haemophilus species and vitamins, amino acids, coenzymes,
dextrose, ferric ion and other factors which improve the growth of
1. Fildes. 1920. Br. J. Exp. Pathol. 1:29.
2. Vastine, Dawson, Hoshiwara, Yonega, Daghfous and Messadi. 1974. Appl. Microbiol. 28:688. P
fastidious microorganisms; e.g., pathogenic Neisseria.2
Availability
BBL Peptic Digest Agar
Cat. No. 297705 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.

Bacto Peptone BiTek Peptone

Intended Use BiTek Peptone was developed to serve the biotechnology/phar-
Bacto Peptone and BiTek Peptone are used as organic nitrogen maceutical industry by providing a lower-cost alternative to
sources in microbiological culture media for cultivation of a Bacto Peptone, while offering the same lot-to-lot consistency
variety of bacteria and fungi. and similar growth characteristics to Bacto Peptone.

Summary and Explanation Principles of the Procedure

Bacto Peptone was first introduced in 1914 and became the Bacto Peptone and BiTek Peptone are enzymatic digests of
standard peptone for the preparation of bacteriological culture animal protein. Bacto Peptone contains nitrogen in a form that
media. Bacto Peptone is used as an organic nitrogen source in is readily available for bacterial growth. Bacto Peptone has a
microbiological culture media for cultivation of a variety of high peptone and amino acid content, with only a negligible
bacteria and fungi. For example, Iwanaga et al.1 utilized Bacto quantity of proteoses and more complex nitrogenous constitu-
Peptone for production of cholera toxin by Vibrio cholerae ents. BiTek Peptone has growth properties similar to Bacto
O1 El Tor. Benkerroum et al.2 reported using Bacto Peptone Peptone.
in a selective medium developed for isolating Leuconostoc sp.
from food samples. Bacto Peptone was used in a culture medium Typical Analysis
for two anaerobic, extremely thermophilic Archaea, Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of this
Thermococcus celer and Pyrococcus woesei, by Blamey et al.3 manual.
Bacto Peptone has also been utilized as a nitrogen source Precautions16
in cell culture media formulations. Taylor et al.4 used Bacto 1. Biosafety Level 2 practices, containment equipment and
Peptone to supplement serum-free medium for several mammalian facilities are recommended for activities with clinical speci-
cell lines and reported that the solubility of Bacto Peptone is mens of human or animal origin containing or potentially
very good at 10 g/100 mL water. Sakoda and Fukusho5 also containing pathogenic Brucella spp.
utilized Bacto Peptone in serum-free culture medium for main- 2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and
taining porcine kidney epithelial cells. Bacto Peptone is also facilities are recommended for all manipulations of cultures
useful as a supplement in cell culture with serum. of the pathogenic Brucella spp. and for experimental
Researchers uncovered estrogenic activity associated with Bacto animal studies.
Peptone when including the peptone in medium for culture of
yeast. The estrone contained in Bacto Peptone was converted to Directions for Preparation from
estrodiol by Saccharomyces cerevisiae. These findings suggest that Dehydrated Product
adding estrogens to a medium containing Bacto Peptone for studies Refer to the final concentration of Bacto Peptone and BiTek
of estrodiol production by yeast may confound results.6,7 Peptone in the formula of the medium being prepared. Add
appropriate product as required.
Several media containing peptone are specified in standard
methods for multiple applications.8-15
433
Section III
OP Peptone, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Bacto Peptone
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, granules.
Solution: 1.0%, 2.0% and 10.0% solutions, soluble in purified water. 1.0% solution is light amber, clear. 2.0% solution is light to
medium amber, clear. 10.0% solution is medium to dark amber, clear to very slightly opalescent, may have a very slight
precipitate.
Reaction of 1.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8-7.2
BiTek Peptone

Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous powder.

Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified water. Solution is light amber, clear to slightly opalescent, may have a slight precipitate.
Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7-7.4

Cultural Response
Biochemical Reactions
Bacto Peptone or BiTek Peptone
Prepare a sterile solution of Bacto Peptone or BiTek Peptone as directed below. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-
48 hours.
TEST TEST SOLUTION ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT BACTO RESULT BITEK
7
Fermentable Carbohydrates 2% Escherichia coli 25922 ~10 Negative Negative
Indole Production 0.1% Escherichia coli 29552 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive Negative to
slight positive
Acetylmethylcarbinol 0.1% with Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive Positive
Production 0.5% dextrose
Hydrogen Sulfide 1% Salmonella choleraesuis 14028 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive Negative to
Production subsp. choleraesuis slight positive
serotype Typhimurium

Growth Response
Bacto Peptone or BiTek Peptone
Prepare a sterile solution with 2% Bacto Peptone or BiTek Peptone, 0.5% sodium chloride and 1.5% agar. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and
incubate plates at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Brucella suis 4314* Undiluted Good
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good
*If this strain is not available, verify performance with a known isolate.

12. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 2000. Improved enumeration methods for the recreational
Procedure water quality indicators: Enterococci and Escherichia coli. EPA-821/R-97/004. Office of Water,
Washington, D.C.
See appropriate references for specific procedures using Bacto 13. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
Peptone and BiTek Peptone. national, Washington, D.C.
14. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
15. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1998. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food Safety
Expected Results and Inspection Service, USDA, Washington, D.C.
16. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results. Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.

References
1. Iwanaga, Yamamoto, Higa, Ichinose, Nakasone and Tanabe. 1986. Microbiol. Immunol. 30:1075. Availability
2. Benkerroum, Misbah, Sandine and Elaraki. 1993. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 59:607.
3. Blamey, Chiong, Lopez and Smith. 1999. J. Microbiol. Methods. 38:169. Bacto Peptone
4. Taylor, Dworkin, Pumper and Evans. 1972. Exp. Cell Res. 74:275. AOAC BAM COMPF EP EPA SMD SMWW USDA USP
5. Sakoda and Fukusho. 1998. In Vitro Cell. Dev. Biol. Anim. 34:53.
6. Feldman and Krishnan. 1995. Environ. Health Perspect. 103 Suppl 7:129. Cat. No. 211840 Dehydrated 100 g
7. Miller, Bottema, Stathis, Tokes and Feldman. 1986. Endocrinology. 119:1362. 211677 Dehydrated 500 g
8. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
211820 Dehydrated 2 kg
9. Horowitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC 211830 Dehydrated 10 kg
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
10. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and BiTek Peptone
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
11. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
Cat. No. 254820 Dehydrated 10 kg
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

434
 Peptone Iron Agar

Peptone Iron Agar

Intended Use Levine reported that ferric citrate was a much more sensitive
Peptone Iron Agar is used for detecting hydrogen sulfide indicator of hydrogen sulfide production than lead acetate,
production by microorganisms. producing a medium that gave definite reactions within 12
hours. Peptone Iron Agar is a modification of Levines original
Summary and Explanation formula in which peptone has been included with proteose
Levine and co-workers1,2 described a medium containing peptone and the more soluble ferric ammonium citrate is used
proteose peptone and ferric citrate for detection of hydrogen
sulfide production by coliform bacteria. They demonstrated
in place of ferric citrate.
O
that such a medium served to differentiate strains that were
Tittsler and Sandholzer3 compared Peptone Iron Agar with lead
acetate agar for the detection of hydrogen sulfide and found
P
Voges-Proskauer negative, methyl-red positive and citrate
that Peptone Iron Agar had the advantage of giving earlier
positive from other members of the Enterobacteriaceae.
reactions and clearer results.

User Quality Control Principles of the Procedure

Identity Specifications Peptones are the nitrogen sources in Peptone Iron Agar. Ferric
Difco Peptone Iron Agar ammonium citrate and sodium thiosulfate are used to detect
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. H2S production. Sodium glycerophosphate is a buffering com-
Solution: 3.6% solution, soluble in purified water pound. Agar is the solidifying agent.
upon boiling. Solution is light amber, very
slightly to slightly opalescent. Formula
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent. Difco Peptone Iron Agar
Reaction of 3.6% Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2 Peptone ................................................................... 15.0 g
Proteose Peptone ....................................................... 5.0 g
Cultural Response Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.5 g
Difco Peptone Iron Agar Sodium Glycerophosphate ......................................... 1.0 g
Prepare the medium per label directions. Stab inoculate tubes with fresh Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................... 0.08 g
cultures and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours. Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY H2S PRODUCTION
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 Good Directions for Preparation from
Escherichia coli 25922 Good Dehydrated Product
Proteus vulgaris 6380 Good + 1. Suspend 36 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
thoroughly.
serotype Enteritidis 13076 Good + 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
pletely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

Procedure
1. Obtain a pure culture of a test organism. Pick the center of
a single colony with an inoculating needle.
2. Inoculate a tube of Peptone Iron Agar by the stab method.
Stab the needle to within 1/4 to 1/2 inch of the bottom.
Withdraw the needle following the initial line of inoculation.
3. Incubate tubes at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
Uninoculated Escherichia coli Salmonella 4. Read tubes for growth and hydrogen sulfide production.
Tube ATCC 25922 enteritidis
ATCC 13076
Expected Results
Any blackening of the medium along the line of inoculation or
throughout the butt indicates hydrogen sulfide production.
For a complete discussion of the identification of coliform bacteria,
refer to appropriate references.4-6

435
Section III
OP Peptone Iron Agar, cont.

References Availability
1. Levine, Vaughn, Epstein and Anderson. 1932. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 29:1022.
2. Levine, Epstein and Vaughn. 1934. Am. J. Public Health 24:505.
Difco Peptone Iron Agar
3. Tittsler and Sandholzer. 1937. Am. J. Public Health 27:1240. Cat. No. 289100 Dehydrated 500 g
4. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
6. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

Peptone Water
Intended Use Formula
Peptone Water is used for cultivating nonfastidious organisms, Difco Peptone Water
for studying carbohydrate fermentation patterns and for Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
performing the indole test. Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Summary and Explanation
The formulation of Peptone Water makes it useful for cultivating Directions for Preparation from
nonfastidious organisms.1 This nonselective medium has been used Dehydrated Product
as a basal medium for biochemical tests such as carbohydrate 1. Dissolve 15 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
fermentation patterns and production of indole.1,2 2. Warm slightly with frequent agitation to completely
dissolve the powder.
Principles of the Procedure 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Peptone Water contains peptone as a source of carbon, nitrogen, 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
vitamins and minerals. Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic stable, typical control cultures.
balance of the medium. For Determining Carbohydrate Fermentation Patterns
1. Add 1.8 mL 1% phenol red solution to 1 liter rehydrated
User Quality Control Peptone Water. Mix thoroughly.
Identity Specifications 2. Dispense into test tubes containing inverted Durham vials.
Difco Peptone Water 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Dehydrated Appearance: Cream-white to light tan, free-flowing, 4. Aseptically add sufficient sterile carbohydrate solution to
homogeneous. yield a 1% final concentration. Rotate each tube to
Solution: 1.5% solution, soluble in purified water thoroughly distribute the carbohydrate.
upon warming with frequent agitation.
Solution is light amber, clear to very
slightly opalescent.
Procedure
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to slightly opales-
For Determining Carbohydrate Fermentation Patterns
cent. 1. Inoculate tubes with test organisms.
Reaction of 1.5% 2. Incubate tubes at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2 3. Observe for color change.
Cultural Response For Performing the Indole Test
Difco Peptone Water 1. Inoculate tubes with test organisms.
Growth/Indole Reaction 2. Incubate tubes at 35 2C for 24 or 48 hours.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with a fresh culture 3. Using an inoculation loop, spread a loopful of culture over
and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours. Indole reaction is read using
the BBL DrySlide Indole test slide (Cat. No. 231748).
the reaction area of a BBL DrySlide Indole slide.
4. Examine the reaction area for appearance of a pink color
INDOLE
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY REACTION within 30 seconds.
Escherichia coli 25922 Good Positive
Expected Results
Carbohydrate Fermentation For Determining Carbohydrate Fermentation Patterns
Prepare the medium per label directions with the addition of phenol
red and dextrose. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
Acid is produced when carbohydrates are fermented. This is
indicated by a yellow color in the medium. Gas production is indi-
INOCULUM ACID
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY PRODUCTION cated by the presence of gas bubbles in the fermentation tube.
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good Positive For Performing the Indole Test
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good Positive
Observe for the formation of a pink color in the DrySlide reaction
area, which indicates a positive test for indole production.
436
 Petragnani Medium

References Availability
1. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Difco Peptone Water
2. Balows, Hausler, Herrmann, Isenberg and Shadomy (ed.). 1991. Manual of clinical microbiology, ISO
5th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Cat. No. 218071 Dehydrated 500 g
BBL DrySlide Indole

Cat. No. 231748 Pkg. 25 x 3 slides

Petragnani Medium
Intended Use Slanted media should be incubated in a horizontal plane until
O
Petragnani Medium is used in qualitative procedures for the inoculum is absorbed. Tubes should have screw caps loose P
the isolation and cultivation of mycobacteria from clinical for the first 3 weeks to permit circulation of carbon dioxide
specimens. for the initiation of growth. Thereafter, to prevent dehydration,
tighten caps; loosen briefly once a week. Stand tubes upright
Summary and Explanation if space is a problem.
Petragnani Medium was described by Norton et al. in their NOTE: Cultures from skin lesions suspected to contain
paper regarding culture methods for tubercle bacilli.1,2 M. marinum or M. ulcerans should be incubated at 25-33C
Petragnani Medium is glycerolated egg medium made with a for primary isolation; cultures suspected to contain M. avium
milk base containing malachite green. Somewhat more inhibi- or M. xenopi exhibit optimum growth at 40-42C.3 Incubate
tory than ATS and Lowenstein-Jensen media because of higher a duplicate culture at 35-37C.
dye content, Petragnani Medium is particularly recommended
for old specimens and for use in parallel with other media for Expected Results
isolation of tubercle bacilli.2,3 Cultures should be read within 5-7 days after incubation and
once a week thereafter for up to 8 weeks.
Principles of the Procedure Record Observations.3
The casein peptone, potato flour and skim milk contain amino
acids, proteins and carbohydrates necessary for the growth of 1. Number of days required for colonies to become macro-
mycobacteria. The glycerol is a source of energy. Asparagine scopically visible. Rapid growers have mature colonies
promotes the initiation of growth and increases the growth within 7 days. Slow growers require more than 7 days for
rate. Egg yolk is a source of lipids for mycobacterial metabo- mature colony forms.
lism. Partial inhibition of bacteria is achieved by the presence 2. Pigment production
of the malachite green dye. White, cream or buff = Nonchromogenic (NC)
Lemon, yellow, orange, red = Chromogenic (Ch)
Precaution
Laboratory procedures involving mycobacteria require special Stained smears may show acid-fast bacilli, which are reported
equipment and techniques to minimize biohazards.4 only as acid-fast bacilli unless definitive tests are performed.

Procedure References
1. Norton, Thomas and Broom. 1932. Am. Rev. Tuberc. 25:378.
The test procedures are those recommended by the Centers for 2. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) for primary isolation 3. Cernoch, Enns, Saubolle and Wallace. 1994. Cumitech 16A, Laboratory diagnosis of the mycobac-
terioses. Coord. ed., Weissfeld. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
from specimens containing mycobacteria.3 N-Acetyl-L-cysteine- 4. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Health, 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
sodium hydroxide (NALC-NaOH) solution is recommended No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
as a gentle but effective digesting and decontaminating agent. 5. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby,
Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
These reagents are provided in the BBL MycoPrep Myco- 6. Metchnock, Nolte and Wallace. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
bacterial Specimen Digestion/Decontamination Kit. For
detailed decontamination and culturing instructions, consult Availability
an appropriate reference.3,5,6 BBL Petragnani Medium
Media may be inoculated up to the expiration date and Cat. No. 221389 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.
incubated for up to 8 weeks. Following inoculation, keep test
containers shielded from light and place them in a suitable
system providing an aerobic atmosphere enriched with
carbon dioxide. Incubate at 35 2C.

437
Section III
OP Phenol Red Agar Media

Phenol Red Agar Media

Phenol Red Agar Base Phenol Red Mannitol Agar
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Phenol Red Agar Base is used with added carbohydrate in dif- Peptone provides the carbon and nitrogen required for good
ferentiating pure cultures of bacteria based on fermentation growth of a wide variety of organisms. Sodium chloride
reactions. maintains the osmotic balance of the medium. Agar is
Phenol Red Mannitol Agar is used for differentiating pure the solidifying agent. Phenol red serves as a pH indicator,
cultures of bacteria based on mannitol fermentation reactions. turning from red-orange to yellow when acid is produced
during fermentation of the carbohydrate; if the carbohy-
Summary and Explanation drate is not fermented, the medium remains red or becomes
Phenol Red Agar Base with added carbohydrate is well suited alkaline (darker red).
for the study of fermentation reactions of microorganisms.1-4
However, while liquid media are generally employed in studying Formulae
fermentation reactions, many bacteriologists prefer a solid BBL Phenol Red Agar Base
medium for this purpose. One advantage of a solid fermenta- Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
tion medium is that it permits observation of fermentation Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
reactions under both aerobic and anaerobic conditions. Deep Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
tubes can provide sufficiently anaerobic conditions for the Phenol Red ............................................................... 18.0 mg
growth of obligate anaerobic bacilli. Any gas formation that Difco Phenol Red Mannitol Agar
occurs during a reaction is indicated by splitting of the agar or Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g
accumulation of gas bubbles in the base. Beef Extract ................................................................ 1.0 g
Phenol Red Agar Base supports excellent growth of many fas- D-Mannitol ............................................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
tidious bacteria. It is a basal medium free of any fermentable Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
carbohydrates that could give erroneous interpretations. With Phenol Red ............................................................... 25.0 mg
the exception of the omitted carbohydrate, it is a complete *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

medium prepared with phenol red as an indicator of reaction

Directions for Preparation from
changes. Phenol Red Agar Base permits the user to prepare
any quantity of medium needed, adding to different portions
Dehydrated Product
BBL Phenol Red Agar Base
any fermentable substance to be tested. Usually a final
concentration of 0.5-1% of a test carbohydrate is added. An 1. Suspend 30 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Add
entire series of carbohydrate agars can be made up readily, carbohydrate, 5-10 g per L if desired. Mix thoroughly.
conveniently and economically. Phenol Red Mannitol Agar 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
already contains the specified carbohydrate. pletely dissolve the powder. If addition of carbohydrate
causes a fall in pH, readjust.
3. Dispense and autoclave at 118C for 15 minutes. Alterna-
tively, sterile carbohydrate solution may be added to cooled
autoclaved solution.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
Difco Phenol Red Mannitol Agar
1. Suspend 41 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
pletely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Uninoculated Typical positive Typical negative
Tube reaction with reaction with stable, typical control cultures.
acid and gas positive growth

438
 Phenol Red Agar Media, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Phenol Red Mannitol Agar BBL Phenol Red Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Pink, free-flowing, homogeneous. Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, without obvious
Solution: 4.1% solution, soluble in purified foreign material.
water upon boiling. Solution is Solution: 3.0% solution, soluble in purified water
orange-red to red, very slightly opal- upon boiling. Solution is medium to

Prepared Appearance:
escent.
Red to orange-red, slightly opalescent.
dark, red-orange to rose, clear to
slightly hazy. O
Reaction of 4.1%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, red-orange to rose,
clear to slightly hazy.
P
Reaction of 3.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
Cultural Response
Difco Phenol Red Mannitol Agar Cultural Response
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate slant tubes with BBL Phenol Red Agar Base
fresh cultures by stabbing the butt and streaking the slant surface. Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours. 35 2C for 12-18 hours.

ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY ACID GAS ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY

Escherichia coli 25922 Good + + Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good

Salmonella choleraesuis Pseudomonas aeruginosa 10145 102-103 Good
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 Good + +
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 Good +
Streptococcus mitis 9895 Good

Procedure 2. When inoculating tubes, stab gently and do not use a loop.
1. Inoculate the medium by stabbing into the butt and streak- Rough stabbing or using a loop to stab may give the false
ing the surface of the slant. If desired, inoculate obligate appearance of gas production when mechanical splitting
anaerobic bacteria into melted medium that has been cooled of the medium is what actually occurred.
to 45C. Allow the agar to solidify prior to incubation.
2. Incubate at 35 2C for 4-48 hours (or anaerobically for References
1. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th edition. Mosby,
24-72 hours). Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
3. Examine periodically for growth, acid production and gas 2. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken. (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th
edition. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
formation. 3. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams. 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriology,
9th edition. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
4. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th edition. Elsevier Sci-
Expected Results ence Publishing Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.

Fermentation of the carbohydrate is indicated by a change Availability

in the color of the medium from red to canary yellow. Gas
BBL Phenol Red Agar Base
formation is indicated by the collection of gas bubbles in the
Cat. No. 211502 Dehydrated 500 g
base or by splitting of the agar.
Difco Phenol Red Mannitol Agar

For expected reactions with organisms on Phenol Red Agar Cat. No. 210310 Dehydrated 500 g
Base supplemented with various carbohydrates, refer to
appropriate references.1-5

Limitations of the Procedure

1. The addition of some carbohydrates to the basal medium
may cause an acid reaction. To restore the original pH (and
color of the medium), add 0.1N sodium hydroxide on a
drop-by-drop basis. Take care not to make the medium too
alkaline, which would prevent fermentation from occur-
ring within the usual incubation period.

439
Section III
OP Phenol Red Broth Base

Phenol Red Broth Base

Phenol Red Broth with Carbohydrates
Intended Use In 1950, Vera recommended using pancreatic digest of casein
Phenol Red Broth Base and Phenol Red Broth with carbohydrates in fermentation test media.3 She found that casein peptone could
are used for the determination of fermentation reactions in the be used with the pH indicator phenol red in fermentation tests
differentiation of microorganisms. with a high degree of accuracy.

Summary and Explanation Principles of the Procedure

The ability of an organism to ferment a specific carbohydrate Phenol Red Broth Base is a complete medium without added
incorporated in a basal medium, resulting in the production of carbohydrate. It is used as a negative control for fermentation
acid or acid and gas, has been used to characterize a specific studies or as a base for the addition of carbohydrates by
species or group of bacteria, aid in the differentiation between the aseptic addition of BBL Taxo Carbohydrate Discs.
genera and aid in species differentiation.1,2 Pancreatic digest of casein provides nutrients and is low in

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
BBL Phenol Red Broth Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material.
Solution: 1.5% solution, soluble in purified water.
Solution is medium, orange-red to rose-
red, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Medium, orange-red to rose-red, clear
to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 1.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
BBL Phenol Red Broth with Dextrose or Lactose or

Mannitol or Sucrose Uninoculated Typical positive Typical negative

Tube reaction with reaction with
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous acid and gas positive growth
material.
Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified water.
Solution is medium, orange-red to rose-
red, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Medium, orange-red to rose-red, clear
to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2 (pH 7.4 0.1 for Sucrose
Broth)

Cultural Response
BBL Phenol Red Broth Base or Phenol Red Broth with Dextrose or Lactose or Mannitol or Sucrose
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures and incubate at 35 2C for 42-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC BASE DEXTROSE LACTOSE MANNITOL SUCROSE
Escherichia coli 25922 K AG AG AG
Enterococcus faecalis 33186 A A A
Proteus vulgaris 8427 K A K AG
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 10145 K K
Salmonella typhimurium* 14028 K K K
Shigella flexneri 9199 K A K A K
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 A
*S. choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis serotype Typhimurium
KEY: A = growth with acid (yellow color)
K = growth with alkaline reaction (red color)
G = gas formation

For quality control organisms for prepared tubes of Phenol Red Broth with the various carbohydrates, consult the BBL Quality Control and Product
Information Manual for Plated and Tubed Media.4

440
 Phenol Red Broth Base, cont.

fermentable carbohydrate.3 The pH indicator, phenol red, is inoculate tubes of media with growth from an 18- to 24-hour
used to detect acid production. pure culture using an inoculating loop. Incubate tubes with
loosened caps at 35 2C for 18-48 hours either in an aerobic
Phenol Red Broths, prepared with a final concentration of
or anaerobic atmosphere depending on the organism being
one-half percent carbohydrate, are convenient for the deter-
evaluated. Incubation up to 30 days may be necessary for a
mination of fermentation reactions. Most of the end products
negative result.
of carbohydrate fermentation are organic acids which, in the
presence of phenol red, produce a color change in the medium
Expected Results
from red to yellow.1 If gas is produced during the fermentation
Examine the unsupplemented tubes at intervals during the
reaction, it is collected in the inverted Durham tube.
incubation process for growth. If supplemented with carbo-
No yellow color should occur in the control tube. If it does, hydrate, observe for the presence of acid (yellow color) and O
the results cannot be correctly interpreted since acid has been
produced without fermentation.
gas (as evidenced by displacement of the liquid in the Durham P
tubes).

Formulae Consult appropriate references for typical reactions produced

BBL Phenol Red Broth Base
by various microbial species.1,2, 5-7
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g References
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g 1. MacFaddin. 2000. Biochemical tests for identification of medical bacteria, 3rd ed., Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Phenol Red ............................................................... 18.0 mg 2. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 3. Vera. 1950. Am. J. Public Health, 40:1267.
4. Becton, Dickinson and Co. 2001. BBL quality control and product information manual for plated
BBL Phenol Red Carbohydrate Broths and tubed media, BD Diagnostic Systems, Sparks, Md.
5. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsvier Science
Contain the above ingredients with, per liter, 5.0 g of the speci- Publishing Co., New York, N.Y.
fied carbohydrate. 6. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriol-
ogy, 9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
7. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
Directions for Preparation from American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Dehydrated Product
BBL Phenol Red Broth Base Availability
1. Dissolve 15 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. BBL Phenol Red Broth Base
Cat. No. 211506 Dehydrated 500 g
2. Add carbohydrate (5-10 g) , if desired. Agar (0.5-1.0 g) 221897 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
may be added if it is desirable to minimize convection
BBL Phenol Red Dextrose Broth
currents in the broth. When agar is added, the medium Cat. No. 211514 Dehydrated 500 g
should be boiled briefly.
BBL Phenol Red Lactose Broth

3. Dispense in suitable tubes and insert Durham tubes when
Cat. No. 211519 Dehydrated 500 g
gas fermentation is to be recorded.
4. Autoclave at 118C for 15 minutes. Tubes should be packed BBL Phenol Red Mannitol Broth

Cat. No. 211527 Dehydrated 500 g

loosely to ensure free access of steam.
5. Alternatively, the base may be autoclaved and carbohydrates BBL Phenol Red Sucrose Broth

Cat. No. 211533 Dehydrated 500 g

added aseptically as needed.
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using BBL Phenol Red Broth with Carbohydrates and

Durham Tube
stable, typical control cultures.
Cat. No. 221671 Prepared Tubes with Adonitol Pkg. of 10*
BBL Phenol Red Broth with Dextrose or Lactose or 221673 Prepared Tubes with Arabinose Pkg. of 10*
Mannitol or Sucrose 221675 Prepared Tubes with Cellobiose Pkg. of 10*
221677 Prepared Tubes with Dextrose Pkg. of 10*
1. Dissolve 20 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Agar 221679 Prepared Tubes with Dulcitol Pkg. of 10*
(0.5-1.0 g) may be added if it is desirable to minimize con- 221681 Prepared Tubes with Glycerol Pkg. of 10*
vection currents in the broth. When agar is added, the 221683 Prepared Tubes with Inositol Pkg. of 10*
221685 Prepared Tubes with Inulin Pkg. of 10*
medium should be boiled briefly. 221687 Prepared Tubes with Lactose Pkg. of 10*
2. Dispense and insert Durham tubes for detection of gas 221688 Prepared Tubes with Lactose Ctn. of 100*
formation. 221689 Prepared Tubes with Maltose Pkg. of 10*
221691 Prepared Tubes with Mannitol Pkg. of 10*
3. Autoclave at 118C for 15 minutes. 221693 Prepared Tubes with Raffinose Pkg. of 10*
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 221695 Prepared Tubes with Rhamnose Pkg. of 10*
stable, typical control cultures. 221697 Prepared Tubes with Salicin Pkg. of 10*
221699 Prepared Tubes with Sorbitol Pkg. of 10*
221701 Prepared Tubes with Sucrose Pkg. of 10*
Procedure 221703 Prepared Tubes with Trehalose Pkg. of 10*
If Taxo Carbohydrate Discs are being used with tubes of 221705 Prepared Tubes with Xylose Pkg. of 10*
Phenol Red Broth Base, aseptically add the appropriate disc to *Store at 2-8C.

the tubes prior to inoculation. Using a heavy inoculum,

441
 Section III
OP Phenylalanine Agar

Phenylalanine Agar
Ferric Chloride Reagent
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Phenylalanine Agar is used for the differentiation of enteric The phenylalanine serves as the substrate for enzymes which
bacilli on the basis of their ability to produce phenylpyruvic are able to deaminate it to form phenylpyruvic acid. The addition
acid by oxidative deamination. Ferric Chloride Reagent is used of 3-5 drops of a 10% aqueous ferric chloride solution (or a
to visualize the phenylalanine deamination reaction. 12% aqueous ferric chloride solution acidified with 2.5 mL
of concentrated HCl per 100 mL of reagent) to the cultures
Summary and Explanation following incubation results in the appearance of a light
Henrickson initially demonstrated that Proteus species were to deep green color (positive reaction) or no color change (nega-
able to transform phenylalanine to phenylpyruvic acid.1 Singer tive reaction). In a positive reaction, any phenylpyruvic acid
and Volcani,2 Hamida and LeMinor3 and others studied the present will react with the ferric salt in the reagent to give a
reaction and emphasized its usefulness in the taxonomy of the green color.
Enterobacteriaceae.
Buttiaux et al. developed a culture medium containing
Formulae
Difco Phenylalanine Agar
phenylalanine in their study of the characteristic biochemical
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
properties of the Proteus and Providencia genera. 4 This DL-Phenylalanine ........................................................ 2.0 g
medium was designed to differentiate members of the Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Proteeae from other members of the Enterobacteriaceae Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g
by the ability of organisms in the genera within the Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g
Proteeae to deaminate phenylalanine to phenylpyruvic BBL Phenylalanine Agar
acid by enzymatic activity. 5 Proteus, Providencia and Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Morganella species possess this capability. This formula DL-Phenylalanine ........................................................ 2.0 g
conforms to the modified formula of Ewing et al.6 Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Ferric Chloride Reagent is used to determine if a specific Sodium Phosphate ..................................................... 1.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g
microorganism is capable of producing phenylpyruvic acid
from phenylalanine.5

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Phenylalanine Agar BBL Phenylalanine Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous. Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
Solution: 2.3% solution, soluble in purified material.
water upon boiling. Solution is light Solution: 2.3% solution, soluble in purified
amber, slightly opalescent. water upon boiling. Solution is pale
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent. to light, yellow to tan, clear to slightly
hazy.
Reaction of 2.3%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2 Prepared Appearance: Pale to light, yellow to tan, slightly
hazy.
Cultural Response Reaction of 2.3%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
Difco Phenylalanine Agar

Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate slant tubes and
incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. After reading for growth, add
Cultural Response
3-5 drops of a 10% aqueous solution of ferric chloride and gently BBL Phenylalanine Agar
rotate to loosen the growth. Read reactions after 1-5 minutes. Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate slant tubes and
incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. After reading growth, add 3-5
INOCULUM COLOR
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY REACTION
drops of a 10% aqueous solution of ferric chloride and gently rotate to
loosen the growth. Read reactions after 1-5 minutes.
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 102-103 Good
Proteus vulgaris 13315 102-103 Good + (green) INOCULUM COLOR
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY REACTION
Providencia alcalifaciens 9886 102-103 Good + (green) 2 3
Escherichia coli 25922 10 -10 Good
Proteus vulgaris 8427 102-103 Good + (green)

442
 Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar

Difco/BBL Ferric Chloride Reagent Droppers 35 2C for 4 hours or 18-24 hours. If the inoculum is suffi-
Contain 0.5 mL of 10% ferric chloride in aqueous solution. ciently heavy, a 4-hour incubation period should be adequate.5
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Directions for Preparation from Expected Results

Dehydrated Product Following the incubation period, add 3-5 drops of the ferric
chloride reagent to the slants. Gently rotate the tube to loosen
1. Suspend 23 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
the growth. Observe for the production of a green color
thoroughly.
(positive reaction) within 1-5 minutes.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder. Members of Proteus, Morganella and Providencia genera
3. Dispense in tubes for slant cultures.
4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
produce positive results. Most other genera within the
Enterobacteriaceae are negative for phenylpyruvic acid
O
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance production.7,8 P
using stable, typical control cultures.
References
Procedure 1.
2.
Henrikson. 1950. J. Bacteriol. 60:225.
Singer and Volcani. 1955. J. Bacteriol. 69:303.
Using a heavy inoculum, inoculate tubed slants with growth from 3.
4.
Hamida and LeMinor. 1956. Ann. Inst. Pasteur. 90:671.
Buttiaux, Osteux, Fresnoy and Moriamez. 1954. Ann. Inst. Pasteur Lille. 87:375.
an 18- to 24-hour pure culture. Incubate tubes aerobically at 5. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
6. Ewing, Davis and Reavis. 1957. Public Health Lab. 15:153.
7. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriology,
9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
8. Farmer. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). Manual of clinical microbiology,
7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Availability
Difco Phenylalanine Agar
BAM
Cat. No. 274520 Dehydrated 500 g
BBL Phenylalanine Agar

BAM
Cat. No. 211537 Dehydrated 500 g
221342 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
Difco/BBL Ferric Chloride Reagent (10%)
Uninoculated Proteus vulgaris Cat. No. 261190 Droppers, 0.5 mL Ctn. of 50
Tube with Reagent ATCC 13315
*Store at 2-8C.

Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar

Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Phenylethyl Alcohol (PEA) Agar is a selective medium for the Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar and Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar
isolation of gram-positive organisms, particularly gram-positive with 5% Sheep Blood support the growth of gram-positive
cocci, from specimens of mixed gram-positive and gram-nega- bacterial species, due to the content of peptones, which supply
tive flora.1 The medium, when supplemented with 5% sheep nitrogen, carbon, sulfur and trace nutrients. Sodium chloride
blood, should not be used for determination of hemolytic reac- maintains osmotic equilibrium. Sheep blood is a source
tions since atypical reactions may be observed. of growth factors. Phenylethyl alcohol is bacteriostatic for
gram-negative bacteria since it selectively and reversibly
Summary and Explanation inhibits DNA synthesis.3
After noting that phenylethyl alcohol exhibited an inhibitory
effect on gram-negative bacteria with only slight effect on gram- Formula
positive organisms, Lilley and Brewer incorporated the chemical BBL Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar
in an infusion agar base as a selective agent for the isolation Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 15.0 g
of gram-positive bacteria. 2 Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar, Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal .................................. 5.0 g
unsupplemented or supplemented with 5% sheep blood, is used Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
in the microbiology laboratory to inhibit gram-negative -Phenylethyl Alcohol ................................................ 2.5 g
bacteria, particularly Proteus, in specimens containing a mixed Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
bacterial flora.
443
 Section III
OP Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar, cont.

Staphylococcus aureus
User Quality Control ATCC 25923

Identity Specifications
BBL Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Slightly moist and softly clumped,
resembling brown sugar in consis-
tency and appearance.
Solution: 4.25% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
to medium, yellow to tan, clear to
slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear to
slightly hazy.
Reaction of 4.25%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C with 3-5% CO2 for 18-24 hours.
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY
Proteus mirabilis 12453 104-105 Partial to complete
inhibition
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-104 Good
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 103-104 Good, alpha hemolysis
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 103-104 Good, beta hemolysis

Directions for Preparation from References

1. Ruoff, Whiley and Beighton. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
Dehydrated Product of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. Lilley and Brewer. 1953. J. Am. Pharm. Assoc. 42:6.
1. Suspend 42.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. 3. Dowell, Hill and Altemeir. 1964. J. Bacteriol. 88:1811.
Mix thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- Availability
pletely dissolve the powder. BBL Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cat. No. 211539 Dehydrated 500 g
4. Cool to 45C and add 5% sterile defibrinated blood, if BBL Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
desired. BS10 MCM7
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using United States and Canada
Cat. No. 221179 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
stable, typical control cultures. 221277 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Japan
Procedure Cat. No. 212086 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci- 251277 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
mens. Incubate plates 24-48 hours at 35 2C in an aerobic Mexico
atmosphere supplemented with carbon dioxide. Cat. No. 252569 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

Expected Results
Examine plates for growth of gram-positive organisms.

Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2

Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 is used for the preparation of The formula for phosphate buffer was specified by the American
dilution blanks for use in the examination of waters, dairy Public Health Association (APHA) for use in diluting test
products, foods and other materials. samples. Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 still is specified for use in
diluting water, dairy products and foods in microbiological
methods. In the compendia of methods for the microbiological
examination of water1 and dairy products,2 the addition of

444
 Phosphate Buffered Saline

magnesium chloride is recommended. In the APHA publica- Directions for Preparation from
tion, Compendium of Methods for the Microbiological Ex- Dehydrated Product
amination of Foods,3 this product is referred to as Butterfieldss 1. Prepare a stock solution, according to standard procedure,
Buffered Phosphate Diluent and does not contain magnesium by dissolving 34.0 g in purified water and make up to 1 L.
chloride. The Bacteriological Analytical Manual4 describes the 2. Dispense and sterilize, if desired. Store under refrigeration.
product as Butterfields Phosphate Buffered Dilution Water 3. Prepare a working solution for use in dilution blanks, ac-
(also without magnesium chloride). cording to standard procedure, by adding 1.25 mL of stock
phosphate buffer solution to purified water* and make up
Principles of the Procedure to 1 L (1:800).
Phosphate buffer is used in the preparation of dilution blanks
for use in microbiological testing rather than unbuffered
4. Dispense in bottles or tubes to provide a post-autoclaving
volume of 99 2.0 mL or 9 0.2 mL or other appropriate
O
water in order to standardize this potential variable due to quantity. P
the wide variation in the pH of purified water from multiple 5. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. The working solution
sources. pH will vary depending on glassware used and may require
additional adjustment to achieve 7.2 0.5 after autoclaving.
Formula
BBL Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 *NOTE: If desired, add 5.0 mL of magnesium chloride
Approximate Formula* Per Liter solution (81.1 g MgCl6 H2O per liter of purified water).
Potassium Dihydrogen Phosphate ............................ 26.22 g
Sodium Carbonate ..................................................... 7.78 g References
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 1. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wasterwater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
2. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
User Quality Control Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Identity Specifications 4. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
BBL Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2
Dehydrated Appearance: White, fine, homogeneous, free of extra-
neous material.
Availability
BBL Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2
Solution: 3.4% solution, soluble in purified water.
Solution is colorless, clear to trace hazy. AOAC BAM COMPF SMD SMWW USDA
Cat. No. 211544 Dehydrated 500 g
Prepared Appearance: Colorless, clear to trace hazy.
Reaction of 3.4% Solution
(after autoclaving) at 25C: pH 7.2 0.5

Phosphate Buffered Saline

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Phosphate Buffered Saline (PBS) is used in cold enrichment In cold enrichment procedures, stool specimens or other materials
procedures to enhance the recovery of Yersinia enterocolitica. are inoculated into the saline solution and refrigerated at 4C for
up to 3 weeks.2-6 Sodium chloride maintains osmotic equilib-
Summary and Explanation rium and potassium phosphate salts buffer the medium to
Phosphate Buffered Saline is a modified phosphate buffered maintain an alkaline pH. Y. enterocolitica can survive and grow
substrate used in cold enrichment procedures. Cold enrich- at the low temperature, while most other microorganisms
ment procedures utilize the ability of Y. enterocolitica to grow cannot.
at 4C to improve the recovery of certain serotypes of this
bacterium from foods, environmental samples and clinical Procedure
specimens from asymptomatic carriers and patients who are Inoculate Phosphate Buffered Saline with approximately 1 g
beyond the acute (diarrheal) stage of illness.1-7 Direct plating of stool specimen and refrigerate at 2-8C for up to 3 weeks.
of clinical specimens without cold enrichment is adequate for Subculture may be done at 3, 7, 14 and, for maximal recovery,
recovery of Y. enterocolitica during the acute stage of illness. 21 days to CIN Agar and/or MacConkey Agar.1
The addition of certain nutrients to Phosphate Buffered Saline
Expected Results
is recommended for cold enrichment with meats, vegetable
Observe for growth of Yersinia enterocolitica upon subculture.
products and other food samples.8

445
 Section III
OP Phosphate Buffered Saline, cont.

References Availability
1. Farmer, Wells, Griffin and Wachsmuth. 1987. In Wentworth (ed.), Diagnostic procedures for
bacterial infections, 7th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
BBL Phosphate Buffered Saline
2. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science Cat. No. 297485 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10
Publishing Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
3. Greenwood, Flanigan, Pickett and Martin. 1975. J. Clin. Microbiol. 2:559.
4. Eiss. 1975. Scand. J. Infect. Dis. 7:249.
5. Toma and Deidrick. 1975. J. Clin. Microbiol. 2:478.
6. Pai, Sorger, LaFleur, Lackman and Marks. 1979. J. Clin. Microbiol. 9:712.
7. Swaminathan, Harmon and Mehlman. 1982. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 52:151.
8. Mehlman, Aulisio and Sanders. 1978. J. Assoc. Anal. Chem. 61:761.

Phytone Peptone Phytone Peptone, UF

Select Soytone Bacto Soytone
Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Phytone Peptone, Phytone Peptone, UF, Select Soytone and Phytone Peptone is an animal-free soy peptone. Phytone Peptone
Bacto Soytone are used in media for the cultivation of a large retains the high vitamin and high carbohydrate content of the soy
variety of organisms, including fungi. plant tissue. It is an excellent plant peptone for the cultivation of

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications
Difco Select Soytone
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, homogeneous powder.
Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified water. Solution is clear to moderately hazy.
Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5-7.5
Bacto Soytone

Dehydrated Appearance: Light to medium tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.

Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified water. Solution is light to medium amber, clear to very slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5-7.5

Cultural Response
Biochemical Reactions
Bacto Soytone
Prepare sterile solutions of Bacto Soytone as directed below. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
TEST TEST SOLUTION ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT
Fermentable Carbohydrates 2% Escherichia coli 25922 ~107 Slight positive
Indole Production 0.1% Escherichia coli 29552 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Acetylmethylcarbinol 0.1% with Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Production 0.5% dextrose
Hydrogen Sulfide 1% Salmonella choleraesuis 14028 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Production subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium

Growth Response
Bacto Soytone
Prepare a sterile solution with 2% Bacto Soytone, 0.5% sodium chloride and 1.5% agar. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate plates at
35 2C for 18-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Brucella suis 4314* Undiluted Good
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good
*If this strain is not available, verify performance with a known isolate.
Continued

446
 Phytone Peptone, cont.

Identity Specifications
BBL Phytone Peptone
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous powder.
Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified water. Solution is clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5-7.5
BBL Phytone Peptone, UF
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous powder.
Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified water. Solution is clear to slightly hazy, no flocculation.
Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5-7.5 O
Cultural Response P
Biochemical Reactions
BBL Phytone Peptone
Prepare a sterile solution of Phytone Peptone as directed below. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
TEST TEST SOLUTION ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT
Fermentable Carbohydrates 2% Escherichia coli 29552 ~107 Positive
Indole Production 0.1% Escherichia coli 29552 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Acetylmethylcarbinol 0.1% with Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Production 0.5% dextrose
Hydrogen Sulfide Production 1% Citrobacter freundii 8454 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive

Growth Response
BBL Phytone Peptone
Prepare a sterile solution of peptone agar without (plain) and with 5% sheep blood (SB) using 10 g of Phytone Peptone, 2.5 g of sodium chloride and
6.5 g of agar in 500 mL of purified water. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate plates at 35 2C for 2-3 days (incubate streptococci with
3-5% CO2).
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY PLAIN RECOVERY WITH SB
Staphylococcus aureus 6538P 103-104 Good N/A
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 103-104 N/A Good, alpha hemolysis
Streptococcus pyogenes 49117 104-105 Good Good, beta hemolysis

fungi and fastidious types of bacteria, such as members of the Media formulations containing Phytone Peptone or Bacto
Clostridium and Neisseria genera.1 It has been used in cell Soytone are specified in various standard methods for
culture applications due to its high carbohydrate content. multiple applications.4-8
Phytone Peptone, UF is an ultra-filtered peptone that was
Principles of the Procedure
developed specifically for the tissue culture market. Its nitrogen
Phytone Peptone, Phytone Peptone, UF, Select Soytone and Bacto
content combined with the naturally occurring vitamins has
Soytone are enzymatic digests of soybean meal. The nitrogen
demonstrated remarkable growth support with monoclonal
source in the soy peptones contains naturally occurring high
antibodies and protein expression. It has an endotoxin level
concentrations of vitamins and carbohydrates of soybean.
of less than 500 EU/g, which makes it an ideal substitute or
supplement for fetal bovine serum in cell culture applications.
Typical Analysis
Select Soytone demonstrates excellent growth support for Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of this
Escherichia coli. Select Soytone is also used in molecular manual.
genetics media such as Select APS Super Broth. Subtle differ-
ences in the hydrolysation process give Select Soytone improved Precautions9
performance in cell culture. 1. Biosafety Level 2 practices, containment equipment and
facilities are recommended for activities with clinical speci-
Bacto Soytone was found to be effective in the recovery of
mens of human or animal origin containing or potentially
stressed E. coli.2 It was found that Bacto Soytone with the
containing pathogenic Brucella spp.
addition of 7 vitamins replaced yeast extract as an economical
2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and
alternative for the production of lactic acid by Lactobacillus
facilities are recommended for all manipulations of cultures
rhamnosus.3 It should be noted that Bacto Soytone utilizes an
of the pathogenic Brucella spp. and for experimental
enzyme in the digestion of the soy flour that has been sourced
animal studies.
from animal.
447
 Section III
OP Phytone Peptone, cont.

6. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 2000. Improved enumeration methods for the recreational
Directions for Preparation from water quality indicators: Enterococci and Escherichia coli. EPA-821/R-97/004. Office of Water,
USEPA, Washington, D.C.
Dehydrated Product 7. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington D.C.
Refer to the final concentration of Phytone Peptone, Phytone 8. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1998. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food Safety
Peptone, UF, Select Soytone and Bacto Soytone in the formula and Inspection Service, USDA, Washington, D.C.
9. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
of the medium being prepared. Add appropriate product as Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
required.
Availability
Procedure BBL Phytone Peptone
See appropriate references for specific procedures using Phytone AOAC BAM EPA SMWW USDA
Peptone, Phytone Peptone, UF, Select Soytone and Bacto Cat. No. 211906 Dehydrated 454 g
Soytone. 298147 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
292450 Dehydrated 10 kg

Expected Results BBL Phytone Peptone, UF

Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results. Cat. No. 210931 Dehydrated 500 g
210936 Dehydrated 10 kg

References Difco Select Soytone

1. Power (ed.). 1988. Manual of BBL products and laboratory procedures, 6th ed. Becton Dickinson Cat. No. 212488 Dehydrated 500 g
Microbiology Systems, Cockeysville, Md. 212489 Dehydrated 10 kg
2. Chou and Cheng. 2000. Int. J. Food Microbiol. 61:127.
3. Kwon, Lee, Lee, Chang, Keun and Chang. 2000. Enzyme Microb. Technol. 26:209. Bacto Soytone
4. Horowitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md. AOAC BAM EPA SMWW USDA
5. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
national, Gaithersburg, Md.
Cat. No. 243620 Dehydrated 500 g
243610 Dehydrated 10 kg

Phytone Yeast Extract Agar

Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Phytone Yeast Extract Agar is used for the selective isolation Carmichael and Kraus modified the classical formula of
of dermatophytes, particularly Trichophyton verrucosum, and Sabouraud medium in order to selectively recover Trichophy-
other pathogenic fungi from routine clinical specimens. ton verrucosum, one of the species associated with ringworm,
from clinical specimens.1,2
User Quality Control Phytone Yeast Extract Agar is used in Petri dishes for early
Identity Specifications detection of dermatophytes. Skin scrapings or hairs are rubbed
BBL Phytone Yeast Extract Agar over the surface of the agar. Blood agar plates should be
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous inoculated in parallel to permit isolation of pyogenic cocci
material. which may also be present. The medium is of value for
Solution: 7.2% solution, soluble in purified water increasing the yield of isolation of ringworm organisms and
upon boiling. Solution is light to dark,
yellow to tan, clear to moderately
for early identification, especially of T. verrucosum.
hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light to dark, yellow to tan, clear to Principles of the Procedure
moderately hazy. The incorporation of the antimicrobial agents streptomycin and
Reaction of 7.2% chloramphenicol in the medium inhibits growth of bacterial
Solution at 25C: pH 6.6 0.2 species and promotes detection of pathogenic fungi.
Cultural Response
BBL Phytone Yeast Extract Agar
Formula
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures BBL Phytone Yeast Extract Agar
as described below and incubate at 25 2C for 7 days. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal ................................ 10.0 g
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Aspergillus niger 16404 Undiluted Good Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g
Candida albicans 10231 Undiluted Good Streptomycin .............................................................. 0.03 g
Chloramphenicol ........................................................ 0.05 g
Penicillium roquefortii 9295 Undiluted Good
Agar ......................................................................... 17.0 g
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 104-105 Complete inhibition *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Trichophyton verrucosum 38485 Undiluted Good

448
 Plate Count Agar

Directions for Preparation from Expected Results

Dehydrated Product After the plates have been incubated for 2-3 days, examine
1. Suspend 72 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix them directly under the microscope. If microcolonies are
thoroughly. observed, they should be transferred to fresh plates before the
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to original plates become overgrown.
completely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. References
1. Carmichael and Kraus. 1959. Alberta Med. Bull. 24:201.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 2. Carmichael. 1961. Mycopathologia 14:129.
stable, typical control cultures.
Availability
Procedure BBL Phytone Yeast Extract Agar O
Inoculate skin scrapings, hair or other materials directly on Cat. No. 211546 Dehydrated 500 g P
the agar surface of Petri plates. Incubate plates in an aerobic
atmosphere at 25-30C or at 30-37C if T. verrucosum is
suspected.

Plate Count Agar/Standard Methods Agar

(Tryptone Glucose Yeast Agar)
Intended Use Formula
Plate Count Agar and Standard Methods Agar (Plate Count Difco Plate Count Agar or BBL Standard Methods Agar
Agar; Tryptone Glucose Yeast Agar) are used for obtaining Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
microbial plate counts from milk and dairy products, foods, Yeast Extract .............................................................. 2.5 g
water and other materials of sanitary importance. Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Summary and Explanation *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Plate Count Agar and Standard Methods Agar are made ac-
Directions for Preparation from
cording to the American Public Health Association (APHA)
formulation.1 They are recommended for obtaining plate
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 23.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
counts for milk and other dairy products and may also be used
Mix thoroughly.
to determine the sanitary quality of foods, water and other
materials.1-5 Uninoculated Pasteurized
Plate Milk
Each lot of dehydrated medium base is subjected to the APHA
quality control test and has met the APHA requirements.1,6
Appropriate references should be consulted for standard plate count
procedures recommended by the APHA and other agencies.1-5
The Hycheck hygiene contact slide is a double-sided paddle
containing two agar surfaces for immersing into fluids or
sampling surfaces. There are two slides with Plate Count Agar:
one contains Plate Count Agar on one side of the slide and the
medium with triphenyltetrazolium chloride (TTC) on the other
side; the second slide contains Plate Count Agar with TTC on
both sides.

Principles of the Procedure

Enzymatic digest of casein provides the amino acids and other
complex nitrogenous substances necessary to support bacterial
growth. Yeast extract primarily supplies the B-complex
vitamins, and dextrose is an energy source. TTC is reduced to
the insoluble formazan inside the bacterial cell producing red-
colored colonies.

449
 Section III
OP Plate Count Agar, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Plate Count Agar BBL Standard Methods Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Dehydrated Appearance: Fine to medium fine, may contain
neous. small tan and white flecks, homoge-
Solution: 2.35% solution, soluble in purified neous, free of extraneous material.
water upon boiling. Solution is light Solution: 2.35% solution, soluble in purified
amber, slightly opalescent. water upon boiling. Solution is light
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent. to medium, yellow to tan, clear to
slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 2.35%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear
to slightly opalescent.
Cultural Response Reaction of 2.35%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
Difco Plate Count Agar

Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the pour plate
method and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
Cultural Response
BBL Standard Methods Agar
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the pour plate
Lacbobacillus johnsonii 11506 30-300 Good method and incubate Bacillus stearothermophilus at 55-60C and 35
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good 2C for all other organisms for 18-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Bacillus subtilis 6633 30-300 Good
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Bacillus stearothermophilus 7953 30-300 Good
completely dissolve the powder. Enterococcus hirae 10541 30-300 Good
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Lactobacillus rhamnosus 7469 30-300 Good
stable, typical control cultures. Lactobacillus delbruecki
subsp. lactis 122315 30-300 Good
Procedure
Consult appropriate references for information regarding the
Availability
processing and inoculation of food, water samples and other
Difco Plate Count Agar
materials.1-5 AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF EPA ISO SMD SMWW USDA
Liquefy the medium in pour tubes and bottles by heating in Cat. No. 247930 Dehydrated 100 g
247940 Dehydrated 500 g
boiling water. Cool to 45-50C. 247910 Dehydrated 2 kg
247920 Dehydrated 10 kg
Usually 1 mL samples of appropriate dilutions of the test sample
are pipetted into sterile Petri dishes and molten, cooled Difco Hycheck Hygiene Contact Slides
medium is added followed by gently mixing to distribute the Cat. No. 290531 Plate Count Agar // Plate Count Agar with
TTC (20 slides)*
sample dilution throughout the agar. Incubate hardened plates 290451 Plate Count Agar with TTC // Plate Count Agar
for 48 3 hours at 32 1C (dairy products) or 35 0.5C with TTC (20 slides)*
(foods) in an aerobic atmosphere. BBL Standard Methods Agar
AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF EPA ISO SMD SMWW USDA
Expected Results Cat. No. 212455 Dehydrated 100 g
Follow recommended procedures for the counting of colonies 211638 Dehydrated 500 g
211641 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
and the reporting of results.1-5 298084 Dehydrated, LitrePak 20 1.0 L
United States and Canada
References Cat. No. 297030 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
1. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American 221030 Prepared Pour Tubes Pkg. of 10
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
2. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods, 299094 Prepared Bottles 10 200 mL
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. 299102 Prepared Bottles 10 500 mL
3. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. Europe
4. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. vol. 1. AOAC Cat. No. 254483 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
5. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter- Japan
national, Gaithersburg, Md.
6. Marth (ed.). 1978. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 14th ed. American
Cat. No. 251536 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. 251543 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
251546 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 24*
251506 Prepared RODAC Plates Pkg. of 30*
*Store at 2-8C.

450
 Polypeptone Peptone

m Plate Count Broth

Intended Use Formula
m Plate Count Broth is used for enumerating microorganisms Difco m Plate Count Broth
by membrane filtration. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Tryptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
Summary and Explanation Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.0 g
m Plate Count Broth is a nonselective general-purpose medium *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
for determining bacterial counts from food and water samples
using the membrane filtration procedure. Also known as m Directions for Preparation from O
Tryptone Glucose Yeast Broth or m Standard Methods Broth,
this medium has the same formulation as Plate Count Agar
Dehydrated Product P
1. Suspend 17 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
except that agar has been omitted and the ingredients are thoroughly.
employed in twice the concentration as in the solid medium.1
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder.
Principles of the Procedure
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Yeast extract is a source of trace elements, vitamins and amino
acids. Peptone provides carbon and nitrogen for bacterial metabo- 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
lism. Dextrose is a fermentable carbohydrate and carbon source. stable, typical control cultures.

User Quality Control Procedure

1. Collect samples according to recommended guidelines.1,2
Identity Specifications 2. Place a sterile absorbent pad in each 50 9 mm Petri dish.
Difco m Plate Count Broth 3. Saturate the pad with approximately 2.0-2.4 mL of
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige to beige, free-flowing, prepared medium.
homogeneous.
4. Place an inoculated membrane filter, inoculated side up, on
Solution: 1.7% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light to
the saturated pad.
medium amber, clear to slightly opales- 5. Incubate in a 35 2C incubator for 18-24 hours.
cent, may have a very slight precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear to Expected Results
slightly opalescent, may have a very After incubation, count the colonies on the surface of the
slight precipitate.
filter. The colonies can be subcultured to appropriate media
Reaction of 1.7%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 for identification, if desired.

Cultural Response References

1. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
Difco m Plate Count Broth wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 2. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
35 2C for 18-24 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY Availability
Enterococcus faecalis 19433 102-3102 Good Difco m Plate Count Broth
Escherichia coli 25922 102-3102 Good Cat. No. 275120 Dehydrated 500 g
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-3102 Good
Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 102-3102 Good

Polypeptone Peptone
Intended Use utilized in culture media for the production of trypsin inhibitor
Polypeptone Peptone is used as a component in microbiological by Cephalosporium sp.,1 in the production of bacterial cellulose
culture media. by Acetobacter sp. A92 and in the production of succinic acid
from whey by Anaerobiospirillum succiniciproducens.3 In
Summary and Explanation addition, Polypeptone Peptone has been used in the mass
Researchers have found that Polypeptone Peptone meets production of luciferase-bacterial magnetic particles by
the nutritional requirements of various bacteria, fungi and recombinant Magnetospirillum magneticum AMB-14 and the
mammalian cells, where a single source of casein meat production of a novel tumor-killing factor by human
peptone has been unsatisfactory. Polypeptone Peptone has been macrophage-monocyte hybridomas.5
451
 Section III
OP Polypeptone Peptone, cont.

Media formulations containing Polypeptone Peptone are speci- digest of animal tissue. Polypeptone Peptone provides nitrogen,
fied in standard methods for various applications.6-11 amino acids and vitamins in microbiological culture media.

Principles of the Procedure Typical Analysis

Polypeptone Peptone is a mixture of peptones made up of equal Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of this
parts of pancreatic digest of casein and peptic digest of animal manual.
tissue. Polypeptone Peptone includes the high content of amino
acids and small polypeptides characteristic of pancreatic digest Directions for Preparation from
of casein and the larger polypeptides characteristic of peptic Dehydrated Product
Refer to the final concentration of Polypeptone Peptone in the
User Quality Control formula of the medium being prepared. Add product as
required.
Identity Specifications
BBL Polypeptone Peptone Procedure
Dehydrated Appearance: Light to dark, yellow to tan, fine,
homogeneous, free of extraneous
See appropriate references for specific procedures using
material. Polypeptone Peptone.
Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light to medium, Expected Results
yellow to tan, clear to slightly hazy. Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8-7.5
References
1. Tsuchiya and Kimura. 1978. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 35:631.
Cultural Response 2. Son, Heo, Kim and Lee. 2001. Biotechnol. Appl. Biochem. 33(Pt 1):1.
3. Lee, Lee, Kwon, Lee and Chang. 2000. Appl. Microbiol. Biotechnol. 54:23.
BBL Polypeptone Peptone

4. Yang, Takeyama, Tanaka and Matsunaga. 2001. Enzyme Microbiol. Technol. 29:13.
Prepare a sterile solution of peptone agar without (plain) and with 5% 5. Taniyama, Yoshida and Furuta. 1988. J. Immunol. 141:4061.
6. Horowitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC
sheep blood (SB) using 10 g of Polypeptone Peptone, 2.5 g of sodium International, Gaithersburg, Md.
chloride and 6.5 g of agar in 500 mL of purified water. Adjust final pH 7. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate plates at 35 2C for 2-3 days International, Gaithersburg, Md.
8. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
(incubate streptococci with 3-5% CO2). foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
9. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/
INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY The national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
ORGANISM ATCC CFU PLAIN WITH SB 10. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Salmonella choleraesuis 11. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1998. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food Safety
subsp. choleraesuis and Inspection Service, USDA, Washington, D.C.
serotype Typhi 19430 103-104 Good N/A
Staphylococcus aureus 6538P 103-104 Good N/A Availability
Streptococcus BBL Polypeptone Peptone
pneumoniae 6305 103-104 N/A Good, alpha
AOAC BAM COMPF SMWW USDA USP
hemolysis
4 5 Cat. No. 211910 Dehydrated 454 g
Streptococcus pyogenes 49117 10 -10 Good Good, beta
297108 Dehydrated 10 kg
hemolysis

Potato Dextrose Agar Potato Dextrose Broth

Intended Use of certain dermatophytes and for differentiation of atypical
Potato Dextrose Agar conforms with specifications of The varieties of dermatophytes by pigment production.4
United States Pharmacopeia (USP). Potato Dextrose Broth is a general-purpose broth medium for
Potato Dextrose Agar is used for the cultivation and enumera- yeasts and molds (Potato Dextrose Agar without the agar).
tion of yeasts and molds.
Principles of the Procedure
Potato Dextrose Broth is used for cultivating yeasts and molds.
Potato starch and dextrose support luxuriant growth of fungi.
Lowering of the pH of the medium to approximately 3.5 with
Summary and Explanation
sterile tartaric acid achieves the inhibition of bacterial growth.
Potato Dextrose Agar is recommended by the American
It is important, however, to avoid heating the medium after it
Public Health Association for plate counts of yeasts and
has been acidified because this action results in the hydrolysis
molds in the examination of foods and dairy products.1,2 It is
of the agar and impairs its ability to solidify.
recommended in the USP for use in the performance of
Microbial Limit Tests.3 It is also used for the stimulation of
sporulation (slide preparations), maintenance of stock cultures
452
 Potato Dextrose Agar, cont.

Candida albicans Aspergillus niger

User Quality Control ATCC 10231 ATCC 16404

Identity Specifications
Difco Potato Dextrose Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.9% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light amber,
slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 3.9%
pH 5.6 0.2
Solution at 25C:
Difco Potato Dextrose Broth

O
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. P
Solution: 2.4% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is very, very light
amber, clear to very slightly opalescent .
Prepared Appearance: Very, very light amber, clear to very
slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 2.4%
Solution at 25C: pH 5.1 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Potato Dextrose Agar Saccharomyces Trichophyton
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at cerevisiae mentagrophytes
ATCC 9763 ATCC 9533
25-30C for 18-48 hours (up to 7 days for T. mentagrophytes).
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Aspergillus niger 16404 103-104 Good
Candida albicans 10231 103-104 Good
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 103-104 Good
Trichophyton mentagrophytes 9533 Undiluted Good

Difco Potato Dextrose Broth

Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
25 2C for 40-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
2 3
Aspergillus niger 16404 10 -10 Good
Candida albicans 10231 102-103 Good
Lactobacillus rhamnosus 7469 102-103 Fair to good
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 102-103 Good

Formulae 4. To alter the reaction of the agar medium to pH 3.5, cool

Difco Potato Dextrose Agar the base to 45-50C and aseptically add an appropriate
Approximate Formula* Per Liter amount of sterile 10% tartaric acid to each liter of
Potato Starch ............................................................. 4.0 g medium. Mix well. Do not reheat the medium.
Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Difco Potato Dextrose Broth stable, typical control cultures.
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. Procedure
Consult appropriate references for information concerning
Directions for Preparation from the processing and inoculation of specimens.1-3,5,6 Liquefy the
Dehydrated Product medium in pour tubes by heating in boiling water. Cool to
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water: 45-50C and pour into sterile Petri dishes. Allow to solidify
Difco Potato Dextrose Agar 39 g; for a minimum of 30 minutes.
Difco Potato Dextrose Broth 24 g.
Streak the specimen onto prepared media with a sterile inoculat-
Mix thoroughly.
ing loop to obtain isolated colonies. When used for determining
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
yeast and mold counts, the medium should be adjusted to a pH
completely dissolve the powder.
of approximately 3.5 with sterile tartaric aid and used in the
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
standard pour plate technique. Incubate the plates at 25-30C in
an inverted position (agar side up) with increased humidity.

453
 Section III
OP Potato Dextrose Agar, cont.

Tubed slants are used primarily for the cultivation and Limitations of the Procedure
maintenance of pure cultures. They should be inoculated with 1. Heating Potato Dextrose Agar after acidifying hydrolyzes
an inoculating loop and incubated under the same conditions the agar and may destroy the solidifying properties.
as the plated medium. 2. Potato Dextrose Agar is not a differential medium.
For isolation of fungi from potentially contaminated specimens, Perform microscopic examination and biochemical tests to
a selective medium should be inoculated along with the identify isolates to genus and species if necessary.
nonselective medium. For isolation of fungi causing systemic
mycoses, two sets of media should be inoculated, with one set References
1. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
incubated at 25-30C and a duplicate set at 35 2C. All foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
2. Marshall, (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
cultures should be examined at least weekly for fungal growth Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
and should be held for 4-6 weeks before being reported as national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
4. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
negative. vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
5. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
Inoculation of Potato Dextrose Broth with pure cultures of American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
6. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
yeasts can assist in their identification. Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Expected Results Availability

After sufficient incubation, the plates, which were streak- Difco Potato Dextrose Agar
inoculated, should show isolated colonies in streaked areas AOAC BAM BS10 CCAM CMPH COMPF MCM7 SMD USP
Cat. No. 213300 Dehydrated 100 g
and confluent growth in areas of heavy inoculation. The
213400 Dehydrated 500 g
colonies in pour plates should be counted and the results 213200 Dehydrated 2 kg
expressed as yeast and molds counts per gram or milliliter of BBL Potato Dextrose Agar
material, taking into account the applicable dilution factor. AOAC BAM BS10 CCAM CMPH COMPF MCM7 SMD USP
Growth from tubes inoculated with pure cultures may be used United States and Canada
Cat. No. 296272 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 20*
for biochemical and/or serological testing. 297945 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Ctn. of 100*
221002 Prepared Pour Tubes, 20 mL Pkg. of 10
For broth, observe cultures for surface growth and pellicle 297241 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10
formation. 299906 Bottle, 500 mL Pkg. of 10
Japan
Cat. No. 251545 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
251821 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Ctn. of 100*
251544 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 24*
Difco Potato Dextrose Broth
Cat. No. 254920 Dehydrated 500 g
*Store at 2-8C.

Potato Flakes Agar Potato Flakes CC Agar

Potato Flakes Agar with Chloramphenicol and
Gentamicin
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
These media are used in qualitative procedures for the cultivation The medium stimulates the production of morphological features,
of pathogenic and opportunistic fungi encountered in clinical such as conidia configurations, improving the ability to identify
mycology. fungi by their particular morphological structures. Correct
identification of fungi causing human disease depends upon
Summary and Explanation visualization of characteristic morphological features.
Potato Flakes Agar induces sporulation, enhancing the
The antimicrobial agents chloramphenicol, cycloheximide
production of morphological structures required for the
and gentamicin are incorporated in various combinations to
identification of many pathogenic and opportunistic fungi.1
improve the recovery of pathogenic fungi from specimens
The addition of chloramphenicol and cycloheximide (CC) or
heavily contaminated with bacteria and saprophytic fungi.2
gentamicin provides selectivity for more effective isolation
Chloramphenicol is a broad-spectrum antibiotic that inhibits
and identification of medically significant fungi.
a wide range of gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria.
Cycloheximide is an anti-fungal agent that inhibits saprophytic

454
 Potato Infusion Agar

fungi, while permitting the growth of pathogenic species. Gen- Expected Results
tamicin is an aminoglycoside antibiotic that inhibits growth of Examine the media for growth. Microscopic examination of
gram-negative bacteria. the colony aids in identification.6

Procedure References
Consult appropriate references for information about the 1. Rinaldi. 1982. J. Clin. Microbiol. 15:1159.
2. Merz and Roberts. 1995. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
processing and inoculation of specimens such as tissues, skin microbiology, 6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Baron, Peterson and Finegold. 1994. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 9th ed. Mosby-Year
scrapings, hair, nail clippings, etc.3-5 Book, Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
4. Kwon-Chung and Bennett. 1992. Medical mycology. Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia, Pa.
For isolation of fungi causing cutaneous mycoses, a nonselective 5. Koneman, Allen, Janda, Schreckenberger and Winn. 1997. Color atlas and textbook of diagnostic
microbiology, 5th ed. Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, Pa.
medium should be inoculated along with a selective medium.
Incubate the plates at 25-30C in an inverted position (agar side
6. Larone. 1995. Medically important fungi: a guide to identification, 3rd ed. American Society for
Microbiology, Washington, D.C. O
up) with increased humidity. For isolation of fungi causing Availability P
systemic mycoses, two sets of media should be inoculated with BBL Potato Flakes Agar
one set incubated at 25-30C and a duplicate set at 35 2C. BS10 CMPH MCM7
Cat. No. 298328 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
All cultures should be examined at least weekly for fungal
growth and should be held for 4-6 weeks before being reported BBL Potato Flakes CC Agar

Cat. No. 298327 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*

as negative.
BBL Potato Flakes Agar with Chloramphenicol

and Gentamicin
Cat. No. 292259 Prepared Slants Ctn. of 100*
*Store at 2-8C.

Potato Infusion Agar

Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Potato Infusion Agar is used for cultivating Brucella, especially Potato Infusion Agar is prepared according to the formula used
in mass cultivation procedures. by Stockman and MacFadyean for the isolation of Brucella
abortus. Brucellosis is a zoonotic disease with a domestic-animal
User Quality Control reservoir.1 Transmission by milk, milk products, meat and direct
contact with infected animals is the usual route of exposure.1
Identity Specifications
Difco Potato Infusion Agar Brucella spp. grow on most standard laboratory media,
Dehydrated Appearance: Medium tan, free-flowing, homoge- including blood agar and chocolate agar, when incubated at
neous. 35C in a CO2-supplemented atmosphere; however, enriched
Solution: 4.9% solution, soluble in purified media are preferred.2 Potato Infusion Agar, enriched with
water with 2% glycerol upon boiling. glycerol, permits luxuriant growth of characteristic colonies
Solution is medium amber, slightly
opalescent, with a slight precipitate. of B. abortus from infected materials, and may be used with
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, slightly opalescent to excellent results in mass cultivation of Brucella in the prepara-
opalescent with a slight precipitate. tion of vaccines and antigens.
Reaction of 4.9% Solution
with 2% Glycerol at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2 Principles of the Procedure
Infusion from potatoes, beef extract and peptone provide the
Cultural Response
Difco Potato Infusion Agar
nitrogen, vitamins and amino acids in Potato Infusion Agar.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Dextrose and glycerol are used as a carbon source in this
35 2C under 5-10% CO2 for 40-72 hours. formula. Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance of
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
the medium. Agar is the solidifying agent.
Brucella abortus 4315* 102-103 Good
Brucella melitensis 4309* 102-103 Good
Formula
Brucella suis 4314* 102-103 Good Difco Potato Infusion Agar
Streptococcus Approximate Formula* Per Liter
pneumoniae 6305 30-300 Good Potatoes, Infusion from 200 g .................................... 4.0 g
Beef Extract ................................................................ 5.0 g
*Minimally, one strain of Brucella should be used for performance testing. These ATCC strains
should be used if available. Proteose Peptone ..................................................... 10.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

455
 Section III
OP Potato Infusion Agar, cont.

Precautions3 Procedure
1. Biosafety Level 2 practices, containment equipment and Incubate plates at 35 2C in 5-10% CO2 for 10 days.1 For a
facilities are recommended for activities with clinical speci- complete discussion on the inoculation and identification of
mens of human or animal origin containing or potentially Brucella spp., consult appropriate references.1,2
containing pathogenic Brucella spp.
2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and Expected Results
facilities are recommended for all manipulations of cultures Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
of the pathogenic Brucella spp. and for experimental
animal studies. References
1. Shapiro and Wong. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Directions for Preparation from 2. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
St. Louis, Mo.
Dehydrated Product 3. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
1. Suspend 49 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.

containing 2% glycerol. Mix thoroughly.

2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Availability
Difco Potato Infusion Agar
completely dissolve the powder.
Cat. No. 251100 Dehydrated 500 g
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. The final medium will
contain a slight, rapidly-settling precipitate that will not Difco Glycerol

Cat. No. 228210 Bottle 100 g

interfere with product performance. 228220 Bottle 500 g
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

Presence-Absence Broth
Intended Use Formula
Presence-Absence Broth is used for detecting coliforms in Difco Presence-Absence Broth
treated water. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Summary and Explanation Lactose ....................................................................... 7.46 g
The Presence-Absence (P-A) test is a presumptive detection test Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.90 g
for coliforms in water. The test is a simple modification of the Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 3.93 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.35 g
multiple-tube procedure.1 One test sample, 100 mL, is inoculated Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.35 g
into a single culture bottle to obtain qualitative information on Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.46 g
the presence or absence of coliforms based on the presence or Sodium Lauryl Sulfate ................................................ 0.05 g
Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 8.5 mg
absence of lactose fermentation.1 This test is based on the prin- *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
ciple that coliforms and other pollution indicator organisms should
not be present in a 100 mL water sample.2-8 Directions for Preparation from
Comparative studies with the membrane filter procedure Dehydrated Product
indicate that the P-A test may maximize coliform detection in 1. Suspend 91.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water to
samples containing many organisms that could overgrow prepare at triple strength. Mix thoroughly.
coliform colonies and cause problems in detection.1 The P-A 2. Warm gently to completely dissolve the powder.
test is described in standard methods for water testing1 and by 3. Dispense 50 mL amounts into screw cap 250 mL milk
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.9 dilution bottles.
4. Autoclave at 121C for 12 minutes, with total autoclave
Principles of the Procedure time not to exceed 30 minutes.
Beef extract and peptones provide the nitrogen, vitamins and 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
amino acids in Presence-Absence Broth. Lactose is the carbon stable, typical control cultures.
source in the formula. The potassium phosphates provide buff-
ering capacity; sodium chloride provides essential ions. Sodium
lauryl sulfate is the selective agent, inhibiting many organisms
except coliforms. Bromcresol purple is used as an indicator
dye; lactose-fermenting organisms turn the medium from purple
to yellow with or without gas production.

456
 Presence-Absence Broth, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Presence-Absence Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.05% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is purple, clear to very
slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Purple, clear to very slightly opalescent,
without significant precipitate.
Reaction of 3.05%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2 O
Cultural Response
P
Difco Presence-Absence Broth
Prepare Presence-Absence Broth in triple strength solution (9.15%).
Sterilize in 50 mL quantities in milk dilution bottles with capacity greater
than 150 mL. Add 100 mL of drinking water after medium is sterilized Presence-Absence Broth
and cooled to room temperature. Inoculate bottles with the test organ-
isms. Incubate bottles for 18-48 hours at 35 0.5C.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY COLOR CHANGE
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 102-103 Partial inhibition to fair No change to slight yellow
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good Yellow with or without gas production
Escherichia coli 13762 102-103 Good Yellow with or without gas production
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 102-103 Partial inhibition to fair No change

Procedure Limitations of the Procedure

1. Collect water samples as described in recommended proce- 1. The P-A test is only a presumptive test for coliforms.
dures.1,9 2. Extending the P-A test incubation period to 72 or 96 hours
2. Inoculate 50 mL of the sterile triple strength P-A Broth with will allow isolation of other indicator organisms. However,
100 mL of the water sample. indicator bacteria isolated after 48 hours incubation may
3. Invert the bottle a few times to achieve an even distribution not be considered for regulatory purposes.
of the medium throughout the test sample.
4. Incubate at 35 0.5C. References
1. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
5. Inspect for acid and gas production after 24 and 48 hours wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
2. Weiss and Hunter. 1939. J. Am. Water Works Assoc. 31:707.
of incubation. 3. Clark. 1968. Can. J. Microbiol. 14:13.
4. Clark. 1969. Can. J. Microbiol. 15:771.
5. Clark and Vlassoff. 1973. Health Lab. Sci. 10:163.
Expected Results 6. Clark and Pagel. 1977. Can. J. Microbiol. 23:465.
7. Clark. 1980. Can. J. Microbiol. 26:827.
A distinct yellow color indicates lactose fermentation, an acid 8. Clark, Burger and Sabatinos. 1982. Can. J. Microbiol. 28:1002.
9. Federal Register. 1989. National primary drinking water regulations; total coliforms (including
reaction. Gas production can be observed by a foaming reaction fecal coliforms and E. coli). Fed. Regist. 54:27544.
when the bottle is gently shaken. Any amount of gas and/or
acid is a positive presumptive test requiring confirmation.1 Availability
Report results as positive or negative for coliforms per 100 Difco Presence-Absence Broth
mL of sample. EPA SMWW
Cat. No. 219200 Dehydrated 500 g
Confirmation and differentiation of coliforms detected by the 219100 Dehydrated 2 kg
P-A test may be achieved by use of appropriate confirmatory 292862 Dehydrated 10 kg
media, incubation times and temperatures as outlined in BBL Presence-Absence Broth
appropriate references.1,9 EPA SMWW
Cat. No. 299543 Prepared Bottle, 50 mL Pkg. of 10

457
 Section III
OP Proteose Peptone

Bacto Proteose Peptone BiTek Proteose Peptone

Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 2 Bacto Proteose
Peptone No. 3 Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 4
Intended Use Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 2 was originally developed for
Bacto Proteose Peptone, BiTek Proteose Peptone, Bacto Proteose use in media for the production of diphtheria toxin. Bunney
Peptone No. 2 and Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 4 are used and Thomas17 reported good yield of diphtheria toxin with
in preparing microbiological culture media and in producing Proteose Peptone No. 2 in a simple peptone-sugar-sodium
bacterial toxins. acetate medium.
Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3 is used in preparing microbio- Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3 is a modification of Bacto
logical culture media. Proteose Peptone adapted for use in the preparation of chocolate
agar for propagation of Neisseria species and chocolate
Summary and Explanation tellurite agar for Corynebacterium diphtheriae. While investi-
Studies of peptic digests of animal tissue prepared under gating the nutritional values of the Bacto Proteose Peptones,
varying digestion parameters led to the development of Bacto Difco Laboratories found that Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3
Proteose Peptone, Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 2 and Bacto provides superior nutrition for fastidious microorganisms. It
Proteose Peptone No. 3. Data accumulated during these supports growth of streptococci, staphylococci, pneumococci,
studies demonstrated that no one peptone is the most suitable gonococci and other organisms that require a highly nutritious
nitrogen source for every microbiological application. substrate. For example, Ifediba and Vanderberg18 report that
Proteose Peptone No. 3 or Neopeptone (both being peptones
Bacto Proteose Peptone was originally developed to produce a
of meat origin) in addition to calf serum, was used as an
diphtheria toxin of high and uniform potency from cultures of
inexpensive replacement for human serum in cultivation of
Corynebacterium diphtheriae. Studies support the use of Bacto
Plasmodium falciparum, the causative agent of human
Proteose Peptone for production of diphtheria toxin, toxin-
malaria. Recently, because of the benefit of lower endotoxin
antitoxin mixtures and toxoid.1,2 Bacto Proteose Peptone is
levels, cell culture manufacturers have found significant yield
also valuable in the production of other bacterial toxins such
improvements in using Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3.
as Clostridium botulinum toxin,3 toxin from Clostridium
Consult standard methods for additional media formulations
perfringens,4 toxin of hemolytic streptococci,5 pneumococcus
containing Proteose Peptone No. 3.14-16,19
toxin6 and toxin from Salmonella pullorum.7
Many factors account for the suitability of Bacto Proteose Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 4 is a spray-dried version of Bacto
Peptone for the culture of fastidious pathogens, including the Proteose Peptone. It offers the same beneficial nutrients as Bacto
nitrogen components, buffering range and the high content of Proteose Peptone for growth promotion and toxin production
proteoses. These elements create an environment beneficial to with a wide range of fastidious microorganisms.
the maintenance of virulence and the elaboration of bacterial
Principles of the Procedure
by-products. Consequently, stock cultures are well preserved
Bacto Proteose Peptone, BiTek Proteose Peptone, Bacto
on media containing Bacto Proteose Peptone. Bacto Proteose
Proteose Peptone No. 2, Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3 and
Peptone may be used in culture medium for a variety of appli-
Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 4 are enzymatic digests of protein
cations, including production of substances from the culture
that provide nitrogen in a form that is readily available for
of bacteria, fungi and mammalian cells. Bacto Proteose Peptone
bacterial growth.
has been utilized in a medium for producing glycosidases
from Bacteroides fragilis8 and to stimulate amyloglucosidase
Typical Analysis
production by Aspergillus sp.9 It has been used to cultivate
Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of this
halophilic bacteria isolated from soil in Egypt for production
manual.
of polymers.10 Jan et al.11 reported that Proteose Peptone as
supplementation to a defined medium resulted in significant
Precautions20
increases in cell number and specific monoclonal antibody
1. Biosafety Level 2 practices, containment equipment and
production in a batch culture system. Proteose Peptone has
facilities are recommended for activities with clinical
also been used to provide nutrients for axenic culture of
specimens of human or animal origin containing or poten-
amoeba.12 Consult standard methods for additional media for-
tially containing pathogenic Brucella spp.
mulations containing Proteose Peptone.13-16
2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and
BiTek Proteose Peptone was developed to provide a product facilities are recommended for all manipulations of cultures
priced for the biotechnology/pharmaceutical market with of the pathogenic Brucella spp. and for experimental
growth characteristics to match Bacto Proteose Peptone. animal studies.
458
 Proteose Peptone, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Bacto Proteose Peptone Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, granules. Dehydrated Appearance: Golden tan, free-flowing granules.
Solution: 1.0%, 2.0% and 10.0% solutions, Solution: 1.0%, 2.0% and 10.0% solutions,
soluble in purified water. 1.0% solu- soluble in purified water. 1.0% solu-
tion is light amber, clear to very slightly tion is very light amber, clear to very
opalescent, may have a slight precipi- slightly opalescent, may have a slight
tate. 2.0% solution is light to medium precipitate. 2.0% solution is light
amber, clear to slightly opalescent, amber, clear to very slightly opales-
may have a slight precipitate. 10.0% cent, may have a slight precipitate. O
solution is medium dark amber,
slightly opalescent to opalescent, may
10.0% solution is light to medium
amber, clear to slightly opalescent, P
have a slight precipitate. may have a slight precipitate.
Reaction of 1.0% Reaction of 1.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.6-7.6 Solution at 25C: pH 7.0-7.6
BiTek Proteose Peptone Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 4
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, homogeneous. Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 1.0%, 2.0% and 10.0% solutions, Solution: 1.0%, 2.0% and 10.0% solutions,
soluble in purified water. 1.0% solu- soluble in purified water. 1.0% solu-
tion is very light amber, clear to very tion is very light amber, clear to very
slightly opalescent, may have a slight slightly opalescent, may have a slight
precipitate. 2.0% solution is light precipitate. 2.0% solution is light
amber, clear to slightly opalescent, amber, clear to slightly opalescent,
may have a slight precipitate. 10.0% may have a slight precipitate. 10.0%
solution is light to medium amber, solution is medium amber, slightly
clear to slightly opalescent, may have opalescent to opalescent, may have a
a slight precipitate. slight precipitate.
Reaction of 1.0% Reaction of 1.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5-7.5 Solution at 25C: pH 6.6-7.6
Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 2
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, granules.
Solution: 1.0%, 2.0% and 10.0% solutions,
soluble in purified water. 1.0% solu-
tion is light to medium amber, clear.
2.0% solution is medium amber, clear.
10.0% solution is medium to dark
amber, slightly opalescent to opales-
cent, may have a slight precipitate.
Reaction of 1.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2-7.6 Continued

Directions for Preparation from References

1. Kirkbride, Berthelsen and Clark. 1931. J. Immunol. 21:1.
Dehydrated Product 2. Hazen and Heller. 1931 J. Bacteriol. 23:195.
3. Nelson. 1927. J. Infect. Dis. 41:9.
Refer to the final concentration of Bacto Proteose Peptone, 4. Mollby and Holme. 1976 J. Gen. Microbiol. 96:137.
BiTek Proteose Peptone, Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 2, Bacto 5. Kirkbride and Wheeler. 1926. J. Immunol. 11:477.
6. Kneeland and Dawes. 1932. J. Exp. Med. 55:735.
Proteose Peptone No. 3 and Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 4 in 7. Hanks and Rettger. 1931. J. Immunol. 22:283.
8. Berg, Nord and Wadstrom. 1978. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 35:269.
the formula of the medium being prepared. Add appropriate 9. Mamo and Gessesse. 1999. J. Ind. Microbiol. Biotechnol. 22:622.
10. Hezayen, Rehm, Eberhardt and Steinbuchel. 2000. Appl. Microbiol. Biotechnol. 54:319.
product as required. 11. Jan, Jones, Emery and Al-Rubeai. 1994. Cytotechnol. 16:17.
12. Shukla, Kaul and Mehlotra. 1989. Indian J. Exp. Biol. 27:785.
13. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
Procedure Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
14. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1998. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food Safety
See appropriate references for procedures using Bacto Proteose and Inspection Service, USDA, Washington, D.C.
15. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 2000. Improved enumeration methods for the recreational
Peptone, BiTek Proteose Peptone, Bacto Proteose Peptone No. water quality indicators: Enterococci and Escherichia coli. EPA-821/R-97/004. Office of Water,
USEPA, Washington, D.C.
2, Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3 and Bacto Proteose Peptone 16. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
No. 4. wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
17. Bunney and Thomas. 1936. J. Immunol. 31:95.
18. Ifediba and Vanderberg. 1980. J. Parasitol. 66:236.
Expected Results 19. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
20. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results. Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.

459
 Section III
OP Proteose Peptone, cont.

Cultural Response
Biochemical Reactions
Bacto Proteose Peptone, BiTek Proteose Peptone, Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 2,
Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3 or Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 4
Prepare a sterile solution as directed below. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
TEST TEST SOLUTION ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT
Fermentable Carbohydrates 2% Escherichia coli 25922 ~107 Negative
Indole Production 0.1% Escherichia coli 29552 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Acetylmethylcarbinol 0.1% Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Production with 0.5% dextrose
Hydrogen Sulfide 1% Salmonella choleraesuis 14028 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Production subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium

Growth Response
Bacto Proteose Peptone, BiTek Proteose Peptone Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 2
or Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 4 Prepare a sterile solution with 2% Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 2, 0.5%
1. Prepare a sterile solution with 2% Bacto Proteose Peptone, BiTek sodium chloride and 1.5% agar. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate
Proteose Peptone or Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 4, 0.5% sodium and incubate plates at 35 2C for 18-48 hours under appropriate
chloride and 1.5% agar. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and atmospheric conditions.
incubate plates at 35 2C for 18-48 hours under appropriate
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
atmospheric conditions.
Brucella suis 4314* Undiluted Good
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good
Brucella suis 4314* Undiluted Good Staphylococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 30-300 Good** *If this strain is not available, verify performance with a known isolate.
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6303 30-300 Good
Prepare a sterile solution with 2% Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3, 0.5%
*If this strain is not available, verify performance with a known isolate.
**Fair to good for BiTek Proteose Peptone. sodium chloride and 1.5% agar. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate
and incubate plates at 35 2C for 18-48 hours under appropriate
2. For Bacto Proteose Peptone and Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 4 only, atmospheric conditions.
prepare KL Virulence Agar from individual ingredients using 2 g of Bacto
Proteose Peptone or Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 4. Sterilize, cool to ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
55-60C and add KL Virulence Enrichment. Dispense into Petri dishes Brucella suis 4314* Undiluted Good
containing Taxo KL Antitoxin Strips. Inoculate with a loopful of sur- Staphylococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good
face growth and incubate at 35 2C for 72 hours. Examine at 24, 48
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6303 30-300 Good
and 72 hours.
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 30-300 Good
ORGANISM ATCC RESULT *If this strain is not available, verify performance with a known isolate.

Corynebacterium diphtheriae
biotype intermedius 8032 Precipitin line
Corynebacterium diphtheriae
biotype gravis 8028 Precipitin line
Corynebacterium diphtheriae
biotype mitis 8024 Precipitin line

Availability Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3

BAM EPA SMWW USDA
Bacto Proteose Peptone

Cat. No. 211693 Dehydrated 500 g

EPA SMD SMWW USDA
212220 Dehydrated 2 kg
Cat. No. 211684 Dehydrated 500 g 212230 Dehydrated 10 kg
212010 Dehydrated 10 kg
Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 4
BiTek Proteose Peptone
Cat. No. 211715 Dehydrated 10 kg
Cat. No. 253310 Dehydrated 10 kg
Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 2
Cat. No. 212120 Dehydrated 500 g
212110 Dehydrated 10 kg

460
 Proteose No. 3 Agar

Proteose No. 3 Agar

Intended Use Formula
Proteose No. 3 Agar is used with added enrichment in isolating Difco Proteose No. 3 Agar
and cultivating Neisseria and Haemophilus. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 20.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 0.5 g
Summary and Explanation Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Proteose No. 3 Agar, introduced in 1938, is used for isolating Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Neisseria gonorrhoeae. When enriched with Hemoglobin and
Supplement B,1,2 Proteose No. 3 Agar recovers gonococci in a
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. O
manner comparable to more complex media, ranking only Directions for Preparation from P
slightly lower than GC media at 24 hours.3 Dehydrated Product
Chocolate agar may be prepared from Proteose No. 3 Agar 1. Suspend 45.5 g of the powder in 500 mL of purified water.
with the addition of 2% Hemoglobin. Hemoglobin provides Mix thoroughly.
X factor (hemin), required for growth of Haemophilus and 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
enhanced growth of Neisseria. completely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 50-60C.
The growth rate of Neisseria and Haemophilus spp. may be 4. Aseptically add 500 mL sterile 2% solution of Hemoglobin
improved with the addition of 1% Supplement B or VX, which and 10 mL of Supplement B or VX. Mix thoroughly.
provide the growth factors glutamine and cocarboxylase. 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
Principles of the Procedure
Proteose Peptone No. 3 provides nitrogen, vitamins and amino Procedure
acids. Dextrose is a carbon source. Sodium chloride maintains For a complete discussion of the isolation and identification
the osmotic balance in the medium, which is buffered by of Haemophilus or Neisseria spp., refer to the procedures
disodium phosphate. Agar is the solidifying agent. outlined in the references.4-6
Proteose Peptone No. 3 Agar is intended for use with supplemen-
tation by 2% Hemoglobin and Supplement B or Supplement VX. Expected Results
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
User Quality Control Limitation of the Procedure
Identity Specifications Proteose No. 3 Agar is intended for use with supplementation.
Difco Proteose No. 3 Agar

Although certain diagnostic tests may be performed directly
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. on this medium, biochemical and, if indicated, immunological
Solution: 9.1% (double strength) solution, testing using pure cultures are recommended for complete
soluble in purified water upon boil-
ing with frequent agitation. Solution
identification. Consult appropriate references for further
is light to medium amber, opalescent information.
with a slight flocculent precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: (Single strength) light amber, opales- References
cent with a slight flocculent precipitate. 1. Lankford, Scott, Cox and Cooke. 1943. J. Bacteriol. 45:321.
2. Lankford and Snell. 1943. J. Bacteriol. 45:410.
Reaction of 9.1% 3. Carpenter, Bucca, Buck, Casman, Christensen, Crowe, Drew, Hill, Lankford, Morton, Peizer, Shaw
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2 and Thayer. 1949. Am. J. Syphil. Gonorrh. Vener. Dis. 33:164.
4. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol.1. American Society for Mi-
crobiology, Washington, D.C.
Cultural Response 5. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Difco Proteose No. 3 Agar 6. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
Prepare the medium per label directions (with 2% Hemoglobin and St. Louis, Mo.

1% Supplement B). Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C under 5-10%

CO2 for 18-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
2 3
Haemophilus influenzae 10211 10 -10 Good
Neisseria gonorrhoeae 43070 102-103 Good
Neisseria meningitidis 13102 102-103 Good
Neisseria sicca 9913 102-103 Good

461
 Section III
OP Proteose No. 3 Agar, cont.

Availability Difco Supplement B

Cat. No. 227610 Lyophilized 6 10 mL with Reconstituting Fluid*
Difco Proteose No. 3 Agar

227620 Lyophilized 100 mL with Reconstituting Fluid*
Cat. No. 265100 Dehydrated 500 g
Difco Supplement VX
BBL Hemoglobin Solution 2%

Cat. No. 233541 Lyophilized 6 10 mL with Reconstituting Fluid*
Cat. No. 211874 Bottle 10 100 mL* 233542 Lyophilized 100 mL with Reconstituting Fluid*
BBL Hemoglobin, Bovine, Freeze-Dried *Store at 2-8C.
Cat. No. 212392 Dehydrated 500 g

Pseudomonas Agars
Pseudomonas Agar F Flo Agar
Pseudomonas Agar P Tech Agar
Intended Use the medium, thereby enhancing production of the fluorescent
These media conform with specifications of The United States pigment. Magnesium sulfate provides essential ions for
Pharmacopeia (USP). fluorescin production.5
Pseudomonas Agar F, also known as Flo Agar, is used for the Pseudomonas Agar P (Tech Agar) contains enzymatic digest of
enhancement of fluorescin production and Pseudomonas Agar gelatin to provide amino acids and other essential nitrogenous
P, also known as Tech Agar, is used for the enhancement of substances. The gelatin peptone is low in phosphorous to
pyocyanin production by Pseudomonas. minimize the inhibitory action on pyocyanin production.5
Magnesium, potassium and sulfate ions promote pyocyanin
Summary and Explanation production.5
Pseudomonas aeruginosa is widely distributed in soil, water Both media contain glycerol, which acts as a source of energy
and foods. It is frequently isolated from infusion fluids, and enhances pigment production.
disinfectants and cosmetics. The organism causes disease in
humans; e.g., ocular infections, burn wound infections and Formulae
respiratory tract infections.1 Difco Pseudomonas Agar F
Most strains of P. aeruginosa produce pyocyanin, a blue, Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
water- and chloroform-soluble, nonfluorescent pigment that Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g
diffuses into the surrounding medium.2 P. aeruginosa is the Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.5 g
only Pseudomonas species known to produce this pigment. Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 1.5 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
(However, certain strains are apyocyanogenic.)
Difco Pseudomonas Agar P
Some strains of P. aeruginosa produce other pigments, such as Approximate Formula* Per Liter
the brown-black pyomelanin, the red pyorubin or the yellow Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ..................................... 20.0 g
Magnesium Chloride .................................................. 1.4 g
pyoverdin. Pyoverdin is a water soluble fluorescent pigment Potassium Sulfate ..................................................... 10.0 g
often produced by P. aeruginosa and other pseudomonads Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
isolated from humans.2 The presence of these pigments can, *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

however, mask the production of pyocyanin.2

Directions for Preparation from
Pseudomonas Agar F (Flo Agar) and Pseudomonas Agar P Dehydrated Product
(Tech Agar) are modifications of two media (Medium A and 1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water containing 10
Medium B) that King et al. developed to enhance pigment g of glycerol:
production for improved differentiation of pseudomonads.3 Difco Pseudomonas Agar F 38 g;
Both media are listed in the USP for use in the performance of Difco Pseudomonas Agar P 46.4 g.
Microbial Limit Tests.4 Mix thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
Principles of the Procedure pletely dissolve the powder.
The 1:1 ratio of casein to meat peptone in Pseudomonas Agar 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
F (Flo Agar) is conducive to fluorescin production by 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Pseudomonas. These peptones contain phosphorus, which stable, typical control cultures.
is stimulatory to fluorescin production.5 The addition of
dipotassium phosphate increases the phosphorus content of

462
 Pseudomonas Agars, cont.

Pseudomonas aeruginosa
User Quality Control ATCC 9027

Identity Specifications Pseudomonas Pseudomonas

Agar F Agar P
Difco Pseudomonas Agar F

Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.

Solution: 3.8% solution, soluble in purified water
with 1% glycerol upon boiling. Solution
is light to medium amber, very slightly
to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal-
escent.
Reaction of 3.8%Solution O
with 1% glycerol at 25C:
Difco Pseudomonas Agar P
pH 7.0 0.2
P
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 4.64% solution, soluble in purified water
with 1% glycerol upon boiling. Solution
is light amber, very slightly to slightly
opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opales-
cent.
Reaction of 4.64% Solution
with 1% glycerol at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Pseudomonas Agar F or Pseudomonas Agar P
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 18-24 hours.
PIGMENT PRODUCTION PIGMENT PRODUCTION
INOCULUM PSEUDOMONAS PSEUDOMONAS

ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY AGAR F AGAR P
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 9027 30-300 Good Greenish yellow Blue
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 30-300 Good Greenish yellow Blue
Pseudomonas cepacia 25609 30-300 Good No pigment No pigment

Procedure Limitations of the Procedure

Specimens must first be isolated in pure culture on an appro- 1. Occasionally, a Pseudomonas culture is encountered that
priate medium. The isolate should be Gram-stained and will produce small amounts of pigment in the medium.
examined to confirm that morphology is appropriate for When this happens, a yellow-green color will appear on
Pseudomonas. Pseudomonas Agar F (Flo Agar) or a blue-green color on
Pseudomonas Agar P (Tech Agar). If a blue-green color
Using a sterile inoculating loop or needle, streak plates or slants
occurs on Pseudomonas Agar P (Tech Agar), confirmation
with several colonies from the subculture medium. Incubate
of the presence of pyocyanin can be made by extraction
plates or tubes, with caps loosened, at 35 2C for 18-24
with chloroform (CHCl3).5
hours. If the isolate fails to grow or grows slowly, reincubate
2. The formation of nonpigmented colonies does not
at 25-30C for 1-2 days and observe for growth and pigment
completely rule-out a Pseudomonas aeruginosa isolate.
production.6
3. A pyocyanin-producing Pseudomonas strain will usually
Expected Results also produce fluorescin. It must, therefore, be differentiated
Examine Pseudomonas Agar F (Flo Agar) under short wavelength from other simple fluorescent pseudomonads by other
UV light (254 nm) for fluorescin, a greenish-yellow fluorescent means. Temperature can be a determining factor as most
pigment in the colonies and surrounding medium. Examine other fluorescent strains will not grow at 35C. Rather, they
Pseudomonas Agar P (Tech Agar) for pyocyanin, a blue to grow at 25-30C.5
blue-green pigment seen in the colonies and surrounding
medium. Confirm the presence of pyocyanin by adding
References
1. Kiska and Gilligan. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
several drops of chloroform and observe for a blue color in microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
the chloroform. (Pyocyanin is more soluble in chloroform St. Louis, Mo.
3. King, Ward and Raney. 1954. J. Lab. Clin. Microbiol. 44:301.
than in water.) 4. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The U.S. pharmacopeia 25/The national
formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
5. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
6. Sewell. 1987. In Wentworth (ed.), Diagnostic procedures for bacterial infections, 7th ed. American
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

463
 Section III
OP Pseudomonas Agars, cont.

Availability BBL Tech Agar

BAM USP
Difco Pseudomonas Agar F

Cat. No. 296004 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10

BAM USP
Cat. No. 244820 Dehydrated 500 g Difco Glycerol

Cat. No. 228210 Bottle 100 g

BBL Flo Agar
228220 Bottle 500 g
BAM USP
Cat. No. 296003 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10
Difco Pseudomonas Agar P
BAM USP
Cat. No. 244910 Dehydrated 500 g

Pseudomonas Isolation Agar

Intended Use potent broad spectrum antimicrobial that is not active against
Pseudomonas Isolation Agar is used with added glycerol in Pseudomonas.3 As well as being selective, Pseudomonas Isola-
isolating Pseudomonas and differentiating Pseudomonas tion Agar is formulated to enhance the formation of the blue
aeruginosa from other pseudomonads based on pigment or blue-green pyocyanin pigment by Pseudomonas aeruginosa.
formation. The pigment diffuses into the medium surrounding growth.
Irgasan is a trademark of Ciba-Geigy.

Summary and Explanation

Pseudomonas aeruginosa is an opportunistic pathogen that Principles of the Procedure
can infect eyes, ears, burns and wounds.1 It is also a leading Peptone provides the carbon and nitrogen necessary for
cause of hospital acquired infections. Patients undergoing bacterial growth. Magnesium chloride and potassium sulfate
antibiotic therapy are especially susceptible to infection by promote production of pyocyanin. Irgasan, an antimicrobial
Pseudomonas aeruginosa. agent, selectively inhibits gram-positive and gram-negative
bacteria other than Pseudomonas spp. Agar is the solidifying
Pseudomonas Isolation Agar is prepared according to a slight agent. Glycerol serves as an energy source and also helps to
modification of the Medium A formulation of King, Ward and promote pyocyanin production.
Raney.2 Pseudomonas Isolation Agar includes Irgasan, a

Uninoculated Pseudomonas aeruginosa

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 27853

Identity Specifications
Difco Pseudomonas Isolation Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Very light beige, homogeneous, free-
flowing.
Solution: 4.5% solution, soluble in purified water
containing 2% glycerol upon boiling.
Solution is light to medium amber, very
slightly to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 4.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Pseudomonas Isolation Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 18-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY APPEARANCE
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Marked to
complete inhibition
Pseudomonas
aeruginosa 10145 102-103 Good Green to
blue-green
Pseudomonas
aeruginosa 27853 102-103 Good Green to
blue-green

464
 Purple Agar Base

Formula Limitations of the Procedure

Difco Pseudomonas Isolation Agar 1. Some strains of Pseudomonas aeruginosa may fail to
Approximate Formula* Per Liter produce pyocyanin.1,4
Peptone ................................................................... 20.0 g 2. Non-Pseudomonas aeruginosa strains that are not
Magnesium Chloride .................................................. 1.4 g
Potassium Sulfate ..................................................... 10.0 g completely inhibited on this medium may be encountered
Irgasan ................................................................... 25.0 mg and must be differentiated from Pseudomonas aeruginosa.
Agar ......................................................................... 13.6 g Consult appropriate references.1,5
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Directions for Preparation from References

1. Kiska and Gilligan. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 45 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water
microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. King, Ward and Raney. 1954. J. Lab. Clin. Med. 44:301.
3. Furia and Schenkel. January, 1968. Soap and Chemical Specialties.
O
containing 20 mL of glycerol. Mix thoroughly.
4. Gaby and Free. 1931. J. Bacteriol. 22:349.
5. Pezzlo. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American
P
Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder. Availability
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Difco Pseudomonas Isolation Agar
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Cat. No. 292710 Dehydrated 500 g
stable, typical control cultures. Europe
Cat. No. 257002 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Procedure Mexico
Inoculate the medium using the streak plate method to obtain Cat. No. 252648 Prepared Plates (60 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 20*
isolated colonies. Incubate for 18-48 hours at 35 2C. Difco Glycerol

Cat. No. 228210 Bottle 100 g

Expected Results 228220 Bottle 500 g
*Store at 2-8C.
Examine for the presence of good growth. Pseudomonas
aeruginosa colonies may be greenish after incubation for 18 hours
and turn blue to blue-green as incubation continues up to 24-48
hours, with diffusion of the pigment into the medium.

Pseudosel Agar
(See Cetrimide Agar Base)

Purple Agar Base Purple Broth Base

Purple Broth with Carbohydrates
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Purple Agar Base and Purple Broth Base are used with added These media consist of carbohydrate-free peptone with the
carbohydrate in differentiating pure cultures of bacteria. They pH indicator bromcresol purple. Specific carbohydrates are
are used primarily for the differentiation and presumptive iden- added in a concentration of 0.5-1%. This concentration is
tification of gram-negative enteric bacilli based on patterns recommended to ensure against depletion of the carbohydrate
of carbohydrate fermentation. and reversal of the fermentation reaction.
When the media are inoculated with an organism that is able
Summary and Explanation
to ferment the carbohydrate present, acid or acid and gas are
Purple Agar Base and Purple Broth Base are carbohydrate-free
produced. A Durham tube is provided in tubed broth media
media with a slightly acid pH that, when supplemented with
to collect the gas produced during fermentation. The indicator
carbohydrates, are useful in obtaining accurate fermentation
in the media changes from purple to yellow when the amount
reactions, particularly in the identification of gram-negative
of acid produced by carbohydrate fermentation is greater than
enteric bacteria.1,2 The media either may be used with the
the alkaline end products from peptone utilization. If the
addition of the appropriate carbohydrate or the plain broth
carbohydrate is not fermented, the color will remain unchanged
may be used with BBL Taxo Carbohydrate Discs.
or become more alkaline (darker purple) due to degradation
of the amino acids in the medium.

465
 Section III
OP Purple Agar Base, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Purple Agar Base BBL Purple Broth Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan with grayish-green cast, free- Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
flowing, homogeneous. ous material.
Solution: 3.1% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 1.5% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is purple, water. Solution is medium purple,
slightly opalescent. clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Purple, slightly opalescent. Prepared Appearance: Medium purple, clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 3.1% Reaction of 1.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2 Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2

Cultural Response Cultural Response

Difco Purple Agar Base BBL Purple Broth Base
Prepare the medium per label directions with 1% dextrose. Inoculate Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
with fresh cultures and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours. diluted 1:10 and incubate at 35 2C for 42-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY ACID GAS ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY REACTION
Alcaligenes faecalis 8750 Good Escherichia coli 25922 Good Alkaline
Escherichia coli 25922 Good + + (purple)
Salmonella choleraesuis Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 Good + + serotype Typhimurium 14028 Good Alkaline
+ = yellow for acid; - = no change (purple)

Uninoculated Escherichia coli Escherichia coli Uninoculated Typical positive Typical negative
Tube ATCC 25922 ATCC 25922 Tube reaction with acid reaction with
+ Dextrose No Dextrose and gas growth
Purple Agar Base Purple Broth Base

Formulae Directions for Preparation from

Difco Purple Agar Base Dehydrated Product
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Difco Purple Agar Base
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g
Beef Extract ................................................................ 1.0 g 1. Suspend 31 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g thoroughly.
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 0.02 g
completely dissolve the powder.
BBL Purple Broth Base
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ..................................... 10.0 g NOTE: When preparing 0.5-1% carbohydrate fermenta-
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g tion agars, dissolve 5-10 g of the desired carbohydrate in
Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 0.02 g the basal medium prior to autoclaving, or dissolve 31 g of
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

466
 Purple Lactose Agar

Purple Agar Base in 900 mL of purified water and asepti- References

cally add 100 mL of a sterile 5-10% carbohydrate solution 1. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science
Publishing Co, Inc., New York, N.Y.
(w/v) after autoclaving and cooling the basal medium. 2. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby,
Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 3. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteri-
ology, 9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
stable, typical control cultures. 4. Farmer. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
BBL Purple Broth Base
1. Suspend 15 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Add Availability
carbohydrates, 5-10 g/L, if desired, and readjust the pH if Difco Purple Agar Base
necessary. Cat. No. 222810 Dehydrated 500 g
2. Dispense with Durham fermentation tubes, if gas formation
is to be recorded.
BBL Purple Broth Base

O
3. Autoclave at 118C for 15 minutes. DO NOT OVER-
AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF ISO SMD USDA
Cat. No. 211558 Dehydrated 500 g P
296012 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Durham Tube
HEAT. Pkg. of 10*
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
BBL Purple Broth with Carbohydrates and Durham Tube
stable, typical control cultures.
Cat. No. 295862 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Adonitol Pkg. of 10*
295863 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Arabinose Pkg. of 10*
Procedure 295864 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Cellobiose Pkg. of 10*
Carbohydrates should be added to the basal medium either as 296013 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Dextrose Pkg. of 10*
295865 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Dulcitol Pkg. of 10*
sterile solutions or as BBL Taxo Carbohydrate Discs (broth). 297734 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Fructose Pkg. of 10*
Inoculate tubes of carbohydrate agar with an inoculating needle 296014 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Galactose Pkg. of 10*
295866 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Inositol Pkg. of 10*
to within 1/4 inch from the bottom of the tube. Inoculate 296015 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Lactose Pkg. of 10*
tubes of broth containing an appropriate carbohydrate 295999 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Maltose Pkg. of 10*
using a light inoculum from an 18- to 24-hour pure culture. 297018 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Mannitol Pkg. of 10*
295867 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Raffinose Pkg. of 10*
Incubate tubes for 24-72 hours or up to 30 days at 35 2C 297203 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Rhamnose Pkg. of 10*
either in an aerobic or anaerobic atmosphere depending on 297019 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Salicin Pkg. of 10*
the organism being tested. 297020 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Sorbitol Pkg. of 10*
296016 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Sucrose Pkg. of 10*
295870 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Trehalose Pkg. of 10*
Expected Results 295871 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) with Xylose Pkg. of 10*
Examine the tubes daily for growth. A yellow color (acid) is *Store at 2-8C.
a positive reaction for fermentation of the carbohydrate
incorporated into the medium. Bubbles in the inverted fermen-
tation vials are an indication of gas production.
Consult appropriate texts for expected reactions of specific
organisms with specific carbohydrates.1-4

Purple Lactose Agar

Intended Use organisms ability to use a carbohydrate with the production
Purple Lactose Agar is used for cultivating coliform organisms; of acid metabolic end products.2 Colonies of lactose-fermenting
for differentiating lactose-fermenting from lactose- organisms are differentiated from lactose nonfermenters by a
nonfermenting organisms. color change of the indicator from blue-purple (alkaline) to
yellow (acid). If gas is produced during fermentation of the
Summary and Explanation carbohydrate, bubbles will appear in the medium.
Purple Lactose Agar is a modification of Litmus Lactose Agar,
described by Wurtz.1 In Purple Lactose Agar, bromcresol purple Principles of the Procedure
replaces litmus, which is less selective and less stable. Beef extract and peptone provide the nitrogen, vitamins and
amino acids in Purple Lactose Agar. Lactose is the carbohydrate
Purple Lactose Agar is used for detecting coliforms and in dif-
used in the fermentation reaction. Agar is the solidifying agent.
ferential studies based on the fermentation of lactose. Tests
Bromcresol purple is the pH indicator.
used to differentiate Enterobacteriaceae determine the

467
 Section III
OP Purple Lactose Agar, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Purple Lactose Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, may have a greenish tint,
free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 2.8% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is purple, clear to
very slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Purple, clear to very slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 2.8%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.1

Cultural Response
Difco Purple Lactose Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate agar slants with fresh
cultures by stabbing the butt and streaking with an inoculating needle.
Uninoculated Escherichia Salmonella
Incubate tubes at 35 2C for 40-48 hours. Acid production is indicated Tube coli typhi
by a yellow color. ATCC 25922 ATCC 19430

ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY ACID (YELLOW) GAS

Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 Good + +
Escherichia coli 25922 Good + +
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 Good +

Formula Limitation of the Procedure

Difco Purple Lactose Agar The medium is slightly acid (pH 6.8) and positive reactions
Approximate Formula* Per Liter may be slower than with phenol red carbohydrate medium.5
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g References
1. Wurtz. 1897. Technique Bacteriologique, Masson, Paris, France.
Agar ......................................................................... 10.0 g 2. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
Bromcresol Purple .................................................... 25.0 mg St. Louis, Mo.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 3. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
4. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol 1. American Society for Mi-
Directions for Preparation from crobiology, Washington, D.C.
5. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
Dehydrated Product vol 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.

1. Suspend 28 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix

thoroughly. Availability
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Difco Purple Lactose Agar
completely dissolve the powder. Cat. No. 282100 Dehydrated 500 g
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

Procedure
For a complete discussion on the expected reactions of specific
Enterobacteriaceae species, refer to appropriate references.2-4

Expected Results
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.

468
 Pyridoxine Y Medium

Pyridoxine Y Medium
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Pyridoxine Y Medium is used for determining pyridoxine Pyridoxine Y Medium is free from pyridoxine, but contains
concentration by the microbiological assay technique. all other nutrients and vitamins essential for the growth of
S. cerevisiae ATCC 9080. The addition of pyridoxine in
Summary and Explanation specified increasing concentrations gives a growth response that
Vitamin assay media are prepared for use in the microbiological can be measured turbidimetrically or titrimetrically.
assay of vitamins. Three types of media are used for this
purpose: Formula O
1. Maintenance Media: For carrying the stock culture to Difco Pyridoxine Y Medium P
preserve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g
for its intended purpose; L-Asparagine .............................................................. 4.0 g
2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for immediate Ammonium Sulfate .................................................... 4.0 g
use; Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 3.0 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 1.0 g
3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the vitamin under Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.49 g
test. They contain all the factors necessary for optimum DL-Methionine ......................................................... 40.0 mg
growth of the test organism except the single essential DL-Tryptophan ......................................................... 40.0 mg
DL-Isoleucine ............................................................ 40.0 mg
vitamin to be determined. DL-Valine .................................................................. 40.0 mg
Pyridoxine Y Medium is patterned after the formulation of L-Histidine Hydrochloride ......................................... 20.0 mg
Riboflavin ................................................................. 20.0 mg
Campling and Nixon,1 and modified by Hurley2 and Parrish, Biotin Salt ................................................................... 8.0 mg
Loy and Kline.3 This medium is used in the microbiological Inositol ....................................................................... 5.0 mg
assay of pyridoxine using Saccharomyces cerevisiae ATCC Ferrous Sulfate ....................................................... 500.0 g
Thiamine Hydrochloride ......................................... 400.0 g
9080 as the test organism. Calcium Pantothenate ............................................ 400.0 g
Nicotinic Acid ......................................................... 400.0 g
User Quality Control Boric Acid ............................................................... 200.0 g
Potassium Iodide .................................................... 200.0 g
Identity Specifications Ammonium Molybdate ............................................ 40.0 g
Manganese Sulfate .................................................. 80.0 g
Difco Pyridoxine Y Medium Copper Sulfate ......................................................... 90.0 g
Dehydrated Appearance: White to off-white, fine, free-flowing, Zinc Sulfate .............................................................. 80.0 g
homogeneous. *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Solution: 5.3% (double strength) solution,
soluble in purified water upon boil- Precautions
ing for 2-3 minutes. Solution 2.65%
Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media
(single strength) is colorless to very,
very light amber, clear, may have a or glassware in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely
slight precipitate. small amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give
Prepared Appearance: (Single strength) colorless to very light erroneous results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from
amber, clear, may have a slight pre-
detergents and other chemicals must be used. Glassware must
cipitate.
be heated to 250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic
Reaction of 2.65%
Solution at 25C: pH 4.4 0.2 residues that might be present. Take precautions to keep
sterilizing and cooling conditions uniform throughout assay.
Cultural Response
Difco Pyridoxine Y Medium Directions for Preparation from
Prepare the medium per label directions. The medium supports the
growth of Saccharomyces cerevisiae ATCC 9080 when prepared in
Dehydrated Product
single strength and supplemented with pyridoxine hydrochloride. The 1. Suspend 5.3 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water.
medium should produce a standard curve when tested using a pyridox- 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 2-3 minutes to
ine hydrochloride reference standard at 0.0 to 10.0 ng per 10 mL.
completely dissolve the powder.
Incubate the tubes with caps loosened at 25-30C for 22 hours. Read
the percent transmittance using a spectrophotometer at 660 nm. 3. Dispense in 5 mL amounts into flasks, evenly dispersing
the precipitate.
4. Add standard or test samples.
5. Adjust flask volume to 10 mL with purified water.
6. Steam at 100C for 10 minutes.

469
 Section III
OP Pyridoxine Y Medium, cont.

Procedure Expected Results

Stock cultures of S. cerevisiae ATCC 9080 are carried on 1. Prepare a standard concentration response curve by
Lactobacilli Agar AOAC. Following incubation at 25-30C plotting the response readings against the amount of stan-
(held constant within 0.5C) for 18-24 hours, store the dard in each tube, disk or cup.
cultures in the dark at 2-8C. Prepare fresh slant cultures 2. Determine the amount of vitamin at each level of assay
every week. Do not use stock cultures for preparing the inoculum solution by interpolation from the standard curve.
if more than one week old. Inoculum for assay is prepared by 3. Calculate the concentration of vitamin in the sample from
subculturing a stock culture of S. cerevisiae ATCC 9080 into the average of these volumes. Use only those values that do
a tube (10 mL) of single strength Pyridoxine Y Medium not vary more than 10% from the average and use the
containing 1 ng per mL each of pyridoxal hydrochloride, results only if two-thirds of the values do not vary more
pyridoxamine dihydrochloride and pyridoxine hydrochloride. than 10%.
After 18-24 hours incubation at 25-30C (held constant within
0.5C), centrifuge the cells under aseptic conditions and Limitations of the Procedure
decant the liquid supernatant. Wash the cells 3 with 10 mL 1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium
sterile 0.85% saline. After the third wash, resuspend in 10 mL must be grown and maintained on a medium recommended
sterile single strength medium and adjust to a turbidity of for this purpose.
45-50% transmittance when read on the spectrophotometer 2. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the assay
at 660 nm. procedure.
3. The use of altered or deficient media may cause mutants
It is essential that a standard curve be set up for each separate
having different nutritional requirements that will not give
assay. Conditions of steaming and temperature of incubation
a satisfactory response.
which influence the standard curve readings cannot always be
4. For successful results of these procedures, all conditions of
duplicated. Obtain the standard curve by using pyridoxine
the assay must be followed precisely.
hydrochloride at levels of 0, 1, 2, 4, 6, 8 and 10 ng per flask
(10 mL).
References
1. Campling and Nixon. 1954. J. Physiol. 126:71.
The concentrations of pyridoxine hydrochloride required 2. Hurley. 1960. J. Assoc. Off. Agri. Chem. 43:43.
for the preparation of the standard curve may be prepared as 3. Parrish, Loy and Kline. 1956. J. Assoc. Off. Agri. Chem. 39:157.

follows:
Availability
1. Dissolve 50 mg dried pyridoxine hydrochloride in about Difco Pyridoxine Y Medium
100 mL 25% ethyl alcohol. Cat. No. 295110 Dehydrated 100 g*
2. Dilute to 500 mL with additional 25% ethyl alcohol. *Store at 2-8C.

3. Further dilute by adding 2 mL to 998 mL 25% ethyl alcohol

to make a stock solution containing 200 ng pyridoxine
hydrochloride per mL. Prepare the stock solution fresh daily.
To make the standard solution, dilute 1 mL of stock solution
with 99 mL purified water, to make a solution containing 2 ng
pyridoxine hydrochloride per mL. Use 0.0, 0.05, 1, 2, 3, 4 and
5 mL per assay tube.
Following inoculation, incubate the tubes on a shaker (about
100 rpm) at 25-30C for 22 hours. Steam in the autoclave
for 5 minutes to stop growth. Measure the growth turbidi-
metrically using a spectrophotometer at any specific wavelength
between 540 and 660 nm.

470
 R2A Agar

R2A Agar
Intended Use absorbing toxic metabolic by-products. Sodium pyruvate
R2A Agar is used for enumerating heterotrophic organisms in increases the recovery of stressed cells. Potassium phosphate is
treated potable water. used to balance the pH and provide phosphate. Magnesium
sulfate is a source of divalent cations and sulfate. Agar is the
Summary and Explanation solidifying agent.
R2A Agar was developed by Reasoner and Geldreich1 for
bacteriological plate counts of treated potable water. A low Formula
nutrient medium, such as R2A Agar, in combination with Difco R2A Agar
a lower incubation temperature and longer incubation Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 0.5 g
time stimulates the growth of stressed and chlorine-tolerant Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 0.5 g
bacteria.1 Nutritionally rich media, such as Plate Count Casamino Acids ......................................................... 0.5 g
Agar (Standard Methods Agar), support the growth of fast- Dextrose ..................................................................... 0.5 g
growing bacteria but may suppress slow growing or stressed
Soluble Starch ............................................................ 0.5
Sodium Pyruvate ........................................................ 0.3
g
g Q
bacteria found in treated water. When compared with nutri-
tionally rich media, R2A Agar has been reported to improve
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 0.3
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.05
g
g R
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
the recovery of stressed and chlorine-tolerant bacteria from
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
drinking water systems.2-4
R2A Agar is recommended in standard methods for pour plate, Directions for Preparation from
spread plate and membrane filter methods for heterotrophic Dehydrated Product
plate counts.5,6 1. Suspend 18.2 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
Principles of the Procedure 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Yeast extract provides a source of trace elements and vitamins. completely dissolve the powder.
Peptone and casamino acids provide nitrogen, vitamins, amino 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
acids, carbon and minerals. Dextrose serves as a carbon source. 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Soluble starch aids in the recovery of injured organisms by stable, typical control cultures.

User Quality Control Procedure

1. Water samples should be collected as described in Standard
Identity Specifications Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater,
Difco R2A Agar
Section 9060A.5 To minimize changes in bacterial popula-
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous. tion, water samples should be tested as soon as possible, but
Solution: 1.82% solution, soluble in purified at least within six hours of collection if the sample has not
water upon boiling. Solution is light been refrigerated or within 30 hours if refrigerated.
amber, very slightly opalescent with a 2. Prepare test dilutions for heterotrophic plate count.
slight precipitate.
3. Plate the test sample and dilutions by the spread plate, pour
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent with
a slight precipitate. plate or membrane filter method. Do not exceed 1 mL of
Reaction of 1.82% sample or dilution per spread or pour plate. The volume of
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2 test sample to be filtered for the membrane filter technique
will vary.
Cultural Response 4. Maintain proper humidity during prolonged incubation:
Difco R2A Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate samples using the INCUBATION MINIMUM OPTIMAL
spread plate method. Incubate at 35 2C for 42-48 hours. Recovery TEMPERATURE INCUBATION TIME3 INCUBATION TIME3
should be typical compared to a previously approved (control) lot and 35C 72 hours 5-7 days
greater than parallel plates of Plate Count Agar (Standard Methods Agar). 20 or 28C 5 days 7 days
ORGANISM ATTC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 30-300 Good
Expected Results
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good Count colonies on spread or pour plates demonstrating
Pseudomonas aerginosa 27853 30-300 Good 30-300 colonies per plate or 20-200 colonies when using the
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good membrane filter method. Compute bacterial count per mL of
sample by multiplying the average number of colonies per plate
by the reciprocal of the appropriate dilution.

471
 Section III
QR R2A Agar, cont.

Report counts as colony forming units (CFU) per mL and report References
variables of incubation such as temperature and length of time. 1. Reasoner and Geldreich. 1985. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 49:1.
2. Fiksdal, Vik, Mills and Staley. 1982. J. Am. Water Works Assoc. 74:313.
3. Kelly, Justice and Nagy. 1983. Abstr. Q122, p. 280. Abstr. 83rd Annu. Meet. Am. Soc. Microbiol.
1983.
Limitations of the Procedure 4. Means, Hanami, Ridgway and Olson. 1981. J. Am. Water Works Assoc. 53:585.
5. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
1. R2A Agar is intended for use only with treated potable wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
water since it is recommended for compromised bacteria. 6. Kim and Feng. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiological
examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
2. Use of the pour plate method is discouraged because 7. Van Soestberger and Lee. 1969. Appl. Microbiol. 18:1092.
8. Klein and Wu. 1974. Appl. Microbiol. 27:429.
recovery of stressed bacteria may be compromised by the
heat shock (44-46C) and low oxygen tension that are part Availability
of the procedure.7,8 Difco R2A Agar
3. Incubation time longer than indicated may be necessary to COMPF EPA SMWW
recover additional slow-growing bacteria. Cat. No. 218262 Dehydrated 100 g
4. R2A Agar performs best with the spread plate technique; 218263 Dehydrated 500 g
218261 Dehydrated 2 kg
however, that procedure is limited to a small sample
volume. BBL R2A Agar
COMPF EPA SMWW
5. Fast-growing bacteria may produce smaller size colonies
United States and Canada
on R2A Agar than on nutritionally rich media. Cat. No. 292341 Prepared Sterile Pack Settling Plates
6. R2A Agar is a low nutrient medium intended for culturing (100 15 mm-style) Ctn. of 100*
compromised microorganisms. Good growth of standard, 299436 Prepared Bottle, 500 mL Pkg. of 10*

healthy control organisms does not necessarily reflect the Europe

Cat. No. 257008 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
ability of the medium to recover stressed organisms. Each
Japan
new lot of medium should be performance tested against a Cat. No. 251258 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
previous lot of R2A Agar using tap water. 251259 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
*Store at 2-8C.

Raka-Ray No. 3 Medium

Intended Use User Quality Control
Raka-Ray No. 3 Medium is recommended for the isolation of
lactic acid bacteria encountered in beer and the brewing process. Identity Specifications
Difco Raka-Ray No. 3 Medium
Summary and Explanation Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Spoilage organisms are often seriously detrimental to beer flavor. Solution: 7.49% solution, soluble in purified
water with 1% polysorbate 80 upon
Lactic acid bacteria including lactobacilli and pediococci, which boiling. Solution is medium to dark
can cause spoilage, are physiologically very diverse. amber, clear to very slightly opalescent.

Raka-Ray No. 3 Medium was developed from a formulation Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark amber, clear to
slightly opalescent.
suggested by Saha, Sondag and Middlekauff,1 who tested a
Reaction of 7.49%
range of ingredients for their ability to stimulate growth of Solution at 25C: pH 5.4 0.2
lactic acid bacteria. Polysorbate 80, liver extract, maltose,
N-acetyl glucosamine and yeast extract were found to stimu- Cultural Response
late growth. Tomato juice, free fatty acids and lyophilized beer Difco Raka-Ray No. 3 Medium
solids (all of which are found in several media formulations Prepare the medium per label directions (with the addition of 3 g/L
phenylethanol and 7 mg/L cycloheximide, adjusted for potency). In-
for lactic acid bacteria) were inhibitory. oculate, overlay with 4 mL of sterile medium and incubate anaerobi-
cally at 27-30C for 18-48 hours.
In comparative studies using in-process beer samples, Raka-Ray
media gave higher colony counts for lactobacilli than Tomato ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY

Juice Agar, W-L Differential Agar and Universal Beer Agar, with Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 None to poor
larger colonies developing after 2-4 days of anaerobic incuba- Lactobacillus brevis 367 30-300 Good
Lactobacillus buchneri 11307 30-300 Good
tion.1,2
Pediococcus acidilactici 8042 30-300 Good
Raka-Ray No. 3 Medium yields larger lactic acid bacterial
colonies than Universal Beer Agar.3 Raka-Ray No. 3 Medium
also suppressed the growth of non-lactic acid, facultative
bacteria, such as Aerobacter aerogenes and Flavobacterium
proteus that are often associated with lactic beer spoilage
organisms.3
472
 Rapid Fermentation Medium

Raka-Ray No. 3 Medium is also recommended by the European 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Avoid overheating,
Brewing Congress Analytical Microbiologica for enumeration which will cause a softer medium.
of lactobacilli and pediococci.4 The agar may be made more 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
selective by the addition of 3 g of 2-phenylethanol and 7 mg of stable, typical control cultures.
cycloheximide dissolved in a small quantity of acetone per
liter of medium before autoclaving. Yeasts and gram-negative Procedure
bacteria are suppressed, facilitating enumeration of the lactic Overlay Technique for Enumeration of Lactic Acid
bacterial flora. Bacteria
1. Inoculate 0.1 mL of the beer sample onto well-dried plates
Principles of Procedure containing 15-20 mL Raka-Ray No. 3 Medium. Five repli-
Polysorbate 80, liver concentrate, maltose and other sugars, cates of each sample are recommended.
N-acetyl glucosamine and yeast extract stimulate the growth 2. Spread over the surface of the medium using a sterile glass
of lactobacilli. The optional addition of cycloheximide provides rod.
increased selectivity against yeasts and gram-negative bacteria. 3. Overlay the surface with 4 mL of the molten sterilized
medium cooled to 50C.
Formula
Difco Raka-Ray No. 3 Medium
4. Incubate plates at 27-30C in an anaerobic (H2/CO2)
atmosphere.
Q
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g Expected Results
R
Tryptone ................................................................... 20.0 g
Liver Concentrate ....................................................... 1.0 g Lactobacilli are visible after 48 hours incubation as smooth,
Maltose .................................................................... 10.0 g moist colonies that are 1 mm in diameter. Incubate the
Fructose ..................................................................... 5.0 g medium for a total of 7 days to allow development of slow-
Glucose ...................................................................... 5.0 g
Betaine Hydrochloride ................................................ 2.0 g
growing Pediococcus strains.
Diammonium Citrate .................................................. 2.0 g If the number of colonies on each plate exceeds 300, the sample
Potassium Aspartate .................................................. 2.5 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.98 g should be diluted 1:10 in sterile physiological saline and
Manganese Sulfate .................................................... 0.42 g retested.
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.0 g
N-Acetyl Glucosamine ................................................ 0.5 g
Potassium Glutamate ................................................. 2.5 g
References
1. Saha, Sondag and Middlekauff. 1974. An improved medium for the selective culturing of lactic acid
Agar ......................................................................... 16.0 g bacteria. Proceedings of the American Society of Brewing Chemists. 9th Congress, p. 9.
2. VanKeer, Van Melkebeke, Vertriest, Hoozee and Van Schoonenberghe. 1983. J. Inst. Brewing 89:360.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 3. Report of the Technical Subcommittee. 1976. Microbiological Controls. J. Am. Soc. Brewing Chemists
34:93.
4. European Brewing Congress Analytica Microbiologica. 1981. J. Inst. Brewing 87:314.
Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product Availability
1. Suspend 74.9 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water Difco Raka-Ray No. 3 Medium
containing 10 mL polysorbate 80. Mix thoroughly. Cat. No. 218671 Dehydrated 500 g
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
pletely dissolve the powder. To increase selectivity, add 3 g
2-phenylethanol and 7 mg cycloheximide per liter prior to
boiling.

Rapid Fermentation Medium

Rapid Fermentation Medium with Carbohydrates
Intended Use The classical method for the differentiation of Neisseria species
Rapid Fermentation Medium and Rapid Fermentation Medium is based upon determination of their carbohydrate utilization
with Carbohydrates provide a rapid method for the differentia- patterns. Pathogenic Neisseria are extremely fastidious organ-
tion of Neisseria species isolated from clinical specimens. isms in both their growth and metabolic activities, thereby
requiring an enriched culture medium. The conventional
Summary and Explanation enriched medium for the determination of carbohydrate utiliza-
The occurrence of Neisseria gonorrhoeae in extra-genitourinary tion is Cystine Trypticase Agar Medium (CTA Medium)
sites has made it important to differentiate this organism from containing 0.5 to 1% carbohydrate.3 The test battery includes
other Neisseria species.1,2 The isolation of N. meningitidis and dextrose, lactose, maltose and sucrose, and an identification can
N. lactamica from genitourinary sites further indicates the need usually be made in 24 hours.
for differentiation of these species.1-3
473
 Section III
QR Rapid Fermentation Medium, cont.

Rapid Fermentation Medium is a modification of the standard Expected Results

CTA Medium. The modified formula includes an increased agar After incubation, compare the reactions produced by the
and carbohydrate content that, when exposed to a large unknown isolates with those produced by known control
number of organisms, exhibits an acid shift by the phenol red organisms. Negative reactions are red. A positive reaction is
indicator. An identification often can be made within 4 hours. indicated by a change of the phenol red indicator from red to
yellow. The control cultures should produce results as shown
Principles of the Procedure in the table. If the results with the control cultures do not
Rapid Fermentation Medium produces rapid results in detecting agree with those in the table, review the procedure, check the
acid production from dextrose, maltose, sucrose and other control cultures by Gram-staining and performing the oxidase
carbohydrates. Although much of the literature refers to test and repeat the fermentation test if necessary. The control
fermentation patterns for N. gonorrhoeae, it has been shown tube (no carbohydrate) should be negative (red).
that this species metabolizes dextrose by strictly aerobic mecha-
CONTROL ORGANISMS ATCC PRODUCTION OF ACID FROM:
nisms; i.e., by a combination of the Entner-Doudoroff and
pentose phosphate pathways. The utilization of dextrose Neisseria gonorrhoeae 43070 Dextrose only
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 Dextrose and Maltose
by N. gonorrhoeae, as indicated by an acid change in the pH
Neisseria lactamica 23970 Dextrose, Maltose and Lactose
indicator present in the medium, is due to the production of Neisseria sicca 29193 Dextrose, Maltose and Sucrose
acetic acid and small amounts of lactic acid.4 The negative
carbohydrate test is the result of the deamination of the If no positive carbohydrate reactions are observed within
peptone in the absence of any utilizable carbohydrate. 4 hours, the tubes may be incubated overnight or longer to
allow a positive reaction to develop.
Procedure
1. Remove a full loopful of fresh colony growth from the
References
1. Flynn and Waitkins. 1972. J. Clin. Pathol. 25:525.
surface of a Chocolate II Agar plate or slant. A large 2. Morse and Bartenstein. 1976. J. Clin. Microbiol. 3:8.
3. Knapp and Koumans. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
inoculum must be used in order to obtain a rapid reaction. microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
4. Morse, Stein and Hines. 1974. J. Bacteriol. 120:702.
2. Deposit the inoculum below the surface of the medium and
mix well. Availability
3. Repeat for each tube to be inoculated. Inoculate a control BBL Rapid Fermentation Medium and Rapid
tube (no carbohydrate) with Neisseria sp. Fermentation Medium with Carbohydrates
4. Incubate all tubes at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere Cat. No. 221890 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
without carbon dioxide. Observe periodically after 4 hours 221891 Prepared Tubes, Dextrose Pkg. of 10*
221893 Prepared Tubes, Lactose Pkg. of 10*
for reactions noted below. Continue incubation overnight 221894 Prepared Tubes, Maltose Pkg. of 10*
if necessary. A few strains may require incubation for up to 221895 Prepared Tubes, Sucrose Pkg. of 10*
48-72 hours. *Store at 2-8C.

Rapid Urea Broth

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Rapid Urea Broth is used for the presumptive identification of The enzyme urease catalyzes the hydrolysis of urea to ammo-
Helicobacter pylori in gastric antral biopsy specimens. nium and bicarbonate ions. Because urease is not a human
enzyme, its activity in the gastric mucosa is due primarily to
Summary and Explanation the presence of H. pylori.7 The preformed urease enzyme
The presence of small, curved and S-shaped bacilli in antral present in biopsy specimens renders the urease broth alkaline
biopsy specimens was first reported by Warren and Marshall and changes the phenol red indicator in the medium to a pink-
in 1983.1 Subsequently, other investigators observed an red color.
association between this organism, now know as Helicobacter
pylori, and gastritis.2-4 However, isolating and identifying Procedure
the organism on primary media may require up to 7 days, After the specimen is obtained by antral biopsy, it should be
delaying treatment.5 placed immediately into Rapid Urea Broth. If the specimen is
transported in saline to the laboratory, it should be transferred
McNulty developed a rapid diagnostic test for Helicobacter-
immediately to Rapid Urea Broth. Place vials in an incubator
associated gastritis. Noting that the rapid hydrolysis of urea
at 35 2C and observe for development of a red color within
is characteristic of H. pylori, he placed biopsy specimens in
1 hour. If negative, continue incubation and observe periodi-
Christensens 2% urea broth and observed a color change.
cally for up to 4 hours.
Depending on the number of organisms present in the speci-
men, positive results could be observed in less than one hour.6
474
 Rappaport-Vassiliadis Medium

Expected Results References

1. Warren and Marshall. 1983. Lancet i: 1273.
The presence of urease is indicated by an intense pink-red color 2. Rauws, Langenberg, Houthoff, Zaneen and Tytgat. 1988. Gastroenterology 94:33.
throughout the broth. A negative reaction is no color change; 3.
4.
Marshall, Armstrong, McGechie and Glancy. 1985. Med. J. Aust. 142:436.
Buck, Gourley, Lee, Subramanyam, Latimer and DiNuzzo. 1986. J. Infect. Dis. 153:664.
i.e., the broth medium remains yellowish-orange. Results 5. Czinn and Carr. 1987. J. Pediatr. 110:569.
6. McNulty and Wise. 1985. Lancet i: 1443.
should be confirmed by Gram-staining and subculturing to an 7. Bates. 1987. Lab. Management 25(11):27.
8. Coudron and Kirby. 1989. J. Clin. Microbiol. 27:1527.
appropriate medium; e.g., Brucella Agar with 5% sheep blood 9. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby,
or 5% horse blood.7-10 Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
10. Versalovic and Fox. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
11. Westblom, Madan, Kemp and Subik. 1988. J. Clin. Microbiol. 26:1393.
Limitation of the Procedure
Urea test media rely on demonstration of alkalinity; hence Availability
they are not specific for urease. The utilization of peptones by BBL Rapid Urea Broth
contaminating organisms or other proteins in the medium may Cat. No. 298330 Prepared Vial, 0.5 mL Pkg. of 10*
raise the pH to alkalinity due to protein hydrolysis and release *Store at 2-8C.
of excessive amino acid residues, resulting in false positive
reactions.11
Q
Rappaport-Vassiliadis (MSRV) Medium, R
Semisolid Modification
Novobiocin Antimicrobic Supplement
Intended Use organisms other than Salmonella. The low pH of the medium,
Rappaport-Vassiliadis (MSRV) Medium, Semisolid Modification combined with the novobiocin, malachite green and magne-
is used with Novobiocin Antimicrobic Supplement in rapidly sium chloride, helps to select for highly resistant Salmonella
detecting motile Salmonella in feces and food products. spp. Agar is the solidifying agent.

Summary and Explanation Formulae

MSRV Medium, Semisolid Modification is a modification of Difco Rappaport-Vassiliadis (MSRV) Medium, Semisolid
Rappaport-Vassiliadis enrichment broth for detecting motile Modification
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Salmonella in feces and food products. The original work on Tryptose ..................................................................... 4.59 g
MSRV medium showed that a semi-solid medium in Petri dishes Casein Hydrolysate (acid) ........................................... 4.59 g
could be used as a rapid and sensitive means of isolating motile Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 7.34 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.47 g
Salmonella from food products following pre-enrichment or Magnesium Chloride (anhydrous) ............................ 10.93 g
selective enrichment.1,2 The semisolid medium allows motility Malachite Green Oxalate .......................................... 37.0 mg
to be detected as halos of growth around the original point of Agar ........................................................................... 2.7 g
inoculation. Difco Novobiocin Antimicrobic Supplement
Formula per 10 mL Vial
The medium is recommended by the European Chocolate Sodium Novobiocin .................................................. 20.0 mg
Manufacturers Association. A collaborative study performed *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

with support of the American Cocoa Research Institute

and the Canadian Chocolate Manufacturers Association Directions for Preparation from
resulted in first action adoption of the MSRV method by AOAC Dehydrated Product
International.3 Difco Rappaport-Vassiliadis Medium, Semisolid
Modification
MSRV Medium, Semisolid Modification may be used as a 1. Suspend 31.6 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
plating medium for isolating Salmonella spp. (other than Mix thoroughly.
S. typhi and S. paratyphi type A) from stool specimens with 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
high sensitivity and specificity.4,5 completely dissolve the powder. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE.
Cool to 50C.
Principles of the Procedure 3. Aseptically add 10 mL of Novobiocin Antimicrobic Supple-
Rappaport-Vassiliadis (MSRV) Medium, Semisolid Modifi- ment. Mix thoroughly.
cation contains peptones as carbon and nitrogen sources for 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
general growth requirements. Magnesium chloride raises the stable, typical control cultures.
osmotic pressure in the medium. Novobiocin (Novobiocin
Antimicrobic Supplement) and malachite green inhibit
475
 Section III
QR Rappaport-Vassiliadis Medium, cont.

Uninoculated Salmonella typhimurium

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 14028

Identity Specifications
Difco Rappaport-Vassiliadis Medium, Semisolid
Modification
Dehydrated Appearance: Pale green, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.16% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is blue, clear to
slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Blue, slightly opalescent, semisolid.
Reaction of 3.16%
Solution at 25C: pH 5.2 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Rappaport-Vassiliadis Medium, Semisolid
Modification
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 42
0.5C for 18-24 hours.
INOCULUM HALO/
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY MOTILITY
Citrobacter freundii 8090 103-2103 Marked
inhibition
Proteus mirabilis 9240 103-2103 None
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 103-2103 None
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Enteritidis 13076 102-103 Good +
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good +
Salmonella senftenberg
(NCTC 10384) 102-103 Good +

Difco Novobiocin Antimicrobic Supplement Negative: Medium remains blue-green around the drops, with
Rehydrate with 10 mL sterile purified water. Mix well. no gray-white, turbid zone extending out from the
drop. Test sample is considered negative for motile
Procedure3,6 Salmonella.
Pre-enrichment
To confirm a presumptive identification of Salmonella:3
1. Add 25 g of cocoa or chocolate to 225 mL of sterile recon-
Rapid serologic confirmation
stituted nonfat dry milk with 0.45 mL of a 1% aqueous
1. Inoculate M Broth with growth from migration edge on
brilliant green dye solution; mix well.6
MSRV, Semisolid Modification plate.
2. Incubate at 35C for 20 2 hours.3
2. Incubate at 35C for 4-6 hours (until turbid). M Broth
Selective Enrichment3 culture can be held for up to 24 hours at 35C.
3. Inoculate 10 mL Tetrathionate Broth (prewarmed to 35C) 3. Test with Salmonella O and H antisera.
with 1 mL of the pre-enrichment culture.
Culture confirmation
4. Incubate at 35C for 8 0.5 hours.
1. Transfer a loopful of growth from the migration edge on
Motility Enrichment on MSRV, Semisolid Modification3 MSRV, Semisolid Modification plate onto Hektoen Enteric
5. After selective enrichment incubation, mix the broth culture. Agar and streak for isolation.
Inoculate 3 drops at separate spots on an MSRV plate. 2. Incubate at 35C for 24 2 hours.
6. Incubate at 42 0.5C for 16 0.5 hours. 3. From colonies of Hektoen agar that show colony appearance
typical of Salmonella (green colonies with black centers),
Expected Results perform biochemical tests to confirm the identification.
Positive: Growth of migrated cells is visible as a gray-white,
turbid zone extending out from the inoculated drop. Limitation of the Procedure
Test sample is considered presumptively positive for The combination of malachite green, magnesium chloride and
motile Salmonella. a low pH may inhibit certain Salmonella, such as S. typhi and
S. choleraesuis. Isolation techniques should include a variety
of enrichment broths and isolation media.

476
 Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10 Broth

References Availability
1. DeSmedt, Bolderdijk, Rappold and Lautenschlaeger. 1986. J. Food Prot. 49:510.
2. DeSmedt and Bolderdijk. 1987. J. Food Prot. 50:658.
Difco Rappaport-Vassiliadis (MSRV) Medium,
3. DeSmedt, Bolderdijk and Milas. 1994. J. AOAC Int. 77:365. Semisolid Modification
4. Dusch and Altwegg. 1995. J. Clin. Microbiol. 33:802.
5. Aspinall, Hindle and Hutchinson. 1992. Eur. J. Clin. Microbiol. Infect. Dis. 11:936.
AOAC
6. Andrews, June, Sherrod, Hammack and Amaguana. 1995. In FDA bacteriological analytical manual, Cat. No. 218681 Dehydrated 500 g
8th ed. AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
Difco Novobiocin Antimicrobic Supplement

AOAC
Cat. No. 231971 Vial 6 10 mL*
*Store at 2-8C.

Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10 Broth

Intended Use Directions for Preparation from
Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10 Broth is used for selectively Dehydrated Product
enriching Salmonella from meat and dairy products, feces and
sewage-polluted water.
1. Suspend 26.6 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
Q
Summary and Explanation
2. Warm slightly to completely dissolve the powder. R
3. Dispense 10 mL amounts into suitable containers.
Rappaport et al.1 formulated an enrichment medium for Salmo- 4. Autoclave at 116C (10 psi pressure) for 15 minutes.
nella that was modified by Vassiliadis et al.2 The Rappaport 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
formulation, designated R25/37C, recommended incubation stable, typical control cultures.
at 37C; the Vassiliadis modification, designated R10/43C,
had a reduced level of malachite green and recommended Procedure and Expected Results
incubation at 43C. Later work by Peterz showed that Water and Sewage Samples
incubation at 41.5 0.5C for 24 hours improved recovery For isolating Salmonella (other than S. typhi) from water and
of Salmonella spp.3 associated materials, such as sewage liquor, sewage sludge,
Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10 Broth is a selective enrichment digested sludge and pressed sludge cake:
medium that is used following pre-enrichment of the specimen
in a suitable pre-enrichment medium. It has gained approval User Quality Control
for use in analyzing milk and milk products,4 raw flesh foods, Identity Specifications
highly contaminated foods and animal feeds.5 Difco Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10 Broth
This medium selectively enriches for salmonellae because Dehydrated Appearance: Pale green to green, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
bacteria, including other intestinal bacteria, are typically
Solution: 2.66% solution, soluble in purified
resistant to or inhibited by malachite green, high osmotic water upon gentle heating. Solution
pressure and/or low pH. S. typhi and S. choleraesuis are sensi- is blue, clear.
tive to malachite green and may be inhibited. Prepared Appearance: Blue, clear.
Reaction of 2.66%
Principles of the Procedure Solution at 25C: pH 5.1 0.2
Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10 Broth contains peptone as the
Cultural Response
carbon and nitrogen source for general growth requirements.
Difco Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10 Broth
Magnesium chloride raises the osmotic pressure in the medium. Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Malachite green is inhibitory to organisms other than 41.5 0.5C for 18-48 hours. Subculture to Brilliant Green Agar and
salmonellae. The low pH of the medium, combined with the incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours.
presence of malachite green and magnesium chloride, helps to ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
select for the highly resistant Salmonella spp. Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Marked inhibition
Proteus mirabilis 9240 103-2103 Marked inhibition
Formula Salmonella choleraesuis
Difco Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10 Broth subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Enteritidis 13076 102-103 Good
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 4.54 g Salmonella choleraesuis
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 7.2 g subsp. choleraesuis
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.45 g serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good
Magnesium Chloride (anhydrous) ............................ 13.4 g
Malachite Green Oxalate .......................................... 36.0 mg
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

477
 Section III
QR Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10, cont.

1. Concentrate the sample by filtering it through a plug of Selective Enrichment

sterile absorbent cottonwool inserted in the neck of a large 3. Inoculate 10 mL of Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10 Broth with
sterile funnel or through a Whatman No. 17 absorbent pad. 0.1 mL of pre-enrichment culture. Inoculate 10 mL of another
selective enrichment medium such as Tetrathionate Broth or
Pre-enrichment
Selenite Cystine Broth with 1 mL of the pre-enrichment
2. Using aseptic technique, transfer the cottonwool plug or
culture.4,5
the pad to 100 mL of a suitable pre-enrichment medium
4. Incubate Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10 Broth at 41.5 0.5C4
such as Buffered Peptone Water.
for 24 2 hours. Incubate the other selective enrichment
3. Incubate at 37 0.5C for 18-24 hours.
broths appropriately.
Selective Enrichment
Expected Results
4. Inoculate 10 mL of Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10 Broth with
5. After incubation, subculture Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10
0.1 mL of the pre-enrichment culture. Inoculate 10 mL of
Broth and the other selective enrichment broths to selective
Muller-Kauffman Tetrathionate Broth with 1 mL of the
agar media and incubate at 35 2C for 24 2 hours.4
pre-enrichment culture.
6. Examine for typical Salmonella colonies. Confirm identifi-
5. Incubate Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10 Broth at 41.5 0.5C.
cation of isolates by biochemical and serologic tests.
Incubate Muller- Kauffman Tetrathionate Broth at 42
1C for 48 hours. Limitation of the Procedure
Expected Results The combined inhibitory factors of this medium (malachite
6. After incubation, subculture both selective enrichment green, magnesium chloride, low pH) may inhibit certain
broths to Brilliant Green Agar and XLD Agar. Incubate at Salmonella, such as S. typhi and S. choleraesuis. Isolation
35 2C for 18-24 hours. techniques should include a variety of enrichment broths and
7. Examine for typical Salmonella colonies. Confirm identifi- isolation media.
cation of isolates by biochemical and serologic tests.
References
Milk and Foods 1. Rappaport, Konforti and Navon. 1956. J. Clin. Pathol. 9:261.
2. Vassiliadis, Trichopoulos, Kalandidi and Xirouchaki. 1978. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 44:233.
For isolating Salmonella (other than S. typhi) from milk and 3. Peterz, Wiberg and Norberg. 1989. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 66:523.
milk products,4 raw flesh foods, highly contaminated foods 4. International Dairy Federation. 1995. Milk and milk products: detection of Salmonella. IDF
Standard 93B:1005. Brussels, Belgium.
and animal feeds:5 5. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC Interna-
tional, Gaithersburg, Md.
Pre-enrichment
1. Add 25 g or a 25 mL sample of the specimen to 225 mL of Availability
pre-enrichment medium. Consult appropriate references for Difco Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10 Broth
the type of product being tested.4,5 AOAC ISO
2. Incubate at 35C for 24 2 hours5 or at 37C for 16-20 hours,4 Cat. No. 218581 Dehydrated 500 g
depending on the referenced procedure being followed.

Regan-Lowe Charcoal Agar

Regan-Lowe Charcoal Agar without Cephalexin
Intended Use medium supplemented with cephalexin to inhibit bacteria
Regan-Lowe Charcoal Agar is a selective medium used for indigenous to the nasopharynx and defibrinated horse blood
isolation of Bordetella pertussis from clinical specimens. to support the growth of Bordetella species.1-3
Regan-Lowe Charcoal Agar without Cephalexin is used for Use of the medium without cephalexin in parallel with Regan-
the cultivation of B. pertussis from clinical specimens and for Lowe Charcoal Agar is recommended, since a few strains
subcultures of the bacterium. (<10%) of B. pertussis will not grow on selective plates; also
the nonselective medium is used for subcultures to obtain
Summary and Explanation a larger amount of growth for additional testing, such as
Regan-Lowe Charcoal Agar plates are used in clinical labora- agglutination or immunofluorescence testing.3,4
tories for the isolation of Bordetella pertussis, the etiologic
agent of whooping cough, from nasopharyngeal swabs The medium in 10 mL prepared tubes (deeps) with screw-caps
and other sources of pharyngeal exudate. This medium was offers a longer shelf-life than the pre-poured plated medium.
developed by Regan and Lowe as a transport medium for To prepare the medium from the agar base, 10% horse blood
whooping cough specimens, but proved useful as an enrich- is added and cephalexin can be added to achieve selectivity.
ment medium for the selective isolation of B. pertussis and
B. parapertussis. It consists of charcoal agar as a basal
478
 Regan-Lowe Charcoal Agar, cont.

Bordetella pertussis
User Quality Control ATCC 9797

Identity Specifications
BBL Regan-Lowe Charcoal Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material.
Solution: 5.1% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is charcoal black,
homogeneous, opaque.
Prepared Appearance: Charcoal black, homogeneous, opaque.
Reaction of 5.1%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL Regan-Lowe Charcoal Agar Base
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh broth
cultures diluted 1:0 and incubate at 35 2C for 7 days.
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY Q
Bordetella pertussis
Bordetella parapertussis
9797
15311
Good
Good R

Principles of the Procedure

Beef extract and enzymatic digest of gelatin provide the amino Procedure
acids and other complex nitrogenous substances necessary Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci-
to support bacterial growth. Sodium chloride maintains the mens. Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar side
osmotic equilibrium. Defibrinated horse blood supplies nutrients up) in a moist chamber at 35C for 7 days. Colonies of
required for the cultivation of Bordetella species. Nicotinic acid B. pertussis may not be visible without the aid of a microscope
is a vitamin that promotes growth. Charcoal and starch for 2-4 days. Plates may be discarded as negative after 7 days
neutralize substances toxic to Bordetella species, such as fatty of incubation.
acids and peroxides. Cephalexin is a cephalosporin antibiotic
that inhibits most normal flora of the nasopharynx. Expected Results
Examine the plates daily with and without a dissecting microscope
Formula (oblique illumination) to detect the presence of B. pertussis.
BBL Regan-Lowe Charcoal Agar Base B. pertussis produces small, domed, glistening, white to gray
Approximate Formula* Per Liter colonies. To prevent overgrowth by spreading colonies or molds,
Beef Extract .............................................................. 10.0 g
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g use a sterile scalpel or needle to remove the portions of the agar
Soluble Starch .......................................................... 10.0 g that contain these contaminants.
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Charcoal ..................................................................... 4.0 g
Niacin ......................................................................... 0.01 g
References
1. Regan and Lowe. 1977. J. Clin. Microbiol. 6:303.
Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g 2. Sneed. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedure handbook, vol. 1. American
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Marcon. 1995. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Directions for Preparation from 4. Reisner, Woods, Thompson, Larone, Garcia and Shimizu. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover
and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology,
Dehydrated Product Washington, D.C.

1. Suspend 51 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix

thoroughly. Availability
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to BBL Regan-Lowe Charcoal Agar Base
Cat. No. 298123 Dehydrated 500 g
completely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. DO NOT OVER- BBL Regan-Lowe Charcoal Agar

BS10 CMPH MCM7

HEAT.
Cat. No. 297883 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
4. For preparation of blood plates, add 10% sterile, defibri- 297855 Prepared Tubes (Deeps), 10 mL Pkg. of 10*
nated horse blood to sterile agar which has been previously
BBL Regan-Lowe Charcoal Agar without Cephalexin
melted and cooled to 45-50C. Cat. No. 298326 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
5. For selective isolation of B. pertussis and B. parapertussis, *Store at 2-8C.
add 40 g of cephalexin per mL.
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
479
 Section III
QR Reinforced Clostridial Medium

Reinforced Clostridial Medium

Intended Use Formula
Reinforced Clostridial Medium is used for cultivating and Difco Reinforced Clostridial Medium
enumerating clostridia, other anaerobes, and other species of Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
bacteria from foods and clinical specimens. Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 5.0 g
Beef Extract .............................................................. 10.0 g
Summary and Explanation Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Reinforced Clostridial Medium is a semisolid medium formu- Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
lated by Hirsch and Grinstead.1 Their work demonstrated that Soluble Starch ............................................................ 1.0 g
the medium outperformed other media in supporting growth Cysteine Hydrochloride .............................................. 0.5 g
of clostridia from small inocula and produced higher viable Sodium Acetate ......................................................... 3.0 g
Agar ........................................................................... 0.5 g
cell counts.1 Barnes and Ingram2 used the medium to dilute
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
vegetative cells of Clostridium perfringens. Barnes et al.3 used
a solid (agar) version of the medium to enumerate clostridia Precautions5
in food. The medium is a nonselective enrichment medium 1. Biosafety Level 2 practices, containment equipment and
and grows various anaerobic and facultative bacteria when facilities are recommended for activities with clinical specimens
incubated anaerobically.4 of human or animal origin containing or potentially
containing C. botulinum or C. tetani or their toxins.
Principles of the Procedure 2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and
Reinforced Clostridial Agar contains peptones and beef extract facilities are recommended for all manipulations of cultures
as sources of carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Yeast of these organisms and for activities with a high potential
extract supplies B-complex vitamins which stimulate bacterial for aerosol or droplet production, and those involving
growth. Dextrose is the carbohydrate source. Sodium chloride production quantities of toxin.
maintains the osmotic balance. In low concentrations, soluble
starch detoxifies metabolic by-products. Cysteine hydrochloride Directions for Preparation from
is the reducing agent. Sodium acetate acts as a buffer. The small Dehydrated Product
amount of agar makes the medium semisolid. 1. Suspend 38 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
User Quality Control 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Identity Specifications completely dissolve the powder.
Difco Reinforced Clostridial Medium 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homoge- 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
neous. stable, typical control cultures.
Solution: 3.8% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium Procedure
amber, slightly opalescent when hot.
See appropriate references for specific procedures.
Prepared Appearance: Upon cooling, medium amber and
becomes more opalescent.
Reaction of 3.8% Expected Results
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2 Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.

Cultural Response References

Difco Reinforced Clostridial Medium 1. Hirsch and Grinstead. 1954. J. Dairy Res. 21:101.
2. Barnes and Ingram. 1956. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 19:117.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 3. Barnes, Despaul and Ingram. 1963. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 26:415.
35 2C for 18-48 hours. 4. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY 5. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
Bacteroides fragilis 23745 102-103 Good No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
Clostridium botulinum 3502* 102-103 Good
Clostridium perfringens 13124 102-103 Good Availability
*If this strain is not available, verify performance with a known isolate.
Difco Reinforced Clostridial Medium
CCAM EP
Cat. No. 218081 Dehydrated 500 g
Europe
Cat. No. 254548 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.

480
 Riboflavin Assay Medium

Riboflavin Assay Medium

Intended Use Formula
Riboflavin Assay Medium is used for determining riboflavin Difco Riboflavin Assay Medium
concentration by the microbiological assay technique. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g
Sodium Acetate ....................................................... 15.0 g
Summary and Explanation Vitamin Assay Casamino Acids ................................. 10.0 g
Vitamin assay media are prepared for use in the microbiological Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g
assay of vitamins. Three types of media are used for this Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
L-Asparagine .............................................................. 0.6 g
purpose: DL-Tryptophan ........................................................... 0.2 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.2 g
1. Maintenance Media: For maintaining the stock culture to Magnesium Sulfate USP ............................................. 0.4 g
preserve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism Adenine Sulfate ....................................................... 20.0 mg
for its intended purpose; Guanine Hydrochloride ............................................ 20.0 mg
2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for immediate Uracil ........................................................................ 20.0 mg
use;
Xanthine .................................................................. 20.0
Ferrous Sulfate ......................................................... 20.0
mg
mg
Q
3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the vitamin under
test. They contain all the factors necessary for optimal
Manganese Sulfate (monohydrate) .......................... 20.0
Sodium Chloride USP ............................................... 20.0
mg
mg R
Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ............................................ 4.0 mg
growth of the test organism except the single essential Pyridoxal Hydrochloride .............................................. 4.0 mg
vitamin to be determined. p-Aminobenzoic Acid ................................................. 2.0 mg
Calcium Pantothenate ............................................ 800.0 g
Riboflavin Assay Medium is a modification of the medium Folic Acid ............................................................... 800.0 g
described by Snell and Strong.1 It is recommended for use in Nicotinic Acid ......................................................... 800.0 g
Thiamine Hydrochloride ......................................... 400.0 g
the microbiological assay of riboflavin following the method- Biotin ......................................................................... 1.0 g
ology outlined in the Official Methods of Analysis of AOAC *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
International2 using Lactobacillus rhamnosus ATCC 7469
as the test organism. Precautions
Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media
Principles of the Procedure or glassware in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely
Riboflavin Assay Medium is free from riboflavin but contains small amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give
all other nutrients and vitamins essential for the growth of erroneous results. Scrupulously clean glassware, free from
Lactobacillus rhamnosus ATCC 7469. The addition of riboflavin detergents and other chemicals, must be used. Glassware must
in specified increasing concentrations gives a growth response be heated to 250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic
that can be measured turbidimetrically or titrimetrically. residues that might be present. Take precautions to keep
sterilizing and cooling conditions uniform throughout assay.
User Quality Control
Directions for Preparation from
Identity Specifications Dehydrated Product
Difco Riboflavin Assay Medium 1. Suspend 4.8 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water.
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 2-3 minutes to
Solution: 2.4% solution (single strength) and
4.8% (double strength), soluble in
completely dissolve the powder.
purified water upon boiling. Solution 3. Dispense 5 mL amounts into tubes, evenly dispersing the
is light to medium amber, clear, may precipitate.
have a slight precipitate.
4. Add standard or test samples.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear, may have a very
slight precipitate.
5. Adjust the volume to 10 mL with purified water.
Reaction of 2.4%
6. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes.
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2
Procedure
Cultural Response Follow applicable assay procedures.2 Levels of riboflavin used
Difco Riboflavin Assay Medium

in the determination of the standard curve should be prepared
Prepare the medium per label directions. The medium supports
according to this reference or according to the following
the growth of Lactobacillus rhamnosus ATCC 7469 when prepared in
single strength and supplemented with riboflavin. The medium should procedure.
produce a standard curve when tested using a riboflavin reference
standard at 0.0 to 125.0 ng per 10 mL. Incubate tubes with caps
Stock Cultures
loosened at 35-37C for 18-24 hours. Read the percent transmittance Stock cultures of L. rhamnosus ATCC 7469 are prepared by
using a spectrophotometer at 660 nm. stab inoculation into 10 mL of Lactobacilli Agar AOAC.

481
 Section III
QR Riboflavin Assay Medium, cont.

After 24-48 hours incubation at 35-37C, the stock cultures the diluted stock solution per tube. Prepare the stock solution
are kept in the refrigerator. Transfers are made at monthly fresh daily.
intervals in triplicate.
Expected Results
Inoculum
1. Prepare a standard concentration response curve by
Inoculum for assay is prepared by subculturing a stock culture
plotting the response readings against the amount of stan-
of L. rhamnosus ATCC 7469 into 10 mL of Lactobacilli Broth
dard in each tube, disk or cup.
AOAC or Micro Inoculum Broth. Following incubation
2. Determine the amount of vitamin at each level of assay
for 16-24 hours at 35-37C, the culture is centrifuged under solution by interpolation from the standard curve.
aseptic conditions and the supernatant liquid decanted. After 3. Calculate the concentration of vitamin in the sample from
washing 3 times with 10 mL sterile 0.85% saline, the cells are the average of these volumes. Use only those values that do
resuspended in 10 mL sterile 0.85% saline. The cell suspen- not vary more than 10% from the average and use the
sion is then diluted with sterile 0.85% saline, to a turbidity of results only if two-thirds of the values do not vary by more
35-40% transmittance when read on the spectrophotometer than 10%.
at 660 nm. One drop of this latter suspension is then used to
inoculate each of the assay tubes. Limitations of the Procedure
Riboflavin Assay Medium may be used for both turbidimetric 1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium
and titrimetric determinations. Turbidimetric readings should must be cultured and maintained on media recommended
be made after 18-24 hours incubation at 35-37C, whereas for this purpose.
titrimetric determinations are best made after 72 hours incu- 2. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the assay
bation at 35-37C. Using Riboflavin Assay Medium, the most procedure.
effective assay range is between 0.025 and 0.15 g riboflavin. 3. The use of altered or deficient media may cause mutants
having different nutritional requirements that will not give
Standard Curve
a satisfactory response.
It is essential that a standard curve be constructed each time
4. For successful results of these procedures, all conditions of
an assay is run. Conditions of autoclaving and temperature
the assay must be followed precisely.
of incubation, which influence the standard curve readings,
5. Maintain pH below 7.0 to prevent loss of riboflavin.
cannot be duplicated exactly from assay to assay. The
standard curve is obtained by using Riboflavin USP Reference References
Standard or equivalent at levels of 0.0, 0.025, 0.05, 0.075, 1. Snell and Strong. 1939. Ind. Eng. Chem. 11:346.
0.1, 0.15, 0.2 and 0.3 g riboflavin per assay tube (10 mL). 2. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. II. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.

The concentration of riboflavin required for the preparation

of the standard curve may be prepared by dissolving 0.1 g of
Availability
Riboflavin USP Reference Standard or equivalent in 1,000 mL Difco Riboflavin Assay Medium
of purified water by heating, giving a stock solution of 100 g AOAC
Cat. No. 232510 Dehydrated 100 g*
per mL. Dilute the stock solution by adding 1 mL to 999 mL
*Store at 2-8C.
purified water. Use 0.0, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5, 2 and 3 mL of

Rice Extract Agar

Intended Use Rice Extract Agar with 2% dextrose may be used to promote
Rice Extract Agar is used for promotion of chlamydospore chromogenesis and, therefore, is helpful in distinguishing
formation by Candida albicans and C. stellatoidea as a means Trichophyton rubrum from T. mentagrophytes.
of differentiating them from other Candida species.
Principles of the Procedure
Summary and Explanation The rice extract provides the nutrients required for the growth
Rice Extract Agar was developed by Taschdjian to aid in the of Candida species. The addition of polysorbate 80 stimulates
identification of chlamydospore-producing species of Candida chlamydospore formation due to its content of oleic acids.
so as to differentiate these species from others within the Chlamydospore production is also favored by the use of a lower
Candida genus.1 Later, Taschdjian recommended inclusion concentration, 13 g/L, although the medium can be prepared
of polysorbate 80 and the use of a lower concentration of at a higher concentration (25 g/L).
medium (13 g/L) to enhance the formation of chlamydospores.2 The addition of 2% dextrose enhances chromogenesis in
T. rubrum.

482
 Rogosa SL Agar

Formula Procedure
BBL Rice Extract Agar 1. For use in the detection of chlamydospore formation.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Inoculate the culture by cutting slits into the agar with an
White Rice, Extract from (solids) ................................. 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g
inoculating needle. Cover the inoculated slits with sterile
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. coverslips. Seal the plates to avoid moisture loss and
incubate at room temperature for 24-48 hours and up to
Directions for Preparation from 14 days before discarding as negative.
Dehydrated Product 2. For use in the promotion of chromogenesis in T. rubrum.
1. Suspend 25 g of the powder in 1 L purified water. To Streak-inoculate tubed medium slants. Tighten caps after
promote chlamydospore formation, suspend 13 g of the inoculation and then loosen slightly. After incubation for
powder in 1 L of purified water. 2-3 days, caps should be retightened to prevent further
2. Add 10 mL polysorbate 80. Mix until a uniform suspension evaporation of water. Incubate tubes at room temperature
is obtained. for up to 14 days.
3. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder. Expected Results
4. Dispense and autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
After 24-48 hours, most strains of C. albicans and
C. stellatoidea will have formed typical chlamydospores.3 Invert
Q
stable, typical control cultures. the plate and examine microscopically (100 magnification) for R
chlamydospore formation along the line of inoculation.
User Quality Control Growth of T. rubrum is pink to red on medium containing
dextrose and, therefore, it is distinguishable from
Identity Specifications
T. mentagrophytes.
BBL Rice Extract Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
ous material. Limitation of the Procedure
Solution: 1.3% solution, soluble in purified Polysorbate 80 enhances chlamydospore production by
water upon boiling. Solution is pale, C. albicans and C. stellatoidea; however, it also enhances chlamy-
yellow to tan, moderately hazy to hazy. dospore formation in other Candida species. Therefore, it is
Prepared Appearance: Pale, yellow to tan, moderately hazy necessary to use additional media for species identification.4
to hazy.
Reaction of 1.3%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.6 0.2
References
1. Taschdjian. 1953. Mycologia 45:474.
2. Taschdjian. 1957. Mycologia 49:332.
Cultural Response 3. Cooper and Silva-Hutner. 1985. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
BBL Rice Extract Agar 4. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Prepare the medium per label directions and test for chlamydospore pro-
duction. Using fresh cultures, streak two parallel lines approximately 1.5
cm long and 1.0 cm apart. Make an S-shaped streak lightly back and Availability
forth across the two parallel streak lines. Place a coverslip over the streak BBL Rice Extract Agar
marks. Incubate at 20-25C for 3-5 days and examine microscopically. Cat. No. 211567 Dehydrated 100 g
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY CHLAMYDOSPORES Europe
Candida albicans 10231 Good + Cat. No. 254420 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Candida albicans 60193 Good _ *Store at 2-8C.

Rogosa SL Agar Rogosa SL Broth

Intended Use etate concentrations effectively suppress other bacterial flora
Rogosa SL Agar and Rogosa SL Broth are used for cultivating allowing lactobacilli to flourish.
oral, vaginal and fecal lactobacilli.
Principles of the Procedure
Summary and Explanation Peptone provides carbon and nitrogen. Yeast extract is a source
Rogosa SL Agar and Broth, also known as RMW Agar/Broth, of trace elements, vitamins and amino acids. Dextrose,
are a modification of media described by Rogosa, Mitchell arabinose and saccharose are carbohydrate sources that
and Wiseman.1,2 These media are used for isolation, enumeration provide carbon. Sodium acetate and ammonium citrate
and identification of lactobacilli in oral bacteriology, feces, inhibit streptococci, molds and other oral microbial flora and
vaginal specimens and foodstuffs.3,4 The low pH and high ac- restrict swarming. Monopotassium phosphate provides

483
 Section III
QR Rogosa SL Agar, cont.

User Quality Control Directions for Preparation from

Dehydrated Product
Identity Specifications 1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
Difco Rogosa SL Agar Difco Rogosa SL Agar 75 g;
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, homogeneous with soft clumps.
Difco Rogosa SL Broth 59.7 g.
Solution: 7.5% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
Mix thoroughly.
amber, slightly opalescent and may 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
have a slight precipitate. completely dissolve the powder.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent. 3. Add 1.32 mL of glacial acetic acid and mix thoroughly.
Reaction of 7.5% Solution 4. Boil for 2-3 minutes. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE.
(with glacial acetic acid
and reboiling) at 25C: pH 5.4 0.2
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
Difco Rogosa SL Broth

Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, appears moist, with soft

clumps. Procedure
Solution: 6.0% solution, soluble in purified See appropriate references for specific procedures.
water upon boiling. Solution is light
amber, clear to slightly opalescent. Expected Results
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to slightly opalescent. Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Reaction of 6.0% Solution
(with glacial acetic acid
and reboiling) at 25C: pH 5.4 0.2
Limitation of the Procedure
The salt in the formulation makes the media unsuitable for
Cultural Response isolation of dairy lactobacilli; e.g., L. lactis, L. bulgaricus and
Difco Rogosa SL Agar or Rogosa SL Broth L. helveticus.4
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate the agar medium
using the pour plate technique and incubate at 35 2C for 40-48 References
hours. Inoculate the broth medium and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 1. Rogosa, Mitchell and Wiseman. 1951. J. Bacteriol. 62:132.
hours. 2. Rogosa, Mitchell and Wiseman. 1951. J. Dental Res. 30:682.
3. Hall, Ledenbach and Flowers. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the
microbiological examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington,
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
D.C.
Lactobacillus rhamnosus 9595 2
10 -10 3
Good 4. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Lactobacillus delbrueckii
subsp. lactis 4797 102-103 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-2103 Marked to
Availability
complete inhibition Difco Rogosa SL Agar
Cat. No. 248020 Dehydrated 500 g*

buffering capability. Magnesium sulfate, manganese sulfate and Japan

Cat. No. 251542 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
ferrous sulfate are sources of inorganic ions. Polysorbate 80
Difco Rogosa SL Broth

acts as a surfactant. Agar is the solidifying agent.
COMPF
Cat. No. 247810 Dehydrated 500 g*
Formulae *Store at 2-8C.
Difco Rogosa SL Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Tryptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Arabinose ................................................................... 5.0 g
Saccharose ................................................................. 5.0 g
Sodium Acetate ....................................................... 15.0 g
Ammonium Citrate .................................................... 2.0 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 6.0 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.57 g
Manganese Sulfate .................................................... 0.12 g
Ferrous Sulfate ........................................................... 0.03 g
Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 1.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Difco Rogosa SL Broth
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

484
 Rose Bengal Agar Base

Rose Agar with 5% Sheep Blood

Intended Use selective for gram-positive bacteria; phenylethyl alcohol is
Rose Agar with 5% Sheep Blood is used in qualitative proce- bacteriostatic for gram-negative organisms. The addition of
dures for the isolation and cultivation of gram-positive cocci 5% sheep blood to the medium allows for the detection of
from clinical specimens. hemolytic reactions.3

Summary and Explanation Procedure

Rose Agar is a combination of the ingredients of two selective Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
media formulations, Columbia CNA Agar base1 and Phenylethyl specimens. Incubate plates, protected from light, in an inverted
Alcohol Agar base,2 plus sheep blood. The medium was found position (agar side up) at 35C for 18-48 hours in an aerobic
to yield greater recovery of gram-positive cocci, particularly atmosphere supplemented with CO2.
streptococci, than either medium individually. (Phenylethyl
alcohol imparts a rose-like odor to the medium.) Expected Results
Columbia CNA Agar is a selective and differential medium
Streptococcal colonies will appear as small, white to grayish
colonies, which may show beta or alpha hemolysis.
Q
for gram-positive organisms; Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar is also
a selective medium for the isolation of gram-positive bacteria,
R
References
particularly gram-positive cocci. 1. Ellner, Stoessel, Drakeford and Vasi. 1966. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 45:502.
2. Lilley and Brewer. 1953. J. Am. Pharm. Assoc. 42:6.
3. Esterez. 1984. Lab. Med. 15:258.
Principles of the Procedure
Rose Agar is a nutritious medium containing amino acids, Availability
peptones and trace elements provided by enzymatic digests BBL Rose Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
of casein, animal tissue, heart muscle and soybean meal. Cat. No. 297961 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
297964 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Yeast extract provides additional nutrients and vitamins. The
*Store at 2-8C.
inclusion of colistin and nalidixic acid renders the medium

Rose Bengal Agar Base

Rose Bengal Antimicrobic Supplement C
Intended Use Rose Bengal Agar Base supplemented with Rose Bengal
Rose Bengal Agar Base is used with Rose Bengal Antimicrobic Antimicrobic Supplement C is a modification of the Rose
Supplement C in isolating and enumerating yeasts and molds. Bengal Chlortetracycline Agar formula of Jarvis.11 Instead
of chlortetracycline, chloramphenicol is employed in this
Summary and Explanation medium as a selective supplement. Of the antibiotics most
A number of methods have been described for the selective frequently employed in media of neutral pH, chloramphenicol
isolation of fungi from environmental materials and food- is recommended because of its heat stability and broad
stuffs containing mixed populations of fungi and bacteria. antibacterial spectrum.12 Rose Bengal Agar or modified
The use of media with an acid pH that selectively inhibits the formulations are recommended in standard methods for
growth of bacteria and thereby promotes the growth of fungi the enumeration of yeasts and molds from foodstuffs and
has been widely employed.1-3 A number of investigators have water.12-14
reported, however, that acidified media may actually inhibit
The Hycheck hygiene contact slide is a double-sided paddle
fungal growth,4,5 fail to completely inhibit bacterial growth5
containing two agar surfaces for immersing into fluids or
and have little effect in restricting the size of mold colonies.6
sampling surfaces. There are two slides with Rose Bengal
Smith and Dawson 7 used rose bengal in a neutral pH
Chloramphenicol Agar along with another medium: Tryptic
medium for the selective isolation of fungi from soil samples.
Soy Agar; and Tryptic Soy Agar with 0.01% TTC.
Chloramphenicol, streptomycin, oxytetracycline and chlortet-
racycline have been used for the improved, selective isolation
and enumeration of yeasts and molds from soil, sewage and
foodstuffs.4,8-11

485
 Section III
QR Rose Bengal Agar Base, cont.

Uninoculated Aspergillus niger

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 1015

Identity Specifications
Difco Rose Bengal Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige to faint pink, free-flowing, homo-
geneous.
Solution: 3.2% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is reddish pink,
very slightly to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Bright pink, very slightly to slightly opal-
escent.
Reaction of 3.2%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
Difco
Rose Bengal Antimicrobic Supplement C
Lyophilized Appearance: White cake, may be dispersed.
Rehydrated Appearance: Colorless, clear.
Solubility: Soluble in 2 mL ethanol.

Cultural Response
Difco Rose Bengal Agar Base with Antimicrobic
Supplement C
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the pour plate Candida
albicans
technique (for Aspergillus niger, inoculate the surface of an agar slant) ATCC 10231
and incubate aerobically at 25-30C for up to 7 days.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Aspergillus niger 1015 102-3102 Good White
Candida albicans 10231 102-3102 Good Pink
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Marked to
complete inhibition
Micrococcus luteus 10240 103-2103 Marked to
complete inhibition

Principles of the Procedure Formulae

Peptone provides the carbon and nitrogen sources required Difco Rose Bengal Agar Base
for good growth of a wide variety of organisms. Dextrose Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Soytone ...................................................................... 5.0 g
is an energy source. Monopotassium phosphate provides Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
buffering capability. Magnesium sulfate provides necessary Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
trace elements. Rose bengal is included as a selective agent Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.5 g
that inhibits bacterial growth and restricts the size and height Rose Bengal ............................................................... 0.05 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
of colonies of the more rapidly growing molds. The restriction
Difco Rose Bengal Antimicrobic Supplement C
in growth of molds aids in the isolation of slow-growing fungi Formula Per 2 mL Vial
by preventing overgrowth by more rapidly growing species. Chloramphenicol ........................................................ 0.05 g
Rose bengal is taken up by yeast and mold colonies, thereby *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

facilitating their recognition and enumeration. Rose Bengal

Antimicrobic Supplement C is a lyophilized antimicrobic
Directions for Preparation from
supplement containing chloramphenicol which inhibits Dehydrated Product
bacteria. Agar is the solidifying agent. Difco Rose Bengal Agar Base
1. Suspend 16 g of the powder in 500 mL of purified water.
Mix thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 45-50C.
4. Aseptically add 2 mL rehydrated Rose Bengal Antimicrobic
Supplement C to 500 mL of cooled agar base. Mix
thoroughly.

486
 Rose Bengal Agar Base, cont.

5. Dispense into sterile Petri dishes and allow to dry References

overnight at room temperature (21-25C). 1. Waksman. 1922. J. Bacteriol. 7:339.
2. Koburger. 1976. In Speck (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using foods. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. Mossel, Visser and Mengerink. 1962. Lab Practice 11:109.
stable, typical control cultures. 4. Martin. 1950. Soil Sci. 69:215.
5. Koburger. 1972. J. Milk Food Technol. 35:659.
Difco Rose Bengal Antimicrobic Supplement C 6. Tyner. 1944. Soil Sci. 57:271.
7. Smith and Dawson. 1944. Soil Sci. 58:467.
(Chloramphenicol) 8. Cooke. 1954. Antibiot. and Chemother. 4:657.
1. Aseptically add 2 mL ethanol per vial of supplement. 9. Papavizas and Davey. 1959. Soil Sci. 88:112.
10. Overcast and Weakley. 1969. J. Milk Technol. 32:442.
2. Invert several times to dissolve the powder. 11. Jarvis. 1973. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 36:723.
12. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Procedure 13. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
1. Inoculate 0.1 mL of appropriate dilutions in duplicate on 14. Beuchat and Cousin. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiological
examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
the solidified agar. Spread over the entire surface using a 15. Banks, Board and Paton. 1985. Lett. Appl. Microbiol. 1:7.

sterile bent glass rod.

2. Incubate plates at 25-30C for up to 7 days.
Availability
Difco Rose Bengal Agar Base
Expected Results
Colonies of yeast appear pink due to the uptake of rose bengal.
SMWW
Cat. No. 218312 Dehydrated 500 g Q
Count plates containing 15-150 colonies and report the counts Difco Rose Bengal Antimicrobic Supplement C
SMWW

R
as colony-forming units (CFU) per gram or mL of sample.
Cat. No. 233521 Vial 6 2 mL*

Limitations of the Procedure Difco Hycheck Hygiene Contact Slides

Cat. No. 290381 Rose Bengal Chloramphenicol Agar//
1. Although this medium is selective primarily for fungi, Tryptic Soy Agar (20 slides)*
microscopic examination is recommended for presumptive 290461 Rose Bengal Chloramphenicol Agar//
identification. Biochemical testing using pure cultures is Tryptic Soy Agar with 0.01% TTC (20 slides)*
*Store at 2-8C.
required for complete identification.
2. Due to the selective properties of this medium and the type
of specimen being cultured, some strains of fungi may
be encountered that fail to grow or grow poorly on the
complete medium; similarly, some strains of bacteria may
be encountered that are not inhibited or only partially
inhibited.
3. Care should be taken not to expose this medium to light,
since photodegradation of rose bengal yields compounds
that are toxic to fungi.14,15

487
 Section III
S SF Medium

SF Medium SF Broth
Intended Use effect on gram-negative bacteria through its inhibitory action
SF (Streptococcus Faecalis) Medium (Broth) is used for the on enzymes in the electron transport system. Bromcresol purple
differentiation of Enterococcus species from the Streptococcus serves as a pH indicator.
bovis group and other streptococci.
Formula
Summary and Explanation Difco SF Medium
The formulation of SF Medium was developed by Hajna and Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Tryptone ................................................................... 20.0 g
Perry1 as a result of their comparative study of presumptive Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g
and confirmatory media for the detection of coliforms and Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 4.0 g
fecal streptococci. It was recommended for use in the exami- Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.5 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
nation of waters and other materials for the presence of fecal Sodium Azide ............................................................. 0.5 g
streptococci as an indicator of pollution. The use of SF Bromcresol Purple .................................................... 32.0 mg
Medium in sanitary bacteriology has been replaced by more *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

selective media recommended in current compendia of methods

Directions for Preparation from
for the examination of waters and foods.2-4
Dehydrated Product
For diagnostic microbiology purposes, the medium is useful in 1. Dissolve 36 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. For
differentiation of enterococci from streptococci. Pure cultures double strength medium, use 72 g/L of purified water.
of streptococci are inoculated into SF Medium in order to Rehydrate with proportionally less water when liquid
determine if the respective culture is Enterococcus sp. Entero- inocula will exceed 1 mL.
cocci ferment dextrose and grow in the presence of the inhibitor 2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
sodium azide. 3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
Principles of the Procedure
Peptone and dextrose supply the nutrients required for the Procedure
growth of enterococci. Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic Inoculate tubes of the medium with pure cultures of the test
balance of the medium. Sodium azide exhibits a bacteriostatic organisms. Incubate tubes for 18-48 hours at 45-46C in an
aerobic atmosphere.
User Quality Control
Expected Results
Identity Specifications
A positive reaction is indicated by turbidity and a yellow-brown
Difco SF Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige to gray, may have a light color due to the fermentation of dextrose and the resultant
greenish tint, free-flowing, homoge- color change of the bromcresol purple indicator.
neous.
A negative reaction is indicated by no change in the purple
Solution: 3.6% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is purple, clear. color of the medium.
Prepared Appearance: Dark purple, clear to slightly hazy, may Streptococci yielding positive reactions:
contain a slight precipitate.
Reaction of 3.6% E. faecalis
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2 E. faecium
Cultural Response Streptococci yielding negative reactions:
Difco SF Medium

S. bovis
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 45-
46C for 18-48 hours.
S. equinus
S. mitis
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY REACTION S. salivarius
Enterococcus faecalis 19433 105-106 Good Yellow (acid) Streptococcus species other than group D
Enterococcus faecium 27270 105-106 Good Yellow (acid)
Escherichia coli 25922 105-106 Inhibition No change Limitations of the Procedure
Streptococcus bovis 33317 105-106 None to No change 1. Pure cultures of enterococci (streptococci) should be inocu-
poor
lated into this medium.
2. Group D streptococci include both enterococcal and
non-enterococcal strains. Consult appropriate references
for further identification of group D streptococci.
488
 SFP Agar Base

References Availability
1. Hajna and Perry. 1943. Am J. Public Health. 33:550.
2. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
Difco SF Medium
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. AOAC
3. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Cat. No. 231510 Dehydrated 500 g
4. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. BBL SF Broth
AOAC
Cat. No. 221712 Prepared Tubes Ctn. of 100

SFP Agar Base

Egg Yolk Enrichment 50%
Antimicrobic Vial K Antimicrobic Vial P
Intended Use C. perfringens is found in raw meats, poultry, dehydrated soups
SFP Agar Base is used with Egg Yolk Enrichment 50%, Anti- and sauces, raw vegetables and other foods and food ingredients,
microbic Vial P and Antimicrobic Vial K in detecting and but occurrences of foodborne illness are usually associated with
enumerating Clostridium perfringens in foods. cooked meat or poultry products.2 Spores of some strains that
may resist heat during cooking germinate and grow in foods
Summary and Explanation that are not adequately refrigerated.3 Enumerating the micro-
Shahidi Ferguson Perfringens (SFP) Agar Base is prepared organism in food samples plays a role in the epidemiological
according to the formulation of Shahidi and Ferguson.1 With
the addition of 50% egg yolk emulsion, both the lecithinase
investigation of outbreaks of foodborne illness.2
S
SFP Agar (with added kanamycin and polymyxin B) is compa-
reaction and the sulfite reaction can identify Clostridium rable to Tryptose Sulfite Cycloserine (TSC) Agar, which uses
perfringens. The selectivity of the medium is due to the added cycloserine as the inhibitory component.2,4,5
kanamycin and polymyxin B.
Uninoculated Clostridium perfringens
User Quality Control Plate ATCC 12919

Identity Specifications
Difco SFP Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 47 g, soluble in 900 mL purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium to dark
amber, slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance (Final): Canary yellow, opaque.
Reaction of 47g/900 mL
Solution at 25C: pH 7.6 0.2
Difco Egg Yolk Enrichment 50%

Appearance: Canary yellow, opaque solution with a

resuspendable precipitate.
Difco Antimicrobic Vial K
Dehydrated Appearance: White cake or powder.
Rehydrated Appearance: Colorless, clear solution.
Difco Antimicrobic Vial P

Dehydrated Appearance: White cake or powder.

Rehydrated Appearance: Colorless, clear solution.

Cultural Response Clostridium

Difco SFP Agar Base perfringens
ATCC 12924
Prepare the base layer and cover layer per label directions, inoculating the
base layer. Incubate at 35 2C under anaerobic conditions for 18-48
hours.
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLONY COLOR
Clostridium perfringens 12919 30-300 Good Black with a zone of precipitation (halo)
Clostridium perfringens 12924 30-300 Good Black with a zone of precipitation (halo)

489
 Section III
S SFP Agar Base, cont.

Principles of the Procedure Cover Layer:

SFP Agar Base contains peptones as sources of carbon, nitrogen, 1. Suspend 47 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
vitamins and minerals. Yeast extract supplies B-complex 2. Prepare as above, except omit Egg Yolk Enrichment 50%.
vitamins, which stimulate bacterial growth. Ferric ammonium 3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
citrate and sodium sulfite are H2S indicators. Clostridia stable, typical control cultures.
reduce sulfite to sulfide, which reacts with iron to form a black Difco Antimicrobic Vial K (Kanamycin)
iron sulfide precipitate. Antimicrobic Vial P contains polymyxin 1. To rehydrate, aseptically add 10 mL sterile purified water
B and Antimicrobic Vial K contains kanamycin; both are per vial.
inhibitors to organisms other than Clostridium spp. Egg Yolk 2. Rotate in an end-over-end motion to dissolve the contents
Enrichment 50% provides egg yolk lecithin, which some completely.
clostridia hydrolyze. Agar is the solidifying agent.
Difco Antimicrobic Vial P (Polymyxin B)
Formulae 1. To rehydrate, aseptically add 10 mL of sterile purified
Difco SFP Agar Base water per vial.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 2. Rotate in an end-over-end motion to dissolve the contents
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g completely.
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 7.5 g
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 7.5 g
Soytone ...................................................................... 5.0 g
Procedure
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 1.0 g See appropriate references for specific procedures.
Sodium Bisulfite ......................................................... 1.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g Expected Results
Difco Egg Yolk Enrichment 50% Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Sterile concentrated egg yolk emulsion.
Difco Antimicrobic Vial K References
25 mg Kanamycin per 10 mL vial. 1. Shahidi and Ferguson. 1971. Appl. Microbiol. 21:500.
2. Labbe. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.). Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination
Difco Antimicrobic Vial P

of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. Rhodehamel and Harmon. 1995. FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Interna-
30,000 units Polymyxin B per 10 mL vial. tional, Gaithersburg, Md.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 4. Andrews. 2000. In Horwitz (ed.), Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed.
AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
5. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
Directions for Preparation from vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.

Dehydrated Product
Difco SFP Agar Base Availability
Base Layer: Difco SFP Agar Base
AOAC BAM COMPF ISO
1. Suspend 47 g of the powder in 900 mL of purified water.
Cat. No. 281110 Dehydrated 500 g
Mix thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Difco Antimicrobic Vial K

completely dissolve the powder. Cat. No. 233391 Vial 6 10 mL*

3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 50C. Difco Antimicrobic Vial P

4. Add 100 mL Egg Yolk Enrichment 50%, 10 mL of Cat. No. 232681 Vial 6 10 mL*
rehydrated Antimicrobic Vial P (30,000 units polymyxin Difco Egg Yolk Enrichment 50%

B sulfate) and 4.8 mL rehydrated Antimicrobic Vial K AOAC BAM COMPF

(12 mg kanamycin). Mix thoroughly. Cat. No. 233471 Bottle 12 10 mL*
233472 Bottle 6 100 mL*
*Store at 2-8C.

SIM Medium
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
SIM Medium is used to differentiate enteric bacilli on the The ingredients in SIM Medium enable the determination of
basis of sulfide production, indole formation and motility. three activities by which enteric bacteria can be differentiated.
Sodium thiosulfate and ferrous ammonium sulfate are indicators
Summary and Explanation of hydrogen sulfide production. The ferrous ammonium
Hydrogen sulfide production, indole formation and motility sulfate reacts with H2S gas to produce ferrous sulfide, a black
are distinguishing characteristics which aid in the identification precipitate.1 The casein peptone is rich in tryptophan, which is
of the Enterobacteriaceae, especially Salmonella and Shigella. attacked by certain microorganisms resulting in the production
SIM Medium, therefore, is useful in the process of identification of indole. The indole is detected by the addition of chemical
of enteric pathogens.
490
 SIM Medium, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
BBL SIM Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material.
Solution: 3.0% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light to medium,
yellow to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear to
slightly hazy.
Reaction of 3.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2

Cultural Response Uninoculated Escherichia coli Salmonella

BBL SIM Medium Tube ATCC 25922 typhimurium
with indole ATCC 14028
Prepare the medium per label directions. Stab inoculate using heavy reagent with indole
inocula of fresh cultures and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. reagent
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY MOTILITY H2S INDOLE
Escherichia coli 25922 Good + +
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 13311 Good + +
Shigella flexneri 9199 Good

reagents following the incubation period. Motility detection is Expected Results

S
possible due to the semisolid nature of the medium. Growth Following incubation, observe for motility (diffuse growth
radiating out from the central stab line indicates that the test outward from the stab line or turbidity throughout the
organism is motile. medium) and for H2S production (blackening along the stab
line). To detect indole production, add three or four drops
Formula of Kovacs reagent2 and observe for a red color (positive
BBL SIM Medium reaction).
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 20.0 g Consult appropriate references for activities of specific micro-
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 6.1 g organisms.2-4
Ferrous Ammonium Sulfate ........................................ 0.2 g
Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................... 0.2 g
Agar ........................................................................... 3.5 g References
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 1. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
2. Ewing. 1986. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science
Directions for Preparation from Publishing Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
3. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriology,
Dehydrated Product 9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
4. Farmer. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiol-
1. Suspend 30 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix ogy, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- Availability
pletely dissolve the powder. BBL SIM Medium
BAM
3. Dispense and autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cat. No. 211578 Dehydrated 500 g
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 221010 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10
stable, typical control cultures. 221011 Prepared Tubes Ctn. of 100

Procedure
Loosen caps, boil and cool before use. Using growth from
a pure culture, stab an inoculating needle two-thirds of the
distance to the bottom in the center of the tube. Incubate
tubes with loosened caps for 18-24 hours at 35 2C in an
aerobic atmosphere.

491
 Section III
S SOB Medium

SOB Medium
Intended Use stress of transformation and grow well. Sodium chloride and
SOB Medium is used for cultivating recombinant strains of potassium chloride provide essential ions. Magnesium sulfate
Escherichia coli. is a source of magnesium ions required in a variety of
enzymatic reactions, including DNA replication.
Summary and Explanation
SOB Medium was developed by Hanahan1 as a nutritionally Formula
rich growth medium for preparation and transformation of Difco SOB Medium
competent cells. Transformation requires making perforations Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Tryptone ................................................................... 20.0 g
in the bacterium (i.e., making the cells competent) to allow Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
the introduction of foreign DNA into the cell. To survive this Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 0.5 g
process, competent cells need a rich, isotonic environment. Magnesium Sulfate (anhydrous) ................................. 2.4 g
Potassium Chloride ................................................ 186.0 mg
SOC Medium, used in the final stage of transformation, may *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

be prepared by aseptically adding 20 mL of a filter-sterilized

20% solution of glucose (dextrose) to the sterile SOB Medium.
Directions for Preparation from
This addition provides a readily available source of carbon Dehydrated Product
and energy in a form E. coli can use in mending the perforations 1. Suspend 28 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
and for replication.2 thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Principles of the Procedure completely dissolve the powder.
Peptone and yeast extract provide sources of nitrogen and 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
growth factors which allow the bacteria to recover from the 4. If desired, SOC Medium may be prepared by adding
20 mL filter-sterilized 20% glucose solution after cooling
User Quality Control the medium to 45-50C.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Identity Specifications stable, typical control cultures.
Difco SOB Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Procedure
Solution: 2.8% solution, soluble in purified
Consult appropriate references for recommended test proce-
water. Solution is light to medium dures.2
amber, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear. Expected Results
Reaction of 2.8% Growth is evident in the form of turbidity.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
References
Cultural Response 1. Hanahan. 1983. J. Mol. Biol. 166:557.
2. Sambrook, Fritsch and Maniatis. 1989. Molecular cloning: a laboratory manual, 2nd ed. Cold
Difco SOB Medium Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-24 hours. Availability
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY Difco SOB Medium
Escherichia coli (DH-5) 53868 2
10 -310 2
Good Cat. No. 244310 Dehydrated 500 g

SPS Agar
Intended Use Sulfadiazine (SPS) Agar and used it to quantitate C. perfringens
SPS Agar is used for detecting and enumerating Clostridium in foods.
perfringens in food. C. perfringens is found in raw meats, poultry, dehydrated soups
and sauces, raw vegetables and other foods and food ingredients.
Summary and Explanation Occurrences of foodborne illness from C. perfringens are
In the 1950s, Mossel1 and Mossel et al.2 proposed media for usually associated with cooked meat or poultry products.4
enumerating anaerobic sulfite-reducing clostridia in foods. Spores of some strains that may resist heat during cooking
Angelotti et al.3 modified the formula as Sulfite Polymyxin germinate and grow in foods that are not adequately refriger-
492
 SPS Agar, cont.

Uninoculated Clostridium perfringens

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 12919

Identity Specifications
Difco SPS Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 4.1% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light to
medium amber, very slightly to slightly
opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal-
escent.
Reaction of 4.1%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco SPS Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the pour plate
technique and incubate anaerobically at 35 2C for 24-48 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Clostridium perfringens 12919 102-103 Good Black
Clostridium sporogenes 11437 102-103 None to fair Black
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Marked to
complete inhibition Staphylococcus
aureus
Salmonella choleraesuis ATCC 25923
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Marked to S
complete inhibition
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Fair to good White

ated.5 Enumerating the microorganism in food samples plays Directions for Preparation from
a role in epidemiological investigation of outbreaks of Dehydrated Product
foodborne illness.4 1. Suspend 41 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.
Principles of the Procedure 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
SPS Agar contains peptone as a source of carbon, nitrogen, completely dissolve the powder.
vitamins and minerals. Yeast extract supplies B-complex 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
vitamins which stimulate bacterial growth. Ferric citrate and 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
sodium sulfite are H2S indicators. Clostridia reduce the sulfite stable, typical control cultures.
to sulfide, which reacts with the iron from ferric citrate to form
a black iron sulfide precipitate. Polysorbate 80 is a dispersing Procedure
agent. Polymyxin B sulfate and sulfadiazine are inhibitors to 1. Dispense inoculum into sterile Petri dish.
organisms other than Clostridium spp. Sodium thioglycollate 2. Pour medium cooled to 50-55C over the inoculum.
is a reducing agent. Agar is the solidifying agent. 3. Gently but thoroughly mix the inoculum and medium.
Allow to solidify on a flat surface.
Formula 4. Incubate anaerobically at 35 2C for 24-48 hours.
Difco SPS Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Expected Results
Tryptone ................................................................... 15.0 g Clostridium perfringens will grow as black colonies with good
Yeast Extract ............................................................ 10.0 g
Ferric Citrate .............................................................. 0.5 g growth.
Sodium Sulfite ............................................................ 0.5 g
Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 0.1 g Limitation of the Procedure
Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 0.05 g
Sulfadiazine ................................................................ 0.12 g The high degree of selectivity of SPS Agar may inhibit some
Polymyxin B Sulfate .................................................... 0.01 g strains of C. perfringens while other strains that grow may fail
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g to produce distinguishing black colonies.4
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

493
 Section III
S SPS Agar, cont.

References Availability
1. Mossel. 1959. J. Sci. Food Agric. 19:662.
2. Mossel, DeBruin, van Diepen, Vendrig and Zoutewelle. 1956. J. Appl. Microbiol. 19:142.
Difco SPS Agar
3. Angelotti, Hall, Foster and Lewis. 1962. Appl. Microbiol. 10:193. Cat. No. 284530 Dehydrated 500 g*
4. Labbe. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination
of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. *Store at 2-8C.
5. Rhodehamel and Harmon. 1995. FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Interna-
tional, Gaithersburg, Md.

SS Agar Salmonella Shigella Agar

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
SS Agar and Salmonella Shigella Agar are moderately selective and SS Agar and Salmonella Shigella Agar are designated as mod-
differential media for the isolation of pathogenic enteric bacilli, erately selective media based upon the degree of inhibition of
especially those belonging to the genus Salmonella. This formula- gram-positive microorganisms that they inhibit due to their
tion is not recommended for the primary isolation of Shigella. content of bile salts, brilliant green and citrates. Differentiation
of enteric organisms is achieved by the incorporation of lactose
Summary and Explanation in the medium. Organisms that ferment lactose produce acid
The culture media that have been developed for the selection which, in the presence of the neutral red indicator, results in
and differentiation of enteric microorganisms from clinical the formation of red colonies. Lactose nonfermenters form
and nonclinical materials inhibit the growth of gram-positive colorless colonies. The latter group contains the majority of the
species to a varying degree due to the presence of either pure intestinal pathogens, including Salmonella and Shigella.
bile salts, mixtures of bile salts or dyes. SS Agar and Salmonella
The sodium thiosulfate and ferric citrate enable the detection
Shigella Agar are examples of media used in the plating of
of hydrogen sulfide production as evidenced by colonies with
samples for the detection of enteric pathogens that contain
black centers.
bile salt mixtures. This formulation is essentially a modifica-
tion of the Desoxycholate-Citrate Agar described by Leifson.1

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco SS Agar BBL Salmonella Shigella Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Very light buff to pink, free-flowing, Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
homogeneous. material, may contain many small tan
Solution: 6.0% solution, soluble in purified water flecks.
upon boiling. Solution is red-orange, very Solution: 6.0% solution, soluble in purified water
slightly to slightly opalescent. upon boiling. Solution is medium, tan-
Prepared Appearance: Red-orange, slightly opalescent. orange to tan-red, clear to moderately
hazy.
Reaction of 6.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 Prepared Appearance: Medium, tan-orange to tan-red, clear
to moderately hazy.
Cultural Response Reaction of 6.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
Difco SS Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-24 hours.
Cultural Response
BBL Salmonella Shigella Agar
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR H2S
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 24 hours.
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-2103 Partial Colorless
inhibition INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR H2S
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Partial Pink
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 104-105 Complete
inhibition to red
inhibition
Salmonella choleraesuis Escherichia coli 25922 104-105 Partial Pink to
subsp. choleraesuis to complete red
2 3
serotype Typhimurium 14028 10 -10 Good Colorless + inhibition
Shigella flexneri 12022 2
10 -10 3
Fair to Colorless Salmonella choleraesuis
good subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 103-104 Good Colorless +
Shigella flexneri 12022 103-104 Good Colorless

494
 SS Agar, cont.

Shigella flexneri Salmonella typhimurium

ATCC 12022 ATCC 14028 Procedure
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
specimens. A nonselective medium should also be streaked to
increase the chance of recovery when the population of gram-
negative organisms is low and to provide an indication of other
organisms present in the specimen. Incubate plates, protected
from light, at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. If negative after 24
hours, reincubate an additional 24 hours.

Expected Results
Typical colonial morphology on Salmonella Shigella Agar is
as follows:
Escherichia coli ................. Slight growth, pink or red
Enterobacter/Klebsiella ..... Slight growth, pink
Proteus ............................. Colorless, usually with black center
Salmonella ....................... Colorless, usually with black center
Shigella ............................ Colorless
Pseudomonas ................... Irregular, slight growth
Gram-positive bacteria ..... No growth

Limitation of the Procedure

Due to the relatively high level of selectivity, some Shigella
Formulae strains may not grow on SS Agar and Salmonella Shigella Agar
Difco SS Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
and, therefore, these media are not recommended for the
primary isolation of Shigella.1,2 Media recommended for the
S
Beef Extract ................................................................ 5.0 g
Proteose Peptone ....................................................... 5.0 g isolation of Shigella are Hektoen Enteric and XLD agars.3
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
Bile Salts No. 3 ........................................................... 8.5 g References
Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 8.5 g 1. Leifson. 1935. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 40:581.
Sodium Thiosulfate ................................................... 8.5 g 2. Taylor and Harris. 1965. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 44:476.
3. Pollock and Dahlgren. 1974. Appl. Microbiol. 27:197.
Ferric Citrate .............................................................. 1.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g
Brilliant Green ............................................................ 0.33mg Availability
Neutral Red .............................................................. 25.0 mg Difco SS Agar
BBL Salmonella Shigella Agar

BS10 CMPH COMPF MCM7
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Cat. No. 274500 Dehydrated 500 g
Beef Extract ................................................................ 5.0 g 212118 Dehydrated 2 kg
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 2.5 g 274300 Dehydrated 10 kg
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 2.5 g
BBL Salmonella Shigella Agar
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
Bile Salts ..................................................................... 8.5 g BS10 CMPH COMPF MCM7
Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 8.5 g Cat. No. 211596 Dehydrated 100 g
Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................... 8.5 g 211597 Dehydrated 500 g
Ferric Citrate .............................................................. 1.0 g 211600 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g 293306 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
Brilliant Green ............................................................ 0.33mg United States and Canada
Neutral Red .............................................................. 25.0 mg Cat. No. 221181 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 221279 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Europe
Directions for Preparation from Cat. No. 254047 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Dehydrated Product 254085 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
1. Suspend 60 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix Japan
Cat. No. 251181 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
thoroughly. 251279 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- 251134 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 200*
pletely dissolve the powder. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE. 251826 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 200*
3. Cool the medium to approximately 45-50C and pour into BBL Salmonella Shigella Agar//Hektoen Enteric Agar
Petri dishes. Cat. No. 297426 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
4. Allow the plates to dry for approximately 2 hours with the *Store at 2-8C.

covers partially removed.

5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

495
 Section III
S SXT Blood Agar

SXT Blood Agar

Intended Use Material not being cultured from swabs may be streaked onto
SXT Blood Agar is used in the isolation of Lancefield groups the medium with a sterilized inoculating loop. The streak plate
A and B streptococci from throat cultures and other specimens. technique is used primarily to obtain isolated colonies from
The growth of viridans streptococci, other beta-hemolytic and specimens containing mixed flora.
nonhemolytic streptococci, most Enterobacteriaceae, Neisseria Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar side up) for
species and some Pseudomonas species is inhibited. 18-24 hours at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere supple-
mented with carbon dioxide. Negative plates should be
Summary and Explanation reincubated for an additional 18-24 hours.11
Groups A and B streptococcal infections may cause serious
medical complications. Group A streptococcal infections may Expected Results
result in scarlet fever, rheumatic fever or acute glomerulone- After 18-48 hours of incubation, the plates should show
phritis. Group B infections may produce neonatal sepsis and isolated colonies in streaked areas and confluent growth in
meningitis.1 areas of heavy inoculation. Group A or B streptococci may be
To aid the detection of group A and B streptococci, chemicals presumptively identified as small, translucent to opaque, white
(such as crystal violet and sodium azide) and antimicrobial to gray colonies surrounded by zones of beta hemolysis. Gram
agents (such as neomycin and gentamicin) have been incorpo- stains, biochemical tests, susceptibility to bacitracin, utilizing
rated into sheep blood agar.2-4 These inhibitory agents suppress Taxo A (0.04 unit) discs, and serological procedures should
the growth of normal flora and other organisms that could be performed to confirm findings.
mask the presence of group A and B streptococci. Pinpoint colonies of alpha-hemolytic, nonhemolytic or other
Gunn et al. introduced SXT Sheep Blood Agar, consisting of beta-hemolytic streptococci may grow in small numbers on
Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood and two antimi- the medium, but should not interfere with the recovery of
crobial agents, sulfamethoxazole and trimethoprim, for the group A and B streptococci or the interpretation of the results.
isolation of group A and B streptococci from throat cultures.5 Neisseria, coliforms, viridans streptococci and most non-group
They reported that most normal flora and beta-hemolytic strep- A or B streptococci are inhibited. Some staphylococci and
tococci other than groups A and B were inhibited on the SXT Pseudomonas species may not be inhibited.
agar, resulting in the recovery of 42% more group A and 49%
more group B streptococci than with sheep blood agar alone. References
1. Ruoff, Whiley and Beighton. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
In similar studies, Mirrett and Reller and others have reported 2. Facklam. 1976. CRC Crit. Rev. Clin. Lab. Sci. 6:287.
that SXT agar is more sensitive and more specific in the recovery 3. Blanchette and Lawrence. 1967. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 48:441.
4. Black and Van Buskirk. 1973. J. Clin. Pathol. 26:154.
of group A streptococci than sheep blood agar alone.6-9 5. Gunn, Onashi, Gaydos and Holt. 1977. J. Clin. Microbiol. 5:650.
6. Mirrett and Reller. 1984. Abstr. C203, p. 270. Abstr. 84th Annu. Meet. Am. Soc. Microbiol.
1984.
Principles of the Procedure 7. Kurzynski and Meise. 1979. J. Clin. Microbiol. 9:189.
8. Kurzynski and Van Holten. 1981. J. Clin. Microbiol. 13:891.
SXT Blood Agar is a primary plating medium suitable for iso- 9. Kurzynski, Meise, Daggs and Helstad. 1979. J. Clin. Microbiol. 9:144.
10. Ruoff. 1995. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
lating group A streptococci (S. pyogenes) and group B strepto- 6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
11. Kellog. 1990. J. Clin. Microbiol. 28:165.
cocci (S. agalactiae) from clinical specimens. Sulfamethoxazole
and trimethoprim act synergistically in this medium to sup- Availability
press the growth of normal flora.5 Defibrinated sheep blood BBL SXT Blood Agar
supplies the nutrients necessary to support the growth of strep- BS10 CMPH MCM7
tococci and, simultaneously, it allows detection of hemolytic Cat. No. 221809 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
reactions. Sheep blood also inhibits the growth of Haemophilus 221810 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
*Store at 2-8C.
haemolyticus, a bacterium commonly found in nose and throat
cultures that is indistinguishable from beta-hemolytic strepto-
cocci.10

Procedure
Streak the specimen as soon as possible after it is received in
the laboratory. For swab specimens, inoculate the medium by
rolling the swab over a third of the agar surface and streaking
the remainder of the plate to obtain isolated colonies. Stab the
medium several times with the inoculating loop in the area of
the heaviest inoculation to enhance detection of beta hemolysis.

496
 Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion

Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion Agar Base

Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion Agar Sabouraud
Brain Heart Infusion Agar with Antimicrobics
Intended Use improve the recovery of pathogenic fungi from specimens
Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion Agar is used in qualitative heavily contaminated with bacteria and saprophytic fungi.2
procedures for cultivation of dermatophytes and other patho-
genic and nonpathogenic fungi from clinical and nonclinical Principles of the Procedure
specimens. The medium is rendered selective by the addition Peptones and brain heart digest are sources of amino acids,
of antimicrobial agents. nitrogen, sulfur, carbon and trace ingredients. Dextrose is an
energy source for the metabolism of microorganisms. Sodium
Summary and Explanation chloride provides essential electrolytes. Disodium phosphate
Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion Agar is based on the formu- buffers the medium to maintain the pH. Defibrinated sheep
lation of Gorman.1 The combination of Brain Heart Infusion blood is added to supply nutrients that induce the growth of
Agar and Sabouraud Dextrose Agar in this medium improves dimorphic species in the yeast phase.2
the recovery of fungi compared with the recovery on either Chloramphenicol is a broad-spectrum antibiotic that inhibits
medium individually. The addition of defibrinated sheep blood a wide range of gram-negative and gram-positive bacteria.
is recommended to increase the recovery of fastidious, dimorphic Cycloheximide is an antifungal agent that is primarily active
fungi.2 against saprophytic fungi and does not inhibit pathogenic
The antimicrobial agents chloramphenicol, cycloheximide and species. Gentamicin is an aminoglycoside antibiotic that S
gentamicin are incorporated in various combinations to inhibits the growth of gram-negative bacteria.

Uninoculated Aspergillus niger

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 16404

Identity Specifications
Difco Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Solution: 5.9% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is medium amber,
very slightly to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, very slightly to slightly
opalescent.
Reaction of 5.9%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion Agar Base
Prepare the medium per label directions without (plain) and with 10%
sheep blood (SB). Inoculate and incubate at 30 2C for 18-48 hours
and up to 7 days for Trichophyton.
INOCULUM RECOVERY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU PLAIN AND WITH SB
Aspergillus niger 16404 102-103 Good
Candida albicans 10231 102-103 Good
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Marked to Saccharomyces
complete inhibition cerevisiae
ATCC 9763
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 102-103 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-2103 Marked to
complete inhibition
Trichophyton
mentagrophytes 9533 102-103 Good

497
 Section III
S Sabouraud Brain Heart, cont.

Formula Expected Results

Difco Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion Agar Base After sufficient incubation, the plates should show isolated
Approximate Formula* Per Liter colonies in streaked areas and confluent growth in areas of
Brain Heart Digest ...................................................... 9.25 g
Proteose Peptone ....................................................... 5.0 g
heavy inoculation.
Enzymatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g Examine the plates for fungal colonies exhibiting typical color
Dextrose ................................................................... 21.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.5 g and morphology. Biochemical tests and serological procedures
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 1.25 g should be performed to confirm findings.
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Limitation of the Procedure
Directions for Preparation from Some fungi may be inhibited by the antibiotics in selective
formulations.3,4
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 59 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
References
thoroughly. 1. Gorman. 1967. Am. J. Med. Technol. 33: 151.
2. Merz and Roberts. 1995. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to microbiology, 6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
completely dissolve the powder. 3. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 50-55C. 4. Kwon-Chung and Bennett. 1992. Medical mycology. Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia, Pa.

4. Aseptically add 1 mL chloramphenicol solution (100 mg/mL)

and, if desired, 10% sterile sheep blood. Availability
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Difco Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion Agar Base
Cat. No. 279720 Dehydrated 500 g
stable, typical control cultures.
BBL Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion Agar

Procedure BS10 MCM7

Cat. No. 297802 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 10*
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci- 298192 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Ctn. of 100*
mens. 297691 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
For isolation of fungi from potentially contaminated specimens, BBL Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion Agar with
both a nonselective and a selective medium should be inoculated. Chloramphenicol and Cycloheximide
Cat. No. 297803 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 10*
Incubate the plates at 25-30C in an inverted position (agar side 297692 Prepared Slants Ctn. of 100*
up) with increased humidity. For isolation of fungi causing
BBL Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion Agar with
systemic mycoses, two sets of media should be inoculated, with Chloramphenicol and Gentamicin
one set incubated at 25-30C and a duplicate set at 35 2C. MCM7
All cultures should be examined at least weekly for fungal Cat. No. 297252 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*

growth and should be held for 4-6 weeks before being reported BBL Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion Sheep Blood Agar
as negative. with Chloramphenicol
Cat. No. 296307 Mycoflask Bottles Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

Sabouraud Media (Low pH)

Sabouraud Dextrose Agar Sabouraud Dextrose
Agar with Antimicrobics Sabouraud Dextrose Agar
with Lecithin and Polysorbate 80 Sabouraud
Dextrose Broth Sabouraud Maltose Agar
Sabouraud Maltose Broth Fluid Sabouraud Medium
Intended Use by the addition of antimicrobics. Sabouraud Dextrose Broth
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar conforms with specifications of The and Sabouraud Maltose Agar and Broth are also used for
United States Pharmacopeia (USP). culturing yeasts, molds and aciduric microorganisms.
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar is used in qualitative procedures for Fluid Sabouraud Medium is used for cultivating yeasts, molds
cultivation of pathogenic and nonpathogenic fungi, particularly and aciduric microorganisms and for detecting yeasts and molds
dermatophytes. The medium is rendered more selective for fungi in normally sterile materials.

498
 Sabouraud Media, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Cultural Response

Difco Sabouraud Dextrose Agar Difco Sabouraud Dextrose Agar or Sabouraud
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Dextrose Broth
neous. Prepare the medium per label directions. For agar, inoculate and
Solution: 6.5% solution, soluble in purified incubate at 30 2C for 18-48 hours, or up to 7 days for Trichophyton.
water upon boiling. Solution is light For broth, inoculate and incubate at 30 2C for 18-48 hours or up to
to medium amber, very slightly to 7 days if necessary.
slightly opalescent. INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly ORGANISM ATCC CFU AGAR BROTH
opalescent. Aspergillus niger 16404 102-3102 Good Good
Reaction of 6.5% Candida albicans 10231 102-3102 Good Good
Solution at 25C: pH 5.6 0.2 Lactobacillus rhamnosus 9595 102-3102 N/A Good
Difco Sabouraud Dextrose Broth
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 102-3102 Good Good
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Trichophyton
neous. mentagrophytes 9533 Undiluted Good N/A
Solution: 3.0% solution, soluble in purified Difco Fluid Sabouraud Medium
water. Solution is light amber, clear. Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear. 30 2C for 18-48 hours or up to 7 days if necessary.
Reaction of 3.0% ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Solution at 25C: pH 5.6 0.2
Aspergillus niger 16404 102 Good
Difco Fluid Sabouraud Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Off-white, free-flowing, homoge-
Candida albicans
Saccharomyces cerevisiae
10231
9763
102
102
Good
Good
S
neous.
Solution: 3.0% solution, soluble in purified wa- Difco Sabouraud Maltose Agar or Sabouraud
ter. Solution is light amber, clear to Maltose Broth
very slightly opalescent. Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to very slightly opal- 30 2C for 18-48 hours or up to 7 days if necessary.
escent. INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
Reaction of 3.0% ORGANISM ATCC CFU AGAR BROTH
Solution at 25C: pH 5.7 0.2 Aspergillus niger 16404 102-3102 Good Good
Difco Sabouraud Maltose Agar
Candida albicans 10231 102-3102 Good Good
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Escherichia coli 25922 102-3102 N/A Good
neous. Lactobacillus rhamnosus 9595 102-3102 N/A Good
Solution: 6.5% solution, soluble in purified Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 102-3102 Good Good
water upon boiling. Solution is light Trichophyton
amber, slightly opalescent, may have mentagrophytes 9533 102-3102 Good N/A
a slight precipitate. Continued
Prepared Appearance: Very light amber, slightly opalescent
without significant precipitate.
Reaction of 6.5% areas and are also recommended for use in air sampling equip-
Solution at 25C: pH 5.6 0.2 ment, such as the Surface Air System.
Difco Sabouraud Maltose Broth
Sterile Pack Finger Dab Isolator plates are intended for
Dehydrated Appearance: White, free-flowing, homogeneous.
sampling gloved hands.
Solution: 5.0% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light amber, clear
to slightly opalescent. Summary and Explanation
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to slightly opales- Sabouraud Dextrose Agar is a general-purpose medium
cent. devised by Sabouraud for the cultivation of dermatophytes.1
Reaction of 5.0% The low pH of approximately 5.6 is favorable for the growth
Solution at 25C: pH 5.6 0.2
of fungi, especially dermatophytes, and slightly inhibitory to
contaminating bacteria in clinical specimens.2-4 This medium
Sterile Pack RODAC environmental sampling plates, is recommended in the USP for use in performing total
containing Sabouraud Dextrose Agar with Lecithin and combined mold and yeast counts (Microbial Limit Tests).5
Polysorbate 80, are used for the detection and enumeration of
The addition of antimicrobics is a modification designed to
microorganisms present on surfaces of sanitary importance.
increase bacterial inhibition.
Sterile Pack plates are particularly useful for monitoring
surfaces in clean rooms and other environmentally-controlled RODAC (Replicate Organism Detection and Counting)
environmental sampling plates are specially constructed so that
499
 Section III
S Sabouraud Media, cont.

Candida albicans
Identity Specifications ATCC 10231
BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
ous material, may contain a large
number of minute to small tan specks.
Solution: 6.5% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is pale to medium,
yellow to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Pale to medium, yellow to tan, clear
to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 6.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 5.6 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
and incubate at 25 2C for 7 days.
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY
Aspergillus niger 16404 Good
Aureobasidium pullulans 9348 Good
Blastomyces dermatitidis 56218 Good
Candida albicans 60193 Good
Cryptococcus neoformans 32045 Good
Microsporum audouinii 9079 Good
Nocardia asteroides 19247 Good
Penicillium roquefortii 9295 Good
Trichophyton mentagrophytes 9533 Good

an agar medium can be over-filled, producing a meniscus or Principles of the Procedure

dome-shaped surface that can be pressed onto a surface for Sabouraud dextrose media are peptone media supplemented
sampling its microbial burden. These plates are used in a with dextrose to support the growth of fungi. Media are also
variety of programs to establish and monitor cleaning tech- provided with maltose substituted for the dextrose. Peptones
niques and schedules.6-10 After touching the surface to be are sources of nitrogenous growth factors. The carbohydrate
sampled with the medium, the environmental sampling dish is provides an energy source for the growth of microorganisms.
covered and incubated at an appropriate temperature. The Gentamicin is an aminoglycoside antibiotic that inhibits
presence and number of microorganisms is determined by the the growth of gram-negative bacteria. Chloramphenicol is
appearance of colonies on the surface of the agar medium.11 inhibitory to a wide range of gram-negative and gram-positive
Collection of samples from the same area before and after bacteria, and cycloheximide is an antifungal agent that is
cleaning and treatment with a disinfectant permits the evalua- primarily active against saprophytic fungi and does not inhibit
tion of the efficacy of sanitary procedures. yeasts or dermatophytes.14
Sabouraud Maltose Agar is a modification of Sabouraud Lecithin neutralizes quaternary ammonium compounds, and
Dextrose Agar with maltose substituted for the dextrose. It is polysorbate 80 neutralizes substituted phenolic disinfectants.15-18
a selective medium due to the acid pH. Davidson et al.
For the Sterile Pack products, the entire double-bagged product
reported that Sabouraud Maltose Agar was a satisfactory
is subjected to a sterilizing dose of gamma radiation, thus the
medium in their studies of infections caused by Microsporum
contents inside the outer bag are sterile.19 This allows the inner
audouini, M. lanosum and Trichophyton gypseum.12 Davidson
bag to be aseptically removed and brought into an environ-
and Dowding also used this medium in isolating T. gypseum
mentally-controlled area without introducing contaminants.
from a case of tinea barbae.13
A third sterile bag is included as a transport device. Since the
Sabouraud Maltose Broth is a modification of Sabouraud agar medium has been sterilized after packaging, the presence
Dextrose Broth in which maltose is substituted for dextrose. It is of microbial growth after sampling and incubation can be re-
selective due to its acid pH and is used for the detection of fungi. lied upon to represent the presence of environmental contami-
Fluid Sabouraud Medium is employed in sterility test nants and not pre-existing microorganisms in the medium that
procedures for determining the presence of molds, yeasts and may have been introduced during manufacture. The RODAC
aciduric microorganisms. The acid reaction of the final plates have a marked grid to facilitate counting organisms.
medium is inhibitive to a large number of bacteria and makes The Sterile Pack Finger Dab Isolator plates are triple-bagged
the medium particularly well suited for cultivating fungi and and are intended for sampling gloved hands.
acidophilic microorganisms.
500
 Sabouraud Media, cont.

Formulae plates and Mycoflask bottles, streak the specimen as soon

Difco Sabouraud Dextrose Agar
as possible after it is received in the laboratory, using a sterile
Approximate Formula* Per Liter inoculating loop to obtain isolated colonies. Consult
Enzymatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g appropriate references for information about the processing
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g and inoculation of specimens.3,4
BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar For the Sterile Pack media, sample selected surfaces by firmly
Approximate Formula* Per Liter pressing the agar medium against the test area. Hold the plate
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 5.0 g
with thumb and second finger and use index finger to press
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g plate bottom firmly against surface. Pressure should be the
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g same for every sample. Do not move plate laterally as this
Difco Sabouraud Dextrose Broth spreads contaminants over the agar surface making resolution
Approximate Formula* Per Liter of colonies difficult. Slightly curved surfaces may be sampled
Enzymatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g
with a rolling motion.
Difco Fluid Sabouraud Medium Areas (walls, floors, etc.) to be assayed may be divided into
Approximate Formula* Per Liter sections or grids and samples taken from specific points within
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g the grid.
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 5.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g Incubate exposed plates at 35-37C for 48 hours, and 25C
Difco Sabouraud Maltose Agar for 7 days or as required.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Enzymatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
Maltose .................................................................... 40.0 g
Expected Results
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g After sufficient incubation, the containers should show isolated
Difco Sabouraud Maltose Broth
colonies in streaked areas and confluent growth in areas of S
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar. heavy inoculation. Transfer of growth from slants to plated
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. media may be required in order to obtain pure cultures of fungi.
Directions for Preparation from Examine containers for fungal colonies exhibiting typical color
Dehydrated Product and morphology.20 Biochemical tests and serological proce-
1. Suspend/dissolve the powder in 1 L of purified water: dures should be performed to confirm findings.
Difco Sabouraud Dextrose Agar 65 g; In the RODAC procedure, colonies are counted (fewer than
BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar 65 g; 200 colonies for accurate counts) and expressed as either
Difco Sabouraud Dextrose Broth 30 g; the number of colonies per RODAC plate or the number of
Difco Fluid Sabouraud Medium 30 g; colonies per cm.2,21,22 Criteria for cleanliness of equipment and
Difco Sabouraud Maltose Agar 65 g; environment (surfaces) can be developed by using a database
Difco Sabouraud Maltose Broth 50 g. derived from repeated routine sampling of specific sites.23
Mix thoroughly.
Subculture colonies of interest so that positive identification
2. Heat the agar media with frequent agitation and boil for
can be made by means of biochemical testing and/or micro-
1 minute to completely dissolve the powder. Avoid over-
scopic examination of organism smears.
heating which could cause a softer medium.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Limitation of the Procedure
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Some fungi may be inhibited by the acidic pH of the medium
stable, typical control cultures.
and by the antimicrobics in the selective media.2-4
Procedure
References
For isolation of fungi from potentially contaminated specimens, 1. Sabouraud. 1892. Ann. Dermatol. Syphil. 3: 1061.
2. Ajello, Georg, Kaplan and Kaufman. 1963. CDC laboratory manual for medical mycology. PHS
a selective medium should be inoculated along with the nonse- Publication No. 994, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
lective medium. Incubate the containers at 25-30C with 3. Reisner, Woods, Thompson, Larone, Garcia and Shimizu. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover
and Yolken (ed.). Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology,
increased humidity. All cultures should be examined at least Washington, D.C.
4. Kwon-Chung and Bennett. 1992. Medical mycology. Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia, Pa.
weekly for fungal growth and should be held for 4-6 weeks 5. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
before being reported as negative. 6. Hall & Hartnett. 1964. Public Health Rep. 79: 1021.
7. Vesley and Michaelson. 1964. Health Lab. Sci. 1:107.
Liquefy the medium in pour tubes by heating in boiling water. 8. Pryor and McDuff. 1969. Exec. Housekeeper, March.
9. Dell. 1979. Pharm. Technol. 3: 47.
Cool to 45-50C and pour into sterile Petri dishes. Allow to 10. Cannon, Beckelheimer and Maxcy. 1985. In Richardson (ed.), Standard methods for the examina-
tion of dairy products, 15th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
solidify for a minimum of 30 minutes. 11. McGowan. 1985. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiol-
ogy, 4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Prepared tubed slants primarily are intended for use with pure 12. Davidson, Dowding and Buller. 1932. Can. J. Res. 6:1.
13. Davidson and Dowding. 1932. Arch. Dermatol. Syphilol. 26:660.
cultures for maintenance or other purposes. With prepared 14. Lorian (ed.). 1996. Antibiotics in laboratory medicine, 4th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.

501
 Section III
S Sabouraud Media, cont.

15. Favero, Gabis and Vesley. 1984. In Speck (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiological Europe
examination of foods, 2nd ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
16. Quisno, Gibby and Foter. 1946. Am. J. Pharm. 118: 320. Cat. No. 254039 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
17. Erlandson and Lawrence. 1953. Science 118: 274 254083 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
18. Brummer. 1976. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 32: 80. Japan
19. Association for the Advancement of Medical Instrumentation. 1984. Process control guidelines for
gamma radiation sterilization of medical devices. Association for the Advancement of Medical Cat. No. 251180 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Instrumentation, Arlington, Va.
20. Larone. 1995. Medically important fungi: a guide to identification, 3rd ed. American Society for BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar with Chloramphenicol

Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

MCM7
21. Vanderzant and Splittstoesser (ed.). 1992. Compendium of methods for the microbiological
examination of foods, 3rd ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. Cat. No. 221851 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 20*
22. Marshall (ed.) 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American 221825 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
23. ICMSF. 1988. Microorganisms in foods 4. Intern. Comm. on Microbiology Spec. for Foods. 221314 Mycoflask Bottles Pkg. of 10*
Blackwall Scient. Publs., Palo Alto, Calif. 221315 Mycoflask Bottles Ctn. of 100*
299098 Bottle, 500 mL Pkg. of 10
Availability BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar with Chloramphenicol
Difco Sabouraud Dextrose Agar

and Cycloheximide
BAM BS10 CCAM CMPH COMPF EP USP Cat. No. 297649 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
Cat. No. 210940 Dehydrated 100 g BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar with Chloramphenicol

210950 Dehydrated 500 g
and Gentamicin
211661 Dehydrated 2 kg
210930 Dehydrated 10 kg MCM7
Cat. No. 296359 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar

BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar with Lecithin

BAM BS10 CCAM CMPH COMPF EP USP
and Polysorbate 80
Cat. No. 211584 Dehydrated 500 g
211585 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg) Cat. No. 221233 Sterile Pack RODAC Plates Pkg. of 10*
293309 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg) 292653 Isolator Pack, Finger Dab Prepared Plates
(100 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 10*
United States and Canada 292654 Isolator Pack, Finger Dab Prepared Plates
Cat. No. 221180 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 20* (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 5*
221278 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Ctn. of 100*
221235 Sterile Pack RODAC Plates Pkg. of 10* Difco Sabouraud Dextrose Broth
297739 Prepared Plates (150 x 15 mm-style), Deep Fill BAM
Pkg. of 24* Cat. No. 238220 Dehydrated 100 g
221012 Prepared Slants (A Tubes) Pkg. of 10* 238230 Dehydrated 500 g
221013 Prepared Slants (A Tubes) Ctn. of 100* 238210 Dehydrated 2 kg
297072 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
297479 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Ctn. of 100* Difco Fluid Sabouraud Medium
297812 Prepared Pour Tubes, 20 mL Pkg. of 10* Cat. No. 264210 Dehydrated 500 g
296182 Prepared Pour Tubes, 20 mL Ctn. of 100*
Difco Sabouraud Maltose Agar

221136 Mycoflask Bottles Pkg. of 10*
221137 Mycoflask Bottles Ctn. of 100* Cat. No. 211020 Dehydrated 500 g
297720 Transgrow-style Bottles Ctn. of 100* Difco Sabouraud Maltose Broth

295699 Bottles, 1 oz. Ctn. of 100* Cat. No. 242910 Dehydrated 500 g
*Store at 2-8C.

Sabouraud Agar, Modified Sabouraud Dextrose

Agar, Emmons Sabouraud Dextrose Agar, Emmons,
with Antimicrobics
Intended Use specimens.2 The acidic pH, however, also may inhibit some
Sabouraud Agar, Modified (Emmons) and Sabouraud Dextrose fungal species.2-4 Emmons modified the original formulation
Agar, Emmons are used in qualitative procedures for cultivation by adjusting the pH close to neutral to increase the recovery of
of dermatophytes and other pathogenic and nonpathogenic fungi fungi and by reducing the dextrose content from 40 to 20 g/L.4
from clinical and nonclinical specimens. The two base formulations offered differ in peptone content
and amount of agar. The addition of antimicrobics further
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar, Emmons is rendered selective by
increases the selectivity of the medium.3,4
the addition of antimicrobial agents.
Principles of the Procedure
Summary and Explanation
Peptones are sources of nitrogenous growth factors. Dextrose
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar was devised by Sabouraud for the
provides an energy source for the growth of microorganisms.
cultivation of dermatophytes.1 The low pH of approximately
Gentamicin is an aminoglycoside antibiotic that inhibits the
5.6 is favorable for the growth of fungi, especially dermato-
growth of gram-negative bacteria. Chloramphenicol is inhibitory
phytes, and inhibitory to contaminating bacteria in clinical
to a wide range of gram-negative and gram-positive bacteria,

502
 Sabouraud Agar, Modified, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Sabouraud Agar, Modified BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar, Emmons
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
neous. ous material, may contain a large
Solution: 5.0% solution, soluble in purified number of minute to small tan specks.
water upon boiling. Solution is light Solution: 4.7% solution, soluble in purified water
to medium amber, slightly opalescent. upon boiling. Solution is pale to medium,
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly yellow to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
opalescent. Prepared Appearance: Pale to medium, yellow to tan, clear
Reaction of 5.0% to slightly hazy.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 Reaction of 4.7%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2
Cultural Response
Difco Sabouraud Agar, Modified Cultural Response
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar, Emmons
30 2C for 18-48 hours, or up to 7 days if necessary. Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
and incubate at 25 2C for 7 days.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Aspergillus niger 16404 Undiluted Good ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY

Candida albicans 10231 30-300 Good Aspergillus niger 16404 Good

Lactobacillus rhamnosus 9595 30-300 Good Aureobasidium pullulans 9348 Good
Saccharomyces cerevisiae
Trichophyton
9763 30-300 Good Blastomyces dermatitidis
Candida albicans
56218
60193
Good
Good
S
mentagrophytes 9533 Undiluted Good Cryptococcus neoformans 32045 Good
Microsporum audouinii 9079 Good
Nocardia asteroides 19247 Good
Penicillium roquefortii 9295 Good
Trichophyton mentagrophytes 9533 Good

and cycloheximide is an antifungal agent that is primarily Procedure

active against saprophytic fungi and does not inhibit yeasts Consult appropriate references for information about the
or dermatophytes.5 processing and inoculation of specimens.2,3

Formulae Prepared tubed slants primarily are intended for use with pure
Difco Sabouraud Agar, Modified
cultures for maintenance or other purposes.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter For isolating fungi from potentially contaminated specimens,
Enzymatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g
a selective medium should be inoculated along with the nonse-
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g lective medium. Incubate the plates at 25-30C in an inverted
BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar, Emmons position (agar side up) with increased humidity. For isolation
Approximate Formula* Per Liter of fungi causing systemic mycoses, two sets of media should
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g be inoculated, with one set incubated at 25-30C and a dupli-
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 5.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g
cate set at 35 2C.
Agar ......................................................................... 17.0 g All cultures should be examined at least weekly for fungal
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
growth and should be held for 4-6 weeks before being reported
Directions for Preparation from as negative.
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
Expected Results
After sufficient incubation, the plates or tubes should show
Difco Sabouraud Agar, Modified 50 g;
growth with or without isolated colonies. Transfer of growth
BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar, Emmons 47 g.
from tubes to plated media may be required in order to obtain
Mix thoroughly.
pure cultures of fungi.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder. Examine plates or tubes for fungal colonies exhibiting typical
3. Autoclave at 118-121C for 15 minutes. color and morphology.6 Biochemical tests and serological
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using procedures should be performed to confirm findings.
stable, typical control cultures.
503
 Section III
S Sabouraud Agar, Modified, cont.

Limitation of the Procedure BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar, Emmons

CMPH MCM7 SMWW
Antimicrobial agents incorporated into a medium to inhibit
Cat. No. 211589 Dehydrated 500 g
bacteria may also inhibit certain pathogenic fungi. 221849 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 20*
221867 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Ctn. of 100*
References 221826 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10
1. Sabouraud. 1892. Ann. Dermatol. Syphil. 3:1061. 221827 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Ctn. of 100
2. Ajello, Georg, Kaplan and Kaufman. 1963. CDC laboratory manual for medical mycology. PHS 296308 Mycoflask Bottles Pkg. of 10
Publication No. 994, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
3. Reisner, Woods, Thompson, Larone, Garcia and Shimizu. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar, Emmons with
and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology,
Washington, D.C. Chloramphenicol
4. Kwon-Chung and Bennett. 1992. Medical mycology. Lea & Febiger, Philadelphia, Pa. MCM7
5. Lorian (ed.). 1996. Antibiotics in laboratory medicine, 4th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore,
Md. Cat. No. 297931 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 10*
6. Larone. 1995. Medically important fungi: a guide to identification, 3rd ed. American Society for 297474 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Ctn. of 100*
Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar, Emmons with
Availability Chloramphenicol and Cycloheximide
Cat. No. 297932 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 10*
Difco Sabouraud Agar, Modified
SMWW BBL Sabouraud Dextrose Agar, Emmons with Gentamicin
Cat. No. 274720 Dehydrated 500 g Cat. No. 296348 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 20*
274710 Dehydrated 2 kg *Store at 2-8C.

Sabouraud Liquid Broth Modified

(See Antibiotic Assay Media)

Saline, 0.45% Saline, Normal

Intended Use The diluted culture should be used within the time limit stated
Saline, 0.45% is used in procedures that require this saline in the appropriate method or procedure.
diluent, such as with the VITEK* identification and suscepti-
bility testing system. Expected Results
Cell integrity and viability is maintained within the param-
Saline, Normal (physiological) is used in procedures that
eters of the particular procedure being employed.
require the use of an isotonic diluent.
*VITEK is a trademark of bioMerieux Vitek, Inc. References
1. Aldridge, Jones, Gibson, Lanham, Meyer, Vannest and Charles. 1977. J. Clin. Microbiol. 6:406.
Summary and Explanation 2. Koneman, Allen, Janda, Schreckenberger and Winn. 1997. Color atlas and textbook of diagnostic
microbiology, 5th ed. Lippincott-Raven Publishers, Philadelphia, Pa.
Saline, 0.45%, is used in procedures where this concentration 3. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved standard M2-A7, Perfor-
mance standards for antimicrobial disk susceptibility tests, 7th ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
of sodium chloride is suitable.1 4. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved standard M7-A5, Meth-
ods for dilution susceptibility tests for bacteria that grow aerobically, 5th ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
An isotonic diluent may be used for dilution of bacterial cells
to provide a concentration suitable for microscopic observation, Availability
determination of cell numbers, analysis for genetic or metabolic BBL Saline, 0.45%
properties, washing cells preparatory to study, or preparation Cat. No. 299489 Prepared Tubes (K Size), 1 mL Ctn. of 100
of standardized inocula.2,3 BBL Saline, Normal

Cat. No. 297815 Prepared Tubes (K Size), 1 mL Ctn. of 100

Principles of the Procedure 221818 Prepared Tubes (K Size), 5 mL Pkg. of 10
221819 Prepared Tubes (K size), 5 mL Ctn. of 100
Saline is routinely used as a diluent to adjust the turbidity of 295771 Prepared Tubes (C size), 5 mL Ctn. of 100
bacterial cell suspensions to help maintain cell integrity and 297753 Prepared Tubes (D size), 10 mL Ctn. of 100
viability.3,4

Procedure
Using a sterile pipette, adjust the turbidity of a culture to be
equivalent to a standard, such as a McFarland (barium
sulfate) turbidity standard.3,4

504
 Schaedler Media

Salt Broth, Modified

Intended Use Procedure
Salt Broth, Modified is used to differentiate Enterococcus Inoculate two or three streptococcal colonies into a tube of
species from the Streptococcus bovis group of streptococci. the medium. Incubate tubes with loosened caps for 72 hours
at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere.
Summary and Explanation
Broth media containing 6.5% NaCl are used to differentiate Expected Results
enterococci by determining the salt tolerance of bile-esculin Examine tubes for growth (indicated by turbidity and sometimes
positive, catalase-negative gram-positive cocci.1 Growth change in the color of the indicator) at 24, 48 and 72 hours.
(turbidity) within 72 hours indicates that the strain is salt Growth within 72 hours indicates that the strain is salt tolerant
tolerant (i.e., positive), and it can be identified as an Entero- (i.e., positive). A change in color from purple to yellow also
coccus if it is also bile-esculin positive or if it is serologically may occur.
group D.
References
Growth in Salt Broth, Modified will sometimes change the 1. Facklam, Sahm and Teixeira. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
indicator color from purple to yellow within 72 hours. clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.

Principles of the Procedure

Digests of animal tissue provide nitrogen and carbon compounds Availability
essential for bacterial growth. Dextrose is an energy source. BBL Salt Broth, Modified
Cat. No. 297189 Prepared Tubes (K size), 2 mL Ctn. of 100
Bromcresol purple is an indicator of acid production during
bacterial metabolism. Sodium chloride serves as a selective
221820
295792
Prepared Tubes (K size), 5 mL Pkg. of 10
Prepared Tubes (D size), 10 mL Ctn. of 100
S
and differential agent.
Enterococci are resistant to the high salt content, which in
sensitive strains interferes with membrane permeability, and
osmotic and electrokinetic equilibria.2

Schaedler Media
Schaedler Agar Schaedler Agar with Vitamin K1
and 5% Sheep Blood Schaedler K-V Agar with
5% Sheep Blood Schaedler Broth Schaedler Broth
with Vitamin K1
Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Schaedler Agar is a base for several media formulations used In 1965, Schaedler, Dubos and Costello1 reported on the
for the recovery of anaerobic microorganisms. bacterial flora of the gastrointestinal tract of mice. In these
studies, several new media formulations were introduced.
Schaedler Agar with Vitamin K1 and 5% Sheep Blood is used
The majority of these contained inhibitors of specific bacterial
for the isolation and cultivation of fastidious aerobes and anaer-
species or groups since the authors indicated the need for
obes from a variety of clinical and nonclinical specimens. It is
selective media when processing specimens which contain large
especially useful for the recovery of the fastidious anaerobic
numbers of a heterogeneous bacterial population. The basal
bacteria such as Bacteroides, Prevotella and Porphyromonas
medium, without inhibitors, is the original version of the
species. Schaedler K-V Agar with 5% Sheep Blood, containing
medium designated as Schaedler Agar. It was formulated to
kanamycin and vancomycin, is especially useful in the selective
support the growth of fastidious anaerobic microorganisms
isolation of Bacteroides and Prevotella species.
such as lactobacilli, streptococci, clostridia and Bacteroides.
Schaedler Broth and Schaedler Broth with Vitamin K1 are media
Mata and coworkers,2 studying the fecal microflora in healthy
used for the cultivation of fastidious aerobic and anaerobic
persons in Central America, modified Schaedler Agar to
microorganisms.
produce a number of new formulations. The modifications in
the basal medium of Schaedler included adjustments in the
505
 Section III
S Schaedler Media, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications Cultural Response
BBL Schaedler Agar BBL Schaedler Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane- Prepare the medium per label directions without (plain) and with added
ous material. vitamin K1 and 5% sheep blood (SB). Inoculate and incubate anaerobi-
Solution: 4.19% solution, soluble in purified cally at 35 2C for 48 hours.
water upon boiling. Solution is medium, RECOVERY
tan to yellow, clear to slightly hazy. INOCULUM RECOVERY WITH VIT. K1

ORGANISM ATCC CFU PLAIN AND SB
Prepared Appearance: Medium, tan to yellow, clear to
slightly hazy. Bacteroides fragilis 25285 106 N/A Good
Reaction of 4.19% Clostridium perfringens 13124 106 N/A Good, beta
Solution at 25C: pH 7.6 0.2 hemolysis
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 103-104 Good N/A
BBL Schaedler Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, may contain tan BBL Schaedler Broth

specks. Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate anaero-
Solution: 2.84% solution, soluble in purified bically at 35 2C for up to 7 days (incubate S. pyogenes aerobically).
water upon boiling. Solution is light ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT
to medium, tan to yellow, clear to
slightly hazy. Bacteroides vulgatus 8482 103 Growth
Clostridium novyi A 7659 103 Growth
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, tan to yellow, clear
to slightly hazy. Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 103 Growth
Reaction of 2.84%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.6 0.2

peptone content, since Trypticase Soy Broth was substituted for The addition of the antimicrobial agents kanamycin and vanco-
the Trypticase peptone component of the original formulation, mycin in the agar medium renders the medium selective for
and an increase in the sodium chloride content. Additionally, the gram-negative microorganisms. The kanamycin inhibits
dextrose concentration was reduced to avoid interference with protein synthesis in susceptible organisms, whereas the vanco-
hemolytic reactions and the yeast extract level lowered to avoid mycin inhibits gram-positive bacteria by interfering with cell
darkening of the medium.3 wall synthesis.8
The inclusion of vitamin K1, is an additional modification and Using Schaedler media, fastidious aerobes and anaerobes grow
was added since it is a growth requirement for some strains of well; however, the type of organisms recovered is dependent
Prevotella melaninogenica (Bacteriodes melaninogenicus)4 and on the environment utilized in the incubation process (aerobic,
is reported to enhance the growth of some strains of Bacteroides aerobic supplemented with carbon dioxide or anaerobic
and gram-positive nonsporeformers.5 conditions).
The combination of kanamycin and vancomycin in Schaedler
Formulae
K-V Agar with 5% Sheep Blood is used for the selective isolation
BBL Schaedler Agar
of gram-negative anaerobes.6 Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Schaedler Broth has the same formula as Schaedler Agar except Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 8.2 g
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................... 2.5 g
that the agar is omitted. Stalons et al.7 found Schaedler Broth Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal .................................. 1.0 g
to be the most effective medium of nine broth media tested for Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.8 g
the growth of obligately anaerobic bacteria when incubated in Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 1.7 g
an anaerobic atmosphere. The incorporation of vitamin K1 Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 0.8 g
broadens the spectrum of organisms that can be cultivated in L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.4 g
Schaedler Broth. Hemin ........................................................................ 0.01 g
Tris (hydroxymethyl) aminomethane ........................... 3.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g
Principles of the Procedure
BBL Schaedler Broth
The combination of three peptones derived from both animal Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
and vegetable sources, dextrose and yeast extract render the *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
basic formulation highly nutritious by providing nitrogenous
growth factors, carbohydrates as energy sources and vitamins.
The sheep blood and hemin also are important in stimulating
the growth of fastidious microorganisms. As discussed above,
the vitamin K1 additive is crucial for the recovery of certain
anaerobes.

506
 Selective Seven H11 Agar

Directions for Preparation from Incubate tubes at 35 2C in the appropriate atmosphere (aerobic,
Dehydrated Product anaerobic, or supplemented with carbon dioxide) for up to 7 days.
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
BBL Schaedler Agar 41.9 g; Expected Results
BBL Schaedler Broth 28.4 g. Agars
Mix thoroughly. In order to determine the relationship to oxygen of each colony
2. If desired, add 1 mL of a 1% vitamin K1 solution in absolute type present on the medium, follow established procedures.10
ethanol. The colony types that prove to contain obligate anaerobes can
3. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- be further studied.11
pletely dissolve the powder. Broths
4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Growth in tubes is indicated by the presence of turbidity
5. For the agar medium, cool to approximately 45C and add compared to an uninoculated control. If growth appears,
5% sterile defibrinated sheep blood when required. cultures should be examined by Gram stain and subcultured
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using onto appropriate media (e.g., a TSA II and/or Chocolate II
stable, typical control cultures. Agar plate, etc.). If obligate anaerobes are suspected, subcultures
should be incubated anaerobically.
Procedure
Agars References
These media should be reduced immediately prior to inoculation 1. Schaedler, Dubos and Costello. 1965. J. Exp. Med. 122:59.
2. Mata, Carrillo and Villatoro. 1969. Appl. Microbiol. 17:596.
by placing them under anaerobic conditions for 18-24 hours.9 3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
4. Gibbons and MacDonald. 1960. J. Bacteriol. 80:164.
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci- 5. Finegold, Sutter, Attebery and Rosenblatt. 1974. In Lennette, Spaulding and Truant (ed.), Manual
mens. Inoculate an enrichment broth, such as Enriched
Thioglycollate Medium, at the same time as the primary plates
of clinical microbiology, 2nd ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
6. Finegold, Miller and Posnick. 1965. Ernahrungsforschung 10:517.
7. Stalons, Thornsberry and Dowell. 1974. Appl. Microbiol. 27:1098.
S
8. Estevez. 1984. Lab. Med. 15:258.
to detect small numbers of anaerobes. 9. Dowell. 1975. In Balows (ed.). Clinical microbiology. How to start and when to stop. Charles C.
Thomas, Springfield, Ill.
10. Allen, Siders and Marler. 1985. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of
Incubate plates and tubes immediately after inoculation, with clinical microbiology, 4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
plates in an inverted position (agar side up) under anaerobic 11. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
conditions at 35C, or place the media in a holding jar flushed
with oxygen-free gas(es) until a sufficient number of plates Availability
and tubes is accumulated (no longer than 3 hours). Incubate BBL Schaedler Agar
for at least 48 hours and, if no growth occurs, continue Cat. No. 212189 Dehydrated 500 g
incubation for up to 7 days. It is recommended that an indicator BBL Schaedler Agar with Vitamin K1 and

of anaerobiosis be used. 5% Sheep Blood

United States and Canada
Examine the selective medium for growth after 48 hours of Cat. No. 221539 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
incubation. Cultures should not be regarded as negative until 221540 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
after 7 days incubation. Since some anaerobes may be inhibited Europe
due to the selective nature of the medium, it is advisable to Cat. No. 254042 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
254084 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
include a nonselective medium such as Schaedler Agar with
Vitamin K1 and 5% Sheep Blood. BBL Schaedler K-V Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
United States and Canada
Broths Cat. No. 221555 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Inoculate the specimen directly into the broth medium. Liquid 221556 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
media for anaerobic incubation should be reduced prior to Europe
Cat. No. 254023 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
inoculation by placing the tubes, with caps loosened, under 254077 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
anaerobic conditions for 18-24 hours prior to use. Alternatively,
BBL Schaedler Broth
liquid media may be reduced immediately prior to use by boiling
Cat. No. 212191 Dehydrated 100 g
with caps loosened and cooling with tightened caps to room
BBL Schaedler Broth with Vitamin K1

temperature before inoculation.
Cat. No. 221541 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10*
221542 Prepared Tubes Ctn. of 100*
*Store at 2-8C.

Selective Seven H11 Agar

(See Seven H11 Agars)

507
 Section III
S Selective Streptococcus Agar

Selective Streptococcus Agar

Intended Use the loop, stab the agar two or three times in the area of heaviest
Selective Streptococcus Agar is designed for the isolation of inoculation. The streak plate technique is used primarily to
group A streptococci from respiratory sources. obtain isolated colonies from specimens containing mixed flora.
Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar side up) at
Summary and Explanation 35-37C for 18-48 hours in a CO2-enriched atmosphere.
Roantree et al.1 introduced a medium for isolation of group A
beta-hemolytic streptococci. The medium enriched with yeast Expected Results
nucleic acid and maltose promoted increased colony size and After 18-48 hours of incubation, the plates should show
enhanced clarity and sharpness of hemolytic zones produced isolated colonies in streaked areas and confluent growth in
by these organisms.2,3 areas of heavy inoculation. Group A streptococci (S. pyogenes)
will appear as translucent or opaque, white to gray, small colonies
Principles of the Procedure surrounded by a zone of beta hemolysis. Most Neisseria
Selective Streptococcus Agar is prepared from beef extract and species and gram-negative rods are inhibited.
casein peptone, which are relatively free of dextrose, permit-
ting the addition of animal blood to detect hemolytic activity. References
The incorporation of the antimicrobial agents, neomycin and 1. Roantree, Rantz and Haines. 1958. J. Lab. Clin. Med. 52:496.
2. Bernheimer and Rodbart. 1948. J. Exp. Med. 88:149.
polymyxin B, provides suppression of normal throat flora for 3. Watner, Bestakova and Motilkova. 1955. Schweiz Ztschr. Allg. Path. 18:278.
improved recovery of Streptococcus pyogenes.
Availability
Procedure BBL Selective Streptococcus Agar
To culture a specimen from a swab, inoculate the medium by Cat. No. 221934 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
221935 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
rolling the swab over a third of the agar surface, and streak
*Store at 2-8C.
the remainder of the plate to obtain isolated colonies. Material
not being cultured from swabs may be streaked onto the
medium with a sterilized inoculating loop. Without resterilizing

Selenite Broth Selenite-F Broth

Intended Use Antimicrobics is recommended for specimens suspected to
Selenite Broth (Selenite-F Broth) is used as an enrichment contain Campylobacter jejuni.3
medium for the isolation of Salmonella from feces, urine,
water, foods and other materials of sanitary importance. Principles of the Procedure
The peptone provides essential nitrogenous and carbon com-
Summary and Explanation pounds. The lactose in the medium serves to maintain a uniform
Selenite Broth was devised by Leifson,1 who demonstrated that pH. When selenite is reduced by the growth of bacteria, alkali
selenite was inhibitory for coliforms and certain other microbial is produced, and such increase in pH would lessen the toxicity
species, such as fecal streptococci, present in fecal specimens of the selenite and result in overgrowth of extraneous bacteria.
and, thus, was beneficial in the recovery of Salmonella species. The acid produced by lactose fermentation serves to maintain
He found that the inhibited strains would eventually break a neutral or slightly decreased pH. The function of the phosphate
through, but if subcultures were made from the enrichment is two-fold; it serves to maintain a stable pH and lessens the
broth after 8-12 hours of incubation, the isolation of Salmonella toxicity of the selenite, thus increasing the capacity of the medium.
was possible without overwhelming growth of many members Sodium selenite inhibits many species of gram-positive and
of the intestinal flora. gram-negative bacteria including enterococci and coliforms.
Enrichment media are routinely employed for detection Formula
of pathogens in fecal specimens since the pathogens usually Difco Selenite Broth
represent only a small percentage of the intestinal flora. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Selenite Broth and the related medium, Selenite Cystine Broth, Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
are recommended for use in the recovery of Salmonella with Lactose ....................................................................... 4.0 g
Sodium Selenite ......................................................... 4.0 g
subcultures being made after 12-18 hours of incubation. For Sodium Phosphate ................................................... 10.0 g
detection of Shigella, GN Broth is a satisfactory enrichment *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
medium.2 Campylobacter Thioglycollate Medium with 5
508
 Selenite Cystine Broth

Directions for Preparation from Incubate tubes with loosened caps at 35 2C for up to
Dehydrated Product 24 hours. Subcultures should be made after 12-18 hours of
1. Suspend 23 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. incubation, if possible. Coliforms will tend to overgrow the
2. Heat to boiling. Avoid overheating. DO NOT AUTO- pathogens if incubated longer than 24 hours.
CLAVE.
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Expected Results
stable, typical control cultures. After incubation, there should be an increase in the number
of pathogens that the medium is designed to select for and
Procedure enrich. Subculture onto appropriate selective and differential
For feces and other solid materials, suspend 1-2 g of the media (e.g., MacConkey Agar, Hektoen Enteric Agar, XLD
specimen in the broth (approximately 10-15% by volume) and Agar, XLT4 Agar, CHROMagar Salmonella) to isolate
emulsify with an inoculating needle, if necessary. pathogens for identification.

User Quality Control Limitation of the Procedure

Enrichment broths should not be used as the sole isolation
Identity Specifications
medium. They are to be used in conjunction with selective and
Difco Selenite Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Off-white, free-flowing, homoge-
nonselective plating media to increase the probability of
neous. isolating pathogens, especially when they may be present in
Solution: 2.3% solution, soluble in purified wa- small numbers. Consult references for detailed information
ter upon boiling. Solution is very light and recommended procedures.3
amber, clear to very slightly opales-
cent, may have a slight precipitate.
References
Prepared Appearance: Very light amber, clear to very slightly
opalescent, may have a slight precipitate.
1. Leifson. 1936. Am. J. Hyg. 24:423.
2. Taylor and Harris. 1965. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 44:476.
3. Nachamkin. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical micro-
S
Reaction of 2.3% biology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
Availability
Cultural Response
Difco Selenite Broth
Difco Selenite Broth
BS10 MCM7 SMWW
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Cat. No. 227540 Dehydrated 500 g
35 2C for 18-24 hours. After incubation, subculture onto MacConkey
Agar plates and incubate plated media at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. BBL Selenite-F Broth

BS10 MCM7 SMWW

COLONIES ON
INOCULUM MACCONKEY Cat. No. 221020 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 8 mL Pkg. of 10*
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY AGAR 221021 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 8 mL Ctn. of 100*
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Partial Pink with bile *Store at 2-8C.
inhibition precipitate
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good Colorless

Selenite Cystine Broth

Intended Use and Bartram modified Leifsons Selenite-F Enrichment broth
This medium conforms with specifications of The United States by adding cystine, which stimulated growth of Salmonella.2
Pharmacopeia (USP). The cystine-containing formulation is included in the USP for
Selenite Cystine Broth is used as a selective enrichment use in the performance of Microbial Limit Test procedures for
medium for the isolation of Salmonella from feces, foods, Salmonella species and is recommended by the Food and Drug
pharmaceutical articles, water and other materials of sanitary Administration, AOAC International and American Public
importance. Health Association for detecting Salmonella in foods and
waters.3-7
Summary and Explanation Selenite Cystine Broth and similar enrichment media are
Leifson found that selenite inhibited fecal streptococci and useful for detecting Salmonella in the nonacute stages of illness
coliforms during the first 8-12 hours of incubation, thereby when the organisms occur in the feces in low numbers and
permitting salmonellae to replicate without overwhelming for epidemiological studies to enhance the detection of low
interference from other members of the intestinal flora.1 North numbers of organisms from asymptomatic or convalescent
patients.8
509
 Section III
S Selenite Cystine Broth, cont.

Principles of the Procedure Procedure

Peptone provides amino acids and other nitrogenous For feces, food samples or other solid materials, suspend 1-2 g
substances. Lactose provides a source of energy, and sodium of the specimen in the broth (approximately 10-15% by
phosphate buffers the medium to maintain the pH. Sodium volume) and emulsify with an inoculating needle, if necessary.
selenite inhibits gram-positive bacteria and suppresses the Consult references for information about the processing and
growth of most gram-negative enterics other than Salmonella. inoculation of other samples or specimens.3-7
L-cystine is incorporated to improve the recovery of Salmonella.9
Incubate the tubes at 35C and subculture onto selective and
differential media (e.g., MacConkey Agar, XLD Agar, XLT4
Formula
Agar, CHROMagar Salmonella) after 6-8 hours of incubation
Difco Selenite Cystine Broth
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
and again after 12-24 hours of incubation.
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
Lactose ....................................................................... 4.0 g Expected Results
Sodium Phosphate ................................................... 10.0 g After incubation, the number of colonies of pathogens the
Sodium Selenite ......................................................... 4.0 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.01 g medium is designed to select should increase. Subculture
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. onto appropriate selective and differential media to isolate
pathogens for identification.
Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product Limitations of the Procedure
1. Suspend 23 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. 1. Enrichment broths should not be used as the sole isolation
2. Heat to boiling. Avoid overheating. DO NOT AUTO- medium. They are to be used in conjunction with selective
CLAVE. and nonselective plating media to increase the probability
3. Use immediately. of isolating pathogens, especially when they may be present
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using in small numbers. Consult references for detailed informa-
stable, typical control cultures. tion and recommended procedures.3,4,6
2. A brick red precipitate may appear if the medium is
User Quality Control overheated during preparation or exposed to excessive
moisture during storage.
Identity Specifications
Difco Selenite Cystine Broth References
Dehydrated Appearance: Off-white, free-flowing, homoge- 1. Leifson. 1936. Am. J. Hyg. 24:423.
2. North and Bartram. 1953. Appl. Microbiol. 1:130.
neous. 3. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
Solution: 2.3% solution, soluble in purified water national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
4. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
upon boiling. Solution is very light International, Gaithersburg, Md.
amber, clear to very slightly opalescent, 5. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. 1. AOAC
may have a slight precipitate. International, Gaithersburg, Md.
6. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to slightly opales- foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
cent, may have a slight precipitate. 7. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Reaction of 2.3% 8. Kelly, Brenner and Farmer. 1985. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2 9. Chapin and Murray. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Cultural Response
Difco Selenite Cystine Broth Availability
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Difco Selenite Cystine Broth
35 2C for 24 2 hours. After incubation, subculture onto AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF ISO SMD SMWW USP
MacConkey Agar plates and incubate plated media at 35 2C for Cat. No. 268740 Dehydrated 500 g
18-24 hours. 268710 Dehydrated 2 kg
COLONIES ON BBL Selenite Cystine Broth
INOCULUM MACCONKEY

ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY AGAR AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF ISO SMD SMWW USP
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Partial to Pink with bile Cat. No. 297711 Prepared Tubes (A Tubes), 20 mL Ctn. of 100*
complete precipitate *Store at 2-8C.
inhibition
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good Colorless
Shigella sonnei 9290 102-103 Fair to Good Colorless

510
 Seven H11 Agars

Serum Tellurite Agar

Intended Use Potassium tellurite is inhibitory for a variety of microorganisms;
Serum Tellurite Agar is a selective and differential medium used however, corynebacteria are resistant to tellurite and produce
for isolation of members of the genus Corynebacterium, characteristic gray to black colonies on media containing
particularly in the laboratory diagnosis of diphtheria. tellurite.2 Lamb serum contains growth factors required by
Corynebacterium species.
Summary and Explanation
Serum Tellurite Agar, which contains lamb serum and potassium Procedure
tellurite, was developed for use in the examination of nose, Inoculate plates and/or slants with specimen material. Incubate
throat and vaginal cultures for isolation of Corynebacterium tubes with loosened caps for 24-72 hours at 35 2C in an
species.1 aerobic atmosphere. The slanted medium is also convenient
for use in cultivation of pure cultures for use in laboratory
Principles of the Procedure studies. Incubate plates for 24-48 hours at 35 2C in an
The nutrients in Serum Tellurite Agar are supplied by casein aerobic atmosphere.
and meat peptones, which provide growth factors such as
nitrogen, carbon, sulfur, and trace ingredients. Dextrose is an Expected Results
energy source. Sodium chloride maintains osmotic equilibrium. Colonies which are gray to black in color are presumptively
identified as Corynebacterium species. These colonies should
Corynebacterium
diphtheriae be picked and used to obtain the organism in pure culture
ATCC 9675 prior to organism speciation.
Typical colonial morphology on Serum Tellurite Agar is as follows: S
Corynebacteria ................. Gray, dark centers, smooth
to rough, flat
Streptococci ..................... Small, white to gray
Staphylococci ................... Large, white to gray
Micrococci ........................ Large, white to gray, rough
Candida ........................... Small, white to gray
Listeria monocytogenes .... Gray
Gram-negative bacteria .... No growth to trace growth

References
1. Albers. 1947. U.S. Naval Med. Bull. 47:33.
2. Funke and Bernard. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). Manual of clinical
microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Availability
BBL Serum Tellurite Agar
BS10 CMPH MCM7
Cat. No. 221183 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
221024 Tubed Slants Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

Seven H11 Agars

Mycobacteria 7H11 Agar Seven H11 Agar Base
Seven H11 Agar Selective Seven H11 Agar
Seven H11 Agar with Aspartic Acid and Pyruvate
Intended Use Summary and Explanation
These media are used in qualitative procedures for isolation Seven H11 Agar (also referred to as Middlebrook 7H11 Agar)
and cultivation of mycobacteria, especially Mycobacterium was developed by Cohn et al. by the addition of casein
tuberculosis, from clinical and nonclinical specimens. hydrolysate to 7H10 Agar.1 Seven H11 Agar provides enhanced
growth of fastidious, drug-resistant strains of M. tuberculosis

511
 Section III
S Seven H11 Agars, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Mycobacteria 7H11 Agar BBL Seven H11 Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige with green tint, free-flow- Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
ing, homogeneous. material.
Solution: 2.1 g/90 mL solution, soluble in purified Solution: 19 g/900 mL solution, soluble in puri-
water with 0.5% glycerol upon boiling. fied water with 0.5% glycerol upon
Solution is light yellowish green, very boiling. Solution is colorless to pale tan
slightly to slightly opalescent. to light tan-green, slightly hazy to hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light yellowish green, very slightly to Prepared Appearance: Colorless to pale tan to light tan-green,
slightly opalescent. slightly hazy to hazy.
Reaction of 2.1 g/90 mL Reaction of 19 g/900 mL
with 0.5% Glycerol with 0.5% Glycerol
Solution at 25C: pH 6.6 0.2 Solution at 25C: pH 6.6 0.2

Cultural Response Cultural Response

Difco Mycobacteria 7H11 Agar BBL Seven H11 Agar Base
Prepare the medium per label directions with added Middlebrook OADC Prepare the medium per label directions with added Middlebrook OADC
enrichment. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C with 3-5% and up to enrichment. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C with 3-5% and up to
10% CO2 for up to 21 days. 10% CO2 for up to 21 days.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Partial inhibition Mycobacterium
Mycobacterium tuberculosis H37Ra 25177 103 Good
tuberculosis H37Ra 25177 3102-103 Good Mycobacterium
Mycobacterium kansasii Group I 12478 102 Good
2 3
kansasii Group I 12478 310 -10 Good Mycobacterium
Mycobacterium scrofulaceum Group II 19981 102 Good
2 3
scrofulaceum Group II 19981 310 -10 Good Mycobacterium
Mycobacterium intracellulare Group III 13950 102 Good
2 3
intracellulare Group III 13950 310 -10 Good Mycobacterium
Mycobacterium fortuitum Group IV 6841 102 Good
2 3
fortuitum Group IV 6841 310 -10 Good

Mycobacterium
that grow poorly (or not at all) on 7H10 Agar or other widely- tuberculosis H37Ra
used media.1,2 ATCC 25177

The Selective Seven H11 Agar is 7H11 Agar modified by the

addition of four antimicrobial agents: polymyxin B, carbenicillin,
amphotericin B and trimethoprim lactate. Mitchison et al.
initially developed the medium to reduce the need for decon-
tamination procedures.3 They found that the alkaline agents
used to reduce the growth of contaminating organisms inhibited
some species of mycobacteria. McClatchy recommended
reducing the concentration of carbenicillin used by Mitchison
et al. to make the medium less inhibitory to mycobacteria.4
The addition of pyruvate to Seven H11 Agar has been recom-
mended for specimens suspected of containing Mycobacterium
bovis. The addition of aspartic acid has been recommended
to enhance the production of niacin.5
Deep-filled plates are available to reduce the effects of drying
during prolonged incubation.

Principles of the Procedure

Middlebrook 7H10 Agar is a defined medium consisting of
oleic acid-albumin enrichment, glycerol, dextrose and inorganic
compounds to supply the nutrients necessary to support the
growth of mycobacterial species. Catalase destroys toxic
512
 Seven H11 Agars, cont.

peroxides that may be present in the medium. Malachite green Precaution7

acts as an inhibitory agent to provide partial inhibition of Biosafety Level 2 practices and procedures, containment equip-
contaminating bacteria. ment and facilities are required for non-aerosol-producing
Seven H11 Agar consists of 7H10 Agar supplemented with manipulations of clinical specimens such as preparation of
pancreatic digest of casein to enhance the growth of fastidious acid-fast smears. All aerosol-generating activities must be
strains of M. tuberculosis. conducted in a Class I or II biological safety cabinet. Biosafety
Level 3 practices, containment equipment and facilities are
The addition of antimicrobial agents to Seven H11 Agar required for laboratory activities in the propagation and
improves the recovery of mycobacteria from specimens manipulation of cultures of M. tuberculosis and M. bovis.
containing mixed flora. 2 Polymyxin B is a polypeptide Animal studies also require special procedures.
antibiotic that selectively inhibits most species of gram-
negative bacilli, including Pseudomonas, but not Proteus Directions for Preparation from
species.6 Carbenicillin is a semi-synthetic penicillin effective Dehydrated Product
against gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria, including 1. Suspend the powder in 900 mL of purified water containing
strains of Escherichia coli resistant to other antimicrobial 5 mL of glycerol:
agents.6 Amphotericin B is an antifungal antibiotic, and Difco Mycobacteria 7H11 Agar 21 g;
trimethoprim lactate is a synthetic antimicrobial agent that BBL Seven H11 Agar Base 19 g.
inhibits both gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria, including 2. Swirl to obtain a smooth suspension. Boil if necessary to
Proteus species. completely dissolve the powder.
With Seven H11 Agar containing aspartic acid and pyruvate, 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
aspartic acid serves as a precursor for niacin synthesis by 4. Aseptically add 100 mL of Middlebrook OADC Enrich-
M. tuberculosis and M. bovis. All mycobacteria produce nicotinic ment to the medium when cooled to 50-55C. Mix well.
acid (niacin). Because of a blocked metabolic pathway for 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using S
the conversion of free niacin to nicotinic mononucleotide, stable, typical control cultures.
M. tuberculosis accumulates niacin and excretes it into the
culture medium, a function that differentiates it from most Procedure
other mycobacterial species. Pyruvate enhances the recovery The test procedures are those recommended by the Centers for
of M. bovis. Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) for primary isolation
from specimens containing mycobacteria. N-Acetyl-L-cysteine-
Formulae sodium hydroxide (NALC-NaOH) solution is recommended as
Difco Mycobacteria 7H11 Agar a gentle but effective digesting and decontaminating agent. These
Approximate Formula* Per 900 mL reagents are provided in the BBL MycoPrep Mycobacterial
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 1.0 g Specimen Digestion/Decontamination Kit. For detailed decon-
L-Glutamic Acid ......................................................... 0.5 g
Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 0.4 g tamination and culturing instructions, consult an appropriate
Pyridoxine .................................................................. 1.0 mg reference.8-11
Biotin ......................................................................... 0.5 mg
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.04 g Following inoculation keep tubes shielded from light and place
Ammonium Sulfate .................................................... 0.5 g them in a suitable system providing an aerobic atmosphere
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 1.5 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.5 g
enriched with carbon dioxide. Incubate at 35 2C.
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.05 g Slanted media should be incubated in a horizontal plane until
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Malachite Green ........................................................ 1.0 mg the inoculum is absorbed. Tubes should have screw caps loose
BBL Seven H11 Agar Base for the first 3 weeks to permit circulation of carbon dioxide
Approximate Formula* Per 900 mL for the initiation of growth. Thereafter, to prevent dehydration,
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 1.0 g tighten caps; loosen briefly once a week. Stand tubes upright if
Monosodium Glutamate ............................................ 0.5 g space is a problem.
Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 0.4 g
Pyridoxine .................................................................. 1.0 mg NOTE: Cultures from skin lesions suspected to be M. marinum
Biotin ......................................................................... 0.5 mg
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.04 g
or M. ulcerans should be incubated at 25-33C for primary
Ammonium Sulfate .................................................... 0.5 g isolation; cultures suspected to contain M. avium or M. xenopi
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 1.5 g exhibit optimum growth at 40-42C.4 Incubate a duplicate
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.5 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.05 g
culture at 35-37C.
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g For information on the niacin test, consult the BBL Quality
Malachite Green ....................................................... 0.25 mg
Zinc Sulfate ................................................................ 1.0 mg Control and Product Information Manual for Plated and Tubed
Copper Sulfate ........................................................... 1.0 mg Media and other appropriate references.2,8-11 BBL Taxo TB
Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.5 mg Niacin Test Reagents (strips and control) may be used instead
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
of the test reagents.
513
 Section III
S Seven H11 Agars, cont.

Expected Results References

1. Cohn, Waggoner and McClatchy. 1968. Am. Rev. Respir. Dis. 98:295.
Cultures on Seven H11 Agar should be read within 5-7 days 2. Metchock, Nolte and Wallace. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
after incubation and once a week thereafter for up to 8 weeks. of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Mitchison, Allen, Carrol, Dickinson and Aber. 1972. J. Med. Mycol. 5:165.
4. McClatchy, Waggoner, Kanes, Cernich and Bolton. 1976. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 65:412.
Record Observations:8 5. Kilburn, Stottmeier and Kubica. 1968. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 50:582.
6. Garrod and OGrady. 1971. Antibiotics and chemotherapy, 3rd ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
1. Number of days required for colonies to become macro- 7. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Insitutes of
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiology and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
scopically visible. Rapid growers have mature colonies No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
8. Kent and Kubica. 1985. Public health mycobacteriology: a guide for the level III laboratory. USDHHS,
within 7 days. Slow growers require more than 7 days for Centers for Disease Control, Atlanta, Ga.
9. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
mature colony forms. Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
10. Cernoch, Enns, Saubolle and Wallace. 1994. Cumitech 16A, Laboratory diagnosis of the mycobac-
2. Pigment production terioses. Coord. ed., Weissfeld. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
White, cream or buff = Nonchromogenic (NC) 11. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
St. Louis, Mo.
Lemon, yellow, orange, red = Chromogenic (Ch)
Stained smears may show acid-fast bacilli, which are reported Availability
only as acid-fast bacilli unless definitive tests are performed. Difco Mycobacteria 7H11 Agar
Cat. No. 283810 Dehydrated 500 g
Test all nonchromogenic mycobacteria on Seven H11 Agar with
BBL Seven H11 Agar Base
Aspartic Acid and Sodium Pyruvate for niacin production; only Cat. No. 212203 Dehydrated 500 g
the rough nonchromogenic strains need to be tested for
BBL Seven H11 Agar

niacin. A culture must have at least 50-100 colonies with

BS10 CMPH MCM7
growth 3-4 weeks old. M. tuberculosis and the more rare Cat. No. 221870 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 10*
M. simiae are usually niacin positive. Most other mycobacteria 221391 Prepared Slants (A Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
are niacin negative. 221392 Prepared Slants (A Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
296105 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
297704 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
Limitations of the Procedure
BBL Selective Seven H11 Agar
1. Negative culture results do not rule-out active infection by
BS10 CMPH MCM7
mycobacteria. Some factors that are responsible for unsuc- Cat. No. 221868 Prepared Plates (Deep-fill) Pkg. of 10*
cessful cultures are: 297315 Prepared Slants (A Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
The specimen was not representative of the infectious 297639 Prepared Slants (A Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
297184 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
material; i.e., saliva instead of sputum. 297654 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
The mycobacteria were destroyed during digestion and
BBL Seven H11 Agar with Aspartic Acid and Sodium
decontamination of the specimen. Pyruvate
Gross contamination interfered with the growth of the Cat. No. 221958 Prepared Slants (A Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
mycobacteria. BBL Middlebrook 7H11 Agar//Selective 7H11 Agar

Proper aerobic conditions and increased CO2 tension BS10 CMPH MCM7
were not provided during incubation. Cat. No. 297250 Prepared Bi-Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
2. Mycobacteria are strict aerobes and growth is stimulated Difco Glycerol

by increased levels of CO2. Screw caps on tubes or bottles Cat. No. 228210 Bottle 100 g
should be handled as directed for exchange of CO2. 228220 Bottle 500 g
BBL Taxo TB Niacin Test Strips and Control
Cat. No. 231741 Vial 25 strips*
231735 Cartridge, Control 50 discs*
*Store at 2-8C.

Simmons Citrate Agar

Intended Use and Enterobacter aerogenes as part of the IMViC (Indole-
Simmons Citrate Agar is used for the differentiation of gram- Methyl Red-Voges Proskauer-Citrate) reactions. Simmons,2
negative bacteria on the basis of citrate utilization. in 1926, modified Kosers formulation with the addition of
1.5% agar and bromthymol blue.3 Organisms capable of
Summary and Explanation metabolizing citrate grow well on this medium.
Koser,1 in 1923, developed a liquid medium consisting of
inorganic salts in which an ammonium salt was the only source Principles of the Procedure
of nitrogen and citrate was the sole carbon source in order to Organisms able to utilize ammonium dihydrogen phosphate
differentiate between what are now known as Escherichia coli and sodium citrate as the sole sources of nitrogen and carbon,

514
 Simmons Citrate Agar, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
BBL Simmons Citrate Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
material, may contain many dark and
gray flecks.
Solution: 2.42% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is medium
to dark, green, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, green, clear to slightly
hazy, with a small amount of precipitate
and as many as a large amount of
insolubles.
Reaction of 2.42%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.9 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL Simmons Citrate Agar
Uninoculated Enterobacter Escherichia coli
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures Tube aerogenes ATCC 25922
and incubate at 35 2C for 4 days. ATCC 13048
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY REACTION
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 Good Alkaline (blue)
Escherichia coli 25922 Partial to
complete inhibition
Klebsiella pneumoniae
Shigella flexneri
33495 Good
9199 Complete inhibition
Alkaline (blue)
S
respectively, will grow on this medium and produce an alkaline Procedure
reaction as evidenced by a change in the color of the bromthymol Inoculate slants with growth from a pure culture using a light
blue indicator from green (neutral) to blue (alkaline). inoculum. Incubate all tubes for 4 days at 35 2C in an
aerobic atmosphere.
Formula
BBL Simmons Citrate Agar Expected Results
Approximate Formula* Per Liter A positive reaction is indicated by growth with an intense blue
Ammonium Dihydrogen Phosphate ........................... 1.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g color in the slant. A negative reaction is evidenced by no growth
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g to trace growth with no change in color (medium remains dark
Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 2.0 g green).
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.2 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g Consult appropriate texts for additional differentiating
Bromthymol Blue ....................................................... 0.08 g characteristics.4,5
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Directions for Preparation from References

1. Koser. 1923. J. Bacteriol. 8:493.
Dehydrated Product 2. Simmons. 1926. J. Infect. Dis. 39:209.
3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
1. Suspend 24.2 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
4. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriology,
Mix thoroughly. 9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
5. Farmer. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
completely dissolve the powder.
3. Dispense and autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Availability
4. Allow to cool in a slanted position for use as slants. The BBL Simmons Citrate Agar
agar also may be used as a plating medium. AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF ISO USDA
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Cat. No. 211620 Dehydrated 500 g
221026 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
stable, typical control cultures. 221027 Prepared Slants Ctn. of 100*
*Store at 2-8C.

515
 Section III
S Skim Milk

Skim Milk Skim Milk Medium

Intended Use Formula
Skim Milk is used for preparing microbiological culture Difco Skim Milk
media. Skim Milk Medium may be used for the cultivation Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Skim Milk Powder .................................................. 100.0 g
and differentiation of microorganisms based on the coagula-
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
tion and proteolysis of casein.
Directions for Preparation from
Summary and Explanation Dehydrated Product
Skim Milk is soluble, spray-dried skim milk. When prepared 1. Dissolve 100 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
in a 10% solution, it is equivalent to fresh skim milk. Skim 2. Warm, if necessary, to completely dissolve the powder.
Milk can be used to prepare Skim Milk Agar for detecting 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
proteolytic microorganisms in foods, 1 including dairy 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
products.2 It can also be used to prepare litmus milk, a differ- stable, typical control cultures.
ential test medium for determining lactose fermentation and
for detecting proteolytic enzymes that hydrolyze casein (milk Procedure
protein) and cause coagulation (clot formation).3 Heat the medium in a boiling water bath for 2-5 minutes with
Skim Milk Medium, 10% skim milk solution prepared in tubes, caps loosened and cool to room temperature with caps
is used for the maintenance and propagation of lactic acid tightened.
bacteria. It is especially useful in species differentiation within Inoculate tubes using a calibrated loop or sterile disposable
the genus Clostridium. pipet. For the study of anaerobic organisms, sterile mineral
oil can be layered over the medium following inoculation.
Principles of the Procedure
Skim Milk is a source of lactose and casein and other nutrients Incubate tubes, with tightened caps for clostridia and loosened
required for the growth of lactobacilli.4 Clostridial species can caps for other organisms, at 35 2C and read at intervals for 7
be differentiated based on their ability to enzymatically days for growth and reactions.
degrade proteins to peptones (peptonization) or coagulate
milk.5 It may be used to detect the stormy fermentation
Expected Results
produced by Clostridium perfringens. Consult an appropriate reference for the expected reactions
for specific microbial species.4,5

User Quality Control Limitation of the Procedure

Identity Specifications Skim Milk Medium supports growth of many microorganisms.
Difco Skim Milk
Perform microscopic examination and other biochemical tests
Dehydrated Appearance: White to off-white, free-flowing, to identify isolates to the genus and species level, if necessary.
homogeneous.
Solution: 10% solution, soluble in purified References
water upon warming. Solution is 1. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
white, opalescent. foods. 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
2. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of the dairy products, 16th ed. American
Prepared Appearance: Off-white to beige, opaque. Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
Reaction of 10% vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Solution at 25C: pH 6.3 0.2 4. Sneath and Holt (ed.). 1986. Bergeys Manual of systematic bacteriology, vol.2. Williams &
Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
5. Allen, Emery and Siders. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
Cultural Response clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Difco Skim Milk

Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with a drop or loopful Availability
of fresh culture and incubate at 35 2C for 1-7 days. Difco Skim Milk
ORGANISM ATCC GROWTH APPEARANCE
Cat. No. 232100 Dehydrated 500 g
Clostridium perfringens 12919 Good Stormy fermentation BBL Skim Milk Medium
Escherichia coli 25922 Good Acid, curd Cat. No. 298240 Prepared Tubes (D Tubes) Pkg. of 10
Lactobacillus rhamnosus 9595 Good Acid, curd

516
 Snyder Test Agar

Skirrows Medium
(See Campylobacter Agars)

Snyder Test Agar

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Snyder Test Agar, also known as BCG Dextrose Agar,1 is used Snyder Test Agar contains peptones as sources of carbon, nitrogen,
for estimating the relative number of lactobacilli in saliva based vitamins and minerals. Dextrose is the carbohydrate. Bromcresol
on acid production. green is the pH indicator. Agar is the solidifying agent.
Microorganisms that use the dextrose in the medium acidify
Summary and Explanation
the medium and the pH indicator, bromcresol green, changes
Tooth decay (dental caries) is a localized, progressive deminer-
color from blue-green to yellow.
alization of the hard tissues of the crown and root surfaces of
teeth. Streptococcus mutans and possibly lactobacilli ferment Formula
dietary carbohydrates that produce acids that cause the Difco Snyder Test Agar
demineralization. The organisms reside in dental plaque, which Approximate Formula* Per Liter
is a gelatinous material that adheres to the surfaces of teeth. Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g
Demineralization of the tooth alternates with periods of Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g
remineralization. If demineralization exceeds remineralization, Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
a subsurface carious lesion becomes a clinical cavity with Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g S
extension of the decay into the dentine.2 Bromcresol Green ....................................................... 0.02 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Snyder3,4 described a test procedure for determining, by
colorimetric analysis, the rate and amount of acid produced Directions for Preparation from
by microorganisms in saliva. The procedure uses an agar Dehydrated Product
medium that is known as Snyder Test Agar. Alban5 simplified 1. Suspend 65 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
the procedure, used it extensively and reported it to be more thoroughly.
accurate than Snyders original procedure.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Snyder Test Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Cream with green tint to light green,
free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 6.5% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is dark
emerald green, very slightly to slightly
opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Dark emerald green, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 6.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 4.8 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Snyder Test Agar Uninoculated Lactobacillus
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 Tube fermentum
ATCC 9338
2C for 18-72 hours.
INOCULUM ACID
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY PRODUCTION
Lactobacillus rhamnosus 9595 102-103 Good +
Lactobacillus fermentum 9338 102-103 Good +
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 None to poor

517
 Section III
S Snyder Test Agar, cont.

2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Alban Modification
completely dissolve the powder. a. No color change
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. b. Color beginning to change to yellow from top of medium
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using down (+)
stable, typical control cultures. c. One half of medium yellow (++)
d. Three fourths of medium yellow (+++)
Procedure e. The entire medium is yellow (++++)
Specimens should be collected preferably before breakfast, The final report is a composite of the daily readings, for
lunch, or dinner, and before the teeth are brushed. This proce- example; , +, ++, +++. The readings indicate the rapidity and
dure can be done just before lunch or dinner. amount of acid production.
Snyder Procedure3,4
1. Collect specimens of saliva in a sterile container while Limitations of the Procedure
patient is chewing paraffin for 3 minutes. 1. The data indicate only what is happening at the time the
2. Shake specimens thoroughly and transfer 0.2 mL to a specimen was collected.
tube of sterile Snyder Test Agar melted and cooled to 45C. 2. At least two specimens collected within 2-4 days must be
(Prepared medium in tubes is heated in a boiling water bath obtained to establish a base-line or reference point.
for 10 minutes and cooled to 45C.) 3. Only when two or more specimens have been cultured can
3. Rotate the inoculated tubes to mix the inoculum uniformly any reliability or prediction be obtained.
with the medium and allow to solidify in an upright 4. The clinician must study enough cases by use of periodic
position. laboratory data to establish the value or significance for
4. Incubate at 35C. Observe color at 24, 48 and 72 hours. the purpose intended.
Alban Modification5
References
1. Collect enough unstimulated saliva to just cover the medium 1. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
in the tube. When specimen collection is difficult, dip a 2. Lewis and Ismail. 1995. Can. Med. Assoc. J. 152:836.
sterile cotton swab into the saliva under the tongue or rub 3. Snyder. 1941. J. Dent. Res. 20:189.
4. Snyder. 1941. J. Am. Dent. Assoc. 28:44.
on tooth surfaces and place the swab just below the surface 5. Alban. 1970. J. Dent. Res. 49:641.

of the medium.
2. Incubate the inoculated tubes and an uninoculated control Availability
at 35C. Difco Snyder Test Agar
Cat. No. 224710 Dehydrated 500 g
3. Examine tubes daily for 4 days.
4. Observe daily color change compared to control tube.

Expected Results
Snyder Procedure
Observe tubes for a change in color of the medium from bluish-
green (control) to yellow. A positive reaction is a change in
color so that green is no longer dominant; record as ++ to
++++. A negative reaction is no change in color or only a slight
change (green is still dominant); record as 0 to +.

Sodium Hippurate Broth

Intended Use test procedure in their study of the presumptive identification
Sodium Hippurate Broth is used in the determination of the of groups A, B and D streptococci.2
ability of an organism to hydrolyze sodium hippurate by The ability of an organism to hydrolyze sodium hippurate
enzymatic action. is one of a number of tests that aid in the differentiation of
bovine beta-hemolytic group B Streptococcus (S. agalactiae)
Summary and Explanation from human beta-hemolytic group B Streptococcus species.3
Ayers and Rupp discovered that hemolytic streptococci from Differentiation of beta-hemolytic group B streptococci from
human and bovine sources could be differentiated by their abil- beta-hemolytic group A streptococci and nonenterococcal
ity to hydrolyze sodium hippurate.1 Facklam et al. modified the group D streptococci is also aided by the determination of
hippurate hydrolysis.3

518
 Soytone

Principles of the Procedure 4. If positive (initial precipitate does not clear within 15
Heart muscle infusion and animal tissue peptone supply the minutes), ferric ion is not in excess and must be titrated to
variety of nutrients required for the growth of a majority determine the optimal amount of solution required to be in
of bacterial species. Sodium chloride maintains osmotic equi- excess.
librium. Sodium hippurate serves as a substrate for the If titration is necessary, rapidly add 0.2, 0.3, 0.4 and 0.5 mL
measurement of hippurate hydrolysis. amounts of ferric chloride solution to small negative control
tubes #2 through #5 each containing 1.0 mL of the incubated
Procedure uninoculated broth. Immediately shake gently. Let stand
Inoculate tubes with one or two drops of an 18- to 24-hour 10-15 minutes with occasional shaking. The smallest amount
pure broth culture of a confirmed beta-hemolytic Streptococcus of FeCl3 solution giving a clear solution indicates that ferric
or with one to two isolated colonies from an original isolation ion is in excess. Use this amount in the evaluation of the test
plate. Include an uninoculated tube as a negative control and cultures.
a positive control (S. agalactiae). Incubate tubes with loosened
caps for 48 hours at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere. Add the appropriate amount of the ferric chloride solution to
all tubes containing 0.8 mL of incubated test and positive
Following incubation, centrifuge all cloudy cultures and use control cultures.
the supernatant in the test. Aseptically transfer an aliquot of
culture (or its supernatant) to small test tubes using 0.8 mL Expected Results
of the test organism cultures. Set up five negative controls. A positive test for hippurate hydrolysis is indicated by produc-
Add 0.8 mL from the incubated negative control tube to small tion of a brown flocculating, insoluble precipitate that persists
negative control tube #1 and 1.0 mL aliquots to small on shaking. The amount of the precipitate is related to the
negative control tubes #2 through #5. degree of hippurate hydrolysis.
Before adding ferric chloride solution to tubes containing test A negative test (hippurate not hydrolyzed) is indicated by the S
organism or positive cultures, use the small, negative control lack of precipitate formation or the formation of a precipitate
tubes to determine the amount of ferric chloride to add by that dissolves on shaking.
means of the following procedure.
Consult an appropriate text for additional differentiating
1. To small negative control tube #1 containing 0.8 mL of characteristics.4
incubated broth, add 0.2 mL of the 12% ferric chloride
solution and immediately shake gently. References
2. Allow the tube to stand 10-15 minutes before reading the 1. Ayers and Rupp. 1922. J. Infect. Dis. 30:388.
2. Facklam, Padula, Thacker, Wortham and Sconyers. 1974. Appl. Microbiol. 27:107.
result. 3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
3. If negative (initial precipitate clears within 15 minutes), the 4. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriology,
9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
ferric ion is in excess and the ferric chloride solution can be
used in the testing of the test cultures.
Availability
BBL Sodium Hippurate Broth
Cat. No. 221618 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10

Sorbitol MacConkey Agars

(See MacConkey Agars with Sorbitol)

Soybean-Casein Digest Media

(See Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar and Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Broth)

Soytone
(See Phytone Peptone)

519
 Section III
S Special Yeast and Mold Medium

Special Yeast and Mold Medium

Intended Use and molds. The medium contains malt extract, peptone and
Special Yeast and Mold Medium is used for isolating and dextrose as sources of nutrients. Streptomycin and/or chlor-
cultivating yeasts and molds. tetracycline may be added as antibacterial agents.2

Summary and Explanation Formula

In 1986, the American Congress of Governmental Industrial Difco Special Yeast and Mold Medium
Hygienists (ACGIH) described a medium for detecting and enu- Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Malt Extract .............................................................. 20.0 g
merating fungi.1 The ACGIH recommendations were accepted, Peptone ..................................................................... 1.0 g
with the addition of antibiotics, by the Finnish Medical Board Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g
which recommends this medium for collecting airborne Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
microorganisms.2
Directions for Preparation from
Principles of the Procedure Dehydrated Product
Special Yeast and Mold Medium is a nutritionally rich
1. Suspend 61 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
medium that supports the growth of a wide variety of yeasts
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
User Quality Control completely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 45-50C.
Identity Specifications
Difco Special Yeast and Mold Medium
4. For improved selectivity, aseptically add 40 mg streptomycin
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- and/or 35 mg chlortetracycline and mix well.
neous. 5. If desired, adjust pH by aseptically adding 1N HCl or 1N
Solution: 6.1% solution, soluble in purified NaOH.
water upon boiling. Solution is light 6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
to medium amber, very slightly to
slightly opalescent. stable, typical control cultures.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, very slightly
to slightly opalescent. Procedure
Reaction of 6.1% Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
Solution at 25C: pH 5.6 0.2 specimens. Incubate plates aerobically at room temperature
in the dark for 4-7 days. Examine plates for growth after 18-
Cultural Response
24 hours incubation and up to 7 days.
Difco Special Yeast and Mold Medium
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
30 2C for 7 days for the yeast and molds. Inoculate and incubate Expected Results
other organisms at 35 2C for 48 hours. Yeasts and molds should show growth in 4-7 days at room
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY temperature. Bacteria should be inhibited on the complete
Aspergillus niger 16404 30-300 Good medium containing antibacterial agents.
Candida albicans 26790 30-300 Good
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 30-300 Marked to References
complete inhibition 1. Morey, Otten, Burge, Chatigny, Feeley, LaForce and Peterson. 1986. Applied Industrial Hygiene
1:R-19.
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Marked to 2. Guide regarding condition and attendance of houses. 1990. Finnish Medical Board. Helsinki, Finland.
complete inhibition
Trichophyton Availability
mentagrophytes 9533 30-300 Poor to fair
Difco Special Yeast and Mold Medium
Cat. No. 210810 Dehydrated 500 g

520
 Spirit Blue Agar

Spirit Blue Agar

Lipase Reagent
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Spirit Blue Agar is for use with Lipase Reagent or other lipid Spirit Blue Agar contains peptone as a source of carbon, nitrogen,
source for detecting and enumerating lipolytic microorganisms. vitamins and minerals. Yeast extract supplies B-complex
vitamins which stimulate bacterial growth. Spirit blue is the
Summary and Explanation indicator of lipolysis. Agar is the solidifying agent.
In 1941, Starr1 described a lipid emulsion medium for detecting
Lipase Reagent contains tributyrin, a true fat and the simplest
lipolytic (lipase-producing) microorganisms to which he added
triglyceride occurring in natural fats and oils. It is a good
the dye, spirit blue. Other dyes used as indicators of lipolysis
substrate when testing for lipolytic microorganisms because
were toxic to many microorganisms. Spirit blue did not have
some microorganisms that hydrolyze tributyrin will not hy-
toxic effects. When testing samples of dairy products, air and
drolyze other triglycerides or fats containing longer chain fatty
sewage on Spirit Blue Agar, Starr obtained accurate counts of
acids.2
lipolytic microorganisms and total microbial counts on the
same medium. Formulae
Lipolytic microorganisms, such as psychrotrophic bacteria, Difco Spirit Blue Agar
molds or yeasts, can adversely affect the flavor of milk and Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
high fat dairy products. Spirit Blue Agar is a recommended Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
medium for testing milk and dairy products.2
Lipase Reagent, a mixture of tributyrin and polysorbate 80, is
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0
Spirit Blue ................................................................... 0.15
g
g S
recommended as the lipid source. Other lipoidal emulsions may Difco Lipase Reagent
be prepared from cottonseed meal, cream, vegetable oil and A ready-to-use lipid suspension, containing a mixture of tributyrin
olive oil. A satisfactory emulsion can be prepared by dissolving and polysorbate 80.
10 g gum acacia or 1 mL polysorbate 80 in 400 mL warm *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

purified water, adding 100 mL cottonseed or olive oil and

agitating vigorously to emulsify.
Uninoculated Staphylococcus aureus
User Quality Control Plate ATCC 25923

Identity Specifications
Difco Spirit Blue Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Grayish-beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Solution: 3.5% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is royal blue,
slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Plain Royal blue, opalescent.
With 3% Lipase Reagent Pale blue,
opalescent.
Reaction of 3.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2
Difco Lipase Reagent

Appearance: White, opaque emulsion.

Cultural Response
Difco Spirit Blue Agar and Lipase Reagent
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for up to 72 hours.
INOCULUM HALO/
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY LIPOLYSIS
Staphylococcus
Proteus mirabilis 25933 102-103 Good epidermidis
ATCC 12228
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good +
Staphylococcus aureus 6538 102-103 Good +
Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 102-103 Good +

521
 Section III
S Spirit Blue Agar, cont.

Directions for Preparation from Expected Results

Dehydrated Product Lipolytic microorganisms metabolize the lipid in the medium
1. Suspend 35 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix and form colonies with halos indicating lipolysis.
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to References
1. Starr. 1941. Science 93:333.
completely dissolve the powder. 2. Frank, Christen and Bullerman. 1993. In Marshall (ed.), Standard methods for the examination of
dairy products, 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 50-55C.
4. Aseptically add 30 mL Lipase Reagent or other lipid source Availability
and mix thoroughly. Difco Spirit Blue Agar
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using SMD
stable, typical control cultures. Cat. No. 295010 Dehydrated 100 g
295020 Dehydrated 500 g
Procedure Difco Lipase Reagent
Inoculate the organism onto the medium. Incubate plates at SMD
35 2C for up to 72 hours, or at other temperatures and Cat. No. 243110 Bottle 6 x 20 mL

times according to standard methods.2

Spirolate Broth
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Spirolate Broth was developed for mass culture of the Reiter The casein peptone, dextrose and yeast extract supply nitrog-
treponeme in a medium without agar. It can be used for culti- enous growth factors, carbon, minerals and vitamins required
vating other spirochetes. for the metabolism of Reiter treponemes. Sodium chloride aids
in the maintenance of the osmotic equilibrium of the medium.
Summary and Explanation Sodium thioglycollate reduces the oxygen tension to a
In 1956, Omata and Disraely developed FM Medium as a level conducive to the growth of treponemes. L-Cysteine
selective medium for the growth of oral fusobacteria.1 BBL hydrochloride is a reducing agent and is slightly inhibitory to
Spirolate Broth is a modification of that medium and is fusobacteria.1
recommended for bulk production of Reiter treponemes for use
The addition of ether-soluble pure palmitic, stearic, oleic and
in antigen production or research studies. Supplementation
linoleic acids, in equal amounts at a total fatty acid concentra-
with fatty acids has a stimulatory effect on growth of the Reiter
tion of 0.20-0.25 mg/mL of medium, provides fatty acids which
treponeme.2
enhance the growth of Reiter treponemes.2
User Quality Control Formula
Identity Specifications BBL Spirolate Broth
BBL Spirolate Broth Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 15.0 g
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g
ous material.
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Solution: 2.9% solution, soluble in purified Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.5 g
water upon boiling. Solution is light Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 0.5 g
to medium, tan to yellow, clear to L-Cysteine HCl ........................................................... 1.0 g
slightly hazy. *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, tan to yellow, clear
to slightly hazy. Directions for Preparation from
Reaction of 2.9% Dehydrated Product
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2
1. Suspend 29 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Cultural Response thoroughly. (Add equal quantities of palmitic, stearic, oleic
BBL Spirolate Broth and linoleic acids to a total fatty acid concentration of 0.20-
Prepare the medium per label directions (with 10% inactivated rabbit 0.25 g/L, if desired.)
serum). Inoculate with a fresh culture and incubate at 35 2C for 7 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
days.
completely dissolve the powder.
ORGANISM RECOVERY 3. Dispense in test tubes, filling them half full, using 15-
Reiter treponeme Good 20 mL in 6-inch tubes, preferably with screw caps. If larger
containers are used, the ratio of surface to volume should
be similar to that for tubes.
522
 Standard Methods Agar

4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Close caps upon 7 days at 35 2C in an anaerobic atmosphere (BBL GasPak
removal from the autoclave. EZ anaerobic system or equivalent).
5. Cool and add sterile inactivated sheep, rabbit or bovine
serum, 10% by volume, to each tube. Tighten caps. Expected Results
6. Store at room temperature, not in the refrigerator, unless After obtaining sufficient growth, process the cultures accord-
in sealed containers. ing to the particular method being utilized.
7. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures. References
1. Omata and Disraely. 1956. J. Bacteriol. 72: 677.
2. Power and Pelczar. 1959. J. Bacteriol. 77: 789.
Procedure
Inoculate containers of Spirolate Broth with 0.05-mL aliquots Availability
of a 7-day pure culture in Thioglycollate Medium without BBL Spirolate Broth
Indicator-135C supplemented with 15% inactivated sheep, Cat. No. 211636 Dehydrated 500 g
rabbit or bovine serum. Incubate containers for a minimum of

Standard Methods Agar

(See Plate Count Agar)

Standard Methods Agar with Lecithin

and Polysorbate 80 S
Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Standard Methods Agar with Lecithin and Polysorbate 80 is Standard Methods Agar with the neutralizers, lecithin and
recommended for the detection and enumeration of microor- polysorbate 80, is formulated according to recommendations
ganisms present on surfaces of sanitary importance. of the American Public Health Association.1,2 It is primarily used
in RODAC (Replicate Organism Detection and Counting) and
User Quality Control contact plates for the enumeration of microorganisms on
flat impervious surfaces. For this purpose the plates must be
Identity Specifications prepared carefully to ensure the presence of a meniscus of agar
BBL Standard Methods Agar with Lecithin and
extending above the top of the poured plate. This requires
Polysorbate 80
Dehydrated Appearance: Medium fine, softly lumped powder approximately 17.0 mL of sterile medium per RODAC or
brown sugar appearance, free of contact plate.
extraneous material.
The presence and number of microorganisms on a surface is
Solution: 2.92% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light, determined by the appearance of colonies on the surface of the
yellow to tan, slightly to moderately medium following application to the test surface.3 Collection
hazy. of samples from identical areas before and after treatment
Prepared Appearance: Light, yellow to tan, slightly to mod- with disinfectant yields data useful in evaluating cleaning
erately hazy.
Reaction of 2.92% procedures in environmental sanitation.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
Principles of the Procedure
Cultural Response Casein peptone, yeast extract and dextrose are sources of
BBL Standard Methods Agar with Lecithin and nutrients required for the replication of microorganisms. The
Polysorbate 80
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
peptone provides nitrogenous compounds, including essential
35 2C for 42-48 hours amino acids. Yeast extract is a rich source of B-complex
INOCULUM
vitamins. Dextrose is an energy source.
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY APPEARANCE
Lecithin and polysorbate 80, two commonly used neutralizers,
Pseudomonas
aeruginosa 10145 103-104 Good Yellow to are reported to inactivate residual disinfectants where the samples
green pigment are being collected. Lecithin is incorporated to neutralize
Staphylococcus quaternary ammonium compounds, and polysorbate 80 is used
aureus 25923 103-104 Good Cream to
to neutralize substituted phenolic disinfectants.3-5
gold colonies

523
 Section III
S Standard Methods Agar, cont.

Formula For use in the sampling of surfaces, remove the top of the plate.
BBL Standard Methods Agar with Lecithin and Apply the agar surface to a flat surface, pressing down gently
Polysorbate 80 but firmly and making certain that the entire agar meniscus
Approximate Formula* Per Liter touches the surface. Use a rolling uniform pressure on the
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 2.5 g back of the plate to effect contact. Lift the plate straight up
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g from the surface, being careful not to allow it to slide along
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g the surface. Replace the top of the plate. Incubate plates with
Lecithin ...................................................................... 0.7 g
Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 5.0 g
the agar side up at 32C for 24-48 hours depending upon
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. whether contamination is heavy or light.1,2

Directions for Preparation from Expected Results

Dehydrated Product After incubation, count the colonies and record as either number
1. Suspend 29.2 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. of colonies per RODAC plate or number of colonies per cm2.1,2
Mix thoroughly. Subculture those colonies which are of interest so that positive
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- identification can be made by means of biochemical testing
pletely dissolve the powder. and/or microscopic examination of organism smears.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to approximately
45C. References
1. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
4. In RODAC or Contact plates, use 16.5-17.5 mL per plate. foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
2. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
stable, typical control cultures. 3. McGowan. 1985. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
4. Quisno, Gibby and Foter. 1946. Am. J. Pharm. 118: 320.
NOTE: The dehydrated medium has a characteristic brown 5. Erlandson and Lawrence. 1953. Science 118: 274.
sugar appearance and may seem moist.
Availability
Procedure BBL Standard Methods Agar with Lecithin and
Liquefy the tubed medium in boiling water. Cool to 45-50C Polysorbate 80
and carefully pour in sterile RODAC plates. The agar in these COMPF SMD
plates after hardening should form a meniscus above the sides Cat. No. 211643 Dehydrated 500 g*
221939 Prepared Contact Plates Pkg. of 20*
of the plates.
221032 Prepared Pour Tubes, 18 mL Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

m Staphylococcus Broth
Intended Use m Staphylococcus Broth, with the addition of sodium azide, is
m Staphylococcus Broth is used for isolating staphylococci by used in a multiple-tube procedure to monitor swimming pool
the membrane filtration technique. water for the presence of S. aureus.1

Summary and Explanation Principles of the Procedure

Staphylococci, along with other bacteria, are indicators of recre- Peptone provides the nitrogen, amino acids and minerals in
ational water quality.1 Indicators of health risk include normal m Staphylococcus Broth. Yeast extract is the vitamin source in
skin flora that are likely to be shed, such as Pseudomonas, this formula. Lactose and mannitol are the carbohydrates for
Streptococcus and Staphylococcus.2 These organisms account bacterial growth. Dipotassium phosphate is the buffering agent.
for a large percentage of swimming pool-associated illness.1 The high concentration of sodium chloride permits this
The coagulase-positive species, Staphylococcus aureus, is well docu- medium to be selective for staphylococci.
mented as a human opportunistic pathogen.3 Coagulase-negative
Staphylococcus spp. are a major component of the normal Formula
microflora of humans.3 Staphylococci are widespread in Difco m Staphylococcus Broth
nature, though they are mainly found living on the skin, skin Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
glands and mucous membranes of mammals and birds.3 Yeast Extract .............................................................. 2.5 g
Chapman4 added 7.5% NaCl to Phenol Red Mannitol Agar Lactose ....................................................................... 2.0 g
Mannitol .................................................................. 10.0 g
to achieve a selective medium for staphylococci. While Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 5.0 g
studying this medium formulation, Chapman5 developed Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 75.0 g
Staphylococcus Medium 110. m Staphylococcus Broth is *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

patterned after the formula of Staphylococcus Medium 110.

524
 Staphylococcus Medium 110

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco m Staphylococcus Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 10.4% solution, soluble in purified water upon warming. Solution is light amber, clear to slightly opalescent, may have
a slight precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to slightly opalescent, may have a slight precipitate.
Reaction of 10.4%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco m Staphylococcus Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Use the membrane filtration technique with the test organisms. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C under humid
conditions for 40-48 hours. Observe the membranes for recovery and pigment production. Detect mannitol fermentation by adding a drop of bromthymol
blue to the site where a colony was removed. A yellow color indicates a positive result for mannitol fermentation.
MANNITOL PIGMENT
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY FERMENTATION PRODUCTION
Escherichia coli 25922 20-200 Inhibition N/A
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 20-200 Good + +
Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 20-200 Good

Directions for Preparation from Expected Results

Dehydrated Product Observe membranes for growth and pigment production. Test
1. Dissolve 104 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. for mannitol fermentation by adding a drop of bromthymol S
2. Warm slightly to completely dissolve the powder. blue to the site from which a colony is removed; a yellow color
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. indicates mannitol fermentation.
NOTE: For field studies where autoclaving is not practical,
Limitation of the Procedure
boil the medium for 5 minutes.
Confirm positive isolates using biochemical reactions.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures. References
1. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Procedure 2. Seyfried, Tobin, Brown and Ness. 1985. Am. J. Public Health 75:1071.
3. Kloos and Bannerman. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
1. Follow the membrane filtration procedure described in microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
4. Chapman. 1945. J. Bacteriol. 50:201.
Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and 5. Chapman. 1946. J. Bacteriol. 51:409.
Wastewater.1
2. Use 2.0-2.5 mL of medium to saturate the paper pads on Availability
which the inoculated membrane is placed. Difco m Staphylococcus Broth
3. Incubate at 35 2C for 40-48 hours. SMWW
Cat. No. 264920 Dehydrated 500 g

Staphylococcus Medium 110

Intended Use Red Mannitol Agar to make a selective isolation medium for
Staphylococcus Medium 110, also known as Stone Gelatin staphylococci using a high salt content. Further studies by
Agar,1 is used for isolating and differentiating staphylococci Chapman5 led to the development of Staphylococcus Medium
based on mannitol fermentation, pigment formation and 110. This medium is recommended for selectively isolating
gelatinase activity. pathogenic staphylococci from foods.

Summary and Explanation Principles of the Procedure

Stone2 described a culture medium on which food-poisoning Staphylococcus Medium 110 contains peptone as a source
staphylococci gave a positive gelatinase test. Chapman, Lieb of carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Yeast extract
and Curcio3 later reported that pathogenic staphylococcal supplies B-complex vitamins which stimulate bacterial growth.
strains typically ferment mannitol, form pigment and produce Sodium chloride, in high concentration, inhibits most bacteria
gelatinase. Chapman4 suggested adding 7.5% NaCl to Phenol other than staphylococci. Lactose and D-mannitol are the

525
 Section III
S Staphylococcus Medium 110, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Staphylococcus Medium 110
Dehydrated Appearance: Very light beige to beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 14.9% solution, soluble in purified water upon boiling. Solution is light amber, slightly opalescent to opalescent with
heavy precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent to opalescent.
Reaction of 14.9%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Staphylococcus Medium 110
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours. To observe mannitol fermentation, remove a colony from
the medium and add a drop of 0.04% bromthymol blue to the area from which the colony was removed. Observe for the formation of a yellow color
(positive reaction).
To observe the gelatinase reaction, flood the plate with 5 mL of saturated ammonium sulfate solution and incubate at 35 2C for 10 minutes. Observe
for a zone of clearing around the colonies (positive reaction).
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY PIGMENT* GELATINASE MANNITOL
2 2
Escherichia coli 25922 10 -310 Marked to complete N/A N/A
inhibition
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-3102 Good + + +
Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 102-3102 Good +
*Pigment is seen as a yellow to orange color.

carbohydrates. Gelatin is included for testing liquefaction. Agar Procedure

is the solidifying agent. Consult appropriate references for procedures concerning
Pathogenic staphylococci (coagulase-positive staphylococci) selection and enumeration of staphylococci.
typically resist the high salt concentration and form colonies
with a yellow-orange pigment. These organisms typically Expected Results
ferment mannitol and produce acid, and liquefy gelatin, Growth of pathogenic staphylococci produces colonies with
producing zones of clearing around the colonies. yellow-orange pigment.

Formula Limitations of the Procedure

Difco Staphylococcus Medium 110
1. Enterococcus faecalis may grow on Staphylococcus
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Medium 110 as tiny colonies with mannitol fermentation.
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g Differentiate these organisms from staphylococci with the
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 2.5 g Gram stain and catalase test.
Gelatin ..................................................................... 30.0 g
Lactose ....................................................................... 2.0 g 2. Suspected staphylococci must be subcultured to Nutrient
D-Mannitol ............................................................... 10.0 g Broth, Blood Agar, BHI Broth, or Tryptose Phosphate Broth
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 75.0 g for coagulase testing as the high salt content of Staphylo-
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g coccus Medium 110 may interfere with results.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 3. Pigment production is not a reliable criterion for differen-
tiation of staphylococcal species.
Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product References
1. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
1. Suspend 149 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
thoroughly. 2. Stone. 1935. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 33:185.
3. Chapman, Lieb and Curcio. 1937. Food Res. 2:349.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 4. Chapman. 1945. J. Bacteriol. 50:201.
5. Chapman. 1946. J. Bacteriol. 51:409.
completely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes. Availability
4. Evenly disperse the precipitate when dispensing. Difco Staphylococcus Medium 110
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Cat. No. 229730 Dehydrated 500 g
stable, typical control cultures. Japan
Cat. No. 251358 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.

526
 Starch Agar

Starch Agar
(For Nocardia, see Nocardia Differentiation Media)

Starch Agar
Intended Use Formula
Starch Agar is used for cultivating microorganisms being tested Difco Starch Agar
for starch hydrolysis. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Soluble Starch .......................................................... 10.0 g
Summary and Explanation Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g
In 1915,1 Vedder formulated Starch Agar for cultivating *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Neisseria. Since then, other media have been developed that

Directions for Preparation from
are superior to Starch Agar for the isolation of Neisseria spp.,
including enriched GC medium base. Starch Agar is used in Dehydrated Product
differentiating microorganisms based on the starch hydrolysis 1. Suspend 25 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
test. thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Principles of the Procedure completely dissolve the powder.
Beef extract provides the nitrogen, vitamins, carbon and amino 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
acids in Starch Agar. Starch reacts with Gram Iodine to give a
blue color. Organisms hydrolyzing starch through amylase
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
S
production will produce a clearing around the isolate while
the remaining medium is blue. Agar is the solidifying agent. Procedure
Starch Hydrolysis Test
User Quality Control Flood the surface of a 48-hour culture on Starch Agar with Gram
Iodine.
Identity Specifications
Difco Starch Agar For a complete discussion of the collection, isolation and identi-
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- fication of microorganisms, refer to appropriate references.2,3
neous.
Solution: 2.5% solution, soluble in purified Expected Results
water upon boiling. Solution is light Starch hydrolysis (+) is indicated by a colorless zone surrounding
amber, slightly opalescent.
colonies. A blue or purple zone indicates that starch has not
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent.
been hydrolyzed (-).
Reaction of 2.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.5 0.2
References
1. Vedder. 1915. J. Infect. Dis. 16:385.
Cultural Response 2. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
Difco Starch Agar
Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with a single streak American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
of undiluted test organism and incubate at 35 2C for 40-48 hours.
Test for starch hydrolysis by removing growth from each streak to Availability
expose the agar and flood plates with Gram Iodine.
Difco Starch Agar
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY STARCH HYDROLYSIS Cat. No. 272100 Dehydrated 500 g
Bacillus subtilis 6633 Good +
Escherichia coli 25922 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 Good
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 Good

527
 Section III
S Starch Agar with Bromcresol Purple

Starch Agar with Bromcresol Purple

Intended Use Hydrolysis of the starch produces acids, which lower the pH
Starch Agar with Bromcresol Purple is a differential medium of the medium and change the color of the surrounding
used for the primary isolation and presumptive identification medium to yellow. The medium remains purple surrounding
of Gardnerella vaginalis from clinical specimens. colonies of organisms that do not hydrolyze starch.

Summary and Explanation Procedure

Starch Agar with Bromcresol Purple was developed by Smith Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci-
as a rapid means of detecting, isolating and enumerating mens. Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar side up)
G. vaginalis from specimens of the genitourinary tract.1 Starch at 35C in a CO2-enriched atmosphere for up to 72 hours.
is useful as a differential agent because few organisms of the
genitourinary tract other than G. vaginalis hydrolyze it.2 The Expected Results
pH indicator, bromcresol purple, facilitates the detection of After sufficient incubation, colonies of G. vaginalis and the
starch hydrolysis by changing the color of the medium in the medium in the area of growth become yellow, indicating acid
area of the reaction from purple to yellow. production.
Smith used Purple Broth Base as a basal medium. In this modi- Gram staining, biochemical tests and other identification
fication, GC II Agar base is used for improved recovery of procedures should be performed to confirm findings.
G. vaginalis with soluble starch and bromcresol purple added
for determining starch hydrolysis. References
1. Smith. 1975. Health Lab. Sci. 12:219.
2. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
Principles of the Procedure vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.

Enzymatic digests of casein and animal tissue provide amino Availability

acids and other nitrogenous substances. Corn starch neutralizes BBL Starch Agar with Bromcresol Purple
toxic fatty acids that may be present in the medium. The Cat. No. 295911 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
medium also contains sodium chloride to maintain the osmotic *Store at 2-8C.
equilibrium and phosphate buffers to maintain the pH of the
medium.

Sterility Test Broth

(See Thioglycollate Media)

Stock Culture Agar

Intended Use pneumoniae, Mycobacterium spp. and others, grew well on
Stock Culture Agar is used for maintaining stock cultures of their medium. Stock Culture Agar is prepared to duplicate the
bacteria, particularly streptococci. medium described by Ayers and Johnson.1
Stock Culture Agar may also be prepared with L-asparagine
Summary and Explanation (1 g/L) for the maintenance of pathogenic and nonpathogenic
Ayers and Johnson1 reported a medium that gave luxuriant bacteria, especially streptococci.2
growth and extended viability of streptococci and other
organisms. The success of their medium can be attributed to Principles of the Procedure
its semisolid consistency, added casein, buffered environment Infusion from beef heart, peptone, gelatin and isoelectric casein
and dextrose, which serves as a readily available source of provide the nitrogen, vitamins and amino acids in Stock Culture
energy. This study reported that pathogenic streptococci Agar. Dextrose is a carbon source. Disodium phosphate is a
remained viable for at least four months at room temperature buffering agent. Sodium citrate acts as a preservative. Agar is
(24C) in the medium. Organisms such as Streptococcus the solidifying agent.

528
 Strep ID QUAD

Formula References
1. Ayers and Johnson. 1924. J. Bacteriol. 9:111.
Difco Stock Culture Agar 2. Atlas. 1997. Handbook of microbiological media, 2nd ed. CRC Press, Inc., Boca Raton, Fla.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Heart, Infusion from 500 g ............................... 10.0 g
Proteose Peptone ..................................................... 10.0 g
Availability
Gelatin ..................................................................... 10.0 g Difco Stock Culture Agar
Isoelectric Casein ........................................................ 5.0 g Cat. No. 254100 Dehydrated 500 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 0.5 g
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 4.0 g
Sodium Citrate ........................................................... 3.0 g User Quality Control
Agar ........................................................................... 7.5 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. Identity Specifications
Difco Stock Culture Agar
Directions for Preparation from Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homoge-
Dehydrated Product neous.
Solution: 5.0% solution, soluble in purified
1. Suspend 50 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix water upon boiling. Solution is
thoroughly. medium amber, opalescent.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, opalescent.
completely dissolve the powder. Reaction of 5%
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Solution at 25C: pH 7.5 0.2
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Cultural Response
stable, typical control cultures.
Difco Stock Culture Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Stab inoculate with fresh
Procedure cultures and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
See appropriate references for specific procedures.
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY S
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 Good
Expected Results Staphylococcus aureus 25923 Good
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results. Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 Good
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 Good

Strep ID QUAD
Intended Use of 62 enterococci were able to grow and split esculin, whereas
The Streptococcus Identification Quadrant plate is a four-sectored other streptococci could not.3 Swan used a bile esculin
plate that is used with a battery of tests for the differentiation and medium containing 40% bile and reported that a positive
presumptive identification of streptococci. reaction on this medium correlated with a serological group D
precipitin reaction.4 Facklam and Moody evaluated Swans
Summary and Explanation medium and concluded that the bile-esculin test provided
Quadrant I contains Trypticase Soy Agar, Modified (TSA II) a reliable means of identifying and differentiating group D
supplemented with the antibiotic bacitracin. TSA II is a nutritious, streptococci.5
general-purpose medium that provides excellent growth of a Quadrant IV contains Blood Agar Base with 6.5% sodium
wide variety of microorganisms, including streptococci. TSA II chloride for the determination of salt tolerance. Enterococcal
with bacitracin is used for the presumptive differentiation streptococci may be easily differentiated from other strepto-
of group A streptococci (S. pyogenes) from non-group A strep- cocci by their ability to grow in the presence of salt.6
tococci based on susceptibility to bacitracin.
Quadrant II contains TSA II enriched with sheep blood to Principles of the Procedure
provide appropriate hemolytic reactions and the erythrocytes Quadrants I and II contain TSA II as a basal medium. TSA II
needed for performing the CAMP test. The CAMP test contains digests of casein and soybean meal to supply amino
enables the presumptive identification of group B streptococci.1 acids and other complex nitrogenous substances.
Quadrant III contains Bile Esculin Agar for the rapid selective The polypeptide antibiotic bacitracin is incorporated in quadrant
detection and enumeration of group D streptococci. Rochaix I for presumptive differentiation of group A from non-group
initially noted the value of esculin hydrolysis in the identifica- A beta-hemolytic streptococci. Group A beta-hemolytic
tion of enterococci.2 The enterococci are able to hydrolyze streptococci are inhibited by the bacitracin while non-group A
esculin while other streptococci cannot. Meyer and Schonfeld beta-hemolytic streptococci are resistant.
incorporated bile into the esculin medium and showed that 61
529
 Section III
S Strep ID QUAD, cont.

Defibrinated sheep blood is incorporated in quadrant II to control. This procedure should be practiced with known
enable the detection of hemolytic reactions. Defibrinated sheep cultures before using it to identify unknown isolates.
blood is the most widely-used and efficient blood for enriching
Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar side up) in an
agar-based media. Hemolytic reactions are proper, and
aerobic atmosphere at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. Do not
Haemophilus haemolyticus, a bacterium commonly found
incubate anaerobically or in a CO2 incubator. False-positive
in nose and throat specimens that is indistinguishable from
CAMP test results may occur with group A streptococci when
beta-hemolytic streptococci, is inhibited.1
incubation is in an anaerobic or CO2-enriched atmosphere.1,8
The CAMP test is based on the formation of a zone of synergistic
hemolysis at the junction of perpendicular streak inocula of Expected Results
Staphylococcus aureus and group B streptococci. The reaction Interpret results in conjunction with hemolytic reactions of
is caused by the sphingomyelinase (beta-toxin) of S. aureus the isolate.
reacting with sphingomyelin in the sheep erythrocyte mem- Quadrant I (bacitracin): Streptococci strains susceptible to
brane to produce ceramide. A non-enzymatic protein (CAMP bacitracin are inhibited on quadrant I while bacitracin-resistant
protein), produced by group B streptococci (S. agalactiae), binds strains exhibit growth. A bacitracin-susceptible strain may be
to the ceramide and leads to disorganization of the lipid presumptively identified as a group A streptococcus.
bilayer of the sheep erythrocyte membrane, resulting in an area
of complete lysis that is shaped like an arrowhead or Quadrant II (CAMP test): A definite arrowhead or crescent-
crescent.1,7 shaped clearing at the junction of S. aureus and the isolate
indicates a positive reaction. The absence of clearing indicates
Bile Esculin Agar enables the differentiation of group D from a non-group B streptococcus. Bacitracin-resistant, CAMP-positive,
non-group D streptococci. The bile in the esculin medium in beta-hemolytic streptococci may be identified presumptively as
quadrant III inhibits most gram-positive organisms other than group B streptococci. CAMP-positive group A streptococci may
group D streptococci. Esculin is incorporated as a differential be differentiated from group B streptococci by hemolysis,
agent. Hydrolysis of esculin by group D species results in the bacitracin susceptibility and hippurate hydrolysis. Group B
production of esculetin and dextrose. The esculetin reacts with streptococci generally have smaller hemolytic zones than group
the iron salt in the medium, producing a dark brown to black A streptococci.
complex that appears as zones around the group D colonies.
Quadrant III (Bile Esculin Agar): The presence of brownish-
Enterococcal species may be differentiated in quadrant IV by black to black pigmentation of the medium indicates that
the 6.5% NaCl tolerance test. Enterococci usually grow heavily; the isolate may be presumptively identified as a group D
nonenterococcal species do not grow in the salt-supplemented streptococcus. Any blackening of the medium is enough to
medium. However, salt tolerant, nonenterococcal streptococci report as a positive esculin reaction. The test is negative if
do grow occasionally.1 there is no blackening of the medium.
Procedure Quadrant IV (6.5% sodium chloride): Growth indicates a
Subculture the organism to be tested onto a plate of Trypticase positive reaction. No growth indicates a negative reaction. A
Soy Agar enriched with sheep blood, or another suitable bile esculin positive, salt-tolerant isolate may be presumptively
medium, streaking to obtain isolated colonies. Incubate for identified as an enterococcus.
18-24 hours in a CO2-enriched atmosphere. Using a sterile
inoculating loop, choose one or two isolated colonies and References
1. Ruoff. 1995. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
perform a Gram stain, examining to confirm that the 6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. Rochaix. 1924. Comt. Rend. Soc. Biol. 90:771.
morphology of the isolate is appropriate for streptococci. 3. Meyer and Schonfeld. 1926. Zentralbl. Bakteriol. Parasitenk. Infectionskr. Hyg. Abt. Orig.
99:402.
Choose three or four well-isolated colonies and streak the 4. Swan. 1954. J. Clin. Pathol. 7:160.
5. Facklam and Moody. 1970. Appl. Microbiol. 20:245.
surface of quadrants I, III, and IV of the Strep ID QUAD plate. 6. Facklam, Padula, Thacker, Wortham and Sconyers. 1974. Appl. Microbiol. 27:107.
7. Bernheimer, Linder and Avigard. 1979. Infect. Immun. 23:838.
8. Darling. 1975. J. Clin. Microbiol. 1:171.
Inoculate quadrant II by streaking Staphylococcus aureus
ATCC 33862 across the widest area of the quadrant. If a
Availability
loop is used, do not use it parallel to the agar surface, since the
BBL Strep ID QUAD
streak will be too wide and results will not be satisfactory. Cat. No. 297891 Prepared Plates (QUAD) Pkg. of 10*
Then, streak the unknown isolate perpendicular to the S. aureus *Store at 2-8C.
culture, leaving 2-3 mm space between the two streak lines.
Alongside the unknown isolate, streak a known S. agalactiae
strain as a positive control and S. pyogenes as a negative

530
 Sulfite Agar

Sulfite Agar
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Sulfite Agar is used for detecting thermophilic, H2S-producing Sulfite Agar contains peptone as a source of carbon, nitrogen,
anaerobes, particularly in foods. vitamins and minerals. Sodium sulfite, upon reduction,
produces hydrogen sulfide. Agar is the solidifying agent.
Summary and Explanation
Iron nails or iron strips will combine with any dissolved
Sulfide spoilage of foods is due to three factors: high spore
oxygen in the medium and provide an anaerobic environment.
counts, the heat resistance of the spores and subjecting the
finished product to elevated temperatures. The last factor may Formula
occur if the processed food is not cooled adequately.1 Difco Sulfite Agar
2
Clark and Tanner described the thermophilic organisms that Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
cause spoilage in canned foods as flat-sour spoilage organisms, Sodium Sulfite ............................................................ 1.0 g
thermophilic anaerobes and sulfide-spoilage organisms. They Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g
used Sulfite Agar to study sulfide-spoilage organisms in sugar *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

and starch.
Directions for Preparation from
Both beet and cane sugar can carry spores of the thermophilic Dehydrated Product
bacteria that are spoilage agents. 3 Desulfotomaculum 1. Suspend 31 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
nigrificans, first classified as Clostridium nigrificans, causes thoroughly.
spoilage in non-acid canned foods such as vegetables and 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
infant formula.1 The growth of D. nigrificans occurs in the completely dissolve the powder. S
range of pH 6.2-7.8, with the best growth occurring at pH 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
6.8-7.3. Scanty growth can be observed at pH 5.6. The reaction 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
of most vegetables, except corn and peas, falls below pH 5.8, stable, typical control cultures.
so sulfide spoilage is rare.1
Sulfite Agar is a recommended standard methods medium for
detecting sulfide spoilage bacteria.1,3

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Sulfite Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Very light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Solution: 3.1% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light amber, very
slightly to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, very slightly to slightly
opalescent.
Reaction of 3.1%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.6 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Sulfite Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate molten medium,
solidify and incubate aerobically at 55 2C for 18-48 hours.
INOCULUM SULFITE
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY REDUCTION Uninoculated Bacillus Desulfotomaculum
Tube stearothermophilus nigrificans
Bacillus ATCC 10149 ATCC 19858
stearothermophilus 10149 30-100 Good
Clostridium
thermosaccharolyticum 7956 30-100 Good +
Desulfotomaculum
nigrificans 19858 30-100 Good +

531
 Section III
S Sulfite Agar, cont.

Procedure1 Cream
Sugar 1. Mix 2 g of gum tragacanth and 1 g of gum arabic in 100 mL
1. Place 20 g of dry sugar in a dry, sterile, graduated 250 mL of water in an Erlenmeyer flask.
Erlenmeyer flask closed with a rubber stopper. 2. Autoclave at 121C for 20 minutes.
2. Add sterile water to the 100 mL mark and shake to 3. Transfer 20 mL of cream sample to a sterile, graduated
dissolve. 250 mL Erlenmeyer flask.
3. Replace the stopper with a sterile cotton plug, bring 4. Add sterilized gum mixture to the 100 mL mark.
the solution rapidly to a boil, and continue boiling for 5 5. Shake carefully using a sterile rubber stopper.
minutes. 6. Loosen the stopper. Autoclave at 5 pounds pressure for 5
4. Replace evaporated liquid with sterile water. minutes.
5. Cool immediately in cold water. Soy Protein Isolates
NOTE: For liquid sugar, prepare as for dry sugar, except 1. Prepare a 10% suspension of soy protein isolate in sterile
determine the amount of liquid sugar needed on the basis of 0.1% peptone water in milk dilution or similar bottles.
degree Brix in order to be equivalent to 20 g of dry sugar.3 2. Adjust to pH 7.0 0.1.
3. Steam in an autoclave at 5 pounds pressure for 20 minutes.
6. Divide 20 mL of heated sugar solution among 6 screw-cap 4. Add 1 mL of soy protein isolate suspension to each of 10
tubes (20 150 mm) containing approximately 10 mL of tubes containing freshly autoclaved, still molten Sulfite Agar
freshly autoclaved, still molten Sulfite Agar and a nail. and a nail. If using already prepared medium, heat the tubes
7. Make the inoculations into freshly autoclaved medium, and immediately before inoculation to eliminate oxygen.
cool and solidify immediately in cold water. 5. Mix tubes.
8. Preheat the tubes to 50-55C. 6. Solidify in an ice water bath.
9. Incubate at 50-55C for 24-48 hours. 7. Overlay with vaspar (one part mineral oil combined with
Starch and Flour two parts petroleum jelly, heated in an oven at 191C for 3
1. Place 20 g of starch or flour in a dry, sterile, graduated hours).
250 mL Erlenmeyer flask. 8. Preheat the tubes to 55C.
2. Add sterile water to the 100 mL mark, swirling occasionally. 9. Incubate at 55C for 14 days. Take preliminary counts at
3. Close the flask with a sterile rubber stopper. 48 hours, 7 days and 14 days in case tubes become com-
4. Shake well to obtain a uniform, lump-free suspension. pletely blackened.
Add sterile glass beads to the sample mixture to aid in thor- 10.Count the blackened areas for each tube and report as the
oughly mixing during shaking. number of spores per gram of soy isolate.
5. Divide 20 mL of the starch or flour suspension among 6
screw-cap tubes (20 150 mm) containing approximately Expected Results
10 mL of freshly autoclaved, still molten Sulfite Agar and a Hydrogen sulfide production from the reduction of sulfite
nail. causes a blackening of the medium.
6. Swirl the tubes several times to ensure even dispersion of Sulfide spoilage spores should be present in not more than
the starch or flour in the medium. Heat in a boiling water two of five samples tested (40%) with not more than 5 spores
bath for 15 minutes, continuing to swirl the tubes. per 10 g in any one sample.1
7. Cool and solidify immediately in cold water.
8. Preheat the tubes to 50-55C. Limitations of the Procedure
9. Incubate at 50-55C for 24-48 hours. 1. Nails or iron strips should be cleaned in hydrochloric acid
Nonfat Dry Milk and rinsed well to remove any rust before being placed into
tubes of medium.
1. Place 10 g of nonfat dry milk in a sterile, graduated 250 mL
2. If iron nails or iron strips are not available, substitute 10 mL
Erlenmeyer flask.
of 5% ferric citrate solution.
2. Add .02N sodium hydroxide to the 100 mL mark.
3. Spoiled peas may not show discoloration but will show
3. Shake to completely dissolve.
blackening with a dark-colored brine.
4. Autoclave at 5 pounds pressure for 10 minutes.
4. Spangling of the enamel may occur as a result of the inter-
5. Cool immediately.
action of dissolved hydrogen sulfide with the iron of the
6. Transfer 2 mL of nonfat dry milk solution to each of two
container.
screw-cap tubes (20 150 mm) containing freshly auto-
claved, still molten Sulfite Agar and a nail.
7. Gently swirl several times.
8. Cool and solidify immediately in cold water.
9. Preheat the tubes to 50-55C.
10.Incubate at 50-55C for 24-48 3 hours.

532
 Synthetic Broth AOAC

References Availability
1. Donnelly and Hannah. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbio-
logical examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Difco Sulfite Agar
2. Clark and Tanner. 1937. Food Res. 2:27. AOAC COMPF
3. Andrews. 2000. In Horwitz (ed.), Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed.
AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
Cat. No. 297210 Dehydrated 500 g

Synthetic Broth AOAC

Intended Use User Quality Control
Synthetic Broth AOAC is used for maintaining disinfectant
test cultures. Identity Specifications
Difco Synthetic Broth AOAC
Summary and Explanation Dehydrated Appearance: White, homogeneous, free-flowing.
Synthetic Broth AOAC is a chemically defined broth recom- Solution: 1.7% solution, soluble in purified water
mended by AOAC International (AOAC).1 It contains all upon boiling. Solution is colorless and
the nutrients essential for growth of the test cultures used in clear.
determining the phenol coefficients of disinfectants. Prepared Appearance: Colorless, clear.
Reaction of 1.7%
Principles of the Procedure Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.1

The chemically-defined ingredients in Synthetic Broth AOAC Cultural Response

provide nitrogen, carbon, vitamins and minerals required for Difco Synthetic Broth AOAC
bacterial growth. Prepare the medium per label directions (with 0.1 mL 10% dextrose
added per tube). Inoculate and incubate the tubes at 35 2C for 48
Formula 2 hours. S
Difco Synthetic Broth AOAC

ORGANISM ATCC
INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Salmonella choleraesuis
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.05 g subsp. choleraesuis
DL-Methionine ........................................................... 0.37 g serotype Choleraesuis 10708 ~102 Good
L-Arginine Hydrochloride ........................................... 0.4 g
DL-Histidine Hydrochloride ......................................... 0.3 g
L-Lysine Hydrochloride ............................................... 0.85 g
L-Tyrosine ................................................................... 0.21 g
Directions for Preparation from
DL-Threonine ............................................................. 0.5 g Dehydrated Product
DL-Valine .................................................................... 1.0 g 1. Suspend 17 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
L-Leucine .................................................................... 0.8 g
DL-Isoleucine .............................................................. 0.44 g thoroughly.
Glycine ....................................................................... 0.06 g 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1-2 minutes to
DL-Serine ................................................................... 0.61 g completely dissolve the powder.
DL-Alanine ................................................................. 0.43 g
L-Glutamic Acid Hydrochloride ................................... 1.3 g 3. Dispense 10 mL amounts into 20 150 mm culture tubes.
L-Aspartic Acid ........................................................... 0.45 g 4. Autoclave at 121C for 20 minutes.
DL-Phenylalanine ........................................................ 0.26 g 5. Before inoculating, aseptically add 0.1 mL sterile 10%
DL-Tryptophan ........................................................... 0.05 g
L-Proline ..................................................................... 0.05 g dextrose solution per tube.
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 3.0 g 6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Potassium Chloride .................................................... 0.2 g stable, typical control cultures.
Magnesium Sulfate (anhydrous) ................................. 0.05 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.5 g
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 4.0 g Procedure
Thiamine Hydrochloride ............................................. 0.01 g See the reference for specific procedures.1
Nicotinamide .............................................................. 0.01 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Expected Results
Refer to the reference and procedures for results.1

Reference
1. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC Interna-
tional, Gaithersburg, Md.

Availability
Difco Synthetic Broth AOAC
AOAC
Cat. No. 235220 Dehydrated 500 g

533
Section III
T TAT Broth Base

TAT Broth Base TAT Broth

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
This medium conforms with specifications of The United States Peptone provides the nitrogen, vitamins, amino acids and
Pharmacopeia (USP). carbon in TAT Broth Base. Soy lecithin and polysorbate 20
TAT Broth Base with added polysorbate 20 and TAT Broth neutralize preservatives in the cosmetics or pharmaceutical
(complete) are used for cultivating microorganisms from highly products, allowing bacteria to grow.
viscous or gelatinous materials.
Formulae
Summary and Explanation Difco TAT Broth Base
Approximate Formula* Per 960 mL
TAT (Tryptone-Azolectin-Tween*) Broth Base with the Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 20.0 g
addition of polysorbate 20 is recommended for testing for the Soy Lecithin ................................................................ 5.0 g
presence of microorganisms in viscous materials, such as salves Difco TAT Broth (prepared)
or ointments. It is especially adapted to the testing of cosmet- Approximate Formula* Per Liter
ics. Cosmetics and pharmaceutical products are subject to Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 20.0 g
Soy Lecithin ................................................................ 5.0 g
contamination during manufacturing and use by consumers.1 Polysorbate 20 ......................................................... 40.0 mL
Preservatives are used in aqueous products to make them *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
self-sterilizing for vegetative bacteria, yeasts and molds, and
bacteriostatic or bactericidal for spores.1 TAT Broth is the Directions for Preparation from
medium, including polysorbate 20, provided in bottles. Dehydrated Product
TAT Broth is an enrichment medium developed to isolate and 1. Suspend 25 g of the powder in 960 mL of purified water.
cultivate microorganisms. TAT Broth conforms to the formula 2. Add 40 mL of polysorbate 20.
specified for Fluid Casein Digest-Soy Lecithin-Polysorbate 20 3. Heat in a water bath at 50-60C for 15-30 minutes with
Medium by the USP for use in Microbial Limit Tests.2 occasional agitation to dissolve completely.
4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
*Tween is a trademark of ICI Americas, Inc.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
User Quality Control
Identity Specifications Procedure
Difco TAT Broth Base
1. Add 10 g or 10 mL of an undiluted sample to 90 mL of
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. complete medium and agitate to obtain an even suspension.
Solution: 2.5% solution with 4% polysorbate 2. Incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
20. Soluble when heated to 50-60C;
let stand for 15-30 minutes with oc- For a complete discussion on microbial limit testing refer to
casional agitation to dissolve prior to appropriate procedures in the USP.2
autoclaving. Solution is light amber,
clear to very slightly opalescent with
a very slight precipitate.
Expected Results
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to very slightly opal- Tubes or bottles exhibiting growth should be subcultured for
escent. identification.
Reaction of 2.5% Solution with
4% Polysorbate 20 at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2 References
1. Orth. 1993. Handbook of cosmetic microbiology. Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y.
2. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
Cultural Response national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
Difco TAT Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions or use prepared TAT Broth. Availability
Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours. Difco TAT Broth Base
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY USP
2 3
Cat. No. 298410 Dehydrated 500 g
Bacillus subtilis 6633 10 -10 Good
Candida albicans 26790 102-103 Fair to good Difco TAT Broth

Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 102-103 Good USP

Salmonella choleraesuis Cat. No. 290721 Bottle (wide mouth) 10 90 mL
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhi 6539 102-103 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good

534
 TC Yeastolate

Bacto TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Bacto TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate is used for preparing Bacto TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate is the enzymatically
bacterial, insect and mammalian cell culture media. hydrolyzed protein portion of milk whey. In recent years, whey
proteins have gained increased recognition as a complete
Summary and Explanation protein source.2 This product is a mixture of peptides, amino
Bacto TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate is intended as a nutritional acids, carbohydrates, simple and complex.
supplement for bacterial, insect and mammalian cell culture.
For years, TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate has been used as a Typical Analysis
nutritional source for lactobacilli. It is also useful for indole Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of this
testing because of its high tryptophan content. TC Lactalbumin manual.
Hydrolysate is frequently used in mammalian cell culture
media as an amino acid supplement.1 Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product
User Quality Control Refer to the final concentration of Bacto TC Lactalbumin
Hydrolysate in the formula of the medium being prepared.
Identity Specifications
Add product as required.
Bacto TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate
Dehydrated Appearance: Buff to tan, free-flowing, homoge-
neous powder. Procedure
Solution: 1.0% solution, soluble in purified See appropriate references for specific procedures using Bacto
water. Solution is very light to light TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate.
amber, clear.
Expected Results
Cultural Response
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Bacto TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate
Prepare a sterile solution containing TC Hanks solution with 0.5% Bacto
References
TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate and 10% fetal calf serum in tissue culture
flasks. Prepare a second sterile solution containing TC Medium 199 1. Bridson and Brecker. 1970. Methods in Microbiology 3A:248.
2. Burrington. 2002. The Dairy Pipeline. 14:1.
T
with 0.5% Bacto TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate and 2.5% fetal calf
serum in tissue culture flasks. Inoculate flasks with epithelial and fibro-
blast cell lines. Assay cell growth is comparable to approved control Availability
after 7 days of incubation at 35 2C. Bacto TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate
Cat. No. 259962 Dehydrated 500 g
259961 Dehydrated 10 kg

Bacto TC Yeastolate TC Yeastolate, UF

Intended Use Yeastolate, UF has been ultra-filtered at a 10,000 MWCO
Bacto TC Yeastolate and TC Yeastolate, UF (ultra-filtered) are (molecular weight cut-off). It has an endotoxin value of less
used for preparing bacterial, insect and mammalian cell than 500 EU/g.
culture media.
Typical Analysis
Summary and Explanation Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of this
Both Bacto TC Yeastolate and TC Yeastolate, UF are intended manual.
as nutritional supplements for bacterial, insect and mammalian
cell culture. For years, TC Yeastolate has been used in insect Directions for Preparation from
cell nutrition. TC Yeastolate was found to be a very versatile Dehydrated Product
supplement to enhance growth and production characteristics Refer to the final concentration of Bacto TC Yeastolate or TC
of Sf9 and High-Five cells.1-5 Yeastolate, UF in the formula of the medium being prepared.
Add appropriate product as required.
Principles of the Procedure
Bacto TC Yeastolate and TC Yeastolate, UF are animal-free, Procedure
water-soluble portions of autolyzed Saccharomyces cerevisiae. See appropriate references for specific procedures using Bacto
Both products are a mixture of peptides, amino acids, carbo- TC Yeastolate or TC Yeastolate, UF.
hydrates, simple and complex, as well as vitamins. TC
535
Section III
T TC Yeastolate, cont.

User Quality Control Expected Results

Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Identity Specifications
Bacto TC Yeastolate References
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous 1. Chan, Greenfield and Reid. 1998. Biotechnol. Bioeng. 59:178.
2. Nguyen, Jarnagin, Williams, Chan and Barnett. 1993. J. Biotechnol. 31:205.
fine powder. 3. Ikonomou, Bastin, Schneider and Agathos. 2001. In Vitro Cell Dev. Biol. Anim. 37:549.
Solution: 0.1% and 0.2% solutions, soluble in 4. Bedard, Kamen, Tom and Maassie. 1994. Cytotechnology 15:129.
5. Donalson and Shuler. 1998. Biotechnology Prog. 14:573.
TC Medium 199. Solutions, after the
addition of 10% sodium bicarbonate
to adjust the pH to 7.0-7.2, are Availability
orange-red, clear. Bacto TC Yeastolate
Difco TC Yeastolate, UF Cat. No. 255772 Dehydrated 100 g
Dehydrated Appearance: Free-flowing, homogeneous fine 255771 Dehydrated 10 kg
powder. Difco TC Yeastolate, UF
Solution: 0.1% and 0.2% solutions, soluble in Cat. No. 292804 Dehydrated 500 g
TC Medium 199. 292805 Dehydrated 10 kg
Reaction of 0.1% and
0.2% Solutions at 25C: pH 5.4-7.2

Cultural Response
Bacto TC Yeastolate
Prepare a sterile solution containing TC Medium 199 with 0.1% Bacto
TC Yeastolate and 5% fetal calf serum in tissue culture flasks. Inoculate
flasks with epithelial and fibroblast cell lines and observe for toxicity. No
toxicity should be evident after two passages and at least 14 days of
incubation at 35 2C.

TCBS Agar
Intended Use of gram-positive bacteria is achieved by the incorporation of
Thiosulfate Citrate Bile Salts Sucrose Agar (TCBS Agar) is used oxgall, which is a naturally occurring substance containing a
for the selective isolation of cholera vibrios and Vibrio mixture of bile salts, and sodium cholate, a pure bile salt.
parahaemolyticus from a variety of clinical and nonclinical Sodium thiosulfate serves as a sulfur source and, in combina-
specimens.1,2 tion with ferric citrate, detects hydrogen sulfide production.
Saccharose (sucrose) is included as a fermentable carbohydrate
Summary and Explanation for the metabolism of vibrios. The alkaline pH of the medium
Vibrio species are most widely recognized for their role in hu- enhances the recovery of V. cholerae. Thymol blue and
man intestinal infections. Diarrheas caused by Vibro cholerae bromthymol blue are included as indicators of pH changes.
and V. parahaemolyticus are important worldwide.3 The isola-
tion of Vibrio species has been enhanced by the development of Formula
media which are highly selective for vibrios. Difco TCBS Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
TCBS is the primary plating medium universally used for the Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
selective isolation of vibrios that cause cholera, diarrhea and Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Citrate ......................................................... 10.0 g
food poisoning. It was developed by Kobayashi et al.4, who Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................. 10.0 g
modified the selective medium of Nakanishi.5 The combination Oxgall ......................................................................... 8.0 g
of alkaline peptone water and TCBS Agar is used in many Saccharose ............................................................... 20.0 g
procedures for the isolation of V. cholerae and other Vibrio Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 10.0 g
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 1.0 g
species from feces.1-3,6,7 Bromthymol Blue ....................................................... 0.04 g
Thymol Blue ............................................................... 0.04 g
TCBS Agar Deeps (pour tubes) are provided in a 20 mL fill so Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
that the medium may be liquefied and poured into a Petri dish. *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
This provides a convenient source of medium with a longer
shelf-life than pre-poured plated media. Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product
Principles of the Procedure 1. Suspend 89 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
TCBS Agar is highly selective for the isolation of V. cholerae thoroughly.
and V. parahaemolyticus as well as other vibrios. Inhibition 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder.
536
 TCBS Agar, cont.

Vibrio cholerae
User Quality Control ATCC 14033

Identity Specifications
Difco TCBS Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan with greenish cast, free-flow-
ing, homogeneous.
Solution: 8.9% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is forest green,
very slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Green, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 8.9%
Solution at 25C: pH 8.6 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco TCBS Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures (E. coli
grown in TSB; vibrios grown in BHI) and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24
hours.
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY COLONY COLOR
Escherichia coli 25922 None
Vibrio alginolyticus 17749 Good Yellow
Vibrio cholerae El Tor 14033 Good Yellow
Vibrio parahemolyticus 17802 Good Blue green

3. Cool to 45-50C and use immediately. DO NOT AUTO- 3. TCBS is an unsatisfactory medium for oxidase testing of
CLAVE. Vibrio spp.10
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 4. A few strains of V. cholerae may appear green or colorless
stable, typical control cultures. on TCBS due to delayed sucrose fermentation.9

Procedure References
To prepare plated media, place agar deeps with caps loosened 1. Downes and Ito. 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
T
in a boiling water bath until the medium becomes liquefied. 2. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Pour the molten medium into a sterile Petri dish. Allow the 3. Tison. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
medium to solidify. Store the plates, protected from light, in 4. Kobayashi, Enomoto, Sakazaki and Kuwahara. 1963. Jap. J. Bacteriol. 18: 387.
5. Nakanishi. 1963. Modern Media 9: 246.
an inverted position (agar side up) at 2-8C until ready to use. 6. Furniss, Lee and Donovan. 1978. The vibrios. Public Health Laboratory Service Monograph
Series no. 11. Maidstone Public Health Laboratory. H.M.S.O., London, England.
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci- 7. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.
St. Louis, Mo.
mens. Incubate the plates, protected from light, in an inverted 8. Bottone and Robin. 1978. J. Clin. Microbiol. 8:760.
9. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
position (agar side up) at 35C for 24-48 hours. vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
10. Morris, Merson, Huq, Kibrya and Black. 1979. J. Clin. Microbiol. 9:79.

Expected Results
Availability
Typical colonial morphology on TCBS Agar is as follows:
Difco TCBS Agar
V. cholerae ........................... Large yellow colonies. AOAC BAM BS10 CMPH COMPF ISO MCM7 SMWW
V. parahaemolyticus ............. Colonies with blue to green Cat. No. 265020 Dehydrated 500 g
centers.
V. alginolyticus ..................... Large yellow colonies. BBL TCBS Agar

Proteus/Enterococci .............. Partial inhibition. If growth, AOAC BAM BS10 CMPH COMPF ISO MCM7 SMWW
colonies are small and yellow to United States and Canada
translucent. Cat. No. 221872 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
Pseudomonas/Aeromonas .... Partial inhibition. If growth, 297437 Prepared Pour Tubes, 20 mL Pkg. of 10*
colonies are blue.
Europe
Cat. No. 254432 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Limitations of the Procedure Japan
1. On initial isolation, V. parahaemolyticus may be confused Cat. No. 251143 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
with Aeromonas hydrophila, Plesiomonas shigelloides and 251137 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Pseudomonas species.8 Mexico
2. Sucrose-fermenting Proteus species produce yellow colonies Cat. No. 226850 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.
which may resemble those of Vibrio.9

537
Section III
T m TEC Agar

m TEC Agar
Intended Use dipotassium phosphate offer buffering capabilities. Lactose is a
m TEC Agar is used for isolating, differentiating and rapidly fermentable carbohydrate and carbon source. Sodium lauryl
enumerating thermotolerant Escherichia coli from water by sulfate and sodium desoxycholate are selective against gram-
membrane filtration and an in situ urease test. positive bacteria. Bromcresol purple and bromphenol red are
indicator components. Agar is the solidifying agent.
Summary and Explanation
m TEC is an acronym for membrane Thermotolerant E. coli. Formula
Escherichia coli is widely used as an indicator of fecal pollution Difco m TEC Agar
in water, and there are many procedures for enumerating Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 5.0 g
E. coli based on its ability to grow at elevated temperatures Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
and produce indole from tryptophan.1,2 The determination Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
of indole production in conjunction with the most-probable- Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 7.5 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
number procedure often requires the use of another medium Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 3.3 g
and additional incubation time. Sodium Lauryl Sulfate ................................................ 0.2 g
Sodium Desoxycholate ............................................... 0.1 g
In 1981, Dufour et al. developed a simple, accurate, nonlethal Bromcresol Purple ...................................................... 0.08 g
membrane filter technique for the rapid enumeration of E. coli.3 Bromphenol Red ........................................................ 0.08 g
This medium, m TEC Agar, quantifies E. coli within 24 hours Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
without requiring subculture and identification of isolates. The
authors reported that they were able to recover E. coli from Directions for Preparation from
marine, estuarine and fresh water samples. Dehydrated Product
m TEC Agar and urea substrate are recommended for use in 1. Suspend 45.3 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
the detection of E. coli when evaluating the microbiological thoroughly.
quality of recreational waters.4,5 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
pletely dissolve the powder.
Principles of the Procedure 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. (Cool to 45-50C and
m TEC Agar contains sufficient nutrients to support the growth dispense 4-5 mL amounts into 50 10 mm Petri dishes
of E. coli. Peptone is a source of nitrogen, amino acids, carbon and allow to solidify; store in the refrigerator.)
and amino acids. Yeast extract provides trace elements, 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
vitamins and amino acids. Monopotassium phosphate and stable, typical control cultures.

Escherichia coli
User Quality Control ATCC 8739

Identity Specifications
Difco m TEC Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Green to grayish tan, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
Solution: 4.53% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is deep
purple with red cast, slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Deep purple with red cast, slightly opal-
escent.
Reaction of 4.53%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco m TEC Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the membrane
filter technique and incubate the plates at 35 2C for 2 hours. Transfer
plates and incubate at 44.5 0.5C for 22 2 hours. After incubation,
remove filters and place over pads saturated with approximately 2 mL of
urease substrate. Count yellow to yellow-brown colonies (urease nega-
tive) after 15-20 minutes.
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLONY COLOR
Escherichia coli 8739 20-80 Good Yellow to yellow-brown

538
 mTEC Agar, Modified

Procedure Limitations of the Procedure

1. Follow applicable membrane filter procedures.4,5 1. The 35C incubation step is required to resuscitate stressed
2. Incubate inoculated plates for 2 hours at 35 2C to resus- organisms. The 44.5C incubation temperature is required
citate injured cells. to inhibit non-thermotolerant organisms.
3. Transfer the plates to a 44.5 0.5C waterbath or incubator 2. The urease test is required to presumptively identify E. coli.
and incubate for 22 2 hours. 3. Choose a water sample size that will result in 20-80 colonies
4. Transfer countable filters to pads saturated with urea sub- per filter. Plates containing more than 80 colonies are
strate. Prepare urea substrate by combining 2 g urea and not recommended because high counts may not provide
10 mg phenol red in 100 mL of purified water and adjust accurate urease test results.
the pH to 5.0 0.2. Store at 2-8C and use within 1 week. 4. Do not trap air bubbles underneath the filter.
NOTE: Other methods may recommend an alternative pH.4,5
References
Prepare substrate according to recommended guidelines. 1. Mara. 1973. J. Hyg. 71:783.
2. Pugsley, Evision and James. 1973. Water Res. 7:1431.
5. After 15-20 minutes, count all yellow to yellow-brown 3. Dufour, Strickland and Cabelli. 1981. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 41:1152.
4. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
colonies with the aid of a stereoscopic microscope. wastewater. 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
5. American Society for Testing and Materials. 1996. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Water and
Environmental Technology (PCN: 01-110296-16). ASTM, West Conshohocken, Pa.
Expected Results
Yellow to yellow-brown colonies (urease negative) may be Availability
presumptively identified as E. coli. Difco m TEC Agar
SMWW
Cat. No. 233410 Dehydrated 100 g

mTEC Agar, Modified

Intended Use Modified mTEC method was developed by the USEPA in
Modified mTEC Agar is a selective culture medium used for 19987,8 as a single-step procedure that does not require the
the chromogenic detection and enumeration of thermotolerant transfer of the membrane filter to another substrate. The modified
Escherichia coli in water by the membrane filtration technique. medium contains the chromogen, 5-bromo-6-chloro-3 indolyl- T
It conforms with U.S. Environmental Protection Agency -D-glucuronide. This chromogen is catabolized to glucuronic
(USEPA) Approved Method 1603: Escherichia coli (E. coli) in acid by E. coli strains that produce the enzyme -D-glucu-
Water by Membrane Filtration Using Modified membrane- ronidase to form red- or magenta-colored colonies, enabling
Thermotolerant Escherichia coli Agar (modified mTEC). confirmatory identification of E. coli in 24 hours. Red or
magenta colonies can be verified as E. coli in instances where
Summary and Explanation required in evidence gathering or for performing quality
mTEC is an acronym for membrane Thermotolerant E. coli. control for the initial use of this test.8
E. coli is widely used as an indicator of fecal pollution in water. This medium is recommended for testing the presence of
This organism has a high correlation with gastroenteritis in fresh E. coli as an indicator organism for fecal contamination in
water environments.1 In 1986, the USEPA recommended that fresh recreational water. This allows for a wide range of sample
E. coli be used as a bacterial water quality indicator to monitor volumes or dilutions to be analyzed by membrane filtration
recreational waters.2 for the detection and enumeration of E. coli levels in water. The
Many procedures have been developed for enumerating E. coli USEPA-published false-positive rate is <1% and false-negative
based on its ability to grow at elevated temperatures and rate is 4% from a variety of environmental water samples.8
produce indole from tryptophan.3,4 The determination of
indole production in conjunction with the most-probable- Principles of the Procedure
number procedure often requires the use of another medium Modified mTEC Agar contains sufficient nutrients to support
and additional incubation time. the growth of E. coli. Peptone is a source of nitrogen, amino
acids, carbon and amino acids. Yeast extract provides trace
Dufour developed a membrane filtration procedure using
elements, vitamins and amino acids. Lactose is a fermentable
mTEC agar for the rapid enumeration of thermotolerant
carbohydrate and carbon source. Sodium chloride maintains
E. coli.5,6 This alternative two-step test procedure quantified
osmotic equilibrium. Monopotassium and dipotassium
E. coli within 24 hours without requiring subculture and
phosphates offer buffering capabilities. Sodium lauryl sulfate
identification of isolates. However, the membrane filter had to
and sodium desoxycholate are selective against gram-positive
be transferred after initial incubation at an elevated temperature
bacteria. The chromogen, 5-bromo-6-chloro-3-indolyl--D-
to a urea substrate/phenol red-saturated pad.
glucuronide, is catabolized to form glucuronic acid and a

539
Section III
T mTEC Agar, Modified, cont.

Escherichia coli (magenta) Klebsiella pneumoniae (tan)

User Quality Control ATCC 13762 ATCC 33495

Identity Specifications
Difco Modified mTEC Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Solution: 4.56% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light to medium
tan, very slightly to slightly opalescent,
without significant precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Light tan, clear to very slightly opales-
cent, without significant precipitate.
Upon removal from 2-8C storage,
plates may exhibit a crystal precipitate
that disappears upon warming to room
temperature. This is a typical character-
istic of the medium and is acceptable.
Reaction of 4.56%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Modified mTEC Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35C
for 2 hours. Transfer plates and incubate at 44.5 0.2C for approxi-
mately 22-24 hours. Count all red or magenta colonies.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Enterococcus faecalis 19433 20-80 Marked to
complete inhibition
Escherichia coli 13762 20-80 Good Purple, reddish-purple
Proteus mirabilis 25933 20-80 Good Tan

red- or magenta-colored compound by E. coli that produce 5. Dispense 5 mL amounts into 9 50 mm or 15 60 mm

the enzyme -D-glucuronidase. Agar is the solidifying agent. plates and allow to solidify.
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Formula stable, typical control cultures.
Difco Modified mTEC Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
NOTE: Upon removal from 2-8C storage, plates may
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 5.0 g exhibit a crystal precipitate that disappears upon warming
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g to room temperature. This is a typical characteristic of the
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g medium and is acceptable.
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 7.5 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 3.3 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g Procedure
Sodium Lauryl Sulfate ................................................ 0.2 g 1. Collect and prepare water samples in accordance with
Sodium Desoxycholate ............................................... 0.1 g
5-Bromo-6-chloro-3-indolyl--D-glucuronide ............. 0.5 g recommended guidelines.9,10
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g 2. Test required sample volumes following the membrane
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. filtration procedure described in Standard Methods for the
Examination of Water and Wastewater.9 Select sample
Directions for Preparation from
volumes to produce 20-80 colonies on the membrane filter.
Dehydrated Product 3. After sample has been filtered, aseptically remove membrane
1. Suspend 45.6 g of the powder in 1 L purified water. Mix filter from filter base and roll it onto Modified mTEC Agar
thoroughly. to avoid the formation of bubbles between the membrane
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to and the agar surface.
completely dissolve the powder. 4. Invert inoculated plates and incubate for 2 hours at 35
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 45-50C in a 0.5C to resuscitate injured cells.
water bath. 5. After a 2-hour incubation at 35 0.5C, transfer the plates
4. Determine pH of medium (remove an aliquot and cool to to a plastic bag, seal the bag, and place it onto a rack in a
room temperature) and adjust pH to 7.3 0.2 by aseptically 44.5 0.2C water bath for 22 - 24 hours.
adding sterile 1N NaOH.

540
 TPEY Agar Base

6. After the 22-24 hour incubation, remove the plates from References
the water bath and count and record the number of red or 1. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1986. Ambient water quality criteria for bacteria - 1986.
Publication EPA-440/5-84/002. Office of Water, Regulations and Standards. Criteria and Standards
magenta colonies using an illuminated lens with a 2-5 Division, USEPA, Washington, D.C.
2. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1986. Bacteriological ambient water quality criteria: avail-
magnification or a stereoscopic microscope. ability. Fed. Reg. 51(45):8012.
3. Mara. 1973. J. Hyg. 71:783.
7. Calculate and report the number of E. coli colonies per 4. Pugsley, Evision, and James. 1973. Water Res. 7:1431.
5. Eaton, Clesceri, and Greenberg (ed.). 1995. Standard methods for the examination of water and
100 mL of sample. wastewater. 19th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
6. Dufour, Strickland and Cabelli. 1981. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 41:1152.
7. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 2000. Improved enumeration methods for the recreational
Expected Results water quality indicator: enterococci and Escherichia coli. Publication EPA/821/R-97/004. Office of
Science and Technology, USEPA, Washington, D.C.
Red to magenta colonies may be presumptively identified as 8. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 2002. Method 1603: Escherichia coli (E. coli) in water by
membrane filtration using modified membrane-thermotolerant Escherichia coli agar (modified
E. coli. Refer to the USEPA Microbiology Methods Manual, mTEC). Publication EPA-821-R-02-023. USEPA Office of Water, Office of Science and Technology,
Part II, Section C, 3.5 for general counting rules.11 Washington, DC.
9. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Limitations of the Procedure 10. ASTM International. 2002. Annual book of ASTM standards. Water and environmental technology.
ASTM International, West Conshohocken, Pa.
11. Bordner, Winter and Scarpino (ed.). 1978. Microbiological methods for monitoring the environment:
1. The 35C incubation step is required to resuscitate stressed water and wastes. Publication EPA-600/8-78/017. Environmental Monitoring and Support Labora-
organisms. The 44.5C incubation temperature is required tory, Office of Research and Development, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati, Ohio.

to inhibit non-thermotolerant organisms.

2. Choose a water sample size that will result in 20-80 colonies
Availability
Difco Modified mTEC Agar
per filter. Plates containing more than 80 colonies are
EPA
not recommended because high counts may not provide Cat. No. 214884 Dehydrated 100 g
accurate test results. 214880 Dehydrated 500 g
3. Minimize the exposure of Modified mTEC Agar to light BBL Modified mTEC Agar
before and during incubation, as light may destroy the EPA
chromogen. Cat. No. 215044 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
215046 Prepared Plates Ctn.of 100*
*Store at 2-8C.

TPEY Agar Base T

Intended Use solution and enriched with an egg yolk emulsion prior to its use
TPEY (Tellurite Polymyxin Egg Yolk) Agar Base with appro- for the isolation of staphylococci.
priate additives is used for the recovery of staphylococci from
foods and other materials. Principles of the Procedure
Peptone provides the carbon and nitrogen sources required
Summary and Explanation for growth. Yeast extract is a source of the B-complex vitamins.
TPEY Agar Base was developed by Crisley et al. for the detection Mannitol is a source of energy for coagulase-positive staphylo-
and enumeration of coagulase-positive staphylococci in foods.1, 2 cocci, which utilize the carbohydrate by a fermentative process.
The base must be supplemented with potassium tellurite Lithium chloride, potassium tellurite and polymyxin B inhibit

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
BBL TPEY Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Medium fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous material.
Solution: 57.5 g/930 mL, soluble in purified water upon boiling. Solution is light to medium, yellow to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of Base
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL TPEY Agar Base
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 42-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY APPEARANCE
Escherichia coli 25922 104-105 Complete inhibition
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-104 Good Black colonies, zone of precipitation
Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 104-105 Partial to complete inhibition Gray to black colonies

541
Section III
T TPEY Agar Base, cont.

a wide variety of microorganisms including coagulase-negative 3. No zone or halo around the colony, but precipitate (opacity)
staphylococci. beneath the colony.
Coagulase-negative cocci, after 24 hours of incubation, usually
Formula
produce small (pinpoint to 0.5-mm diameter) white, gray or
BBL TPEY Agar Base
Approximate Formula* Per 930 mL
black colonies with a gray periphery. They do not produce
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g any clearing or precipitation of the egg yolk. If colonies are
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g crowded, there may be a diffuse egg yolk reaction unlike those
D-Mannitol ................................................................. 5.0 g listed above. After longer incubation, an occasional strain may
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 20.0 g
Lithium Chloride ........................................................ 2.0 g develop colonies resembling those of coagulase-positive strains.
Polymyxin B ................................................................ 4.0 mg
Agar ......................................................................... 15.5 g Limitations of the Procedures
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
1. Mannitol-positive and/or tellurite-positive staphylococcal
Directions for Preparation from strains that are coagulase-negative are occasionally found.
Dehydrated Product Difinitive identification of S. aureus, therefore, should be
1. Suspend 57.5 g of the powder in 930 mL of purified water. based primarily on the coagulase reaction, with mannitol
Mix thoroughly. fermentation and tellurite reduction being used only for
2. Heat with frequent agitation just until the medium boils. confirmation.3
3. Autoclave at 118C for 15 minutes. 2. The prepared medium becomes less inhibitory to coagulase-
4. Cool to 50C and add 10 mL of sterile 1% potassium tellurite negtive strains of staphylococci if stored for longer than
solution and 60 mL of sterile 50% emulsion of egg yolk in one week.
saline. 3. Graves and Frazier4 showed that Bacillus spp. able to grow
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using on TPEY Agar produce an antibiotic that inhibits growth
stable, typical control cultures. of staphylococci.

Procedure References
1. Crisley, Angelotti and Foter. 1964. Public Health Rep. 79: 369.
Streak cultures or specimens onto the surface of TPEY Agar 2. Crisley, Peeler and Angelotti. 1965. Appl. Microbiol. 13: 140.
3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteira,
plates. Incubate plates for 24-48 hours at 35 2C in an vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
4. Graves and Frazier. 1963. Appl. Microbiol. 11:513.
aerobic atmosphere.
Availability
Expected Results BBL TPEY Agar Base
Coagulase-positive staphylococci form black or dark-gray colonies Cat. No. 211688 Dehydrated 500 g
with three types of egg yolk precipitation reactions as follows:
BBL Tellurite Solution 1%

1. A discrete zone of precipitation around and beneath the Cat. No. 211917 Tube 20 mL*
colonies. Difco Egg Yolk Enrichment 50%
2. A clear zone or halo, often with a zone of precipitation Cat No. 233471 Tube 12 10 mL*
(opacity) beneath the colony. 233472 Bottle 6 100 mL*
*Store at 2-8C.

TSN Agar
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
TSN (Trypticase Sulfite Neomycin) Agar is used for the se- Neomycin and polymyxin are inhibitory for gram-negative
lective isolation of Clostridium perfringens. enteric bacilli. Neomycin at the concentration employed at
least partially inhibits C. bifermentans. The relatively high
Summary and Explanation incubation temperature of 46C renders the medium highly
TSN Agar was developed by Marshall et al. as a medium that specific for C. perfringens. The colonies are black due to the
could achieve rapid enumeration of Clostridium perfringens.1 formation of ferric sulfide as a result of the reduction of the
The formulation is a modification of Mossels medium for the sulfite.
enumeration of sulfite-reducing clostridia in foods.2 The 46C
temperature of incubation for TSN Agar permits specific and
quantitative results.

542
 TT Broth Base, Hajna

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
BBL TSN Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, may contain a large amount of minute to small dark particles.
Solution: 4.0% solution, soluble in purified water upon boiling. Solution is light to medium, yellow to tan, clear to moderately hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear to moderately hazy.
Reaction of 4.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL TSN Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 46 1C anaerobically for 18-24 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY APPEARANCE
Clostridium bifermentans 17836 Undiluted Partial to complete inhibition With or without blackening
Clostridium perfringens 3624 Undiluted Good Blackening
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Enteritidis 13076 104-105 Partial to complete inhibition No blackening

Formula Procedure
BBL TSN Agar

Use on the day of preparation. Inoculate tubes or plates of the
Approximate Formula* Per Liter medium by stabbing deep tubes or streaking plates with the
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 15.0 g
Sodium Sulfite ............................................................ 1.0 g
test specimen. Incubate containers for 18-24 hours at 46
Neomycin Sulfate ....................................................... 0.05 g 0.1C in an anaerobic atmosphere (BBL GasPak or GasPak
Polymyxin Sulfate ....................................................... 0.02 g EZ anaerobic system or equivalent).
Yeast Extract ............................................................ 10.0 g
Ferric Citrate .............................................................. 0.5 g
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g Expected Results
C. perfringenes produces black colonies at 46C. C. perfringens
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
and C. bifermentans produce black colonies on TSN Agar at T
Directions for Preparation from 37C; however, C. bifermentans is inhibited at 46C.1
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 40 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix References
thoroughly. 1. Marshall, Steenbergen and McClung. 1965. Appl. Microbiol. 13:559.
2. Mossel. 1959. J. Sci. Food Agric. 10:662.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
pletely dissolve the powder. Availability
3. Dispense and autoclave at 118C for 12 minutes. Do not BBL TSN Agar
overheat. Cat. No. 211690 Dehydrated 500 g
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

TT Broth Base, Hajna

Intended Use disease if ingested.2 Salmonella spp., in particular, cause many
TT (Tetrathionate) Broth Base, Hajna is used for enriching types of infections from mild self-limiting gastroenteritis to
Salmonella from food and dairy products prior to isolation life-threatening typhoid fever.3 The most common form of
procedures. Salmonella disease is self-limiting gastroenteritis with fever
lasting less than 2 days and diarrhea lasting less than 7 days.3
Summary and Explanation TT Broth Base, Hajna conforms to the formulation of Hajna
TT Broth Base, Hajna is used as a selective enrichment for the and Damon.4 The medium is a modification of the enrichment
cultivation of Salmonella spp. Salmonella organisms can be described by Kauffmann5 and Knox.6 Hajna and Damon4
injured in food-processing procedures. These procedures include developed a new broth containing yeast extract, peptone, carbon
exposure to low temperatures, sub-marginal heat, drying, sources and the selective agents, sodium desoxycholate and
radiation, preservatives and sanitizers.1 Although injured cells brilliant green (replacing bile salts).
may not form colonies on selective media, they can cause

543
Section III
T TT Broth Base, Hajna, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco TT Broth Base, Hajna
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige to very light green, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 9.15% solution, partially insoluble in purified water upon boiling. Solution is light green, slightly opalescent with a
heavy white precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Light green, slightly opalescent with a heavy white precipitate.
Reaction of 9.15%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.6 0.2 (after addition of the iodine solution)

Cultural Response
Difco TT Broth Base, Hajna
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. After incubation, plate the inoculated broth onto MacConkey
Agar and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours.

ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY COLONY COLOR ON MACCONKEY AGAR

Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 None to poor Pink with bile percipitate
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good Colorless

TT Broth Base, Hajna is used in testing Salmonella in egg 2. Heat to boiling. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE. Cool to below
processing plants.7 It is included in procedures for the isola- 50C.
tion and identification of Salmonella from meat and poultry 3. Add 40 mL iodine solution (5 g iodine crystals and 8 g
as well as egg products.8 potassium iodide dissolved in 40 mL of purified water) and
mix well.
Principles of the Procedure 4. Dispense into sterile tubes while keeping suspension well
Peptone provides nitrogen and amino acids. Yeast extract mixed. Do not heat the medium after adding iodine.
supplies growth factors and vitamins. Dextrose and mannitol 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
are fermentable carbohydrates. Selectivity is accomplished stable, typical control cultures.
by the combination of sodium thiosulfate and tetrathionate,
suppressing coliform organisms.6 Tetrathionate is formed in Procedure
the medium by the addition of a solution containing iodine After preparation, add 1-3 g of fecal specimen to each tube
and potassium iodide. Organisms containing the enzyme (heavy inoculum). Incubate tubes for 12-24 hours at 35 2C
tetrathionate reductase will proliferate in this medium. in an aerobic atmosphere.
Sodium desoxycholate and brilliant green are selective agents
Expected Results
that suppress coliform bacteria and inhibit gram-positive
Growth is indicated by turbidity in the medium. Subculture to
organisms. Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance of
selective and differential enteric plating media for further in-
the medium. Calcium carbonate is a neutralizer that absorbs
vestigations.
toxic metabolites.

Formula References
1. Hartman and Minnich. 1981. J. Food Prot. 44:385.
Difco TT Broth Base, Hajna 2. Sorrells, Speck and Warren. 1970. Appl. Microbiol. 19:39.
3. Gray. 1995. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 2.0 g 4. Hajna and Damon. 1956. Appl. Microbiol. 4:341.
5. Kauffman. 1930. Zentralb. Bakteriol. Parasitenkd. Infektionskr. Hyg. Abr. I Orig. 113:148.
Tryptose ................................................................... 18.0 g 6. Knox, Gell and Pollack. 1942. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 54:469.
Dextrose ..................................................................... 0.5 g 7. Catalano and Knable. 1994. J. Food Prot. 57:587.
D-Mannitol ................................................................. 2.5 g 8. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1998. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food Safety
and Inspection Service, USDA, Washington, D.C.
Sodium Desoxycholate ............................................... 0.5 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................. 38.0 g Availability
Calcium Carbonate .................................................. 25.0 g Difco TT (Tetrathionate) Broth Base, Hajna
Brilliant Green ............................................................ 0.01 g USDA
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Cat. No. 249120 Dehydrated 500 g
249110 Dehydrated 2 kg
Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 91.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly.

544
 Tellurite Glycine Agar

Tech Agar
(See Pseudomonas Agars)

Tellurite Glycine Agar

Tellurite Solution 1%
Intended Use Tellurite Glycine Agar is prepared according to the formula of
Tellurite Glycine Agar is used with Tellurite Solution 1% for Zebovitz, Evans and Niven.4 The medium permits the isolation
isolating coagulase-positive staphylococci. of coagulase-positive staphylococci from food, air, dust, soil
and clinical specimens. Coagulase-negative staphylococci and
Summary and Explanation other bacteria are markedly to completely inhibited.
Coagulase-positive Staphylococcus aureus is well documented
as a human opportunistic pathogen.1 Foods are examined for Principles of the Procedure
the presence of S. aureus and/or its enterotoxins to confirm Peptones are sources of nitrogen and amino acids in Tellurite
that S. aureus is the causative agent of foodborne illness, Glycine Agar. Yeast extract is a vitamin source in this formula-
to determine whether a food is the source of staph food tion. D-Mannitol is a source of fermentable carbohydrate
poisoning and to determine post-processing contamination.2 for coagulase-positive staphylococci. Lithium chloride, glycine
and potassium tellurite are the selective agents. Dipotassium
Ludlam3 described a selective medium for the isolation of
phosphate is used to buffer the medium. Agar is the solidifying
staphylococci. This medium was alkaline in reaction, contained
agent.
mannitol, and lithium chloride with potassium tellurite as the
selective agents. Zebovitz, Evans and Niven4 modified Ludlams Tellurite Solution is a sterile 1% solution of potassium
medium by adding glycine as a selective agent and adjusting tellurite, a differential agent. Coagulase-positive staphylococci
the reaction of the basal medium to pH 7.2 instead of pH 9.6. reduce tellurite and produce black colonies.5

User Quality Control Uninoculated

Plate
Staphylococcus aureus
ATCC 25923
T
Identity Specifications
Difco Tellurite Glycine Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Solution: 6.25% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is amber,
opalescent with precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, opalescent with pre-
cipitate.
Reaction of 6.25%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Tellurite Glycine Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 18-48 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Marked to
complete inhibition
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 30-300 Marked to
complete inhibition
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good Black
Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 30-300 Partial inhibition Gray, if any

545
Section III
T Tellurite Glycine Agar, cont.

Formula refer to appropriate procedures.1,6 For the examination of

Difco Tellurite Glycine Agar
staphylococci in foods refer to standard methods.2,7
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 6.5 g Expected Results
Soytone ...................................................................... 3.5 g
Tryptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
Coagulase-positive staphylococci produce black colonies within
Glycine ..................................................................... 10.0 g 24 hours of incubation at 35C.
D-Mannitol ................................................................. 5.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 5.0 g Limitation of the Procedure
Lithium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 17.5 g Occasional coagulase-negative staphylococci may produce
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. small gray colonies, not readily confused with black coagulase-
positive colonies.
Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product References
1. Suspend 62.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix 1. Kloos and Bannerman. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). Manual of clinical
microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
thoroughly. 2. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
national, Gaithersburg, Md.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 3. Ludlam. 1949. Monthly Bull. Ministry of Health 8:15.
4. Zebovitz, Evans and Niven. 1955. J. Bacteriol. 70:686.
completely dissolve the powder. 5. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1, Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. 6. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
4. Aseptically add 10 mL Tellurite Solution 1% to the me- Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
7. Lancette and Bennett. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.). Compendium of methods for the microbio-
dium at 50-55C. Mix well. logical examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using

stable, typical control cultures. Availability
Difco Tellurite Glycine Agar
Procedure Cat. No. 261710 Dehydrated 500 g

For a complete discussion on the isolation and identification BBL Tellurite Solution 1%
of coagulase-positive staphylococci from clinical specimens Cat. No. 211917 Tube 1 20 mL*
*Store at 2-8C.

Terrific Broth
Intended Use User Quality Control
Terrific Broth is used with glycerol in cultivating recombinant
strains of Escherichia coli. Identity Specifications
Difco Terrific Broth
Summary and Explanation Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Terrific Broth is a highly enriched medium developed by Tartoff
Solution: 4.76% solution, soluble in purified
and Hobbs to improve yield in plasmid-bearing E. coli.1 water. Solution is light to medium
Recombinant strains have an extended growth phase in the amber, clear.
medium. The addition of extra peptone and yeast extract in Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear.
the medium allows higher plasmid yield per volume. Glycerol Reaction of 4.76%
is used as the carbohydrate source in this formulation. Unlike Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

glucose, glycerol is not fermented to acetic acid. Cultural Response

Difco Terrific Broth
Principles of the Procedure Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Peptone and yeast extract provide necessary nutrients and 35 2C for 18-24 hours.
cofactors for excellent growth of recombinant strains of E. coli. ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
The yeast extract concentration is increased to allow for Escherichia coli (C600) 23724 102-103 Good
elevated cell yields. Potassium phosphates are added to provide Escherichia coli (HB101) 33694 102-103 Good
potassium for cellular systems and prevent cell death due to a Escherichia coli (DH-1) 33849 102-103 Good
drop in pH. Glycerol is added as a carbon and energy source. Escherichia coli (JM103) 39403 102-103 Good
Escherichia coli (JM107) 47014 102-103 Good
Escherichia coli (DH-5) 53868 102-103 Good

546
 Tetrathionate Broth Base

Formula Expected Results

Difco Terrific Broth Growth is evident in the form of turbidity.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 12.0 g References
Yeast Extract ............................................................ 24.0 g 1. Tartoff and Hobbs. 1987. Bethesda Research Laboratories Focus 9:12.
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 9.4 g 2. Sambrook, Fritsch and Maniatis. 1989. Molecular cloning: a laboratory manual, 2nd ed. Cold
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 2.2 g Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Availability
Directions for Preparation from Difco Terrific Broth
Dehydrated Product Cat. No. 243820 Dehydrated 500 g
243810 Dehydrated 2 kg
1. Dissolve 47.6 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
2. Add 4 mL of glycerol to the medium. Difco Glycerol
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cat. No. 228210 Bottle 100 g
228220 Bottle 500 g
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

Procedure
Consult appropriate references for recommended test proce-
dures.1,2

Tetrathionate Broth Base

Intended Use small numbers and compete with intestinal flora. Salmonella
This medium conforms with specifications of The United States organisms may also be injured in food-processing procedures,
Pharmacopeia (USP). which include exposure to low temperatures, sub-marginal
heat, drying, radiation, preservatives and sanitizers.1 Although
Tetrathionate Broth Base, with added iodine-iodide solution,
injured cells may not form colonies on selective media, they
is used as a selective enrichment medium for the isolation of
Salmonella from feces, urine, foods and other materials of
can, if ingested, cause disease.2 T
sanitary importance. Tetrathionate Broth was originally described by Mueller who
found that the medium selectively inhibited coliforms, thereby
Summary and Explanation permitting enteric pathogens to grow virtually without restric-
Tetrathionate Broth Base is used as a selective enrichment for tion.3 Kaufmann modified Muellers medium and achieved a
the cultivation of Salmonella species that may be present in

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Tetrathionate Broth Base
Dehydrated Appearance: White to off-white, may have a slight greenish tint, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 4.6% solution, partially insoluble in purified water. Solution is a milky white, opaque suspension. Upon standing,
appearance is nearly colorless to light yellow supernatant over insoluble white precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Nearly colorless to light yellow supernatant over a heavy white precipitate.
Reaction of 4.6%
Solution at 25C: pH 8.4 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Tetrathionate Broth Base
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. After incubation, subculture onto MacConkey Agar plates
and incubate plated media at 35 2C for 18-24 hours.
COLONIES ON
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY MACCONKEY AGAR
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Little or no increase in Pink with bile
number of colonies precipitate
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good Colorless

547
Section III
T Tetrathionate Broth Base, cont.

higher percentage of isolates.4,5 The medium is specified in liquid specimen (approximately 10% by volume) and emul-
standard methods.6-8 sify with an inoculating needle, if necessary. Incubate tubes
for 18-24 hours at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere.
Principles of the Procedure
Peptones provide nitrogen, vitamins, amino acides and carbon. Expected Results
Oxgall inhibits gram-positive microorganisms. Tetrathionate, Growth is indicated by turbidity in the medium. Subculture
which is formed in the medium by the addition of the iodine- to selective and differential enteric plating media for further
iodide solution, inhibits the normal intestinal flora of fecal investigations.
specimens.9 Calcium carbonate neutralizes and absorbs toxic
metabolites. Limitation of the Procedure
Enrichment broths should not be used as the sole isolation
Formula medium. They are to be used in conjunction with selective
Difco Tetrathionate Broth Base and nonselective plating media to increase the probability of
Approximate Formula* Per Liter isolating pathogens, especially when they may be present in
Proteose Peptone ....................................................... 2.5 g
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 2.5 g
small numbers. Consult references for detailed information
Oxgall ......................................................................... 1.0 g and recommended procedures.6-8,10
Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................. 30.0 g
Calcium Carbonate .................................................. 10.0 g References
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 1. Hartman and Minich. 1981. J. Food Prot. 44:385.
2. Sorrells, Speck and Warren. 1970. Appl. Microbiol. 19:39.
Directions for Preparation from 3.
4.
Mueller. 1923. C. R. Soc. Biol. (Paris) 89:434.
Kaufman. 1930. Zentrabl. Bakteriol. Parsitenkd. Infektionskr. Hyg. Abt. I Orig. 113:148.
Dehydrated Product 5.
6.
Kaufman. 1935. Z. Hyg. Infektionskr. 117:26.
U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
1. Suspend 4.6 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water. 7. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
2. Heat to boiling. Cool to below 60C. foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
8. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
3. Add 2 mL of iodine solution (6.0 g of iodine crystals and national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmaceopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
9. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
5.0 g of potassium iodide in 20.0 mL of water). DO NOT vol. 1, Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
10. Murray, Baron, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American
REHEAT MEDIUM AFTER ADDING IODINE. DO NOT Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
AUTOCLAVE.
4. Use immediately. Availability
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Difco Tetrathionate Broth Base
stable, typical control cultures. AOAC BAM COMPF SMD SMWW USP
Cat. No. 210430 Dehydrated 500 g
210420 Dehydrated 2 kg
Procedure
Inoculate tubes with a swab or loopful of specimen or, where
the tube volume permits, add feces, other solid sample or

Thayer-Martin Selective Agar

Modified Thayer-Martin (MTM II) Agar
Intended Use Martin et al. modified Thayer-Martin Selective Agar by adding
Thayer-Martin Selective Agar and Modified Thayer-Martin trimethoprim to produce Modified Thayer-Martin Agar.4 A
(MTM II) Agar are used for the isolation of pathogenic Neis- significantly greater number of positive gonococcal isolates
seria from specimens containing mixed flora of bacteria and from clinical specimens were reported as compared with
fungi. Thayer-Martin Selective Agar due to the inhibition of swarm-
ing Proteus species.4-6 Because of its improved performance, it
Summary and Explanation is recommended over earlier formulations for the isolation of
Thayer-Martin Selective Agar was developed for the primary N. gonorrhoeae.7,8 The original formula contained 20 g/L of
isolation of N. gonorrhoeae and N. meningitidis from speci- agar and 1.5 g/L dextrose (in addition to the dextrose in the
mens containing mixed flora taken from the throat, vagina, BBL IsoVitaleX Enrichment). The agar concentration has
rectum and urethra.1-3 Consisting of Chocolate II Agar with been changed to approximately 12 g/L; the extra 1.5 g/L of
vancomycin, colistin and nystatin, it is formulated to dextrose has been eliminated since the lower dextrose content
minimize the overgrowth of gonococci and meningococci by was found to improve the growth of N. gonorrhoeae. BBL
contaminants, to suppress the growth of saprophytic Neisseria MTM II was developed by careful selection and pretesting of
species and to enhance the growth of pathogenic Neisseria. raw materials to provide enhanced growth of gonococci as
well as improved inhibition of Candida species.
548
 Thayer-Martin Agar, cont.

Gono-Pak is the name given to a selective medium-resealable vitamins, amino acids, coenzymes, dextrose, ferric ion and other
polyethylene bag-CO2 generating tablet system described by factors which improve the growth of pathogenic Neisseria.
Holston et al. for the isolation of N. gonorrhoeae. It was found
These selective media contain the antimicrobial agents,
to be comparable to the candle jar method for the isolation of
vancomycin, colistin and nystatin (V-C-N inhibitor) to
N. gonorrhoeae from clinical specimens.9,10 The Gono-Pak
suppress the normal flora. Vancomycin is active primarily
system obviates the need both for a separate carbon dioxide
against gram-positive bacteria. Colistin inhibits gram-
system and for transferring the specimen from the transport
negative bacteria, including Pseudomonas spp., but is not
system to the culture plate. It has been reported to be superior
active against Proteus spp. Nystatin inhibits fungi.
to Transgrow (Modified Thayer-Martin Agar with CO2-enriched
atmosphere in a bottle) as a transport system.11 Modified Thayer-Martin (MTM II) Agar also contains
trimethoprim for the inhibition of Proteus spp.
The JEMBEC* style plate was developed by John E. Martin,
Jr., of the Centers for Disease Control in association with Ames In the Gono-Pak system, a tablet consisting of a mixture of
Laboratories and was designed to provide a self-contained CO2 citric acid and sodium bicarbonate is activated by the moisture
environment through the use of a CO2-generating tablet placed (humidity) produced by the culture medium within the sealed
in a specially designed well provided in the plate.12 plastic bag and generates CO2 levels sufficient for the growth
of Neisseria gonorrhoeae on the selective medium provided
The JEMBEC system is recommended for the growth and trans-
with the system.10
portation of Neisseria gonorrhoeae and has the advantage over
other transport systems of obviating the necessity of transferring In the JEMBEC system, a tablet consisting of a mixture of
the specimen from the transport system to a culture plate. citric acid and sodium bicarbonate is placed in a well within
*JEMBEC is a trademark of Miles Scientific.
the plate and is activated by the moisture (humidity) produced
by the culture medium within the sealed plastic bag. The CO2
Principles of the Procedure levels generated are sufficient for the growth of Neisseria
Thayer-Martin Selective Agar and Modified Thayer-Martin gonorrhoeae on the selective medium provided with the system.12
(MTM II) Agar are based on Chocolate II Agar, which contains
an improved GC Agar base, bovine hemoglobin and IsoVitaleX Procedure
Enrichment. The GC II base contains nitrogenous nutrients Streak the specimen as soon as possible after it is received in
in the form of casein and meat peptones, phosphate buffer to the laboratory. If material is being cultured directly from a
maintain pH and corn starch, which neutralizes toxic fatty swab, proceed as follows:12 T
acids that may be present in the agar. Hemoglobin provides X 1. Roll swab directly on the medium in a large Z to provide
factor (hemin) for Haemophilus spp. IsoVitaleX Enrichment is adequate exposure of swab to the medium for transfer of
a defined supplement which provides V factor (nicotinamide organisms.
adenine dinucleotide, NAD) for Haemophilus species and 2. Cross-streak the Z pattern with a sterile wire loop, pref-
Modified Thayer-Martin (MTM II) Agar erably in the clinic. If not done previously, cross-streaking
Neisseria gonorrhoeae should be done in the laboratory.

ATCC 43069
3. Place the culture as soon as possible in an aerobic environ-
ment enriched with carbon dioxide.
a. With the Gono-Pak System:
Place inoculated plates in the polyethylene bag provided
(one or two plates per bag). Cut off the corner of one foil-
wrapped CO2 tablet to expose the tablet and place in the
bag. DO NOT ADD WATER TO THE TABLET.
To seal the bag, simply press down on the zipper at the
end of the bag with fingers and slide along to the opposite
end. Be sure that the bag is sealed completely. After the
bag is sealed, incubate in an inverted position (agar bed
up) at 35C for 18-48 hours.7, 13
To transport the culture after incubation, place the sealed
Gono-Pak system in a suitable mailing of shipping
container. Care should be taken to protect the culture from
extreme heat or cold and to ensure delivery to the testing
laboratory as rapidly as possible.
b. With the JEMBEC System:
With sterile forceps, remove a CO2-generating tablet from
its foil wrapper and place it in the specially designed well

549
Section III
T Thayer-Martin Agar, cont.

in the plate. Place inoculated plates in the polyethylene Some strains of Capnocytophaga species may grow on these
bag provided (one plate per bag). DO NOT ADD WATER selective media when inoculated with oropharyngeal speci-
TO THE TABLET. Seal the bag by pressing down on the mens.17
zipper at the end of the bag with fingers and slide along
to the opposite end. Be sure that the bag is sealed References
1. Martin, Billings, Hackney and Thayer. 1967. Public Health Rep. 82:361.
completely. After the bag is sealed, incubate in an inverted 2. Thayer and Martin. 1966. Pub. Health Rep. 81:559.
position (agar bed up) at 35C for 18-48 hours.7,13 3.
4.
Mitchell, Rhoden and Marcus. 1966. Am. J. Epidem. 83:74.
Martin, Armstrong and Smith. 1974. Appl. Microbiol. 27:802.
To transport the culture after incubation, place the sealed 5. Center for Disease Control. January 2, 1975. Memorandum: recommendation to use the same
medium, Modified Thayer-Martin (MTM), in both plates and bottles for the GC culture screening
JEMBEC system in a suitable mailing or shipping container. program. U. S. Public Health Service, Atlanta, Ga.
6. Seth. 1970. Br. J. Vener. Dis. 46:201.
Care should be taken to protect the culture from extreme 7. Evangelista and Beilstein. 1993. Cumitech 4A, Laboratory diagnosis of gonorrhoea. Coord. ed.,
Abramson. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
heat or cold and to ensure delivery to the testing labora- 8. Kanpp and Koumans. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
tory as soon as possible. clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
9. Holston, Hosty and Martin. 1974. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 62:558.
4. Incubate at 35 2C and examine after overnight incuba- 10. DeVaux, Evans, Arndt and Janda. 1987. J. Clin. Microbiol. 25:571.
11. Lewis and Weisner. 1980. Lab. Management. 18:33.
tion and again after approximately 48 hours. 12. Center for Disease Control. 1975. Criteria and techniques for the diagnosis of gonorrhea. U. S.
Public Health Service, Atlanta, Ga.
5. Subculture for identification of N. gonorrhoeae should be 13. Lewis. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American
Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
made within 18-24 hours. 14. Cross, Hoger, Neibaur, Pasternack and Brady. 1971. HSMHA Health Rep. 86:990.
15. Phillips, Humphrey, Middleton and Nicol. 1972. Br. J. Vener. Dis. 48:287.
16. Edberg. 1974. J. Clin. Pathol. 62:445.
Expected Results 17. Reichart, Rupkey, Brady and Hook. 1989. J. Clin. Microbiol. 27:808.

Typical colonial morphology on these media is as follows:

Neisseria gonorrhoeae ... Small, grayish-white to colorless,
Availability
mucoid BBL Modified Thayer-Martin (MTM II) Agar
Neisseria meningitidis ..... Medium to large, blue-gray, mucoid BS10 CMPH MCM7
Cat. No. 221567 Prepared Plates Pkg of 20*
Colonies may be selected for Gram staining, subculturing or 221568 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
other diagnostic procedures. BBL Thayer-Martin Selective Agar
Cat. No. 221184 Prepared Plates Pkg of 20*
Limitations of the Procedure 221282 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Selective media for pathogenic Neisseria may inhibit other BBL Modified Thayer-Martin (MTM II) Agar//
pathogenic bacteria, e.g., Haemophilus. Chocolate II Agar
Cat. No. 221623 Prepared Bi-Plate Dishes
The existence of strains of N. gonorrhoeae inhibited by the (100 x 15 mm-style, Divided) Pkg. of 20*
components of V-C-N Inhibitor and trimethoprim lactate have
BBL Modified Thayer-Martin (MTM II) Agar Gono-Pak
been reported.14,15
BS10 CMPH MCM7
While saprophytic Neisseria are generally suppressed by Cat. No. 221795 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
selective media, the occasional recovery of N. lactamica on BBL Modified Thayer-Martin (MTM II) Agar (JEMBEC)
Thayer-Martin Selective Agar has been reported.16 BS10 CMPH MCM7
Cat. No. 221806 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

Thermoacidurans Agar
Intended Use Thermoacidurans Agar can also be used to isolate mesophilic
Thermoacidurans Agar is used for isolating and cultivating spore-forming anaerobes (Clostridium spp.) from foods. These
Bacillus coagulans (Bacillus thermoacidurans) from foods. microorganisms tolerate high heat, grow in the absence of oxygen
and grow over the range of temperatures used in canned and
Summary and Explanation processed foods. They are of primary importance in spoilage of
Stern et al.1 described a medium for isolating B. coagulans low-acid foods packed in hermetically sealed containers.2
(B. thermoacidurans), which causes flat sour spoilage in
tomato juice and other canned foods. Bacterial growth results Principles of the Procedure
in a 0.3-0.5 drop in pH; the ends of the can remain flat. Thermoacidurans Agar contains peptone to provide the
B. coagulans is a soil microorganism that can be found in carbon and nitrogen for general growth requirements. Yeast
canned tomato products and dairy products. Conditions extract supplies B-complex vitamins which stimulate bacterial
favorable to multiplication of the organism can result in growth. Dextrose is the carbohydrate source. Agar is the
spoilage of the food product.2 solidifying agent.

550
 Thiamine Assay Medium

User Quality Control Directions for Preparation from

Dehydrated Product
Identity Specifications 1. Suspend 39 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Difco Thermoacidurans Agar thoroughly.
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Solution: 3.9% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
completely dissolve the powder.
amber, opalescent. 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Avoid overheating
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, opalescent. which could cause a softer medium.
Reaction of 3.9% 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Solution at 25C: pH 5.0 0.2 stable, typical control cultures.
Cultural Response Procedure
Difco Thermoacidurans Agar
Consult appropriate references for recommended test proce-
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
55 1C for 18-48 hours. dures.1,2
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
2 3
Expected Results
Bacillus coagulans 7050 10 -10 Good
Growth is evident in the form of turbidity.

Formula Limitation of the Procedure

Difco Thermoacidurans Agar
Microorganisms other than B. coagulans may grow on this
Approximate Formula* Per Liter medium. Perform microscopic examination and biochemical
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g tests to identify to genus and species if necessary.
Proteose Peptone ....................................................... 5.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 4.0 g References
1. Stern, Hegarty and Williams. 1942. Food Research 7:186.
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g 2. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

Availability
Difco Thermoacidurans Agar
CCAM COMPF
T
Cat. No. 230310 Dehydrated 500 g

Thiamine Assay Medium Thiamine Assay Medium LV

Intended Use Thiamine Assay Medium is prepared according to the formula
Thiamine Assay Medium is used for determining thiamine by Sarett and Cheldelin.1 Lactobacillus fermentum ATCC 9338
concentration by the microbiological assay technique using is used as the test organism in the microbiological assay of
Lactobacillus fermentum ATCC 9338. thiamine (vitamin B1).
Thiamine Assay Medium LV is used for determining Thiamine Assay Medium LV, patterned after APT medium,
thiamine concentration by the microbiological assay technique was described by Deibel, Evans and Niven2 for the microbio-
using Weissella (Lactobacillus) viridescens ATCC 12706. logical assay of thiamine using Lactobacillus viridescens ATCC
12706.
Summary and Explanation
Vitamin Assay Media are prepared for use in the microbio- Nutritional studies by Evans and Niven 3 on the
logical assay of vitamins. Three types of medium are used for heterofermentative lactobacilli that cause greening in cured
this purpose: meat products indicated that thiamine was an essential
vitamin for growth of these organisms. Deibel, Evans and
1. Maintenance Medium: For carrying the stock culture to
Niven4 described APT medium for lactobacilli cultivation. They
preserve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism
reported that lactobacilli required at least 10 ng thiamine per
for its intended purpose;
mL for growth in contrast to 0.2 to 3 ng per mL for thiamine-
2. Inoculum Medium: To condition the test culture for imme-
requiring streptococci, leuconostocs and staphylococci.
diate use;
Further, they suggested that lactobacilli requiring large amounts
3. Assay Medium: To permit quantitation of the vitamin
of thiamine might be employed in microbiological assay
under test. Assay media contain all factors necessary for
procedures. In 1957,2 these authors described a medium for
optimal growth of the test organism except the single
the microbiological assay of thiamine using Lactobacillus (now
essential vitamin to be determined.
551
Section III
T Thiamine Assay Medium, cont.

Weissella) viridescens ATCC 12706 as the test organism. This Guanine Hydrochloride ............................................ 20.0 mg
Uracil ........................................................................ 20.0 mg
medium is known as Thiamine Assay Medium LV. Riboflavin ............................................................... 200.0 g
Calcium Pantothenate ............................................ 200.0 g
Principles of the Procedure Niacin ..................................................................... 200.0 g
Thiamine Assay Medium and Thiamine Assay Medium LV are Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ........................................ 200.0 g
free from thiamine, but contain all other nutrients and p-Aminobenzoic Acid ............................................. 200.0 g
vitamins essential for the growth of the test organisms. The Folic Acid ................................................................... 5.0 g
Biotin ......................................................................... 0.8 g
addition of thiamine in specified increasing concentrations gives Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g
a growth response that can be measured turbidimetrically. Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.4 g
Formulae Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 20.0 mg
Difco Thiamine Assay Medium Ferrous Sulfate ......................................................... 20.0 mg
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Manganese Sulfate .................................................. 20.0 mg
Thiamine-Free Tryptone ............................................ 22.0 g Difco Thiamine Assay Medium LV
Vitamin Assay Casamino Acids ................................... 5.0 g Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g Thiamine-Free Yeast Extract ..................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Acetate ....................................................... 15.0 g Thiamine-Free Tryptone ............................................ 20.0 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.2 g Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g
Adenine Sulfate ....................................................... 20.0 mg Sodium Citrate ......................................................... 10.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate ............................................ 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 10.0 g
User Quality Control Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 1.6 g
Manganese Sulfate .................................................... 0.28 g
Identity Specifications Ferrous Sulfate ........................................................... 0.08 g
Difco Thiamine Assay Medium Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 2.0 g
Dehydrated Medium: Beige, homogeneous, tendency to *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
clump.
Solution: 4.25% (single strength) and 8.5% Precautions
(double strength) solution, soluble in Great care to avoid contamination of media or glassware must
purified water upon boiling 2-3
minutes. 4.25% solution is light amber, be taken in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely small
clear, may have a slight precipitate. amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give errone-
Prepared Appearance: 4.25% solution is light amber, clear, ous results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from detergents
may have a slight precipitate. and other chemicals must be used. Glassware must be heated
Reaction of 4.25% to 250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic residues
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5 0.2
that might be present. Take precautions to keep sterilization
Difco Thiamine Assay Medium LV and cooling conditions uniform throughout the assay.
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, homogeneous, tendency to
clump.
Solution: 4.2% (single strength) and 8.4%
Directions for Preparation from
(double strength) solution, soluble in Dehydrated Product
purified water upon boiling 2-3 1. Suspend the powder in 100 mL of purified water:
minutes. 4.2% solution is light amber,
clear, may have a slight precipitate. Difco Thiamine Assay Medium - 8.5 g;
Prepared Appearance: 4.2% solution is light amber, clear, Difco Thiamine Assay Medium LV - 8.4 g.
may have a slight precipitate. 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 2-3 minutes.
Reaction of 4.2% 3. Dispense in 5 mL amounts into tubes, evenly dispensing
Solution at 25C: pH 6.0 0.2 the precipitate.
4. Add standard or test samples.
Cultural Response
5. Adjust the volume to 10 mL with purified water.
Difco Thiamine Assay Medium
Prepare the medium per label directions. The medium supports the 6. Autoclave at 121C for 5 minutes.
growth of Lactobacillus fermentum ATCC 9338 when prepared in
single strength and supplemented with thiamine. The medium should Procedure
produce a standard curve when tested using a thiamine hydrochloride
Thiamine Assay Medium
reference standard at 0.0 to 0.05 g per 10 mL. Incubate tubes with
caps loosened at 35-37C for 16-18 hours. Read the percent transmit- Prepare stock cultures of the test organism, Lactobacillus
tance using a spectrophotometer at 660 nm. fermentum ATCC 9338, by stab inoculation on Lactobacilli
Difco Thiamine Assay Medium LV Agar AOAC or Micro Assay Culture Agar. After 24-48 hours
Prepare the medium per label directions. The medium supports the incubation at 35-37C, keep the tubes in the refrigerator. Make
growth of Weissella viridescens ATCC 12706 when prepared in single transfers in triplicate at monthly intervals.
strength and supplemented with thiamine. The medium should
produce a standard curve when tested using a thiamine hydrochloride Prepare the inoculum by subculturing a stock culture of the
reference standard at 0.0 to 25.0 ng per 10 mL. Incubate tubes with
caps loosened at 30 2C for 16-20 hours. Read the percent transmit- test organism in 10 mL of Lactobacilli Broth AOAC or Micro
tance using a spectrophotometer at 660 nm. Inoculum Broth. After 16-18 hours incubation at 35-37C,
centrifuge the cells under aseptic conditions and decant the
552
 Thiamine Assay Medium, cont.

supernatant liquid. Wash the cells three times with 10 mL This is obtained by using 0.0, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4 and 5 mL
sterile 0.85% NaCl. After the third wash, resuspend the cells of the standard solution, which contains 5 ng (0.005 g)
in 10 mL sterile 0.85% NaCl. Add 0.5 mL of this suspension thiamine hydrochloride per mL. The most effective assay range
to 100 mL sterile 0.85% NaCl. Use one drop of the resulting is between 2.5 and 20 ng per tube.
suspension to inoculate the assay tubes.
The solution for preparing the standard curve for Thiamine
A standard curve should be run with each assay because con- Assay Medium LV may be prepared as follows:
ditions of heating and incubation temperature that influence
1. Dissolve 50 mg of thiamine hydrochloride in 500 mL
the standard curve readings cannot always be duplicated.
purified water (100 g/mL).
The tubes for the Thiamine Assay Medium standard curve 2. Add 1 mL of the solution in Step 1 to 99 mL purified water
contain 0.0, 0.005, 0.01, 0.015, 0.02, 0.03, 0.04 and 0.05 g (1 g/mL).
of thiamine hydrochloride per 10 mL tube. The most effective 3. Add 1 mL of the solution in Step 2 to 199 mL purified water
assay range for Thiamine Assay Medium is between 0.005 and to give a final concentration of 5 ng (0.005 g) per mL.
0.03 g thiamine.
Following incubation of W. viridescens ATCC 12706 at 30
Prepare the stock solution of thiamine required for the prepa- 2C for 16-20 hours, the growth response is measured turbidi-
ration of the standard curve in Thiamine Assay Medium as metrically.
follows:
Expected Results
1. Dissolve 0.1 g of thiamine hydrochloride in 1,000 mL of
Thiamine Assay Medium and Thiamine Assay Medium LV
purified water (100 g/mL).
1. Prepare a standard concentration response curve by plotting
2. Add 1 mL of the solution in Step 1 to 99 mL purified water
the response readings against the amount of standard in
(1 g/mL).
each tube, disk or cup.
3. Add 1 mL of the solution in Step 2 to 99 mL purified water
2. Determine the amount of vitamin at each level of assay
to give a final concentration of 10 ng (0.010 g/mL). Use
solution by interpolation from the standard curve.
0.0, 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 3, 4 and 5 mL of this final solution per
3. Calculate the concentration of vitamin in the sample from
tube. Prepare fresh stock solution daily.
the average of these volumes. Use only those values that do
After 20-24 hours incubation at 35-37C, L. fermentum ATCC not vary more than 10% from the average and use the
9338 is capable of using the pyrimidine and thiazole moieties
of the thiamine molecule. It is essential that the growth
results only if two-thirds of the values do not vary more
than 10%.
T
response be measured turbidimetrically prior to this time.
Incubate the tubes at 35-37C for 16-18 hours, then place in Limitations of the Procedure
the refrigerator for 15-30 minutes to stop growth. The growth 1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium
can then be measured by any suitable nephelometric method. must be cultured and maintained on media recommended
Thiamine Assay Medium LV for this purpose.
Prepare stock cultures of the test organism, W. viridescens 2. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the micro-
ATCC 12706, by stab inoculation on APT Agar or Lactobacilli biological assay procedure.
Agar AOAC. After 24-48 hours incubation at 30 2C, keep 3. The use of altered or deficient media may cause mutants
the tubes in the refrigerator. Make transfers in triplicate at having different nutritional requirements which will not give
monthly intervals. a satisfactory response.
4. For successful results, all conditions of the assay must be
Prepare the inoculum by subculturing a stock culture of the followed exactly.
test organism to 10 mL APT Broth or Lactobacilli Broth AOAC.
After 16-20 hours incubation at 30 2C, centrifuge the cells References
under aseptic conditions and decant the supernatant liquid. 1. Sarett and Cheldelin. 1944. J. Biol. Chem. 155:153.
2. Deibel, Evans and Niven. 1957. Abstr. A68, p. 28. Bacteriol. Proc. 57th Gen. Meet. Soc. Am.
Wash the cells three times with 10 mL sterile 0.85% NaCl. Bacteriologists. 1957.
3. Evans and Niven. 1951. J. Bacteriol. 62:599.
After the third wash, resuspend the cells in 10 mL sterile 0.85% 4. Diebel, Evans and Niven. 1955. Abstr. G56, p. 48. Bacteriol. Proc. 55th Gen. Meet. Soc. Am.
Bacteriologists. 1955.
NaCl. Add 1 mL of this cell suspension to 100 mL sterile 0.85%
NaCl. Use one drop of this suspension to inoculate the assay
Availability
tubes.
Difco Thiamine Assay Medium
A standard curve should be run with each assay because Cat. No. 232610 Dehydrated 100 g*
conditions of heating and incubation temperature that influ- Difco Thiamine Assay Medium LV
ence the standard curve readings cannot always be duplicated. Cat. No. 280810 Dehydrated 100 g*
*Store at 2-8C.
The standard curve for Thiamine Assay Medium LV is
obtained by using thiamine at levels of 0.0, 1, 2.5, 5, 7.5, 10,
15, 20 and 25 ng of thiamine hydrochloride per 10 mL tube.
553
Section III
T Thioglycollate Media

Thioglycollate Media
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium NIH Thioglycollate
Broth Sterility Test Broth Thioglycollate Medium,
Brewer Modified Fluid Thioglycollate Medium with
Beef Extract Thioglycollate Medium without
Dextrose Thioglycollate Medium (Fluid), without
Dextrose or (Eh) Indicator Thioglycollate Medium
without Indicator (135C) Fluid Thioglycollate
Medium, Enriched Enriched Thioglycollate Medium
Thioglycollate Medium with Calcium Carbonate
Enriched Thioglycollate Medium with Calcium
Carbonate
Intended Use Enriched Thioglycollate Medium when supplemented with
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium and NIH Thioglycollate Broth/ sodium bicarbonate or a marble chip is used to prepare a
Sterility Test Broth conform with specifications of The United standardized inoculum by the growth method for antimicrobial
States Pharmacopeia (USP). susceptibility testing of anaerobic bacteria.
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium (FTM) is used for the sterility Thioglycollate Medium with Calcium Carbonate and
testing of biologics and for the cultivation of anaerobes, Thioglycollate Medium, Enriched, with Calcium Carbonate
aerobes and microaerophiles. are recommended for the maintenance of stock cultures.
NIH Thioglycollate Broth and Sterility Test Broth (USP Summary and Explanation
Alternative Thioglycollate Medium) may be used for sterility
Quastel and Stephenson1 found that the presence of a small
testing instead of FTM.
amount of a compound containing an SH group (cysteine,
Thioglycollate Medium, Brewer Modified is used for the thioglycollic acid, glutathione) permitted aerobic growth of
cultivation of obligate anaerobes, microaerophiles and facul- Clostridium sporogenes in tryptic digest broth.
tative organisms.
Falk, Bucca and Simmons2 pointed out the advantages of
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium with Beef Extract is used in using small quantities of agar (0.06-0.25%) in detecting
cultivating microorganisms from normally sterile biological contaminants during sterility testing of biologicals. The value
products. of combining a small amount of agar and a reducing substance
was demonstrated by Brewer.3 Brewers experiments revealed
Thioglycollate Medium without Dextrose and Thioglycollate
that in a liquid medium containing 0.05% agar, anaerobes grew
Medium (Fluid), without Dextrose or (Eh) Indicator are used
equally well in the presence or absence of sodium thioglycollate.
as bases for fermentation studies of anaerobes, as well as for
Marshall, Gunnish and Luxen4 reported satisfactory cultiva-
detecting microorganisms in normally sterile materials,
tion of anaerobes in Brewers Thioglycollate Medium in the
especially those containing mercurial preservatives.
presence of a mercurial preservative. Nungester, Hood and
Thioglycollate Medium without Indicator (135C) is an enriched Warren5 and Portwood6 confirmed the neutralization of the
general-purpose medium for the recovery of a wide variety bacteriostatic effect of mercurial compounds by sodium
of microorganisms, particularly obligate anaerobes, from thioglycollate. Incorporation of casein peptone was introduced
clinical specimens and other materials. by Vera.7 Malin and Finn8 reported the commonly used medium
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium, Enriched and Enriched containing thioglycollate is inhibitory to some organisms in the
Thioglycollate Medium are general-purpose media used in presence of a carbohydrate. In 1941, the National Institutes
qualitative procedures for the cultivation of fastidious, as well of Health specified the use of two thioglycollate media in
as nonfastidious microorganisms, including aerobic and anaerobic sterility testing, the Brewer Formula and the Linden Formula.9
bacteria, from a variety of clinical and nonclinical specimens. The Linden Formula was later referred to as Modified Brewer

554
 Thioglycollate Media, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications
Difco Fluid Thioglycollate Medium Difco Thioglycollate Medium without Dextrose
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous. neous.
Solution: 2.98% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 2.4% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. When hot, solu- water upon boiling. When hot, solu-
tion is light amber, clear. tion is light amber, clear to very slightly
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent, 10% opalescent.
or less of upper layer may be medium Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent, 10%
pink. After shaking solution becomes or less of upper layer is green.
pink throughout. Reaction of 2.4%
Reaction of 2.98% Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2
Difco Thioglycollate Medium without Dextrose or
Difco NIH Thioglycollate Broth Indicator
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homoge- Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous. neous.
Solution: 2.9% solution, soluble in purified water Solution: 2.4% solution, soluble in purified
upon boiling. When hot, solution is light water upon boiling. When hot, solu-
amber, clear to very slightly opalescent, tion is light amber, clear.
may have a slight precipitate. Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to very slightly opal- Reaction of 2.4%
escent, may have a slight precipitate. Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Reaction of 2.9%
Difco Thioglycollate Medium without Indicator

Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2 Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
neous.
Difco Fluid Thioglycollate Medium with Beef

Solution: 2.9% solution, soluble in purified
Extract
water upon boiling. When hot, solu-
Dehydrated Appearance:
Solution:
Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
3.47% solution, soluble in purified
tion is light amber, clear. T
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent.
water upon boiling for 1-2 minutes.
When hot, solution is medium amber, Reaction of 2.9%
clear. Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Prepared Appearance: Medium amber with some opales- Continued

cence, 10% or less of upper layer may
be pink. After shaking solution
becomes pink throughout. Thioglycollate Medium in which meat infusion was replaced
Reaction of 3.47% by plant (soy) peptones.10
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium is recommended in the FDA
Bacteriological Analytical Manual (BAM)11 and the Official
Methods of Analysis of AOAC International12 for the exami-
nation of food, and for determining the phenol coefficient and
sporicidal effects of disinfectants. Fluid Thioglycollate Medium
is also specified for sterility checks on banked blood.13 It is one
of the media recommended in the USP for use in sterility
testing of articles purporting to be sterile; these formulations
meet the requirements of the USP growth promotion test.14
NIH Thioglycollate Broth and Sterility Test Broth, which are the
USP Alternative Thioglycollate Medium, are Fluid Thioglycollate
Medium without the agar or indicator components. They are used
for the same sterility test procedures except that anaerobic incu-
bation is recommended rather than aerobic incubation. They
also meet the requirements of the USP growth promotion test.14
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium with Beef Extract is recom-
Uninoculated Bacteroides vulgatus mended by the Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service,
Tube ATCC 8482 USDA,15 in the detection of viable bacteria in live vaccines.
Thioglycollate Medium without Dextrose and Thioglycollate
555
Section III
T Thioglycollate Media, cont.

Cultural Response
Difco Fluid Thioglycollate Medium Difco Fluid Thioglycollate Medium with Beef
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 30- Extract
35C for 18-48 hours (up to 72 hours, if necessary). To test for growth Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
promotion according to the USP/EP, inoculate using organisms marked 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
with (*) and incubate aerobically at 30-35C for up to 5 days.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
INOCULUM USP/EP Bacillus subtilis 6633 10-102 Good
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY GROWTH
2
Bacteroides vulgatus 8482 10-102 Good
Clostridium novyi 7659 10-10 Good N/A
Candida albicans 10231 10-102 Good
Clostridium perfringens 13124 10-102 Good N/A
Clostridium chauvoei 10092 10-102 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 10-102 Good N/A
Clostridium perfringens 13124 10-102 Good
Bacillus subtilis* 6633 10-102 N/A Growth
Clostridium sporogenes 19404 10-102 Good
Bacteroides vulgatus* 8482 10-102 N/A Growth
Micrococcus luteus 9341 10-102 Good
Clostridium sporogenes* 11437 10-102 N/A Growth
Clostridium sporogenes* 19404 10-102 N/A Growth Mercurial Neutralization Test To perform, add 1% Merthiolate to
Micrococcus luteus* 9341 10-102 N/A Growth medium, inoculate (103 CFU) with Staphylococcus aureus ATCC 6538P
and Streptococcus pyogenes ATCC 19615, and incubate at 30-35C
Pseudomonas aeruginosa* 9027 10-102 N/A Growth
for 18-48 hours. Recovery of organisms indicates that Merthiolate has
Staphylococcus aureus* 6538 10-102 N/A Growth been neutralized.
Mercurial Neutralization Test To perform, add 1% Merthiolate* to Difco Thioglycollate Medium without Dextrose,
medium, inoculate (103 CFU) with Staphylococcus aureus ATCC 6538P Thioglycollate Medium without Indicator* or
and Streptococcus pyogenes ATCC 19615, and incubate at 30-35C
Thioglycollate Medium without Dextrose or
for 18-48 hours. Recovery of organisms indicates that Merthiolate has
Indicator*
been neutralized.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Difco NIH Thioglycollate Broth 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate duplicate tubes
and incubate at 30-35C for 18-48 hours (up to 72 hours, if necessary) ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
under anaerobic conditions (tight caps). Bacteroides fragilis 25285 10-102 Poor to fair
Bacteroides vulgatus 8482 10-102 Poor to fair
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Clostridium novyi 7659 10-102 Good
Bacteroides vulgatus 8482 10-102 Poor to good
Clostridium sporogenes 11437 10-102 Good
Clostridium sporogenes 11437 10-102 Poor to good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 10-102 Good
Clostridium sporogenes 19404 10-102 Poor to good
*Mercurial Neutralization Test To perform, add 1% Merthiolate to
Mercurial Neutralization Test To perform, add 1% Merthiolate to medium, inoculate (103 CFU) with Staphylococcus aureus ATCC 6538P
medium, inoculate (103 CFU) with Staphylococcus aureus ATCC 6538P and Streptococcus pyogenes ATCC 19615, and incubate at 30-35C
and Streptococcus pyogenes ATCC 19615, and incubate at 30-35C for 18-48 hours. Recovery of organisms indicates that Merthiolate has
for 18-48 hours. Recovery of organisms indicates that Merthiolate has been neutralized.
been neutralized.
Continued
*Merthiolate is a trademark of Eli Lilly and Company.

Medium without Dextrose or Indicator may be used with added to be required by certain anaerobes for growth.19,20 The addition
carbohydrates for fermentation studies. of calcium carbonate enhances the maintenance of stock
cultures by neutralizing acids produced during growth.16 The
Thioglycollate Medium without Indicator (135C) is the
Enriched Thioglycollate Medium (Broth) recommended by the
medium of choice for diagnostic work because the lack of
NCCLS for inoculum preparation for susceptibility tests of
indicator avoids possible toxicity to organisms.11 This medium
anaerobes consists of Enriched Thioglycollate Medium
supports a minimal inoculum with early visibility of growth.
(Thioglycollate Medium without Indicator [135] with 1 g/
When used as an enrichment broth to support plated media, mL of Vitamin K1 and 5 g/mL of hemin) supplemented with
thioglycollate media are often supplemented with hemin and 1 mg/mL of sodium bicarbonate or a marble chip to neutralize
vitamin K1.16 Fluid Thioglycollate Medium, Enriched is BBL acids produced during growth of the test organisms.21
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium supplemented with vitamin
K1 and hemin. Enriched Thioglycollate Medium is BBL Principles of the Procedure
Thioglycollate Medium without Indicator-135C supplemented Dextrose, peptone, L-cystine and yeast extract provide the
with vitamin K1 and hemin. Enriched broth media are recom- growth factors necessary for bacterial replication. Sodium
mended for use in the isolation and cultivation of fastidious or chloride provides essential ions. Sodium thioglycollate is a
slow growing, obligately anaerobic microorganisms present reducing agent that prevents the accumulation of peroxides
in clinical materials.17,18 They are also recommended for the which are lethal to some microorganisms. The L-cystine is
isolation and cultivation of a wide variety of aerobic and facul- also a reducing agent, since it contains sulfhydryl groups which
tatively anaerobic microorganisms. Enriched Thioglycollate inactivate heavy metal compounds and maintain a low redox
Medium is prepared with an anaerobic head space and is potential, thereby supporting anaerobiosis. Methylene blue is
provided in screw-capped tubes in accordance with CDC an indicator of the level of oxidation/reduction in the medium;
recommendations.17 Vitamin K1 and hemin have been shown increased oxidation raises the Eh, causing the methylene blue
556
 Thioglycollate Media, cont.

Identity Specifications Cultural Response

BBL Fluid Thioglycollate Medium BBL Fluid Thioglycollate Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Medium fine to fine, homogeneous, Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate
free of extraneous material. aerobically at 30-35C for up to 5 days. To test for growth promotion
Solution: 2.95% solution, soluble in purified according to the USP/EP, test with all of the organisms listed.
water upon boiling. When hot, solu- ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT
tion is pale to light, yellow to tan, clear.
Bacillus subtilis 6633 < 102 Growth
Prepared Appearance: Pale to light, yellow to tan with light
Bacteroides vulgatus 8482 < 102 Growth
pink to rose indicator on top, moder-
ately hazy to hazy. Clostridium sporogenes 11437 < 102 Growth
Clostridium sporogenes 19404 < 102 Growth
Reaction of 2.95%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2 Micrococcus luteus 9341 < 102 Growth
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 9027 < 102 Growth
BBL Sterility Test Broth Staphylococcus aureus 6538 < 102 Growth
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
ous material. BBL Sterility Test Broth
Solution: 2.85% solution, soluble in purified Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 30-
water upon boiling. When hot, solu- 35C for 7 days. Incubate organisms marked with (*) anaerobically (with
tion is light to medium, yellow to tan, tight caps).
clear to slightly hazy.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, clear
Bacillus subtilis 6633 103 Growth
to slightly hazy.
Bacteroides vulgatus* 8482 102 Growth
Reaction of 2.85%
Candida albicans 10231 103 Growth
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2
Clostridium sporogenes* 11437 102 Growth
BBL Thioglycollate Medium, Brewer Modified Micrococcus luteus 9341 103 Growth
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane- Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 103 Growth
ous material.
Solution: 3.85% solution, soluble in purified BBL Thioglycollate Medium, Brewer Modified
water upon boiling. When hot, solu- Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
tion is light to medium, yellow to tan, 35 2C for 7 days under appropriate atmospheric conditions.
clear.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan with
Bacteroides fragilis 25285 103 Growth
medium green indicator color at the
top, moderately hazy to hazy. Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103 Growth T
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 103 Growth
Reaction of 3.85%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2 BBL Thioglycollate Medium, Fluid, without
BBL Thioglycollate Medium, Fluid, without Dextrose or Eh Indicator
Dextrose or Eh Indicator Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane- 35 2C for 7 days under appropriate atmospheric conditions.
ous material and may contain tan
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT
specks.
Clostridium sporogenes 11437 103 Growth
Solution: 2.4% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. When hot, solu- Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103 Growth
tion is pale to light, yellow to tan, BBL Thioglycollate Medium without Indicator 135C
clear.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate as
Prepared Appearance: Pale to light, yellow to tan, slightly to indicated below.
moderately hazy.
INOCULUM INCUBATION
Reaction of 2.4% ORGANISM ATCC CFU TIME/TEMP RESULT
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2
Bacteroides fragilis 25285 103 7 days/35 2C Satisfactory
BBL Thioglycollate Medium without Indicator 135C Campylobacter jejuni
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane- subsp. jejuni 33291 103 7 days/40-44C Satisfactory
ous material. Saccaharomyces
Solution: 3.0% solution, soluble in purified cerevisiae 9763 103 7 days/25 2C Satisfactory
water upon boiling. When hot, solu- Staphylococcus
tion is pale to light, tan to yellow, aureus 25923 103 7 days/35 2C Satisfactory
clear. Streptococcus
Prepared Appearance: Pale to light, tan to yellow, moderately pyogenes 19615 103 7 days/35 2C Satisfactory
hazy to hazy.
Reaction of 3.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2

557
Section III
T Thioglycollate Media, cont.

indicator to become green. Resazurin is an oxidation-reduc- BBL Thioglycollate Medium, Brewer Modified
tion indicator, being pink when oxidized and colorless when Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 17.5 g
reduced. The small amount of agar assists in the maintenance Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal .................................. 2.5 g
of a low redox potential by stabilizing the medium against Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
convection currents, thereby maintaining anaerobiosis in the Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 1.0 g
lower depths of the medium. The USP lists 5.5g/L of dextrose Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.0 g
in the formulations for Fluid Thioglycollate Medium and Methylene Blue .......................................................... 2.0 mg
Alternative Thioglycollate Medium; some of the following Agar ........................................................................... 0.5 g
formulations include the anhydrous form of dextrose (5.0g/L). Difco Fluid Thioglycollate Medium with Beef Extract
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Vitamin K1 is a growth requirement for some strains of Beef Extract ............................................................... 5.0 g
Prevotella melaninogenica18 and is reported to enhance the Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
growth of some strains of Bacteroides species and gram- Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 15.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.5 g
positive nonsporeformers.22 Hemin is the source of the X Sodium Chloride ....................................................... 2.5 g
factor, which stimulates the growth of many microorganisms. L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.5 g
Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 0.5 g
Calcium carbonate neutralizes acids produced during growth, Agar ........................................................................... 0.75 g
which helps to maintain the viability of fastidious organisms; Resazurin ................................................................... 1.0 mg
e.g., pneumococci, gram-negative cocci, Clostridium Difco Thioglycollate Medium without Dextrose
perfringens and other acid-sensitive bacteria. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 15.0 g
Dipotassium phosphate is a buffering agent. Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.5 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.25 g
Formulae Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 0.5 g
Difco Fluid Thioglycollate Medium Agar ........................................................................... 0.75 g
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Methylene Blue .......................................................... 2.0 mg
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 15.0 g Difco Thioglycollate Medium without Dextrose
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g or Indicator
Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.5 g
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.5 g
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 15.0 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.5 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 0.5 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.5 g
Agar ........................................................................... 0.75 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.25 g
Resazurin ................................................................... 1.0 mg
Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 0.5 g
BBL Fluid Thioglycollate Medium Agar ........................................................................... 0.75 g
Approximate Formula* Per Liter BBL Thioglycollate Medium, Fluid, without Dextrose
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 15.0 g or Eh Indicator
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Dextrose (anhydrous) ................................................. 5.0 g Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.5 g Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 20.0 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.5 g Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.5 g
Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 0.5 g L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.5 g
Agar ........................................................................... 0.75 g Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 0.5 g
Resazurin ................................................................... 1.0 mg Agar ........................................................................... 0.75 g

Difco NIH Thioglycollate Broth Difco Thioglycollate Medium without Indicator

Approximate Formula* Per Liter Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Casitone ................................................................... 15.0 g Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 15.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.5 g Dextrose ..................................................................... 5.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.5 g Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.5 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.5 g L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.25 g
Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 0.5 g Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 0.5 g
Agar ........................................................................... 0.75 g
BBL Sterility Test Broth
BBL Thioglycollate Medium without Indicator 135C
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 15.0 g Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 17.0 g
Dextrose (anhydrous) ................................................ 5.0 g Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal .................................. 3.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.5 g Dextrose ..................................................................... 6.0 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.5 g Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.5 g
Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 0.5 g L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.25 g
Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 0.5 g
Agar ........................................................................... 0.7 g
Sodium Sulfite ............................................................ 0.1 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

558
 Thioglycollate Media, cont.

Directions for Preparation from References

1. Quastel and Stephenson. 1926. J. Biochem. 20:1125.
Dehydrated Product 2. Falk, Bucca and Simmons. 1939. J. Bacteriol. 37:121.
3. Brewer. 1940. JAMA 115:598.
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water: 4. Marshall, Ginnish and Luxen. 1940. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 43:672.
Difco Fluid Thioglycollate Medium 29.8 g; 5.
6.
Nungester, Hood and Warren. 1943. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 52:287.
Portwood. 1944. J. Bacteriol. 48:255.
BBL Fluid Thioglycollate Medium 29.5 g; 7. Vera. 1944. J. Bacteriol. 47:59.
8. Malin and Finn. 1957. J. Bacteriol. 62:349.
Difco NIH Thioglycollate Broth 29 g; 9. Linden. 1941. Fluid thioglycollate medium for the sterility test. National Institutes of Health,
Bethesda, Md.
BBL Sterility Test Broth 28.5 g; 10. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
BBL Thioglycollate Medium, Brewer Modified 38.5 g; 11. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
Difco Fluid Thioglycollate Medium w/Beef Extract 34.7 g; International, Gaithersburg, Md.
12. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. 1. AOAC
Difco Thioglycollate Medium w/o Dextrose 24 g; International, Gaithersburg, Md.
13. Federal Register. 1992. Fed. Regist. 21:640.2.17.
Difco Thioglycollate Medium w/o Dextrose or Indicator 14. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
24 g; 15. Federal Register. 1992. Fed. Regist. 21:113.26.
BBL Thioglycollate Medium, Fluid, w/o Dextrose or Eh 16. Reischelderfer and Mangels. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook,
vol. 1. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Indicator 24 g; 17. Dowell, Lombard, Thompson and Armfield. 1977. Media for isolation, characterization, and
identification of obligately anaerobic bacteria. CDC laboratory manual. Center for Disease
Difco Thioglycollate Medium w/o Indicator 29 g; Control, Atlanta, Ga.
18. Chapin and Murray. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
BBL Thioglycollate Medium w/o Indicator 135C 30 g. microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
19. Gibbons and MacDonald. 1960. J. Bacteriol. 80:164.
Mix thoroughly. 20. Wilkins, Chalgren, Jimeniz-Ulate, Drake and Johnson. 1976. J. Clin. Microbiol. 3:359.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 21. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2003. Approved standard: M11-A5. Meth-
ods for antimicrobial susceptibility testing of anaerobic bacteria, 5th ed. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
completely dissolve the powder. 22. Finegold, Sutter, Attebery and Rosenblatt. 1974. In Lennette, Spaulding and Truant (ed.), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 2nd ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Follow label directions specific for each medium.
4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes, or as directed on the Availabilty
label. Difco Fluid Thioglycollate Medium
5. Store fluid thioglycollate media at 15-30C. If more than AOAC BAM BS10 COMPF EP USDA USP
30% of the medium is pink prior to use, reheat once (100C) Cat. No. 225640 Dehydrated 100 g
to drive off absorbed oxygen. 225650 Dehydrated 500 g
225620 Dehydrated 2 kg
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 225630 Dehydrated 10 kg
stable, typical control cultures.
BBL Fluid Thioglycollate Medium
Precautions
AOAC BAM BS10 COMPF EP USDA USP
Cat. No. 211260 Dehydrated 500 g
T
Do not reheat the media more than once; continued reheating 211263 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
gives rise to toxicity. 211264 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
221195 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (K Tubes ) Pkg. of 10*
221196 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
Procedure 220888 Prepared Tubes, 20 mL (A Tubes) Pkg. of 10
Follow the procedures outlined in the references and, where 220889 Prepared Tubes, 20 mL (A Tubes) Ctn. of 100
290622 Prepared Bottles, 100 mL (wide mouth) Pkg. of 10
applicable, in product package inserts. 299108 Prepared Bottles, 100 mL (serum) Pkg. of 10
299417 Prepared Bottles, 100 mL (septum screw cap)
Expected Results Pkg. of 10
After incubation, growth is evidenced by the presence of 257217 Sterile Pack Bottles (double bagged), 100 mL
Pkg. of 10
turbidity compared to an uninoculated control. Strict aerobes 299112 Prepared Bottles, 500 mL (septum screw cap)
tend to grow in a thin layer at the surface of the broth; Pkg. of 10
obligate anaerobes will grow only in that portion of the broth Difco NIH Thioglycollate Broth (USP Alternative
below the upper oxidized layer. Thioglycollate Medium)
USP
Limitation of the Procedure16 Cat. No. 225710 Dehydrated 500 g
Anaerobes can be overgrown by more rapidly growing facul- BBL Sterility Test Broth (USP Alternative Thioglycollate
tative organisms. Examine and Gram stain broth if plating Medium)
USP
medium reveals no growth. Never rely on broth cultures
Cat. No. 211651 Dehydrated 500 g
exclusively for isolation of anaerobes. Some anaerobes may be
inhibited by metabolic products or acids produced from more BBL Thioglycollate Medium, Brewer Modified

Cat. No. 211716 Dehydrated 500 g

rapidly growing facultative anaerobes.
Difco Fluid Thioglycollate Medium with Beef Extract
Cat. No. 269720 Dehydrated 500 g
269710 Dehydrated 10 kg
Difco Thioglycollate Medium without Dextrose
Cat. No. 236310 Dehydrated 500 g

559
Section III
T Thioglycollate Media, cont.

Difco Thioglycollate Medium without Dextrose or BBL Fluid Thioglycollate Medium, Enriched
Indicator Cat. No. 297642 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
Cat. No. 243210 Dehydrated 500 g
BBL Enriched Thioglycollate Medium

BBL Thioglycollate Medium, Fluid, without Dextrose BS10 CMPH MCM7 NCCLS
or Eh Indicator Cat. No. 221741 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
Cat. No. 211727 Dehydrated 500 g 221742 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
221398 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100* 221787 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
221788 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
Difco Thioglycollate Medium without Indicator 297289 Prepared Tubes, 10 mL (D Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
Cat. No. 243010 Dehydrated 500 g 297292 Prepared Tubes, 10 mL (D Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
BBL Thioglycollate Medium without Indicator 135C BBL Thioglycollate Medium with Calcium
BS10 CMPH Carbonate Chip
Cat. No. 211720 Dehydrated 500 g Cat. No. 298518 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100
211723 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
221199 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10* BBL Enriched Thioglycollate Medium with

221200 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100* Calcium Carbonate

221797 Prepared Tubes, 10 mL (D Tubes) Pkg. of 10* Cat. No. 297264 Prepared Tubes, 10 mL (D Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
221798 Prepared Tubes, 10 mL (D Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
*Store at 2-8C.
221047 Prepared Tubes, 20 mL (A Tubes) Ctn. of 100*

Thiol Medium Thiol Broth

Intended Use aids in dispersion of reducing substances and CO2 formed in
Thiol Medium and Thiol Broth are used for cultivating the environment.8
organisms from body fluids and other materials containing
penicillin, streptomycin or sulfonamides. Formulae
Difco Thiol Medium
Summary and Explanation Approximate Formula* Per Liter
1 Proteose Peptone No.3 ............................................ 10.0 g
While studying Vibrio fetus cultivation, Huddleson found Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 4.35 g
that vibrios remained viable in Thiol Medium at room Gelatin ....................................................................... 1.0 g
temperature for at least 150 days without transfer. Christensen2 Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 0.2 g
tested Thiol Medium for the ability to neutralize penicillin and Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
streptomycin. Ten milliliters (10 mL) of Thiol Medium can L-Cystine, Disodium ................................................... 2.4 g
inactivate up to 100 units of penicillin and up to 1,000 micrograms Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 1.0 g
Agar ........................................................................... 1.0 g
of streptomycin, producing luxuriant growth of staphylococci p-Aminobenzoic Acid ................................................. 0.05 g
and other organisms from dilute inocula in 24 hours.
Difco Thiol Broth
3 4
Szawatkowski and Shanson and Barnicoat reported Thiol Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Broth to be superior in supporting the growth of Bacteroides
species in blood cultures. Thiol Broth was used to study the Directions for Preparation from
optimum incubation period of blood culture broths.5 Media
Dehydrated Product
containing thiol and thioglycollate are recommended for
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
recovery of nutritionally variant streptococci (NVS).6
Difco Thiol Medium - 30 g;
Thiol Broth has the same formulation as Thiol Medium, omit- Difco Thiol Broth - 29 g.
ting the agar. Thiol (Broth) is cited in Clinical Microbiology Mix thoroughly.
Procedures Handbook7 as a medium specific for anaerobic 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
bacteria in blood cultures. pletely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Principles of the Procedure 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Peptones and yeast extract provide nitrogen, vitamins and stable, typical control cultures.
amino acids in Thiol media. Dextrose is a carbon source.
Sodium chloride maintains osmotic balance. Para-aminobenzoic Procedure
acid is a preservative. Sodium thioglycollate and L-cystine are For a complete discussion on processing and interpretation of
is rich in sulfhydryl (-SH) groups, which neutralize the bacte- blood cultures and other specimens, refer to appropriate refer-
riostatic and bactericidal effects of penicillin, streptomycin ences.7,9
and sulfonamides. Thiol Medium contains 0.1% agar to
maintain an Eh potential that facilities anaerobic growth and

560
 Thiotone E Peptone

User Quality Control Expected Results

Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Identity Specifications
Difco Thiol Medium Limitation of the Procedure
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Strict reliance on blood culture bottles containing Thiol Broth
neous.
is not recommended for aerobic microorganisms. Always use
Solution: 3% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is very an aerobic medium for optimum isolation of the broad
light to light amber, clear to very spectrum of microorganisms that can cause bacteremia or
slightly opalescent when hot. septicemia.
Prepared Appearance: Very light amber, opalescent after
cooling. References
Reaction of 3% 1. Huddleson. 1948. J. Bacteriol. 56:508.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2 2. Christensen. 1947. Presented at the Michigan Branch, Society of American Bacteriologists, Detroit,
Mich., December 12, 1947.
Difco Thiol Broth 3. Szawatkowski. 1976. Med. Lab. Sci. 33:5.
4. Shanson and Barnicoat. 1975. J. Clin. Pathol. 28:407.
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- 5. Murray. 1985. J. Clin. Microbiol. 21:481.
neous. 6. Donnelly. 1994. Infect. Dis. Alert 6:109.
7. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
Solution: 2.9% solution, soluble in purified water Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
upon boiling. Solution is very light to light 8. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance medical bacteria, vol
1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
amber, clear to slightly opalescent. 9. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Prepared Appearance: Very light amber, clear to slightly
opalescent.
Reaction of 2.9% Availability
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.2 Difco Thiol Medium
Cat. No. 230710 Dehydrated 500 g
Cultural Response Difco Thiol Broth
Difco Thiol Medium or Thiol Broth
Cat. No. 243420 Dehydrated 500 g
Prepare the medium per label directions. Test without and with concen- 243410 Dehydrated 10 kg
trations of 5, 100 and 1,000 units of penicillin and 100, 1,000 and
10,000 g of streptomycin per 10 mL tube. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-48 hours.

ORGANISM ATCC
INOCULUM
CFU
RECOVERY RECOVERY
w/o ANTIBIOTICS w/ANTIBIOTICS T
Staphylococcus
aureus 25923 102-103 Good Good
Streptococcus
pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good Good
Antibiotic concentrations up to 100 units of penicillin or 1,000 g of streptomycin.

Thiotone E Peptone
Intended Use organisms. Thiotone E Peptone is used in Modified HL5
Thiotone E Peptone is used as a component in microbiological Medium, one of the main media used for culturing the cellular
culture media. slime mold Dictyostelium discoideum.
Media formulations containing Thiotone E Peptone are
Summary and Explanation specified in standard methods for various applications.2,4,5
Thiotone E Peptone has been recommended for use in blood
agar formulae for hemolysis studies with pneumococci and Principles of the Procedure
streptococci. Thiotone E Peptone is high in sulfur amino Thiotone E Peptone is an enzymatic digest of animal tissue.
acids and can be used in media to detect hydrogen sulfide Thiotone E Peptone contains a wide range of peptide sizes,
production. Tortora1 utilized Thiotone E Peptone as the nitro- including the large molecular weight peptides, which support
gen source in a medium promoting sporulation of Clostridium fastidious organisms. This ingredient provides nitrogen, amino
perfringens strains. Thiotone E Peptone is recommended for acids and vitamins in microbiological culture media.
use in media for testing water samples for coliforms.2 Kwinn3
utilized Thiotone E Peptone as a supplement to her medium Typical Analysis
for Corynebacterium glutamicum to make the cells Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of this
electrocompetent for transformations. Thiotone E Peptone has manual.
also been cited as an ingredient in media for nonbacterial

561
Section III
T Thiotone E Peptone, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
BBL Thiotone E Peptone
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous material.
Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified water. Solution is clear to moderately hazy.
Reaction of 2.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5-7.5

Cultural Response
Biochemical Reactions
BBL Thiotone E Peptone
Prepare a sterile solution of Thiotone E Peptone as directed below. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
TEST TEST SOLUTION ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT
Fermentable Carbohydrates 2% Escherichia coli 29552 ~107 Positive
Indole Production 0.1% Escherichia coli 29552 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Acetylmethylcarbinol 0.1% with Enterobacter 13048 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Production 0.5% dextrose aerogenes
Hydrogen Sulfide Production 1% Citrobacter freundii 8454 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive

Growth Response
BBL Thiotone E Peptone
Prepare a sterile solution of peptone agar without (plain) and with 5% sheep blood (SB) using 10 g of Thiotone E Peptone, 2.5 g of sodium chloride and
6.5 g of agar in 500 mL of purified water. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate plates at 35 2C for 2-3 days (incubate streptococci with
3-5% CO2).
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY PLAIN RECOVERY WITH SB HEMOLYSIS
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-104 Good N/A
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 103-104 N/A Good Alpha
Streptococcus pyogenes 49117 104-105 Good Good Beta

Directions for Preparation from References

1. Tortora. 1984. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 47:1172.
Dehydrated Product 2. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, DC.
Refer to the final concentration of Thiotone E Peptone in the 3. Kwinn. 2001. Bug Journal, Biology Department, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. 4:193.
formula of the medium being prepared. Add product as 4. Horowitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
required. 5. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.

Procedure Availability
See appropriate references for specific procedures using BBL Thiotone E Peptone
Thiotone E Peptone. AOAC BAM SMWW
Cat. No. 212302 Dehydrated 500 g
Expected Results
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.

Tinsdale Agar Base

Tinsdale Enrichment Desiccated
Intended Use tory tract but occasionally of the skin,1 is caused by toxigenic
Tinsdale Agar Base is used with Tinsdale Enrichment Desic- strains of Corynebacterium diphtheriae. The three biotypes
cated in isolating and differentiating Corynebacterium are mitis, intermedius and gravis.1 The signs and symptoms of
diphtheriae. the disease are a pharyngeal membrane, sore throat, malaise,
headache and nausea.2 Death can result from respiratory
Summary and Explanation obstruction by the membrane or myocarditis caused by the toxin.2
Tinsdale Agar Base, supplemented with Tinsdale Enrichment, Tinsdale3 developed a serum-cystine-thiosulfate-tellurite agar
is employed in the cultural diagnosis of diphtheria. Diphthe- medium for the primary isolation and differentiation of
ria, an acute infectious disease primarily of the upper respira-
562
 Tinsdale Agar Base, cont.

Uninoculated Corynebacterium diphtheriae

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 8028

Identity Specifications
Difco Tinsdale Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free flowing, homoge-
neous.
Solution: 4.5% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light to
medium amber, slightly opalescent to
opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly
opalescent to opalescent.
Reaction of 4.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
Difco Tinsdale Enrichment Desiccated
Desiccated Appearance: Light to dark tan cake; variations may
occur.
Solution: Soluble in purified water. Solution is
light to dark amber, clear to opalescent,
may have a slight precipitate.

Cultural Response
Difco Tinsdale Agar Base with Tinsdale Enrichment
Desiccated
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate to obtain discrete
colonies and stab several times using an inoculating needle; incubate at
35 2C for 18-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY APPEARANCE
Corynebacterium diphtheriae
biotype gravis 8028 102-103 Good Brown with halos
Corynebacterium diphtheriae
biotype mitis 8024 102-103 Good Brown with halos
Klebsiella pneumoniae 13883 102-103 Marked to complete T
inhibition
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 102-103 Poor to fair Brown to black without halos

C. diphtheriae. This formulation distinguished between L-cystine and sodium thiosulfate are H2S indicators. Potassium
C. diphtheriae and diphtheroids which exhibited similar tellurite is a selective agent. The formation of black to brown
characteristics. The differential principle is based on the halos surrounding the colony results from the reduction of
capacity of C. diphtheriae to produce a brown or black halo potassium tellurite to metallic tellurite.
around the colonies.
Stabbing the medium with an inoculating needle accentuates
Billings4 simplified Tinsdale Basal Medium by using Proteose darkening of the medium by C. diphtheriae.
Peptone No. 3 as a nutrient source. This modification improved
the differential qualities and recovery of C. diphtheriae. Tinsdale Formulae
Agar Base and Tinsdale Enrichment are prepared according to Difco Tinsdale Agar Base
the Billings4 modification. Moore and Parsons5 confirmed Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 20.0 g
the halo formation of C. diphtheriae with one exception; Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
C. ulcerans occasionally produced colonies similar to Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g
C. diphtheriae and required biochemical identification. Difco Tinsdale Enrichment Desiccated
Contains Bovine Serum, L-Cystine, Sodium Hydroxide, Sodium
Tinsdale Enrichment Desiccated contains bovine serum, sodium Thiosulfate and Potassium Tellurite at pH 8.0-10.0.
hydroxide, L-cystine, sodium thiosulfate and potassium *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
tellurite in the quantity and proportion described by Billings.4
Directions for Preparation from
Principles of the Procedure Dehydrated Product
Peptone provides the nitrogen, vitamins, carbon and amino Difco Tinsdale Agar Base
acids in Tinsdale Agar Base. Sodium chloride maintains the 1. Suspend 45 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
osmotic balance of the medium. Agar is the solidifying agent. thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Tinsdale Enrichment contains bovine serum, which provides
completely dissolve the powder.
essential growth factors. Sodium hydroxide maintains the pH.
563
Section III
T Tinsdale Agar Base, cont.

3. Dispense 100 mL amounts into flasks. Limitations of the Procedure

4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. 1. Tinsdale Agar is not suitable as a primary plating medium,
5. Aseptically add 15 mL rehydrated Tinsdale Enrichment to since it may not support the growth of some strains of
each 100 mL at 50-55C. Mix well. C. diphtheriae.1
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 2. C. ulcerans, C. pseudotuberculosis and (rarely) Staphylo-
stable, typical control cultures. coccus species may produce a characteristic halo on Tinsdale
Difco Tinsdale Enrichment Desiccated Agar.1
1. Rehydrate with 15 mL sterile purified water. 3. Do not read Tinsdale Agar early because several organisms
2. Rotate in an end-over-end motion to dissolve completely. may exhibit slight browning on this medium in 18 hours.1
4. Incubation in 5-10% CO2 retards the development of
Procedure halos on Tinsdale Agar.1
1. For a complete discussion on the collection, isolation and 5. On media containing tellurite, diphtheria bacilli are shorter
identification of C. diphtheriae and other Corynebacterium and stain more uniformly; however, granules are less readily
species, refer to the appropriate procedures outlined in the observed than when grown on Loefflers medium.7
references.1,2,6 6. Further biochemical tests may be necessary to distinguish
2. Inoculate plates with the test organisms in a manner to between C. diphtheriae and C. ulcerans due to similar
obtain discrete colonies and stab the medium several times reactions on this medium.
with an inoculating needle.
3. Definitive identification of a strain of C. diphtheriae as a References
1. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
true pathogen requires demonstration of toxin production.6 Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. Funke and Bernard. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical
Characteristic colonies of C. diphtheriae may be inoculated microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Tinsdale. 1947. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 59:461.
directly onto KL Virulence Agar enriched with KL 4. Billings. 1956. An investigation of Tinsdale Tellurite medium: its usefulness and mechanisms of
Virulence Enrichment and containing Taxo KL Antitoxin halo-formation. M.S. thesis. University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, Mich.
5. Moore and Parsons. 1958. J. Infect. Dis. 102:88.
Strips for toxigenicity tests. 6. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.,
St. Louis, Mo.
7. Bailey and Scott. 1966. Diagnostic microbiology, 2nd ed. The C. V. Mosby Company, St. Louis, Mo.
Expected Results
The appearance of brown-black colored colonies surrounded Availability
by brown-black halos is presumptive evidence for Difco Tinsdale Agar Base
C. diphtheriae.1 Cat. No. 278610 Dehydrated 500 g
Difco Tinsdale Enrichment Desiccated

Cat. No. 234210 Tube 6 15 mL*

*Store at 2-8C.

Bacto Todd Hewitt Broth Todd Hewitt Broth

Todd Hewitt Broth with Gentamicin and Nalidixic Acid
Intended Use Since its emergence in the 1970s, neonatal group B streptococcal
Todd Hewitt Broth is a general-purpose medium, which disease has become the major infectious cause of illness and
primarily is used for the cultivation of beta-hemolytic strepto- death among newborns. Prior to 1994, an estimated 7,600
cocci, especially for serological studies. episodes of invasive group B streptococcal disease, primarily
sepsis and meningitis, occurred in newborns each year in the
Todd Hewitt Broth with Gentamicin and Nalidixic Acid is used
United States, with approximately 80% of those episodes
for the selective enrichment of group B streptococci (Strepto-
representing early-onset disease occurring within the first week
coccus agalactiae), especially from genital specimens.
of life.5 The disease is spread to newborns through vertical
transmission from a mother who carries group B streptococci
Summary and Explanation
in her anorectum or genital tract.
Todd Hewitt broth originally was developed for use in the
production of streptococcal hemolysin.1 The modification of The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) has
Updyke and Nickle2 is used for the growth of beta-hemolytic published guidelines for screening and use of intrapartum
streptococci for use in fluorescent antibody test procedures3 chemoprophylaxis for prevention of neonatal group B
and for serological typing based on the production of streptococcal disease.6 The use of Todd Hewitt Broth with
type-specific M protein.4 Gentamicin and Nalidixic Acid (or Lim Broth) is recommended
to maximize the likelihood of recovering group B streptococci
upon plating on sheep blood agar.
564
 Todd Hewitt Broth, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Bacto Todd Hewitt Broth BBL Todd Hewitt Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
neous. ous material.
Solution: 3.0% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 3.0% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light to medium water. Solution is light to medium,
amber, clear. tan to yellow, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear. Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, tan to yellow, clear
Reaction of 3.0% to slightly hazy.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.8 0.2 Reaction of 3.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.8 0.2
Cultural Response
Bacto Todd Hewitt Broth Cultural Response
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at BBL Todd Hewitt Broth
35 2C for 18-48 hours. Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-24 hours.

ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 102-103 Good ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT

Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 103 Growth
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6303 102-103 Good Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 103 Growth
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good Streptococcus, Group B 12386 103 Growth

Group B streptococci have also been found in cases of sepsis BBL Todd Hewitt Broth
in nonparturient women and in men and in joint infection, Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Heart, Infusion from (solids) ....................................... 3.1 g
osteomyelitis, urinary tract infection and wound infection. They Peptonen ................................................................. 20.0 g
are associated with endocarditis, pneumonia and pyelonephritis Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.0 g
in immunosuppressed patients.7
Sodium Phosphate ..................................................... 0.4
Sodium Carbonate ..................................................... 2.5
g
g
T
Principles of the Procedure *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Todd Hewitt Broth is highly nutritious due to its content of
peptones, dextrose and salts. Dextrose stimulates hemolysin Directions for Preparation from
production. Sodium phosphate and sodium carbonate Dehydrated Product
provide buffering action to counteract the acidity produced 1. Dissolve the powder in 1 L of purified water:
during fermentation of dextrose, thereby protecting the hemol- Bacto Todd Hewitt Broth 30 g;
ysin from inactivation by the acid.4 BBL Todd Hewitt Broth 30 g.
2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Selectivity for group B streptococci is obtained by the inclu-
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
sion of gentamicin and nalidixic acid in the medium. Selective
stable, typical control cultures.
enrichment broths include the advantages of both enrichment
and selection by providing conditions conducive to the growth
Procedure
of group B streptococci while inhibiting the growth of
Incubate throat swabs in loosely-capped tubes of Todd Hewitt
contaminants.
Broth at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere with or without
Formulae added carbon dioxide for 2-5 hours prior to use in fluorescent
antibody procedures for the identification of group A strepto-
Bacto Todd Hewitt Broth
Approximate Formula* Per Liter cocci. Incubation may be continued for approximately 24 hours
Heart, Infusion from 500 g ......................................... 3.1 g prior to streaking for isolation on blood agar plates. Pure
Neopeptone ............................................................. 20.0 g cultures of streptococci may be cultured in Todd Hewitt Broth
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 2.0 g
prior to the preparation of extracts for serological typing.
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 0.4 g Consult appropriate references for specific serological test
Sodium Carbonate ..................................................... 2.5 g
procedures.2,8
Incubate tubes of Todd Hewitt Broth with Gentamicin and
Nalidixic Acid in an aerobic atmosphere with or without added
carbon dioxide. If turbidity is observed, subculture from the

565
Section III
T Todd Hewitt Broth, cont.

broth culture to a sheep blood agar plate; otherwise, incubate Availability

an additional 24 hours before discarding.9 Bacto Todd Hewitt Broth
SMWW
Expected Results Cat No. 249230 Dehydrated 100 g
249240 Dehydrated 500 g
Growth in broth medium is indicated by the presence of
249210 Dehydrated 2 kg
turbidity compared to an uninoculated control. 249220 Dehydrated 10 kg
Subculture to a Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II) BBL Todd Hewitt Broth
plate and incubate for 18-24 hours, or up to 48 hours if necessary. SMWW

Identify organisms suggestive of group B streptococci (- or Cat. No. 211735 Dehydrated 100 g
211736 Dehydrated 500 g
non-hemolytic, gram-positive and catalase negative). Specific 297778 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 0.5 mL Pkg. of 10
identification may be performed; e.g., using streptococcal grouping 221713 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 5 mL Pkg. of 10
sera, the CAMP test or other procedures. 221714 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 5 mL Ctn. of 100
BBL Todd Hewitt Broth with Gentamicin and
References Nalidixic Acid
1. Todd and Hewitt. 1932. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 35:973. Cat No. 299486 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
2. Updyke and Nickle. 1954. Appl. Microbiol. 2:117.
3. Jones, Hebert and Cherry. 1978. Fluorescent antibody techniques and bacterial applications, HEW *Store at 2-8C.
Publication (CDC) No. 78-8364. Center for Disease Control, Atlanta, Ga.
4. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
5. Federal Register. 1994. Prevention of group B streptococcal disease: a public health perspective.
Fed. Regist. 59:64764.
6. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. 2002. Morbid. Mortal. Weekly Rep. 51(No. RR-11): 1.
7. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby,
Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
8. Facklam and Washington II. 1991. In Balows, Hausler, Hermann, Isenberg and Shadomy (ed.),
Manual of clinical microbiology, 5th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
9. Isenberg (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Tomato Juice Media

Tomato Juice Agar Tomato Juice Agar Special
Tomato Juice Broth
Intended Use the diagnosis of caries. This medium is more selective for
Tomato Juice Agar is used for cultivating and enumerating lactobacilli than Tomato Juice Agar.
Lactobacillus species. Tomato Juice Broth is recommended for use in cultivating and
Tomato Juice Agar Special is used for cultivating and enumer- isolating yeasts, lactobacilli and other aciduric microorganisms
ating lactobacilli and other acidophilic microorganisms from from clinical specimens and foods.
saliva and other specimens.
Principles of the Procedure
Tomato Juice Broth is used for cultivating yeasts and other Tomato Juice Agar and Tomato Juice Agar Special
aciduric microorganisms. Tomato juice is a source of carbon, protein and nutrients.
Peptone provides a source of nitrogen, amino acids and
Summary and Explanation
carbon. Peptonized milk contains lactose as an energy source.
In 1925, Mickle and Breed1 reported the use of tomato juice
Agar is the solidifying agent.
in culture media used for cultivating lactobacilli. Kulp 2 inves-
tigated the use of tomato juice on bacterial development and Tomato Juice Broth
found that the growth of L. acidophilus was enhanced. Tomato juice is a source of carbon, protein and nutrients. Yeast
Tomato Juice Agar, prepared according to Kulp and Whites3 extract is a source of trace elements, vitamins and amino
modification, is especially useful in cultivating L. acidophilus acids. Dipotassium phosphate and monopotassium phosphate
from clinical specimens and foodstuffs.4 provide buffering capability. Magnesium sulfate, ferrous
sulfate and manganese sulfate provide inorganic ions. Sodium
Tomato Juice Agar Special is recommended for the direct plate
chloride is a source of essential ions.
count of lactobacilli from saliva and for cultivation of other
acidophilic microorganisms. The acidic pH of Tomato Juice Agar
Special encourages growth of lactobacilli while inhibiting growth
of accompanying bacteria. The number of lactobacilli in saliva
is an index of a predisposition to dental caries as described by
Jay.5, 6 Many dentists use the direct count of lactobacilli for
566
 Tomato Juice Media, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications Cultural Response
Difco Tomato Juice Agar Difco Tomato Juice Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, homogeneous. Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the pour plate
Solution: 5.1% solution, soluble in purified technique and incubate at 35 2C for 40-48 hours.
water upon boiling. Solution is ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
medium to dark amber, very slightly
opalescent. Lactobacillus acidophilus 4356 102-103 Good
Lactobacillus rhamnosus 9595 102-103 Good
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark amber, very slightly
opalescent. Lactobacillus delbrueckii
subsp. lactis 4797 102-103 Good
Reaction of 5.1%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.1 0.2 Difco Tomato Juice Agar Special
Difco Tomato Juice Agar Special
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, homogeneous. 35 2C for 18-48 hours (72 hours if necessary).
Solution: 6.0% solution, soluble in purified ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
water upon boiling. Solution is Lactobacillus acidophilus 4356 102-103 Good
medium to dark amber, slightly Lactobacillus rhamnosus 9595 102-103 Good
opalescent.
Lactobacillus delbrueckii
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark amber, slightly opal- subsp. lactis 4797 102-103 Good
escent.
Reaction of 6.0% Difco Tomato Juice Broth

Solution at 25C: pH 5.0 0.2 Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-72 hours.
Difco Tomato Juice Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, homogeneous and ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
may contain dark particles. Lactobacillus rhamnosus 9595 102-103 Good
Solution: 4.1% solution, soluble in purified Lactobacillus delbrueckii
water upon boiling. Solution is dark subsp. lactis 4797 102-103 Good
amber, clear. Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9080 102-103 Good
Prepared Appearance: Dark amber, clear. Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 102-103 Good
Reaction of 4.1%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.7 0.2 T
Uninoculated Lactobacillus rhamnosus
Plate ATCC 9595 Formulae
Difco Tomato Juice Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Tomato Juice (from 400 mL) ..................................... 20.0 g
Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
Peptonized Milk ....................................................... 10.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 11.0 g
Difco Tomato Juice Agar Special
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Tomato Juice (from 400 mL) ..................................... 20.0 g
Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
Peptonized Milk ....................................................... 10.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g
Difco Tomato Juice Broth
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Tomato Juice (from 400 mL) ..................................... 20.0 g
Yeast Extract ............................................................ 10.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 0.5 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 0.5 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.1 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 0.01 g
Ferrous Sulfate ........................................................... 0.01 g
Manganese Sulfate .................................................... 0.01 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

567
Section III
T Tomato Juice Media, cont.

Directions for Preparation from Expected Results

Dehydrated Product Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Equilibrate the medium to room temperature before opening.
References
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water: 1. Mickle and Breed. 1925. Technical Bulletin 110. N.Y. State Agriculture Exp. Station, Geneva, N.Y.
2. Kulp. 1927. Science 66:512.
Difco Tomato Juice Agar 51 g; 3. Kulp and White. 1932. Science 76:17.
Difco Tomato Juice Agar Special 60 g; 4. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification- maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Difco Tomato Juice Broth 41 g. 5. Jay and Gordon (ed). 1938. Bacteriology and immunology of dental caries and dental science and
dental art. Lea and Febiger, Philadelphia, Pa.
Mix thoroughly. 6. Jay, Pelton and Wisan. 1949. Dentistry in public health. W. B. Saunders Company, Philadelphia, Pa.

2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to

completely dissolve the powder. Availability
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Avoid overheating Difco Tomato Juice Agar
Tomato Juice Agar Special, which could cause a softer Cat. No. 211794 Dehydrated 500 g*
medium. Difco Tomato Juice Agar Special

4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Cat. No. 238910 Dehydrated 500 g*
stable, typical control cultures. Difco Tomato Juice Broth
Cat. No. 251720 Dehydrated 500 g*
Procedure 251710 Dehydrated 10 kg*
See appropriate references for specific procedures. *Store at 2-8C.

Transport Media
Transport Medium Amies Transport Medium Amies
without Charcoal Transport Medium (Stuart, Toshach
and Patsula) Cary and Blair Transport Medium
Intended Use Due to its high pH, Cary and Blair Transport Medium is also
Transport Medium Amies, Transport Medium Amies without effective in maintaining the viability of Vibrio cultures for up
Charcoal and Transport Medium (Stuart, Toshach and Patsula) to four weeks.8 Cary and Blair Transport Medium is currently
are used for collecting, transporting and preserving microbio- recommended for fecal and rectal samples.
logical specimens. Amies9 confirmed Cary and Blairs observations that an
Cary and Blair Transport Medium is used for collecting, trans- inorganic salt buffer was superior to the glycerophosphate.
porting and preserving microbiological specimens, particularly He further modified the formulation by using a balanced salt
those containing Vibrio cholerae. solution containing inorganic phosphate buffer, omitting the
methylene blue and adding charcoal. This modified medium
Summary and Explanation yielded a higher percentage of positive cultures than the
Transport media are chemically defined, semisolid, nonnutritive, transport medium of Stuart. Transport Medium Amies, avail-
phosphate buffered media that provide a reduced environment. able with and without charcoal, is recommended for throat,
Transport media are formulated to maintain the viability of vaginal and wound samples. Amies media are especially suited
microorganisms without significant increase in growth. for specimens containing Neisseria gonorrhoeae.
In 1948, Moffett, Young and Stuart described a medium for
Principles of the Procedure
transporting gonococcal specimens to the laboratory.1 Stuart,
In the formulations, potassium chloride, calcium chloride,
Toshach and Patsula improved this formulation, introducing
magnesium chloride and sodium chloride provide essential ions
what is now known as Stuarts Transport Medium.2 The
that help maintain osmotic balance while controlling perme-
ability of Stuarts medium to maintain the viability of gonococci
ability of bacterial cells. Monopotassium phosphate and
during transport3,4 led other researchers to explore its use with
disodium phosphate provide buffering capabilities. Sodium
a variety of specimens. This medium is currently recommended
thioglycollate suppresses oxidative changes and provides a
for throat, vaginal and wound samples.
reduced environment. Sodium glycerophosphate is a buffer for
In 1964, Cary and Blair modified Stuarts medium by substi- use with calcium chloride. Methylene blue is a colorimetric
tuting inorganic phosphates for glycerophosphate and raising pH indicator of the oxidation-reduction state. Charcoal
the pH to 8.4.5 The modified medium was effective in maintaining neutralizes fatty acids that are toxic to microorganisms. Agar
the viability of Salmonella and Shigella6,7 in fecal samples. makes the media semi-solid.

568
 Transport Media, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Transport Medium Amies BBL Transport Medium (Stuart, Toshach and Patsula)
Dehydrated Appearance: Black, free-flowing, homogeneous. Dehydrated Appearance: Slightly moist, granular, softly
Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified clumped, free of extraneous material,
water upon boiling. Solution is black, may contain minute to small white
opaque. particles.
Prepared Appearance: Black, opaque, semi-solid. Solution: 1.41% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is pale,
Reaction of 2.0% yellow with light blue-green top, clear
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2 to slightly hazy.
Difco Transport Medium Amies without Charcoal Prepared Appearance: Pale, yellow with light blue-green top,
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. clear to slightly hazy.
Solution: 1.0% solution, soluble in purified Reaction of 1.41%
water upon boiling. Solution is color- Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
less to very light amber, opalescent
BBL Cary and Blair Transport Medium
with precipitate.
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
Prepared Appearance: Colorless to very light amber, opales- ous material.
cent with precipitate, semi-solid.
Solution: 12.6 g/991 mL, soluble in purified
Reaction of 1.0% water upon boiling. Solution is light
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2 to medium, gray, hazy to cloudy.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, gray, hazy to cloudy.
Cultural Response
Reaction of 12.6 g/991 mL
Difco Transport Medium Amies or Transport
Solution at 25C: pH 8.0 0.5
Medium Amies without Charcoal
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate sterile swabs with
suspensions of test organisms containing 103-104 CFU/0.1 mL. Place
Cultural Response
swabs in the medium and incubate at room temperature for 18-24 BBL Transport Medium (Stuart, Toshach and Patsula)
hours. Remove swabs, streak on prepared chocolate agar plates and Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate charcoal impreg-
incubate appropriately. All cultures should be viable.
ORGANISM ATCC
nated sterile swabs with heavy suspensions of the test organisms. Place
in the medium and incubate at 25 2C for 66-72 hours. Remove T
swabs, streak on TSA with 5% sheep blood plates or Chocolate II agar
Bacteroides fragilis 25285 plates for (*) organisms and incubate plates at 35 2C for 18-24
Haemophilus influenzae Type b 10211 hours under appropriate atmospheric conditions.
Neisseria gonorrhoeae 43069 ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY
Neisseria meningitidis Group B 13090
Haemophilus influenzae* 10211 Good
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305
Neisseria gonorrhoeae* 19424 Good
Streptococcus pyogenes Group A 19615
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 Good

BBL Cary and Blair Transport Medium

Formulae Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate sterile swabs with
heavy suspensions of the test organisms. Place in the medium and
Difco Transport Medium Amies

incubate at 25 2C for 18-24 hours. Remove swabs, streak on
Approximate Formula* Per Liter TSA with 5% sheep blood plates or Chocolate II agar plates for (*)
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 3.0 g organisms and incubate plates at 35 2C for 18-24 hours under
Potassium Chloride .................................................... 0.2 g appropriate atmospheric conditions.
Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.1 g
Magnesium Chloride .................................................. 0.1 g ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 0.2 g Haemophilus influenzae* 10211 Good
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 1.15 g Neisseria gonorrhoeae* 19424 Good
Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 1.0 g
Shigella flexneri 9199 Good
Charcoal ................................................................... 10.0 g
Agar ........................................................................... 4.0 g Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 Good

Difco Transport Medium Amies without Charcoal

Consists of the same ingredients without the charcoal.
BBL Transport Medium (Stuart, Toshach and Patsula) BBL Cary and Blair Transport Medium
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 1.0 g Sodium Thioglycollate ................................................ 1.5 g
Sodium Glycerophosphate ....................................... 10.0 g Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 1.1 g
Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.1 g Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Methylene Blue .......................................................... 2.0 mg Agar ........................................................................... 5.0 g
Agar ........................................................................... 3.0 g *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

569
Section III
T Transport Media, cont.

Directions for Preparation from Expected Results

Dehydrated Product Survival of bacteria in a transport medium depends on many
Difco Transport Medium Amies or Transport Medium
factors including the type and concentration of bacteria in the
Amies without Charcoal specimen, the formulation of the transport medium, the
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water: temperature and duration of transport and inoculation to
Difco Transport Medium Amies 20 g; appropriate culture media within 24 hours.
Difco Transport Medium Amies w/o Charcoal 9.8 g.
Optimal growth and typical morphology can only be expected
Mix thoroughly.
following direct inoculation and appropriate cultivation.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder. Limitations of the Procedure
3. Dispense into 6-8 mL screw-cap vials to within 5 mm of 1. Specimens taken from transport media will not exhibit the
the top. Cap tightly. optimal or comparative growth as expected from direct
4. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. inoculation and cultivation. These media do, however,
5. Retighten caps, if necessary. For Transport Medium Amies, provide an adequate degree of preservation for those
invert vials just prior to solidification to uniformly distribute specimens which cannot be forwarded immediately to
the charcoal. the laboratory for prompt evaluation.
6. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 2. Viability of cells will diminish over time and some degree
stable, typical control cultures. of multiplication or growth of contaminants can occur
BBL Transport Medium (Stuart, Toshach and Patsula) during prolonged periods of transit. This is particularly true
1. Suspend 14.1 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. of fecal specimens that contain substantial numbers of
Mix thoroughly. coliform organisms.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 3. The condition of the specimen received by the laboratory
completely dissolve the powder. for culture is a significant variable in recovery and final
3. Dispense in small screw-capped bottles or vials, filling them identification of the suspect pathogen. An unsatisfactory
almost to capacity. Leave only enough space to permit specimen (overgrown by contaminants, containing nonvi-
acceptance of a small swab without overflow when in use. able organisms, or having the number of pathogens greatly
6. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes or steam for 1 hour. diminished) can lead to erroneous or inconclusive results.
After autoclaving, tighten caps immediately. 4. For transport of specimens that may contain N. gonorrhoeae,
7. Test samples of the finished product for performance using the use of a selective medium, such as JEMBEC or Gono-
stable, typical control cultures. Pak systems, should also be considered.
BBL Cary and Blair Transport Medium
References
1. Suspend 12.6 g of the powder in 991 mL of purified water. 1. Moffett, Young and Stuart. 1948. Br. Med. J. 2:421.
2. Stuart, Toshach and Patsula. 1954. Can. J. Public Health 45:73.
Mix thoroughly. 3. Stuart. 1946. Glasgow M. J. 27:131.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 4.
5.
Stuart. 1959. Public Health Reports 74:431.
Cary and Blair. 1964. J. Bacteriol. 88:96.
completely dissolve the powder. 6. Cary, Matthew, Fusillo and Harkins. 1965. Am. J. Clin. Path. 43:294.
7. Neuman, Benenson, Hubster and Thi Nhu Tuan. 1971. N. Am. J. Clin. Path. 57:33.
3. Cool to 50C and add 9 mL of 1% aqueous calcium chloride. 8. Kelly, Hickman-Brenner and Farmer. 1991. In Balows, Hausler, Herrmann, Isenberg and Shadomy
(ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology, 5th ed.. American Society for Microbiology, Washington
4. Adjust the pH to approximately 8.4, if necessary. D.C.
9. Amies. 1967. Can. J. Public Health 58:296.
5. Dispense in 7 mL amounts in 9 mL screw-capped test tubes.
6. Steam for 15 minutes. Cool. Tighten caps.
Availability
7. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Difco Transport Medium Amies
stable, typical control cultures. Cat. No. 212225 Dehydrated 500 g

Procedure Difco Transport Medium Amies without Charcoal

Cat. No. 283210 Dehydrated 500 g

1. Obtain specimen with sterile swab. Insert specimen swab(s)
into the upper third of the medium in the transport con- BBL Amies Transport Medium without Charcoal
Cat. No. 297643 Prepared Tubes, 9 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100
tainer.
2. Cut with sterile scissors or break-off the protruding portion BBL Transport Medium (Stuart, Toshach and Patsula)

of the swab stick. Tightly screw the lid on the bottle or vial. Cat. No. 211743 Dehydrated 500 g*

3. Label the bottle or vial and send to the laboratory with BBL Cary and Blair Transport Medium
minimum delay. Specimens may be refrigerated until ready Cat. No. 211102 Dehydrated 500 g*
297611 Prepared Tubed Deeps, 10 mL (D Tubes)
for shipment. Ctn. of 100
4. Submit to laboratory within 24 hours for culture and analysis. *Store at 2-8C.

570
 Trichophyton Agars 1 7

Trichophyton Agars 1 7
Intended Use isolate requires inositol, thiamine or both. Trichophyton Agar
Trichophyton Agars are differential media used in the presump- 5, equivalent to Trichophyton Agar 1 with added nicotinic acid
tive identification of Trichophyton species based on nutritional (2 mg/L), is used with medium 1 to determine the requirement
requirements. for nicotinic acid, and medium 7 is used with medium 6 to
determine the requirement for histidine.
Summary and Explanation
Members of the genus Trichophyton have specific nutritional Principles of the Procedure
requirements that are essential for definitive identification.1-3 Nutritional requirements are determined by inoculating a
Georg and Camp devised a set of chemically-defined media control medium and a medium enriched with a specific
for differentiation and identification of Trichophyton isolates vitamin or amino acid with Trichophyton isolates that have
based on specific vitamin and amino acid requirements.4 These been presumptively identified by gross colony characteristics
requirements are determined by comparing growth in a basal and microscopic morphology.1-6 Moderate to heavy growth in
medium (Trichophyton Agar 1 or 6) with the amount of growth the vitamin- or amino acid-enriched medium compared to little
obtained by providing a specific nutrient. Trichophyton Agar or no growth in the basal medium indicates that the isolate
2, 3 and 4 are used with medium 1 to determine whether an requires that nutrient.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Trichophyton Agars 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 or 7
Dehydrated Appearance: White to off-white, free-flowing, homo-
geneous.
Solution: 5.9% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light to medium
amber, slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal-
escent. T
Reaction of 5.9%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Trichophyton Agars 1, 2 or 3
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
and incubate at 30 2C for up to 2 weeks.

RECOVERY RECOVERY
ORGANISM ATCC AGARS 1 & 2 AGAR 3 Uninoculated Trichophyton
Tube schoenleinii
Trichophyton concentricum 9358 Good Good ATCC 4822
Trichophyton schoenleinii 4822 Good Good
Trichophyton verrucosum 34470 None to poor Good

Difco Trichophyton Agar 4

Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
and incubate at 30 2C for up to 2 weeks.
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY
Trichophyton rubrum 28188 Good
Trichophyton verrucosum 34470 Poor
Trichophyton violaceum 8376 Good

Difco Trichophyton Agars 6 or 7

Prepare Trichophyton Agar 6 per label directions, plain and with 0.03 g/L
L-Histidine HCl. Prepare Trichophyton Agar 7 per label directions. Inocu-
late with fresh cultures and incubate at 30 2C for up to 2 weeks.
RECOVERY AGAR 6 RECOVERY AGAR 6 WITH RECOVERY
ORGANISM ATCC PLAIN L-HISTIDINE HCL AGAR 7
Microsporum gallinae 22243 Good Good Good
Trichophyton megninii 12106 Poor Good Good

571
Section III
T Trichophyton Agars 1 7, cont.

Formulae Procedure
Difco Trichtophyton Agar 1 Using a sterile inoculating loop or needle, remove a small
Approximate Formula* Per Liter amount of colony growth from the isolation medium and streak
Vitamin Assay Casamino Acids ................................... 2.5 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g
the agar surface. A small inoculum should be used to prevent
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.8 g carry-over of essential nutrients from the isolation medium.
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.1 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g Incubate medium at room temperature for up to 2 weeks.
Difco Trichtophyton Agar 2

Approximate Formula* Per Liter

Expected Results
Vitamin Assay Casamino Acids ................................... 2.5 g Record the amount of growth using + to indicate a trace of
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g submerged growth to 4+ to indicate maximum growth. Consult
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.8 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.1 g
appropriate texts for information needed for interpretation of
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g the results.1,2
Inositol ..................................................................... 50.0 mg
Difco Trichtophyton Agar 3 Limitations of the Procedure
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 1. It is important that pure cultures from a medium that is
Vitamin Assay Casamino Acids ................................... 2.5 g
not vitamin enriched, such as Sabouraud Dextrose Agar or
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.8 g another general-purpose fungal medium, be used for the
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.1 g inoculum.
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g 2. If cultures are contaminated with bacteria, the cultures
Inositol ..................................................................... 50.0 mg
Thiamine HCl ......................................................... 200.0 g should be grown on a fungal medium containing antibiotics
Difco Trichtophyton Agar 4 for several generations to eliminate the bacteria. Many
Approximate Formula* Per Liter bacteria synthesize vitamins and may invalidate the test
Vitamin Assay Casamino Acids ................................... 2.5 g results.
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g 3. When inoculating Trichophyton Agars, take care not to
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.8 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.1 g carry-over growth substances from primary cultures to the
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g tube media used in the differential tests. Inocula transferred
Thiamine HCl ......................................................... 200.0 g to the nutrition tubes should be very small.
Difco Trichtophyton Agar 6
Approximate Formula* Per Liter References
Ammonium Nitrate .................................................... 1.5 g 1. Roberts. 1985. In Washington (ed.), Laboratory procedures in clinical microbiology, 2nd ed. Springer-
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g Verlag, New York, N.Y.
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.8 g 2. Weitzman, Rosenthal and Silva-Hutner. 1988. Superficial and cutaneous infections caused by
molds: dermatomycoses. In Wentworth (ed.), Diagnostic procedures for mycotic and parasitic
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.1 g infections, 7th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g 3. Kane and Summerbell. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Difco Trichtophyton Agar 7 4. Georg and Camp. 1957. J. Bacteriol. 74:113.
5. Haley, Transdel and Coyle. 1980. Cumitech 11, Practical methods for culture and identification of
Approximate Formula* Per Liter fungi in the clinical mycology laboratory. Coord. ed., Sherris. American Society for Microbiology,
Ammonium Nitrate .................................................... 1.5 g Washington, D.C.
Histidine HCl ............................................................ 30.0 mg 6. McGinnis and Pasarell. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol.
1. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.8 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.1 g Availability
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g Difco Trichophyton Agar 1
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. Cat. No. 287710 Dehydrated 500 g

Directions for Preparation from BBL Trichophyton Agar 1

Cat. No. 296243 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg of 10*

Dehydrated Product
Difco Trichophyton Agars 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 and 7 Difco Trichophyton Agar 2

Cat. No. 287410 Dehydrated 500 g

1. Suspend 59 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly. BBL Trichophyton Agar 2

Cat. No. 296244 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10*

2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder. Difco Trichophyton Agar 3

Cat. No. 296510 Dehydrated 500 g

3. Autoclave at 121C for 12 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using BBL Trichophyton Agar 3

stable, typical control cultures. Cat. No. 296245 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
Difco Trichophyton Agar 4

Cat. No. 219710 Dehydrated 500 g

BBL Trichophyton Agar 4

Cat. No. 296246 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10*

572
 Trichosel Broth, Modified

BBL Trichophyton Agar 5 Difco Trichophyton Agar 7

Cat. No. 297498 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10* Cat. No. 295510 Dehydrated 500 g
Difco Trichophyton Agar 6

BBL Trichophyton Agar 7

Cat. No. 252410 Dehydrated 500 g Cat. No. 297500 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.
BBL Trichophyton Agar 6
Cat. No. 297499 Prepared Slants (C Tubes) Pkg. of 10*

Trichosel Broth, Modified

Intended Use Formula
Trichosel Broth, Modified is used for the isolation and cultiva- BBL Trichosel Broth, Modified
tion of Trichomonas species. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 12.0 g
Beef Extract ................................................................ 2.0 g
Summary and Explanation Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Trichosel Broth, Modified is a modification of the Simplified L-Cysteine HCl ........................................................... 1.0 g
Trypticase Serum (STS) Medium of Kupferberg et al. for the Maltose ...................................................................... 2.0 g
Agar ........................................................................... 1.0 g
cultivation of Trichomonas spp.1 The classical formula has Chloramphenicol ........................................................ 0.1 g
been modified by the addition of beef extract and horse serum Methylene Blue .......................................................... 3.0 mg
and an increased amount of yeast extract to improve perfor- *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

mance. Chloramphenicol, a relatively stable antibiotic, replaces

Directions for Preparation from
the penicillin and streptomycin recommended for addition to
the STS base.
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 23.1 g of the powder in 950 mL of purified water.
Principles of the Procedure Mix thoroughly.
Trichosel Broth, Modified contains casein peptone, cysteine, beef 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
extract and yeast extract as sources of amino acids, nitrogen, completely dissolve the powder.
sulfur, carbon, vitamins and trace ingredients. Maltose is an 3. Autoclave at 118C for 15 minutes. Immediately tighten
energy source for the metabolism of microorganisms including caps. T
Trichomonas spp. Chloramphenicol is a broad spectrum 4. Cool and aseptically add 5% horse serum.
antibiotic which inhibits a wide range of gram-positive and gram- 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
negative bacteria. Horse serum is added to provide growth stable, typical control cultures.
factors required by Trichomonas.
Procedure
Inoculate specimens suspected of containing Trichomonas
User Quality Control
organisms into the broth medium using swabs containing the
Identity Specifications specimen or by alternative methods, as appropriate. Incubate
BBL Trichosel Broth, Modified tubes at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere. After 48 hours
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous and 5 days of incubation, prepare a wet mount from the broth
material.
and examine microscopically under low power for the
Solution: 23.1 g soluble in 950 mL purified water
presence of flagellate protozoans.
upon boiling. Solution is light to medium,
yellow to tan, with blue-green to green
ring at top, hazy. Expected Results
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, with If growth of trichomonads has occurred, organisms of typical
blue-green to green ring at top, hazy. morphology will be seen in the broth medium when an aliquot
Reaction of 23.1 g/950 mL is examined microscopically using low power magnification.
Solution at 25C: pH 6.0 0.2

Cultural Response Reference

1. Kupferberg, Johnson and Sprince. 1948. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 67:304.
BBL Trichosel Broth, Modified

Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
and incubate at 35 2C for 5 days.
Availability
BBL Trichosel Broth, Modified
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY
Cat. No. 211747 Dehydrated 500 g
Candida albicans 10231 Good
BBL Trichosel Broth, Modified, with 5% Horse Serum
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 Partial to complete inhibition
Cat. No. 298323 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10*
Trichomonas vaginalis 30001 Good; microscopic examination
reveals typical morphology and motility *Store at 2-8C.

573
Section III
T Triple Sugar Iron Agar

Triple Sugar Iron Agar TSI Agar

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
This medium conforms with specifications of The United States TSI Agar contains three sugars (dextrose, lactose and sucrose),
Pharmacopeia (USP). phenol red for detecting carbohydrate fermentation and
ferrous ammonium sulfate for detection of hydrogen sulfide
Triple Sugar Iron Agar (TSI Agar) is used for the differentia-
production (indicated by blackening in the butt of the tube).
tion of gram-negative enteric bacilli based on carbohydrate
fermentation and the production of hydrogen sulfide. Carbohydrate fermentation is indicated by the production of
gas and a change in the color of the pH indicator from red to
Summary and Explanation yellow. To facilitate the detection of organisms that only
TSI Agar is used for the determination of carbohydrate ferment dextrose, the dextrose concentration is one-tenth the
fermentation and hydrogen sulfide production in the identifi- concentration of lactose or sucrose. The small amount of acid
cation of gram-negative bacilli.1,2 It is recommended in the produced in the slant of the tube during dextrose fermentation
USP for use in performing Microbial Limit Tests.3 oxidizes rapidly, causing the medium to remain red or revert
Hajna developed the formulation for TSI Agar by adding sucrose to an alkaline pH. In contrast, the acid reaction (yellow) is
to the double sugar (dextrose and lactose) formulation of Kligler maintained in the butt of the tube because it is under lower
Iron Agar.4 The addition of sucrose increased the sensitivity of oxygen tension.
the medium by facilitating the detection of sucrose-fermenting After depletion of the limited dextrose, organisms able to do
bacilli, as well as lactose and/or dextrose fermenters. so will begin to utilize the lactose or sucrose.2
Carbohydrate fermentation is detected by the presence of To enhance the alkaline condition of the slant, free exchange
gas and a visible color change (from red to yellow) of the pH of air must be permitted by closing the tube cap loosely. If the
indicator, phenol red. The production of hydrogen sulfide is tube is tightly closed, an acid reaction (caused solely by
indicated by the presence of a precipitate that blackens the dextrose fermentation) will also involve the slant.
medium in the butt of the tube.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Triple Sugar Iron Agar BBL TSI Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Pink, free-flowing, homogeneous. Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
Solution: 6.5% solution, soluble in purified ous material, may contain many
water upon boiling. Solution is red, minute to very small tan specks.
slightly opalescent. Solution: 5.94% solution, soluble in purified
Prepared Appearance: Red, slightly opalescent. water upon boiling. Solution is medium
to dark, red-orange to orange-red,
Reaction of 6.5% clear to slightly hazy.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, red-orange to orange-
red, clear to slightly hazy.
Cultural Response
Reaction of 5.94%
Difco Triple Sugar Iron Agar
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
by the stab and streak method and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24
hours.
Cultural Response
BBL TSI Agar
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY SLANT BUTT GAS H 2S
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
Escherichia coli 25922 Good A A + by the stab and streak method and incubate at 35 2C for 24 hours.
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 9027 Good K K
ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY SLANT BUTT GAS H 2S
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis Escherichia coli 25922 Good A A +
serotype Enteritidis 13076 Good K A + + Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 Good K K
Shigella flexneri 12022 Good K A Salmonella choleraesuis
A = Acid K = Alkaline subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 Good K A +/ +
Shigella flexneri 12022 Good K A
A = Acid K = Alkaline

574
 Triple Sugar Iron Agar, cont.

Formulae Procedure
Difco Triple Sugar Iron Agar To inoculate, carefully touch only the center of an isolated
Approximate Formula* Per Liter colony on an enteric plated medium with a cool, sterile needle,
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
stab into the medium in the butt of the tube, and then streak
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 15.0 g back and forth along the surface of the slant. Several colonies
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 5.0 g from each primary plate should be studied separately, since
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g mixed infections may occur.
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
Sucrose .................................................................... 10.0 g Incubate with caps loosened at 35C and examine after 18-24
Ferrous Sulfate ........................................................... 0.2 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g hours for carbohydrate fermentation, gas production and
Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................... 0.3 g hydrogen sulfide production. Any combination of these reactions
Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g may be observed. Do not incubate longer than 24 hours
Phenol Red ............................................................... 24.0 mg
because the acid reaction in the slant of lactose and sucrose
BBL TSI Agar fermenters may revert to an alkaline reaction.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
Peptic Digest of Animal Tissue ................................. 10.0 g Expected Results
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g Compare reactions produced by the unknown isolate with those
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g produced by the known control organisms.
Sucrose .................................................................... 10.0 g
Ferrous Ammonium Sulfate ........................................ 0.2 g Carbohydrate fermentation is indicated by a yellow coloration
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................... 0.2 g of the medium. If the medium in the butt of the tube becomes
Agar ......................................................................... 13.0 g yellow (acidic), but the medium in the slant becomes red
Phenol Red ............................................................... 25.0 mg (alkaline), the organism being tested only ferments dextrose
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
(glucose).
Directions for Preparation from A yellow (acidic) color in the slant and butt indicates that
Dehydrated Product the organism being tested ferments dextrose, lactose and/or
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water: sucrose.
Difco Triple Sugar Iron Agar 65 g;
A red (alkaline) color in the slant and butt indicates that the
BBL TSI Agar 59.4 g.
Mix thoroughly.
organism being tested is a nonfermenter. T
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Hydrogen sulfide production results in a black precipitate in
completely dissolve the powder. the butt of the tube.
3. Dispense into tubes and autoclave at 118-121C (per label Gas production is indicated by splitting and cracking of the
directions) for 15 minutes. medium.
4. Cool in a slanted position so that deep butts are formed.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using For final identification, perform biochemical tests and other
stable, typical control cultures. identification procedures with a pure culture of the organism.
Consult appropriate references for further information.5-7

Limitations of the Procedure

1. Hydrogen sulfide production may be evident on Kligler Iron
Agar but negative on Triple Sugar Iron Agar. Studies by
Bulmash and Fulton8 showed that the utilization of sucrose
could suppress the enzymatic mechanisms responsible for
H2S production. Padron and Dockstader9 found that not
all H2S-positive Salmonella are positive on TSI.
2. Sucrose is added to TSI to eliminate some sucrose-fermenting
lactose-nonfermenters such as Proteus and Citrobacter spp.1
3. Further biochemical tests and serological typing must be
performed for definite identification and confirmation of
organisms.
4. Do not use an inoculating loop to inoculate a tube of Triple
Uninoculated Escherichia coli Salmonella Shigella flexneri Sugar Iron Agar. While stabbing the butt, mechanical
Tube ATCC 25922 enteritidis ATCC 12022
ATCC 13076 splitting of the medium occurs, causing a false positive
result for gas production.1

575
Section III
T Triple Sugar Iron Agar, cont.

5. A pure culture is essential when inoculating Triple Sugar Availability

Iron Agar. If inoculated with a mixed culture, irregular Difco Triple Sugar Iron Agar
observations may occur. AOAC BAM BS10 CCAM CMPH COMPF EP MCM7 SMD
6. Tubes should be incubated with caps loosened. This allows SMWW USDA USP
Cat. No. 226540 Dehydrated 500 g
a free exchange of air, which is necessary to enhance the
alkaline condition on the slant.1 BBL TSI Agar

AOAC BAM BS10 CCAM CMPH COMPF EP MCM7 SMD

References SMWW USDA USP

1. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria, Cat. No. 211749 Dehydrated 500 g
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md. 221038 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
2. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, 221039 Prepared Slants Ctn. of 100*
Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
3. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The *Store at 2-8C.
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
4. Hajna. 1945. J. Bacteriol. 49:516.
5. Ewing. 1985. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science
Publishing Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
6. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
7. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriol-
ogy, 9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
8. Bulmash and Fulton. 1964. J. Bacteriol. 88:1813.
9. Padron and Dockstader. 1972. Appl. Microbiol. 23:1107.

Tryptic Nitrate Medium

Intended Use detected by various test methods and is used in differentiating
Tryptic Nitrate Medium is used for differentiating microor- organisms from clinical samples, foods and dairy products.1-5
ganisms based on nitrate reduction.
Principles of the Procedure
Summary and Explanation Peptone is a source of nitrogen, amino acids and vitamins.
Tryptic Nitrate Medium is a differential, semi-solid, general Dextrose provides carbohydrates. Potassium nitrate provides
purpose medium that supports growth of aerobes as well as the basis for nitrate reduction. Disodium phosphate is a buff-
facultative and obligate anaerobes.1 The formulation includes ering agent. The low agar content, which allows varying
potassium nitrate which can be reduced by certain organisms degrees of anaerobiosis in the medium, supports growth of
to either nitrite or nitrogen gas. Nitrate reduction can be organisms with various oxygen requirements.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Tryptic Nitrate Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 2.5% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
amber, clear to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 2.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Tryptic Nitrate Medium
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 18-24 hours; incubate Clostridium sporogenes anaerobically. Test
for nitrate reduction using Difco/BBL Nitrate A, B and C Reagents.

INOCULUM NITRATE
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY REDUCTION
Clostridium sporogenes 11437 102-103 Good Uninoculated Escherichia coli Clostridium
Tube ATCC 25922 sporogenes
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good + ATCC 11437
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 102-103 Good +

576
 Tryptic Soy Agar

Formula Presumptive negative nitrate reduction reaction: Lack

Difco Tryptic Nitrate Medium of color development denotes an absence of nitrite in the
Approximate Formula* Per Liter medium; this should be confirmed by addition of Nitrate C
Tryptose ................................................................... 20.0 g Reagent (zinc dust).
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 2.0 g 2. After adding Nitrate C Reagent:
Potassium Nitrate ....................................................... 1.0 g Positive nitrate reduction reaction: Lack of color development
Agar ........................................................................... 1.0 g indicates that nitrate has been reduced to nitrogen gas.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Negative nitrate reduction reaction: Development of a red-
Directions for Preparation from violet color within 5-10 minutes indicates that unreduced
Dehydrated Product nitrate is still present.
1. Suspend 25 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly. Limitation of the Procedure
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- This medium is not recommended for indole testing of coliforms
pletely dissolve the powder. and other enterics.1
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using References
1. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
stable, typical control cultures. vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
2. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
national, Gaithersburg, Md.
Procedure 3. Pezzlo. 1992. In Isenberg (ed.), Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American
Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
1. Obtain a pure culture of the organism to be tested from a 4. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
solid culture medium. Select well-isolated colonies. 5. Flowers, Andrews, Donnelly and Koenig. 1993. In Marshall (ed.), Standard methods for the exami-
nation of dairy products, 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
2. Inoculate a tube of Tryptic Nitrate Medium and incubate 6. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken. 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. Ameri-
aerobically or anaerobically, as appropriate, at 35 2C can Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
7. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey and Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby,
for 18-24 hours. Inc., St. Louis, Mo.

3. Read tubes for growth.

4. Test for nitrate reduction using Difco/BBL Nitrate A, B Availability
and C Reagents or equivalents per reagent instructions. Difco Tryptic Nitrate Medium
Cat. No. 236710 Dehydrated 500 g

Expected Results Difco /BBL Nitrate A Reagent

T
1. After adding Nitrate A and B Reagents: Cat. No. 261197 Droppers 50 0.5 mL
Positive nitrate reduction reaction: Development of a red- Difco /BBL Nitrate B Reagent

violet color within 1-2 minutes indicates that nitrate has Cat. No. 261198 Droppers 50 0.5 mL
been reduced to nitrite. Difco /BBL Nitrate C Reagent

Cat. No. 261207 Vials 50 1 g

Tryptic Soy Agar/Trypticase Soy Agar

(Soybean-Casein Digest Agar)
Intended Use Hycheck hygiene contact slides are used for assessing the

Tryptic Soy Agar and Trypticase Soy Agar conform with speci- microbiological contamination of surfaces and fluids.
fications of The United States Pharmacopeia (USP).
Summary and Explanation
Tryptic (Trypticase) Soy Agar (TSA) is used for the isolation
The nutritional composition of TSA has made it a popular
and cultivation of nonfastidious and fastidious microorgan-
medium for many years. It is the medium specified as
isms. It is not the medium of choice for anaerobes.
Soybean-Casein Digest Agar Medium in the USP for the total
The 150 15 mm-style plates of Trypticase Soy Agar are aerobic microbial count portion of the microbial limit testing
convenient for use with Taxo factor strips in the isolation procedures.1 The medium is used for a multitude of purposes
and differentiation of Haemophilus species. including maintenance of stock cultures, plate counting,
isolation of microorganisms from a variety of specimen types
Sterile Pack and Isolator Pack plates are useful for monitoring
and as a base for media containing blood.2-4 It is included
surfaces and air in clean rooms, Isolator Systems and other
in the compendia of methods for the examination of water,
environmentally-controlled areas when sterility of the medium
wastewater and foods,5, 6 in the Bacteriological Analytical
is of importance.
Manual 7 and is used for testing bacterial contaminants in
cosmetics.8
577
Section III
T Tryptic Soy Agar, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Tryptic Soy Agar BBL Trypticase Soy Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
neous. ous material.
Solution: 4.0% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 4.0% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light water upon boiling. Solution is light
amber, slightly opalescent. to medium, yellow to tan, clear to
Prepared Appearance: Plain Light amber, slightly opalescent. slightly hazy.
With 5% sheep blood Bright red, Prepared Appearance: Plain Light to medium, yellow to tan,
opaque. clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 4.0% With 5% sheep blood Bright red,
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2 opaque.
Reaction of 4.0%
Cultural Response Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
Difco Tryptic Soy Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions, without (plain) and with 5%
Cultural Response
sheep blood (SB). Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours BBL Trypticase Soy Agar
under 5-10% CO2. Prepare the medium per label directions, without (plain) and with 5%
sheep blood (SB). Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 2 days
INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU PLAIN WITH SB HEMOLYSIS
(incubate streptococci with 3-5% CO2).

Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good Good Beta INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU PLAIN WITH SB HEMOLYSIS
Neisseria
meningitidis 13090 102-103 Good Good None Candida albicans 10231 103-104 N/A Good None
Staphylococcus Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 N/A Good Beta
aureus 25923 102-103 Good Good Beta Listeria
Streptococcus monocytogenes 19115 103-104 N/A Good Beta (+/-)
2 3
pneumoniae 6305 10 -10 Good Good Alpha Pseudomonas
Streptococcus aeruginosa 10145 103-104 Good N/A
2 3
pyogenes 19615 10 -10 Good Good Beta Shigella flexneri 12022 103-104 Good N/A
CAMP Test medium with 5% sheep blood Perform using S. aureus ATCC 33862, Streptococcus Staphylococcus
sp. group B ATCC 12386 (positive) and S. pyogenes ATCC 19615 (negative).
aureus 25923 103-104 Good Good Beta
Streptococcus
Escherichia coli Staphylococcus aureus pneumoniae 6305 103-104 Good Good Alpha
ATCC 25922 ATCC 25923 Streptococcus
pyogenes 19615 103-104 Good Good Beta
CAMP Test medium with 5% sheep blood Perform using S. aureus ATCC 25923, Streptococcus
sp. group B ATCC 12386 (positive) and S. pyogenes ATCC 19615 (negative).

Since TSA does not contain the X and V growth factors, it can
conveniently be used in determining the requirements for these
growth factors by isolates of Haemophilus by the addition of
X, V and XV Factor Strips to inoculated TSA plates.3 The 150
mm plate provides a larger surface area for inoculation,
making the satellite growth around the strips easier to read.
With the Sterile Pack and Isolator Pack plates, the entire double-
wrapped (Sterile Pack) or triple-wrapped (Isolator Pack) product
is subjected to a sterilizing dose of gamma radiation, so that the
contents inside the outer package(s) are sterile.9 This allows the
inner package to be aseptically removed without introducing
contaminants. Since the agar medium has been sterilized after
packaging, the presence of microbial growth after sampling and
incubation can be relied upon to represent true recovery and
Streptococcus Streptococcus not pre-existing medium contaminants. A third rolled sterile
pneumoniae pyogenes
ATCC 6305 ATCC 19615 bag is included as a transport device. Isolator Pack plates have
been validated to protect the medium from vaporized hydrogen
peroxide when used in an Isolator System.

578
 Tryptic Soy Agar, cont.

The Hycheck hygiene contact slide is a double-sided paddle Trypticase Soy Agar (150 mm plates) for Haemophilus
containing two agar surfaces for immersing into fluids or The initial specimens should be inoculated onto Chocolate II
sampling surfaces. There are three slides containing TSA along Agar or another suitable medium and incubated for 18-24
with another medium: D/E Neutralizing Agar; Violet Red hours in an aerobic atmosphere supplemented with carbon
Bile Glucose Agar; or Rose Bengal Chloramphenicol Agar. A dioxide. Choose one or two well-isolated colonies that
fourth slide contains TSA with 0.01% TTC and Rose Bengal resemble Haemophilus species and perform a Gram stain to
Chloramphenicol Agar. confirm that the isolate is a gram-negative rod or cocco-
bacillus. Suspend 1-2 colonies in 5 mL sterile, purified water
Principles of the Procedure or Trypticase Soy Broth and vortex to mix. Dip a swab in the
The combination of casein and soy peptones in TSA renders suspension and inoculate the entire surface of the plate with
the medium highly nutritious by supplying organic nitrogen, the swab. With sterile forceps, place a Taxo X factor strip, a
particularly amino acids and longer-chained peptides. The V factor strip and a XV strip on the plate, at least 20 mm
sodium chloride maintains osmotic equilibrium. Agar is the apart.
solidifying agent. Incubate plates at 35 2C for 24 hours in an aerobic atmo-
Haemophilus species may be differentiated by their require- sphere supplemented with carbon dioxide.
ments for X and V factors. Paper strips impregnated with
these factors are placed on the surface of the medium after Expected Results
inoculation with the test organism. Following incubation, a After incubation, it is desirable to have isolated colonies of
zone of growth around the strip indicates a requirement for organisms from the original sample. Subculture colonies of
the factor(s). interest so that positive identification can be made by means
of biochemical and/or serological testing.3,10,11
Formulae Consult appropriate texts for the growth patterns produced
Difco Tryptic Soy Agar
by the various strains of Haemophilus.3,12
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 15.0 g
Enzymatic Digest of Soybean Meal ............................ 5.0 g References
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g 1. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g 2. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
BBL Trypticase Soy Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
3. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby Inc.,
St. Louis, Mo.
T
4. Nash and Krenz. 1991. In Balows, Hausler, Herrmann, Isenberg and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 15.0 g clinical microbiology, 5th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal .................................. 5.0 g 5. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
6. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 7. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
8. Curry, Joyce and McEwen. 1993. CTFA microbiology guidelines. The Cosmetic, Toiletry and
Directions for Preparation from Fragrance Association, Inc., Washington, D.C.
9. Association for the Advancement of Medical Instrumentation. 1984. Process control guidelines for
Dehydrated Product gamma radiation sterilization of medical devices. AAMI, Arlington, Va.
10. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
1. Suspend 40 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
11. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriology,
thoroughly. 9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 12. Campos. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiol-
ogy, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
completely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. DO NOT OVER- Availability
HEAT. Difco Tryptic Soy Agar (Soybean-Casein Digest Agar)
4. For preparation of blood plates, add 5-10% sterile, AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF EP ISO SMD SMWW USDA USP
defibrinated blood to the sterile agar which has been cooled Cat. No. 236940 Dehydrated 100 g
236950 Dehydrated 500 g
to 45-50C.
236920 Dehydrated 2 kg
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 236930 Dehydrated 10 kg
stable, typical control cultures. BBL Trypticase Soy Agar (Soybean-Casein Digest Agar)
AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF EP ISO SMD SMWW USDA USP
Procedure Cat. No. 211043 Dehydrated 500 g
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from 211046 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
211047 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
specimens. Since many pathogens require carbon dioxide on
primary isolation, plates may be incubated in an atmosphere
containing approximately 3-10% CO2. Incubate plates at
35 2C for 18-24 hours.

579
Section III
T Tryptic Soy Agar, cont.

BBL Trypticase Soy Agar (Soybean-Casein Digest Agar) BBL Trypticase Soy Agar, Sterile Pack
AOAC BAM CCAM COMPF EP ISO SMD SMWW USDA USP Cat. No. 221236 Prepared Settling Plates Pkg. of 10*
United States and Canada 222205 Prepared Settling Plates Ctn. of 100*
Cat. No. 221185 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20* 221237 Prepared Settling Plates
221283 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100* (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 5*
221803 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 24* 222206 Prepared Settling Plates
221082 Prepared Pour Tubes, 20 mL Pkg. of 10 (150 15 mm-style) Ctn. of 45*
221086 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10 292257 Prepared Plates, heavy fill Pkg. of 10*
221087 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100 292396 Prepared Plates, heavy fill Ctn. of 100*
299099 Prepared Bottles, 500 mL Pkg of 10
BBL Trypticase Soy Agar, Isolator Pack
Europe Cat. No. 292651 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
Cat. No. 254051 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20* 292652 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
254086 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120* 292272 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 5*
25007 Prepared Contact Plates Pkg. of 33*
Difco Hycheck Hygiene Contact Slides
Japan
Cat. No. 251167 Prepared Plates (5 4) Pkg. of 20* Cat. No. 290391 Tryptic Soy Agar//D/E Neutralizing Agar (20 slides)*
251185 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20* 290371 Tryptic Soy Agar//Violet Red Bile Glucose Agar
251540 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20* (20 slides)*
251260 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 24* 290381 Tryptic Soy Agar//Rose Bengal Chloramphenicol
251812 Prepared Plates (60 15 mm-style) Ctn. of 240* Agar (20 slides)*
251355 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20* 290461 Tryptic Soy Agar with 0.01% TTC//Rose Bengal
Chloramphenicol Agar (20 slides)*
*Store at 2-8C.

Tryptic Soy Agar with Lecithin and Polysorbate 80

(Microbial Content Test Agar) Trypticase Soy Agar
with Lecithin and Polysorbate 80 Trypticase Soy
Agar with Penicillinase Trypticase Soy Agar with
Lecithin, Polysorbate 80 and Penicillinase
Intended Use determined by the appearance of colonies on the surface of
These media are recommended for the detection and enumeration the medium following application to the test surface and incu-
of microorganisms present on surfaces of sanitary importance. bation.7,8 The RODAC plate has a marked grid to facilitate
Prepared plates are provided for environmental monitoring. counting organisms.
Sterile Pack and Isolator Pack RODAC prepared plates are The 100 15 mm and the 150 15 mm style plates can be
particularly useful for monitoring surfaces in clean rooms, used for active and passive air sampling. These plates are also
Isolator Systems and other environmentally-controlled areas designed for personnel monitoring of finger tips (Finger Dab).
and are also recommended for use in air sampling equipment
such as the Surface Air System. Finger Dab Sterile Pack and Principles of the Procedure
Isolator Pack plates are intended for sampling gloved hands. Casein and soy peptones are a source of nutrients required for
the replication of microorganisms. Sodium chloride maintains
Summary and Explanation osmotic equilibrium. Lecithin and polysorbate 80, two
These media may be employed to establish and monitor cleaning commonly used neutralizers, are reported to inactivate residual
techniques and schedules.1-4 Collection of samples from disinfectants when the sample is being collected.7 Lecithin is
identical areas before and after treatment with disinfectant incorporated to neutralize quaternary ammonium compounds
yields data useful in evaluating cleaning procedures in and polysorbate 80 is used to neutralize substituted phenolic
environmental sanitation. Tryptic (Trypticase) Soy Agar with disinfectants.9-12 Agar is the solidifying agent.
Lecithin and Polysorbate 80 is recommended for the Aerobic
Plate Count (Microbial Limit Test) for water-miscible cosmetic Trypticase Soy Agar with Penicillinase and Trypticase Soy Agar
products containing preservatives.5 with Lecithin, Polysorbate 80 and Penicillinase contain 50 mL/L
of penicillinase, which inactivates antibiotics such as
RODAC (Replicate Organism Detection and Counting) and penicillins and cephalosporins.
contact plates are used in a wide variety of surface sampling
programs and may be employed to establish and monitor With the Sterile Pack and Isolator Pack plates, the entire double-
cleaning techniques and schedules.1-4,6 The presence and wrapped (Sterile Pack) or triple-wrapped (Isolator Pack)
number of microorganisms on a flat impervious surface is product is subjected to a sterilizing dose of gamma radiation,

580
 TSA with Lecithin & Poly 80, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Tryptic Soy Agar with Lecithin and BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with Lecithin and
Polysorbate 80 (Microbial Content Test Agar) Polysorbate 80
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous, Dehydrated Appearance: Medium fine, softly lumped powder,
may appear moist. free of extraneous material.
Solution: 4.57% solution, soluble in purified NOTE: The dehydrated medium has
water upon boiling with frequent a characteristic brown sugar
gentle swirling. When hot, solution is appearance and may seem moist.
medium amber, slightly opalescent Solution: 4.57% solution, soluble in purified
with a resuspendable precipitate. water upon boiling. Solution is light
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal- to medium, yellow to tan, slightly to
escent, may have a precipitate. moderately hazy.
Reaction of 4.57% Prepared Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan,
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2 slightly to moderately hazy.
Reaction of 4.57%
Cultural Response Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
Difco Tryptic Soy Agar with Lecithin and
Polysorbate 80 (Microbial Content Test Agar) Cultural Response
Prepare the medium per label directions. Test the medium in parallel BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with Lecithin and
with Plate Count Agar, using the pour plate method. Apply disks im- Polysorbate 80
pregnated with varying dilutions of a quaternary ammonium compound Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
to the medium surface. Incubate plates at 35 2C for 40-48 hours 35 2C for 2 days (incubate A. niger at 25 2C for 4 days).
and inspect for zones of inhibition.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC
CFU GROWTH* Aspergillus niger 16404 Undiluted Good
Escherichia coli 11229 2
10 -10 3
Smaller zone of inhibition Bacillus subtilis 6633 103-104 Good
of growth compared to Candida albicans 001 103-104 Good
Plate Count Agar Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-104 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 6538P 102-103 Smaller zone of inhibition
of growth compared to
Micrococcus luteus
Pseudomonas aeruginosa
9341
10145
103-104
103-104
Good
Good T
Plate Count Agar Salmonella choleraesuis
*Interpretation: The smaller zones of inhibition indicate neutralization of the quaternary
ammonium compound by the medium.
subsp.choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 13311 103-104 Good
Serratia marcescens 13880 103-104 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103-104 Good
Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 103-104 Good
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 103-104 Good

so that the contents inside the outer package(s) are sterile.13 BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with Lecithin and
This allows the inner package to be aseptically removed Polysorbate 80
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
without introducing contaminants. Since the agar medium has Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 15.0 g
been sterilized after packaging, the presence of microbial growth Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal .................................. 5.0 g
after sampling and incubation can be relied upon to represent Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Lecithin ...................................................................... 0.7 g
true recovery and not pre-existing medium contaminants. A third Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 5.0 g
rolled sterile bag is included as a transport device. Isolator Pack Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
plates have been validated to protect the medium from vapor- *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

ized hydrogen peroxide when used in an Isolator System.

Directions for Preparation from
Formulae Dehydrated Product
Difco Tryptic Soy Agar with Lecithin and Polysorbate 1. Suspend 45.7 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
80 (Microbial Content Test Agar) Mix thoroughly.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 15.0 g
completely dissolve the powder.
Soy Peptone ............................................................... 5.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to approximately
Lecithin ...................................................................... 0.7 g 45C.
Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g

581
Section III
T TSA with Lecithin & Poly 80, cont.

4. In RODAC plates, use 16.5-17.5 mL per plate. Expected Results

5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Because interpretations are relative, each laboratory should
stable, typical control cultures. establish its own values for what constitutes a clean area.

Procedure Count all developing colonies. Spreading colonies should be

100 15 mm and 150 15 mm-Style Plates
counted as one but care should be taken to observe other distinct
colonies intermingled in the growth around the plate periphery
1. If specimen is being cultured from a swab, roll the swab
or along a hair line. These should also be counted as one colony,
directly on the medium surface.
as should bi-colored colonies and halo type spreaders.
2. Incubate all plates at 35-37C for 48 hours, and 25C for 7
days or as required. It is generally agreed that 200 colonies is the approximate
3. When incubation has been completed, count the colonies. maximum that can be counted on contact plates.
RODAC/Contact Plates Colony counts may be recorded by:
Selected surfaces are sampled by firmly pressing the agar 1. Simply keeping individual counts.
medium against the test area. Hold the plate with thumb and 2. Number of viable particles per square foot (agar area is
second finger and use index finger to press plate bottom firmly 3.97 square inches).
against surface. Pressure should be the same for every sample. 3. Means and standard deviations.
Do not move plate laterally; this spreads contaminants over
the agar surface making resolution of colonies difficult. Slightly Subculture colonies of interest so that positive identification can
curved surfaces may be sampled with a rolling motion. be made by means of biochemical and/or serological testing.

Areas (walls, floors, etc.) to be assayed may be divided into Limitation of the Procedure
sections or grids and samples taken from specific points within The effectiveness of preservative neutralization with this
the grid. medium depends on both the type and concentration of the
Grid method: preservative(s).
1. Subdivide surface (floor or wall) into 36 equal squares per References
100 square feet of area by striking five equidistant dividing 1. Vesley and Michaelson. 1964. Health Lab. Sci. 1:107.
2. Pryor and McDuff. 1969. Exec. Housekeeper, March.
lines from each of the two adjacent sides. 3. Dell, L. A. 1979. Pharm. Technol. 3:47.
2. These dividing lines intersect at twenty-five points. 4. Hickey, Beckelheimer and Parrow. 1993. In Marshall (ed.), Standard methods for the examination
of dairy products, 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. Number these intersections consecutively in a serpentine 5. Orth. 1993. Handbook of cosmetic microbiology. Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York, N.Y.
6. Hall and Hartnett. 1964. Public Health Rep. 79:1021.
configuration. 7. McGowan. 1985. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
4th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
4. Use red numerals for odd numbers, black numerals for even 8. Bryan. 1995. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
numbers. 9. Favero, Gabis and Vesley. 1984. In Speck (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiological
5. Omit number 13 which falls in the center of the total area. examination of foods, 2nd ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
10. Quisno, Gibby and Foter. 1946. Am. J. Pharm. 118:320.
6. Sample odd points at one sampling period, even points at 11. Erlandson and Lawrence. 1953. Science 118:274.
12. Sveum, Moberg, Rude and Frank. 1992. In Vanderzant and Splittstoesser (ed.), Compendium of
the next sampling period. methods for the examination of foods, 3rd ed. American Public Health Association, Washington,
D.C.
7. For areas greater than 100 square feet, extend grid to in- 13. Association for the Advancement of Medical Instrumentation. 1984. Process control guidelines for
gamma radiation sterilization of medical devices. AAMI, Arlington, Va.
clude entire area.
8. For areas smaller than 25 square feet, divide the areas into
Availability
twenty-five equal squares (sixteen intersections). Sample
Difco Tryptic Soy Agar with Lecithin and
eight even-numbered or odd-numbered intersections at each Polysorbate 80 (Microbial Content Test Agar)
sampling period. Cat. No. 255320 Dehydrated 500 g*
9. For areas between 25 and 100 square feet, divide into 36 255310 Dehydrated 2 kg*
equal squares as in #1. BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with Lecithin and
10.Mark plates with intersection numbers. Polysorbate 80
Cat. No. 211764 Dehydrated 500 g*
Incubate exposed plates at 35-37C for 48 hours, and 25C 212263 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)*
for 7 days or as required. 296033 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)*

582
 TSA Blood Agars

United States and Canada Europe

Cat. No. 221943 Prepared Plates (Double Bag) Ctn. of 100* Cat. No. 254038 Contact Plates Pkg. of 33*
221945 Contact Plates (Double Bag) Pkg. of 20*
221288 Prepared RODAC Plates Pkg. of 10*
BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with Penicillinase, Sterile
221287 Prepared RODAC Plates Ctn. of 100* Pack
221961 Sterile Pack Contact Plates Pkg. of 10* Cat. No. 221839 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
222208 Sterile Pack Contact Plates Ctn. of 100* 221837 Prepared Plates (150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 5*
221238 Sterile Pack RODAC Plates Pkg. of 10* 292256 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 10*
222207 Sterile Pack RODAC Plates Ctn. of 100* BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with Lecithin, Polysorbate 80
299896 Isolator Pack RODAC Plates Pkg. of 10* and Pencillinase, Sterile Pack
292335 Isolator Pack RODAC Plates Ctn. of 100*
292273 Sterile Pack Finger Dab Plates Pkg. of 10* Cat. No. 221987 Contact Plates Pkg. of 10*
292271 Sterile Pack Finger Dab Plates Ctn. of 100* 221234 Prepared RODAC Plates Pkg. of 10*
292305 Sterile Pack Finger Dab Plates 292301 Prepared Finger Dab Plates Ctn. of 100*
(150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 5* *Store at 2-8C.
292648 Isolator Pack Finger Dab Plates Pkg. of 10*
292649 Isolator Pack Finger Dab Plates Ctn. of 100*
292650 Isolator Pack Finger Dab Plates
(150 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 5*

TSA Blood Agars

Tryptic Soy Blood Agar Base No. 2 Tryptic Soy Blood
Agar Base EH Trypticase Soy Agar, Modified (TSA II)
Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II)
Trypticase Soy Agar with 10% Sheep Blood (TSA II)
Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Horse Blood (TSA II)
Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Rabbit Blood (TSA II) T
Intended Use Blood agar base media are specified in standard methods for
Tryptic Soy Blood Agar Base No. 2, Tryptic Soy Blood Agar food testing.1,2
Base EH and Trypticase Soy Agar, Modified (TSA II) supplemented
with blood are used for cultivating fastidious microorganisms and Principles of the Procedure
for the visualization of hemolytic reactions produced by many The combination of casein and soy peptones in Trypticase Soy
bacterial species. Agar, Modified (TSA II) renders the medium highly nutritious
by supplying organic nitrogen, particularly amino acids and
Summary and Explanation larger-chained peptides. The sodium chloride maintains os-
The nutritional composition of TSA (Tryptic Soy Agar/ motic equilibrium. Agar is the solidifying agent.
Trypticase Soy Agar) has made it a popular medium, both Tryptic Soy Blood Agar Base No. 2 and Tryptic Soy Blood
unsupplemented and as a base for media containing blood. Agar Base EH are similar in composition to TSA II. These
Trypticase Soy Agar, Modified (TSA II) is an improved version formulations utilize the peptones Tryptone H and Tryptone H
of the original TSA formulation for use with animal blood Plus to enhance hemolysin production while minimizing
supplements. With 5 or 10% sheep blood, it is extensively antagonism or loss in activity of streptococcal hemolysins.
used for the recovery and cultivation of fastidious microbial
species and for the determination of hemolytic reactions that Defibrinated sheep blood is the most widely used blood for
are important differentiating characteristics for bacteria, espe- enriching agar base media.3 Hemolytic reactions of strepto-
cially Streptococcus species. Some investigators prefer the use cocci are proper and growth of Haemophilus hemolyticus, a
of rabbit or horse blood, but Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% nonpathogen whose hemolytic colonies are indistinguishable
Horse Blood is not recommended for use with throat cultures. from those of beta-hemolytic streptococci, is inhibited.

Tryptic Soy Blood Agar Base No. 2 and Tryptic Soy Blood Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II) prepared
Agar Base EH (enhanced hemolysis) are additional options plates provide excellent growth and beta hemolysis by
when hemolytic reactions are important. Tryptic Soy Blood Streptococcus pyogenes (Lancefield group A) and also
Agar Base No. 2 provides clear hemolytic reactions with group provide excellent growth and appropriate hemolytic reactions
A streptococci, while Tryptic Soy Blood Agar Base EH with other fastidious organisms. This medium is suitable for
provides dramatic, improved hemolysis. performing the CAMP test for the presumptive identification

583
Section III
T TSA Blood Agars, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Tryptic Soy Blood Agar Base No. 2 or Tryptic BBL Trypticase Soy Agar, Modified (TSA II)
Soy Blood Agar Base EH Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- ous material.
neous. Solution: 4.0% solution, soluble in purified
Solution: 4.0% solution, soluble in purified water upon boiling. Solution is light
water upon boiling. Solution is light to medium, yellow to tan, clear to
to medium amber, clear to slightly slightly hazy.
opalescent. Prepared Appearance: Plain Light to medium, yellow to tan,
Prepared Appearance: Plain Light to medium amber, clear clear to slightly hazy.
to slightly opalescent. With 5% sheep blood Bright red,
With 5% sheep blood Bright cherry opaque.
red, opaque. Reaction of 4.0%
Reaction of 4.0% Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
Cultural Response
Cultural Response BBL Trypticase Soy Agar, Modified (TSA II)
Difco Tryptic Soy Blood Agar Base No. 2* or Tryptic

Prepare the medium per label directions with 5% sheep blood. Inocu-
Soy Blood Agar Base EH late and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours (incubate streptococci
Prepare the medium per label directions with 5% sheep blood. Inocu- with 3-5% CO2).
late and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours under 5-10% CO2.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY HEMOLYSIS
INOCULUM HEMOLYSIS HEMOLYSIS Candida albicans 10231 103-104 Good None

ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY TSA NO. 2 TSA EH
2 3
Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good, within Beta
Escherichia coli 25922 10 -10 Good Beta Beta 24 hours
Neisseria Listeria
meningitidis 13090 102-103 Good None None monocytogenes 19115 103-104 Good Beta (+/-)
Staphylococcus Shigella
aureus 25923 102-103 Good Beta Beta dysenteriae 9361 103-104 Good None
Streptococcus Staphylococcus
pneumoniae 6305 102-103 Good Alpha Alpha aureus 25923 103-104 Good, within Beta
Streptococcus 24 hours
pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good Beta Beta Staphylococcus
*CAMP Test Perform using S. aureus ATCC 25923, Streptococcus sp. group B ATCC 12386
(positive) and S. pyogenes ATCC 19615 (negative).
aureus 6538P 103-104 Good Beta
Streptococcus
pneumoniae 6305 103-104 Good, within Alpha
TSA II with 5% Sheep Blood 24 hours
Escherichia coli Staphylococcus aureus Streptococcus
ATCC 25922 ATCC 25923
pyogenes 19615 103-104 Good, within Beta
24 hours
Streptococcus
pyogenes 49117 103-104 Good Beta
CAMP Test Perform using S. aureus ATCC 25923, Streptococcus sp. group B ATCC 12386
(positive) and S. pyogenes ATCC 19615 (negative).

of group B streptococci (S. agalactiae), and for use with low

concentration (0.04 unit) bacitracin discs (Taxo A) for pre-
sumptive identification of group A streptococci (S. pyogenes).
The CAMP test is based on the formation of a zone of synergistic
hemolysis at the junction of perpendicular streak inocula of
Staphylococcus aureus and group B streptococci. The reaction is
caused by the sphingomyelinase (beta-toxin) of S. aureus reacting
with sphingomyelin in the sheep erythrocyte membrane to
produce ceramide. A non-enzymatic protein (CAMP protein),
produced by S. agalactiae, binds to the ceramide and leads to
disorganization of the lipid bilayer of the sheep erythrocyte
Enterococcus Streptococcus membrane resulting in complete lysis.4
faecalis pyogenes
ATCC 29212 ATCC 19615

584
 TSA Blood Agars, cont.

Trypticase Soy Agar with 10% Sheep Blood (TSA II) prepared Directions for Preparation from
plates are provided for those laboratories preferring the Dehydrated Product
increased blood content. This medium is not recommended 1. Suspend 40 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
for performance of the CAMP test. Additionally, the increased thoroughly.
blood content can make hemolytic reactions less distinct and 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
more difficult to read. completely dissolve the powder.
Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Horse Blood (TSA II) prepared 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. DO NOT OVER-
plates supply both the X and V factors which are growth HEAT.
requirements for certain organisms; e.g., Haemophilus 4. For preparation of blood plates, add 5-10% sterile,
influenzae. Sheep and human blood are not suitable for defibrinated blood to sterile agar which has been cooled to
this purpose because they contain enzymes that inactivate 45-50C. Mix well.
the nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide (NAD), which is the 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
V factor.5 stable, typical control cultures.
Defibrinated horse blood may give hemolytic reactions different Procedure
from sheep blood.3 Some streptococci (e.g., group D) give Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
hemolytic reactions on horse blood, but not on sheep blood specimens. After streaking, stab the agar several times to
and may be mistakenly reported as group A. If a hemolytic deposit beta-hemolytic streptococci beneath the agar surface.
reaction is obtained, the organisms should be tested with Subsurface growth will display the most reliable hemolytic
a Taxo A disc and grouped serologically or tested by the reactions owing to the activity of both oxygen-stable and
fluorescent method. 6 Beta-hemolytic streptococci and oxygen-labile streptolysins.9
Haemophilus hemolyticus may be differentiated by perform-
ing a Gram stain on a smear prepared from the colony.7 Incubate plates at 35 2C for 18-72 hours. Since many
pathogens require carbon dioxide on primary isolation, plates
Defibrinated rabbit blood is also used for enriching agar-based may be incubated in an atmosphere containing approximately
media.8 Hemolytic reactions on Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% 5% CO2.
Rabbit Blood (TSA II) prepared plates are similar to those on
sheep blood. However, rabbit blood does not inhibit CAMP Test10
Non-hemoytic, bile-esculin negative streptococci or bacitracin-
Haemophilus haemolyticus, a bacterium inhibited by sheep
blood that produces colonies indistinguishable from those of resistant beta-hemolytic streptococci may be tested by the T
beta-hemolytic streptococci. CAMP test for presumptive identification as S. agalactiae
(Lancefield group B). The inoculum may be taken from an
Formulae overnight broth culture or from colonies picked from a blood
Difco Tryptic Soy Blood Agar Base No. 2 agar plate. Make a single streak of Staphylococcus aureus
Approximate Formula* Per Liter ATCC 33862 across the center of a blood agar plate. If a loop
Tryptone H ............................................................... 15.0 g is used, do not use it parallel to the agar surface, since the
Soytone ...................................................................... 5.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g streak will be too wide and the results will not be satisfactory.
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g The streptococcal isolates to be tested are inoculated by
Difco Tryptic Soy Blood Agar Base EH making a simple streak perpendicular to the S. aureus line
Approximate Formula* Per Liter coming as close as possible (2-3 mm), but not touching it.
Tryptone H Plus ........................................................ 15.0 g Several streptococcal isolates may be tested on the same plate.
Soytone ...................................................................... 5.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g Perpendicular streptococcal streaks should be 5-8 mm apart.
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g Include a known S. agalactiae for a positive control and
BBL Trypticase Soy Agar, Modified (TSA II) S. pyogenes as a negative control. The procedure should be
Approximate Formula* Per Liter practiced with known cultures before using it to identify
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 14.5 g unknown isolates.
Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal .................................. 5.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g NOTE: Studies on the CAMP Test have shown that the
Agar ......................................................................... 14.0 g
reaction is most reliable early in the shelf life of some lots of
Growth Factors .......................................................... 1.5 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. the prepared plated medium. It is recommended that
S. agalactiae ATCC 12386 be included along with patient
isolates to verify satisfactory performance.
Incubate plates in an aerobic atmosphere at 35 2C for
18-24 hours. Do not incubate anaerobically or in a CO2
incubator. False-positive results may occur with group A strep-
tococci when incubation is in an anaerobic or CO2-enriched
atmosphere.10,11
585
Section III
T TSA Blood Agars, cont.

Expected Results Availability

Hemolytic streptococci may appear translucent or opaque, Difco Tryptic Soy Blood Agar Base No. 2
grayish, small (1 mm), or large matt and mucoid (2-4 mm) BAM COMPF
colonies, encircled by a zone of hemolysis. Gram stains should Cat. No. 227300 Dehydrated 500 g
227200 Dehydrated 10 kg
be made and examined to check the macroscopic findings.
(Other organisms which may cause hemolysis include Listeria, Difco Tryptic Soy Blood Agar Base EH
BAM COMPF
various corynebacteria, hemolytic staphylococci, Escherichia Cat. No. 228300 Dehydrated 500 g
coli and Pseudomonas.) In reporting, approximate quantitation 228200 Dehydrated 10 kg
of the number of colonies of hemolytic streptococci may be BBL Trypticase Soy Agar, Modified (TSA II)
helpful to the clinician. BAM COMPF
Cat. No. 212305 Dehydrated 500 g
Pneumococci usually appear as very flat, smooth, translu-
298031 Dehydrated, LitrePak 20 x 1.0 L
cent, grayish and sometimes mucoid colonies surrounded 221082 Prepared Pour Tubes, 20 mL Pkg. of 10
by a narrow zone of green (alpha) hemolysis. 297941 Prepared Pour Tubes, 20 mL Ctn. of 100
Staphylococci appear as opaque, white to gold-yellow BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II)
colonies with or without zones of beta hemolysis. BS10 CMPH MCM7
Listeria produce small zones of beta hemolysis. They United States and Canada
Cat. No. 221239 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
may be distinguished by their rod shape in stains, and 221261 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
by motility at room temperature.
Europe
Haemophilus influenzae produces nonhemolytic, small Cat. No. 254053 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
grayish, translucent colonies with a mousy odor on 254087 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
Trypticase Soy Agar (TSA II) with 5% Rabbit Blood. Japan
Other organisms representing minimal flora and Cat. No. 251239 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
251261 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
clinically significant isolates can also be expected to 251240 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 200*
grow on this nonselective formulation.
BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with 10% Sheep Blood (TSA II)
CAMP Test Cat. No. 221162 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
221260 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
A positive CAMP reaction is indicated by an arrowhead or
triangular shaped area of increased hemolysis which forms around BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II)//
the end of the streptococcal streak line closest to the S. aureus Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II)
Cat. No. 221292 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
growth. The streptococcal growth must be within the wide
zone of partial hemolysis that surrounds the S. aureus growth. A BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
(TSA II)//Group A Selective Strep Agar with 5%
negative reaction may appear as a bullet-shaped zone of slightly Sheep Blood (ssA)
increased hemolysis or as no increased hemolysis. Cat. No. 221783 Prepared Bi-Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
Bacitracin-negative, CAMP-positive, beta-hemolytic strepto- BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood

cocci may be reported as presumptive group B streptococci. (TSA II)//Chocolate II Agar

CAMP-positive group A species may be differentiated from BS10 CMPH MCM7
United States and Canada
group B streptococci by hemolysis, bacitracin susceptibility, Cat. No. 221302 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
and hippurate hydrolysis. Group B streptococci tend to 221303 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
produce larger colonies and have less pronounced zones of Europe
beta hemolysis than other beta-hemolytic strains, and some Cat. No. 251302 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
group B strains are nonhemolytic.9 Japan
Cat. No. 251302 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
251303 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
References
1. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
International, Gaithersburg, Md. (TSA II)//Levine EMB Agar
2. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. BS10 CMPH MCM7
3. Vera and Power. 1980. In Lennette, Balows, Hausler and Truant (ed.), Manual of clinical microbi-
ology, 3rd ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Cat. No. 221286 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
4. Bernheimer, Linder and Avigad. 1979. Infect. Immun. 23:838. 221289 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
5. Krumweide and Kuttner. 1938. J. Exp. Med. 67:429.
6. Vera. 1971. Health Lab Sci. 8:176.
7. Finegold and Martin. 1982. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 6th ed. The C.V. Mosby
Company, St. Louis, Mo.
8. Nash and Krenz. 1991. In Balows, Hausler, Herrmann, Isenberg and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 5th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
9. Ruoff, Whiley and Beighton. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
10. Darling. 1975. J. Clin. Microbiol. 1:171.
11. Facklam and Washington. 1991. In Balows, Hausler, Herrmann, Isenberg and Shadomy (ed.),
Manual of clinical microbiology, 5th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

586
 TSA II with Ampicillin

BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Horse Blood (TSA II)
(TSA II)//MacConkey II Agar United States and Canada
BS10 CMPH MCM7 Cat. No. 221372 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
United States and Canada Europe
Cat. No. 221290 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20* Cat. No. 212099 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
221291 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*
BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Rabbit Blood (TSA II)

Europe
Cat. No. 251290
Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20* Cat. No. 221356 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*

Japan BBL Trypticase Soy Agar (TSA II) with Defibrinated

Cat. No. 251290 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 20* Sheep Blood Slant
251572 Prepared I Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100* Cat. No. 220830 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
220831 Prepared Slants Ctn. of 100*
BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
*Store at 2-8C.
(TSA II)//MacConkey II Agar with MUG

Cat. No. 221949 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
(TSA II)//Chocolate II Agar//MacConkey II Agar
Cat. No. 297140 Prepared Y Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
299580 Prepared Y Plate Dishes Ctn. of 100*

Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II)

with Ampicillin
Intended Use Expected Results
Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II) with Ampi- Colonies of Aeromonas may be round, raised, with an entire
cillin is used for the isolation of Aeromonas spp. edge, smooth surface and may be surrounded by a zone of
beta hemolysis. Gram staining, biochemical tests and other
Summary and Explanation procedures should be performed to confirm findings.
Aeromonas spp. are widely distributed in nature, primarily
occurring in natural fresh and salt waters, where they infect Limitations of the Procedure T
animals, amphibians, reptiles and fish.1 They have been recov- 1. Some diagnostic tests may be performed with the primary
ered from a variety of specimens; gastroenteritis, however, is plate. However, a pure culture is recommended for identi-
the most common infection associated with this organism.2 fication purposes. Consult appropriate references for
detailed information and recommended procedures.1-3
Aeromonas spp. grow on standard media used for the isolation
2. Ampicillin-susceptible species of Aeromonas have been
of gram-negative bacilli (e.g., blood agar and MacConkey Agar),
reported.1, 4
but some strains are reported to be inhibited on selective media
used to isolate Salmonella, Shigella and Campylobacter.2
References
Isolation is facilitated, however, on 5% sheep blood agar 1. Altwegg. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology,
containing ampicillin as a selective agent.1 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. Baron, Peterson and Finegold. 1994. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 9th ed. Mosby-
Year Book, Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
3. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriology,
Principles of the Procedure 9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
4. Carnahan, Chakraborty, Fanning, Verma, Ali, Janda and Joseph. 1991. J. Clin. Microbiol. 29:1206.
The combination of casein and soy peptones in the Trypticase
Soy Agar base renders the medium highly nutritious by
Availability
supplying organic nitrogen, particularly amino acids and
BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II)
larger-chained peptides. The sodium chloride maintains osmotic with Ampicillin
equilibrium. Defibrinated sheep blood supplies nutrients and, Cat. No. 297346 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
simultaneously, it allows detection of hemolytic reactions. *Store at 2-8C.

Ampicillin is active against gram-negative as well as gram-positive

organisms, although most Aeromonas spp. are resistant to it. Agar
is the solidifying agent.

Procedure
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from
specimens. Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar
side up) at 35 2C in an aerobic atmosphere for 18-48 hours.

587
Section III
T TSA II with Gentamicin

Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II)

with Gentamicin
Intended Use fastidious organisms and to detect hemolytic reactions while
Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II) with Gen- also inhibiting the growth of Haemophilus haemolyticus, a
tamicin is used for the isolation of Streptococcus pneumoniae bacterium commonly found in nose and throat specimens
from clinical specimens. that is indistinguishable from beta-hemolytic streptococci.1
Gentamicin is an aminoglycoside antibiotic that inhibits the
Summary and Explanation growth of gram-negative bacteria. Agar is the solidifying agent.
Streptococcus pneumoniae is the leading cause of bacterial
pneumonia and a cause of meningitis, endocarditis, otitis Procedure
media and sinusitis.1 Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci-
mens. Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar side
To improve the recovery of S. pneumoniae from clinical
up) at 35C in a CO2-enriched atmosphere for 18-48 hours.
specimens, gentamicin has been incorporated into a general
growth medium enriched with sheep blood. Dilworth et al. Expected Results
and Sondag et al. reported that supplementing sheep blood
Staphylococci and gram-negative bacteria are inhibited. Circular,
agar with gentamicin increased the recovery of S. pneumoniae
flat, translucent colonies surrounded by zones of alpha hemolysis
from respiratory secretions by inhibiting the growth of bacteria
may be presumptively identified as Streptococcus pneumoniae.
that masked the presence of pneumococcal colonies.2, 3
However, when the colonies are young, they may be dome-
Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II) with shaped and may be confused with viridans streptococci, which
Gentamicin improves the recovery of Streptococcus will also grow on this medium. Gram staining, biochemical
pneumoniae from clinical specimens by inhibiting the growth tests and serological procedures should be performed to
of bacteria that could mask its presence, including staphylo- confirm findings.
cocci and gram-negative bacilli. The concentration of
gentamicin has been reduced to 2.5 mg/L in this medium References
1. Ruoff, Whiley and Beighton. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
because higher concentrations of gentamicin may inhibit of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
2. Dilworth, Stewart, Gwaltney, Hendley and Sande. 1975. J. Clin. Microbiol. 2:453.
the growth of some strains of S. pneumoniae. 3. Sondag, Morgens, Hoppe and Marr. 1977. J. Clin. Microbiol. 5:397.

Principles of the Procedure Availability

The combination of casein and soy peptones renders the BBL Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II)
medium highly nutritious by supplying organic nitrogen, with Gentamicin
particularly amino acids and longer-chained peptides. Sodium Cat. No. 297457 Prepared Plates Pkg of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.
chloride maintains osmotic equilibrium. Defibrinated sheep
blood supplies nutrients necessary to support the growth of

Bacto Tryptic Soy Broth/Trypticase Soy Broth

(Soybean-Casein Digest Medium) Trypticase Soy
Broth with 6.5% Sodium Chloride Trypticase Soy
Broth with 5% Fildes Enrichment Bacto Tryptic
Soy Broth without Dextrose
Intended Use Trypticase Soy Broth with 6.5% Sodium Chloride is used to
Tryptic (Trypticase) Soy Broth conforms with specifications differentiate Enterococcus spp. from the Streptococcus bovis
of The United States Pharmacopeia (USP). group of streptococci.
Tryptic (Trypticase) Soy Broth (Soybean-Casein Digest Medium) Trypticase Soy Broth with 5% Fildes Enrichment is used for
is a general purpose medium used in qualitative procedures for the cultivation of fastidious organisms; e.g., Haemophilus
the cultivation of fastidious and nonfastidious microorganisms influenzae.
from a variety of clinical and nonclinical specimens.

588
 Tryptic Soy Broth, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Bacto Tryptic Soy Broth BBL Trypticase Soy Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extrane-
neous. ous material.
Solution: 3.0% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 3.0% solution, soluble in purified
water upon warming. Solution is light water upon warming. Solution is light,
amber, clear. tan to yellow, clear to slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear. Prepared Appearance: Light, tan to yellow, clear to slightly
Reaction of 3.0% hazy.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2 Reaction of 3.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
Bacto Tryptic Soy Broth without Dextrose

Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-

neous.
Cultural Response
BBL Trypticase Soy Broth
Solution: 2.75% solution, soluble in purified
water upon warming. Solution is light Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate aero-
amber, clear to very slightly opalescent. bically (unless otherwise indicated) at 20-25C for organisms marked
(*) and at 33-37C for the remaining organisms. Incubate for up to 5
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to very slightly opal- days (incubate E. coli and S. aureus for 2 days).
escent.
Reaction of 2.75% ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2 Aspergillus niger* 16404 < 102 Growth
Bacillus subtilis* 6633 < 102 Growth
Cultural Response Bacteroides fragilis (anaerobic) 25285 5102-103 Growth
Bacto Tryptic Soy Broth Candida albicans* 10231 < 102 Growth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Candida albicans* 2091 < 102 Growth
30-35C for 18-48 hours (up to 72 hours, if necessary). To test for Escherichia coli 25922 < 102 Growth
growth promotion according to the USP/EP, inoculate using organisms Micrococcus luteus* 9341 < 102 Growth
marked with (*) and incubate at 20-25C for 3 days and 7 days for
Neisseria meningitidis (3-5% CO2) 700344 < 102 Growth
bacteria and fungi, respectively (incubate B. subtilis at 20-25C and
30-35C). Pseudomonas aeruginosa
Staphylococcus aureus
27853
25923
5102-103
< 102
Growth
Growth
T
INOCULUM USP/EP Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 < 102 Growth
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY GROWTH
Streptococcus pneumoniae
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 10-102 Fair to good N/A (anaerobic) 6305 < 102 Growth
Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 10-102 Good N/A NOTE: A. niger ATCC 16404, B. subtilis ATCC 6633 and C. albicans ATCC 10231 are the USP/EP
Streptococcus recommended organisms for growth promotion testing.
pneumoniae 6305 10-102 Good N/A
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 10-102 Good N/A
Aspergillus niger* 16404 10-102 N/A Growth
Bacillus subtilis* (20-25C) 6633 10-102 N/A Growth
Bacillus subtilis* (30-35C) 6633 10-102 N/A Growth
Candida albicans* 10231 10-102 N/A Growth

Bacto Tryptic Soy Broth without Dextrose

Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 30-300 Fair to good
Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 30-300 Good
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 30-300 Good
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 30-300 Good

Uninoculated Staphylococcus
Tube epidermidis
ATCC 12228

589
Section III
T Tryptic Soy Broth, cont.

Tryptic Soy Broth without Dextrose, a low carbohydrate Tryptic Soy Broth and Trypticase Soy Broth are provided
formulation of Tryptic Soy Broth, is used for cultivating as prepared media in a variety of bottle styles. In addition,
fastidious and nonfastidious microorganisms. Tryptic Soy Broth is provided as a Sterile Pack Bottle; i.e., the
bottle has been terminally sterilized inside of autoclavable
Summary and Explanation double-bags. All varieties of bottled TSB conform with
Tryptic (Trypticase) Soy Broth (TSB) is a nutritious medium requirements for Ready-To-Use Media as described in the USP.
that will support the growth of a wide variety of microorganisms,
including common aerobic, facultative and anaerobic bacteria and Formulae
fungi.1-4 Because of its capacity for growth promotion, this Bacto Tryptic Soy Broth
formulation is included in the USP as a sterility test medium Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 17.0 g
and for use in performing microbial limit testing.5 Enzymatic Digest of Soybean Meal ............................ 3.0 g
TSB was chosen by the USDA Animal and Plant Health Inspection Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.5 g
Service for detecting viable bacteria in live vaccines.6 It is used in Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.5 g
the coliphage detection procedure, a methodology in Standard BBL Trypticase Soy Broth
Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater.7 Approximate Formula* Per Liter
TSB is recommended for testing bacterial contaminants in Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 17.0 g
cosmetics8 and complies with established standards in the food Papaic Digest of Soybean Meal .................................. 3.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
industry.9-11 Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.5 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.5 g
TSB is also recommended, because of growth promotion, for
use as the inoculum broth for disc diffusion and agar dilution Bacto Tryptic Soy Broth without Dextrose
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
antimicrobial susceptibility testing as standardized by the Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 17.0 g
National Committeee for Clinical Laboratory Standards Enzymatic Digest of Soybean Meal ............................ 3.0 g
(NCCLS).12,13 Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 2.5 g
Trypticase Soy Broth with 6.5% Sodium Chloride is used to *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

differentiate the enterococcal species from the S. bovis group

of streptococci by the 6.5% NaCl tolerance test.14 Directions for Preparation from
Dehydrated Product
Trypticase Soy Broth supplemented with 5% Fildes Enrich-
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
ment provides growth factors necessary for the cultivation of
Bacto Tryptic Soy Broth 30 g;
fastidious organisms.15
BBL Trypticase Soy Broth 30 g;
Tryptic Soy Broth without Dextrose, a modification of TSB, is Bacto Tryptic Soy Broth without Dextrose 27.5 g.
a basal medium to which carbohydrates may be added for use Mix thoroughly.
in fermentation studies. Phenol red and other indicators may 2. Warm gently until solution is complete.
also be added. 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Principles of the Procedure stable, typical control cultures.
Enzymatic digests of casein and soybean meal provide amino acids
and other complex nitrogenous substances. Dextrose is an energy Procedure
source. Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic equilibrium. Dibasic Swab specimens may be inserted into the medium after inocu-
potassium phosphate acts as a buffer to control pH. lation of appropriate plated media. For liquid specimens, use
The addition of 6.5% sodium chloride to Trypticase Soy Broth a sterile inoculating loop to transfer a loopful of the specimen
to the broth medium. Specimens known or suspected to
permits the differentiation of salt-tolerant enterococci, which
contain obligate anaerobes should be inoculated near the
are resistant to the high salt content, from the salt-intolerant
bottom of the tube.
S. bovis group and other streptococcal species. At this
concentration, the sodium chloride is a selective agent that Incubate the tubes and bottles with loosened caps at 35 2C
interferes with membrane permeability and osmotic and aerobically with or without supplementation with carbon
electrokinetic equilibria.1 dioxide. Tubed and bottled media intended for the cultivation
of anaerobes should be incubated under anaerobic conditions.
Fildes Enrichment is a peptic digest of sheep blood that sup-
An efficient and easy way to obtain suitable anaerobic condi-
plies the X (hemin) and V (nicotinamide adenine dinucleotide,
tions is through the use of BBL GasPak or GasPak EZ
NAD) factors necessary for the growth of H. influenzae.
anaerobic systems or equivalent alternative system.
Dextrose is omitted from the formula for Tryptic Soy Broth
Examine for growth after 18-24 hours and 42-48 hours of
without Dextrose to permit use of the medium in fermenta-
incubation.
tion studies. The carbohydrate concentration used most
frequently in fermentation reactions is 0.5% or 1%.
590
 TSB with 0.15% Agar

For use in sterility testing, consult the USP for procedural BBL Trypticase Soy Broth (Soybean-Casein Digest
details and specifications for volume of medium relative to Medium)
AOAC BAM BS10 CCAM CMPH COMPF EP ISO MCM7
container size.5
NCCLS SMD SMWW USDA USP
For use in the preparation of standardized inocula for antimi- Cat. No. 211768 Dehydrated 500 g
296264 Sterile, Dehydrated 500 g
crobial susceptibility testing, refer to the NCCLS standards.12,13 211771 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
211772 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
Expected Results 298131 Dehydrated LitrePak 20 1.0 L
Growth in broth media is indicated by the presence of turbid- 297294 Prepared Tubes, 0.5 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100
295634 Prepared Tubes, 1 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100
ity compared to an uninoculated control. Broth cultures should 221815 Prepared Tubes, 2 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100
be held for at least a week before discarding as negative. 297979 Prepared Tubes, 3 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100
297482 Prepared Tubes, 4 mL (D Tubes) Ctn. of 100
221715 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10
References 221716 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100
1. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md. 297342 Prepared Tubes, 5 mL (D Tubes) Ctn. of 100
2. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American 221092 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. 221093 Prepared Tubes, 8 mL (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100
3. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby, Inc.
St. Louis, Mo. 297354 Prepared Tubes, 10 mL (D Tubes) Ctn. of 100
4. Fredette and Forget. 1961. The sensitivity of several media to small inocula. Extract from a paper 221823 Prepared Tubes, 15 mL (A Tubes) Ctn. of 100
presented at the Canadian Society of Microbiology Annual Meeting, June 12-15. Kingston, Ontario,
Canada.
297811 Prepared Tubes, 21 mL (A Tubes) Pkg. of 10
5. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The 297380 Prepared Bottle 30 mL
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md. 299107 Prepared Bottles, 100 mL (serum bottle) Pkg. of 10
6. Federal Register. 1992. Fed. Regist. 21:113.26.
7. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
299416 Prepared Bottles, 100 mL
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. (septum screw cap) Pkg. of 10
8. Curry, Joyce and McEwen. 1993. CTFA microbiology guidelines. The Cosmetic, Toiletry and 299113 Prepared Bottles, 500 mL Pkg. of 10
Fragrance Association, Inc., Washington, D.C.
9. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC BBL Trypticase Soy Broth with 6.5% Sodium Chloride

International, Gaithersburg, Md.
10. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis AOAC International, 17th ed., vol. 1. AOAC Cat. No. 221351 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
11. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of BBL Trypticase Soy Broth with Fildes Enrichment
foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
12. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved standard: M2-A7. Per- Cat. No. 221403 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
formance standards for antimicrobial disk susceptibility tests, 7th ed., NCCLS, Wayne, Pa. 221404 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Ctn. of 100*
13. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved standard: M7-A5.
Methods for dilution antimicrobial susceptibility tests for bacteria that grow aerobically, 5th ed. Bacto Tryptic Soy Broth without Dextrose
NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
Cat. No. 286220 Dehydrated 500 g
14. Facklam, Sahm and Teixeira. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
15. Fildes. 1920. Br. J. Exp. Pathol. 1:129.
286210 Dehydrated 10 kg T
*Store at 2-8C.

Availability
Bacto Tryptic Soy Broth (Soybean-Casein Digest
Medium)
AOAC BAM BS10 CCAM CMPH COMPF EP ISO MCM7
NCCLS SMD SMWW USDA USP
Cat. No. 211824 Dehydrated 100 g
211825 Dehydrated 500 g
211822 Dehydrated 2 kg
211823 Dehydrated 10 kg
290631 Prepared Bottles, 100 mL
(septum screw cap) Pkg. of 10
290612 Prepared Bottles, 90 mL (wide mouth) Pkg. of 10
290613 Prepared Bottles, 100 mL (wide mouth) Pkg. of 10
257213 Sterile Pack Bottles (double bagged),
100 mL Pkg. of 10

Trypticase Soy Broth with 0.15% Agar

Intended Use enhances the cultivation of some microorganisms, particularly
Trypticase Soy Broth (TSB) with 0.15% Agar is a general- anaerobes from root canal and other clinical specimens.1
purpose medium for cultivation of fastidious and nonfastidious
microorganisms, especially anaerobic bacteria. Principles of the Procedure
TSB contains enzymatic digests of casein and soybean meal to
Summary and Explanation provide nitrogenous substances. Dextrose is a source of
TSB is a nutritious medium that supports the growth of a wide energy, and sodium chloride provides osmotic equilibrium.
variety of microorganisms, including common aerobic, anaerobic
and facultative bacteria and fungi.1-3 The addition of agar

591
Section III
T TSB with 0.15% Agar, cont.

Supplementing TSB with agar is useful for the cultivation of Expected Results
anaerobes. The agar in the medium retards the absorption of Growth in tubes is indicated by the presence of turbidity com-
oxygen by reducing convection currents in the medium. pared to an uninoculated control.

Procedure If growth appears, cultures should be examined by Gram stain-

ing and subculturing onto appropriate media; e.g., a
Liquid media for anaerobic incubation should be reduced prior
Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II) plate
to inoculation by placing the tubes, with caps loosened, under
and/or Chocolate II Agar plate, EMB Agar or MacConkey II
anaerobic conditions for 18-24 hours. An efficient and easy
Agar plate, etc. If anaerobes are suspected, subcultures should
way to obtain suitable anaerobic conditions is through the use
be incubated anaerobically, as in a GasPak EZ anaerobic
of BBL GasPak EZ anaerobic systems or an alternative
system.
anaerobic system.4
The organisms to be cultivated must first be isolated in pure References
culture on an appropriate plated or slanted medium. 1. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
2. Fredette, Auger and Forget. 1961. Can . Med. Assoc. J. 84:164.
Using a sterile inoculating loop or needle, transfer fresh growth 3. Forbes, Sahm, and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed.
Mosby, Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
from the plate or slant to the tubed medium to achieve the 4. Seip and Evans. 1980. J. Clin. Microbiol. 11:226.
desired concentration of viable organisms. Specimens known
or suspected to contain obligate anaerobes should be inocu- Availability
lated near the bottom of the tube. BBL Trypticase Soy Broth with 0.15% Agar
Cat. No. 298263 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 9 mL Ctn. of 100
Tubed media intended for isolation and cultivation of anaerobes
should be incubated under anaerobic conditions for up to 7
days.

Trypticase Soy Broth with 20% Glycerol

Intended Use Expected Results
This medium is used in the long-term frozen maintenance of Bacterial stock cultures frozen and stored at -20C or below
bacterial stock cultures. will remain viable for several months, and some may remain
viable for years.
Summary and Explanation
Trypticase Soy Broth, a nutritious medium supplemented References
1. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
with glycerol, may be used as a maintenance medium for the vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
preservation of bacterial cultures.1, 2 2. Gherna. 1994. In Gerhardt, Murray, Wood and Krieg (ed.). Methods for general and molecular
bacteriology. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Norris and Ribbons (ed.). 1970. Methods for microbiology, vol. 3A. Academic Press, Inc., New
York, N.Y.
Principles of the Procedure 4. Kirsop and Snell (ed.). 1984. Maintenance of microorganisms. Academic Press, Inc., New York,
N.Y.
Enzymatic digests of protein substrates act as protective
colloids. Glycerol is a cryoprotective agent that provides
Availability
intracellular and extracellular protection against freezing.2
BBL Trypticase Soy Broth with 20% Glycerol
Cat. No. 296346 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 1.5 mL Pkg. of 10
Procedure 297808 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 1.5 mL Ctn. of 100
Using a sterile swab or inoculating loop, remove fresh growth 297352 Prepared Tubes (C Tubes), 10 mL Ctn. of 100
from the plated or slanted medium and suspend in the broth
maintenance medium to achieve the desired concentration of
viable cells. Freeze suspension immediately at -20C or below.
Consult texts for detailed information about preparing stock
cultures of specific organisms.2-4

Tryptone Trypticase Peptone

(See Casitone)

592
 Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar

Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar m TGE Broth

Intended Use Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar with added milk remained the
Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar is used for cultivating and standard methods medium for dairy products8 and was also
enumerating microorganisms in water and dairy products. adopted for testing water.9 It is currently recommended in
the Compendium of Methods for the Microbiological Exami-
m TGE Broth, also known as membrane Tryptone Glucose
nation of Foods for performing the heterotrophic plate count
Extract Broth, is used for enumerating microorganisms by
procedure in testing bottled water.10
membrane filtration.
m TGE Broth is a nonselective nutrient medium for the deter-
Summary and Explanation mination of bacterial counts by the membrane filter method.
In the 1930s, Bower and Hucker1 developed a medium for The broth has the same formulation as the agar except that
detecting bacteria in milk and other dairy products. Many the broth contains no agar and the ingredients are at twice the
investigators compared the performance of Tryptone Glucose concentration.
Skim Milk Agar to Nutrient Agar for estimating bacteria in
milk and other dairy products.2-4 Prickett5 used a glucose agar Principles of the Procedure
containing tryptone to study thermophilic bacteria in milk. Nutrients, including amino acids, carbon compounds, carbo-
This medium, described in Standard Methods of Milk hydrates, minerals and trace substances, are supplied by the
Analysis,6 was prepared in the dehydrated form as Yeast tryptone, beef extract and dextrose. Agar is the solidifying
Dextrose Agar. The American Public Health Association agent in Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar.
(APHA) adopted Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar for use in
testing milk and dairy products in 1948.7 For many years,

Uninoculated Pasturized
User Quality Control Plate Milk

Identity Specifications
Difco Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light to medium tan, free-flowing,
homogeneous. T
Solution: 2.4% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light amber,
clear to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 2.4%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
Difco m TGE Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Light tan, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 1.8% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light to medium
amber, clear to very slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Medium amber, clear to very slightly
opalescent.
Reaction of 1.8%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions in parallel with a control (ap-
proved) lot of medium. Inoculate with serial dilutions of pasteurized and
raw milk samples using the pour plate technique and incubate at 32
1C for 47-49 hours. Recovery of bacteria from the milk samples should
be comparable for both the test and control lots.
Difco m TGE Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the membrane
filter technique and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours in a humid
atmosphere.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good

593
 Section III
T Tryptone Glucose Extract, cont.

Formulae hardened plates at 32 1C for 47-49 hours, or as specified in

Difco Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar standard methods (35 0.5C for at least 72 hours).10
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Broth (Membrane Filtration)
Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
Tryptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g Inoculate medium using the membrane filter technique and
Dextrose (Glucose) ..................................................... 1.0 g incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours in a humid atmosphere.
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Difco m TGE Broth Expected Results
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Beef Extract ................................................................ 6.0 g
Follow recommended procedures for counting colonies and
Tryptone ................................................................... 10.0 g reporting results.10
Dextrose (Glucose) ..................................................... 2.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Because bacteria found in bottled water demonstrate a
prolonged lag phase during adaptation to growth on Tryptone
Directions for Preparation from Glucose Extract Agar, extended incubation beyond 48 hours
Dehydrated Product may be required.10
1. Suspend/dissolve the powder in 1 L of purified water:
Difco Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar 24 g; References
1. Bowers and Hucker. 1935. Tech. Bull. 228. New York State Agr. Exp. Sta., Geneva, N.Y.
Difco m TGE Broth 18 g. 2. Yale. 1938. Am. J. Pub. Health 28:148.
3. Proc. 36th Cong. Intern. Assoc. Ice Cream Manufacturers. 1936. 2:132.
Mix thoroughly. 4. Dennis and Weiser. 1937. J. Dairy Science 20:445.
2. For agar, heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute 5.
6.
Prickett. 1928. Tech. Bull. 147. New York State Agr. Exp. Sta., Geneva, N.Y.
Standard Methods of Milk Analysis, 6th ed. 1934.
to completely dissolve the powder. 7. American Public Health Association. 1948. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products,
9th ed. American Public Health Association, New York, N.Y.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. 8. American Public Health Association. 1972. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products,
13th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 9. American Public Health Association. 1980. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 15th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
stable, typical control cultures. 10. Kim and Feng. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiological
examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

Procedure
Consult the reference for information regarding the process- Availability
Difco Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar
ing and inoculation of bottled water samples.10
AOAC COMPF
Agar (Pour Plate) Cat. No. 223000 Dehydrated 500 g
Usually 1 mL samples of appropriate dilutions of the test sample Difco m TGE Broth
are pipetted into sterile Petri dishes and molten, cooled Tryptone COMPF
Glucose Extract Agar is added followed by gentle mixing to Cat. No. 275010 Dehydrated 100 g
275020 Dehydrated 500 g
distribute the sample dilution throughout the agar. Incubate

Tryptone Water
Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Tryptone Water is recommended for use in the detection Tryptone Water contains both tryptone (1%) and sodium chlo-
of Escherichia coli in food and water samples based on indole ride. Due to its high tryptophan content, tryptone is suitable
production. for use in detecting indole production by bacteria. Tryptophan
is hydrolyzed and deaminated to produce indole, pyruvic acid
Summary and Explanation and ammonia.4 Indole can then be detected by the addition
Tryptone Water is based on the Tryptone Water formula of either Kovacs or Ehrlichs Reagent, which contain an
described in an ISO standard.1 In this procedure, Tryptone aldehyde group. The aldehyde group combines with indole to
Water is used with Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2% to determine produce a red color in the alcohol layer. Sodium chloride is added
the most probable number (MPN) of E. coli present in meat to the medium to provide a suitable osmotic environment.
and meat products. Growth and gas production in Brilliant
Green Bile Broth 2% and indole production in Tryptone Formula
Water following incubation of both media at 44 1C is used Difco Tryptone Water
as the basis for this presumptive E. coli test. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Tryptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
Tryptone Water may also be used for differentiation of other Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
bacteria based on indole production. Production of indole *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

using pure cultures in tryptophan-containing media is recom-

mended as an aid in the differentiation of bacteria and the
identification of E. coli isolated from food and water samples.2,3
594
 Tryptone Water, cont.

Indole Determination Using Pure Cultures

User Quality Control 1. Inoculate Tryptone Water using a light inoculum of an
Identity Specifications 18-24 hour pure culture.
Difco Tryptone Water 2. Incubate the tubes at 35 2C with loosened caps for
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free flowing, homoge- 18-24 hours.
neous. 3. Add 0.5 mL of Indole Reagent (Kovacs) directly to the tube
Solution: 1.5% solution, soluble in purified wa-
and agitate. Allow tubes to stand for 5-10 minutes.
ter. Solution is light to medium am-
ber, clear to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear to Expected Results
slightly opalescent. Presumptive Test For E. coli in Meats and Meat Products
Reaction of 1.5% Examine and record the tubes of Brilliant Green Bile Broth
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
2% tubes containing gas. Add 0.5 mL Indole Reagent Kovacs
Cultural Response to the Tryptone Water tubes. Observe tubes for the formation
Difco Tryptone Water of a red ring at the top of medium indicating indole produc-
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at tion. Record the tubes for positive indole production. Deter-
35 2C for 18-24 hours. Add 0.5 mL Indole Reagent (Kovacs) to the mine the MPN (Most Probable Number) of E. coli present in
tubes to test for indole production. Formation of a red color denotes a the sample based on the number of tubes that are positive for
positive indole test.
both gas and indole. Consult the appropriate 3-tube MPN
INOCULUM INDOLE table.2
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY PRODUCTION
Enterobacter cloacae 13047 102-3102 Good Indole Determination Using Pure Cultures
Escherichia coli 25922 102-3102 Good + Examine tubes for the formation of a red ring at the top of the
tube indicating indole production.

Directions for Preparation from Limitations of the Procedure

Dehydrated Product 1. Detection of E. coli in meats using Tryptone Water is a
1. Dissolve 15 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. presumptive test. If confirmatory testing is required, please
2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. consult appropriate references.
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
2. Indole testing is recommended as an aid in the differentia-
tion of microorganisms based on indole production.
T
For complete identification of the organism, further
Procedure biochemical evaluation is necessary.
Presumptive Test For E. coli in Meats and Meat Products1
1. Suspend one part sample in 9 parts diluent. Homogenize References
sample. 1. International Organization for Standardization: Meat and meat products. Detection and enumera-
tion of presumptive coliform bacterial and presumptive E. coli (Reference method ISO/DIS 3811-
2. Dilute homogenate in duplicate using serial 10-fold 1979). International Organization for Standardization, Geneva, Switzerland.
2. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
dilutions to 10-6 using 1 mL of material to be diluted to 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
9 mL of diluent. Mix each dilution thoroughly. wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
4. MacFaddin. 2000. Biochemical tests for identification of medical bacteria, 3rd ed. Lippincott
3. Transfer 1 mL of homogenate (step 1) to 6 tubes contain- Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
ing 10 mL Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2% and group in 2
sets of 3 tubes each. If the number of coliforms is expected Availability
to be high, transfer 10 mL of homogenate into 6 tubes con- Difco Tryptone Water
taining double strength Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2%. ISO
4. Transfer 1 mL from each of the dilutions prepared in step 2 Cat. No. 264410 Dehydrated 500 g
into each of 3 tubes containing 10 mL Brilliant Green Bile Difco/BBL Indole Reagent
Broth 2%. Cat. No. 261185 Droppers 50 0.5 mL
5. Incubate Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2% tubes (prepared in
steps 3 and 4) at 30 1C for 48 2 hours. Subculture all
tubes containing gas, using 1 drop of inoculum, into
Tryptone Water and Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2%.
6. Incubate tubes prepared in step 5 at 44 1C for 48 2
hours.

595
Section III
T Tryptose

Bacto Tryptose
Intended Use Tryptose is the major ingredient and only peptone in the
Bacto Tryptose is an enzymatic digest of protein used in pre- formulation for Tryptose Phosphate Broth (TPB), an often-
paring microbiological culture media. used medium for various culture applications. Hata and
Kojima6 have shown TPB to be a useful supplement in cultur-
Summary and Explanation ing the nematode, Angiostrongylus cantonensis. TPB was also
Tryptose was originally developed as a peptone particularly reported as a supplement to a medium for cultivating a proto-
adapted to growth requirements of Brucella. Tryptose is very zoan parasite, which parasitizes vectors of Chagas disease, on
useful for cultivation of streptococci, pneumococci, meningo- its insect cell host.7 Spodoptera frugiperda, a cotton pest in
cocci and other fastidious organisms, and was found to be Argentina8 and several tick cell lines have also been grown
superior to meat infusion peptone media previously used for using a TPB-supplemented medium.9 Tryptose Phosphate Broth
these organisms.1,2 Mobley et al.3 reported that Tryptose Broth has been reported as a suitable supplement for growth of baby
was the preferred medium for strains of Bordetella hamster kidney cells10 and porcine kidney cells.11
bronchiseptica in studies of phosphatase activity. Media formulations containing Bacto Tryptose are specified
Tryptose has been reported as beneficial for cell culture applica- in standard methods for various applications.12-17
tions. Litwin4 found Tryptose to be suitable for supplementing
a serum-free medium to grow human diploid fibroblasts. Vaughn Principles of the Procedure
and Fan5 established that Tryptose provided free amino acids Bacto Tryptose is a mixed enzymatic hydrolysate with distinc-
necessary for growth of Spodoptera frugiperda and Lymantria tive nutritional properties. The digestive process of Bacto
dispar insect cell lines. Tryptose is often used as a biomass Tryptose results in assorted peptides of higher molecular weight
enhancer for recombinant E. coli production. suitable for long chain amino acid requirements. Bacto Tryptose

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Bacto Tryptose
Dehydrated Appearance: Tan, free-flowing, granules.
Solution: 1.0%, 2.0% and 10.0% solutions, soluble in purified water. 1.0% solution is light amber, clear. 2.0% solution is
medium amber, clear to slightly opalescent. 10.0% solution is medium to dark amber, very slightly opalescent to
opalescent, may have a precipitate.
Reaction of 1.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1-7.5

Cultural Response
Biochemical Reactions
Bacto Tryptose
Prepare a sterile solution of Bacto Tryptose as directed below. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-48 hours.
TEST TEST SOLUTION ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RESULT
Fermentable Carbohydrates 2% Escherichia coli 25922 ~107 Negative
Indole Production 0.1% Escherichia coli 29552 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Acetylmethylcarbinol 0.1% with Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
Production 0.5% dextrose
Hydrogen Sulfide Production 1% Salmonella choleraesuis 14028 0.1 mL, undiluted Positive
subsp. choleraesuis serotype Typhimurium

Growth Response
Bacto Tryptose
Prepare a sterile solution with 2% Bacto Tryptose, 0.5% sodium chloride and 1.5% agar. Adjust final pH to 7.2-7.4. Inoculate and incubate plates at
35 2C for 18-48 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Brucella suis 4314* Undiluted Good
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6303 30-300 Good
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 30-300 Good
*If this strain is not available, verify performance with a known isolate.

596
 Tryptose Blood Agar Base

provides nitrogen, amino acids and vitamins in Expected Results

microbiological culture media. Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.

Typical Analysis References

Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of this 1. Casman. 1942. J. Bacteriol. 43:33.
2. Casman. 1947. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 17:281.
manual. 3. Mobley, Chengappa, Kadel and Stuart. 1984. Can. J. Comp. Med. 48:175.
4. Litwin. 1985. Dev. Biol. Stand. 60:25.
5. Vaughn and Fan. 1997. In Vitro Cell. Dev. Biol. Anim. 33:479.
Precautions18 6. Hata and Kojima. 1990. Exp. Parasitol. 70:467.
7. Reduth, Schaub, and Pudney. 1989. Parasitology 98:387.
1. Biosafety Level 2 practices, containment equipment and 8. Deutschmann and Jager. 1994. Enzyme Microb. Technol. 16:506.
9. Munderloh and Kurtti. 1989. Exp. Appl. Acarol. 7:219.
facilities are recommended for activities with clinical 10. Prodafikas and Plavsic. 2000. Focus 22:35.
11. Sakoda and Fukusho. 1998. In Vitro Cell Dev. Biol. Anim. 34:53.
specimens of human or animal origin containing or poten- 12. Horowitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
tially containing pathogenic Brucella spp. 13. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual 8th ed. AOAC
2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and International, Gaithersburg, Md.
14. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
facilities are recommended for all manipulations of cultures foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
15. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA). 2000. Improved enumeration methods for the
of the pathogenic Brucella spp. and for experimental recreational water quality indicators: Enterococci and Escherichia coli. EPA-821/R-97/004. Office
of Water, USEPA, Washington, D.C.
animal studies. 16. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
17. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1998. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food and
Directions for Preparation from Safety Inspection Service, USDA, Washington, D.C.
18. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Dehydrated Product Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
Refer to the final concentration of Bacto Tryptose in the for-
mula of the medium being prepared. Add product as required. Availability
Bacto Tryptose
Procedure AOAC BAM COMPF EPA SMWW USDA
See appropriate references for specific procedures using Bacto Cat. No. 211713 Dehydrated 500 g
Tryptose. 211709 Dehydrated 10 kg

Tryptose Blood Agar Base T

Intended Use Without enrichment, this base can be used as a general-
Tryptose Blood Agar Base is used with blood in isolating, purpose medium. Tryptose Blood Agar Base is included in
cultivating and determining the hemolytic reactions of the FDA Bacteriological Analytical Manual (pH adjusted to
fastidious microorganisms. 6.8 0.2).3

Summary and Explanation Principles of the Procedure

Investigations of the nutritive properties of tryptose demon- Tryptose is the source of nitrogen, carbon and amino acids in
strated that culture media prepared with this peptone were Tryptose Blood Agar Base. Beef extract provides additional
superior to the meat infusion peptone media previously used nitrogen. Sodium chloride maintains osmotic balance. Agar is
for the cultivation of Brucella, streptococci, pneumococci, the solidifying agent.
meningococci and other fastidious bacteria. Casman1,2 reported
Supplementation with 5-10% blood provides additional growth
that a medium consisting of 2% tryptose, 0.3% beef extract,
factors for fastidious microorganisms and is used to determine
0.5% NaCl, 1.5% agar and 0.03% dextrose equaled fresh beef
hemolytic patterns of bacteria.
infusion base with respect to growth of organisms. The small
amount of carbohydrate was noted to interfere with hemolytic Formula
reactions, unless the medium was incubated in an atmosphere Difco Tryptose Blood Agar Base
of carbon dioxide. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Tryptose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Tryptose Blood Agar Base is a nutritious infusion-free basal Beef Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
medium typically supplemented with 5-10% sheep, rabbit or Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
horse blood for use in isolating, cultivating and determining Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
hemolytic reactions of fastidious pathogenic microorganisms.

597
Section III
T Tryptose Blood Agar Base, cont.

Escherichia coli Staphylococcus aureus

User Quality Control ATCC 25922 ATCC 25923

Identity Specifications
Difco Tryptose Blood Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 3.3% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is light amber, very
slightly to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Plain Light amber, slightly opalescent.
With 5% sheep blood Cherry red,
opaque.
Reaction of 3.3%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Tryptose Blood Agar Base
Prepare the medium per label directions without (plain) and with 5%
sterile defibrinated sheep blood (SB). Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C
for 18-48 hours (blood plates under 5-10% CO2).
INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY HEMOLYSIS
ORGANISM ATCC CFU PLAIN WITH SB 18-48 HR
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good Good Beta
Neisseria Streptococcus Streptococcus
meningitidis 13090 102-103 None to poor Good None pneumoniae pyogenes
ATCC 6305 ATCC 19615
Staphylococcus
aureus 25923 102-103 Good Good Beta
Streptococcus
pneumoniae 6305 102-103 Fair to good Good Alpha
Streptococcus
pyogenes 19615 102-103 Fair to good Good Beta

Directions for Preparation from Expected Results

Dehydrated Product Four different types of hemolysis on blood agar media can be
1. Suspend 33 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix described:5
thoroughly. a. Alpha ()-hemolysis is the reduction of hemoglobin to
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to methemoglobin in the medium surrounding the colony.
completely dissolve the powder. This causes a greenish discolorization of the medium.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. b. Beta ()-hemolysis is the lysis of red blood cells, result-
4. To prepare blood agar, aseptically add 5% sterile defibri- ing in a clear zone surrounding the colony.
nated blood to the medium cooled to 45-50C. Mix well. c. Gamma ()-hemolysis indicates no hemolysis. No
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using destruction of red blood cells occurs, and there is no
stable typical control cultures. change in the medium.
d. Alpha-prime ()-hemolysis is a small zone of complete
Procedure hemolysis that is surrounded by an area of partial lysis.
1. Process each specimen as appropriate, and inoculate directly
onto the surface of the medium. Streak for isolation with Limitations of the Procedure
an inoculating loop, then stab the agar several times to 1. Blood Agar Base Media are intended for use with blood
deposit beta-hemolytic streptococci beneath the agar supplementation. Although certain diagnostic tests may
surface. Subsurface growth will display the most reliable be performed directly on this medium, biochemical and, if
hemolytic reactions of both oxygen-stable and oxygen- indicated, immunological testing using pure cultures
labile streptolysins.4 are recommended for complete identification. Consult
2. Incubate plates aerobically, anaerobically or under conditions appropriate references for further information.
of increased CO2 (5-10%) in accordance with established 2. Hemolytic reactions of some strains of group D strepto-
laboratory procedures. cocci have been shown to be affected by differences in
3. Examine plates for growth and hemolytic reactions after animal blood. Such strains are beta-hemolytic on horse,
18-24 and 48-hour incubation. human and rabbit blood agar and alpha-hemolytic on sheep
blood agar.4

598
 Tryptose Agar

3. Colonies of Haemophilus haemolyticus are beta-hemolytic References

on horse and rabbit blood agar, and must be distinguished 1. Casman. 1942. J. Bacteriol. 43:33.
2. Casman. 1947. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 17:281.
from colonies of beta-hemolytic streptococci using other 3. Harmon, Kautter, Golden and Rhodehamel. 1995. In FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th
ed. AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
criteria. The use of sheep blood has been suggested to 4. Ruoff, Whiley and Beighton. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
obviate this problem since sheep blood is deficient in 5. Isenberg. (ed.). 1992. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol. 1. American Society for
Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
pyridine nucleotides and does not support growth of 6. Baron, Peterson and Finegold. 1994. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 9th ed. Mosby-Year
H. haemolyticus.6 Book, Inc., St. Louis, Mo.

4. The atmosphere of incubation has been shown to influence

hemolytic reactions of beta-hemolytic streptococci.3 For Availability
Difco Tryptose Blood Agar Base
optimal performance, incubate blood agar base media
BAM
under increased CO2 or anaerobic conditions. Cat. No. 223220 Dehydrated 500 g
5. Hemolytic patterns may vary with the source of animal 223210 Dehydrated 2 kg
blood or type of base medium used.4

Tryptose Agar Tryptose Broth

Intended Use Summary and Explanation
Tryptose Agar is used for cultivating a wide variety of fastidi- Tryptose media, prepared without extract or infusion of meat,
ous microorganisms, particularly for isolating Brucella accord- are recommended for the cultivation and isolation of patho-
ing to Huddleson and Castaeda. genic and saprophytic bacteria. Historically, it was considered
necessary to include meat extract or infusion as a nutritional
Tryptose Broth is used for cultivating Brucella and other fas-
supplement in culture media. Tryptose was developed while
tidious microorganisms.
studying the growth requirements of Brucella. Huddleson1
User Quality Control found tryptose media to be equal or superior to meat infusion
media, providing uniformity for the cultivation and differen-
Identity Specifications tiation of fastidious organisms.
Difco Tryptose Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, homogeneous, free-flow- Tryptose media are particularly well suited for the isolation T
ing. of Brucella from blood. Castaeda2 studied the isolation of
Solution: 4.1% solution, soluble in purified Brucella species using a broth containing 2% tryptose and
water upon boiling. Solution is light 2% sodium citrate. Sodium citrate serves as an anticoagulant
amber, slightly opalescent.
and assists in inactivating complement in the blood specimen.
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 4.1% Tryptose Broth can be used as a complete basal medium or
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2 supplemented with enrichments. Huddleson3 used a broth
Difco Tryptose Broth containing 2% tryptose as an enrichment medium in the
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, homogeneous, free-flowing. isolation of Brucella from clinical specimens. McCullough et
Solution: 2.6% solution, soluble in purified al. reported that addition of thiamine, dextrose and iron salts
water. Solution is light amber, clear. increased growth of Brucella suis.4 Addition of 0.1% agar
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear. to Tryptose Broth can increase growth of aerobes and
Reaction of 2.6% anaerobes in liquid media. Blood agar may be prepared by
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2
adding 5% sterile, defibrinated sheep, horse or rabbit blood
Cultural Response to the sterile medium.
Difco Tryptose Agar or Tryptose Broth The high productivity of tryptose media in the isolation and
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C under 5-10% CO2 for 40-48 hours. cultivation of Brucella supports use of these formulas as
general-purpose media, especially when avoidance of animal
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
tissue products is desired. Tryptose Agar with 5% bovine
Brucella abortus 11192* 102-103 Good
serum, with or without antibiotics, remains a standard plating
Brucella melitensis 4309* 102-103 Good
Brucella suis 9843* 102-103 Good medium for the isolation of brucellae.5 For isolation of
*Minimally one strain of Brucella should be used for performance testing. These ATCC strains Brucella stains from contaminated milk, crystal violet
should be used if available.
(gentian violet) can be added to Tryptose Agar to suppress
gram-positive organisms.6 Tryptose media can be supplemented
with thiamine or citrate for the cultivation and maintenance
of fastidious aerobic and facultative microorganisms.7

599
Section III
T Tryptose Agar, cont.

Tryptose Agar is specified in the Compendium of Methods for Expected Results

the Microbiological Examination of Foods.8 Tryptose media Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
are recommended in the FDA Bacteriological Analytical
Manual for serological testing.9 Limitations of the Procedure
1. Tryptose media are general-purpose, non-selective media.
Principles of the Procedure Although certain diagnostic tests may be performed directly
Tryptose peptone is a source of nitrogen and carbon. Dextrose on the medium, biochemical and, if indicated, immuno-
is a source of carbohydrate. Sodium chloride maintains logical testing using pure cultures are recommended for
osmotic balance. Agar is the solidifying agent in Tryptose Agar. complete identification.
2. When preparing blood agar, hemolytic reactions of some
Formulae strains of group D streptococci have been shown to be
Difco Tryptose Agar affected by differences in animal blood.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 3. Atmosphere of incubation has been shown to influence
Tryptose ................................................................... 20.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g hemolytic reactions of beta-hemolytic streptococci.11
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g For optimal performance, incubate tryptose media supple-
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g mented with blood under increased CO2 or anaerobic
Difco Tryptose Broth conditions.
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar. 4. Dextrose has been shown to inhibit hemolysin production
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
by some organisms.
Precautions10
1. Biosafety Level 2 practices, containment equipment and References
1. Huddleson. 1943. Brucellosis in man and animals, rev. ed. The Commonwealth Fund, New York,
facilities are recommended for activities with clinical speci- N.Y.
2. Castaeda. 1947. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 64:114.
mens of human or animal origin containing or potentially 3. Huddleson. 1939. Brucellosis in man and animals. Oxford University Press, Oxford, England.
4. McCullough, Mills, Herbst, Roessler and Brewer. 1947. J. Bacteriol. 53:5.
containing pathogenic Brucella spp. 5. Moyer and Holcomb. 1995. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover, and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
2. Biosafety Level 3 practices, containment equipment and clinical microbiology, 6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
6. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
facilities are recommended for all manipulations of cultures vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
7. Atlas. 1995. Handbook of microbiology media for the examination of food. CRC Press, Boca Raton,
of the pathogenic Brucella spp. and for experimental Fla.
8. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods.
animal studies. 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
9. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
national, Gaithersburg, Md.
Directions for Preparation from 10. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
Dehydrated Product No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
11. Ruoff, Whiley and Beighton. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
Difco Tryptose Agar clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
1. Suspend 41 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
thoroughly. Availability
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to Difco Tryptose Agar
completely dissolve the powder. BAM CCAM COMPF
Cat. No. 264300 Dehydrated 500 g
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. 264100 Dehydrated 2 kg
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Difco Tryptose Broth
stable, typical control cultures.
BAM CCAM COMPF
NOTE: To prepare blood agar, aseptically add 5% sterile Cat. No. 262200 Dehydrated 500 g
262100 Dehydrated 10 kg
defibrinated sheep, horse or rabbit blood. Dispense into sterile
Petri dishes.
Difco Tryptose Broth
1. Dissolve 26 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

Procedure
Methodologies for the multiple applications using tryptose
media are outlined in the references.

600
 Tryptose Phosphate Broth

Bacto Tryptose Phosphate Broth

Intended Use User Quality Control
Bacto Tryptose Phosphate Broth is used for cultivating fastidi-
ous microorganisms. Identity Specifications
Bacto Tryptose Phosphate Broth
Summary and Explanation Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Tryptose Phosphate Broth is an infusion-free buffered medium Solution: 2.95% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light amber, clear
recommended for the cultivation of fastidious, pathogenic to very slightly opalescent, may have
microorganisms. It can be used in a procedure for the serodi- a very slight precipitate.
agnosis of Listeria monocytogenes.1 It is valuable in tissue Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear to very slightly opal-
culture procedures,2 where the peptone content is considered escent, may have a very slight precipi-
tate.
to be a stimulating factor for cells.
Reaction of 2.95%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.3 0.2
Principles of the Procedure
Peptone provides carbon and nitrogen. Dextrose is a carbon Cultural Response
source. Sodium chloride maintains osmotic balance. Buffering Bacto Tryptose Phosphate Broth
capacity is provided by disodium phosphate. Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2oC for 18-48 hours.
The addition of 0.1-0.2% agar to Tryptose Phosphate Broth
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
facilitates anaerobic growth and aids in dispersion of reducing
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 102-103 Good
substances and CO2 formed in the environment.3 The low agar Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 102-103 Good
concentration provides suitable conditions for both aerobic Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 102-103 Good
growth in the upper zone and for microaerophilic and anaerobic Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 102-103 Good
growth in the lower zone.

Formula
Bacto Tryptose Phosphate Broth
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
T
Tryptose ................................................................... 20.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 2.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 2.5 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

Directions for Preparation from

Dehydrated Product
1. Dissolve 29.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. (If a
medium containing 0.1-0.2% agar is desired, add 1-2 g of
agar; heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder.)
2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Uninoculated Streptococcus
Tube pneumoniae
stable, typical control cultures. ATCC 6305

Procedure
See appropriate references for specific procedures.

Expected Results
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.

601
Section III
T Tryptose Phosphate Broth, cont.

References Availability
1. Bennett and Weaver. 1995. In FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC International,
Gaithersburg, Md.
Bacto Tryptose Phosphate Broth
2. Ginsberg, Gold and Jordan. 1955. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 89:66. BAM
3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Cat. No. 260300 Dehydrated 500 g
260100 Dehydrated 2 kg
260200 Dehydrated 10 kg

Tween 80 Water
Intended Use Procedure

Tween * 80 Water may be used to restore and/or inoculate Follow those procedures or test methods requiring the use of
microdilution panels. water with 0.02% polysorbate 80.
*Tween is a trademark of ICI Americas.
Reference
Summary and Explanation 1. Thrupp. 1986. In Lorian (ed.), Antibiotics in laboratory medicine, 2nd ed. Williams & Wilkins,
Baltimore, Md.
Tween 80 (polysorbate 80) is a surface active agent that is
recommended for use at a 0.02% concentration in routine Availability
inoculum preparation and dispensing procedures in various BBL Tween 80 Water
microdilution systems.1 Cat. No. 297381 Prepared Tubes (D Tubes), 12.5 mL Ctn. of 100
296207 Prepared Tubes (A Tubes), 25 mL Pkg. of 10
Principles of the Procedure 296184 Prepared Tubes (A Tubes), 25 mL Ctn. of 100

Tween 80 Water is a 0.02% concentration of polysorbate 80

in purified water that is convenient for use in dispersing
microorganisms during inoculum preparation and for recon-
stituting antimicrobial agents in microdilution plates.

Tyrosine Agar
(See Nocardia Differentiation Media)

602
 UVM Modified Listeria Enrichment

UVM Modified Listeria Enrichment Broth

Intended Use The most common contaminating bacteria found in food
UVM Modified Listeria Enrichment Broth is used for rapidly sources potentially containing Listeria are: streptococci,
isolating Listeria monocytogenes. especially the enterococci, micrococci and Bacillus species,
Escherichia coli, Pseudomonas aeruginosa and Proteus vulgaris.8
Summary and Explanation Identification of Listeria is based on successful isolation of
First described in 1926 by Murray, Webb and Swann,1 the organism, biochemical characterization and serological
Listeria monocytogenes is a widespread problem in public confirmation.
health and the food industries. This organism can cause
human illness and death, particularly in immunocompromised UVM Modified Listeria Enrichment Broth is a modification of
individuals and pregnant women.2 The first reported food- the formula described by Donnelly and Baigent.9 It is used for
borne outbreak of listeriosis was in 1985,3 and since then, selective enrichment of Listeria spp. from food7,10 and clinical
microbiological and epidemiological evidence from both specimens.11
sporadic and epidemic cases of listeriosis has shown that the
principal route of transmission is via the consumption of Principles of the Procedure
foodstuffs contaminated with Listeria monocytogenes.4 Peptones, beef extract and yeast extract in UVM Modified
Listeria Enrichment Broth provide nitrogen, vitamins and
Implicated vehicles of transmission include turkey frankfurt- minerals. Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance of
ers,5 coleslaw, pasteurized milk, Mexican-style cheese, pat and the medium. Phosphate acts as a buffering agent. Nalidixic
pickled pork tongue. The organism has been isolated from com- acid inhibits growth of gram-negative organisms. Acriflavine
mercial dairy and other food processing plants and is ubiqui- hydrochloride inhibits many gram-positive bacteria. Esculin is
tous in nature, being present in a wide range of unprocessed hydrolyzed by Listeria species.
foods and in soil, sewage, silage and river water.6
Listeria species grow over a pH range of 4.4-9.6 and survive Formula
in food products with pH levels outside these parameters.7 Difco UVM Modified Listeria Enrichment Broth
Listeria spp. are microaerophilic, gram-positive, asporogenous, Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
non-encapsulated, non-branching, regular, short, motile rods. Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 5.0 g
Motility is most pronounced at 20C. Beef Extract ................................................................ 5.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 20.0 g
User Quality Control Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 9.6 g
Identity Specifications
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.35 g
U
Difco UVM Modified Listeria Enrichment Broth
Esculin ........................................................................ 1.0 g
Nalidixic Acid ............................................................. 0.02 g -
Dehydrated Appearance:
Solution:
Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
5.2% solution, soluble in purified
Acriflavine HCl ......................................................... 12.0 mg
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Z
water upon boiling. Solution is light
to medium amber with a faint bluish- Directions for Preparation from
green ring at the surface, clear to very Dehydrated Product
slightly opalescent with a fine pre-
cipitate.
1. Suspend 52 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal-
thoroughly.
escent with a fine precipitate. 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Reaction of 5.2% completely dissolve the powder.
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Cultural Response
stable, typical control cultures.
Difco UVM Modified Listeria Enrichment Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-48 hours. Procedure
The USDA method11 involves enrichment of the specimen in
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
UVM Modified Listeria Enrichment Broth (one part sample in
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-2103 Suppressed at
18-24 hours; good nine parts broth) at 30C. After incubation, a portion of the
at 40-48 hours enrichment mixture is added to an enrichment broth or plated
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Marked to onto the final isolation agar.7 For further information when
complete inhibition
testing food samples or clinical specimens, refer to appropriate
Listeria monocytogenes 19114 102-103 Good
references.7,10-12

603
Section III
U-Z UVM Modified Listeria, cont.

Expected Results Availability

Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results. Difco UVM Modified Listeria Enrichment Broth
AOAC COMPF
References Cat. No. 222330 Dehydrated 500 g
1. Murray, Webb and Swann. 1926. J. Pathol. Bacteriol. 29:407. 222310 Dehydrated 2 kg
2. Monk, Clavero, Beuchat, Doyle and Brackett. 1994. J. Food Prot. 57:969. 222320 Dehydrated 10 kg
3. Wehr. 1987. J. Assoc. Off. Anal. Chem. 70:769.
4. Bremer and Osborne. 1995. J. Food Prot. 58:604.
5. Grau and Vanderlinde. 1992. J. Food Prot. 55:4.
6. Patel, Hwang, Beuchat, Doyle and Brackett. 1995. J. Food Prot. 58:244.
7. Ryser and Donnelly. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.), Compendium of methods for the microbiologi-
cal examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
8. Kramer and Jones. 1969. J. Appl. Bacteriol. 32:381.
9. Donnelly and Baigent. 1986. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 52:689.
10. McClain and Lee. May 24, 1989. Laboratory communication No. 57. Microbiology Division, Food
Safety and Inspection Service, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Beltsville, Md.
11. Bille, Rocourt and Swaminathan. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
12. Hayes, Graves, Swaminathan, Ajello, Marcolm, Weaver, Ransom, Deaver, Plikaytis, Schuchat, Wenger,
Pinner, Broome and The Listeria Study Group. 1992. J. Food. Prot. 55:952.

Universal Beer Agar

Intended Use themselves to existent conditions in the brewery. The presence
Universal Beer Agar (UBA Medium) is used for cultivating of hop constituents and alcohol inhibits growth of many air-
microorganisms of significance in the brewing industry. borne microorganisms not adapted to this environment.3
Universal Beer Agar supports growth of Lactobacillus,
Summary and Explanation Pediococcus, Acetobacter and yeast strains which may be found
Universal Beer Agar is a basal medium to which beer is added. contaminating the wort and beer.
It is based on the formula developed by Kozulis and Page1
who compared it with other media commonly used in breweries Principles of the Procedure
for detecting microbial contamination.2 The characteristics of Yeast extract is a source of trace elements, vitamins and amino
Universal Beer Agar are closer to the natural environmental acids. Peptonized milk contains lactose as an energy source.
conditions found in the typical brewery than other media studied. Tomato juice is a source of carbon, protein and nutrients.
It supports growth of more varieties of lactic acid bacteria and Dextrose provides additional carbon. Dipotassium and
yields larger colonies in a shorter time than traditional brewers monopotassium phosphates provide buffering capability.
media. Due to the presence of beer in the medium, it is Magnesium sulfate, ferrous sulfate and manganese sulfate are
selective for growth of microorganisms that have adapted sources of ions that stimulate metabolism. Sodium chloride
provides essential ions. Agar is the solidifying agent.
User Quality Control
Formula
Identity Specifications Difco Universal Beer Agar
Difco Universal Beer Agar Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Dehydrated Appearance: Medium beige, homogeneous, free- Yeast Extract .............................................................. 6.1 g
flowing. Peptonized Milk ....................................................... 15.0 g
Solution: 6.2% solution, soluble in purified Tomato Juice (from 244 mL) ..................................... 12.2 g
water upon boiling. Solution is medium Dextrose ................................................................... 16.1 g
to dark amber, very slightly opales- Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 0.31 g
cent. Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 0.31 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.12 g
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark amber, very slightly
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 6.0 mg
opalescent.
Ferrous Sulfate ........................................................... 6.0 mg
Reaction of 6.2% Manganese Sulfate .................................................... 6.0 mg
Solution at 25C: pH 6.3 0.2 Agar ......................................................................... 12.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Cultural Response
Difco Universal Beer Agar Directions for Preparation from
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Dehydrated Product
30 2C for up to 3 days.
1. Suspend 62 g of the powder in 750 mL of purified water
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY (or halogen-free tap water). Mix thoroughly.
Acetobacter pasteurianus 12879 102-103 Good 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Lactobacillus fermentum 9338 102-103 Good completely dissolve the powder.
Lactobacillus johnsonii 11506 102-103 Good
3. While the medium is still hot, add 250 mL commercial beer
Pediococcus acidilactici 8081 102-103 Good
(not degassed) and mix well.

604
 Universal Preenrichment Broth

4. Autoclave at 121C for 10 minutes. References

5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 1. Kozulis and Page. 1968. Proc. Am. Soc. Brewing Chemists, p. 52.
2. Murphy and Saletan. 1970. Tech. Q. Master Brew. Assoc. Am. 7:182.
stable, typical control cultures. 3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance medical bacteria, vol.
1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.

Procedure Availability
See appropriate references for specific procedures. Difco Universal Beer Agar
Cat. No. 285610 Dehydrated 500 g
Expected Results Mexico
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results. Cat. No. 252644 Prepared Plates (60 15 mm-style) Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.

Universal Preenrichment Broth

Intended Use Salmonella and Listeria. The broth medium provides sufficient
Universal Preenrichment Broth is used for recovering sublethally buffering capacity to prevent rapid decreases in pH and
injured Salmonella and Listeria from food products. allows for repair of injured cells that might be sensitive to low
pH values or inhibitory substances.
Summary and Explanation
Traditional methods for recovering Salmonella and Listeria Principles of the Procedure
from food products require separate preenrichment media for Universal Preenrichment Broth contains peptones as sources
each microorganism.1,2 Some broth media recommended of carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Sodium and
for preenrichment contain antibiotic inhibitors3 or have potassium phosphates buffer the medium. Sodium chloride
insufficient buffering capacity which hinder recovery of suble- maintains the osmotic balance of the medium. Magnesium
thally injured cells.3-5 sulfate and ferric ammonium citrate provide essential ions.
Dextrose is an energy source. Sodium pyruvate helps stimulate
Bailey and Cox3 formulated Universal Preenrichment Broth to
the metabolism of stressed organisms.
permit simultaneous resuscitation of sublethally injured

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco Universal Preenrichment Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge-
U
neous. -
Solution: 3.8% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light to medium
Z
amber, slightly opalescent to opales-
cent, may have a precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal-
escent to opalescent, may have a
precipitate.
Reaction of 3.8%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.3 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Universal Preenrichment Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 Uninoculated Salmonella
2C for 18-24 hours. Tube typhimurium
ATCC 14028
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Listeria monocytogenes 19115 10-102 Good
Salmonella choleraesuis subsp.
choleraesuis serotype Enteritidis 13076 10-102 Good
Salmonella choleraesuis subsp.
choleraesuis serotype Typhimurium 14028 10-102 Good

605
Section III
U-Z Universal Preenrichment, cont.

Formula Procedure
Difco Universal Preenrichment Broth Procedures for the preenrichment of Salmonella and Listeria
Approximate Formula* Per Liter are provided in appropriate references.1,2
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
Proteose Peptone ....................................................... 5.0 g
Monopotassium Phosphate ...................................... 15.0 g Expected Results
Disodium Phosphate .................................................. 7.0 g Salmonella and Listeria demonstrate good growth and
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g recovery following preenrichment in this broth.
Dextrose ..................................................................... 0.5 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.25 g
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.1 g References
Sodium Pyruvate ........................................................ 0.2 g 1. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. 2. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed., rev. October
2001. AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
Directions for Preparation from 3. Bailey and Cox. 1992. J. Food Prot. 55:256.
4. Bailey, Fletcher and Cox. 1990. J. Food Prot. 53:473.
Dehydrated Product 5. Juven, Cox, Bailey, Thomson, Charles and Shutze. 1984. J. Food Prot. 47:299.

1. Suspend 38 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix Availability

thoroughly. Difco Universal Preenrichment Broth
2. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. BAM
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Cat. No. 223510 Dehydrated 500 g
stable, typical control cultures.

Urea Media
Urea Agar Base Urea Agar Base Concentrate 10
Urea Agar Urea Broth Urease Test Broth
Urease Broth Concentrate 10
Intended Use subsp. morganii, Providencia rettgeri, and a few Providencia
Urea Agar and Urease Test Broth are used for the differentiation stuartii strains with the reclassification of the members of the
of organisms, especially the Enterobacteriaceae, on the basis Proteeae.
of urease production. Urease base is also supplied as a filter sterilized 10 concen-
trated solution for use in preparing Urease Test Broth in the
Summary and Explanation laboratory.
Urea Agar was devised by Christensen for use as a solid medium
for the differentiation of enteric bacilli.1 It differentiates between Principles of the Procedure
rapid urease-positive Proteeae organisms (Proteus spp., The urea medium of Rustigian and Stuart3 is particularly suited
Morganella morganii subsp. morganii, Providencia rettgeri, for the differentiation of Proteus species from other gram-
and some Providencia stuartii) and other urease-positive negative enteric bacilli capable of utilizing urea;1 the latter are
organisms: Citrobacter, Enterobacter and Klebsiella and unable to do so in Urease Test Broth because of limited
bacteria other than Enterobacteriaceae; i.e., some Bordetella nutrients and the high buffering capacity of the medium. To
and Brucella spp.2 provide a medium with greater utility, Urea Agar was devised
The base is also supplied as a filter-sterilized 10 concentrated by Christensen1 with peptone and dextrose included and
solution in tubes for use in preparing Urea Agar slants in the reduced buffer content to promote more rapid growth of many
laboratory. of the Enterobacteriaceae and permit a reduction in incuba-
tion time. The complete Urea Agar contains 15.0 g/L of agar
Urease Test Broth was developed by Rustigian and Stuart.3 It
in addition to the ingredients in the base medium.
may be used for the identification of bacteria on the basis of
urea utilization and it is particularly recommended for the When organisms utilize urea, ammonia is formed during
differentiation of members of the genus Proteus from those of incubation which makes the reaction of these media alkaline,
Salmonella and Shigella in the diagnosis of enteric infections.4 producing a red-pink color. Consequently, urease production
The medium is positive for Proteus, Morganella morganii may be detected by the change in the phenol red indicator.

606
 Urea Media, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Difco Urea Broth BBL Urea Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Light orange to light pink, homoge- Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous
neous, inherently lumpy. material.
Solution: 3.87% solution, soluble in purified Solution: 29 g/100 mL solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is orange-yellow, clear. water. Complete medium is light to
Prepared Appearance: Orange-yellow, clear. medium, orange, clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 3.87% Prepared Appearance: Complete medium is light to medium,
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.1 orange, clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 2.9%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8 0.2
Cultural Response
Difco Urea Broth

Cultural Response
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
BBL Urea Agar Base
and incubate at 35 2C for 8-48 hours.
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate with fresh cultures
ORGANISM ATCC UREASE REACTION (2 heavy loopfuls) and incubate at 35 2C for 24 hours.
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 ORGANISM ATCC UREASE REACTION
Escherichia coli 25922
Proteus vulgaris 8427 +
Proteus mirabilis 25933 +
Salmonella choleraesuis
Proteus vulgaris 13315 + subsp. choleraesuis
Salmonella choleraesuis serotype Typhimurium 13311
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028

U
-
Uninoculated Proteus vulgaris Escherichia coli Uninoculated Proteus vulgaris Escherichia coli
Z
Tube ATCC 13315 ATCC 25922 Tube ATCC 13315 ATCC 25922
Urea Agar Urea Broth

Formulae Directions for Preparation from

BBL Urea Agar Base

Dehydrated Product
Approximate Formula* Per Liter BBL Urea Agar Base
Pancreatic Digest of Gelatin ....................................... 1.0 g
Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g 1. Dissolve 29 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water.
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g Mix thoroughly. Sterilize by filtration.
Potassium Phosphate ................................................. 2.0 g 2. Suspend 15 g of agar in 900 mL of purified water.
Urea ......................................................................... 20.0 g
Phenol Red ............................................................... 12.0 mg 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Difco Urea Broth 4. Cool to 50C and add 100 mL of the sterile Urea Agar
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Base.
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 0.1 g 5. Mix thoroughly and dispense aseptically in sterile tubes.
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 9.1 g 6. Cool tubed medium in a slanted position so that deep butts
Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 9.5 g
Urea ......................................................................... 20.0 g are formed.
Phenol Red ................................................................. 0.01 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

607
Section III
U-Z Urea Media, cont.

7. Do not remelt the complete medium. Expected Results

8. Test samples of the finished product for performance using The production of urease is indicated by an intense pink-red
stable, typical control cultures. (red-violet) color on the slant or throughout the broth. The
BBL Urea Agar Base Concentrate 10 (Prepared Tubes) color may penetrate into the agar (butt); the extent of the color
1. To prepare Urea Agar medium, add 1.7 g of granulated indicates the rate of urea hydrolysis.5
agar to 100 mL of purified water. Heat with agitation and A negative reaction is no color change. The agar medium
boil for 1 minute. remains pale yellow to buff; the broth remains yellowish-
2. Dispense in 9 mL aliquots into tubes and autoclave at 121C orange.
for 15 minutes.
For a listing of urease-positive organisms, consult appropriate
3. Cool the agar to 45-50C, and allow one tube of
texts.2, 4-7
concentrate to come to room temperature. Add 1 mL
of concentrate to each 9 mL of cooled agar solution Limitations of the Procedure
and mix thoroughly. Urea Agar Base
4. Allow the tubes to cool in a slanted position so that slants
1. The alkaline reaction produced in this medium after prolonged
with deep butts are formed.
incubation may not be caused by urease activity. False posi-
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
tive reactions may occur due to the utilization of peptones
stable, typical control cultures.
(especially in slant agar by Pseudomonas aeruginosa, for
Difco Urea Broth example) or other proteins which raise the pH due to
1. Equilibrate the medium to room temperature before protein hydrolysis and the release of excessive amino acid
opening. The presence of urea in this medium renders it residues. To eliminate possible protein hydrolysis, perform
inherently lumpy. This condition will not adversely affect a control test with the same test medium without urea.7
a properly stored medium. 2. Do not heat or reheat the medium because urea decomposes
2. Dissolve 38.7 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. very easily.
Mix thoroughly to completely dissolve the powder. 3. Urea Agar detects rapid urease activity of only the urease-
3. Filter sterilize. DO NOT BOIL OR AUTOCLAVE THE positive Proteus species. For results to be valid for the
MEDIUM. detection of Proteus, the results must be read within the
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using first 2-6 hours after incubation. Urease-positive
stable, typical control cultures. Enterobacter, Citrobacter or Klebsiella, in contrast, hydro-
BBL Urease Broth Concentrate 10 (Prepared Tubes)
lyze urea much more slowly, showing only slight penetra-
tion of the alkaline reaction into the butt of the medium in
1. To prepare medium, aseptically add 10 mL of the concen-
6 hours and requiring 3-5 days to change the reaction of
trate to 90 mL of cold sterile purified water. Mix thoroughly.
the entire butt.
2. Dispense aseptically in 1-3 mL amounts, in small sterile
test tubes. Urea Broth
1. To rule out false positives due to protein hydrolysis (as
Procedure opposed to urea hydrolysis) that may occur in the medium
If Urea Agar Base Concentrate 10 or Urease Broth Concen- after prolonged incubation, perform a control test with the
trate 10 is being used, prepare the complete medium as same test medium without urea.7
described above. If crystals form in the concentrate, they will 2. Do not heat or reheat the medium because urea decom-
usually dissolve at room temperature, or in a few minutes in a poses very easily.
40C water bath. 3. The high buffering system in this medium masks urease
Using a heavy inoculum (2 loopfuls) of growth from an 18- to activity in organisms that are delayed positive. This
24-hour pure culture (TSI Agar or other suitable medium), medium is therefore recommended for the detection of
inoculate the broth or agar (streaking back and forth over the urease activity in all Proteus spp., Providencia rettgeri and
entire slant surface). Do not stab the butt since it serves as a urease-positive Providencia stuartii.1 M. morganii slowly
color control. For broth, shake tubes gently to suspend the hydrolyzes urea and may require approximately a 36 hour
bacteria. Incubate tubes with loosened caps at 35 2C in an incubation for a strong urease-positive reaction to occur.1
incubator or water bath. Observe reactions after 2, 4, 6, 18, If in doubt as to a result, compare with an uninoculated
24 and 48 hours. For agar, continue to check every day for tube or incubate for an additional 24 hours.
a total of 6 days; even longer incubation periods may be 4. Variations in the size of the inoculum can affect the time
necessary. required to reach positive (alkaline, pH 8.1) results.

608
 V Agar

References BBL Urea Agar Base Concentrate 10

1. Christensen. 1946. J. Bacteriol. 52:461. Cat. No. 221100 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10*
2. MacFaddin. 2000. Biochemical tests for identification of medical bacteria, 3rd ed. Lippincott
Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md. BBL Urea Agar

3. Rustigian and Stuart. 1941. Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. Med. 47:108.
4. Ewing. 1985. Edwards and Ewings identification of Enterobacteriaceae, 4th ed. Elsevier Science Cat. No. 221096 Prepared Slants Pkg. of 10*
Publishing Co, Inc., New York, N.Y. 221097 Prepared Slants Ctn. of 100*
5. Holt, Krieg, Sneath, Staley and Williams (ed.). 1994. Bergeys Manual of determinative bacteriol-
ogy, 9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md. Difco Urea Broth
6. Farmer. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiol-
ogy, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C. AOAC BAM COMPF SMD
7. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria, Cat. No. 227210 Dehydrated 500 g*
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
BBL Urease Test Broth

Availability AOAC BAM COMPF SMD

Cat. No. 221719 Prepared Tubes, 3 mL Pkg. of 10*
BBL Urea Agar Base
CCAM ISO USDA BBL Urease Broth Concentrate 10

Cat. No. 211795 Dehydrated 500 g* Cat. No. 221098 Prepared Tubes Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

V Agar
Intended Use diffuse beta hemolysis after 48 hours of incubation in an
V Agar is an enriched medium used in qualitative procedures aerobic atmosphere supplemented with carbon dioxide.
for the isolation and differentiation of Gardnerella vaginalis
from clinical specimens. References
1. Ellner, Stoessel, Drakeford and Vasi. 1966. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 45:502.
2. Greenwood, Pickett, Martin and Mack. 1977. Health Lab Sci. 14:102.
Summary and Explanation 3.
4.
Greenwood and Pickett. 1980. Int. J. Syst. Bacteriol. 30:170.
Piot, Van Dyck, Goodfellow and Falkow. 1980. J. Gen. Microbiol. 119:373.
In 1966, Ellner et al. developed an improved blood agar base 5.
6.
Greenwood and Pickett. 1979. J. Clin. Microbiol. 9:200.
Funke and Bernard. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed), Manual of clinical
formulation, which has been designated as Columbia Agar.1 microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Greenwood et al., in 1977, described a modification of Availability

Columbia Agar in which the peptone concentration was BBL V Agar
increased and human blood was used.2 This enriched medium CMPH MCM7
was designed for the isolation and differentiation of G. vaginalis United States and Canada
by means of beta hemolysis of human blood.3,4 Greenwood Cat. No. 221874 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
221875 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
et al. reported that 96% of G. vaginalis isolated produced beta
hemolysis of human blood, whereas none were beta-hemolytic
Mexico
Cat. No. 221874 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10* U
on sheep blood.5 *Store at 2-8C. -
Principles of the Procedure Gardnerella vaginalis
Z
ATCC 14018
V Agar contains peptones, beef extract and yeast extract, which
supply the nutrients required for the growth of G. vaginalis
strains. The peptones and beef extract are sources of nitrog-
enous compounds, carbon, sulfur and trace ingredients. The
yeast extract and corn starch serve as energy sources with the
yeast extract being a supplier of the B-complex vitamins.
The human blood aids in the identification of G. vaginalis since
the small size of the colonies and the diffuse hemolysis is
distinctive compared to other hemolytic colonies.

Procedure
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci-
mens. Since G. vaginalis requires carbon dioxide on primary
isolation, plates should be incubated in an aerobic atmosphere
containing approximately 3-10% CO2 at 35 2C for 48 hours.6

Expected Results
Typical colonies of G. vaginalis appear small and white, yield
gram-variable diphtheroid-like forms and exhibit distinctive

609
Section III
U-Z VJ Agar

VJ Agar (Vogel and Johnson Agar)

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
This medium conforms with specifications of The United States Peptone is a source of carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals.
Pharmacopeia (USP). Yeast extract supplies B-complex vitamins which stimulate
bacterial growth. Mannitol is the carbohydrate. Inhibition of
VJ Agar, also known as Vogel and Johnson Agar, is used for
nonstaphylococcal organisms is achieved by the potassium
the early detection of coagulase-positive, mannitol-fermenting
tellurite additive, which is inhibitory for some species of both
staphylococci.
gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria, by lithium chloride
Summary and Explanation and by the high glycine content. Staphylococci may be slightly
In 1955, Zebovitz et al. developed Tellurite-Glycine Agar as inhibited by the presence of the three inhibitors; however, this
a selective plating medium for the quantitative detection of is compensated for by the addition of mannitol and glycine.3
coagulase-positive staphylococci.1 This medium was modified Phenol red is the pH indicator and agar is the solidifying agent.
by Vogel and Johnson in 1960 by the addition of phenol red as Coagulase-positive staphylococci reduce the potassium tellurite
a pH indicator and by increasing the mannitol content.2 VJ to metallic free tellurium, producing colonies that are gray-black.
Agar selects and differentiates the coagulase-positive staphy- The fermentation of mannitol by coagulase-positive staphylo-
lococci which ferment mannitol and reduce tellurite.3 cocci is detected by a change in the color of the phenol red
VJ Agar is specified as a standard methods medium for cosmet- indicator from red (alkaline) to yellow (acid).
ics,4,5 pharmaceutical articles6 and nutritional supplements.6 In Prepared plates of Vogel and Johnson Agar contain 0.2 g/L of
addition, the formulation complies with recommendations by potassium tellurite.
the USP for microbial limit testing.6

Uninoculated Staphylococcus aureus

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 25923

Identity Specifications
Difco VJ Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Pink, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 6.0% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is red, very slightly
to slightly opalescent, may have a slight
white precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Red, slightly opalescent, may have a
slight white precipitate.
Reaction of 6.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.2 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco VJ Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 18-48 hours.
INOCULUM TELLURITE MANNITOL
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY REDUCTION FERMENTATION
Escherichia coli 25922 3102-103 Marked to
complete (translucent) (red)
inhibition
Proteus mirabilis 25933 3102-103 Partial to + Staphylococcus aureus
complete (black) (red) ATCC 25923
inhibition with Potassium Tellurite
Staphylococcus
aureus 25923 102-3102 Good + +
(black) (yellow)
Staphylococcus
epidermidis 12228 3102-103 Fair to good
(translucent (red)
to black)

610
 Vancomycin Screen Agar

Formula organisms, other than coagulase-positive staphylococci, are

Difco VJ Agar totally or markedly inhibited. By 48 hours, many coagulase-
Approximate Formula* Per Liter negative, mannitol-fermenting or coagulase-negative, mannitol-
Tryptone ................................................................... 10.0 g negative staphylococci will appear on the medium.
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Mannitol .................................................................. 10.0 g The coagulase-positive cocci form small, black colonies on red
Dipostassium Phosphate ............................................ 5.0 g
Lithium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
plates. If mannitol is fermented, the colonies are surrounded
Glycine ..................................................................... 10.0 g by yellow zones due to the color change of the phenol red
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g indicator in response to the acid formation. If mannitol has
Phenol Red ............................................................... 25.0 mg not been fermented, no yellow zone is present, and the color
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
of the medium around the colonies may even be a deeper red
Directions for Preparation from than normal due to utilization of the peptones in the medium.
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend 60 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix References
1. Zebovitz, Evans and Niven. 1955. J. Bacteriol. 70:686.
thoroughly. 2. Vogel and Johnson. 1960. Public Health Lab. 18:131.
3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
4. Hitchins, Tran and McCarron. 1995. In FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
completely dissolve the powder. International, Gaithersburg, Md.
5. Curry, Graf and McEwen (ed.). 1993. CTFA microbiology guidelines. The Cosmetic, Toiletry, and
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. Cool to 45-50C. Fragrance Association, Washington, D.C.
4. Add 20 mL of sterile Tellurite Solution 1%. Mix well. 6. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures. Availability
Difco VJ Agar
Procedure BAM USP
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from Cat. No. 256220 Dehydrated 500 g
specimens. Incubate plates for 18-48 hours at 35 2C in an BBL Vogel and Johnson Agar

aerobic atmosphere. BAM USP

Cat. No. 298220 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
Expected Results BBL Tellurite Solution 1%
After incubation, examine the isolated colonies on the plated Cat. No. 211917 Tube 20 mL*
medium. During the first 18-24 hours of incubation, most *Store at 2-8C.

Vancomycin Screen Agar U

Intended Use Enterococcus faecalis -
Vancomycin Screen Agar is used to test enterococci for resis-
ATCC 51299
Z
tance to vancomycin and to predict the synergistic activity of
this antimicrobial with an aminoglycoside antimicrobial.

Summary and Explanation

Enterococci are known to cause a wide variety of infections.
Most commonly they infect the urinary tract, abdomen, blood-
stream, endocardium, biliary tract, burn wounds and in-dwelling
catheters.1 Enterococcus faecalis causes 80 to 90% of infections,
while E. faecium causes the majority of the remainder.2 Today
the enterococci are the fourth leading cause of hospital
acquired infection and the third leading cause of bacteremia
in the United States.3 The case/fatality rates for enterococcal
bacteremia range from 12 to 68% with death due to sepsis in
4 to 50% of the cases.4
Treatment of enterococcal infections with either penicillin or
vancomycin alone fails to kill enterococci resulting in relapse
of infection.5 Enterococci for years were known to have low
intrinsic resistance to a variety of -lactam as well as
aminoglycoside antibiotics.6 The addition of an aminoglycoside

611
Section III
U-Z Vancomycin Screen Agar, cont.

to which the isolate has demonstrated susceptibility results in 2. Spot inoculate the plate with 10 L of the adjusted
both in vitro and in vivo synergism producing a bactericidal suspension.12
effect.7 This synergistic effect is thought to be due to the 3. Allow the inoculum spot to absorb into the agar surface.
penicillin or vancomycin damaging the integrity of the cell wall, 4. Inoculate a growth control plate, such as a Trypticase Soy
thus allowing the aminoglycoside to penetrate and inhibit Agar with 5% Sheep Blood, in the same manner.
bacterial protein synthesis.8 The emergence of resistance 5. Incubate plates at 35 2C aerobically for a full 24 hours.
to vancomycin ( 6 g/mL)9 may result in the failure of
vancomycin-aminoglycoside combinations to eradicate the Expected Results
infecting organisms. Therefore, testing for resistance to Following a full 24 hours of incubation, observe plates for
vancomycin is important. The use of a Brain Heart Infusion growth.
Agar (BHIA) containing vancomycin (6 g/mL) is recom- Growth control plate: Growth indicates viable test organisms
mended by the National Committee for Clinical Laboratory in the inoculum broth suspension and the test is valid. If there
Standards (NCCLS) for testing resistance.10, 11 is no growth, the test is invalid and must be repeated.
Principles of the Procedure BHIA with vancomycin (Yellow): Growth (> one colony)
The Brain Heart Infusion Agar base is a general-purpose indicates that the antimicrobial agent may not be synergistic
medium suitable for the cultivation of a wide variety of micro- in combination therapy. No growth ( one colony) indicates
organisms. that synergy may be predicted.11
The meat infusion solids and peptones are sources of organic References
nitrogen, carbon, sulfur, vitamins and trace substances. 1. Jett, Huycke and Gilmore. 1994. Clin. Microbiol. Rev. 7:462.
2. Moellering. 1992. Clin. Infect. Dis. 14:1173.
Dextrose is a carbohydrate source. The medium is buffered 3. Emori and Gaynes. 1993. Clin. Microbiol. Rev. 6:428.
through the use of disodium phosphate. Vancomycin at 6 g/mL 4. Landry, Kaiser and Wenzel. 1989. Am. J. Infect. Control. 17:323.
5. Moellering, Korzeniowski, Sande and Wennersten. 1979. J. Infect. Dis. 140:203.
is used to detect resistance to vancomycin.11 The Food, Drug 6. Murray. 1990. Clin. Microbiol. Rev. 3: 46.
7. Mandell. 1984. Ann. Intern. Med. 100:904.
& Cosmetic (FD & C) dye is inert and added for easy visual 8. Moellering and Weinberg. 1971. J. Clin. Invest. 50:2580.
9. Johnson, Uttley, Woodford and George. 1990. Clin. Microbiol. Rev. 3:280.
identification of this vancomycin-containing medium. 10. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. Approved standard: M7-A5.
Methods for dilution antimicrobial susceptibility tests for bacteria that grow aerobically, 5th ed.
NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
Procedure 11. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 2000. M100-S10 (M7). MIC testing supple-
mental tables. NCCLS, Wayne, Pa.
1. Prepare the inoculum by suspending several well-isolated 12. Sahm and Torres. 1988. J. Clin. Microbiol. 26:250.

colonies of the enterococcal isolate from an 18-24 hour

plate culture into a tube of Trypticase Soy Broth and Availability
adjust the turbidity to be equivalent to a 0.5 McFarland BBL Vancomycin Screen Agar
BS10 CMPH MCM7 NCCLS
turbidity standard.
Cat. No. 222204 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

Veal Infusion Agar Veal Infusion Broth

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Veal Infusion Agar is used for cultivating fastidious microor- Infusion from lean veal and peptone provide the nitrogen,
ganisms with or without added enrichment. vitamins, carbon and amino acids in veal infusion media.
Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance of the formu-
Veal Infusion Broth is used for cultivating fastidious microor-
lations. Agar is the solidifying agent in Veal Infusion Agar.
ganisms.

Summary and Explanation Formulae

Difco Veal Infusion Agar
The nutritive factors of veal infusion media permit luxuriant
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
growth of fastidious microorganisms. Veal Infusion Agar may Lean Veal, Infusion from 500 g ................................ 10.0 g
be used as a base with blood, ascitic fluid, serum or other Proteose Peptone No. 3 ........................................... 10.0 g
enrichments. Veal infusion media are specified for use in Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
the examination of food.1,2 Veal Infusion Agar is specified in
Difco Veal Infusion Broth
Official Methods of Analysis of AOAC International for
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
culturing eggs and egg products, and as a maintenance *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
medium for E. coli.3 Veal Infusion Broth is recommended for
culturing E. coli in the AOAC procedure for invasiveness of
mammalian cells.3

612
 Violet Red Bile Agar

User Quality Control Directions for Preparation from

Dehydrated Product
Identity Specifications 1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
Difco Veal Infusion Agar Difco Veal Infusion Agar 40 g;
Dehydrated Appearance: Very light beige, free-flowing, homo-
geneous.
Difco Veal Infusion Broth 25 g.
Solution: 4.0% solution, soluble in purified
Mix thoroughly.
water upon boiling. Solution is light 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
to medium amber, very slightly to completely dissolve the powder.
slightly opalescent.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal-
escent.
4. Cool the agar medium to 45-50C and aseptically add
Reaction of 4.0%
sterile serum, defibrinated blood or other enrichment, as
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2 desired. Mix thoroughly.
Difco Veal Infusion Broth
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. stable, typical control cultures.
Solution: 2.5% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light to medium Procedure
amber, clear to very slightly opalescent. For a complete discussion on the examination of fastidious
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear to very microorganisms in food refer to the procedures outlined in the
slightly opalescent with no more than
very slight precipitation. references.1-3
Reaction of 2.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2 Expected Results
Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Cultural Response
Difco Veal Infusion Agar or Veal Infusion Broth
Prepare the agar medium per label directions without (plain) and with
References
1. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Inter-
5% sterile defibrinated sheep blood (SB). Inoculate and incubate plates national, Gaithersburg, Md.
at 35 2C for 18-48 hours under approximately 10% CO2. 2. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Prepare the broth medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate 3. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC Interna-
at 35 2C for 18-48 hours. tional, Gaithersburg, Md.

INOCULUM
RECOVERY
AGAR
RECOVERY
AGAR Availability

ORGANISM ATCC CFU (PLAIN)/BROTH WITH SB Difco Veal Infusion Agar
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 102-103 Good Good AOAC BAM COMPF
Staphylococcus Cat. No. 234310 Dehydrated 500 g
epidermidis
Streptococcus mitis
12228
9895
102-103
102-103
Good
Good
Good
Good
Difco Veal Infusion Broth U
Streptococcus
AOAC BAM COMPF
Cat. No. 234420 Dehydrated 500 g
-
pneumoniae 6305 102-103 Good Good
234410 Dehydrated 10 kg Z

Violet Red Bile Agar

Intended Use method for performing the presumptive test for coliforms uses
Violet Red Bile Agar is used for enumerating coliform organ- Violet Red Bile Agar. If typical coliform colonies appear, they
isms in dairy products. are tested further to confirm their identification as coliforms.

Summary and Explanation Principles of the Procedure

The coliform group of bacteria includes aerobic and faculta- Violet Red Bile Agar contains peptone to provide carbon
tively anaerobic gram-negative non-sporeforming bacilli that and nitrogen sources for general growth requirements. Yeast
ferment lactose and form acid and gas at 35C within 48 hours. extract supplies B-complex vitamins which stimulate bacterial
Members of the Enterobacteriaceae comprise the majority of growth. Bile salts and crystal violet inhibit most gram-positive
the group but other lactose fermenting organisms may also be microorganisms. Lactose is the carbohydrate source and
included. neutral red is the pH indicator. Agar is the solidifying agent.
Procedures to detect, enumerate and presumptively identify
coliforms are used in testing foods and dairy products.1-3 One

613
Section III
U-Z Violet Red Bile Agar, cont.

Uninoculated Enterobacter aerogenes

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 13048

Identity Specifications
Difco Violet Red Bile Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Reddish-beige, homogeneous, free-
flowing.
Solution: 4.15% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is reddish-
purple, slightly opalescent, without
significant precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Reddish-purple, slightly opalescent, no
significant precipitate.
Reaction of 4.15%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Violet Red Bile Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 32
1C for 24 2 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Enterobacter
aerogenes 13048 30-300 Good Red, may have
slight red precipitate Escherichia coli
around colonies ATCC 25922

Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good Deep red with red

precipitate around colonies
Staphylococcus
aureus 25923 ~103 Marked to
complete inhibition

Formula 4. Examine for purple-red colonies, 0.5 mm in diameter (or

Difco Violet Red Bile Agar larger), surrounded by a zone of precipitated bile acids.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 5. Continue with confirmatory testing of typical coliform
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Peptone ..................................................................... 7.0 g
colonies.1-3
Bile Salts No. 3 ........................................................... 1.5 g
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g Expected Results
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g Lactose fermenters: Purple-red colonies, with or without a zone
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Neutral Red ................................................................ 0.03 g
of precipitate around the colonies
Crystal Violet .............................................................. 2.0 mg Lactose nonfermenters: Colorless to transparent colonies
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Gram-positive cocci: Colorless, pinpoint colonies
Directions for Preparation from Limitations of the Procedure
Dehydrated Product 1. Violet Red Bile Agar may not be completely inhibitory
1. Suspend 41.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix to gram-positive organisms. Perform Gram stain and
thoroughly. biochemical tests as necessary to identify isolates.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to 2. The medium will grow gram-negative bacilli other than
completely dissolve the powder. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE. members of the Enterobacteriaceae. Perform biochemical
3. Cool to 45-50C and use immediately. tests to identify isolates to genus and species.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 3. Boiling the medium for longer than 2 minutes can decrease
stable, typical control cultures. the ability to support growth.
4. Plates of Violet Red Bile Agar should not be incubated longer
Procedure than 24 hours because microorganisms that are only
Presumptive test for coliforms using solid medium: partially inhibited may grow after extended incubation.
1. Transfer a 1 mL aliquot of test sample to a Petri dish. 5. For optimum performance, prepare and use the medium
2. Add 10 mL of Violet Red Bile Agar (at 48C) and swirl to mix. within 24 hours.
3. Allow medium to solidify before incubating at 35C for
18-24 hours; use 32C for dairy products.

614
 Violet Red Bile Agar with MUG

References Availability
1. Christen, Davidson, McAllister and Roth. 1993. In Marshall (ed.). Standard methods for the micro-
biological examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washing-
Difco Violet Red Bile Agar
ton, D.C. BAM CCAM COMPF ISO SMD
2. Kornacki and Johnson. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.). Compendium of methods for the microbio-
logical examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Cat. No. 211695 Dehydrated 500 g
3. Hitchins, Feng, Watkins, Rippey and Chandler. 1995. In FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 211687 Dehydrated 2 kg
8th ed. AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
Europe
Cat. No. 254484 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
*Store at 2-8C.

Violet Red Bile Agar with MUG

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Violet Red Bile Agar with MUG is used for enumerating Violet Red Bile Agar contains peptone as a source of carbon,
Escherichia coli and total coliform bacteria in food and dairy nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Yeast extract supplies B-complex
products. vitamins which stimulate bacterial growth. Bile salts and
crystal violet inhibit gram-positive bacteria. Lactose is a
Summary and Explanation carbohydrate source. Neutral red is a pH indicator. MUG
Violet Red Bile Agar is specified in standard methods procedures (4-methylumbelliferyl--D-glucuronide) is a substrate used for
to enumerate coliforms in food and dairy products.1-3 In 1982, detecting glucuronidase activity. Agar is the solidifying agent.
Feng and Hartman developed a rapid fluorogenic assay
E. coli produces the enzyme glucuronidase which hydrolyzes
for Escherichia coli by incorporating 4-methylumbelliferyl--
MUG to yield a fluorogenic compound detectable with
D-glucuronide (MUG) into Lauryl Tryptose Broth.4 Incorpo-
long-wave UV light (366 nm). Typical strains of E. coli (red
rating MUG into Violet Red Bile Agar permits the detection of
colonies surrounded by a bile precipitate) exhibit blue fluores-
E. coli among the coliform colonies.2, 3
cence. Non-E. coli coliforms may produce red colonies with
Standard methods procedures include Violet Red Bile Agar zones of precipitated bile but they are MUG negative.
with MUG for detecting E. coli in food and dairy products by
fluorescence.1-3

Escherichia coli
User Quality Control ATCC 25922

Identity Specifications
Difco Violet Red Bile Agar with MUG
Dehydrated Appearance: Reddish beige, free-flowing, homoge- U
neous. -
Solution: 4.16% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is reddish-
Z
purple, clear to slightly opalescent,
without significant precipitate.
Prepared Appearance: Reddish-purple, clear to slightly opales-
cent, no significant precipitate.
Reaction of 4.16%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Violet Red Bile Agar with MUG
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 32
2C for 22-26 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY FLUOR-
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR ESCENCE
Enterobacter
aerogenes 13048 30-300 Good Pink, may +
have bile ppt.
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good Deep red,
with bile ppt.
Staphylococcus
aureus 25923 3102-103 Marked to
complete inhibition

615
Section III
U-Z Violet Red Bile with MUG, cont.

Formula E. coli colonies are red surrounded by a zone of precipitated

Difco Violet Red Bile Agar with MUG bile and fluoresce blue under long-wave UV light.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Salmonella and Shigella strains that produce glucuronidase may
Peptone ..................................................................... 7.0 g be encountered infrequently but these are generally lactose
Bile Salts No. 3 ........................................................... 1.5 g negative and appear as colorless colonies which may fluoresce.
Lactose ..................................................................... 10.0 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g Limitations of the Procedure
Neutral Red ................................................................ 0.03 g 1. Glucuronidase-negative strains of E. coli have been encoun-
Crystal Violet .............................................................. 2.0 mg tered.5-7 Similarly, glucuronidase-positive strains of E. coli
MUG (4-methylumbelliferyl--D-glucuronide) ............ 0.1 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
that do not fluoresce have been reported.8
2. Strains of Salmonella and Shigella that produce glucu-
Directions for Preparation from ronidase may infrequently be encountered.9 These strains
Dehydrated Product must be distinguished from E. coli on the basis of other
1. Suspend 41.6 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix parameters; e. g., gas production, lactose fermentation or
thoroughly. growth at 44.5C.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
completely dissolve the powder. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE. References
1. Christen, Davidson, McAllister and Roth. 1993. In Marshall (ed.). Standard methods for the micro-
3. Cool to 45-50C and use immediately. biological examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washing-
ton, D.C.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using 2. Kornacki and Johnson. 2001. In Downes and Ito (ed.). Compendium of methods for the microbio-
stable, typical control cultures. logical examination of foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. Hitchins, Feng, Watkins, Rippey and Chandler. 1995. In FDA bacteriological analytical manual,
8th ed. AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
4. Feng and Hartman. 1982. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 43:1320.
Procedure 5. Chang, Brill and Lum. 1989. Appl. Environ. Microbiol. 55:335.
6. Hansen and Yourassowsky. 1984. J. Clinical Microbiol. 20:1177.
1. Process each specimen as appropriate for that specimen.1-3 7. Kilian and Bulow. 1976. Acta Pathol. Microbiol. Scand. Sect. B 84:245.
2. Incubate plates at 35C for 22-26 hours. 8. Mates and Shaffer. 1989. J. Appl. Bacteriology 67:343.
9. Damare, Campbell and Johnston. 1985. J. Food Sci. 50:1736.
3. Examine plates for growth and fluorescence.
Availability
Expected Results Difco Violet Red Bile Agar with MUG
Coliform organisms form purplish-red colonies that are BAM COMPF
generally surrounded by a reddish zone of precipitated bile. Cat. No. 229100 Dehydrated 500 g
When examined under long-wave fluorescent light, MUG- BBL Violet Red Bile Agar with MUG

positive colonies are surrounded by a bluish fluorescent halo. BAM COMPF

MUG-negative colonies lack the fluorescent halo. Cat. No. 299128 Prepared Bottle (200 mL) Pkg. of 10

Violet Red Bile Glucose Agar

Intended Use The Hycheck hygiene contact slide is a double-sided paddle
Violet Red Bile Glucose Agar is used for detecting and enu- containing two agar surfaces for immersing into fluids or
merating Enterobacteriaceae in foods and dairy products. sampling surfaces. There is one slide containing Violet Red
Bile Glucose Agar paired with Tryptic Soy Agar.
Summary and Explanation
The Enterobacteriaceae group includes lactose-fermenting Principles of the Procedure
coliform bacteria, lactose-nonfermenting strains of E. coli, Violet Red Bile Glucose Agar contains peptone as a source of
and lactose-nonfermenting species, such as Salmonella and carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Yeast extract supplies
Shigella. When examining some foods, it is desirable to detect B-complex vitamins which stimulate bacterial growth. Glucose
Enterobacteriaceae rather than the coliform bacteria.1,2 is a carbohydrate. Bile salts and crystal violet inhibit gram-
positive bacteria. Glucose fermenters produce red colonies with
Enterobacteriaceae are glucose-fermenting bacteria. Mossel
red-purple halos (bile precipitation) in the presence of neutral
et al. 3 modified lactose-containing Violet Red Bile Agar by
red, a pH indicator. Agar is the solidifying agent.
adding glucose to improve the recovery of Enterobacteriaceae.
Later work by Mossel et al.4,5 demonstrated that lactose could
be omitted, resulting in the formulation known as Violet Red
Bile Glucose Agar (VRBGA).

616
 Violet Red Bile Glucose Agar, cont.

Uninoculated Escherichia coli

User Quality Control Plate ATCC 25922

Identity Specifications
Difco Violet Red Bile Glucose Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Pink-beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 4.15% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is red to
purple, very slightly to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Red to purple, very slightly to slightly
opalescent.
Reaction of 4.15%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco Violet Red Bile Glucose Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Using the pour plate method,
inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours.
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY REACTION
Acinetobacter baumanii 19606 ~103 None to poor Colorless to red
colonies, no bile
precipitate
Escherichia coli 25922 102-3102 Good Red to purple colonies
with bile precipitate
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-3102 Good Red to purple colonies
with bile precipitate
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 ~103 None to poor Colorless to red
colonies, no bile
precipitate

Formula Expected Results

Difco Violet Red Bile Glucose Agar Enterobacteriaceae ferment glucose, produce acid products and
Approximate Formula* Per Liter form red to dark purple colonies surrounded by red-purple
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
halos.
Peptone ..................................................................... 7.0 g
Bile Salts No. 3 ........................................................... 1.5 g U
Glucose .................................................................... 10.0 g Limitation of the Procedure -
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Neutral Red ................................................................ 0.03 g
When used in the pour plate procedure, the medium should be
freshly prepared, tempered to 47C, and used within 3 hours.
Z
Crystal Violet .............................................................. 2.0 mg
Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. References
1. Draft Standard Methods for Microbiological Examination of Meat Products. Part 3: Detection and
Directions for Preparation from enumeration of Enterobacteriaceae. BS5393: Part 3 1977 ISO/DIS 5552.
2. Mossel. 1985. Int. J. Food Microbiol. 2:27.
Dehydrated Product 3. Mossel, Mengerink and Scholts. 1962. J. Bacteriol. 84:381.
4. Mossel, Eelderink, Koopmans and van Rossem. 1978. Lab Practice 27:1049.
1. Suspend 41.5 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix 5. Mossel, Eelderink, Koopmans and van Rossem. 1979. J. Food Protect. 42:470.

thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Availability
Difco Violet Red Bile Glucose Agar
completely dissolve the powder. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE.
COMPF ISO
3. Test samples of the finished product for performance using Cat. No. 218661 Dehydrated 500 g
stable, typical control cultures. Europe
Cat. No. 254486 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
Procedure 257042 Prepared Contact Plate Pkg. of 33*
This medium can be used in spread or pour plate procedures, Difco Hycheck Hygiene Contact Slides
with or without an overlay. In addition, this medium can Cat. No. 290371 Violet Red Bile Glucose Agar//Tryptic Soy Agar
be used as an overlayer for spread plates to both prevent (20 slides)*
*Store at 2-8C.
swarming colonies and to provide semi-anaerobic conditions
that suppress the growth of nonfermentative gram-negative
organisms. Stab inoculation procedures can also be used with
this medium.
617
Section III
U-Z Vitamin B12 Assay Medium

Vitamin B12 Assay Medium

Intended Use is added in specified increasing concentrations providing a
Vitamin B12 Assay Medium is used for determining vitamin growth response that can be measured titrimetrically or turbi-
B12 concentration by the microbiological assay technique. dimetrically.

Summary and Explanation Formula

Vitamin Assay Media are prepared for use in the microbio- Difco Vitamin B12 Assay Medium
logical assay of vitamins. Three types of media are used for Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Vitamin Assay Casamino Acids ................................. 12.0 g
this purpose: Dextrose ................................................................... 40.0 g
1. Maintenance Media: For carrying the stock culture to Sodium Acetate ....................................................... 20.0 g
L-Cystine .................................................................... 0.2 g
preserve the viability and sensitivity of the test organism DL-Tryptophan ........................................................... 0.2 g
for its intended purpose; Adenine ................................................................... 20.0 mg
Guanine ................................................................... 20.0 mg
2. Inoculum Media: To condition the test culture for immediate Uracil ........................................................................ 20.0 mg
use; Xanthine .................................................................... 1.0 mg
3. Assay Media: To permit quantitation of the vitamin under Thiamine Hydrochloride ............................................. 2.0 mg
Riboflavin ................................................................... 2.0 mg
test. They contain all the factors necessary for optimal Niacin ......................................................................... 2.0 mg
growth of the test organism except the single essential Calcium Pantothenate ............................................ 200.0 g
vitamin to be determined. Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ............................................ 4.0 mg
p-Aminobenzoic Acid ............................................. 200.0 g
Vitamin B12 Assay Medium is prepared according to the Biotin ....................................................................... 10.0 g
Folic Acid ............................................................... 100.0 g
formula described by Capp, Hobbs and Fox.1 This medium is Polysorbate 80 ........................................................... 2.0 g
used in the microbiological assay of vitamin B12 using Lacto- Dipotassium Phosphate .............................................. 1.0 g
bacillus delbrueckii subsp. lactis (Lactobacillus leichmannii) Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.4 g
ATCC 4797 or 7830. Sodium Chloride ...................................................... 20.0 mg
Ferrous Sulfate ......................................................... 20.0 mg
Principles of the Procedure Manganese Sulfate .................................................. 20.0 mg
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Vitamin B12 Assay Medium is a vitamin B12-free medium
containing all other nutrients and vitamins essential for the Precautions
cultivation of L. delbrueckii subsp. lactis ATCC 4797 or 7830. Great care must be taken to avoid contamination of media or
To obtain a standard curve, USP Cyanocobalamin Reference glassware in microbiological assay procedures. Extremely small
amounts of foreign material may be sufficient to give errone-
User Quality Control ous results. Scrupulously clean glassware free from detergents
and other chemicals must be used. Glassware must be heated
Identity Specifications
to 250C for at least 1 hour to burn off any organic residues
Difco Vitamin B12 Assay Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Very light to light beige, homoge-
that might be present. Take precautions to keep sterilization
neous, with a tendency to clump. and cooling conditions uniform throughout the assay.
Solution: 3.8% solution (single-strength),
soluble in purified water upon Directions for Preparation from
boiling 2-3 minutes. Solution is light Dehydrated Product
amber, clear, may have a slight
1. Suspend 7.6 g of the powder in 100 mL of purified water.
precipitate.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 2-3 minutes.
Prepared Appearance: Very light amber, clear, may have a
very slight precipitate. 3. Dispense 5 mL amounts into tubes, evenly dispersing the
Reaction of 3.8% precipitate.
Solution at 25C: pH 6.3 0.2 4. Add standard or test samples.
5. Adjust tube volume to 10 mL.
Cultural Response 6. Autoclave at 121C for 5 minutes.
Difco Vitamin B12 Assay Medium
Prepare the medium per label directions. The medium supports the Procedure
growth of Lactobacillus delbrueckii subsp. lactis ATCC 4797 when
prepared single strength and supplemented with cyanocobalamin Stock cultures of the test organism, L. delbrueckii subsp. lactis
(vitamin B12). The medium should produce a standard curve using a ATCC 4797 or 7830, are prepared by stab inoculation
cyanocobalamin reference standard at 0.0 to 0.25 ng per 10 mL. of Lactobacilli Agar AOAC or B12 Culture Agar. Following
Incubate tubes with caps loosened at 35-37C for 18-24 hours. Read
the percent transmittance using a spectrophotometer at 660 nm. incubation at 37C for 24-48 hours, the tubes are stored in the
refrigerator. Transfers are made at 2 week intervals.

618
 Vitamin K1-Hemin Solution

Inoculum for the assay is prepared by subculturing a stock of a standard concentration should be used which, after incuba-
L. delbrueckii subsp. lactis ATCC 4797 or 7830 into a tube tion, will give a titration at the 5 mL level of 8-12 mL 0.1N
containing 10 mL of Lactobacilli Broth AOAC or B12 Inocu- sodium hydroxide.
lum Broth. After incubation at 35-37C for 18-24 hours,
Inoculate and incubate at 35-37C for 18-24 hours. For turbi-
the cells are centrifuged under aseptic conditions and the
dimetric determinations, place tubes in a refrigerator at 2-8C
supernatant liquid decanted. The cells are washed by
for 15-20 minutes to stop growth. The growth can be measured
resuspending in 10 mL of sterile 0.85% saline solution and
by a nephelometric method. Titrimetric determinations of
centrifuging. The washing is repeated for a total of 3 times.
growth are made after incubation at 37C for 72 hours. The
Finally the cells are resuspended in 10 mL of sterile 0.85%
curve is then constructed from the values obtained.
saline. The cell suspension is then diluted 1:100 with sterile
0.85% saline. One drop is used to inoculate each assay tube. Expected Results
It is essential that a standard curve be constructed each time 1. Prepare a standard concentration response curve by
an assay is run. Conditions of autoclaving and temperature of plotting the response readings against the amount of
incubation that influence the standard curve readings cannot standard in each tube, disk or cup.
always be duplicated. 2. Determine the amount of vitamin at each level of assay
solution by interpolation from the standard curve.
The concentrations required for the preparation of the stan-
3. Calculate the concentration of vitamin in the sample from
dard curve are obtained by adding sufficient 25% ethanol to
the average of these volumes. Use only those values that do
an accurately weighed amount of USP Cyanocobalamin
not vary more than 10% from the average. Use the results
Reference Standard (resulting in a solution containing 1.0 g
only if two-thirds of the values do not vary more than 10%.
of cyanocobalamin per mL). This stock solution is stored
in the refrigerator and should be used within 60 days. In the
Limitations of the Procedure
preparation of the standard curve, further dilutions of this stock
1. The test organism used for inoculating an assay medium
solution (1 g/mL) are made as follows:
must be cultured and maintained on media recommended
A. Add 1 mL stock solution to 99 mL purified water (1 mL = for this purpose.
10 ng). 2. Aseptic technique should be used throughout the assay
B. Add 1 mL of the solution from step A to 199 mL purified procedure.
water (1 mL = 0.05 ng). 3. The use of altered or deficient media may cause mutants
An acceptable standard curve can be obtained by using the having different nutritional requirements that will not give
USP Cyanocobalamin Reference Standard at levels of 0.0, a satisfactory response.
0.025, 0.05, 0.1, 0.15, 0.2 and 0.25 ng per assay tube. This is 4. For successful results of these procedures, all conditions of
accomplished by adding 0, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 mL of the 0.05 the assay must be followed precisely.
ng/mL solution per assay tube and sufficient purified water to U
make 10 mL volume per tube. References -
Z
1. Capps, Hobbs and Fox. 1949. J. Biol. Chem. 178:517.
2. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
A standard concentration is used which, after incubation, gives national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
a transmittance value at the 5 mL level of not less than that
which corresponds to a dry cell weight of 1.25 mg (see USP2 Availability
for method of calibration of a spectrophotometer and Difco Vitamin B12 Assay Medium
determination of dry cell weight). For the titrimetric method, Cat. No. 236010 Dehydrated 100 g*
*Store at 2-8C

Vitamin K1 - Hemin Solution

Intended Use Principles of the Procedure
Vitamin K1 - Hemin Solution is used as a culture medium Gibbons and MacDonald reported isolating strains of Bacteroides
enrichment for anaerobic microorganisms. melaninogenicus (Prevotella melaninogenica) that require
hemin and vitamin K1 for growth.3 Vitamin K1 enhances
Summary and Explanation the growth of some strains of Bacteroides and certain gram-
CDC Anaerobe 5% Blood Agar was developed at the Centers positive nonsporeformers.4 The inclusion of Vitamin K1 - Hemin
for Disease Control and Prevention as a nonselective medium in anaerobic culture media has been suggested by many
for the isolation and cultivation of a wide variety of obligately investigators.5
anaerobic microorganisms, particularly those found in
clinical materials.1,2 The medium is enriched with vitamin K1
and hemin.
619
Section III
U-Z Vitamin K1-Hemin Solution, cont.

Formula Procedure
BBL Vitamin K1-Hemin Solution Vitamin K1-Hemin Solution is a ready-to-use solution. The
Approximate Formula* Per Liter solution cannot be heated and must be added aseptically in
Hemin ........................................................................ 0.5 g
Sodium Hydroxide ...................................................... 0.4 g
the proper amounts to media that have been autoclaved and
Phytomenadione (Vitamin K1) .................................... 0.05 g cooled to 50-55C.
Ethyl Alcohol, 95% .................................................. 10.0 mL
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Vitamin K1-Hemin Solution is usually employed in prepared
media at a final concentration of 5% for optimal results. Add
Vitamin K1-Hemin Solution as required.
User Quality Control
Identity Specifications Expected Results
BBL Vitamin K1-Hemin Solution

Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Appearance: Dark blackish-brown, opaque.
References
Cultural Response 1. Dowell, Lombard, Thompson and Armfield. 1977. Media for isolation, characterization and iden-
tification of obligately anaerobic bacteria. CDC laboratory manual. CDC, Atlanta, Ga.
BBL Vitamin K1-Hemin Solution 2. Jousimies-Somer, Summanen and Finegold. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken
Prepare medium with added Vitamin K1-Hemin Solution. Inoculate and (ed.), Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
3. Gibbons and MacDonald. 1960. J. Bacteriol. 80:164.
incubate at 35-37C for up to 4 days under appropriate atmospheric 4. Finegold, Sutter, Attebery and Rosenblatt. 1974. In Lennette, Spaulding and Truant (ed.), Manual
conditions. of clinical microbiology, 2nd ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
5. Murray and Citron. 1991. In Balows, Hausler, Herrmann, Isenberg and Shadomy (ed.), Manual of
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY clinical microbiology, 5th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

Bacteroides levii 29147 103-104 Good

Bacteroides vulgatus 8482 103-104 Good Availability
BBL Vitamin K1 - Hemin Solution
Cat. No. 212354 Prepared Tubes, 10 mL Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.

Vogel and Johnson Agar

(See VJ Agar)

WL Nutrient Medium WL Nutrient Broth

WL Differential Medium
Intended Use WL Nutrient Medium and WL Differential Medium are used
WL Nutrient Medium and WL Nutrient Broth are used for simultaneously as a set of three plates. One plate is prepared
cultivating yeasts, molds and bacteria encountered in brewing from WL Nutrient Medium and two plates from WL Differ-
and industrial fermentation processes. ential Medium.3 The WL Nutrient Medium plate is incubated
aerobically to obtain a total count of mainly yeast colonies. A
WL Differential Medium is used for isolating bacteria encoun-
tered in brewing and industrial fermentation processes. differential agar plate is incubated aerobically for growth of
acetic acid bacteria, Flavobacterium, Proteus and thermophilic
Summary and Explanation bacteria. Another differential agar plate is incubated anaero-
WL (Wallerstein Laboratory) nutrient media were developed bically for growth of lactic acid bacteria and Pediococcus.
by Green and Gray1,2 in their study of various fermentation
processes. An exhaustive study examining the methods of Principles of the Procedure
fermentation control procedures in worts, beers, liquid yeasts Yeast extract is a source of trace elements, vitamins and amino
and similar fermentation products led to the development of acids. Peptone provides nitrogen, amino acids and carbon.
these media. Dextrose is the source of carbohydrate. Monopotassium
phosphate buffers the media. Potassium chloride, calcium
At a pH of 5.5, counts of viable bakers yeast may be made on chloride and ferric chloride are essential ions and help to
the WL Nutrient Medium. By adjusting the pH to 6.5, the maintain osmotic balance. Magnesium sulfate and manganese
medium is suitable for obtaining counts of bakers and distillers sulfate are sources of divalent cations. Bromcresol green is a
yeast. The medium can support the growth of bacteria, but pH indicator. Agar is the solidifying agent in WL Nutrient
unless the number of yeast cells is small the bacteria may not Medium and WL Differential Medium. Cycloheximide
be detected. Due to this limitation, Green and Gray developed inhibits yeasts and molds in WL Differential Medium.
WL Differential Medium that inhibits the growth of yeasts
without inhibiting the growth of bacteria present in beers.
620
 WL Nutrient Medium, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications
Difco WL Nutrient Medium or WL Differential Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige with a greenish tint, free-
flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 8.0% solution, soluble in purified water
upon boiling. Solution is blue to greenish
blue, very slightly to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Blue to greenish blue, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 8.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 5.5 0.2
Difco WL Nutrient Broth
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige with a greenish tint, free-
flowing, homogeneous. Uninoculated Escherichia coli Lactobacillus
Tube ATCC 25922 fermentum
Solution: 6.0% solution, soluble in purified ATCC 9338
water. Solution is blue, clear.
Prepared Appearance: Blue, clear.
Reaction of 6.0%
Solution at 25C: pH 5.5 0.2

Cultural Response Uninoculated Escherichia coli

Plate ATCC 25922
Difco WL Nutrient Medium

Prepare the medium per label directions. Using the pour plate technique,
inoculate and incubate for 42-72 hours at 35 2C for bacteria and at
30 2C for yeasts.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Fair to good
Lactobacillus fermentum 9338 102-103 Fair to good
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 102-103 Good

Difco WL Nutrient Broth

Prepare the medium per label directions with the addition of inverted
fermentation tubes for gas production. Inoculate and incubate for 40-
48 hours at 35 2C for bacteria and up to 5 days at 30 2C for
yeasts.
INOCULUM U
ORGANISM
Escherichia coli
ATCC
25922 102-103
CFU RECOVERY
Fair to good
ACID GAS
+ +
-
Lactobacillus fermentum 9338 102-103 Fair to good + sl. + Z
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 102-103 Good + +
Acid + = positive, yellow
Acid = negative, no color change
Saccharomyces
Difco WL Differential Medium cerevisiae
ATCC 9763
Prepare the medium per label directions. Using the pour plate tech-
nique, inoculate and incubate for 40-48 hours at 35 2C for bacteria
and at 30 2C for yeasts.
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY
Escherichia coli 25922 102-103 Good
Lactobacillus fermentum 9338 5102-103 Good
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 103-2103 Inhibition

621
Section III
U-Z WL Nutrient Medium, cont.

Formulae 2. Heat the agar media with frequent agitation and boil for 1
Difco WL Nutrient Medium minute to completely dissolve the powder.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 3. Autoclave agar and broth media at 121C for 15 minutes.
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 4.0 g 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ........................................ 5.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 50.0 g stable, typical control cultures.
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 0.55 g
Potassium Chloride ................................................ 425.0 mg Procedure
Calcium Chloride ................................................... 125.0 mg
Magnesium Sulfate ................................................ 125.0 mg
See appropriate references for specific procedures.
Ferric Chloride ............................................................ 2.5 mg
Manganese Sulfate .................................................... 2.5 mg Expected Results
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Bromcresol Green ..................................................... 22.0 mg
Difco WL Nutrient Broth References
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar. 1. Green and Gray. 1950. Wallerstein Lab. Commun. 12:43.
2. Green and Gray. 1950. Wallerstein Lab. Commun. 13:357.
Difco WL Differential Medium

3. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
Consists of the same ingredients as WL Nutrient Medium with
the addition of 4.0 mg cycloheximide.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Availability
Difco WL Nutrient Medium
Directions for Preparation from Cat. No. 242420 Dehydrated 500 g
Dehydrated Product Difco WL Nutrient Broth

1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water: Cat. No. 247110 Dehydrated 500 g
Difco WL Nutrient Medium* 80 g; Difco WL Differential Medium
Difco WL Differential Medium* 80 g; Cat. No. 242510 Dehydrated 500 g
Difco WL Nutrient Broth** 60 g.
Mix thoroughly.
* If desired, the pH may be adjusted to 6.5 0.2 by adding approximately 27-32 mL (see label
directions) of 1% sodium carbonate solution per liter of purified water prior to dissolving the
powder.
** If desired, add fermentation vials to tubes before autoclaving to assess gas production.

Wallenstein Medium
Intended Use Procedure
Wallenstein Medium is used in qualitative procedures for The test procedures are those recommended by the Centers for
the isolation and cultivation of mycobacteria from clinical Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) for primary isolation
specimens. from specimens containing mycobacteria.5 N-acetyl-L-cysteine,
sodium hydroxide (NALC-NaOH) solution is recommended
Summary and Explanation as a gentle but effective digesting and decontaminating agent.
Wallenstein Medium is a glycerolated egg yolk medium These reagents are provided in the BBL MycoPrep Myco-
containing malachite green.1,2 Somewhat more inhibitory than bacterial Specimen Digestion/Decontamination Kit. For
Lowenstein-Jensen Medium because of the higher malachite detailed decontamination and culturing instructions, consult
green content, this medium is particularly recommended an appropriate reference.3,5-7
for use in parallel with other media for isolation of tubercle
Following inoculation, keep test containers shielded from light
bacilli.3
and place in a suitable system providing an aerobic atmosphere
enriched with carbon dioxide. Incubate at 35 2C.
Principles of the Procedure
Egg yolk is a source of energy and enhances the growth of Slanted and bottled media should be incubated in a horizontal
Mycobacterium species. Inhibition of bacteria is achieved by plane until the inoculum is absorbed. Tubes and bottles should
the presence of malachite green dye. have screw caps loose for the first 3 weeks to permit circulation
of carbon dioxide for the initiation of growth. Thereafter, to
Precaution prevent dehydration, tighten caps; loosen briefly once a week.
Laboratory procedures involving mycobacteria require special Stand tubes upright if space is a problem.
equipment and techniques to minimize biohazards.4,5
NOTE: Cultures from skin lesions suspected to be M. marinum
or M. ulcerans should be incubated at 25-33C for primary
isolation. Incubate a duplicate culture at 35-37C.5

622
 Wilkins-Chalgren Agar

Expected Results Bottles may be examined by inverting the bottles on the stage
Cultures should be read within 5-7 days after incubation and of a dissecting microscope. Read at 10-60 with transmitted
once a week thereafter for up to 8 weeks. light. Scan rapidly at 10-20 for the presence of colonies.
Higher magnification (30-60) is helpful in observing colony
Record Observations5
morphology; i.e., serpentine cord-like colonies.
1. Number of days required for colonies to become macroscopi-
cally visible. Rapid growers have mature colonies within 7 References
1. Wallenstein. 1941. Am. J. Clin. Pathol., Tech. Sect. 11, 108.
days. Slow growers require more than 7 days for mature 2. MacFaddin. 1985. Media for isolation-cultivation-identification-maintenance of medical bacteria,
colony forms. vol. 1. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore, Md.
3. Forbes, Sahm and Weissfeld. 1998. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 10th ed. Mosby,
2. Number of colonies (bottles): Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
4. U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and National Institutes of
No colonies = Negative Health. 1999. Biosafety in microbiological and biomedical laboratories, 4th ed. HHS Publication
No. (CDC) 93-8395. U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C.
Less than 50 colonies = Actual Count 5. Kent and Kubica. 1985. Public health mycobacteriology: a guide for the level III laboratory.
USDHHS. CDC, Atlanta, Ga.
50 to 100 colonies = 1+ 6. Cernoch, Ennis, Saubolle and Wallace. 1994. Cumitech 16A, Laboratory diagnosis of the myco-
100 to 200 colonies = 2+ bacterioses. Coord. ed., Weissfeld. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
7. Metchock, Nolte and Wallace. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual
Almost confluent (200 to 500) = 3+ of clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

3. Pigment production
White, cream or buff = Nonchromogenic (NC) Availability
Lemon, yellow, orange, red = Chromogenic (Ch) BBL Wallenstein Medium
Cat. No. 295857 Prepared Bottles Ctn. of 100*
Stained smears may show acid-fast bacilli, which are reported *Store at 2-8C.
only as acid-fast bacilli unless definitive tests are performed.

Water
Intended Use Reagent
Water may be used in laboratory procedures; e.g., preparation Purified water.
of dilutions of reagents and suspensions of microorganisms.
References
Summary and Explanation 1. Baron, Peterson and Finegold. 1994. Bailey & Scotts diagnostic microbiology, 9th ed. Mosby-
Year Book, Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
Water has been recommended for numerous uses in the microbi- 2. Wickerham. 1951. Taxonomy of yeasts. U. S. Department of Agriculture technical bulletin 1029.
Department of Agriculture, Washington, D.C.
ology laboratory.1 It is utilized in serial dilutions for test cultures,
in preparing stock solutions of reagents and in the preparation of Availability
the base medium for yeast assimilation studies.2 U
BBL Water
Cat. No. 297345 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes), 5 mL Ctn. of 100
-
Principles of the Procedure Z
The water in these tubes is purified (deionized) water that is ready
and convenient for use as a diluent or suspending medium.

Wilkins-Chalgren Agar Anaerobe Broth MIC

Intended Use Anaerobe Broth MIC is a modification of the formula described
Wilkins-Chalgren Agar is used for susceptibility testing of by Wilkins and Chalgren.1 In Anaerobe Broth MIC the agar
anaerobes and for isolating and cultivating anaerobes. has been omitted.
Anaerobe Broth MIC is used for susceptibility testing of The preferred medium for agar dilution tests with anaerobes
anaerobes by the broth dilution technique. is Wilkins-Chalgren Agar or brucella agar. 1 For broth
microdilution tests Anaerobe Broth MIC has been used
Summary and Explanation successfully.3 Supplements must be added to these media to
Wilkins-Chalgren Agar was designed by Wilkins and Chalgren1 support the growth of certain fastidious anaerobes, including
for use in determining the minimal inhibitory concentration Bacteroides gracilis, Bilophila wadsworthia, Prevotella species,
(MIC) of antibiotics for anaerobic bacteria by the agar Fusobacterium species and anaerobic cocci.3 Defibrinated sheep
dilution procedure. This medium and the procedure are blood, 5% or lysed sheep blood is an adequate supplement for
described in the protocol used in the NCCLS Methods for many fastidious anaerobic organisms.2
Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing of Anaerobic Bacteria.2

623
Section III
U-Z Wilkins-Chalgren Agar, cont.

User Quality Control Principles of the Procedure

Peptones provide the nitrogen and amino acids in Wilkins-
Identity Specifications Chalgren Agar and Anaerobe Broth MIC. Yeast extract is
Difco Wilkins-Chalgren Agar the vitamin source in the media formulations. Dextrose is the
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- carbon source, and sodium chloride maintains the osmotic
neous.
balance of the media. L-arginine and sodium pyruvate are
Solution: 4.8% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light added to provide the proper environment for anaerobic growth.
to medium amber, very slightly to Hemin and vitamin K1 are growth factors. Agar is the solidifying
slightly opalescent. agent in Wilkins-Chalgren Agar.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal-
escent.
Formulae
Reaction of 4.8%
Difco Wilkins-Chalgren Agar
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.1
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Difco Anaerobe Broth MIC Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 10.0 g
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Peptone ................................................................... 10.0 g
neous. Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Solution: 3.3% solution, soluble in purified Dextrose ..................................................................... 1.0 g
water upon warming. Solution is Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
light amber, clear, may have a slight L-Arginine .................................................................. 1.0 g
precipitate. Sodium Pyruvate ........................................................ 1.0 g
Hemin ...................................................................... 5.0 mg
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, clear, may have a slight Vitamin K1 .................................................................. 0.5 mg
precipitate. Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
Reaction of 3.3%
Difco Anaerobe Broth MIC
Solution at 25C: pH 7.1 0.1
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Cultural Response
Difco Wilkins-Chalgren Agar Directions for Preparation from
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C under anaerobic conditions for 40-48 hours. Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Bacteroides fragilis* 25285 102-103 Good
Difco Wilkins-Chalgren Agar 48 g;
Bacteroides thetaiotaomicron* 29741 102-103 Good Difco Anaerobe Broth MIC 33 g.
Clostridium perfringens 13124 102-103 Good Mix thoroughly.
Eubacterium lentum 43055 102-103 Good 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to
Minimal Inhibitory Concentration (MIC) Assay: Prepare plates and completely dissolve the powder.
inoculate as described by NCCLS.2 Test organisms marked (*) and 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
compare the MIC (lowest concentration of antimicrobial that inhibits 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
growth of the test bacterium) of the antimicrobials tested to the NCCLS
standard.2 stable, typical control cultures.
Difco Anaerobe Broth MIC
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
Procedure
35 2C under anaerobic conditions for 18-48 hours. For a complete discussion on susceptibility testing of anaerobic
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
bacteria refer to appropriate procedures outlined in the
Bacteroides fragilis* 25285 102-3102 Good
references.2-4
Bacteroides thetaiotaomicron* 29741 102-3102 Good
Eubacterium lentum 43055 102-3102 Good Expected Results
Minimal Inhibitory Concentration (MIC) Assay: Prepare broth Refer to appropriate references for acceptable ranges.
microdilution trays and inoculate as described by NCCLS.2 Test organisms
marked (*) and compare the MIC (lowest concentration of antimicrobial Limitation of the Procedure
that inhibits growth of the test bacterium) of the antimicrobials tested
Anaerobe Broth MIC is supplemented to a final concentration
to the NCCLS standard.2
of 0.5 g per mL of vitamin K1 and 5.0 g of hemin per mL.
NCCLS changed their recommendations to include use of broth
with a final concentration of 1 g of vitamin K1 per mL.2
To follow NCCLS recommendations, the concentration of
vitamin K1 should be increased accordingly. A final concentration
of 0.5 g of vitamin K1 per mL is sufficient, but some fastidious
anaerobes may need a higher concentration of vitamin K1.4

624
 XL Agar Base

References Availability
1. Wilkins and Chalgren. 1976. Antimicrob. Agents Chemother. 10:926.
2. National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. 1993. Methods for antimicrobial suscepti-
Difco Wilkins-Chalgren Agar
bility testing of anaerobic bacteria. Approved standard M11-A3. NCCLS, Villanova, Pa. NCCLS
3. Wexler and Doern. 1995. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). Manual of clinical
microbiology, 6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Cat. No. 218051 Dehydrated 500 g
4. Isenberg (ed.). 1995. Clinical microbiology procedures handbook, vol 1. American Society for
Microbiology, Washington, D.C. Difco Anaerobe Broth MIC
NCCLS
Cat. No. 218151 Dehydrated 500 g

XL Agar Base XLD Agar

Intended Use It is particularly recommended for obtaining counts of enteric
XLD Agar conforms with specifications of The United States organisms. This medium can be rendered moderately selective
Pharmacopeia (USP). for enteric pathogens, particularly Shigella, by the addition of
sodium desoxycholate (2.5 g/L) to make XLD Agar.1
XL (Xylose Lysine) Agar Base is used for the isolation and differ-
entiation of enteric pathogens and, when supplemented with XL Agar Base can be made selective for Salmonella by adding
appropriate additives, as a base for selective enteric media. 1.25 mL/L of 1% aqueous brilliant green to the base prior to
autoclaving. Its use is recommended for Salmonella isolation
XLD Agar is the complete Xylose Lysine Desoxycholate Agar,
after selenite or tetrathionate enrichment in food analysis; both
a moderately selective medium recommended for isolation and
coliforms and Shigella are inhibited.1
differentiation of enteric pathogens, especially Shigella species.
XLD Agar was developed by Taylor in order to increase the
Summary and Explanation efficiency of the isolation and identification of enteric pathogens,
A wide variety of media have been developed to aid in the particularly Shigella.1 The pathogens are differentiated not
selective isolation and differentiation of enteric pathogens. Due only from the nonpathogenic lactose fermenters but also from
to the large numbers of different microbial species and strains many nonpathogens which do not ferment lactose or sucrose.
with varying nutritional requirements and chemical resistance Additionally, the medium was formulated to increase the
patterns, investigators have developed various formulae to meet frequency of growth of the more fastidious pathogens,1 which
general as well as specific needs relative to isolation and in other formulations have often failed to grow due to the
identification of the microorganisms. inclusion of excessively toxic inhibitors. The results
obtained in a number of clinical evaluations have supported
XL Agar Base was developed by Taylor1 for the nonselective
the claim for the relatively high efficiency of XLD Agar in the
isolation and differentiation of gram-negative enteric bacilli.
XL Agar Base XLD Agar U
Uninoculated
Plate
Escherichia coli
ATCC 25922
Salmonella typhimurium
ATCC 14028
Shigella flexneri
ATCC12022
-
Z

625
Section III
U-Z XL Agar Base, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications
Difco XLD Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Pink, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Solution: 5.7% solution, soluble in purified water upon boiling. Solution is red, very slightly to slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Red, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of 5.7%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2

Cultural Response
Difco XLD Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours.
INOCULUM
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLONY COLOR
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103-2103 Partial inhibition
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Partial inhibition Yellow with or
without bile precipitate
Providencia alcalifaciens 9886 102-103 Good Red
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good Red with black centers
Shigella flexneri 12022 102-103 Good Red
Continued

primary isolation of Shigella and Salmonella.2-6 XLD Agar Formulae

is included in the USP microbial limit test for screening specimens BBL XL Agar Base
for the presence or absence of Salmonella7 and is recommended Approximate Formula* Per Liter
for the testing of foods, dairy products and water.7-12 Xylose ........................................................................ 3.5 g
L-Lysine ...................................................................... 5.0 g
Lactose ....................................................................... 7.5 g
Principles of the Procedure Sucrose ...................................................................... 7.5 g
Xylose is incorporated into the medium since it is fermented Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
by practically all enterics except for the shigellae, and this prop- Phenol Red ................................................................. 0.08 g
erty enables the differentiation of Shigella species. Lysine is Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g
included to enable the Salmonella group to be differentiated Difco XLD Agar
from the nonpathogens since, without lysine, salmonellae Approximate Formula* Per Liter
rapidly would ferment the xylose and be indistinguishable from Xylose ........................................................................ 3.75 g
L-Lysine ...................................................................... 5.0 g
nonpathogenic species. After the salmonellae exhaust the Lactose ...................................................................... 7.5 g
supply of xylose, the lysine is attacked via the enzyme, lysine Saccharose ................................................................. 7.5 g
decarboxylase, with reversion to an alkaline pH which mimics Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
the Shigella reaction. To prevent similar reversion by lysine- Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Phenol Red ................................................................ 0.08 g
positive coliforms, lactose and sucrose (saccharose) were added Sodium Desoxycholate ............................................... 2.5 g
to produce acid in excess.1 Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................... 6.8 g
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.8 g
To add to the differentiating ability of the formulation, an H2S Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
indicator system, consisting of sodium thiosulfate and ferric BBL XLD Agar
ammonium citrate, is included for the visualization of the Approximate Formula* Per Liter
hydrogen sulfide produced, resulting in the formation of colonies Xylose ........................................................................ 3.5 g
L-Lysine ...................................................................... 5.0 g
with black centers. The nonpathogenic H2S producers do not Lactose ....................................................................... 7.5 g
decarboxylate lysine; therefore, the acid reaction produced by Sucrose ...................................................................... 7.5 g
them prevents the blackening of the colonies.1 Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
XLD Agar is both a selective and differential medium. It utilizes Phenol Red ................................................................. 0.08 g
sodium desoxycholate as the selective agent and, therefore, it Sodium Desoxycholate ............................................... 2.5 g
Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................... 6.8 g
is inhibitory to gram-positive microorganisms. Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.8 g
Agar ......................................................................... 13.5 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

626
 XL Agar Base, cont.

Identity Specifications
BBL XL Agar Base
Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous material.
Solution: 4.5% solution, soluble in purified water upon boiling. Solution is dark medium to dark, red to rose-red, clear to slightly
hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Dark medium to dark, red to rose-red, clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 4.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.5 0.2
BBL XLD Agar

Dehydrated Appearance: Fine, homogeneous, free of extraneous material.

Solution: 5.5% solution, soluble in purified water upon boiling. Solution is medium to dark, orange-red to rose-red, clear to
slightly hazy.
Prepared Appearance: Medium to dark, orange-red to rose-red, clear to slightly hazy.
Reaction of 5.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2

Cultural Response
BBL XL Agar Base
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours (up to 48 hours if necessary).
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY COLONY COLOR
Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good Yellow without precipitate
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 103-104 Good Red to yellow without
precipitate, black centers to
predominately black
Shigella flexneri 12022 103-104 Good Red
BBL XLD Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C for 18-24 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY COLONY COLOR
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 104-105 Partial to complete inhibition
Escherichia coli 25922 104-105 Partial to complete inhibition If growth, yellow with or without bile precipitate
Klebsiella pneumoniae 33495 103-104 Good Yellow with or without bile precipitate
Proteus vulgaris 8427 103-104 Good Yellow with or without bile precipitate
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 10145 103-104 Good Red
Salmonella choleraesuis U
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhi 19430 103-104 Good Red with black centers
-
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
Z
serotype Paratyphi 9150 103-104 Good Red
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 103-104 Good Red with black centers
Shigella boydii 9207 103-104 Good Red
Shigella flexneri 12022 103-104 Good Red

Directions for Preparation from 5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Dehydrated Product stable, typical control cultures.
BBL XL Agar Base Difco and BBL XLD Agar
1. Suspend 45 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix 1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
thoroughly. Difco XLD Agar 57 g;
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- BBL XLD Agar 55 g.
pletely dissolve the powder. Add brilliant green, if desired. Mix thoroughly.
3. Autoclave at 118C for 10 minutes. Cool to 55-60C. 2. Heat with agitation just until the medium boils. DO NOT
4. Add 20 mL of an aqueous solution containing 34% OVERHEAT. DO NOT AUTOCLAVE.
sodium thiosulfate and 4% ferric ammonium citrate. 3. Cool to 45-50C in a water bath and use immediately.
For XLD agar, add 25 mL of 10% aqueous sodium Overheating causes precipitation.
desoxycholate. Pour into plates. 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.
627
Section III
U-Z XL Agar Base, cont.

Procedure References
1. Taylor. 1965. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 44:471.
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from 2. Taylor and Harris. 1965. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 44:476.
specimens. A nonselective medium should also be streaked to 3.
4.
Taylor and Harris. 1967. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 48:350.
Taylor and Schelhart. 1967. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 48:356.
increase the chance of recovery when the population of gram- 5. Taylor and Schelhart. 1968. Appl. Microbiol. 16:1387.
6. Pollock and Dahlgren. 1974. Appl. Microbiol. 27:197.
negative organisms is low and to provide an indication of other 7. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc. 2001. The United States pharmacopeia 25/The
national formulary 20 2002. United States Pharmacopeial Convention, Inc., Rockville, Md.
organisms present in the specimen. Incubate plates, protected 8. U.S. Food and Drug Adminsitration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC
from light, at 35 2C for 18-24 hours. Colonies on XLD agar International, Gaithersburg, Md.
9. Horwitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC Interna-
may require 48 hours incubation for full color development. tional, Gaithersburg, Md.
10. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of
foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
Expected Results 11. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
12. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
Degradation of xylose, lactose and sucrose generates acid prod- wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
ucts, causing a color change in the medium from red to yellow.
Hydrogen sulfide production under alkaline conditions causes Availability
colonies to develop black centers. This reaction is inhibited by BBL XL Agar Base
SMWW
the acid conditions that accompany carbohydrate fermentation. Cat. No. 211836 Dehydrated 500 g
Lysine decarboxylation in the absence of lactose and sucrose Difco XLD Agar

fermentation causes reversion to an alkaline condition and the AOAC BAM BS10 CMPH COMPF EP MCM7 SMD
color of the medium changes back to red. SMWW USP
Cat. No. 278850 Dehydrated 500 g
Typical colonial morphology and reactions on XLD Agar are 278820 Dehydrated 2 kg
as follows: 278830 Dehydrated 10 kg

E.coli ................................... Large, flat, yellow; some strains BBL XLD Agar
may be inhibited AOAC BAM BS10 CMPH COMPF EP MCM7 SMD
Enterobacter/ Klebsiella ....... Mucoid, yellow SMWW USP
Proteus ................................ Red to yellow; most strains have Cat. No. 211838 Dehydrated 500 g
black centers 212266 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
Salmonella .......................... Red-yellow with black centers
United States and Canada
Shigella, Salmonella
Cat. No. 221192 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
H2S-negative ....................... Red
221284 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
Pseudomonas ...................... Red
Gram-positive bacteria ........ No growth to slight growth Europe
Cat. No. 254055 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
254090 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 120*
Limitations of the Procedure
Japan
1. Red, false-positive colonies may occur with some Proteus Cat. No. 251159 Prepared Plates Ctn. of 100*
and Pseudomonas species.
BBL XLD Agar//Hektoen Enteric Agar

2. Incubation in excess of 48 hours may lead to false-positive
Cat. No. 295646 Prepared I Plate Dishes Pkg. of 20*
results. *Store at 2-8C.
3. S. paratyphi A, S. choleraesuis, S. pullorum and S. gallinarum
may form red colonies without black centers, thus resembling
Shigella species.
4. Some Proteus strains will give black-centered colonies on
XLD Agar.

XLT4 Agar Base XLT4 Agar Supplement

Intended Use isolation media where overgrowth of Proteus, Providencia and
XLT4 Agar Base is used with XLT4 Agar Supplement in Pseudomonas can dramatically interfere with the detection and
isolating non-typhi Salmonella. isolation of Salmonella.
In 1990, Miller and Tate described a new medium, XLT4 Agar,
Summary and Explanation for isolating Salmonella.1 The authors established the selectivity
Numerous media have been developed for isolating and differ- of XLT4 Agar using pure cultures of a variety of enteric organ-
entiating enteric pathogens. The majority were designed to isms. They also evaluated its sensitivity in detecting and isolating
recover a broad spectrum of enteric pathogens.1 Consequently, Salmonella using fecal-contaminated farm samples containing high
overgrowth of nuisance or contaminating organisms can be numbers of competing bacteria. In follow-up studies, Miller2,3
a major problem when recovery of a specific organism or and Tate4 reported that XLT4 Agar significantly improved the
species is desired. This is particularly true for Salmonella

628
 XLT4 Agar Base, cont.

User Quality Control XLT4 Agar Base with XLT4 Supplement

Salmonella typhimurium
Identity Specifications ATCC 14028
Difco XLT4 Agar Base

Dehydrated Appearance: Pink, free flowing, homogeneous.

Solution: 5.9% solution, soluble upon boiling in
purified water containing 4.6 mL/L of
XLT4 Agar Supplement. Solution is red,
slightly opalescent.
Prepared Appearance: Reddish-orange, slightly opalescent.
Reaction of Final
Medium at 25C: pH 7.4 0.2
Difco XLT4 Agar Supplement
Appearance: Colorless to slightly yellow, clear, slightly
viscous solution.

Cultural Response
Difco XLT4 Agar Base with XLT4 Agar Supplement
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at 35
2C for 18-48 hours.
INOCULUM COLONY
ORGANISM ATCC CFU RECOVERY COLOR
Enterococcus faecalis 29212 103 Marked inhibition
Escherichia coli 25922 103 Partial inhibition Yellow
Proteus mirabilis 25933 103 Inhibition
Salmonella choleraesuis
subsp. choleraesuis
serotype Typhimurium 14028 102-103 Good Yellow to red
with black centers
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 103 Inhibition

recovery of non-typhi Salmonella from chicken and farm Difco XLT4 Agar Supplement
environmental drag-swab samples. A 27% solution (approximate) of the surfactant Tergitol** 4
(7-ethyl-2-methyl-4-undecanol hydrogen sulfate, sodium salt).
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Principles of the Procedure **Tergitol is a trademark of Union Carbide Chemicals & Plastics Technology Corporation.

XLT4 Agar Base contains peptone as a source of complex

Directions for Preparation from
nitrogen compounds. Yeast extract is added as a source of
Dehydrated Product U
vitamins and other cofactors. Differentiation of Salmonella
from other organisms that also grow on this medium is based 1. Suspend 59 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water.
-
on fermentation of xylose, lactose and sucrose, decarboxylation 2. Add 4.6 mL XLT4 Agar Supplement. Mix thoroughly. Z
of lysine and the production of hydrogen sulfide. Hydrogen 3. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
sulfide production is detected by the addition of ferric ions. pletely dissolve the powder. Avoid overheating. DO NOT
Sodium thiosulfate is added as a source of inorganic sulfur. AUTOCLAVE.
Sodium chloride maintains the osmotic balance of the medium. 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Agar is the solidifying agent. Phenol red is added as an indicator stable, typical control cultures.
of pH changes resulting from fermentation and decarboxylation
reactions. XLT4 Agar Supplement is added to inhibit growth Procedure
of non-Salmonella organisms. 1. Inoculate a suitable Salmonella enrichment broth (such as
Tetrithionate Broth) and incubate at 35C for 18-24 hours.
Formulae 2. Following enrichment, subculture onto XLT4 Agar. Streak
Difco XLT4 Agar Base for isolation.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter 3. Incubate plates aerobically at 35 2C. Examine for growth
Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................. 1.6 g after 18-24 and 48 hours incubation.
Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
L-Lysine ...................................................................... 5.0 g
Xylose ........................................................................ 3.75 g Expected Results
Lactose ....................................................................... 7.5 g Typical Salmonella colonies (H2S-positive) appear black or
Saccharose ................................................................. 7.5 g
Ferric Ammonium Citrate ........................................... 0.8 g
black-centered with a yellow periphery after 18-24 hours of
Sodium Thiosulfate .................................................... 6.8 g incubation. Upon continued incubation, the colonies become
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g entirely black or pink to red with black centers.
Agar ......................................................................... 18.0 g
Phenol Red ................................................................. 0.08 g
629
Section III
U-Z XLT4 Agar Base, cont.

Colonies of H2S-negative Salmonella strains appear pinkish- 3. Freshly inoculated plates and plates held over several days
yellow. may develop multicolored, metallic looking crystals/flecks
on the surface. These crystals/flecks do not interfere with
Most Citrobacter colonies that grow on this medium are yellow
the performance of the medium.
without evidence of blackening. Growth of Enterobacter
aerogenes and Escherichia coli is markedly inhibited; colonies
References
that do grow appear yellow without evidence of blackening. 1. Miller and Tate. 1990. The Maryland Poultryman April:2.
Growth of Proteus, Pseudomonas, Providencia, Alteromonas 2.
3.
Miller, Tate, Mallinson and Schemer. 1991. Poultry Science 70:2429.
Miller, Tate, Mallinson and Schemer. 1992. Poultry Science 71:398.
putrefaciens, Yersinia enterocolitica and Acinetobacter 4. Tate, Miller and Mallinson. 1992. J. Food Prot. 55:964.
5. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1998. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed., Food Safety and
calcoaceticus is markedly to completely inhibited on XLT4 Inspection Service, USDA, Washington, D.C.
6. Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). 1999. Manual of clinical microbiology, 7th ed.
Agar. Shigella species are partially inhibited and colonies ap- American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
7. Downes and Ito (ed.) 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of foods,
pear red. 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.

Limitations of the Procedure Availability

1. XLT4 Agar is intended for detecting and isolating Salmonella Difco XLT4 Agar Base
based on selectivity and colonial characteristics. Presumed USDA
Salmonella colonies must be confirmed by biochemical and/ Cat. No. 223420 Dehydrated 500 g
or immunological methods. Consult appropriate references Difco XLT4 Agar Supplement

for further information.5-7 USDA

2. Non-Salmonella strains that are not completely inhibited Cat. No. 235310 Bottle l00 mL
on this medium may be encountered and must be differen-
tiated from Salmonella. Consult appropriate references.5-7

Xanthine Agar
(See Nocardia Differentiation Media)

YM Agar YM Broth
Intended Use ents. Peptone is an additional source of carbon and provides
YM Agar and YM Broth are used for cultivating yeasts, molds nitrogen and amino acids. Dextrose provides carbon. Agar is
and other aciduric microorganisms. the solidifying agent.

Summary and Explanation Formulae

YM Agar and YM Broth (Yeast Mold Agar and Broth) are Difco YM Agar
prepared according to the formulae published by Wickerham.1-3 Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Wickerham suggested that YM Broth acidified to pH 3.0-4.0 Yeast Extract .............................................................. 3.0 g
Malt Extract ................................................................ 3.0 g
be used as an enrichment medium for yeasts from populations Peptone ..................................................................... 5.0 g
also containing bacteria and molds. Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 20.0 g
Media selectivity may be enhanced through acidification or Difco YM Broth
through addition of selective agents. YM Broth may be acidi- Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
fied prior to sterilization. YM Agar should be sterilized with- *Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

out pH adjustment and sterile acid added to the sterile molten

medium cooled to 45-50C. Acidified YM Agar should not be Directions for Preparation from
heated. Antibiotics may be aseptically added to the sterile me- Dehydrated Product
dia. Other fungistatic materials, such as sodium propionate 1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
and diphenyl may be added to YM Agar to eliminate molds Difco YM Agar 41 g;
and permit the enumeration of yeasts in mixed populations. Difco YM Broth 21 g.
Mix thoroughly.
Principles of the Procedure 2. Heat the agar medium with frequent agitation and boil for
Yeast extract is a source of trace elements, vitamins and amino 1 minute to completely dissolve the powder.
acids. Malt extract is a source of carbon, protein and nutri- 3. Autoclave the agar and broth media at 121C for 15 minutes.

630
 YPD Agar

4. To increase selectivity, acidify the medium to pH 3.0 to 4.0

User Quality Control
(by adding sterile 10% HCl, tartaric acid or 10% citric
Identity Specifications acid) or add antibiotics (penicillin 20 units per mL final
Difco YM Agar concentration or streptomycin 40 g per mL final concen-
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. tration) using aseptic technique. Acidified agar medium
Solution: 4.1% solution, soluble in purified water should not be reheated.
upon boiling. Solution is light to medium
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
amber, very slightly opalescent.
stable, typical control cultures.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal-
escent.
Reaction of 4.1% Procedure
Solution at 25C: pH 6.2 0.2 Inoculate YM Agar plates or YM Broth tubes with sample
Difco YM Broth
to evaluate for the presence of yeasts, molds, or aciduric
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. microorganisms. Incubate at 30 2C for 18-72 hours.
Solution: 2.1% solution, soluble in purified
To favor isolation of fermentative species, add a layer of
water. Solution is light to medium am-
ber, clear to very slightly opalescent. sterile paraffin oil 1 cm deep on the surface of the inoculated
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear to very broth. Incubate the culture until growth appears and then streak
slightly opalescent. At pH adjusted to onto YM Agar to obtain isolated yeast colonies. To isolate
3.0-4.0, medium becomes slightly fermentative and oxidative strains, place acidified inoculated
opalescent.
YM Broth on a rotary shaker for 1 or 2 days. This favors yeast
Reaction of 2.1%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.2 0.2 recovery while preventing the sporulation of molds.

Cultural Response Expected Results

Difco YM Agar or YM Broth Examine the plates or tubes for growth. Record YM Agar
Prepare two sets of agar plates or broth tubes (one set pH 6.2, one set results as colony-forming units (CFU) per volume of sample.
adjusted to pH 3.0-4.0) per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Record YM Broth results as growth or no growth.
30 2C for 18-72 hours.
INOCULUM RECOVERY RECOVERY References
ORGANISM ATCC CFU pH 3.0-4.0 pH 6.2 1. Wickerham. 1939. J. Tropical Med. Hyg. 42:176.
2. U. S. Department of Agriculture. 1951. Tech. Bull. No. 1029.
Aspergillus niger 16404 102-103 Good Good 3. Jong and Edwards. 1991. American Type Culture Collection catalog of filamentous fungi, 18th ed.
Candida albicans 10231 102-103 Good Good American Type Culture Collection, Rockville, Md.
Escherichia coli 25922 102-3102 Marked to Good
complete Availability
inhibition
Difco YM Agar
Lactobacillus rhamnosus 7469 102-3102 Poor to fair Good
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 102-103 Good Good
AOAC COMPF
U
Cat. No. 271210
Difco YM Broth
Dehydrated 500 g
-
Cat. No. 271120 Dehydrated 500 g Z
271110 Dehydrated 10 kg

YPD Agar YPD Broth

Intended Use so that during exponential or log-phase growth, the cells
YPD Agar and YPD Broth are used for maintaining and propa- divide every 90 minutes.1
gating yeasts in molecular microbiology procedures.
Principles of the Procedure
Summary and Explanation YPD Agar and YPD Broth contain peptone as a source of
General methods in yeast genetics specify using yeast extract- carbon, nitrogen, vitamins and minerals. Yeast extract supplies
peptone-dextrose (YPD) medium for cultivating Saccharomyces B-complex vitamins which stimulate bacterial growth. Dextrose
cerevisiae and other yeasts.1 Yeasts grow well on a minimal is the carbohydrate source. YPD Agar contains agar as the
medium containing only dextrose and salts. The addition of solidifying agent.
protein and yeast cell extract hydrolysates allows faster growth

631
Section III
U-Z YPD Agar, cont.

User Quality Control Formulae

Difco YPD Agar
Identity Specifications Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Difco YPD Agar Yeast Extract ............................................................ 10.0 g
Peptone ................................................................... 20.0 g
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. Dextrose ................................................................... 20.0 g
Solution: 6.5% solution, soluble in purified Agar ......................................................................... 15.0 g
water upon boiling. Solution is light Difco YPD Broth
to medium amber, very slightly to
Consists of the same ingredients without the agar.
slightly opalescent.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, slightly opal-
escent. Directions for Preparation from
Reaction of 6.5%
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5 0.2
Dehydrated Product
1. Suspend the powder in 1 L of purified water:
Difco YPD Broth

Difco YPD Agar 65 g;

Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
Difco YPD Broth 50 g.
Solution: 5.0% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light to medium Mix thoroughly.
amber, clear to very slightly opalescent. 2. Heat the agar medium with frequent agitation and boil for
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear to very 1 minute to completely dissolve the powder.
slightly opalescent.
3. Autoclave the agar and broth media at 121C for 15 min-
Reaction of 5.0%
utes.
Solution at 25C: pH 6.5 0.2
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Cultural Response stable, typical control cultures.
Difco YPD Agar or YPD Broth
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at Procedure
25 2C for 42-48 hours (broth) or 48 hours (agar up to 72 hours if See appropriate references for specific procedures.
necessary).
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY Expected Results
Kluyveromyces lactis 8563 102-103 Good Growth of colonies on the agar or turbidity in the broth.
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 18790 102-103 Good
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9080 102-103 Good Reference
1. Ausubel, Brent, Kingston, Moore, Seidman, Smith and Struhl. 1994. Current protocols in molecular
biology, Current Protocols, Brooklyn, N.Y.

Availability
Difco YPD Agar
Cat. No. 242720 Dehydrated 500 g
242710 Dehydrated 2 kg
Difco YPD Broth
Cat. No. 242820 Dehydrated 500 g
242810 Dehydrated 2 kg

2YT Medium
Intended Use acids, nucleotide precursors, vitamins and other metabolites
2YT Medium is used for cultivating recombinant strains of that the cell would otherwise have to synthesize.2
Escherichia coli.
Principles of the Procedure
Summary and Explanation Peptone and yeast extract provide the necessary nutrients and
2YT (Yeast Extract Tryptone) Medium is a nutritionally rich cofactors required for excellent growth of E. coli. Sodium chlo-
growth medium designed for growth of recombinant strains ride is included to provide a suitable osmotic environment.
of Escherichia coli. This medium is also used for propagation
of M13 bacteriophage for sequencing and phage display re- Formula
search.1-3 The components of 2YT Medium provide nitro- Difco 2YT Medium
gen and growth factors that allow bacteriophage to reproduce Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Pancreatic Digest of Casein ...................................... 16.0 g
in large quantities without exhausting the host. E. coli grows Yeast Extract ............................................................ 10.0 g
more rapidly in this rich medium because it provides amino Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 5.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.

632
 Yeast Extract

Directions for Preparation from 3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.

Dehydrated Product 4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
1. Suspend 31 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix stable, typical control cultures.
thoroughly.
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- Procedure
pletely dissolve the powder. Consult appropriate references for recommended test proce-
dures.1-3
User Quality Control Expected Results
Identity Specifications Growth is evident in the form of turbidity.
Difco 2YT Medium
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homogeneous. References
Solution: 3.1% solution, soluble in purified 1. Sambrook, Fritsch and Maniatis. 1989. Molecular cloning: a laboratory manual, 2nd ed. Cold
Spring Harbor Laboratory, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.
water. Solution is light to medium 2. Ausubel, Brent, Kingston, Moore, Seidman, Smith and Struhl. 1994. Current protocols in molecu-
amber, clear. lar biology, vol 1. Current Protocols, New York, N.Y.
3. Davis, Dibner and Battey. 1986. Basic methods in molecular biology. Elsevier, New York, N.Y.
Prepared Appearance: Light to medium amber, clear.
Reaction of 3.1% Availability
Solution at 25C: pH 7.0 0.2
Difco 2YT Medium
Cultural Response Cat. No. 244020 Dehydrated 500 g
244010 Dehydrated 2 kg
Difco 2YT Medium

292711 Dehydrated, LitrePak 20 1L
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate and incubate at
35 2C for 18-24 hours.
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Escherichia coli (C600) 23724 102-3102 Good

Bacto Yeast Extract Yeast Extract, UF

Yeast Extract, LD Bacto Yeast Extract, Technical
Yeast Extract
Intended Use high content of naturally occurring B vitamins, it is an ideal U
Bacto Yeast Extract, Yeast Extract, UF (ultra-filtered), Yeast substitute for fetal bovine serum. It has an endotoxin level of -
Extract, LD, Bacto Yeast Extract, Technical and Yeast Extract
are used in preparing microbiological culture media.
less than or equal to 500 EU/g.
Z
Yeast Extract, LD was created to eliminate the problem of dust
inhalation when handling large quantities of yeast extract. Yeast
Summary and Explanation Extract, Yeast Extract, UF and Yeast Extract, LD are processed
Bacto Yeast Extract, Yeast Extract, UF, Yeast Extract, LD, Bacto from the same culture of Saccharomyces.
Yeast Extract, Technical and Yeast Extract are concentrates of
the water-soluble portion of Saccharomyces cerevisiae cells that Bacto Yeast Extract, Technical and Yeast Extract were developed to
have been autolyzed. The autolysis is carefully controlled to provide products priced for the biotechnology/pharmaceutical
preserve the naturally occurring B-complex vitamins. Yeast market with acceptable clarity and growth promoting char-
extract is considered a non-animal product and is used exten- acteristics.
sively for many non-animal formulations for bacterial, fungal, Media formulations containing yeast extract are specified in
mammalian and insect cell culture. standard methods for various applications.2-8
Bacto Yeast Extract has been considered one of the most
complete and versatile of the fermentation bionutrients avail- Principles of the Procedure
able. It has been a valuable ingredient for the microbiological Bacto Yeast Extract, Yeast Extract, UF, Yeast Extract, LD, Bacto
assay of vitamins. Yeast extract is also of value in the assay Yeast Extract, Technical and Yeast Extract are prepared by grow-
of antibiotics. B factor, a growth substance necessary for the ing bakers yeast, Saccharomyces sp., in a carbohydrate-rich plant
production of rifampin in a Nocardia sp., can be isolated from medium. The yeast is harvested, washed and resuspended
yeast extract.1 in water, where it undergoes autolysis, or self-digestion. Yeast
extract is the total soluble portion of this autolytic action. The
Yeast Extract, UF is ultra-filtered and specifically designed for autolytic activity is stopped by a heating step. The resulting
tissue culture applications. With its low endotoxin level and
633
Section III
U-Z Yeast Extract, cont.

User Quality Control

NOTE: Differences in the Identity Specifications and Cultural Response testing for media offered as both Difco and BBL brands may reflect differences
in the development and testing of media for industrial and clinical applications, per the referenced publications.

Identity Specifications Identity Specifications

Bacto Yeast Extract BBL Yeast Extract
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Dehydrated Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, fine,
neous. homogeneous, may contain up to a
Solution: 1.0% and 2.0% solutions, soluble in small amount of minute light to dark,
purified water. 1.0% solution is light tan particles.
to medium amber, clear, may have a Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified
very slight precipitate. 2.0% solution water. Solution is light to dark, yellow
is medium amber, clear, may have a to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
very slight precipitate. Reaction of 2.0%
Reaction of 1.0% Solution at 25C: pH 5.4-7.2
Solution at 25C: pH 6.4-6.8
Difco Yeast Extract, UF Cultural Response
Dehydrated Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, fine, BBL Yeast Extract
homogeneous, may contain up to a Prepare a sterile solution containing 10.0 g of Yeast Extract, 2.5 g of
small amount of minute light to dark sodium chloride and 6.5 g of agar in 500 mL of purified water. Adjust
tan particles. the final pH to 7.2-7.5. Inoculate and incubate plates at 35 2C for
Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified 3 days (incubate streptococci with 3-5% CO2; incubate C. sporogenes
water. Solution is light to dark, yel- anaerobically).
low to tan, clear to slightly hazy. ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
Reaction of 2.0% Candida albicans 10231 103-104 Good
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8-7.2
Clostridium sporogenes 11437 103-104 Good
Difco Yeast Extract, LD Escherichia coli 25922 103-104 Good
Dehydrated Appearance: Light to medium, yellow to tan, fine, Micrococcus luteus 9341 103-104 Good
homogeneous, may contain up to a Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 103-104 Good
small amount of minute light to dark Streptococcus pyogenes 49117 104-105 Good
tan particles.
Solution: 2.0% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light to dark, yel-
low to tan, clear to slightly hazy.
yeast extract is then filtered to produce a clear product and
Reaction of 2.0%
subsequently made into a powder by a spray-drying process.
Solution at 25C: pH 6.8-7.2 Bacto Yeast Extract, Yeast Extract, UF, Yeast Extract, LD, Bacto
Bacto Yeast Extract, Technical Yeast Extract, Technical and Yeast Extract provide vitamins,
Dehydrated Appearance: Light to medium beige, free-flowing, nitrogen, amino acids and carbon in microbiological culture
homogeneous.
media.
Solution: 1.0% solution, soluble in purified
water. Solution is light to medium
amber, clear to very slightly opalescent. Typical Analysis
Refer to Product Tables in the Reference Guide section of this
Cultural Response manual.
Bacto Yeast Extract
Prepare a solution containing 1% Bacto Yeast Extract and 0.5% Directions for Preparation from
sodium chloride. Adjust the pH to 7.2 0.2 using dilute NaOH.
Dispense into tubes and autoclave. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C Dehydrated Product
for 18-48 hours. Refer to the final concentration of Bacto Yeast Extract, Yeast
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY Extract, UF, Yeast Extract, LD, Bacto Yeast Extract, Technical
Neisseria meningitidis 13090 30-300 Fair to good and Yeast Extract in the formula of the medium being pre-
Staphylococcus aureus 25923 30-300 Good pared. Add appropriate product as required.
Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 30-300 Good

Bacto Yeast Extract, Technical Procedure

Prepare a solution containing 2% Bacto Yeast Extract, Technical and See appropriate references for specific procedures using Bacto
0.5% sodium chloride. Adjust the pH to 7.2-7.4 using dilute NaOH. Yeast Extract, Yeast Extract, UF, Yeast Extract, LD, Bacto Yeast
Dispense into tubes and autoclave. Inoculate and incubate at 35 2C
for 18-48 hours.
Extract, Technical and Yeast Extract.

ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY

Expected Results
Escherichia coli 25922 30-300 Good Refer to appropriate references and procedures for results.
Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 30-300 Good

634
 Yeast Extract Glucose Agar

References Difco Yeast Extract, UF

1. Kawaguchi, Asahi, Satoh, Uozumi and Beppu. 1984. J. Antibiot. 37:1587. Cat. No. 210929 Dehydrated 500 g
2. Horowitz (ed.). 2000. Official methods of analysis of AOAC International, 17th ed. AOAC 210934 Dehydrated 10 kg
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
3. U.S. Food and Drug Administration. 1995. Bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed. AOAC Difco Yeast Extract, LD
International, Gaithersburg, Md.
4. Downes and Ito (ed.). 2001. Compendium of methods for the microbiological examination of Cat. No. 210933 Dehydrated 500 g
foods, 4th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. 210941 Dehydrated 10 kg
5. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA). 2000. Improved enumeration methods for the
recreational water quality indicators: Enterococci and Escherichia coli. EPA-821/R-97/004. Office
of Water, Washington, D.C.
Bacto Yeast Extract, Technical
6. Marshall (ed.). 1993. Standard methods for the examination of dairy products, 16th ed. American Cat. No. 288620 Dehydrated 500 g
Public Health Association, Washington, D.C. 288610 Dehydrated 10 kg
7. Clesceri, Greenberg and Eaton (ed.). 1998. Standard methods for the examination of water and
wastewater, 20th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
8. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 1998. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food Safety
BBL Yeast Extract
and Inspection Service, USDA, Washington, D.C. Cat. No. 211929 Dehydrated 454 g
211930 Dehydrated 5 lb (2.3 kg)
Availability 211931 Dehydrated 25 lb (11.3 kg)
Bacto Yeast Extract
AOAC BAM COMPF EPA SMD SMWW USDA
Cat. No. 212750 Dehydrated 500 g
212720 Dehydrated 2 kg
212730 Dehydrated 10 kg

Yeast Extract Glucose Chloramphenicol Agar

Intended Use fungal cells, which are sensitive to an acid environment, and
Yeast Extract Glucose Chloramphenicol Agar is a selective agar in less interference from precipitated food particles during the
recommended by the International Dairy Federation1,2 for enu- counting.3-7
merating yeasts and molds in milk and milk products. Yeast Extract Glucose Chloramphenicol Agar is a nutrient
medium that inhibits the growth of organisms other than yeasts
Summary and Explanation and molds due to the presence of chloramphenicol. When a
The antibiotic method for enumerating yeasts and molds in sample contains predominantly yeasts and/or injured yeasts,
dairy products has become the method of choice, replacing the use of Yeast Extract Glucose Chloramphenicol Agar may
the traditional acidified method.2 The use of antibiotics for offer some advantage.2 After incubation at 25C, colonies are
suppressing bacteria results in better recovery of injured counted and yeast colonies are distinguished from molds by
colony morphology.
User Quality Control
Principles of the Procedure U
Identity Specifications
Yeast extract provides basic nutrients. Glucose is a carbon -
Difco Yeast Extract Glucose Chloramphenicol Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Beige, free-flowing, homogeneous.
energy source. Chloramphenicol inhibits bacterial growth. Agar Z
is the solidifying agent.
Solution: 3.81% solution, soluble in purified
water upon boiling. Solution is light
amber, very slightly to slightly opales- Formula
cent. Difco Yeast Extract Glucose Chloramphenicol Agar
Prepared Appearance: Light amber, slightly opalescent. Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Reaction of 3.81% Yeast Extract .............................................................. 5.0 g
Solution at 25C: pH 6.6 0.2 Glucose .................................................................... 20.0 g
Chloramphenicol ........................................................ 0.1 g
Cultural Response Agar ......................................................................... 13.0 g
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria.
Difco Yeast Extract Glucose Chloramphenicol Agar
Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate by the pour plate Directions for Preparation from
technique and incubate at 25 2C for up to 4 days.
Dehydrated Product
ORGANISM ATCC INOCULUM CFU RECOVERY
1. Suspend 38.1 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix
Aspergillus niger 16404 30-300 Good
thoroughly.
Candida albicans 10231 30-300 Good
Escherichia coli 25922 103-2103 Inhibition 2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com-
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 30-300 Good pletely dissolve the powder.
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes.
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
stable, typical control cultures.

635
Section III
U-Z Yeast Extract Glucose Agar, cont.

Procedure 4. Pipette 1 mL of each dilution into two Petri dishes.

1. Prepare initial sample dilutions using 10 g or 10 mL of sample 5. Pour 10 mL of sterile molten agar (cooled to 45C) into
in 90 mL of diluent, as listed below: each dish. Mix thoroughly.
SAMPLE 10 g or 10 mL DILUENT 90 mL PREPARATION 6. Incubate at 25C for 4 days.
Milk 1/4-strength Ringers solution Mix.
Liquid milk product Expected Results
Dried Milk 1/4-strength Ringers solution Shake at 47C. 1. Select plates containing 10-300 colonies and count the colo-
Whey powder nies. Distinguish yeasts from molds by colony morphol-
Buttermilk powder ogy.
Lactose
2. Express results as yeasts and molds per gram or per
Casein 2% dipotassium phosphate solution Shake at 47C.
milliliter.
Cheese 2% sodium citrate solution Shake at 47C.
Butter 1/4-strength Ringers solution Shake at 47C. References
Edible ice 1. International Dairy Federation. Standard Method ISO/DIS 6611.
2. Frank, Christen and Bullerman. 1993. In Marshall (ed.), Standard methods for the examination of
Custard dessert 1/4-strength Ringers solution Shake. dairy products, 16th ed. American Public Health Association, Washington, D.C.
3. Beuchat. 1979. J. Food Prot. 42:427.
Fermented milk 4. Cooke and Brazis. 1968. Mycopathol. Mycol. Appl. 35:281.
Yogurt 5. Koburger. 1970. J. Milk Food Technol. 33:433.
6. Koburger. 1973. J. Milk Food Technol. 36:434.
7. Overcase and Weakley. 1969. J. Milk Food Technol. 32:442.
2. Add 10 mL from the initial dilution prepared above (#1) to
90 mL of 1/4-strength Ringers solution. One milliliter Availability
(1 mL) of this dilution corresponds to 0.01 g/mL of sample. Difco Yeast Extract Glucose Chloramphenicol Agar
3. Prepare further dilutions by adding 10 mL of the 0.01 g/mL ISO SMD
dilution above (#2) to 90 mL of diluent. Cat. No. 219001 Dehydrated 500 g

Yeast Extract Phosphate (YEP) Agar

Intended Use Histoplasma and Blastomyces spp. grow more slowly than
Yeast Extract Phosphate (YEP) Agar is used in qualitative pro- bacteria or yeasts they are probably less affected by the tran-
cedures for the isolation of dimorphic pathogenic fungi from sient high pH produced by NH4OH.
clinical specimens. The plates are deep-filled to reduce the
effects of drying during prolonged incubation. Procedure
Use standard procedures to obtain isolated colonies from speci-
Summary and Explanation mens. Add one drop of concentrated NH4OH (ammonia) at
Smith and Goodman developed YEP Agar for the primary re- the edge of the inoculated medium and allow the medium to
covery of Blastomyces dermatitidis and Histoplasma sit for 20 minutes before inverting.
capsulatum from contaminated specimens.1 The medium is Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar side up) at
designed to be used with ammonium hydroxide, a selective 22-25C.
agent that improves the recovery of dimorphic pathogens by
inhibiting bacteria, yeasts and saprophytic fungi.2,3 Expected Results
All cultures should be examined for growth at least weekly.
Principles of the Procedure Cultures should be held for 4-6 weeks before reporting as
Yeast extract primarily supplies B-complex vitamins, but also negative.
provides some amino acids and carbohydrates to support
fungal growth. A phosphate buffer maintains a slightly acidic References
pH. Chloramphenicol is a broad spectrum antibiotic which 1. Smith and Goodman. 1974. Am. J. Clin. Pathol. 62:276.
2. Haley and Callaway. 1978. Laboratory methods in medical mycology. HEW Publication No.
inhibits a wide range of gram-positive and gram-negative (CDC) 78-8361. Center for Disease Control, Atlanta, Ga.
3. Larone, Mitchell and Walsh. 1999. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.), Manual of
bacteria. A drop of ammonium hydroxide (NH4OH) added clinical microbiology, 7th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
to the surface of the inoculated medium inhibits bacteria, yeasts
and saprophytic fungi that may be contained in clinical speci- Availability
mens without affecting the growth of Blastomyces or Histo- BBL Yeast Extract Phosphate (YEP) Agar
plasma spp. Phenol red changes the color of the medium from Cat. No. 297886 Prepared Plates (Deep Fill) Pkg. of 10*
*Store at 2-8C.
pale tan to pink to show that the NH4OH has been applied to
the agar surface. It also shows the loss of alkalinity as
the ammonia volatilizes and the pH falls below 7.0. Since

636
 Yeast Fermentation Broth

Yeast Fermentation Broth Base with Durham Tube

Yeast Fermentation Broth with Carbohydrates and
Durham Tube
Intended Use Air bubbles should be removed from the Durham tube prior
Yeast Fermentation Broth media are used for identification of to inoculation by inverting the broth tube and gently tapping
yeasts based on the fermentation of specific carbohydrates; the side to dislodge the bubble. Return the broth tube to the
e.g., dextrose, galactose, lactose, maltose, sucrose, trehalose upright position, taking care to avoid reintroducing air into
and xylose.1 A Durham tube is provided to detect the gas the Durham tube.
produced during fermentation. Using a sterile cotton swab, remove growth from the subcul-
ture and suspend it in sterile water to a density approximately
Summary and Explanation equal to that of a McFarland no. 1 standard. Inoculate the
Yeast Fermentation Broth is a modification of a medium de- medium with one drop of the standardized culture using a sterile
veloped by Wickerham for the determination of carbohydrate 1 mL pipette.
fermentation by yeasts.2 In this test, tubes of media, each con-
taining a specific carbohydrate, are inoculated with a yeast Incubate the tubes at 25C and examine at 5, 7, 10 and 14
isolate. If the carbohydrate is fermented by the yeast, the color days for growth and fermentation (gas production).
of the medium changes from purple to yellow, due to the for-
mation of acids, and gas is produced. Expected Results
Growth is indicated by turbidity in the broth medium. Fer-
In this modification of the Wickerham formula, bromcresol mentation of the carbohydrate is indicated by accumulation
purple is substituted for bromthymol blue. of gas in the Durham tube and the change of the indicator to
yellow.
Principles of the Procedure
Yeast Fermentation Broth Base consists of a peptone medium References
supplemented with yeast extract to supply the B complex vita- 1. Haley and Callaway. 1978. Laboratory methods in medical mycology, 4th ed. USDHEW Publica-
tion No. (CDC) 78-8361. CDC, Atlanta, Ga.
mins necessary to support growth. Specific carbohydrates are 2. Warren and Shadomy. 1991. In Balows, Hausler, Herrmann, Isenberg and Shadomy (ed.), Manual
of clinical microbiology, 5th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
added to the basal medium in a concentration of 1%.
When the medium is inoculated with a yeast that is able to Availability
ferment the carbohydrate present, acids or acids and gas are
produced. The acids lower the pH of the medium and change
BBL Yeast Fermentation Broth Base with Durham Tube
U
the indicator from purple to yellow. Gas production is the
Cat. No. 297299 Prepared Tubes (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
BBL Yeast Fermentation Broth with Carbohydrates
-
most reliable evidence of the fermentation of carbohydrates and Durham Tube Z
by yeasts because some yeasts can assimilate certain carbohy- Cat. No. 297302 Prepared Tubes with Dextrose
(K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
drates without fermenting them.2 Gas production is detected 297407 Prepared Tubes with Galactose
by the displacement of the medium in the Durham tube, leav- (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
ing a clear area (bubble) in the tube. 297406 Prepared Tubes with Lactose
(K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
The pattern of fermentation of a battery of carbohydrates is 297300 Prepared Tubes with Maltose
characteristic of a given species or group of yeast species and (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
297301 Prepared Tubes with Sucrose
may be used for their classification or identification. (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
297337 Prepared Tubes with Trehalose
Procedure (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
297449 Prepared Tubes with Xylose
Subculture the isolate to be identified onto a Sabouraud Dex- (K Tubes) Pkg. of 10*
trose Agar slant or Mycophil Agar slant. *Store at 2-8C.

637
Section III
U-Z Yeast Media

Yeast Media
Yeast Morphology Agar Yeast Carbon Base Yeast
Nitrogen Base Yeast Nitrogen Agar Yeast Nitrogen
Base w/o Amino Acids Yeast Nitrogen Base w/o
Amino Acids and Ammonium Sulfate
Intended Use Alternate methods of applying the carbohydrates to the agar
Yeast Morphology Agar is used for classifying yeasts based on surface have been used. The dry carbohydrates used by
colonial characteristics and cell morphology. Beijerinck may be replaced with filter-paper discs impregnated
with carbohydrates (Taxo carbohydrate discs), by placing
Yeast Carbon Base is used for classifying yeasts based on
drops of carbohydrate solution onto the agar, or by placing
nitrogen assimilation.
the carbon sources in wells cut in the agar surface.9
Yeast Nitrogen Base and Yeast Nitrogen Agar are used for
Yeast Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids, which lacks the
classifying yeasts based on carbon assimilation.
amino acids histidine, methionine and tryptophan, and Yeast
Yeast Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids is used for classify- Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids and Ammonium Sulfate,
ing yeasts based on amino acid and carbohydrate requirements. which lacks amino acids and ammonium sulfate, are prepared
Yeast Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids and Ammonium according to Guenters10 modification of Wickerhams Yeast
Sulfate is used for classifying yeasts based on carbon and Nitrogen Base formulation.
nitrogen requirements. These media are included in many applications for the study
of yeasts in molecular genetics.11,12
Summary and Explanation
Yeasts are unicellular, eukaryotic, budding cells that are generally Principles of the Procedure
round-to-oval or elongate in shape.1 They multiply principally by Yeast Morphology Agar contains all essential nutrients and
the production of blastoconidia (buds).1 Yeast colonies are moist vitamins necessary for the cultivation of yeasts, including a
and creamy or glabrous to membranous in texture.1 Yeasts are source of carbohydrate.
considered opportunistic pathogens.1
Yeast Carbon Base contains all essential nutrients and vita-
The yeast media cited are prepared according to the formulas mins necessary for the cultivation of yeasts except a source of
of Wickerham.27 nitrogen.
Yeast Carbon Base tests the ability of yeasts to assimilate Yeast Nitrogen Base contains all essential nutrients and vita-
nitrogen by the addition of various nitrogen sources. The mins necessary for the cultivation of yeasts except a source of
inclusion of vitamins aids in the utilization of nitrogen-con- carbohydrate.
taining compounds by certain yeasts which cannot assimilate
Prepared plated Yeast Nitrogen Agar is composed of a defined
these compounds in the absence of vitamins.
set of nutrients, including a nitrogen source, amino acids, min-
Yeast Nitrogen Base is a suitable medium for studying strains erals and vitamins required for the growth of yeasts, but with-
of yeast that require certain vitamins. out any energy source. This medium is used to determine the
Prepared plated Yeast Nitrogen Agar, which is Yeast Nitrogen ability of a yeast species to utilize a carbohydrate that is added
Base plus 13.0 g/L of agar, is prepared according to Wickerham to the medium as the sole source of carbon.9
and Burtons formulation for use in an auxanographic tech- Yeast Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids contains all essen-
nique for determining patterns of carbohydrate assimilation.7 tial vitamins and inorganic salts necessary for the cultivation
In the auxanographic technique originally devised by Beijerinck, of yeasts except histidine, methionine, tryptophan and a source
small amounts of dry carbohydrates are placed on the surface of carbohydrate.
of a heavily seeded synthetic agar medium.8 Growth in the
Yeast Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids and Ammonium
area surrounding a carbohydrate indicates that the yeast
Sulfate contains all essential nutrients and vitamins necessary
assimilated that sugar as a carbon source. The pattern of
for the cultivation of yeasts except amino acids and a source
utilized carbohydrates is an auxanogram.
of nitrogen and carbohydrate.

638
 Yeast Media, cont.

User Quality Control

Identity Specifications Cultural Response
Difco Yeast Morphology Agar Difco Yeast Morphology Agar
Dehydrated Appearance: Light beige, free-flowing, homoge- Prepare the medium per label directions. Inoculate using the pour plate
neous. technique and incubate at 25-30C for 18-48 hours. Also, inoculate by
Solution: 3.5% solution, soluble in purified the Dolman technique (streak and point) and add coverslips. Incubate
water upon boiling. Solution is very at 25-30C for 6-7 days and examine microscopically for hyphae.
light amber, slightly opalescent. DOLMAN
Prepared Appearance: Very light amber, slightly opalescent ORGANISM ATCC RECOVERY PLATE TEST
without significant precipitate. Kloeckera apiculata 9774 Good
Reaction of 3.5% Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9080 Good
Solution at 25C: pH 5.6 0.2 Candida albicans 10231 Good Hyphae
Difco Yeast Carbon Base

Difco Yeast Carbon Base (with and without 5%
Dehydrated Appearance: Off-white, free-flowing, homoge- ammonium sulfate) Difco Yeast Nitrogen Base
neous. (with and without 5% dextrose) Difco Yeast
Solution: 1.17% (single-strength) and 11.7% Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids (with and
(10) solution, soluble in purified without 5% dextrose, 0.02% DL-methionine, 0.02%
water with slight warming. Single- DL-tryptophan and 0.01% L-histidine) Difco Yeast
strength solution is colorless to very Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids and Ammonium
light amber, clear. Sulfate (with and without 5% dextrose, 5%
Prepared Appearance: Colorless to very light amber, clear. ammonium sulfate, 0.02% DL-methionine, 0.02%
Reaction of 1.17% DL-tryptophan and 0.01% L-histidine)
Solution at 25C: pH 5.5 0.2 Prepare the medium per label directions with and without the supple-
ments indicated above. Add 1 mL of the filter-sterilized solution to
Difco Yeast Nitrogen Base

9 mL of sterile water, inoculate and incubate at 25-30C for 2-5 days.
Dehydrated Appearance: Off-white, free-flowing, homoge-
neous. GROWTH WITHOUT GROWTH WITH
ORGANISM ATCC SUPPLEMENT(S) SUPPLEMENT(S)
Solution: 0.67% (single strength) and 6.7%
(10) solution, soluble in purified Kloeckera apiculata 9774 None to poor Good
water with agitation. Single-strength Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9080 None to poor Good
solution is almost colorless and clear;
10 solution is yellow and clear. Uninoculated Candida albicans
Plate ATCC 10231
Prepared Appearance: Colorless, clear.
Reaction of 0.67%
Solution at 25C: pH 5.4 0.2
Difco Yeast Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids

Dehydrated Appearance: Off-white, free-flowing, homoge- U

Solution:
neous.
0.67% (single strength) or 6.7%
-
(10) solution, soluble in purified
water with agitation. Single-strength
Z
solution is colorless to very pale yel-
low and clear; 10 solution is yellow
and clear.
Prepared Appearance: Colorless, clear.
Reaction of 0.67%
Solution at 25C: pH 5.4 0.2
Difco Yeast Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids

and Ammonium Sulfate

Dehydrated Appearance: Light yellowish-beige, free-flowing,
homogeneous.
Solution: 0.17% (single-strength) and 1.7%
(10) solution, soluble in purified
water. Single-strength solution is col- Saccharomyces
cerevisiae
orless to very pale yellow and clear; ATCC 9080
10 solution is yellow and clear.
Prepared Appearance: Colorless, clear.
Reaction of 0.17%
Solution at 25C: pH 4.5 0.2

639
Section III
U-Z Yeast Media, cont.

Formulae Difco Yeast Nitrogen Base

Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Difco Yeast Morphology Agar

Approximate Formula* Per Liter Nitrogen Source

Ammonium Sulfate .................................................... 5.0 g
Nitrogen Sources
Ammonium Sulfate .................................................... 3.5 g Amino Acids
Asparagine ................................................................. 1.5 g L-Histidine Monohydrochloride ................................ 10.0 mg
LD-Methionine ......................................................... 20.0 mg
Carbon Source LD-Tryptophan ......................................................... 20.0 mg
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g
Vitamins
Amino Acids Biotin ......................................................................... 2.0 g
L-Histidine Monohydrochloride ................................ 10.0 mg Calcium Pantothenate ............................................ 400.0 g
LD-Methionine ......................................................... 20.0 mg Folic Acid ................................................................... 2.0 g
LD-Tryptophan ......................................................... 20.0 mg Inositol ................................................................ 2,000.0 g
Vitamins Niacin ..................................................................... 400.0 g
Biotin ......................................................................... 2.0 g p-Aminobenzoic Acid ............................................. 200.0 g
Calcium Pantothenate ............................................ 400.0 g Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ........................................ 400.0 g
Folic Acid ................................................................... 2.0 g Riboflavin ............................................................... 200.0 g
Inositol ................................................................ 2,000.0 g Thiamine Hydrochloride ......................................... 400.0 g
Niacin ..................................................................... 400.0 g Compounds Supplying Trace Elements
p-Aminobenzoic Acid ............................................. 200.0 g Boric Acid ............................................................... 500.0 g
Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ........................................ 400.0 g Copper Sulfate ......................................................... 40.0 g
Riboflavin ............................................................... 200.0 g Potassium Iodide .................................................... 100.0 g
Thiamine Hydrochloride ......................................... 400.0 g Ferric Chloride ........................................................ 200.0 g
Compounds Supplying Trace Elements Manganese Sulfate ................................................ 400.0 g
Boric Acid ............................................................... 500.0 g Sodium Molybdate ................................................. 200.0 g
Copper Sulfate ......................................................... 40.0 g Zinc Sulfate ............................................................ 400.0 g
Potassium Iodide .................................................... 100.0 g Salts
Ferric Chloride ........................................................ 200.0 g Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
Manganese Sulfate ................................................ 400.0 g Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.5 g
Sodium Molybdate ................................................. 200.0 g Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 0.1 g
Zinc Sulfate ............................................................ 400.0 g Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.1 g
Salts
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g Difco Yeast Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.5 g Approximate Formula* Per Liter
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 0.1 g Nitrogen Source
Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.1 g Ammonium Sulfate .................................................... 5.0 g
Agar ......................................................................... 18.0 g Vitamins
Difco Yeast Carbon Base Biotin ......................................................................... 2.0 g
Approximate Formula* Per Liter Calcium Pantothenate ............................................ 400.0 g
Folic Acid ................................................................... 2.0 g
Carbon Source Inositol ................................................................ 2,000.0 g
Dextrose ................................................................... 10.0 g Niacin ..................................................................... 400.0 g
Amino Acids p-Aminobenzoic Acid ............................................. 200.0 g
L-Histidine Monohydrochloride .................................. 1.0 mg Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ........................................ 400.0 g
LD-Methionine ........................................................... 2.0 mg Riboflavin ............................................................... 200.0 g
LD-Tryptophan ........................................................... 2.0 mg Thiamine Hydrochloride ......................................... 400.0 g
Vitamins Compounds Supplying Trace Elements
Biotin ......................................................................... 2.0 g Boric Acid ............................................................... 500.0 g
Calcium Pantothenate ............................................ 400.0 g Copper Sulfate ......................................................... 40.0 g
Folic Acid ................................................................... 2.0 g Potassium Iodide .................................................... 100.0 g
Inositol ................................................................ 2,000.0 g Ferric Chloride ........................................................ 200.0 g
Niacin ..................................................................... 400.0 g Manganese Sulfate ................................................ 400.0 g
p-Aminobenzoic Acid ............................................. 200.0 g Sodium Molybdate ................................................. 200.0 g
Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ........................................ 400.0 g Zinc Sulfate ............................................................ 400.0 g
Riboflavin ............................................................... 200.0 g Salts
Thiamine Hydrochloride ......................................... 400.0 g Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
Compounds Supplying Trace Elements Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.5 g
Boric Acid ............................................................... 500.0 g Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 0.1 g
Copper Sulfate ......................................................... 40.0 g Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.1 g
Potassium Iodide .................................................... 100.0 g
Ferric Chloride ........................................................ 200.0 g
Manganese Sulfate ................................................ 400.0 g
Sodium Molybdate ................................................. 200.0 g
Zinc Sulfate ............................................................ 400.0 g
Salts
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.5 g
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 0.1 g
Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.1 g

640
 Yeast Media, cont.

Difco Yeast Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids and 4. Prepare the final medium by aseptically pipetting 0.5 mL of
Ammonium Sulfate the 10 solution into 4.5 mL of purified water. Mix well.
Approximate Formula* Per Liter
5. Test samples of the finished product for performance using
Vitamins
Biotin ......................................................................... 2.0 g stable, typical control cultures.
Calcium Pantothenate ............................................ 400.0 g
Folic Acid ................................................................... 2.0 g Procedure
Inositol ................................................................ 2,000.0 g
Difco Yeast Morphology Agar
Niacin ..................................................................... 400.0 g
p-Aminobenzoic Acid ............................................. 200.0 g Inoculate plates using the Dolman technique. This is an excel-
Pyridoxine Hydrochloride ........................................ 400.0 g lent method for studying the hyphae of filamentous yeasts.
Riboflavin ............................................................... 200.0 g
Thiamine Hydrochloride ......................................... 400.0 g 1. Near one side of the plate (from the relative positions of 10
Compounds Supplying Trace Elements oclock to 2 oclock), lightly inoculate a single streak taken
Boric Acid ............................................................... 500.0 g
from a slant culture.
Copper Sulfate ......................................................... 40.0 g
Potassium Iodide .................................................... 100.0 g 2. In addition to the single streak, inoculate two points near
Ferric Chloride ........................................................ 200.0 g the other side of the plate (at the 4 oclock and 8 oclock
Manganese Sulfate ................................................ 400.0 g positions).
Sodium Molybdate ................................................. 200.0 g
Zinc Sulfate ............................................................ 400.0 g 3. Cover a central section of the streak inoculation and one
Salts point inoculation with cover glasses, as follows:
Monopotassium Phosphate ........................................ 1.0 g a. With forceps, remove a cover glass from absolute alco-
Magnesium Sulfate .................................................... 0.5 g hol, drain momentarily, and burn off excess alcohol by
Sodium Chloride ........................................................ 0.1 g
Calcium Chloride ....................................................... 0.1 g passing over a low flame.
*Adjusted and/or supplemented as required to meet performance criteria. b. When the cover glass has cooled, place one edge on the
agar and allow it to fall across the central portion of the
Directions for Preparation from inoculated streak. Place a second cover glass over one point
Dehydrated Product inoculation.
Difco Yeast Morphology Agar 4. Incubate at 25-30C for 6-7 days.
1. Suspend 35 g of the powder in 1 L of purified water. Mix 5. After incubation, observe with a high dry objective.
thoroughly.
Difco Yeast Carbon Base, Yeast Nitrogen Base, Yeast
2. Heat with frequent agitation and boil for 1 minute to com- Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids and Yeast Nitrogen
pletely dissolve the powder. Base without Amino Acids and Ammonium Sulfate
3. Autoclave at 121C for 15 minutes. 1. Inoculate the prepared tubed medium very lightly with the
4. Test samples of the finished product for performance using test organism.
stable, typical control cultures. 2. Incubate at 25C for 6-7 days.
Difco Yeast Carbon Base, Difco Yeast Nitrogen Base, 3. After incubation (6-7 days and, if necessary, 20-24 days), U
Difco Yeast Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids or shake the tubes to suspend growth. -
Difco Yeast Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids and
Ammonium Sulfate
4. Read for growth.
Z
BBL Yeast Nitrogen Agar
1. To facilitate filtration, prepare a 10 solution as follows:
Difco Yeast Carbon Base Dissolve 11.7 g of base and a 1. Subculture the isolate to be identified onto a Sabouraud
nitrogen source in 100 mL of purified water (with warm- Dextrose Agar or Mycophil Agar slant. Incubate at 30C
ing, if necessary). Mix well. until good growth is observed (24-48 hours).
Difco Yeast Nitrogen Base Dissolve 6.7 g of base and 5 g 2. Using a sterile cotton swab, remove the growth from the
of dextrose or equivalent amount of other carbohydrate in subculture and suspend in 9 mL sterile water. Using a new
100 mL of purified water (with warming, if necessary). Mix sterile swab, uniformly inoculate the medium with the yeast
well. suspension.
Difco Yeast Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids Dis- 3. Following inoculation, place carbohydrate discs onto the
solve 6.7 g of base, 5 g of dextrose or equivalent amount of surface of the medium. Press each disc with sterile forceps
other carbohydrate and 5-10 mg% of the desired amino to make good contact with the agar surface.
acid in 100 mL of purified water (with warming, if neces- 4. Incubate the plates in an inverted position (agar side up) at
sary). Mix well. 25C for 4872 hours.
Difco Yeast Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids and Carbon Assimilation Test
Ammonium Sulfate Dissolve 1.7 g of base plus nitrogen Refer to the procedure described in the Manual of Clinical
and carbon sources as required in 100 mL of purifed water Microbiology.9
(with warming, if necessary). Mix well.
2. Filter sterilize. Nitrogen Assimilation Test
3. Store at 2-8C. Refer to the procedure described in the Manual of Clinical
Microbiology.9
641
Section III
U-Z Yeast Media, cont.

Expected Results References

1. Warren and Hazen. 1995. In Murray, Baron, Pfaller, Tenover and Yolken (ed.). Manual of clinical
Difco Yeast Morphology Agar microbiology, 6th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
Using the high-dry objective, observe for hyphae of filamen- 2. Wickerham. 1951. Taxonomy of yeasts. Technical bulletin No. 1029, U. S. Dept Agriculture, Wash-
ington, D.C.
tous yeasts. 3. Wickerham. 1939. J. Tropical Med. Hyg. 42:176.
4. Wickerham. 1946. J. Bacteriol. 52:293.
5. Wickerham. 1948. J. Bacteriol. 56:363.
Difco Yeast Carbon Base, Yeast Nitrogen Base, Yeast 6. Wickerham. 1943. J. Bacteriol. 46:501.
Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids and Yeast Nitrogen 7. Wickerham and Burton. 1958. J. Bacteriol. 56:363.
8. Beijerinck. 1889. Arch. Neerl. Sci. Exactes Nat. 23:367.
Base without Amino Acids and Ammonium Sulfate 9. Warren and Shadomy. 1991. In Balows, Hausler, Herrmann, Isenberg and Shadomy (ed.). Manual
Measure growth turbidimetrically at 660 nm wavelength using of clinical microbiology, 5th ed. American Society for Microbiology, Washington, D.C.
10. Guenter. Personal Communication.
a spectrophotometer. Turbidimetric readings on assay tubes 11. Sherman, Fink and Hicks. 1986. Methods in yeast genetics. Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press,
Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y.
should be comparable to the control. 12. Brownstein, Silverman, Little, Burke, Korsmeyer, Schlessinger and Olson. 1989. Isolation of single-
copy human genes from a library of yeast artificial chromosomes clones. Science. 244:1348.
BBL Yeast Nitrogen Agar 13. Haley, Trandel and Coyle. 1980. Cumitech 11, Practical method for culture and identification of
fungi in the clinical mycology laboratory. Coord. ed., Sherris. American Society for Microbiology,
After sufficient incubation, a zone of growth should be visible Washington, D.C.
14. Larone. 1995. Medically important fungi: a guide to identification, 3rd ed. American Society for
in the area surrounding carbohydrates that have been assimi- Microbiology, Washington, D.C.

lated. A yeast species may be presumptively identified based

on a pattern of assimilation of carbohydrates. Consult appro- Availability
priate texts for information on biochemical tests and other Difco Yeast Morphology Agar
Cat. No. 239320 Dehydrated 500 g
identification procedures to confirm findings.9,13,14
Difco Yeast Carbon Base
Limitation of the Procedure Cat. No. 239110 Dehydrated 100 g
Yeasts grown on a rich medium may carry a reserve of nitro- Difco Yeast Nitrogen Base

gen in the form of protein. Possible errors due to this reserve Cat. No. 239210 Dehydrated 100 g
are eliminated by making two serial transfers in the complete BBL Yeast Nitrogen Agar
medium. When the first transfer is seven days old, the culture Cat. No. 295977 Prepared Plates Pkg. of 20*
is shaken and one loopful is transferred to a second tube of the Difco Yeast Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids

complete medium containing the same source of nitrogen. If a Cat. No. 291940 Dehydrated 100 g
positive test is obtained when the second culture is seven days 291920 Dehydrated 2 kg
291930 Dehydrated 10 kg
old, the organism being tested assimilates this particular nitro-
gen source. Difco Yeast Nitrogen Base without Amino Acids and
Ammonium Sulfate
Cat. No. 233520 Dehydrated 100 g
233510 Dehydrated 10 kg
*Store at 2-8C.

Yersinia Selective Agar Base (CIN Agar Base)

Yersinia Antimicrobic Supplement CN
(See CIN Agar Base)

642
643
Section IV
Reference Guide

644
 Media for Specific Groups

Culture Media for Specific Groups of Microorganisms

Organisms Isolation Cultivation Identification Maintenance
Actinomycetes (aerobic) Actinomycete Isolation Agar Bushnell-Haas Medium Casein Agar Brain Heart Infusion Agar
Nocardia Brain Heart CC Agar Czapek-Dox Agar CTA Media Chocolate Agar
Streptomyces Columbia CNA Agar Eugon Agar Indole Nitrite Medium CTA Medium
Rhodococcus Lowenstein-Jensen Media ISP Medium 1,2, and 4 ISP Medium 4 ISP Medium 4
Middlebrook 7H10 Agar Sabouraud Dextrose Agar Nocardia Quad ID Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar
Blood Agar Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar Nutrient Gelatin YM Agar/YM Broth
Chocolate Agar YM Agar/YM Broth Tyrosine Agar
Sabouraud Dextrose w/ and w/o Xanthine Agar
CC
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy
Media

Anaerobes Anaerobic Agar Actinomyces Broth Bacteroides Bile Esculin Agar Cooked Meat Medium
(exclusive of clostridia): Bacteroides Bile Esculin Agar Anaerobic Agar Cooked Meat Medium CTA Medium
Actinomyces Brewer Anaerobic Agar Brewer Anaerobic Agar CTA Medium w/Carbohydrates Thioglycollate Medium w/o
Bacteroides Brucella Laked Blood Agar CDC Anaerobe Blood Agar Indole Nitrite Medium Indicator-135C
Bifidobacterium w/KV Columbia Anaerobic Sheep Blood Sulfite Agar
Eubacterium CDC Anaerobe Blood Agar Agar Thioglycollate Media
Fusobacterium CDC Anaerobe Blood Agar Cooked Meat Medium
Lactobacillus w/KV Liver Veal Agar
Peptostreptococcus CDC Anaerobe Blood Agar Schaedler Agar/Broth
Porphyromonas w/PEA Sulfite Agar
Prevotella CDC Anaerobe Laked Blood Thioglycollate Media
Proprionibacterium Agar w/KV Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Media
Veillonella Columbia Anaerobic Sheep
Blood Agar
Cooked Meat Medium
Liver Infusion Agar/Broth
Liver Veal Agar
Schaedler Agar/Broth
Sulfite Agar
Thioglycollate Media
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Media
Bordetella Bordet Gengou Agar Base Bordet Gengou Agar Base Blood Agar Bordet Gengou Agar Base
Charcoal Agar Charcoal Agar Heart Infusion Agar
Chocolate Agar Chocolate Agar MacConkey Agar
Regan-Lowe Charcoal Agar Litmus Milk
Base Motility Test Medium
Nitrate Broth
Urea Agar Base
Urease Test Broth
Brucella Brucella Agar/Broth Brucella Agar/Broth CTA Medium CTA Medium
Eugon Agar Eugon Agar Urea Agar Base Nutrient Agar
Liver Infusion Agar/Broth Eugon Broth/Eugonbroth Urease Test Broth
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Media Liver Infusion Agar/Broth
Tryptose Broth Potato Infusion Agar
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Media

Campylobacter Brucella Agar/Broth Campy CSM Agar Campy CSM Agar

Campy CSM Agar Campy CVA Agar Campy CVA Agar
Campy CVA Agar Campylobacter Agar Base Campylobacter Agar Base
Campylobacter Agar Base Campylobacter with 5 Antimicrobics Campylobacter with 5
Campylobacter Agar w/5 and 10% SB Antimicrobics and 10% SB
Antimicrobics and 10% SB Nutrient Broth for Motility
Campylobacter Thioglycollate Triple Sugar Iron (TSI) Agar
Medium w/5 Antibiotics for H2S

Clostridium Anaerobic Agar Anaerobic Agar Clostridium difficile Selective Cooked Meat Medium
CDC Anaerobe Blood Agar CDC Anaerobe Blood Agar Agar Thioglycollate Medium w/o
CDC Anaerobe Blood Agar Columbia Anaerobic Cooked Meat Medium Indicator-135C
w/PEA Blood Agar Differential Reinforced Tryptic/Trypticase Agar
Clostridium difficile Selective Cooked Meat Medium Clostridial Agar Base
Agar Differential Reinforced Clostridial Egg Yolk Agar, Modified
Clostrisel Agar Agar Indole Nitrite Medium
Cooked Meat Medium Egg Yolk Agar, Modified Lecithin Lactose Agar
Lecithin Lactose Agar Egg Meat Medium Litmus Milk
Liver Infusion Agar/Broth McClung Toabe Agar McClung Toabe Agar
McClung Toabe Agar Reinforced Clostridial Medium SFP Agar
Reinforced Clostridial Agar SFP Agar SPS Agar
SFP Agar SPS Agar Sulfite Agar
SPS Agar Schaedler Agar/Broth Thioglycollate Media
Schaedler Agar/Broth Thioglycollate Media Tryptic/Trypticase Agar Base
TSN Agar Trypticase Soy Broth with 0.1%
Thioglycollate Media Agar

645
Section IV
Media for Specific Groups, cont.

Culture Media for Specific Groups of Microorganisms

Organisms Isolation Cultivation Identification Maintenance
Coliforms and Proteus A-1 Medium Brain Heart Infusion A-1 Broth Nutrient Agar
Brilliant Green Bile Agar Brain Heart Infusion Agar Acetate Differential Agar Tryptic/Trypticase Soy
Brilliant Green Bile Broth, 2% MacConkey Agar Brilliant Green Bile Agar Media
Brilliant Green Bile Broth, 2% Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Media Brilliant Green Bile Broth, 2%
with MUG CHROMagar O157
CHROMagar O157 CHROMagar Orientation
CHROMagar Orientation Decarboxylase Media
CLED Agar EC Medium/Broth
EC Medium/Broth EC Medium/Broth w/MUG
EC Medium/Broth w/MUG EC Medium, Modified
EC Medium, Modified Endo Agar
Endo Agar m Endo Agar LES
m Endo Agar LES m Endo Broth MF
m Endo Broth MF EMB, Levine
EMB, Levine EMB, Modified
EMB, Modified Enteric Fermentation Base
m FC Broth Hektoen Enteric Agar
Hektoen Enteric Agar Indole Nitrite Medium
Lactose Broth Kligler Iron Agar
Lauryl Sulfate/Tryptose Broth Koser Citrate
Lauryl Sulfate/Tryptose Broth Lauryl Sulfate Broth/Lauryl
w/MUG Tryptose Broth with MUG
MI Agar MI Agar
MacConkey Media MacConkey Media
MacConkey Sorbitol Media MacConkey Sorbitol Media
Nutrient Agar w/MUG Malonate Broth, Ewing
Presence-Absence Broth Modified
R2A Agar MR-V P Broth
Salmonella Shigella Agar Minerals Modified Glutamate
Sorbitol MacConkey w/CT Broth
TAT Broth Base MIO Medium
m TEC Agar Motility Test Medium
Modified m TEC Agar Nitrate Broth
Tryptone Water Nutrient Agar w/MUG
Violet Red Bile Agar w/ and Nutrient Gelatin
w/o MUG OF Basal Medium
XL Agar Base/XLD Agar Phenol Red Broth
w/Carbohydrates
Phenylalanine Agar
Purple Broth Base
Salmonella Shigella Agar
SIM Medium
Simmons Citrate Agar
m TEC Agar
Modified m TEC Agar
Triple Sugar Iron (TSI) Agar
Tryptic/Trypticase Agar Base
with Taxo Discs
Tryptophan 1% Solution
Urea Agar Base
Urease Test Broth
Violet Red Bile Agar
Violet Red Bile Agar w/MUG
XL Agar Base/XLD Agar

Corynebacterium Loeffler Medium Brain Heart Infusion Agar CTA Agar Blood Agar Base +
Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar Loeffler Medium Indole Nitrite Medium 5% Rabbit Blood
Serum Tellurite Agar Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar KL Virulence Agar CTA Medium
Tinsdale Base KL Virulence Enrichment Nutrient Agar
Tinsdale Enrichment, Taxo KL Antitoxin Strips Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar
Desiccated Nitrate Broth
Trypticase Tellurite Agar Base Serum Tellurite Agar
Starch Agar
Trypticase Tellurite Agar Base
Urea Agar

646
 Media for Specific Groups, cont.

Culture Media for Specific Groups of Microorganisms

Organisms Isolation Cultivation Identification Maintenance
Enteric Bacilli Bismuth Sulfite Agar Brain Heart Infusion Bismuth Sulfite Agar Nutrient Agar
DCLS Agar Brain Heart Infusion Agar Desoxycholate Agar Tryptic/Trypticase Soy
Desoxycholate Agar Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Media Desoxycholate-Citrate Agar Media
Desoxycholate-Citrate Agar Desoxycholate Lactose Agar
Desoxycholate Lactose Agar DNase Test Agar with Toluidine
Endo Agar Blue
EMB, Levine Decarboxylase Media
EMB, Modified Endo Agar
GN Broth EMB, Levine
Hektoen Enteric Agar EMB, Modified
MacConkey Media Hektoen Enteric Agar
MacConkey Sorbitol Media Indole Nitrite Medium
Salmonella Shigella Agar Kligler Iron Agar
TAT Broth Base Lysine Iron Agar
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar MacConkey Media
Violet Red Bile Agar MacConkey Sorbitol Media
XL Agar Base/XLD Agar Malonate Broth, Ewing
Modified
Moeller KCN Broth Base
MIO Medium
Motility Test Medium
Nitrate Broth
Nutrient Gelatin
OF Basal Medium
Phenol Red Media
Phenylalanine Agar
Purple Broth Base
Salmonella Shigella Agar
SIM Medium
Simmons Citrate Agar
Triple Sugar Iron (TSI) Agar
Tryptophan 1% Solution
Urea Agar Base
Urease Test Broth
Violet Red Bile Agar
XL Agar Base/XLD Agar

Enterococci Azide Dextrose Broth Brain Heart Infusion BAGG Broth Brain Heart Infusion
Group D Streptococci BAGG Broth Brain Heart Infusion Agar Bile Esculin Agar CTA Medium
Bile Esculin Agar SF Broth/Medium CTA Medium w/Carbohydrates Stock Culture Agar
Columbia CNA Agar Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Media mEI Agar Trypticase Soy Agar w/
M-E Agar Base Enterococcosel Agar/Broth 5% Sheep Blood
mEI Agar KF Streptococcal Agar /Broth
Enterococcosel Agar MacConkey Agar w/o CV
Esculin Iron Agar Salt Broth, Modified
Ethyl Violet Azide (EVA) Broth SF Broth/Medium
KF Streptococcal Agar/Broth Trypticase Soy Broth w/6.5%
m-Enterococcus Agar NaCl
MacConkey Agar w/o CV
Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar
SF Broth/Medium
Streptosel Agar/Broth

647
Section IV
Media for Specific Groups, cont.

Culture Media for Specific Groups of Microorganisms

Organisms Isolation Cultivation Identification Maintenance
Fungi (Yeasts and Molds) BiGGY Agar Brain Heart Infusion Agar/Broth BiGGY Agar CTA Medium
Brain Heart CC Agar Corn Meal Agar Candida BCG Agar Emerson YpSs Agar
Brain Heart Infusion Agar Czapek-Dox Broth Candida Isolation Agar Mycophil Agar
Candida BCG Agar Czapek Solution Agar CHROMagar Candida Potato Dextrose Agar
Candida Isolation Agar Emerson YpSs Agar Corn Meal Agar Sabouraud Dextrose Agar
CHROMagar Candida Lima Bean Agar DRBC Agar Tryptic/Trypticase Agar
Cooke Rose Bengal Agar Malt Agar Pagano Levin Base w/TTC Base
Corn Meal Agar Malt Extract Agar/Broth Rice Extract Agar YPD Agar/Broth
DRBC Agar Mycophil Agar/Broth Rose Bengal Agar
Dermatophyte Test Medium Littman Oxgall Agar Trichophyton Agars 1-7
Dextrose Agar Oatmeal Agar Yeast Carbon Base
Emerson YpSs Agar OGYE Agar Base Yeast Extract Glucose
Fluid Sabouraud Medium Pagano Levin Base Chloramphenicol Agar
HC Agar Base Potato Dextrose Agar/Broth Yeast Nitrogen Base w/o Amino
Inhibitory Mold Agar Sabouraud Media Acids
M-Green Yeast and Mold Broth Special Yeast and Mold Medium Yeast Nitrogen Base w/o Amino
Littman Oxgall Agar Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Media Acids and Ammonium
Malt Agar Wort Agar Sulfate
Malt Extract Agar/Broth YM Agar/Broth Yeast Morphology Agar
Mycological Agar Yeast Extract Glucose Yeast Nitrogen Base
Mycophil Agar/Broth Chloramphenicol Agar
Mycophil Agarw/Low pH Yeast Morphology Agar
Mycosel Agar
Oatmeal Agar
OGYE Agar Base
Orange Serum Agar
Pagano Levin Base w/TTC
Petragani Medium
Phytone Yeast Extract Agar
Potato Dextrose Agar
Rose Bengal Agar
Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion
Agar
Sabouraud Media
Special Yeast and Mold
Medium
Wort Agar
YM Agar/Broth
Yeast Extract Glucose
Chloramphenicol Agar

Gardnerella vaginalis HBT Bilayer Medium Chocolate Agar HBT Bilayer Medium Casman Agar Base +
V Agar Columbia CNA Agar Sodium Hippurate Broth 5% Rabbit Blood
Casman Agar Base + Starch Agar w/
5% Rabbit Blood Bromcresol Purple
V Agar

Haemophilus Casman Agar Base Casman Agar Base Hemo Quad ID Chocolate II Agar
Chocolate II Agar Chocolate II Agar Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar CTA Medium
GC Agar Base GC Agar Base with Taxo X, V and XV
GC II Agar Base GC II Agar Base Factor Strips

Lactobacillus APT Agar/Broth APT Agar/Broth Esculin Agar Slants CTA Medium
Leuconostoc Eugon Agar Chocolate II Agar Indole Nitrite Medium Eugon Agar
Lactobacillus MRS Agar/Broth Elliker Broth Litmus Milk Lactobacilli MRS Broth
LBS Agar/Broth Eugon Agar Moeller Decarboxylase Broth Tomato Juice Agar
MRS Agar/Broth LBS Agar/Broth w/ Arginine
Orange Serum Agar MRS Agar/Broth MRS Broth
Raka Ray No. 3 Broth/Medium Rogosa SL Agar/Broth Trypticase Soy Broth w/
Reinforced Clostridial Agar Tomato Juice Agar 6.5% NaCl
Snyder Agar Tomato Juice Agar, Special
Thayer Martin Agar Trypticase Soy Agar w/
5% Sheep Blood
Universal Beer Agar (UBA)

Legionella BCYE Agar Base BCYE Agar BCYE Agar BCYE Agar
BCYE Agar BCYE Differential Agar
BCYE Differential Agar Sodium Hippurate Broth
BCYE Selective Agar w/PAC
BCYE Selective Agar w/PAV
BCYE Selective Agar w/CCVC
Legionella Agar Enrichment

648
 Media for Specific Groups, cont.

Culture Media for Specific Groups of Microorganisms

Organisms Isolation Cultivation Identification Maintenance
Listeria Buffered Listeria Enrichment Eugon Agar CTA Medium Brain Heart Infusion Agar
Broth Listeria Enrichment Broth Esculin Agar Slant CTA Medium
Demi-Fraser Broth LPM Agar Base Indole Nitrite Medium Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar
Fraser Broth PALCAM Medium Base Litmus Milk
GBNA Medium Thioglycollate Medium w/o Indicator- MR-VP Broth
Listeria Enrichment Broth 135C Motility Test Medium
Listeria Enrichment Broth, Trypticase Soy Agar w/ Oxford Medium Base
Modified 5% Sheep Blood Purple Broth Base
LPM Agar Base Triple Sugar Iron (TSI) Agar
McBride Listeria Agar
Oxford Medium Base
PALCAM Medium Base
Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar
UVM Modified Listeria
Enrichment Broth
Universal Preenrichment Broth
Mycobacterium Dubos Oleic Agar Base Dubos Broth Base Arylsulfatase Broth Lowenstein-Jensen Media
Lowenstein-Jensen Media Dubos Broth, Enriched Lowenstein Jensen Medium Middlebrook and Cohn 7H10
Middlebrook and Cohn 7H10 Lowenstein-Jensen Media Lowenstein Jensen w/5% NaCl Agar Base
Agar Base Middlebrook 7H9 Broth Base MacConkey w/o CV Petragnani Medium
Mycobacteria 7H11 Agar Middlebrook and Cohn 7H10 Agar Middlebrook 7H9 Broth
Mycobactosel L-J Medium Base Urea Agar Base
Petragnani Medium Mycobacteria 7H11 Agar
Selective 7H11 Agar Petragnani Medium
Seven H11 Agar Base Seven H11 Agar Base
Herrolds Egg Yolk Agar Wallenstein Medium
w/ANV and w/Mycobactin J
Herrolds Egg Yolk Agar
w/ANV, w/o Mycobactin J
Wallenstein Medium

Mycoplasma Mycoplasma Broth Base (Frey) A7 Agar, Modified A7 Agar, Modified Mycoplasma Agar Base
Ureaplasma PPLO Agar Mycoplasma Broth Base (Frey)
PPLO Broth w/o CV PPLO Agar
PPLO Broth w/o CV

Neisseria Casman Agar Base Brain Heart Infusion Agar CTA Medium w/Carbohydrates Chocolate II Agar
Chocolate II Agar Casman Agar Base Rapid Fermentation Medium CTA Medium
GC Agar Base Chocolate II Agar
GC II Agar Base Eugon Agar
GC-Lect Agar Eugon Broth/Eugonbroth
Eugon Agar GC Agar Base
Martin-Lewis Agar GC II Agar Base
Modified Thayer-Martin (MTM Tryptose Phosphate Broth
II) Agar
Thayer-Martin Selective Agar
Tryptose Phosphate Broth

Pseudomonas M-PA-C Agar Eugon Agar Acetamide Agar Nutrient Agar

Acinetobacter Cetrimide/Pseudosel Agar Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar Gelatin Tryptic/Trypticase Agar
Alcaligenes PC (Burkholderia cepacia) Agar MacConkey Agar Base
Burkholderia Pseudomonas Isolation Agar Moeller Decarboxylase Broths
and other Nitrate Broth
Nonfermenters OF Basal Medium
Phenol Red Media
Pseudomonas F and P Agars
Triple Sugar Iron (TSI) Agar

649
Section IV
Media for Specific Groups, cont.

Culture Media for Specific Groups of Microorganisms

Organisms Isolation Cultivation Identification Maintenance
Salmonella BG Sulfa Agar Brain Heart Infusion Acetate Differential Agar Nutrient Agar
Shigella Bismuth Sulfite Agar Brain Heart Infusion Agar BG Sulfa Agar Tryptic/Trypticase Soy
Brilliant Green Agar Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Media Bismuth Sulfite Agar Media
Brilliant Green Agar Modified Brilliant Green Agar
m Brilliant Green Broth Brilliant Green Agar Modified
Buffered Peptone Water CHROMagar Salmonella
CHROMagar Salmonella DCLS Agar
DCLS Agar Decarboxylase Media
Desoxycholate Agar Desoxycholate Agar
Desoxycholate-Citrate Agar Desoxycholate-Citrate Agar
Desoxycholate Lactose Agar Desoxycholate Lactose Agar
Endo Agar Endo Agar
EMB, Levine EMB, Levine
EMB, Modified EMB, Modified
GN Broth/GN Broth Hajna Hektoen Enteric Agar
Hektoen Enteric Agar Indole Nitrite Medium
Lactose Broth Kligler Iron Agar
M Broth Lysine Iron Agar
MacConkey Media MacConkey Media
Modified Buffered Peptone Malonate Broth, (Ewing)
Water Modified
Muller Kauffmann Tetrathionate Motility Test Medium
Broth Base Nitrate Broth
Rappaport-Vassiliadis Medium Nutrient Gelatin
Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10 OF Basal Medium
Broth Phenol Red Media
SBG Sulfa Enrichment Purple Broth Base
Salmonella Shigella Agar Rappaport-Vassiliadis Medium
Selenite Cystine Broth Salmonella Shigella Agar
Selenite Broth/Selenite-F Broth SIM Medium
Tetrathionate Broth Base Simmons Citrate Agar
Universal Preenrichment Broth Triple Sugar Iron (TSI) Agar
VJ (Vogel & Johnson) Agar Tryptophan 1% Solution
XL Agar Base/XLD Agar Urea Agar Base
XLT4 Agar Base w/Supplement Urease Test Broth
XL Agar Base/XLD Agar
XLT4 Agar Base w/Supplement

Staphylococci Baird-Parker Agar Base Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Media Baird-Parker Agar Base CTA Medium
Chapman Stone Agar Chapman Stone Agar Nutrient Agar
CHROMagar Staph aureus CHROMagar Staph aureus Trypticase Soy Agar
Coagulase Mannitol Agar Coagulase Mannitol Agar
Columbia CNA Agar Columbia CNA Agar
Giolitti-Cantoni Broth Base CTA Medium with Mannitol
Mannitol Salt Agar DNase Test Agar
Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar DNA Test Agar w/Methyl
Staphylococcus Agar #110 Green
Tellurite Glycine Agar Base DNA Test Agar w/Toluidine
TPEY Agar Base Blue
VJ (Vogel & Johnson) Agar Mannitol Salt Agar
Phenol Red Mannitol Broth
Spirit Blue Agar
Staphylococcus Agar #110
Tellurite Glycine Agar Base
TPEY Agar Base

650
 Media for Specific Groups, cont.

Culture Media for Specific Groups of Microorganisms

Organisms Isolation Cultivation Identification Maintenance
Streptococcus Azide Blood Agar Base Brain Heart Infusion Azide Blood Agar Base Brain Heart Infusion Broth
(Non-Group D) Bile Esculin Agar Brain Heart Infusion Agar Bile Esculin Agar CTA Medium
Columbia CNA Agar Todd Hewitt Broth Columbia CNA Agar Trypticase Soy Agar w/
ssA Agar (Group A Selective Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Media Moeller Decarboxylase Broth 5% Sheep Blood
Strep Agar with 5% SB) Tryptose Phosphate Broth w/Arginine
M17 Broth MR-VP Broth
Mitis Salivarius Agar Sodium Hippurate Broth
Neomycin Blood Agar Stock Culture Agar
Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar Trypticase Soy Agar w/
Streptosel Agar /Broth 5% Sheep Blood
SXT Blood Agar Trypticase Soy Broth w/
Todd Hewitt Broth 6.5% NaCl
Tryptose Phosphate Broth

Trichomonas Trichosel Broth, Modified

Vibrio Alkaline Peptone Water Trypticase Soy Agar w/5% Sheep DCLS Agar Brain Heart Infusion Agar
DCLS Agar Blood Kligler Iron Agar Marine Agar 2216
TCBS Agar Moeller Decarboxylase Broths Nutrient Agar
MR-VP Broth
Purple Agar/Broth Base
Simmons Citrate

Yersinia enterocolitica CIN Agar Base (Yersinia Trypticase Soy Agar w/5% Sheep Christensen's Urea Brain Heart Infusion Agar
Selective Agar Base) Blood CIN Agar Base (Yersinia Nutrient Agar
MacConkey Agar MacConkey Agar Selective Agar Base) Trypticase Soy Agar w/5%
Decarboxylase Broths Sheep Blood
Kligler Iron Agar Tryptose Agar
Motility Test Medium
MR-VP Broth
Simmons Citrate
Triple Sugar Iron (TSI) Agar

651
Section IV
Application Tables

Agar Selection Guide

Products

ted

al
eA

ula

nic
ar

t
ble

lec
Ag

an
ad

ch

No

se
Gr
Gr

Se
Te

aro
cto

ar,
ar,
ar,

ar,

ar,
Ag
Ag
Ag

Ag

Ag

Ag
Ba
Bacteriological Applications
Auxotrophic studies ++ ++ +
Bacteriology, research ++ ++ +
Bacteriology, general purpose ++ ++ + +
Bacteriophage studies ++ +
Biotechnology production + + ++ +/
General microbial production + + ++ +/
Growth of fastidious organisms ++ ++
Identification of pathogenic organisms ++ ++ + +/
Microaerophilic studies ++ +
Molecular genetics ++ ++ + ++
Prepared plate manufacture + + ++
Quality control, production ++ + + +/
Quality control, environmental + + ++ +/
Transformation of bacteria ++ +
Transformation of yeast ++ +
Non-Bacteriological Applications
Immunodiffusion ++ ++
Electrophoresis ++ ++
Tissue Culture, mammalian ++
Tissue Culture, plant ++ ++ +
Histology, tissue embedding + + ++
Histology, bone marrow embedding ++ + +
Insect growth substrate ++

Key
++ Recommended
+ Suitable
+/ Marginal

652
 Application Tables

Antimicrobial/Preservative
Effectiveness Testing

Products
D/E Neutralizing Agar
D/E Neutralizing Broth
Letheen Agar
Letheen Agar, Modified
Letheen Broth
Letheen Broth, Modified
Nutrient Agar
Plate Count Agar/Standard Methods Agar
Potato Dextrose Agar
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar
Sabouraud Dextrose Broth
TAT Broth Base
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Broth
YM Agar

653
Section IV
Application Tables

Cosmetic Testing
Applications

us
nin ve
l

s
nta

cc
tiv t i v e

ld
na
ree ati

es
g

Mo
co
es

me

mo
Sc -Neg

en
fec va

ylo
rob

t&
on

do
Ef ser

ph
am
ae

vir

eu

as
e

Sta
Pr
An

En

Ps

Ye
Gr
Products
Acetimide Agar
Baird-Parker Agar Base
CDC Anaerobe Blood Agar
Cetrimide/Pseudosel Agar
CHROMagar Staph aureus
Cooked Meat Medium
D/E Neutralizing Agar
D/E Neutralizing Broth
Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Modified
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium
HC Agar Base
Hycheck Hygiene Contact Slides
Koser Citrate Medium
Letheen Agar
Letheen Agar, Modified
Letheen Broth
Letheen Broth, Modified
MacConkey Agar
Malonate Broth
Malt Agar
Malt Extract Agar
Malt Extract Broth
Mannitol Salt Agar
Moeller Decarboxylase Broth w/Arginine
Motility Nitrate Medium
Mycological Agar/Mycophil Agar
Neutralizing Buffer
Nutrient Agar
Nutrient Broth
Nutrient Gelatin
OF Medium w/Dextrose
Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar (PEA)
Plate Count Agar/Standard Methods Agar
Potato Dextrose Agar
Pseudomonas Agar F/Flo Agar
Pseudomonas Agar P/Tech Agar
Pseudomonas Isolation Agar
RODAC Plates
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar
Sabouraud Dextrose Broth
m Staphylococcus Broth
Staphylococcus Medium 110
TAT Broth Base
Triple Sugar Iron (TSI) Agar
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar
Tryptic (Trypticase) Soy Agar w/Lecithin,
Poly 80 (Microbial Content Test Agar)

Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Broth
VJ (Vogel & Johnson) Agar
654 YM Agar
 Application Tables

Dairy Testing
Applications

coc us/
r

ccu
l
cte

cus
Cou Plate
nta
in M tams

lus

ld
c
Shi ella/
oba

loco

Mo
coc
me

acil
ilk

nt
ms

a
ac

rd
gell
iron
pyl

a
pto

st &
eria

phy

ero
ifor

tob
a-L

nda

sini
mo
Cam

Stre
Env

Ent
List
Lac
Col
Bet

Yea
Sta
Sal

Yer
Sta
Products
Antibiotic Medium 1
Antibiotic Medium 4
Baird-Parker Agar Base
Bile Esculin Agar
Bismuth Sulfite Agar
Blood Agar
Brain Heart Infusion
Brain Heart Infusion Agar
Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2%
Brucella Agar
Brucella Broth
CIN Agar
Campylobacter Agar Base/
Antimicrobic Supplement Skirrow
D/E Neutralizing Agar
D/E Neutralizing Broth
DNase Test Agar w/Toluidine Blue
DRBC Agar
Decarboxylase Broth Base
EC Medium
Elliker Agar
m Endo Broth MF
Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine
m FC Agar
Fraser Broth Base/
Fraser Broth Supplement
GBNA Medium
Hektoen Enteric Agar
Hycheck Hygiene Contact Slides
Koser's Citrate Broth
LBS Agar
LPM Agar Base/
Listeria Selective Supplement
Lactobacilli MRS Agar
Lactobacilli MRS Broth
Lactose Broth
Lauryl Tryptose Broth/
Lauryl Sulfate Broth
Lauryl Tryptose Broth w/MUG/
Lauryl Sulfate Broth w/MUG
Listeria Enrichment Broth
Listeria Enrichment Broth, Modified
Listeria Enrichment Broth Base, Buffered
Lysine Decarboxylase Broth
Lysine Iron Agar
M 17 Agar
MR-VP Broth
MacConkey Agar
Malonate Broth
McBride Listeria Agar
Milk Agar (IDF formulation)
Motility Test Medium
Mucate Broth
Neutralizing Buffer
655
Section IV
Application Tables

Dairy Testing
Applications

/
r

ccu

ero occus
l
cte

cus
Cou late
nta
in M tams

lus

ld
Shi ella/
oba

loco

Mo
me

coc
rd P
acil
ilk

nt
ms

a
ac

c
gell
iron
pyl

a
pto

st &
eria

phy
ifor

tob
a-L

nda

sini
mo
Cam

Stre
Env

Ent
List
Lac
Col
Bet

Yea
Sta
Sal

Yer
Sta
Products
Noble Agar
Nutrient Agar
Nutrient Broth
OGYE Agar Base
Oxford Agar (Oxford Medium Base
w/Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement)
Oxford Agar, Modified (Oxford Medium Base
w/Modified Oxford Supplement)
PALCAM Medium Base
w/PALCAM Antimicrobic Supplement
Phenol Red Broth w/Carbohydrates
Phenylalanine Agar
Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar (PEA)
Plate Count Agar/Standard Methods Agar
Potato Dextrose Agar
Potato Dextrose Broth
Purple Broth w/Carbohydrates
Rose Bengal Agar Base/
Rose Bengal Antimicrobic Supplement C
SF Medium
SIM Medium
Selenite Cystine Broth
Simmons Citrate Agar
Tetrathionate Broth Base
Tomato Juice Agar
Triple Sugar Iron (TSI) Agar
Tryptic Nitrate Medium
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Broth
Tryptic (Trypticase) Soy Agar w/Lec &
Poly 80 (Microbial Content Test Agar)
Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar
Tryptone Phosphate Broth
Tryptone (Tryptophan) Water (1%)
UVM Modified Enrichment Broth/
UVM Modified Listeria Enrichment Broth

Universal Preenrichment Broth
Urea Agar
Violet Red Bile Agar
Violet Red Bile Agar w/MUG
Yeast Extract Glucose Chloramphenicol Agar

656
 Application Tables

Environmental Sampling and Disinfectant Testing

Dehydrated Culture Media Hygiene Contact Slides
BCYE Agar/Legionella Antimicrobic Supplement Hycheck D/E Neutralizing Agar
Bushnell-Haas Broth Hycheck for Disinfection Control
Clostrisel Agar Hycheck for Enterobacteriaceae
Cooke Rose Bengal Agar Hycheck Plate Count Agar w/TTC
Czapek-Dox Broth Hycheck for Total Count
Czapek Solution Agar Hycheck for Yeast and Molds
D/E Neutralizing Agar Hycheck for Yeast and Molds w/TTC
D/E Neutralizing Broth
Egg Meat Medium
Letheen Agar
Letheen Agar, Modified
Letheen Broth
Letheen Broth, Modified
Neutralizing Buffer
Rose Bengal Agar Base
Special Yeast & Mold Medium
Synthetic Broth AOAC
Tryptic (Trypticase) Soy Agar w/Lecithin, Poly 80 (Microbial Content
Test Agar)

Sterile Pack Plated Media (Double Wrapped, Irradiated) Isolator Pack Media (Triple Wrapped, Irradiated)

Contact Plates RODAC Plates

D/E Neutralizing Agar D/E Neutralizing Agar
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar Sabouraud Dextrose Agar w/Lecithin, Poly 80
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar w/Lecithin, Poly 80 Trypticase Soy Agar w/Lecithin, Poly 80
Trypticase Soy Agar w/Lecithin, Poly 80
Trypticase Soy Agar w/Lecithin, Poly 80, Penicillinase Settling Plates
D/E Neutralizing Agar
RODAC Plates Sabouraud Dextrose Agar w/Lecithin, Poly 80
*CDC Anaerobe Blood Agar Trypticase Soy Agar
D/E Neutralizing Agar Trypticase Soy Agar w/Lecithin, Poly 80
*D/E Neutralizing Agar w/Penicillinase *Trypticase Soy Agar w/Lecithin, Poly 80, Penicillinase
*Rose Bengal Agar w/Penicillinase
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar Finger Dab Plates
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar w/Lecithin, Poly 80 D/E Neutralizing Agar
Trypticase Soy Agar w/Lecithin, Poly 80 Sabouraud Dextrose Agar w/Lecithin, Poly 80
Trypticase Soy Agar w/Lecithin, Poly 80, Penicillinase Trypticase Soy Agar w/Lecithin, Poly 80

Settling Plates
*m-HPC Agar
*R2A Agar
*Rose Bengal Agar w/Penicillinase
Trypticase Soy Agar
Trypticase Soy Agar w/Penicillinase
*Trypticase Soy Broth w/Agar

Finger Dab Plates

Trypticase Soy Agar w/Lecithin, Poly 80

*Available as a custom product.

657
Section IV
Application Tables

Fermentation
Products

Acidicase Peptone Peptone Water Todd Hewitt Broth, Bacto

Beef Extract, Paste Peptone, Bacto Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Broth
Beef Extract, Powder Peptone, BiTek Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Broth w/o Dextrose
Beef Extract, Desiccated, Bacto Phytone Peptone Trypticase Peptone
Beef Heart for Infusion Phytone Peptone, UF Tryptone, Bacto
Biosate Peptone Polypeptone Peptone Tryptone, BiTek
Brain Heart Infusion, Bacto Proteose Peptone #2, Bacto Tryptose Phosphate Broth
Brain Heart Infusion, Porcine, Bacto Proteose Peptone #3, Bacto Tryptose, Bacto
Brucella Broth Proteose Peptone #4, Bacto WL Differential Medium
Casamino Acids, Bacto Proteose Peptone, Bacto WL Nutrient Broth
Casamino Acids, Technical Proteose Peptone, BiTek WL Nutrient Medium
Casein Digest Select APS LB Broth Yeast Extract
Casitone, Bacto Select APS Super Broth Yeast Extract, Bacto
Eugon Broth, Bacto Select Soytone Yeast Extract, LD
Gelysate Peptone Soytone, Bacto Yeast Extract, Technical
Heart Infusion Broth, Bacto TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate, Bacto Yeast Extract, UF
M Broth, Bacto TC Yeastolate, Bacto
Malt Extract, Bacto TC Yeastolate, UF
Neopeptone, Bacto Thiotone E Peptone

658
 Application Tables

Food and Beverage Testing

Applications

a
15
is

ell
lys

us

t
li O

hig

un
o c s/
r

l
cte

cc
na

nta

lus

s
o c ccu

ld
co

a/S

cu

C
co
m
eA

ba

Mo
cil
me
E.

te
diu

t e r co
ell

o
ylo

a
lus

r ag

ba

Pla
s/

l
on

ini
&
ia

hy

E n to
on
tri

rm

cto

rio
mp

ter

rep
cil

st
vir
ve

rs
ap
lm

tal
os

lifo

a
Vib

Ye
Lis
Ba

Be

La
En
Ca

St

Ye
Sa

To
Cl

St
Co
Products
A-1 Medium
APT Agar
APT Broth
BG Sulfa Agar
Baird-Parker Agar Base/
EY Tellurite Enrichment
Bile Esculin Agar
Bismuth Sulfite Agar
Brilliant Green Agar
Brilliant Green Agar Modified
(Edel-Kampelmacher)
Brilliant Green Bile Agar
Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2%
Brucella Agar
Brucella Broth
Buffered Peptone Water
Buffered Peptone Water, Modified
CIN Agar Base/
Yersinia Antimicrobic Supplement CN
Campylobacter Agar Base/
Antibiotic Supplement Blaser
Campylobacter Agar w/5 Antimicrobics
and 10% Sheep Blood
Cary and Blair Transport Medium
Cetrimide/Pseudosel Agar
CHROMagar O157
CHROMagar Salmonella
CHROMagar Staph aureus
Cooke Rose Bengal Agar
Cooked Meat Medium
D/E Neutralizing Agar
D/E Neutralizing Broth
DNase Test Agar
DNase Test Agar w/Toluidine Blue
DRBC Agar
Demi-Fraser Broth Base
Desoxycholate Citrate Agar
Desoxycholate Lactose Agar
Differential Reinforced Clostridial Agar
EC Medium/EC Broth
EC Medium w/MUG/
EC Broth w/MUG
EC Medium, Modified/
Novobiocin Antimicrobic Supplement
EE Broth Mossel
mEI Agar
Elliker Broth
m Endo Agar LES
m Endo Broth MF
Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium

659
Section IV
Application Tables

Food and Beverage Testing

Applications

57

a
is

ell
O1
lys

nt
hig

cu

o c s/
r

ou
l
cte
na

nta

lus

s
oli

o c ccu

ld
oc

cu
a/S

C
m
eA

.c
ba

Mo
cil
me

oc

te
diu

t e r co
s/ E

ell
ylo

a
lus

r ag

ba

Pla
l
on

ini
&
ia

hy

E n to
on
tri

rm

cto

rio
mp

ter

rep
cil

st
vir
ve

rs
ap

tal
os

lm
lifo

a
Vib

Ye
Lis
Ba

Be

La
En
Ca

St

Ye
To
Cl

St
Sa
Co
Products
Fraser Broth Base/
Fraser Broth Supplement
GBNA Medium
GN Broth, Hajna/GN Broth
Giolitti-Cantoni Broth
M-Green Yeast and Mold Broth
Hektoen Enteric Agar
Hycheck Hygiene Contact Slides
KF Streptococcus Agar
KF Streptococcus Broth
Koser Citrate Medium
LBS Agar
LPM Agar Base/
Listeria Selective Supplement
Lactobacilli MRS Agar
Lactobacilli MRS Broth
Lactose Broth
Lauryl Tryptose Broth/
Lauryl Sulfate Broth
Lauryl Tryptose Broth w/MUG/
Lauryl Sulfate Broth w/MUG
Letheen Agar
Letheen Broth
Listeria Enrichment Broth
Listeria Enrichment Broth, Modified
Listeria Enrichment Broth, Buffered
Litmus Milk
Liver Veal Agar
Lysine Iron Agar
Lysine Medium
M 17 Agar
M 17 Broth
M Broth
MI Agar
MYP Agar/Egg Yolk Enrichment 50%/
Antimicrobic Vial P

MacConkey Agar
MacConkey Broth
MacConkey Sorbitol Agar/
MacConkey II Agar w/Sorbitol

Malt Agar
Malt Extract Agar
Malt Extract Broth
Mannitol Salt Agar
McBride Listeria Agar
McClung Toabe Agar Base
Miller Mallinson*
Minerals Modified Glutamate Agar
Moeller Decarboxylase Broth Base
Motility Test Medium
Muller Kauffmann Tetrathionate Broth Base

660
 Application Tables

Food and Beverage Testing

Applications

57

a
is

ell
O1
lys

us

t
un
hig

o c s/
r

tal
cte

cc
na

oli

lus

s
o c ccu

Co

ld
cu
n

a/S

co
m
eA

.c
ba

Mo
cil
me

te
diu

t e r co
s/E

lo
ell
ylo

a
lus

r ag

ba

Pla
on

ini
&
ia

hy

E n to
tri

on
rm

cto

rio
mp

ter

rep
cil

st
vir
ve

rs
ap

tal
os

lm
lifo

a
Vib

Ye
Lis
Ba

Be

La
En
Ca

St

Ye
To
Cl

St
Sa
Co
Products
Mycological Agar/Mycophil Agar
Neutralizing Buffer
Nutrient Broth
OGYE Agar Base/
Antimicrobic Vial Oxytetracycline
Orange Serum Agar
Orange Serum Broth Concentrate 10X
Oxford Medium/
Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement

Oxford Medium, Modified/
Modified Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement
PALCAM Medium Base/
PALCAM Antimicrobic Supplement

Phenol Red Dextrose Broth
Plate Count Agar/
Standard Methods Agar

Potato Dextrose Agar
Potato Dextrose Broth
Purple Broth Base
Raka-Ray No. 3 Medium
Rappaport-Vassiliadis (MSRV)
Medium Semisolid Modification

Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10 Broth
Reinforced Clostridial Agar
Rogosa SL Agar
Rogosa SL Broth
Rose Bengal Agar Base/
Rose Bengal Antimicrobic Supplement C

SFP Agar Base
SPS Agar
SS Agar/Salmonella Shigella Agar
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar
Sabouraud Dextrose Broth
Selenite Broth
Selenite Cystine Broth
Sorbitol MacConkey Agar
w/Cefixime & Tellurite

Special Yeast and Mold Medium
m Staphylococcus Broth
Staphylococcus Medium 110
Sulfite Agar
TCBS Agar
TPEY Agar Base
TSN Agar
TT Broth Base, Hajna
Tetrathionate Broth Base
Tomato Juice Agar, Special
Tomato Juice Broth
Triple Sugar Iron (TSI) Agar
Tryptic (Trypticase) Soy Agar w/Lec &
Poly 80 (Microbial Content Test Agar)

661
Section IV
Application Tables

Food and Beverage Testing

Applications

57

a
is

ell
O1
lys

us

t
un
hig

cc /
r

s
cte

oli

c
nta
na

us
lus

o c ccu

Co
oc

ld
a/S
E. c
m
eA

ba

Mo
me

cil

loc

te
diu

t e r co
ell

a
ylo
rag
lus

ba

Pla
s/

on

ini
&
hy
ia

E n to
on
tri

rm

cto
mp

rio
ter

rep

st
cil

vir

rs
ve

ap

tal
os

lm
lifo

Ye
Vib
Lis
Ba

Be

La
En
Ca

St

Ye
To
Cl

St
Sa
Co
Products
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Broth
Tryptone Water
UVM Modified Listeria Enrichment Broth
Universal Beer Agar (UBA)
Universal Preenrichment Broth
VJ (Vogel & Johnson) Agar
Violet Red Bile Agar
Violet Red Bile Agar w/MUG
Violet Red Bile Glucose Agar
WL Differential Medium
WL Nutrient Broth
WL Nutrient Medium
Wort Agar
XLD Agar
XLT4 Agar Base/XLT4 Supplement
YM Agar
YM Broth
Yeast Extract Glucose Chloramphenicol Agar

*Available as a custom product.

662
 Application Tables

Media and Reagents Recommended for Campylobacter*

Isolation and Identification in Foods

1 2
FDA USDA/FSIS
Hunt Enrichment Broth
Bolton Broth + Horse Blood, Supplements and
+ Horse Blood Antibiotics
+ Antibiotics or
0.1% Peptone Water

Pre-enrichment Pre-enrichment
at 30C or 37C at 37C
for 4-5 hours for 4 hours

Enrichment Enrichment
at 42C at 42C
for 20-44 hours for 20 hours

Modified Campylobacter
Charcoal Differential Agar
or (MCCDA)

Abeyta-Hunt-Bark Agar (AHB) Modified Campylobacter

(Heart Infusion Agar + Yeast Blood-Free Selective Agar
Extract + Antibiotics) Base (CCDA)
Brucella-FBP Broth
(Brucella Broth + Additions)

Identification and Confirmation Tests

Catalase Test Growth on MacConkey Agar
Cephalothin Inhibition Hippurate Hydrolysis
Glucose Utilization H2S from Cysteine
Gram Stain Motility
Growth at 25C, 37C and 42C Nalidixic Acid Inhibition
Growth in 1% Glycine Nitrate Reduction Test
Growth in 3.5% NaCl Oxidase Test
Triple Sugar Iron Agar (TSI)

*Campylobacter sp. are microaerophilic bacteria. All media must be incubated under microaerophilic conditions using an anaerobic jar and
Campylobacter microaerophilic envelopes.

1. Hunt, Abeyta and Tran. 2000. Campylobacter. FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed., rev. A. AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
2. Ransom and Rose. 1998. Isolation, identification and enumeration of Campylobacter jejuni/coli from meat and poultry products. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food Safety and
Inspection Service, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, D.C.

663
Section IV
Application Tables

Media and Reagents Recommended for E. coli O157:H7

Isolation and Identification in Foods

1 2
FDA USDA/FSIS

mTSB
(TSB + Bile Salts #3 Modified EC Medium
Enrichment + Novobiocin Antimicrobic
+ Novobiocin Antimicrobic Supplement
+ Dipotassium Phosphate) Supplement
+ Additions

ELISA
Selective Plating Screening Test

TC SMAC
(Sorbitol MacConkey Agar
E Buffer
w/Tellurite, Cefixime)
(Buffered Peptone Water
+ Bovine Albumin
+ Tween 20)

TSAYE
(Tryptic Soy Agar Immunomagnetic
+ 0.6% Yeast Extract) Separation (IMS)
Selective Plating
Biochemical
Screening
Selective Chromogenic
Media for E. coli O157
Indole Test

Identification Tests
Cellobiose Ornithine Decarboxylase
Lysine Decarboxylase Simmons Citrate
Motility Triple Sugar Iron (TSI) Agar
MR-VP Tests

Serological Tests
E. Coli O Antiserum O157
E. Coli H Antiserum H7
Latex Kit for E. coli O157:H7

1. Hitchins, Feng, Watkins, Rippey and Chandler. 1998. Escherichia coli and the coliform bacteria. FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed., rev. A.
AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
2. Cray, Abbott, Beacorn and Benson. 2001. Detection, isolation and identification of Escherichia coli O157:H7 and O157:NM (nonmotile) from meat products.
Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed., rev. 2. Food Safety and Inspection Service, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, D.C.

664
 Application Tables

Media and Reagents Recommended for Listeria

Isolation and Identification in Foods

1 2
FDA USDA/FSIS

Primary
Buffered Listeria Enrichment UVM Modified
Enrichment Broth Base + Listeria Enrichment
Antimicrobics Broth

and a minimum of Secondary Enrichment

one of the following Fraser Broth

LPM Agar

Isolation/
Identification Modified Oxford
Oxford Agar LPM Agar Agar (MOX)
3+
(OXA) + Esculin + Fe

PALCAM Horse Blood Overlay Agar

Medium (HL)
(Columbia Blood Agar Base +
4% Horse Blood)

and
Tryptic Soy Agar +
Brain Heart Motility Test
0.6% Yeast Extract
Infusion (BHI) Medium
(TSAYE)

Identification and Confirmation Tests

Bile Esculin Agar Purple Broth Base
Brain Heart Infusion Agar + Dextrose
Brain Heart Infusion Broth + Esculin
CAMP Test + Maltose
Catalase Test + Mannitol
Gram Stain + Rhamnose
Motility Test + Xylose
MR-VP Tests Tryptic Soy Broth +
Nitrate Reduction Test 0.6% Yeast Extract
Oxidase Test (TSBYE)

Serological Tests
FA Buffer, Dried
Tryptose Broth/Agar
Listeria O Antiserum Poly
Listeria O Antiserum Type 1
Listeria O Antiserum Type 4

1. Hitchins. 2000. Listeria monocytogenes. FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed., rev. A. AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
2. U.S. Department of Agriculture. 2002. Isolation and identification of Listeria monocytogenes from red meat, poultry, egg and environmental
samples, MLG 8.03, rev. 3. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed. Food Safety and Inspection Service, U.S. Department of Agriculture,
Washington, D.C.

665
Section IV
Application Tables

Media and Reagents Recommended for Salmonella

Isolation and Identification in Meat and Poultry

FDA 1 USDA/FSIS 2

Pre-Enrichment
Lactose Broth Buffered Peptone Water

Selective Enrichment
Tetrathionate Rappaport- Tetrathionate Rappaport-Vassiliadis
Broth Vassiliadis Medium Broth, Hajna Broth

and and Selective Plating XLT4 Agar and

or
Bismuth Sulfite Xylose Lysine Hektoen Enteric Brilliant Green
Agar (BS) Desoxycholate Agar (HE) Double Modified Sulfa Agar
Agar (XLD) Lysine Iron Agar

Biochemical Screening
Triple Sugar Iron Agar (TSI)
Lysine Iron Agar (LIA)

Identification and Confirmation Tests

Dextrose Motility
Dulcitol MR-VP Test
Indole Test Phenol Red Tartrate Agar
KCN Broth Salicin
Lactose Simmons Citrate
Lysine Decarboxylase Sucrose
Malonate Urease Test

Serological Tests
Refer to BD Product Catalog
for complete listing of
Salmonella Antisera

1. Andrews and Hammack. 1998. Salmonella. FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed., rev. A. AOAC International, Gaithersburg, Md.
2. Rose. 2001. Isolation and identification of Salmonella from meat, poultry and egg products. Microbiology laboratory guidebook, 3rd ed., rev. 1. Food Safety
and Inspection Service, U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, D.C.

666
 Application Tables

Media and Reagents Recommended for Vibrio cholerae

Isolation and Identification in Foods1

Enrichment
Alkaline Peptone Water

Selective
and (optional)
Plating

Thiosulfate-Citrate- Modified Cellobiose-

Bile Salts-Sucrose Polymyxin B-Colistin
Agar (TCBS) Agar (mCPC)

and (optional) Purification

Tryptone Salt Agar
or Gelatin Agar (GA)
Tryptic Soy Agar (TSA) + + Gelatin Salt Agar (GS)
2% NaCl

Identification and Confirmation Tests

Arginine Dihydrolase Growth at 42C
Arginine Glucose Slant (AGS) Kligler Iron Agar
Purple Broth Base w/2-3% NaCl Lysine Decarboxylase
+ Arabinose Motility
+ Cellobiose ONPG
+ Glucose Ornithine Decarboxylase
+ Lactose Oxidase Test
+ Mannitol Salt Tolerance
+ Mannose Triple Sugar Iron Agar
+ Sucrose 1% Tryptone Broth
Gelatin Agar 1% Tryptone Broth + 3% NaCl
Gelatin Salt Agar Voges-Proskauer Test
Gram Stain Urea Hydrolysis

Serological Tests
Vibrio Cholerae Antiserum Poly
Vibrio Cholerae Antiserum Inaba
Vibrio Cholerae Antiserum Ogawa

1. Elliot, Kaysner, Jacson and Tamplin. 1998. Vibrio cholerae, V. parahaemolyticus, V. vulnificus and other Vibrio sp. FDA bacteriological analytical manual, 8th ed., rev. A. AOAC
International, Gaithersburg, Md.

667
Section IV
Application Tables

Membrane Filtration Testing

Applications

ting
Tes

g
stin
ge

r Te
era

te
Bev

Wa
Products

m Brilliant Green Broth

m E Agar
m EI Agar
m Endo Agar LES
m Endo Broth MF
m Enterococcus Agar
m FC Agar
m FC Basal Medium
m FC Broth Base
M-Green Yeast and Mold Agar
M-Green Yeast and Mold Broth
m HPC Agar
MI Agar
M-PA-C Agar
m Plate Count Broth
m Staphylococcus Broth
m TEC Agar
m TEC Agar, Modified
m TGE Broth

668
 Application Tables

Microbial Limit Testing

Applications

nt
oli

ial bic

ld
aur coccu
nos s

Cou
a

Mo
ia c

a
aer omon

o
la

eus

Mic al Aer
nel

nd
ich

lo
ugi

phy

st a
rob
mo
ud
her

Tot
Pse

Sta

Yea
Sal
Esc
Products*
Baird-Parker Agar
Bismuth Sulfite Agar
Brilliant Green Agar
Cetrimide/Pseudosel Agar
Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine
Lactose Broth
MacConkey Agar/MacConkey II Agar
Mannitol Salt Agar
Potato Dextrose Agar
Pseudomonas Agar F/Flo Agar
(Pseudomonas Agar for Detection of Fluorescin)
Pseudomonas Agar P/Tech Agar
(Pseudomonas Agar for Detection of Pyocyanin)
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar
Selenite Cystine Broth
TAT Broth Base
(Fluid Casein Digest-Soy Lec-Poly 20)
Tetrathionate Broth Base
Triple Sugar Iron (TSI) Agar
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar
(Soybean-Casein Digest Agar Media)
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Broth
(Fluid Soybean-Casein Digest Media)
VJ (Vogel & Johnson) Agar
XLD Agar

*As specified in The United States Pharmacopeia .

669
Section IV
Application Tables

Molecular Genetics
LB Media NZ Media General Media
LB Agar, Lennox Casein Digest 2YT
LB Agar, Miller NZCYM Broth M9 Minimal Salts
LB Broth, Lennox M9 Minimal Salts, 5
NZYM Broth
LB Broth, Miller MacConkey Agar Base
Luria Agar Base, Miller Minimal Agar Davis
Minimal Broth Davis w/o Dextrose
Luria Broth Base, Miller
S.O.B. Medium
Select APS LB Broth Base
Terrific Broth
Select APS Super Broth Base YPD Agar
Super Broth II YPD Broth
Select Soytone Yeast Nitrogen Base
Yeast Nitrogen Base
w/o Amino Acids
Yeast Nitrogen Base w/o
Amino Acids and Ammonium
Sulfate

670
 Application Tables

Pharmaceutical Testing
Applications

y
ssa
y

ting t
ssa

g
Wa utical
Tes l Limi

stin

dA
Aci /
ss

in
e
tic A

Effe ervativ
ene

Am Vitam
ter

y Te
Ind ical
ors

ce
ia

rma
rob

ctiv
ibio

icat

ino
log

rilit
s
Pre
Mic

Pha
Ant

Bio

Ste
Products
AC Broth
AK Agar #2
APT Agar
APT Broth
Antibiotic Medium 1
Antibiotic Medium 2
Antibiotic Medium 3
Antibiotic Medium 4
Antibiotic Medium 5
Antibiotic Medium 8
Antibiotic Medium 9
Antibiotic Medium 10
Antibiotic Medium 11
Antibiotic Medium 12
Antibiotic Medium 13
Antibiotic Medium 19
B12 Assay Medium
B12 Culture Agar
B12 Inoculum Broth
Baird-Parker Agar
Biotin Assay Medium
Bismuth Sulfite Agar
Brilliant Green Agar
Cetrimide/Pseudosel Agar
Choline Assay Medium
CHROMagar Salmonella
CHROMagar Staph aureus
Cystine Assay Medium
Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium w/Beef Extract
Folic Acid Assay Medium
Folic Acid Casei Medium
Folic AOAC Medium
m-HPC Agar
Inositol Assay Medium
Lactobacilli Agar AOAC
Lactobacilli Broth AOAC
Lactose Broth
Lysine Assay Medium
MI Agar
MacConkey Agar
Mannitol Salt Agar
Methionine Assay Medium
Micro Assay Culture Agar
Micro Inoculum Broth
Niacin Assay Medium
671
Section IV
Application Tables

Pharmaceutical Testing
Applications

y
ssa
y

ting t
ssa

g
Wa utical
Tes l Limi

stin

dA
Aci /
ss

in
e
tic A

Effe ervativ
ene

Am Vitam
ter

y Te
Ind ical
ors

ce
ia

rma
rob

ctiv
ibio

icat

ino
log

rilit
s
Pre
Mic

Pha
Ant

Bio

Ste
Products
Pantothenate Assay Medium
Pantothenate Medium AOAC
Plate Count Agar/Standard Methods Agar
Potato Dextrose Agar
Pseudomonas Agar F/Flo Agar
Pseudomonas Agar P/Tech Agar
Pyridoxine Y Medium
R2A Agar
Riboflavin Assay Medium
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar
Sabouraud Dextrose Broth
Selenite Cystine Broth
*Sterility Bottles -
Fluid A/Peptone Water (0.1%)
Fluid D/Peptone Water (0.1%) w/Poly 80
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Broth
TAT Broth Base
Tetrathionate Broth Base
Thiamine Assay Medium
Thiamine Assay Medium LV
Thioglycollate, Brewer Modified
Thioglycollate Medium, Fluid
Thioglycollate Medium, NIH
Thioglycollate Medium w/o Dextrose
Thioglycollate Medium w/o Indicator
Thioglycollate Medium w/o Dextrose or Indicator
Triple Sugar Iron (TSI) Agar
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar
Tryptic (Trypticase) Soy Agar w/Lec &
Poly 80 (Microbial Content Test Agar)
Tryptic/ Trypticase Soy Broth
Tryptic Soy Broth, Select APS
VJ (Vogel & Johnson) Agar
Vitamin B12 Assay Medium
XLD Agar
*Sterility Bottles available in various sizes and bottle configurations.

672
 Application Tables

Sterility Testing

Products
AC Broth
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium w/Beef Extract
NIH Thioglycollate Medium (USP Alternative Thioglycollate)
*Sterility Bottles -
Fluid A/Peptone Water (0.1%)
Fluid D/Peptone Water (0.1%) w/Poly 80
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Broth
TAT Broth Base
Thioglycollate, Brewer Modified
Thioglycollate Medium w/o Dextrose
Thioglycollate Medium w/o Indicator
Thioglycollate Medium w/o Dextrose or Indicator
Tryptic (Trypticase) Soy Agar w/Lec &
Poly 80 (Microbial Content Test Agar)
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Broth
Tryptic Soy Broth, Select APS
*Sterility Bottles available in various sizes and bottle configurations.

673
Section IV
Application Tables

Veterinary Testing
Applications

Med se

us
ia

ld
rium
eric ive
ture rpo

cus
nas

occ

Mo
Ent egat

g el /
m

Shi nella
Cul ral Pu

s
la

coc
mo
pira

cte

la

loc
diu

nd
sel
la

mN

udo

pto
oba

st a
phy
tos
cel

stri

nci

mo

rio
e
Gen

Stre
Bru

Lep

Pse
Gra

Myc
Fra

Vib

Yea
Clo

Sta
Sal
Products
Azide Blood Agar Base
Baird-Parker Agar Base/
EY Tellurite Enrichment
BiGGY Agar
Bismuth Sulfite Agar
Blood Agar Base No. 2
Brain Heart Infusion
Brain Heart Infusion Agar
Brilliant Green Agar
Brucella Agar
Brucella Broth
Cetrimide/Pseudosel Agar
CHROMagar Orientation
CHROMagar Salmonella
CHROMagar Staph aureus
Clostidium Difficile Selective Agar
Columbia Blood Agar Base
Columbia CNA Agar
Cooked Meat Medium
Corn Meal Agar
Cystine Heart Agar
DNase Test Agar
DNase Test Agar w/Methyl Green
DNase Test Agar w/Toluidine Blue
Dermatophyte Test Medium
Enterococcosel Agar
Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine
Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Modified
Eugon Agar
Eugon Broth/Eugonbroth
Fletcher Medium Base
Fluid Thioglycollate Medium
Heart Infusion Agar
Hektoen Enteric Agar
Herrold's Egg Yolk Agar
w/Mycobactin J and ANV
Herrold's Egg Yolk Agar
w/o Mycobactin J and w/ANV
Leptospira Enrichment EMJH
Leptospira Medium Base EMJH
Lowenstein Jensen Medium Base
Lysine Iron Agar
MIO Medium
MR-VP Medium/MR-VP Broth

674
 Application Tables

Veterinary Testing
Applications

Med se

us
ia

ld
rium
eric ive
ture rpo

cus
nas

occ

Mo
Ent egat

g el /
m

Shi nella
Cul ral Pu

s
la

coc
mo
pira

cte

la

loc
diu

nd
sel
la

mN

udo

pto
oba

st a
phy
tos
cel

stri

nci

mo

rio
e
Gen

Stre
Bru

Lep

Pse
Gra

Myc
Fra

Vib

Yea
Clo

Sta
Sal
Products
MacConkey Agar
MacConkey Sorbitol Agar/
MacConkey II Agar w/Sorbitol

Malt Agar
Malt Extract Agar
Mannitol Salt Agar
McClung Toabe Agar Base
Moeller Decarboxylase Broth Base
Mycological Agar/Mycophil Agar
OF Basal Medium
Phenol Red Broth Base
Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar (PEA)
Potato Dextrose Agar
Potato Infusion Agar
Pseudomonas Agar F/Flo Agar
Pseudomonas Agar P/Tech Agar
Pseudomonas Isolation Agar
Purple Agar Base
Purple Broth Base
Reinforced Clostridial Medium
SFP Agar Base
SPS Agar
SS Agar/
Salmonella Shigella Agar

Sabouraud Dextrose Agar
Sabouraud Dextrose Broth
Schaedler Agar
Selenite Broth
Selenite Cystine Broth
Simmons Citrate Agar
Staphylococcus Medium 110
TCBS Agar
Tellurite Glycine Agar
Tetrathionate Broth Base
Triple Sugar Iron (TSI) Agar
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Broth
Tryptose Agar
Tryptose Broth
Tryptose Phosphate Broth
Urea Agar Base
VJ (Vogel & Johnson) Agar
XLD Agar
YM Agar
YM Broth

675
Section IV
Application Tables

Vitamin Assays

Products
APT Agar
APT Broth
B12 Assay Medium
B12 Culture Agar
B12 Inoculum Broth
Biotin Assay Medium
Choline Assay Medium
Cystine Assay Medium
Folic Acid Assay Medium
Folic Acid Casei Medium
Folic AOAC Medium
Inositol Assay Medium
Lactobacilli Agar AOAC
Lactobacilli Broth AOAC
Lysine Assay Medium
Methionine Assay Medium
Micro Assay Culture Agar
Micro Inoculum Broth
Niacin Assay Medium
Pantothenate Assay Medium
Pantothenate Medium AOAC
Pyridoxine Y Medium
Riboflavin Assay Medium
Thiamine Assay Medium
Thiamine Assay Medium LV
Vitamin B12 Assay Medium

676
 Application Tables

Water/Wastewater Testing
Applications

s/
tal

us
cus
E. c liform
r

- To

Cou Plate
cte

nas

occ
coc
oli
oba

Stre Fecal

la

s
ms

mo

nt
ella

loc

ani d
o

sm
nel

rd

e
al C

pto

la
ifor
pyl

udo

ess
nda

phy
ion

gel
mo

rio
gi
Fec
Cam

Col

Str
Fun

Leg

Org
Pse

Shi

Sta

Sta

Vib
Sal
Products
A-1 Medium
Azide Dextrose Broth
BAGG Broth
BCYE Agar
Baird-Parker Agar Base w/
EY Tellurite Enrichment
Beef Extract
Bile Esculin Agar
Bismuth Sulfite Agar
Brain Heart Infusion
Brilliant Green Agar
Brilliant Green Agar Modified

(Edel-Kempelmacher)
m Brilliant Green Broth
Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2%
Campylobacter Agar Base/
Antibiotic Supplement Skirrow
Cetrimide/Pseudosel Agar
Corn Meal Agar
Czapek Solution Agar
Desoxycholate Lactose Agar
m E Agar
EC Medium
EC Medium w/MUG
m EI Agar
EVA Broth
m Endo Agar LES
m Endo Broth MF
Enterococcosel Agar
(Bile Esculin Azide Agar)
m Enterococcus Agar
Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine
Esculin Iron Agar
m FC Agar
m FC Basal Medium
m FC Broth Base
m HPC Agar
KF Streptococcus Agar
Lactose Broth
Lactose Peptone Broth
Lauryl Tryptose Broth/
Lauryl Sulfate Broth

677
Section IV
Application Tables

Water/Wastewater Testing
Applications

s/
tal

us
cus
E. c orm
r

Cou Plate
- To
cte

nas

occ
coc
olif
oli
oba

Stre Fecal

la

s
ms

mo

nt
ella

Org ssed
loc

sm
nel

rd
al C

pto

la
ifor
pyl

udo

nda

phy
ion

ani
g el
mo

rio
gi

e
Fec
Cam

Col

Str
Fun

Leg

Pse

Vib
Shi

Sta

Sta
Sal
Products
Lauryl Tryptose Broth w/MUG/
Lauryl Sulfate Broth w/MUG
MI Agar
MR-VP Broth
MacConkey Agar
MacConkey Sorbitol Agar/
MacConkey II Agar w/Sorbitol
MacConkey Broth
Minerals Modified Glutamate Medium
Moeller Decarboxylase Broth Base
Motility Test Medium
Muller Kauffmann Tetrathionate
Broth Base
Nutrient Agar w/MUG
M -PA-C Agar
Plate Count Agar/
Standard Methods Agar
m Plate Count Broth
Presence-Absence Broth
R2A Agar
Rapapport-Vasilliadis R10 Broth
Rosolic Acid
SF Medium
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar, Emmons
Selenite Broth
Selenite Cystine Broth
m Staphylococcus Broth
TCBS Agar
m TEC Agar
m TEC Agar, Modified
m TGE Broth
Tetrathionate Broth Base
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Agar
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Broth
Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar
Tryptone (Tryptophan) Water (1%)
XLD Agar

678
 Product Tables

Bactrol Plus Quality Control Organisms*

(5 vials/pkg)

Catalog Catalog
Organism ATCC Number Organism ATCC Number
Acinetobacter baumannii 19606 237932 Enterobacter cloacae 700323 237525
Acinetobacter lwoffii 17925 237401 Enterobacter sakazakii 51329 237526
Acinetobacter species 49137 237402 Enterococcus avium 14025 237527
Acinetobacter species 49139 237403 Enterococcus avium 49464 237528
Acinetobacter species 49466 237404 Enterococcus casseliflavus 700327 237529
Actinomyces odontolyticus 17929 237405 Enterococcus durans 6056 237532
Actinomyces pyogenes 19411 237406 Enterococcus durans 11576 237530
Aerococcus viridans 700406 237407 Enterococcus durans 49135 237531
Aeromonas caviae 15468 237408 Enterococcus faecalis 19433 237936
Aeromonas hydrophila 7966 237410 Enterococcus faecalis 29212 237911
Aeromonas hydrophila 35654 237409 Enterococcus faecalis 49452 237533
Alcaligenes faecalis 8750 237942 Enterococcus faecalis 51299 237534
Alcaligenes faecalis 19018 237943 Enterococcus gallinarum 700425 237535
Alcaligenes faecalis 35655 237411 Erysipelothrix rhusiopathiae 19414 237536
Arcanobacterium haemolyticum 9345 237425 Escherichia coli 4157 237539
Arcanobacterium pyogenes 49698 237426 Escherichia coli (USP, QC testing) 8739 237540
Aspergillus niger 16404 237427 Escherichia coli 11775 237949
Bacillus brevis 8246 237428 Escherichia coli 25922 237912
Bacillus licheniformis 12759 237429 Escherichia coli 33605 237537
Bacillus sphaericus 4525 237430 Escherichia coli (Serotype O157) 35150 237950
Bacillus subtilis (USP sterility testing) 6633 237431 Escherichia coli 35218 237538
Bacteroides distasonis 8503 237432 Exiguobacterium sp. 49676 237541
Bacteroides fragilis 23745 237433 Finegoldia magna 29328 237542
Bacteroides fragilis 25285 237900 Fluoribacter bozemanae 33217 237543
Bacteroides ovatus 8483 237434 Fusobacterium mortiferum 25557 237951
Bacteroides thetaiotaomicron 29741 237435 Fusobacterium nucleatum 25586 237544
Bacteroides uniformis 8492 237436 Fusobacterium varium 27725 237545
Bacteroides ureolyticus 33387 237437 Gardnerella vaginalis 14018 237546
Bacteroides vulgatus (USP sterility testing) 8482 237438 Gardnerella vaginalis 49145 237547
Bordetella bronchiseptica 10580 237466 Haemophilus aphrophilus 19415 237550
Bordetella pertussis 9340 237944 Haemophilus influenzae 9006 237552
Brevundimonas diminuta 11568 237468 Haemophilus influenzae Type B 10211 237553
Brevundimonas diminuta 19146 237467 Haemophilus influenzae 35056 237902
Burkholderia cepacia 25416 237470 Haemophilus influenzae 49144 237551
Burkholderia cepacia 25608 237469 Haemophilus influenzae 49247 237952
Campylobacter jejuni 33291 237472 Haemophilus influenzae 49766 237953
Candida albicans 10231 237474 Haemophilus parahaemolyticus 10014 237554
Candida albicans 14053 237922 Haemophilus parainfluenzae 7901 237555
Candida albicans 60193 237475 Haemophilus paraphrophilus 49146 237556
Candida albicans 66027 237476 Haemophilus paraphrophilus 49917 237557
Candida glabrata 2001 237478 Kingella denitrificans 33394 237572
Candida glabrata 15126 237477 Klebsiella oxytoca 8724 237576
Candida glabrata 66032 237479 Klebsiella oxytoca 49131 237574
Candida guilliermondii 6260 237480 Klebsiella oxytoca 700324 237575
Candida kefyr 2512 237482 Klebsiella pneumoniae 10031 237577
Candida kefyr 8553 237484 Klebsiella pneumoniae 13883 237905
Candida kefyr 66028 237483 Klebsiella pneumoniae 27736 237578
Candida kefyr 204093 237481 Klebsiella pneumoniae subsp. pneumoniae 33495 237579
Candida krusei 14243 237485 Klebsiella pneumoniae subsp. pneumoniae 35657 237580
Candida lusitaniae 34449 237486 Klebsiella pneumoniae subsp. pneumoniae 700603 237954
Candida tropicalis 750 237490 Kocuria rosea 186 237581
Candida tropicalis 13803 237487 Lactobacillus acidophilus 314 237582
Candida tropicalis 66029 237489 Leclercia adecarboxylata 23216 237583
Candida tropicalis 201380 237488 Leclercia adecarboxylata 700325 237584
Candida utilis 9950 237491 Legionella pneumophila subsp. pneumophila 33152 237586
Chryseobacterium meningosepticum 13253 237494 Listeria grayi 25401 237587
Citrobacter braakii 10625 237495 Listeria monocytogenes 7644 237588
Citrobacter freundii 8090 237933 Listeria monocytogenes 19115 237955
Citrobacter freundii 8454 237945 Micrococcus luteus 533 237591
Citrobacter koseri 27028 237496 Micrococcus luteus 4698 237589
Clostridium histolyticum 19401 237497 Micrococcus luteus (FDA, USP) 9341 237956
Clostridium perfringens 13124 237901 Micrococcus luteus 49732 237590
Clostridium sordellii 9714 237498 Micrococcus species 700405 237592
Clostridium sporogenes 3584 237499 Micromonas micros 33270 237593
Clostridium sporogenes (USP, QC testing) 11437 237946 Moraxella catarrhalis 8176 237610
Corynebacterium pseudodiphtheriticum 10700 237502 Moraxella catarrhalis 23246 237605
Corynebacterium pseudodiphtheriticum 10701 237503 Moraxella catarrhalis 25238 237606
Cryptococcus albidus 66030 237504 Moraxella catarrhalis 25240 237607
Cryptococcus albidus var. albidus 34140 237505 Morganella morganii 25830 237611
Cryptococcus humicolus 9949 237506 Neisseria gonorrhoeae 19424 237613
Cryptococcus laurentii 18803 237508 Neisseria gonorrhoeae 31426 237614
Cryptococcus laurentii 66036 237507 Neisseria gonorrhoeae 43069 237615
Cryptococcus neoformans 66031 237512 Neisseria gonorrhoeae 43070 237903
Cryptococcus neoformans 32045 237947 Neisseria gonorrhoeae 49926 237616
Cryptococcus neoformans 204092 237509 Neisseria gonorrhoeae 49981 237617
Cryptococcus uniguttulatus 66033 237513 Neisseria lactamica 23970 237937
Edwardsiella tarda 15947 237948 Neisseria lactamica 23971 237618
Enterobacter aerogenes 13048 237904 Neisseria lactamica 49142 237619
Enterobacter cloacae 13047 237522 Neisseria meningitidis 13077 237621
Enterobacter cloacae 23355 237930 Neisseria meningitidis 13090 237938
Enterobacter cloacae 35030 237523 Neisseria meningitidis Group C 13102 237622
Enterobacter cloacae 49141 237524 Neisseria mucosa 19695 237623
679
Section IV
Product Tables

Bactrol Plus Quality Control Organisms*

(5 vials/pkg)

Catalog Catalog
Organism ATCC Number Organism ATCC Number
Neisseria sicca 9913 237939 Staphylococcus aureus 25178 237678
Oligella ureolytica 43534 237627 Staphylococcus aureus 25923 237914
Oligella urethralis 17960 237628 Staphylococcus aureus 29213 237915
Paenibacillus polymyxa 842 237631 Staphylococcus aureus 49476 237679
Pasteurella aerogenes 27883 237632 Staphylococcus aureus subsp. aureus 33591 237680
Peptostreptococcus anaerobius 27337 237634 Staphylococcus capitis 35661 237682
Peptostreptococcus asaccharolyticus 29743 237635 Staphylococcus epidermidis 12228 237908
Plesiomonas shigelloides 14029 237636 Staphylococcus epidermidis 14990 237683
Plesiomonas shigelloides 51903 237637 Staphylococcus epidermidis 49134 237684
Porphyromonas gingivalis 33277 237638 Staphylococcus haemolyticus 29970 237685
Porphyromonas levii 29147 237639 Staphylococcus hominis 27844 237686
Prevotella intermedia 25611 237957 Staphylococcus lentus 700403 237687
Propionibacterium acnes (USP, QC testing) 11827 237640 Staphylococcus lugdunensis 700328 237688
Proteus mirabilis 7002 237645 Staphylococcus saprophyticus 15305 237971
Proteus mirabilis 12453 237641 Staphylococcus saprophyticus 35552 237689
Proteus mirabilis 25933 237642 Staphylococcus saprophyticus 49453 237690
Proteus mirabilis 35659 237643 Staphylococcus saprophyticus 49907 237691
Proteus mirabilis 43071 237644 Staphylococcus sciuri 29061 237692
Proteus vulgaris (OX19 strain) 6380 237646 Staphylococcus sciuri subsp. sciuri 29060 237693
Proteus vulgaris 6896 237648 Staphylococcus simulans 27851 237694
Proteus vulgaris 8427 237649 Staphylococcus warneri 49454 237695
Proteus vulgaris 9484 237958 Staphylococcus xylosus 29971 237696
Proteus vulgaris 13315 237906 Staphylococcus xylosus 35033 237697
Proteus vulgaris 49132 237647 Staphylococcus xylosus 35663 237698
Prototheca wickerhamii 16529 237650 Staphylococcus xylosus 49148 237699
Providencia alcalifaciens 51902 237651 Staphylococcus xylosus 700404 237700
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 9027 237959 Stenotrophomonas maltophilia 13637 237972
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 10145 237652 Stenotrophomonas maltophilia 17666 237701
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 27853 237913 Stenotrophomonas maltophilia 49130 237702
Pseudomonas aeruginosa 35032 237653 Stenotrophomonas maltophilia 51331 237703
Pseudomonas stutzeri 17588 237960 Streptococcus agalactiae 12386 237705
Saccharomyces cerevisiae 9763 237961 Streptococcus agalactiae 13813 237909
Salmonella choleraesuis 6962 237657 Streptococcus agalactiae 27956 237704
Salmonella choleraesuis 8387 237658 Streptococcus bovis 9809 237709
Salmonella choleraesuis 9270 237659 Streptococcus bovis 49133 237706
Salmonella choleraesuis 13311 237963 Streptococcus bovis 49147 237707
Salmonella choleraesuis subsp. arizonae 13314 237964 Streptococcus bovis 49475 237708
Salmonella choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis 10708 237660 Streptococcus equi Group C 9528 237710
Salmonella choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis 11511 237661 Streptococcus equi subsp. zooepidemicus 700400 237711
Salmonella choleraesuis subsp. choleraesuis 13076 237962 Streptococcus equisimilis 9542 237713
Salmonella choleraesuis Group B 8759 237662 Streptococcus equisimilis 35666 237712
Salmonella typhimurium 14028 237907 Streptococcus mutans 35668 237714
Serratia liquefaciens 27592 237965 Streptococcus oralis formerly mitis 9811 237715
Serratia marcescens 8100 237931 Streptococcus pneumoniae 6301 237719
Serratia marcescens 13880 237966 Streptococcus pneumoniae 6303 237940
Serratia odorifera 33077 237667 Streptococcus pneumoniae 6305 237921
Serratia rubidaea 33670 237668 Streptococcus pneumoniae 27336 237716
Shewanella putrefaciens 8071 237670 Streptococcus pneumoniae 49136 237717
Shewanella putrefaciens 49138 237669 Streptococcus pneumoniae 49150 237718
Shigella boydii 9207 237671 Streptococcus pneumoniae 49619 237974
Shigella dysenteriae 9361 237967 Streptococcus pyogenes 19615 237910
Shigella dysenteriae 13313 237672 Streptococcus salivarius 13419 237720
Shigella flexneri 9199 237968 Streptococcus sanguinis 10556 237721
Shigella flexneri 12022 237934 Streptococcus uberis 9927 237723
Shigella sonnei 9290 237674 Streptococcus uberis 700407 237722
Shigella sonnei 25931 237935 Trichophyton mentagrophytes 9533 237725
Sphingobacterium multivorum 35656 237675 Trichosporum mucoides 204094 237726
Sphingobacterium spiritovorum 33861 237676 Vibrio cholerae 9459 237975
Staphylococcus aureus subsp. aureus 6538 237970 Yarrowia lipolytica 9773 237728
Staphylococcus aureus subsp. aureus (FDA strain) 6538P 237681 Yersinia kristensenii 33639 237729
Staphylococcus aureus subsp. aureus 43300 237969
*For additional information on Bactrol Plus Sets and QualiSwab Quality Control Organisms, refer to our product catalog.

680
 Product Tables

Culture Media - Antimicrobial Susceptibility Testing

Products
Anaerobe MIC Broth
Brain Heart Infusion
Brucella Agar (supplemented with lysed sheep blood,
hemin and vitamin K1)
Enriched Thioglycollate Medium (supplemented with
sodium bicarbonate or a marble chip)
Enterococcosel Agar with Vancomycin, 8 mcg/mL
GC II Agar with IsoVitaleX Enrichment
Haemophilus Test Medium Agar
Haemophilus Test Medium Broth
Mueller Hinton Agar
Mueller Hinton Agar with 5% Sheep Blood
Mueller Hinton II Agar
Mueller Hinton Broth
Mueller Hinton II Broth
Mueller Hinton II Broth with Lysed Horse Blood
Mueller Hinton II Broth with 2% Sodium Chloride
Oxacillin Screen Agar
Tryptic/Trypticase Soy Broth
Vancomycin Screen Agar
Wilkins Chalgren Agar

Culture Media - General Purpose

Products
Blood Agar Base No. 2 Heart Infusion Agar Tryptic Soy Blood Agar Base EH

Brain Heart Infusion Heart Infusion Broth Tryptic/ Trypticase Soy Agar

Brain Heart Infusion Agar Infusion Agar Trypticase Soy Agar with
5% Sheep Blood
Brain Heart Infusion Agar, Modified Infusion Broth Trypticase Soy Agar with Lecithin
and Polysorbate 80
Brain Heart Infusion Broth, Modified Nutrient Agar Trypticase Soy Broth with
10% NaCl
Brain Heart Infusion without Nutrient Agar 1.5% Trypticase Soy Broth with
Dextrose 5% Fildes
Columbia Agar Base Nutrient Broth Trypticase Soy Broth with Lecithin
and Polysorbate 80
Columbia Blood Agar Base Schaedler Agar Trypticase Soy Broth without
Dextrose
Columbia Blood Agar Base EH Schaedler Agar with Vitamin K1 Tryptose Agar
and 5% Sheep Blood
Columbia Agar with 5% Sheep Blood Schaedler Broth with TTC Tryptose Blood Agar Base

Columbia Anaerobe 5% Sheep Schaedler CNA Agar Tryptose Broth

Blood Agar
Columbia CNA Agar Schaedler KV Agar with Tryptose Phosphate Broth
5% Sheep Blood
Columbia CNA Agar with 5% Sheep Thioglycollate Medium without TSA Blood Agar Base No. 2
Blood Indicator
Columbia PNA Agar with 5% Sheep Thioglycollate Medium, Veal Infusion Agar
Blood Brewer Modified
Columbia Broth Thioglycollate Medium (Fluid), Veal Infusion Broth
Enriched
GC Agar Base Thioglycollate Medium (Fluid),
Enriched w/Vitamin K1 & Hemin

681
Section IV
Product Tables

Culture Media - Supplements/Selective Agents

Culture Medium Supplement Agent Concentration per Vial
Baird-Parker Agar Base EY Tellurite Enrichment Egg Yolk emulsion containing
Potassium Tellurite
Campylobacter Agar Base Campylobacter Antimicrobic Vancomycin - Polymyxin B - Trimethoprim 5 mg/1,250 units/2.5 mg per 5 mL vial
Supplement Skirrow
Campylobacter Agar Base Campylobacter Antimicrobic Vancomycin - Polymyxin B - Trimethoprim - 5 mg/1,250 units/2.5 mg/
Supplement Blaser Cephalothin - Amphotericin B 7.5 mg/1 mg per 5 mL vial
Cooke Rose Bengal Agar Antimicrobic Vial A Chlortetracycline 25 mg
Demi-Fraser Broth Base Fraser Broth Supplement Ferric Ammonium Citrate 0.5 g
Dubos Broth Base Dubos Medium Albumin Solution of Albumin Fraction V (from bovine 5% solution of albumin fraction V/
plasma) and Dextrose in normal saline 7.5% dextrose in normal saline
Dubos Oleic Agar Base Dubos Oleic Albumin Complex Solution of alkalinized Oleic Acid in a 0.05% solution of oleic acid in a
solution of Albumin Fraction V 5% solution of albumin fraction V
in normal saline
EC Medium, Modified Novobiocin Antimicrobic Novobiocin 20 mg
Supplement
m FC Agar/m FC Broth Base Rosolic Acid Rosolic Acid 1.0 g
Fraser Broth Base Fraser Broth Supplement Ferric Ammonium Citrate 0.5 g
GC Media VCA Inhibitor Vancomycin - Colistin - Anisomycin 400 mcg/750 mcg/2.0 mg
GC Media VCAT Inhibitor Vancomycin - Colistin - Anisomycin - 400 mcg/750 mcg/2.0 mg/5 mcg
Trimethoprim Lactate
GC Media VCN Inhibitor Vancomycin - Colistin - Nystatin 300 mcg/750 mcg/1,250 units
GC Media VCNT Inhibitor Vancomycin - Colistin - Nystatin - 300 mcg/750 mcg/1,250 units/
Trimethoprim Lactate 5 mcg
GC Media Supplement B Sterile yeast concentrate containing
V and X factors
GC Media Supplement VX Sterile concentrate of essential growth
factors
GC Media IsoVitaleX Enrichment Chemically defined supplement containing
V factor

GC Media Hemoglobin Solution 2% Hemoglobin provides the X factor 2%

KF Streptococcus Agar TTC Solution 1% 2,3,5-Triphenyl Tetrazolium Chloride 1%

KL Virulence Agar KL Virulence Enrichment Casamino Acids - Glycerol - Tween 80 1 g/1 mL/1 mL per 100 mL
Taxo KL Antitoxin Strips Antitoxin to diphtheria toxin
LPM Agar Base Listeria Selective Supplement Moxalactam 20 mg
Leptospira Medium Base EMJH Leptospira Enrichment EMJH Solution of Albumin, Polysorbate 80 and
additional growth factors for Leptospira
MYP Agar Antimicrobic Vial P Polymyxin B 30,000 units
McClung Toabe Agar Base Egg Yolk Enrichment 50% Sterile concentrated egg yolk emulsion 50% egg yolk/50% saline
Middlebrook 7H9 Broth Middlebrook ADC Enrichment Albumin Fraction V, Bovine - 5 g/2 g/0.003 g per 100 mL
Dextrose - Catalase (Beef)
Middlebrook 7H10 Agar Middlebrook OADC Enrichment Oleic Acid - Albumin Fraction V, Bovine - 0.05g/ 5 g/2 g/0.0004 g/0.85 g
Dextrose - Catalase (beef) - Sodium per 100 mL
Chloride
Mitis Salivarius Agar Tellurite Solution 1% Potassium Tellurite Solution 1%
OGYE Agar Base Antimicrobic Vial Oxytetracycline Oxytetracycline 100 mg
Oxford Medium Base Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement Cyclohexamide - Colistin Sulfate - 400 mg/20 mg/
Acriflavine - Cefotetan - Fosfomycin 5 mg/2 mg/10 mg
Oxford Medium Base Modified Oxford Antimicrobic Moxalactam - Colistin Sulfate 20 mg/10 mg
Supplement
PALCAM Medium Base PALCAM Antimicrobic Ceftozidime 40 mg
Supplement
PKU Test Agar PKU Subtilis Spore Suspension Standardized, stable suspension of
Bacillus subtilis ATCC 6633
PPLO Agar/PPLO Broth w/o CV Mycoplasma Supplement Horse Serum, Dessicated - Yeast Extract 1.6 g/0.01 g
PPLO Agar/PPLO Broth w/o CV Mycoplasma Enrichment Horse Serum - Yeast Extract - 20 mL/10 mL/
w/o Penicillin Thallium Acetate 50 mg
Rappaport-Vassiliadis (MSRV) Novobiocin Antimicrobic Novobiocin 20 mg
Medium, Semisolid Modification Supplement
Rose Bengal Agar Base Rose Bengal Antimicrobic Chloramphenicol 0.05 g
Supplement C
SFP Agar Base Egg Yolk Enrichment 50% Sterile Concentrated Egg Yolk Emulsion 50% egg yolk/50% saline
Antimicrobic Vial K Kanamycin 25,000 mcg
Antimicrobic Vial P Polymyxin B 30,000 units
Spirit Blue Agar Lipase Reagent Lipid suspension containing a mixture
of Tributyrin and Polysorbate 80
Tellurite Glycine Agar Tellurite Solution 1% Potassium Tellurite Solution 1%
Tinsdale Base Tinsdale Enrichment Desiccated Contains Bovine Serum, L-cystine,
Sodium Hydroxide, Sodium Thiosulfate
and Potassium Tellurite
XLT4 Agar Base XLT4 Supplement Sodium 7 - ethyl - 2 - methyl - 4 -
undecyl sulfate (Tergitol 4)
Yersinia Selective Agar Base (CIN) Yersinia Antimicrobic Cefsulodin - Novobiocin 4 mg/2.5 mg
Supplement CN

682
 Product Tables

Peptones and Hydrolysates

Product Name 100 g 500 g 454 g 2 kg 5 lb 10 kg 25 lb 25 kg 50 kg
Acidicase Peptone 211843
Beef Extract, Paste 212610
Beef Extract, Powder 212303
Beef Extract, Desiccated, Bacto 211520
Beef Heart for Infusion 213210
Biosate Peptone 211862 294312
Casamino Acids, Bacto 223050 223020 223030
Casamino Acids, Technical, Bacto 223120 223110
Casamino Acids, Vitamin Assay 228820 228830
Casitone, Bacto 225930 225910
Gelysate Peptone 211870
Malt Extract, Bacto 218630 218610
Neopeptone, Bacto 211681 211680
Peptone, Bacto 211840 211677 211820 211830
Peptone, BiTek 254820
Phytone Peptone 211906 298147 292450
Phytone Peptone, UF 210931 210936
Polypeptone Peptone 211910 297108
Proteose Peptone, Bacto 211684 212010 212030
Proteose Peptone, BiTek 253310
Proteose Peptone No. 2, Bacto 212120 212110
Proteose Peptone No. 3, Bacto 211693 212220 212230 211692
Proteose Peptone No. 3, BiTek 253720
Proteose Peptone No. 4, Bacto 211715
Select Soytone 212488 212489
Soytone, Bacto 243620 243610
TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate, Bacto 259962 259961
TC Yeastolate, Bacto 255772 255771
TC Yeastolate, UF 292804 292805
Thiotone E Peptone 212302
Trypticase Peptone 211921 211922 211923 299031
Tryptone, Bacto 211705 211699 211701
Tryptone, BiTek 251420
Tryptose, Bacto 211713 211709
Yeast Extract 211929 211930 211931
Yeast Extract, Bacto 212750 212720 212730 212710
Yeast Extract, LD 210933 210941
Yeast Extract, Technical, Bacto 288620 288610
Yeast Extract, UF 210929 210934

683
Section IV
Product Tables

Peptones by Category

Meat Peptones and Media

Beef Extract, Paste Polypeptone Peptone
Beef Extract, Powder Bacto Proteose Peptone
Bacto Beef Extract, Desiccated BiTek Proteose Peptone
Beef Heart for Infusion Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 2
Bacto Brain Heart Infusion Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3
Bacto Brain Heart Infusion, Porcine BiTek Proteose Peptone No. 3
Bacto Neopeptone Peptone Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 4
Bacto Peptone Thiotone E Peptone
BiTek Peptone Bacto Tryptose
Gelysate Peptone

Casein Peptones
Bacto Casamino Acids Trypticase Peptone
Bacto Casitone Bacto TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate
Acidicase Peptone Bacto Tryptone
Biosate Peptone BiTek Tryptone

Soy Peptones
Phytone Peptone Select Soytone
Phytone Peptone, UF Bacto Soytone

Yeast Extracts
Bacto TC Yeastolate Yeast Extract
TC Yeastolate, UF Yeast Extract, UF
Bacto Yeast Extract Yeast Extract, LD
Bacto Yeast Extract, Technical

Alternative Protein Source (APS)/Non-Animal Origin Products

Bacto Malt Extract Bacto Yeast Extract, Technical
Phytone Peptone Yeast Extract
Phytone Peptone, UF Yeast Extract, UF
Select Soytone Yeast Extract, LD
Bacto TC Yeastolate Select APS LB Broth
TC Yeastolate, UF Select APS Super Broth
Bacto Yeast Extract

684
 Product Tables

Peptones for Cell Culture

Product Name Substrate Applications
Excellent for growth promotion and protein production,
Phytone Peptone Soy
as well as a good, non-animal alternative to serum.

An ultrafiltered version of Phytone with a low

Phytone Peptone, UF Soy
endotoxin specification.

Excellent for growth promotion and protein production,

Bacto Proteose Peptone No. 3 Porcine
as well as a good alternative to serum.

Excellent for growth promotion and protein production,

Select Soytone Soy
as well as a good alternative to serum.

Excellent serum-free supplement for human diploid

Bacto Tryptose Meat
fibroblasts.

Bacto TC Lactalbumin Frequently used in mammalian cell culture media as an

Casein
Hydrolysate amino acid supplement.
Good for growth promotion, especially with insect
Bacto TC Yeastolate Yeast
cells.
An ultrafiltered version of TC Yeastolate with a low
TC Yeastolate, UF Yeast
endotoxin specification.

Good for growth promotion, especially with insect

Bacto Yeast Extract Yeast
cells.

Yeast Extract, LD Yeast A low dusting Yeast Extract.

An ultrafiltered Yeast Extract with a low endotoxin

Yeast Extract, UF Yeast
specification.

685
Section IV
Product Tables

Typical Analyses - Peptones and Hydrolysates

Aspartic Acid (% Total)

Aspartic Acid (% Free)
Asparagine (% Free)
Amino Nitrogen (%)
Total Nitrogen (%)

Loss on Drying (%)

Arginine (% Total)
Arginine (% Free)
Alanine (% Total)
Magnesium (ug/g)

Alanine (% Free)
pH (2% Solution)

Potassium (ug/g)
Calcium (ug/g)

Phosphate (%)
Sodium (ug/g)

Chloride (%)

Sulfate (%)
NaCl (%)
Ash (%)
AN/TN
Product Name
Acidicase Peptone 8.5 6.2 0.73 36.8 5.3 32.3 6.8 229 36 1164 140900 16.99 0.25 1.42 1.6 2.1 1.3 1.9 0.0 3.4 3.9

Beef Extract, Desiccated, Bacto 13.9 2.0 0.14 7.7 1.8 1.7 6.9 53 92 31423 21645 1.62 0.70 0.43 1.1 7.1 1.3 4.2 0.1 0.3 2.4

Beef Extract, Powder 12.4 2.3 0.19 9.3 3.5 0.3 6.9 264 285 28793 18510 * 0.53 3.22 1.8 4.0 2.8 2.8 0.6 0.6 5.5

Biosate Peptone 13.4 6.0 0.45 7.7 6.6 0.3 7.1 258 398 21320 17100 0.07 0.43 3.19 2.4 4.2 2.1 2.9 0.9 0.9 5.9

Brain Heart Infusion, Bacto 10.2 3.9 0.38 22.9 1.5 3.2 7.3 103 394 19810 72870 9.05 0.25 0.22 1.3 6.5 1.1 3.2 0.4 0.7 3.9

Brain Heart Infusion, Porcine, Bacto 9.2 4.0 0.43 22.4 1.8 2.2 7.4 211 374 19020 80930 8.77 0.27 0.25 1.4 6.6 0.9 3.5 0.4 0.9 3.8

Casamino Acids, Bacto 10.8 9.4 0.87 18.3 4.8 12.1 6.4 59 2 4098 88090 6.74 0.55 2.56 3.0 3.0 2.4 2.5 0.0 5.0 5.0

Casamino Acids, BiTek 8.3 5.7 0.69 33.7 4.0 14.3 6.9 110 70 1740 144360 18.25 0.26 1.53 2.1 4.4 1.1 1.7 0.0 3.6 3.2

Casitone, Bacto 13.5 5.0 0.37 6.4 2.0 0.0 7.0 111 213 3480 34090 0.10 0.40 2.48 0.9 3.4 2.6 2.8 0.5 0.2 5.5

Gelysate Peptone 17.0 2.9 0.17 3.8 4.9 0.2 6.9 650 150 646 11090 * 1.66 0.18 0.8 8.8 3.1 6.3 0.1 0.1 4.7

Malt Extract, Bacto 0.3 0.3 0.97 0.3 3.1 0.2 5.2 111 130 603 713 0.07 0.07 0.08 0.1 0.1 * 0.1 * * 0.1

Neopeptone, Bacto 13.6 3.2 0.20 6.9 4.0 1.4 7.4 38 8 8945 36313 0.48 0.45 2.59 0.5 4.3 0.5 2.6 0.2 0.3 4.2

Peptone, Bacto 15.4 3.5 0.20 3.8 2.7 1.7 7.1 18 1 2542 18440 0.90 0.32 0.40 1.2 9.2 2.8 5.8 0.3 0.3 5.0

Peptone, BiTek 16.4 3.0 0.18 3.4 2.0 0.0 6.9 400 70 840 10530 0.01 1.82 0.07 0.7 8.3 3.7 6.3 0.1 0.1 3.9

Phytone Peptone 9.0 2.4 0.27 12.4 1.5 4.0 7.1 1001 2435 31547 34037 0.76 0.67 0.64 0.3 2.6 0.6 2.1 0.1 0.3 3.9

Phytone Peptone UF 9.4 2.6 0.28 12.5 4.9 4.0 7.0 900 1700 21200 36100 0.76 0.58 0.71 0.3 3.1 0.8 2.4 0.2 0.2 4.7

Polypeptone Peptone 13.1 5.2 0.40 9.7 4.9 2.7 7.3 271 342 7340 44257 1.00 0.40 3.40 1.2 4.1 2.4 3.3 0.4 0.4 6.1

Proteose Peptone, Bacto 14.3 2.8 0.20 7.8 3.0 4.9 6.7 120 261 12780 23110 2.65 0.19 0.64 0.5 6.0 0.4 4.7 0.1 0.4 5.3

Proteose Peptone, BiTek 13.1 3.1 0.24 13.1 4.8 10.3 6.8 130 680 7390 49930 4.93 1.01 0.94 0.8 7.0 0.4 4.4 0.1 0.6 3.9

Proteose Peptone No. 2, Bacto 12.9 5.0 0.39 12.1 3.5 7.1 7.3 151 98 13313 52717 3.86 0.38 1.88 1.6 5.2 1.4 4.1 0.5 1.1 5.5

Proteose Peptone No. 3, Bacto 13.4 3.7 0.28 10.5 2.3 6.6 7.4 132 67 13160 38113 2.54 0.37 1.51 0.9 5.2 0.8 4.3 0.3 0.6 5.1

Proteose Peptone No. 4, Bacto 14.3 2.7 0.19 7.8 3.3 3.9 7.0 169 378 11243 35280 2.63 0.34 0.72 0.5 6.5 0.4 4.6 0.1 0.3 4.4

Select Soytone 9.2 3.7 0.40 10.7 3.5 0.0 7.0 250 1749 29787 31087 0.07 2.65 1.03 0.5 3.6 0.4 2.1 0.4 0.2 6.2

Soytone, Bacto 9.4 3.1 0.33 12.0 4.6 0.2 7.2 550 1610 22200 34040 0.17 2.33 0.82 0.4 2.5 2.1 2.8 0.3 0.2 5.5

TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate 13.0 6.3 48.30 7.2 4.6 0.3 7.0 1620 340 17200 14800 0.8 1.2 4.1 2.3 4.7 2.2 2.5 0.9 0.9 6.5

TC Yeastolate UF 10.6 6.5 0.61 13.3 2.1 1.0 7.0 247 267 60940 3716 0.52 0.89 2.46 5.5 5.7 1.9 3.2 1.3 2.1 6.4

TC Yeastolate, Bacto 10.7 6.0 0.56 11.7 2.2 0.6 7.0 20 250 50850 8190 0.30 0.49 2.63 4.6 4.6 1.7 2.4 1.2 1.8 4.8

Thiotone E Peptone 13.4 3.4 0.25 11.4 4.8 8.2 6.7 196 270 9629 46683 4.17 0.81 0.65 1.0 6.7 0.9 4.3 0.1 0.9 4.4

Trypticase Peptone 14.2 5.2 0.37 5.7 4.0 0.1 7.2 295 110 588 26600 0.09 0.18 2.54 0.9 5.7 2.3 4.8 0.5 0.2 7.7

Tryptone, Bacto 13.3 5.3 0.40 6.6 2.3 0.0 7.3 256 195 3257 33910 0.06 0.33 2.58 1.0 3.2 3.1 2.7 0.6 0.4 5.2

Tryptone, BiTek 13.1 5.6 0.43 5.8 5.0 0.0 7.1 180 100 620 26970 0.35 0.22 2.25 0.6 5.0 3.8 2.6 0.5 0.1 3.9

Tryptose, Bacto 13.3 4.5 0.34 8.8 3.2 3.2 7.3 191 110 9292 37740 1.61 0.23 2.05 1.2 4.3 1.9 3.5 0.4 0.5 5.1

Yeast Extract 11.4 6.9 0.60 13.1 1.0 0.2 7.0 230 799 58013 1003 0.07 0.65 3.73 5.7 6.2 2.0 3.0 1.0 2.2 5.9

Yeast Extract, Bacto 10.9 6.0 0.55 11.2 3.1 0.1 6.7 130 750 31950 14900 0.38 0.09 3.27 4.4 5.6 1.4 2.6 1.0 1.6 5.3

Yeast Extract, LD 8.1 6.1 0.75 17.5 0.3 0.1 7.0 254 649 55700 1683 0.12 0.96 2.11 4.7 5.1 1.8 2.6 1.2 1.9 5.2

Yeast Extract, UF 10.7 6.0 0.56 18.2 0.7 0.0 7.0 191 558 59240 1244 0.13 1.02 2.70 4.8 5.4 1.5 2.6 1.2 1.7 5.4

*Below level of detection

**Partially destroyed during hydrolysis

686
 Product Tables

Free Amino Acids/Total Amino Acids

Glutamic Acid (% Total)

Glutamic Acid (% Free)

Phenylalanine (% Total)
Phenylalanine (% Free)
Methionine (% Total)
Methionine (% Free)

Tryptophan (% Free)
Glutamine (% Free)

Threonine (% Total)
Threonine (% Free)
Isoleucine (% Total)
Isoleucine (% Free)
Histidine (% Total)
Histidine (% Free)

Serine (% Total)**

Tyrosine (% Total)
Tyrosine (% Free)
Glycine (% Total)

Leucine (% Total)
Glycine (% Free)

Leucine (% Free)

Proline (% Total)
Proline (% Free)
Cystine (% Free)

Lysine (% Total)

Valine (% Total)
Valine (% Free)
Serine (% Free)
Lysine (% Free)
0.8 8.3 11.6 0.0 0.8 1.0 0.8 1.6 1.6 4.0 3.9 6.3 4.4 4.6 0.9 1.4 2.5 3.5 3.3 5.3 2.2 1.8 0.9 1.4 * 1.0 1.4 1.8 4.4

* 0.6 6.4 * 1.0 8.2 0.1 1.4 0.2 1.3 0.4 2.8 0.6 2.5 0.3 0.7 0.2 1.5 0.4 7.2 0.3 0.3 0.2 0.4 0.2 0.3 0.8 0.2 2.0

0.2 2.5 14.6 0.1 0.5 2.3 0.4 2.1 1.3 5.1 3.8 7.2 4.0 5.7 0.8 1.6 2.5 5.0 0.3 5.7 0.8 2.1 0.6 1.8 0.7 0.6 1.5 1.4 5.4

0.3 3.5 16.1 0.3 0.6 2.2 0.6 2.0 1.6 5.8 4.7 7.7 3.5 5.9 1.0 1.9 2.9 5.5 0.5 6.2 1.0 2.2 0.8 1.9 0.7 0.5 1.4 1.9 6.1

0.5 1.4 6.4 0.1 0.4 3.7 0.2 1.2 0.7 2.3 2.5 4.4 1.6 4.2 0.8 1.0 1.6 2.3 0.2 3.4 0.6 0.3 0.5 0.7 0.3 0.8 1.2 0.7 3.1

0.5 1.7 5.9 0.1 0.4 4.3 0.2 0.9 0.6 2.1 2.1 4.1 1.4 3.9 0.8 0.9 1.4 2.1 0.3 3.2 0.6 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.3 0.8 1.2 0.7 2.8

0.1 15.1 15.9 0.0 1.4 1.4 2.0 1.9 3.1 4.0 4.6 5.0 6.0 5.9 1.4 1.4 3.4 3.6 7.5 8.0 4.3 2.0 2.0 1.7 * 0.4 0.4 4.7 5.6

0.4 5.1 8.4 0.0 0.8 1.1 0.5 1.1 1.2 2.7 2.7 4.6 4.0 4.6 0.9 1.2 1.4 1.9 2.9 5.7 1.8 0.2 0.9 0.5 * 1.5 1.6 1.6 3.4

* 0.9 16.0 * 0.2 1.7 0.4 1.9 1.1 5.9 4.7 7.9 4.5 5.9 1.1 2.2 2.7 5.5 0.3 7.1 0.8 2.1 0.5 1.9 0.8 0.5 1.6 1.3 6.3

0.3 0.2 7.9 0.05 0.5 16.8 0.3 1.0 0.5 1.6 0.9 3.2 2.0 3.3 0.3 0.8 1.1 2.4 0.1 9.7 0.2 1.8 0.1 0.9 * 0.5 0.6 0.3 2.3

* * 0.2 * * 0.1 * * * 0.1 * 0.1 * 0.1 * * * 0.1 0.1 0.1 * 0.1 * * * * * * 0.1

0.4 0.6 7.4 0.01 0.2 3.4 0.1 1.2 0.3 2.3 1.6 4.6 0.8 4.0 0.5 1.0 1.3 2.7 0.1 4.7 0.3 0.8 0.2 0.9 0.3 0.8 2.2 0.3 2.9

* 0.7 8.1 * 0.7 15.9 0.2 0.8 0.6 2.1 1.6 3.8 2.2 3.4 0.3 0.7 1.4 2.8 0.3 8.8 0.4 1.5 0.3 1.1 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.7 2.8

0.7 0.2 6.3 0.06 0.5 12.7 0.3 0.8 0.4 1.2 1.1 2.4 1.8 0.2 0.5 0.8 0.9 1.5 0.1 7.1 0.2 0.4 * 0.6 * 0.6 0.6 0.4 2.0

0.4 0.3 5.9 0.01 0.2 1.5 0.3 0.8 0.2 1.3 0.8 2.3 1.2 2.4 0.2 0.2 0.2 1.4 0.1 1.8 0.2 0.5 0.1 0.5 * 0.2 0.8 0.1 1.5

0.5 0.4 6.5 0.04 0.2 1.8 0.1 0.9 0.2 1.6 0.9 2.7 1.5 2.8 0.2 0.3 0.3 1.6 0.1 1.9 0.3 0.6 0.1 0.6 0.1 0.3 1.0 0.1 1.7

0.3 0.9 12.6 0.06 0.5 3.0 0.4 2.1 1.1 3.8 3.9 6.2 3.6 6.2 1.0 1.9 2.4 3.6 0.3 5.4 0.7 2.1 0.7 1.9 0.6 0.7 1.6 1.3 4.7

0.4 0.7 8.4 0.02 0.2 8.2 0.1 1.3 0.3 3.3 1.4 5.7 0.8 4.2 0.3 1.4 1.0 3.6 0.1 4.6 0.2 1.7 0.2 1.5 0.1 0.6 1.8 0.2 3.7

0.4 0.4 6.3 0.05 0.4 7.3 0.1 0.8 0.4 2.0 1.4 4.2 0.9 3.4 0.6 1.0 1.1 2.3 0.1 6.3 0.2 0.3 0.1 0.7 0.1 0.5 1.2 0.4 2.8

1.0 1.8 7.5 0.08 0.9 6.2 0.3 1.3 1.1 3.7 3.3 6.2 2.5 4.2 0.8 1.2 2.2 3.9 0.5 3.8 0.8 1.9 0.6 1.7 0.5 0.7 1.3 1.0 4.0

0.6 1.2 8.0 0.04 0.4 6.5 0.1 1.3 0.6 3.2 2.3 5.6 1.5 4.2 0.6 1.3 1.5 3.5 0.3 3.8 0.5 1.6 0.4 1.5 0.3 0.8 1.6 0.5 3.5

0.3 0.6 6.5 0.02 0.2 5.9 0.1 1.1 0.3 2.2 1.2 4.3 0.7 4.0 0.5 1.1 0.9 2.3 0.1 5.0 0.2 0.4 0.2 0.8 0.2 0.5 1.6 0.2 2.9

0.5 0.7 6.9 * 0.1 2.2 0.5 1.3 0.9 2.6 2.2 3.9 2.6 3.4 0.4 0.3 1.3 2.4 0.2 2.6 0.3 1.2 0.5 1.0 0.1 1.0 0.8 1.0 2.8

0.4 0.4 8.9 0.1 0.2 2.1 0.2 1.1 0.6 2.8 1.7 4.3 1.9 2.9 0.3 0.5 1.2 3.1 0.2 2.0 0.3 1.4 0.2 1.1 0.2 1.3 1.3 0.4 2.7

0.5 2.2 4.0 0.5 0.2 1.6 1.0 2.0 2.6 5.7 6.4 7.2 6.0 7.4 1.6 1.7 3.1 3.7 0.7 6.7 1.1 1.7 1.3 2.5 1.2 0.6 0.9 3.1 6.0

0.2 7.3 10.6 0.2 1.5 3.0 0.6 1.5 2.1 3.2 3.0 4.0 2.5 5.1 0.8 0.9 2.4 2.9 1.1 2.0 1.7 1.5 1.5 1.7 0.9 0.1 0.9 2.7 4.0

0.2 6.6 8.7 0.3 1.3 2.7 0.5 1.1 2.1 3.6 3.5 4.9 2.3 4.2 0.8 0.8 2.3 3.3 0.9 1.8 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.4 0.6 0.8 0.9 2.4 3.7

0.6 0.6 7.4 0.04 0.4 10.7 0.1 0.8 0.5 2.8 1.8 5.5 1.4 2.8 0.5 1.1 1.4 3.6 0.1 6.2 0.3 1.6 0.2 1.2 0.1 0.6 1.2 0.6 3.5

0.3 1.1 13.2 0.1 0.1 6.3 0.5 4.8 1.1 8.3 5.3 10.4 3.3 10.6 1.1 2.5 2.7 7.1 0.2 10.9 0.4 2.5 0.6 2.4 0.8 0.4 1.6 1.5 9.1

0.3 1.4 15.1 0.05 0.2 1.7 0.5 1.9 1.3 5.5 4.8 7.5 5.5 6.2 1.0 2.1 3.0 5.2 0.2 6.6 0.7 2.2 0.7 1.8 0.8 0.5 1.3 1.7 5.9

0.4 0.7 9.8 0.02 0.1 1.4 0.6 1.6 1.1 3.8 4.2 6.0 5.4 5.9 0.7 1.4 2.8 3.4 0.1 7.3 0.7 0.3 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.4 1.2 1.5 4.6

0.4 1.3 10.6 * 0.4 4.4 0.3 1.5 1.0 4.0 3.5 6.4 3.5 4.9 0.9 1.6 2.2 4.0 0.4 4.8 0.7 1.8 0.6 1.6 0.5 0.6 1.4 1.3 4.4

0.2 7.3 11.1 0.1 1.6 3.3 0.3 1.4 2.5 4.7 4.0 6.2 2.7 4.9 0.9 1.1 2.7 4.4 1.3 2.3 1.3 1.9 1.7 1.8 0.7 0.9 1.2 3.0 4.8

0.2 6.6 9.4 0.2 1.0 3.0 0.4 1.3 1.8 3.0 3.0 4.1 1.9 4.6 0.6 0.8 2.0 2.6 0.8 2.0 1.3 1.6 1.1 1.6 0.5 0.8 1.2 2.2 3.5

0.2 6.4 9.6 0.35 1.3 2.8 0.5 1.2 2.1 2.8 3.5 3.9 2.4 4.2 0.8 0.8 2.3 2.5 0.9 1.9 1.5 1.5 1.4 1.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 2.5 3.3

0.2 6.8 10.4 0.3 1.3 2.9 0.6 1.2 1.8 3.8 2.8 4.7 2.2 4.6 0.7 0.8 2.1 3.6 0.9 1.9 1.6 1.7 1.3 1.6 0.5 0.5 0.8 2.4 4.1

687
Section IV
Product Tables

688
690
 Product Index

Product Index
A Bile Esculin Agar .......................................................................... 76
Biosate Peptone ....................................................................... 77
A-1 Medium ................................................................................ 33 Biotin Assay Medium ................................................................... 78
A7 Agar, Modified ....................................................................... 34 Bird Seed Agar ............................................................................ 80
AC Broth ..................................................................................... 35 Bismuth Sulfite Agar .................................................................... 80
Acetamide Agar .......................................................................... 38 Blood Agar Base (Infusion Agar) .................................................. 83
Acetate Differential Agar ............................................................. 39 Blood Agar Base No. 2 ................................................................ 83
Acidicase Peptone .................................................................. 128 Bordet Gengou Agar Base ........................................................... 85
Actinomyces Broth ...................................................................... 40 Bordet Gengou Blood Agar ......................................................... 85
Actinomycete Isolation Agar ........................................................ 41 Bovine Albumin 5% .................................................................... 86
Agar, 1.5% ................................................................................. 45 Brain Heart CC Agar .................................................................... 87
Agar, Bacto .............................................................................. 42 Brain Heart Infusion ..................................................................... 89
Agar, Grade A ............................................................................. 42 Brain Heart Infusion (Broth Media) ............................................... 89
Agar, Granulated ......................................................................... 42 Brain Heart Infusion Agar ............................................................ 92
Agar, Noble ................................................................................. 42 Brain Heart Infusion Agar, Modified ............................................. 92
Agar, Select ................................................................................. 42 Brain Heart Infusion Agars ........................................................... 92
Agar, Technical ............................................................................ 42 Brain Heart Infusion Broth, Modified ............................................ 89
Agarose ....................................................................................... 42 Brain Heart Infusion, Porcine ........................................................ 94
Agars .......................................................................................... 42 Brain Heart Infusion Sheep Blood Agar ........................................ 92
AK Agar #2 (Sporulating Agar) .................................................... 36 Brain Heart Infusion with PAB and Agar ....................................... 95
Alkaline Peptone Water ............................................................... 45 Brain Heart Infusion with PABA .................................................... 95
Amies Transport Media .............................................................. 568 Brain Heart Infusion with Supplements ........................................ 89
Amino Acid Assay Media ............................................................. 46 Brain Heart Infusion without Dextrose ......................................... 89
Anaerobe Broth MIC ................................................................. 623 Brewer Anaerobic Agar ............................................................... 96
Anaerobe CNA Agar with 5% Sheep Blood ................................. 48 Brilliant Green Agar ..................................................................... 98
Anaerobe Laked Sheep Blood KV Agar ........................................ 49 Brilliant Green Agar Modified ...................................................... 99
Anaerobe Neomycin 5% Sheep Blood Agar ................................. 50 Brilliant Green Bile Agar ............................................................. 100
Anaerobic Agar ........................................................................... 50 Brilliant Green Bile Broth 2% ..................................................... 101
Antibiotic Assay Broth ................................................................. 52 m Brilliant Green Broth .............................................................. 103
Antibiotic Assay Media ................................................................ 52 Brucella Agar ............................................................................. 104
Antibiotic Medium 1 ................................................................... 52 Brucella Agar with 5% Horse Blood ........................................... 104
Antibiotic Medium 2 ................................................................... 52 Brucella Agar with 5% Sheep Blood,
Antibiotic Medium 3 ................................................................... 52 Hemin and Vitamin K1 ........................................................... 106
Antibiotic Medium 4 ................................................................... 52 Brucella Broth ............................................................................ 104
Antibiotic Medium 5 ................................................................... 52 Brucella Broth with 20% Glycerol .............................................. 107
Antibiotic Medium 8 ................................................................... 52 Brucella Laked Sheep Blood Agar
Antibiotic Medium 9 ................................................................... 52 with Kanamycin and Vancomycin .......................................... 106
Antibiotic Medium 10 ................................................................. 52 Brucella Media .......................................................................... 104
Antibiotic Medium 11 ................................................................. 52 Brucella Media for Anaerobes .................................................... 106
Antibiotic Medium 12 ................................................................. 52 Buffered Listeria Enrichment Broth Base ..................................... 307
Antibiotic Medium 13 ................................................................. 52 Buffered Peptone Water ............................................................ 108
Antibiotic Medium 19 ................................................................. 52 Buffered Peptone Water II .......................................................... 108
Antimicrobic CNV ...................................................................... 241 Bushnell-Haas Broth .................................................................. 109
Antimicrobic Vial A .................................................................... 158 Butterfield Buffer with 0.1% Peptone
Antimicrobic Vial K .................................................................... 489 and 2% Polysorbate 80 ......................................................... 110
Antimicrobic Vial Oxytetracycline ............................................... 411
Antimicrobic Vial P ............................................................ 333, 489 C
APT Agar ..................................................................................... 37
APT Broth .................................................................................... 37 Campy CSM Agar ..................................................................... 121
Arylsulfatase Broth (0.001 M and 0.003 M) ................................. 57 Campy CVA Agar ...................................................................... 121
Aspergillus Differential Agar ........................................................ 58 Campylobacter Agar Base ......................................................... 121
Azide Blood Agar Base ................................................................ 59 Campylobacter Agar with 5 Antimicrobics
Azide Dextrose Broth ................................................................... 60 and 10% Sheep Blood .......................................................... 121
Campylobacter Agars ................................................................ 121
B Camplyobacter Antimicrobic Supplement Blaser ........................ 121
Campylobacter Antimicrobic Supplement Skirrow ...................... 121
B12 Assay Medium ...................................................................... 62 Campylobacter Thioglycollate Medium
B12 Culture Agar ........................................................................ 63 with 5 Antimicrobics ............................................................. 124
B12 Inoculum Broth ..................................................................... 63 Candida BCG Agar Base ............................................................ 125
Bacteroides Bile Esculin Agar (BBE) ............................................... 71 Candida Bromcresol Green Agar ................................................ 125
BAGG Broth ................................................................................ 65 Candida Isolation Agar .............................................................. 127
Baird-Parker Agar Base ................................................................ 72 Cary and Blair Transport Medium ............................................... 568
Baird-Parker Agar ........................................................................ 72 Casamino Acids ......................................................................... 128
BCYE Agar .................................................................................. 66 Casamino Acids, Technical ......................................................... 128
BCYE Agar Base .......................................................................... 66 Casamino Acids, Vitamin Assay ................................................. 128
BCYE Agars ................................................................................. 66 Casein Agar .............................................................................. 402
BCYE Differential Agar ................................................................ 66 Casein Digest ............................................................................ 130
BCYE Selective Agars (CCVC, PAC, PAV) ...................................... 66 Casitone .................................................................................... 131
Beef Extract ................................................................................. 74 Casman Agar Base .................................................................... 133
Beef Extract, Desiccated .............................................................. 74 CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar ....................................... 111
Beef Extract Powder .................................................................... 74 CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar
Beef Heart for Infusion ................................................................ 75 with Kanamycin and Vancomycin .......................................... 111
BG Sulfa Agar ............................................................................. 68 CDC Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar
BiGGY Agar ................................................................................ 70 with Phenylethyl Alcohol ....................................................... 111
691
 CDC Anaerobe Laked Sheep Blood Agar E
with Kanamycin and Vancomycin .......................................... 111
Cetrimide Agar Base .................................................................. 134 m E Agar ................................................................................... 193
Chapman Stone Medium .......................................................... 136 EC Medium ............................................................................... 195
Charcoal Agar ........................................................................... 137 EC Medium, Modified ............................................................... 198
Chocolate II Agar ...................................................................... 138 EC Medium with MUG .............................................................. 196
Chocolate II Agar with Bacitracin ............................................... 138 EE Broth Mossel ......................................................................... 199
Chocolate II Agar with Pyridoxal ................................................ 138 Egg Meat Medium .................................................................... 203
Choline Assay Medium .............................................................. 140 Egg Yolk Agar, Modified ............................................................ 204
Chopped Meat Carbohydrate Broth, PR II .................................. 141 Egg Yolk Enrichment 50% .................................................. 356,489
Chopped Meat Glucose Broth, PR II ........................................... 141 mEI Agar ................................................................................... 200
CHROMagar Candida ............................................................ 142 Elliker Broth ............................................................................... 205
CHROMagar O157 ................................................................. 144 EMB Agar, Levine, without Lactose ............................................ 218
CHROMagar Orientation ........................................................ 144 Emerson YpSs Agar ................................................................... 206
CHROMagar Salmonella ......................................................... 146 Endo Agar ................................................................................. 207
CHROMagar Staph aureus ..................................................... 147 m Endo Agar LES ....................................................................... 208
CIN Agar Base (Yersinia Selective Agar Base) .............................. 114 m Endo Broth MF .................................................................... 209
CLED Agar ................................................................................ 116 Enriched Thioglycollate Media ................................................... 554
Clostridium Difficile Selective Agar ............................................. 148 Enriched Thioglycollate Medium ................................................ 554
Clostrisel Agar ........................................................................... 149 Enriched Thioglycollate Medium with Calcium Carbonate .......... 554
Coagulase Mannitol Agar .......................................................... 150 Enteric Fermentation Base ......................................................... 211
Columbia Agar Base .................................................................. 151 Enterococcosel Agar .............................................................. 212
Columbia Agar with 5% Sheep Blood ....................................... 151 Enterococcosel Agar with Vancomycin, 8 g/mL .................... 214
Columbia Agar with Fildes Enrichment and Bacitracin ................ 151 Enterococcosel Broth ............................................................. 212
Columbia Agars ........................................................................ 151 m Enterococcus Agar ................................................................. 215
Columbia Anaerobe 5% Sheep Blood Agar ............................... 154 Enterococcus Screen Agar QUAD Plate ...................................... 217
Columbia Blood Agar Base ........................................................ 151 Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Levine ............................................. 218
Columbia Blood Agar Base EH ................................................... 151 Eosin Methylene Blue Agar, Modified, Holt-Harris and Teague ... 220
Columbia Broth ......................................................................... 155 Esculin Agar .............................................................................. 221
Columbia CNA Agar .................................................................. 156 Esculin Iron Agar ....................................................................... 193
Columbia CNA Agar, Modified .................................................. 156 Eugon Agar ............................................................................... 222
Columbia PNA Agar .................................................................. 156 Eugon Broth .............................................................................. 223
Cooke Rose Bengal Agar ........................................................... 158 Eugonbroth Medium ............................................................. 223
Cooked Meat Medium .............................................................. 159 EVA Broth .................................................................................. 202
Cooked Meat Medium with Glucose, Hemin and Vitamin K1 ........... 159 EY Tellurite Enrichment ................................................................ 72
Corn Meal Agar ........................................................................ 161
Corn Meal Agar with 1% Dextrose ............................................ 161 F
Corn Meal Agar with Polysorbate 80 ......................................... 161 m FC Agar ................................................................................. 225
CTA Agar .................................................................................. 118 m FC Basal Medium .................................................................. 227
CTA Medium ......................................................................... 119 m FC Broth Base ........................................................................ 225
CTA Medium with Carbohydrates .......................................... 119 Ferric Chloride Reagent ............................................................. 442
Cystine Assay Medium ................................................................ 46 Fildes Enrichment ...................................................................... 229
Cystine Heart Agar .................................................................... 163 Fletcher Medium Base ............................................................... 230
Cystine Tryptic Agar ................................................................... 119 Fletchers Media ........................................................................ 230
Czapek Solution Agar ................................................................ 164 Fletchers Medium ..................................................................... 230
Czapek-Dox Broth ..................................................................... 164 Fletchers Medium with 5-FU ..................................................... 230
FLN Agar ................................................................................... 228
D Flo Agar .................................................................................... 462
D/E Neutralizing Agar ................................................................ 167 Fluid A ...................................................................................... 231
D/E Neutralizing Broth ............................................................... 167 Fluid D ...................................................................................... 231
DCLS Agar ................................................................................ 166 Fluid Sabouraud Medium .......................................................... 498
Decarboxylase Base Moeller ....................................................... 175 Fluid Thioglycollate Media ......................................................... 554
Decarboxylase Differential Media ............................................... 175 Fluid Thioglycollate Medium ...................................................... 554
Decarboxylase Medium Base ..................................................... 175 Fluid Thioglycollate Medium, Enriched ....................................... 554
Demi-Fraser Broth Base .............................................................. 178 Fluid Thioglycollate Medium with Beef Extract ........................... 554
Dermatophyte Test Medium Base .............................................. 180 Folic Acid Assay Medium ........................................................... 234
Dermatophyte Test Medium, Modified with Chloramphenicol .... 180 Folic Acid Casei Medium ........................................................... 236
Desoxycholate Agar ................................................................... 181 Folic AOAC Medium .................................................................. 232
Desoxycholate Citrate Agar ....................................................... 182 Fraser Broth Base ....................................................................... 238
Desoxycholate Lactose Agar ...................................................... 184 Fraser Broth Supplement ........................................................... 238
Dextrose Agar ........................................................................... 185 FTA Hemagglutination Buffer ..................................................... 229
Dextrose Broth .......................................................................... 185
Dextrose Starch Agar ................................................................. 186 G
Dextrose Tryptone Agar ............................................................. 187 GBNA Medium .......................................................................... 239
Differential Reinforced Clostridial Agar ...................................... 188 GC Agar Base ............................................................................ 241
DNase Test Agar ........................................................................ 170 GC II Agar Base ......................................................................... 241
DNase Test Agar with Methyl Green .......................................... 170 GC II Agar with IsoVitaleX Enrichment ................................... 246
DNase Test Agar with Toluidine Blue .......................................... 170 GC Medium Base ...................................................................... 241
DNase Test Agars ....................................................................... 170 GC-Lect Agar .......................................................................... 247
DRBC Agar ................................................................................ 173 Gelatin ...................................................................................... 250
Dubos Broth Base ...................................................................... 190 Gelysate Peptone ................................................................... 252
Dubos Broth, Enriched ............................................................... 190 Giolitti-Cantoni Broth Base ........................................................ 253
Dubos Media ............................................................................. 190 Glycerol ....................................................................................... 41
Dubos Medium Albumin ........................................................... 190 GN Broth ................................................................................... 249
Dubos Oleic Agar Base .............................................................. 190 GN Broth, Hajna ........................................................................ 249
Dubos Oleic Albumin Complex .................................................. 190 M-Green Yeast and Mold Broth ................................................. 254
Group A Selective Strep Agar with 5% Sheep Blood .................. 255
692
 Product Index, cont.

H Liver Infusion Broth .................................................................... 311

Liver Veal Agar .......................................................................... 313
Haemophilus Isolation Agar with Bacitracin ............................... 260 Loeffler Blood Serum ................................................................. 314
Haemophilus Test Medium Agar (HTM Agar) ............................. 260 Loeffler Medium ........................................................................ 314
Haemophilus Test Medium Broth (HTM Broth) ........................... 262 Lowenstein Media ..................................................................... 315
HBT Bilayer Medium .................................................................. 257 Lowenstein Medium Base .......................................................... 315
HC Agar Base ............................................................................ 257 Lowenstein-Jensen Medium ...................................................... 315
Heart Infusion Agar ................................................................... 263 Lowenstein-Jensen Medium, Gruft ............................................ 315
Heart Infusion Broth .................................................................. 264 Lowenstein-Jensen Medium with 5% Sodium Chloride ............. 315
Hektoen Enteric Agar ................................................................ 265 Lowenstein-Jensen Medium with Iron ........................................ 315
Hemo (Haemophilus) Identification (ID) QUAD Plate .................. 268 Lowenstein-Jensen Medium with Pyruvic Acid ........................... 315
Hemoglobin .............................................................................. 241 LPM Agar Base .......................................................................... 288
Herrolds Egg Yolk Agar with Mycobactin J and ANV ................. 269 Luria Agar Base, Miller ............................................................... 318
Herrolds Egg Yolk Agar without Mycobactin J with ANV ........... 269 Luria Broth Base, Miller .............................................................. 320
m HPC Agar .............................................................................. 258 Lysine Assay Medium ................................................................... 46
Lysine Decarboxylase Broth ........................................................ 175
I Lysine Iron Agar ......................................................................... 319
Indole Nitrite Medium (Trypticase Nitrate Broth) ..................... 271 Lysozyme Broth ......................................................................... 321
Infusion Broth ............................................................................ 273 Lysozyme Control ...................................................................... 321
Inhibitory Mold Agar ................................................................. 274
Inhibitory Mold Agar with Gentamicin ....................................... 274 M
Inositol Assay Medium ............................................................... 275 m Brilliant Green Broth .............................................................. 103
IsoVitaleX Enrichment ............................................................ 241 m E Agar ................................................................................... 193
ISP Medium 1 ............................................................................ 270 m Endo Agar LES ....................................................................... 208
ISP Medium 2 ............................................................................ 270 m Endo Broth MF .................................................................... 209
ISP Medium 4 ............................................................................ 270 m Enterococcus Agar ................................................................. 215
m FC Agar ................................................................................. 225
J m FC Basal Medium .................................................................. 227
Jordans Tartrate Agar ................................................................ 277 m FC Broth Base ........................................................................ 225
m HPC Agar .............................................................................. 258
K m Plate Count Broth .................................................................. 451
m Staphylococcus Broth ............................................................ 524
KF Streptococcus Agar ............................................................... 277
m TEC Agar ............................................................................... 538
KF Streptococcus Broth .............................................................. 279
m TGE Broth .............................................................................. 593
KL Antitoxin Strips ..................................................................... 280
M Broth ..................................................................................... 324
KL Virulence Agar ...................................................................... 280
M-Green Yeast and Mold Broth ................................................. 254
KL Virulence Enrichment ............................................................ 280
M-PA-C Agar ............................................................................. 418
Kligler Iron Agar ........................................................................ 282
M17 Agar ................................................................................. 322
Koser Citrate Medium ............................................................... 284
M17 Broth ................................................................................. 322
L M9 Minimal Salts, 5 ............................................................... 322
MacConkey Agar ...................................................................... 334
Lactobacilli Agar AOAC ............................................................. 290 MacConkey Agar Base .............................................................. 334
Lactobacilli Broth AOAC ............................................................ 290 MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet .................................... 334
Lactobacilli MRS Agar ................................................................ 291 MacConkey Agar without Crystal Violet or Salt ......................... 334
Lactobacilli MRS Broth ............................................................... 291 MacConkey Agar without Salt ................................................... 334
Lactose Broth ............................................................................ 293 MacConkey Agars ..................................................................... 334
Lactose Peptone Broth ............................................................... 295 MacConkey Agars with Sorbitol ................................................ 340
Lauryl Sulfate Broth ................................................................... 296 MacConkey Broth ...................................................................... 342
Lauryl Sulfate Broth with MUG .................................................. 297 MacConkey II Agar .................................................................... 338
Lauryl Tryptose Broth ................................................................. 296 MacConkey II Agar with MUG ................................................... 338
Lauryl Tryptose Broth with MUG ................................................ 297 MacConkey II Agar with Sorbitol ............................................... 340
LB Agar, Lennox ........................................................................ 285 MacConkey Sorbitol Agar .......................................................... 340
LB Agar, Miller ........................................................................... 286 Malonate Broth ......................................................................... 343
LB Broth, Lennox ....................................................................... 285 Malonate Broth, (Ewing) Modified ............................................. 344
LB Broth, Miller .......................................................................... 286 Malt Agar .................................................................................. 346
LBS Agar ................................................................................... 287 Malt Extract ............................................................................... 347
LBS Broth .................................................................................. 287 Malt Extract Agar ...................................................................... 348
Lecithin Lactose Agar ................................................................ 299 Malt Extract Broth ..................................................................... 348
Legionella Selective Agar ........................................................... 300 Mannitol Salt Agar .................................................................... 349
Legionella Selective Agar DGVP ................................................. 300 Marine Agar 2216 ..................................................................... 351
Leptospira Enrichment EMJH ..................................................... 301 Marine Broth 2216 .................................................................... 351
Leptospira Medium Base EMJH .................................................. 301 Martin-Lewis Agar ..................................................................... 352
Letheen Agar ............................................................................ 302 Martin-Lewis Agar (Gono-Pak) ................................................... 352
Letheen Agar, Modified ............................................................. 304 Martin-Lewis Agar (JEMBEC) ................................................... 352
Letheen Broth ............................................................................ 302 Martin-Lewis Agar, Modified ..................................................... 352
Letheen Broth, Modified ............................................................ 304 Maximum Recovery Diluent ....................................................... 354
Levine EMB Agar ....................................................................... 218 McBride Listeria Agar ................................................................ 355
Lim Broth .................................................................................. 305 McClung Toabe Agar Base ......................................................... 356
Lima Bean Agar ......................................................................... 306 McFarland Turbidity Standard No. 0.5 ........................................ 357
Lipase Reagent .......................................................................... 521 mEI Agar ................................................................................... 200
Listeria Enrichment Broth ........................................................... 307 Methionine Assay Medium .......................................................... 46
Listeria Enrichment Broth Base, Buffered .................................... 307 MI Agar ..................................................................................... 325
Listeria Enrichment Broth, Modified ........................................... 307 Micro Assay Culture Agar .......................................................... 358
Listeria Selective Supplement ..................................................... 288 Micro Inoculum Broth ................................................................ 358
Litmus Milk ............................................................................... 309 Microbial Content Test Agar ...................................................... 580
Littman Oxgall Agar .................................................................. 310 Middlebrook 7H10 Agar ............................................................ 361
Liver Infusion Agar .................................................................... 311 Middlebrook 7H9 Broth ............................................................. 360

693
 Middlebrook 7H9 Broth with Glycerol ........................................ 360 O
Middlebrook 7H9 Broth with Polysorbate 80 ............................. 360
Middlebrook ADC Enrichment ................................................... 360 Oatmeal Agar ............................................................................ 412
Middlebrook and Cohn 7H10 Agar ............................................ 361 OF Basal Medium ...................................................................... 410
Middlebrook OADC Enrichment ................................................ 361 OF Medium with Carbohydrates ................................................ 410
MIL Medium .............................................................................. 328 OFPBL Agar ............................................................................... 422
Milk .......................................................................................... 516 OGYE Agar Base ....................................................................... 411
Milk Agar .................................................................................. 364 Orange Serum Agar .................................................................. 413
Minerals Modified Glutamate Broth ........................................... 365 Orange Serum Broth Concentrate 10 ...................................... 413
Minimal Agar Davis ................................................................... 367 Oxacillin Screen Agar ................................................................. 415
Minimal Broth Davis without Dextrose ....................................... 367 Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement ............................................... 416
MIO Medium ............................................................................. 329 Oxford Medium Base ................................................................. 416
Mitis Salivarius Agar .................................................................. 369
Modified mTEC Agar ................................................................. 539 P
Modified Oxford Antimicrobic Supplement ................................ 416 M-PA-C Agar ............................................................................. 418
Modified Thayer-Martin (MTM II) Agar ....................................... 548 Pagano Levin Base ..................................................................... 428
Moeller Decarboxylase Broth Base ............................................. 175 PALCAM Antimicrobic Supplement ............................................ 420
Moeller Decarboxylase Broth with Arginine ................................ 175 PALCAM Medium Base .............................................................. 420
Moeller Decarboxylase Broth with Lysine ................................... 175 Pantothenate Assay Medium ..................................................... 429
Moeller Decarboxylase Broth with Ornithine .............................. 175 Pantothenate Medium AOAC .................................................... 431
Moeller Decarboxylase Broths .................................................... 175 PC Agar .................................................................................... 422
Moeller KCN Broth Base ............................................................ 370 Peptic Digest Agar ..................................................................... 432
Motility GI Medium ................................................................... 371 Peptone .................................................................................... 433
Motility Indole Lysine Sulfide (MILS) Medium ............................. 372 Peptone Iron Agar ..................................................................... 435
Motility Indole Ornithine Medium .............................................. 329 Peptone Water .......................................................................... 436
Motility Nitrate (MN) Medium .................................................... 373 Petragnani Medium ................................................................... 437
Motility Test Medium ................................................................. 374 Phenol Red Agar Base ............................................................... 438
MR-VP Broth ............................................................................. 330 Phenol Red Agar Media ............................................................. 438
MR-VP Medium ......................................................................... 330 Phenol Red Broth Base ............................................................... 440
mTEC Agar, Modified ................................................................ 539 Phenol Red Broth with Carbohydrates ....................................... 440
Mucate Agar ............................................................................. 375 Phenol Red Mannitol Agar ......................................................... 438
Mucate Broth ............................................................................ 375 Phenylalanine Agar .................................................................... 442
Mueller Hinton Agar .................................................................. 376 Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar ........................................................... 443
Mueller Hinton Agars ................................................................ 376 Phenylethyl Alcohol Agar with 5% Sheep Blood ........................ 443
Mueller Hinton Broth (Not Cation-Adjusted) .............................. 382 Phosphate Buffer, pH 7.2 ........................................................... 444
Mueller Hinton Chocolate Agar ................................................. 380 Phosphate Buffered Saline ......................................................... 445
Mueller Hinton II Agar ............................................................... 376 Phytone Peptone ................................................................... 446
Mueller Hinton Agar with 5% Sheep Blood ............................... 376 Phytone Peptone, UF ............................................................. 446
Mueller Hinton II Agar with Tryptophan ..................................... 381 Phytone Yeast Extract Agar .................................................... 448
Mueller Hinton II Broth (Cation-Adjusted) .................................. 383 PKU Subtilis Spore Suspension ................................................... 423
Mueller Hinton II Broth (Cation-Adjusted) PKU Test Agar ........................................................................... 423
with 2% Sodium Chloride ..................................................... 383 PKU Test Agar without Thienylalanine ........................................ 423
Mueller Hinton II Broth (Cation-Adjusted) Plate Count Agar ....................................................................... 449
with Lysed Horse Blood ......................................................... 383 m Plate Count Broth .................................................................. 451
Muller Kauffmann Tetrathionate Broth Base ............................... 386 Polypeptone Peptone ............................................................ 451
Mycobacteria 7H11 Agar ........................................................... 511 Potato Dextrose Agar ................................................................ 452
Mycobactosel L-J Medium ..................................................... 388 Potato Dextrose Broth ............................................................... 452
Mycological Agar ...................................................................... 389 Potato Flakes Agar .................................................................... 454
Mycological Media .................................................................... 389 Potato Flakes Agar with Chloramphenicol and Gentamicin ........ 454
Mycophil Agar ....................................................................... 389 Potato Flakes CC Agar ............................................................... 454
Mycophil Agar with Low pH .................................................. 389 Potato Infusion Agar ................................................................. 455
Mycoplasma Broth Base (Frey) ................................................... 425 PPLO Agar (Mycoplasma Agar Base) .......................................... 425
Mycoplasma Enrichment w/o Penicillin ...................................... 425 PPLO Broth (Mycoplasma Broth Base) ........................................ 425
Mycoplasma Media ................................................................... 425 PPLO Media (Mycoplasma Media) .............................................. 425
Mycoplasma Supplement .......................................................... 425 Presence-Absence Broth ............................................................ 456
Mycosel Agar ......................................................................... 391 Proteose No. 3 Agar .................................................................. 461
MYP Agar ................................................................................. 333 Proteose Peptone ...................................................................... 458
Proteose Peptone No. 2 ............................................................. 458
N Proteose Peptone No. 3 ............................................................. 458
NBB Agar Base, Modified .......................................................... 393 Proteose Peptone No. 4 ............................................................. 458
Neomycin Blood Agar ................................................................ 395 Pseudomonas Agar F ................................................................. 462
Neopeptone .............................................................................. 395 Pseudomonas Agar P ................................................................. 462
Neutralizing Buffer .................................................................... 397 Pseudomonas Agars .................................................................. 462
New York City (NYC) Medium, Modified .................................... 397 Pseudomonas Isolation Agar ...................................................... 464
Niacin Assay Medium ................................................................ 398 Pseudosel Agar ...................................................................... 134
NIH Thioglycollate Broth ............................................................ 554 Purple Agar Base ....................................................................... 465
Nitrate Broth ............................................................................. 400 Purple Broth Base ...................................................................... 465
Nocardia Differentiation Media .................................................. 402 Purple Broth with Carbohydrates ............................................... 465
Nocardia ID QUAD ..................................................................... 403 Purple Lactose Agar ................................................................... 467
Novobiocin Antimicrobic Supplement ........................................ 198 Pyridoxine Y Medium ................................................................ 469
Nutrient Agar ............................................................................ 404
Nutrient Agar 1.5% .................................................................. 405 R
Nutrient Agar with MUG ........................................................... 406 R2A Agar .................................................................................. 471
Nutrient Broth ........................................................................... 408 Raka-Ray No. 3 Medium ............................................................ 472
Nutrient Gelatin ........................................................................ 408 Rapid Fermentation Medium ..................................................... 473
NZCYM Broth ............................................................................ 394 Rapid Fermentation Medium with Carbohydrates ...................... 473
NZYM Broth .............................................................................. 394 Rapid Urea Broth ....................................................................... 474
694
 Product Index, cont.

Rappaport-Vassiliadis (MSRV) Medium, Semisolid Modification .. 475 Starch Agar ........................................................................ 402,527
Rappaport-Vassiliadis R10 Broth ................................................. 477 Starch Agar with Bromcresol Purple ........................................... 528
Regan-Lowe Charcoal Agar ....................................................... 478 Sterility Test Broth ...................................................................... 554
Regan-Lowe Charcoal Agar without Cephalexin ........................ 478 Stock Culture Agar .................................................................... 528
Reinforced Clostridial Medium ................................................... 480 Strep ID Quad ............................................................................ 529
Riboflavin Assay Medium ........................................................... 481 Sulfite Agar ............................................................................... 531
Rice Extract Agar ....................................................................... 482 Supplement B ............................................................................ 241
Rogosa SL Agar ......................................................................... 483 Supplement VX ......................................................................... 241
Rogosa SL Broth ........................................................................ 483 SXT Blood Agar ......................................................................... 496
Rose Agar with 5% Sheep Blood ............................................... 485 Synthetic Broth AOAC ............................................................... 533
Rose Bengal Agar Base .............................................................. 485
Rose Bengal Antimicrobic Supplement C ................................... 485 T
Rosolic Acid ............................................................................... 225 TAT Broth .................................................................................. 534
TAT Broth Base .......................................................................... 534
S TC Lactalbumin Hydrolysate ....................................................... 535
Sabouraud Agar, Modified ......................................................... 502 TC Yeastolate ............................................................................ 535
Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion Agar ......................................... 497 TC Yeastolate, UF ...................................................................... 535
Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion Agar Base ................................. 497 TCBS Agar ................................................................................. 536
Sabouraud Brain Heart Infusion Agar with Antimicrobics ........... 497 Tech Agar .................................................................................. 462
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar .......................................................... 498 m TEC Agar ............................................................................... 538
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar, Emmons ........................................... 502 Tellurite Glycine Agar ................................................................. 545
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar, Emmons, with Antimicrobics ............ 502 Tellurite Solution 1% .......................................................... 369,545
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar with Antimicrobics ............................ 498 Terrific Broth .............................................................................. 546
Sabouraud Dextrose Agar with Lecithin and Polysorbate 80 ....... 498 Tetrathionate Broth Base ............................................................ 547
Sabouraud Dextrose Broth ......................................................... 498 m TGE Broth .............................................................................. 593
Sabouraud Liquid Broth Modified ................................................ 52 Thayer-Martin Selective Agar ..................................................... 548
Sabouraud Maltose Agar ........................................................... 498 Thermoacidurans Agar .............................................................. 550
Sabouraud Maltose Broth .......................................................... 498 Thiamine Assay Medium ............................................................ 551
Sabouraud Media (Low pH) ....................................................... 498 Thiamine Assay Medium LV ....................................................... 551
Saline, 0.45% ........................................................................... 504 Thioglycollate Media ................................................................. 554
Saline, Normal ........................................................................... 504 Thioglycollate Medium (Fluid), without Dextrose ........................ 554
Salmonella Shigella Agar ........................................................... 494 Thioglycollate Medium, Brewer Modified ................................... 554
Salt Broth, Modified .................................................................. 505 Thioglycollate Medium with Calcium Carbonate ........................ 554
SBG Sulfa Enrichment .................................................................. 68 Thioglycollate Medium without Dextrose ................................... 554
Schaedler Agar .......................................................................... 505 Thioglycollate Medium without Indicator (135C) ....................... 554
Schaedler Agar with Vitamin K1 and 5% Sheep Blood .............. 505 Thiol Broth ................................................................................ 560
Schaedler Broth ......................................................................... 505 Thiol Medium ............................................................................ 560
Schaedler Broth with Vitamin K1 ............................................... 505 Thiotone E Peptone ............................................................... 561
Schaedler K-V Agar with 5% Sheep Blood ................................. 505 Tinsdale Agar Base .................................................................... 562
Schaedler Media ........................................................................ 505 Tinsdale Enrichment Desiccated ................................................. 562
Select Soytone ........................................................................... 446 Todd Hewitt Broth ..................................................................... 564
Selective Brain Heart Infusion Agars ............................................. 87 Todd Hewitt Broth with Gentamicin and
Selective Seven H11 Agar .......................................................... 511 Nalidixic Acid ......................................................................... 564
Selective Streptococcus Agar ..................................................... 508 Tomato Juice Agar Special ......................................................... 566
Selenite Broth ............................................................................ 508 Tomato Juice Broth .................................................................... 566
Selenite Cystine Broth ................................................................ 509 Tomato Juice Media ................................................................... 566
Selenite-F Broth ......................................................................... 508 TPEY Agar Base ......................................................................... 541
Serum Tellurite Agar .................................................................. 511 Transport Media ........................................................................ 568
Seven H11 Agar ........................................................................ 511 Transport Medium (Stuart, Toshach and Patsula) ........................ 568
Seven H11 Agar Base ................................................................ 511 Transport Medium Amies ........................................................... 568
Seven H11 Agar with Aspartic Acid and Pyruvate ...................... 511 Transport Medium Amies without Charcoal ............................... 568
Seven H11 Agars ....................................................................... 511 Trichophyton Agars 1 7 ........................................................... 571
SF Broth .................................................................................... 488 Trichosel Broth, Modified ....................................................... 573
SF Medium ................................................................................ 488 Triple Sugar Iron Agar ................................................................ 574
SFP Agar Base ........................................................................... 489 Tryptic Nitrate Medium .............................................................. 576
SIM Medium ............................................................................. 490 Tryptic Soy Agar with Lecithin and Polysorbate 80 ..................... 580
Simmons Citrate Agar ............................................................... 514 Tryptic Soy Agar/Trypticase Soy Agar ...................................... 577
Skim Milk Medium .................................................................... 516 Tryptic Soy Blood Agar Base EH ................................................. 583
Skirrows Medium ...................................................................... 121 Tryptic Soy Blood Agar Base No. 2 ............................................. 583
Snyder Test Agar ....................................................................... 517 Tryptic Soy Broth ....................................................................... 588
SOB Medium ............................................................................. 492 Tryptic Soy Broth without Dextrose ............................................ 588
Sodium Hippurate Broth ............................................................ 518 Trypticase Peptone ................................................................ 131
Sorbitol MacConkey Agars ........................................................ 340 Trypticase Soy Agar, Modified (TSA II) .................................... 583
Sorbitol MacConkey II Agar with Cefixime and Tellurite ............. 340 Trypticase Soy Agar with 10% Sheep Blood (TSA II) ............... 583
Soybean-Casein Digest Agar Media ........................................... 577 Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Horse Blood (TSA II) .................. 583
Soybean-Casein Digest Broth Media .......................................... 588 Trypticase Soy Agar with 5% Rabbit Blood (TSA II) ................. 583
Soytone ..................................................................................... 446 Trypticase Soy Agar with
Soytone, Bacto ....................................................................... 446 5% Sheep Blood (TSA II) .......................................... 583,587,588
Special Yeast and Mold Medium ................................................ 520 Trypticase Soy Agar with Lecithin and Polysorbate ................. 580
Spirit Blue Agar ......................................................................... 521 Trypticase Soy Agar with Lecithin, Polysorbate 80 and
Spirolate Broth .......................................................................... 522 Penicillinase ........................................................................... 580
SPS Agar ................................................................................... 492 Trypticase Soy Agar with Penicillinase .................................... 580
SS Agar ..................................................................................... 494 Trypticase Soy Broth .............................................................. 588
Standard Methods Agar ............................................................ 449 Trypticase Soy Broth with 0.15% Agar ................................... 591
Standard Methods Agar with Lecithin and Polysorbate 80 ......... 523 Trypticase Soy Broth with 20% Glycerol ................................. 592
m Staphylococcus Broth ............................................................ 524 Trypticase Soy Broth with 5% Fildes Enrichment .................... 588
Staphylococcus Medium 110 ..................................................... 525 Trypticase Soy Broth with 6.5% Sodium Chloride .................. 588

695
 Tryptone .................................................................................... 131 VJ Agar (Vogel and Johnson Agar) ............................................. 610
Tryptone Glucose Extract Agar ................................................... 593 Vogel and Johnson Agar ............................................................ 610
Tryptone Water .......................................................................... 594
Tryptose .................................................................................... 596 W
Tryptose Agar ............................................................................ 599 Wallenstein Medium .................................................................. 622
Tryptose Blood Agar Base .......................................................... 597 Water ........................................................................................ 623
Tryptose Broth ........................................................................... 599 Wilkins-Chalgren Agar .............................................................. 623
Tryptose Phosphate Broth .......................................................... 601 WL Differential Medium ............................................................ 620
TSA Blood Agars ....................................................................... 583 WL Nutrient Broth ..................................................................... 620
TSI Agar .................................................................................... 574 WL Nutrient Medium ................................................................. 620
TSN Agar ................................................................................... 542
TT Broth Base, Hajna ................................................................. 543 X
TTC Solution 1% ....................................................................... 277
Tween 80 Water ...................................................................... 602 Xanthine Agar ........................................................................... 402
Tyrosine Agar ............................................................................. 402 XL Agar Base ............................................................................. 625
XLD Agar .................................................................................. 625
U XLT4 Agar Base ......................................................................... 628
XLT4 Agar Supplement .............................................................. 628
Universal Beer Agar ................................................................... 604
Universal Preenrichment Broth ................................................... 605 Y
Urea Agar .................................................................................. 606
Urea Agar Base .......................................................................... 606 Yeast Carbon Base ..................................................................... 638
Urea Agar Base Concentrate 10 .............................................. 606 Yeast Extract .............................................................................. 633
Urea Broth ................................................................................. 606 Yeast Extract Glucose Chloramphenicol Agar ............................. 635
Urea Media ............................................................................... 606 Yeast Extract, LD ........................................................................ 633
Urease Broth Concentrate 10 ................................................. 606 Yeast Extract Phosphate (YEP) Agar ........................................... 636
Urease Test Broth ....................................................................... 606 Yeast Extract, Technical .............................................................. 633
UVM Modified Listeria Enrichment Broth ................................... 603 Yeast Extract, UF ........................................................................ 633
Yeast Fermentation Broth Base with Durham Tube ..................... 637
V Yeast Fermentation Broth with Carbohydrates ........................... 637
Yeast Media .............................................................................. 638
V Agar ...................................................................................... 609 Yeast Morphology Agar ............................................................. 638
Vancomycin Screen Agar ........................................................... 611 Yeast Nitrogen Agar .................................................................. 638
VCA Inhibitor ............................................................................ 241 Yeast Nitrogen Base ................................................................... 638
VCAT Inhibitor ........................................................................... 241 Yeast Nitrogen Base w/o Amino Acids ....................................... 638
VCN Inhibitor ............................................................................ 241 Yeast Nitrogen Base w/o Amino Acids
VCNT Inhibitor .......................................................................... 241 and Ammonium Sulfate ........................................................ 638
Veal Infusion Agar ..................................................................... 612 Yersinia Antimicrobic Supplement CN ........................................ 114
Veal Infusion Broth .................................................................... 612 Yersinia Selective Agar Base (CIN Agar Base) .............................. 114
Violet Red Bile Agar ................................................................... 613 YM Agar ................................................................................... 630
Violet Red Bile Agar with MUG .................................................. 615 YM Broth .................................................................................. 630
Violet Red Bile Glucose Agar ..................................................... 616 YPD Agar .................................................................................. 631
Vitamin B12 Assay Medium ........................................................ 618 YPD Broth ................................................................................. 631
Vitamin K1 - Hemin Solution ...................................................... 619 2YT Medium .......................................................................... 632

696